Skip to content

Updates from Canadian Border Services Agency

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31 (Unpublished)

Rebecca Purdy (she/her/elle) is a Senior Spokesperson for the Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA). The Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA) intercepted three prohibited devices at Vancouver International Airport on April 26, 2024 as part of its mandate to screen goods entering and leaving Canada. While investigative details remain undisclosed, the CBSA collaborates with law enforcement agencies, including the RCMP, to combat smuggling and organized crime. Under Canada’s Border Plan, the government is investing $1.3 billion to enhance border security and immigration systems. The CBSA employs intelligence-led screening, detection tools, and international partnerships to prevent illegal goods and criminal activity while ensuring the safe and efficient flow of trade and travel across 1,200 ports of entry.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What were the circumstances of the Vancouver International Airport interception on April 26, 2024?

Rebecca Purdy: On April 26, 2024, Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA) border services officers at Vancouver International Airport Commercial Operations intercepted and seized three prohibited devices in a courier package. The CBSA has a mandate to screen goods entering and leaving Canada. All goods must be declared and each declaration is subject to a risk assessment. Border Services Officers are trained in examination techniques and use a risk management approach, state-of-the-art detection technologies and indicators to determine whether further examination is required.

Jacobsen: What actions were taken by the CBSA and the RCMP during the investigation?

Purdy: The CBSA does not comment on investigative steps in specific cases. For publicly available information on this case, please refer to the news release and the court record.

Jacobsen: On other subject matter, how does Canada’s Border Plan aim to address resource allocation issues at ports of entry? What mechanisms does the CBSA use to screen and intercept illegal goods? How do we detect and prevent illegal drugs from entering Canada under the new Plan?

Purdy: Canada is investing $1.3 billion to bolster security at the border and strengthen the immigration system, all while keeping Canadians safe. Information available on the plan is available here: The Government of Canada’s Border Plan: significant investments to strengthen border security and our immigration system – Canada.ca.  

For additional information, including traveller statistics and seizure statistics, please see the 2024 Year in review: CBSA protecting Canadians and supporting our economy news release and the accomplishments by the numbers (for the period between January 1 and October 31, 2024). 

Every day last year, billions of dollars in goods and services and about 400,000 people crossed the Canada-U.S. border. The CBSA is Canada’s first line of defence at 1,200 ports of entry across the country. Day in and day out, approximately 8,500 CBSA frontline personnel play a crucial role protecting our communities by preventing dangerous goods and people from entering Canada. Across the country, the CBSA employs over 200 criminal investigators who investigate individuals and businesses that commit serious offences against Canada’s border and criminal legislation. Abroad, the Agency employs approximately 60 international officers at 40 missions in 35 countries who help push our borders out. The CBSA strategically dedicates its resources to address the threats that Canada faces while supporting the flow of legitimate trade and travel across the border. The CBSA works in an operating environment that changes on a daily basis and we are ready to respond and adapt as needed.

As smugglers are increasingly utilizing more sophisticated concealment methods in smuggling attempts, the CBSA employs a number of tools to stem the flow of illegal and prohibited materials in and out of Canada. The Agency remains vigilant in the interdiction of prohibited firearms, weapons and illegal drugs to ensure they remain off the streets and out of local communities. Guided by intelligence, our officers use contraband detection tools such as handheld devices, small-scale and large-scale X-ray machines, and detector dogs. We prioritize and risk-assess importations and exportations of goods entering and leaving Canada to make sure they are properly declared and meet import/export requirements. We support efforts to combat organized crime by using a risk-management approach to identify and intercept shipments containing contraband or goods obtained through crime.

The CBSA works regularly and closely with domestic and U.S. law enforcement partners, including the RCMP and other Canadian police agencies, provincial and territorial governments, U.S. Customs and Border Protection, U.S. Homeland Security Investigations, the United States Coast Guard, the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration, and the U.S. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives in a joint effort to seize drugs and guns and prevent those who engage in criminal activity from entering Canada and to assist with investigations. The Agency regularly shares relevant information on border and national security issues with its national and international law enforcement partners as well as other government departments in Canada, to ensure the health, safety, and security of Canadians. The CBSA carefully monitors global trends and patterns to ensure that its frontline border services officers are well-equipped to identify and prevent illegal goods from entering and exiting Canada. 

Criminals try to exploit the border both ways. U.S. authorities count on us in the same way we count on them to share information and identify threats to our countries. It is a tried and tested partnership that has kept our countries safe for decades.

With the collaboration of our partners, we support national security and public safety, while facilitating the free flow of legitimate trade and travel. 

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Rebecca.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Justin Weller on Politics and the Underprivileged’s Education

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31

Justin T. Weller is the Founder of Urbana Tomorrow, and the Founder and executive director of Urbana Youth Center. Justin T. Weller is the founder of Urbana Tomorrow, a business group in Urbana, Ohio, that spans real estate, construction, event spaces, media and retail. A native of Urbana, advocate, community builder, entrepreneur, and member of the LGBTQ+ community, Justin’s business prowess and personal dedication to enacting change in his rural community have fueled the idea that a better tomorrow is always possible. In high school, co-founding the marketing and media company TrueChat led Justin to develop and host a podcast called The State of Us. The podcast focused on cutting through the noise to bring attention to pressing issues, and it was syndicated on AM and FM radio stations across much of the United States and Canada for 12 years. After studying psychology, political science, and public relations at Xavier University, Justin committed himself to entrepreneurship full-time. While continuing to lead TrueChat, he founded Urbana Tomorrow to manage an event venue at his family’s farm and invest in blighted properties in the Urbana area. Weller talks about his entrepreneurial journey at 14 with a cattle business and transitioned to media with TrueChat, aiming to elevate rural voices. His insights stem from hosting “The State of Us,” advocating for discourse over division. Weller discussed the decline of local media, its impact on community cohesion, and his efforts at the Urbana Youth Center. Serving over 700 members, the center tackles barriers like hunger and education gaps. Recognized as a Disney Magic Maker in 2021, Weller credited his team and emphasized small acts’ transformative potential, stressing the media’s role in fostering understanding.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Justin T. Weller, a native of Urbana, Ohio. He is an advocate, community builder, and entrepreneur committed to revitalizing rural communities. You began your entrepreneurial journey at 14 with a beef cattle business, followed by the founding or co-founding of TrueChat. Two questions arise: what was the nature of your entrepreneurship in beef cattle, and how did that transition directly into marketing and media while you were still in high school?

Justin Weller: That’s a fair question, and many people would wonder the same. How does one go from ranching to media and marketing? It’s not a standard transition. This reflects a recurring theme throughout my life: from death comes life, and from doubt comes perspective. Running a cattle business teaches you invaluable lessons about perseverance, overcoming hardship, and managing a business.

When you care for animals that depend on you, their well-being directly impacts the success of your business. During that time, I committed to honouring the natural world as much as possible, ensuring animal welfare and health. Reflecting on those experiences, I see that everyone has a role to play in improving the world. Many industries have existed for generations, and it’s our responsibility to think about improving them. Often, we get caught up in the idea that we need to change the entire world, but sometimes, changing one person’s world is enough.

While the cattle company wasn’t massive, it was successful. We served several clients and directly contributed to their health and well-being through the products we provided. My transition to media occurred because, as I was growing up and managing this cattle business in rural America, particularly in the Midwest, a lot was happening worldwide. There always is, but this was during the financial crisis of 2008. Before, during, and after that period, I was learning and experiencing significant economic and political challenges. These events made me feel we were at an inflection point, and I believed we needed new voices, messages, and fresh perspectives.

This led me to the realization that in a hometown like mine—often overlooked and dismissed as “flyover country”—there was untapped potential. These are the states you pass over to reach places considered more significant, a misconception I strongly challenge.

Jacobsen: That is sometimes the sentiment. Sometimes, that’s the way people here feel. One of the places we see that is in the media market. Over the last two decades, the number of local media sources has reduced by more than half and continues declining. That’s a serious issue. One of the places this is evident is in schools. A very common occurrence used to be that local sporting events and extracurricular activities received a lot of media coverage.

Weller: They were a great way to encourage people to participate in extracurriculars and keep the community involved in what was happening at the school. Urbana is not a massive media market, as you may have gathered. As we saw less and less of that coverage, I am old enough to remember when we had a local access channel that people regularly watched on TV.

My best friend and I were asked to comment on a basketball game. We played football but weren’t involved in a sport during the winter season, so we agreed to comment. I said, “Sure,” just as a fluke, but we both enjoyed it. I immediately thought, “It’s a shame this isn’t available for more school events.” At the time, there were maybe one or two broadcasts a season, so the coverage was very limited.

We set out to figure out how to provide this service more regularly to the community in a way that intersects with the 21st century. That, of course, led to a media company. We started with internet radio, as we couldn’t use the word “podcast” since nobody knew what that meant. That was the transition from small-town media to creating something meaningful for the community.

Jacobsen: Oh, being in media, I did about 27 months at a horse farm—many stalls to muck. The worst was five days of cleaning 65 stalls back-to-back, followed by second pickings, about nine hours of work each day. It was gruelling, but one thing I noticed is that there are many similarities between so-called white-collar and blue-collar labour. The difference is the setting. In the barn, the “watering hole” or the water trough, whereas it’s the water cooler in an office. But people make up for those deficits in interesting ways. Did your interest in communication and media influence your decision to run as an independent candidate for mayor of Urbana in 2019?

Weller: Oh. When I started TrueChat, I had no idea what it would become. I was in high school, and our ambitions were modest—we just wanted to do something good for our hometown. But it quickly grew into something more. My best friend and I were committed to addressing the anger and frustration in America, which felt like it was reaching a boiling point. It was very unclear what would happen next.

We strongly felt that young people’s perspectives must be shared. We wanted to advocate for more common sense and less cruelty, more respectful discourse, and less hatred. This led me to spend the next 12 years hosting a podcast called The State of Us, which ultimately became a nationally syndicated AM and FM radio show. When we stopped, we were reaching 20 U.S. states. The show focused on perspective—discussing the issues and having conversations that no one else was willing to have.

Jacobsen: So what ultimately led to this philosophical pondering of your awakening?

Weller: It came from spending so much time researching everything happening worldwide that mainstream media wasn’t covering. I said, “Gee, some of this is important, and I didn’t even know it was happening.” At the same time, I was trying to figure out what I thought about it and having those conversations.

If anybody spends 2,000-plus hours trying to learn about something and understand the issues that impact this nation, you’re bound to come up with questions—and probably some ideas about how you’d do things if it were up to you. So yes, that program I ran for 12 years was probably the greatest educational experience I’ve ever had. It gave me perspective not just on the state of the world but also on the state of the Midwest, rural America, and small towns.

It all culminated in the 2016 election when I told listeners during an episode, “If you don’t like the way the table is set, you have to turn over the table.” In other words, you have to be part of the solution. You can’t just complain from the sidelines. Later that day, as I listened to the episode before release to make edits, I had a “smack myself in the face” moment. I heard myself say that and thought, “Here I am, sitting in downtown Cincinnati, in a skyscraper overlooking a professional sports stadium, as far away as possible from my cattle days.”

I had to ask myself, “What are you doing? You left your hometown. You left everything behind because you didn’t want to deal with it, and now you’re not trying to improve it.” That realization marked the beginning of my journey to move back to my hometown and try to make a difference. I tried to do that by running for mayor as an independent against a two-term incumbent Republican in a place that votes about 80% Republican 80% of the time.

Some people called that crazy—and they were probably right—but it started some important conversations here.

Jacobsen: How would you describe the feel of media in Urbana? When talking about radio, television, or podcasts hosted out of Urbana, would you say they’re influenced by the “cultural soil,” so to speak? Do they have a particular character?

Weller: Yes, and part of what bothers me most about the decline of local media is that it often translates into the death of the community. Local media talks about the culture, the undertones, and the unique way a place feels when you’re there. We forget how much of that revolves around what’s happening where you are.

As local newspapers, radio stations, and TV stations consolidate, voids are created in places like Urbana. We’re fortunate to have a local newspaper still. Still, we’re a community that serves about 25,000 to 30,000 people, and only about 1,100 subscribe to the paper. That’s a major issue because most of the population doesn’t have access to a unified source of information about what’s happening.

The closest thing to that is Facebook, but I don’t need to tell anyone that there’s nothing unified about the information on Facebook. More than anything, the flavour is disconnection—of being adrift. People feel disconnected from what’s happening, which leads to many cliques, groups of people relying on what they can gather from each other. There’s value in that, but the problem arises when we don’t all start from the same facts.

It becomes very difficult for different groups to interact positively when this group’s facts and that group’s facts aren’t the same. They might not even be talking about the same story. Our local newspaper does a good job of maintaining a journalistic approach to what they write. However, if they had more than two reporters, they could do even more.

They used to have, I believe, 20 people in the newsroom alone—though that was years ago. Now, they have two: the managing editor and someone for the sports section. It’s a tough job to cover all the happenings in Urbana and Champaign County with so few resources. They do a solid job of staying down the middle, but I’m not sure people here want “down the middle.” Sometimes, that approach challenges what a group is telling or advocating for, which makes things even more complicated.

I continue to advocate for and press for a resurgence of local media. It will likely need to look and feel different. Still, the decline of local media has contributed as much to our division as a nation as anything else.

Jacobsen: How is the work at the Urbana Youth Center progressing in terms of providing evidence-based, ethical programs to help kids and students who may not have the same access to resources and education as other families?

Weller: The Urbana Youth Center is a perfect story. Its origins are a perfect example of the concept that “from death comes life.” I had run for mayor and came closer than anyone thought I would—possibly even closer than I believed myself. But when you don’t win, you’re faced with a choice: what will you do now? Is it over? Am I done trying to make a difference, or is there more to be done?

That’s where new life emerged from that defeat. I decided that as long as I knew there were people in this community who needed help, I had a responsibility to do something about it. That perspective came from overcoming self-doubt. Anyone considering running for office knows those doubts: Am I good enough? Can I do it? Will I do a good job? Can I win?

And then, after losing, more doubts emerge: if I didn’t win, am I meant to do anything? The answer is yes. Maybe I wasn’t meant to do that particular thing. Still, I can now do something else—perhaps even more important.

The Urbana Youth Center is the most important thing I’ve done to contribute to society. I didn’t fully realize that at the time. It was part of my campaign platform to establish a youth center, and I was aware of the stats: one in two kids in this community is classified as disadvantaged by the state of Ohio. That means they’re not set up to have the same opportunities as the average kid.

In Ohio, most kids were on free or reduced lunch programs. We also knew that about one in three didn’t have either of their biological parents living with them at home. So we understood the numbers, but the numbers don’t convey the human element of situations like that.

The human element became clear once we did all the work to start the youth center. These kids began showing up in droves—to hang out and be in a place where adults genuinely cared about them. However, the students had to overcome much doubt because so many have lived lives where trusting adults has proven dangerous. It doesn’t work out in their favour when someone promises them something.

Naturally, the students approached the youth center with skepticism. We provide them with a new perspective. We operate with open hearts, open minds, and open doors. We meet them where they are and work to build trust. We can only talk to them about new opportunities and connect them with programming to improve their world.

That ties back to something I mentioned earlier: for those who feel called to make the world a better place, there’s often this overwhelming focus on doing something grand—changing the entire world. But “grand” doesn’t always mean large-scale. It can mean a dramatic change for just one person. A grand act of kindness doesn’t need to affect millions to matter.

Changing one person’s world is just as significant. And the truth is, you don’t know how many other lives that single person might go on to affect. If one person destined to live in a cycle of poverty manages to break that cycle, their impact could ripple outward. Beyond their increased earning potential—contributing an additional half-million to a million dollars to the economy—they could lift others, changing even more lives.

We must not undervalue the importance of helping just one individual. Of course, the youth center aims to do this on a larger scale. We serve over 700 registered members, meeting them where they are with spaces to hang out, homework and study assistance, and pathways for dropouts to earn their high school equivalency diplomas, known as GEDs in other states.

We also provide books, art programming, food, and hygiene products. We aim to address the full scope of barriers that can hold these kids back from success. Education understandably takes a backseat when you’re hungry or don’t have proper clothes to wear. That’s just a basic reality of being human. Suppose you don’t have food or feel unsafe. In that case, your priority isn’t going to be your education or your future—it will be figuring out how to get through today.

Jacobsen: I understand you received Disney’s Magic Maker recognition in 2021. Can you tell me more about that?

Weller: Yes. There have been three or four moments in my life that I can only describe as truly extraordinary.

There are moments of humility—things you never expect to happen that do. I was nominated for the Disney Magic Maker recognition. So were, I don’t know, 30 or 40,000 other Americans. It’s great to be nominated, and that matters, but it’s one of those things where you think, “Oh, I’ve been nominated,” and then you don’t think about it again.

They were only choosing 50 people, and I thought, “There have to be 50 people out there who are making magic happen in ways I can’t even imagine.” But then I got an email from Disney’s Corporate Citizenship team. They said, “We’re going through the applications and narrowed it down. We want to schedule a time to talk with you and learn more about what you’re doing at the youth center and with Urbana Tomorrow.”

So I set it up, and we spoke. I didn’t know—because they wouldn’t tell you this—that they had already decided before that call. As you’d expect from a company like Disney, they extensively researched my background and work. They had already spoken to many other people before reaching out to me.

At the end of the call, they said, “We’re pleased to inform you that our team has reviewed everything, and we’ve selected you as one of 50 Magic Makers across America. In recognition, we’d like to bestow this award upon you and offer you a complimentary vacation to the Magic Kingdom. We’ll cover your airfare, hotel, and entry to all the parks for a week.”

They asked me what I thought about that, and I just had to sit there for a moment and think, “Is this happening?” Of course, it was. I felt incredibly grateful. I told them I would give more credit to the team at the youth center than to myself. No one person can do what we do there. It takes a team; it takes a community.

We’re fortunate to have amazing people at the youth center who work tirelessly daily to help these kids. Many do this work for substantially less than they could earn in private-sector jobs. So, yes, it was a humbling honour to receive. It also motivated me to work even harder to live up to that recognition at the youth center daily. We’re continuing to make Disney proud of their selection.

Jacobsen: Justin, do you have any final thoughts or feelings about today’s conversation?

Weller: Well, I want to thank you. We talked about the media, and we need good people dedicated to spending their time, energy, and passion on responsible journalism. It’s important to get the word out—not just about urgent things, but also the important things.

I’ve tried to keep those items in perspective this year. Urgent matters are often in your face, and you feel critical because they happen now. Sometimes, they are important, but we often sacrifice what’s truly important to address the urgent.

What you’re doing—keeping attention on the important things—is valuable. We need people doing that. We need them to do it in a trustworthy way that brings attention to issues that might otherwise go unnoticed. So, I appreciate that you’ve taken the time and believed I might have something important to say. It means a lot.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Justin. I appreciate the opportunity to have this conversation.

Weller: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

United Hatzalah, Faith, and Philanthropic Aims

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31 (Unpublished)

 Mark Gerson is an entrepreneur, philanthropist, and best-selling author dedicated to bridging faith and culture. He co-founded United Hatzalah, Israel’s volunteer EMT network, and leads Torah Tuesdays with Eagles Wings, a global Christian organization supporting Israel. Mark is the author of the forthcoming book, God Was Right: How Modern Social Science Proves the Torah is True, and hosts The Rabbi’s Husband, featuring discussions with leaders like Tucker Carlson and Senator Cory Booker. He specializes in faith-driven leadership, social science validations of religious texts, and ethical business practices. United Hatzalah, with 8,000 volunteer EMTs, ensures rapid first response in emergencies, saving lives daily. African Mission Healthcare partners with Christian hospitals across 19 countries to provide essential medical care and infrastructure. Gerson’s upcoming book, “God Was Right,” argues that modern social science validates Torah ethics, promoting happier, healthier lives. Through his podcast “The Rabbi’s Husband,” he explores biblical inspirations across diverse leaders. Gerson emphasizes aligning faith with business for ethical, impactful leadership.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How has your experience co-founding United Hatzalah shaped views on the intersection of faith and philanthropy?

Mark Gerson: I have co-founded and Chair two charitable organizations — United Hatzalah of Israel and African Mission Healthcare. United Hatzalah is Israel’s system of crowd-sourced volunteer first response.  It is based on the fact that ambulances, even in the most advanced cities, will take an average of ten minutes to someone who calls 911.  This is no one’s fault — it is driven by the fact that ambulances are too big to be fast and too expensive to be ubiquitous. 

However, a victim of pre-hospital trauma — someone who calls 911, maybe someone who is choking, bleeding, having a heart attack, a stroke or is giving birth suddenly — does not need an ambulance immediately.  He needs a trained and equipped first responder at his side, ideally within 90 seconds. 

So we built, over 20 years, an organization that has 8,000 volunteer EMTs and paramedics — who are ready, at all times, to drop whatever they are doing (working, eating, sleeping, celebrating, whatever) to rush to someone in their immediate vicinity who is in need.  Each volunteer carries on him/her, at all times, a full medic kit that we provide — so that the volunteer is always ready for everything: from a car accident to a child drowning to someone choking to a heart attack to a woman giving birth suddenly. 

Because we are crowd-sourced — because we are able to locate the closest first responder and dispatch him to the scene immediately — we have the best response times in the world.  We respond to an average of 2,200 calls a day — and save dozens of lives every day. 

I co-founded African Mission Healthcare in 2010 with my great friend Dr. Jon Fielder, who has been a missionary physician in Africa for his career.  We partner with Christian missionary physicians at Christian hospitals in Africa to provide clinical care to the poor, enable training of physicians and other medical professionals, build infrastructure (from oxygen to physician housing) and do hospital administration.  We have 31 hospital partners in 19 countries. 

Many of the doctors we work with have devoted their entire lives to serving the poor — and doing so in medical conditions that are unimaginable to any physician in the West (operating without piped oxygen or consistent power, among other things) and living in conditions that I don’t think I could deal with for literally a weekend. They do so because they are inspired by their Christian faith to serve those who Jesus called in the Book of Matthew, “the least among us.” 

This intersection of faith and philanthropy, where both organizations sit, has taught my wife (a Rabbi) and I a great deal.  We have seen how faith can bring out genuine greatness in people — how a devoted Jew (regardless of how ritually observant) will be excited to rush from his Shabbat table, wake up in the middle of the night or dash around the corner to render care to someone he doesn’t know.  And this devotion (which is not unique to Jews in United Hatzalah; we have many Christian, Muslim and Druze volunteers as well) does not even stop there — there are so many instances where, like what happened last week, a volunteer will return to the home of a patient he took to the hospital to clean it up…so that the patient can recover in a clean and welcoming environment.  

And we have seen the same devotion with our Christian missionary partners (and now often friends) in Africa — we have seen how these people, who could be making excellent livings in the West, devote their entire lives to serving the poor due to their faith. 

The missionary physicians we know through African Mission Healthcare and the volunteers we know through United Hatzalah are the best people we know — the people we want our children to be like — and we are blessed to be able to be their philanthropic partner. 

And everyone who gives to either organization (or a similar organization — like Samaritan’s Purse) should regard themselves as partners — and never say (or think!): “It’s only money.”  Both the missionary physicians and the United Hatzalah volunteers have said that without the financial support of philanthropists — they’d be working with Band-Aides. 

Jacobsen: God Was Right: How Modern Social Science Proves the Torah is True is an upcoming book. What is social science affirming the ethics of the Torah?

Gerson:I have been studying the Torah every day for probably 15 years now — I start my day by running six miles on the treadmill, where I listen and watch Torah commentary, and then study subsequently.  The first thing I really understood about the Torah is what kind of book it is.  It is not a history book or a science book or a cookbook or even a lawbook — it is, as the Torah says of itself in Deuteronomy, a guidebook.  

As a guidebook, the Torah exists to help us live happier, healthier and more fulfilling lives — in the most practical ways.  As such, it makes hundreds of primarily psychological, social and political claims — about who we are and who we can and should be personally and communally.  Many are completely counter-intuitive — such as that we can choose to be anti-fragile, we can change our character (and who we are) by following one simple rule, our choice of clothing is existentially important (and for reasons that have nothing to do with modesty or temperature control), and on and on. 

For several thousand years, people have assessed the Torah using faith and experience.  Now, thanks to the advent of technology — we have science: specifically 21st century social science.  The 21st century social scientists, whose work ranges from obscure journals to best-sellers, have asked the same questions that the Biblical Author did.  

I realized that the claims of the Torah can now be validated or invalidated socially scientifically.  In the book, I go through the Torah claims on dozens of subjects — from diversity to routine to fear to future orientation.  It turns out that the Torah is absolutely right in all of its asserts; in other words, the Torah has now been proven true.

Many of the chapters also address where society and culture are in conjunction with the claims of the Torah and the findings of modern social science.  There, we are often going in the opposite directions— and I address that as well. 

Jacobsen: What lessons have The Rabbi’s Husband taught you, in hosting? 

Gerson: With the Rabbi’s Husband podcast, I did around 150 or so interviews with leaders from a variety of fields — Senators and NFL players, Pastors and Rabbis, physicians and Congressmen — about their favorite Biblical passage.  I learned just how the Bible — and often singular Biblical stories, laws and passages — can drive, intrigue and inspire a wide variety of people.  I think the most popular episode was Tucker Carlson’s — when we discussed whether Adam was right to trust Eve about the fruit, and its statement about gender relationships.

Jacobsen: How can faith and business align to create ethical and impactful leadership? Gerson: The Torah is the greatest guide for everything — including ethical business leadership.  Here are just a few things:

Leviticus 19: “You shall have honest scales and weights.”  A business leader who follows this principle will be sure to always have accurate accounting, fair billing, transparent performance metrics, honest advertising and clear claims about product risks and specifications.  

Deuteronomy 24: “You shall give him [your worker] his wage on his day and not let the sun set over it.” A business leader will always pay his workers immediately and completely. 

Leviticus 19 and 23: This commands that the landowner must leave a part of his field where the poor can reap.  A business leader following this principle will identify how he can allocate some of his products and services — in addition to money — for the benefit of the less fortunate.  And he will also do so with care for the dignity of the recipient — as this is why the poor are to reap themselves (rather than to get handouts from the landowner).

Jacobsen: What insights come out of Torah Tuesdays and Eagles Wings in interfaith collaboration?

I teach Torah every Tuesday at 12pm EST on Zoom to primarily Evangelicals — through the remarkable Christian Zionist and philo-Semitic parachurch ministry Eagles Wings.  We go through the Torah line by line, extracting the practical teachings and lessons for our daily lives.  I love the insights that the Pastor hosting the session (and the Pastor/hosts change each week) often bring from the New Testament and from their Christian experience.  And it is such a pleasure to be able to study the text in such depth.  We do about a book of the Torah (Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, Deuteronomy) every year.  If anyone wants to join, email me at mgerson@godwasright.com — and we’ll send you the Zoom link! 

Jacobsen: What is relevant and irrelevant in the interpretive frame from the Torah in navigating contemporary life? People orient the truths of religion and emphasize and de-emphasize in civilizational seasons. Ours seems no different.

Gerson: Great question — as everything in the Torah is completely relevant for navigating contemporary life.  The Torah is the guidebook for just that.  Every question, concern, challenge, opportunity that anyone has can be enlightened by the Torah in some profound and very helpful way.  That is what “God Was Right” is about! 

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Mark.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Global State of Optimism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/30 (Unpublished)

In 2023, LG Electronics launched a global survey to embody their “Life’s Good” philosophy centered on brave optimism. The survey revealed surprisingly high levels of optimism worldwide, countering prevalent pessimistic views. Utilizing these insights, LG initiated the “Optimism Your Feed” campaign on TikTok, collaborating with Professor Casey Fiesler to promote positive content through curated playlists that influence user feeds. Additionally, LG plans to integrate survey findings into future marketing and product innovations, emphasizing that optimism is a deliberate and active choice. Addressing Gen Z’s concerns, LG fosters informed optimism and aims to merge technology, optimism, and happiness through smart innovations and Affectionate Intelligence.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired LG Electronics conduct a global survey on optimism?

LG Electronics: In 2023 LG wanted to tell the world what Life’s Good really meant. In LG’s eyes, Life’s Good means believing in the power of optimism. Not blind optimism, but brave optimism. Optimism that spurs you to want better from your life every day. But this isn’t just an empty brand gesture, it’s a real way of thinking at LG, and a fundamental belief of the company. With that in mind, LG wanted to understand better optimism around the world, which spurred the inaugural survey.

Jacobsen: What were the most surprising findings of the survey?

LG Electronics: The most surprising fact was that optimism levels around the world were, generally, high. It can often feel easy to feel pessimistic about the world and think the rest of the world must feel the same, but in actual fact people were positive and optimistic about their own futures and the world around them.

Jacobsen: How does LG plan to leverage the survey results to enhance consumer experiences if at all?

LG Electronics: In the journey to increase optimism, this is the launch point for LG to continue spreading optimism globally through immersive experiences and product usage. Our initial studies found that optimism was waning in the world. The results of this study have given us a number of insights into what gets in the way of people feeling more optimistic, and where it feels right to do so LG wants to help people feel more optimistic.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on the “Optimism your feed” campaign and the impact on social media users?

LG Electronics: Recognizing the intricate and often rigid nature of social media algorithms, LG collaborated with Professor Casey Fiesler, a luminary in social media research. Rather than attempting a direct overhaul of TikTok’s algorithm, the strategy was ingenious: ‘hack’ the existing system by signaling a preference for optimistic content. This subtle manipulation aimed to shift user feeds organically toward positivity.

LG introduced OYF, a revolutionary tool designed to perpetuate optimism within the digital landscape. This innovative campaign delivered a meticulously curated TikTok playlist teeming with positive, uplifting content.

Each interaction with the playlist—be it a view, like, share, or accumulated watch time—fed into the algorithm, incrementally tailoring users’ For You Playlist (FYPs) to reflect more hopeful and joyous content.

Jacobsen: How do entertainment and AI drive optimism among consumers

LG Electronics: Our survey found that over 50% of people surveyed were very, to extremely optimistic about AI in the future. This isn’t to say AI is driving their optimism, but that it is not a major barrier to them feeling optimistic.

Jacobsen: Given the findings about Gen Z’s concerns about optimism potentially being harmful, how does  LG address these concerns? I only agree insofar as one defines this as sole narrow form of pollyannish stance on happiness. But who truly believes that?

LG Electronics: LG’s point of view on optimism believes that it is a brave choice to see the optimistic values when the world pushes pessimism. The choice aspect of this is the most important part, particularly with the reservations Gen Z might have. You are right in that a polyannish approach to life is foolhardy, but that isn’t the optimism LG believes in. LG’s belief in optimism is that it is a choice, and requires an understanding of what is going on in the world, and a willingness to do something about it. Optimism is a brave choice, and an active choice.

Jacobsen: How does LG plan to incorporate findings from this survey into future marketing or product innovation?

LG Electronics: We plan on using the findings of this survey as a launching pad for future campaigns. LG deeply believes in optimism, and this survey gives us many reasons people don’t feel optimistic. The trick is finding authentic places where LG can help.

Jacobsen: What are LG’s next steps in exploring the intersection of technology, optimism, and happiness?

LG Electronics: Everything LG does is in service of making people believe that ‘Life’s Good’. We’re constantly exploring how to make life better with intuitive, smart innovations. Our belief that AI should be more human is why it’s called Affectionate Intelligence at LG. And we’re excited to see how all these elements come together in the future.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ontario Nurses’ Association in Negotiations

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/30 (Unpublished)

Erin Ariss is a registered nurse and the Provincial President of the Ontario Nurses’ Association (ONA). With decades of emergency department experience, she is a dedicated advocate for nurses and public health care. Ariss has been instrumental in addressing issues such as access to personal protective equipment during the pandemic and promoting workplace safety. The Ontario Nurses’ Association (ONA) and the Ontario Hospital Association (OHA) are in contract negotiations under a nondisclosure agreement, but their proposals are starkly opposed. ONA prioritizes improved RN staffing ratios to address overwhelming workloads, enhance patient care, and reduce nurse attrition. Ontario has the worst RN-to-population ratio in Canada, leading to ER closures and delays. ONA warns that hospital CEOs’ proposals could trigger a mass nurse exodus. The negotiations are crucial as ONA seeks an agreement rather than arbitration, which has determined contracts for 14 years. ONA questions the origins of OHA’s far-reaching proposals, raising broader concerns.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the main issues with the current contract negotiations between the Ontario Nurses’ Association (ONA) and the Ontario Hospital Association (OHA)?

Erin Ariss: We cannot get specific as both the OHA and ONA are negotiating under a nondisclosure agreement. However, what we can say is that our two organizations have come to the table with proposals that couldn’t be more opposite.

Jacobsen: Why are RN staffing ratios a top priority for front-line members of ONA?

Ariss: The number-one priority of our members is better workloads that would allow them to provide the best-quality patient care they can. The impossibly heavy workloads they have experienced for years now have taken a large toll on them, and our patients are not receiving the best care that they both need and deserve because of time constraints. Nurse staffing ratios have been introduced elsewhere and have been shown to reduce the rates of complications and death in patients, and resulted in lower attrition rates for nurses. Overall they are a cost savings. They are win-win.

Jacobsen: How does ONA President Erin Ariss characterize the understaffing in public hospitals?

Ariss: Ontario’s understaffing is the worst in Canada. An annual report (CIHI) shows Ontario has consistently had the worst RN-to-population ratio in the country for almost a decade. That has led to ER closures, delays in care, hallway medicine and cancelled surgeries.

Jacobsen: What might be the potential consequences based on the proposals of hospital CEOs?

Ariss: It’s not an exaggeration to say the proposals put forward by hospital CEOs would result in an exodus of nurses and health-care professionals from our hospitals across the province. It will make things much, much worse. 

Jacobsen: Is this similar to the consequences to proposals from the Ford government)?

Ariss: We do not bargain with the government in the hospital sector. But the proposals from the OHA are so far-reaching, we question where they came from.

Jacobsen: Why is this round of negotiations significant given the last negotiation happening 14 years ago?

Ariss: The last negotiation happened two years ago. That ended in arbitration, as did every other round of negotiations for the past 14 years. ONA is pushing for the OHA to reach an agreement for its 60,000+ nurses and health-care professionals in negotiations, NOT send the matter to an arbitrator again, who will impose a contract.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Erin.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dominique Simeone on the International Esperanto Movement

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/29

Dominique Simeone is a committed advocate for the Esperanto movement and a passionate freethinker. Born in Italy, Simeone’s early exposure to multiple languages (Italian, French, German, Flemish, and English) laid the groundwork for a life dedicated to linguistic exploration. Their involvement with organizations such as SAT-Amikaro reflects a conviction that Esperanto fosters global communication and understanding. Simeone’s belief in a non-imperialist approach to language underscores a desire to bring people together—culturally and ideologically—through inclusive dialogue. Simeone recounts discovering Esperanto through a radio broadcast in Paris and learning it quickly, requiring just 200 hours for proficiency. She details political movements, language imperialism, and Esperanto’s role as a gateway language. Simeone contrasts its straightforward rules with more complex tongues like French and English. China’s openness is noted, while France’s early embrace ended in 1923. Simeone affirms Esperanto’s non-imperialist value for diverse groups, stressing its freethinking ethos and capacity for broad global communication.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dominique Semion. We’re going to discuss Esperanto. As I mentioned in our earlier correspondence, I have not researched Esperanto as much as I would have liked intellectually, but I find it a fascinating subject for those unfamiliar with it.

Esperanto is the most widely spoken constructed international auxiliary language, created in 1887 by Dr. L. L. Zamenhof to promote global understanding and unity through a neutral, easy-to-learn linguistic platform. On that note, how did you first encounter Esperanto? What were your initial thoughts when you came across it?

Dominique Simeone: I was near Paris on a Friday when I heard a radio broadcast by an artist discussing Esperanto. That’s how I first started learning about Esperanto. Afterward, I went to Paris to join an association where I could formally study the language.

Jacobsen: What was your experience like learning the language?

Dominique: Oh, it was really simple. I lived with my mother then and used quite an individualistic method. I would read texts and learn a large number of words—around one hundred per lesson, for example.

I built a strong vocabulary to develop a deep understanding of the language and communicate effectively with others.

Jacobsen: How did conversations in Esperanto compare to conversations in, for example, Parisian French?

Dominique: Oh, it felt natural when speaking with other Esperantists. You mentioned that Dr. Zamenhof envisioned Esperanto as a neutral, international language. Still, I was involved in the political movement within Esperanto. We discussed political issues with French Esperantists both within and outside the Esperanto movement. We also engaged with people outside the movement to discuss political problems and work on resolving organizational challenges.

In Paris, I served as president of SAT-Amikaro, the French branch of the World Non-National Association. During our meetings, we discussed issues such as the association’s finances, publicity, and general management, which were crucial to maintaining the organization’s effectiveness.

Jacobsen: What were the requirements for being part of the political movement around Esperanto? What were the goals and vision of the political movement among Esperantists?

Dominique: It depends. For example, in SAT, you have anarchists, communists, and socialists—they’re all on the left side of the political spectrum.

But you have all kinds of groups. For example, in a group, you might find Maoists or Christians, as well as people from those movements who agree with you, if you see what I mean. However, we act as part of the political movement.

For instance, my friends in the communist group promote Esperanto within the Communist Party. That’s the aim of their group. I, on the other hand, act in the broader international movement.

I also connect with freethinkers worldwide who support Esperanto and are willing to promote the language within their respective groups.

Jacobsen: How long would it take to learn Esperanto if someone studied it through a structured course and progressed from beginner to fluency?

Dominique: You need about 200 hours to achieve a fairly good level in Esperanto.

Jacobsen: That’s not bad.

Dominique: By comparison, it takes approximately 2,000 hours for French or English to reach the same level.

Jacobsen: What makes Esperanto so efficient for teaching and learning? If it’s so efficient, why do many people resist learning it?

Dominique: Many people are studying Esperanto and attending conferences about it. However, they tend to focus on their own lives and adopt an individualistic approach to living.

When you tell them, “If you learn this language, you’ll be able to connect with thousands of people,” they often feel hesitant or even afraid.

Additionally, there’s linguistic imperialism in most countries. This applies to English, French, and other dominant languages. These languages are imposed on others, and there’s resistance to accepting another language, like Esperanto, on an equal footing.

For example, Esperanto was taught in schools and universities in France at the beginning of the 20th century. However, in 1923, a law introduced by Léon Bérard removed Esperanto from the educational system. That policy still influences people’s attitudes toward Esperanto in France today.

Jacobsen: Which cultures are most willing to embrace Esperanto, teach it, and integrate it into their cultural framework?

Dominique: It’s difficult to say, but China stands out.

In China, there’s a large community of Esperantists. You can learn Esperanto in primary schools and universities.

Jacobsen: Do people in China receive subsidies, bursaries, grants, or scholarships to learn Esperanto? Or do they have to pay out of pocket?

Dominique: Ah, yes, okay. That I don’t know.

I know that at the university level, you likely pay tuition fees just as you would at universities in France. However, I am aware that some university courses in Esperanto are available. These lessons cover various subjects taught in Esperanto, such as commerce, trade, and other topics.

Jacobsen: Have there been cases where Esperanto was coerced or forced onto people in the way English or French have been during the height of French and British imperialism? In conversations about anti-imperialism and anti-colonialism, we often discuss how languages like English or French were forced onto people. Sometimes, people were made to give up their native languages, or economic incentives were used to make English or French seem unavoidable.

Over time, English and French became lingua franca—languages of trade, economics, and international politics. While organizations like the United Nations use translators to ensure accessibility, these major languages still dominate globally.

Have there been any cases where Esperanto has been used similarly—not by its founders’ intentions but perhaps by overzealous advocates who tried to export it coercively?

Dominique: For some people, one of the projects for Esperanto was to impose it at the head of organizations or even nations. However, the main focus now seems to be different. For example, in Paderborn, Germany, Esperanto is promoted as a “gateway language” to help people learn other languages.

So, Esperanto is no longer just Esperanto by itself; it’s presented as a tool to facilitate relationships between people. For instance, it can make it easier for someone to learn Arabic or other challenging languages.

Jacobsen: For example, Esperanto takes about 200 hours to achieve proficiency, while English takes roughly 2,000 hours to reach a similar level. Which language takes the longest to master, and why?

Dominique: I’m not a language specialist, but I believe Esperanto is easier because its grammar is very simple. For example, the stress is always on the penultimate syllable, and there are only about 17 grammatical rules. This simplicity allows learners to make significant progress quickly.

In contrast, languages like French are much harder to learn. French has many rules and exceptions, which make it difficult to assimilate the language quickly.

Jacobsen: Have any adaptations to Esperanto made it more efficient over time?

The language’s original structure was neutral and simplified, as it was a constructed language rather than an evolved one. However, like many systems in linguistics—such as Noam Chomsky’s grammar framework—adjustments often occur over time. Did Esperanto undergo similar changes, or has it remained faithful to its design from the late 1800s?

Dominique: The structure of Esperanto’s grammar was fixed in 1905 during the first Congress. The rules have not changed since then, and Esperanto linguists believe that the grammar does not need modifications now or in the future.

Jacobsen: How many people speak Esperanto now? For example, in France. That might be a more relevant question.

Dominique: In France, there may be 2,000 to 5,000 people.

Jacobsen: Are there annual conferences, events, or symposiums for Esperanto speakers?

Dominique: I think there’s some sort of Esperanto meeting happening every day. However, there are also larger, organized events in various countries.

For example, in France, Espéranto-France, which is part of the neutral movement, holds a congress once a year. Similarly, SAT-Amikaro and SAT both organize annual congresses.

Additionally, most countries have similar goals and hold their annual congresses. The largest organization in the neutral movement, UEA (Universala Esperanto-Asocio), hosts a global congress each year in a different country. This is the biggest Esperanto event, with around 2,000 attendees and representation from approximately 65 languages.

Jacobsen: In developmental psychology, it’s often said that language learning becomes significantly harder after age 16, particularly when aiming for native-like fluency.

Does this barrier exist for Esperanto, or is it an exception to this general rule?

Dominique: The key to learning any language is having a foundational level of education. Even people who are 30 or 40 years old can still learn Esperanto well.

If someone has had formal schooling and a basic educational level, there’s no problem learning Esperanto at any age. It’s a language that can be acquired at any stage of life.

Jacobsen: If you could go back and change your educational history, would you still learn French first, or would you prefer to learn Esperanto first?

Dominique: No, I learned French, but my first language was Italian because I was born in Italy.

Later, I attended a European school, where I learned German. I also picked up Flemish by speaking with people on the streets. After that, I learned English.

Jacobsen: Many multilingual individuals often say they feel like a slightly different person when they speak each language, as though each language brings out a different aspect of their personality.

Do you experience this? Does a different version of yourself emerge when speaking Esperanto than Italian, Flemish, French, or English?

Jacobsen:When you speak Esperanto, do you feel like a different version of yourself compared to when you speak other languages?

Dominique: Yes, but I am part of the international and constructed language movement when I speak Esperanto. However, I remain a freethinker regardless of the language I am speaking.

For instance, I am a freethinker in French, Flemish, and Italian. The language itself is a tool—it’s something I use—but it doesn’t change who I am. No matter the language I speak, I remain a freethinker.

Jacobsen: What critical questions about Esperanto aren’t asked but should be asked in good faith to help people better understand the language and decide whether they should learn it?

Dominique: Esperanto could greatly benefit people who work in associations, factories, or the economic sector.

The language allows them to connect with others worldwide—for instance, in countries like China or Russia. Through Esperanto, they can exchange ideas and discuss work-related matters across borders.

It is also an excellent way to improve one’s understanding of other languages, especially European ones. It acts as a bridge, facilitating better communication and relationships across different cultures.

Jacobsen: We’re running short on time. How can people get involved with Esperanto? Why should it interest fellow freethinkers—whether they’re humanists, atheists, agnostics, or advocates of free speech and social justice?

Dominique: Yes, there’s a strong case for Esperanto. Historically, in the 18th and 19th centuries, English was often considered the language of freethinkers, especially as England led the world in many areas at the time.

But now, if you want to connect globally—say, with people in China or South Korea—Esperanto can be incredibly useful. For example, I once contacted a friend in South Korea to request a journal article. He didn’t speak French or English, but he did speak Esperanto.

The article was written in Esperanto first and then translated into French. This demonstrates how Esperanto can create meaningful connections worldwide without relying on dominant or imperialist languages.

Using Esperanto offers a neutral, non-imperialist way to foster relationships and promote communication globally. While you could use French or English, Esperanto provides a more egalitarian alternative.

Jacobsen: Simeone, thank you very much for your time today. 

Dominique: Yes, thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Andrew Christensen on Integrative Behavioural Couple Therapy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/28

Andrew Christensen is Distinguished Research Professor of Psychology at the University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA). At UCLA, he conducts research on couple conflict and couples therapy and teaches couple therapy. He is a licensed clinical psychologist in the state of California and has a part-time private practice devoted to couples counseling and therapy. Dr. Christensen is devoted to the advancement of evidence-based treatments for couples in distress. Along with the late Neil S. Jacobson, he developed Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT), an empirically supported treatment for couples. Since 1993, he has been studying the effectiveness of couple therapy, especially IBCT, usually with federal grant support. In 2010, the US Department of Veteran’s Affairs adopted IBCT as one of its evidence-based treatments for couples.  Since then Christensen has been training VA therapists in IBCT and evaluating the impact of this therapy in the VA. Along with Neil Jacobson and Brian Doss, Christensen wrote a self-help book for couples based on IBCT: Reconcilable Differences (translated into French, Greek, Korean, Italian, Polish, and Portuguese). He also wrote a book for therapists on IBCT: Acceptance and Change in Couple Therapy (translated into Korean), which was recently revised and titled Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy. With Brian Doss of the University of Miami, he developed an online intervention for couples: OurRelationship (available in English and Spanish). Christensen discussed his co-development of Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT) with the late Dr. Neil S. Jacobson. Created in the 1990s to address limitations of traditional Behavioral Couple Therapy, IBCT emphasizes emotional acceptance and evocative change over rigid, rule-governed strategies. It helps couples navigate conflicts like demand-withdraw dynamics while fostering mutual engagement and emotional safety. Christensen highlighted IBCT’s effectiveness, demonstrated through rigorous studies, including a five-year follow-up, and its adoption by the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs. He also discussed IBCT-inspired innovations, like the OurRelationship online program, and the therapy’s emphasis on safety and self-reflection. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Andrew Christensen, a distinguished research professor of psychology at the University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA), specializing in clinical psychology. Christensendiscussed Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT), which was co-developed with the late Dr. Neil S. Jacobson. What inspired the development of this new methodology? How did it evolve in collaboration with Dr. Jacobson? 

Dr. Andrew Christensen: Neil and I began developing IBCT in the early 1990s because of the limitations of earlier approaches to helping couples. We were trained in behavioural couple therapy (BCT), also called behavioural marital therapy. Over time, the term was updated to encompass all types of romantic couples, whether married or not. While BCT was effective for some couples, many did not benefit significantly. Additionally, even among those who experienced positive outcomes, there was often a risk of relapse.

We developed IBCT to address these shortcomings in what was, at the time, the most widely practiced and empirically supported treatment for couples: Behavioral Couple Therapy (BCT). BCT encourages positive change by teaching couples to communicate better and solve problems more effectively. However, it lacked an important element: emotional acceptance.

There are limits to how much individuals are willing or able to change.. Certain aspects of a person’s character are deeply ingrained and shaped by genetics and life experiences. Interestingly, some traits we later wish our partners would change are often the same qualities that initially attracted us to them.

For instance, consider a couple we’ll call Jack and Jill. Jack might have been drawn to Jill’s vibrant, emotional energy—her ability to feel deeply and express herself passionately brought excitement to their relationship. Meanwhile, Jill might have been attracted to Jack’s calm, steady demeanor, which provided stability. However, as time passes, Jack might feel overwhelmed by Jill’s emotional fluctuations. At the same time, Jill might grow frustrated with Jack’s perceived lack of enthusiasm or spontaneity. This scenario highlights how positive traits can also have a downside. Often, we are drawn to our partner’s strengths but later wish they would change the challenges associated with those traits.

This understanding led us to focus on emotional acceptance as a cornerstone of IBCT. Some characteristics in a partner are unlikely to change substantially, especially not quickly or dramatically. While change is possible over time, emotional acceptance is vital for addressing those enduring aspects of a partner’s personality. This focus on acceptance became a defining feature of IBCT.

Another important factor was the approach to change. Traditional BCT relied on a “rule-governed” approach, which involved teaching couples specific communication techniques and providing guidelines for effective interaction. For example, couples might be instructed to use “I” statements to express their feelings more constructively.

So rather than saying, “You always do this,” you say, “I feel X when you do this particular Y.” Or, rules about listening. For example, you listen and don’t interrupt your partner. Before sharing your piece, you summarize what your partner has said so they know you’ve understood them, even if you don’t agree. These are the kinds of communication rules we taught, along with rules for problem-solving. We also encouraged specific behaviours.

We would give assignments to do positive things for each other. This is a rule-governed approach to change, which can be helpful. However, integrative behavioural couple therapy (IBCT) incorporates those strategies while introducing completely different ones. To explain that, let me step back and discuss the challenges of rule-governed change.

For instance, partners can be sensitive to whether something feels genuine. A common complaint in couples is, “You’re not affectionate enough,” or “I want you to be more sexual with me,” or “I want you to be more complimentary,” or “I want you to be more interested in what’s going on with me.” These desires are difficult to address through rule-governed behaviour. Assigning couples to have sex twice a week, kiss every night, or offer a positive comment daily—whether they feel it or not—often backfires. Partners may resist doing these things or feel that even if the other complies, it’s not heartfelt but rather done because the therapist or the rules dictated it.

Part of the joy in relationships comes from feeling that our partner genuinely wants to be affectionate, sexual, or complimentary. A heartfelt apology or compliment feels meaningful, while a mechanical gesture often feels hollow or hurtful. These issues highlight the limitations of rule-governed behaviour.

To address this, we focus on a type of behaviour change that is more evocative than deliberate. Deliberate change involves intentional, direct efforts, such as assignments or learning communication techniques, where the therapist essentially says, “Here’s how to do it right—now go do it.” In contrast, evocative change aims to shift the emotional climate in the room, fostering more genuine positive change.

We help couples reduce defensiveness and openly discuss their feelings and vulnerabilities. However, this only works when both partners feel emotionally safe—safe enough to admit limitations without fear of criticism or attack. For example, suppose one partner acknowledges a personal flaw. In that case, they need reassurance that the other won’t use it as ammunition against them.

Creating this emotional climate isn’t as straightforward as giving assignments. Still, it allows couples to express thoughts and feelings they may have never shared—or even fully recognized—before. Sometimes, a partner’s emotions are filtered through a single lens, such as anger. They might express anger instead of revealing deeper feelings of hurt or disappointment.

By fostering a safe and open environment, the therapist can help uncover and address these underlying emotions, leading to more genuine connection and understanding between partners.

Jacobsen: You’ve mentioned the importance of emotional acceptance and evocative change. Could you explain how these elements combine in Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT)?

Christensen: Certainly, often, in couples, you hear their anger and resentment. However,  underlying that anger may be disappointment or hurt that hasn’t been expressed. We can create an environment where partners feel safe to discuss these deeper emotions. In that case, it opens the door to more honest and empathetic discussions. This can lead to evocative change, where partners soften toward each other, treat each other with more tenderness, and shift the emotional climate of their relationship. This, in turn, can spontaneously lead to greater affection and emotional closeness.

To summarize, these are the two key innovations IBCT brings compared to traditional Behavioral Couple Therapy (BCT): an emphasis on emotional acceptance and evocative change strategies. Traditional BCT and Cognitive Behavioral Couple Therapy focused primarily on direct, intentional, and rule-governed change. IBCT builds on that foundation with these additional elements, creating a more comprehensive and flexible approach.

Once we developed IBCT, we secured federal grants to conduct rigorous research. First, we completed a pilot study, followed by a large clinical trial conducted at UCLA and the University of Washington, where Neil Jacobson was based. These studies demonstrated the effectiveness of IBCT, not only in the short term but also in the long term. We conducted the longest follow-up study of a major clinical trial in couple therapy, spanning five years. The evidence strongly supports the benefits of IBCT for couples.

In 2010, the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs adopted IBCT as one of its evidence-based treatments for couple distress. Since then, I have consulted with the VA and helped train therapists in IBCT for about 15 years.

IBCT was the foundation for an online program called OurRelationship (ourrelationship.com), developed under the leadership of Dr. Brian Doss, a professor at the University of Miami but with my assistance. This program was designed to make IBCT principles accessible to more couples cost-effectively. The online program has been tested through multiple randomized clinical trials and has proven effective in improving relationships. It can be done entirely self-guided or with the support of a relationship coach. Working with a coach enhances effectiveness and increases the likelihood of completing the program.

The program consists of 6 to 8 hours of activities organized into three phases: OU, and R, corresponding to ObservationUnderstanding, and Response—the acronym OUR.

  1. O Phase (Observation): In this phase, partners work individually to complete empirically supported questionnaires and receive personalized feedback about their relationship. They identify one or two core issues that need attention. At the end of this phase, partners come together, guided by the program, to share what they’ve learned.
  2. U Phase (Understanding): Partners again work individually to explore why the identified core issue/s are problematic for their relationship. This phase involves a deeper analysis of the challenges from both perspectives, which we call the DEEP analysis. Specifically, the programs helps partners identify natural Differences between them that contribute to the problem, Emotional sensitivities in each that add emotional fuel to the problem, External stressors that make dealing with any problem more complicated, and finally, the Pattern of interaction in which they get stuck, which doesn’t solve the problem and often exacerbates it. After the partners complete this DEEP analysis of the problem,, the program facilitates partners’ sharing of their findings with each other.
  3. R Phase (Response): In the final phase, partners explore ways they and their partners can make changes to address the core issues. The program guides them through creating a plan for these changes, which they share.

The program has undergone clinical trials sponsored by the Administration for Children and Families in the United States. It has shown effectiveness even at a one-year follow-up. It provides couples a structured yet flexible way to work through challenges and strengthen their relationship.

Jacobsen: I understand that the U.S. military has also adopted the OurRelationship program. Could you elaborate on its use among active-duty personnel and any challenges you’ve observed during the therapeutic process?

Christensen: The U.S. military has adopted OurRelationship program, which is now available to all active-duty personnel. The military recognizes that deployments and military life can create significant stressors on relationships. OurRelationship serves as an effective intervention for couples because it can be completed  online  with or without a coach, and thus provides a cost-effective way to help couples improve their relationships.

So, Scott, that’s an overview of IBCT and OurRelationship. I realize I’ve been talking at length—hopefully, not too much! Two things come to mind regarding your question about challenges. First, there are  clients that are not appropriate for IBCT.. Second, there are couples that present challenges in conducting IBCT. .

Jacobsen: What are some of the couples that are not appropriate for IBCT?

Christensen:. One common issue is when the partners have different agendas for the relationship. For example, if one partner wants to  leave the relationship while the other wants to work on it, it creates an obvious challenge.  IBCT is for couples who want to improve their relationship, even if they question whether it can be improved.  IBCT is not separation therapy or divorce therapy.

There are also exclusion criteria for IBCT. One key exclusion is intimate partner violence (IPV). If there is a level of IPV that poses a danger, the couple is not ready for IBCT. Couple therapy can be intense and evoke strong emotions, and we never want to contribute to violence inadvertently. As part of the assessment phase in IBCT, we evaluate the level of IPV and make a determination of whether it is safe to work with the couple..

It is possible to work with couples experiencing low-level violence if both partners are committed to ending the violence and taking responsibility for their actions. However, if there are dangerous levels of violence, the couple must address that issue first before entering therapy.

Other exclusion criteria include situations where one partner is actively suicidal or psychotic, as these require individual treatment before couple therapy can be effective.

Jacobsen: Apart from exclusion criteria, what challenges do you encounter with suitable couples for IBCT?

Christensen: High-conflict couples are a common challenge. When these couples start discussing their problems, the conversation can quickly escalate into an argument. Therapy should never devolve into a screaming match. In such cases, IBCT therapists must be directive to ensure the environment remains safe and that both partners have an opportunity to speak. If things escalate, the therapist may choose to see each partner individually until they calm down and can be brought back together.

Another challenge is when one partner insists that the primary problem lies with the other and that they have little or no role in the issues. Despite our efforts to broaden their perspective, this mindset can hinder progress. For therapy to succeed, both partners must recognize their roles in the relationship dynamics and be open to change.

These are just a few of the challenges we face, but IBCT is designed to work effectively even with these difficulties, as long as the couple is willing to engage in the process.

Jacobsen: Conflict in therapeutic sessions can sometimes seem influenced by gender dynamics. Are there any tendencies or patterns you’ve observed that are linked to gender? Additionally, do these dynamics differ in same-sex relationships, or do the patterns remain consistent regardless of gender?

Christensen: Yes, this is an important question. Alongside my work developing and studying couple therapy, I’ve long been interested in conflict patterns and have published extensively on this topic. A very common dynamic we see is the demand-withdraw pattern. In this pattern, one partner takes on the demanding or pursuing role—wanting to talk about issues and often being more critical—while the other partner assumes the withdrawing or shutting down role, avoiding the discussion altogether.

This pattern is prevalent in both heterosexual and same-sex couples. However, in heterosexual couples, it often has a gender linkage: men are more likely to adopt the withdrawal role, while women are more likely to take on the demand role. That said, these roles can be reversed depending on the context of the conflict. For example, in a young heterosexual couple, the man might take on a demanding role in matters related to sexual intimacy. At the same time, the woman may adopt the withdrawal role. Conversely, she might take on the role of demand in other areas of the relationship while he takes on the withdrawal role.

We’ve conducted cross-cultural studies showing that this gendered pattern also appears in other cultures, indicating that it’s not just a Western phenomenon. However, in same-sex couples, while the demand-withdraw pattern exists, it’s not gendered by definition. It simply reflects how couples, regardless of gender, navigate certain conflicts.

Jacobsen: Are there other common couple dynamics patterns similar to the demand-withdraw pattern?

Christensen: Absolutely. While the demand-withdraw pattern is one of the most frequently observed, it’s not the only one. Another common pattern is when both partners adopt a move-against stance, where they are both argumentative, critical, and escalating conflicts. This can lead to a cycle of mutual criticism and hostility.

On the other end of the spectrum, there’s a mutual withdrawal pattern, where both partners shut down emotionally and avoid engagement. This often results in awkward silences and unresolved tension. While less common than the other patterns, it’s still a significant challenge when it occurs.

There are also variations of these patterns. For instance, some couples exhibit what we call an anxious pursuit and withdrawal pattern. In this dynamic, one partner, often driven by anxiety about the relationship or fear of infidelity, becomes intrusive, asking questions like, “Where were you?” or “Who were you talking to?” Feeling overwhelmed by this pursuit, the other partner withdraws further, exacerbating the cycle. This is similar to the demand-withdraw pattern but with a more anxious, less confrontational pursuit.

What’s interesting about these patterns is how they vary in complexity. While I’m describing them in somewhat simplified terms here, the reality is that these dynamics often overlap and shift depending on the context of the relationship and the specific issues the couple is facing. In IBCT, we focus on helping couples identify these patterns and work toward more constructive engagement.

Jacobsen: Do you find that addressing these patterns early in therapy helps reduce session resistance or conflict?

Christensen: Yes, absolutely. One of the core principles of IBCT is helping partners see that relationship problems are co-created. This doesn’t mean they’re equally responsible—one partner might play a larger role than the other (although it is fruitless for a couple to argue about who has the larger role)—but it does mean that problems are inherently relational and best resolved by working together. Helping couples recognize this often reduces resistance and fosters a sense of shared responsibility.

Jacobsen: You mentioned earlier how patterns can shift during conflicts. How do these dynamics evolve or escalate during therapy sessions?

Christensen: Certainly, you may have a couple where one partner demands and the other withdraws. However, this dynamic can escalate. For example, the withdrawing partner may eventually blow up, shifting into a demanding role. In contrast, the previously demanding partner moves to withdraw or shut down. After such an escalation, both partners may withdraw entirely for a time. These patterns can develop and shift depending on the context and intensity of the conflict. I hope that explanation clarifies things.

Jacobsen: It does. Thank you. What about patterns you observe near the end of therapy? For instance, when predefined goals have been met, and the couple achieves a healthier homeostasis in their relationship, perhaps only requiring occasional checkups, what typically characterizes that stage?

Christensen: In IBCT, the goal is mutual, open, and constructive engagement. By the time we’re approaching termination, partners can typically share their thoughts and feelings openly while being curious and receptive to their partner’s perspective. The emotional tension that initially brought them to therapy has significantly diminished.

Often, a clear sign that therapy is nearing its end is when a couple no longer has significant issues to address. For example, I had a session just yesterday with a couple. We might consider termination soon because they had nothing substantial to discuss. They had a good couple of weeks, managed their issues independently, and didn’t feel the need to bring anything major to therapy.

That’s an encouraging sign. Therapy shouldn’t devolve into casual discussions about movies or unrelated topics. When couples consistently report they’re handling challenges independently, and we can observe that pattern over several weeks, it’s a good indicator that they’re ready to move forward without regular sessions.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. Given our time constraints, my last question is this: In what situations would you recommend that couples either not continue their relationship or delay entering one until certain relational or psychological patterns are resolved?

Christensen: The primary criterion for us in IBCT is safety, particularly physical safety. Unfortunately, a significant percentage of distressed couples experience some level of physical violence. Ensuring physical safety is paramount in couple therapy. Suppose a couple cannot maintain a physically safe relationship. In that case, I recommend they pause or end the relationship, as it’s too dangerous to continue without first addressing this issue.

While physical safety is non-negotiable, emotional safety is more nuanced. Even in the best relationships, there are times when partners may not feel entirely emotionally safe—for example, when bringing up a sensitive topic or expressing criticism about something a partner or their family member did. Emotional safety is more subjective and situational. In therapy, part of our work is to help couples develop greater emotional safety over time. Still, it’s rarely a binary issue like physical safety.

If physical violence is present and unresolved, however, the couple must prioritize safety before continuing the relationship or therapy.

Jacobsen: Apart from dangerous situations for the couple, how does IBCT approach the decision to end a relationship? Do you offer guidance, or is it more about helping clients reach conclusions?

Christensen: The decision to end a relationship is, ultimately, an existential decision. In IBCT, we don’t advise couples to stay together or separate because that responsibility lies with them. It’s a deeply personal decision that each partner must make for themselves. That said, we can discuss the pros and cons with them and reference what the literature suggests.

For instance, let me give you an example, Scott. Imagine one partner wants to leave the relationship because it’s no longer satisfying. They’ve tried therapy but feel they’re not improving enough and believe leaving is the best option. Meanwhile, the other partner desperately wants to save the relationship. They might cite various arguments—such as the potential impact on children—to justify staying together. One might say, “It’ll be better for the children if we stay together,” or, “Leaving would mean abandoning the family.”

Jacobsen: What’s IBCT’s stance in such situations?

Christensen: We emphasize that leaving or staying is their decision—not ours. Unless the relationship is harmful or dangerous to one or both partners, we don’t take responsibility for advising them to separate or remain together. Our role is to provide insights, help them explore the implications of their decision, and support their process of reflection. As to the particular question of the impact on the kids, we might explain that the nature of parental relationship is paramount in terms of the children’s functioning.  Parents can separate or divorce and have a functional co-parenting relationship or a horrible co-parenting relationships; similarly, the couple can remain together and have a good or bad co-parenting relationship.  What is particularly harmful is when there is violence between the parents (and between parent and child) and when parents try to ally with the children against the other parent so the child feels pulled between the two and pressed to see one parent as the good guy and the other as the bad guy.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Dr. Christensen, for sharing your expertise today. I appreciate your time and insights.

Christensen: You’re welcome, Scott. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

How can you keep your skin healthy?

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/27 (Unpublished)

Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD, is a dermatologist with 20 years of skincare, cosmetic procedures, and dermatological research expertise. She specializes in evidence-based treatments, including sunscreen, retinol, and antioxidants, while addressing conditions like acne, rosacea, and aging skin. Passionate about patient education, she emphasizes the importance of lifestyle, diet, and personalized care. Dr. Kazlouskaya is also experienced in advanced therapies like exosomes, microneedling, and lasers, making her a trusted authority in modern dermatology. Kazlouskaya discussed effective skincare, focusing on essentials like sunscreen, retinol, and vitamin C while cautioning against overusing active ingredients or following unproven trends like beef tallow or period blood in skincare. Kazlouskaya highlighted the role of diet and lifestyle in skin health, including the impact of insulin resistance and treatments like Ozempic. She explained different patient demographics, from cost-insensitive individuals seeking comprehensive treatments to those resistant to interventions like injections. They concluded by planning future discussions on hair, nails, and advanced skincare procedures.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD. We will discuss dermatology, in which she has 20 years of expertise. Let’s start on a positive note by focusing on effective techniques and technologies that are not.

So, what are people doing right regarding skin health and skincare?

Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya: Before we begin, may I ask a quick question? Are we focusing on home skincare or discussing skincare and procedures in general?

Jacobsen: Let’s focus on home skincare first. We can move on to specialties once we’ve established that as a foundation.

Kazlouskaya: The number one mistake people make is using too many products. Skincare is a multi-billion-dollar industry, and it is ubiquitous. It’s on social media and the internet; every dermatologist seems to be developing their products. This encourages people to overuse, overpurchase, and overconsume. Unfortunately, this is harmful, as it can lead to serious consequences.

A small study published in dermatology literature showed that overusing too many active ingredients can make the skin more sensitive and more prone to conditions like acne and rosacea. This overuse can worsen these issues, damage the skin barrier, and make the skin more vulnerable overall.

So that’s the first point. The second issue related to the first is that very young people unnecessarily use too many active ingredients. For example, if someone does not have acne, there is no need to start using retinol during their teenage years. Doing so can damage the skin barrier and lead to dryness.

The same goes for exfoliation, particularly with acids. Overuse of exfoliating acids is completely unnecessary and can harm the skin.

The third point is that people don’t always need to spend much on skincare. Affordable options often work just as well as expensive ones. Of course, this isn’t always true—there are pricier products with unique formulations that can be more effective—but it is not universally the case.

Typically, over-the-counter products from well-known brands are not particularly helpful and are often overpriced. Many of these products contain excessive fragrances and botanical extracts, which can be irritating. On the other hand, some medical-grade products can be excellent, albeit more expensive.

Overall, however, there is usually no need to overspend. Studies have shown that some inexpensive moisturizers are less irritating because they contain fewer ingredients, reducing the risk of irritation. This information is backed by peer-reviewed research. If needed, I can provide links to these studies for reference.

Jacobsen: Regarding the cost differences between name-brand products and more affordable options with fewer fragrances and additives, are there any name-brand products that stand out as genuinely better—not simply because of their branding, but due to the higher quality of their ingredients?

Kazlouskaya: Yeah, there are many brands right now, and many are doing a decent job selecting ingredients. A couple of brands have been known for decades, and we, as dermatologists, often recommend them. Smaller brands are also trying to select safe ingredients and find effective combinations.

So, do you need some names?

Jacobsen: Should we give them free advertising? What if we rank products based on efficacy, from high-end to low-end? Without focusing on particular name brands, what do we know helps people with their skin? And conversely, what do we know doesn’t help at all?

Kazlouskaya: Okay, first, we must clarify what we’re discussing—anti-aging, general skincare, or specific concerns.

Let’s start with sunscreen. This is the number one helpful product because collagen is degraded by UV exposure if you’re not using sunblock or protecting your skin. This also exacerbates many conditions.

Sunscreen is essential not just for maintenance but also for conditions like rosacea. Scientific studies have shown that sunscreen can improve rosacea by up to 15%, even without medication. Similarly, sunscreen can help with acne-related post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, which can be more distressing than the acne itself.

There’s no easy cure for hyperpigmentation, and while cosmetic treatments exist, wearing sunscreen during acne treatment can prevent these problems altogether.

There are two types of sunscreens: synthetic and natural. Natural ingredients include zinc oxide or titanium dioxide. Both types are effective. Some people fear synthetic ingredients, thinking they’re toxic chemicals, but there is no scientific evidence supporting this concern. However, natural sunscreens containing zinc may be preferable for sensitive skin due to a lower risk of reactions or interactions with other skincare products.

So, sunscreen is the number one product everyone should use. All other products are optional, even retinol for anti-aging.

Retinol, a modified vitamin A molecule, is the second most effective ingredient. It promotes skin regeneration, stimulates collagen production, and has extensive research supporting its effectiveness in maintaining skin health. Suppose you start using retinol in your 20s and continue consistently. In that case, you have an excellent chance of keeping your skin youthful throughout your life.

Another essential category is antioxidants, which protect the skin from free radicals, UV damage, and environmental stress. Vitamin C is the most notable antioxidant. It plays a significant role in collagen synthesis, skin protection, pigmentation, and texture enhancement.

The top three scientifically supported skincare ingredients are sunscreen, retinol, and vitamin C. Using just these three will ensure your skin looks healthy and radiant.

After these essentials, the focus shifts to addressing specific concerns. For example, if you have acne, there are proven treatments. Similarly, targeted molecules can help with oiliness or other issues.

Guide me towards more specific areas, and I can elaborate further.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss skin dryness, acne, pigmentation, or any skin malfunctions that develop over time, such as sunspots, moles, etc.

Kazlouskaya: Okay. If you have dry and sensitive skin, focusing on moisturizing is essential. Everyone is fond of hyaluronic acid, but pure hyaluronic acid isn’t effective unless it’s layered with more occlusive ingredients. Using a hyaluronic acid serum can evaporate from your skin, making it feel drier. It’s most effective when combined with other molecules in a cream, and nearly every cream on the market today contains hyaluronic acid. Alternatively, you can use it as a serum for targeted areas or your entire face. Still, you must follow it with an occlusive product to prevent evaporation.

Glycerin, petrolatum, panthenol for healing, and ceramides, which mimic our natural fats, are the best moisturizer components. These ingredients help restore the skin’s normal barrier.

For oily skin or skin with sebaceous filaments (those tiny black dots often mistaken for blackheads), we recommend using acids such as salicylic acid to dissolve oil buildup, as well as alpha-hydroxy acids (AHAs) and beta-hydroxy acids (BHAs). However, it’s crucial not to overuse these acids, as they can dry out the skin, worsen acne, and even trigger new breakouts.

In the anti-aging category, we now have interesting molecules studied less than retinol, vitamin C, and sunscreen, but they are still promising. One example is bakuchiol, which is less potent than retinol but safe for use during pregnancy and breastfeeding. It increases skin turnover, thickens the epidermis, and improves skin texture, offering a plumper look.

We’re also entering a new era with ingredients like growth factors, peptides, and exosomes. These are trending right now and are highly sought after. They work because they’re small molecules that participate in skin regeneration. However, choosing products from reputable brands with clinically proven formulations is important, as not all molecules penetrate the skin effectively. These products are often priced in the higher range, costing several hundred dollars for a quality formula.

Another emerging trend is addressing mature skin, particularly for women in their 50s experiencing estrogen deficiency. Products targeting estrogen-depleted skin are still limited, but some companies are developing compounded estrogen molecules or estrogen-like ingredients that mimic estrogen’s activity on the skin. This is a growing field and represents a new direction in skincare.

Jacobsen: What about products or treatments that are widely used but lack evidence or don’t work?

Kazlouskaya: Many at-home treatments don’t have sufficient evidence to support their effectiveness. I’m also cautious about oils in skincare. They’ve become trendy, but they aren’t always helpful. While some evidence supports certain oils, they can clog pores, provoke acne, and cause allergic reactions, especially for sensitive skin. Oils often contain fragrances, which can be irritating.

Another questionable trend is using beef tallow in skincare. For those unfamiliar with beef tallow, it is fat derived from animals. While it’s gaining popularity in some circles, I’m unaware of strong evidence supporting its benefits for the skin, and it may not be suitable for everyone.

Animals have fat inside, stored between their organs, and if it’s from beef, it’s called beef tallow. It’s a huge trend right now. I was interviewed about it at least three times last month, and one news magazine has already published an article about it.

But it’s everywhere—on TikTok and Instagram—so it’s a hot topic. Essentially, it involves putting animal fat on your face.

Will it work? Who knows? There’s some indication that fat might have anti-inflammatory properties, but we don’t have sufficient data to support its effectiveness.

Another trend I’ve noticed is castor oil. It’s becoming very popular here in the U.S. What trends are you seeing in Canada?

Jacobsen: Oh, I don’t even know. This is a new topic for me, so I don’t know if people in Canada follow similar trends to those in the United States but in a less extreme way.

People do things that might work to some degree but are exaggerated for appearance’s sake, such as surgical procedures like facelifts or other cosmetic surgeries. Those are trendy, but they’re also very expensive.

Kazlouskaya: In skincare, I feel that home remedies or DIY treatments, like putting unusual substances on your face, don’t work. For example, some people are now putting period blood on their faces.

Some studies suggest that period blood might contain exosomes, which can have regenerative properties. However, period blood is also full of bacteria and can become a breeding ground for harmful pathogens. Even though it’s being promoted as a trend, it’s risky and not evidence-based.

This is just one example of how much advertising is driven by untrained individuals—not specialists—looking to gain likes, shares, or income from social media. This kind of misinformation can be very dangerous. It’s not just ineffective in some cases but outright harmful.

Jacobsen: What’s being proposed now, that’s new and experimental and shows promise but isn’t sufficiently supported by evidence yet?

Kazlouskaya: Exosomes are a big development right now. These small vesicles facilitate cell communication, carrying growth factors and molecules that promote healing, reduce inflammation, and support various cellular processes. Essentially, they act as signalling agents between cells.

Exosomes are very trendy because of their potential benefits. They are even being studied as intravenous treatments for neurodegenerative conditions, but this research is still in its early stages. In skincare, a few companies produce exosome-based products derived from human fibroblasts.

However, it’s crucial to ensure that the source of these fibroblasts is safe. They must come from clean donors—individuals free of diseases or cancers. These fibroblasts can come from sources like skin cells or umbilical cords. Properly sourced and purified exosomes have the potential to be very helpful.

A few companies produce high-quality exosome products that work well, but this area is still developing. These products are not FDA-approved, and while some people attempt to inject them as treatments, this is 100% unregulated and not FDA-approved.

On the other hand, using exosome products topically in the form of creams or serums is not prohibited. This makes it a bit of a “Wild West” situation, as some people take risks by using or promoting them beyond their intended purposes.

We also use exosomes after procedures like microneedling, but more regulation and research are needed. Many products come from outside the United States, and we don’t fully understand their potential long-term effects or risks.

Jacobsen: Who are the main demographics that are more likely to come to your office?

Kazlouskaya: There are two primary demographics. One group is young, working professionals with medium to high incomes who want everything done to maintain a polished look. The other group comprises women in their 40s and 50s seeking skin maintenance and rejuvenation treatments.

Jacobsen: So, it’s about professionalizing their appearance and maintaining skin health.

Kazlouskaya: Interestingly, younger populations are increasingly seeking these treatments. They are very knowledgeable about cosmetic procedures. For example, I got my first Botox treatment in my 30s, and at that time, it didn’t feel very safe. But now, people in their early 20s are already getting procedures like microneedling, fillers, and Botox.

Today, these treatments are so normalized that they’re almost like ordering coffee at Starbucks—just a casual part of life.

Jacobsen: One related area I’d like to touch on is diet. An old North American phrase is, “You are what you eat.” What about the relationship between diet and skin health?

Kazlouskaya: Diet is worth discussing, as it plays a significant role in skin health. Let’s explore that further.

Diet is a significant factor, and I see its effects often. Insulin resistance and prediabetes can lead to noticeable changes in the skin, such as increased pigmentation, roughness, and other issues. These conditions are often challenging to address with just creams and procedures. Lifestyle changes, including diet, play a crucial role.

A healthy diet rich in fruits, vegetables, and proteins is essential because our skin and hair predominantly comprise protein. If you’re protein-deficient, your skin won’t look its best. For example, one in seven women in the United States has polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), which is now a leading cause of infertility. PCOS has specific skin-related symptoms like hair thinning, acne (especially in the lower face and later stages of life), darkened skin patches, stretch marks, and other signs.

PCOS is often linked to insulin resistance. Lifestyle changes like exercising more, eating healthier, and getting better sleep can significantly improve skin health. Even reducing salt intake can help minimize facial swelling.

I’ve had clients who underwent multiple cosmetic procedures but only saw temporary results. However, after adopting a healthier lifestyle—going to the gym and eating well—their skin transformed within six months. These changes occurred even though I knew they weren’t consistent with their skincare routines. Simply changing their lifestyle made a noticeable difference.

Another emerging factor is the rise of obesity treatments like Ozempic. This is creating a new wave of challenges in the skin industry. Fat is a tissue that stores and produces hormones and other compounds. When people lose fat rapidly, as they often do with Ozempic, it can disturb hormones on a micro-level. This can lead to changes in skin quality, including hair loss, which is particularly difficult to address.

Many of these individuals seek help for skin care and treatments, and I expect this trend to grow as more people use Ozempic. In places like New York, it’s almost as common as taking vitamins—everyone seems to be on it.

Jacobsen: When consulting with people—how do motivations factor into the conversation? Can you differentiate between good and bad motivations for seeking advice or help? How does the medical code of ethics come into play?

Kazlouskaya: As a business owner and physician, balancing the business side with the ethical duty to benefit patients can sometimes be challenging. Of course, you want patients to pursue treatments. Still, at the same time, you must recognize that some treatments may not be beneficial for everyone.

I maintain this balance by prioritizing the patient’s best interests. I never recommend or perform treatments that won’t benefit me.

There are different types of people who come in for treatments. Some want everything done. They’ll say, “I don’t care about the cost; I want to address this wrinkle or pigmentation issue. What treatments do you have?” The cost is not a concern for these individuals, so we can provide the most advanced treatments and develop a comprehensive plan to address their concerns.

Then, some people are entirely against injections. Even when you know that injections are necessary for significant improvement—like when aging is already advanced—you still need to respect their wishes. You have to explain that injections or surgery might provide the best results. Still, if they are unwilling, you can offer alternatives with the caveat that the results may be less effective.

Another group includes people who have done nothing for their skin throughout their lives and come in their sixties saying, “I just have a little bit of laxity.” These patients often have never even used a cream. When you examine them, you see sagging skin that requires significant intervention. It’s difficult to make them understand that, at this stage, achieving significant results is challenging, and even surgery might not fully resolve their concerns.

Everyone is unique, and you must navigate their beliefs and expectations. In the past, dermatologists were very assertive in their recommendations, but now, it’s more about working with the patient’s preferences.

The younger population is very different. They want to participate actively in their treatment plans. They rarely jump into any suggestions without researching, reading reviews, and seeking feedback. It’s a very collaborative process with them.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Viktoryia.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Sangeetha Venugopal, M.D., M.S. on Smoking and MDS

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/27

 Dr. Sangeetha Venugopal, M.D., M.S., is a distinguished physician-scientist specializing in hematology at Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center, part of the University of Miami Miller School of Medicine. As an assistant professor of hematology, Dr. Venugopal focuses on advancing research and improving clinical outcomes for patients with blood disorders, particularly myelodysplastic syndromes (MDS) and their precursor conditions. Venugopal is recognized for her groundbreaking research linking tobacco smoking to increased genetic mutations and disease progression in MDS. Her recent study, presented at the American Society of Hematology (ASH) annual meeting, highlighted the significant role of smoking cessation in mitigating disease risk and improving survival outcomes for MDS patients. She briefly talks about how tobacco smoking contributes to MDS pathogenesis, showing a dose-response relationship between smoking intensity and genetic mutations (ASXL1, SF3B1, U2AF1, ZRSR2). Smoking accelerates disease progression, reduces survival, and necessitates smoking cessation counseling as part of MDS management. Future research will explore the impact of early-life smoking on later MDS development.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Can you summarize the key findings of your study from the ASH annual meeting?

Dr. Sangeetha Venugopal: Summary: We have shown that tobacco smoking potentially contributes to the multi-step molecular pathogenesis of MDS.

We demonstrated a dose-response relationship with smoking meaning the heavier someone smokes, the chances of accumulation of mutations are high,

Tobacco smoking is associated with disease progression of MDS and impacts survival adversely.

Jacobsen: What genetic mutations are associated with smoking in MDS patients?

Venugopal: ASXL1, SF3B1, U2AF1, and ZRSR2

Jacobsen: How did your study establish a dose-response relationship between smoking intensity and genetic mutations?

Venugopal: After adjustment for sex, age and disease group, the number of mutations increased significantly with the pack-year (PY) smoked (p=0.006), and those at the 75th and 90th percentiles of PY had 1.8 and 3.5 times the number of mutations, respectively, compared to non-smokers, indicating a dose-response relationship. i.e.,those in the 90th percentile of pack-year smoking had double the number of mutations compared to those in the 75th percentile

Jacobsen: What are the implications of the findings for the clinical management of MDS or its precursor conditions?

Venugopal: When anyone gets diagnosed with MDS or precursor condition who also smoke, must be counselled to quit smoking. Because this study clearly shows that tobacco smoking is associated with disease progression and impacts survival adversely.

Jacobsen: What role does smoking cessation counseling play in the treatment plan for patients with MDS? 

Venugopal: When anyone gets saddled with a new diagnosis of cancer,first question to come up is dietary and lifestyle modification. At the outset, physicians discuss about maintaining a healthy lifestyle and smoking cessation is an important lifestyle modification

Jacobsen: How does your study contribute to the existing body of knowledge regarding smoking and blood cancers?

Venugopal: We know that smoking is an epidemiological risk factor. This study shows that smoking is also associated with disease progression and impacts survival adversely

Jacobsen: What are the next steps in your research?

Venugopal: To evaluate if smoking at an young age contributes to the development of MDS at an older age.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Venugopal.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Peter Dankwa on Tribalism and a Humanist Response

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/26

Peter Nyarko Dankwa is a member of the Humanist Association of Ghana. He is outspoken about spreading humanism and critical thinking. He uses his blog, Peter’s Box, to promote humanism and critical thinking. At a Toastmasters meeting in 2019, Peter delivered a speech titled ‘No Monkey Games,’ which was inspired by humanist values. He has held several leadership positions in Toastmasters International, from the club to the district level. Peter holds a bachelor’s degree in Aerospace Engineering. He is a passionate chess and Rubik’s cube coach.

In ‘Whispers in the Dust’ Peter talks about his short story on Tribalism’s destructive effects. Inspired by online tribal banters in Ghana, Peter personifies Tribalism to highlight its militating impact on humanity. The story follows Tribalism rejecting help due to prejudice, leading to his downfall. Dankwa discusses parallels with other group identities, such as nationalism and religion, where prioritizing group identity over humanity causes division. 

He collaborated on this story with one of Ghana’s prolific writers, Ama Pomaa (the author of A Time to Part and The Ones We Find).

In his last blog post ‘Left Out’, Peter passionately decries the senselessness of stigmatization of left-handed people in Ghana after having experienced first-hand discrimination for using his left hand in a social interaction. 

Dankwa’s next post ‘Jungle Justice’ explores the dangers of mob action, inspired by tragic incidents of prejudice and injustice in Ghana. He believes the rise of mob justice in Africa, can be linked to distrust in the corrupted justice systems.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Okay, today, once again, we’re here with Peter Dankwa from Ghana. You have a short story that illustrates the fall of Tribalism. Tribalism can indeed be problematic. So, Peter, what inspired you to write this short story?

Peter Dankwa: Whispers In The Dust was inspired by the sickening tribal bantering that creeps up on my social media feed. It was my humanistic attempt to address the pitfalls of tribalism in an ever-growing tribalistic Ghanaian society. One might wonder why strangers who might probably never meet each other in the real world, would gleefully tear each other apart on social media for the sole reason of their tribal identity. 

Appealing to our shared humanism, I sought to dissect the misappropriation of tribalism under the knife of reason and critical thinking. And what better way to present it than through storytelling? That was how I came up with Whispers In The Dust – a form of protest writing particularizing the dangers of tribalism. 

Hopefully, reason shall prevail at the end of my fictional story. 

The storyline shows that while we may belong to specific tribes, elevating tribal identity above the fundamental values of our shared humanity is militating to our existence. To demonstrate this, I decided to personify Tribalism as a character and show how it manifests in everyday life, ultimately harming himself due to his tribalistic nature.

The story begins with Tribalism (the character) going about his day and meeting people from different walks of life. Each time he meets someone, conflict arises because he’s arrogant, cocky, and believes his tribe is superior. Eventually, he ends up in a healthcare facility, but his insulting behaviour alienates everyone who might have helped him. Even when Death offers to be patient with Tribalism, he snobs death. You can imagine what happened to him.

The story illustrates how destructive Tribalism can be when taken too far.

I would add that Tribalism, as an evolutionary strategy, isn’t entirely negative—it can foster a competitive spirit that motivates tribes to become better. But once it crosses the line and overshadows humanity and core virtues, it becomes a serious problem. That, in a nutshell, is the message of the story.

Jacobsen: Also, I mean, is this a perspective that could be applied if you personified a nation-state or something similar, where someone takes pride in their country—which is understandable—but elevates that above the broader perspective of humanity? Over time, as nation-states have essentially occupied most of the world’s territories, people derive an identity from them. It has its advantages but also significant disadvantages when taken too far. Could similar analogies be made to other group identities that people adopt?

Dankwa: Yes, you couldn’t have put it any better! The principle is the same – the very one you will find in Whispers In The Dust. You can observe this same pattern across religions and races, where people feel threatened by the identity of others or fear their identity will be diminished if they don’t take the spotlight. This pattern appears in many areas of life where people prioritize their tribe or ethos over humanity. Religion is one of the most apparent examples of this. In religion, it often becomes a case of “us versus them.” That’s the underlying theme. There is rarely a point where people reason based on a shared community. Instead, it’s about asserting, “We have our ideals, and you must accept them, or you’re our enemy.” This issue spans many areas.

So yes, you’re correct that this principle transcends Tribalism and applies to many contexts, including patriotism. Patriotism isn’t inherently bad, but when it begins to undermine someone else’s identity—especially when that identity has no bearing on you—it becomes problematic. I struggle to understand why someone else’s identity should affect you so profoundly that you build your life around protecting your own.

The principle of “live and let live” should be the norm. However, it often escalates to a point where, perhaps due to our evolutionary psychology, people revert to a tribal mindset. In ancient times, tribal wars were common, but now those conflicts have shifted into debates and rhetoric. Sometimes, these expressions are subtle, but they still reflect the underlying concept of Tribalism. 

Jacobsen: Maybe there’s some game-theory consideration here. When I think about competition between nations—particularly in areas like science and technology—or competition between tribes in terms of mastering their crafts in earlier times, there seems to be a zero-sum mentality at play. In a zero-sum game, if one party gains, another, by definition, loses.

When you move away from zero-sum thinking to a “grow the pie” perspective, competition becomes more constructive. For instance, if nations or tribes compete in ways that benefit everyone—such as discovering new science, inventing technologies, or engaging in trade that benefits both parties—they can maintain pride in their identities while fostering collective growth. This approach reflects expansion rather than contraction or stagnation.

This may tie into evolutionary psychology. When people adopt zero-sum thinking regarding their identities, it often becomes unhealthy. On the other hand, when identity is approached expansively, it can lead to positive, constructive outcomes.

Are you planning any other stories that will involve this character of Tribalism?

Dankwa: I have another story for February 1st titled ‘Jungle Justice – The Dread of Kabutey’. 

I seek to address the problem of jungle justice with this story. For far too long the canker of mob justice has plagued Africa and has seared the conscience of many. Just this week I chanced on a video circulating on social media where some pedestrians were stoning a man who had allegedly stolen an item. Let me spare you the horrific details of that. You might have lost your appetite had you seen it. How are people in the 21st century committing such acts and then justifying them?

I believe the problem partly lies in the mistrust of the people in the justice system. Many people here struggle with the system’s fidelity. When cases arise where perpetrators are arrested but then somehow released, it creates a sense of insecurity and distrust. People begin to feel that justice won’t be served unless they take matters into their own hands. This eye-for-an-eye mentality feels, to them, like a way to ensure justice, but it’s deeply problematic.

One significant issue is that the mob’s victim could be innocent. Once a mob murders someone, there’s no way to undo that act or bring back their life. For example, I have a friend who grew dreadlocks as a form of protest after his friend was murdered in a mob action simply because of his appearance.

This friend of his had dreadlocks, and there was a perception in the community that people with such hairstyles were criminals or vagabonds. When a call went out about a thief on the streets, and no one could identify the culprit, they simply looked for someone who seemed “different.” They saw his dreadlocks, noticed his slightly unconventional attire, and concluded he must be the thief. Tragically, they murdered him.

A humanist friend decided to grow dreadlocks himself as a form of protest. His message was to challenge these stereotypes and show that a person’s appearance doesn’t define their character. He wanted people to understand: “I’m the same person you know. I’m not evil simply because I have dreadlocks.”

This issue and his story inspired me to write another piece that explores the dangers of mob justice and challenges the prejudices that lead to such tragedies. 

Jacobsen: Yeah. I mean, it’s a different flavour in North America. You see the same psychology manifesting. We all know the case of Mubarak Bala, who was jailed in what appears to be an act of social retribution based on a complaint from S.S. Umar & Co. The complaint stemmed from one Facebook post labelled as being, quote, “provocative and annoying. ” I remember communicating with him the night before his arrest because we were working on an Ask Mubarak series for a Canadian Atheist publication. We completed seven sessions and were working on the eighth, or something like that.

But yeah, this kind of social retribution is quite common. The difference is that the strength of institutions determines the extent to which people feel they need to take matters into their own hands. Stronger institutions provide a better buffer against this.

Okay, well, thank you for your time today.

Dankwa: Thank you, too.

LEFT OUT

I sighed deeply in relief when I walked inside the house after work on Friday night. This Friday night was special, unlike the others. My leave began today, and I’ll be gone from work for a month. I gleefully unlocked the door, yet a sense of discomfort lingered in the pit of my stomach.

I replayed the scene that had just transpired on the street a few seconds ago in my head. Why didn’t she greet me back? Every time I reconstructed the scene, I asked the same question. Why didn’t she greet me back? I made up an excuse. She did not see me. But I’m sure we made eye contact. So why didn’t she return my greeting?

Was she begrudging me? On what, exactly? We’ve always welcomed each other without incident. Hmm. Anyway, I greeted her today, and she did not return the greeting.
As I entered my room, I tossed my bag onto the bed, along with my earlier dilemma. Let the weekend and my leave begin! Next week, I will be in Singapore for the International Humanists Conference.
‘Good evening. Is there anyone home?’ I heard Dad’s voice behind my door. He would do this every time he returned home from town.
‘Good evening, Daa,’ I answered perfunctorily.
‘Afi says you…’ He sounded muffled.
I inched closer to the door to better hear him. ‘What?’
‘You know Afi, right? “The house after our next-door neighbour?”
When I heard the name Afi, the unsettling feeling in the pit of my stomach rumbled.
‘Yes, I know Afi.’

Dad smiled wryly, perhaps to make it seem anodyne. ‘She wasn’t happy that you greeted her with your left hand. When I met her on my way home, she registered her displeasure.
When I heard that, I held unto my indrawn breath a little longer. I felt my chest expand. The unsettling feeling erupted into sulkiness, though I was relieved that I finally had some closure to my earlier dilemma.
With laboured breathing and disapproving eyes brows, I let out a litany of arguments. ‘Ah! Didn’t she see that my hands were full?’
I had my laptop backpack slung over my right shoulder. That same right hand held my camera bag, which was heavier than the tripod pouch I was holding with my left hand. It felt natural to wave to her with my left hand. So did I.

I was correct. She saw me! At least she saw me make an attempt to greet her. And she didn’t return it? I was enraged that she didn’t upraid me right away while I was still in her view. Perhaps she didn’t want to be late to her destination. She had just driven out of her compound in her car.

I continued ranting. Why didn’t she inform me right away so I could learn from my mistake? You know what? I am equally offended! I greeted you with a smile. Would you rather I greet you with my left hand or not greet at all? You ignored me, drove by me, and reported to my father. Was she expecting a vicarious apology from my father?

Ah, I get it. Dad will somehow magically explain why using my left hand was inappropriate and unacceptable.

Read more at https://peesbox.com/left-out/

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Siamak Agha, Plastic Surgery’s Nips and Tucks

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/26

Dr. Siamak Agha, a Cambridge-trained MD/PhD and pioneer in plastic surgery, has spent over 20 years transforming the field with innovative techniques like the three-dimensional facelift and high-definition tummy tuck. His research in gene therapy earned two international patents, and his surgical expertise was honed during a seven-year residency at the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center. As the founder of The Aesthetic Centers in Newport Beach, California, Dr. Agha caters to local and international patients, offering state-of-the-art care and virtual consultations for those seeking transformative, natural results. He has been featured in People Magazine, E News, Bravo TV, and Yahoo Entertainment. Agha shared insights on his holistic approach to plastic surgery, emphasizing the artistry and science required for optimal outcomes. He highlighted advancements like high-definition tummy tucks, circumferential thigh lifts, and innovations in three-dimensional techniques for natural results. Dr. Agha discussed AI’s potential in analyzing aging and the evolving patient trends toward refinement and natural aesthetics. Addressing scarring, cultural variations, and patient motivations, he stressed the importance of balance, patient-centered care, and realistic expectations.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re with Dr. Agha, MD, PhD, from Cambridge University. You completed your residency at the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center. You are a board-certified plastic surgeon with over 20 years of experience. You specialize in aesthetic rejuvenation, breast reshaping, and body contouring. Is that accurate?

Agha: Absolutely.

Jacobsen: So, Dr. Agha, why did you specialize in plastic surgery?

Agha: It’s an interesting story. My father was an obstetrician-gynecologist and a devout Christian. He was always busy, and I rarely saw him. From an early age, I knew I didn’t want to pursue OB-GYN because I saw firsthand how he was never home.

However, I was exposed to plastic surgery during medical school and quickly realized how unique and versatile the field is. Plastic surgery is the ultimate form of general surgery. As a plastic surgeon, you perform reconstructive procedures, assist trauma surgeons, and collaborate with other specialists, such as cardiac and orthopedic surgeons.

Nearly every medical discipline may involve or require plastic and reconstructive surgery at some point. The ability to help people feel better about themselves, improve their self-confidence, and enhance their quality of life is immensely rewarding.

Plastic surgery is also incredibly comprehensive—genuinely “head-to-toe” surgery. We operate on the face, hands, breasts, body, and even toes. We incorporate elements of orthopedic surgery, soft tissue surgery, oncologic surgery, and more. It’s a fascinating field because it blends creativity with technical precision.

Jacobsen: What do you find most exciting about the field?

Agha: The constant evolution of the field keeps it exciting. New techniques and technologies are emerging all the time. Even after completing my formal training 20 years ago, I’ve had to stay up-to-date with innovations. There’s always something new to learn, whether it’s surgical techniques, advancements in transplantation, or minimally invasive procedures.

Jacobsen: Since completing your training, what are the most significant advancements in plastic surgery?

Agha: Plastic surgery has seen remarkable progress over the years. For example, hand and face transplants are now possible, which was science fiction just a few decades ago. These procedures require immense collaboration and expertise, but they’ve transformed lives.

We’ve also seen significant advancements in post-weight-loss body contouring surgery, breast reconstruction techniques after mastectomy, and minimally invasive procedures like injectables and laser treatments.

Another area of innovation is regenerative medicine. Plastic surgeons now use stem cell therapies and tissue engineering to restore form and function in ways we couldn’t before.

It’s worth noting that many people need to realize how integral plastic surgeons are to other fields. For instance, the first successful kidney transplant was performed with the help of a plastic surgeon. Plastic surgery is foundational to many life-changing procedures and continues evolving incredibly.

Jacobsen: That’s fascinating. Have you noticed other disciplines incorporating elements of plastic surgery?

Agha: Absolutely. For example, ENT (ear, nose, and throat) specialists increasingly perform facial plastic surgeries, such as rhinoplasty and facelifts. Dermatologists are also becoming more involved in aesthetic procedures, like Botox and fillers. While this collaboration is great for advancing patient care, it also underscores the importance of proper training and expertise in achieving the best outcomes.

You have ophthalmologists performing oculoplastic procedures, oncologic surgeons specializing in breast cancer and breast reconstruction, and other disciplines venturing into cosmetic surgery. But truly, a board-certified plastic surgeon is also a board-certified reconstructive surgeon. As you mentioned, numerous reconstructive advancements, such as hand and face transplantation, have been making headlines. 

Jacobsen: That brings us to the present moment. In many fields today, we see jargon terms thrown around, and artificial intelligence (AI) is becoming a major part of the conversation. For example, AI detects diseases through scans or images to assist medical doctors. How do you see AI influencing plastic surgery, particularly on the cutting edge of where the field might evolve through the rest of the 2020s?

Agha: AI plays a role, but it may take time to impact the surgical side of plastic surgery. Instead, AI will likely contribute more to understanding the process of aging and rejuvenation. For instance, AI can help identify genetic differences in how people age. Why does one person’s skin age faster than another’s? What nutrients or components do they need to maintain healthy skin, organs, and overall health?

AI will also help us understand the role of the microbiome and how it affects aging and general health. Right now, AI is geared toward analyzing the biology behind aging and how we can reverse or slow it.

Regarding surgery, the role of AI will depend on the advancements in robotics and whether patients will accept robots performing procedures. AI and robotics excel in some types of surgery, such as tumour removal, because they are more mechanical: determining precise dimensions and executing minimally invasive incisions to remove the tumour.

However, plastic surgery is different. It’s as much an art as it is a science. The artistic element involves making nuanced judgments based on cultural variations, aesthetics, and an innate sense of design and proportion. Unless we can teach robots that artistic sensibility, AI won’t fully replace the human plastic surgeon.

Artistic ability plays a major role in plastic surgery outcomes. Only some plastic surgeons may excel in that area. All plastic surgeons are trained to perform the surgery. Still, not everyone will become a great surgeon because the artistic element is harder to teach. Every surgery involves artistic decisions: shaping, proportioning, and contouring to meet the patient’s unique goals.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss the artistic and cultural variations you mentioned. If you travelled to different regions, what differences in desired aesthetics would you typically observe?

Agha: Oh, there’s significant cultural variation regarding aesthetics. For example, in Korea, calf reduction surgery is very common. Koreans, generally speaking, may have more developed calf muscles, specifically the gastrocnemius muscles. A popular procedure in Korea involves resecting part of the muscle to create a slimmer calf.

In the Middle East, rhinoplasty is extremely common among men and women. Countries like Turkey and Iran are renowned for having some of the world’s top rhinoplasty surgeons, and the demand for nose-reshaping procedures is very high.

Even here in North America, I see cultural differences. For instance, when patients come to me for buttock enhancement, preferences often vary based on cultural background. My Latino patients, for example, often desire a lower, heavier buttock shape—what I refer to as the “J.Lo butt.” In contrast, my Caucasian patients typically want a more centrally heavy buttock, while my Black patients may prefer a different aesthetic altogether.

These preferences highlight how cultural beauty ideals can shape surgical goals, even for specific parts of the anatomy. It’s fascinating to see how diverse these desires can be.

It underscores the importance of understanding plastic surgery’s science and cultural artistry.

Jacobsen: That is super interesting. Has that trend changed much over your working years, or has it been fairly consistent?

Agha: No, it changes all the time. Right now, I’m seeing a significant shift in patient preferences. Many people are opting for implant removal and smaller breasts. The trend is moving from large breasts to smaller, more natural sizes. Similarly, there’s a shift from bigger to smaller buttocks, though patients still want them to look perky.

One issue with standard plastic surgery, which I have been working to evolve in my practice for the past twenty years, is that most procedures are treated as two-dimensional. In plastic surgery, you often lift and tighten, but humans are not two-dimensional.

We have vertical skin, horizontal skin, and projection, the third dimension. As people gain weight or age, their skin expands three-dimensionally—it stretches vertically and horizontally and increases in depth. However, most traditional plastic surgery techniques address only vertical or horizontal laxity. The third dimension, projection, is often overlooked, and there aren’t many methods to create it.

Most of my practice has been focused on incorporating that third dimension, especially for female patients. For men, this matters far less. Men generally want to look linear, masculine, and V-shaped and prefer a flat chest and a defined structure. They don’t want large breasts or prominent buttocks, so those procedures are relatively straightforward.

However, women aim to create curves, projections, and natural contours. We aim for a nice projection of the breasts, well-shaped buttocks, and overall balance. That’s where the third dimension comes in, and many of the procedures I perform focus on creating that three-dimensional result.

Jacobsen: So, what specific patients are coming to you for these days?

Agha: A big trend I’m seeing now is implant removal. When implants are removed, the breasts look flat because the implants stretch the breast tissue over time. Let’s talk about how implants work.

For example, when you place a large implant in someone with an A-cup or small breast, it stretches the breast tissue horizontally and vertically, but it also thins it out. Over time, the breast tissue becomes like a pancake sitting over a large implant. While this can look great for many years, removing the implant leaves you with a stretched, deflated pancake sitting flat against the chest.

If you approach this issue with standard techniques, you would typically remove the excess skin and pull the tissue together. However, this does not recreate projection; it flattens the tissue further.

I do breast reshaping instead. I take every element of the excess breast tissue and strategically pull it together. Imagine the breast tissue as a wide, stretched-out area. You create projection by narrowing the tissue, shortening it, and bringing it together in a specific way. It’s about reshaping and suturing the tissue to achieve depth, contours, and natural projection.

So it’s far more refined than standard lifting procedures. Anyone can lift a breast, but creating projection, depth, and shadows requires a specialized approach. That’s what differentiates my practice from others. Patients come to me specifically for these refinements because they know I can achieve superior results. I often get patients travelling from Canada, the UK, and other parts of the world for these advanced techniques.

My practice’s evolution focuses on pushing beyond standard procedures. It’s about lifting and creating natural projections, balanced proportions, and aesthetically pleasing results.

Jacobsen: When performing sutures, I assume one concern in surgery is the risk of scarring. How do you minimize the appearance of scars when performing sculpting and aesthetic procedures?

Agha: Scarring is an inevitable part of surgery. For instance, you can sculpt a patient using liposuction, but if the patient is older, has lost significant weight, or has skin laxity, the skin won’t shrink properly after liposuction. In such cases, you have to remove the excess skin, which means making incisions, which results in scars.

Scars are permanent—there’s no way around that. My philosophy is that since a scar is unavoidable, we should place it perfectly. Proper placement makes all the difference.

I position the scars meticulously when performing body or reverse gravity lifts. For example, I tell my patients, “I guarantee you’ll be able to wear a thong, and your scars will be hidden.” I ensure the scars are placed strategically. For a butt lift, I position the scar precisely at the junction between the lower back and the upper buttocks—exactly where a thong would naturally rest.

For a tummy tuck, I design the scar so low that it includes part of the pubic skin, allowing for a pubic lift. Patients often ask, “Will my scars be visible?” I respond, “Yes, when you’re naked and looking in a mirror or when your partner sees you. But otherwise, no—they’re positioned low enough in the pubic area to remain hidden.”

You can’t eliminate scars, but you can make them symmetrical, thin, and strategically placed at anatomical junctions. For instance, scars can be placed at the junctions between the abdomen and the thighs, the abdomen and the breasts, or the lower back and the buttocks. This careful positioning hides a significant portion of the scar, making it less noticeable.

When scars are well-placed and minimal in appearance, patients are generally more focused on the correction than the scars themselves. Scar placement and symmetry are critical. A jagged, asymmetrical, or uneven scar detracts from the overall result, and patients understandably don’t appreciate it.

Another philosophy I follow is what I call “naked beauty.” My goal is for my patients to look good when they’re naked. When they see themselves in front of a mirror, they should feel confident and say, “Wow, I look great.” That’s the ultimate aim of my work.

They may have an incision, but if it’s symmetrical, thin, and placed at the right junction, patients often don’t notice it anymore. 

Jacobsen: What about complications during surgery? I imagine they don’t occur often with skilled surgeons, but what types of complications might happen in rare cases when they do arise?

Agha: Complications depend on the type of surgery being performed. For example, facelift patients typically have fewer complications compared to someone undergoing their seventh or eighth breast surgery—and yes, I’ve had those cases. I’ve even had patients come to me for their ninth buttock or breast surgery.

In such situations, the tissues are disrupted and damaged multiple times, and the normal anatomy is distorted. This significantly increases the risk of complications.

One thing I’ve learned from my mentors—universal across surgical residencies—is the saying, “If you don’t want complications, don’t operate.” The reality is that if you operate on enough patients, complications will eventually occur. However, with proper training and experience, complication rates remain low.

During my residency, my mentor insisted that we know at least six ways to perform every surgery. Before every procedure, we had to write these approaches on a whiteboard and discuss them. This training instilled the habit of planning surgeries meticulously the night before, thinking through every possible scenario.

For straightforward surgeries like breast augmentations, complication rates are very low in the hands of a well-trained surgeon. However, revision surgeries or complex procedures like anti-gravity lifts inherently carry higher risks. These risks often depend on factors like the patient’s ability to heal.

Healing is incredibly individualized. Everyone’s ability to heal, fight infections, or recover from surgery varies. Healthy patients tend to heal better, which lowers the likelihood of complications. Larger surgeries, like full-body makeovers or extensive revisions, depend more on the patient’s overall health and ability to heal properly.

So, complications are not solely dependent on the surgeon’s skill and training. They also hinge on the patient’s ability to follow postoperative instructions and their body’s capacity for optimal healing. When all these factors align—skilled surgery, patient compliance, and good healing ability—complication rates are significantly lower.

Jacobsen: What about patients who might benefit from counselling or self-esteem support instead of surgery? For example, someone who wants a breast reduction, breast enhancement, or buttock modification for reasons tied to self-esteem. It’s their body, choice, and money in a private clinic. But have you ever encountered cases where counseling could have addressed their concerns instead of surgery?

Agha: Yes, that’s an important consideration. For some patients, plastic surgery might not be the best first step. If their concerns are primarily tied to self-esteem or emotional challenges, a conversation or counselling could help them gain confidence without surgery.

However, surgery can help others meet their personal goals and improve their quality of life. It’s essential to assess each case individually. During consultations, I spend significant time understanding why a patient wants a particular procedure. If I believe their motivations are not rooted in realistic expectations, or if surgery doesn’t truly address their concerns, I recommend taking more time to reflect or even seek counselling first.

For many patients, achieving their desired physical changes can boost their confidence and align their appearance with how they see themselves, positively impacting their lives. Ultimately, it’s about helping patients make informed decisions that suit their unique circumstances and goals.

Jacobsen: When it comes to plastic surgery, is there a conversation around who truly needs it versus those who might not?

Agha: Absolutely, there is. Some people don’t require surgery but still desire it. Fortunately, those cases are rare, especially in this country, where plastic surgery is a cash-based, self-paid service. It’s a luxury surgery. I always tell patients, “This is luxury surgery. Do you have to have it? No. Do you need bigger breasts? No. Do you need smaller breasts, a flatter tummy, or a brow lift? No.”

Most patients don’t need plastic surgery—they desire it. If they’re willing to pay for it and it will benefit them, then we do it. However, I sometimes have to say no if I believe it won’t benefit them, if the issue is minor, or if their expectations are unrealistic.

Jacobsen: So you turn people down?

Agha: Yes, I do. I have frank conversations with patients. I tell them, “The risk-to-reward ratio doesn’t justify doing a big surgery to achieve a very small improvement.” For example, just yesterday, I spoke with a physician who looked great already. I told her, “This will be a significant surgery for minimal improvement.” Ironically, she still wanted to move forward, and that’s her prerogative.

If patients feel strongly that the procedure will make them feel better about their body, improve their confidence, or help their relationships, it’s their decision. In those cases, plastic surgery becomes a quality-of-life decision.

Jacobsen: How would you define what is more necessary versus more frivolous regarding aesthetic surgery?

Agha: That’s a difficult question because these surgeries aren’t for me—they’re for the patients. If it makes someone feel good about themselves, helps them wear a bikini for the first time in years, or lets them feel comfortable being naked in front of their spouse, then it’s worth doing.

The more interesting question is this: What part of plastic surgery is “vanity surgery,” and what part is “quality-of-life surgery”? There’s a big difference.

Jacobsen: What would you consider vanity surgery?

Agha: Vanity surgeries are procedures like making a slightly smaller nose or slightly bigger breasts—changes primarily about appearance. However, some patients have a different story.

For instance, someone might come in after losing 200 or 300 pounds and have loose skin everywhere. They tell me they’re embarrassed to be naked in front of their spouse, they haven’t had a sexual relationship in over a year, they experience chafing, or they even deal with skin infections.

When you remove that excess skin, it’s life-changing. People feel confident, start dating at 55 for the first time, or their marriage improves. These are real stories I’ve witnessed. That’s not vanity surgery anymore—that’s quality-of-life surgery.

Jacobsen: That’s powerful.

Agha: It is. These procedures have a profound impact on people’s lives.

Jacobsen: Let’s talk about how you approach plastic surgery differently.

Agha: Right now, plastic surgery, as it’s traditionally trained in residencies, is still largely two-dimensional. We’ve evolved those techniques to focus on creating projection, profile, and a true three-dimensional result.

For example, when patients come to me for a mommy makeover, most people think that means breast surgery and a tummy tuck. I don’t look at it that way. I don’t look at patients as just a list of procedures.

I focus on what we can do to create a more refined version of the body. Often, I assess the patient holistically—the front, back, and sides—because patients tend to fixate on their front. However, the sides and back are integral to the overall result. For example, if someone looks great from the front but their sides are too wide or too full, it will affect the overall appearance.

My philosophy is 360-degree enhancement and refinement, especially for the female body. I emphasize creating projection, curves, and fullness where desired. Over the past 20 years, I’ve worked to evolve various surgeries to achieve this comprehensive approach to shaping the body.

Jacobsen: American television, and even Canadian to some extent, is filled with doctor-focused talk shows. Shows like The Doctors are popular. Do these shows accurately portray plastic surgery in terms of how it’s done, experienced, and its overall impact?

Agha: Not at all. Shows like these are designed for entertainment, not education. Television prioritizes drama. They focus on patients with dramatic backstories because that keeps audiences engaged. The surgery is often just one aspect of the show, and the storytelling takes center stage.

My issue with these shows is that you rarely see the truth after. You’ll see the patient’s “before” story, the drama around their life, and perhaps a glimpse of the immediate postoperative result. But you don’t see the patient three or six months later or how the surgery impacted their long-term life.

Plastic surgery is about transformation, and that transformation takes time. Television doesn’t show that—it’s not about educating people; it’s about selling ads.

Jacobsen: That’s a good point. Television is ultimately a business, and producers decide what makes the final cut.

Agha: The goal is ratings and revenue, but it does not accurately depict the field.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or reflections on our conversation today?

Agha: I’d love to talk more about aging.

Jacobsen: Sure, let’s dive into that—it’s a great topic.

Agha: Thank you. Aging is something we see more and more in my practice. Many patients start with facial work as they age—facelifts, for example. They often have already had breast and body work done, such as a mommy makeover earlier in life.

By the time they come to us, especially those travelling from out of state or overseas, they’re not looking for basic breast or tummy procedures anymore. Instead, they present with an aging body that no longer matches their face. For instance, they may have a beautifully rejuvenated face, but their body shows signs of aging.

This mismatch can be particularly frustrating for patients and is a common issue. Since many plastic surgeons don’t perform larger, more comprehensive body refinement surgeries, these patients often come to us for solutions that involve addressing the entire lower body.

Jacobsen: So, your practice is seeing a demand for full-body refinement surgeries to complement previous procedures like facelifts or breastwork?

Agha: These patients want their bodies to reflect the same level of youthfulness as their faces. It’s about achieving harmony between all aspects of their appearance.

Regarding those surgeries, I often perform some of our pioneering procedures, such as the circumferential thigh lift. This procedure lifts the thigh’s front, outer, and sometimes inner aspects while incorporating buttock refinement, lift, and sculpting. It’s designed to rejuvenate the entire lower half of the body.

I want to highlight this because many people aren’t even aware of these procedures. Traditionally, these surgeries were reserved for patients who had significant weight loss and excess skin. However, more and more, I’m seeing patients seeking body refinement—thigh, buttock, and overall lower-body sculpting—not because of extreme skin laxity but because they want a body that matches their face, aspirations, goals, and self-esteem.

By combining comprehensive procedures—such as the circumferential thigh lift, butt lift, sculpting, tummy tuck, and high-definition tummy tuck—we can achieve these goals for patients.

Jacobsen: High-definition tummy tuck? That’s interesting. What is it?

Agha: Of course. A high-definition tummy tuck is a procedure I pioneered in 2007. I submitted the technique for publication in the Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery Journal to share it with other surgeons, but it wasn’t accepted. As a result, I trademarked it instead.

The concept behind the high-definition tummy tuck is to create a natural-looking abdomen. In a standard tummy tuck, the skin is completely lifted off the muscle, releasing all the attachments between the skin and the muscle. While this smooths the abdomen, it also eliminates the natural contours and shadows that define a toned abdomen.

We preserve those natural attachments with the high-definition technique, allowing the skin and fatty tissue to maintain their original placement. This preservation creates a natural appearance with defined contours and shadows, giving the abdomen a more athletic and aesthetically pleasing look.

Jacobsen: Does the technique maintain the natural structure rather than flatten everything?

Agha: Exactly. By preserving these attachments, we avoid the overly flat, unnatural appearance that sometimes results from traditional tummy tucks. The high-definition tummy tuck delivers a more sculpted, realistic outcome that aligns with the patient’s body shape and aesthetic goals.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Agha.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Eva Quiñones, Hate for Atheists and Framing Humanism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/25

Eva Quiñones Segarra resides in the municipality of Río Grande. She studied from third grade at a Catholic school in Guaynabo, receiving the religion medal at her graduation in 1984, despite having stopped believing a few years earlier. She pursued agricultural sciences at the University of Puerto Rico at Mayagüez, specializing in livestock industries. She later enrolled in the School of Law at the Interamerican University of Puerto Rico, graduating with a Juris Doctor in 2001. Quiñones discusses her experiences as a humanist in Puerto Rico, including receiving hate mail and death threats, which she reported to the FBI without action. She highlights the limited organization and acceptance of atheism and humanism locally, despite hosting a regional convention in 2014. Quiñones details challenges in affiliating with larger groups, emphasizing support from figures like Dan Barker. She describes upcoming Latin American humanist conferences, logistical issues, and efforts to foster global unity against politicization. Additionally, she shares personal stories about her atheist son facing religious bullying in school and her growing positive media presence. Initiatives like student essay contests aim to promote humanist values.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What about the hate mail you receive? What has that been like over the years?

Eva Quiñones: I’ve had to call the FBI once due to death threats. They did not feel immediately believable—I don’t generally fear for my life in Puerto Rico. But I did send those messages to the FBI, and they called me, asking, “Can you explain this?” After explaining, they told me they wouldn’t do anything about it. They didn’t consider the threats severe or actionable. I thought, “Okay, fine.”

Over the years, I’ve received three or four threats. I inform authorities so they have it documented in their files, even if they don’t act on it. The FBI keeps a file on it, but that’s as far as it goes.

Jacobsen: How did discussions about atheism and humanism develop in Puerto Rico?

Quiñones: Before 2011, no one was talking about these things. There were some small atheist activities, but I never knew about them, and we still aren’t very organized. My group has lost some popularity for reasons I’ve mentioned before—it’s not considered prestigious to talk about religion right now.

But we did have our moment. For example, we hosted an American Atheists regional convention here in 2014.

Jacobsen: There’s an A.A. chapter in Puerto Rico, right?

Quiñones: We don’t have an official chapter. We were affiliated at one point, but they haven’t paid much attention to us in recent years. David Silverman was very enthusiastic and heavily involved with us. I tried to maintain that relationship, but they didn’t stay engaged.

However, Mandisa Thomas and her group have been involved. Dan Barker from the Freedom From Religion Foundation has been massively supportive. He even spoke at one of my events in Puerto Rico, as did David Silverman. Humanists International was also involved with us to some extent, but American Humanists needed more interest.

It didn’t sit well with people here when they decided to rescind certain awards, like the Humanist of the Year from 20 years ago. We thought it was petty and insignificant, especially since they’d never shown much interest in us.

For a while, there were attempts to involve Latinos in humanist initiatives in a meaningful way. I was contacted—not directly by American Humanists, but by one of their Latin American representatives—to be part of a subdivision. However, it fell apart because there were too many conflicting opinions, and nothing could be solidified into a basic position statement. It’s impossible because we are all so different. Latin American countries have different dynamics, and Latin Americans in the U.S. have different needs and perspectives than those in Latin America.

Plus, American Humanists have yet to show interest in us. There was no outreach, no invitations to collaborate. But other groups were involved, and we accomplished many great things together. I have to give credit to Dan Barker and Annie Laurie Gaylor. David Silverman, until his departure, was very supportive of us. Anything we needed, he was in.

Jacobsen: It sounds like building worldwide unity is difficult.

Quiñones: Yes, but humanism has the potential to unite people because it’s based on ethics, science, free-thinking, and compassion—universal values. Leaders do have to be careful nowadays, but it is possible to create global unity. Many attempts have been made, but they often get politicized, making it challenging. You’ve heard the phrase “herding cats,”right?

Jacobsen: Yes, that’s a common analogy.

Quiñones: It’s difficult and nearly impossible, especially with the current wave of wokeness. Humanism isn’t “woke.” It has a central mission.

Jacobsen: How would you define wokeness? And is there any similarity or overlap with humanism?

Quiñones: There are similarities and overlaps because human flourishing isn’t achieved in just one way. Many factors contribute to flourishing, and individuals within minority groups are affected by their interactions with majorities in particular ways. Humanism can provide guidance and reasoning for addressing these interactions.

So, there is overlap in that humanism can help guide interactions between minorities and majorities and promote better understanding. Humanism emphasizes caring for the individual, whether they’re part of a minority or not. There has to be some overlap, but humanism doesn’t impose acceptance.

Jacobsen: That’s insightful. You’re defining humanism in terms of its approach, which is newer to me. Humanism, as you describe it, doesn’t impose—it asks critical questions, seeks evidence, and applies that evidence to improve human well-being at the individual level, which can then extend to groups and societies. On the other hand, wokeness starts ideologically. It builds forward from there, often collecting grievances rather than working from a positive framework. It’s almost as if both come to similar conclusions but apply solutions differently.

Quiñones: Exactly. Humanism already acknowledges our collective—humanity, people.

Jacobsen: So, that’s our collective. Yes, it’s about avoiding re-racializing one another in the process. When you re-racialize in a “benevolent” way, it’s still problematic. Benevolent racism can be seen as a counterpart to malevolent racism. The nasty kind is the overtly negative, harmful type we often see.

Quiñones: I see. But your collective—your tribe—is humanity.

Jacobsen: You mentioned that events for Latin American free thought organizations happen every three years, right?

Quiñones: Yes, that’s correct. These events happen once every three years. The upcoming one this year will be held in Mexico. The first event was in 2018 in Arequipa, Peru. The second was supposed to happen in 2020, but COVID-19 postponed it, so it was held in September 2022. Now, in 2024, it’s happening in Mexico City. The 2022 event was in Pereira, Colombia, the country’s coffee capital. I appreciate that place every day, all day.

Jacobsen: It’s called the Coffee Axis, right?

Quiñones: Yes, the Coffee Axis—A-X-I-S. Not the “Axis of Evil,” but the axis of coffee growers.

Jacobsen: So, they’re the good guys by default?

Quiñones: They’re pretty great, yes. Unfortunately, I couldn’t attend the 2022 event because I was hospitalized.

Jacobsen: Oh no. What happened?

Quiñones: I had an abscess and an infection that required antibiotics. It wasn’t life-threatening, but it was significant. I’m okay now, but I was more upset about missing the event in Colombia at the time. I had everything set up—Airbnb, transportation, plane tickets. It was expensive, too. But such is life.

Jacobsen: I’m glad you’re okay now.

Quiñones: Thank you. So, the upcoming event in Mexico will be held at the Escuela Nacional de Antropología e Historia (ENAH)—the National School of Anthropology and History. Anthropology, history, and archaeology are significant in Mexico due to its beautiful and extensive pre-Columbian history, with different civilizations in the region that now includes Mexico, Guatemala, and Honduras. Archaeologically, it’s an important area. And Mexico takes pride in its history, which I will enjoy because I love museums.

I love that stuff. So yes, the event will happen, and it will be three days long. It starts on November 13 and runs through the 15th, Wednesday through Friday.  There will be a wide range of speakers from various Latin American countries, including Mexico. There will be well-known journalists, scientists, and thought leaders. Of course, I will speak about nuclear energy, which is interesting considering Mexico’s significant oil production and its role as a petroleum user and exporter.

We’ll have three days of activities. A reception on Tuesday the night before, and a group tour to Puebla is planned for Saturday. I’ll be flying back to Puerto Rico on Sunday. I’m travelling with my partner, son, and another group member here in Puerto Rico. In total, there will be four of us travelling, along with other Puerto Ricans living in the U.S. who will also be attending. There will be speakers from Peru, Colombia, and Argentina, which will be a significant event.

Mexico is known for its prominent atheist movements; about 15 years ago, they hosted an “Atheist in Congress” event, the largest atheist gathering I’ve heard of globally, with around 2,000 people attending. Mexico City is immense—it’s incredible. Puerto Rico could fit into the metropolitan area of Mexico City five or six times over. I’ve never been to Mexico, so I’m excited to meet my best friends from across Latin America and reconnect with those I’ve met at previous events.

Jacobsen: Have you met many of them before?

Quiñones: I’ve met many of them multiple times in the U.S. through other groups. I’m sure you’ve heard of David Tamayo from Hispanic American Freethinkers. He’s a close friend and has been very supportive. We’ve helped each other many times, and he’ll be there, too. It’s going to be a big gathering of freethinkers and atheists. Mexico is a wonderful country, and I’m happy to participate in this event.

Jacobsen: Were other cities considered potential hosts for this conference before Mexico was chosen?

Quiñones: Yes, there were. At the end of the last day of the first conference, I led the conversation about which countries were interested in hosting the next one. Costa Rica, Colombia, and Chile were all potential candidates. I collected all the feedback, and we eventually voted and decided on Colombia for the next event.

I didn’t want to hold the conference in Colombia, even though it was chosen. When I voted, I voted for Costa Rica. First, Costa Rica is the only country in Latin America with a formal agreement with the Vatican to be a Catholic country by governmental decree. So, what better place to hold the event than in a Catholic country? However, with Colombia selected, I still wanted Costa Rica as an option. I’ve been there before, and it’s a beautiful country that everyone should visit.

I preferred Costa Rica because my friends Carlos and David Tamayo cannot visit Colombia. Despite being Colombian, David has certain security clearances from his job that prevent him from visiting specific countries, including Colombia. He had reminded me, “Remember, I can’t visit Colombia.” So that was another reason for my preference.

However, Colombia was chosen as the focal point. David said, “Don’t worry, we’ll go for the next one.” After the second conference, even though I couldn’t attend due to my hospitalization, I was part of the group that evaluated the next host city. We chose Mexico because of their experience hosting high-level events. I knew the organizers and trusted their commitment and expertise. Mexico won the vote.

We’ll decide on the next city on the last day of this conference in Mexico. We’re considering Argentina or Chile to bring it further south and distribute the events more evenly throughout Latin America. I will never propose Puerto Rico because the hotels here are expensive, and the currency exchange rate makes it costly for people from other Latin American countries.

Jacobsen: That makes sense.

Quiñones: People often ask, “Why not host it in Puerto Rico?” I always respond, “You won’t be able to afford to travel here.” Plus, there are visa issues with the U.S., which adds complications. Even some Peruvians cannot travel to Mexico without hurdles.

Jacobsen: Why can’t they?

Quiñones: They need a formal invitation from an organization stamped by the government. They have to submit a proposal explaining why they must travel to Mexico, and then they might get a visa. The Peruvian attendees face challenges, and the organizers have been working hard to issue the necessary documents for travellers from Latin America.

This differs from the European Union, where Schengen agreements make it easier to travel between countries. In the EU, countries agree to the Schengen Area, allowing people to cross borders without visas—like going from France to Germany. But that’s not the case here.

We also deal with that issue. It gives you a sense of the organization needed for meetings in Latin America.

Jacobsen: Yes, I imagine it’s a huge task. I plan to travel to visit different communities. That would be an interesting project—an investigative photojournalism trip to explore humanist communities in various countries. It could be a very cool project.

Quiñones: One of the things we’re doing at the conference is a student essay contest, similar to what Dan Barker has done in the past. We received much interest from students, and my group is sponsoring the cash prize for the winner. I’ll be presenting and reading the winning essay.

Jacobsen: How much is the prize?

Quiñones: First place will receive $300, and second and third place will receive $100 and $50, respectively. The first-place essay will also be published in a highly regarded scientific journalistic magazine. We want to make an impact and are passionate about initiatives like this.

Dan Barker hosted a similar contest here, and we received so many entries—about 150—that we had to split them among six judges for evaluation. It was much work, but involving high school students is rewarding.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a great initiative.

Quiñones: It is. I have a 20-year-old son, and when he was in first grade, there was a thunderstorm, and his teacher said, “That’s God moving furniture around.” My son replied, “Gods don’t have furniture.”

Jacobsen: Good one! What else can a first-grader say?

Quiñones: Even in religious communities, they often find such comments from kids amusing rather than offensive. I’m glad they did in that case. The school was evangelical, although it was supposed to be non-religious. They didn’t pray excessively, but God was present everywhere. Don’t worry—I took him out of that school.

Later, in fifth grade, a Catholic teacher humiliated him for not standing up during the prayer said over the intercom.

One day, a girl defended my son, saying, “He doesn’t need to stand up. He doesn’t believe in that.” The school called me, and it turned into a big deal. The counsellor even had the nerve to say, “Tell your kid not to talk about not believing in God at school.”

I responded, “Let me start by saying he never does. This came up because he was asked. Will you tell all the other kids not to talk about their belief in God at school?”

Jacobsen: Good question.

Quiñones: That ended the conversation. My son doesn’t talk about his beliefs unless he’s asked. It’s different when someone answers a question versus initiating the topic. And as you and I know, especially with American evangelicals and Catholics, it’s typically taught with a different frame of mind.

At this other school, he attended, there was a girl whose parents were Muslim, and she was being bullied. One day, I noticed her clinging to the teacher and asked, “What’s going on? Why is she clinging to you like that?” The teacher, a Christian Puerto Rican woman from Connecticut, explained that a little group of evangelical kids was bullying the girl. This was third or fourth grade—young kids.

The bullying was because the mother was Muslim, wearing a veil and speaking a different language, and the girl herself had an accent. The teacher told me it involved 15 or so kids. I immediately asked, “Is my kid part of that?” She said, “No. He’s nice to her and tries to engage with her.”

I told her, “Remember, that boy is my atheist kid. He’s not into any of this religious nonsense.” The teacher’s eyes widened, and she nodded, saying he tried to calm the girl. But, understandably, the girl didn’t want to talk to him or be friends with anyone because all the kids seemed the same to her. She knew she was different, and it made her cautious.

The fact that other kids bullied her because of religion at that age—eight or nine years old—is sickening. I was proud when the teacher said, “Your son is not involved. He tries to approach her.”

Jacobsen: That’s something to be proud of.

Quiñones: Absolutely. I told the teacher, “Don’t forget—he’s an atheist.” I even gave her my card. So when people ask, I say, “Yes, I am,” and they nod in understanding.

I don’t see anything shocking about it. The opposite would be shocking. I’m often called to appear on TV, and I always say, “I’m the atheist; I’m the humanist.” It’s easier to say “atheist” because people generally know what that means. When I say “humanist,” I have to explain it. But I’ve done TV interviews where I’ve explained humanism, and people get it. I know how to frame it culturally to resonate with people here.

I do a lot of TV and radio, and I’ve noticed that I’m also asked to comment on other topics because people know I’ll provide a non-religious perspective. Many in the media find that refreshing. I’ve been featured on the highest-rated radio show in Puerto Rico numerous times and have built a good relationship with the journalist who hosts it. If I have something to say, I text him and tell him to invite me. He usually sets me up for a 15-minute segment that week.

He teases me about religion for the first 10 minutes, but then he gives me the floor to deliver my message. That’s where I get the death threats, but it’s also where I receive the highest engagement. My clips often have the most comments on the station’s page. The first time I appeared, there were 3,000 comments, and 99% of them were negative—calling me a crazy woman, using slurs, and saying awful things.

Over the years, though, I’ve seen a shift. Now, about 50% of the comments are supportive. People say, “She’s not crazy; she makes sense,” and you can see religious and atheist individuals debating in the comments, defending me. It shows change. Fewer than 50% of the comments are negative, calling me names like “crazy woman” or worse in more colourful Spanish terms.

You can see the change. People get it. People understand if you sit down and patiently explain humanism, secularism, rational thinking, or ways of approaching life without relying on God or the Bible. My favourite example is this: what do you do when you lose your keys? You look for them. You might mumble, “God, help me find them,” but you won’t find them if you don’t look. You have to act. You can thank God afterward, but you’re the one who put them in your hands.

Most religious people live like that, and they get it when I explain it this way. Recently, I was on TV talking about euthanasia and dying with dignity. I’ve done this two or three times already. I start by saying that euthanasia and dying with dignity are not religious issues.

Take that out of your minds right away. Most religious people are for it. Why would God tell one person it’s a sin and tell others it’s a compassionate act? Why would the same God give conflicting messages?

Remove God from the equation, and let’s have a discussion. One religious individual from one sect doesn’t represent the religious beliefs of everyone in Puerto Rico. There are many different spiritual perspectives, and only some are representative.

I often clarify why my viewpoint holds more weight than the specific religious opinions of the person I’m debating. I say, “You’re speaking from your religious framework in your Church. I’m not. My perspective is different, based on principles that aim for better reasoning and outcomes.” That’s what I do.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Eva.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

How to Expand Business in Hospitality

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/25 (Unpublished)

Sean Taylor is an accomplished hospitality executive with over 14 years of experience as CEO, currently leading Taylor Hospitality based in Charlottesville, Virginia. He specializes in change management, project management, and business consulting, focusing on enhancing hotel and club profitability. A graduate of Elon University, Sean emphasizes the importance of ECHO Teamwork: Execution, Caring, Honesty, and Ownership. He has successfully managed high-profile properties like the Virginia International Raceway and The Franklin (formerly Capital Plaza Hotel). Sean is also a thought leader, publishing guides on operational excellence and driving revenue growth in the hospitality industry. Taylor emphasizes their values, ECHO Teamwork: Execution, Caring, Honesty, and Ownership, as central to their restoration efforts. The hotel caters to both business and leisure travellers, offering events like comedy nights and murder mysteries. Notable past guests include Jimmy Carter, Sandra Day O’Connor, Tiger Woods, and Michael Jordan.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let me ensure I have my facts correct. Taylor Hospitality has added the Capital Plaza Hotel in Frankfort, Kentucky, to its portfolio. This is part of a broader strategy to expand its regional presence. The hotel is strategically located on the Bourbon Trail, near the Kentucky Capitol, and offers spacious accommodations along with iconic attractions, such as the Buffalo Trace Distillery.

Today, we are joined by CEO Sean Taylor, who is focused on restoring the hotel’s historic charm. Let’s explore this in more detail. Additionally, the hotel has partnered with Wyndham’s Trademark Collection and has incorporated a Kentucky horse and bourbon theme. Two questions arise: What does the partnership with Wyndham Trademark entail, and how is the Kentucky horse and bourbon theme reflected in the hotel’s design? I am familiar with the Kentucky Derby, but I would love to learn more about this theme.

Sean Taylor: Our partnership involves contracting with Wyndham to soft-brand the hotel as part of their Trademark Collection. This partnership ensures the property is managed under Wyndham’s operations, sales, and marketing platforms. We formed an investment group to purchase the property, which required significant attention. Several million dollars are being invested in the property to bring it up to modern lodging and hospitality standards that today’s travellers expect.

The hotel is conveniently located next to the Buffalo Trace Distillery, a world-renowned bourbon producer. It is on the Bourbon Trail, which spans Lexington, Frankfort, and Louisville — regions known for producing some of the best bourbons globally. The location is also ideal as it is directly adjacent to and across the street from the Kentucky State Capitol. Since Frankfort is the state capital, the area attracts significant government and business activity, and we are thrilled to be a part of that.

Jacobsen: What is the significance of adding the Capital Plaza Hotel to your portfolio?

Taylor: This is a major acquisition for us. The property features 163 guest rooms and 30 luxury apartments on the top floors, in addition to 15,000 square feet of meeting and event space. This large property allows us to expand our capabilities and pursue additional large-scale hotel projects. While we remain committed to the boutique hotel market, this will be one of our largest boutique properties.

Jacobsen: What key themes are incorporated to enhance the hotel’s restoration?

Taylor: This will be a comprehensive renovation and restoration project. All guest rooms will be completely revamped, and two new restaurants will be added to the overall operations. There will also be updated meeting spaces and a new ballroom. A highlight of the project is transforming the pool area into a speakeasy venue where guests can enjoy bourbon in a unique and memorable setting.

The main lobby will be fully redesigned, creating a modern and updated look. In addition, significant structural and foundational maintenance issues that have been neglected in the past will be addressed. We are allocating substantial capital toward preventative maintenance and upgrading all facilities to ensure the property meets and exceeds today’s hospitality standards.

Jacobsen: What makes the Capital Plaza Hotel a flagship destination in the region?

Taylor: Its location in the heart of Kentucky and proximity to key attractions like the Buffalo Trace Distillery and the Kentucky State Capitol makes it a standout property in a beautiful and vibrant area.

Jacobsen: If you’ve ever been in that area of Kentucky, the Bourbon Trail is unique. The Bourbon Trail right now is where Napa Valley was 10 years ago in terms of becoming a destination for alcohol tourism. Some of the best bourbons in the world are distilled right on the Bourbon Trail. Frankfort sits at the center point, surrounded by all these fabulous distilleries. You could make the Capital Plaza, which you are renaming to The Franklin, a central hub where guests can stay and branch out to visit a variety of distilleries, all within a 30- to 40-minute drive.

What values guide your goals around restoration, partnership building, and raising the region’s profile?

Taylor: We have company goals and values called “ECHO Teamwork.” While we do a tremendous amount within the restoration space, our values are centred around people because everything revolves around them.

ECHO stands for:

  • E: Execution – Do what you say you’re going to do and do it in a caring manner.
  • C: Caring – Treat people with care and respect.
  • H: Honesty – Operate with the highest level of integrity. This is crucial, especially when managing other people’s money, as trust is foundational with our owners, investors, and clients.
  • O: Ownership – Own the business, operations, and experience.

Finally, everything revolves around teamwork. It’s about ensuring all the moving parts work in harmony, with everyone pulling their weight to deliver a high-quality experience and make the property perform at its best.

Jacobsen: How do you ensure high-quality service across your properties, especially those under new ownership or in restoration?

Taylor: Good question. We are very much a decentralized company. While we have a home office, most of our workforce operates in the field at our properties. From a service perspective, one property’s quality directly impacts our other properties’ reputation.

We focus heavily on training. We have a digital university that all team members join upon hiring. They are immediately given access to training modules so that by interacting with customers, they understand our standards and what their role requires. This ensures they have a high level of competency before engaging with guests. Our frontline team must be fully prepared, so they’re not learning on the job while interacting with customers. Training is at the heart of what we do daily to ensure our guests’ experiences are second to none.

Jacobsen: You mentioned the distillery and the Bourbon Trail, which reflects an integration with local culture. Is this integration a common practice in your business model?

Taylor: Absolutely. At all our properties, especially in hospitality and hotels, we are responsible for promoting our venues, tourism, and the local area. We actively partner with local businesses, including restaurants, service providers, ski resorts, fly-fishing guides, hiking tour operators, etc.

The goal is to build relationships that drive more people to the area. Whether they come for an activity or service, we also want them to stay in our hotels and dine in our restaurants. This collaborative approach ensures that our properties and the surrounding community benefit from increased tourism and economic activity.

Jacobsen: So, you actively promote the area to drive tourism. What about business travellers versus more regionally local people travelling for a stay? How do you cater to their needs during their time with you?

Taylor: Our sales directors at all locations have two distinct responsibilities. They manage both sides of the coin: group and business travel and the leisure market. These are two completely separate markets. For business travellers, we contract with companies and organizations to host their business events or meetings at our venues or to accommodate their general business travel needs while they’re in the area.

Our sales directors do an effective job of driving this type of business. At the same time, they are equally responsible for finding ways to attract more leisure travellers. This is where collaboration within the team is crucial. The operations team must be on board to create events and programs that entice people to visit our hotels.

For example, at our property in Elkins, West Virginia, the Tiger Hotel hosts events such as comedy nights and murder mystery dinners. They’ve even partnered with a local theatre to perform plays within the hotel. It’s a win-win for everyone. The community and the hotel benefit, as these events bring in business during slower periods. Meanwhile, our marketing and sales teams work hard to promote these events through social media, email campaigns, and other outreach.

The goal is always to raise the public’s awareness of functions and events. This way, when people think about visiting a town, they’ll think of our hotel because they’ve seen so much about it—whether through social media, emails, or recommendations from friends who have attended and enjoyed our events.

Jacobsen: Last question: Who have been some of your famous clients?

Taylor: Oh, wow, famous clients. Over the years, let me think. We’ve hosted Jimmy Carter, Bill Clinton, George Bush, Sandra Day O’Connor, The Eagles, Jimmy Buffett, Tom Watson, Arnold Palmer, Jack Nicklaus, Tiger Woods, and David Duval, to name a few.

In basketball, we’ve had Michael Jordan and Mike Krzyzewski, and I could go on forever about college basketball and professional golf. For example, Ernie Els, Lee Trevino, Freddie Couples, Chi Chi Rodriguez, and Andy North stayed with us.

At one of our properties, 150 PGA Tour members were regulars. This was in Orlando, so it attracted many golf professionals. We’ve also hosted royalty, like the Queen of Saudi Arabia and many Saudi princes.

Other notable names include Ralph Lauren, Terry Bradshaw, and Roger Staubach. The list of interesting people who have stayed at our properties is like a who’s who of the industry.

Jacobsen: That’s impressive! Thank you for sharing. It’s noon here now, so I’ll let you go. Sean, it was a pleasure speaking with you.

Taylor: Thank you so much for your time.

Jacobsen: I’ll have a transcript ready in about four hours and send it to you.

Taylor: That sounds great.

Jacobsen: Perfect. Take care!

Taylor: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

California Healthcare Worker Strike

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/24

*Interview conducted December 26, 2024.*

The National Union of Healthcare Workers in the United States. They highlighted systemic issues during the October 2024 strike by Southern California’s mental health workers, including appointment delays, cancellations, and inadequate staffing. They criticized Kaiser’s insufficient contingency plan and its failure to meet state-mandated mental health care standards. They noted NUHW’s push for legislative reforms, such as SB 221 and SB 855, to enhance mental health care access. The union’s demands include equitable pay, restored pensions, and sufficient time for therapists to manage non-appointment tasks, addressing chronic understaffing and high turnover. They also emphasized the vital role of therapist-patient relationships and urged systemic changes to ensure parity between mental and physical health care services. NUHW’s efforts aim to hold Kaiser accountable and improve care for its 9.4 million California members.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How has Kaiser Permanente responded to the ongoing strike? 

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Kaiser has responded to this strike similarly to how it responded to a strike by mental health therapists in Northern California, for which it was cited for illegally canceling 111,803 individual and group therapy appointments. 

State law requires Kaiser to continue providing mental health care during a strike, just as it would be required to maintain medical care. But since the strike in Southern California began on Oct. 21, NUHW has filed complaints against Kaiser documenting instances of the HMO:

Forcing patients onto 30-day appointment waitlists; Cancelling psychotherapy groups for thousands of patients; Failing to adequately staff its hospice services; and Sending patients with severe conditions to an outside provider unequipped to care for them.

Kaiser’s state-mandated contingency plan for providing timely and appropriate mental health care during an ongoing strike by its behavioral health professionals was also woefully inadequate, without any detail for how the state’s largest HMO is providing critical mental health services for its 4.8 million members from San Diego to Bakersfield.

The 3-page document submitted to the California Department of Managed Health Care just prior to the start of the strike, provides no information about the volumes of replacement services Kaiser anticipates having to provide and no information about how many workers from outside of Kaiser can be relied on to provide it. The plan itself is barely over a page with a one-page introduction.

Jacobsen: What about the allegations of inadequate mental health care?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Last week, four Kaiser patients spoke about their inadequate access to clinically appropriate mental health care in a recorded zoom press conference

More than 500 Kaiser mental health patients have submitted their stories to kaiserdontdeny.org since October 2024 and more than 3,000 have submitted since 2018.

Facing two state investigations, Kaiser agreed to a $200 million Settlement Agreement that included a $50 million fine for violating California mental health parity laws and agreed to pay an additional $150 million to support mental health initiatives throughout the state last year.

The giant HMO, which has 9.4 million members in California, had been previously fined for similar violations, but this time Kaiser acknowledged its mental health services were understaffed and that patients were suffering because of it.

Kaiser understaffed its clinics, which resulted in appointment wait times that exceeded the 10-business day standard set by NUHW’s landmark law SB 221. https://californiahealthline.org/news/article/california-law-aims-to-strengthen-access-to-mental-health-services/

Instead of abiding by the law, Kaiser has started programs to cut appointment times for some patients to less than 30 minutes, far shorter than clinical standards.

Jacobsen: What is the National Union of Healthcare Workers demanding to address the staffing and care issues?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: NUHW sponsored SB 221 and SB 855 to improve access to mental health care and has filed dozens of complaints with state agencies against Kaiser. Our strike in Northern California in 2022 contributed to Kaiser’s $200 million settlement agreement between Kaiser and the California Department of Managed Health Care, which included a record $50 million fine. In the current contract negotiations, we’re fighting to make Kaiser treat mental health care on par with its other services. Our demands are a prerequisite for Kaiser to satisfy the terms of its Settlement Agreement and “transform” its mental health delivery services. 

We’ve also connected with Kaiser patients directly via kaiserdontdeny.org to hear their stories of mental health care delays and denials and have shared their stories with regulators. We work hard to amplify the voices of the most impacted which are the workers and the patients.

Seeking Equity for Mental Health Care: to improve staffing levels and reduce turnover that disrupts patient care, Kaiser’s Southern California mental health professionals are seeking a contract that includes the same working conditions as their fellow Kaiser mental health providers in Northern California and comparable pay and benefits as their colleagues who don’t work in mental health. However, despite being under a state order to undertake “transformational change” of its mental health delivery services, Kaiser has so far rejected the workers’ three primary proposals.

Patient Care Time. Southern California workers are seeking the same amount of time (7 hours per week) to perform critical patient care duties that can’t be done during appointments as their counterparts working for Kaiser in Northern California. The lack of time to respond to patient calls and emails, prepare for appointments and devise treatment plans is a major reason why therapists leave Kaiser, contributing to the HMO’s chronic understaffing issues.

Fair Pay. Workers are seeking to close the gap between themselves and therapists that provide medical care at Kaiser, who make up to 40 percent higher salaries.

Restoration of pensions. Workers are seeking to restore pensions that nearly all Kaiser employees still receive, but were taken away from newly hired mental health professionals in Southern California starting a decade ago. More than 70 percent of Kaiser mental health professionals in Southern California do not have a pension, and Kaiser data shows that they are twice as likely to leave Kaiser.

Jacobsen: How does Kaiser’s mental health therapist-to-patient ratio compare to industry standards?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Not an apples to apples comparison because Kaiser is fairly rare in having an in-house network directly employed by Kaiser itself. What we do know is that in comparing Kaiser’s two California regions, Kaiser staffs a significantly higher ratio of therapists in Northern California than in Southern California. That means more Northern California patients get the benefits of Kaiser’s integrated model of care instead of being sent outside the Kaiser system.

Jacobsen: What are the long-term effects of high turnover among mental health professionals at Kaiser?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Mental health depends greatly on the relationship between the therapist and the patient. If Kaiser members are bounced from therapist to therapist, as indicated by many patients who’ve reached out with us to share their stories that relationship never forms, OR that relationship is severed because Kaiser can’t retain therapists, it makes it harder for patients to make progress.

Jacobsen: How does Kaiser’s refusal to restore pensions contribute to the ongoing staffing crisis?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Kaiser eliminated pensions for mental health professionals in Southern California starting in 2015. Currently, more than 70 percent of mental health professionals at Kaiser in SoCal do not have pensions. Those workers were twice as likely to leave employment with Kaiser as their colleagues that still do have pensions according to Kaiser’s own employment data. That data is here in this fact sheet: https://nuhw.org/wp-content/uploads/Kaiser-Fact-Sheet.pdf

Jacobsen: What steps can be taken to ensure parity between mental health and physical health services within Kaiser Permanente?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: There are two tracks. When it comes to state enforcement, Kaiser is required to submit a state-approved Corrective Action Plan to address the deficiencies cited by the state investigations that led to the settlement agreement. Kaiser was supposed to have had this plan approved by the state early this year, but it still hasn’t received approval. Here is a fact sheet about the Settlement Agreement: https://nuhw.org/wp-content/uploads/Kaiser_PsychSocial_Strike_SettlementFAQ_Leaflet_1_20241021-2.pdf

The state needs to ensure that Kaiser produces a Corrective Action Plan that truly results in a systemic overhaul and improvement of its mental health delivery system and that Kaiser puts it into practice.

The other track is with workers. Kaiser’s Corrective Action Plan will never be worth the paper it’s printed on if it doesn’t finally start treating mental health care as equally important to its medical services. The contract provisions being sought by the striking workers are prerequisites for making that happen.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jessica Henning & Liz Sadler, Wichita Oasis

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/23

Liz Sadler and Jessica Henning talk about Wichita Oasis, part of the Oasis Network founded in the 2010s. Liz shared how the group originated from Skeptics in the Pub, while Jessica emphasized its role as a progressive, secular community. Wichita Oasis offers activities focused on community, education, and service, such as movie nights, speaker events, and local outreach. Despite challenges like COVID-19 and maintaining diversity, the group has grown steadily, providing an inclusive space for nonreligious families. Both highlighted the importance of filling the void left by leaving religion, fostering meaningful connections without a religious framework.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Liz and Jessica from Wichita Oasis. This group emerged in the 2010s as part of the Oasis Network, which grew alongside the Sunday Assembly. The Ethical Society of St. Louis and similar movements preceded them slightly but also gained attention during the New Atheist wave.

So, how did you two get involved with Oasis in Wichita, and how has it evolved? Liz, would you like to go first?

Liz Sadler: Wichita Oasis started when someone in our local community, who had heard about the Oasis Network, approached a group I was part of called Skeptics in the Pub. They were interested in starting an Oasis chapter in Wichita and asked if anyone would like to help. A few members from Skeptics in the Pub joined to help start it.

I wasn’t a founding member, but I’ve been involved since its inception. While I’ve attended from the beginning, my level of involvement has varied over time. I’ve actively participated since it was established.

Jacobsen: So, your connection with Oasis started in a skeptic-adjacent space.

Sadler: Yes, that’s right.

Jacobsen: Was it also an opportunity for your family?

Jessica Henning: Definitely. My husband and I were looking for a community to fit into as a family. We attended Oasis a few times, along with other groups, to see where we felt most comfortable. Initially, it wasn’t the best fit because our child was younger, but now that he’s older, it has worked out wonderfully.

We were searching for a space to be ourselves. This progressive, like-minded community met regularly but wasn’t centred around church or religion. It was important that our son could make friends with other children from nonreligious or open-minded families.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a meaningful experience. I remember a story from an old friend of mine, Dale, who’s in her seventies now. When her daughter had a young child, I saw them altering children’s books to remove religious content. They lived in an evangelical community and didn’t want religious narratives to shape her granddaughter’s worldview unintentionally.

I thought it was excessive then, but looking back, I can understand their perspective. Anyway, that’s a tangent. To bring it back, what does Oasis mean to you?

Henning: Oasis has been about filling the gap many people feel when they leave religion—especially Christianity, which often provides an integrated community and support system. When people leave that environment, they often wonder, What now?

Oasis has provided us with a welcoming, inclusive space to build relationships and find support without the religious framework. For my family, it’s been a place to connect with others who share our values and build a community where we truly feel we belong.

Jacobsen: Even though, at least from one story, it was simply going from skeptics to connecting with another community.

Henning: Yes. Adulting is hard for me, and it’s nice to have a network and a place to go where the people are fantastic. I’ve made good friends there. There are only a few places I enjoy going to that offer that. Wichita has some great places—if you’re into music or D&D, there are many clubs for different things—but finding a community with a little bit of everything is rare.

We play board games, go to movies, and do many things together as a community without centring around just one specific activity or topic. It’s great for that. As I said, Wichita has many places and other groups with great people. There’s even a progressive First UU Church, a good fit for some people.

But for us, it was a little too religious or spiritual. It was about finding a place to be myself, connect with like-minded people, and be my whole self—not just one aspect of myself tailored to fit a particular group.

Liz Sadler: To piggyback off that, much of the same is true for me. I started attending because the skeptic’s group was something I went to monthly. Then, this other thing, Oasis, started up. I thought, “Okay, I’ll check that out too,” and I started going.

At first, the crowd consisted mostly of the same people, but over time, it shifted, and now it’s mostly different folks. I stopped going to the skeptic’s group but kept going to Oasis. The intent behind Oasis feels different—it’s more about being a community than a club.

When you approach it with that mindset, it feels less rigid and more genuine. We have few big opportunities to have each other’s backs, but when they’ve come up, we’ve stepped up. For example, during a terrible freeze, someone’s pipes burst. Her dad was able to fix it but needed money for materials. We organized a fundraiser, raised the funds quickly, and sorted it.

That’s what Oasis is about. There’s no single thing that defines us. Sure, many of us are nerds and neurodivergent, but that’s not the focus. We’re here to be a community of people who share similar values. I keep going because it’s what I do now—where my people and friends are.

Jacobsen: That’s healthy because you’re following a path that aligns with how people often find and engage with communities.

When I did a group interview with the Atheist Society of Kenya—their founder, executive director, and several members—a lot came out of that discussion. For many African humanists and atheists, their experiences are starkly different. They’re often called satanic, possessed, witches, or worse, and those accusations can have serious consequences.

Harrison Mumia, for example, shared that he lost his job at a bank because he publicly endorsed atheism.

Henning: That shows up for me, too—thinking about those broader challenges.

Jacobsen: For the resources they have, given the challenges African free thinkers typically face, the Atheist Society of Kenya managed to grow to about 120 members. That’s all right, considering the circumstances.

Henning: Wow.

Jacobsen: Our stories are so different. Wanting to be your whole self is a very different narrative from losing your job at the bank and being called satanic. I’m glad you two have had a much easier time and were able to integrate and find a community for yourselves in a positive way.

What kinds of activities do you do in your Oasis?

Sadler: I’ll let Jess take that one because she handles more of it than I do.

Henning: Sure. We do a mix of activities focused on community building, education, and service projects. For community building, we do things like movie nights, board game days, and Jackbox game sessions.

On the educational side, we bring in speakers or discuss relevant topics. For example, we’ve had a firefighter give a talk on fire safety, and a nurse teach us how to recognize the signs of a stroke—which, incidentally, came in handy for someone recently.

Jacobsen: That’s great!

Henning: Yes, it’s been very helpful. So, we mix educational programming with community-building activities. We also do service projects, like park cleanups or working with the McKinney-Vento program at our local school district. Through that program, we’ve created snack bags for homeless teens attending local schools.

So, those three elements—community, education, and service—are the foundation of our programming.

Jacobsen: That’s fantastic. Learning about fire safety or stroke recognition is much more practical and useful. It reminds me of a Midwest comedian, Jeff Allen. He’s not as prominent as Jeff Foxworthy but well-known in certain circles.

He talks about how he came to his Christian faith through the Book of Ecclesiastes of all things. That’s such an unusual and deeply reflective book.

Henning: It’s one of my favourites.

Jacobsen: “Meaningless, meaningless…”

Henning: Exactly!

Jacobsen: “It’s all meaningless.” His account is that God reached him through Ecclesiastes. His joke is, “God reached you through Ecclesiastes?” That’s less practical than fire safety, stroke identification, and trash pickup. Those are much more useful. How big is your community, and what does it look like?

Henning: It has varied in size over the years. When it first started, and I attended on and off, there were 40 to 50 people. Over time, there were natural ebbs and flows. Then COVID hit, which made things difficult because everything had to move online.

I wasn’t involved much during that period, but the community tried to stay connected through Zoom calls and similar efforts. When we returned to meeting in person, the group had dwindled to about 10 to 15 weekly attendees.

We’re back up to around 20 attendees each week, though it’s different from the 20 people every time. Overall, a larger group of about 30 to 35 attend semi-regularly. We’ve been growing over the last two years, particularly following the elections, bringing more people looking for community and local engagement.

Jacobsen: Would having a dedicated building with tax-exempt status or government and grant funding for community activities help Oasis grow and offer more services?

Henning: We’re already a 501(c)(3) nonprofit benefiting from tax-exempt status. People who donate can take a tax deduction, which is helpful. But we’re still small and need to leverage more of those privileges.

We don’t have a building or salaried employees, so we volunteer everything. We could grow significantly with a dedicated space or even one salaried staff member. 

Sadler: With more resources, we could host more events, bring in additional speakers, and expand our outreach efforts.

For example, we could have someone manage email lists, make calls to spread the word about events, and plan activities. That would help us draw in more people.

Jacobsen: You could find someone like a retired accountant named Beth who’d be conscientious about everything.

Henning: [Laughing].

Jacobsen: Does the local Kansas culture influence Oasis’s style? Does it affect the music you play, the topics you discuss, or anything else?

Henning: Wichita feels like it’s trying to be progressive, but it’s still very center-right politically, even for a bigger city. We’re not like Austin, Texas—a blue dot in a sea of red—but we’re working on it.

People seek out Oasis here to find a sense of progressiveness and like-mindedness. I spoke with one member who moved from California. She didn’t feel the need to join a group there because the culture already aligned with her values, and she found it easy to make friends. But here in Wichita, the culture is more conservative, so groups like Oasis provide a much-needed space for people to connect.

Sadler: Kansas culture doesn’t specifically influence how we pick speakers or plan events. Still, it does shape why people are looking for a community like this in the first place.

When picking speakers, we focus more on whether their message aligns with our goals of community-mindedness or education. Does it fit within our values? Would people be interested in hearing them?

We don’t spend much time worrying about what everyone else might think. If you don’t attend Wichita Oasis, you may not even know it exists, so I’m not too worried about potential blowback. There have been some people who’ve reached out.

Jacobsen: I might be one of the few people who’ve reached out to Oasis chapters, Sunday Assemblies, and Satanic Temple groups to ask if they’d be interested in doing interviews.

Sadler: There was a time at our previous location when we discussed ways to attract more people. Someone suggested putting flyers on neighbourhood doors.

However, we hesitated because we didn’t know the neighbourhood well. It might have been a religious area, and we were concerned that seeing the word “secular” might lead some to think “Satan worshippers.” For some fundamentalist groups, “secular” is still a dirty word.

Ultimately, we decided not to pursue that option, partly because we weren’t sure it would be effective and partly because we wanted to avoid potential backlash.

Henning: We’ve tried to include local speakers to highlight the history of Wichita and Kansas. For example, we had someone from Humanities Kansas talk about the women behind the Brown v. Board of Education lawsuit, which originated in Kansas.

That kind of history is fascinating and helps us connect to the culture and community around us. However, I wouldn’t say Kansas culture plays a huge role in shaping our programming.

Jacobsen: Do you get any hate mail? If so, what does it say?

Henning: The worst hate mail we’ve received is, “If you meet every week, aren’t you a church?” Which is… a weird critique.

Jacobsen: That’s an odd take.

Henning: If it’s not their vibe, that’s fine. But no, we rarely get negative feedback. Most people are positive or neutral when we explain who we are and what we do.

Jacobsen: That’s nice. You’re leaning into Unitarian Universalist territory, where almost no one has beef with them.

Henning: [Laughing] Almost no one in the universe seems to have an issue with them.

Jacobsen: Do you collaborate with local religious groups of a more progressive persuasion or other freethought groups when you want to organize larger events or activism in the area?

Henning: Yes, we’re trying to get back into that. It petered over time, but we have a meeting next month to bring some progressive groups together to discuss a few projects—Project 2025 being one of them.

Right now, we share events that other groups will enjoy. For example, if a particular speaker is coming that might interest other groups, we’ll share that information.

Charles, from the humanist group, is always wonderful. They have a monthly humanist meeting at the Unitarian church, and he always shares those events with our group. Hence, we know what’s coming up. A bit of informal collaboration is happening, but we’re aiming for more intentional collaboration in the future.

Jacobsen: It’s interesting how you mentioned this effort had tapered off for a while. Over the past few decades in the United States and Canada—where I’m based—the trend, if you draw a line of best fit, has been a consistent increase in the number of atheists, agnostics, humanists, and progressively non-theistic individuals.

So, aside from COVID, what would you attribute this dip in participation to? Given the growing nonreligious demographic in the U.S., you’d expect more people to join.

Henning: COVID changed everything about how people interact—it shifted the culture, even for hobbies and social groups. It disrupted the landscape, and it took us a while to adapt and find where the need was.

Even as people started emerging from COVID-19, there was still much fear about meeting in person. Navigating those challenges as a volunteer-run group with access to the latest research or resources made things easier. We’ve had to be cautious about how we approached returning to normal.

Sadler: I wouldn’t call COVID a blip for Oasis—it was a brick wall. We had to immediately switch to doing everything online. But by the end of the workweek, people were already burned out from Zoom and didn’t want to join yet another online meeting for Oasis.

We stayed online for over a year, and it wasn’t until August 2021 that we started meeting in person again.

Another hurdle was that the place we were leasing moved just as we considered returning to in-person meetings. So, we had to find a new venue, which delayed our ability to transition back to in-person gatherings even longer.

Those combined challenges—fear of meeting in person, burnout from virtual events, and logistical issues with finding a new location—made it harder to rebuild the community after COVID.

The thing we realized was that we had to go back in person.

[Sadler’s cat joins the call.]

Sadler\: They say hello!

Henning: [Laughing] Hello, Mila. We realized we needed to return in person because our Zoom attendance was circling the drain. It wasn’t a case of everyone moving online for a while and returning in person. Some people returned, but fewer and fewer showed up online over time. When we transitioned back to in-person meetings, we started rebuilding from there. 

You going to come up here, Mila, or what?

Jacobsen: [Laughing] You’re reminding me of that scene from National Lampoon’s Christmas Vacation—the cat in the box from the grandmother.

Henning: I’ve only seen that movie once, so I don’t remember it well.

Jacobsen: Oh, there’s a part where they hand the box over to Clark Griswold, and it starts shaking like crazy. The mom brought random stuff—like Jell-O, an old cake, and even the cat—in little boxes.

Henning: [Laughing] That’s great. 

Jacobsen: So, back to Oasis—what else should I ask? Much of online secular culture tends to be male-dominated. For instance, the ex-Muslim community was predominantly men for a long time, though that has started to shift. How do you see gender dynamics in Oasis and the local secular community, especially regarding community building?

Henning: That’s a good question. Wichita has an atheist group, and while it tends to lean male, our Oasis community is closer to gender parity. We’re not doing anything special or unique. Still, Wichita has a lot of badass women, so that helps!

Jacobsen: [Laughing] There you go! We also have to set realistic expectations. We talk about the 50/50 gender balance, but hitting 40/60 is often a reasonable green zone for many communities. Context plays a big role, however. For instance, in one of the African groups you mentioned, the approximate number of women in their group was zero. That’s true—different societal and cultural pressures affect these dynamics.

Henning: Yes, we’re pretty gender diverse, which is great. However, I’ve always been frustrated that we’re not more racially diverse. We’ve been trying to address that shortcoming, but I need to figure out how to fix it.

Do we need to market to wider groups? We’re working on that, but I still feel uncertain about the best way to make our community more inclusive racially. I’ve always felt frustrated by this.

Jacobsen: That’s a common issue. I’ve heard similar frustrations from people like Dan Barker, Mandisa Thomas, and Bolaji Alonge in Nigeria.

Henning: Yes, it’s pervasive. We all need to work on it as secular communities continue to grow and evolve.

Jacobsen: So, he’s in Nigeria. He’s an artist and photographer. Mandisa and Dan Barker went to Nigeria for an arts festival—the first for secular groups in the country. There aren’t many people like that.

There’s Ayanna Watson, Mandisa, Sikivu Hutchinson, and Candace Gorham, the new president of the American Humanist Association. But there are few leading voices in these spaces.

Even as important as she is, even Sikivu Hutchinson gives much credit to Anthony Pinn. But in general, the number of prominent voices is an issue. Another challenge is that the African American population in the United States, from an outsider’s view, is overwhelmingly religious. The pressure to stay in the community—or to stay quiet if you’re outside of it as an atheist—is much greater.

So, it becomes layered in several ways. Not every case, obviously, but the trend lines point to those challenges. I’m glad at least to have tried to reach out.

What do you think? Is there anything I missed? 

Henning: Are you part of a secular, atheist, or nonreligious community?

Jacobsen: Well, internationally, for a while, yes. I was on the board of Humanist Canada and part of Young Humanists International, which is affiliated with Humanists International.

We were transitioning from the International Humanist and Ethical Union (IHEU) to the International Humanist and Ethical Youth Organization (IHEYO), so I had many international friends and still do. Throughout the year, I keep intermittent contact with people doing important work in writing, journalism, art, and activism.

Locally, however? Not really. I grew up in Fort Langley, British Columbia, Canada. That’s where Trinity Western University is located—the largest private university in Canada. It’s an evangelical Christian university.

Henning: So, something similar to Liberty University in the United States but on a Canadian scale?

Jacobsen: Correct. It’s evangelical in orientation and gets some benefits, like tax exemptions. It was about five minutes from where I lived.

They had a Supreme Court case regarding a proposed law school, which they lost 7–2. The issue was that students, staff, administration, and faculty needed to sign a covenant stating they wouldn’t engage in premarital sex, LGBTQ+ relationships, drinking, or any behaviour contrary to evangelical beliefs. Essentially, anyone who doesn’t believe as they do is condemned to “conscious eternal torment,” in their own words.

After the court case, they made the covenant mandatory for everyone except students, making it optional for them. Of course, cultural pressure still pushes students to sign.

Henning: That sounds intense.

Jacobsen: It was the community I grew up in. I joke that I either ended up in the wrong profession or that alternate universes passed me by. I was meant to be an evangelical youth pastor playing acoustic guitar or a member of the Mormon Tabernacle Choir. [Laughing] I know how I look!

But, alternate realities aside, I went into journalism and interviewed many atheists.

Henning: How did you connect to secularism, given that background?

Jacobsen: My experience was disparate. Growing up in that environment, there wasn’t any local secular community—it was hush-hush. I gained access to these ideas and communities when I started writing and getting involved in journalism.

Of course, I blame the British. [Laughing] Before this, I was focused on ethical and sustainable fashion journalism.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time. I appreciate you telling me about Wichita. If I’m ever in the area, I’ll send an email so we can meet for coffee.

Henning: Sounds good!

Jacobsen: Thank you again!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Prof. Sari Van Anders on Feminism, Gender, Sex, and Desire

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/22

Dr. Sari van Anders is the Canada 150 Research Chair in Social Neuroendocrinology, Sexuality, and Gender/Sex and Professor of Psychology, Gender Studies, and Neuroscience at Queen’s University. Dr. van Anders has published about 100 papers with research that sets out new ways to conceptualize, understand, measure, and map gender/sex, sexual diversity, and sexuality and also provides unique tools and theories for feminist and queer bioscience, especially within social neuroendocrinology and studies of testosterone. Dr. van Anders’ work has been recognized with the 2013 Janet Taylor Spence Award for Transformative Early Career Contributions from the Association for Psychological Science, the 2014 Frank Beach Young Investigator Award from the Society for Behavioral Neuroendocrinology, the 2016 and 2020 Distinguished Publication Award from the Association for Women in Psychology, the 2019 George A. Miller Award for an Outstanding Recent Article on General Psychology from APA Division 1, the 2012 Ira and Harriet Reiss Theory Award from the Foundation for the Scientific Study of Sexuality, the 2016 Committee on Women in Psychology Leadership Award from the American Psychological Association, the 2022 Distinguished Scientific Contribution Award from the Society for Sexual Orientation and Gender Diversity (APA Division 44), and more. Dr. van Anders has also been named one of 50 Distinguished Sexual and Gender Health Revolutionaries from the University of Minnesota’s Program in Human Sexuality and a Member of the Royal Society of Canada’s College of New Scholars. Dr. van Anders is committed to progressive transformation efforts for academic spaces and beyond. Van Anders emphasized that testosterone, often linked to masculinity, reflects social experiences, not innate biology. Her work explores how societal roles, heteronormativity, and household inequities influence sexual desire and hormone levels. Rejecting binary and deterministic frameworks, she highlights the dynamic interplay of gender and sex. The steroid-peptide theory further examines how hormones like testosterone and oxytocin shape behaviours outside traditional gendered assumptions. Her goal is to advance inclusive, empirical, and justice-oriented research, transforming societal understanding of gender/sex.

Scott Douglas. Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Sari van Anders. How did you become interested in gender, sex, and the various aspects of this deeply human topic?

Prof. Sari van Anders: I have been interested in feminism for most of my life. When I went to university, I became curious about understanding evolution, sex, and gender. Over time, I developed a stronger interest in feminist science and eventually worked to integrate all of these areas. Surprisingly, I also found myself drawn to the study of hormones.

If you are interested in hormones and psychology, it almost inevitably leads back to gender, sex, and sexuality. I became fascinated with how these areas interconnect.

Jacobsen: How do you integrate feminist and queer theories with psychology and sex? That’s a broad area, so how do you connect these elements? How do you approach this formally?

van Anders: During my undergraduate and graduate studies, I read extensively about feminist science studies and emerging queer scholarship. Most of this reading was self-directed. There wasn’t much available on how to conduct feminist science; it was largely focused on theoretical critiques of science.

I used those critiques and my growing scientific practice to develop an approach.To that end,  I incorporate feminist and queer perspectives into how I study and select research topics. Not every project integrates all of these elements, however. For instance, some projects focus on topics like porn or desire, but they are always explored through a feminist and queer lens.

Some projects involve hormones, while others do not. I am particularly interested in how social contexts—related to sexuality, gender, power, and oppression—shape our experiences, including how they influence our sexuality and even our hormones. I’m also intrigued by the fundamental ways we conceptualize gender, sex, sexuality, and hormones like testosterone.

Much of what we think we know—our theories, concepts, and categories—is based on non-empirical foundations or biased starting points. My goal is to create empirical theories and knowledge that address injustice and are inclusive and applicable to everyone, not just those who fit normative standards.

Jacobsen: How do societal roles—whether imposed overtly or subtly—affect sexual desire and, in turn, influence hormone production? Does this alter levels of testosterone, estrogen, or stress hormones? How does this process work?

van Anders: We’ve done some work on how sexual context might impact testosterone. I’ll give you two examples. The first example is that we find sexual thoughts increase testosterone. When people are assigned to have sexual thoughts, their testosterone levels increase.

This finding challenges the common assumption that hormones drive sexuality—that testosterone levels are the cause or influence on desire and sexuality. While I’m not saying there’s no relationship in that direction, the reverse relationship is much more strongly supported by empirical evidence. Sexual contexts are more likely to influence testosterone.

Of course, people of various genders and sexes do not access or encounter sexuality in the same way. Some people are taught that sexual thoughts are normal and normative, while others are taught that sexual thoughts are sinful, dirty, or appropriate only for people of another gender/sex. Accordingly, even something as seemingly simple as sexual thoughts is heavily gendered.

I’ve also done work on how gendered experiences themselves might change testosterone in a more general sense. Most people know that, on average, men have higher testosterone levels than women. However, there’s not much research on testosterone levels in non-binary people, so I’ll focus here on binary genders and sexes.

People often assume that testosterone differences between men and women reflect innate sex differences. However, some of my work calls that assumption into question. For example, could our gendered experiences overlap with phenomena that are evolutionarily salient for testosterone? Society pushes people to engage in activities aligned with gender norms, and ironically, those activities often increase or decrease testosterone in ways that align with those norms.

What we think of as sex differences may reflect, at least in part, gendered experiences. This is one of the reasons I use the term “gender/sex.” If we look at something like testosterone, we assume it reflects innate biological or evolved sex differences. However, my research, along with that of others, suggests that testosterone may reflect social experiences.

For instance, the higher testosterone levels observed in men on average may not necessarily represent a purely natural process. Instead, they might reflect how we live and adhere to gendered expectations.

Jacobsen: What does this mean for the categories or terms we use? Could we be heading toward a future where terms like “gender” and “sex” become outmoded, especially if there’s this fluid overlap between what we currently consider innate biological or evolved traits?

van Anders: Yeah, that’s a great question. Many of us work to make clear how gender and sex are often entangled—intertwined or tied up with each other. This doesn’t mean that inequities in roles, such as in the home or workplace, can be justified as evolved differences. Historically, some have argued that women have “just evolved to be nurturing,” so it’s not an inequity that they do more caring labour, for example. But that’s not what this is about.

This isn’t about justifying inequities by arguing that they’re biological, so we don’t need to address them. Instead, the concept of gender/sex is about acknowledging how our biological bodies are not immune to gendered processes.

Traditionally, people tend to put sex, nature, and hormones on one side and gender, culture, and nurture on the other. Gender/sex, and this way of thinking, is about recognizing how intertwined and entangled they can be.

As for the future, do I envision a time where we no longer use terms like “gender” and “sex” or where terms like “man,” “woman,” and “non-binary person” become irrelevant? I don’t anticipate that happening. At least for now, gender/sex is deeply embedded in many people’s lives—whether they are binary, non-binary, transgender, cisgender, or something else. Gender is a significant part of the lived experiences of many, though not everyone; some people are agender.

I envision instead a broader understanding of the overlap between gender and sex. For example, many aspects of what we think of as “sex” or “nature” —immune function, hormones, neural processes, bone density, and cardiac function—are shaped by social experiences. When we study differences in health patterns across genders, we often find these differences reflect lived experiences, oppression, and life trajectories rather than purely genetic or in-utero processes.

Jacobsen: I sense that this creates a constellation of data where there’s significant overlap or “mushiness” between categories but also areas where they remain somewhat distinct. Where would you identify the greatest areas of mushiness and the greatest areas of distinctiveness within the categories we traditionally use?

van Anders: One of the interesting things is how we define gender, sex, and related categories such as “man,” “woman,” “girl,” “boy,” or “non-binary person.” These definitions have shifted over time and continue to evolve. For instance, in some cultures, a woman who has never given birth might not be considered a “full” woman, while in other cultures, that characteristic is irrelevant to the definition of womanhood.

This variability shows us that what qualifies someone for a category—whether related to gender or sex—changes over time. Even with things like testosterone or traits as seemingly trivial as liking the colour pink, there have been shifts in whether these are seen as aspects of gender, sex, or neither. Historically, and even now, pink has been placed in both categories—or seen as just a colour unrelated to either.

The dividing lines between these concepts are constantly shifting and highly dynamic. What goes into each category and where the lines are drawn is not static.

As for where there might be clear-cut distinctions, that’s more of an empirical question. In terms of hard lines between gender and sex, there’s very little of sex that gender cannot influence. To use a metaphor, sex is a pie with many fingers in it. However, there are aspects of gender where it might not be necessary to consider sex.

For example, when addressing gender inequities in pay, we don’t need to bring evolved differences to explain disparities. At the same time, completely excluding biological realities, such as pregnancy, lactation, or chestfeeding, has historically led to further inequities for those affected. So, while gender analysis might suffice in many areas, ignoring or excluding sex entirely can be problematic.

I wouldn’t call the lines between gender and sex “mushy,” as that term often implies unfounded or overly flexible boundaries. Instead, I would describe them as dynamic and porous—reflecting a deep interactivity between the two.

Jacobsen: Deep interactivity.

Van Anders: Yes.

Jacobsen: Rather than mushy. What about heteronormativity and its psychological effects—how people internalize societal expectations about what they’re supposed to do, which then interacts with the psychology of what they think they have to do? This external and internal interplay, acted out over the developmental lifespan, could impact hormone production and even gross anatomical differences in the brain. How is research progressing in understanding this dynamic?

van Anders: We research heteronormativity, and one of the areas we’re particularly interested in is its impact on desire. This is a topic where all my interests converge. People often assume that desire reflects testosterone levels and is something innate—either you have a strong drive, which reflects high testosterone, or you don’t. Similarly, if someone has low desire, people might think it’s due to low testosterone, requiring a pill. Others might suggest mindfulness or stress reduction, which can also play a role.

However, our research has been examining how gender inequities in the household, often tied to heteronormativity, significantly impact desire. This isn’t a new idea—feminists, especially women, have long argued that inequities in daily life influence sexual desire. Yet, there’s a persistent “zombie idea” that desire is purely hormonal or physiological, which remains oddly resistant to evidence against it.

Our research and others’ findings suggest that gender inequities in household labour directly reduce desire in women partnered with men. This supports some of the theories we’ve developed. We’re also exploring related areas, such as gender differences in leisure. For example, no woman aspires to spend her life making dental appointments for her kids or cleaning the countertop for the millionth time.

Hormones come into this as well. Heteronormativity can create problematic dynamics for women in relationships with men, as it often positions women as caretakers or even “mothers” to their male partners. This dynamic isn’t beneficial for anyone—being in a parental role isn’t conducive to a sexual relationship with the person you’re in that role with. This positioning might reduce testosterone levels in the women, which in turn reduces desire.

So, there are potentially two main pathways to lower desire: one involves perceived unfairness and exhaustion from unequal household labour, and the other involves physiological mechanisms triggered by experiencing one’s partner as a dependent. Heteronormativity affects sex lives in significant ways that could be addressed, and many women report experiencing these challenges in managing relationships with their male partners.

Jacobsen: What is the steroid-peptide theory of social bonds?

van Anders: The steroid-peptide theory of social bonds examines how hormones like testosterone (a steroid), and oxytocin and vasopressin (peptides) individually and collectively help us understand various behavioural phenomena and contexts. Typically, hormone researchers—and our culture more broadly—focus on how hormones influence behaviour. However, an important perspective is studying hormonal responses to behaviour to understand those behaviours better.

For example, testosterone is often studied about masculinity, maleness, manhood, and boyhood. However, there are many behaviours associated with masculinity that do not increase testosterone. Similarly, there are behaviours often associated with femininity, womanhood, or femaleness—such as some parental behaviours—that can increase testosterone.

The steroid-peptide theory helps us make sense of these findings by moving beyond traditional frameworks that equate testosterone with masculinity. Testosterone is connected to a wide range of functions, including immunity, cardiac health, and parenting, that researchers have historically overlooked due to entrenched assumptions.

Likewise, oxytocin is often stereotyped as the “cuddling hormone” associated with goodness and sweetness. Yet, it’s also linked to phenomena like in-group favouritism, which can contribute to biases such as racism, heteronormativity, or transphobia. This theory explores hormonal responses to behaviour outside of narrow or outdated frameworks, offering a more nuanced and empirical understanding of how these hormones operate.

Jacobsen: Where do you see this research moving in the future? Are there any theoretical frameworks or technologies that could help us pinpoint the differences and directions of interaction more precisely, such a complex field intersects the organism, social constructs, and individual psychology.

van Anders: Yeah. There’s so much to explore. In some ways, these are specific, discrete, experimental, and empirical research questions. However, in other ways, they are part of larger theoretical frameworks.

For example, I’ve often emphasized the importance of looking at testosterone beyond its association with masculinity. That doesn’t mean ignoring that it can sometimes be tied to phenomena associated with masculinity, but expanding our perspective opens up opportunities for research in psychology, health sciences, ecology, and more—areas that are crucial for us to explore.

I also developed a theoretical framework called Sexual Configurations Theory, which helps us engage with gender and sex—concepts that matter deeply to people—but in ways that move beyond binaries and biological determinism. Biological determinism assumes that gender equals sex and sex equals genes, which is a limiting perspective.

This framework allows individuals to locate themselves within a model that includes gender/sex but in a much more expansive and inclusive sense. The goal is to leverage feminist and queer science frameworks to conduct research that is more empirical, accurate, and just.

Jacobsen: All right, thank you very much for your time today.

van Anders: Okay, thanks so much. If there are any follow-ups, just let me know.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Have a good day.

van Anders: Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Rich McClellan, Crafting Unique Rides Via Elite Customs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/22

When it comes to blending creativity, precision, and innovation in the world of automotive customization, Rich McClellan is a name that stands out. As the founder of Elite Customs just south of Nashville in Franklin, Tennessee, Rich brings years of expertise and an unyielding passion for transforming vehicles into personal works of art. From luxury cars to bespoke interiors, Elite Customs has become a go-to destination for those seeking to bring their unique vision to life. In this engaging Q&A, Rich shares insights into his journey, the evolution of Elite Customs, and what it takes to excel in the ever-changing world of high-end automotive design.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How did Elite Customs begin?

Rich McClellan: Elite Customs was founded in 2015, born from my years of experience in the customization industry and deep passion for the craft. After learning everything I could from working in various shops, I saw an opportunity to create something different—a place where clients had a voice in the design process. I couldn’t pass up the chance to strike out on my own and bring that vision to life.

When I met my wife Samantha (Sam) in 2018, she wasn’t familiar with the custom car world but quickly fell in love with it. She saw it for what it truly is: a canvas for endless creativity and self-expression. Back then, the local industry lacked much of a feminine perspective, and Sam saw an opportunity to fill that gap. In 2022, she made the bold decision to close her own business and join Elite Customs, bringing her keen eye for design and fresh ideas into the mix.

We started humbly, working out of a 1,200-square-foot, two-car bay. Within six months, demand pushed us to expand by another 1,200 square feet. Another six months later, we upgraded to a 4,000-square-foot shop. A year after that, we moved into a 5,500-square-foot space in the heart of Cool Springs. Today, Elite Customs thrives in a 12,000-square-foot facility, and we’re already planning our next expansion. Every day, we wake up excited to hit the ground running and do what we love.

While cars are our specialty—particularly luxury and high-end vehicles—we’ve worked on everything from boats to RVs. Our services are as diverse as our projects, from body modifications and custom interiors to state-of-the-art audio and lighting upgrades. At Elite Customs, we make it our mission to turn dreams into reality, no matter the canvas.

Jacobsen: What inspired you to focus on luxury and high-end customization?

McClellan: Luxury and high-end customization are my passions because they demand a higher level of precision, creativity, and innovation. Every project is an opportunity to treat the vehicle like a canvas, ensuring every detail is perfect. It’s also a space where clients come with bold visions, giving us the chance to push boundaries and create something truly extraordinary. The challenge of combining form and function seamlessly drives me daily.

Jacobsen: What part of auto-customization is the hardest when capturing a customer’s aesthetic?

McClellan: One of the toughest challenges in auto customization is narrowing down a customer’s vision to a cohesive theme. Many clients come in with scattered ideas—they might know what they like but struggle to understand how auto aesthetics work as a whole. Our job is to listen, collaborate, and guide them toward one or two unified styles that reflect their personality and vision.

Sam has been instrumental in making this process seamless. With her background in interior design and an incredible eye for detail, she has a talent for translating vague ideas into clear, intentional design plans. She knows how to blend textures, colors, and finishes in ways that elevate the final product while ensuring it feels personal. Her ability to clarify the design process has been a game-changer for Elite Customs.

Jacobsen: How has Sam’s influence reshaped Elite Customs?

McClellan: Sam has completely transformed the way we approach customization. Before she joined, our focus was heavily technical, but she brought a fresh perspective rooted in personal style and design. Her background in interior design has helped us better connect with clients, especially women and first-timers, who now feel more comfortable expressing their ideas. Sam’s ability to blend textures, colors, and finishes has elevated our work, and her influence is evident in every project we undertake.

Jacobsen: How do the aesthetics of California and Las Vegas influence your work in Tennessee?

McClellan: California’s aesthetic is all about individuality and breaking the rules. It’s where low-riders and old-school styles shine, and truly anything goes—it’s the Wild West of customization. Vegas, on the other hand, is defined by its opulence. It’s all about glitz, glamour, and making bold, larger-than-life statements. The pace is fast, and the designs are all about grabbing attention.

When I began working in Tennessee, I noticed that the Southeast has a more understated approach. It doesn’t follow the trends of the West Coast but instead embraces a style rooted in the state’s natural beauty and culture. Over time, I’ve introduced a philosophy of “fashion meets function” to my work here. It’s about creating bold, stylish designs that still make sense for everyday use. You can have a badass custom truck without going full-on “boss hog.” The key is pushing the limits, respecting the local culture, and finding ways to reinvent the wheel. This approach has resonated with clients ready to embrace a blend of creativity and practicality.

Jacobsen: What’s your approach to handling challenging clients or projects?

McClellan: It all comes down to communication and transparency. Customization is a collaborative process, and we take the time to understand our client’s vision while setting realistic expectations. One memorable challenge involved a client who couldn’t decide on a color scheme for their car’s interior. Sam worked closely with them, creating mockups and samples to bring their vision to life. The extra effort was worth it when we saw their excitement with the final result.

Jacobsen: How do you stay ahead in an industry that’s constantly evolving?

McClellan: Innovation is key. To stay ahead of the curve, I stay connected with industry trends, attend trade shows, and invest in cutting-edge technology like 3D printing. Building a network of professionals worldwide has also been invaluable for sharing ideas and solving unique challenges. The industry moves fast, and staying ahead means always being willing to adapt and learn.

Jacobsen: What made the project with Jelly Roll and the 1964 Lincoln Continental so special?

McClellan: Working on Jelly Roll’s 1964 Lincoln Continental for the 2023 CMAs was my dream project. I’ve always had a personal connection to that car—I own one myself—so when Jelly Roll gave us complete creative freedom, it felt like the perfect opportunity to merge his personality and music with my passion for classic cars.

Every detail of the build was carefully thought out to reflect Jelly Roll’s style and heartfelt lyrics. Sam played a huge part in creating the color story and ensuring the textures worked harmoniously. However, one of the most talked-about features was her idea to incorporate intricate engraving throughout the car. A particularly meaningful touch was removing the rearview mirror to highlight Jelly Roll’s famous lyric: “I took the mirror off of this old Ford, so I only see in front of me.”Considering Lincoln is Ford’s luxury division, it added another layer of depth to the design.

Of course, every project has its controversies; for this one, it was the wheels. People always have opinions, which is why these projects are so exciting—they spark conversations and leave an impression.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges in scaling customization?

McClellan: One of the biggest hurdles in scaling up auto customization is overcoming misconceptions about the industry. Too often, people associate customization with over-the-top, impractical builds—like hot tubs in minivans or fish tanks in trucks—thanks to reality TV. That’s not what we do. At Elite Customs, we focus on elevating and personalizing vehicles by improving their existing features thoughtfully and practically.

Another challenge is managing client expectations around timelines. The “Hollywood-edited timeline” often creates unrealistic ideas about how long a quality build takes. Completely dismantling a vehicle, executing precise customizations, and reassembling it with attention to every detail is a time-intensive process. Rushing can lead to overlooked details or cutting corners, which is never an option for us. Customizing your car the right way takes time, but the results are always worth the wait.

Jacobsen: What Are the Top Trends in Luxury Car Customization for the 2020s?

McClellan: The 2020s have brought exciting trends to the luxury car customization space. Clients are gravitating toward metallic finishes, jewel tones, textured materials, and bold, colored leathers. Personal branding is also taking center stage, with people opting for unique, signature designs rather than recognizable logos. Lighting—once an overlooked feature—is making a strong comeback with innovative options that transform interior and exterior aesthetics.

But staying ahead in this industry requires more than just following trends. As cars evolve and technology advances, so must we. Around the shop, the joke is that the quickest way to challenge me is to say something can’t be done—I’ll move mountains to prove otherwise. Meanwhile, Sam continues to expand our business boundaries, particularly with first-time clients. Her favorite moment is watching someone realize the endless possibilities of customization and start dreaming up their unique build. Those first sparks of inspiration are what drive us forward.

Jacobsen: How does Elite Customs collaborate with country music stars and athletes?

McClellan: Elite Customs has had the privilege of working with a roster of talented country music stars and professional athletes. From Jelly Roll and his wife Bunnie to Keith Urban and Eric Church, we’ve collaborated with some of the biggest names in music. One of our recent projects was a custom vehicle for comedian Nate Bargatze, a build that brought laughter and creativity together in a unique way.

We’ve also partnered with various professional athletes, including NFL players like Michael Griffin and Kevin Byard, NHL legends Pekka Rinne and Roman Josi, and even former Olympians. Each project has its own challenges and rewards, but our commitment to crafting designs that reflect each client’s individuality and style is the consistent thread.

Jacobsen: How do you balance classic car culture with modern customizations?

McClellan: Preserving the integrity of classic car culture while incorporating modern elements is an art form in itself. For me, the key is respecting the car’s original design and craftsmanship. I study its era’s shapes, lines, and aesthetics and use those as the foundation for updates. From there, it’s about thoughtfully integrating modern amenities—advanced technology or updated materials—without compromising the car’s vintage charm.

It’s a delicate balance that requires time, patience, and a genuine appreciation for the vehicle’s history. Over the years, I’ve fine-tuned this skill, always learning and adapting to ensure that every project stays authentic to its roots while meeting the client’s vision. The result is a build that honors the car’s past while pushing it toward a timeless future.

Jacobsen: What has been your most rewarding project to date?

While the Jelly Roll 1964 Lincoln Continental project holds a special place in my heart, restoring a classic Mustang as a surprise for a client’s father was another standout. The emotional reaction from both the client and their dad was incredibly rewarding and reminded me of why I started this journey—to create meaningful, lasting connections through our work.

Jacobsen: What’s the process for working with Elite Customs from start to finish?

McClellan: First, we start with a detailed consultation. We want to understand the client’s vision, budget, and timeline. Then comes the design phase, where Sam and the team craft sketches, mockups, and material samples for approval. Once finalized, we source parts and begin the build. We keep clients in the loop with regular updates, and every project goes through meticulous quality control before delivery. It’s a seamless process that ensures the client’s satisfaction every step of the way.

Jacobsen: How do you balance artistic vision with practical functionality?

McClellan: Striking this balance is what makes customization both challenging and rewarding. A car has to look amazing, but it also needs to perform reliably. For example, when integrating custom lighting, we focus on aesthetics without compromising safety or usability. It’s about enhancing the vehicle while respecting its original purpose.

Jacobsen: What role does storytelling play in your projects?

McClellan: Every project at Elite Customs tells a story. Whether it’s a vehicle passed down through generations or a new build reflecting someone’s personality, storytelling adds depth and meaning. The Jelly Roll Lincoln project, with its lyrical engraving and personal touches, is a perfect example. These stories turn vehicles into more than just machines—they become symbols of identity and expression.

Jacobsen: What advice would you give to clients considering their first custom build?

McClellan: Be open-minded and trust the process. Customization is a journey, and collaboration is key. Share your ideas and inspirations, but allow your customizer to guide you toward the best solutions. The results are always worth the effort when you see your dream come to life.

Jacobsen: How do you ensure each customization reflects the owner’s unique style?

McClellan: At Elite, the key to creating personalized designs is taking the time to truly understand each client. Our consultations are longer because we want to dive deep into their preferences, style, and vision. This time investment not only helps us deliver a highly customized product but also enhances the luxury, personalized experience we aim to provide.

It’s all about listening carefully, finding the common threads in their ideas, and offering feedback to refine their vision. Being in this industry requires a love for both cars and people. That passion sets Elite apart—everyone is welcome here, and we’ve built a reputation for making the customization process as exciting and comfortable as possible. When a client tells us they enjoyed the process and the outcome exceeded their expectations, we know we’ve succeeded in turning them into a lifelong enthusiast. That’s always the ultimate goal.

Jacobsen: What’s the most surprising request you’ve received?

McClellan: A coffee aficionado once asked us to install a fully functioning espresso machine in their luxury SUV. Although this was an unusual request, it perfectly reflected their lifestyle. The challenge was to make it look seamless, resulting in a feature that felt as natural as the car itself.

Jacobsen: What advice would you give aspiring auto customizers?

McClellan: For anyone looking to enter this industry, my first piece of advice is never to be afraid to push the limits of what’s possible. Customization is about breaking boundaries and stepping out of your comfort zone. Inspiration is everywhere—whether it’s home design, fashion, or music. If you hit a creative block on a build, step back and take a moment to let the vision come to you.

Another crucial lesson is that no one succeeds alone in this business. Collaboration is essential. I can’t tell you how often we’ve relied on our global network of experts and professionals to troubleshoot an issue or explore a new idea. Building those relationships and knowing when to lean on others is vital. Referrals are a big part of our industry, and for years, I’ve lived by the mantra: “It’s not WHAT you know; it’s WHO you know.” Building a strong network and being willing to collaborate will set you apart and help you grow in this field.

Jacobsen: How do you see the future of customization evolving?

McClellan: Sustainability and technology are shaping the future of customization. Clients are asking for eco-friendly materials and features, and technological advances like AI and smart systems are opening up new possibilities. At Elite, we’re excited to be part of this evolution and to continue pushing the boundaries of what’s possible.

Jacobsen: What’s next for Elite Customs?

McClellan: We’re expanding into electric vehicle customization to meet the growing demand for personalized EVs. Additionally, we’re exploring collaborations with designers outside the auto industry and planning to launch a line of exclusive accessories. The goal is to keep innovating and finding new ways to bring our client’s visions to life.

Rich McClellan and Elite Customs continue to redefine automotive customization, blending artistry, functionality, and innovation. Whether it’s a bold luxury build or a heartfelt restoration, Elite Customs delivers projects that exceed expectations. Ready to turn your vision into reality? Contact Elite Customs today, and let’s start your journey toward creating a vehicle that’s as unique as you are.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Iliya Valchanov on Team-GPT and Use Cases for AI

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/21

Iliya Valchanov is the CEO of Team-GPT, an AI-powered platform serving 50,000 users globally. With over 1.4 million students on Udemy, he is a renowned educator specializing in AI and online learning. A serial entrepreneur, Valchanov has co-founded multiple initiatives and startups, reaching millions of users. Holding a degree from Università Commerciale Luigi Bocconi, he has published works featured in Forbes and Inc.com. Valchanov actively champions data security and compliance in enterprise AI solutions. A leader in the AI space, he focuses on scalable, ethical innovation and creating tools that integrate seamlessly into workflows, transforming how teams operate. Valchanov talks about integrating AI into enterprise workflows. Team-GPT serves 50,000 users across industries, offering tools like a Design Basis Memorandum (DBM) for structured content creation, prompt libraries, and native integrations with platforms like Microsoft and Salesforce. Valchanov emphasized the importance of realistic AI promises, data security, and compliance, particularly for enterprises handling sensitive data. Founded in 2023, Team-GPT leverages transparency, SEO, and free educational resources to grow its user base. Looking ahead, Valchanov envisions AI’s exponential integration into workflows, targeting 100,000 active users by 2025 while emphasizing ethical, practical, and scalable AI applications.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does Team-GPT facilitate the discovery and deployment of AI use cases for enterprises in a data-secure manner? Let’s address this.

Iliya Valchanov: Team-GPT currently serves approximately 50,000 users across various enterprises. Through our experience, we’ve discovered that GPT and large language models are incredibly versatile, providing value across multiple departments and use cases. Initially, we asked ourselves: what are the real use cases? How many exist? Are they confined to specific fields, like marketing, or do they span all business areas?

We’ve identified over 1,000 distinct use cases on our platform. These cover marketing, sales, IT development, data science, HR, compliance, and more. Typically, these use cases revolve around chat interfaces, specific prompts, and contextual customization.

However, we learned that chat functionality alone isn’t always sufficient. To address this, we developed additional user interfaces. For example, one of our most innovative tools is called Pages, a text editor designed for long-form content creation. This tool allows users to move beyond chat and into a structured writing environment that aligns with their goals.

Another key benefit is our prompt library, which is designed for diverse use cases. Imagine someone creating a social media post or survey. They can select their desired use case, and our system guides them through a structured process. For example, to create a LinkedIn post, the user inputs a topic, and the system generates a detailed, customized prompt—longer and more specific than typical chat input.

Additionally, we provide prebuilt prompts tailored to specific professions. For example, educators can click a button to access tools designed for their unique needs. These enhancements significantly enrich the chat experience.

Our text editor becomes invaluable for writing-focused tasks, such as drafting blog posts. Users can input topics, such as “Team-GPT Raises $4,500,000,” or paste content directly from their resources. The platform then helps them refine and structure the content into professional-quality output.

Jacobsen: You can choose the length, and it generates content based on the context I just provided. I can edit the text in a text editor—delete, add, or even use AI to paraphrase, shorten, expand, or translate.

Valchanov: Exactly. All of this is AI-first. You can also achieve this with a prompt. Our vision is that as AI integrates into workflows, it will fundamentally change how we write, communicate, and execute tasks. For example, your recording interview might later be synthesized using AI.

For us, this would represent a native integration of any AI-driven note-taking tool you’re using to create a page with a given context. We’re building all kinds of tools to support this. Let me show you an example: I can drag and drop a screenshot into our platform if I have a screenshot. From there, I can extract text from the image, initiate a chat, and perform various other actions.

At Team-GPT, we’ve identified thousands of use cases from our users. For instance, if someone uses chat to create an article, we suggest they try our page creator, which is a more efficient tool. Similarly, for those automating customer support, we’re integrating with their customer support chatbots. This integration provides a novel interface where inquiries are received, processed, and resolved seamlessly.

Chats are a universal, user-friendly interface, but we’re creating many other tools that better address specific use cases.

Jacobsen: Do you find different use cases or challenges when partnering with organizations like Johns Hopkins University or Salesforce?

Valchanov: Yes, the main difference lies in the data sources. The examples I showed you are generic—they rely on foundational models and user-provided context. However, when working with larger organizations, they typically have their systems of record. These could include Microsoft OneDrive, Google Drive, SharePoint, Notion, or Salesforce.

These organizations often require native integrations that pull context from their internal systems. Enterprises, for example, often use the Microsoft ecosystem—SharePoint, Teams, and so on. In contrast, startups like us lean towards platforms like Slack and Notion. Universities, on the other hand, are almost always tied to Microsoft systems. This distinction is one of the primary differences between large organizations and smaller ones.

Jacobsen: How does integrating AI into workflows increase productivity?

Valchanov: There are several ways. First, people spend significant time searching for the right information. Even when the information exists within the organization, users often don’t know where to find it—or if it exists at all. AI can address this challenge by surfacing relevant information efficiently.

Second, AI increases productivity by streamlining repetitive tasks, enabling faster decision-making, and enhancing team collaboration.

Jacobsen: And there’s no question about it. But, typically, the issue is reusable context. How do you use the same context repeatedly for different purposes? This context could include information about your organization, processes, branding, or marketing identity. Marketing teams, for example, need a marketing identity. Sales teams need the sales playbook. Finance teams require the latest spreadsheets and data. Productivity increases when you have the right context and use AI to act on it.

Jacobsen: When was the company founded, and how did you achieve the 50,000-user base or attract such talent?

Valchanov: We founded the company in April 2023. During the first couple of months, we focused on growth hacking. We actively posted on LinkedIn and ran a “building in public” campaign, which we still maintain. All our financials, marketing campaigns, and activities are documented and shared publicly on LinkedIn. This transparency helped build trust with our users.

We were also very early adopters of this approach. Later, we started creating a lot of content. My background is in online education, and when starting I already had over 1 million paying students. We created an AI course on how to use ChatGPT effectively, which attracted some of our existing students. The course was hosted exclusively on our platform as a lead generation campaign. Users came for the course—offered for free—and stayed for the Team-GPT platform.

We created how-to guides, blog articles, and similar resources from there. Most of our traffic comes from SEO, with users finding us through Google.

Jacobsen: Do you find your Google presence stronger now than in your first year? Or has growth stagnated or risen steadily over time?

Valchanov: Like most SEO efforts, it has accumulated over time. The more you do, the more traffic you generate. If you stop working on SEO, you’ll feel the impact about six months later. For instance, we paused SEO for a year and a half, and our traffic is growing again. We receive thousands of organic clicks daily, all highly relevant to our offerings.

Since the industry is still emerging, we often get spikes in traffic when major players like OpenAI, Anthropic, or Microsoft announce something new. These announcements generate more interest in the field. Less than 1% of the world population uses AI tools, so there’s significant growth potential ahead.

Jacobsen: What is the role of data security and compliance in your adoption strategy for enterprises?

Valchanov: Many enterprises face challenges with data security and compliance. Their IT and compliance departments often distrust OpenAI and are reluctant to share data due to fears that OpenAI might train its models on it—a valid concern. For example, all OpenAI servers are located in the U.S., which doesn’t comply with regulations for many companies outside the U.S.

European enterprises, for instance, cannot use ChatGPT because it doesn’t meet compliance requirements. Compliance considerations include data residency—ensuring data is stored within the EU or North America without transiting between continents. For financial institutions, it’s often unacceptable for data to interact with OpenAI systems.

We emphasize to our clients that their employees are likely already using ChatGPT, so they need to implement secure and compliant solutions. Our product allows companies to deploy our system on their servers, whether on-premises or private clouds, and we enable them to interact securely with any model.

Jacobsen: So if a client doesn’t want to interact with the OpenAI model, they can use custom models within your system, and all of this remains contained within their network?

Valchanov: Exactly. When the data never leaves the client’s network, they can be confident it’s private and secure.

Jacobsen: Do you think data privacy and process will increasingly influence the adoption of systems like Team-GPT or AI models in general?

Valchanov: Absolutely. One of the biggest issues right now is: where does the data go? Does OpenAI have access to my data? This concern is at the core of our value proposition.

We emphasize to clients that they own their data—it’s entirely theirs. Our product is designed with this principle, particularly for enterprises that handle intellectual property, sensitive information, personally identifiable information, healthcare data, or financial records. These organizations will likely continue prioritizing private and secure environments for their data.

In contrast, smaller organizations may default to accepting that their data is stored with larger companies, much like what we see with Google. Google has extensive knowledge of users’ activities—every search, every interaction—and most people have come to accept this. However, there are alternatives, like DuckDuckGo or other privacy-centric browsers, for those who value data security.

Jacobsen: What do you see as a crucial point people need to understand when you’re educating them about these products, processes, and general data security?

Valchanov: A significant challenge is the lack of clarity around how AI works and its boundaries. We encounter a wide spectrum of beliefs: some people think AI can’t do anything useful for them, which is incorrect, while others believe AI can perform near-magical feats, which is equally unrealistic.

When I start a conversation with someone, I often don’t know where they fall on this spectrum. They might be skeptics or overenthusiastic believers. One of the key tasks is managing their expectations—explaining what is currently possible, what isn’t, and what they can realistically expect from AI models.

For example, tools like ChatGPT aren’t strong at performing complex mathematical operations. People need to understand these limitations. However, this won’t remain the case indefinitely. Models like o1 and o3 (and beyond) are already showing improvements in mathematics, but we’re not fully there yet.

The industry is evolving so rapidly that capabilities are constantly shifting. This pace of change creates confusion for decision-makers trying to stay informed about what’s feasible today versus what might be achievable soon.

Jacobsen: Not only did they not know the capabilities to begin with, but these capabilities are also changing every day. What was true yesterday may no longer be true today.

For example, when you have a two-year sales cycle, which is typical for financial institutions or government deals, the landscape can shift dramatically. At the start of negotiations, certain functionalities might be impossible, but by the end, many of those same functionalities may be feasible. It’s a very confusing field in that regard. I’ve been listening to Eric Schmidt, the former CEO of Google, and Jensen Huang, the CEO of NVIDIA.

Both present a reasoned perspective on these systems’ vast capabilities and potential while discussing risks and rewards and how to maximize the latter while minimizing the former. This is a highly relevant conversation. What will the capabilities of Team-GPT as it builds on models like O1 and potentially O3? I’ve seen some graphs where O3 significantly outperforms earlier iterations like O1, even in low-power modes. What are your thoughts on this?

Valchanov: I think Silicon Valley attracts some of the brightest minds in mathematics and computer science. If there are problems they excel at solving, they’re often mathematical or technical—such as coding, data science, or algorithm development.

The fact that the earliest AI systems focused on creative use cases, like content creation or article writing, was more of a coincidence and an outlier. I expect Bay Area experts to solve highly technical use cases—like those for coders, data scientists, or mathematicians—exceptionally well because they deeply understand those domains. On the other hand, I believe they’re less likely to excel in use cases like generating text and images or creating engaging stories.

In this regard, I foresee mathematical and reasoning capabilities improving at a super-fast pace while advancements in creativity may take significantly longer. AI may not achieve a high level of creativity for quite some time.

Jacobsen: I’ve observed a distinction in how AI is often discussed, particularly in English. These systems process massive datasets through deep learning and neural networks, enabling them to generate new information based on prior models or datasets. However, this isn’t comparable to what we call organic creativity. It’s more akin to generativity, as described by thinkers like Chomsky.

When people discuss creativity in AI, they often reference this notion of generativity. If we consider AI systems creative in any sense, it’s a form of lower-level creativity. That said, I envision a future where AI achieves higher forms of creativity once its operations and algorithms are further refined. What do you think?

Valchanov: That’s an excellent observation. These AI systems are indeed generative but in a way that’s constrained by their datasets and models. They don’t have the organic creativity of humans, which stems from complex, unstructured cognitive processes.

As you said, current AI creativity is a lower-level form. While it may someday evolve into something more profound, that will require breakthroughs in algorithm design and operational frameworks. Until then, AI’s creative abilities will likely remain limited, but its utility in technical and reasoning tasks will continue to grow exponentially.

Jacobsen: What would you project your user base to be by the end of 2025? For instance, in terms of total users and the partnerships you expect to have? Currently, you’re working with Salesforce and Johns Hopkins University. What other areas do you see as potential for your prompt-based system?

Valchanov: For us, the focus is on mid-market and enterprise clients—companies with more than 200 to 300 employees. The productivity improvements and cost savings for these organizations are enormous. While smaller organizations benefit from the boost, it’s less impactful than a company with 1,000 employees, for instance.

I haven’t set KPIs for 2025 yet, so I can’t give you an exact number in terms of total users. However, having 50 to 100 large companies—each with more than 300 employees—would be a significant milestone for us. It’s not just about acquiring users but activating them.

For example, we currently have organizations with thousands of employees, but only 50 people are actively using the system. In one case, we have an organization with 4,000 employees, but only three use the platform. They’ve been paying for three months, and now the client asks, “How do we roll this out meaningfully to all 4,000 employees?” It’s a complex challenge because you’re disrupting workflows to introduce new technology.

Another company started with 15 users. A year later, they had 60 active users. They aim to onboard 300 people by the end of Q1 and 1,000 by 2025. That organization has 5,000 employees, so onboarding 1,000 people in a year would be a significant achievement.

Long story short, I hope we reach more than 100,000 potential users by 2025. It would be an incredible achievement if we activated 50,000 to 100,000 of them. However, activation takes time and effort.

Jacobsen: Thank you for sharing your insights. I find this area particularly interesting and startups should invest more time and money in it. Everyone seems to want to invest in AI, primarily out of fear—ironically, fear of AI’s potential power. In my opinion, this field will remain a powerful area for growth well into the 2030s and beyond.

Valchanov: I agree 100%. It will likely take 15 years or more to integrate AI into workflows fully. I’m very excited about the possibilities, even though we don’t know what to expect. I’ve heard projections that humanoid robots could outnumber living humans by 2040 or 2050. With advancements in large language models, interactions are becoming much more dynamic and meaningful than ever before.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much for your time. I’ll start editing this today, and I should have something ready for you soon.

Valchanov: Thank you! Have a great day.

Jacobsen: You too. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Scott Maclean, ADHD Diagnosis and Assistive Technology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/20

Scott Maclean discussed his journey with ADHD, diagnosed in his early 50’s, and how it has shaped his life, relationships, and coping strategies. He shared insights into developing the Visual Timer, a tool addressing time management, procrastination, and task overwhelm, which integrates neuroscience principles. Maclean emphasized the need for practical solutions for ADHD and broader challenges like procrastination in fast-paced societies. He expressed interest in collaborating with researchers, creating a podcast, or writing a book to share his experiences. Maclean highlighted the importance of breaking down neuroscience into actionable tips and tools to help individuals manage their lives effectively.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Scott Maclean. We will discuss a few issues that are quite prevalent in society today. These challenges may not be exacerbated by technology. Still, regardless of their source, people often experience them and cope in various ways. I want to start by asking about your life journey into middle age and discovering that you have ADHD. What were the coping mechanisms you used before your diagnosis, and how have things changed since gaining that knowledge?

Scott Maclean: Yes, it’s interesting. I recently turned 55 and was only recently diagnosed with ADHD. The diagnosis has shifted my perspective and changed my life significantly. It has allowed me to understand many things I couldn’t figure out before—how my brain works, how it operates differently, and the coping mechanisms I developed to fit into society. That adjustment process has been fascinating.

The reality is that my brain doesn’t function the same way as most people’s. For a long time, I internalized that difference as a personal flaw. I thought I wasn’t good enough. I had trouble concentrating, procrastinated constantly, avoided tasks, and often overcompensated in social situations. I struggled with impulse control issues typical of ADHD, which sometimes made social interactions even harder. 

Since being diagnosed and starting medication, I’ve been able to reflect on the neuroscience behind ADHD. I’ve done much research and studying to understand how the brain works for neurodivergent individuals. This learning process has allowed me to revisit my past, understand why I behaved the way I did, and explore what changes I need to make to improve my life moving forward.

As part of that journey, I began looking for tools and resources to help people with ADHD. As a father of two young children, I’ve faced significant challenges with time management and routines for myself and my family. Simple tasks like getting the kids to bed, leaving the house on time, or encouraging them to do homework became major stress points. I tried using timers and other available tools, but they weren’t effective enough. This led me to explore creating better solutions.

As a result of my research—particularly into neuroscience—I developed the Visual Timer, which launched about eight weeks ago in October on Amazon. It’s currently the number one new release in its category and is selling well. This success suggests that many others face similar challenges with time management, focus, procrastination, and task overwhelm, and they are searching for tools to help them navigate these issues.

Jacobsen: When people face task overwhelm, do they sometimes resort to unhealthy coping mechanisms, such as substance abuse or overusing prescription medications beyond what doctors recommend?

Maclean: Yes, that does seem to happen, unfortunately, for some individuals dealing with the struggles of ADHD.

I can now draw a direct line between many of the challenges in my life—like my marriage breaking down, career inconsistencies, and general instability—and my undiagnosed ADHD. What came with that realization was an understanding of my codependency. After my marriage broke down, I began to see how ADHD had shaped my coping mechanisms, including my choice of a partner.

I ended up in a codependent marriage because I had convinced myself that I wasn’t able to cope on my own. I believed my brain wasn’t working the “correct” way. So, my initial coping mechanism was to find a partner who could take care of me. It wasn’t a disability, per se—I was a fairly normal, functioning person, and so was she. But from a psychological perspective, there was clear codependency. She was very control-oriented—an alpha female—and I was happy to let her take the reins on day-to-day tasks.

On the surface, I appeared to be functioning normally. But as with many relationships, there was an imbalance. That dependency model ultimately created problems. When the marriage ended, I panicked because I realized I had to take care of myself—and, on top of that, become a single dad to two children.

During that time, I was self-medicating with alcohol, which became dangerous and psychologically damaging. I started seeing psychologists and counsellors, reading self-help books, and listening to podcasts to understand what was happening. Everywhere I turned, though, I was treated for depression.

I even asked psychologists directly if they thought I might have ADHD or another mental health condition. Still, they consistently told me, “No, you don’t have it.” This went on for years.

Eventually, I gained control of my drinking and have been sober ever since. Sobriety gave me the mental clarity to revisit the issue and challenge the medical professionals. I returned to my doctor and said, “Listen, something isn’t right. Despite what everyone is telling me, there’s something else going on.”

Finally, I got a referral to see a psychiatrist. It took months to get an appointment because psychiatrists are so busy, which says a lot about the state of mental health care in society.

When I finally saw the psychiatrist, she had a checklist of ten items he looked for in diagnosing ADHD. She told me, “You check off eight of these, so you have ADHD.” From there, we quickly moved into discussions about treatment.

It was only after this diagnosis that the doors opened for me. I began to understand what ADHD is, what it means for me, and how I can manage it moving forward.

I went into the intellectual side of it as much as possible with my ADHD brain. Fortunately for me—despite the misfortune of not being diagnosed earlier—the Internet, as you put it, seems to be everywhere. There’s a wealth of information out there.

There are also many products claiming to help with ADHD. I explored them and thought, “That’s not going to work for me,” or I tried them, and they didn’t work. This was mostly because I’m visual, as many people are. A common statistic floating around the Internet is that 65% of people are visual learners.

But with ADHD, my brain was moving at such a fast pace that I couldn’t focus for long periods. I needed to understand this to break things down and find better solutions. Otherwise, I was scared of living a life that felt less than it could be—or worse, being tempted back into self-medication, which I knew was highly dangerous.

Jacobsen: How many prototypes did you go through when you started developing your product?

Maclean: The process took over 18 months since I hand-drew my idea on paper. Looking back now, it’s fascinating how much effort goes into turning an idea into reality.

To answer your question, I went through three physical prototypes. The first was a non-working, 3D-printed model to determine the size and shape of the screen. From there, we began developing actual working models and refining them. Beyond those were countless digital or hand-drawn iterations and documented concept versions.

Interestingly, despite my lack of artistic skills, my first drawing contained all the core functionality I wanted. Later, I used AI tools, like MidJourney, to finalize the design.

Jacobsen: How does your product’s timing and colouring system anchor executive function? How does it help users stay engaged or relaxed?

Maclean: It’s the only timer on the market with a 360-degree LED light system synchronizing with an audible chime and a high-definition LCD countdown screen. These three elements work together seamlessly.

The second important feature is the “first and final warning” system, which alerts users as they approach the end of the allocated time. This combination helps the brain understand what’s happening and relax.

The cognitive aid comes from the constant colour and sound cues, which provide a structured framework for your task. Time becomes visualized and sits in your peripheral vision, so you don’t need to fixate on numbers counting down on a screen. The calm colours are a gentle reminder, signalling, “Hey, your time is managed—you can focus.”

You’re travelling relative to whatever time you’ve set. The colour and the sounds give you a subtly off-to-the-side anchor to time, reducing the demands on your brain and executive functions—such as working memory and sustained attention. This lets you focus more on the task because the timer provides constant, useful feedback.

For example, when the timer starts and glows bright green, it switches your brain on to the task.  As it transitions to yellow at 25% of the remaining time, it gives you a proactive way to check in on your progress. It’s a moment to ask yourself, “How am I doing? Do I need to speed up? Am I behind? Or can I relax because I’m doing well?”

That’s the first warning. 

At 5% of your time remaining, the colour changes to red, signalling the final warning. This is the timer telling your brain, “Hey, it’s time to wrap things up.” For people like me who struggle with task transitions, this advanced warning helps me mentally prepare to finish the task and move smoothly into the next one.

When the final alarm goes off, there’s no surprise—what I call “alarm shock”—because you’ve been gently prepared for it. This was a major challenge with other timers that all have one-off alarms.

For example, there’s a timer with a manual coloured disc that moves clockwise, much like a traditional analog clock. I’d set it, but my brain would quickly get distracted. I’d forget about the timer entirely until the alarm startled me. It didn’t offer any proactive cues or feedback.

Another issue was that while I might have understood the timer’s function, my kids didn’t. They couldn’t grasp what “15 minutes left” meant in the abstract. The timer was too passive, providing no engagement or useful warnings until the alarm went off. The key difference with my product is that the lights, sounds, and gradual warnings help the brain. They provide telecoms, subliminal, and sound cues to help the brain relax and stay on task. Knowing a break is approaching, I’m reassured I can stay focused on the task without constantly checking the timer.

Jacobsen: Looking ahead, what would you like to do regarding media? Would you consider starting a podcast, creating a YouTube channel, or conversing with professionals who research the areas you’ve explored—albeit informally—to refine your product further?

Maclean: Yes, I’d love to explore those avenues. I’ve become fascinated by the neuroscience behind visual learning, for example. I’m still developing my understanding of it. Still, I see great potential in collaborating with professionals to improve the product and help more people manage ADHD in various ways and degrees.

Having developed the product along these lines, there’s much more room for deeper understanding. As you mentioned, new information and research are constantly coming online, evolving our thinking. More effort should be put into supporting and advancing that work. I’m interested in collaborating with and supporting those out there doing this research.

At the same time, I’d like to tell my own story more than I currently do. Perhaps through writing a book or creating a podcast, I could reach others who are similar to me—or even those who aren’t but who face similar challenges with mental health or issues like procrastination and overwhelm.

Even for people who don’t consider themselves to have mental health challenges, many in our fast-paced Western world—whether in Australia, North America, Canada, or elsewhere—are overwhelmed by procrastination and the difficulty of focusing. That’s the problem I want to address. I’ve started with the timer, which has been very successful. It’s selling well and has a great story behind it.

But there’s so much more information and research that could be done. It could inform other products or raise awareness. By breaking down neuroscience into practical, easy-to-understand tips, we could help people manage their lives better. Whether through tools, products, or simple advice, there’s still much work to be done in this area.

Jacobsen: Scott, I want to thank you for your time today and your patience yesterday.

Maclean: No worries. I appreciate that, and I hope this helps make things easier for others struggling with similar issues.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. For what it’s worth, I understand this personally. At least one person close struggles with some of these challenges.

Maclean: That means a lot. 

Jacobsen: Thank you again for your time and for sharing your insights.

Maclean: You’re welcome. I appreciate your time and patience with me as well.

Jacobsen: Take care.

Maclean: Perfect. Thank you! Take care, buddy.

Back-to-school season is here, and with it comes the chaos of morning routines, homework battles, and bedtime struggles. Enter the VISUAL Timer—a simple yet revolutionary tool designed to simplify routines and eliminate nagging for parents everywhere.

Created by Scott Maclean, a single dad with ADHD, the VISUAL Timer uses 360° color-coded LED lights to guide children through tasks independently. Its engaging, neuroscience-backed design transforms time management into a fun and empowering experience for kids.

Why It’s Perfect for Back-to-School:

  • Visual Progress Awareness: Color-coded cues (green, yellow, red) help kids stay on track without constant reminders.
  • Stress-Free Transitions: Proactive warnings foster calm and cooperation during busy mornings and evenings.
  • Neurodivergent-Friendly: Ideal for kids with ADHD or Autism, offering a non-disruptive way to manage time-related anxiety.
  • Affordable: At under $30, it’s an accessible solution for every family.

Real-Life Impact:
Take 8-year-old Noah, who used to struggle with getting ready for school. With the VISUAL Timer, he now completes his tasks independently, guided by its intuitive color cues. His parents report calmer mornings and a happier household.

We’d love to provide you with a sample timer for review, high-res images, or an interview with Scott Maclean to dive deeper into the neuroscience and story behind this game-changing tool.

Let’s help your readers take the chaos out of back-to-school routines and bring calm to their homes!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub on Elder Abuse Protections

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/18

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discuss elder abuse protections in the U.S., emphasizing the growing elderly population, projected to double by 2060. They highlight disparities among states, noting that Wisconsin, Vermont, and Massachusetts excel in elder abuse prevention due to strong funding, robust regulations, and innovative solutions like elder abuse shelters. Conversely, rural states like South Carolina, Utah, and South Dakota lag due to policy gaps and fewer resources. They explore financial fraud as a prevalent form of elder abuse, stressing the need for better funding, local lobbying, and societal changes to protect vulnerable populations. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here again with the wonderful Chip Lupo. We will discuss elder abuse protections, an essential and often underappreciated topic. It’s a serious and sensitive issue that hasn’t been discussed enough. I’m glad you all took the time to research this critical subject. So, how much is elder abuse costing Americans annually? Let’s put a dollar figure on it.

Chip Lupo: Elder abuse is a significant problem, Scott. One reason we need to address this issue is that the U.S. population is aging as people live longer. The number of Americans aged 65 and older is projected to nearly double, from 49 million in 2016 to 95 million by 2060. Acting now is crucial to ensure a better quality of life for our aging population.

Jacobsen: If we consider the extent of suffering for individuals across different cities, what does the scope look like in the United States? With tens of millions of people aged 65 and older, how prevalent is elder abuse? What are we looking at?

Lupo: Different states have varying measures in place to protect older people. In states with higher retirement populations, protections tend to be stronger, but exceptions exist. For instance, Wisconsin ranks number one in elder abuse protection. While Wisconsin isn’t traditionally considered a retirement state, its older population is relatively high due to younger people leaving for job opportunities elsewhere. As a result, Wisconsin has developed robust resources to protect its elderly population.

On the other hand, states like South Carolina (my home state), Utah, and South Dakota rank lower in terms of elder abuse protections. These disparities are often driven by policy and resource allocation.

Jacobsen: Now, why are states like Massachusetts, Vermont, Ohio, and Virginia at the top regarding elder abuse protections?

Lupo: The answer often comes down to funding and infrastructure. For example, Vermont has the second-highest ombudsman funding per elderly resident and the second-highest number of elderly care organizations offering services.

In many cases, adequate funding is a key factor. Another critical aspect of elder abuse that often gets overlooked is financial fraud. Elderly individuals are prime targets for scams, including phone, mail, and online fraud. For instance, Vermont has one of the lowest average financial losses per fraud case targeting older people, highlighting the effectiveness of its preventive measures.

So, safeguards are in place to address complaints and minimize the financial losses due to fraud. However, for those in states that don’t offer a strong framework for protection, there is often a lack of prevention, significant neglect, and exploitation. 

Jacobsen: Why do these particular states and cities face such conditions, and what do the numbers show?

Lupo: In those situations, it’s often policy-driven. Much of it comes down to the resources available and the quality of care in nursing homes. States that rank well generally have measures in place to ensure the quality of nursing homes and other resources.

The data shows that states at the bottom of the rankings often lack these safeguards. This includes fewer assisted living facilities, fewer certified volunteer ombudspersons, and less overall funding for elder care. It boils down to the types of organizations in place, their quality, and the resources to manage them effectively.

Jacobsen: What kinds of resources are most effective?

Lupo: The states or cities with higher investments in prevention and elder care stand out. I’m glad you brought that up, Scott. One significant reason Wisconsin ranks at the top of the list is that it is one of only 22 states with elder abuse shelters. These shelters function similarly to those for at-risk teens or battered spouses.

These shelters provide mistreated elderly individuals a place to escape abusive situations, access counselling, and find temporary shelter until their complaints are resolved. It’s a relatively new development but an important one. States at the top of the rankings often have these resources and the funding to manage them effectively.

Jacobsen: Are there any sociocultural factors at play? You mentioned earlier the role of employment opportunities and the migration of younger people as younger individuals leave for better job prospects, cities or states age. Are there other sociocultural factors that influence these numbers?

Lupo: Sociocultural factors certainly play a role, especially in lower-ranked states like South Carolina, Utah, and South Dakota. These states are more rural, with traditional family structures where elderly individuals are often left to fend for themselves. This trend is consistent across the bottom half of the rankings.

nother factor to consider is gender. Men tend to die younger than women by a few years in most countries, including the U.S. and Canada. This gender gap in lifespan impacts elder care dynamics, as women are more likely to live alone in their later years and may face additional challenges related to neglect or abuse.

Jacobsen: So, I can think of this from several levels. For instance, if women live longer, there will be more older women, making them more likely to be exploited simply because of their numbers. Are those kinds of dynamics at play as well?

Lupo: They are. While it’s not directly addressed in this study, it’s a known issue. Men traditionally die younger than women, and in some of these traditionally bound states, women are often left to fend for themselves. Sometimes, when men die earlier, they don’t leave their spouses with adequate resources to live on. There’s often a lack of financial preparation, and that becomes a significant factor, especially in rural states like South Carolina, Utah, and South Dakota, which rank at the bottom of the elder abuse protection list.

In many cases, the surviving spouse may find themselves in a dire financial situation, which makes them vulnerable to fraud. Fraudsters actively target individuals in such circumstances, preying on their vulnerability and exploiting their situations.

Jacobsen: That’s sad. What about cases of credit card fraud, business scams, and robocalls? What are the most frequent forms of elder abuse that aren’t physical but are more financial or social?

Lupo: Those include everything you’ve mentioned, plus Social Security fraud. Many state attorneys general have programs to educate older people on scams. For example, they emphasize that agencies like the IRS or the Social Security Administration will never call you directly. Instead, they will send official correspondence on agency letterhead.

Phone scams are the most prevalent because many elderly individuals still use landline telephones and haven’t embraced cell phone technology. For instance, my father-in-law, who is 84 years old, still uses a landline and constantly receives calls. Some are just sales pitches for Medicare plans, but others are fraudulent, like threats to cut off power unless gift cards are purchased. Fortunately, my father-in-law is well-educated and savvy enough to spot scams, but many others aren’t as fortunate.

Elderly individuals with dementia or other cognitive impairments are especially vulnerable, as scammers exploit their reduced ability to detect deception.

Jacobsen: What can people notice regarding changes in behaviour and personal care as potential indicators—not necessarily confirmations—of elder abuse? How can someone make an objective assessment of the elders in their lives?

Lupo: And that triggers something, Scott. One of the things that moves these states to the top of the rankings is that they actively crack down on elder abuse. They are very strong in minimizing misconduct in nursing homes. For example, there are strict requirements for inspections, and they enforce severe penalties for nursing home employees who abuse elderly residents. States like Wisconsin, Massachusetts, and Vermont have robust safeguards in place.

They are very punitive—yes, that’s the word—in dealing with misconduct in nursing home facilities.

Jacobsen: Should there be legal restrictions against caregivers financially benefiting from the death of a person they were caring for?

Lupo: Let’s take a look at what some of the experts say on this. One expert mentioned that elder abuse often results from family members or caretakers in in-home settings—it’s not limited to nursing homes. Policies should be expanded to address these in-home situations.

States at the top of the rankings greatly regulate and monitor nursing facilities, but perhaps more attention should be given to in-home care. Just as we do for domestic violence cases, we need to ensure protection for elderly residents who might face abuse, whether financial, emotional, or otherwise. So yes, states should do more to crack down on this issue.

Jacobsen: What about the weight given to elder abuse, gross neglect, and exploitation complaints? Why is it given triple weight at 24 points?

Lupo: Let’s look at that. It’s given that weight because these complaints represent a broad range of issues directly affecting older people. Most of these complaints are made to the state’s long-term care ombudsman, who oversees elder care programs. These complaints often include elder abuse, gross neglect, and exploitation, which are serious concerns for residents aged 65 and older.

It’s weighted so heavily because it targets that demographic, making it one of the three key metrics in the prevalence category. Wisconsin, for instance, has excelled in this area. Let’s check which state has the best prevalence in terms of elder abuse.

Now, if you go to our survey, you can sort these numbers. The rankings have little double triangles that you can click on to sort. Let’s see… Louisiana has the best prevalence ranking, followed by Florida, Michigan, New Hampshire, and Indiana.

Prevalence covers a range of issues. It’s not just limited to complaints; it also includes the fraud rate and the estimated financial loss per reported fraud. This is a key metric, so 40 points out of the 100 go toward prevalence. The breakdown is 40 points for prevalence, 30 for resources, and 30 for protection. More emphasis is placed on prevalence because it specifically targets residents aged 65 and older.

Jacobsen: What kind of actions can we take between 2016 and 2060, given that the number of individuals aged 65 and older will double from 49 million in 2016 to a projected 95 million in 2060?

Lupo: Right. Now is the time to act, as we mentioned earlier. This is largely policy-driven. Beyond that, individual behaviours need to be adjusted when protecting older people. However, more lobbying at the local level is essential. As I’ve said before, you must first create change in City Hall to create change in Washington.

It’s critical to lobby local politicians and lawmakers to ensure the implementation and funding of well-supported programs. With the 65+ population expected to reach 95 million by 2060, we must ensure funding keeps pace with inflation. We cannot set a static budget number. Instead, adjustments must be made for cost-of-living increases to ensure these programs remain effective and well-funded over the coming decades.

Jacobsen: Okay, that’s it for today, Chip. 

Lupo: Bye. Talk to you tomorrow.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

New Years Resolution’s for 2025 and Better/Worse Cities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/17

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discusses WalletHub’s research on New Year’s resolutions and financial challenges for 2025. Americans prioritize saving money, with Seattle, San Francisco, and Scottsdale ranking as the best cities for achieving resolutions, while Gulfport, Newark, and Jackson rank lowest due to low incomes and high crime. Lupo emphasizes creating realistic budgets that account for inflation, using tools like apps or simple methods. They explore connections between financial and physical health, stress, and debt management. Other topics include financial literacy, credit unions, and identity theft, highlighting proactive steps like monitoring finances and teaching fundamental money management skills early.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with the marvellous Chip Lupo. We are going to discuss one of the many topics researched by WalletHub. I appreciate their research because it is thorough and clean, employs reasonable metrics, provides interesting breakdowns, and offers clear answers—whether on a Zoom call or through submitted questions.

This is useful information for anyone who comes across it. When looking at New Year’s resolutions, the top financial resolution for Americans in 2025 was to save more money. Regarding the best and worst cities for keeping those New Year’s resolutions, the best were Seattle, Washington; San Francisco, California; and Scottsdale, Arizona. The worst cities were Gulfport, Mississippi; Newark, New Jersey; and Jackson, Mississippi.

Why were these cities ranked as the best and worst, particularly with Mississippi having two of the worst-ranked cities in the state?

Chip Lupo: Let’s start with the bottom cities. Gulfport, Mississippi; Newark, New Jersey; and Jackson, Mississippi were mentioned. If we expand the list, we find Detroit, Michigan; Memphis, Tennessee; and Shreveport, Louisiana.

This part of the country is predominantly in the Deep South, except Newark, New Jersey. Low incomes and high crime rates characterize these areas. Cities like Detroit and Newark fit this pattern. The bottom-ranked cities are mostly geographically concentrated in the Deep South.

The combination of low-income states and large metro areas with deteriorating inner cities—such as Memphis, Detroit, and Newark—contributes to these rankings. The data supports this. For example, if we look at metrics related to financial resolutions, the bottom three cities rank very low. At a glance, the highest ranking among these cities is 53rd for school and work resolutions.

However, these cities perform poorly when it comes to financial and health-related resolutions—the two most common New Year’s resolutions. Generally, the top New Year’s resolutions are health-related, including eating better, exercising more, and losing weight. Financial resolutions, such as budgeting better, spending less, or securing a better-paying job, are typically second.

Due to the economic challenges over the past four years, financial resolutions are gradually catching up to health-related resolutions in importance. It would not be surprising if they soon become equally prioritized.

That said, the bottom-ranked cities continue to perform poorly in both health and financial.

Now, let’s look at the top-ranked cities. The top three—Seattle, San Francisco, and Scottsdale—score highly for health resolutions. San Francisco ranks first overall in this category. These cities also perform well in financial resolutions, with Scottsdale, Arizona, ranking lowest among the three at 27th.

Jacobsen: Americans also face a significant debt problem. For various reasons, this issue was politically consequential during the last election. Credit card debt has been highlighted as a major factor. Was creating a realistic budget the number one financial resolution for Americans?

Lupo: Making a realistic budget and sticking to it are two different things. A related study found that only about one out of ten people we surveyed were making a realistic budget and sticking to it.

In a separate part of the survey, a percentage of people felt that keeping a budget was too complicated. However, keeping a budget can be as simple as using a method that my mother and my father-in-law still use: a pen, a pad, and a calculator. You write down your expenses and income and then do the math.

That said, there is plenty of technology available. WalletHub, for instance, has a budget app. If you resist using pen and paper or opening a spreadsheet, you can visit our website—or many other financial websites—that offer apps to do the work. You just key in the numbers, and it provides you with alerts, such as when you’re getting close to going over budget or when certain expenses are trending upward.

So, it’s easier said than done when it comes to keeping a budget realistically and sticking to it. One thing you can do to adjust for inflation—which does impact people’s budgets—is to plan for it. For example, when budgeting for something static, like utility bills that don’t fluctuate based on interest rates, you could average a year’s worth of utility bills.

I do this. I budget a set amount based on an average. Here in Columbia, South Carolina, we pay more in the summer months because of the heat, and we run the heater more during winter storms in January and February. However, utility costs level off in the cooler months, like spring and early fall. By averaging the costs, you balance out the higher expenses in extreme seasons.

That’s just one tip for budgeting. The key is to stick to it. Make sure your budget is realistic. Many people kid themselves, thinking, “Oh, I won’t spend X amount on food this year,” but chances are, they will. Be honest and account for those expenses. Don’t strip your budget so tightly that you risk your livelihood. Be realistic about how much you’re willing and able to spend.

Jacobsen: What about people’s earned income? Are there any resolutions around getting better work or upgrading their education to secure better-paying jobs? Do these goals come up in the resolutions as well?

Lupo: They do. When it comes to earned income, people need to evaluate their situation. Usually, at the top of the list is getting a better job or picking up a second part-time job to make ends meet.

Another factor to consider is location. If you live in an area with a very high cost of living, you might consider relocating to a more affordable area. However, with the current state of the housing market, this can take time. Relocation and career advancement are often long-term goals, but they’re definitely part of many people’s resolutions to improve their earned income.

Jacobsen: What about identity theft? Due to extensive digital tracking systems, that’s a significant problem, particularly in wealthier societies. However, scams also occur frequently via phone and online platforms. Certain vulnerabilities seem to arise in richer countries. What are the concerns around identity theft for people in the United States? How does it influence their New Year’s resolutions when it’s a common worry?

Lupo: It’s not just an issue in wealthy societies—it can happen to anyone, particularly older people, who seem to be prime targets for scammers.

If someone wanted to create a New Year’s resolution related to identity theft, it would involve practicing due diligence, such as regularly monitoring their bank accounts, credit card accounts, and credit reports. Most people only check these after something happens, but being proactive is key.

Start by regularly reviewing your credit reports, bank statements, and credit card statements. You could set up a weekly, biweekly, or monthly schedule, but the important thing is consistency. If something suspicious arises, you can report it immediately and take steps to address it.

Jacobsen: Why are people interested in joining credit unions, improving their financial literacy, or focusing on their physical health related to financial health? These concerns seem existential for many people.

Lupo: The connection between physical and financial health is significant. When debt is burdened, it often leads to stress, which affects sleep, eating habits, and overall well-being. The two are interconnected.

The key consideration regarding credit unions is membership. Membership requirements vary. Sometimes, it’s as simple as living in a specific country, while others may be tied to military service or employment. Credit unions often provide better rates than traditional banks, especially on car loans, mortgages, and personal loans, making them an appealing choice for people serious about improving their financial situation.

Financial literacy, meanwhile, is becoming a growing topic of concern in the United States. We recently surveyed about back-to-school shopping and found that 95% of parents believe financial literacy should be taught in public schools. While I agree, it should begin at home and be reinforced in schools.

Teaching children about finances at an early age—such as with a mock checking account—can help them develop the skills to manage their money effectively. In school, an elective course called consumer economics taught skills like writing checks, balancing chequebooks, and understanding simple interests.

Learning these fundamentals is similar to learning a sport or a musical instrument: you start with the basics. When people are well-grounded in these fundamentals, they are better equipped to handle their financial lives in the long term.

Jacobsen: Yeah, this is a big issue. It has also been politically consequential for Canadians. For those unfamiliar, inflation refers to the general increase in the costs of goods and services.

How does inflation factor into 2025? This issue is also politically and socially significant for Americans.

Lupo: Right. This ties back to creating a realistic budget and sticking to it. When listing your expenses, don’t assume that costs in January 2025 will remain the same in December 2025.

Plan with the assumption that the costs of everything in your budget will increase. The challenge is predicting how much they’ll increase—or, in some cases, decrease. A common example in the U.S. is fuel prices, which fluctuate significantly from the beginning to the end of the year.

When accounting for inflation, set your budget realistically, assuming a gradual cost increase. As we discussed earlier, averaging out utility bills is a good strategy. Similarly, keep track of inflation monthly and adjust your budget as needed.

It’s important to allow for flexibility. Don’t make your budget so rigid that there’s no room to adapt. You need some wiggle room to handle inflation effectively. If certain expenses decrease, treat that surplus as an opportunity—for instance, reinvesting it to pay off high-interest debt, such as a mortgage or credit card bills.

Jacobsen: I think that’s it for today, Chip. Thank you very much for your time.

Lupo: Fantastic. All right, Scott. Thank you.

Jacobsen: Thank you as well.

Lupo: Take care.

Jacobsen: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Jeffrey Egler on Resilient Health in Fires

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/17

Dr. Jeffrey Egler, MD, is a double board-certified physician in Family and Lifestyle Medicine. A graduate of Drexel University School of Medicine, he completed residency at the University of Colorado and a fellowship in Faculty Development at UCLA. With expertise spanning adult medicine, pediatrics, surgery, and obstetrics, he also served as Assistant Clinical Professor at USC. Dr. Egler holds a master’s in Spiritual Psychology and certification from the Institute of Functional Medicine. An advocate for holistic health, he integrates evidence-based and functional approaches to optimize patient well-being. He is affiliated with AAFP, ACLM, IFM, and A4M. Egler talks about strategies to protect Angelenos from the health impacts of wildfire smoke and environmental toxins. Dr. Egler emphasized limiting exposure by staying indoors, using HEPA air purifiers, and wearing N95 or P100 masks when outside. He suggested saline nasal sprays, IV nutrient therapy with antioxidants like vitamin C and glutathione, and functional medicine approaches to mitigate oxidative stress. For vulnerable groups, tailored care and clean indoor environments are critical. Dr. Egler also recommended optimizing nutrition, hydration, and detox strategies, incorporating therapies like cryotherapy and HBOT, and prioritizing biomarker testing for resilience.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What immediate actions should Angelenos take to protect themselves from smoke inhalation?

Dr. Jeffrey Egler: As an Angeleno, the first and most important step to protect yourself from smoke inhalation right now is to limit exposure. Stay indoors as much as possible, keeping windows and doors tightly closed to prevent outdoor pollutants from entering your space. It’s also a great time to refresh any weather stripping in your home that needs repair. Using an air purifier with a HEPA filter is highly effective for reducing indoor air contaminants and improving air quality, too. If you absolutely must go outside, wearing a properly fitted N95 or P100 mask is critical. These masks filter out fine particulate matter that can deeply irritate your respiratory system. I also recommend using a saline nasal spray to gently cleanse your nasal passages, helping to remove any irritants you may have inhaled.

For a proactive approach to countering the oxidative stress caused by smoke exposure, consider replenishing your body’s defenses with IV nutrient therapy. At Next Health, we offer customized IV therapy options, including antioxidants like vitamin C and glutathione, which are key players in neutralizing harmful free radicals and supporting your immune system. This comprehensive strategy can make a significant difference in protecting your health during times of poor air quality. Stay vigilant, take these precautions, and prioritize your well-being during these challenging conditions.

Jacobsen: What can help mitigate the effects of smoke exposure and support lung health?

Egler: To mitigate the effects of smoke exposure and support your lung health, it’s important to focus on reducing inflammation and enhancing your body’s natural defenses. Antioxidant support is a key step—nutrients like N-acetylcysteine (NAC), vitamin C, and glutathione play a critical role in neutralizing free radicals produced by smoke exposure. These antioxidants help protect lung tissue from oxidative stress and promote recovery.

Incorporating breathwork and respiratory care into your daily routine can also provide relief. Simple deep breathing exercises can improve oxygen exchange and help expel irritants from your lungs. Using a humidifier in your living space adds moisture to the air, soothing irritated respiratory passages and reducing discomfort.

For a more advanced approach, consider Hyperbaric Oxygen Therapy (HBOT), which we offer at Next Health. This therapy delivers concentrated oxygen to your tissues, promoting healing and significantly reducing inflammation caused by smoke exposure. Another option to address systemic inflammation is cold therapy, such as cryotherapy, which can help calm your body’s inflammatory response and boost overall recovery.

Jacobsen: How can residents optimize diets and hydration to counteract increased environmental toxins from the LA fires?

Egler: To counteract the increased environmental toxins from the LA fires, optimizing your diet and hydration is essential for supporting your body’s natural detoxification processes. First and foremost, stay well-hydrated by drinking plenty of filtered water throughout the day. Proper hydration helps flush toxins from your system and supports kidney function. Adding electrolytes, like mineral salt or high-quality coconut water without added sugar, can further enhance hydration by ensuring your body maintains the right balance of minerals during this stressful time.

Incorporate anti-inflammatory, nutrient-dense foods into your diet to help combat oxidative stress. Focus on antioxidant-rich fruits like berries, leafy greens like kale and spinach, and spices like turmeric, which has powerful anti-inflammatory properties. Omega-3-rich fish, such as salmon or mackerel, can also provide essential fatty acids that help reduce systemic inflammation and support lung health.

For a more tailored approach, consider consulting with a functional medicine provider at Next Health. Our experts can work with you to create a personalized detox diet plan that aligns with your unique needs, incorporating supplements or specific food strategies to boost your body’s resilience. By prioritizing hydration and nutrition, you can equip your body to better manage the effects of environmental toxins and maintain optimal health.

Jacobsen: What advice do you have for those with pre-existing respiratory or cardiovascular conditions around fires?

Egler: For individuals with pre-existing respiratory or cardiovascular conditions, such as asthma, COPD, or heart disease, it’s especially important to take proactive steps to protect your health during these devastating fires. Start by closely following your prescribed management plan and ensuring that any rescue medications, like inhalers, are easily accessible. This preparedness can be life-saving if symptoms are triggered by poor air quality.

Everyone should leverage biomarker testing to gain a data-driven understanding of how your unique body is responding to environmental challenges. These tests can monitor inflammation and oxidative stress levels, helping to tailor your health strategy and address any potential risks before they escalate.

Another option to consider is ozone therapy, which enhances oxygen delivery throughout the body and can significantly reduce systemic inflammation, providing a supportive boost for your respiratory and cardiovascular systems. By combining these approaches, you can better safeguard your health during periods of heightened environmental stress while ensuring you remain resilient and well-equipped to manage pre-existing conditions.

Jacobsen: How does a functional medicine strategy address the health challenges posed by wildfire smoke and ash?

Egler: A functional medicine strategy is uniquely equipped to address the health challenges posed by wildfire smoke and ash by focusing on root cause identification and personalized solutions. Wildfire exposure introduces toxins and increases oxidative stress, so the primary goal is to support the body’s detoxification and immune response.

Detoxification support is essential for eliminating harmful pollutants from the body. Detox IV drips, rich in antioxidants like glutathione and vitamin C, can provide immediate relief by neutralizing free radicals and promoting cellular repair. Oral supplementation with antioxidants and binders, such as activated charcoal, can further aid in removing toxins from the system.

Strengthening the immune system is another critical component. Supplements like zinc and vitamin D can help bolster immune resilience, ensuring your body can better combat the inflammatory effects of smoke exposure.

At Next Health, our comprehensive wellness plans are designed to address inflammation, oxidative stress, and overall recovery. These personalized strategies combine advanced therapies and expert guidance to ensure your body is fully supported in mitigating the health impacts of wildfire exposure, promoting long-term resilience and vitality.

Jacobsen: What are practical tips for reducing the long-term risks associated with air pollution?

Egler: Reducing the long-term risks associated with air pollution requires a proactive and multi-faceted approach. Start by investing in your home’s air quality with high-quality air purifiers, particularly those equipped with HEPA filters, to minimize exposure to harmful airborne particles indoors. Clean, pollutant-free air is a crucial foundation for protecting your health over time.

Regular detoxification can also play a key role. Seasonal detox protocols, such as IV therapy to replenish antioxidants like glutathione and vitamin C, and sauna sessions to encourage sweat-based toxin elimination, are effective ways to support your body’s natural cleansing processes.

Lifestyle optimization is equally important. Focus on maintaining a nutrient-rich diet filled with antioxidant-rich fruits, vegetables, and healthy fats to combat oxidative damage. Engage in regular physical activity indoors during periods of poor air quality, and consider incorporating targeted supplements to further protect against inflammation and free radical damage. At Next Health, we offer tailored wellness plans to help you build long-term resilience, combining personalized detox strategies, advanced therapies, and nutritional support to keep you thriving despite environmental challenges.

Jacobsen: How can families support children and elderly members who are vulnerable to the impacts of the fires?

Egler: This question hits home for me as I serve as the functional medicine doctor for my own children, one of whom has asthma and has been especially impacted by the environmental toxins. Supporting children and elderly family members during fires requires thoughtful measures to address their unique vulnerabilities. Begin by creating a safe indoor environment. Use HEPA filters to maintain clean air, limit exposure to outdoor air by keeping windows and doors closed, and ensure everyone stays adequately hydrated to help flush toxins from their systems.

For more tailored care, consider pediatric or geriatric consultations with functional medicine providers. These specialists can address specific needs, whether it’s enhancing a child’s developing immune system or managing chronic conditions in older adults, with personalized strategies to mitigate the impacts of smoke and pollutants.

Wellness services can also be invaluable for recovery. IV therapy and antioxidant supplementation, such as glutathione and vitamin C, can provide critical support by combating oxidative stress and promoting overall resilience for vulnerable family members.

To empower families further, Next Health offers educational webinars and resources to help you stay informed about best practices for protecting loved ones. By combining safe environments, specialized care, and wellness resources, you can effectively support your family through the challenges of fire season.

Jacobsen: How can Los Angeles residents build health resilience?

Egler: Building health resilience as a Los Angeles resident involves taking proactive steps to support your body against environmental and lifestyle stressors. Start with routine biomarker testing to gain insights into inflammation levels, toxin exposure, and antioxidant capacity. This data provides a clear picture of your health and allows you to address potential issues before they escalate.

Optimizing core health pillars is equally vital. Prioritize quality sleep, effective stress management, balanced nutrition, and regular physical activity. Next Health’s 12-spoke Wellness Wheel framework is a powerful tool to help you identify any areas of weakness and create a plan to strengthen them, ensuring a holistic approach to resilience.

Incorporating therapies like cryotherapy and sauna sessions into your routine can further enhance your body’s defenses. Cryotherapy reduces inflammation, while sauna use promotes detoxification by encouraging sweat-based toxin elimination.

Finally, consider joining as a Next Health member to make health optimization part of your lifestyle. These personalized programs integrate advanced diagnostics, cutting-edge therapies, and expert guidance to help you build a strong foundation of health and resilience, enabling you to thrive in the face of Los Angeles’ unique environmental challenges.

By adopting these strategies, Angelenos can not only protect themselves during wildfire season but also invest in long-term health resilience. At Next Health, our mission is to empower you with cutting-edge tools and guidance to thrive in any environment.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Egler.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pimiskâw Scholarship to Support Indigenous Students

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/18

Genevieve Decarie a Conseillère en communication for UQAT. The Pimiskâw Scholarship competition at UQAT supports Indigenous students by recognizing academic excellence, perseverance, and community involvement, while reducing financial barriers to higher education. The program was co-created with Indigenous students, UQAT’s First Peoples Service, Mamawi Mikimodan, and FUQAT, ensuring it aligns with Indigenous realities and values. The name “Pimiskâw,” symbolizing paddling a canoe, reflects perseverance and support during academic challenges. Nearly $75,000 in scholarships are available for 2025, with applications open from January 6–26. Organizations can contribute by donating through FUQAT. The initiative promotes access to education, retention, and the inclusion of Indigenous culture in academia, reflecting UQAT’s commitment to First Peoples.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship competition support Indigenous students at UQAT?

Genevieve Decarie: This program will support several university career pathways and recognize the excellence, perseverance and commitment of Indigenous students. While helping to reduce social inequalities and promoting access to higher education, these scholarships are also intended to attract more Indigenous people to post-secondary studies, and more specifically to UQAT.

  • Excellence scholarships: aim to recognize the academic performance of students (in addition to results, various criteria will be considered such as attendance, progress, etc.).
  • Perseverance scholarships: Recognize the tenacity of students who have an atypical or challenging background, and who demonstrate determination by succeeding in their studies.  
  • Involvement scholarships: aim to recognize students’ involvement in the university and/or community environment (Note: paid work and involvement in the workplace will not be considered)

Jacobsen: How does the collaboration between FUQAT, UQAT’s First Peoples Service, Mamawi Mikimodan, and Indigenous students influence the Pimiskâw Scholarship program?

Decarie: The competition is the result of a close collaboration between the Fondation de l’UQAT (FUQAT), UQAT’s First Peoples Service (FPS), the Mamawi Mikimodan service and members of the Indigenous student community. This co-creation process has made it possible to design a program that responds to the realities of Indigenous students. 

For example, we consulted the members of the Indigenous student community and collaborated with them to develop a promising program that is adapted to their context, to better understand their needs and also to find a representative name for the competition, which would also highlight Indigenous language and culture. Through this initiative, we want to support them better and recognize the richness of their culture and their contribution to our university and our society.

Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship initiative reflect UQAT’s commitment to First Peoples?

Decarie: The Pimiskâw Scholarship competition is yet another example of the long-standing collaboration between UQAT and Indigenous people over the past several years, but also based on UQAT’s principle of territorial recognition.This is a concrete demonstration of the University’s commitment to valuing the knowledge, culture and resilience of First Peoples by implementing means to promote and encourage access to studies and academic perseverance.

Jacobsen: What cultural symbolism is represented by the name “Pimiskâw”?

Decarie: The name Pimiskâw was chosen following a consultation with UQAT’s Indigenous students. It was proposed by Jérémie Brazeau, a member of the Kitigan Zibi Anishinabe community and a student in the Bachelor of Teaching English as a Second Language program, at the Mont-Laurier Centre. The word refers to the action of paddling a canoe. “Being a canoeist, I associate my return to school with a trip down a river. Sometimes we run into rapids, but our canoe and our efforts will get us to where we want to go. I associate this financial aid with the canoe that helps us throughout our school career”, explains Mr. Brazeau. Pimiskâw symbolizes the support and perseverance needed to overcome the challenges of academic life. 

Jacobsen: What is the total amount of scholarships available?

Decarie: This year, nearly $75,000 in scholarships are available

Jacobsen: How can organisations contribute to supporting the Pimiskâw Scholarship program?

Decarie: The Pimiskâw program exists because of generous donors who offer various scholarships to recognize excellence, perseverance and commitment. Any organization wishing to support this program and offer scholarships to Indigenous students is invited to contact the Fondation de l’UQAT, who manages the program. In the near future, we’d like to develop new scholarships to attract Indigenous students to programs where they are less represented. For example, in engineering, digital creation and psychoeducation.

INFO: fondation@uqat.ca

Jacobsen: What is the timeline for Indigenous students to apply to the scholarships?

Decarie: Indigenous students will be invited to submit their applications from January 6 to 26, 2025. The scholarships will be awarded in part at the Vallée-de-l’Or Scholarships Gala on April 2nd at the First Peoples Pavilion on the Val-d’Or campus, or according to the recipients’ home campus. Many Indigenous students are distance learners, some in their own communities. The Foundation will find an appropriate way to give them their bursary.

Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship initiative aim increase access to post-secondary education?

Decarie: This program will support several university career pathways by reducing financial stress, enabling a better balance between family, work and study-related obligations, valuing post-secondary studies and encouraging student retention, etc.  

By reducing social inequalities and promoting access to higher education, these scholarships are also intended to attract more Indigenous people to post-secondary studies, and more specifically to UQAT.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Rob Scott, Chief Innovator of Monjur and IT Attorney

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/17

Robert Scott is a thought leader in managed services and cloud law serving as the Chief Innovator for his latest venture, Monjur, with a mission to redefine legal services. Robert has been recognized as the Technology Lawyer of the Year by Finance Monthly and carries an AV Rating as Preeminent from Martindale Hubbell. He represents major corporations in strategic IT matters including cloud-based transactions, managed services contracts, data privacy, and cybersecurity risk management. Robert is licensed to practice law in Texas and holds memberships in several professional associations, including the Dallas Bar Association and the Managed Service Providers Alliance Board. He regularly shares his insights on the MSP Zone podcast and is a frequent presenter in the industry. He discusses how organizations across industries are increasingly adopting data processing agreements (DPAs) in response to data protection regulations like GDPR, HIPAA, GLBA, and state-specific laws (CCPA/CPRA, CPA, CTDPA, SHIELD Act, CDPA). Well-drafted DPAs clarify roles, reduce breaches, strengthen defenses, and demonstrate compliance to regulators. However, hidden risks include imprecise or conflicting terms and risk-shifting provisions that belong in broader contracts. Proactive management, such as Monjur’s subscription-based DPA update service, is essential to staying aligned with emerging regulations. Cybersecurity risk management is a critical component, requiring clear breach response protocols and security obligations. Effective DPAs bolster market credibility by safeguarding trust and operations.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What factors drive the recent increase in data processing agreements across industries?

Rob Scott: The rise in data processing agreements is largely tied to the growing number of regulations around data protection and privacy. Laws like GDPR in Europe, HIPAA and GLBA in the U.S., and CMMC for government contractors have pushed organizations to take a closer look at how they handle data. In the U.S., we’re also seeing state-specific laws such as California’s CCPA/CPRA, Colorado’s CPA, Connecticut’s CTDPA, New York’s SHIELD Act, and Virginia’s CDPA driving the need for clear agreements. These frameworks are designed to protect data and create accountability, and businesses are increasingly recognizing the need to formalize their practices to meet these standards.

Jacobsen: How does the increase in data processing agreements safeguard organizations?

Scott: Well-drafted DPAs clarify roles and responsibilities, ensuring that everyone involved understands how data should be handled. This reduces the risk of mismanagement or breaches and gives businesses a strong defense if something goes wrong. They also demonstrate to regulators that companies are taking privacy and security seriously, which is a critical component of compliance.

Jacobsen: Are there any hidden risks from this?

Scott: Absolutely. One issue I often see is that end-user-provided DPAs include risk-balancing provisions that really belong in the Master Services Agreement or other primary documents. This can create conflicts and unnecessary liability. Additionally, businesses sometimes sign agreements without fully understanding the implications of vague or overly broad terms, which can expose them to compliance risks or enforcement actions. It’s all about aligning the DPA with the broader contractual framework to avoid surprises down the road.

Jacobsen: How can companies navigate the complex legal landscape of data compliance?

Scott: It starts with a strategy. Companies need to prioritize understanding their obligations under various laws and regulations and then align their internal policies accordingly. Partnering with experts who can demystify the complexities is crucial. It’s also important to build flexibility into your approach, as the legal landscape is constantly evolving.

Jacobsen: What are common legal loopholes in data processing agreements?

Scott: One common problem is failing to clearly define roles—like data controllers versus data processors—which can cause disputes over responsibility. Another is overlooking indemnity clauses or jurisdiction-specific requirements, leaving businesses exposed to risks they didn’t anticipate. These gaps can lead to significant liability if not addressed properly.

Jacobsen: How has Monjur redefined legal services in the context of IT?

Scott: Monjur has taken a proactive approach to legal compliance with services like our DPA update offering. For a small monthly fee, we manage our clients’ data processing agreements as a service. This means that as new laws are enacted or existing ones are updated, we dynamically revise their DPAs to ensure they remain compliant. It’s a hands-off, worry-free solution tailored for small businesses in IT and software, helping them stay ahead of regulatory changes without disrupting their operations.

Jacobsen: What role does cybersecurity risk management play in negotiation?

Scott: It’s critical. Cybersecurity risk management has moved from being a background concern to a primary focus in every negotiation. A strong agreement will address breach notifications, security requirements, and even audit rights. These terms ensure that all parties are actively working to minimize vulnerabilities.

Jacobsen: How do data processing agreements, done right and done wrong, impact a company’s operations or reputation?

Scott: When done right, DPAs build trust and protect operations. They show clients and regulators that you’re serious about compliance. On the flip side, poorly constructed DPAs can lead to compliance failures, breaches, and reputational damage that’s hard to recover from. It’s not just about avoiding penalties—it’s about maintaining credibility in the market.

Jacobsen: What are the current trends for managed services and cloud law that companies should be aware of?

Scott: Two big trends are shaping the landscape right now. First, shared responsibility models in cloud agreements are becoming the norm, which requires companies to clearly define their obligations. Second, AI governance is quickly becoming a key focus. As businesses rely more on AI tools, they need to understand how these technologies fit into existing compliance frameworks.

Jacobsen: Is there a way to balance the benefits of cloud-based transactions with privacy and security risks?

Scott: Yes, but it requires intentionality. Companies need to be transparent in their agreements, invest in robust security measures, and stay proactive about compliance. The balance comes from viewing privacy and security as integral to the business, not as barriers to growth.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Rob.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pamela Rutledge, Social Media Use and Positive Psychology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/16

Dr. Pamela Rutledge is a renowned media psychologist combining 20+ years of experience as a media producer with deep expertise in human behavior. She serves as the Director of the Media Psychology Research Center and is Professor Emerita of Fielding Graduate University’s Media Psychology program, where she develops courses on social technologies, audience engagement, and brand psychology. Her work spans design, development, and audience impact, helping clients like 20th Century Fox, Warner Bros., and the US Department of Defense build actionable consumer strategies and consumers create healthy relationships with media. Recognized by the American Psychological Association for her contributions, Dr. Rutledge has co-authored Exploring Positive Psychology: The Science of Happiness and Well-Being and contributed to notable works on media psychology. An expert source for outlets like The NY Times and Good Morning America, she also authors “Positively Media” for Psychology Today and is Editor-in-Chief of Media Psychology Review. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Social media is the name of the game for so many people now. What is the positive psychology orientation on social media use compared to the general use by, apparently, most people–so healthier and unhealthier uses of it?

Pamela Rutledge: Social media is getting a lot of attention right now, with people worrying about the negative effects. Social media, however, is any technology that enables us to connect socially across the internet. It has a lot of different platforms and uses, from connecting with friends and entertainment to finding useful information, building skills, and increasing productivity. How we use social media determines whether the impact is positive or negative. In spite of the current moral panic, social media effects vary widely from positive to negative based on individual differences.

Positive psychology focuses on the cultivation of skills and values that increase our sense of well-being, not just momentarily feeling good—what psychologists call hedonic happiness–but also longer-term satisfactions or eudaimonic happiness. Eudaimonic comes from the Greek concept of flourishing or living well, which emphasizes a meaningful life rather than simply seeking pleasure. We tend to stereotype social media use as short-term emotional fixes, but many interactions and content can foster a sense of meaning, purpose, and growth, contributing to a deeper sense of well-being and satisfaction with life.  Well-being and satisfaction, however, are a combination of both types of happiness: positive emotions and well-being or life satisfaction.

Positive emotions are pretty straightforward. They include things like happiness, joy, optimism, and hope.  However, well-being is more complicated and is a result of our ability to meet our basic needs.  These needs can be summarized by three things: 1) social connection and belonging, 2) agency—or our ability to take action and not feel helpless in our environment, and 3) competence, or our ability to act effectively when we take action. It’s easy to see how interacting on social media is motivated by these intrinsic drivers of human behavior: social media allows us to connect, take action, and see evidence of our actions. 

However, positive psychology also focuses on values as well as intrinsic motivations. Values are deeply held beliefs about what is important and meaningful in life, guiding our choices and actions toward a fulfilling and meaningful existence. They are a compass, influencing our decisions, behaviors, and interactions with the world around us. Culture and cultural norms play a significant role in shaping our values—our family, friends, and community influence what we believe is good, right, and important. The definitions of happiness, the prioritized values, and how life should be lived can vary significantly across cultures and social groups. 

People learn values through socialization. Family is one of the main sources of values, as children learn values directly from parents and other family members through observation, modeling, and explicit instruction. Similarly, friends, colleagues, and groups implicitly communicate values by reinforcing accepted behavioral norms required for group membership.

Media, including books, movies, music, and social media, also expose people to values and beliefs, shaping their understanding of the world.

Jacobsen: If people are using social media from super young ages and seeing them used from a young age, what is the impact on the development of personality?

Rutledge: Personality development is influenced by many factors: biological, intellectual, social, cultural, and situational. Social media is just one source of influence, and research in this area is correlational, not causal.  In other words, things may be related, but that doesn’t answer the chicken-and-egg question of whether one causes the other or if there are other factors involved. 

Social media, however, exposes users to images and lifestyles that can lead to negative social comparison. Social comparison, by the way, is a normal response to social situations and part of our survival instinct. Assessing our roles in a social environment was a critical factor in our survival and, in many senses, still is. Our ability to read what others want, empathize with their situations, and understand group dynamics is central to our ability to navigate our social world. 

Much of the concern about social media comes from assuming that it triggers negative social comparison in all users, thus damaging self-esteem and body image. These types of generalizations are vastly overstated.

Jacobsen: Does excessive social media use make people more self-involved digitally impair or improve empathy and narcissistic tendencies, lead to a idealized sense of self rather than a genuine one, impact the perception of everyone on individuals’ lives other than their own and potentially, lead to something like a constant validation loop? 

Rutledge: Before I answer each of those questions, I want to emphasize that social media use does not have a binary influence: this or that, all or nothing. No social media effects impact ALL users, and not all effects are the same. In fact, there are many different forms of social media with different participation and consumption behaviors (e.g., Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, video games, WhatsApp, forums, blogs, etc.).

Almost all social media research is self-reported and correlational. A correlation is a relationship, but it is not causal or directional.  All research is based on probabilities of something happening, not a certain outcome (e.g., “is likely to,” not “is”). So, a study that says excessive social media use is more likely to make people more self-involved would also say that more self-involved people are more likely to use social media excessively. This is true of concerns over mental health, narcissism, idealized self and identity development, inauthentic sense of self, and reliance on social validation of others. Research findings vary a lot based on how the researcher asks the questions and defines the variables.  For example, what is “excessive” social media use? 

But let’s focus on some fundamentals. Social media is relatively new, so people don’t innately have the skills to manage an always-on digital world with limitless information and access to a wider public than we can even conceive.  Our brains were not designed for this, which makes all of us, not just young people, vulnerable and reactive unless we learn the skills to anticipate our innate, primal tendencies and step into self-manage. Our brains are wired to notice change, to focus our attention on things that are out of the ordinary, to attend to interruptions (warnings), especially if they have a social component, to seek an understanding of our social and physical environment, and to adapt our behaviors to be fit in with our desired social groups.  All these innate tendencies were essential to our survival back in the Savannah.

When talking about kids, combine these innate factors with normal biological and neurological changes over their lifespan, and it helps understand the development tasks that shift motivations as people mature. For example, the normal developmental tasks of adolescents are identity development and the building of a social life outside the nuclear family. Recognizing this, it makes sense that teens would be focused on social media, connecting with friends, and keeping up with pop cultural trends to maintain social capital. Teens also do not have a fully developed prefrontal cortex, so they are less able to value longer-term goals and outcomes in favor of near-term rewards. 

The best approaches for keeping kids healthy and safe online are to give them training and the tools to understand and navigate the digital space and establish an open and trusting line of communication between parents and kids. Suppression and bans only make technology more desirable while making it less likely kids will come to you when there’s a problem. 

When young people can reflect on their technology use and its effect on their lives through the lens of digital literacy, they gain valuable skills essential to success on and offline.  For example, digital literacy teaches how persuasive technology manipulates attention, the psychology of positive and negative social comparisons, how to identify information sources and validity, how to search for information effectively, how to manage privacy settings, strategies for dealing with conflict, bullies, and trolls, and how to translate personal values, like respect, compassion, and empathy, to online behavior. Armed with digital literacy skills, young people are much less likely to have problematic social media use and much more likely to be able to avoid or at least handle trouble, misinformation, scams, and bullies.

Jacobsen: Does excessive social media use make people more self-involved or more other-involved? 

Rutledge: Social media can do both, depending on the context, how people use it, and their self-awareness. People who are vulnerable to the opinions of others may become preoccupied with fitting in, whether that’s looks, clothes, or gaming skills. On the other hand, social media can make people aware of social issues around the world, expanding someone’s view of self and others.

Jacobsen: Does media consumption digitally impair or improve factors like empathy and narcissistic tendencies? 

Rutledge: Social media consumption has been related to both.  Social media has been associated with an increased ability to understand and share others’ feelings and increase compassion, encouraging perspective-taking. However, empathy has been shown to decrease when social media is linked with polarization by reinforcing preexisting beliefs and reducing cognitive flexibility. It has also been linked to diminished empathy through desensitization to tragedy through constant exposure.

Jacobsen: How does online presentation, typically, lead to a idealized, curated form of the Self rather than a genuine, realistic one?

Rutledge: Online presentation typically leads to an idealized, curated demonstration of the self rather than a genuine, realistic one. People are motivated to show a positive and desirable public image, often leading them to select and edit the content they share carefully. This phenomenon is not unique to social media. People also curate their looks when they go to many offline activities, e.g., job interviews and parties, to present a desirable version of themselves that aligns with social norms and expectations. 

The pressure to conform can lead to idealized standards of appearance, lifestyle, and achievement that, if internalized, can lead to increased social anxiety and can negatively impact self-esteem and self-worth.  However, online platforms can also provide opportunities for self-expression and aspiration that have a positive impact.

Jacobsen: How does this impact the perception of everyone on individuals’ lives other than their own?

Rutledge: Without critical thinking, people may see social media like Instagram as an accurate representation of life rather than an artificial (and often filtered) construct. This can activate negative emotions, such as jealousy or feeling inferior, or it can be inspirational, depending on the user’s focus. The key here is critical thinking, knowledge of technology, like filters, and recognizing the human tendency for social comparison to provide context for content interpretation.

Jacobsen: Do these, potentially lead to something like a constant validation loop? They have to keep up with the next hot or popular trend.

Rutledge: The “constant validation loop” describes a cycle where people seek constant external validation through likes, comments, and shares on their posts, leading to an unhealthy reliance on social media for self-worth. When we receive positive feedback online, our brains release dopamine, creating a sense of pleasure and reward, reinforcing the behavior, and motivating us to seek more validation. Instant feedback offers a quick boost to our self-esteem, but the feeling is not sustained. Similarly, when we constantly measure our lives against the often idealized lives of others, it can increase feelings of inadequacy, also leading to a greater need for validation to fill the void.

Social validation is not restricted to online experiences. We see it every day in schools, the office, and community organizations—who has the most money, the best clothes, the fastest car, the smartest children, etc. The potential negatives of an unhealthy reliance on external validation include low self-esteem, addiction, anxiety, depression, and dissatisfaction with self or life. 

There are, however, strategies to recognize and manage this tendency.  These include building awareness of how your social media use and need for validation impact your well-being, setting boundaries (like blocking negative triggers) and limiting the time spent on social media platforms, focusing on internal validation by cultivating self-compassion, appreciating your strengths and accomplishments, finding activities that make you feel happy and fulfilled, such as spending time with loved ones, pursuing hobbies, or engaging in physical activity. 

Jacobsen: How does anonymity in some areas of the internet impact treatment of self and others, so social interactions?

Rutledge: Anonymity plays a significant role in crowd behavior, often leading to people acting differently than they would alone or in smaller, more identifiable groups. This is deindividuation, where people lose their sense of self-awareness and personal identity within a crowd, reducing their sense of responsibility and increasing conformity to group norms. The more people want to belong to a group, the more likely they are to suppress their individual sense of self and conform to the group norms.

Motivations for seeking anonymity online vary. Individuals with negative or developing self-perceptions may be drawn to anonymity because it gives them the freedom to explore different personas to fulfill self-related or identity needs. Individuals struggling with self-consciousness, social anxiety, and low self-esteem also tend to prefer anonymity online. In contrast, people with darker personality traits use anonymity online to satisfy more antisocial goals, like deceiving or bullying others. 

Jacobsen: How can social media be used to encourage prosocial behaviours?

Rutledge: Digital literacy is the first step in promoting prosocial online behaviors. It emphasizes the responsible use of technology and online safety and encourages critical thinking. When it comes to young people, parents can model the kind of behavior they’d like to see their kids emulate, from device use to treating others with respect.

Prosocial behavior involves actions that are intended to help or benefit others. There is no line between online and offline in today’s world. Digital citizenship is just an extension of the behavior we want to see and teach in person. Prosocial actions can be encouraged at home, at school, and at work by emphasizing the importance of a range of actions, from simple acts of kindness, such as sharing or comforting a friend, to more complex behaviors like volunteering or standing up against injustice. 

Publicly valuing prosocial behavior can shift social norms and culture and has numerous benefits. It not only promotes positive relationships and a sense of belonging but also fosters emotional well-being and resilience. People who engage in prosocial behavior tend to have higher levels of happiness and life satisfaction.

Jacobsen: What have been the largest cultural impacts of social media technology to date, and will likely be those large cultural changes stemming from them in the near future?

Rutledge: Social media has significantly influenced culture by shaping social interactions, communication, expectations, and societal values. 

Global connectivity has allowed people from different cultures and backgrounds to connect, share ideas, and collaborate. The rapid dissemination of information on social media has transformed how news is shared and consumed. This immediacy can lead to greater awareness of global and social events, but the volume of information also leads to information bubbles and the spread of misinformation.

Changes in how people communicate have driven expectations toward shorter, visual forms of communication like memes, gifs, and videos and rapid response.

Exposure to curated representations of others’ lives can lead to feelings of inadequacy and negative social comparison, impacting self-esteem and mental health for some users but providing opportunities for connecting with people that were previously beyond our reach.

Social media platforms allow anyone to create and share content, leading to a diversification of voices and perspectives that challenge traditional media narratives and also to the spread of conspiracy theories and misinformation with the potential for influencing political landscapes and bad actors.

Digital literacy and accountability are necessary for us to benefit from the positives and limit the negatives.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Pamela.

Rutledge: My pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub on Best and Worst Cities for Singles

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/15

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discussed the dynamics of dating in the U.S., noting that 46% of adults are unmarried. Dating costs have risen due to inflation and location-based economic factors. Cities like Atlanta, Las Vegas, and Seattle attract singles with fun and recreation, even if economics are challenging. Tinder’s popularity, broadband access, and smartphone usage significantly impact dating opportunities. Economic pressures, particularly in low-income areas, influence dating activity, while wealthier cities face demographic challenges. Cultural and economic trends in thriving metro areas like Seattle, Atlanta, and Las Vegas shape their appeal to singles.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, once again, we are here for the third day in a row with Chip Lupo, a WalletHub analyst. This discussion is a bit more lighthearted compared to the topic of elder abuse we covered last time.

I deal with a lot of human rights abuse issues, which can be quite heavy most of the time. So, it’s refreshing to discuss a lighter topic like this. According to the U.S. Census Bureau, 46% of the U.S. adult population is unmarried. This category includes those who have never been married, divorced, or widowed.

This statistic has created interesting American dating and marital landscape dynamics. Additionally, date-related activities have risen in price over the years due to inflation and other economic factors. So, what explains this trend of 46% of adults being unmarried in the United States? And why has dating become so prohibitively expensive?

Lupo: To address the second part of your question, dating has become more expensive primarily due to inflation. Depending on where you live, the cost of living may be higher, contributing to the expense. Whether it’s a trip to the movies, a sporting event, or a museum, factors like travel costs and the overall cost of living play a significant role. This can make dating quite costly, particularly in cities with abundant activities for singles.

The best cities for singles typically balance affordability with fun and recreation. As you mentioned, the unmarried demographic is diverse, encompassing those who have never married and those who are divorced or widowed. What appeals to one segment of this group may not resonate with another.

WalletHub’s research ranks the best cities for singles based on economics, fun and recreation, and dating opportunities. The top cities include Atlanta, Georgia; Las Vegas, Nevada; Seattle, Washington; Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; and Tampa, Florida. These cities rank highly, especially for their fun and recreational offerings, which often outweigh economic considerations.

You’re correct in observing that these cities emphasize fun and recreation, which offsets the financial challenges. The best cities tend to achieve a balance, but fun and recreation often take precedence. For instance, Atlanta and Las Vegas rank first and second in the fun and recreation category. However, Atlanta is slightly more expensive overall.

Dating opportunities. Now, this is an interesting dynamic, especially regarding dating opportunities. That boils down to factors such as, first and foremost, the share of the single population. There are some cities — and we’re talking strictly about cities, not the surrounding metro areas — where this dynamic plays out differently. This limitation negatively affects some high-population cities that are closer to larger urban areas.

Dating opportunities also consider the share of the single population, gender balance, and online dating opportunities. By “online dating opportunities,” we mean the share of households with broadband internet, enabling residents to access dating websites or apps. Mobile dating follows a similar logic and measures the share of residents who own a smartphone.

An interesting metric is Google search traffic for “Tinder.” Tinder is a social media outlet, and this metric measures the percentage of residents in a city who search for Tinder the most. If a city scores relatively high in these two areas, it can offset low economic scores. For instance, you mentioned Seattle, Washington. Its economics rank is 173rd out of 182 cities, yet it ranks 5th in dating opportunities and 9th in fun and recreation. This balance makes a difference.

Let’s look at another example. Last week, I talked to someone in Florida who wanted to know how their cities fare. Miami, Florida, was particularly interesting. It ranks 3rd in “things to do,” yet 176th in economics. It’s a very expensive place to live.

Despite being so expensive, Miami still manages to rank 15th overall. Miami could easily make the top 10 or even the top 5 if it were more affordable.

Jacobsen: When breaking down the weighting of factors, the main categories are economics, fun and recreation, and dating opportunities. The first two categories are each weighted at 25%, while dating opportunities are weighted at 50%. Interestingly, dating opportunities have the fewest subcategories but carry the most weight. These subcategories include the share of the single population, gender balance, online dating opportunities, mobile dating opportunities, and Google search traffic for the term “Tinder.”

Why are those subcategories, such as metrics 31 through 35, given so much weight when considering the overall picture of cities and singles?

Lupo: Dating opportunities are the most critical criteria for single people seeking a significant other. Single individuals want to know if they’re in an environment surrounded by like-minded, single people. For example, if you’re single and living in a place like Scottsdale, Arizona — I’m just throwing this out there — or any other city known as a retirement haven, it might not be ideal if you’re in your twenties and surrounded by an older single population.

This is why dating opportunities are so important. They directly influence whether a city attracts singles looking for meaningful connections.

JWhat chance do I have of meeting someone in my city based on gender balance and the shared single population? And, of course, factors like internet and phone access—would I be able to join certain dating sites? Would those sites be accessible? 

Jacobsen: It seems like these factors weigh more heavily than the others. Also, using Tinder as a search metric is particularly interesting since so many dating apps are available. Why was Tinder chosen, and were other apps considered for inclusion in that metric?

Lupo: Well, I can’t say for sure, Scott, but from what I understand, Tinder is considered the gold standard for social media among singles. I assume it’s the most interactive, though that’s a guess. Its metrics carry double weight in the analysis, so there must be something significant about it.

Jacobsen: Let me clarify for the audience. There are no financial conflicts of interest regarding this research, correct?

Lupo: Correct.

Jacobsen: Is there a point where economics becomes an overwhelming factor in dating opportunities? The top-ranked cities for singles don’t always do well in economics. However, they still provide plenty of opportunities. People are taking advantage of these opportunities despite the economic challenges. Do you notice a point in the statistics where economics significantly affects how willing people are to use dating apps or go on dates?

Lupo: There is such a point, but it’s more reflective of the overall economics of the city. For instance, a city like Tampa, Florida, has a relatively strong economy and an economics rank of 110. In contrast, Portland, Oregon, ranks 150. If you’re in a low-income city or state, the breaking point for economic pressure comes sooner than in a place with higher income or strong 

Even in cities like New York City or Washington, D.C.—which have extremely high living costs—higher wages can sometimes offset the economic challenges. Washington, D.C., for example, ranks 179th in economics, but because it’s a world health hub with relatively high incomes, some of those pressures are mitigated. However, if you’re single, a student, or earning a lower income, the breaking point could still come much sooner in high-cost cities like D.C.

Jacobsen: Why do we find that people still aren’t going on dates in some wealthy cities?

Lupo: That’s an interesting question. Even in rich cities, economic pressures still exist for certain demographics, especially students or young professionals who aren’t yet earning high wages. Social and cultural factors also play a role in influencing whether people feel comfortable or inclined to date actively.

Again, it depends on the environment and how you define “single.” Someone who is divorced, for instance, might be more eager to get back into the dating scene, especially in places like Washington, D.C., or New York City. If for no other reason, perhaps to keep up appearances.

That would be my guess as well. By the way, I just checked—New York City ranks dead last in economics at 182nd but ranks 4th in fun and recreation. So, there’s a balance there. Folks in New York have to decide: there’s much to do here, but at what point does affordability limit those opportunities?

Jacobsen: Right. I’ve used Tinder before, and New York might have one of the biggest user bases for the app. People find a way regardless of the cost. Are there any cultural consistencies between Seattle, Atlanta, and Las Vegas?

Lupo: Cultural? Well, one consistency is that these three cities are thriving metro areas. Their populations have exploded over the last 10 years, making them up-and-coming hubs that continue to grow. Economically, at least for Atlanta and Seattle, there’s solid job growth. I don’t know about Las Vegas beyond the gaming industry.

Still, these cities share a common thread. People flocking to them from other areas are attracted by opportunities and quality of life. While the economic rankings differ—Seattle ranks 103rd, and Las Vegas is 140th—they all have plenty of things to do. These sprawling urban areas offer various activities, making them attractive for singles and families.

Jacobsen: Hey, Chip, I appreciate your time today.

Lupo: Oh, glad to be here! It’s always a pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thank you. I appreciate your insights. I’ll keep an eye on my emails, and if I come across anything else of interest, I’ll reach out so we can talk again.

Lupo: Absolutely. Thank you so much. Take care.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Lupo: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Daniel Shea and Nasrudin Salim on Chatoyance

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/14

Daniel Shea, M.Sc. is the founder and CEO of Chatoyance. Shea possesses a Master’s degree in Computer Science from the University of New Hampshire, with several years of industry experience in software engineering. He has published freelance articles on foreign exchange market strategy analysis and has published software analyzing fractals in the foreign exchange markets. Leveraging his experience with software design and financial markets, he started Chatoyance with the intent of transforming the way independent investors approach the foreign exchange market. 

Nasrudin Salim is the Co-Founder, COO and CTO of Chatoyance. He has worked in the financial trading and banking industry specializing in machine learning and previously headed the ML operations team in DBS Bank, led AI architecture in OCBC Bank, the 2 of the largest banks in Singapore and Asia and was VP of Engineering in Almanak which uses AI agents for on-chain trading in web3. His specialty is in building machine learning and AI systems at scale and also in real-time processing.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: When did you two meet?

Daniel Shea: We first met in 2012 in a high IQ society called Torr. Nasrudin had posted an internal message to the group about his recent experiences trading on the foreign exchange market, and I followed up with my own. We discussed more offline, then started working on independent trading projects with each other. One such project was a platform that allowed us to automatically mirror each other’s trades via a central server with which our separate trading platforms would communicate. We then realized we could scale this up to a wider audience, and Chatoyance was born.

Nasrudin Salim: In 2012, I was an 18 year old back then, having started trading at the age 14 with my parent’s money. I did a bit of bitcoin and forex and found success during a time when the market was not as volatile and full of trading agents and bots like today. I posted some insights into a high IQ society called Torr which had a minimum IQ requirement to join at 146, percentile at the 99.87th. Dan replied to some of my posts and we realized we both approached trading from a systems engineering perspective. At first we did simple trading projects, and then later we came to the idea of building a sort of trade sharing collective. Dan did most of the work initially as I didn’t know how to code much back then but grew rapidly later. We started building custom integrations to mirror each other’s trades on the popular platform MetaTrader 4. Then eventually it was about mirroring everyone in a group, not just one-way but bidirectional as many-to-many communication.

Jacobsen: What was the origin of the idea for Chatoyance?

Shea: Chatoyance initially started as a social trading platform which, as mentioned, was itself started as a means for us to share trades in real-time. This gradually evolved into a platform that generated trading strategies based on predefined characteristics using genetic programming. Though these two services would seem quite distinct, there are some core similarities, chief among them being the idea that many strategies operating in parallel outweigh a lone strategy over time and that there is a constant need to reevaluate and cycle out strategies as market conditions evolve.

Nasrudin Salim:  Early on, we thought, “why limit these mirrored trades to just us?” Both of us were layering signals, blending sentiment and quant metrics. The strategy seemed scalable and liquidity was deep. The original concept was basically a distributed, real-time signal exchange. It was like a sandbox where multiple strategies or traders could compete, evolve, and reinforce each other. As the system matured, we introduced genetic programming to shape custom strategies on the fly. So, from the start, the seed idea was that multiple concurrent approaches can minimize single-strategy fragility. That’s how Chatoyance was born.

Jacobsen: How has the business and technology, and software, landscape for Chatoyance’s focus changed in the last ten years?

Shea: There is certainly more competition in this space now than there was one decade ago. This is likely due to the lower barrier to entry and a hype cycle when it comes to AI. Some of the core tech has changed over time to reflect advances in the field. But another change has been the interest in different asset classes over time. Our software is designed to accommodate currency pairs, equities, commodities, cryptocurrencies, and more, but interest from clients has shifted over the years. Forex was the initial interest one decade ago. These days, equities and cryptocurrencies are asked about more regularly.

Nasrudin Salim: The stack is radically different. A decade ago, market data pipelines were heavier and less real-time. Now, I have a cheap feed of tick-level crypto, forex, equities and also options data and can run complex ML models, even LLMs directly on live streams. Cloud infra matured, open-source AI toolkits exploded, and more competition due to now a lower barrier to entry. We’ve seen forex become less sexy and crypto become standard for high-risk plays. I had to ensure the underlying architecture scales to new asset classes fluidly. We’re definitely dealing with a more fragmented but also more flexible ecosystem.

Jacobsen: How is machine learning and AI built into the business?

Shea: The core product that we offer to clients is a service that automates the construction of trading strategies based on current market conditions. Additional tiers involve full portfolios, that is to say many strategies of different trading styles or risk tolerances per the desires of the client, and strategies that evolve as market conditions change over time, owing to the fact that any strategy which works in the short term is unlikely to hold for long. This is ultimately done by leveraging AI. That is said with the full acknowledgement that the term “AI” can be quite loaded and overused these days, often used to placate certain audiences. Despite the current implications of the term, there is indeed no better term to describe what is being done. With that said, just about anyone could develop an application that outputs strategies by the end of a weekend-long hackathon. The breadth of technical indicators used, entry and exit strategy logic employed, optimization criteria supported, money management strategies considered, and robust filtering logic included all coalesces to form a more comprehensive offering than competing organizations.

Nasrudin Salim: We apply ML from the ground up. Every piece of the puzzle from market microstructure to anomaly detection, dynamic portfolio rebalancing. We mix between simple algorithms, genetic optimization to traditional machine learning, then to reinforcement learning and now LLMs. The key is continual learning. Strategies adapt as new conditions emerge and so do the humans who now build how these strategies are going to adapt. Like including meta-learning concepts, model ensembles, and reinforcement signals. The result is that you’re not stuck with stale logic. It morphs as volatility regimes shift or as new liquidity venues pop up.

Jacobsen: How does Chatoyance build more social trading into the trader networks?

Shea: The first iteration of Chatoyance was a more social experience. The idea was that there would be different trading rooms, and members of these rooms would automatically copy each other’s trades through our software. There would be safeguards in place, such as the option of enabling private rooms, muting certain traders so they could only receive trades but not contribute any to the group themselves, and so on. The idea was that, if you had a room of traders each interacting with the markets, the collective gains would outweigh the collective losses, resulting in everyone benefiting from the participants’ engagement.

The business model was that users registered with an affiliated broker, and thus commission was collected on each trade. Since a single trade was replicated for each user in a trading room, this meant a single action from a user could result in wider commissions due to each member simultaneously opening or closing the trade.

In practice, this was not quite the case. Often, people would join trading rooms and wait for others to make the first move. Those who were more experienced did not feel a motivation to contribute trades without some clearer incentive. Some ideas, such as profit sharing on commission, were proposed, but ultimately, if someone is skilled at swing trading the markets, they are more likely to go into fund management themselves than potentially risk it all on some other member running a huge drawdown.

So the idea was ultimately scrapped after several months. However, the idea of many traders bringing their own strategies to a collective single trading room has a spiritual line to our later concept of automated strategy generation with distinct trading personalities, together constructing an automated portfolio.

Nasrudin Salim: We learned that simple social mirroring wasn’t sticky. Traders either lurk or they just want someone’s edge without giving their own. So instead, we integrated the “social” element into a collaborative network of AI-driven strategy modules. Each “node” in the network is like a trader with a personality. From maybe momentum-focused, or mean-reversion-heavy, and they collaborate by sharing signals and outcomes. It’s less about people copying each other and more about these agent-like strategies feeding into each other’s learning loops, evolving collectively to handle shifting regimes. It’s social trading, but via synthetic participant strategies rather than pure human interaction.

Jacobsen: How do you do risk management?

Shea: Risk management is particular to the client, but there are many levers to pull when assessing one’s risk tolerance. Risk management can range from high-level goals, such as drawdown thresholds and Sharpe ratio targets, to finer-grained details such as exit strategies, money management strategies, partial entries and exits, and more. Many times, people will state that they want a high-risk high-reward strategy, but suddenly get cold feet at the first sight of what that risk entails. There is an element of getting to the heart of one’s true risk tolerance before crafting a template that generates appropriate strategies.

Nasrudin Salim:  Risk management is programmatic and multi-layered. For crypto, for example, I might impose real-time volatility-adjusted position limits. For a more traditional asset, we might weigh by a blend of sector correlation risk and liquidity depth. The user sets broad tolerances like max drawdown or desired sorting ratio. From there, the ML system translates that into execution-level heuristics. The idea is we fuse top-down constraints with bottom-up adaptive strategies.

Jacobsen: How do fractals play into financial markets?

Shea: Fractals are one indicator among many that are baked into the product. The algorithm may use fractals depending on market conditions, but may not. The interest in fractals in particular comes from an old technical indicator that was published to the MQL Marketplace (https://www.mql5.com/en/market/product/4131). However, in the current iteration of the product, it is not highlighted any more prominently than additional indicators, ranging from the standard basket (ADX, ATR, CCI, EMA, MACD, RSI, etc.) to the more esoteric (candlestick patterns, Fibonacci retracements, Elliott Waves, etc.) depending on the interests of the client.

Nasrudin Salim: Maybe fractal-based signals matter in certain trending conditions or where micro-structure has repeating patterns. if the system thinks fractals add incremental predictive power given current conditions, it’ll use them. As one of the architects of Chatoyance, I add it as just another tool that our systems could use, and the choice is autonomous. If not, it won’t. We never rely on a single tool. Everything competes on a data-driven meritocracy.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges facing technology-driven financial companies?

Shea: At least from the conversations I have with others in this space, I notice that there is often an overreliance on technical indicators at the cost of fundamentals. This makes sense from a programmatic perspective as engineers can readily integrate these into their models. With that said, the fusion of technicals and fundamentals is necessary to arrive at a more holistic view of the market, all of which serves to only improve the outputs of the algorithm.

Nasrudin Salim: One of the big ones is bridging the gap between what’s quantifiable and what’s real. Pure technical systems might ignore underlying credit conditions, macro news, or liquidity crises until it’s too late. Also, data noise, market manipulation, and wild regulatory shifts can break your models. It’s crucial to design adaptive frameworks that don’t assume static conditions. We’re constantly at war with overfitting and model drift. Especially in cryptocurrency where a lot of the movements originate from insider activity and information found in web3 ‘Cabals’ that exists as Telegram group chats, which can only be joined through connections or NFT purchases.

Jacobsen: What are the guiding principles of Chatoyance?

Shea: It is deceptively simple to say that one’s financial goals are just to “make lots of money.” As discussed earlier, people may feel confident moving forward with a high-risk high-reward strategy at first, only to recoil at the first drop. This isn’t entirely unexpected; after all, a safer market experience would be to invest in a set-and-forget whole market ETF. To pursue these strategies is to expect higher reward at the cost of higher risk. However, even in this more narrow range of higher risk tolerance, there is a wide window of consideration and opportunity. We ultimately aim to reconcile this risk-reward trade-off on a per-client basis and arrive at a portfolio that doesn’t fail to impress.

Nasrudin Salim: We want to democratize robust strategy generation. It’s not just “make money fast.” it’s “craft a strategy that aligns with your true risk appetite and thrives under evolving conditions.” We want to give clients a toolkit that doesn’t lock them into a fixed view of markets. Instead, we shape a pipeline that constantly checks itself like adjusting parameters, evaluating signals, pruning weak strategies, doubling down on robust ones.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Shea: Thank you for giving us the opportunity to highlight what we have built! This space moves slow and then fast all at once. The journey has been edifying, humbling, and exhilarating. We have many years behind us and are looking forward to many more.

Nasrudin Salim: Happy to share what we’re up to. It’s been good to lay it all out.

Chatoyance Pte. Ltd. (“Chatoyance”) The materials and data contained on this website and any related mobile application are for information only and shall in no event be construed as an offer to purchase or sell, or the solicitation of an offer to purchase or sell, any securities in any jurisdiction. Chatoyance does not make any representation, undertaking, warranty, or guarantee as to the timeliness, completeness, correctness, reliability, or accuracy of the materials and data herein. Certain statements made on this Site may not be based on historical information or facts and may be “forward looking statements”. Actual investment results may differ materially from these forward-looking statements due to a number of factors, including future changes or developments in the business of a company featured on this Site or other political, economic, legal, and social conditions. All opinions, forecasts, or estimates expressed herein are subject to change without prior notice. Chatoyance and its affiliates accept no liability or responsibility whatsoever for any direct or consequential loss and/or damages arising out of or in relation to any use of opinions, forecasts, materials, and data contained herein or otherwise arising in connection therewith.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Vlada Polishchuk, Canadian Development Manager: Dignitas Fund

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/13

Vlada Polishchuk, Canadian Development Manager for Dignitas Fund, talked about her mission and efforts. Dignitas operates in Ukraine and the U.S., focusing on training, supplying drones, and providing humanitarian aid like mobile laundry units. Polishchuk’s role involves fostering collaborations, raising awareness, and exploring Canadian expansion. She highlighted the challenges of declining donations after years of conflict and the need for innovative approaches to fundraising. Despite political shifts, established donor trust has been key. Polishchuk expressed concerns over worsening conditions in Ukraine and emphasized the urgency of global support to counter aggression and safeguard broader regional stability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your role?

Vlada Polishchuk: I volunteer with Dignitas Fund as the Canadian Development Manager.

Jacobsen: What does that role involve, and what is the scope of Dignitas?

Polishchuk: Currently, Dignitas operates through two charitable organizations: in the United States as Dignitas Ukraine, and in Ukraine as Dignitas Fund. Essentially, we are one team of motivated people. We are now taking steps to explore the potential for establishing operations and collaborations in Canada.

My role involves

  • fostering potential collaborations,
  • facilitating the exchange of experiences and
  • raising awareness about the work of Dignitas.

Jacobsen: When it comes to Dignitas Canada, is Canada the home base or an extension of Dignitas?

Polishchuk: We currently operate primarily in Ukraine and the U.S. In Canada, we would function as an extension of the organization. However, we are actively exploring developing a stronger presence here.

I would love to see a fully established Dignitas Canada one day.

Jacobsen: What about products? What kind of products do you provide, what do they do, and how is this funded?

Polishchuk: Our product management efforts are focused on supporting Ukrainians. We supply drones, and we have launched initiatives to enhance training efforts. For example, our Flight to Recovery program empowers veterans through simulation and FPV drone training.

Additionally, we have implemented projects like providing mobile laundry units to aid those in need. Our work is focused on the first responders and defenders of Ukraine, as well as Ukrainian veterans, with an overall focus on helping Ukraine win this war through technological advancements. These efforts aim to save lives, strengthen defences, and protect people, with the ultimate goal of achieving victory for Ukraine and safeguarding its sovereignty.

Jacobsen: Are the operations in Ukraine different from those in the U.S.?

Polishchuk: Yes, the operations differ significantly. Dignitas conducts training programs in Ukraine, particularly in the eastern regions and other key locations. Most of our operations are centred in Ukraine, focusing on direct support and on-the-ground initiatives.

Our primary focus in the U.S. is fundraising. We are now expanding these efforts to Canada and seeking investors and collaborators.

Jacobsen: How is the search for investors going in Canada?

Polishchuk: The search has been progressing well. I joined Dignitas about a month ago, and it has been an active and productive start. I’ve met many interesting individuals—some from Canada, others from Europe or Ukraine.

Even though my primary focus is on Canada, I’ve found myself connecting with a global network of people. It’s fascinating to see how interconnected this work is. Many of my contacts have ties to Ukraine or other parts of the world. I’m optimistic that we will see positive outcomes from these efforts within the next month or so.

I can’t disclose more than that, but it’s exciting. I’m confident that, by doing so, we will raise awareness about what we are doing and make a significant difference in the direction of things.

Jacobsen: What are the struggles that come up in fundraising? Every organization with someone trying to make contacts for investors will probably get more “no’s” than “yeses.” So, how do you pursue this?

Polishchuk: Absolutely. Overall, Maria Berlinska, one of our cofounders, has been working on raising awareness about drones since around 2014 or 2015.

At that time, people were like, “What are you talking about?” because discussing drones felt like something new and unfamiliar. I wouldn’t say people took it seriously back then. It was challenging to move in that direction.

Dignitas is well-established in Ukraine and known in the U.S. In terms of fundraising, we have many established investors who trust us. We ensure transparency and inform them about our progress and plans to maintain engagement.

However, after three years of the full-scale invasion, we have observed a decline in donations and support. This motivates us to be even more creative and push harder to meet our goals.

Jacobsen: Does the political context of various Western countries influence your strategies for outreach to funders? For instance, if a new prime minister or president exists in one of the major funding countries, does that factor into your planning?

Polishchuk: With our currently established network, I don’t think it significantly affects our context. We have built trust with our donors and prioritize transparency about our costs, plans, and ongoing efforts.

Polishchuk: Our focus is on deepening and expanding our work. The people who donate to us are already on our side, supporting what we do regardless of political shifts in their countries.

Jacobsen: Does the leadership in countries, such as new presidents or prime ministers, influence your efforts?

Polishchuk: It doesn’t make that big of a difference for our trusted donors, but influences how we target large scales in terms of people. Our cause can be positioned relative to different leaders and so influences support.  

If the leadership takes an approach that does not prioritize Ukraine’s fight for resources and strength to push back against aggression, it impacts public opinion, actions, and even digital donations on a larger scale.

We’ve also observed a decline in the frequency of conversations about Ukraine. People are becoming desensitized to what’s happening. However, the intensity of the attacks or the frontline situation has remained the same. The situation has worsened.

For example, last year, in 2023, when I was in Ukraine, the Pokrovsk and Kostiantynivka regions were relatively safer. You could still travel there, breathe, and feel a moment of normalcy despite the chaos. Now, these areas are at the center of the conflict, frequently appearing in the news. The scale of destruction is insane, and Russian forces are progressing at an alarming speed.

It’s heartbreaking to see places I have warm memories of—charming towns and villages—now devastated. The scale of the destruction is staggering. It’s clear that if we slow down our efforts, things will only worsen.

I’m curious about what 2025 might look like if we don’t push as hard as we can and take this situation seriously. From my point of view, this isn’t just a threat to Ukraine—it’s a threat to other countries as well.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Vlada.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo, The Neediest States in the U.S.

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/12

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo talks about 2024’s neediest cities in the United States. WalletHub analyzed 182 cities using 28 key indicators of economic disadvantage, such as child poverty, unemployment, food insecurity, and health metrics. Cities like Detroit, Gulfport, and Brownsville rank poorly in economic well-being and health indicators. Faith-based nonprofits, like the Salvation Army, are critical in providing support. Lupo emphasizes significant gaps between cities, such as a 30-times difference in homelessness rates. Seasonal needs spike in winter and summer due to extreme weather. Solutions require local leadership and grassroots action to address these issues effectively.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with Chip Lupo of WalletHub. We will be talking about 2024’s neediest cities in the United States. So, how do we define neediness in the United States?

Chip Lupo: Okay, Scott. We analyzed 182 U.S. cities—these are the largest cities by population—based on 28 key indicators of economic disadvantage. This includes everything from child poverty, food insecurity, and uninsured rates to other factors that help us understand where Americans need the most support.

Jacobsen: And when they’re looking for support, what are the main social supports? What are the main economic supports? What are the main religious or institutional supports? In other words, what are some concrete ways these needs are being met, with specific examples?

Lupo: It’s interesting you bring that up because there seems to be a trend where people are increasingly turning to faith-based institutions for support. In many urban and low-income areas—which we’ll discuss in more detail—there’s a perception that government policies have not provided sufficient help.

When we talk about economics specifically, we mean child poverty rates, adult poverty rates, unemployment rates, homelessness rates, bankruptcy rates, and foreclosure rates. So, people often look within their communities or turn to faith-based institutions for assistance. Initial government efforts may have been well-intentioned in many of these areas but have yet to catch up over time.

Jacobsen: And now, with overall religion in the United States declining—whether in terms of total numbers, attendance, or adherence to faith-based practices—are we still seeing an increasing reliance on these institutions? Or are they as impactful as they’ve always been regarding social provisions?

Lupo: They’re about as impactful as they’ve always been. However, we’re not necessarily talking about formal religious institutions like churches. We’re referring more to faith-based nonprofit groups—organizations like the Salvation Army.

These types of charitable organizations, which are faith-based to some extent, are relied upon more frequently now. Of course, because the demand for their services is so high, many of these groups are stretched thin. They depend heavily on donations and volunteer support to keep their operations running and to serve these communities.

Jacobsen: What do you notice about some of the neediest cities, like Detroit, Michigan, Gulfport, Mississippi, and Brownsville, Texas?

Lupo: These cities consistently rank poorly in two main areas: economic well-being and health and safety. We touched on economic well-being earlier—factors like poverty, unemployment, and foreclosure rates.

Regarding health and safety, we’re looking at indicators like the uninsured rate, the share of severely overcrowded homes, and the percentage of adults who needed to see a doctor but couldn’t afford to. Other indicators include depression rates, suicide rates, and crime rates.

The three cities you mentioned—Detroit, Gulfport, and Brownsville—consistently rank among the lowest in economic, health, and safety indicators. Their rankings in these areas place them among the neediest cities in the United States.

Jacobsen: What are you weighing more—economics or health and safety—for neediness?

Lupo: Those two are equal; they’re the two main dynamics. Now, within each, we have metrics that carry different weights. For example, with economic well-being, we assign triple weight to metrics such as child, adult, and homelessness rates. We give full weight to metrics such as unemployment and underemployment.

That’s key because, in many of these areas, people may have jobs, but those jobs are often several levels below their qualifications. For example, you may have a master’s degree in a specific field but can’t find work there. As a result, you take a lower-paying job or something far below what your qualifications merit.

We also assign full weight to high school dropout rate and median credit score indicators. Consumer bankruptcies receive half weight, while economic security also receives half weight.

In the health and safety dimension, uninsured rates and food insecurity rates get full weight. This is critical in what are now being called food deserts—areas where access to quality produce or supermarkets is severely limited. In many cases, crime in these areas is so rampant that supermarkets close or relocate because they can’t sustain business under those conditions.

We also assign full weight to indicators like the share of severely overcrowded homes and the share of adults who needed to see a doctor but couldn’t afford to.

But, to answer your question directly—on a scale of 100, economic well-being gets 60 points, and health and safety gets 40 points. So, it does tilt slightly more toward economics because it’s likely a more accurate gauge of neediness in these areas.

Jacobsen: And how are the worst-performing cities looking in terms of child and adult poverty rates?

Lupo: Let’s see. For child poverty rate:

  • Detroit, Michigan ranks 2nd worst,
  • Gulfport, Mississippi, is 8th from the bottom, and
  • Brownsville, Texas, is 14th from the bottom.

For adult poverty rate:

  • Detroit has the highest rate,
  • Gulfport ranks 8th highest, and
  • Brownsville is the 10th highest.

Detroit also has the highest underemployment rate.

Jacobsen: How long have you been conducting this particular neediness study?

Lupo: To my knowledge, I can recall that we’ve been doing it for at least 2 or 3 years, as far as. It may go back even further. I’d check with Diana on that one, but we’ve conducted this study as far back as 2020.

Jacobsen: And what about unemployment and uninsured rates? How do these factor into the degree to which some of these worst-performing cities are addressing the needs of their citizens?

Lupo: Okay. For unemployment:

  • Detroit has the highest unemployment rate at almost 7.5%.
  • Gulfport ranks 121st, which is relatively good out of 182 cities.
  • Brownsville ranks 19th worst.

For underemployment:

  • Detroit ranks 1st for underemployment, meaning it’s the worst.
  • Gulfport performs better in this metric, and Brownsville has a very low underemployment rate.

Now, regarding Brownsville—being in the South Texas area, there’s a lot of agriculture and farming, so underemployment may not be as significant an issue there. People are likely employed in agricultural jobs that fit their immediate skills, even if they’re not highly specialized roles.

So, to recap, Detroit is the most concerning city with high unemployment and underemployment rates, while Brownsville and Gulfport show mixed results depending on the metric.

Jacobsen: Gulfport ranks 171st, and Brownsville ranks 181st. So, they’re not as bad in terms of underemployment as they are for unemployment in those areas. Now, let’s see what else we can look at here. When you’re looking at the highs and lows of neediness in the United States, are the gaps significant across the spectrum, or is there simply a rank order,, and the gaps are relatively close overall?

Lupo: The gaps are pretty sizable. Let’s look, for example, at the the child poverty rate. Cleveland, Ohio, has the highest child poverty rate, while Pearl City, Hawaii, has the lowest. That’s a 13-times difference. So, a child in Cleveland is 13 times worse off than one in Pearl City, Hawaii.

For adult poverty rate, Detroit has the highest rate, which is 6 times worse than in Pearl City, Hawaii.

When it comes to homelessness, the difference is even more dramatic. There’s a 30-times difference between Honolulu, Hawaii, which has the highest homelessness rate, and Overland Park, Kansas, which has the lowest.

Depending on the metric, we’re seeing some significant gaps between the cities performing the worst and those performing the best. This highlights the discrepancies in economic well-being, health, and safety across the country and raises the question of how we bridge those gaps.

Jacobsen: Some of your research focuses on actionable. If people want to reduce the neediness in their city, what policies or social programs seem reasonable to implement based on the data?

Lupo: It begins at the local level. Residents need to petition their local leaders or legislatures to revamp existing policies. If those leaders aren’t addressing the issues, residents need to vote them out and bring in new leadership to prioritize these challenges.

I don’t know if you’ve been following the situation in Chicago, but there’s been significant tension between citizens and city officials over illegal immigration. The city wants to raise taxes to fund services for an influx of immigrants, but residents have had enough. They’re confronting the mayor and assembly members, saying, “You need to look out for us first and not raise taxes to support people who are here illegally.”

We’re starting to see more backlash in impoverished, high-crime communities. Residents are stepping up, making their voices heard, and demanding action. Change has to start at the grassroots level—you can’t petition Washington for solutions until you’ve addressed issues at city hall. Any meaningful improvements in these communities must begin locally and work their way up.

Jacobsen: I have time for one more question. What should we ask here? Are there differences—these are annual studies—but are there seasons in which Americans overall are more needy than others, like the winter or summer?

Lupo: Well, based on the data, this time of year—the holiday season—tends to highlight neediness the most. It’s a season of giving and charity, which brings these issues to the forefront even more.

But in a place like Detroit, for example, where winters can be brutally cold, there’s a significant degree of homelessness, and the need for shelter, warmth, and clothing becomes far more urgent.

Similarly, during the peak of summer, during heat waves, people need air conditioning, access to hydration, and cooling centers to survive. So, yes, I would say that winter and summer—the two peak seasons—are when neediness seems to be the greatest.

Jacobsen: Well, Chip, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it, as always. 

Chip Lupo: Oh, absolutely! That was great.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Denise Berkhalter, NFTE World Series of Innovation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/11

Denise L. Berkhalter, APR, is the National Director of Communications for the Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE). A Mississippi native, she brings nearly three decades of experience in mass communication, including roles as a digital news editor, newspaper editor, reporter, freelance writer, graphic designer, and public relations professional. Berkhalter discusses how young innovators contribute to global change through programs like the World Series of Innovation (WSI). Berkhalter highlights the creativity and curiosity of youth, fostering entrepreneurial skills, global responsibility, and problem-solving through challenges linked to UN SDGs. The program promotes inclusivity with multilingual resources and real-world context evaluation. Supported by sponsors like Citi and MetLife Foundations, WSI provides mentorship and free participation, encouraging solutions for issues like education and clean water. Participants learn practical skills, design thinking, and teamwork, often impacting their communities post-competition and continuing as changemakers globally.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you see young innovators contributing to long-term global changes, like those of the SDGs from the UN? 

Denise Berkhalter: Young people bring fresh ideas and energy to solving big challenges like poverty, inequality, and climate change. Programs like the World Series of Innovation help them focus on these global problems by giving them tools and a structure to think creatively. For example, in WSI, students are encouraged to come up with solutions that align with the SDGs. After the competition, many participants said they understood the SDGs better and felt more confident they could make a difference​​.

Jacobsen: What qualities do WSI Imagination League youth bring to the competition? 

Berkhalter: Even at a young age, children aged 5 to 12 have incredible imagination and curiosity, which makes them perfect for innovation challenges like WSI. They approach problems with fresh, creative ideas because they aren’t afraid to think outside the box. At this age, kids are naturally curious and good at asking “why” and “what if,” which helps them explore solutions that adults might not think of. Participating in WSI also allows us to set the stage for entrepreneurial thinking early on. Through the competition, these young participants begin to understand how to solve problems creatively, work collaboratively, and present their ideas confidently—skills that will serve them for life.

Jacobsen: How does competition foster not only entrepreneurial skills and global responsibility? 

Berkhalter: The competition teaches young people how to turn ideas into action, just like real entrepreneurs. They learn how to research problems, develop solutions, and pitch their ideas to judges. But it’s not just about business – the competition also connects their ideas to real-world issues, like hunger or clean energy, so they think about how their work can help others. For example, one challenge asked students to create ideas to bring quality education to more kids, encouraging them to think about the bigger picture​.

Jacobsen: How does the availability of multiple languages enhance inclusivity? 

Berkhalter: As of 2024, the WSI program is available to participants, educators, and others in five languages. This ensures accessibility for diverse participants, fosters inclusivity, and enables a broader demographic of young innovators to contribute.

Jacobsen: What kind of impact have previous winners had on their communities? 

Berkhalter: Winners often implement their innovations to create tangible community impacts which has led to meaningful discussions and solutions tailored to local needs, demonstrating the potential of youth-led initiatives​​.

Jacobsen: How do global sponsors like Citi Foundation and MetLife Foundation help?

Berkhalter: Global Sponsors play a crucial role in the competition by funding challenges, providing strategic guidance, and creating opportunities for students to participate at no cost. Their support not only focuses the challenges on real-world problems but also strengthens the program by ensuring access to resources, mentorship, and opportunities. This enables the competition to expand its reach, enhance sustainability, and benefit more global young innovators.

Jacobsen: How do you balance fostering creativity and innovation with practicality? 

Berkhalter: The program uses tools like the Lean Canvas model, which helps students focus on key questions like “Who is my solution for?” and “How will it work?” This keeps their ideas creative but also ensures they can actually make them happen. It’s about teaching students to dream big but stay grounded in what’s possible​.

Jacobsen: What challenges have you encountered in fairly addressing innovations from different cultures?

Berkhalter: It can be tricky because what seems like a great idea in one country might not work in another. Judges have to think about each idea within the context of the student’s culture and community. For example, a solution for clean water in a rural village might look very different from a solution in a big city. The program works to make sure every idea is judged fairly by considering these differences. To support this, we have developed a rubric that emphasizes innovation, with creativity as its foundation. Volunteers receive comprehensive guidance to ensure they understand that students are developing their ideas based on diverse lived experiences. This ensures evaluations remain sensitive to the unique contexts and challenges students are addressing.

Jacobsen: Can you share any insights into how competition helps participants evolve beyond the event? 

Berkhalter: The competition is more than just one moment. Students learn skills they can use in the future, like problem-solving, teamwork, and communication. They also build confidence in their ability to create change. Many students go on to start businesses, join other programs, or get more involved in solving problems in their communities​.

Jacobsen: What is the role of design thinking plays in shaping solutions for global challenges? 

Berkhalter: Design thinking is central to WSI’s approach, guiding students through ideation, prototyping, and testing solutions. This iterative process ensures that their ideas are user-centered and address real-world needs effectively​​.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Denise.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Anastasiia Romashko, Ukrainian-Canadian Media Production

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/10

Anastasiia Romashko, assistant producer and social media manager at Kontakt Ukrainian Television Network, discussed the challenges and dynamics of the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape. She highlighted difficulties refugees face, including language barriers for older generations and educational adjustments for younger ones. Cultural integration remains complex, with Ukrainian-Canadian media largely isolated from mainstream outlets, except for limited collaboration with Omni TV. War-related stories dominate interests, often interwoven with personal hardships. Romashko noted differences in coverage, emphasizing Ukrainian media’s sharper, more direct approach compared to Canada’s broader, less detailed perspective. Despite challenges, cultural maintenance and storytelling are vital for the Ukrainian diaspora.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your role in the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape?

Anastasiia Romashko: I am an assistant producer and social media manager at Kontakt Ukrainian Television Network.

Jacobsen: What does being an assistant producer for media involve?

Romashko: Usually, I contact different people. If we are looking for individuals for our materials, they could be Ukrainian personalities or Canadians connected to Ukraine or doing something for Ukraine. It varies. We usually arrange interviews with them or organize some reports that we can film for our content network.

Romashko: What are the most difficult stories to report on? And what are the easiest?

Jacobsen: The easiest stories are definitely about hobbies. It is easier if they are not doing something directly related to Ukraine or are in Ukraine—such as people who play the violin, ballet dancers, or perform similar activities.

However, every story carries some level of pain or disappointment from the individual’s perspective, as most fled the Ukraine war. Even if we conduct mostly lighthearted interviews or report on something enjoyable, they often share a story about the war or how they fled Ukraine.

Most of them were very successful in Ukraine before they moved to Canada. Now, they have lost everything and are no longer doing what they were doing in Ukraine or Europe. That is hard to hear. Some of them begin to cry, and we often don’t know how to respond because we cannot fully understand their feelings.

Jacobsen: When someone starts crying during an interview, do you interrupt their emotion or give them space to express it for tone?

Romashko: Based on our experience with such emotional situations, we usually… I’m not the interviewer. I don’t conduct the interviews myself. I assist with the production or post-production.

Typically, we give them the space to express their emotions because it would feel odd to say something like, “It’s fine, don’t worry, don’t cry.” That’s understandable, so we allow them to express themselves and their feelings.

From an interview perspective, it’s important because it helps the interviewer connect with the person on an emotional level. Of course, there is a reason for their feelings, so you can’t stop them. You have to let them process and express themselves.

Jacobsen: Regarding the Ukrainian diaspora, with the large numbers of Canadians who have Ukrainian heritage, what is the number?

Romashko: It’s almost like 200,000, close to 300,000.

Jacobsen: So, a huge number of Canadians are Ukrainian. What topics interest them? In other words, what subject matter is pertinent to their concerns as Canadians and those with Ukrainian heritage?

Romashko: The main issue that interests people is the war, which is still ongoing. Secondly, there’s the topic of people recently arriving from Ukraine to Canada.

They face challenges not necessarily with communication but integrating into a society completely different from what they were used to in Ukraine. This includes differences in behaviour, societal norms, and general adjustment.

Jacobsen: What about things like English as a second language? Is that a barrier to integration for refugees or asylum seekers?

Romashko: It’s mostly a barrier for older people. They usually had less exposure to English than younger generations. For those aged 20 to 40, we had more English instruction in schools or opportunities to travel to Europe. Still, for older people, those aged 50 or above, or for someone’s grandparents, it takes much work to learn a new language.

That’s a big problem, and many older people feel uncomfortable here because they cannot connect or communicate with others as they could before. For example, a colleague shared a story about her parents, who moved back to Poland. They had tried living with her but found communicating too difficult. They felt so alone and isolated because she was the only person they could talk to. They didn’t have friends or relatives to interact with, which made them feel lost. Ultimately, they decided to go back.

It’s much easier for younger people. Even if they don’t know English initially, it’s easier for them to learn because English speakers surround them. There’s no way they won’t pick it up eventually.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges for young people? What are the challenges for older people when they first arrive in Canada in an ongoing war outside of language?

Romashko: The main challenge for younger people is education. For instance, if they are still in school or university, they must adjust their studies when they arrive. They need to find their place in a new academic environment, which can be overwhelming.

Another challenge is making friends. When you move from your home country, you leave behind your friends, school, and teachers, which makes life comfortable and familiar. Here, they have to start over, building relationships in a place where they initially know no one except their parents. That is challenging.

The main challenge for older people is finding work. It can be difficult due to language barriers, differences in work experience, or even a lack of career opportunities, making integration much harder for them.

That’s the main one. 

Jacobsen: How integrated is the Ukrainian media landscape, specifically the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape, into the mainstream Canadian media? How is the integration there? Is there an exchange of information, stories, and expertise? Or are you more isolated as Ukrainian-Canadians?

Romashko: We’re generally more separated from Canadian television and media centers. The only connection we’ve established is with Omni TV, which is part of the Rogers Media Group. Omni TV is technically an international channel where various nationalities can broadcast their reports or other content.

That’s the only platform where we have some presence. Occasionally, there are conferences like this one, where we meet people from other Canadian media organizations. However, there needs to be a stronger connection with mainstream Canadian media overall.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts about this war, the media, or cultural maintenance?

Romashko: The media, the war, as well as the media in Canada specifically, are quite different here. Even though I’ve learned a lot about the war in Ukraine and attended various conferences about it, Canadian media approaches it differently than Ukrainian media.

Ukrainian media tends to be sharper and more direct in covering what’s happening in Ukraine. Here in Canada, the coverage is more of an overview, focusing on cultural and political events rather than directly highlighting the war actions.

That’s an issue.

Romashko: Thank you very much for your time.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tauya Chinama on National-Regional Humanist Partnerships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/08

Tauya Chinama is a Zimbabwean-born philosopher, Humanist, apatheist, academic researcher and educator. He is also into human rights struggles and active citizenship as the founding leader of a Social Democrats Association (SODA), a youth civic movement which lobbies and advocates for the inclusion and recognition of young people into decision-making processes and boards throughout the country anchored on Sustainable Development Goal 16 (Peace, Justice, Strong Institutions). He is also the acting president of Humanists Zimbabwe.

Chinama discusses the challenges faced by humanists and freethinkers in Zimbabwe and surrounding countries, focusing on religious overreach and the lack of religious tolerance. Chinama highlights that Zimbabwe’s population, predominantly Christian, often views other religions negatively due to media portrayal. Humanists aim to promote religious pluralism and advocate for religious freedom while recognizing the importance of education and awareness. Chinama discusses the progress of organizations like Atheists in Kenya and the registration challenges Zimbabwean humanist groups face. He emphasizes the importance of dialogue, mutual respect, and collaboration in advancing humanism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we will focus on national and regional issues, particularly in Zimbabwe, and some of the common challenges faced by humanists and freethinkers in the region. Specifically, we’ll discuss countries like Zimbabwe, Zambia, and South Africa and examine Zimbabwe’s national problems concerning religious overreach. Additionally, we’ll explore how Zimbabwe can collaborate with humanists in neighbouring countries to establish a broader base for advocacy and action.

Tauya Chinama: The primary issue in Zimbabwe is a need to understand better what it means to be tolerant and respectful to religious liberties and freedoms. Many people in Zimbabwe believe that the majority religion (Christianity) is the ‘true’ one. For example, about 85% of the population in Zimbabwe identifies as Christian. As a result, when people encounter other religions, such as Islam or Judaism, they often regard them as false. This perception might stem from how these religions are portrayed in the media.

For example, when you mention Islam to an average Zimbabwean, they often associate it with terrorism and violence, likely because media outlets like Al Jazeera, BBC, and others frequently report stories about suicide bombings and conflict without showing the positive aspects of the religion. Similarly, some pastors, especially in Zimbabwe, still blame Jews for the crucifixion of Jesus in their preachings, which negatively influences the views of many Christians.

Although Hinduism is practiced by a smaller population in Zimbabwe, mainly among the Indian community, especially in places like the Belvedere suburb of Harare, it is often misunderstood. Many Zimbabweans accuse Hindus of idolatry without a clear understanding of their religious practices. The core issue here is a lack of education and awareness.

Humanists and freethinkers are responsible for raising awareness about the diversity of religious worldviews and the importance of religious pluralism. As humanists in Zimbabwe we aim to be objective about different religions, worldviews, cultures and philosophies by being willing to present both the positive and negative aspects of each. However, in Zimbabwe, it is often only acceptable to highlight the positive sides of Christianity. At the same time, any criticism of the religion is seen as blasphemous, and those who do so are often ostracized.

Our political leaders tend to reinforce this problem by aligning themselves with the majority religion for political popularity. This creates a challenge when trying to foster respect for human rights and religious freedoms because populist politicians prefer to cater to the majority rather than protect the rights of minority groups.

Humanists aim to take an objective approach to examining religion, advocating for religious freedom and liberty without promoting one religion over another. This issue is rooted in the colonial era when one religion was often favoured.

Jacobsen: Nevertheless, registered groups, like the Atheist Society of Nigeria and Atheists in Kenya, have achieved official recognition by their governments, offering a model for how Zimbabwe could also create space for non-religious or minority religious groups to gain recognition.

So, there could be practices for registering organizations that other African activists, humanists, skeptics, and similar groups could consider to legitimize their work. They could even use that status to apply for grants. Could we share expertise on these processes, particularly how to gain governmental approval and respectability to benefit various African humanist and freethinker groups?

Chinama: Yes. In Zimbabwe, religious organizations and churches are usually registered, and any civil society organization must be registered. However, the Zimbabwean government is currently working on a bill, the PVO (Private Voluntary Organizations) bill, regarding how to register these organizations. The bill has taken a long time to pass into law, but it might be enacted soon.

Previously, organizations in Zimbabwe could exist in three forms: as a PVO, trust, or Universitas Personarum. PVOs and trusts must be registered through the Ministry of Social Welfare Services. The Universitas Personarum does not necessarily need to be registered. It is formed when people come together and agree on a particular cause, and it is recognized by law. This is the easiest method, and I have personally used this approach.

That is how the organization I co-founded in 2020, SODA, operates. It’s called Universitas Personarum, and it allows us to engage with government institutions and other entities because we are recognized by law. However, the government is attempting to remove the trust status. They claim that civil society organizations meddle too much in politics and want to regulate such activities. They are trying to make organizations clarify their objectives, especially when they are accused of being anti-government.

The government is also trying to cut off external funding, arguing that it influences organizations to serve the interests of the countries providing the funds. Despite these challenges, the Humanists Zimbabwe continues to operate as an organization for non-religious people and has been recognized by Humanists International. We have been pushing to advance our work, and we are one of the influential organizations in the southern region of Africa. However, other organizations are more advanced than us though.

For example, Atheists in Kenya Society (AIK) is one such organization. The last time I heard about them, the president of Kenya invited them to a national prayer breakfast. Although it sounds amusing that non-religious people are invited to a prayer breakfast, it shows their progress in being recognized and called upon for national events. It may sound funny, but being invited to prayer breakfast for non-religious people is a significant achievement.

We need to reach a point where we are invited to such events. The last time I met with the cultural counsellor of the embassy of Iran in Zimbabwe, I asked him how he felt about the fact that at national events here in Zimbabwe—whether it’s Independence Day, Heroes Day, or other state events—they normally open with Christian prayers. They don’t seem to care if there are Muslims, Jews, or non-religious people present. I asked him how he felt as a diplomat when a Christian prayer was forced upon him and his religion was not recognized.

He said that it worries them, but diplomats are not there as advocates when they are in other countries. They  ought not to be actively participating advocacy divorced from their country’s business, so they go with the flow. I realized that people are often forced to accept what the majority does, even if they disagree. We should care about the rights and freedoms of the minority. Suppose the practice of the majority’s rights infringes on the rights of the minority. In that case, we need to sit down and figure out how best to recognize and accommodate the minority. Otherwise, we may be causing unnecessary suffering.

Jacobsen: And which regions, countries, or organizations seem to have more well-developed communities for freethinkers? What lessons can be gained from them?

Chinama: The country that is a little ahead in our region is South Africa. In South Africa, even in their education system, they respect religious diversity. That’s why they’re called the ‘Rainbow Nation’. If there’s to be a prayer, everyone can say what they want—Hindus, Muslims, and others. Another challenge we face as a region is the difference in our command languages.

For example, in Mozambique and Angola, they use Portuguese, while in Tanzania, they use Kiswahili. However, they are transitioning more towards English. These language barriers make it difficult for a region to collaborate effectively. So, we need to find a common language to make collaboration easier. But, at the moment, South Africa is above everyone else regarding respect for religious liberties.

Jacobsen: I’ve heard that marriage officiants are given certification in South Africa. Are there any other African countries doing this?

Chinama: Yes, in marriage officiants are state certified on the side of the Humanists there are several humanists marriage celebrants in Uganda, and here in Zimbabwe, we have one as well. Unfortunately, he’s still trying to find people who want to utilize his services. The Secretary General of Humanists Zimbabwe, Mxolisi Blessed Masuku, is a marriage celebrant. The last time I met him, I tried to convince him to consider becoming a Humanist chaplain, but he was hesitant. He said he would consider it.

I was also talking to the secretary of the faculty of Theology, ethics, religious studies and Philosophy at the Catholic University of Zimbabwe. I asked if they would accept humanists in their certificate program for training chaplains, and they told me that it was fine and that I could just come. They are willing to assist everyone. So, next year, I will need to fundraise and do the certificate in chaplaincy. I hope to inspire others to follow.

If I become a chaplain, I would move around local universities, train humanist chaplains, and try to expand these services into our defence forces, whether the police, correctional services or the army. We don’t have humanist chaplains in our educational institutions or security forces, but we need these services. We can’t criticize religious groups for their shortcomings without offering alternative solutions. It’s time we prove that what religions can offer, humanists can offer even better.

I plan to become a chaplain. It won’t be too difficult for me, as I once trained to be a priest, so I understand this role well. Recently, I saw Dr. Leo Igwe from Nigeria become a chaplain, and I’m sure he is making progress. If we have more humanist chaplains, it will help greatly. I can inspire others to join me, and we could create a tailored program for African humanist chaplains.

The American Humanist Association also trains humanist chaplains. I contacted them, and they said they used to train chaplains, though it’s been a while. The person I spoke with promised to raise the issue at their next meeting and see how they can help. I remember looking at  young humanist leaders nominees of 2022, and I came across a lady who was a humanist chaplain in the Canadian military. I don’t recall her name, but a few humanist chaplains are in Canada.

Jacobsen: Yes, Marie Claire Khadij in the Canadian Armed Forces became the first humanist chaplain in the military in 2022. There’s also Marty Shoemaker in British Columbia. There are at least two others. There are only four registered humanist chaplains in Canada, but they are making a difference.

Chinama: Yes, I recall she was the first humanist chaplain in the Canadian army. I’ll have to check the name again. It’s mentioned on the Young Humanists International website page. They usually nominate young people working on humanism and other related fields. I was also a nominee in 2023 for that program, we can certainly do something similar here in Africa.

Jacobsen: What would be the first and easiest step for building bridges among African humanists? I’m calling from Canada to do these interviews and get some exposure. But I’m also sensitive to the fact that activists in any particular country are working on their projects. They want to ensure things are done more on their terms than not, even though they’re grateful for our exposure and help.

Chinama: Yes, platforms like this are helpful. We could organize online webinars where people from different countries in the region can speak out, share experiences, and manage to recognize the similarities and difficulties we face, as well as celebrate our successes. In addition to virtual webinars, in-person meetings at the regional level might also be necessary.

For instance, we can meet in Zambia, then next time in Zimbabwe, Botswana, Mozambique, or South Africa. Eventually, we could do this at a continental level. Southern, Eastern, Western, and Northern African representatives could meet in a particular country. I know this can be taxing, especially coming from third-world countries where we have various jobs that occupy most of our time. We may have little money to spare for humanist activities, so we must make sacrifices and look for resources wherever possible.

One of the biggest challenges for humanism in the southern hemisphere is that many of our economies are still developing, so there are significant struggles. 

We also need to work on sustainability. Someone could buy land and start farming to fund humanist activities, or we could build a school. All these projects require funding, but we should brainstorm ideas for the region. For now, we can start with virtual webinars.

You mentioned a group talk last time, and some of the topics we could discuss at a regional level would include how to build a humanist movement, sustainability, and self-reliance. There are also practical activities, such as advocacy for alleged witches, psychosocial support from humanist organizations, and platforms like ‘Talk to a Humanist.’

We have the Young Humanists group and the Humanists Zimbabwe in Zimbabwe. Many exciting things are happening in Zimbabwe that are contributing to the development of humanism. When it comes to government, there are elements in the curriculum that don’t explicitly carry the label’ secular Humanist,’ but they imply it nonetheless.

Jacobsen: Evolutionary theory is fundamental to a naturalistic understanding of the world and how reality operates in biology, especially regarding the evolution and origin of the human species. How is evolutionary theory taught in Zimbabwean schools? What other topics need advocacy at the federal level in Zimbabwe to support a better, more secular, humanistic educational system for all?

Chinama: The challenge in Zimbabwe is that while the current curriculum is good, we have a heritage-based curriculum intended to run from 2024 until 2030. The curriculum itself is solid, but the problem lies with its implementation. Many teachers need to be well-trained in teaching certain topics. Evolutionary theory, for example, needs to be taught more effectively. Some people here confuse evolutionary biology with historical social darwinism and tend to make fun of it.

For instance, people often joke, saying that we came from baboons, which is not what evolutionary theory claims. I normally explain that we didn’t come from baboons; humans, bonobos, orangutans, and chimpanzees share a common ancestor. We are cousins, not descendants of these primates. However, the misunderstanding is widespread; even biology teachers sometimes need help to grasp and teach these concepts correctly.

We need a more humanistic approach to teaching, especially regarding topics like evolution. The primary and secondary curriculum is good, but we must improve our teachers’ training. To influence this kind of change, we would need financial resources, strong advocacy efforts, and access to media outlets to spread awareness and understanding.

Jacobsen: What have you found the biggest lesson in your activism in Zimbabwe? Every leader whom I consider you, with whom I have interacted, has gone through moments of significant self-doubt and challenge. What moments triggered that for you, and what lessons did you gain from it?

Chinama: The greatest lesson I’ve gained is that, as a person and leader, when you want to push for what you think is best, the number one thing is dialogue. But how do you engage in dialogue? You can only have a meaningful dialogue with someone once you learn their language and put yourself in their shoes. So, the first thing is understanding why people do what they do.

By putting myself in their shoes, I can then engage in dialogue with them, giving them time to talk while giving myself time to listen. This approach works wonders, even though it may only work on a small scale. When you meet someone and allow them to express themselves, and then you express yourself, it builds mutual respect. When you show someone you can listen to them, they are likelier to listen to you.

I’ve realized that human beings can listen, dialogue, and sit down and discuss issues. Yes, I’ve seen people try to be confrontational, but I’ve also learned that confrontation often makes people defensive. I’ve learned this over time, which I aim to perfect. It’s made me want to research more about people’s backgrounds to understand how they’ve come to be who they are and how the systems they follow have shaped them.

Religious people have told me I would make a good pastor several times. When you reach that point—when a religious person sees a humanist as someone who could be a good pastor—you’ve already made an impact. You’ve given that person something to think about. They may go away, reflect on what you’ve discussed, and come back to you a year later.

Jacobsen: Thank you for your time today for that session.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mikey Weinstein on Activism for a Secular Military

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/07

*Full biographical sketch at the end of the interview.*

Michael L. “Mikey” Weinstein is the undisputed leader of the national movement to restore the obliterated wall separating church and state in the most technologically lethal organization ever created by humankind: the United States armed forces. Described by Harper’s magazine as “the constitutional conscience of the U.S. military, a man determined to force accountability”, Mikey’s family has a long and distinguished U.S. military history spanning three consecutive generations of military academy graduates and over 130 years of combined active duty military service in every major combat  engagement our country has been in from World War I to the current Global War on Terror. Mikey is a 1977 Honor Graduate of the United States Air Force Academy. Mikey has been married  for 47 years to his wife, Bonnie. He is the proud parent of three sons, one daughter, two granddaughters, and one grandson. His oldest son and daughter-in-law are 2004 Graduates. Seven  total members of Mikey’s family have attended the Academy. His father was a distinguished graduate of the United States Naval Academy. Mikey served for more than 10 years with the Judge Advocate  General (“JAG”) Corps. A registered Republican, he also spent over three years working in, and for, the West Wing of the  Reagan Administration as legal counsel in the White House. In his final position there, Mikey was named the Committee Management Officer of the much-publicized Iran-Contra Investigation in his capacity as Assistant General Counsel of The White House Office of Administration, Executive Office of the President of the United States. Mikey has held numerous positions in corporate America as a senior executive businessman and attorney.  After stints at prominent law firms in both New York City and Washington D.C., Mikey served as the first General Counsel to Texas billionaire and two-time Presidential candidate H. Ross Perot and  Perot Systems Corporation. He left Mr. Perot’s employ in 2006 to focus his fulltime attention on the nonprofit charitable foundation he founded to directly battle the far-right militant radical evangelical religious fundamentalists: the Military Religious Freedom Foundation. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What kind of hate do you get now, individually or through the MRFF?

Mikey Weinstein: If my last name were Smith and I was a plumber instead of Weinstein—obviously Jewish and a lawyer—I don’t think we’d see 99% of the harassment we go through.

My wife has written two books, published in L.A., that include the hate mail we receive, which is unbelievably vile. Every single day, we still get a flood of grotesque, hateful threats that we have to live with. But we’re not going to let that impact our sailors, soldiers, Marines, Guardians—what they’re called in the Space Force—or any of our other clients. We’re built to handle it.

You can imagine, though, if we get this level of harassment, how hard it is for an 18- or 19-year-old service member to stand up. I remember one of our key cases: a Navajo sailor on one of our huge aircraft carriers—small cities with 4,000 or 5,000 sailors aboard. A fundamentalist Christian chief petty officer was relentlessly proselytizing him.

Jacobsen: Chief petty officer? Only that rank? Not like a lieutenant colonel or something?

Weinstein: No, just a senior NCO. This sailor’s Navajo faith is about 10,000 years old, yet he was mercilessly evangelized. We disciplined and reassigned the chief petty officer to another part of the ship. About a week later, we received a message via Window Rock, Arizona, the capital of the Navajo Nation. It was from the parents of that 19-year-old sailor.

The message still gives me chills. It was brief, just a few words. But it became our mantra: “Please tell Mr. Weinstein and the Military Religious Freedom Foundation thank you for being the voices we are not allowed to speak with.” I think about that every day, multiple times.

Most of our clients are Protestants, followed by Roman Catholics. Only 5% of our nearly 91,000 clients are non-Christians. We have over 1,100 staff at the foundation, both paid and volunteer, similar to many civil rights organizations. Our representatives cover most U.S. military installations worldwide, with a network of about 1,000 people. Roughly 84% of our staff are Christians themselves. So this narrative from the religious right, claiming that “Mikey and his people eat good Christians for breakfast, lunch, and dinner, with snacks in between,” is complete nonsense. However, it does create a security issue for us. We live with cameras, infrared surveillance, and everything else for protection.

And by the way, Article VI, Clause 3 of the Constitution states that no religious test shall ever be required for any position in the federal government. The last time I checked, being a member of the U.S. military qualifies as a federal position. Under the guise of ensuring “spiritual readiness” for our military members, they’re trying to impose a religious agenda. We recently broke a story about Lieutenant General Ryan Eifler, the most senior personnel officer in the U.S. Army. As Deputy Chief of Staff for Personnel, he oversees all Army personnel worldwide. He has disturbing ties to the New Apostolic Reformation—a group I’d describe not just as Christian nationalists but as Christian extremists working hard to create a modern-day Gilead, a fundamentalist Christian nationalist state like in The Handmaid’s Tale.

He’s also associated with people deeply involved in the January 6, 2021 events. So, it’s a dangerous situation. You can deny it, but facts are stubborn things, Scott. You can argue all day that something doesn’t exist, but if I put my hand over an open flame, it will burn.

Sometimes, people ask, “How pervasive, how systemic is this problem?” So, since we’re on Zoom, I’ll take advantage. I usually ask them to pick up a pen or a pencil and hold it up.

Jacobsen: Okay, I’m listening.

Weinstein: Then I ask, “Why did it drop, Scott?”

Jacobsen: Gravity, Mikey.

Weinstein: Exactly. How pervasive and systemic is gravity on planet Earth, Scott?

Jacobsen: Completely.

Weinstein: There you go. So, that’s what I tell them. If you go to the International Space Station, you won’t have the same gravity issues. But here on Earth, it’s inescapable. That’s how fundamentalist Christian dominionism and nationalism have become embedded in the very DNA of our military. It’s in the air conditioning of what we often call the “Pentecostal Gong” of the Pentagon.

When I speak around the country, people say, “I served in the Marines for 20 years, and I never saw that.” I’ll ask, “Where are you from?” They might say Nashville, Toronto, Vancouver, Boise, New York, or Denver. I’ll follow up with, “Did you ever personally witness a rape, an armed robbery, or a murder in those cities?” They usually say no. So, if they never personally witnessed it, does that mean it doesn’t happen? Right?

Many people avoid discussing this because it touches on privilege. If you’re a straight, white, Christian male, you have a tremendous advantage over others. Acknowledging that privilege, which is unearned, often sparks outrage. But we see its effects daily.

I grew up as a military brat; my dad graduated from the Naval Academy and took his commission in the Air Force, and I grew up on Air Force bases. I had never encountered anti-Semitism before—I was involved in school, sports, and everything. However, I faced it directly during my first semester at the Air Force Academy. I was physically assaulted twice and knocked unconscious, and they never found the perpetrators.

It was almost like a taunt; they didn’t catch anyone, and there were no consequences. Thirty years later, the same experiences were revisited in my children. That was the thread I started pulling, Scott, to see where it led. And as I kept pulling, the sweater unravelled. Before I started this work, the Academy loved me.

I was Ross Perot’s general counsel—he ran for president, an Academy grad. I was also a lawyer for President Reagan in the White House. I donated much money to the Academy. Still, then I became the “bad boy” because we stood up for people who were being crushed for not being the “right” type of Christian.

As I mentioned, we have over 24 different varieties of Baptists among our clients. We’ve defended individuals from every major faith tradition here except Scientology. I’m still waiting for Tom Cruise to reach out, but he’s not in the military. 

Jacobsen: He’s more of a film star nowadays, right?

Weinstein: I think he is—a bit of a maverick.

Jacobsen: That’s right! 

Weinstein: So, it’s a hard fight. Technically, we report to the IRS that my workweek is 105 hours—a schedule of 7 AM to 10 PM daily. This morning, it started at 4:25 AM with calls for help from a military base overseas. This happens a lot.

And I’m not playing a violin here. I’m not saying, “Oh, I’m so wonderful, such a tough guy, with such a tough life.” No, I’m the most flawed person I know, but we’re fighting something that must be fought. If you look back to Machiavelli’s The Prince, when you aim at the prince, Scott, you better kill the prince.

So, yes, we’re aggressive and militant. Still, our militancy supports the bedrock separation of church and state within the U.S. military. Even though some people crossed us three times within six weeks, like when a certain commander first took over, he did eventually do something positive. We called that out with cautious optimism. He’s not a 20-star general; he’s a three-star general, and maybe he’ll never get a fourth star, but at least it’s something.

Other military branches have nothing equivalent to Air Force Instruction 1-1, Section 2.16. So, we must rely on other regulatory provisions or the Constitution itself. In most cases, our biggest weapon is media exposure. We don’t necessarily need reporters; we have direct access to outlets like Daily Kos and sometimes get picked up by others like L.A. Progressive. However, we still engage with traditional media. Some ask why we even talk to outlets like One America News, Newsmax, Fox, or Breitbart.

It’s simple: we can’t just speak to outlets that already understand this. The Humanist and American Humanist are great platforms, and they’re not tied to these belief systems. We don’t criticize anyone’s beliefs. We don’t care if you believe in Spider-Man or the Flying Spaghetti Monster. Our focus here at the foundation is clear: we address when, where, and how superiors deploy their faith or lack thereof.

In over 20 years of this work, we’ve only encountered one instance of misconduct from an atheist superior and addressed it immediately.

The overwhelming majority of the time, we haven’t had issues with Muslim supremacism, and we’ve rarely encountered problems involving Jewish or LDS Mormon beliefs. Almost 99.9% of the time, the issue arises from Christian dominionists or Christian nationalists. And it doesn’t stop, nor will it stop, until we see punitive measures that make people reconsider their actions—similar to how someone might avoid speeding on the highway if they know it’ll result in an $80,000 fine.

If you look at this election season, we’re up against entities pushing the “Make America Great” agenda, where terms like diversity, equity, inclusion, and critical race theory are targeted. Critical race theory, for instance, merely acknowledges systemic issues and historical injustices, yet opposing it is branded as patriotic. Then there’s the label of “woke,” which is equated to Marxism or socialism. Meanwhile, we already have social systems: public schools, Medicare, Medicaid, the postal service, police, and fire departments—all funded by taxes. So, debating whether something is “socialistic” misses the point. The point is that people are people, and their rights deserve respect.

To tell a member of the U.S. military that they lack integrity, character, discipline, honour, intelligence, or worthiness because of their faith or lack thereof is no different than telling someone they’re lesser due to their skin colour or gender. As I’ve said, it’s as simple as a hamburger or a hot dog—it’s not complex.

After nearly 20 years of this work, we’ve reached a point where we’re well-known. When we contact someone, especially on behalf of multiple subordinates—most Christians—they know why we’re there, and they don’t like it. Our clients include Sikhs, Muslims, Jews, atheists, agnostics, humanists, and secularists. We represent everyone.

Senior commanders who blow the whistle on their organizations have been an interesting phenomenon over the past 8-10 years. In a shadowy fashion, they reach out to me or the foundation, pointing out issues. They need to respond to us reactively rather than proactively trying to address it independently. We don’t shame them for that. I could say, “Yes, Admiral, General, you’re the one with stars on your shoulders—why don’t you do something?” But they know we’ll address it often because they trust us to handle it effectively.

If their chain of command does not fault them, then “Hurricane Mikey” and “Hurricane MRFF” roll in. We get it—sometimes they had to do what they had to do. But little do people know that commanders, generals, and admirals bring us many of these issues.

So we bite our lips. I don’t lecture them about it or say, “Hey, we’re not a line item in the budget like you are.” We don’t run on chocolate sauce; we run on dollars. We’re just a cherry on top. They’re the ones who will retire as generals or admirals with pensions, and there’s a reason they have those stars on their shoulders. But we don’t shame them; we’re glad they come to us. This started about a decade ago.

There’s a famous movie, Casablanca, with Humphrey Bogart. I don’t know if you’ve heard of it. In the film, his character, Rick, runs a casino in French-controlled Morocco during World War II. It’s a restaurant, a nightclub, and an illegal gambling spot. At one point, the gendarmes come in and accuse Rick of running gambling. He says, “What? Gambling? I’m shocked, shocked!”—knowing full well it’s happening. That’s how it feels when these generals or admirals whistle on their organizations.

When their old bosses come around and ask, “What happened? I didn’t know this was going on!” Well, we help fix it.

By the way, with a name like Jacobsen, are you Jewish, either ethnically or otherwise?

Jacobsen: That’s astute! “Jacobson” has roots in Reform Judaism, founded by Israel Jacobson in 1810.

Weinstein: Early in the 19th century. 

Jacobsen: Reform Judaism began in Germany around that time. My family background came up in my DNA results—100% Northwestern European with a trace of something my grandmother used to call “gypsy.” So, some of our family might have roamed a bit. But you’re right about Israel Jacobson; he started around 1810 in Germany. Israel Jacobson, spelled with an “o-n” rather than “e-n.”

Weinstein: I’d like to know if there’s any relation. 

Jacobsen: Given my last name, I would like to know if there is some Jewish heritage, but 23andMe mainly shows nationality. Given the European background, it could indicate Ashkenazi heritage, but it’s hard to know for certain.

Weinstein: Right, it could be Ashkenazi, but who knows? All our blood is bonded—we’re all connected. I’m not here to argue whether the world is 6,000 years old, as some of the people we challenge believe. Like I say, I don’t care what someone’s beliefs are. Every morning, I wake up to about two dozen messages from some of the largest Christian organizations in the country, all proselytizing to me.

I also get texts from individual Christians with Bible verses, often from Proverbs or the New Testament, urging me to convert. I always tell them, “It’s not about your beliefs. We don’t care about anyone’s views; it’s only about the time, place, and manner they think they can impose them on subordinates.”

Jacobsen: This was a great conversation.

Weinstein: Glad to hear that. Thanks, Scott. Appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Bye, and talk again soon.

Michael L. “Mikey” Weinstein  is the undisputed leader of the national movement to restore the obliterated wall  separating church and state in the most technologically lethal organization ever created by  humankind: the United States armed forces. Described by Harper’s magazine as “the constitutional  conscience of the U.S. military, a man determined to force accountability”, Mikey’s family has a long  and distinguished U.S. military history spanning three consecutive generations of military academy  graduates and over 130 years of combined active duty military service in every major combat  engagement our country has been in from World War I to the current Global War on Terror. Mikey is a 1977 Honor Graduate of the United States Air Force Academy. Mikey has been married  for 47 years to his wife, Bonnie. He is the proud parent of three sons, one daughter, two  granddaughters, and one grandson. His oldest son and daughter-in-law are 2004 Graduates. Seven  total members of Mikey’s family have attended the Academy. His father was a distinguished graduate  of the United States Naval Academy. Mikey served for more than 10 years with the Judge Advocate  General (“JAG”) Corps.  

A registered Republican, he also spent over three years working in, and for, the West Wing of the  Reagan Administration as legal counsel in the White House. In his final position there, Mikey was  named the Committee Management Officer of the much-publicized Iran-Contra Investigation in his  

capacity as Assistant General Counsel of The White House Office of Administration, Executive Office  of the President of the United States. Mikey has held numerous positions in corporate America as a  senior executive businessman and attorney.  

After stints at prominent law firms in both New York City and Washington D.C., Mikey served as the  first General Counsel to Texas billionaire and two-time Presidential candidate H. Ross Perot and  Perot Systems Corporation. He left Mr. Perot’s employ in 2006 to focus his fulltime attention on the  nonprofit charitable foundation he founded to directly battle the far-right militant radical evangelical  religious fundamentalists: the Military Religious Freedom Foundation.   

Mikey has appeared innumerable times on all of the major cable and terrestrial TV news networks  and is a frequent guest on national radio networks as well. His constitutional activism has been  covered and profiled extensively in the print media including the Associated Press, The New York  Times, the Washington Post, the L.A. Times, the Denver Post, The Guardian, and many other  national and international newspapers and periodicals including Time magazine.  

St. Martins Press in New York released Mikey’s book, “With God On Our Side: One Man’s War  Against an Evangelical Coup in America’s Military” in October 2006. The paperback version was  released in February 2008 with the Foreword being written by Ambassador Joseph Wilson IV. The  book is an expose on the systemic problem of religious intolerance throughout the United States  armed forces. At this time, Mikey also made his international film debut in the Hollywood adaptation  of James Carroll’s New York Times best selling book detailing the 2,000 year bloody history between  the Church and the Jews, entitled “Constantine’s Sword”, and directed by Oscar nominee Oren  Jacoby. 

In January, 2012, Mikey’s latest book “No Snowflake in an Avalanche: The Military Religious  Freedom Foundation, its Battle to Defend the Constitution, and One Family’s Courageous War  Against Religious Extremism in High Places” was released. It details MRFF’s prominent case studies,  struggles, and the violent reactions to MRFF advocacy.  

Mikey was named one of the 50 most influential Jews in America by the Forward, one of the nation’s  preeminent Jewish publications. He also has received a nomination for the JFK’s Profile in Courage  Award and received the Buzzflash Wings of Justice Award. In addition Mikey was honored by a  distinguished civil rights organization, Jews for Racial and Economic Justice, with the Rabbi Marshall  T. Meyer Risk-Taker Award for those who have taken risks in the pursuit of justice. 

In December 2012, Defense News named Mikey one of the 100 Most Influential People in U.S.  Defense. As a distinguished “Opinion shaper” exercising a hard-fought influence over the U.S. Armed  Forces, Mikey’s influence has been recognized as exceeding that of former General David Petraeus  himself by a publication that represents “the world’s biggest military newsroom.” Defense News is a  Gannett publication – as are USA Today, The Arizona Republic, Detroit Free Press, The Indianapolis  Star, The Cincinnati Enquirer, and many other prominent newspapers across the nation. Gannett  Government Media consists of Defense News, Army Times, Air Force Times, Navy Times, Marine  Corps Times, Armed Forces Journal and Federal Times.  

Reviled by the radical fundamentalist Christian far-right, Mikey has been given many names by his  enemies including “Satan”, “Satan’s lawyer”, “the Antichrist”, “That Godless, Secular Leftist”,  “Antagonizer of All Christians”, “Most Dangerous Man in America” and “Field General of the Godless  Armies of Satan”.  

On November 7, 2011, Americans United for the Separation of Church and State presented Mikey  Weinstein with AU’s first ever Person of the Year Award. In their press release, AU describes MRFF  as “the leading voice protecting church-state separation in the military.”  

On November 13, 2014, for the sixth consecutive year, the Military Religious Freedom Foundation  was officially nominated again for the 2015 Nobel Peace Prize (its seventh total nomination).

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Karen Martin, BSN on Hospice Care and Faith

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/06

Karen Martin, BSN, a former hospice nurse, talks about her experiences in end-of-life care and prison ministry. Martin shares insights on hospice care’s evolution, emphasizing its shift from a personal vocation to a business model. She highlights the importance of love, peace, and preparation at the end of life, encouraging families to focus on the present and cherish moments. Martin also discusses the healing power of poetry, journaling, and mentorship, noting that people value relationships and forgiveness over achievements. In prison ministry, she parallels her approach to hospice, offering empathy, faith, and support to those struggling. She is the author of Everyone Dies: Journey of a Hospice Nurse.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Karen Martin, BSN. You have a collection of stories that you gathered from your notes as a hospice nurse. My first question, of course, is: How was your time as a hospice nurse?

Karen Martin: Oh, I loved every moment. It was probably the hardest thing I’ve ever done, but it gave me far more than I could have ever given to anyone. It has been a truly rewarding experience.

Jacobsen: Has hospice care changed much from the start of your career to now? Or has the focus remained the same?

Martin: Yes, it has changed—and I wish I didn’t have to say that. When I started, our census was typically around 20 to 25 patients. We were on call for long stretches—sometimes a full month at a time. Now, it’s much different. Most hospices manage between 100 to 150 patients, with separate on-call nurses. While that’s positive in some ways, it does change the personal nature of the work.

Hospice has increasingly become more of a business than a personal calling, which changes how care is delivered. I could go into the financial and political side of things, but the shift has made hospice feel less intimate.

Jacobsen: How do you address that shift, especially as the workload grew from 25 to 125 patients? That’s a significant increase. What impact does a more “business-oriented” approach have on the spirit of hospice care?

Martin: That’s a great question. Before I retired, I hired, trained, and educated nurses, especially about the admission process and patient care. I always told my nurses, “If you don’t have a heart for this work, you’re not meant for it.” I emphasized that every family is unique and incredibly important.

You must be in the right profession if hospice care is solely about numbers and business. Shifting that mindset back to hospice care’s personal and emotional core helped many nurses stay focused. There are draining times—being on call and handling difficult cases—but if you see hospice work as a vocation, it changes everything. When you view it as an opportunity to bring peace, comfort, and dignity to families, it helps you stay grounded. I also educated staff on burnout. While burnout is real, the calling to serve is so powerful that it can often outweigh administrative frustrations.

Jacobsen: As a journalist, I interview people and learn about their lives, but it seems like it takes a truly special person to deal with death daily in such a caring role. What allows someone to handle that kind of work consistently?

Martin: That’s a very thoughtful question. I don’t think I could have done it without God. My faith was number one—it gave me the strength I needed in every situation. My husband was number two—he supported me during those long, sleepless nights when I was out in the field, caring for patients. His understanding and encouragement were incredible.

There was also a real sense of camaraderie among the hospice staff. We supported one another, lifted each other during hard times, and shared in the understanding that we were making a meaningful difference. I can’t count the many thank-yous and heartfelt acknowledgments I received from families. Those moments kept me going—they reminded me why I was called to this work.

Over time, I learned that life is precious and that every day is a gift. If you live with that perspective, hospice work is no longer about focusing on the sadness of death. End-of-life care is difficult, yes, but it can also be beautiful. Death can bring peace and dignity and be filled with love and gratitude.

And the families working together at the end of life, caring for someone, is phenomenal to observe and be a part of. 

Jacobsen: What are your biggest lessons on love, despair, and loss in those moments?

Martin: Do you mean from the perspective of the person dying, the family, or something else?

Jacobsen: All of those.

Martin: Well, I started every visit by telling the family that there is no such thing as a perfect family. It’s incredibly difficult when someone is dying, especially if it’s a young mother or a young person in the family. In those cases, the family dynamics often escalate by 100%. Let them know that their journey is their journey. I promised to walk alongside them, never to judge them, and to help them in any way I could.

I don’t know if you’ve read my book, but many situations would change dramatically in the moments or hours before death. It becomes easier if the family is on board with what is happening. I often had to remind them that no single person can care for someone 24/7 alone. Taking it one day at a time became a cornerstone of my approach.

When I entered a home, I would say, “I will walk this journey with you, but we will take one step at a time. We won’t worry about what might happen five months from now. We will focus on today, and I will be here with you daily.” That approach reassured families and helped them stay grounded.

For example, if a patient could walk one day but were bedbound the next, I would make an extra visit. I would ensure they were comfortable and teach the family how to care for their loved ones. Walking that journey without looking too far ahead made it more manageable for everyone.

As you might already know, within hospice care, you often deal with preparatory grief. Families start preparing for the loss long before the death occurs. I don’t want to say that makes it easy—because it’s never easy to lose someone you love—but it can make it easier. Families get the opportunity to say goodbye. They can say “I love you,” address regrets, and have those important conversations.

Compare that to sudden loss. If someone were to tell me, for example, that my husband had died today, I would have so many thoughts of “I wish I had done this” or “I wish I had said that.” However, with hospice, families often get the time to resolve those feelings beforehand, and it’s beautiful to witness that kind of closure.

Jacobsen: What should people avoid when preparing for death? Specifically, when they are emotionally overwhelmed or unprepared—what mistakes should they try to avoid?

Martin: That’s an excellent question. One of the biggest things to avoid is pushing emotions away or trying to deny the reality of the situation. Sometimes, families want to “hold it together” so much that they shut down emotionally, which doesn’t help anyone.

Another thing to avoid is neglecting self-care. People often feel guilty about stepping away for a moment or taking time for themselves, but no one can effectively care for a loved one without first caring for themselves.

Avoid creating unnecessary conflict or revisiting old grievances. I’ve seen families bring up long-standing arguments during these times, and it only adds stress to an already emotional situation.

Finally, avoid “future-tripping”—worrying excessively about what will happen in days, weeks, or months. It’s natural to fear what’s ahead, but it takes away from the time you have now. I always encouraged families to take it one day, or even one hour, at a time.

Focusing on the moment allows you to be fully present with your loved one and appreciate your time together. It’s in those moments that the most meaningful conversations and connections happen.

Jacobsen: What should people do when someone is dying? 

Martin: There isn’t necessarily a “right” or “wrong” way, but what advice would I give: Any preparation you can make for your loved one is incredibly helpful. That includes legal documents like power of attorney, advance directives, or a will. It is important to know what your loved one wants for their funeral, what they love, what brings them comfort, and what doesn’t.

I’ve already written out my funeral plans. I don’t care if they follow them to the letter, but I know it’ll make things much easier for my family when the time comes.

It’s harder to answer what not to do because everyone is different. But this: try to walk the journey as a joy rather than a burden, as hard as that may sound.

Let me share a personal example. My brother-in-law is dying of Parkinson’s, and my sister has such a beautiful attitude about it. She cherishes every moment they have together, and he appreciates everything she does for him. That’s the heart of it—not sweating the small stuff. Don’t get overwhelmed by thoughts like, “How will I do this? This is too much for me.”

It’s like any major task or project. Tackling 100% of it all at once will feel impossible. But if you take it one day or even one hour at a time, it becomes more manageable. I encourage people to focus on the day before them, enjoy the moments, and view life as a gift—even in hospice care—rather than a death sentence.

Jacobsen: How does poetry help people deal with that process?

Martin: Oh, I love poetry. I’ve found it phenomenal in helping me through the hardest times. Writing a poem lets those emotions flow out. Sometimes, the feelings I share in my poetry are even deeper than what I include in my stories. Poetry has a way of capturing things that ordinary words often cannot.

Whether you write traditional rhyming poetry, free verse, or other forms—what’s it called again? Oh yes, haiku—it doesn’t matter. Any poetry can help. If you’re poetry-minded, it can be incredibly healing.

Even journaling can be a powerful tool. Many of my families kept journals. When I would visit, they would tell me exactly what had happened over the past two or three days, and that journal helped us all stay on the same page. It also gave families a way to process their emotions.

Sometimes, journaling can feel time-consuming, and a few families told me they didn’t want to look back at it. But eventually, they often do, and they cherish those memories. Everyone is different—some prefer journaling, others prefer poetry—but for me, poetry has been profoundly healing in every aspect of my life.

Jacobsen: What do people typically want to be remembered for when they die?

Martin: That is such an interesting question. I’ve cared for people from all walks of life—millionaires, billionaires, people at the top of their careers, and others who lived quieter lives.

None of that matters. 99.9% of people know they aren’t taking anything with them. At the end of life, they want to be remembered for the love they’ve given, the joy they’ve shared, and the hopes they’ve held for their family. Those with regrets often spend their final days apologizing, confessing, and asking for forgiveness. I’ve noticed that if they don’t, they tend to have a much harder death.

The poignancy of dying brings what’s truly important into focus: making peace—with their families, themselves, and others.

Jacobsen: What do people typically say as their final words? Are there common themes in what people express near the end?

Martin: I see it in two ways. People who aren’t ready to go—spiritually or mentally—often have a harder time. In contrast, those who are at peace tend to say the most beautiful things.

They often see things or talk to loved ones who have already passed. They’re peaceful. They want their family around them. Some people request joyful, upbeat music. Others want something quiet and serene. Everyone is different, so it’s hard to generalize.

But most people don’t care about their achievements or material success at the end of life. They truly want to be remembered for their kindness, love, and the peace they brought into the world.

Jacobsen: So their achievements mean much less to them at that point?

Martin: Yes. Absolutely. I’ve cared for people from all walks of life—CEOs, doctors, highly successful professionals—and they’re just like you and me at the end of their lives. Death levels us all.

I’ve had people confess things they’ve carried for years. Many highly accomplished individuals find peace only when they make amends with others and themselves. I say “go to heaven” because that’s my belief. But I’ve cared for people from many faiths—Hindus, Muslims, and others. My role is never to convert them. I respect everyone’s faith and beliefs.

Most people want peace with their family, peace within themselves, and peace with their God. However, they define that relationship.

Jacobsen: How do you use these experiences from hospice care in your prison ministry?

Martin: Oh, wow. Prison ministry is a completely different experience—but there are parallels.

When I enter the prison, I tell the women, “There’s no such thing as a perfect family. I’m just as broken as you are, only in a different way.” That levelled the playing field. It helped them see that we’re all human and trying to help one another.

My goal is to help them find Jesus so they can have peace and maybe walk away from their addictions or destructive cycles. I’ll help them in any way I can.

The ministry might look different, but at its core, it’s about pointing people toward faith, love, and hope. That said, I don’t sugarcoat things. We talk about the hard stuff—how difficult it is to be in prison, the regrets they have, and the challenges they face. We face it all together.

I have a young woman now—she’s 21 years old—and she’s going to be in prison for 40 years. I’m going to visit her next week. My heart aches for her, and I cannot imagine what she must be going through.

So, you must have a heart for prison ministry and hospice work. You have to love people and find joy in reaching out to others and helping them in their hardest times—whether that’s being in prison or having a loved one who’s dying.

Jacobsen: One of the lighter aspects of your story, something not as difficult as prison or as tragic as hospice care, is your work in women’s mentorship programs at your church. Different demographics require different kinds of support. What do you find women need most in church mentorship?

Martin: Oh, wow. That’s a great question.

Again, it comes down to reaching out to people who are struggling. At my age, I do much mentoring with younger women in the church—women who may be wrestling with their faith or asking, “What’s life all about? What’s my purpose?” I let them know I was once in that same place and understood.

The key is walking the journey with them. It’s not about having all the answers—because I don’t. Sometimes, it’s just about being someone who can listen and say, “That must be so difficult.” It’s about showing empathy, not necessarily fixing everything.

For example, when a young father comes to me and says, “Why is my wife dying at 35? Why is this happening to us when we have four children?”—a hard question. That’s a very hard question. I don’t always have the answers, and it’s okay to admit that.

What I can do is listen, care, and pray for them. That gives them even a small hope to move forward.

Jacobsen: Karen, thank you for the wonderful conversation today.

Martin: Not a problem. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: I will continue to pray for you and your family as you navigate death and dying as well.

Martin: Thank you. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Is there anything else you’d like to add?

Martin: No, I think that’s it for now.

Jacobsen: We’ll be in touch. Thank you so much.

Martin: Bye.

Jacobsen: Bye-bye.

Martin: God bless you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Harrison Mumia and Atheism in Kenya

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/05

The Atheists In Kenya Society (AIK) is a nonprofit organization founded by Harrison Mumia on February 17, 2016. It promotes the rights and visibility of atheists in Kenya and advocates for secularism and rational inquiry. AIK is affiliated with Humanists International and actively engages in legal and social activism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re here with Harrison Mumia. When you hear stories of people coming out as atheists in Kenya and consider the political situation in Kenya, particularly regarding religious influence on politics and society, what stories come forward? What common themes may people need to learn about in Kenya?

Harrison Mumia: Thank you so much, Scott. We’re happy to have this conversation. In Kenya, the public is generally skeptical of atheism because it is still a relatively new concept in our societal landscape.

We see a public that does not necessarily reject the idea that people like us exist, but they portray us as individuals who are misguided or who do not fully understand ourselves. In our interactions with politicians and the public, we frequently comment as a society on political events in Kenya, always striving to maintain a rational and fair approach.

We consistently respond to political matters to ensure that governance is logical and adheres to principles of good leadership. However, the feedback we receive often reflects skepticism. Many people believe there is something inherently wrong with us.

A small percentage of Kenyans agree with us regarding our position as an organization that does not believe in God or the supernatural. However, the majority still need to be convinced of our perspective. That said, we are making progress. Through dialogue, there is slow but measurable acceptance.

This acceptance is very gradual. For example, some politicians have acknowledged us and even supported certain ideas we advocate for, particularly on social media. Prominent lawyers in Kenya are also taking note of our work.

Nevertheless, Kenya is a highly religious country. The Catholic Church, Protestant movements, and the Muslim community wield significant influence in public life, and their views are given considerable weight.

Despite this, we are working hard to ensure our voice is heard. We issue press statements regularly and actively participate on social media to share our perspectives. This helps people see that we have a legitimate voice in public discourse. While skepticism persists, a small but growing minority is beginning to accept our presence.

Jacobsen: What about challenges within families? How do people navigate coming out as non-religious in family structures with greater intimacy and pressure? Families often have specific expectations for men, women, the young, and the old.

Mumia: Many non-religious people prefer not to disclose their position to their families because religion is deeply embedded in Kenyan family traditions.

For instance, family ceremonies, such as weddings, are almost always expected to have a religious component. Most parents strongly believe that religion must be central in such occasions. Our education system also includes a substantial religious component, and even in some public-sector jobs, religion is a factor.

These deeply rooted cultural and societal norms make it difficult for individuals to openly identify as non-religious without facing significant challenges or backlash.

Our education system, particularly in universities, often incorporates a religious component. For example, there are universities in Kenya where you must belong to a specific church or religion to gain admission. This reflects our history as a nation and our deeply rooted religious traditions.

Because of this, many Kenyans are reluctant to disappoint their family members by revealing their religious positions, especially if they are openly atheists. We understand that they often cannot come out openly to their families. This is why we have WhatsApp groups where people can engage and share their thoughts without publicly coming out.

I see a generational transition within Kenya. The younger generation is more open to identifying as atheists, although they tend to do so individually rather than in large groups. On the other hand, the older generation remains deeply conservative and tied to religious traditions.

So, there is a transition happening, albeit slowly. Despite this, the fact that we have a recognized space in Kenya and some degree of legal recognition is a positive starting point. The government’s awareness of our existence is a step forward. That, in itself, is progress in the Kenyan context.

Jacobsen: What about the Constitution or policies that are passed? Is the Constitution formally secular? Are there policies that support secularism? Yet, in practice, that doesn’t necessarily happen.

Mumia: Our Constitution is secular. However, the preamble states, “We, the people of Kenya, believe in the God Almighty.” This explicitly affirms God’s supremacy.

Jacobsen: We have that, too—’affirming the supremacy of God.’

Mumia: Yes, but in Kenya, it gets even more specific. The preamble refers to “God Almighty, the creator of everything.” Religious beliefs influenced the framers of the Constitution, and we understand that.

However, the Bill of Rights is highly progressive. Article 32 of our Constitution guarantees freedom of religion, freedom of belief, and freedom of conscience.

On another note, Scott, a significant legal judgment is coming next week. Two years ago, a religious individual sued us, and the court is set to rule on our constitutionality as a society. The judgment will clarify our legal space in light of the Constitution.

The court will deliver its decision next Tuesday. I will share the link if you want to join and listen to the judge’s ruling. It’s an important case, as it addresses our existence and rights as a society.

If the religious groups lose the case, it will be a significant step forward for Kenya in affirming religious freedom. We are optimistic about winning because they initiated the lawsuit. We are the defendants in this case and expect them to lose.

If they lose, it will mark a huge milestone for the legal and constitutional interpretation of non-religious people’s rights in Kenya. So, we’re eagerly awaiting this. We’re making progress.

Jacobsen: There was a comment from a member named Fiona, who made an astute point: “The constitution doesn’t matter, if a certain group of people feel ‘oppressed’ by our existence.” What happens, in this case, in terms of social reprisals? You live in a secular society, and the Constitution is secular. Yes, there’s the ongoing legal situation, but what about individuals who feel “oppressed” by your existence as atheists, believing that your mere presence is somehow imposing on their beliefs?

Mumia: That’s a very interesting point. From my perspective, in Kenya right now, I’ve never seen an atheist being arrested, beaten, or attacked by the government or any forces. I’m the most public atheist in Kenya—everyone knows me. I can travel to any part of the country freely.

I’ve been invited to forums and universities, and in just two days, we’re hosting a public end-of-year party. We’ve publicly announced the location; any Kenyan is welcome to attend. We’ve never faced any physical threats or attacks, and I haven’t had any atheists write to me saying, “Mumia, I’m in danger because I’m an atheist.”

The main challenges atheists face in Kenya are within their families. For example, someone might lose a relationship with their parents after coming out as an atheist. But in terms of general societal interaction, we haven’t seen oppression the way Nigeria has in the Mubarak Bala case.

If such incidents did occur, they would reflect poorly on the government. Kenyans are agitating strongly for fundamental freedoms, including the right to protest and express dissent. While Kenya is a religious nation, many Kenyans are also rational. If a government overreach or repression were to happen, many people would side with us.

For example, you might recall the Gen Z protests. That movement demonstrated how strongly Kenyans value their rights and freedoms.

The Gen Z protest, for example, was not organized by anyone in particular. Despite this, Kenyans gathered outside parliament to protest the finance bill, which introduced heavy taxation that many Kenyans opposed.

Our society supported the demonstrators during these protests, and we received positive feedback. Many protesters appreciated our stance, which was evident on social media.

Let me tell you something, Scott. As long as we continue advocating for human rights and fundamental freedoms, we have the potential to change how society views atheists and our organization. By demonstrating that we care about the same issues as others, we humanize ourselves in their eyes.

Our goal is to show them that we’re just human beings who care about the same things they do. So far, I haven’t seen any violence directed at atheists in Kenya. It’s not like in countries such as Saudi Arabia or Nigeria, where atheists face severe consequences. That would never happen here.

We regularly post memes and commentary on social media, some of which critique religion. Despite this, I’ve never faced threats or heard of anyone saying, “We’re going to arrest Mumia for this.” Kenya is more liberal in this regard.

If there were issues, they would likely be resolved in court, where we have lawyers to defend our position. That’s the environment we operate in, and that’s how I see it.

Jacobsen: What about the case of street preachers, Jehovah’s Witnesses who knock on your door, or a family member or friend who happens to be an aggressive believer? They might say, “The preamble to our Constitution says there is a creator who made you. How could you deny His existence?”

Mumia: Yes, we have Jehovah’s Witnesses here. They still go door-to-door, knocking and sharing their pamphlets. I’ve had them come to my door and hand me literature about their beliefs.

In addition, we often see press conferences by religious leaders who refer to the Constitution’s preamble. They proclaim Kenya as a God-fearing nation because the preamble mentions “the God Almighty.”

However, their assertions begin and end there. They cling to the preamble, but it doesn’t hold much weight for us. To us, it means nothing. We are more focused on defending our fundamental rights and freedoms.

Beyond Jehovah’s Witnesses and a few other groups knocking on doors, the pushback we encounter comes in the form of public statements, such as press conferences where religious groups assert that Kenya is a God-fearing nation. We object to these claims every time they are made.

While we respect their right to express their views, we firmly believe that the preamble has no bearing on our rights or freedoms as non-believers. That’s where we focus our efforts.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Harrison, thank you again.

Mumia: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Robyn Blumner: On the Center for Inquiry Now

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/04

Robyn Ellen Blumner (born May 14, 1961) is an American attorney, civil rights advocate, journalist, and CEO of the Center for Inquiry. A graduate of Cornell University and New York University School of Law, she served as a director for the ACLU in Utah and Florida, focusing on civil liberties and rights. She later became a syndicated opinion writer for the Tampa Bay Times, earning recognition as a Pulitzer Prize finalist. Currently, she also leads the Richard Dawkins Foundation for Reason and Science, where she promotes secular values and science education. Blumner is an outspoken atheist and champion of secular humanism.

Blumner discusses her journey into atheism and humanism, starting in childhood and becoming more prominent after her column “I’m an Atheist, So What?” drew massive response. Joining the Richard Dawkins Foundation led to her role at the Center for Inquiry (CFI), merging both organizations to promote science, skepticism, and secularism. Blumner highlights CFI’s initiatives: challenging pseudoscience, supporting secular celebrants, defending church-state separation, and rescuing atheist activists abroad. She views these efforts as essential defenses of Enlightenment values. Despite opposition from Christian nationalism and pseudoscience advocates, Blumner remains focused on the work..

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Robyn Blumner. We will discuss all things related to American humanism and scientific skepticism. Where should we start? What is your personal, superhero-like origin story in scientific skepticism and secular humanism?

Robyn Blumner: We can go back to when I was 11 or 12 years old when I first realized that I was an atheist. I was raised in a Jewish household, but it didn’t stick. Let’s put it that way. I was questioning the existence of God and the biblical stories I was taught from an early age. Finally, sometime between the ages of 11 and 12—I can’t pinpoint the exact moment—I said, “I’m no longer a believer.”

I became an atheist, and I would sit quietly, but I refused to drink the Kool-Aid any more. That all happened at a fairly young age, but for a long time, I was the only atheist I knew. That changed by the time I got to college, where I met many more like-minded individuals. Eventually, my entire family became atheists, one way or another. They either arrived at it organically or decided they were atheists, including both of my parents. But it took quite a while before I found others who were kindred spirits.

That said, atheism wasn’t a central part of my identity growing up. I wasn’t necessarily seeking out humanist or secular groups. I would mention it if there were an appropriate opportunity without causing unnecessary offence to others.

Fast forward to 2004, when Sam Harris came out with The End of Faith. However, even before that book—about a week or two earlier—I wrote a column for the St. Petersburg Times newspaper in Florida, where I was a columnist and editorial writer, titled I’m an Atheist, So What? 

That column was my way of publicly coming out as an atheist to my newspaper readership. I was syndicated across the country, so it appeared in newspapers in several cities.

I was inspired to write it because of an incident at a Tampa City Council meeting, where a council member invited an atheist to give an invocation. Instead of listening to the atheist, two council members stormed out of the room in disgust, standing in solidarity with the idea that atheists cannot be moral people. I felt it was my duty to defend the atheist who gave the invocation publicly. It was a beautiful sentiment emphasizing church-state separation and respecting each person’s liberty to have freedom of conscience—to believe or not believe as they saw fit.

Jacobsen: That must have been quite a moment. How did people respond?

Blumner: I received more letters in response to that column than for any other I had written—hundreds and hundreds of them. A small portion told me I was damned and going to hell.

Jacobsen: Naturally. 

Blumner: But most letters were from people thanking me for voicing what they had been thinking for most of their lives. One man wrote that he had been reading newspapers for over 70 years and had never seen his perspective reflected in a mainstream publication.

It was heart-wrenching to see how this small outreach to the atheist community resulted in such a tsunami of responses. It was like this giant exhale of relief as if somebody had finally stepped into the limelight. It voiced the truth of their understanding of the nature of reality. What it showed me was that this was an important endeavour. It didn’t take long after that for the New Atheist movement to gain traction. You had the books of Sam Harris, The God Delusion by Richard Dawkins; God is Not Great by Christopher Hitchens, and Dan Dennett’s books.

At the time, I was still with the newspaper, but in 2013, I was approached about the job to take over the Richard Dawkins Foundation. That meant my husband and I would have to quit our jobs, move from newspapers, and relocate to Washington, D.C. I had been a huge fan of Richard Dawkins—notfor The God Delusion, which I thought was a beautifully written polemic on why faith doesn’t have a rational basis, but also for his evolutionary biology books. They made me love and understand that subject at a much deeper level than I had after taking biology in school.

I was attracted to the position because of the man at the helm, so I took it, and we moved to Washington, D.C. Within two years, the Center for Inquiry (CFI) approached the Richard Dawkins Foundation to see if we’d be willing to merge with them. CFI is a much larger organization with a legacy spanning almost 50 years.

It was a good fit. The two organizations had overlapping missions—promoting reason, science, and secularism. At the time, Ron Lindsay, my predecessor and the president and CEO of CFI, had announced his plans to retire. So, it was a wonderful symbiosis, having the Richard Dawkins Foundation merge with CFI and then having me step into the leadership role. That brings us to the present day.

Jacobsen: That’s quite the origin story. Now, here you are, 20 years after that first coming-out article, leading, ironically, a tripartite set of organizations and as one of the most prominent women in these movements. How does it feel, 20 years later, reflecting on how an article sparked heartfelt responses, both positive and negative, and then taking on a huge role advocating for scientific skepticism, humanistic values, and secularism? I’m sure you’ve received both love and hate waves in this position.

Blumner: Few people get to do professionally what they would choose to do as volunteers, and I’m one of those lucky few. Earlier in my career, I earned a law degree.

I was head of the ACLU in Utah and the ACLU in Florida before transitioning to a columnist and nationally syndicated editorial writer. So, I have a background in progressive advocacy and civil liberties litigation. I always thought that working for the ACLU would be the apex of my career in representing my values through an organization. It turns out I was wrong. This is, without a doubt, the apex of my career in representing my values through an organization.

The Center for Inquiry promotes reason, science, and secularism. The entire package of Enlightenment values is the secret sauce to humanity’s progress and happiness. There’s no better way to structure society—based on the evidence of world history—than to promote reason, science, and secularism in a society. I love the Center for Inquiry, the work we do, and the values it represents. While some antagonism comes my way, I have a bit of a force field around me because I love what I do so much that it’s hard to penetrate this feeling of fulfillment with discouraging words and hostility.

Jacobsen: I have to ask because I’ve interviewed many women in this movement, too. I did an article a while ago that was quite popular. It was a play on The Unbearable Lightness of Being, titled The Incredible Politeness of Being: Women in the Secular Communities. It was long. I got commentary from some prominent voices then and now.

I’ve quoted interviews before. In one recent interview with Mneka Mbanje from the Zimbabwe humanist group run by Tauya Chinama. She mentioned she was supposed to travel to the World Humanist General Assembly in Singapore but couldn’t due to some factors. I asked her if the critique, criticism, and hostility she receives as a humanist woman in Zimbabwe is more substantive than what men experience. She said, “Very much gendered.”

In your experience, either in conversations with other women in the movement orfrom banter, do you find that the hostility you receive is gendered compared to men? Do you find it a gendered experience in terms of the kind of hate you get?

Blumner: I don’t, no.

Jacobsen: You don’t? Interesting.

Blumner: No, I don’t. First of all, I don’t get much hate—maybe because I’m not looking for it. I’m not reading the Twitterverse, and I don’t go seeking out the postings of antagonistic voices. I’ve got work to do, and I don’t have time for that. I used to have a personal credo when I was a columnist.

If I wrote a column and you didn’t agree with it, I’d be interested in your critique, but not in ad hominem attacks. If someone sent me an email—and this was before many comments were posted online—I’d only read up to the first insult.

Blumner: Once I encounter an insult, I delete the message. I’m not interested in your point of view if you can’t communicate civilly. The way I interact with the online atmosphere is that I generally ignore it. It may be that ugly stuff is being said about me, but I don’t know about it. .

Jacobsen: Two things: First, that’s a wise policy. Second, it may indicate a healthier societal development when hate and love are equal-opportunity responses.

Blumner: yes, that’s so true. There’s a lot of anger in cyberspace and much ugliness spread by largely insignificant people. When you read what they say, you give them too much credit and worry about it. I don’t do either of those things.

Jacobsen: Good approach. Now, shifting focus, let’s discuss getting involved in more positive and constructive societal endeavours. Specifically, regarding the Richard Dawkins Foundation for Reason and Science and the Center for Inquiry, what is the importance of each in their respective domains? How can people get involved by donating money, donating expertise, volunteering, or writing articles for newsletters, blogs, publications, and journals?

Blumner: Let me tell you a bit about the Center for Inquiry’s (CFI) origin story. It was founded in 1976 by Carl Sagan, Isaac Asimov, James “The Amazing” Randi, and Paul Kurtz—the house Paul built. Kurtz was a philosophy professor at SUNY Buffalo, and the Center for Inquiry’s headquarters is still in Buffalo, though we also have a building in Los Angeles. Many of our 31 staff members work remotely across the United States.

The founders created an organization called CSICOP—C-S-I-C-O-P—the Committee for the Scientific Investigation of Claims of the Paranormal. As the name suggests, the impetus was to combat the “Age of Aquarius” nonsense that was catching fire then. Think of psychic powers, ESP, telekinesis, talking to the dead, and weird alternative medicine. All this woo was capturing the attention of even educated people without the scientific community rising to challenge it.

The organization was founded to challenge these forms of pseudoscience. CSICOP eventually became the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry. Paul Kurtz also helped found the Council for Secular Humanism, an organization that promotes atheism and secular humanism.

These were not distinct missions because religion is another form of pseudoscience. Pseudoscience is when nonsense gets wrapped up in the garb of science—claims about the natural world grounded in wishful thinking or received wisdom rather than evidence or science. So, religion is a form of pseudoscience. It’s grounded in faith, not evidence.

It makes claims about the natural world that turn out not to be true over and over again. So, it fits well within the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry portfolio. However, Paul Kurtz created another organization, the Council for Secular Humanism. Those two entities worked side by side. The Committee for Skeptical Inquiry published Skeptical Inquirer magazine, and the Council for Secular Humanism published Free Inquiry magazine.

We still have tens of thousands of subscribers to those magazines today. I encourage anyone interested in these subjects to subscribe because you won’t find a better range of interesting, thoughtful opinions in those areas than in these magazines. Then, the Richard Dawkins Foundation for Reason and Science merged with us in 2016, which completed the picture we have today.

We go way beyond publishing magazines. I see the job of CFI as promoting Enlightenment values. We have a legal department; bringing church-state separation cases, and challenging medical quackery. Right now, one of our biggest cases is a suit against Boiron, the largest homeopathic manufacturer in the world. We’re claiming Boiron uses deceptive marketing practices when selling their products. If you look at their labelling, they essentially claim that what you’re getting is real medicine when, in reality, it’s a sugar pill—a placebo. That’s the only effect homeopathy has on a patient.

We have a legal program and a lobbying program. Our lobbyist works in state legislatures across the United States, lobbying against ideas like Louisiana’s law forcing the Ten Commandments onto the walls of every classroom in the state.

We also have a program called Secular Rescue. We save the lives of atheist activists overseas, dozens of them each year. We teach teachers how to teach evolution through our Teacher Institute for Evolutionary Science. We have an incredible range of programs that promote reason, science, and secularism.

Jacobsen: What are some of the other current activities of the Center for Inquiry?

Blumner: One of our programs focuses on promoting secular celebrants. In every state in the United States, religious leaders automatically have the legal right to solemnize marriages, but secular individuals often lack this right. To address this, we have pursued legal action in multiple jurisdictions to secure the right for humanists to solemnize marriages. We also provide a program to certify secular celebrants, who receive certification from us after completing a training program, demonstrating they are qualified to solemnize marriages and officiate various services and ceremonies, such as funerals, graduations, and other celebrations.

Most importantly, we seek the legal right for secular celebrants to marry people. Many individuals prefer to choose between something other than a religious leader or a city clerk, so our program certifies secular celebrants, whom we then represent in lawsuits to challenge state laws that restrict humanist officiants from solemnizing marriages. We have filed such a case in Texas on behalf of a secular celebrant there and won the right for secular celebrants to officiate and solemnize marriages in Illinois. Similar efforts in Michigan and other states have equalized rights between religious leaders and secular celebrants. This effort remains part of our active legal program.

As I mentioned earlier, another legal initiative involves litigation against Boiron, one of the largest manufacturers of homeopathic products, for alleged deceptive marketing practices. Boiron claims that its homeopathic remedies are effective treatments for various illnesses. Evidence shows these claims are unsupported, except for a possible placebo effect. Basically homeopathic products are modern-day snake oil. They cannot work because they contain no actual medicine.

While this work is intensive and expensive, it is deeply rewarding. We are especially hopeful about the Boiron case, and while it may take years, we are committed to seeing it through.

In addition, we have a program called the Teacher Institute for Evolutionary Science (TIES), which provides science teachers with resources to teach evolution and address criticisms effectively. Many teachers, especially in middle schools, are underprepared to teach evolution and may avoid it altogether. Through TIES, we provide these educators with knowledge, tools, and confidence so that they are equipped with materials, labs, and tests to offer a robust educational experience to their students. We have hosted teacher development workshops in every U.S. state, including states where resistance to evolution education can be strong, such as Alabama, Arkansas, Mississippi, and South Dakota. So far, we have reached more than 3,500 teachers nationwide, which will benefit generations of students.

Additionally, we run an initiative called “ScienceSaves,” which promotes appreciation for science’s invaluable contributions to our lives. We are working to establish March 26th as National Science Appreciation Day in the United States, honouring the day in 1953 when Dr. Jonas Salk announced the success of the polio vaccine.

The idea is that science needs an advocate these days. There’s a lot of misinformation, pseudoscience, and distrust of science.  Not enough people truly understand how vital science is to their longevity, health, prosperity, and happiness. So, we remind people of what science has contributed to their lives. One of our initiatives is an annual college scholarship contest. We ask high school seniors planning to attend college the following year to submit a 30-second video describing how science has helped them or someone they know or love. We then jury these videos and select winners, along with honourable mentions.

We also encourage participants to share their videos on their social media platforms, creating a peer-to-peer science advocacy effort that has been extremely successful. 

We have the only full-time paranormal investigator in the world, Kenny Biddle. He frequently receives queries about ghost sightings or other supernatural or paranormal claims, which he thoroughly investigates.

Kenny spends much of his time dismantling videos purporting to show something supernatural and demonstrating how specific techniques, fraudulent techniques, are executed. He’s incredibly skilled and engaging, drawing a diverse audience of believers and skeptics. Even those who believe in ghosts are interested in seeing him debunk these claims, and he’s remarkably effective at challenging those beliefs. So, that’s part of what we do.

We also have a podcast called Point of Inquiry. During the year, we host Skeptical Inquirer Presents, which are free online lectures open to the public. Our CFI West Executive Director, Jim Underdown, has a web series called SkeptaLab: The Bunk Stops Here—you can Google SkeptaLab, and the episodes will come up. In each episode, he uses Los Angeles celebrities to explore a different supernatural or paranormal claim, such as telekinesis, astrology, dowsing, and U.F.O.s.

In an entertaining 20 minutes, Jim walks viewers through how people might get confused or misled into thinking pseudosciences are real. He enlists scientists to explain the underlying physics or chemistry to reveal the truth. Additionally, Jim oversees our $500,000 paranormal challenge, which has been ongoing for 20 years.

The challenge is similar to the late James Randi’s $1,000,000,e We set aside $500,000 instead. It’s open to anyone claiming psychic or paranormal abilities. Participants can test their skills under controlled conditions, with tests agreed upon in advance. Suppose they can demonstrate an ability like moving an object with their mind, predicting the next card in a deck, or locating a hidden water bottle among 20 cups. In that case, we’ll pay them the $500,000. So far, our money remains safe.

So that gives you an overview of the work of the Center For Inquiry. 

Jacobsen: What about Free Inquiry

BlumnerFree Inquiry is a project of the Council For Secular Humanism, the arm of CFI that focuses on atheism and humanism work. It is an excellent magazine that explores the latest humanist thought and atheist advocacy. 

Jacobsen: What about international outreach? I am Canadian—a foreigner to Americans. You have affiliates like the Center For Inquiry Canada. How does outreach contribute to advancing knowledge, education, and humanist values?

Blumner: That’s a great question. We do have branches around the world. For example, we support a humanist orphanage in Kenya. The orphanage assists children whose parents, or the children themselves, have been accused of witchcraft, forcing them to flee. This orphanage provides a haven and pays school fees so that these children can receive an education. We also have a C.F.I. in Argentina and one in France.

These branches often rely on dedicated humanist leaders within their countries to carry the mission forward.. CFI Canada used to be a part of the Center For Inquiry. It was once integrated within our organization, but at some point before I came on board, a decision was made for CFI Canada to become independent. This separation mainly allowed Canadians to donate tax-deductible funds directly to CFI Canada rather than to an American nonprofit without tax advantages for Canadians.

While we support CFI Canada’s success, we are no longer aligned as a single organization. 

Jacobsen: What about conferences and events, such as C.S.I.C.O.N. 2024?

Blumner: Yes, C.S.I.C.O.N. 2024 just took place—I returned from Las Vegas a few days ago. It was a fantastic conference. Many videos will be available online soon, so look out for those. We honoured astrophysicist Brian Cox with the Richard Dawkins Award for 2024, and he gave an incredible talk about black holes and singularities.

Neil deGrasse Tyson delivered a keynote address as well. Neil is an extraordinary speaker whose public presentations overflow with insight and charisma, and we are always thrilled to have him at our conferences. We also hosted climate scientist Michael Mann, who addressed the serious state of our planet and updated us on what the “hockey stick” graph now shows.

To clarify, C.S.I.C.O.N.stands for the Committee For Skeptical Inquiry Convention. It’s always been centred on skepticism work.

Much focus these days revolves around medical quackery and pseudoscience. So much quackery is being sold as medicine, and many consumers are misled, confused, and deceived into buying treatments that don’t work. This topic comprised a large portion of the presentations at the recent event. CSICON also serves as an opportunity for professors in critical thinking and debunking misinformation to share their insights. We constantly seek effective tools to help people trapped in conspiracy theories and misinformation find a way out.

Jacobsen: Now, as you’re running this organization—which encompasses three entities in one—you have publications, media, conferences, events, advocacy in education, and international outreach. A lot is happening at once within the organization. What aspects of your work tend to receive the most pushback from those who oppose promoting science, reason, secular values, humanism, or critical thinking?

Blumner: The strongest opposition typically comes from those who want the country to be explicitly Christian in nature, law, and practice. The Christian nationalist movement has been gaining momentum recently, with allies in the federal judiciary in the United States. We’re seeing an unfortunate regression in enforcing the Establishment Clause of the Constitution, which mandates the separation of church and state. It’s disheartening that the clear line between church and state, firmly established since the mid-20th century, is now blurred. The U.S. Supreme Court seems ready to elevate religious belief as an overriding right that trumps other constitutional interests.

Under the Court’s current jurisprudence, a neutral law that applies to everyone could automatically have an exception for religious beliefs. This is, perhaps, the most distressing recent development in constitutional law. We’ve seen this in the Dobbs decision, which reversed Roe v. Wade, eliminating the federal right to abortion in America. The notion that a cluster of cells smaller than a pinhead is equivalent to a human being like you or me is a theological stance, not a scientific one. For the Court to undercut the right to privacy and place a woman’s rights on equal footing with an embryo and fetus—effectively denying a woman’s right to bodily autonomy and her ability to make personal medical decisions—is a travesty.

And it’s grounded in religious dogma, not law, which is distressing. We will continue to fight, and hopefully, one day, new jurists will arrive at different conclusions. 

Jacobsen: What do you consider secondary concerns to the immediate issue of Christian nationalist encroachment into secular life in the United States? If Christian nationalism is number one on that list, what would be number two?

Blumner: We’ve observed an increase in identitarian political leanings infiltrating scientific endeavours, which poses a danger to the scientific method. For example, we’re seeing the suggestion that traditional or indigenous medical practices are equal to Western scientific medicine entering scientific institutions, medical schools, and curricula. In places like New Zealand and, increasingly, Canada, there’s a push to recognize Indigenous knowledge as equivalent to Western science despite it often being grounded in creation myths and storytelling rather than clinical testing or the scientific method. While certain outcomes from indigenous knowledge might be beneficial, a scientific claim should only be presented as truth within science once it is rigorously tested.

For the integrity of scientific truth, it’s crucial to set aside political biases and evaluate claims with the same rigour applied to all scientific inquiries. Creationism, for instance, asserts that life’s diversity stems from supernatural sources rather than evolution and natural selection. Whether that’s framed as God or Jesus or a mythological figure from an indigenous culture, it remains creationism and not science.

Jacobsen: If you had ample personnel and funding—say, a hundred staff and unlimited resources—what sort of outreach would you prioritize for public awareness, benefiting the general public, and growing secular humanism and scientific skepticism?

Blumner: I’d allocate more resources to lobbying efforts. It’s challenging to effectively moniter the activities of 50 state legislatures with our current lobbying capabilities. Much of the problematic legislation could be countered with stronger lobbying power. For example, in Louisiana, there’s now a requirement to display the Ten Commandments in every classroom. In Oklahoma, public schools are set to teach the Bible. Additionally, naturopathic groups are pushing to receive medical credentials, which is both absurd and dangerous.

We’re fighting a 50-front war with a tiny army. I would love to expand our lobbying staff. As you suggested, we need an advertising campaign to help people understand the importance of science, the dangers of pseudoscience, and what it truly is. People also need to see that Christian nationalism is not at all what America’s founders envisioned for this country—quite the opposite.

This is an attention economy; we need resources to capture more attention. 

Jacobsen: Who are some of your biggest allies in these efforts?  I know, for instance, that when people want to place giant tablets of the Ten Commandments on a courthouse lawn, The Satanic Temple might respond by erecting a statue of Baphomet, claiming their religious freedom as a form of protest. Which organizations, groups, or individuals do you find to be consistent and reliable allies?

Blumner: We certainly welcome allies from all sides. Some groups align with us on one issue but may oppose us on another. The Satanic Temple, for example, has a knack for humorous and impactful stunts, capturing public attention with its “hoist you on your own petard” approach. It’s truly mastered the art of clever P.R. What makes CFI unique among secular groups is our focus on challenging pseudoscience. We are pro-vaccine, track medical quackery, and even take legal cases on those issues. When we’re in legislative discussions, we’re not just countering religious legislation but also monitoring the actions of the alternative medicine lobby.

Jacobsen: Among late secular humanists and scientific skeptics who have died, who stands out to you as a hero or an inspiration?

Blumner: Christopher Hitchens has to be at the top of that list. I’ve never seen anyone as skilled as Hitchens at verbally dismantling an opponent. He was also a brilliant, impactful writer. Other heroes include Robert Green Ingersoll, Thomas Paine, Thomas Jefferson, Mary Wollstonecraft, and John Stuart Mill. The writers of the Enlightenment are my greatest heroes. Then there’s Bertrand Russell, a more recent and brave atheist. Losing Dan Dennett recently was a tremendous loss to our movement. There are many giants whose shoulders we stand on.

Jacobsen: What would you choose if you had a small bookshelf and could only include a few books to guide people?

Blumner: Steven Pinker’s Enlightenment Now would be at the top. Richard Dawkins’ The God Delusion, the Selfish Gene, and Carl Sagan’s The Demon-Haunted World would also be essential. It’s a solid list.

Jacobsen: Here’s a foundational question. Do these recurring counter-movements against secular humanism, scientific skepticism, reproductive rights, human rights, and similar issues primarily attack what we see as the continuation of the Enlightenment’s substantive work? I don’t necessarily mean just the values themselves but also the practices—whether it’s lawsuits over homeopathic pseudoscience, proper education for middle school teachers on evolution, challenges to religious fundamentalism infringing on reproductive rights, and so forth. The many issues discussed in this interview all seem to touch on this. Short version: Foundationally, do you see these attacks as assaults on what we consider an extension of Enlightenment values?

Blumner: Yes. We stand for reason, science, and secularism—fundamental values of the Enlightenment. Much of what we do flows from those principles, including protecting individual rights and freedom of conscience. Suppose someone wants America to be a Christian nation. In that case, they’ll discard freedom of conscience, impartiality in the law, and the democratic principle that individuals have a right to dissent. This seriously threatens the American experiment, which we’ve helped successfully export elsewhere.

Sadly, many Americans don’t fully grasp this danger. People worldwide sometimes seem more alarmed at America’s trajectory than many of my fellow Americans.

Jacobsen: Is there anything else you’d like to address that we still need to cover?

Blumner: You did a fantastic job covering the full scope. Thanks for the thorough discussion!

Jacobsen: Nice to meet you.

Blumner: Nice to meet you. Bye-bye.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Steven Stosny, Ph.D. on CompassionPower and Relational Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/03

Steven Stosny, Ph.D., is the founder of CompassionPower in suburban Washington, DC. Dr. Steven Stosny’s most recent books are Empowered Love and Soar Above: How to Use the Most Profound Part of Your Brain under Any Kind of Stress. He has appeared on “The Oprah Winfrey Show,” “The Today Show,” “CBS Sunday Morning,” and CNN’s “Talkback Live” and “Anderson Cooper 360” and has been the subject of articles in, The New York Times, The Washington Post, U.S. News & World Report, The Wall Street Journal, Esquire, Cosmopolitan, O, Psychology Today, AP, Reuters, and USA Today. He has offered hundreds of workshops all over the world and has presented at most of the leading professional conferences. A consultant in family violence for the Prince George’s County Circuit and District courts, as well as for several mental health agencies in Maryland and Virginia, he has treated over 6,000 clients for various forms of resentment, anger, abuse, and violence. He has taught at the University of Maryland and at St. Mary’s College of Maryland.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Physiologically and psychologically, what is anger, and what is the purpose, evolutionarily, of anger?

Dr. Steven Stosny: Physiologically, anger prepares us to fight, with a burst of adrenaline and by sending action signals in the form of peptides to the muscles and organs of the body. It evolved as a survival emotion, activated by a real or imagined threat to life and limb, loved ones, property, or territory. Psychologically, it protects the ego. The bigger and more fragile the ego, the more frequent the anger.

Jacobsen: How do compassion and self-empowerment work into the work of cognitive-behavioral therapies?

Stosny: Compassion is an emotional regulator, incompatible with resentment and anger. We can’t be compassionate and angry at the same time. Self-empowerment puts focus on the ability to improve, appreciate, connect and protect, whereas the blame inherent in anger almost always makes matters worse. 

Jacobsen: What does the study of emotional regulation tell us about the treatment of domestic violence and family dynamics for relationships and intimacy?

Stosny: Emotional regulation means transforming an emotion likely to motivate behavior against one’s best interests into an emotion that enables behavior in one’s long-term best interest. Physical or verbal aggression against loved ones is self-destructive. Compassion for loved ones is transformative. 

Jacobsen: Why the emphasis on self-empowerment for clients rather than more traditional therapist led approaches?

Stosny: Anger is a cry of powerlessness. Traditional treatment for abusers urges them to give up power when they feel powerless. When empowered to regulate their own emotions, they have little interest in exerting power. Family relationships must be about value, not power. They like themselves better when valuing loved ones than when devaluing them.

Jacobsen: How can self-empowerment and the development of more emotional self-regulation make for healthier relationships with deeper intimacy?

Stosny: By definition, intimacy is letting down defenses, which you cannot do in the presence of anger and which becomes easier when compassionate. Healthy relationships are marked by safety, respect, compassion, and kindness.

Jacobsen: What are limitations still in your theoretical foundations in the CompassionPower model?

Stosny: The limitation is that it takes practice to gain self-regulation skill and change a lifetime of blame, denial, and avoidance into a future of improve, appreciate, connect, and protect. Some people want a quick fix.

Jacobsen: What are some common myths about anger that you encounter, and how do you address them in your work?

Stosny: That it means someone is trying to threaten you or valued persons or things. The perception of threat is necessarily tied to a perception of vulnerability. The more vulnerable we feel, the more threat we perceive. In modern times, we have attached anger to protecting the ego. Anger tells us more about a fragile ego than actual intended threat.

Jacobsen: Can you share simple techniques people can use to practice emotional regulation in their daily lives?

Stosny: There are no simple techniques to regulate anger, only to distract from it, which produce more anger in the long-run.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Gary Whittenberger, Reducing Gun Violence in the United States

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/02

Gary Whittenberger is a retired psychologist and freelance writer known for his thoughtful contributions to discussions on psychology, philosophy, science, and religion. Holding a doctorate in clinical psychology from Florida State University, he worked as a psychologist in federal prisons for 23 years. Whittenberger is an active member of the freethought community and co-directed the Tallahassee Freethinkers’ Forum. He has authored several works, including God Wants YOU to be an Atheist, and has written for Skeptic Magazine, Free Inquiry, and other publications. His articles often tackle complex topics such as personhood, free will, and gun violence prevention.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Quick backdrop questions, what have the work in clinical psychology, in federal prisons, and freethought activism, taught about the American culture’s psyche around guns–the heart of the matter?

Dr. Gary WhittenbergerScott, I want to thank you for this opportunity to talk about my article “A Comprehensive Program for Reducing Gun Violence in the US” which appeared in the October/November 2024 issue of Free Inquiry magazine.  Also, I compliment you on the great work you are doing with The Good Men Project.  We need more journalism, analysis, and commentary like that.

Turning to your question:  I think Americans have an obsession with guns which is unhealthy.  I think it has roots in the founding of a new country, exploring and settling the western frontier, and rebellion against old governments, all of which occurred a few centuries ago.  Fear and anger at levels higher in our country than what are found in other countries stimulate the ownership, purchase, and use of firearms.  Part of the solution is to lower these emotions and part of it is to reduce the access to and the number of firearms in the country.

Jacobsen: In the Uvalde case, what were the failures of law enforcement?

Whittenberger: Law enforcement officers failed to confront the shooter as soon as they could have and should have.  In my opinion, whenever there are at least two officers who have firearms on the scene, they should call for backup but begin to engage the shooter.  This response needs to be stipulated in policies, laws, and training.  Officers who do not have the willingness or courage to act to defend others in stressful situations should not be in law enforcement.

Jacobsen: How can gun regulations balance with Second Amendment rights?

WhittenbergerAs I said in my article, the Second Amendment needs to be amended.  Although American citizens should have a right to possess, own, and use guns, this right should not be absolute.  The right should be regulated, restricted, and limited for the common good, especially to minimize unjustified aggression.  I have suggested that ordinary citizens be limited to three firearms.  Nobody needs an armory.  I think “military type” guns should be held from the public.  I believe that five different groups of persons should be prohibited from having guns.  Any ethical, well-trained, and responsible firearms user has no good reason to oppose these reforms.

Jacobsen: What is the importance of considering mental health in approach reduction of gun violence?

WhittenbergerI think it is extremely important, but I don’t agree with the more conservative pundits who think it should be the only approach to reducing gun violence.  The more guns there are in a society, the more unjustified gun violence there will be.  The more guns are accessible to people likely to misuse them, the more unjustified violence there will be.  Yes, treating mental health problems is necessary, but not sufficient.  We need to identify, diagnose, and treat mental health problems early, during childhood, and this is why we need so many more social workers, counselors, and psychologists to work with children in our schools.

Jacobsen: What community intervention efforts can mitigate gun-related violence?

WhittenbergerI think politicians, office holders, nonprofits, and all citizens of a community should strongly advocate for and support gun control policies, as I have outlined in my article.  We all need to commit ourselves to slightly reducing our freedoms to possess, own, and use guns in order to reduce gun violence and promote the common good.  Give up a little in order to gain so much more!  I support buy-back programs conducted by cities and counties.

Jacobsen: What other training or preparedness might help law enforcement agencies?

Whittenberger:Law enforcement agencies need to improve both their employee selection procedures and their training.  Officers need to use their agency-issued firearms in a prudent, rational, ethical, and legal manner.   Over-use and under-use of firearms by officers are both problems which need to be corrected.  We saw in the Uvalde situation that officers took up to 75 minutes to mount their counter-attack, which was way too long.  On the other hand, we have seen in other kinds of situations that officers are too prone to use their firearms too quickly to resolve a situation.

Jacobsen: What other reasonable and unreasonable approaches to the reduction of gun violence are being proposed other than, for example, pray?

WhittenbergerI think I have mentioned most of the reasonable approaches in my article.  Banning firearms for private citizens in the US would be an unreasonable approach.  I think more than half the citizens do have legitimate uses for the ownership of firearms for protection, hunting, and target practice, but ownership of firearms by some citizens, of military-grade guns, and more than three guns is not reasonable.

Jacobsen: What would be a reasonable estimate of efficacy of these proposition to reduce gun violence?

WhittenbergerI think full implementation of the practical steps I have recommended would reduce gun violence by 90%.

Jacobsen: What might be some criticisms of your approach?

WhittenbergerA common criticism is “Implementation of your recommended gun regulation program would lead to the banning and confiscation of guns among private citizens.”  This is a slippery slope argument which is used to scare people and arouse resistance to gun regulation.  My approach is a common sense and gradual approach which would not be fully in place for about 75 years.  And yet, reductions in gun violence will gradually dissipate over that time period.   Responsible users of firearms should be willing to sacrifice just a little of their freedom for the common good which comes from a reduction of gun violence in our society.

Jacobsen: What might be barriers to implementation at the state of the federal level?

Whittenberger:   Extreme selfishness, fear, the NRA, and owners of large numbers of guns would be barriers to implementation.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Gary.

Whittenberger:   You are welcome.  And thank you for bringing wider exposure to my article and my many ideas about gun control.  Gun violence is rampant in our society and we need to solve the problem!  “Thoughts and prayers” for victims just don’t cut it.  Please continue your excellent work with The Good Men Project.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Alex Craiu on the War in Ukraine

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/01

Alex Craiu lives and works in Ukraine as a war correspondent. He studied in the United Kingdom and California, United States, with a documentary and cinematography production degree. He works as a freelancer and independent journalist. In 2017, he successfully completed an internship with the BBC in London and later started creating videos for social networks, collaborating with various publications. He travelled to most regions of Ukraine, except those fully occupied, and presented online the current situation in Ukraine, including in conflict zones. Currently based in Kyiv, Ukraine, he analyzes and documents people’s lives during the war.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: You’re still living in a danger zone. I am not. So, yes. Have you done anything brash or risky since we last attempted that brief vacation into Russia? 

Alex Craiu: The way this started is interesting because everything that’s been happening over the last few weeks ultimately boils down to the fact that I’m still alive—full stop. That is quite an achievement given the current circumstances, especially in light of what has recently transpired across Ukraine. We’re talking about numerous attacks I’ve read about or witnessed here in Kyiv. Unfortunately, we’ve seen an increasing number of casualties in Ukraine lately, which is somewhat predictable, as attacks tend to become more frequent during the winter months.

There are some advantages to being here, however. So, to answer your question, remaining in Ukraine during these months, when there are indicators of predicted instability, is inherently risky—something many people, especially in the West, would consider quite dangerous. The area where you are isn’t within artillery range but is largely within the range of ballistic missiles and drones.

Kyiv is about 200 kilometres from the nearest Russian-controlled territory, so we tend to be targeted by attacks. It’s important to remember that these Shahid drones—specifically the Shahed-136 model—are often launched in groups.

We’re dealing with many Shahid drones launched simultaneously. These drones could be more precise, but they are relatively cheap and can cause considerable destruction. Here in Kyiv, we’ve been experiencing an uptick in attacks over the past few days. This coincides with recent reports about North Korean munitions reportedly being used in the region around Kursk, near the Ukrainian border. All these events are converging, but the primary concern here in Kyiv, what’s most visible, is the extensive damage to residential buildings caused by these Shahid drones.

Jacobsen: How have you found covering the war as a journalist in this context? I know we travelled to several sites, but I’m unsure if that was an unusually high travel for war journalism or just typical for your work.

Craiu: Travelling to Sumy Oblast was unusual because I don’t usually cover events so close to the front lines. Others can do that much better. At the same time, my focus tends to be on the everyday life of Ukrainians living in larger cities.

For example, in Kyiv, Kharkiv, and Zaporizhzhia. Yes, these places are relatively closer to the front line but far from it or right next to the Russian border, like Sumy. So, it was quite an unusual trip for me. However, what followed was an incredible opportunity to visit the exclusion zone of Chornobyl.

And we’re talking about the town of Pripyat, which everyone knows about, and a visit to the nuclear power plant. This was also rather unusual because, right now, this zone—although it used to be quite a tourist-friendly place before the war—has an increased risk due to the presence of nuclear waste. In the event of an attack, it could contaminate a large area. So what followed those trips to Sumy Oblast and Poltava was not a miniseries of unusual destinations. 

Jacobsen: As a journalist, I was just grateful to have the opportunity to visit. I couldn’t turn them down, regardless of how fatigued I was from being in areas with an increased level of danger. Now, Kyiv itself has more defense systems.

The Patriot systems are reserved for higher-priority threats like ballistic missiles. But it’s among the safer areas because it’s far south and west of the front lines, usually over 200 kilometres. Yet, there’s still a sense of unease among the public. When I was there, people lived with a certain tension, generally speaking. Living there longer, do you also get that sense of living in the midst of a war?

Craiu: Interestingly, speaking from a personal standpoint, I’ve found that the longer I spend in Ukraine, the more my fear has deepened. That fear grows with a better understanding of the risks. This understanding comes with researching, living in a place like this, and gathering information. It has shown me that instability is probably one of the most unsettling aspects of Ukraine. To expand on this, I use the word instability because I still regard Kyiv as a highly unstable place. For instance, concerts are organized in some parts of the city, and on the same night—as was the case about two to three weeks ago—a 15-year-old girl was killed in her flat in Kyiv, doing nothing but living her ordinary life, by a Shahed drone—a senseless death, a complete waste of human life, in a capital many regard as safe.

We saw this summer that Ukraine became more popular with tourists. Some were likely tourists, though many were not. People gained a sense of security that was instantly shattered by the random attacks, which can happen any day without warning.

Jacobsen: What about the context of reports of 8,000 North Korean troops at Ukraine’s border, based on U.S. statements at the United Nations? This is coming from legitimate sources like the A.P. wire and A.P. News.

Craiu: Yes, currently, Ukraine estimates around 12,000 Russian troops on the border, so they consider this additional number significant. Yesterday, I was on the streets of Kyiv, asking people what they thought about it. The general sentiment was a concern. Initially, I wondered if people might be neutral or see it as unimportant. Still, they regard this development as potentially risky and troubling for Ukraine. We’re not just talking about more troops near the border; we’re also discussing the involvement of another country, like North Korea, which could lead to further escalation.

So, there’s the political side of things and the military aspect. The fact that we have 10,000 foreign troops fighting alongside Russia against Ukraine underscores the likelihood that Ukraine may soon need another mobilization to repel those attacks. 

Jacobsen: The 11th emergency special session of the United Nations General Assembly opened on February 28, 2022, at the U.N. headquarters to address the Russian Federation’s invasion of Ukraine. The voting record showed 141 in favour, five against, and 35 abstentions, with non-members not holding voting rights at this level.

So, it was a 141-5 vote condemning the Russian Federation’s aggression against Ukraine, accompanied by various stipulations on what constitutes that aggression. Among those who voted against it were Belarus, Eritrea, Russia, Syria, and North Korea. This aligns with a pattern; North Korea and Russia have been openly aligned in their stance, functionally supporting aggression against Ukraine, as demonstrated by this voting record over two years ago.

Jacobsen: What is the general conversation in Kyiv regarding these North Korean troops? How does this expand the concept of this war beyond Ukrainian borders?

Craiu: First of all, the fact that North Korean troops are reportedly siding with Russia and joining Russian forces in their fight against Ukraine raises questions about future developments. This includes the possibility of more troops being deployed or other countries allied with Russia potentially joining forces to fight Ukraine. Depending on the number and resources these allies provide, this could alter the war’s course.

One conversation happening in Kyiv is whether Russia’s use of North Korean troops might provoke a stronger response from the West. This could potentially lead to Ukraine being allowed to use Western-supplied weapons to strike deep into Russian territory—a restriction currently in place due to fears of escalation. All eyes are on the U.S. and other NATO countries that have provided weapons to Ukraine but have limited their use to strikes within Ukraine’s borders only.

Given recent events, if escalation is being openly discussed, Ukrainians expect a shift in current policy, one that might allow such strikes in Russia. This is a significant topic of conversation. Additionally, regarding Russia’s troop numbers and resources compared to Ukraine, there’s also talk of a possible new mobilization in Ukraine. This overlaps with ongoing protests over soldiers on the front lines, many of whom have been there for over a year without rotation.

And they don’t get a chance to return home or have the option of being released. This is something I’ve spoken with many people about, and there’s a general fear among those being drafted into the army that they’ll be forced to fight until they physically or psychologically can’t continue. These are the main concerns I’m currently seeing. The fact that Russia has an additional 10,000 troops on its side certainly complicates things for Ukraine.

Jacobsen: Do you want to comment on the claims that Elon Musk and Vladimir Putin have been in regular contact via phone calls, as reported by A.P. News?

Craiu: Well, we’re seeing some interesting actions from Elon Musk lately. This is a personal comment. Many have pointed out the unusual events he’s attended, like those supporting Donald Trump. Now, there’s the issue of Vladimir Putin. Although Elon Musk is certainly a smart individual, there’s a high degree of unpredictability with him so that anything could be possible. But generally speaking, I’m observing some rather bizarre behaviour coming from Musk. That’s my two personal cents on this.

Jacobsen: So, my question—as a Canadian journalist in Ukraine—is regarding the EU allies moving forward in late October with the $50 billion of frozen Russian funds being loaned to Ukraine to support their war effort. What are some of your thoughts on this? I’m assuming you’re positive, but there may be complications that you’re more aware of than I am since you’ve been doing this longer.

Craiu: Well, from what I’ve seen in general discussions, not everyone favours using those frozen assets from Russian oligarchs to support Ukraine. This is likely because people are questioning the morality of such a decision.

It will help Ukraine. If we were talking about Western assets frozen in Russia and used to fund their war effort or continue the offensive against Ukraine, this would hardly spark a negative response from the general public. As a state, Russia isn’t concerned with the morality of its actions. So, the fact that we’re even debating this in Western countries highlights our values and adherence to morality in our actions.

This is a completely fair and necessary action that will greatly help Ukraine. We’re talking about $50 billion—that’s an enormous amount of support. 

Jacobsen: Thank you again for your time, Alex.

Craiu: Yes, I hope you’re doing well. Good luck with everything. Keep in touch.

Jacobsen: Have a good day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK DRISCOLL: MASCULINITY, CONTROL, AND REINVENTION

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/09

Today I’m joined by Ashley Darling, a former member of both Mars Hill Church and Trinity Church in Scottsdale, Arizona—two congregations shaped by the distinct theology and culture of New Calvinism under Pastor Mark Driscoll. This movement fused rigid doctrine with a stylized vision of masculinity, casting male dominance as both the spiritual mandate and an evangelistic strategy.

In our conversation, Darling examines the gender politics and cultural dynamics of New Calvinism, interrogating how Driscoll’s rebranding of “biblical manhood” sanctified control, authority, and aggression as divine virtues. She speaks candidly about the systemic harm to women—ranging from normalized abuse and enforced silence to lasting psychological trauma. Darling also details how Driscoll leveraged public relations and theological rhetoric to rehabilitate his image in Arizona, sustaining a model of leadership cloaked in repentance but resistant to accountability.

(Mark Driscoll/Facebook)

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Ashley, can you help unpack those two ideas for us—what is New Calvinism, and how was masculinity used in its missionary efforts?

Ashley Darling: Yes. These are connected but distinct ideas. New Calvinism was a movement that emerged in the early 2000s, characterized by a resurgence of Reformed theology among younger evangelicals. It was deeply influenced by thinkers like John Piper, Tim Keller, and later, Mark Driscoll and Matt Chandler. At its core, it affirmed traditional Calvinist doctrines like predestination, total depravity, and the sovereignty of God. Still, it presented them in a modern, culturally engaged, and often emotionally restrained way.

Although New Calvinism didn’t outright ban women from theological discussions, it was rooted in a complementarian framework that assigned distinct roles to men and women. Leadership, especially in the church and home, was reserved for men. That theology, over time, shaped the culture of churches associated with the movement.

One thing that attracted many men to New Calvinism was its emphasis on structure, clarity, and what some saw as a more rational, no-nonsense theology. It avoided the emotionalism or ecstatic spirituality often found in charismatic churches. Instead, it offered something more intellectual and systematized. For many men, particularly those who felt alienated by more emotive expressions of Christianity, that was compelling.

Mark Driscoll, in particular, combined intellectual Reformed theology with a hyper-masculine, confrontational style. He was one of the few high-profile pastors to openly challenge the “feminization” of the church. He encouraged MMA-style aggression and rugged manhood and positioned male headship as essential to both spiritual and cultural renewal. In doing so, he created a platform that attracted young men seeking purpose, authority, and a sense of identity.

Jacobsen: And when we talk about masculinity being used as a kind of missionary tool, or even as branding—how did that function in his church, and why was it so effective, especially in contrast to churches with predominantly female congregations?

Darling: That’s a great question. At its core, it was marketing, and Mark Driscoll knew it. His background in communications played a role. He understood that he had to speak their language to build a church that attracted young, unchurched men. He framed Jesus not as gentle or meek but as a fighter, a carpenter, a man’s man. He used masculine imagery to frame spiritual leadership, fatherhood, and theology.

In evangelical churches, it’s common for women to outnumber men. Driscoll flipped that by appealing directly to male identity. And here’s the strategic part: if you get the men, statistically, the family often follows. So, it was also a pragmatic approach to church growth.

But we have to be honest—there was also a financial incentive. If you follow biblical tithing, converts tithe ten percent of their income, supporting the institution. So, targeting men wasn’t just theological but structural and economic. Driscoll’s model was successful, but it came with a cost.

At Mars Hill and Trinity Church, the desire for strong leadership sometimes evolved into authoritarianism. When power becomes a defining theological virtue rather than humility or service, it can open the door to abuse.

Jacobsen: And so, if you could expand on the role of power and how it was framed within these churches, there were men who already felt they had power and seemed to be reinforcing it among their peers or even over their wives. But there were also others, as you’ve noted before, who carried deep emotional wounds. How did Driscoll’s approach speak to both groups?

Darling: Yes. For the men who already felt they had power—those who were always trying to assert it in front of their guy friends or over their wives—Driscoll’s message validated them. It confirmed, “Yes, I am doing this right by lording my power over those I see beneath me.”

But it also spoke powerfully to another group—men who carried deep, unprocessed father wounds: emotional neglect, constant criticism, or the sense that they were never good enough. For them, Driscoll’s framework offered an emotional escape. Instead of confronting that pain, they could trade emotional vulnerability for power. That’s a compelling exchange, especially for men in the church who were taught to suppress emotion.

Mark Driscoll brought “authenticity” and “honesty” to this equation. He would say things like, “You men are weak. You’re effeminate. You’re failing in your God-given duty to lead your family.” It was deliberately confrontational. And in marketing terms, he was hitting the pain point. The classic strategy: “You don’t have X because you’re not Y.”

Whether it’s fitness or finances, that’s a familiar technique—aggravate the pain, then offer a solution. Driscoll applied that same model to masculinity and spirituality. He would shame men; even at its best, that system was still driven by shame.

But it worked because many men responded, “Yes, I need to stand up. I need to be a man of God.” And Mark Driscoll came in offering “truth,” no sugarcoating. That was compelling for many guys, especially in contrast to what I would call the Hillsong movement.

Hillsong churches were deeply emotional at the time. You’d walk in and be enveloped in lights, music, tears, and speaking in tongues. Every service felt like a spiritual spectacle. Mark Driscoll stood in violent contrast to that. He rejected it outright.

He said, “F*** that.” That kind of emotional display? That’s effeminate. That’s for the women. Let them have it at their conferences. But we—we’re men. We come into church to be strong. He painted Jesus as a badass, sword-carrying man and called other men to embody that same energy.

It was, honestly, considerable big dick energy—aggressively so. And it appealed to the broadest base of men in the church then. Even those outside the church found a sense of safety in it. They could come to church and not feel like it was a weakness or like they were caving to their wife’s demands. They could go and feel better about themselves.

However, it was ultimately a self-serving model. You weren’t going to church to worship. You would get your ego stroked to feel like you were the big man on campus, at home, and in public.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Pastor Mark Driscoll (@markdriscoll)

Jacobsen: Critics of this, to give them their due, have called this a form of “performative masculinity.” Would you agree? And how would you unpack that critique?

Darling: Yes, I would agree. It has to be performative.

Because underneath all that posturing, there’s pain that’s never addressed. The model doesn’t leave space for vulnerability. So the performance becomes the substitute for authenticity. You put on the role of the strong man, the leader, the protector—but you’re never really invited to be known for your weakness. That’s not biblical masculinity. That’s branding.

Jacobsen: Because for men, especially married men, the highest standard of manhood in the church, regardless of denomination, often remains marriage. That remains the pinnacle of masculine identity. So when these men come into church with their wives and begin lording their manhood over them, it gives them a clear sense of identity, power, and self-worth. But that dynamic doesn’t function without women participating in it. The other side of the equation must also be emphasized for it to be effective.

Darling: For that model to function, women had to be taught to “fall in line.” So Mark Driscoll would either say directly or have his wife, Grace Driscoll, say things to women like, “Submission is beautiful. It’s not less than; it’s just different.” That message was a significant theme.

One of the most dangerous teachings, particularly for married couples, was the idea that women owed sex to their husbands. That was emphasized repeatedly. And it was incredibly harmful, especially for women who were already in abusive relationships with their “good Christian husbands.” Women who were already enduring physical or emotional violence were now being told that God obligated them to offer their bodies, regardless of consent or safety.

And that’s the core issue. It wasn’t just a pastor’s opinion—it was positioned as divine truth, framed as if God Himself was saying it. To that point, one of the key indicators that Mars Hill had cult-like characteristics was how closely Driscoll’s words were placed alongside, or even equated with, the voice of God. That stems from the New Calvinist framework. Within that structure, if you were the pastor, you weren’t simply someone who interpreted or explained Scripture. You were seen as a mouthpiece for God. That was the role.

So when Driscoll stood at the pulpit and said, “You’re not a man if you’re not leading your wife in this way,” or “If she thinks she’s in charge, something’s wrong,” or “If your wife isn’t happily and enthusiastically giving you sex at every opportunity, you’re failing as a husband”—you believed that was coming from God. Because he was the pastor, and in that environment, the pastor’s voice carried a sense of divine authority. That’s where it became hazardous.

Jacobsen: Let’s dig into that last point a bit. What happened when someone started to question these ideas? Do you not necessarily question the pastor directly, or even the junior pastors, but within the community setting or your own home, say, to your husband?

Darling: You would be ostracized. The response was: Why would you question that? And this is where Calvinism gets cold, rigid, and binary. It’s all black and white.

Ironically, many people in New Calvinist circles consider themselves scholars, deep theological thinkers. For example, my ex-husband had his master’s degree in theology from Liberty University, which is well-known in the United States for its religious studies programs. He was drawn to that intellectual framework.

So, if you tried to raise a concern or disagree, you weren’t met with openness. If they acknowledged your point, it would come as “I can see how you would think that. If I were in your position, I might think that too.” But it always ended with, “Let me introduce you to higher thinking.”

That was the default response. It wasn’t a dialogue but a subtle form of dismissal wrapped in intellectual superiority.

You learn to go along with it because they would talk to you in circles. Ultimately, dissent was framed as dissent against God. Mark Driscoll elevated himself to the voice of God within his community and implicitly empowered that same mindset in the men under his teaching.

These men were commanded to be the spiritual leaders of their homes. That meant they were expected to teach their wives and children about theology, interpret Scripture, and set the tone for the household’s spiritual life. It positioned them as the final authority, not just regarding leadership but regarding access to spiritual knowledge.

So, if you, as a woman, wanted to explore something outside the narrow teachings of New Calvinism—maybe a different theological perspective or a more inclusive spiritual framework—and you brought that up to your husband, it was framed as rebellion. Because those men had been taught that they were God’s designated mouthpiece in the home, disagreeing with them was often treated as disagreeing with God Himself.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Pastor Mark Driscoll (@markdriscoll)

Jacobsen: What about something you mentioned earlier—charismatic continuationism? That’s a phrase people may not be familiar with.

Darling: Yes, so charismatic continuationism is the belief that the spiritual gifts described in the New Testament—like speaking in tongues, prophecy, and healing—continue to this day. That’s in contrast to “cessationism,” which holds that those gifts were given in the early church to authenticate the gospel and were later withdrawn.

There is considerable debate within Christian circles about this. Most Calvinists, including traditional Reformed churches, are cessationists. They believe those gifts ended with the apostolic age. However, the charismatic and Pentecostal traditions affirm that those gifts are still active and accessible.

Mark Driscoll pivoted on this. Toward the end of his tenure at Mars Hill, and especially during his relaunch at Trinity Church in Arizona, he began embracing more charismatic elements. He partnered with Charisma Media and released Spirit-Filled Jesus, emphasizing prophetic impressions and phrases like “God told me…” So, he transitioned from a hardline Reformed stance to something more hybrid—part Calvinist, part charismatic.

Jacobsen: Let’s place this in context. Most people today know Driscoll as the pastor of Trinity Church in Scottsdale, Arizona. But before that, he was the founder and public face of Mars Hill Church in Seattle. Can you walk us through the timeline of Mars Hill’s rise and fall and its rebirth, so to speak, in Arizona?

Darling: Sure. So Mars Hill Church was founded in 1996 in Seattle and gained momentum in the early 2000s. By 2010–2012, it was one of the fastest-growing churches in the U.S. Mark Driscoll had become a national voice in the New Calvinist movement. This was before the advent of short-form content like TikTok or Instagram Reels, so the primary way to access his teachings was through YouTube sermons or podcast downloads from the Mars Hill website.

He wasn’t charismatic in the Pentecostal sense—not initially. His sermons were aggressive, bold, and highly structured, drawing in a large number of men with the appeal of strong, unapologetic leadership.

That said, many women also found his message compelling—but for different reasons. To put it bluntly, if you were a “pick-me girl,” you probably loved Mark Driscoll. Because if you played by the rules—if you submitted, stayed sexually available, and supported your husband without question—you were praised. You were worthy of being “picked.” And I say that with self-awareness. That was me.

Jacobsen: So Mars Hill collapses, but Driscoll reemerges in Arizona. After his resignation in 2014 following multiple allegations of spiritual abuse, authoritarian leadership, and financial misconduct, Mars Hill dissolved. A few years later, Driscoll resurfaced in Scottsdale, Arizona, founding Trinity Church. Why Arizona?

Darling: I can only speculate, but it’s a red state with many transplanted evangelicals, a high rate of churchgoing households, and very little institutional memory of what happened in Seattle. It was a fresh start for him, but not necessarily a fresh approach.

Jacobsen: Quick clip point of clarification here, Ashley. “Pick me” is an American colloquial term. It is sharp and evocative—but for those outside the U.S. context, can you define it? What exactly is a “pick-me girl”?

Darling: Sure. A “pick-me girl” is someone who craves male attention so much that she’ll say or do whatever she thinks will appeal to men. She’ll agree with anything they say and laugh at all their jokes—her whole vibe is, “Pick me! Pick me!” It’s a kind of performative femininity centred entirely around male approval. And within the church context, that identity can easily align with specific teachings on submission, modesty, and obedience to male authority.

Jacobsen: Now, moving from that to a broader theological frame—let’s talk about the link between doctrine and praxis, specifically around the concept of “father hunger” and what, from an external perspective, might look like hypermasculinity. Internally, it’s often framed as “authentic manhood” or “biblical masculinity.” Is that a fair characterization? And what’s the relationship between those ideas and the gender constructs taught in this theology?

Darling: Yes, that’s a fair framing. So, stepping back, in the 1990s, culturally, we were starting to see a lot more visibility and public acceptance of LGBTQ individuals, especially in the wake of the AIDS crisis in the ’80s. That decade had pushed many queer people into hiding. However, by the 1990s, a shift had occurred through television, film, and legal protections toward greater social inclusion.

And the church, especially evangelical Christianity, tends to be reactive to culture rather than proactive. As this shift was occurring in society, the church responded defensively. This was also the rise of the so-called “apologist era,” and debates began to center around what were perceived as the two most significant threats to Christian morality: abortion and homosexuality.

At the same time, churches began realizing that closeted gay people were already part of their congregations. So, new questions emerged: Does your church affirm LGBTQ individuals? That divide became very public very fast.

Now, a lot of the cultural stereotypes—especially in America—frame gay men as “effeminate.” In conservative evangelical circles, any perceived proximity to that stereotype, even among straight men, being soft-spoken, gentle, artistic, and emotionally expressive was utterly unacceptable. It wasn’t just about sexuality. It was about masculine identity.

So when Mark Driscoll came on the scene, what he offered was a kind of aggressive, exaggerated masculinity that repackaged the most toxic aspects of male behaviour as holy. He said: “This is what it means to be a man of God.” He took this idea of “father hunger”—men’s deep, unresolved pain from emotionally absent or abusive fathers—and filled that void not with healing but with dominance.

He told men that the church didn’t have to be emotional or “feminine.” It could be tough, loud, and gritty. For many men who had felt alienated from the church due to its emotional tone or were afraid of being perceived as soft or effeminate, this was a revelation. They were being told: “You belong here. You can be strong. You can be in control.” So in a way, it was a rebranding of the church—away from its emotional, nurturing associations and toward something hard-edged and “manly.”

There was even a joke in Christian circles back then: “Church is for women.” It was a place where people cried, hugged, and became emotional. That was seen as feminine. Driscoll blew that apart and said, “No, church is for warriors. Church is for fighters.” Many men bought into that vision, not necessarily because it was spiritually true, but because it permitted them to express power, anger, and dominance under the guise of godliness.

Mark Driscoll says, “This is what a real man looks like.” He wasn’t crying. He wasn’t emotional—except when it came to anger. And that made many men sit up and go, “Oh. So, the worst parts of toxic masculinity are the best parts of being a holy man? Cool.”

It was this unspoken permission: “I don’t have to change anything about myself. I can take all these traits I already have—anger, control, dominance—and amplify them. Not only does that make me more masculine, it makes me more holy.”

For many men, that was deeply affirming. Because we’re all human, we want to feel in control. That’s a primal need. We want to avoid death and feel like we have some agency in the world.

This brand of Christianity—Driscoll’s version—offered both. Eternal security: “You don’t have to worry about dying because you know what the afterlife holds.” And immediate control: “Here’s how to take charge of your life and household.” That combination? It was brilliant marketing. And that’s how he got them.

Jacobsen: Let’s talk more about “head of household” or household headship—this idea that men are meant to provide, protect, and lead. These aren’t unique ideas to Mars Hill or even to Driscoll. Figures like Steve Harvey, who blend Christian themes with cultural commentary, promote the same beliefs, especially in communities where traditional gender roles are emphasized. Women in those settings are highly motivated to adopt the model because the church exerts such a significant social influence. But if we narrow it down—let’s say, within the Anglo-American evangelical framework—what does household headship mean in practice? What does it look like today?

Darling: Yes, “head of household” is aurally loaded. It has deep traditional roots. Historically, it referred to the man as the provider, the protector, the one who sets the moral and financial direction of the home. It was always paternalistic, but Mars Hill stripped away any nurturing aspect and repackaged it as more about dominance and control.

This wasn’t about care or stewardship—it was about power. And that’s important. The phrase had existed for a long time, but Mars Hill and Trinity Church reframed it in a way that felt like reclaiming something “lost.”

Historically, yes, men were the hunters and providers, while women stayed home to tend to domestic responsibilities. However, as society changed, women entered the workforce, gained independence, and made financial decisions—these shifts were perceived as a threat to traditional Christian gender roles.

In response, a cultural and theological backlash ensued. The message became: “Men, step up. Take back the leadership of your homes. Reclaim your role.” Simultaneously, you had second-wave and third-wave feminism rising, and women were saying, “Actually, no. I’m the one leading this home. I make the money. I make the decisions.”

There was this deep tension—this ideological clash. What emerged from that was a surge of Christian literature, sermons, and workshops all focused on gender roles: what they “should” be, how to “restore” them, and how to “discipline” the home into biblical order.

The result was a kind of spiritual cold war happening in households. Women were increasingly independent, but men were being told that their very godliness depended on asserting control. That dynamic is still playing out today in churches across America.

Jacobsen: So there’s this kind of back-and-forth—men saying, “I want to be in charge,” and women responding, “The hell you are.” It created tension, right? A kind of ideological tug-of-war.

Darling: What we saw in the early 2000s—through figures like Mark Driscoll, Matt Chandler, Francis Chan, and others—was a collective attempt to reassert control within that gender dynamic. These were the intellectual pastors, the theological heavyweights of the New Calvinist movement. They asked: “How do we make this compelling for men to step up and lead again?”

The answer was to incentivize them. The message became, “If you take charge, you’ll be rewarded with power and sex.” So they went to women and preached, “Relinquishing your power is the most godly thing you can do. Give up your autonomy. Give up your consent.” That was the transactional framework: men lead, women submit.

They preached both sides of that coin. Women were already craving love and affirmation from their husbands. And when you sat in a Driscoll sermon and heard him gush about his wife, it was easy to get pulled in.

Jacobsen: There’s a whole TikTok trend mocking that, right? Pastors are standing at the pulpit saying, “My wife is so hot,” over and over again. It’s performative.

Darling: Yes, 100 percent. There is a specific genre on TikTok where people parody this. Mark Driscoll would get up and say, “My wife—she’s so hot. I love her. God, she’s beautiful. My wife is hotter than yours.” And he meant it. There was even a moment where women in the congregation echoed that, like a weird sort of competition.

And women bought into that narrative. Because here was this pastor—moderately attractive, sure—but married way out of his league, and worshiping the ground his wife walked on in public. Women saw that and thought, “God, if my husband listens to this guy, maybe he’ll talk about me that way too.”

That’s how they got the women. That’s why I say if you were a “pick me” girl, you were highly susceptible to that theology. You were already willing to trade some autonomy for perceived love and admiration.

Jacobsen: The way I’m hearing it, from the social and theological trends of that brand of evangelicalism and the feminist responses, there’s no balance, no mutuality, no conversation. “I’m in charge.” “No, I’m in charge.”

Darling: It’s this classically American pendulum swing—from one extreme to another. There’s no room for nuance—the more complex the framing on one side, the more extreme the reaction on the other. You had hardline feminism developing in response to hardline patriarchy. Then, even more reactionary masculinity is being built to defend that patriarchy.

Jacobsen: And then Mars Hill collapses. And Trinity Church rises.

Darling: Yes, the whole dynamic was—and still is—deeply unhealthy. What’s fascinating and disturbing is how forgiveness was used to justify Driscoll’s return. He had built something enormous, then burned it down. Yet, within a few years, he re-emerged in Arizona, planting Trinity Church as if nothing had happened.

Jacobsen: So the question becomes: what’s the social mechanism by which someone can crash a movement of that scale and then be accepted again—by a new congregation—as if the past doesn’t matter?

Darling: That’s exactly it. There’s a deeply embedded notion in evangelical circles of “grace” that, when weaponized, allows spiritual leaders, especially male ones, to escape accountability. They’ll say, “He’s repented. We’ve forgiven him. Let’s move on.” But the people harmed by his leadership? They’re often still reeling. Still silenced. Still dismissed.

So you see, it’s not actual repentance or restitution—it’s rebranding. He’s back with a name change, a location shift, a few new catchphrases, and boom. The theology remains unchanged, as does the model. Only the platform has.

Pastors are excellent at crisis PR. They know how to slip out of almost any situation. And that’s precisely what Mark Driscoll did—he victimized himself throughout the entire collapse of Mars Hill.

Instead of taking responsibility, he spun the story and said, “This is spiritual warfare.” That’s a classic Christian playbook move: when accountability surfaces, blame Satan. Say that the backlash is demonic opposition. That tactic works every time—it deflects criticism and repositions the leader as the one under attack.

We were trying to hold him accountable. We were saying: “You can’t treat your staff like this. You can’t treat your wife like this. You can’t scream at people and call it leadership.” But he refused to accept responsibility. Many of us were sending emails, trying to speak out and create some form of collective accountability within Mars Hill, because we knew what was happening wasn’t right.

Still, some people remained die-hard defenders. And here’s where it gets alarming: some people will sit in church, and if a pastor gets up and says, “I had sexual relations with a 15-year-old, but I repented,” they’ll applaud. They’ll say, “Yes, thank you for your honesty. We forgive you.” The amount of blanket, uncritical forgiveness in the church can be toxic.

That’s what happened with Driscoll. He launched a massive PR campaign, framing himself as a spiritual warrior under attack. He claimed that those of us trying to hold him accountable were tools of the enemy. That is textbook cult leadership. It follows the same trajectory as almost every other cult: the inner circle gets wise to what’s happening, toxic behaviours come to light, and when they’re exposed, the leader deflects everything.

They say, “I didn’t know,” or “None of this is true. Could you believe it? This is an attack on our mission.” They paint themselves as martyrs, and that’s precisely what Driscoll did.

Jacobsen: It wasn’t just a collapse—it was a rebrand. And he needed time to plan that.

Darling: Yes. It took him a minute to start a new church because he had to do market research. He had to ask, “Where do I still have support? Where will people still come and listen to me preach?”

The answer was Republican states, places with a strong evangelical base and some cultural insulation. Arizona was a strategic choice. It’s a red state with conservative values, but it’s still on the West Coast and has a veneer of progressiveness in certain pockets. For Driscoll, that was the perfect happy medium.

And yes, some people from his Mars Hill days—including myself—lived in Arizona. He knew that. He likely counted on people coming out of curiosity, or even offering him grace and a second chance.

So, his reemergence wasn’t just accidental. It was a well-orchestrated crisis public relations campaign, and it worked. He rebuilt. He rebranded. And he still has a substantial following, especially among men who continue to buy into the same rigid, patriarchal model he’s been selling for years.

Jacobsen: I don’t think it came up directly in our earlier conversations, but I’ve been writing about Trinity Western University—a kind of Canadian counterpart to Liberty University. That finance-based, fundamentalist institutional world—that’s the environment I grew up around.

Darling: That makes sense. It’s a parallel path. The structures are similar—the theological rigidity, the emphasis on hierarchy, the idealized gender roles, and the blending of religious power with institutional branding. Whether in Canada or the United States, these conservative evangelical subcultures unfold similarly.

Jacobsen: I recently wrote an article based on Reddit commentary and mainstream articulation. In one thread, someone mentioned a disturbing account of sexual assault on a Christian campus. One commenter said, “I know at least five women who have been raped on campus, but they’re afraid to say anything—so they don’t.”

For women in that kind of community, especially those who are married and are being told that submission is a divine command, how many would you say are dealing with PTSD from sexual assault but are either hiding it or feeling unsafe talking about it?

Darling: A lot. There are many women in that position. Dr. Jessica Johnson conducted extensive ethnographic research on Mars Hill Church, focusing on the experiences of women within the congregation. Dr. Rose Madrid-Swetman was a pastor and adjunct faculty member at The Seattle School of Theology & Psychology who provided pastoral care to individuals who left Mars Hill Church.

She interviewed women who had been in those marriages—women who had internalized the Mars Hill theology and were dealing with severe emotional trauma. Some of them were still married. Others were divorced. But the core theme was the same: these women were conditioned to stay silent.

Even now, on social media, you’ll see waves—every so often, the “hate train” for Mark Driscoll comes back around, and more women come forward with their stories. They talk about being married to men who fully bought into that theology—hook, line, and sinker. Some of these men were emotionally or sexually abusive. And their wives were told to stay, to submit, to serve.

And yes, some women are still in that environment, still saying, “My pastor will protect me.” But many have left, and they’re just beginning to process what they’ve experienced.

Jacobsen: That’s horrifying.

Darling: Yes. It is. It’s important. It needs to be heard.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. This conversation—it’s been a long time coming. I’ve been waiting for this opportunity for, I don’t know, probably seven years.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

HOW AMERICA’S ALLIES ARE WATCHING IT FALL BEHIND

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/03

George Carrillo is the co-founder and CEO of the Hispanic Construction Council (HCC), an organization dedicated to advancing Hispanic professionals in the construction industry through workforce development, advocacy, and access to business resources. A U.S. Marine Corps veteran and former sheriff’s deputy who specialized in child and domestic abuse cases, Carrillo went on to serve as Oregon’s Director of Social Determinants of Health. His career—bridging frontline service, community advocacy, and senior policymaking—offers a rare and layered vantage point on the intersections of labor, public health, economic equity, and national security.

Carrillo brings a resolutely mission-driven approach to public service. His work highlights the structural forces that shape opportunities in America, including racial and economic disparities, fragmented public systems, and the often-overlooked consequences of policy decisions on marginalized communities. Whether in the context of health equity or workforce inclusion, Carrillo consistently centers the need for strategic coordination and the empowerment of underserved populations to build societal resilience.

In our conversation, Carrillo offers a pointed critique of the Trump administration’s politicization of national security—specifically, the replacement of experienced National Security Council officials with loyalists. He warns that this approach weakens interagency coordination, erodes diplomatic continuity, and undermines public safety. Beyond the personnel shifts, Carrillo draws attention to deeper systemic damage: cratering morale among career civil servants, diminishing institutional accountability, and the normalization of authoritarian posturing in democratic governance.

At the same time, Carrillo is not without examples of what principled leadership can look like. He praises countries such as Canada for their commitment to international cooperation and civic integrity. Rooted in a belief that service should reflect enduring national values, Carrillo often returns to the words of John F. Kennedy as a compass point. For him, public service is not simply a job—it is a lifelong commitment to equity, dignity, and national integrity.

Taken together, Carrillo’s experiences—as a Marine, a law enforcement officer, a state policymaker, and a civic leader—form a holistic understanding of how democratic institutions succeed or falter. His insights offer a sobering, urgent, but ultimately hopeful vision for public service at a time when its very foundations are under strain.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you for joining me today. So, what are the immediate strategic risks of replacing seasoned National Security Council officials with political loyalists?

George Carrillo: Yes. Particularly concerning is that national security and foreign policy decisions require continuity, expertise, and coordination across agencies. When these roles are filled by political appointees with limited relevant experience, as in certain instances during the Trump administration, it can undermine the national security strategy.

National security is inherently complex. Effective operations require collaboration between federal agencies, such as the FBI, CIA, Department of Defense, and the Department of State. These entities must coordinate intelligence gathering, operational logistics, and diplomatic communication, often in rapidly changing environments.

You need individuals with operational, diplomatic, or military experience who understand interagency processes and can act with precision and foresight. Appointing individuals without such knowledge, including some with media or partisan political backgrounds, introduces strategic risks. For example, some NSC appointees under Trump, such as political operatives and media personalities, drew criticism for lacking relevant expertise.

Recent reports from within the Department of Defence indicate ongoing concerns about leadership vacancies and policy instability. Such disarray can have real implications for defense readiness and diplomatic positioning.

This trend represents a significant risk to national safety. Leadership choices at the federal level can have a direct impact on Americans’ security. This was evident during the Trump administration, which saw high turnover in national security roles and tensions with career officials. There is concern that a second Trump term or similar leadership style would repeat these patterns.

This political oscillation between administrations and parties should not interfere with the integrity of the executive agencies. Regardless of whether a Democrat or Republican is in office, key national security positions should be filled by individuals with demonstrated qualifications and leadership capacity.

These agencies, particularly those involved in defense and intelligence, require professionals who can lead under pressure and possess a deep understanding of the mission. The national defense relies on structured, multi-agency collaboration. When politically driven change management interrupts that structure, it can compromise the effectiveness of entire operations.

Having worked in government myself, I’ve seen that every time a new administration enters—whether at the state or federal level—there’s often significant disruption. This constant churn undermines stability, and with instability comes a loss of institutional credibility.

Jacobsen: Given the volatility of today’s international order—with recurring crises and sudden geopolitical disruptions—how does a diminished level of institutional competence hinder our ability to adapt and respond swiftly? In what ways does this erosion of expertise slow down decision-making and make those responses less effective?

Carrillo: It opens us up to attacks—whether on foreign soil or at home. The lack of cooperation and the breakdown in intelligence gathering severely limit our ability to defend ourselves against future threats.

Trump’s selections for cabinet positions and national defense leadership are highly disarrayed. The individuals hired under Peter Hegseth—his pick for Secretary of Defense—raise significant concerns. There is an absolute lack of clarity and coordination, making us vulnerable to exploitation.

If we are attacked overseas, we could face a difficult situation. The question becomes: How are we going to respond? Is the intelligence we are gathering credible? Do we have the mobility and logistical readiness to mount a proportionate and timely response? These are the uncertainties we are dealing with.

Jacobsen: When institutional competence erodes, intelligence failures aren’t just more likely—they become more dangerous. In your view, what are the most critical intelligence gaps that are likely to widen? While lowered competence can be discussed in broad strokes, it often takes on specific shapes. Where do you see the most acute vulnerabilities forming—particularly in areas where the American public could face the greatest risk?

Carrillo: One significant risk is our current understanding of Russia’s threat, particularly to European nations, and how that threat could directly impact the United States.

Another is our relations with Arab countries. What Trump is doing now is deeply concerning. He has accepted gifts from foreign nations, which raises questions about the ethics of those exchanges and how they might entangle him or align him with specific actors in the Middle East. That compromises our credibility and complicates our diplomatic relationships.

And then there’s the threat that the American people often do not see: Who is planning an attack on the United States right now? We know that plans are constantly being developed against us globally. Are we properly allocating resources to get ahead of those threats? Many of us, including myself, do not have confidence that the current leadership is truthful or transparent about what is happening domestically and abroad.

(White House)

Jacobsen: What are the implications for NATO? The European Union seems to be taking more assertive steps toward military and defensive independence from the United States, even within NATO member countries. What are the consequences of the deeply rooted intelligence, defense, and military ties among NATO countries?

Carrillo: You can see it on their faces whenever Trump talks—NATO allies are visibly concerned.

I agree with the president on a few points, such as the expectation that all NATO countries should contribute their fair share financially. That is a legitimate discussion.

However, the alliance goes far beyond finances. NATO’s core tenets include intelligence sharing, operational coordination, and a collective commitment to defend one another against shared threats. Those require mutual trust and strategic stability.

Currently, I want to believe that the United States will continue to stand by its NATO partners and that our commitment will be guided more by principle than by dollars and cents. But with this administration, it is hard to predict. What NATO needs now is to keep moving forward with unity and purpose, regardless of the unpredictable nature of U.S. leadership.

NATO needs to demonstrate, especially within Europe, that it will not allow Vladimir Putin to continue acting as the aggressor, seizing territory from Ukraine. The burden is also on the United States to determine how we will participate. Will we stand by our oldest and most reliable NATO partners, or will we retreat and try to avoid conflict, which often only delays and worsens future crises?

What I see in President Trump is the repetition of past mistakes. We are reliving the same missteps that led to greater global instability, similar to the hesitation that preceded the United States’ entry into World War II. Many historians argue that had we joined sooner, the war would have ended faster with fewer casualties.

I also see shades of Richard Nixon’s approach—this idea of isolating ourselves while trying to posture as dominant. The result is a looming disaster regarding NATO solidarity and military readiness as we weaken our alliances through trade wars, aggressive rhetoric, and a general shift toward authoritarian-style leadership.

He operates under the mentality, “We’re the United States—no one can touch us.” That is arrogant. I do not think our NATO allies, nor should they, appreciate it. I believe Europe will need to respond with strength and signal that there is new leadership in the free world, possibly emerging from within Europe itself.

Ideally, the United States should remain the leader of the free world, but currently, we are not demonstrating a presence that inspires trust or confidence.

Jacobsen: While attending the 69th Commission on the Status of Women at UN Headquarters in New York, what struck me wasn’t just what the United States said—but what it didn’t. On American soil, the most revealing insights came not from official remarks but from informal conversations. I met a group of Canadians—each of us had arrived independently—and we found ourselves voicing the same unease: “Are we safe here?” That question lingered, even for me. I later spoke with three women—two African, one a Muslim Canadian—and each shared legitimate concerns about personal safety while in the U.S.

That, I think, is telling. My second key takeaway was about how the world views the United States. Increasingly, the global community is no longer seeking a hegemon. There is a growing recognition of America’s duality—its strengths and its profound flaws. Rather than a rigid top-down leader, people see the U.S. more like a windbreaker goose in a V-formation: not commanding from above, but guiding from within. Yet under the current administration, there’s a sense that the lead goose is drifting to the rear while Europe is quietly taking the front—particularly on issues like human rights and moral leadership within their respective spheres.

Given all this, what’s your sense of how Americans see the world right now? Do they recognize this perceptual shift from abroad, or are they still imagining themselves in the lead?

Carrillo: It depends on who you ask, to be honest.

From a global perspective, the United States is not currently well-regarded; however, this depends on the context.

What worries me most is the way we are forming relationships right now with authoritarian leaders like Vladimir Putin and Kim Jong-Un. That signals a troubling shift in values and alliances. It alienates our traditional partners and undermines the global trust that the United States once commanded.

We seem to speak nicely about authoritarian leaders while speaking terribly about our democratic allies. That is deeply concerning—not just for Americans but the world. When the so-called leaders of the free world appear to be cozying up to autocrats, it sends the wrong message.

I did not necessarily agree with the previous approach, which avoided dialogue altogether. We should continuously pursue conversation and bring people to the table. However, I do not believe Trump’s approach is the right one. It is a snowball effect: now, he is changing how we engage with foreign partners and talk about foundational values like human rights and dignity.

At the same time, domestically, using the phrase “diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI)” is suddenly seen as negative. So the question becomes: “What do we stand for as a country anymore?” We are losing sight of our core American identity.

Jacobsen: Canada?

Carrillo: Yes—Canada. I appreciate the current prime minister’s approach. It is professional but firm. His recent response to President Trump was a good example of maintaining dignity while showing strength. That kind of leadership earns respect.

Many may consider Canada to be the most stable and respectable leader when people think of North America today. Canadians know how to represent themselves and foster authentic partnerships. Meanwhile, the U.S. can come off as arrogant, as though having the biggest economy or the strongest military entitles us to dominate.

But every great nation in history has eventually crumbled. George Carlin once joked, “Because you have the most flavours of Rice-A-Roni doesn’t mean you’re the greatest.” Exactly.

That is how I feel as an American. I can only imagine how others around the globe now perceive us.

When I served in the military, people genuinely saw America as a beacon of hope. I do not think that perception holds in the same way anymore.

Jacobsen: What words come to mind when you think about the current makeup of the administration? I am trying to remember the Japanese term for the “front face” a group shows to the public.

Carrillo: You might think of tatemae—the public face, as opposed to honne, the private truth.

In any political system, yes, there will be internal disagreements. However, just as in a family, those discussions should occur behind closed doors. You have media relations and public events to present a unified front because you represent millions. It is not just politics—it is diplomacy and responsibility.

As for the second Trump administration, the words that come to mind are rebellious and vindictive. That perception stems not only from Trump’s mugshot following his criminal conviction but also from the language he uses, like discussing the military toward domestic protests or threatening political opponents.

These are dangerous narratives in a democratic society. This increasingly feels like a revenge tour—not a campaign rooted in service or vision. One of the most important values instilled in the military is the concept of accountability.

Donald Trump was petulant in front of world leaders during his first term. (Bundesregierung)

Jacobsen: We’ve seen cases where Signal groups of prominent journalists and publishers coordinate the release of classified or sensitive material to the public—and in many instances, there appears to be little to no accountability. Misleading statements are sometimes made in advance. And then, once the facts emerge, no one is held responsible. The issue simply fades from view, swept under the rug.

Contrast that with the military context. As you know, U.S. service members operate under a dual legal system: civilian law and the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ). The UCMJ tends to be far less lenient—particularly in a country like the United States, where the legal system is already highly punitive. If a service member breaks the law, they can face consequences under both frameworks.

So what would happen if a higher-ranking officer—say, a major or above—were to violate the law? How would that accountability process unfold in the military, and how does it compare to the virtual impunity we often see in civilian or media settings?

Carrillo: You’re right. In the military, there’s a higher standard, period. And because that standard is higher, if you make a mistake, especially as a ranking officer, you are held accountable under the UCMJ. The system does not spare you. It is intended to maintain discipline, order, and trust within the chain of command. You can lose your rank and pension and even face imprisonment. There is absolute and enforceable accountability.

What we see now in the civilian sphere, particularly among political appointees and cabinet-level officials, is that they are not held to the same level of accountability. In most cases, the worst that happens is dismissal or quietly resigning.

However, there has been virtually no accountability system in the Trump era, not even for Trump himself as Commander-in-Chief. That is where the Supreme Court got it wrong, especially in its recent ruling that a sitting president cannot be prosecuted for actions taken while in office. Trump has interpreted that as a blank check to do whatever he wants, unconstrained.

Now, he governs almost entirely by executive order. Even when those actions violate the Constitution, they become a matter of legal debate rather than immediate consequences. And in that legal gray zone, no one can stop him in real-time. There’s no enforcement mechanism.

Take the case of Kilmar Abrego Garcia, an undocumented immigrant who was deported. A federal court ordered the administration to bring him back, and Trump’s team ignored the ruling. There has been no consequence for that defiance. Nothing could be done.

We are in a constitutional crisis, even though the administration may deny it. We are allowing a sitting president to violate the Constitution he swore to defend. The judiciary’s failure to enforce clear limits has created a precedent of unchecked executive power.

Jacobsen: How does all this impact the morale and retention of career national security professionals?

Carrillo: Right now, morale is incredibly low. There has been significant turnover, and what is particularly disturbing is the number of positions being cut, especially within our national security infrastructure. And interestingly, these cuts are being made across all agencies.

They’re trying to funnel more money into certain agencies, but many career professionals realize it is time to retire. If you are not politically aligned with the president, you likely will not have a job—you will be dismissed.

This is happening across the government. The people doing the real work—career civil servants—have continuously operated independently of partisan politics. I recall being in public service: it didn’t matter who was president. We never talked about politics. We focused on the mission and the job at hand.

But now, regardless of job performance, people are targeted for their political affiliations. That is not how a professional, nonpartisan civil service should function. Dismissing people based on party loyalty rather than merit threatens the integrity of government institutions.

Jacobsen: Let’s close on a lighter note. What are some of your favourite presidential quotes?

Carrillo: From Trump?

Jacobsen: From any president.

Carrillo: One of my favourite quotes is from John F. Kennedy: “Ask not what your country can do for you—ask what you can do for your country.” That quote has stayed with me throughout my life.

I have worked in government, served in the military, worked as a police officer, and later in social services. I have always tried to give back, represent underserved communities, and defend the ideals this country is supposed to stand for.

That quote captures the spirit of public service. It has guided how I live my life: How can I give back? How can I serve my country or my community?

Jacobsen: George, thank you so much for your time and expertise. It was an absolute pleasure to meet you.

Carrillo: Thank you. I appreciate it.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

ANTISEMITISM ISN’T JUST A BUG IN THE SYSTEM. IT’S BEING AMPLIFIED BY IT.

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/30

As Australia headed into its 2025 federal election, a darker undercurrent pulsed through its digital platforms. CyberWell, a watchdog group specializing in online antisemitism, uncovered a disturbing trend: antisemitic narratives were not just circulating—they were being algorithmically amplified to more than 257,000 users. Using proprietary monitoring tools guided by the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance (IHRA) working definition of antisemitism, CyberWell flagged 548 posts between November 2024 and April 2025. Of those, 80 were confirmed antisemitic.

The responses from social media platforms varied starkly. X (formerly Twitter) removed just 5% of flagged content, citing permissive “civic integrity” policies, while Facebook removed nearly 90%. Classic antisemitic conspiracies—like the Kalergi Plan—reemerged in digital camouflage, retooled into memes and coded language to evade detection.

CyberWell argues that such normalization of Jewish hatred poses a direct threat to democratic norms, public safety, and civil discourse. They advocate for mandatory IHRA-based moderator training and stronger enforcement. Platforms like YouTube and Facebook, which maintain clearer policies and trusted partnerships, demonstrated more robust moderation. But as the data suggests, uneven enforcement leaves critical gaps—ones that extremists are all too eager to exploit.

(Eradicate Hate Global Summit)

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How did CyberWell identify and verify the posts?

Tal-Or Cohen Montemayor: CyberWell utilizes a combination of social media listening tools and a proprietary monitoring system to identify posts that are highly likely to be antisemitic, according to the IHRA working definition. Between Nov 11, 2024 – April 22, 2025, CyberWell’s monitoring technology flagged 548 posts in English on Facebook, X (Twitter), TikTok, and YouTube that included keywords related to the Australian federal election and had a high likelihood of being antisemitic.

Of the 548 posts, CyberWell selected a sample for manual review. In total, 80 posts were confirmed as antisemitic according to the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance’s (IHRA) working definition of antisemitism by CyberWell’s research team. The high level of engagement around a select sample of just 80 posts indicates that the exposure of deeply anti-Jewish narratives ahead of the election period in Australia is far worse than what CyberWell’s research indicates.

Jacobsen: Elon Musk’s X platform removed only ~5% of flagged antisemitic election content compared to 54.2% in 2024. What explains the dramatic drop in moderation?

Montemayor: The significance of removal between X and other platforms is largely due to their policy approach to election-related content. Much of the hate speech that intersects with election issues is mistakenly perceived by X and their moderators as political expression and, therefore, allowed on their platform. X is the platform with the most permissive “Civic Integrity” policy, and it appears that much of the antisemitic election-related content is categorized under this policy as far as they are concerned. This extraordinarily low rate of actioning open Jewish hatred is not something we have encountered before.

Additionally, the gap between X’s rate of removal of antisemitic election content and their average rate of removal in 2024 highlights a key issue when relying on user reporting and escalation to major social media platforms, particularly to X: response time. The average rate of removal of reported antisemitic content by X in 2024, as collected by CyberWell, is a snapshot at the end of the calendar year, giving the platform many months to respond to our reporting. X’s average rate of removal of the antisemitic Australia election dataset collected by CyberWell is approximately 5% reflects the rate of removal three to five days after reporting it to X. While platforms take days to respond to user reports, the engagement algorithms continue to push and suggest content, especially ahead of events of wide public interest like a national election.

Jacobsen: Your report mentions the use of classic antisemitic conspiracy theories, such as the Kalergi Plan and alleged Jewish control over political parties. How have these narratives evolved?

Montemayor: The dominant antisemitic theme that election antisemitism centers around is conspiracy theories about Jewish global control and influence. These narratives characterize Jews as manipulative puppeteers who secretly control governments, political leaders, and the electoral process itself. Antisemitic conspiracy theories—such as the Kalergi Plan and claims of Jewish control over specific political parties—have evolved online by merging with contemporary political narratives and global events.

On social media, this very old anti-Jewish idea is often repackaged using coded language, emojis, and memes. The conspiracy theories suggesting secret Jewish control frequently surface in discussions about major political events, such as federal elections, where antisemitic tropes are embedded within broader ideological discourse. This blending allows hate actors to evade platform policies and challenges enforcement in practice while spreading this harmful narrative to mass audiences during times of increased social sensitivity and tension. This is extremely dangerous for the Jewish community in Australia, which is already experiencing a marked rise in violent and targeted attacks.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Everyone Hates Elon (@everyonehateselon_)

Jacobsen: How have these gained traction in digital political discourse during election cycles?

Montemayor: CyberWell will be releasing a comparative analysis of antisemitic narratives during election cycles, examining how these anti-Jewish trends have gained popularity and audience during the UK, U.S., Canadian, and Australian elections towards the end of the summer.

However, we can share that in each of the four election cycles, classic antisemitism criticizing disproportionate Jewish power and conspiracies of covert control are the most prevalent types of Jewish hatred in election antisemitism across the board. This indicates that the dominant antisemitic theme in this dataset centers on conspiracy theories about Jewish global control and influence.

Notably, this form of classic antisemitism, consistent with the second example of the IHRA working definition, closely aligns with the core principles of major social media platforms’ hate speech and hateful conduct policies. This content includes offensive generalizations, harmful stereotypes, and conspiracy theories targeting a “protected group,” including those defined by religious affiliation or belief.

Since these carve-outs and protections are already recognized by most large social media platforms in their policies, it is reasonable to expect that platforms would enforce their policies against this type of content effectively. In practice, however, enforcement of election-related antisemitic hate speech appears to be significantly lower than typical enforcement rates against online Jewish hatred.

Political rhetoric focused on candidates and party platforms, including those that are irate and critical, are an important part of freedom of expression and political speech. However, the targeted violence against the Australian Jewish community and other Jewish communities across the globe has proven that online conspiracy theories and hatred has real-world consequences.

Jacobsen: How does CyberWell’s application of the IHRA working definition of antisemitism help distinguish rhetoric?

Montemayor: The International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance’s (IHRA) working definition of antisemitism is a globally recognized consensus definition, rooted in multi-disciplinary expertise, that CyberWell uses as a discourse analysis tool. The eleven examples featured in the IHRA working definition provide a framework for a lexicon focused on identifying particular beliefs, conspiracy theories, and narratives that are the cornerstones of Jewish hatred. We apply the definition as a tool for narrative analysis context. It not only helps us monitor specific narratives online but also organizes and allows us to track spikes in particular tropes, accusations, slurs, and narratives.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Everyone Hates Elon (@everyonehateselon_)

Jacobsen: What are the strengths and weaknesses of the IHRA definition of antisemitism? How can social media companies improve enforcement during elections?

Montemayor: A major strength of the IHRA working definition is that it provides a comprehensive consensus definition of antisemitism that addresses the multifaceted nature of Jewish hatred as it has evolved over time and up to the modern day.

The IHRA working definition through the eleven categories laid out in the definition covers the evolution of Jewish hatred from its historical roots in religious antisemitism, race-based Jewish hatred during the Holocaust to its most modern iteration, political antisemitism via vilification of Jews as agents of the Israeli state, demonization of the concept of Jewish self-determination and using the state of Israel or the Israeli identity as a touchstone for promoting classic and openly anti-Jewish tropes, biases and hatred. However, as one of the most complex forms of hatred, even this working definition needs updates.

For example, CyberWell’s research of online antisemitism, particularly the October 7 denial campaign, has revealed that purposeful denial of atrocities or attacks committed against the Jewish community is a form of current antisemitism. The denial or ‘false flag’ narrative, either blaming the victims for the attack or erroneously claiming that they set up the attack, has also been used to delegitimize and dismiss the attacks against the Jewish community in Australia from Sydney to Melbourne. The recognition of Holocaust denial and distortion as a form of antisemitism, featured in the IHRA working definition, should be applied to the purposeful denial or distortion of atrocities committed against Jews for being Jews.

Some social media platforms have gone on the record stating that they use the IHRA working definition as a reference point when updating their policies, but the truth is the practitioners and enforcers of the policies, the content moderators, often outsourced by major platforms to third party providers around the world, are unfamiliar with the IHRA working definition and there is no indication that it is part of their regular training material.

A more comprehensive application of the IHRA working definition within the existing policies of the social media platforms, making sure the definition is part of content moderator training and implementation of recommendations from off-platform experts like CyberWell, including reliance on specialized datasets and keywords around events like the elections, would significantly impact better enforcement of digital policy on social media.

Jacobsen: There is a growing normalization of antisemitism online and offline in Australian society. What are the urgent consequences of this normalization?

Montemayor: The normalization of antisemitism—both online and offline—erodes social tolerance and creates an environment where hate speech, hostility, and violence against Jewish citizens is more likely to be accepted or ignored. It emboldens extremist actors to act criminally and violently, legitimizes dangerous conspiracy theories that erode trust, and fosters a climate of fear within Jewish communities. When antisemitic rhetoric goes unchecked, it weakens democratic norms and desensitizes the public to open bigotry and hatred. This is why many Jewish communities are experiencing increased incidents of harassment, threats to community safety, and the risk of real-world attacks—the increased violence is fueled by online radicalization and algorithmically charged hate speech. The platforms must be responsible for systematic and effective enforcement of their own digital policies in order to stem the tide of increasing violence.

Jacobsen: Facebook and YouTube demonstrated stronger enforcement. Why are they more proactive? Are they more successful?

Montemayor: Unlike the other platforms, YouTube takes a more defined stance by including specific policies on hate speech related to elections and civic integrity. The platform explicitly prohibits hate speech and harassment in the context of elections. Reflecting this policy, YouTube had the fewest antisemitic posts in the dataset. While the removal rate stood at 0%, this is attributable to the fact that only one video was identified during the monitoring period.

Overall, CyberWell’s research across platforms suggests that the more explicit a policy is, the more effectively it is enforced. This is true in terms of technological resources, such as pre-emptive AI removal through classifiers and human content moderation, which reviews users’ reports of violating content. While Facebook does not currently include explicit clauses in their policies targeting election-related hate speech, Facebook demonstrated the highest rate of content removal, taking down 89.47% of the reported posts. It is also worth noting that CyberWell is a trusted partner of TikTok and Meta, but not an official partner of YouTube. This may support stronger response mechanisms by Meta for reported antisemitic content.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Tal-Or.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

GOSPEL OF DENIAL: HOW CHURCHES CONTINUE TO FAIL CLERGY ABUSE SURVIVORS

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/23

Today, I’m joined by Katherine Archer, Father Bojan Jovanović, Dr. Hermina Nedelescu, and Dorothy Small for a wide-ranging discussion on clergy abuse—its psychological toll, institutional roots, and pathways to reform.

Katherine Archer is the co-founder of Prosopon Healing and a graduate student in Theological Studies. She will begin a Master’s in Counseling Psychology in the fall. Her work focuses on clergy abuse within the Eastern Orthodox Church, blending academic research with nonprofit advocacy. Archer champions policy reform addressing adult clergy exploitation, advancing a vision of healing grounded in justice, accountability, and survivor support.

Father Bojan Jovanović, a Serbian Orthodox priest and Secretary of the Union of Christians of Croatia is known for his searing critiques of institutional failings within the Church. His book Confession: How We Killed God and his work with the Alliance of Christians of Croatia underscore a commitment to ethical reform and moral reckoning. Jovanović advocates for transparency and internal dialogue as essential steps toward restoring trust in religious life.

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu is a neuroscientist at Scripps Research in San Diego whose research probes the neurobiological underpinnings of human behavior, particularly in the context of substance use and trauma. Her current work explores how trauma, including sexual abuse, is encoded in the brain’s circuitry and how community-based interventions can address PTSD and addiction in survivors of clergy abuse.

Dorothy Small is a retired registered nurse and longtime survivor advocate with SNAP. A survivor of both childhood and adult clergy abuse, Small began speaking out long before the #MeToo movement gave such voices a broader platform. A cancer survivor and grandmother, she now writes about recovery, resilience, and personal freedom, amplifying the strength of survivors and the urgency of institutional accountability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: In 2024, journalists faced unprecedented threats, with at least 124 killed—the highest number recorded to date—though some sources report 122. The violence in Gaza accounted for a significant share of these deaths. Beyond physical danger, journalists today confront a host of pressures: online harassment, legal intimidation, surveillance, the erosion of press freedoms, and increasing self-censorship. I’ve experienced several of these realities myself. That is the nature of this work.

Each of you here has encountered similar challenges through very different lenses: as a distinguished member of the Serbian Orthodox clergy, a young adult woman within the Orthodox community, a Catholic youth, and a neuroscientist. These identities frame the most critical points of contact within each of your narratives. You all chose to speak out—something most people never do. So let me ask: Once someone breaks that silence and becomes outspoken—whether about their own experience or on behalf of others—what happens? What shifts and consequences follow when the truth is no longer kept quiet?

Katherine Archer: When I was 21, I came forward and reported a clergyperson for what I experienced as a violation of trust and an abuse of pastoral authority. If I had to choose one word to describe how I felt in the aftermath, it would be annihilation. The Orthodox Church upholds the use of icons in worship and annually celebrates the Triumph of Orthodoxy–a commemoration of the end of iconoclasm, or the historical period when people smashed and destroyed icons.

I have often felt a deep dissonance between the reverence given to painted wood as the representation of the human person and my own experience, as a living person, coming forward with a painful and vulnerable account of harm involving a priest. Over the years, I have spoken with many survivors who shared similar feelings after trying to report experiences of abuse within Orthodox Christian communities—whether through conversations with fellow parishioners, clergy, or through official channels.

It is a beautiful and moving tradition to process around the church holding icons on that particular Sunday in Lent. Yet it is profoundly more difficult to carry the weight of someone’s story, confront painful realities, and respond compassionately to a living human reporting such things.

Father Bojan Jovanović: When I first spoke the truth, my truth experienced a paradox: liberation and humiliation in the same breath. I talked about the attempted sexual abuse I survived within the Serbian Orthodox Church and about an even more harrowing reality — the knowledge that a child had been raped and murdered in a monastery. The facts were clear, but the world I spoke them into could not receive them.

Instead of being a space of light and confession of sin, the Church became a prison of denial. Some immediately tried to silence my voice, to “protect the Church,” as if the truth were the threat and not the crime. Others looked at me with discomfort, as if I were the one disrupting the order. Theologically, I felt like a prophet bringing truth, only to be met with stones. Psychologically, it was only the beginning of confronting the deep trauma I had suppressed and wrapped in silence for years.

Hermina Nedelescu: I received supportive responses from most individuals and institutions. In contrast, the response I experienced from the Greek Orthodox Church of America was, in my view, deeply disappointing and lacking in basic compassion. From my experience, their response felt—and continues to feel—fundamentally inhumane.

Dorothy Small: Reporting the sexual assault by my grandfather, just shy of age six, resulted in a slap across the cheek by my grandmother and a swear in French. Ultimately, it resulted in no further abuse by my grandfather. However, almost a year later, living under the same roof as the predator, my grandmother brought me to a Catholic orphanage to be adopted. At the last minute, I was adopted by an aunt and uncle. They were abusive. I feared them. But they were familiar. I feared the orphanage far more. It was unknown. Plus, I feared nuns.

Reporting the schoolteacher helped to stop the harassment my best friend was receiving. It also caused me to be blamed and scorned by my parents. I only had one friend who stood beside me. Ultimately, I ended up moving across the country to escape a small town and the state where I lived. I could not recover from the emotional consequences of living in that state. It took about three or four years for the emotional pain to ease. My parents contacted the principal of the school, mandating that the teacher had until evening to reveal what he did with me to his wife, or my adoptive father would pay him a visit to his home. He had to tell his wife.

Reporting the priest led to a massive fallout. On a work visa from a foreign country, he was pulled from the ministry in the diocese here and remanded to his bishop, where he returned to active ministry. I was banned by the pastor of the Church from all ministry for reporting him. If I had not, I could have continued ministry even though they knew what happened. Silence would have been rewarded. I lost a few close friends due to the publicity of the lawsuit and their discomfort being associated with me. I feared retaliation beyond being shunned, ostracized, and ridiculed, which led to my retreating at home for six weeks, afraid to leave. Some told me that I was hated and accused of seducing the priest.

Once loved and accepted by my church community, I fell sharply from grace. There was also a backlash from my adult son. I ended up walking away from the community that was like a family. It caused marked spiritual confusion and distress for well over five years.

Jacobsen: How were people helpful in this coming-out experience?

Archer: The community of survivors and advocates is incredible. I have come to know some incredibly fierce, strong, and benevolent people. I am moved by people like law professor Amos Guiora and some of the attorneys we have spoken to, who are empathic but knowledgeable and have a fierce resolve to help survivors see justice.

I am excited about the community I will join in the fall to start working towards my Master’s in Counselling Psychology, with professors willing to engage with complex ideas and not turn to binary thinking or platitudes. I do not think a person needs a vast community, but since we are wired to connect with others, some community is necessary for healing. It can be a community of another person, holding a story with respect and tenderness and unwilling to inflict further harm. That is a true “triumph over iconoclasm,” by the way.

Jovanović: Individuals — not institutions, not the majority, but individuals — became lighthouses in my night. These people did not demand proof but listened to my heart. Psychologists, friends, and a few believers who truly understood Christ’s message of love and justice — helped me rediscover my humanity. Their support was not in words, but in the silence where I could cry without shame.

From a theological perspective, it was through these people that God drew near to me. Paradoxically, it was only after I left the institution that called itself His house that I felt God’s presence in my pain. Through them, I understood that faith is not unquestioning loyalty to an institution, but the courage to break with evil in the name of truth, even when that evil is draped in robes.

Nedelescu: Colleagues, mentors, and even strangers responded with empathy and moral clarity, affirming that speaking out was valid and necessary. Some institutions took immediate steps to understand what happened and offered to help in any way possible, whether through documentation, emotional support, or a safe space to be heard. Those responses reminded me that despite my suffering, individuals and institutions are committed to accountability, dignity, and survivor support.

In contrast, the only institution that responded in a reactionary and, in my view, deeply disappointing manner was the Greek Orthodox Church of America. That response had a severe emotional impact on me and compounded the trauma.

Small: With my grandfather, I suppose that although initially, it met with a shocked reaction from my grandmother, there was no further incident the remainder of the time I stayed with them. The positive thing about the schoolteacher was the response I received from the superintendent. I expected to be chastised. Instead, he listened as I berated myself. He interrupted and told me never to speak harshly and negatively about myself again. I was just talking about myself and the way I was spoken to at home. The teacher, however, only received a verbal warning. He did not lose his position.

With the priest, the victim advocate for the diocese was very kind and supportive. One woman from my parish ended up standing beside me throughout everything, even though she did not understand anything about dealing with someone with so much trauma and symptoms, as well as clergy abuse of adults.

After the lawsuit was mediated, I found a spiritual director ed, who became a strong support person. The lawyer I retained was phenomenal. He had a degree in clinical psychology as well as in law. I also contacted SNAP, which is a nonprofit organization for those abused by clergy. I also had a therapist initially, but she did not understand the complex nature of clergy abuse. I ended therapy.

Jacobsen: How were people unhelpful in this coming-out experience?

Archer: People who will not access a body of knowledge on trauma, consent, or abuse, including spiritual abuse, have said atrocious things to me over the years. I was abused by a man starting when I was 14, so I have been in this space of being a “survivor” (and actually, I do not always like that word) for a long time. However, over time, with healing, ignorant words feel like tiny ant bites as I move towards the people committed to modeling authenticity in their lives and growing and learning.

When people say atrocious things, I think, “Thank you for showing me who you are so I can move far away from you.” So, the unhelpful people have ultimately been helpful, after all, in allowing me to disconnect and attach to healthier people and communities. There are healthy communities; we do not have to feel stuck in sick communities.

Jovanović: The unhelpfulness of people was most deeply expressed in their silence. It was not just the words of denial — the quiet distance, the turning away, that wounded me the most. Some even tried to convince me I had misunderstood what had happened, that “people like that do not exist in the Church,” as if I had imagined my trauma.

The abuser did not inflict the most significant pain, but by those who knew, suspected, or heard, and did nothing. Their theological passivity, their silence in the name of “peace” and “God’s order,” is what spiritually broke me the most. They failed to see Christ in me as the wounded one. They trusted those in vestments more than the truth of a broken soul. Moreover, that, in my most profound conviction, is the greatest betrayal of faith.

Nedelescu: How the Greek Orthodox Church of America has responded has, in my view, been profoundly unhelpful—and continues to be. Rather than expressing empathy or taking responsibility, I experienced their response as involving victim-blaming, narrative distortion, and a general attitude that felt fundamentally inhumane. From my perspective, their actions appear more focused on protecting the institution than on acknowledging the harm I experienced at the hands of one of their high-ranking employees.

That kind of ongoing institutional response doesn’t just fail survivors—it intensifies the harm and reinforces the very silence we are trying to break. It is profoundly disheartening to witness such reactionary and defensive behavior from individuals in positions of authority who, in my view, knew—or should have known—that serious harm had occurred and failed to act to mitigate it.

This aligns with what Professor Amos Guiora, a leading expert on sexual assault and enabling behavior, defines as the “enabling phenomenon.” As he writes, an enabler is “an individual able to reasonably know another individual has been harmed and/or is likely to be harmed yet fails to act to minimize the harm to that individual.”

Finally, the words of Diane Langberg resonate with me: “Systems that cover up abuse through deception, coercion, or abuse of power mimic the perpetrator and revictimize the victim. Tragically, many lives have been sacrificed on the altar of secrecy for the sake of the church or the mission.”

Small: The comments made by those who just did not understand the abuse of adults by clergy were tough. My grandmother struck my face with an open hand. My grandfather threatened me after the assault that if I told, he would tell everyone I was lying and I would get into trouble. No one would believe me.

Much is the same when I reported the priest as an adult. Many stood beside him and turned away from me. I think just the fundamental lack of knowledge and understanding, as well as the impact on their religious practice, made it more complicated than if what happened were with a stranger or anyone but a priest as far as the school teacher admitting to my parents, who discovered evidence in my room, that the teacher caused me to hear some of the most horrific things any person who calls himself a father should ever say to any teenager.

His words took deep root. He was a sadistic bully who left a lifetime of damage in his wake. The consequences of being raised by the aunt and uncle, as well as devastating early childhood loss, left me vulnerable to subsequent abuse, culminating in what transpired with the priest at age sixty.

Jacobsen: Thank you all for continuing to break new ground by offering distinct perspectives on this less-discussed darkness in the community ecosphere around abuse.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

FROM RUINS TO RESIN: A CURATOR’S FIGHT TO SAVE UKRAINIAN HERITAGE

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/18

Today, I’m joined by Tetyana Fiks, a Ukrainian cultural manager and curator based in Kyiv, whose work highlights the power of art in times of conflict. Born and raised in Ukraine, Tetyana has played a central role in promoting Ukrainian culture on international platforms, with significant contributions to projects such as the War Fragments Museum, the Bouquet Kyiv Stage Festival, and Kyiv Art Sessions.

The War Fragments Museum, which exhibited at the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD) in London, uses epoxy resin-encased war artifacts to convey the personal stories of Ukrainians affected by war. Through this work, Tetyana emphasizes culture as a universal language that fosters empathy, identity, and resilience. She delves into the ethical considerations of preserving and displaying wartime artifacts, the production challenges her team has faced, and the crucial role of partnerships in sustaining these efforts.

Her involvement with the Bouquet Kyiv Stage Festival and Kyiv Art Sessions further reflects her dedication to making Ukrainian art accessible to global audiences. Through storytelling, artistic expression, and memory, Tetyana Fiks continues to champion Ukraine’s cultural resilience in the face of adversity.

(Facebook)

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do soft disciplines—such as the arts and cultural fields—contribute to the development and preservation of a society’s identity? And in what ways can these disciplines be effectively conveyed to international audiences as instruments of cosmopolitan diplomacy?

Tetyana Fiks: Do you mean in Ukraine specifically or in general?

Jacobsen: In general, we’ll narrow it down to Ukraine shortly. You’ll see where I’m going with it.

Fiks: I ask because we’re living through extraordinary times in Ukraine. So everything feels different here. But for me, culture is an international language. Everyone can understand cultural expressions—paintings, music, performances- no matter where you live. Culture allows us to communicate across borders and deliver important messages.

As a cultural manager, it’s essential for me to share these messages through Ukrainian culture and to highlight them internationally—especially because Ukrainian culture was suppressed and overshadowed by Russian culture for a long time.

Now, even many Ukrainians are discovering their own culture anew, so it is not only important—it is vital. Culture can also be a kind of weapon in that it shapes identity and perception, which we need to understand.

Jacobsen: How would you compare and contrast your experiences—not just with different cultures themselves but with how they evolve? Culture is not a fixed thing. It’s shaped by what people do.

Fiks: Are you referring to the cultures in Ukraine, the UK, or the U.S.?

Jacobsen: Primarily Ukraine and London since both are relevant to your work. But if you want to also reflect on the U.S., we can include that. How do these cultures feel and express themselves from within? And how are they perceived from the outside? Having that dual internal and external perspective can help you see where misunderstandings arise when cultures are interpreted out of context.

Fiks: I prefer not to discuss others’ mistakes in interpreting cultures. But yes, when you’re positioned between different cultural spheres, you notice how culture is often misunderstood. Each society has its own cultural rhythm, values, and symbols. Understanding those—both from the inside and the outside—is crucial for meaningful cultural exchange.

For culture, freedom is crucial. No matter if you’re an artist or an art manager, you should feel free in what you’re doing because art is about freedom. Of course, not all artists can work freely, but still—whether it’s Ukrainian culture, British culture, or the culture of any other country—they’re all different because culture is always tied to a specific context. It’s heritage. It belongs to a place and its people.

But in general, culture is important for me—and, of course, for many others. As I said before, it’s an international language. Whether it’s Ukrainian or Spanish, it’s interesting to me. When I go to another country, visiting a museum is the only way to understand it truly.

Only after that do I feel, “Yes, now I understand this country.” That’s how I connect emotionally and intellectually with a place and its people.

Jacobsen: You mentioned that Ukraine is experiencing a special moment in time, and that’s an important point. How do you bring culture forward uniquely during such extraordinary times?

Fiks: It’s a very interesting time because now the world knows about Ukraine. But often, the only thing people speak about is the war. And, of course, people are tired of hearing about war. We are tired too—but we have no choice. People outside Ukraine have a choice.

So we—my project, my colleagues, my team—try to speak about the war through the language of art. For example, we try to address the war through artistic means with the War Fragments Museum. We realized that people can understand the message when it’s conveyed through a beautiful piece of art.

It doesn’t hurt you at first glance. It becomes painful to read the story behind the piece and understand what it represents. But visually, it’s still a work of art. And that’s powerful. It’s the best way—not just for our project, but many artists and cultural managers are doing this. They are talking about the war and saying, “Look what we are going through,” but they are doing it in a way that isn’t overwhelming or traumatic for the audience.

So, if you want to speak now about Ukrainian culture and art, you must address the war. But if you’re a cultural manager, you cannot harm people emotionally with your work. You must find a way to deliver the message without being too harsh—at least try.

Jacobsen: What is the process of collecting and preserving war artifacts in the cubes?

Fiks: So, it’s a resin. So yes, you can damage a cube, but you can’t break it easily. That was important for us because the resin is long-lasting. It will survive for many years.

We collected all the artifacts and stories in February 2022 and 2023. We also went on expeditions to different cities and villages—some of which were occupied or near the front line—because we wanted to show the stories that most people would never see in the news.

It was important for us that these stories and these people not become just statistics—because they have names. The cities have names, and we wanted to make them visible. So we collected the stories. We talked to people. We spoke with soldiers who had gone through captivity. These experiences will always stay with us. Our team still remembers every story, every face, and every person we spoke with.

It was painful, but I’m glad we did it. It changed us—my team and me—and gave us a deeper understanding of the project. At first, we didn’t think we would go on expeditions. We thought we would write to volunteers and ask them to send us their stories and artifacts.

We received maybe 20 artifacts this way, but then we realized that was not enough. That could not be the core of this project. If we wanted to truly be part of it—and for the project to become part of us—we needed to go. We needed to talk to people and find these stories ourselves. And we did that. I’m grateful we did because it transformed the project.

Jacobsen: How do the artifacts from places like Kherson, Mariupol, or Sumy differ in terms of what they represent—historically and emotionally—compared to artifacts from other cities?

Fiks: I can’t compare artifacts. Even two artifacts from Mariupol—I can’t compare them. Each cube contains someone’s life. And every life is unique. You cannot compare one to another.

That’s why each cube is important. Of course, you might expect that artifacts from Mariupol or Lviv would be different—and they are. But they all carry a piece of the war inside. A war of this scale spreads across the entire country. Maybe Lviv is not on the front line, while Kharkiv is—but all the artifacts are still about war. They are about people. And that’s why I won’t compare any artifact or story.

Jacobsen: How do you balance historical documentation with emotional storytelling?

Fiks: We try to keep that balance because it’s important. Facts matter. Facts are things you can verify—true and check them online. But emotions matter, too, because this project is about people.

And no matter where you live—whether it’s the U.S., Canada, the UK, or Spain—when you read a story about a woman giving birth under missile strikes, you can imagine that. Or when a father buries his 13-year-old son next to the house because he can’t leave his home—you can imagine that, too.

I don’t even know how to describe it. But it’s personal. And as a human being, you understand this. It’s not about philosophy or abstract ideas. It’s about the basic things we all need—eating, living safely, giving birth in normal conditions. These are universal experiences.

(Click to enlarge)

Jacobsen: How does the museum aim to combat—using that word carefully—war fatigue or the desensitization that can come with prolonged exposure to war and suffering?

Fiks: Honestly, I think we’ll only truly understand that after the war is over. Right now, yes—we are tired. But it’s more than tiredness. It’s real fatigue.

Still, we know we have to keep going. We have to fight. We must support those on the front lines—our soldiers, our military. And we can’t allow ourselves to say, “Oh, I’m tired, I’ll do nothing.” We don’t have that luxury.

Everything you’re saying—yes—is something we must face once this war is over.

Jacobsen: Have you received contributions directly from soldiers? So you go there and gather stories in person—someone finds an artifact in the rubble of an administrative building, a primary school, or something belonging to a loved one on the front line. Maybe that soldier is now injured and cannot return to combat. Have you had moments where people heard about your project and gave you something, saying, “I want this to be preserved in resin and remembered”?

Fiks: Yes. I was amazed when Azov soldiers—who had been in Mariupol, were captured, taken to Russia, and eventually returned—shared their stories with us. We interviewed them after they were released from captivity while they were still in the hospital.

They gave us the one thing they had kept with them during captivity in Mariupol. I told them, “This is something you could give to your children or grandchildren—priceless.” But they said, “No. We want this to be part of history. We want it to be in a museum. We want this story to be told.”

I was deeply moved. When I say “I,” I’m also speaking on behalf of my team because this is a team project. We felt a huge responsibility. They gave us something that is beyond value. And then it became our mission—not to make the project famous—but to speak through this project, to speak with it.

So yes, we have these stories—especially from soldiers of Azov—and I’m very grateful we had the opportunity to talk to them. It was important for them to tell their stories, and it was important for us to listen.

Jacobsen: Soldiers have protocol. Politicians have messaging strategies. First responders have procedures. Doctors have ethical guidelines. For cultural managers and museum professionals, what is the protocol for the ethical and responsible handling of artifacts—even if those artifacts are embedded in resin and cannot be shattered, only damaged?

Fiks: The question of ethics was crucial for us. We had to ask ourselves with every story: “Is this, okay? Are we doing the right thing?”

Because we are living through the war, too, we are under missile strikes. We are not sitting in another country, calmly evaluating everything from a distance. No—we’re here. We’re under pressure and stress, like everyone else.

So we thought about it a lot. But we truly tried to make the project as ethical as possible. And I believe we succeeded—because we haven’t received a single message from any soldier, any official, or any private person saying, “Your project is unethical,” or, “You shouldn’t be doing this,” or, “You’re misrepresenting our stories.”

That tells me we’ve managed to approach this with the care and respect it demands.

But it was a hard question for us. With every story, we asked ourselves: Is it okay to share these things? Is it ethical? We questioned ourselves constantly.

(War Fragments Museum)

Jacobsen: What is the importance of collaboration and partnerships? As you noted, museums do not come together alone—there’s a team. But what about teams working with other teams? How do you build partnerships? How do you maintain them? And how do you determine which ones are appropriate, especially for a project as sensitive as this?

Fiks: Of course, collaboration is important. In every field, it matters—but especially in cultural work. We collaborate with museums and galleries within Ukraine, and we also collaborate with partners outside of Ukraine. But for us, there are some key principles.

The most important is that the organization or person supports Ukraine. They cannot have any ties to Russia. That’s essential—because we cannot present the stories of Azov soldiers, for example, while collaborating with someone with connections to Russia. So our partners must support Ukraine, have no relationship with Russia, and not travel to Russia, among other things. Those are our non-negotiables.

Jacobsen: What has been the short-term impact of the exhibitions and the museum?

Fiks: That’s correct—our project is not just about the museum. We have two goals. One is to exhibit the resin cubes in Ukraine and internationally. The second is to raise funds through them. People can purchase a cube from our website, and the proceeds go to one of three charitable foundations we support.

Out of 300 cubes, we now have about 130 left—so we’ve already sold more than half. But we decided to reserve 30 to 40 cubes to donate to museums in Ukraine and abroad. We want this to become part of historical memory.

I should have said this initially: our project is about memory. Memory is essential to every nation because it shapes the future—it shapes future generations. We created this project for them to help them understand what happened. So yes, we will keep several cubes for permanent collections, but we are also using the rest to raise support. That balance is working well so far.

(War Fragments Museum)

Jacobsen: What is your favourite cube?

Fiks: Oh, I can’t say that I have one favourite. But I really loved one—it has burned wheat inside.

Jacobsen: Burned wheat?

Fiks: Yes. It came from the Mykolaiv region. During the harvest season, there were heavy strikes in the area. The fields were burning—but farmers kept working to save the grain. Because in Ukraine, grain is everything. It is our bread—our symbol of life.

There are many photos of grain fields on fire, yet farmers continue to gather what they can. One of those farmers sent us a handful of scorched grain. The grains were whole but darkened by the fire. We turned that into a cube.

I loved that cube. It was sold in just one day.

But truly, I can’t say I have a favourite. These cubes are part of us. This isn’t just a project about art—it’s about war, about our people. And it will always be part of us. I don’t have a favourite cube or a favourite story. All of them are part of us, the team.

Even when someone buys a cube, I’m always happy—because it means we can help the foundations we support. But when I’m packing the cube, I always pause. I feel, “Okay…I understand I have to let it go,” but it’s still hard for me every time.

Jacobsen: The way the cubes are shaped—do you design them, so they are faceted in a way that allows light to reflect through them? So you can see the object more clearly no matter what angle you view it?

Fiks: They all have the same shape and size—15 centimetres by 15 centimetres. We have professional partners who manufacture them. This isn’t something just anyone can do. It takes a lot of resources, expertise, and time.

The epoxy resin we use was developed specifically for this project. It’s very difficult to produce a cube of this size that is still so transparent, so we waited a long time for this resin to be developed. Once we had it, we worked closely with our partners to figure out how to embed the objects to make them look like they’ve always been there.

But it wasn’t easy—it was a long and complicated process. I’m really glad we succeeded in producing the cubes exactly as we envisioned them. It’s a full production, not something that can be done in an office setting.

Jacobsen: I noticed in the online photos, especially from the angles at the vertices of each cube, that there’s a reflective quality—almost like the object inside is mirrored or glowing. Was that something you specifically requested from the resin and cube designers, or did that effect emerge?

Fiks: That effect wasn’t something we planned. It became apparent while we were already producing the cubes. We didn’t predict or request it in advance—but it turned out beautifully.

Jacobsen: How long are these cubes expected to last? Since this is a custom-made epoxy resin, does it have a longer shelf life than standard epoxy once it’s set?

Fiks: Yes. These cubes are designed to last forever. As I’ve said before, you can damage them but not break them. That was part of the idea. They will work like amber capturing history inside them.

Jacobsen: That also sounds like a metaphor.

Fiks: It can be seen as a metaphor. But yes, they are full solids. They will last. I hope they will last forever.

Jacobsen: What was Evgeni Utkin’s role and vision in founding the War Fragments Museum?

Fiks: Evgeny is a special person for all of us on the team. Before the full-scale invasion, he brought us together for another project. Without him, we would never have met or created the War Fragments Museum.

He supported us throughout the entire process—during the preparation period, during production, and once the cubes were ready. He helped in many ways, and I couldn’t list them all. He’s an incredibly important figure in this project. Without him, it wouldn’t exist in the way it does now.

Jacobsen: Were there any moments when the project nearly didn’t happen?

Fiks: There was one serious challenge. When we started producing the cubes, we had a donor and specific milestones to meet. But then a rocket struck the production site where the cubes were being made. We had to postpone everything.

Still, we overcame that delay and finished production in time to meet our project milestones. So yes, it came close, but we made it happen. That was the one major incident. Thankfully, everyone was alive.

Jacobsen: Is there a particular quote from any of the stories—an excerpt or phrase from the descriptions that stand out to you?

Fiks: A quote? I’m not sure I understand the question.

Jacobsen: Ah, yes—so the cubes, as I understand, come with descriptions or accompanying stories. Is there one of those—not necessarily your favourite—but one you’ve been thinking about recently? Something that continues to resonate with you because of its poignancy?

Fiks: Yes, now I understand what you mean. I still carry some sentences from those stories in my mind. I remember certain lines. Not just one—I have a few of them that stay with me and that I think about often.

But they are painful, so I prefer not to say them aloud. I think everyone who’s interested should visit our website and find their own quote. Your quote will be different, depending on your circumstances, your thoughts, and your life. Everyone interested should find their own.

Jacobsen: Tetyana, thank you so much for your time today. It was a pleasure to meet you, and I appreciate your expertise.

Fiks: Thank you so much, Scott. It was nice to meet you, too. Thank you for having me.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WHO WATCHES THE WATCHERS? A CONVERSATION ON DIGITAL RIGHTS AND DECENTRALIZATION

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/16

Today, I’m joined by Alexander Linton, a leading voice in the fight for digital privacy and a central figure behind Session, a privacy-first messaging app developed by the Australian nonprofit Oxen Project. With a background in communications and over five years of work on the Session project, Linton has emerged as a staunch advocate for end-to-end encryption, decentralized networks, and open-source development.

As the public face of Session’s outreach and education efforts, he promotes a platform designed to minimize metadata and safeguard user anonymity—principles that are increasingly under siege in today’s surveillance-driven digital landscape. Linton writes and speaks regularly on the future of privacy technologies, legislative overreach, and digital autonomy, grounding his advocacy in the belief that privacy is not a privilege but a basic human right.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Your background is in journalism and media. How did you transition into digital rights and technology?

Alexander Linton: It was a relatively smooth transition.

The media is such an exposed group these days. Journalists are constantly in the spotlight when it comes to digital rights. So many examples exist where media workers have had their data or communications compromised. So, if you’re passionate about media or journalism, that passion often translates well into working in digital rights. Of course, you end up on the other side of the table. Instead of reporting on issues, you’re now helping build the tools that protect people from them.

That said, I’ve always tried to prioritize human needs when developing technology. I honed this perspective while working directly with people, especially when producing stories or researching sensitive topics. This mindset carries over to building and promoting privacy tools.

(Oxen)

Jacobsen: Broadly speaking, what does “digital privacy” mean in something as diverse, expansive, and porous as the Internet?

Linton: That’s a good question. There are a lot of ways to approach digital privacy, and it matters both on a personal level and at a societal level.

On a personal level, digital privacy touches our lives constantly. Something as simple as seeing a targeted advertisement for something you didn’t realize you needed — but that an algorithm already knew you did — is a basic example of how privacy issues play out daily.

But more insidiously, digital privacy affects the kind of content we see, the information we’re exposed to, and the narratives that shape public opinion. It can influence voting behaviour, shift belief systems, and ultimately rewire society. That’s when the concept of digital privacy moves from being a personal issue to a collective one.

The consequences are systemic. These platforms collect and aggregate data on a massive scale — and over the last two decades, our appetite for technological innovation has far outpaced our commitment to protecting privacy. We’ve ended up in a position where privacy has been sidelined in favour of convenience, speed, and profit.

And now, we’re starting to see the ripple effects of that. From the erosion of trust in institutions to increased surveillance and manipulation, the cost of ignoring privacy is becoming increasingly visible—not just individually but also in how our communities function and societies cohere.

Jacobsen: I keep coming back to the question of whether threats to digital privacy are best understood as a matter of who or what. On one hand, threats are always evolving—becoming more sophisticated as defenses struggle to keep pace. And the usual suspects are still in play: governments, corporations, individuals. But there’s also a less visible tier of actors—lone wolves who operate in the shadows, outside even of collectives like Anonymous, which, for all its controversy, often champions worthy causes.

So how should we be framing this? Are threats to digital privacy primarily about who is behind them—or what systems, technologies, or failures are enabling them?

Linton: Those things go hand in hand, but at the end of the day, it’s who — because it’s us that is affected when privacy deteriorates. And when we talk about at-risk groups like journalists, hacktivists, whistleblowers — or anyone who might be especially sensitive to privacy — a lot of the time, these are people who are well-resourced, or at least more motivated and better equipped to protect themselves than the average person. However, privacy works best when it’s collective.

Suppose you’re the only person practicing privacy out of a group of a hundred. In that case, you stand out — and that can actually make you more vulnerable. You get a kind of “herd immunity” effect with privacy.

Ultimately, while digital privacy benefits everyone, it is especially important for the vulnerable—people in our communities who may be at risk. Whether they’re vulnerable because of their work, who they are, or where they live doesn’t matter. What matters is that improving digital privacy can strengthen and protect those people—and their rights.

(Oxen)

Jacobsen: People see buzzwords thrown around, which, unfortunately, shouldn’t be buzzwords like “closed source” and “open source.” OpenAI took its name from the idea of open-sourced AI. What does “open source” mean?

Linton: Sure. Open source refers to publicly available source code of a piece of software. That means anyone can inspect it, audit it, and, in many cases, contribute to it. It also means anyone can recompile it themselves to ensure the software they’re running actually matches the publicly available code. This is important for building trust, verifiability, and security in software. It’s also important to encourage collaboration, fairness, and transparency when developing technologies that shape our lives.

Now, in the example you gave — OpenAI — AI is clearly going to be a major force in society in the future. So everyone who has a stake in that future (which is all of us) must be able to see what’s happening and potentially shape its direction. The closed source is the opposite: the source code is hidden, and you cannot verify how the software works or whether it’s doing what it claims.

You can’t take pieces of it and build your tools. Generally, this is done so that a company can protect its intellectual property and profit from whatever that technology is.

A simpler definition…It’s quite tricky, but the basic idea is that open source means I’m going to show you how I’m making this thing. Regardless of what it is—it could be your iPad—I will show you all the detailed steps and little pieces that go inside so that, if you wanted to, you could build your own iPad, and it would work exactly the same.

A closed source is when you go to the shop and buy the iPad, which works—but you have no idea how it works or what’s inside. That’s the core difference between open source and closed source.

Jacobsen: How does Session differ from other secure messaging apps like Signal or Telegram?

Linton: The basic principle we’re working with is that the technological systems we use today are essentially critical infrastructure for protecting our rights—things like freedom of speech, privacy, and even freedom of assembly. Encrypted messaging apps are incredibly important tools for maintaining those rights.

The problem is that the systems we rely on today place our rights in the hands of individual companies—or, in some cases, one very rich person. We trust them to continue protecting those rights. Everyone has an agenda, and politics or profit can shift. What’s acceptable or protected today might not be tomorrow.

Suddenly, the speech you thought you had, the communication you believed was private, could be stripped away.

The idea behind Session is to address this risk through disintermediation — removing the reliance on a single company or person to uphold your rights. Instead, we use a decentralized system operated by the people whose rights are at stake. It’s a much more equitable and democratic approach. But technology hasn’t typically worked this way, which is what makes Session different.

So the first way that Session is different is that it’s decentralized. While we have a foundation — responsible for issuing grants and contributing to Session’s open-source development, we don’t run the network that stores and routes messages.

That’s a significant difference between something like Session and something like Signal.

Now, don’t get it twisted — I trust Signal and the people who work there. They’re good people, for sure. But this is a philosophical difference — a different approach.

Technologically, as you mentioned earlier, there’s also additional metadata hardening that Session does, which most messaging apps don’t go through. For example, Signal requires a phone number when you sign up. Even though that number may not be shared or logged for long, Signal can still see who you’re messaging, when you’re doing it, and your IP address.

That kind of information is valuable in the era of surveillance capitalism. Now, to their credit, Signal chooses not to exploit it—which is great.

But Session takes a different approach. Because we operate using a decentralized network, we can use onion routing—a concept championed by the Tor Project—to protect metadata such as IP addresses and prevent the timing correlation of messages.

(Oxen)

Jacobsen: That’s powerful. This is a good point for distinguishing between P2P, onion routing, VPNs, double VPNs, and dedicated IP. They’re each distinct, but they matter to people thinking seriously about privacy.

Linton: Absolutely. I can definitely do that. Let me backtrack a little to where I was — Tor.

Tor invented onion routing, which basically means that your message is wrapped in multiple layers of encryption and sent through several nodes in a network. The first node peels off one layer of encryption and sees only the address of the next node.

Typically, there are three nodes in a route. The first node sees the sender’s IP but has no idea where the message is ultimately going. The final node sees that a message is being delivered to someone, and it sees the recipient’s IP — but it has no idea where the message originally came from.

In practical terms, this means that no single part of the network ever has access to the full picture. Your conversations—and the sensitive metadata that surrounds them—are obscured by design. That’s only possible because of Session’s disintermediated and decentralized architecture.

This process happens in Session by default, but users can also add a layer of protection by using VPNs.

A VPN — or Virtual Private Network — works on a simpler principle. It acts as a middleman. If you’re using WhatsApp, for example, instead of WhatsApp seeing your actual IP address, they see the IP of your VPN.

That’s better, but there are trade-offs. While the platform doesn’t have your IP, it still has your account data — like your phone number and possibly your contact list — which can still be used to identify you and the people you’re talking to.

There are variations like double VPNs, where traffic is routed through two VPN servers for added privacy, and dedicated IPs, which assign a unique IP to you — often for business or stability reasons — but which may be less private in terms of anonymity.

P2P — or peer-to-peer — involves direct user connections, sometimes exposing IPs unless wrapped in privacy layers.

Unlike all of these, onion routing is built specifically for anonymity, distributing trust across the network. That’s why it’s so important in privacy-preserving tools like Session.

Still, a VPN can often be a useful anonymizing tool, but it’s definitely a step down from onion routing when it comes to minimizing metadata.

Another major difference in our system is that because we don’t have a central company routing messages or managing accounts, we can’t use an identifier like a phone number — which is more of a legacy system — to handle addressing or account creation. In fact, there’s no way to create an account at all on Session because there’s no central authority with which to register.

Instead, we generate a key pair on the user’s device. If you’re familiar with public-key encryption, that means private and public keys. Your private key is used primarily for decrypting messages, while your public key is what other people use to encrypt messages sent to you.

You share your public key, and anyone can send you a message that only you can decrypt with your private key. It’s generated locally, so you never need to register anything with anyone. Using some clever mathematical techniques, we can use this public key for addressing inside the decentralized network.

You never need to use a personal identifier like a phone number, which, as a journalist, I’m sure you know can be quite sensitive information to give out when using a messaging service.

Those are the main ways Session differentiates itself from something like Signal, WhatsApp, or Telegram.

Jacobsen: So, how can people protect their privacy? What’s on the cutting edge of the need to protect privacy? I’ve encountered things like double VPN and “onion over VPN,” which essentially add extra layers to the onion. They are helpful but slow things down, especially the double VPN setups. What are your recommendations? And what are you seeing in the future?

Linton: Absolutely. So, first of all, we have systemic problems in how we build technology — and those problems don’t just come from how the tech itself works. They also come from our government structures, how tech companies are regulated (or not), and how funding works in the tech space. All of this contributes to the privacy issues we see today.

Now, all of these tools—VPNs, onion routing, encryption—are fantastic, and the people working on them are absolutely brilliant. But often, it feels like we’re applying Band-Aid solutions to a structural wound.

We often shift the burden of solving this systemic issue onto the consumer. The individual is expected to outsmart the system—and that’s not fair. People often end up isolating themselves by using privacy tools. For example, you’re stuck if you want to use a secure messaging app, but none of your friends are on it.

Okay — that’s the end of the rant. So, what can people do? What are some practical steps? My advice is always to start small and build up. This is a big issue, and it’s easy to throw your hands up and say, “Well, my privacy is already compromised. My data’s already out there. What’s the point?”

But there is a point. Start with the things you use every day. If you use email constantly, find an email provider that supports encryption and has strong privacy-focused policies. If you use messaging apps a lot, find one that is end-to-end encrypted at a minimum—and ideally, one backed by a nonprofit structure like Signal or Session.

If you’re big on social media, say you use Twitter, and maybe look into alternatives like Bluesky or a federated platform like Mastodon. Use what aligns with your own digital habits.

If you’re concerned about network privacy, there’s an ongoing debate about VPNs and whether they’re just privacy theatre. It really comes down to this: do you trust your ISP, or do you trust a VPN company more? The answer depends on your country, your ISP’s practices, and the legal obligations in your jurisdiction.

That said, onion routing is a huge step forward from VPNs in protecting anonymity and minimizing metadata. It’s the more robust, privacy-first option, especially when integrated by default, like in Session.

However, most of the time, when you use a VPN, you don’t even notice it’s running — unless a website blocks you. Things often get noticeably worse if you use an onion network like Tor. Some websites break completely, you get blocked more frequently, and page load times can be significantly slower.

Even further along the spectrum, there’s a concept called a mixnet, which is an even more advanced type of obfuscation overlay network than onion routing. Mixnets group packets together and send them through the network with delays, making it impossible to deanonymize the data using timing attacks.

Timing attacks are a surveillance method only highly sophisticated adversaries can carry out. To monitor when packets are sent and received, you’d need access to the physical Internet infrastructure, such as fibre cables, routers, and middleboxes. Based on that timing, it becomes theoretically possible to deanonymize users, even using a privacy-preserving network like Tor.

Researchers have shown that timing attacks can work, in some cases, even against Tor. Mixnets, like the one used by Nym, address this specific vulnerability.

However, as you might expect, using a mixnet can cause an even bigger impact on user experience. The trade-off between privacy and convenience becomes more extreme.

So, we’re looking at an unsustainable situation in which we ask everyday users to make serious sacrifices in usability to protect their privacy. That’s not a reasonable long-term model.

We need a more privacy-forward approach — giving people privacy by default rather than making them jump through hoops. Tools like mixes are important, but ideally, people shouldn’t have to think about them at all.

Jacobsen: What ethical frameworks are presently in place — or in development — for digital privacy in an era of narrow AI and increasingly sophisticated good and bad actors?

Linton: I’m not as familiar with the AI side of things. But in terms of frameworks that address human actors — both good and bad — there’s a general principle of aiming for “the most good for the most people.”

Let me give an example of digital privacy: Privacy tools like encryption have immense value. They protect the people who uphold democratic society—activists, journalists, lawyers, and human rights defenders.

They also offer essential safeguards for people living under oppressive regimes or anyone vulnerable for social, political, or personal reasons.

So, when we ask whether we should build and deploy privacy tools, the answer becomes clear: yes. The benefits—the very real protections they offer—far outweigh the hypothetical risks. Privacy strengthens the fabric of a just society.

We should advocate for and implement it as broadly as possible, not only as a technical matter but also as a moral imperative.

Jacobsen: Are there any final points people should definitely know about digital privacy that we haven’t already covered?

Linton: Yes — two quick ones.

First, as you said earlier, people often encounter a lot of buzzwords: encryption, onion routing, end-to-end encryption, and open source. These are important concepts, but they’re only parts of the puzzle. We really want to address privacy at its root. In that case, we need to reckon with the broader system of surveillance capitalism.

That system—extracting data for profit—poisons a huge part of today’s tech industry. The good news is that there are better ways to design systems. We can embrace alternative governance models and open-source practices that are more accountable, equitable, and privacy-respecting. That’s where real structural change begins.

Second—and on a more optimistic note—it’s easy to feel pessimistic or helpless about digital privacy. But it’s not too late. Tools, communities, and developers are working to build better systems. The future isn’t written yet, and if we act with purpose and clarity, we can still shape it to protect our rights.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Alexander.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

CAN CAPITAL BE FAITHFUL? THE GLOBAL IMAN FUND’S QUIET REVOLUTION

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/16

Ghalib Salam brings more than 27 years of experience in business development to his new role as Vice President at Global Growth Assets Inc., where he oversees the Global Iman Fund, a Sharia-compliant and ethically focused mutual fund recognized multiple times with the FundGrade A+ Award. The fund invests primarily in technology, healthcare, and consumer sectors, guided by the rigorous screening standards of the Dow Jones Islamic Market Titans 100 Index. Prior to this role, Salam served as Director at the Royal Bank of Canada in Toronto, building a track record of leadership across Canada’s financial sector.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The Global Iman Fund has received the FundGrade A+ Award multiple times. Could you explain what sets the fund apart and what this recognition represents?

Ghalib Salam: Sure. The Global Iman Fund is part of Global Growth Assets Inc., an investment fund with over $850 million in assets under management (AUM) and in operation since February 1998.

Global Growth Assets Inc. is part of the Global Family of Companies, a multifaceted financial organization founded in 1998, with over $3.6 billion in assets under management and administration.

The Global Iman Fund is a mutual fund that adheres to Sharia-compliant investment principles and offers socially responsible investment opportunities. It provides investors with long-term growth through a diversified global investment portfolio that meets ethical and faith-based investing standards.

The Global Iman Fund is available through various distribution channels, including financial advisors, banks, and online platforms.

Jacobsen: The Global Iman Fund has received the FundGrade A+ Award for several consecutive years. Could you elaborate on the significance of this recognition and what it reflects about the fund’s long-term performance and positioning?

Salam: The award recognizes high-performing investment funds based on risk-adjusted returns, consistency, and overall portfolio strength. The ranking methodology evaluates funds against industry benchmarks across multiple tolerance levels.

Funds that receive this distinction are recognized as high-grade, actively traded funds well-received by dealers, financial advisors, and investors.

Jacobsen: What does the investment portfolio of the Global Iman Fund focus on? You alluded to shared principles. How do those principles feed into the portfolio itself?

Salam: Let me share the mechanics of how we select the portfolio. We are the fund manager, and we also have a portfolio manager—UBS is our portfolio manager. There is a Sharia Council that devises a portfolio as part of the Dow Jones Islamic Market Titans Index, selecting 100 publicly tradable companies that comply with Shariah investment principles. UBS then selects specific entities from that portfolio. The composition of investments varies over time, but the approach remains long-term, focusing on sustainable growth.

The portfolio is diversified across different industry sectors. Approximately 37% of the fund is technology-centric, around 14-15% is in service and communications, and close to 13% is allocated to consumer services, with another 13% spread across other industries. These are the high-level concentrations in terms of sector segmentation.

Jacobsen: If you were to break down the size of each of those 100 companies, would you deal with a top-heavy structure where a few large companies dominate, or would the investments be more evenly distributed?

Salam: Yes, indeed. In the case of the Global Iman Fund, these are global companies. More than 80% of our portfolio is U.S.-based, with the remainder comprising approximately 15% European companies and around 5% Asia-centric investments. The fund is entirely U.S. dollar-denominated, providing investors with stability and liquidity.

So, talking about specific names, much of this is publicly available information, but for the benefit of this interview, I’ll highlight some key holdings. Our portfolio combines technology, consumer services, and healthcare-focused investments. We hold shares in Amazon, Apple, Nvidia, Google, Alibaba, and Eli Lilly. As you can see, we focus strongly on technology and consumer-driven industries.

Before diving into specific companies, it’s essential to understand why the Sharia Advisory Board selects these 100 entities. A key principle is that income from non-compliant (or “impure”) sources must not exceed 5% of total revenue. Impure sources mean revenue must not be derived from industries such as alcohol, tobacco, pork and pork-related products, banking, insurance, conventional financial services, weapons, defense, entertainment, gambling, adult content, and casinos.

The portfolio is carefully structured to align with Sharia-compliant ethical investment guidelines.

Jacobsen: Could you elaborate specifically on the technology sector? Companies like Microsoft, AMD, Google, and Nvidia are heavily involved in semiconductors, AI, and cloud computing—volatile but high-growth industries. Do you expect this to be the most profitable sector of your portfolio over the next five years?

Salam: As an investment fund manager, it’s difficult for me to make specific forward-looking statements on expected profitability, as our portfolio managers at UBS are the key decision-makers regarding equities selection and holding periods. However, I can say that these companies are positioned at the forefront of technological advancements, especially in areas like AI, data processing, and semiconductor manufacturing.

The long-term outlook for these sectors remains strong, but their volatility requires strategic portfolio balancing. Our portfolio managers assess market conditions and sector performance to ensure that our investments align with our long-term growth objectives while remaining within the risk parameters defined by the fund’s mandate.

However, I can give you the due diligence rationale behind selecting any asset in the portfolio. One of the key questions might be—why is 38-39% of the fund tech-centric? The reason is simple: that is where the market shift is happening. This transition is accurate, and technology continues to dominate growth sectors globally.

The due diligence process carried out by our portfolio manager involves multiple steps. First, they analyze public disclosure documents, interview management teams, and investor relations representatives, and compare peer group performance metrics. After completing these assessments, they engineer the portfolio, ensuring all investment criteria are met. Once selected, each asset is subject to an ongoing risk management framework designed to mitigate exposure and maintain portfolio balance.

Regarding market volatility, we recognize that no investor operates in isolation—we are part of a broader investment community. We embrace market shifts as they happen, ensuring the portfolio remains structured yet flexible enough to withstand fluctuations while avoiding extreme risk concentration. The goal is to preserve stability while still responsibly leveraging high-growth opportunities.

Jacobsen: Regarding mutual funds like the Global Iman Fund, what should investors understand about the risks and disclaimers involved? And conversely, what are some potential advantages such investments can offer?

Salam: Regarding risk, all investments—including mutual funds—involve the possibility of losing money or failing to generate expected returns. The degree of risk varies from fund to fund, but investments with higher potential returns generally carry higher risks. Investors must carefully assess their risk tolerance before making investment decisions.

Investing in mutual funds like the Global Iman Fund involves a range of considerations. One major factor is concentration risk—when a portfolio leans heavily into specific sectors or a limited group of companies, it can become especially vulnerable to downturns in those areas. Likewise, exposure to emerging markets introduces political, regulatory, and economic uncertainties that can heighten volatility. Market fluctuations are inevitable; while the fund is structured to weather short-term shifts, investors should be prepared for periods of instability.

Additional risks include liquidity challenges, where exiting an investment quickly may not always be feasible, and regulatory shifts, which can reshape compliance obligations as financial laws evolve. For international investors, currency risk is also a factor—the fund is primarily denominated in U.S. dollars, so shifts in exchange rates can affect returns for those operating in other currencies. These factors underscore the importance of a well-informed, diversified investment approach.

There are many other potential risks, but these are some of the most significant factors I want to highlight here.

Jacobsen: What about the potential benefits of investing in this type of fund?

Salam: Our fund’s disclaimer and investment information are publicly available through our website, where we provide an official prospectus. This document is purely for informational purposes, outlining the terms, conditions, and potential risks of investing in the Global Iman Fund. Investors are always encouraged to review the prospectus carefully and consult financial advisors before making decisions.

Again, as a mutual fund administrator, we cannot guarantee that all the information is always complete or current due to the nature of the investment risks we discussed earlier. Market conditions and regulations are subject to change without notice. Mutual funds are not guaranteed investments—their value fluctuates frequently, and past performance may not necessarily be repeated. For this reason, we strongly recommend that potential investors read the prospectus carefully before investing.

Additionally, all documents, whether portfolio manager-driven or included in the prospectus, typically contain forward-looking statements. These statements are predictive and rely on future events and conditions over which we have no control. Investors need to understand that forward-looking statements are made with due caution. However, investment decisions should not be solely based on these statements, as market conditions and external factors can impact outcomes.

When you asked about possibilities and benefits, the number one benefit I can highlight is that Sharia-compliant investing is highly attractive for investors who prioritize ethical and socially responsible investment strategies. While Sharia compliance is an Islamic qualification for investing, we also have a significant number of non-Muslim investors who seek funds that align with their ethical and social values. Many investors are drawn to Sharia-compliant funds because they offer a clear conscience. They know that investments are made under strict ethical guidelines that exclude industries like alcohol, tobacco, gambling, and conventional financial services.

Another benefit is that our fund has consistently delivered strong yields. While I won’t quote specific numbers here, its performance has been at par or above par compared to other mutual funds in the marketplace. Furthermore, our risk management strategies ensure that performance remains stable while maintaining a high-quality portfolio that offers substantial long-term value for investors.

Today, we hold two key distinctions. We are the oldest Sharia-compliant mutual fund in the market and, as of today, the largest.

As awareness of Sharia-compliant investing grows, we benefit from a first-mover advantage. While we do not actively influence investment decisions, we are in a strong position to attract investors looking for a proven and ethical financial product—one that is not necessarily Muslim-centric but instead appealing to all individuals who prioritize ethical responsible investing.

Jacobsen: Great. Thank you for your time today—I appreciate it.

The views expressed by Global Growth Assets Inc. and its partners reflect market conditions at the time of publication and are subject to change. These opinions may differ from those of other associates or affiliates and do not constitute investment advice. Mutual fund investments may be subject to commissions, trailing commissions, management fees, and expenses.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jared Gleaton, Psychology and Healthier Eating

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/01

 Jared Gleaton, a school psychologist turned food critic and author has a unique approach that combines his expertise in psychology with his passion for food. After losing 176 pounds in one year, he created the popular series “Jared Gleaton Eats,” exploring the psychological art of eating. His book, A Feast for the Senses: The Psychological Art of Eating Well, delves into people’s emotional connections with food. As a sought-after guest speaker, Jared shares insights on weight loss, food psychology, and culinary trends. He is open to collaborations with brands, journalists, and podcasters, promoting healthy living and mindful eating.

Gleaton discusses Oklahoma’s evolving food culture, transitioning from deep-fried dishes to fine dining, featuring Laotian and Indigenous cuisines. They explore fast food’s global influence, contrasting it with healthier and mindful eating trends. Jared shares insights on changing habits through self-reflection and moderation, drawing from personal experiences with weight loss and injuries. The conversation emphasizes food as a catalyst for exploration, growth, and life change, advocating for diet balance and quality.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Jared Gleaton, a school psychologist, food critic, author, and host of “Jared Gleaton Eats.” You’re calling from Oklahoma, and I have a good question: What is the food culture like in Oklahoma?

Jared Gleaton: Well, it’s going through a culinary renaissance. It’s diverse, and we have come a long way. I’ve lived here for 30 years; I’m originally from Maine. It was all about deep-fried everything for the first 20 of those years. We loved to put ranch dressing on every food you could think of. But about ten years ago, a chef named Lisa Becklund from Seattle started doing fine dining dinners, which changed things.

Fine dining restaurants and modern American cuisine began popping up all over Oklahoma. Now, we even have a James Beard Award-winning chef, and one of our restaurants, serving Laotian food, was recognized by USA Today as one of the top 10 in the United States. We’ve also got fine dining options featuring Indigenous cuisine. We’ve come a long way quickly, especially over the last five years.

Jacobsen: How does the fast-food culture compare to this renaissance you’re talking about?

Gleaton: Well, fast food is still a big part of the culture here, and many of us grew up with it. The trend we’re trying to break is the dominance of chains like McDonald’s, Wendy’s, Whataburger, and even Five Guys. Fast food remains popular, especially because of its portion size and price. People tend to think they’re getting a good deal—more food for their money—but we slowly realize that farm-to-table, fresh ingredients and high-quality meals are worth much more than what you get at Taco Bell.

Jacobsen: You’d be surprised at how far fast food has spread. I’ve done a lot of different kinds of journalism, from fashion to church-state separation to a recent trip to Ukraine. I mention this because something surprising happened during that trip: In eastern Ukraine, in Kharkiv, 25 kilometres from the Russian border, I saw McDonald’s restaurants. They were as modern as any you’d find in Canada, with digital displays and all the latest technology. It wasn’t just there; other cities had McDonald’s and even KFC. This shows how fast food culture has spread from the United States to many parts of the world.

Many people don’t realize that the U.S.’s real power lies in its culture—often called “soft power”—which gets exported to many countries. Do you think this culinary renaissance in Oklahoma, and maybe in other parts of the U.S., could inspire healthier portions and palates that might spread to other countries, as opposed to the less healthy aspects of American dietary culture?

Gleaton: That’s a really interesting point. You’ve touched on something significant—culture, marketing, capitalism, and how these things make it easy for other societies to adopt certain habits. Let’s break that down further.

And that’s fast food, where the reach and the finances are considerable. But I would argue that if that’s what’s going into Ukraine and other places, it’s similar to how, for example, Coca-Cola is massive in Italy—either Coca-Cola or Pepsi, one of the two are huge there. The old-world, traditional fine dining, Michelin-starred, healthier lifestyles that were staples in European countries for decades are starting to change. It began on the coasts—on the East and West Coasts of the U.S.—but now it’s starting to hit the heartland of the United States, including places like Oklahoma.

It’s also impacting food trends within the U.S. We have that rich culture from countries like France and Italy, all the way up to Germany and England, and even Japan, which has incredible quality. As much as the U.S. is exporting McDonald’s and KFC, those countries are importing culinary techniques that are starting to gain recognition in places like Oklahoma, Kansas, and Missouri. I hadn’t realized it initially, but it’s obvious in hindsight.

One interesting point someone brought up is the idea of wealthy, advanced industrial economies like Japan. Japan became wealthy and high-tech without facing the same levels of obesity or unhealthy habits seen in many other countries. I don’t know Japanese culture deeply, but from what I understand, it’s centred around discipline, moderation, and perfection. You have examples like Wagyu beef, some of the best seafood in the world, and even their pork and chicken are exceptional.

It’s remarkable for an island country like Japan. Their entire culture is so different. In the United States, we had the Great Depression after World War I, followed by World War II, which pulled us out. During the Depression, the mentality was “finish everything on your plate,” and portions were small. But that mentality stuck, even as portion sizes grew larger. The idea became about getting more food for your money.

Then came the complete commercialization of food—remember T.V. dinners?

That’s right. T.V. dinners evolved into boxed dinners, which also have a price. The culture of moderation wasn’t taught because, you could speculate, the Depression created these lasting stereotypes. The focus shifted to how much food you could get for $20 rather than the quality or taste of the food.

And through marketing—think about it—billions of dollars go into designing food packaging and advertising in grocery stores. That becomes the culture, and it’s wildly different from places like Japan, where the tradition and history of food are central. There can be dietary deficiencies in Japan, sure. Still, in North America, particularly the U.S. and Canada, we have cultural overlap, largely driven by commercialization.

Jacobsen: What are we typically missing nutritionally in our diets?

Gleaton: Well, balance. If you’re following a fast-food culture, they’re not focusing on macronutrients or the quality of carbohydrates, fats, and proteins. Everything is deep-fried; everything is processed. It needs to include nutrition, balance, and moderation. What does your body need? How do you get the highest quality and best flavour from what your body requires to make it enjoyable?

All those wonderful sensations in your taste buds translate to your brain, signalling that something tastes incredible. But right now, those childhood favourites often trigger that response—like that blue box of Kraft macaroni and cheese. It tastes good, right? I advocate diving into the psychological aspect—conversing with yourself and reflecting. Do you like what you think you like, or have you been conditioned all your life to like certain foods and never discovered others because you’ve been trained otherwise?

Jacobsen: So, how do you instill healthier habits in kids? As people get older, they tend to become more set in their patterns of thought and habits. What challenges, along with the first question, arise for adults when trying to reprogram certain habits of thought and diet?

Gleaton: Humans are pattern-seeking creatures. We’re creatures of habit and routine. One of the cruellest things about the nature of time is that we’re constantly changing, even on the smallest levels—we might not see the changes, but they’re happening—and yet we resist that change. The first step I always recommend is self-reflection and conversing with yourself. This doesn’t only apply to food but to any aspect of life.

We don’t learn as much from our successes as we do from our failures, and it’s important to have the ability to stop and ask, “Why haven’t I liked this food all my life? What event caused me to think I don’t like it?” Finding the strength to say, “Let’s try it a different way” or “Let’s approach it from a new perspective” is key. If we can find that strength within ourselves, we can apply it to any part of our life, but it can start with food. After all, food is essential to who we are—it’s culture, our story.

Jacobsen: Why does healthier eating get the reputation of being not just difficult but almost Sisyphean in the effort required to make it a daily habit, compared to fast food? Fast food still requires you to go out, order, and wait for your meal. That’s the same effort as grocery shopping, picking up more greens, and eating healthy at home.

Gleaton: Perception is reality. Occam’s razor applies here: the mind perceives that one task takes a certain amount of time and another offers a certain level of quality, but it comes back to our upbringing and makeup. We have these routines and patterns that started in early childhood or developed along the way, and they shape our perceptions. The mind simplifies these routines, and fast food often feels easier, even when, as you said, the overall effort might be comparable.

It’s hard to break out of those habits. We must see a meaningful reason to change, whether because we’re adventurous or due to health reasons. But it’s also about the conversations we have around food in general. We love extremes. We hear things like “healthy food is expensive” or “healthy food doesn’t taste as good.”

For example, I make beautiful green beans sautéed in three or four tablespoons of butter. Sure, that’s not healthy. But if you reduce it to one tablespoon, just enough to coat them, and add a little salt, it’s delightful. It’s all about having that conversation with yourself and moderating what you do with the ingredients you have. That’s hard because we tend to go from one extreme to another.

“Diet” has gained a negative connotation because it is often seen as restrictive. That’s why many diets fail—people take it to the extreme, denying themselves things they crave, almost like addictions. Are you psychologically ready to overcome those cravings? Maybe the conversation should be about moderating those cravings so you can still enjoy them, but in smaller portions, savouring the moment and the pleasures you’ve enjoyed all your life, but in moderation.

Gleaton: What tends to be a turning point for people to start making those changes?

Jacobsen: It’s hard to generalize, but for me, it was losing my father. At that point, I was up to 370 pounds. I had zero moderation with food, and I couldn’t even see certain parts of my body, like my feet when I went to the bathroom. I knew my dad was always worried about my weight. Instead of using food as a coping mechanism, I used his concern as a strength. I knew I loved food—it’s a passion of mine—but I needed to re-explore my relationship with it.

For me, it was about health. It was also driven by my father’s passing and having an honest conversation with myself in my early thirties that I was no longer young. I carried around 300 pounds in my teens and twenties, and it wasn’t until I injured my back and never fully recovered that I realized I needed to make a change. After I lost the weight, the pain disappeared.

But it took a single life event to change my perspective, and even then, you still need drive, motivation, and determination. You must also forgive yourself for the little mistakes you’ll make, especially if you embark on a weight-loss journey.

Jacobsen: Yes, I’ve had two back injuries. Workers’ compensation covered them, and I got help with recovery. I was working at a horse farm, which was a big wake-up call.

Gleaton: It’s a big wake-up call. Once I lost the weight, the pain was reduced by 70%. But I also realized it takes work to strengthen your lower back muscles. I had to get an exercise ball and do strange exercises to strengthen my lower back. It’s one of those things that’s tricky—unlike building up your biceps, for example.

Let’s do some curls—it’s not like a chest press. It would help if you did pelvic thrusts to target those lower back muscles, for lack of a better term. It can feel weird at first. There are all these different exercises, and everyone finds something different to latch onto. It’s unique to the individual.

Jacobsen: When you go into restaurants in Oklahoma, how do you evaluate the restaurant itself? I’m thinking about how you’re greeted, the ambiance of the restaurant, and the entire experience, from looking at the menu to interactions like, “How are you today?” etc.

Gleaton: It depends on the type of restaurant. Is it fine dining? Fast food? Casual? I evaluate based on the genre. I expect that extra service layer if it’s fine dining with a strong reputation. Has the silverware changed between courses? What’s the menu like? What does the staff know about the food?

It’s less formal for casual dining, and I adjust my expectations accordingly. Lately, I’ve adopted a new approach when I visit restaurants. I’ll look at the menu but no longer order from it. Instead, I’ll ask the waiter or manager to bring me whatever they feel best represents the restaurant’s essence for a set amount of money. It doesn’t matter what the dish is—cook it how it’s meant to be cooked, and I’ll enjoy it.

By doing this, I’ve broken out of the box of sticking to the menu or my usual preferences and discovered new flavours and proteins I wouldn’t have tried before. That’s my process—it’s the “anti-menu” approach. I also enjoy tasting menus, where you get five to ten courses and can explore something new.

I greatly advocate experiencing restaurants through the five senses—taste, smell, sound, sight, and touch. Each bite you take has its sound; you might not realize it, but you can hear the texture. The texture, taste, appearance, and smell play into the sensory experience. I always notice the smell when I walk into a restaurant. Sometimes, it’s steak or smells fishy or smoky, which sets the tone. The first impression shapes your expectations for the meal.

Think about temperature—if a restaurant is too warm, instead of focusing on having a good time, you’ll subconsciously think, “This is too warm.” Or if it’s too loud, especially for people in the States (and I’m not sure if it’s the same in Canada), anxiety is at an all-time high. Crowds can trigger anxiety if you walk into a loud restaurant; your anxiety spikes, which dulls your senses. Even if the food is fantastic, you might be too focused on the discomfort to enjoy the experience fully.

Jacobsen: It’s a negative experience. But if you can recognize that, you can come up with a plan to overcome that anxiety. What about fast food restaurants? It will be a simpler evaluation, but what are you looking for?

Gleaton: What I’m looking for in a fast food restaurant is: did they put the burger together properly? Is it warm? Is the cheese melted? Is the chicken crispy? These are all things you can have expectations for, even with fast food.

The price point doesn’t matter. I can’t tell you how many times I’ve walked into McDonald’s over the years, and those famous fries—when they come out fresh from the fryer, they’re perfect. But the texture, flavour, and smell change if they’ve been sitting there for a while. The same goes for their burgers. I was at McDonald’s a couple of months ago, and the cheese wasn’t melted—it was a little cold, which impacted the experience. You can still expect a certain level of quality, even from fast food, to hit all those taste buds. Otherwise, you get the typical “oof, fast food” experience.

Jacobsen: When you’re hosting “Jared Gleaton Eats,” what do you keep in mind when choosing guest topics, and how do you project your voice and personality about things that matter to you?

Gleaton: My primary focus is food reviews on YouTube, which is what “Jared Gleato Eats” is about. I love to invite people to come with me. My focus is on the ambiance, the service, the food, and describing the experience to my audience. You can see the food, but if I say, “It’s wonderful” or “It’s great,” that doesn’t tell you anything. But I describe the initial notes of fatty beef, giving way to the middle notes of salt and pepper with beautiful end notes of garlic. In that case, you can imagine being right there with me, tasting the food and deciding if it’s something you’d want to spend your money on.

Jacobsen: What has been your favourite meal?

Gleaton: There have been so many, but I can tell you about my most memorable meal and my true introduction to gastronomy. It was molecular gastronomy with my sisters at Alinea in 2014. Alinea is known for creations like their green apple taffy balloon—they inflate the taffy with helium, and you eat the balloon, even the string! Another memorable dish was their stained glass made from raspberries. They bring out what looks like a strawberry, but it’s foie gras—there’s no fruit at all. They transform food in a way that tricks your mind into asking, “What is this?” It redefines everything.

What made it especially important was that it was an expensive meal, and my sister Mariah wanted to go. At first, I was against it—I wanted to go to Spiaggia or some other well-known Italian place in Chicago. But she convinced me, and it changed my life. Since then, it’s been an ongoing exploration into the unknown.

Jacobsen: So this exploration of the unknown is where food meets art.

Gleaton: Absolutely. Food meets art. Food meets life. Food meets change. It can catalyze so many wonderful things, yet food often gets a bad rap—especially regarding emotional eating. I’m an advocate for mindful eating. Instead of eating a whole tub of ice cream, take one bite, close your eyes, savour the flavour, and be content with just one or two bites. Food is life. Food is life.

Jacobsen: If you could pick any project to work on that conveys healthier living—something that encourages people to explore unknown territory, is reasonably priced, doesn’t take up too much time, and is still good for their health—what would that project be?

Gleaton: The project would encourage people to close their eyes and try something new whenever they visit a restaurant. It’s about exploration—getting outside your comfort zone and applying that strength to other areas of your life. Maybe there’s something you haven’t tried before but wanted to. Maybe there’s a book you didn’t think you’d enjoy because it wasn’t your usual genre, but you give it a chance. How wonderful if it all starts with something as simple as a restaurant?

Jacobsen: Jared, thank you for the opportunity and your time today.

Gleaton: I appreciate it. Thank you, Scott.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Daniel Frazier, Being a Dad and a General Manager

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/31

Daniel Frazier is the Director of Operations and General Manager at The Pharmacy Burger in Nashville. Starting as a host in 2014, he quickly climbed the ranks, moving to server and Lead Server within a year and transitioning to part-time management in 2016. By 2017, Frazier became Assistant General Manager and took on additional roles as Beverage Director and Bar Manager, deepening his expertise in the global beverage industry. Promoted to General Manager in 2021 and Director of Operations for all locations in 2022, Frazier focuses on creating an electric, welcoming atmosphere that resonates with staff and guests alike.

Frazier discussed the restaurant’s growth since its 2011 opening and its community-focused mission. Starting as a host in 2014, Frazier highlighted the shift from retail to restaurant life and the team’s camaraderie. He shared insights on serving families, maintaining a balanced beer garden environment, and managing customer expectations. As a father, he emphasized the importance of considering children’s needs and provided advice for families on a budget, recommending strategic menu choices and prioritizing quality over frequency of dining out. Frazier underscored valuing both money and time for dining experiences.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Daniel Frazier, the Director of Operations and General Manager of The Pharmacy Burger Parlor & Beer Garden in Nashville, Tennessee. I am Canadian, so I am a foreigner. What can you tell me about the importance of The Pharmacy Burger, especially as someone who started as a host in 2014?

Daniel Frazier: Yes, The Pharmacy has been open since December 2011, so we are approaching the completion of our 13th year. The restaurant opened as the country was coming out of the recession. At that time, there weren’t many restaurants opening or at the point where those processes were beginning to turn again. The opening was in East Nashville, a neighborhood that had faced significant challenges. The owner wanted to create a place that would be great for the community—where families from the neighborhood and surrounding areas could come to feel safe, enjoy themselves, have great food, and build a sense of community. I believe we have accomplished that over the years, creating a destination for out-of-town visitors representing the city and a beloved local spot for those who live nearby and for the wider community.

As you mentioned, I started hosting in March 2014. I began working at the door while playing in bands and trying to make a career out of music. My job at The Pharmacy was separate from my musical aspirations. Still, not long after I started working there, my focus on music stopped. However, I loved the people I worked with. I worked in retail for years at Kohl’s department store, which is common for many people. I wouldn’t recommend it. Transitioning to restaurant life was a significant change, especially moving from a large corporate environment to a smaller, more family- and coworker-oriented setting.

If I had worked in a smaller retail boutique, the experience might have been more pleasant. But I quickly learned that the people at The Pharmacy genuinely cared for each other. While I will only partially contrast my time at Kohl’s with my time at The Pharmacy, the restaurant had a unique energy. The coworkers enjoyed each other’s company, and there was a shared sense of purpose as we worked to serve our guests each day. It couldn’t have been better.

Most of us were in our twenties, so there was plenty of joking around alongside the work. There were also managers we preferred more than others. Some had a more authoritarian approach, and we made the best of that. It’s the same in any restaurant—I’ve worked in several, and it’s common. Sometimes, having a strict manager can even strengthen the bond among team members. It wasn’t pleasant to work under, so I’ve tried not to emulate that style. Still, a certain camaraderie developed when you had someone imposing strict oversight. So, while it wasn’t all negative, even if we didn’t enjoy someone making up health code regulations—such as insisting on wearing socks—it created some amusing moments. While it’s generally good to wear socks, it depends on the type of shoe, I suppose.

But there are many things where you think, “This is strange.” You end up with that. My early time there clicked with me, and I enjoyed this environment. I loved this atmosphere, which has stayed the same for almost 10 years, since or after 10 years. Now, I am a father.

Jacobsen: How has that changed your perspective on the service industry? I’m curious because you have many families at restaurants.

Frazier: You do. It has shaped my perspective. My daughter is going to be 2 years old, which has reoriented my thinking in the service industry. It has mostly stayed the same as what we do but has shifted my intentions. There’s often a feeling among servers that taking care of families with young children can be frustrating because kids can be difficult to handle, and there’s usually more cleanup involved. I always had compassion, but now it’s different.

I’ve heard of places where servers would request not to have children seated in their sections, though we would never honor that request. Some restaurants don’t accommodate high chairs in certain sections due to limited space so that sometimes happens naturally. But it has been about ensuring that families feel welcome, having food options that kids will enjoy, and ensuring they have a good time. We have a large outdoor beer garden space, which is not a playground, so we have to manage it. There can’t be running or excessive horsing around. However, kids can explore and play in little bushes and nooks.

Having a child myself, I now see how much a space that captures a child’s imagination can enhance the dining experience. It makes a big difference. Having food that kids are excited to eat is important, too. We’ve had times when we’ve gone out and ordered something we’ve had before, and she doesn’t want it for whatever reason. Especially with little kids, they can’t always express their desires. You do the best you can. But kids don’t usually turn down fries or similar items. Typically, burgers and hot dogs make them happy, so it feels good to provide that for them.

Being a dad has been amazing. People need to emphasize more how much fun it is. We often hear about the difficulties of parenting, and it is challenging. Still, it’s honestly the most fun I’ve ever had.

Jacobsen: When you serve beverages at a restaurant, not all of them are nonalcoholic. Is it ever a concern or a risk when you have alcoholic drinks in an environment that also caters to families and children?

Frazier: Yes, it is something we think about. We have a beer garden and serve local beverages, especially local beers we love. We also offer many imports, including German and Belgian beers. Because we’ve maintained a certain beer garden atmosphere, we don’t see overindulgence as some other places might. We’ve tried to keep that balanced vibe.

This is not where you come to get hammered, as they say. You’re here to enjoy a beverage—sometimes, people come in and drink. Still, it’s usually two beers on a sunny afternoon or having a beer with a burger and fries. For a long time, we didn’t even serve liquor, so it was much more difficult to overindulge on just beer, especially during the course of one meal, unless someone arrived already intoxicated. We have liquor now, as we’ve adapted and added cocktails. This required additional staff training to watch for signs of overindulgence.

People taking shots is rare here. If someone is doing that, they usually don’t have kids with them. If they do, it’s our staff’s responsibility to ensure there’s someone at the table who isn’t drinking and can drive. This is even more important when there are children present. While we do have a bar, we are primarily a beer garden. In Germany, beer gardens often have families and kids, creating a welcoming and upbeat environment.

If we get more rowdy people, it’s usually in the evening, after most kids go home for bedtime. At that point, you’ll find younger groups, bachelorette and bachelor parties, mingling in the garden, and things naturally work themselves out. We make sure not to over serve people, but we rarely cut someone off—maybe only once or twice a year.

Jacobsen: What is the character of a Nashville, Tennessee restaurant customer?

Frazier: That’s a great question. Nashville is a hub of distinct neighborhoods. A West Nashvillian and an East Nashvillian are similar now, though they might have been a few years ago. Back then, a West Nashvillian was typically older. At the same time, an East Nashvillian often moved to the neighborhood right after college. I was part of that wave over about five to seven years when many college graduates moved into East Nashville.

This trend has shifted slightly, with people moving to different neighborhoods. Many of us, myself included, have kids and have stayed in the neighborhood. It’s interesting to see how there was a mini-migration. I realize I need to answer your question directly, but it’s connected to how the consumer profile has evolved. Ten years ago, the average age of customers was younger—maybe by about seven years. The average age slowly increases as people settle in these neighborhoods. Those who were in their early twenties back then have aged along with us.

Some 28-, 29-, and 30-year-old professionals are moving in with and without families. That consumer is different from the 22-year-old who’s looking for a cheap burger and a beer. The 28-year-old professional, even if they don’t have a family, often has more expendable income and refined tastes. They have specific things they are looking for, so catering to them is important. For us, we’ve managed to stay at a lower price point because we want to offer high-quality service and ingredients while remaining accessible to both families on a budget and those looking for more. Yes, they’ll likely pay more than they would at fast food, but not significantly more if they’re not ordering alcohol.

You can come in, sit down, and receive good service at our location or downtown. We offer a better burger than fast food, with elevated service and specialty handmade drinks, without breaking the bank. Suppose you’re someone looking for something a bit more elevated. In that case, especially if you’re enjoying a beer, we have some of the best selections, along with fun and tasty cocktails. You can sit down, have a casual and quick meal, and still enjoy a great experience without a multi-course meal. That’s where our niche is.

Jacobsen: What would you advise dads to bring their families to a restaurant? What should they do to make it a good, non-chaotic experience that is enjoyable for both kids and parents?

Frazier: That’s a great question. It depends on the child’s age, but this advice is universal until the child is at least five years old. First, know where you’re going and research the food options to ensure your child will enjoy something, especially if it’s a new place. Also, know whether they will need to stay seated the entire time or if they can walk around before the food arrives. It’s always good if they can walk around and explore a bit to burn off some energy before sitting down for the meal.

If you’re dining solo, you might be stuck at the table, but if both parents are present, it’s great to let one parent walk around with the child while waiting for the food. This helps release energy and usually sets the stage for a successful meal. When sitting in a high chair, put the child in as late as possible, ideally when the food arrives. Every child is different, so if your child is happy sitting and waiting, you don’t need to worry. For us, we usually put her in the high chair with food, which helps a lot. If she’s placed in the chair too early, like 15 minutes before the food arrives, she gets restless and agitated, thinking, “I’m tired of sitting here.”

Her attention span is often gone once the food arrives. So beyond that, I suggest bringing a toy or a book to keep them entertained if there’s something small. If you know there will be a wait to be seated or for the food, it might feel silly, but bring a snack. Check the restaurant’s rules, but having a small pouch or some gummies can be helpful. Kids can go from happy to cranky very quickly when they’re a little hungry, especially if the wait is 20 minutes when you expected 10.

In your bag with diapers or essentials, have a snack, a book, or a few small items. If the restaurant provides activities like coloring pages, that’s great, but only some kids are interested. So, I always suggest being prepared. Also, go with the flow. If your child wants to walk around and there’s no reason they can’t, walk with them and explore together. They’ll often be ready to sit and eat when the food arrives. That’s how we’ve succeeded in public spaces for the most part.

Another tip is not to stress too much if your child is loud. The biggest thing I’ve found is that parents often feel they’re making others uncomfortable when their child cries or makes noise. But people usually don’t care as much as you think. It bothers you more than bothers them, so try not to worry too much. As long as you’re attentive and handling the situation warmly, it can put others at ease. If people see you calmly managing it, they’ll feel reassured that everything is fine. Of course, if your child is in genuine distress, take care of it. But, overall, not worrying excessively about noise can help.

Kids are kids. They express their emotions to the fullest—especially two-year-olds. That’s just what they do.

Jacobsen: Last question. Many families are facing tighter budgets due to inflation. How should they strategize about what to pick on the menu?

Frazier: That’s a great question. Are you asking about our menu specifically or menus in general?

Jacobsen: Both, from the perspective of a parent, a dad, and someone who has worked their way up to general manager and has seen these challenges.

Frazier: Yes. Suppose you’re on a budget but still want to enjoy a nice meal. In that case, I’d recommend skipping alcoholic or fancy nonalcoholic beverages. These add significant costs to your bill. While we love it when people come and celebrate with drinks, cutting that out is an easy way to save if your budget is tight.

Secondly, consider ordering dishes that can provide leftovers for another meal. For example, if you’re trying to stretch your budget, order something to make a great meal the next day. Only pick items that will reheat well if you have a strong preference. For instance, when choosing between a quesadilla and a chimichanga at a Mexican restaurant, the quesadilla might hold up better for a next-day meal. Wrap it up and enjoy it later.

Take it home, and there’s lunch for the next day. $12 for two meals is okay compared to $10 for one meal, even if it’s cheaper sometimes. However, $10 for one meal is more expensive in the long run. So, those are small strategies to keep in mind.

Beyond that, make it make sense and make it count. If you’re going to dine out, it’s better to wait and splurge on a nicer experience rather than eating out two or three times and feeling unsatisfied. I’d rather have one great meal where I order everything I want, take my time, and truly enjoy it, rather than going out multiple times and penny-pinching, which can leave you with a sense of regret or feeling like you didn’t budget well.

Additionally, stick to brands and places you trust and research before trying new spots. When your budget is tight, having a bad experience is frustrating. As much as possible, check reviews or ask for recommendations. Go to places that have treated you well or have a reputation for good service and quality. As a dad, I value finances, but I also value my time. I don’t want to go somewhere that wastes my time—the waiting time or the overall experience. If the time spent at a restaurant isn’t worth it, even with no wait, it’s best to avoid that place.

As a restaurant manager, I aim to make customers feel their money is well-spent. But more than that, I want them to feel their time was valued. Dining out takes longer than eating at home—you must travel, sometimes wait to be seated, and then wait for the food. While you’re not cooking at home, everything at home is already there and more organized. So, make sure the time you spend at a restaurant is worthwhile. If a place doesn’t respect your time, it’s better not to give them your business.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Daniel, thank you so much for your time today and for sharing your insights, which come from years of experience working in restaurants from the ground up.

Frazier: It does. It does.

Jacobsen: We’ll be in touch. 

Frazier: That sounds great. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Graham Powell & Dr. Dave Thomas on Mobile Medicine

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/30

Graham Powell and Dr. Dave Thomas discuss their project to develop mobile CT scanners. Dr. Thomas, who has worked on this idea for 17 years, highlighted that 25% of trauma deaths are preventable, emphasizing the importance of rapid imaging. While CT scanners exist, current solutions aren’t designed for quick, mobile use. Powell mentioned efforts to secure funding, including support from a Dubai-based sheikh. Dr. Thomas discussed the benefits of CT scanners over other imaging methods, noting their speed and effectiveness. The team aims to create a practical, deployable system that could save lives in various emergency scenarios.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Graham Powell and Dr. Dave Thomas to discuss ECUs, CT scanners, and a proposal for making them mobile. So, what was the initial inspiration for the idea, Graham? 

Graham Powell: That came from Dave. Dave has been working on this for about 17 years. He led an emergency department for many years, witnessing countless cases that could have benefited from quicker imaging. As we’ve discussed before, about 25% of trauma-related deaths are considered preventable, making this an area of significant impact. The fact that Dr. Fassbender pioneered the concept of a CT scanner in an ambulance in Germany around 2008 shows that the technology has been available for some time. However, widespread adoption could have been faster, and Dave felt a strong need to address this gap.

Now, 17 years later, Dave has amassed a large amount of data and continues working to bring this idea to reality. We’ve been collaborating on this for about nine months. I’ve known Dave for over 40 years—we met on my 21st birthday—and we’ve shared many experiences.

I’ve followed his journey from his early days as a medical student to becoming a doctor through immigration to Australia and developing a hospital in Mackay. Now that he’s semi-retired, he has more time to focus on advancing this idea for change.

Jacobsen: Are there notable cases where this technology could have made a difference, like Princess Diana’s accident?

Powell: Dave has reviewed the medical reports from that accident and was shocked at how long it took to get her to the hospital. She sat in the car for about 20 minutes while people took photos and talked to her. The medical response was basic and didn’t identify her left lung as the source of significant bleeding, which led to her losing too much blood. This type of preventable delay falls within the 25% of trauma cases we discussed.

In this context, we’re referring to physical trauma rather than psychological trauma. Another example is King Faisal of Saudi Arabia, who was shot and not treated quickly enough, resulting in excessive blood loss and death.

These are just some of the cases we’ve looked at. Still, the same principle likely applies to about 25% of gunshot and severe trauma incidents. Unfortunately, in North America, we frequently hear about school shootings and other violent events. While changing laws can be complex and slow, improving how emergency services respond to trauma could help save lives.

Jacobsen: So, this technology—most people think of an emergency involving an ambulance. You’re imagining a vehicle on a road, ground transport. What about in the air? What about at sea? Could this transportable CT scanner be used in those contexts as well?

Powell: Yes. Currently, air ambulances primarily use helicopters almost exclusively. However, drone taxis are expected to debut next year in Dubai, indicating that technology is advancing rapidly. 

The advantage is that while helicopters can travel long distances, drones only need to fly short distances. Hence, the battery impact is less significant. The main concerns are weight and size. We’re in an era dominated by artificial intelligence, so the drone taxis being promoted for next year in Dubai will be autonomous. You can summon them, and the AI will locate you and dispatch a drone to pick you up. This means there wouldn’t need to be pilots navigating or separate medical experts interpreting the telemetry.

We are close to using drone technology in this way, and public perception will soon shift from thinking of accidents as requiring a road ambulance to envisioning flying vehicles coming to pick people up. One advantage of a traditional ambulance is that it has more space for less critical cases and can accommodate four or more people. I don’t know how close we are to that capacity with a drone. However, helicopters will still be available for larger groups. So, the public perception of emergency care and recovery is set to change soon.

Especially in larger countries, we have moved from doctors communicating over a radio system across Australia to more advanced technology. The idea of quickly picking people up and taking them to the hospital is becoming more common. For example, motorized ambulances may remain standard in Britain due to the country’s smaller size. If we put a CT scanner in an ambulance, it would be more traditional.

Given the short distances, as long as we have the technology to communicate and share information with experts, the slight delay of 10 to 15 minutes to get to a hospital would be less significant. This would still be feasible even with current restrictions in Britain.

Jacobsen: Yes, but one barrier to any new technology is finance. How do you envision getting the capital to build a prototype and move this product from an idea to an actual product?

Powell: I have friends with foundations who are interested in the concept. I’m going to be talking to them next week about that. We have a solid business plan that aligns with what people seek, and we can discuss that. I also have a sheikh based in Dubai coming to London next Monday. He wants my assistance in starting a charity, a peace movement that has been active for quite some time.

Since I am in charge of defining the parameters for creating the charity, including our intentions and how it will be managed, I am confident that I can shape it in a way that supports the development of this technology. It doesn’t conflict with a peace movement; it would be much more impactful for a peace movement to have tools to save lives in non-peaceful environments. He’s a powerful, religious leader who meets with figures like the Pope and other world leaders.

You might think that our project is all about formalities and exchanging gifts. Still, our project would offer a practical way to improve real-world situations. I don’t expect any recognition or awards for this. My main interest lies in saving lives.

I’m hoping he will understand my perspective when I speak to him in London next week. You have military cases—the Diana case and the Faisal case—numerous examples of notable figures and service members who could have been saved with telemedicine.

The sheikh’s secretary is from Lebanon. His secretary recently returned to Lebanon, and he’s been in contact with me. You can imagine how the current situation there is affecting him emotionally. This leader’s influence extends to regions like Syria, Lebanon, Israel, and Jordan. Given the current political climate, these areas are highly relevant to our discussion. They must know countless individuals—not just figures like King Faisal or Princess Diana—who have died due to trauma.

Jacobsen: Dr. Dave, as a medical expert, can you explain the advantages of this technology over current solutions?

Dr. Thomas: Basically, it saves lives. If you had a CT scanner on every street corner, you could save up to 10 million lives annually. The leading cause of death under 55 is trauma—being hit by a vehicle or injuries sustained in combat. Trauma, while not common in everyday thought, is catastrophic when it occurs and can be fatal.

When we talk about older populations, strokes and heart attacks become the leading causes of death. These are also time-sensitive conditions that require a CT scanner for quick diagnosis and treatment, such as thrombolysis for strokes. The sooner a patient can get scanned, the better their chances of survival.

CT scanners, however, are not pocket-sized, if you get my drift. But advancements in technology make it possible. While current mobile scanners exist, they are designed for something other than the rapid, in-and-out use we envision. We need a solution to scan and transport the patient to the hospital quickly.

Because after the scan, you will most likely have to take them to a hospital. In some cases, you won’t have to. For example, my friend had severe chest pain and was taken to the hospital. When they scanned him and diagnosed sarcoidosis, they sent him straight home.

Jacobsen: What about cost feasibility? Why choose a CT scanner over other types of scans?

Dr. Thomas: Well, when you say “other,” MRI scans are too slow to be of practical use in emergencies. PET scans are primarily for cancer diagnostics, and while ultrasound is good, it doesn’t match a CT scanner’s image quality or speed. You can get a comprehensive, full-body image with a CT scan very quickly. 

Regarding Princess Diana, here there are some interesting details. She was bleeding into her lung, which would have been an immediate concern because it was life-threatening. But she also had a fractured humerus.

So what? People might think, “I don’t care; it’s just a broken arm.” But if that arm is moved while fractured, it can sever the radial nerve. Then, when Princess Diana woke up, she could have had a paralyzed arm—something that was preventable. Trauma is complex, and it’s crucial to consider multiple injuries.

I’ve seen that happen before. It happened to a friend of mine. The focus was on his chest, and they missed his arm injury, resulting in a paralyzed arm. It would help if you addressed both injuries. If you do, the patient can go home with a healthy arm and chest.

Jacobsen: What are your short sales pitches for this idea, Dave and Graham?

Dr. Thomas: Today’s world is entering an era where this kind of technology should become the norm. It’s time to move forward and create something that can save more lives. Ethically, it’s the right thing to do.

Powell: Mine is straightforward: time-dependent conditions need a CT scan, which is lifesaving, and complex cases require global expertise for better outcomes. That’s the main takeaway.

Jacobsen: Dave, Graham, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it.

Powell: Thanks, Scott.

Dr. Thomas: Cheers, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Stephen Paul, Sunday Alternative in Reading, United Kingdom

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/20

Stephen Paul is a British community organizer and leader of The Sunday Alternative, a secular congregation in Reading, UK. The Sunday Alternative, formerly known as Sunday Assembly Reading, is part of an international movement that celebrates life through community gatherings featuring music, talks, and social activities. Under Stephen’s leadership, the group emphasizes inclusivity and community engagement, offering events like coffee mornings, games nights, and pub quizzes. Stephen’s efforts have fostered a welcoming environment for individuals seeking a sense of community without religious affiliation. 

Paul shared insights on the development and challenges of secular communities like his. He emphasized the shift from New Atheism’s confrontational phase to fostering humanism through inclusive, activity-based gatherings. Unlike religious groups with established support and venues, secular assemblies face unique challenges in sustainability and acceptance, with volunteers and small-scale participation key to maintaining intimacy. While American assemblies often focus on atheism and rationality due to a more religious culture, Paul’s Reading community centers on shared values, philosophy, and creating spaces for diverse backgrounds. The focus remains on meaningful human connection and community well-being.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are with Stephen Paul of the Sunday Alternative in Reading, United Kingdom. I’m always delighted to speak with anyone who lives in a place named after something related to literature, books, or reading, so it’s great to have you here.

Stephen Paul: It’s pronounced “Redding,” not “Reading.” I apologize for the confusion. Before the Internet, it was quite an issue as a place name because if you looked up “Reading,” you often found results for “Redding.” It was a real challenge.

Jacobsen: Interesting. So, what is your background in terms of Sunday Assembly? Did you have a philosophical background? How did you get involved in this philosophical and community-based movement?

Paul: It started when I was about 17 or 18, during my O-level history classes on the Enlightenment. Those were my first steps into exploring atheism. I didn’t come from a religious background. We were nominally Church of England, but it was somewhat superficial—we never attended church. It has always interested me as I have gone through life. Then, I became quite engaged with the emergence of the New Atheist movement led by figures like Richard Dawkins and Christopher Hitchens.

It was all interesting and exciting initially, but I found the movement increasingly negative over time. I realized I was spending too much time on the Internet, arguing with people and feeling bad about myself and others. Around that time, I heard about the Sunday Assembly in London. It made me think there was a better way to promote humanism—through kindness rather than confrontation.

The Sunday Assembly loosely resembled a Church of England service, but with hymns replaced by 1980s pop songs and sermons swapped for TED-style talks, community activities, and shared experiences over tea and cake. It felt like a more positive approach. 

 I didn’t start the Reading group, but I was present at the very first meeting.

Tom, one of the founders of the Reading Assembly, was a Christian who found he didn’t fit in with traditional churches. Even though he loved Jesus, he noticed that many churches leaned toward homophobia, misogyny, or classism. He wanted a place where values could be shared without aligning with beliefs. I, on the other hand, was moving from the opposite direction.

It was a nice meeting point where you could share values without prominently displaying your belief system. 

Jacobsen: How did this compare to the religious beliefs in the communities where you grew up and the individualist movement of the New Atheists in the 2000s and 2010s? From what I observed, it became less about asking questions like “Why are we here?” and more about “How are you?” It fostered a more personal, community-oriented atmosphere. Is that what you were getting at?

Paul: Yes, it is. I had a good friend at the time, and we became close through the New Atheist movement. But I noticed he was slowly becoming more and more paranoid about Muslims taking over Reading, even though he didn’t know any. His social media became increasingly right-wing. There wasn’t any use in this. I always believed in using philosophy and science to establish basic truths, but beyond that, it only achieves a little.

So, I’ll go slightly sideways on this. I’ve been involved in veganism for 33 years. There was a guy named Lawrence I used to know well who sat on the Vegan Society committee and was a druid.

He had a big robe and a big beard and was initially quite intimidating to meet, with a strong smell. Anytime you asked him a question about what the Vegan Society should be doing, he would say, “I’m going to speak to the goddess.” This goddess—I can’t remember which one—lived on a Welsh mountain, so he would spend the night on the mountain and come back down.

His solutions and suggestions were good—they were kind and thoughtful. What he meant by “I’m going to speak to the goddess” was that he needed time alone to think. I felt we might have been judging people based on a superficial reading of their religion, assuming they were doing the things Richard Dawkins and Christopher Hitchens criticized in terms of their thought processes.

But I started to doubt whether that was the case. It seemed more valuable to be gentle with people and not push them on the specifics of their belief systems. When we push anyone hard on their beliefs, they often reach a breaking point. As I implied, the other significant side of me is my veganism. I’ve met many nice humanists, but when you push them on the topic of animal rights, they start using the same irrational arguments they would use against religious people.

We’re all susceptible to irrational, emotional ways of arguing. Organizations like the Sunday Assembly focus on something different. They create a welcoming environment that shares values, not necessarily belief systems.

Jacobsen: Aside from the general overview you provided earlier, what does a regular service look like for you on a Sunday?

Paul: Sunday Assembly was our parent organization. However, I changed the name to Sunday Alternative because “Sunday” and “Assembly” sounded too Christian. I felt we were getting confused with the “enemy,” so to speak. We came up with a Sunday Alternative. We also moved away from their standard format: two songs, an inspirational speaker, some announcements, and two more songs followed by tea and cake.

It worked well for the founders, Sanderson Jones and Pippa Evans because they had big personalities. One was a successful improviser, and the other was a stand-up comedian. They had the charisma to match, initially attracting a congregation of 300 to 400 people to an assembly. However, a turnout of 50 would be significant in Reading, which is much smaller. We usually range between 25 and 35 on a normal day, so we’ve shifted from being a show to more of a community gathering.

So, we don’t have a speaker. We would have an activity. An example of a typical Reading Sunday Alternative assembly would look like this: You gather for tea and cakes for half an hour. Arrive early if you don’t know anyone—that’s the best way to make friends. At 11 o’clock, everyone is brought into the main area, and a simple game is played.

The types of games are similar to those you might do at an improv lesson. It might be a clapping game or a name game designed to make people feel relaxed in the space. Then, we sing two songs, usually 1970s, 1980s, or 1990s rock and pop. After that, we have the main activity.

A nice example we did recently involved a congregation member, a woman named Reka, a language professor. She split us into smaller groups at individual tables and taught us a simple card game from a set of instructions. We practiced the game and then put the sheets away. She informed us that we could no longer talk about the game but still had to play it.

We played one round, and then people moved to different tables based on whether they were winners or losers. We played the game again but should have realized that each table had slightly different rules. For some people, the ace was high; for others, it was low. So, conflicts arose when playing the game—one person would pick up the cards as the winner, while another would push back, believing they were the rightful winner. Since we couldn’t speak, confusion ensued.

Eventually, it was revealed what the game was about: understanding our personality types and our communication limitations. It demonstrated how we jump to conclusions. We would have noticed the rule discrepancies if we had all been as observant as we believed we were—being humanists and skeptics. However, most people assumed they were correct. Some people didn’t mind losing to what they perceived as cheating, while others did. So, you leave that assembly with greater insight into your nature and others.

We often conduct these types of activities. We also focus on topics like neurodiversity and mental health because they are relatable and impactful for many. Talking about those subjects makes sense, unlike discussing satellites, which might be interesting but not something most people have at home.

We aim to keep our themes centred on people, psychology, and philosophy rather than hard sciences like physics or chemistry.

Jacobsen: Does anything ever turn into a movie night where you watch something like Monty Python or other culturally relevant films that everyone might be familiar with, even if they haven’t seen?

Paul: That’s a tricky one because we have many members who are immigrants with different cultural references.

So, we must be careful with that sort of thing. I mean, Monty Python is quite niche. We have people who come along and are English speakers, but they have different cultural backgrounds. For example, I have a good Austrian friend who’s been here for 20 years, and he needs to learn who The Beatles, Queen, or David Bowie are.

Even though he’s been here forever, we must be mindful that if we base an assembly around too many local cultural references—it just doesn’t work. Yes, our band includes on two Hungarians, a Romanian, and a woman from an Iranian background, even though she was born in Britain. It’s not just a group of standard white guys with rock songs. It’s challenging to create a welcoming space for everyone when they come from different backgrounds.

One thing you quickly notice is that someone from an ex-Muslim tradition might see the assembly differently than someone from an ex-Christian background. This is challenging to navigate because we need to learn more about each other’s cultures to get everything right.

Jacobsen: It sounds like a challenge. Are the leaders or organizers usually the same, or is there a rotation of people?

Paul: Initially, we used to hold elections and put the process out there. But, on the whole, people didn’t care. So, it’s generally a group of people willing to put in the effort to make things happen and who end up being the leaders. We abandoned the elections because there wasn’t enough interest. No real power is involved, and no money is moving around.

Yes, an assembly can be thought of as a well-organized party. You go to a friend’s house, and they’ve planned the gathering details. So, trust comes from the idea that if you can keep it going, why not continue?

We involve as many faces as possible. Our last assembly was a 10th anniversary, and at least half the room got up to share their reflections on what the assembly meant to them. The leadership feels more like a management role than a traditional priest or pastor role.

Jacobsen: What are the main challenges of maintaining a community there? And since it’s such a young organizational setup, what insights do you have about the sustainability of these communities?

Paul: Yes, Sunday Assembly is a large organization that grew quickly. It was getting much press as the “atheist church.” Still, the lack of an economic model ultimately undermined it. It was challenging to figure out what that model should be, especially in the UK. In America, there are quite a few assemblies, and people are used to a culture where if someone asks for a $20 donation, they’ll put it in the collection tin.

In England, that doesn’t happen. And if you ask Scandinavians for donations, they’ll ask, “Why? Why would you do that?” because they expect the state to cover such expenses through higher taxes. So, sustainability was challenging. Some assemblies started to fall apart after a few years.

It fractured into different organizations that share the same terminology, but there’s no overarching control anymore. My solution to sustainability was different: while the London Assembly gives away free cakes and biscuits, we charge for ours. We make nice cakes, serve good coffee, and don’t make a big deal about asking for money.

We found that the less we asked, the more people gave, which is counterintuitive. For sustainability, we only manage because the rental space we use is inexpensive—£10 an hour. Yes, keeping it small helps.

One of the reasons I don’t bring in speakers is because some of them charge fees. If a speaker wants, say, £100 to show up, that’s an issue. By keeping our activities within our community, we maintain lower costs and make the events more meaningful. 

Jacobsen: Another challenge is that religious groups often receive government subsidies, tax exemptions, and access to land and buildings. In contrast, secular groups don’t receive the same level of support, if any. Should there be a status for organizations like Sunday Assembly or the Oasis Network to help them achieve sustainability on more stable ground? From a Reading perspective, what are the main challenges?

Paul: The main issue is finding venues. Churches dominate most shared spaces and are difficult to secure. Churches have buildings specifically designed to create the right atmosphere for the community. At the same time, secular groups are left scrambling for space. The London Assembly, for example, currently uses a comedy club. It works, but it’s a different experience from walking into a church—it creates a different vibe.

It would make a huge difference if we had the same support or a history of purpose-built buildings. We aren’t seen in the same light as religious groups. Religious organizations automatically receive a certain reverence from councils or other bodies. At the same time, we’re recognized only as a community group, which could be anything–like a knitting group?

That’s how we would be seen by the council—not as a legitimate alternative to a religious setting. That said, I am interviewed locally by the BBC as a representative of the non-religious community. When I speak with priests, they usually support what we do, as we often discuss things like community retention and creating a welcoming environment.

Most church leaders know they’re doing the same thing we do. But when you speak to their congregation, you often hear, “Why do you do that? What’s the point? Jesus or God isn’t in the room with you.”

When I’ve spoken to priests, they often say, “Ah, we do the same thing.” But unless someone runs one of these organizations, I don’t think people realize we’re doing the same work—creating a community space. What’s important is the mental health benefits people gain from being together and sharing experiences.

But, as you mentioned, it’s not recognized in the same way as religious groups.

Jacobsen: How big is the community now?

Paul: Well, we mainly run through Meetup, and there are about 1,400 people on there, but not all of them show up. As I mentioned, there are usually around 35 people. I don’t actively seek more attendees because, in the past, when we reached around 50 people, the room became overcrowded.

People ended up sitting on guitar amplifiers and each other’s laps. When we moved to a larger venue, the intimacy was lost. The people at the back had a different connection than those at the front. We’re not doing the big church thing—there are no flashy lights or big productions. It’s meant to be on a human level. We can’t push it beyond 35 people and maintain a meaningful connection without becoming a show. I never wanted it to be a show.

Jacobsen: Do people generally come from far away, or are they mostly from the local community?

Paul: People come from local towns. Yes, the range is about 10 miles. The Sunday Alternative has its main assembly once a month, which is my focal point—that’s where the emotional connection happens. We also have coffee mornings that attract similar numbers, around 35 people. These tend to be newcomers to the town looking to meet others.

There’s also a book group connected to the assembly, a music appreciation group, pub quiz nights, and a highly sensitive person café. Some people participate in everything, while others focus on one specific activity.

You have to understand that attending a Sunday assembly can be intimidating for introverted people. Singing and playing games on a Sunday morning isn’t everyone’s idea of fun, so one activity alone can’t hold the community together. It needs variety. Some people want more challenges, while others prefer something less demanding. The assembly is more than just the main event; it’s about creating a broader community where everyone can find their place. I hope that answers your question, though I might have strayed slightly.

Jacobsen: It does. Where do you see this developing in the short term for the rest of the 2020s? Will it continue meeting the needs of different communities, such as introverts, extroverts, or those without faith or a mild naturalistic belief?

Paul: On the whole, we don’t get many hardcore atheists because they often don’t want to engage with anything that resembles a church setting. I find it sad that religion has captured all the community-oriented words, like assemblies and community, making it hard to market ourselves to committed atheists. My friend Tom was an exception. He was a Christian who came along and stayed until he moved out of town. We do get Christians who attend out of curiosity. But when they see Jesus isn’t present, they often say, “This is nice, but there are better places to be on a Sunday morning.”

We do attract many ex-Christians—many. We also get a fair number of people who identify as “spiritual,” though I’m never quite sure what they mean by that. They use the term because they’re unsure where they stand.

I don’t plan to market the assembly to grow beyond its current size. Expanding further wouldn’t be sustainable. COVID hit all the assemblies hard, and many didn’t survive. We came close to it. We still need more volunteers. Sometimes, I feel we keep the momentum up until something changes. If you look back 10 years ago, atheism and secularization were big topics, at least in America and to some extent here.

It’s not a big topic anymore, so we generate less press. That could be a good thing. It was a victory in many ways because what needed to be normalized became so. Yes, atheism, agnosticism, and related ideas became part of common knowledge and conversation—the biggest victory. That’s less the case in America when I speak to my colleagues there.

They focus more on atheism within their assemblies and campaign more on rationality. There’s more at stake there compared to the UK, where the situation is different. The UK is generally more secular, with fewer people attending church regularly. Yes, the push is stronger in America because it’s a more religious population, and there’s more to push against. They also seem to have a bigger presence from the LGBTQ+ community for similar reasons.

In the UK, most people aren’t attending church anyway, so it’s quite a different environment. When I explained what the assembly does, some people ask what’s the difference from jointing, say, a sewing or running club. But the issue with those is that you must be interested in sewing or running The assembly isn’t tied to any specific activity. It’s a space that can be anything, which is what community should be—it shouldn’t be tied to one activity–being in a room with people who do different things creates a diverse community.

That’s what we try to create. I don’t see us growing much bigger, and I don’t want it to grow. Could it be too much work? Yes. The more people you involve, the more potential issues arise. For example, in Sunday Assembly America, an incident involving inappropriate behaviour caused significant damage to their community. I’m always cautious of that kind of thing. Large organizations can turn into power struggles.

Jacobsen: And big personalities can complicate things.

Paul: Yes, exactly. 

Jacobsen: Not all the time, but there have been noteworthy cases. There’s always a place for a gentle, continuous renewal of critique and skepticism, especially when surveys show beliefs in supernatural or conspiratorial ideas. However, when movements overreach for too long, people start looking for alternatives like Sunday Assembly or the Oasis Network. That’s why they were formed in the first place, as you said. There’s a time and place for these things: the 2.0 phase from the 2000s and 2010s. Things have changed. This was lovely.

Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Paul: Thanks for reaching out.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Philip Odonkor on Smart Cities & Informatics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/27

Dr. Philip Odonkor is an Assistant Professor at Stevens Institute of Technology’s Charles V. Schaefer, Jr. School of Engineering and Science, leading the Design Informatics Lab. He earned his PhD and MS in Mechanical Engineering from the University at Buffalo, SUNY. Dr. Odonkor’s research encompasses urban informatics, design optimization, cyber-physical systems, and sustainability. He received the prestigious NSF CAREER award in 2024 for advancing energy equity in urban areas. A co-founder of Grid Discovery, he is an active member of IEEE, ASME, and ACM. His work has been featured in Time Magazine and on the TEDx stage.

Odonkor discussed the intersection of informatics, smart cities, and sustainability. He emphasized that cities are complex socio-technical systems with inherent inefficiencies, particularly in energy use due to historically piecemeal infrastructure development. Odonkor detailed how data science and machine learning, especially reinforcement learning, can optimize energy consumption and improve urban living. He highlighted challenges like balancing privacy with data collection and integrating cultural values into algorithmic models. Odonkor noted varying global privacy attitudes and projected rapid electric and autonomous transportation advancements by 2025. He stressed the importance of long-term, adaptive urban planning.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Philip Odonkor, and we’ll discuss informatics, smart cities, and sustainability—a range of topics he specializes in. Let’s begin with the basics. What is the link between informatics and sustainability in cities?

Dr. Philip Odonkor: That’s an insightful question. Cities are inherently complex environments where people interact daily. While we typically notice the visible aspects of cities—residents, buildings, and transportation systems—examining cities closely reveals them as intricate socio-technical systems.

This viewpoint is central to my work. Complex systems often come with many inefficiencies. In most cities, you can observe inefficiencies in resource management, public services, and energy use. Cities have evolved over many decades, often adding infrastructure piecemeal to meet growing demands, leading to various inefficiencies.

As cities expand, energy systems are retrofitted to support the increased load, which can result in unsustainable practices and higher emissions. This is where informatics and data science—my focus areas—play a vital role. We can better understand how cities function and identify ways to improve efficiency using data. For instance, I analyze how buildings use electricity and seek methods to optimize energy use, ensuring that each unit of electricity contributes more effectively than it currently does. We can enhance sustainability and other critical urban metrics by addressing these inefficiencies.

Jacobsen: How do democratic systems impact long-term city planning? Democratic societies often operate within election cycles, limiting the ability to plan long-term projects. The focus on election terms can restrict the scope of planning, leading to infrastructure projects that may be segmented or delayed, resulting in inefficiencies as they progress through different political agendas. How do you consider this when redesigning energy systems and infrastructure?

Odonkor: I adopt a long-term perspective when seeking solutions in my work. Rather than focusing solely on short-term outcomes, I consider what we want cities to look like in 20 or 30 years. With this vision as a target, I work backward to determine the steps needed to bridge the gap between current systems and the desired future state. This approach helps guide decision-making and prioritize improvements. Although the process is complex and gradual, short-term strategies are integrated into this larger vision to make incremental progress toward a sustainable and efficient urban future.

There are two different scopes you can look at this from. I approach it from a long-term perspective, which helps smooth out some of the issues that might be apparent when looking at it from a short-term view. 

Jacobsen: We live in an era of big data and systems that can process vast amounts of information. It would be beneficial to understand how to make sense of it all. Additionally, smart people build algorithms that can analyze and interpret this data. How do you gather data about a society or a city, and how do you make it understandable so you can use it effectively?

Odonkor: Those are great questions. How do I gather the data? Looking around your home or city, you’ll notice many devices capturing various metrics. For instance, some cameras, such as ring doorbells or surveillance cameras, record video. Across cities, we have sensors that capture data like temperature and noise, providing insights into city functions at any given time. This collection of sensors is part of the Internet of Things (IoT). IoT sensors are generally small, low-power devices that capture real-time data.

In recent years, there has been a significant increase in the number of these devices, making data collection much easier than before. However, the main challenge lies in handling this data. Just having data does not automatically lead to solutions. It often requires extracting insights from the data or combining multiple datasets to derive valuable information. This is where my research comes in—understanding what types of data to combine, when, and on what time scale to draw meaningful insights.

One way I approach this is through machine learning and artificial intelligence. I use machine learning extensively in my work, particularly a method known as reinforcement learning. Reinforcement learning allows us to program an algorithm to analyze data and understand the decision-making processes that generated it. For example, we have data about a home. In that case, the algorithm tries to determine what control actions led to certain patterns of electricity use.

Programming these algorithms aims to learn how a home uses energy. Once we achieve that, we can modify the algorithm to experiment with different actions and identify which changes could improve energy consumption within the home.

That way, I can start automating functions within your home so that it behaves as you would control it, but more efficiently. I understand what you prefer and don’t, and I can adjust things so everything appears normal. However, behind the scenes, processes are happening more efficiently.

Jacobsen: How do the niches within cities factor into this? For example, take Vancouver, which is near where I live. It has pockets of different subcultures, activities, and institutions, like universities scattered throughout the city. Do machine learning and AI algorithms naturally consider those variations part of their process?

Odonkor: No, not naturally. You can think of machine learning as an open canvas—you must tell it what to focus on, prioritize, and its objectives. Some machine-learning versions can attempt to figure things out independently. Still, in this domain, we guide the algorithms throughout the process.

It’s interesting that you bring this up because part of my work involves tuning algorithms to consider aspects beyond energy efficiency. For example, we design algorithms that balance efficiency while considering energy equity issues. Suppose we optimize energy usage in one area. Can the algorithm assess the demographics and decide where to prioritize energy distribution to balance overall usage? We also overlay this approach with considerations for access to renewable energy resources.

You can focus these algorithms on different topics. One of our key goals is to get these algorithms to incorporate energy equity issues, not just efficiency. If we only focus on efficiency, we create environments that might be efficient but not necessarily pleasant or livable. People want to live in spaces that are efficient, enjoyable, and suitable for their needs.

Jacobsen: Different cultures and subcultures value certain aspects differently, including the acceptability of inefficiency or the aesthetic and feel of a space. That can vary by country, state, or even county. When looking at inefficiencies, do you consider them as positive utilities related to local values? It’s not about inefficiency being inherently negative but understanding the direction and context of those values. Is there a way to fine-tune machine learning to account for these differences?

Odonkor: That’s an intriguing question, and while we haven’t fully implemented this yet, it’s a significant point. Different cultures indeed have varied perspectives on what constitutes inefficiency. For example, in the Western world, power outages are viewed as wholly negative, and we strive to minimize them. However, in developing countries, people may have adapted to power outages as part of daily life. While they may be inconvenient, they aren’t viewed as catastrophic in the same way that they are here.

Instead of telling the machine learning algorithm that minimizing power outages should be the primary objective, we could program it more flexibly. Power outages may be tolerable under certain circumstances, or the algorithm can shift power distribution to account for variables like weaker infrastructure.

You allow the machine learning algorithm to tolerate inefficiencies if they result in a collective benefit. These tweaks seem important, especially considering aspects like energy equity. This flexibility across societies and cities could be advantageous if properly implemented. 

We focus on maintaining optimal conditions in most research. However, as you mentioned, there can be utility in so-called inefficiencies, and exploring how machine learning algorithms can leverage these for the greater good is something we are investigating.

Jacobsen: What do people across different cultures typically value when it comes to their vision of a smart city? Clean air, clean water, green spaces—what are the primary and secondary considerations?

Odonkor: That’s an excellent question, and part of the challenge is that there needs to be a universally accepted definition of a smart city. A smart city can mean different things to different people, influenced by what they’ve heard or experienced. In fact, when I teach a class on smart cities, many of my students start out needing to learn what the term truly encompasses.

One recurring theme is the desire for efficiency. People envision smart cities as efficient and livable places. Livability usually means having clean air, reliable transportation, reduced homelessness, and other similar factors. However, one significant concern that comes up repeatedly is privacy.

Balancing privacy and data collection is a complex issue. As I mentioned, my research relies heavily on data captured by various sensors, which is essential for training machine learning algorithms. The more data we have, the better the outcomes. However, generating all that data requires compromising privacy. People want the advantages of a smart city, but not at the cost of their privacy. Finding a middle ground remains an open question we are still trying to solve.

We’ve seen some smart city initiatives struggle or fail because they couldn’t adequately address privacy concerns. A notable example is Sidewalk Labs. I’m not sure if you’re familiar with it—it was a Google-affiliated company attempting to build a smart city project in Canada. It faced significant pushback due to concerns about privacy and data security, and ultimately, it did not move forward because it couldn’t offer sufficient guarantees that people’s privacy would be protected.

Jacobsen: When considering the digitization of everything and the integration of sensors everywhere—visual or otherwise—how do encryption, security, and privacy play into these systems? If the sidewalk has a physical sensor, how do you ensure those are highly encrypted to address privacy concerns? In societies where privacy is not a given right, have some projects infringed on that privacy? This turns into a cybersecurity issue. How do we protect all this digital infrastructure? It may be an open question.

Odonkor: It is indeed an open question. The reality is that we may never reach a point where these systems are 100% secure. We see this even with the most trusted digital systems, such as banking systems, which only guarantee partial protection. However, there have been significant advancements in encrypting data. The solutions will not be limited to smart cities alone; they will likely involve broader applications, such as protecting banking or sensitive health data. These technologies will continue to evolve and be applied in various smart city contexts.

The main challenge is that smart cities are highly complex. They consist of multiple interconnected systems, and any time you have such a distributed system with numerous moving parts, one weak link is enough to create significant issues. Complex systems like this will inherently have weak points, a major challenge for smart cities. However, there is a lot of research in this space. While I don’t specialize in cybersecurity, I am confident that progress will lead us to a point where we are “safe enough” within smart cities.

Jacobsen: Regarding privacy, in some countries, how is this approached?

Odonkor: Yes, that’s an important consideration. In countries like China, for example, technologies that monitor citizens are already in place. While monitoring can have protective and security benefits, it’s also true that these technologies have dual uses. Due to the governmental structure in such countries, it’s easier to install and operate these systems.

In contrast, in the United States, for example, implementing widespread systems like facial recognition often requires more support. So, the global landscape varies depending on societal structures and attitudes toward privacy and governance. We’ll continue to see these differences in how smart city technologies are deployed based on societal norms and legal frameworks.

Jacobsen: What is the most feasible development in smart cities by the end of 2025?

Odonkor: One exciting area is transportation, specifically the electrification of transport. We’re seeing a surge in micro-mobility solutions, such as electric bikes and scooters. On a larger scale, we’re seeing the integration of electric buses and the gradual emergence of autonomous vehicles. An interesting challenge is merging electric autonomous transportation with traditional transportation and navigating the resulting efficiency gains and challenges. This area is evolving quickly, and I’m excited to see how policies adapt to these advancements. Cities are caught off guard by this shift toward electric micro-mobility, so watching how they respond is fascinating.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Philip, thank you so much for your time and insights today.

Odonkor: You’re welcome, Scott. 

Jacobsen: Cool, thank you. It was nice meeting you.

Odonkor: Thanks, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Billy Busch, ‘Family Reins’ and Anheuser-Busch Legacy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/27

Billy Busch, founder of the Busch Family Brewing & Distilling Company, is an heir to the iconic Anheuser-Busch legacy, synonymous with American enterprise and the pursuit of the American dream. Raised on the family’s sprawling estate, Billy’s childhood was one of privilege and tradition, shaped by his father’s rigorous standards for leadership. A graduate of St. Louis University and a former professional polo player, Billy achieved the pinnacle of the sport by winning the U.S. Open Polo Championship. He starred alongside his wife, Christi, a film producer, on the MTV reality series The BuschFamily Brewed, offering a glimpse into their family life. Together, they reside on a 700-acre estate in St. Louis, Missouri, continuing the Busch family tradition of entrepreneurship, storytelling, and community legacy. Busch shares lessons learned from his family’s multi-generational business. He reflects on his great-grandfather Adolphus Busch, whose ambition, innovation, and quality focus revolutionized the brewing industry through pasteurization and the refrigerated railroad car, establishing Budweiser as The King of Beers. Billy also highlights his father’s expansion efforts and brilliant marketing with Busch Gardens. Now, he continues the family tradition with his brewery and distillery, emphasizing innovation and hospitality. An avid equestrian, Billy enjoys life on his 700-acre estate, blending hunting, farming, and family time. He is the author of Family Reins: The Extraordinary Rise and Epic Fall of an American Dynasty.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Billy Busch, the founder of the Busch Family Brewing and Distilling Company and an heir to the iconic Anheuser-Busch legacy.

As a multi-generational family deeply involved in American entrepreneurship, enterprise, and business, what is the biggest family lesson about sustaining a legacy in American business?

Billy Busch: Oh, there are a few key takeaways. What I learned from my great-grandfather, Adolphus Busch, was his ambition to prove himself and create something great here in America. He immigrated from Germany to the United States in 1857 to build a better life and live the American dream.

Adolphus was the 21st of 22 children. His father was a successful businessman, but with such a large family, my great-grandfather knew little inheritance would be left. So, he decided to make his way. That’s why he immigrated to the United States, settling in St. Louis, Missouri, along the Mississippi River, where significant commerce and business activity existed. This choice made sense because he had grown up along the Rhine River in Germany and understood river-based trade and transportation.

When Adolphus arrived in St. Louis, he was optimistic and determined to succeed. He eventually met Lilly Anheuser, the daughter of Eberhard Anheuser, who owned the struggling Bavarian Brewery on the Mississippi River. Seeing potential in Adolphus, Eberhard offered him the opportunity to join the brewery and help turn it around. My great-grandfather accepted the challenge.

Adolphus Busch was an incredibly driven, gregarious, and innovative entrepreneur. He worked tirelessly to grow the business, and his marketing skills were unmatched. In 1876, he developed the recipe for Budweiser, which would become the brewery’s flagship product and earn the title The King of Beers.

His innovations largely drove Adolphus’s success. He was the first brewer in America to pasteurize beer, a breakthrough that extended the beer’s shelf life, allowing it to stay fresh for longer periods. This innovation enabled him to transport beer to far-off markets, something unheard of then.

But there’s more. Adolphus also recognized the importance of keeping beer cold to maintain its quality. He pioneered using the refrigerated railroad car, allowing him to transport beer over long distances while keeping it fresh.

Between pasteurization and refrigeration, my great-grandfather revolutionized the brewing industry. Before these innovations, breweries operated primarily on a local scale because transporting beer was difficult. Adolphus’s vision and ingenuity turned a small, struggling brewery into a national powerhouse. They helped establish Anheuser-Busch as an iconic American brand.

So the lesson I learned—well, I’ve learned two great lessons from him regarding innovation. If you’re going to start a business today, you have to be very innovative. You have to develop ideas that make you unique and carry you forward. It takes you from the norm and puts you in a position that helps your business grow. That’s what my great-grandfather was able to do.

Of course, he had a great product. Quality has always been so important, and that sense of quality has lasted through the generations. My father, who I watched grow the business, was the third generation and the fourth leader of Anheuser-Busch. He became the CEO and president of Anheuser-Busch in 1946 when his older brother passed away prematurely.

At that time, there was only one brewery in the United States, located in St. Louis, Missouri. My father built nine additional breweries across the country. He also established Busch Gardens theme parks around those breweries. That was a brilliant marketing strategy because families could visit the brewery, see the animals, and enjoy the experience. When their kids grew up and were old enough to drink, they remembered those great times at Busch Gardens and SeaWorld—back when we owned SeaWorld. Those experiences built a strong connection to the product and helped the brand grow.

It made Budweiser the household American beer. Quality, great marketing, and innovation were the key ingredients.

I also discuss this in my book Family Reins: The Extraordinary Rise and Epic Fall of an American Dynasty. My uncle, Adolphus Busch III—my dad’s brother—was a patriot and a patriarch. He led the brewery through World War II, during which time 90% of the marketing and advertising went to supporting America’s efforts in the war.

He even shut down all distribution on the West Coast to move munitions and military supplies more efficiently. His loyalty to the country was unmatched. In those campaigns, 90% of the marketing supported America, and only 10% promoted Anheuser-Busch and Budweiser.

But what happened? Lo and behold, it worked out beautifully. People began to associate Budweiser with America itself. It became America’s beer. That’s how Budweiser earned the title The King of Beers.

I learned so much from those stories. My father was focused on building the brewery during his era. From 1946 to 1975, he grew production from 3 million barrels to about 40 million.

It was all about Anheuser-Busch. It was about living and breathing the brand. My father even opened our family farm—where I grew up—to the public. People could come, drink a Budweiser, and enjoy themselves.

We lived it. Day in and day out, we lived in Anheuser-Busch. And that’s what it takes to build something great, like my family did.

And I’m proud it went for five generations when most companies only last three generations in a family.

Jacobsen: The big thing you mentioned at the start of the conversation was that there would be little inheritance in a family of over 20 kids. So, the foresight to go out and make your name or create your legacy becomes essential. Are you doing that with the distillery moving forward?

Busch: Yes. I grew up watching my father and seeing the principles he used to help grow the business. I learned a lot about the brewing industry. I was involved in the marketing side of the business, as well as the entertainment side. I grew up at Grant’s Farm, maintaining and keeping it beautiful for the public.

I also worked in the distribution side of the business, selling beer to retailers in Texas and Florida. Although I never worked directly at the brewery, brewing was in my blood. I have always loved the business and wanted to continue it.

I also wanted to continue the legacy of what my forefathers started. Of course, that legacy was Anheuser-Busch. Unfortunately, the company was sold in 2008 to a foreign company, InBev, and is no longer in family hands.

So, I wanted to keep that legacy alive. I started the Busch Family Brewing and Distilling Company, and now we’re making beer. We produce several different styles of beer and whiskeys. We sell it right here on our farm and invite people to visit. They can enjoy the beautiful property and the farm atmosphere, sample our beers, and eat great food.

It’s a place for families and people of all ages because we have animals there—similar to what you’d find at Busch Gardens—which reflects how I grew up. It’s just a natural extension of my family’s tradition, and it makes perfect sense for me to do this.

I truly enjoy it. I love the hospitality aspect of the brewing business, and I’m also deeply involved in the brewing and manufacturing processes, which I find incredibly rewarding. We’re also expanding our distribution locally here in the St. Louis area.

Jacobsen: Many businesspeople look for ways to blow off some steam. Working 80 hours a week—while it may be a passion—is not always the most fun thing to do. You had a career and even won a championship in one of the major tournaments, didn’t you? How did you get involved in polo, and why choose it? It’s both a way to blow off steam and, at the same time, not because it’s so competitive.

Busch: You’re right. It’s a competitive sport. But my father was a big equestrian. He had horses of all kinds—hunters, jumpers, and driving horses.

Of course, he was the brains behind the Clydesdale eight-horse hitch back in 1933 when they first introduced the Clydesdales. That hitch was a gift from my dad and his brother to their father, thanking him for keeping Anheuser-Busch alive during the 13 years of Prohibition when alcohol couldn’t be sold in the United States. They used the hitch to drive the first case of beer to the White House, presenting it to President Franklin D. Roosevelt after Prohibition was repealed.

As you can see, my family has always been involved with horses. I grew up on a farm, and I’ve been riding my entire life. My dad played polo when he was younger and with some of the best American polo players in the world. My older brother got into it, and I followed in his footsteps.

I love polo because it’s such a fast, exhilarating game. You’re on a horse going 35 miles an hour. I love contact sports—you’re always bumping, pushing, and trying to get to the ball. It gets physical at times, which suits me perfectly because I played football in high school and some in college.

Since I already knew how to ride, polo just made sense. And, yes, we won some of the major tournaments throughout the country. Specifically, my brother and I won the U.S. Open in 1991, the grandfather of all polo tournaments in the United States, with two pros.

It was a wonderful accomplishment. Winning the U.S. Open is incredibly difficult, and I realize that more and more now as I look back. Polo has always been tough, and it’s only become harder. I’m so grateful we had the opportunity to win that tournament in 1991.

Jacobsen: When I worked on a horse farm, the manager competed at the Nations Cup level in show jumping. Her aunt had even ridden for Team Canada in show jumping twice. I did a series of interviews as part of an ongoing book project on that world, and one thing I came across was how horses have become a precious commodity. Horse prices have skyrocketed as more people accumulate wealth, particularly in Western Europe and the United States. A decent Olympic show jumper now costs around €5 million. How have you seen the equestrian world—particularly in polo—change since 1991?

Busch: Well, let’s say you’re 100% right. The prices have gone up tremendously, even in the polo world. A good polo horse today costs you an easy $150,000.

And if you’re playing at the high-goal level—the highest level of polo—you need 8 to 10 horses per game. That’s just for one player. It’s a huge investment.

Today, you’re looking at well over $1 million for the horses alone. Things were very different when my brother and I won the U.S. Open 1991. First of all, we were the only two sponsors on our team. We were what’s called patrons—essentially sponsors—not professional players. We weren’t getting paid to play; we were paying the pros to play for us.

We were fortunate to have some sponsorship from Anheuser-Busch back then. We played for the Bud Light team, which helped offset some costs. But in those days, a good horse cost about $30,000. Today, that same horse costs around $150,000.

Hiring a professional player back then cost about $100,000. Today, you can only hire a top-level pro for $2 million. When my brother and I won the tournament in 1991, we spent around $150,000 to compete and win.

Of course, a little luck was involved—and I’ll take luck any day. Other teams spent much more than we did, but we succeeded with far fewer resources. Because we were playing as patrons, we didn’t have to hire as many pros. My brother and I were also able to split some of the horses we owned, which further reduced the costs.

Today, if you want to win the U.S. Open, you’re considering spending well over $10 million.

Jacobsen: That’s incredible. So, this brings me to two questions. First, what has been the attraction for billionaires—at least the ones I’ve met—to become so interested in horses, especially since horses stopped being our primary mode of transportation more than 125 years ago?

Busch: That’s a great question. Here’s the thing—people with wealth often gravitate toward land. They’ll buy farms or ranches; you naturally have horses when you have land like that. You can’t have a farm or ranch without them, can you?

And there’s no better way to explore and experience your land than by riding a horse. You can see and appreciate so much more of the property on horseback. It’s a completely different experience.

The relationship between a horse and its rider is also second to none. Horses are powerful, intelligent animals, and people develop a connection with them quickly. That bond is something truly special.

Jacobsen: And what about you? What do you do in your time on a 700-acre estate? You’re coming from such a major family legacy.

Busch: Well, life on the farm is always busy and rewarding. I spend much time working on our brewery and distillery business. I love having people on the farm, where they can experience the land, enjoy some great food, and sample our beers and whiskeys. It’s about hospitality and sharing the legacy.

Outside the business, I ride horses, care for the property, and enjoy everything the land offers. There’s always something to do when living on a large piece of land like that. Whether it’s maintaining the property, taking care of the animals, or just riding around and enjoying the beauty of the place—it keeps me grounded.

They can carry you all day long, and it’s just amazing what horses can do. They can go over rough terrain, through creeks, and thick woods—you can get through anything with them, even more so than on a motorcycle, a four-wheeler, or one of these side-by-sides they have today. For people who can afford them, horses are much fun, and people truly enjoy them. They also keep you grounded in a way.

As for what I do on our 700 acres, I love it. We’ve always been big hunters in our family. My son, Billy Jr., is really into hunting apparel. He has his line of hunting gear called Geist Gear. It’s a German word that means ghost, so you’re like a ghost in the woods wearing his gear. He’s got everything you can imagine: coats, hats, gloves, waders, boots—gear for every kind of hunter’s got you covered whether you’re hunting deer, turkey, ducks, or anything else.

If you want to check it out sometime, Scott, go to geistgear.com. It’s good stuff.

We’re big hunters. We love being out on the farm. We hunt ducks, deer, turkey, and dove—all the kinds of animals you find here in the Midwest. We’re also big conservationists and outdoorsmen. My father was the same way.

I still ride horses; we ride quite a bit as a family. With all seven of our kids, my wife Christy and I occasionally get them on horses and ride across the farm together.

Another thing I love to do is hitch up a four-in-hand team of Belgian horses and a couple of Clydesdales. It’s a pair of Belgians, and a pair of Clydesdales hitched to a wagon we got from the Amish in Ohio. The wagon holds about 14 people, and we’ll drive it around the farm. It’s a great way to get together, have fun, and spend quality time as a family.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Billy, thank you so much for the opportunity and for your time.

Busch: Yes, I appreciate it. It’s my pleasure, Scott. Thank you for having me on.

Jacobsen: Okay, we’ll be in touch. Thank you.

Busch: Okay, Scott. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Minister Nectaire OlivevilO, The Satanic Temple Arizona

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/27

Minister Nectaire OlivevilO, elected as congregation head of The Satanic Temple Arizona in June, shared his Protestant upbringing and gradual shift to atheism driven by a passion for science. He discussed the Temple’s principles, emphasizing resistance to arbitrary authority inspired by “Paradise Lost” and “Revolt of the Angels.” They highlighted coalition building with interfaith and secular groups, advocating for scientific understanding, compassion, and bodily autonomy. OlivevilO explained how conversations with skeptics reveal cognitive biases and the importance of bidirectional consent, reinforcing the Temple’s commitment to reason and ethical principles.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: After many, many, many, many, many, many, many, many years, I am back with the Satanic Temple of Arizona. Previously, I was interviewing Michelle and Stu. What has changed over the years that I’ve been away?

Minister Nectaire OlivevilO: A lot has happened. We’ve gone through several generations of council leadership within the congregation, a few cycles of chapter heads, a regent, and eventually, I became one of the elected individuals. In June, I was onboarded as the congregation head of Arizona. 

Jacobsen: When were you first introduced to TST or that style of philosophy? Did you grow up religious, for instance, or in any other religious context?

OlivevilO: Not strictly. I grew up in a household with Protestant parents. On my mother’s side, there was a mix of Methodist and—I believe—Lutheran. On my father’s side, I do not remember what his religious background was. When we visited my maternal grandparents on weekends, we would alternate between different churches. It was not a monoculture of church experiences. When we visited my dad’s mother’s church, it was another different church.

Growing up, I was fascinated by dinosaurs and Legos. I would read paleontology books for kids and popular paleontology books for the general public. I was deeply into science. When I went to Sunday school, they talked about the flood and the ark, which lost me completely. It felt absurd, and I decided I was done with it. 

Jacobsen: Did that moment of disbelief cause any confrontations with people, or was it an internal realization?

OlivevilO: It was entirely internal. I no longer wanted to attend Sunday school; my parents were fine. I would read novels in the pews instead. Eventually, once I had a Walkman, I would listen to music during services. They were okay with that, too.

My parents never forced indoctrination or imposed religious beliefs on me, and I recognize how privileged I am for that. Many people have endured significant religious trauma due to their upbringing, but I was fortunate not to have that experience. My sister was similarly unaffected by it. My atheism continued without conflict. When I learned the term “atheism” in high school, I would have identified with it if I had thought about adopting a label. However, I did not consciously choose an identity then.

I knew the Bible held no value for me. I tried reading it once, but when I got to the genealogies, I stopped, thinking, “I don’t have time for this.” It felt pointless. I didn’t care about who begat whom. That’s where my attempt at reading the Bible ended.

Despite not reading the Bible cover to cover, I was exposed to its content through various sources. For the past 15-plus years, I’ve read atheist blogs, listened to atheist podcasts, and engaged with counter-apologetics. I have delved into the Skeptics Annotated Bible and heard its contents discussed repeatedly through platforms like The Atheist Experience and more recent shows like Talk Heathen. These have been excellent resources for having meaningful conversations with religious people and understanding their beliefs. It is fascinating and engaging work.

\And the folks who call in often expose their cognitive biases immediately. If they’re evangelizing and trying to make claims, their biases show up immediately to the hosts. Many people don’t go into that stuff and have other reasoning, and it doesn’t have the Bible intersection. But yes, from observing these conversations between skeptics and religious people, there’s much exposure to the Bible that I’ve had.

Yes, that’s much of it as far as religious backgrounds are concerned. So, getting to TST is when I connected to or when I first heard about TST. It probably would have been the Pink Mass. That’s the first thing I heard on Evan Etta’s blog when he covered that. So, the blasphemy—I left at that and enjoyed that. But the coverage of that and something you mentioned earlier, I forget the name of the event, but the BDSM babies.​​

That was another one of the things covered in those sorts of media. But those articles included the tenets and went down the list. It’s like, “Hell, yes!” Awesome. Dig it. Do that. Awesome. So, you hear this from Satanists all the time. These things click, and you realize, “Well, I guess I’m a Satanist.” So, I enjoy that—turning a thing on its head.

With blasphemy, you’re taking something sacred and turning it on its head. With this identity with Satanism, you’re taking the attribution of atheists being called Satanists because Christians don’t accurately name the thing that they’re seeing and calling out. It’s embracing Satanism when it has been thrown at you as if it were a weapon. “Got it. Yes. It’s me. Now what?” 

Jacobsen: The taking away of the power of that accusation is empowering. I can see that in other folks, too. So, it is a form of attributing an epithet to something of a benevolent self-identity, self-identification in a way. “This is my term for self-liberation. The devil is a metaphor for the liberation of humanity from an authoritarian god. When you see me as an atheist within your framework, you know that is the worst possible thing.” I’m going to take that on. Here’s what I mean.”If people get past the first reaction, it’s a way to continue the conversation more healthily.

OlivevilO: I guess it’s a “yes, and.”

Jacobsen: Yes, it is. So, it’s the improv comedy principle. What did you learn from those calls from people? When they expose their cognitive biases, as you’re saying? What comes up? What are those biases? And how do you notice them grappling with those pointed out now? That’s an uncomfortable place to be.

OlivevilO: Yes. And it should be an uncomfortable place to be. When callers recognize that they’ve got a contradiction, the people I’ve noticed recognizing that will say, “Oh, I’ll think about that, and I’ll call back about that after I’ve had a chance.” Resistant people tend to have calls that drag on for a long time. The hosts try to bring the person back to the beginning, using several approaches to get them to acknowledge that they have inconsistent ideas. But then, that cognitive dissonance doesn’t even get a chance to kick in as other assumptions the person has prevent them from analyzing their own beliefs. Fundamental attribution error—that’s a pretty common one.

Special pleading. Those are the most common ones. So, fundamental attribution error—well, there are multiple ways it can show up. I saw that one thing happened, another happened, and I assumed that this caused that rather than them being coincidental. This happened, and that happened. Things are only sometimes connected. This thing is only sometimes caused by that thing. So, diversity of plant, animal, and bacterial life—yes. Your book says that a god did that, but all the other information also says this is how things happen. There’s so much more evidence supporting this second explanation.

Jacobsen: Have you had anyone change their mind on one of those calls?

OlivevilO: Well, I want to be clear: this hasn’t been me. This is me consuming things. Yes, I was referring to shows that the atheist community of Austin puts on. They do a great job cultivating an open community interested in these conversations and bringing in religious people to share their ideas.

And that’s great. That cross-pollination of ideas is necessary. We’re people. We’re a social species. We trade ideas. We bounce things off each other. One of the positive ways humans use that is through the scientific revolution—starting to examine these things and figure out why. We build up that base of knowledge through reason and evidence and examine it with one another to average out those cognitive biases that contribute to things. By checking with many people, I see that some have certain biases, and others have different ones.

And where there’s consensus and evidence, you can start to build and look into the next set of things. We know this now. Then what does that mean? What else can we find out? What else can we learn? That scientific approach, that openness to investigate ideas that we think are true and trying to verify whether they are or not. There’s much overlap between science and these sorts of inquiries into people’s beliefs. They are two sides of the same coin of inquiry, and we enjoy that. We engage in that exchange within this congregation, primarily through coalition building.

So, we work with a couple of coalitions. One of them is the Arizona Faith Network. It’s an interfaith group. There are folks from Christian churches, Hindu individuals, a couple of different Buddhist traditions, and UU people. It’s everybody. They do much good stuff. One of their organization’s projects is with heat relief.

Heat relief is a major cause of death in houseless communities or houseless populations in Arizona. That’s one of their big projects. They also do volunteer work, such as poll watching and other activities. But that organization and our participation with them give us a chance to hang out with these other faith leaders, get to know one another, and help our congregations interact with other people—whether they’re congregating with us or vice versa—in a way that’s positive for the entire community of Tucson, Arizona, or wherever the specific projects may be at the time.

Then another coalition that we’re in is a secular one, the Secular Coalition for Arizona. That is a multi-faith group, but many are non-theistic. There are some religious groups within the coalition now. That was only sometimes the case, but some religious groups have joined the coalition in the last couple of years. You know, once, their focus—because they’re a chapter or I don’t know their structure specifically—but I believe they were the first local branch of the Secular Coalition for America.

They do a lot of legislative work. They’ve had a lobbyist at the Arizona Capitol for years and advocate heavily in education. They stream a weekly education presentation, frequently on church-state separation and sometimes on education and other scientific topics that may not have a political bent. Lawmakers always find a way to put undisputed things into the legislature and turn them into political issues. It happens. 

Jacobsen: What do you believe?

OlivevilO: Science is the best method for learning things. We should have compassion for other people, animals, and living things. It doesn’t have to be limited to the animal kingdom.

The whole world is a web; we should have compassion and understanding of how things affect the real world and try to minimize the negative effects—large scale, small scale, interpersonal scale, everything. I’ll suppose that things flow from that. I deeply identify with the tenets covering many aspects of my worldview. They’re always subject to change; they can be updated. So it’s not that I need to say, “I believe this thing and its tenets over here.” I currently identify with them. My positions align with them. They cover many of my philosophy but can’t possibly cover all of a person’s philosophical views.

And let’s see. You asked the classic ACA question, “Why?” Yes. First, science has been shown to work consistently and reliably to advance and expand our knowledge. So, why? Because it works. It shows evidence that it does work.

Why compassion? How did we reword the Golden Rule? It was—he might have called it the Silver Rule or the Platinum Rule. “Don’t do to others as you would like done to you,” but don’t do as they want you to do unto them.

Jacobsen: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.” Consent, bodily autonomy, all these things. Non-harm.  So, someone may be a masochist, and they may want you to harm them. Still, the harm principle would say, “Well, at that point, that’s a limit where those two principles meet together, and you don’t engage in what they would.” Unless it’s some BDSM or something like that.

OlivevilO: If somebody wants to be harmed, I don’t have to harm them. I can withdraw myself from that. I don’t have to participate in that. But I can ask them, “Hey, what do you want?”

Jacobsen: And that’s a subtle point because when people critique it, they’ll assume, “Well, if that’s what they want, then you have to harm them.” Oh, no. But the thing is, it’s not only the harm principle and the platinum rule in terms of “Do what they would want done to you,” but also bidirectional consent. You can also say, “I don’t want this either,” and then not do it. So, it’s a bolt in the critique. You only sometimes know once you play with the words, see how they work, and determine objections.

OlivevilO: We talked about before with the unitarian and universalist principles and the humanist principles. The core ideas embedded in the tenets and these other principles have overlapped. There are multiple ways of saying the same idea. I’m saying a lot of the same ideas. They’re not necessarily in all those or entirely representative of those other principles. 

Jacobsen: Based on their principles since their start, what is the big takeaway for The Satanic Temple or The Satanic Temple Arizona?

OlivevilO: The big message, to boil it down to a single thing, is the resistance to arbitrary authority. You see that in the character of Satan, written in “Revolt of the Angels” and “Parse Lost.”

So, in “Paradise Lost,” Lucifer wages a big war against Heaven to try and take down this literal theocratic dictator who’s giving all these commands and making all these demands of the world, including humans. Satan sympathizes with humanity and stands up for them. That’s even in the Bible, with Satan saying, “No, you won’t die if you eat from this tree.” He’s providing accurate information to humanity, inspiring some of the fifth tenets of scientific understanding.

The struggle for ice comes from that Satanic spirit of being willing to fight in whatever fashion that fight takes. On that sidebar, the Satans undergo two different ways in their fight against God in the two books I mentioned. There’s the frontal assault in “Paradise Lost,” but in “Revolt,” Whisper decides not to take that frontal assault, not to overthrow because he recognizes that there’s a long game. Providing enlightenment and inspiring enlightenment in humanity is the long-game victory plan in that book. So, the struggle for ice, the second tenet, that’s in there too.

All the tenets come from various facets of Satan’s character. God tells humans various things—various sexual structures. “You can’t do that. You have to circumcise. You have to do all these things.” I see opposition to all these arbitrary rules. Each of them is Lucifer standing up to those rules and saying, “No, we don’t have to do that. You’ll be fine if you don’t.”

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it. Yes. I hope to get more interviews, and we can spread the good news.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Michael Sapienza, Colorectal Cancer and Fundraising

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/26

Michael Sapienza is the CEO of the Colorectal Cancer Alliance, a leading nonprofit dedicated to eradicating colorectal cancer through prevention, patient support, and research funding. A former professional musician, Sapienza was inspired to shift careers after losing his mother to the disease in 2009. He has since become an influential advocate for cancer awareness and research. Under his leadership, the Alliance has launched major initiatives, including LEAD FROM BEHIND and Project Cure CRC, aiming to raise $100 million for innovative colorectal cancer research. Sapienza’s mission-driven approach has significantly expanded screening efforts and enhanced patient support across communities.

Sapienza highlighted the urgency of colorectal cancer, which ranks as the second leading cause of cancer-related deaths in the U.S. and is particularly lethal for men under 50. He stressed the need for early screening and awareness, citing barriers like rural access and socioeconomic challenges that hinder screening rates. Sapienza emphasized underfunding in colorectal cancer research compared to breast cancer and discussed initiatives like Project Cure CRC and the LEAD FROM BEHIND campaign with Ryan Reynolds, which boosted screening rates. He noted Dr. Dammie Brown’s contributions and initiatives like BlueHQ for patient support and education.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Of the types of cancer that exist, how prevalent is colorectal cancer? How high is it on the priority list?

Michael Sapienza: Colorectal cancer is the second leading cause of cancer-related deaths for both men and women combined in the United States. Globally, it is also among the most common cancer killers.

Unfortunately, for individuals under the age of 50, it is the leading cancer killer for men and the second-leading cancer killer for women. While it is highly prevalent, it is also one of the most preventable cancers, especially for those eligible for screening.

Jacobsen: What are the factors that contribute to a higher risk of developing colorectal cancer?

Sapienza:. First, if you are 45 or older and have no family history of colon cancer, that is when you should start getting screened. Screening methods include colonoscopy, a fecal immunochemical test (FIT), or a Cologuard test. However, if you have a family history, screening should begin 10 years before the age at which your relative was diagnosed or at age 40, whichever comes first. For example, if my mother had been diagnosed at age 40, I would have started screening at age 30.

Regarding risk factors, signs to watch out for include blood in the stool, changes in bowel habits, unexpected weight loss, and similar symptoms. However, it is important to undergo screening before symptoms appear, as symptoms can indicate an advanced stage of the disease. Screening is essential for individuals age 45 andover.

Jacobsen: Now, why is it the leading cancer killer for men and only the second for women? What is the distinction?

Sapienza: At this time, we do not fully understand the reasons. This statistic refers to young-onset colorectal cancer, defined as cancer occurring in individuals under the age of 50. While it is increasing more rapidly in men under 50 compared to women, the exact reason is unknown. However, if you were born after 1990, you are twice as likely to develop colorectal cancer before the age of 50 compared to those born before 1990. This represents a significant increase in young-onset colorectal cancer, and the reasons for this rise remain unclear.

Potential factors include increased use of antibacterial products, overuse of antibiotics, and a higher intake of sugary drinks than vitamin-rich beverages common in previous generations. Although these are hypotheses, the trend is likely multifactorial. The increase is not confined to the United States; it is observed in many Western countries. We suspect it may be related to environmental factors, diet, and other contributing elements.

One aspect that may be contributing is the change in the human microbiome. Our microbiome evolves as we grow, influenced by exposure to different environments and substances. When altered, the microbiome can weaken our natural defenses, allowing polyps to develop in the colon. These polyps can become cancerous over time.

Jacobsen: Who is more likely to go in for screenings, men or women?

Sapienza: That is a good question. Generally, women are more likely to undergo screenings, but this varies depending on demographics.

So, unfortunately, Black men are much less likely to get screened than their white male counterparts. But Black females do get screened. It depends. However, the most underserved population is the Alaskan Natives.

Jacobsen: Why?

Sapienza: It is likely due to the distance in terms of access to endoscopy suites, where one can get a colonoscopy and education. But mainly, the rural aspect makes it difficult. There are still tribes in places without running water and other basic amenities, which contributes to the inability to have a colonoscopy or even another type of test.

Jacobsen: What about the economic differences and geographic differences? How do those factor into this as well?

Sapienza: It’s interesting to consider whether you live in a city in rural America or another country. There are different risk factors. In a rural area, it may require driving 100 miles to reach an endoscopy center for a colonoscopy. This means taking time off work, paying for gas, and other costs associated with the trip, which deters people from following through with screenings.

In the city, there are other reasons. Are you a single mom or dad who needs that income? You might not be able to do the prep the night before and get screened the next day, or you may need someone to give you a ride home or face a co-pay with your insurance. There are numerous barriers related to payment and insurance.

This is not just an issue for underserved Black Americans or Hispanic Americans. Many white rural Americans face similar challenges and barriers. Additionally, affluent, insured middle-class individuals aged 45 to 58 may be less likely to get screened. They are often busy, with children approaching college age or already in college, and may be in the prime of their careers. The Alliance works extensively to increase screening across these different populations.

Jacobsen: Why is there a target of $100 million through initiatives like Project CURE CRC?

Sapienza: Colon cancer is one of the most underfunded cancers. Suppose you compare the federal spending in the United States. In that case, breast cancer receives about $1.1 to $1.3 billion, whereas colorectal cancer receives $353 million. More people die of colorectal cancer than breast cancer, which highlights a significant funding discrepancy.

Jacobsen: And is the ecosystem of research in the colon cancer space comparable to that of breast cancer?

Sapienza: No, not at all. The entire ecosystem of research for colon cancer is nowhere near where breast cancer research is. For example, the Estee Lauder family donated $100 million in 1994, generating approximately $4 billion in various treatments and leading to 300 new FDA approvals. Meanwhile, colon cancer patients diagnosed with metastatic cancer are still receiving the same frontline treatment they did 20 years ago.

Our board decided to create an initiative to raise significant money and make a substantial impact. This led to the announcement of our $100 million commitment. In December, we gathered top scientists in Miami Beach to plan our proposal request (RFP). We launched the first RFP in March, announced our first grant in June, and funded about $10 million, with more applications and projects in progress. We are reconvening experts in Miami to explore innovative approaches and draw insights from other diseases.

Jacobsen: What is the “Lead From Behind” initiative?

Sapienza: Lead From Behind is a celebrity-driven initiative to break the stigma surrounding colorectal cancer and encourage people to get screened. We partnered with Ryan Reynolds’ agency, Maximum Effortand collaborated with Ryan Reynolds, a Canadian, on the initial campaign. He’s really helped us to bring awareness to screening and prevention.

Jacobsen: Ah, yes, he came straight out of our highest end Canadian famous Ryan manufacturing facility. 

Sapienza: He, along with Rob McElhenney from It’s Always Sunny in Philadelphia, participated by filming their colonoscopies. The campaign generated about 16 million video views and 3.8 billion media impressions.

We have continued with several related campaigns to spread awareness and keep the conversation going. This cultural outreach has proven effective; a study conducted by Axios and Zocdoc showed a 36% increase in colonoscopy appointments during the 100 days following the launch in 2022 compared to the previous year. We refer to this as the “Ryan Reynolds effect.” We were thrilled with the success and continued collaborating with him to raise awareness.

Jacobsen: Dr. Dammie Brown, Senior Vice President of Mission Delivery—what has she contributed?

Sapienza: Dr. Brown has been essential in overseeing our mission delivery programs, including screening navigation initiatives. She has extensive experience launching multiple screening programs in Africa and working on similar programs in Los Angeles. She also brings a wealth of expertise from her time at pharmaceutical companies worldwide, focusing on pipeline development and patient engagement.

Dr. Brown contributes significantly to the research component of Project Cure CRC and has deep knowledge of patient support. Her business experience has also enabled us to develop various products and improve our mission programs.

Jacobsen: What is BlueHQ, and what is Dr. Brown’s role with it?

Sapienza: BlueHQ is a portal for all our patients to access resources and support. Dr. Brown is collaborating closely with our Senior Vice President of Data Intelligence and IT to develop this platform, ensuring it is approached with a business-minded perspective. You may already know this from speaking with other organizations, but many nonprofits are run differently from businesses. They are often managed as traditional nonprofits but must operate more like businesses to be effective. We are focused on creating products that help people rather than on making a profit from them.

Dr. Brown’s experience managing profit and loss (P&L) in large companies like Genentech, Roche, and Novartis has been invaluable. This expertise is crucial for developing practical tools such as an app that can be integrated into a healthcare system. As you may know, the U.S. healthcare system, unlike Canada’s, is neither the most efficient nor the highest quality, and it certainly does not provide universal access.

Jacobsen: What should people understand about the reasons to support colorectal cancer research, and how can they get involved? Are there other types of cancer they should be mindful of for their screenings?

Sapienza: Yes, cancer is a major cause of premature death. First, if anyone has questions about screenings, they should visit quiz.getscreened.org. We have a quiz that helps people determine if they are at high risk. Second, if you have a family member who has been diagnosed with colorectal cancer, visit colorectalcancer.orgg for support resources, including treatment navigators, financial assistance, and psychosocial support. If you are interested in learnign more about Project Cure CRC, to donate or submit a proposal, visit colorectalcancer.org/cure.

It is essential to be aware of when you should be screened for various cancers, such as breast, colorectal, lung, and prostate cancer. The HPV vaccine is also crucial. Knowing when to be screened for these major cancers is vital, as each has specific age guidelines and screening recommendations.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts or feelings after today’s discussion?

Sapienza: No, I talked fast enough. Didn’t I?

Jacobsen: Your coffee kicked in. You’re in D.C., where people need to be verbally fluent. I love D.C. I visited for the first time when I came to the United States earlier this year. I traveled from Montreal to New York, Boston, D.C., Atlanta, New Orleans, Chicago, Los Angeles, San Diego, Irvine, and Seattle, among other cities. I have to say, D.C. has the best landscapers. I did landscaping at a horse farm and other places for several years–and I can tell you–they do mulching right.

Sapienza: That is so funny. That’s what you noticed? Where exactly?

Jacobsen: Downtown. I believe the Smithsonian Museum is there as well. I walked by there. There were some protests about the ongoing book bans—essentially another period of literary repression happening in the United States. I don’t panic too much because this tends to happen periodically in the U.S. I remember walking around and seeing that. 

Thank you so much for your time today.

Sapienza: Of course, Scott.

Jacobsen: It was good to meet you.

Sapienza: Good to meet you too. If you ever need anything or are in D.C., let me know.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. That would be fun.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Padideh Jafari on Family and Divorce Law

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/25

Padideh Jafari, Esq. is a seasoned Family and Divorce Law Attorney with over 22 years of experience, serving as the Founder of Jafari Law & Mediation Office. Established in 2003, her firm specializes in family law, including divorce, mediation, child custody, and domestic violence cases. Renowned for her skillful litigation and mediation, Padideh has a deep understanding of complex divorces, particularly those affected by stark differences in values, such as political and religious beliefs. Known for her compassionate approach and unwavering advocacy, Padideh strives to support families, protect children’s well-being, and guide clients through challenging legal processes with integrity and expertise.

Jafari shares insights on high-conflict divorces, emphasizing the importance of compromise, communication, and trust in marriages. She highlights the “silver bullet” tactic, where false allegations are used in divorce cases, often impacting men. Mediation and collaborative law are recommended for amicable resolutions, especially when children are involved. Financial issues are noted as a major factor in divorces, with wealthier clients navigating the process more smoothly than those less affluent. Padideh maintains her sanity through hobbies, faith, and setting boundaries, advocating for clients while prioritizing healing and child-focused outcomes.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Padideh Jafari, and we’re going to be discussing divorce and the law—first question: a quick backdrop. How did you become interested in this topic? Divorce isn’t necessarily anyone’s first topic of choice.

Padideh Jafari: Yes, I wanted to be a lawyer ever since I was 5 years old. I went through the process of schooling, graduated, and, of all things, became a divorce attorney. I wanted to help people. In divorce cases, you can make an impact, especially when children and child custody issues are involved. Right now, I’m involved with various men’s groups and learning about tactics known as “silver bullet” strategies. No one sets out specifically to become a divorce attorney, but sometimes it falls into your lap. I have the right temperament for it, I suppose, and I’ve been doing this for 22 years now.

Jacobsen: What is the silver bullet strategy? I’ve never heard of it before.

Padideh: The silver bullet strategy is a tactic where a spouse, typically the wife, may use false allegations and restraining orders against the husband to have him removed from the home. In California, for instance, such an emergency restraining order can last up to three weeks. However, the duration varies in other states. Men then have to respond to these allegations and prove their innocence, which can be more challenging than in the criminal system, where one is presumed innocent until proven guilty. When a domestic violence allegation is filed, the accused is often treated as if they are guilty. Judges frequently grant emergency restraining orders that last for several weeks, as seen in California.

If children are involved, and the father has been removed from the home, he is unable to see his children. This starts a process where the mother may then file for divorce while the father deals with false allegations. This is a significant issue being discussed in men’s groups as they see it happening to friends, brothers, and coworkers. These groups are engaging in conversations about how to prevent such scenarios.

Jacobsen: How do you mediate disagreements that seem irreconcilable yet find, legally, areas for potential resolution?

Padideh: If one spouse is highly conflicted, reconciliation is difficult because it requires both parties to acknowledge their role in the breakdown of the marriage. Without that acknowledgment, even the best therapist cannot help. Our law firm specializes in handling high-conflict, narcissistic divorces, where reconciliation is often not possible.

If someone is a narcissist or has a mental disorder or other Cluster B personality disorder, there’s no bridging that gap. An apology isn’t going to be enough. It takes changed behaviour, and the spouse needs to see that changed behaviour over a long period. This is particularly true in the areas where we work, like Los Angeles County and Orange County.

I have a background in psychology, so these cases are very important to me. I represent the underdog, the innocent spouse, as I like to call them, and the victim of these types of selfish, abusive marriages.

Jacobsen: How do differences of opinion play into this? For example, when one spouse is Muslim, and the other is Hindu, or one is Republican, and the other Democrat, or one is more traditionalist and the other more egalitarian—how do these differences play out when real-life issues arise?

Padideh: That’s a good question. I want to note that sometimes when people get married young, in their early twenties, they may have certain political views. I don’t know about you, but when I was in college at Loyola Marymount University, politics wasn’t something I was thinking about. As I grew older, my political views became more defined, and I became more vocal about them.

We often see that people who marry in their early or even mid-twenties experience changes in their political beliefs over time. If you’re in a marriage where your spouse’s political views do not evolve, or if they are not respectful of your political views, it comes down to respect. The main thing is that it’s not just about their overall political stance but also about specific political issues.

For example, suppose one spouse supports reproductive rights, and the other is anti-abortion. In that case, it’s going to be difficult to bridge that gap. Or, if one spouse is strongly supportive of LGBTQ+ rights and the other is not, disagreements can arise that are hard to reconcile. Immigration is another big topic, especially in California, where discussions are frequent. When one spouse supports immigration and the other opposes it, there’s going to be friction.

The key is respect, communication, and understanding that neither spouse should try to change the other. If both partners are respectful and willing to listen to each other’s views, they can stay together and grow as a couple. It’s when one or both dig their heels in the sand and refuse to budge that problems arise.

This is the only way. If someone says, “I’m for immigration” or “I’m against immigration,” and insists that their spouse must agree or else—that kind of request does not work in a marriage. Marriage is about, as I always say, compromise, communication, and trust. If any of these three are lacking, the marriage will not be on stable ground and is likely to fall apart.

One other point I wanted to mention is that sometimes a spouse may disagree with their partner but choose not to be vocal about it. That is even worse because it leads to resentment building over time. Resentment in a marriage will, without fail, lead to divorce 10 out of 10 times.

It’s better if spouses are opposites on an issue or political candidate but can talk and communicate about it. That’s healthier than silently thinking, Oh my gosh, I’m afraid I have to disagree with my spouse, but I’m not going to voice it because they’ll get upset.

Jacobsen: How does illness play into this as well? Something that may not be changeable in any immediate sense—how does that affect the long term, as part of life, as people age?

Padideh: People often forget their marriage vows, especially the part that says, in sickness and in health. We see an increase in what’s known as gray divorce, where individuals over the age of 50 are divorcing, and these cases often coincide with health issues coming to the forefront.

We hear things like, “I don’t want to stay with you; you have cancer; you’re going through chemo or other severe health problems.” Why does this happen? It ties back to the resentment I mentioned earlier. In healthy marriages, this type of abandonment doesn’t occur.

A great example is Pierce Brosnan and his wife. She had throat cancer, gained weight, and went through the entire treatment process. He didn’t care—he stayed by her side. People commented, saying, “This is Pierce Brosnan, Mr. 007, who could be with many women,” but he chose to stand by his wife. That’s a testament to honouring the vows “in sickness and in health.

As a divorce attorney, I see that many people forget those vows. For some, marriage is a contract, while for others, it’s a religious covenant between them and God, making them more hesitant to leave their spouse. For those who view it as a contract, they think, “Well, I can just get divorced; the grass is greener on the other side.”

With the influence of social media, people are constantly seeing what they believe is greener grass. They have instant access through Instagram, Facebook, TikTok, and dating apps, which reinforces the idea that they could find someone new. Whether they’d truly be happier with someone else is another question. Still, the perception that other options exist is always there.

Jacobsen: One of the things that frequently comes up in surveys as, if not the number one, then almost number one reason for divorce is finance. It’s a major factor in every marriage. There is evidence that people on the wealthier end in the United States might emphasize things like love and meaning. Meanwhile, those who are poorer tend to have a more realistic perspective rooted in evidence, which is finances, as it’s a much more immediate concern for them. So, when finance comes up as the top reason or close to it in surveys, it seems that poorer people are more realistic because financial stress is right in front of them.

How does finance play into divorce, and how does it impact divorce concerning different socioeconomic demographics in terms of stress levels?

Padideh: You’re right. Finances play a huge role in both marriage and divorce. If you and your spouse cannot be on the same page about finances, the marriage is not going to last.

Think about it. Suppose one person is constantly spending due to a shopping addiction or gambling, and the other spouse is careful with their money, saving and being thrifty. In that case, that conflict will eventually lead to divorce. I’ve seen this happen many times over my 22 years of practice. So, yes, less affluent people are more aware of financial stress. But here’s another thing to consider:

When people who have money or wealth get a divorce, the process is generally easier for them. They can afford separate attorneys, forensic accountants, therapists for themselves and their children, and even minors’ counsel to represent their children. The process can be smoother for those with financial resources. However, if you don’t have money, you may have to rely on self-help legal services or find a pro bono attorney.

So, finances not only affect the marriage itself but also play a significant role in the divorce process. It’s a two-pronged challenge: dealing with a financially irresponsible spouse or choosing to get divorced and face being a single-income household. We see many mothers going through this dilemma, feeling as though they are already single parents handling everything for their children. They must then consider if they can handle a divorce, knowing they might not receive substantial alimony or child support, especially if their husband is middle or lower income.

Financial issues manifest throughout the entire divorce process—before filing, during the marriage, after filing, and even post-separation. Single mothers, in particular, often struggle to make ends meet. They may need to turn to church pantries and other resources because they cannot make it alone.

So yes, finance is a significant issue and factor in both marriages and divorces.

Jacobsen: How can people going through a divorce—whether it’s gender-specific or not—use strategies to make things more amicable if that’s the ultimate goal? I know that a small percentage of people will use the divorce process as a form of punishment. In regular circumstances involving a high-stress event or process, how can things be made more amicable, healthier, and lead to at least a reasonably equitable resolution?

Padideh: What you mentioned is known as legal abuse. As high-conflict divorce attorneys in Los Angeles and Orange County, we see legal abuse frequently. It’s sometimes called financial abuse as well. To minimize this, I refer to it as the push and pull—where the spouses are pushing and pulling, with each wanting to win. Their egos are heavily involved because they’re now in the divorce process. The best approach is mediation.

Mediation can be done through a private mediator, where the couple works with one lawyer acting as the mediator. The mediator drafts all necessary documents and facilitates discussions, often via Zoom these days, to reach a resolution that benefits both parties. In California, if the couple opts for mediation, they may never have to step foot inside a courthouse. Unfortunately, mediation isn’t effective in cases involving high conflict or when one spouse is narcissistic, and the other is not.

A narcissistic spouse tends to use power, control, legal abuse, and financial abuse to punish the other spouse, particularly if they feel abandoned. In a selfish divorce, the narcissist always sees themselves as the victim, regardless of any wrongdoing on their part, such as infidelity.

That said, there are strategies for those who want to proceed amicably. Mediation and private mediation are options. Another option is collaborative law, which has become popular. When I started my practice 22 years ago, collaborative law was gaining attention, and I was part of that movement. In collaborative law, each spouse has their attorney, and professionals such as forensic accountants can be brought into meetings as needed. The two spouses and their attorneys sign an agreement not to go to court. If the process fails and the couple decides it’s not working, they have to find new attorneys.

In this scenario, signing that document increases the stakes, encouraging a win-win resolution for everyone involved. I always tell my clients that if they prioritize their child and are genuinely child-focused—not just claiming to be—they are more likely to choose mediation or collaborative law. This approach reflects a desire not to fight with the spouse, who is the mother or father of their child, in court. It creates a situation where the mediator helps frame the issues and asks, “How can both of you walk away with what you want?” Even if compromises are made, there is still peace of mind.

Parents need to remember that they will see each other again. I tell my clients that after leaving mediation or court, especially if it’s a litigated case, they will continue to interact. If they share a child, that other parent will be at every soccer match, gymnastics event, or swim competition and will be involved when the child needs a car, graduates, or has children of their own. You might think you’re divorcing them, but they remain part of your life.

So, I always tell my clients to keep their child’s best interest in mind. Children want peace. With my background in psychology, I can say confidently that children crave a peaceful environment.

Children do not want their parents badmouthing each other or fighting. Mediation and collaborative law can achieve that goal and provide a stable environment for the child.

Jacobsen: What about you? For those who are doing this work, how do they keep their sanity?

Padideh: I get asked that a lot, even by clients sometimes. As a divorce attorney, you’re either compassionate and empathetic, understanding the issues quickly—often after the first, second, or third meeting—or you are not. I tell my clients to keep their child first. Divorce is essentially the financial breakdown of a marriage, as it is a contract by nature.

Yes, emotions are involved, and I advise my clients to go to therapy. Some attorneys might say therapy is unnecessary, but I believe in healing and recovery. The statistic is that 86% of people who have been married and divorced get married again within five years. If they are going to remarry, it’s important they heal and recover from their previous marriage and divorce, gaining the ability to self-reflect, which is what a good therapist facilitates. A good therapist does not focus on the other spouse; they help the individual understand their part in the breakdown of the marriage.

In divorce law, especially in Los Angeles and Orange County, you find two types of attorneys: those who care and those who don’t. The ones who don’t care will file anything their client requests, may be sloppy, lack compassion, and might even exhibit narcissistic tendencies. They aim to win at all costs. If you ever see a divorce attorney advertise themselves as “shark” or a “bulldog,” steer clear. Winning at all costs is not the goal, and a good divorce attorney will tell you that nobody wins in a divorce. Every person involved—spouses and children—loses something.

Think about it. Everyone sacrifices something and ends up with a different lifestyle than they anticipated at the start of their marriage. To keep my sanity, I approach cases from a psychological perspective and choose my clients carefully. I always advocate for the innocent spouse or the one who has been victimized, championing the underdog. My faith helps me stay grounded, and I maintain perspective.

I also have hobbies, like horseback riding and hiking with friends, to break up the routine. Since COVID-19, working remotely has become common, but I make a point of shutting down all technology by seven or 7:30 in the evening, and I don’t work on weekends unless there is an emergency.

I tell my clients to keep things in perspective. If they are fighting over something they want so badly, I remind them it’s not worth it. They are paying me, and their spouse is paying their lawyer; they could buy the item new instead. It’s time to let go and move forward. Bringing anything with sentimental value from a toxic marriage into a new home is often better left behind.

I am rare in this space, as I said. There are my type of attorneys, and then there are the others. When we come together on a case, it’s like a battle because we handle divorce cases in the legal system in completely different ways.

Jacobsen: Padideh, thank you so much for your time today.

Padideh: I appreciate it. That’s fine. Thank you so much.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Cities’ Economies and Women’s Choices

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/24

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Women’s city choices are influenced by economic stability, health access, and safety. Top cities like Columbia, MD, offer high wages and low poverty rates, while cities such as Cleveland and Detroit struggle with high poverty for women. Entrepreneurship and diverse job sectors enhance urban life quality. Addressing the gender pay gap is crucial.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What economic factors impact women’s choice in the city?

Chip Lupo: Women’s choice of city is influenced by a combination of economic, health, and safety factors that directly affect financial stability and well-being. Cities that offer higher wages, lower unemployment, and better access to health care are typically among the most attractive.

For example, Columbia, MD, stands out with its high median earnings for women, along with strong economic conditions and safety measures. Cities with a higher percentage of women-owned businesses such as Anchorage, AK also create favorable environments for women to thrive economically.

Additionally, low female uninsured rates and long-life expectancies further contribute to a city’s appeal by enhancing overall quality of life and health outcomes for women.

Jacobsen: What are the best and worst cities for women?

Lupo: In 2024, Columbia, MD, Fremont, CA, and Huntington Beach, CA top the list of best cities for women, as each offer strong economic opportunities, high health care access, and safety. On the other hand, Jackson, MS, Gulfport, MS, and Brownsville, TX rank among the worst. These cities struggle with high unemployment, low wages, and limited access to resources that impact women’s well-being.

Jacobsen: What factors go into these separations between best and worst?

Lupo: The separations between the best and worst cities for women are driven by a combination of economic, health, and safety factors. High-ranking cities tend to offer higher median wages for women, lower unemployment rates, and better access to healthcare, which directly influence economic stability and quality of life.

For example, Columbia, MD, stands out for its high wages and low female poverty rates. At the other end of the spectrum, cities such Jackson and Gulfport, MS are saddled with higher poverty rates, limited business ownership opportunities, and inadequate health insurance coverage, all of which contribute to poorer outcomes for women.

Jacobsen: What cities are better and worse for women in terms of the poverty rate?

Lupo: When it comes to the poverty rate for women, cities such as Pearl City, HI, Overland Park, KS, and Fremont, CA offer the best conditions, with some of the lowest poverty rates for women in the U.S. These cities provide a combination of high wages and low unemployment, which contribute to a higher standard of living for women.

In contrast, cities like Cleveland, OH, Detroit, MI, and Gulfport, MS have the highest poverty rates for women, where women face significant economic challenges. The gap between the best and worst cities is stark, as poverty rates in Pearl City, HI, are seven times lower than in Cleveland, OH.

Jacobsen: What are wise types of jobs for women to search in the city environment?

Lupo: Urban areas offer strong job opportunities for women in fields such as healthcare, technology, finance, education, law, and media. These sectors not only provide stable, in-demand roles but also emphasize leadership diversity and career advancement. Choosing jobs within these industries can create pathways to successful and rewarding careers.

Jacobsen: Does the gender pay gap play into women’s decision-making for city choice?

Lupo: The gender pay gap significantly affects women’s choices on where to live. Since women earn only 84% of what men make, they may seek cities that offer better economic opportunities and support systems. Cities with higher median earnings, low unemployment, and reduced poverty rates among women, including Columbia, MD and Scottsdale, AZ, offer financial stability that can offset the gender pay gap. Moreover, cities that prioritize women’s health and safety, especially those with accessible healthcare and low uninsured rates, empower women to make choices that enhance their economic independence, security, and well-being.

Jacobsen: How does women’s entrepreneurship improve life quality for women in the city environment?

Lupo: Women’s entrepreneurship enhances quality of life in city environments by empowering women to achieve financial independence and secure leadership roles, which are often scarce in traditional workplaces. Cities that support women entrepreneurs offer more opportunities for women to generate income on their own terms, help reduce the gender pay gap, and foster innovation.

Furthermore, cities with robust networks for women entrepreneurs, such as Columbia, MD, and Fremont, CA, provide vital resources and infrastructure that not only bolster women’s economic standing but also contribute to their overall well-being and societal representation.

Jacobsen: How can local governments make cities better for women to live?

Lupo: Local governments can make cities better for women by focusing on economic opportunities, health, and representation. Supporting women-owned businesses and narrowing the pay gap boosts financial independence. Improving access to affordable healthcare and enhancing safety in public places directly affects quality of life. Finally, placing more women in leadership roles ensures policies reflect women’s needs and perspectives.

Jacobsen: Why is Columbia, MD ranked as the best city for women in 2024?

Lupo: Columbia, MD, ranks as the best city for women in 2024 because of its outstanding showings in economic, health, and safety categories. Most notably, Columbia offers financial empowerment and stability with the country’s highest adjusted median wages for women.

Additionally, its top-three ranks in both economic and health safety metrics mean women here enjoy robust job security, access to quality healthcare, and lower risks of poverty. This environment fosters opportunities for women to thrive, making Columbia a model city for supporting women’s economic well-being, physical health, and safety.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Chip. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Brent Atkinson, Couples Research Institute

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/23

Brent J. Atkinson, Ph.D., Dr. Atkinson is Professor Emeritus of Marriage and Family Therapy at Northern Illinois University. , and Director of Post-Graduate Training at the Couples Research Institute in Geneva, Illinois. He is the principal architect of Pragmatic/Experiential Therapy for Couples, an approach that translates new scientific findings about the brain into practical methods for improving relationships. Atkinson practices at the Couples Clinic in Geneva, Illinois.

Atkinson discusses integrating neurobiology and relationship science to improve couples’ interactions. He emphasizes the importance of individual skills for relationship success, noting how common issues like finances and communication can create conflicts. Atkinson highlights critical findings, such as the harm of contempt and the importance of resilience and compassion in partners. He explains reconditioning automatic responses through mindfulness and structured practices. Atkinson also touches on cultural and biological influences, addressing challenges in diverse relationship dynamics, including same-sex couples.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Brent Atkinson, a prominent expert on couples therapy. You are the principal architect of Pragmatic Experiential Therapy for Couples (PET-C), an approach that integrates neurobiology and relationship science insights to develop practical strategies to enhance relationships. In 1983, while completing your doctoral internship, you became dissatisfied with the conventional approaches to addressing the challenges people experienced in their relationships. Over the past four decades, as co-founder of the Couples Clinic and Research Institute in Geneva, Illinois, what have you found to be the main issues that couples generally face?

Dr. Brent Atkinson: A wide variety of issues can arise in relationships. The most common challenges are well-known, such as dealing with in-laws, managing finances, deciding how time should be spent, and balancing personal time versus time spent together. We work with couples facing a full range of issues.

Jacobsen: When you first experienced dissatisfaction in 1983, how did you envision integrating research and practice? Over four decades, significant advancements in research have taken place. Additionally, many researchers become increasingly interdisciplinary as they deepen their expertise. How has this trend evolved?

Atkinson: The past four decades have seen dramatic changes in my field. When I first started, the field needed a solid empirical foundation. Over the years, landmark studies have emerged. For example, John Gottman and his colleagues pioneered research that identified potential predictors of relationship success and secured federal funding to support their work. This funding enabled them to build a laboratory to observe couples’ interactions, collect physiological data such as heart rates and stress responses, and monitor behaviours. They even had couples stay in apartments fitted with video cameras in every room except the bathroom to analyze daily interactions.

They tracked participants over 15 years to see if their initial observations could predict relationship outcomes. Remarkably, they discovered that by measuring the presence or absence of certain core abilities, they could predict the fate of relationships with over 90% accuracy. This level of predictive accuracy is rare, even in medical science. For example, predicting lung cancer risk in chronic smokers does not reach this degree of precision. This groundbreaking research highlighted that some of the best studies in psychology were emerging from the field of relationships.

When I began, I was frustrated by the lack of empirical support for therapeutic methods. There were many theories, but more solid data was needed. Now, we have pinpointed a core set of abilities that research has shown to be essential. These are not optional skills—couples need to develop them to sustain healthy, long-term relationships, and we now know exactly what those abilities are.

We also know what the alternative behaviours are that do not work. This has become a fairly precise endeavour. I assist people by asking them questions and observing what is happening, specifically looking for the presence or absence of the necessary elements. 

It’s important to note that, contrary to popular belief, the most critical abilities are not “couple” but individual abilities. You cannot on your partner to help you with these crucial skills. In fact, you must execute these skills precisely when your partner makes it most difficult for you.

These essential skills are particularly important when you don’t like the way your partner is thinking or acting. Those who maintain healthy relationships tend to have a combination of toughness and tenderness that helps guide their partner. Unfortunately, most people do not possess these skills. Estimates suggest that only about one in four Americans has the full set of required abilities, which helps explain why the divorce rate remains around 50%. While it has dropped slightly in the past decade or two, many people who stay married are either content or simply making the best of their circumstances.

Jacobsen: What are these practical skills? How do they manifest for those who want a long-term relationship and know how to apply them effectively?

Atkinson: There are connection-related abilities that enable the fostering of deep friendships. Then, there are skills for navigating differences, which is usually usually where I begin with couples. Often, couples are so frustrated with one another that simple acts like holding hands or making eye contact can be difficult. The skills related to disagreements can be divided into two sets.

Atkinson: One category includes openness and flexibility skills. These involve choosing how to respond when disagreeing with your partner’s thoughts or actions. You can either assume your partner is wrong, unreasonable, or acting poorly, or you can suspend judgment. You might consider that you are not on the same page and that neither of you is necessarily wrong.

This tendency to judge a partner as being misguided, inferior, or out of line when they are not is known as erroneous fault-finding. Avoiding Erroneous Fault-Finding is one example of an openness and flexibility skill. Another is the ability to step back during disagreements and find something, even just partially understandable from your partner’s point of view. People who can do this are often headed in a positive direction in their relationship. These abilities are self-serving also: finding something reasonable in what your partner is saying greatly increases the chances that they will reciprocate by finding validity in your perspective.

The other set of skills pertains to a situation everyone encounters at some point: what happens when you feel that you’re being open and flexible, but your partner is not reciprocating? You’re putting in the effort, being as sweet as can be, but your partner remains closed-minded and inflexible. You’re trying your best, but it feels one-sided. Your partner may not seem to be trying at all.

So, what do you do? Unfortunately, there is much bad advice about this situation. Much of it is advice I grew up with—my father was a minister and would have told me to “take the high road,” to not “stoop to that level,” and to “be the bigger person.” However, the problem with this approach is that, among all the things researchers have found to be damaging to relationships, one of the worst is when one partner places themselves on a higher plane than the other, considering themselves more relationally adept, mature, or a better partner.

Jacobsen: So, what happens if you’re trying to be reasonable and your partner is not?

Atkinson: If you keep taking it without standing up for yourself and you’re trying to be the “bigger person,” it’s only a matter of time before you start feeling contempt toward your partner. And at that point, you become the one causing more harm than your partner, whom you’ve judged selfish or unreasonable. The second set of skills involves knowing how to stand up for yourself.  You require openness and flexibility from your partner. These standing-up skills only work if you’re willing to give openness and flexibility first. Still, it is often necessary to stand up without turning it into an attack.

In other words, you shouldn’t approach it with, “You’re such an awful person, so now I have to stand up to you.” That won’t get you anywhere. Instead, it’s more effective to have an attitude like, “I don’t blame you for wanting your way, but there are two of us, and we need to work this out.” That demonstrates a skilled way of standing up for yourself, or at least a part of that process.

Jacobsen: Do you find gender differences in how these skills are applied? For instance, do men and women in America tend to lean on different skills? Are they more effective in certain areas than others regarding handling disagreements?

Atkinson: There are differences. Regarding the skills I’m describing, there has been significant discussion about gender differences in behaviour and relationships. When it comes to conflict and handling disagreements, studies indicate that, in heterosexual relationships, women are more prone to what researchers call “harsh startups,” where they bring up a topic critically or abruptly.

Jacobsen: And what about men?

Atkinson: Men, on the other hand, are more prone to something equally problematic: they often struggle to accept influence from their female partners. While some men might appease their partners superficially, true acceptance of influence involves acknowledging, “My partner has a valid point,” rather than resisting, “I’m not going there.” This inability to genuinely accept influence can be just as damaging to the relationship as harsh startups.

Jacobsen: Are there differences in how people handle these skills?

Atkinson: Yes, there are some differences. Regarding what you mentioned, there is a write-up about my work in the Encyclopedia of Couple and Family Therapy. Early in my career, when this research was emerging, I was engaged with it. I was applying it in my life—I’m married and trying to figure out how to make things work smoothly.

We discovered that you can have perfect knowledge of what you need to do and be extremely precise in understanding but still be unable to implement it effectively. This is because when you most need these skills—when you disagree with how your partner is thinking or acting—your brain activates preprogrammed response systems, such as fight, flight, or freeze. However, there are more nuanced responses than just those, and in those moments, your rational, logical, conscious mind is often not accessible to prompt you to behave in ways that do not come instinctively.

I focused on helping people understand the needed skills in my practice’s first 10 or 15 years. I was disappointed that people couldn’t implement that skills when they became more knowledgeable. I realized that more than just education ws needed. While most people do not know the full range of behaviours that can harm relationships, having information alone is insufficient. Breaking long-standing habits requires reconditioning rather than just knowledge.

Jacobsen: How does reconditioning work?

Atkinson: It’s about developing new habits and repeating them frequently to become embedded in your nervous system and start to feel automatic. 

Jacobsen: Does mindfulness play a significant role?

Atkinson: Yes. Mindfulness is a foundational practice that reliably produces positive brain changes. It can reduce nervous system agitation, help people operate less anxiously, promote healthier living, and even contribute to a longer life. We recommend that everyone visiting our office begins mindfulness training, and now good online programs are available. While in-person classes have their advantages, online options are more accessible.

We take mindfulness a step further. Over the years, I’ve encountered individuals who practice mindfulness but are still easily triggered by their partners. We use mindfulness principles but adapt them for real-life application.

Jacobsen: I’ve heard of the term state-dependent learning. Is that relevant here?

Atkinson: Yes, it is. An automatic response pattern must be active when practicing a new behaviour. People need to feel frustration to practice managing it differently. If they only practice calming mental techniques when they are not upset, they will lose access to those techniques when they become upset.

Jacobsen: How do you help people practice this?

Atkinson: We have people engage in daily exercises. Let me start with one practice that we use in our office.

In any relationship, there tends to be one person who is more of a complainer and another who acts as the defender, positioned on the opposite side of the interaction. 

We ask the person who tends to be the complainer to use their phone, which they usually have with them wherever they go. When something happens that irritates them—whether their partner says or does something, or even when they’re upset just thinking about their partner not following through on something—we have them activate the voice recorder on their phone and act as if they are leaving a pointed voicemail for their partner.

We end up with recordings that capture their immediate reaction, or “canned attitude.” We then meet with their partner separately, without the complainer present, and play the recordings at a volume where the complaint or criticism is audible. We observe the partner’s nervous system response as they listen to these recordings and help them become aware of the typical, often counterproductive, thoughts that arise. We also guide them in noticing their physiological reaction.

Jacobsen: How do you motivate them to engage in this process?

Atkinson: Motivation is a significant challenge, as most people come into couples therapy more focused on wanting their partner to change rather than themselves. However, through the therapeutic process, we help individuals understand that their partner will become responsive to them when they develop the full set of needed relationship skills. People with these abilities both encourage and require their partner to treat them well over time.

Once we have a motivated individual listening to their partner’s complaints, we slow the process down. We help them first become aware of their automatic, knee-jerk reactions. Then, we brainstorm to create a practice script of thoughts and behaviors that would be more beneficial if they could replace the unhelpful automatic ones.

Jacobsen: What kind of techniques do you use for this reconditioning?

Atkinson: One effective technique involves a type of slow breathing I recommend called resistance breathing. The person takes a deep breath and then purses their lips to create resistance as they exhale. Studies show this technique helps lower heart rate and calms the nervous system. The aim is to interrupt the automatic responses that drive someone in the wrong direction when they disagree with how their partner is behaving.

This process must be repeated frequently, well beyond the scope of a typical weekly 50—or 60-minute therapy session. Daily practice is essential to recondition the nervous system, especially when the person is feeling upset. It’s about practicing to build new, automatic responses that can replace the old, unhelpful ones.

Another practice we use involves having a person reflect on past upsets with their partner. After an argument has passed, we encourage them to use that memory as a resource because most people can easily become upset again just by recalling a previous disagreement. The person revisits the memory and practices new reactions, going through the process of developing more constructive responses. What are your thoughts or reactions to what I’m describing?

Jacobsen: This is quite interesting. It sounds more grounded in a science-based approach, which was only sometimes emphasized in the past. There’s a strong focus on physiology and the tangible fact that the adult brain is capable of soft rewiring—it happens constantly. You mention the importance of pausing before forming new habits and how mindfulness practice can support these continuous pauses necessary for long-term change. This seems to be an intermittent cognitive process, predominantly a behavioural one, where the pattern must repeatedly change.

Atkinson: Yes, it’s a step-by-step process. Although we emphasize physiology and mental processing first, before communication, ultimately, the goal is to communicate differently with your partner. From decades of experience, we’ve found that people often learn techniques that seem great in theory, like phrasing things diplomatically, but they still internally hold negative thoughts or assumptions. Real progress lies in the internal process—what you tell yourself and your assumptions.

Over the past several decades, studies have shown that heightened physiological responses are not helpful during disagreements. While they are common, the best action is to take a break, calm yourself down, and then try to continue the conversation. So, while communication with your partner is important, addressing physiology and cognition is the first step.

Jacobsen: I want this series to focus less on the negative aspects of relationships and more on what can be done proactively. Of course, acknowledging problematic patterns is important, but only as far as it helps us understand what positive actions to take. You mentioned earlier that only 25% of people have the full skill set necessary for a healthy relationship. For those who lack these skills, what are they typically doing wrong, and what can they do to improve?

Atkinson: There are a few significant pitfalls that people often fall into. Let’s start with two major ones. Some behaviours harm relationships, and it doesn’t take a relationship expert to recognize them. Physical violence, threats of violence, and infidelity (in relationships where there’s an agreement to be faithful) are clear examples. Some couples may have different agreements regarding fidelity, but violating that agreement is damaging for those who do. Other behaviours include lying and speaking negatively about your partner behind their back.

These are obvious issues; we refer to them as the “heavy hitters” because they can do significant damage with one action. However, the big news in relationship science over the past 40 years is recognizing a whole other category of destructive behaviours that are often more subtle. These include patterns that might not seem severe on the surface but have a cumulative negative impact over time.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on these types of behaviours?

Atkinson: Yes. Many people are surprised to learn that certain behaviours they grew up with damage relationships. 

One example I mentioned earlier is erroneous fault-finding—acting as if your partner is doing something wrong when they aren’t. It’s important to understand that approximately 69% of partner conflicts are rooted in basic personality differences. These are differences in values or priorities where there isn’t necessarily a “right” or “wrong.” Research has shown a fairly wide range of ways to have a successful relationship.

Other damaging behaviours include criticism, dismissiveness, defensiveness, acting superior, and failing to stand up for yourself when necessary—only to blame your partner for being selfish or controlling.The ability to respectfully stand up for oneself is as vital to a healthy relationship as avoiding selfishness, but that isn’t widely known.

There are two major categories here. First, there are the “heavy hitters” I mentioned earlier—things like physical violence, threats, infidelity, and lying. These can quickly ruin a relationship, and they have no grace period. For example, you can’t cheat on your partner and slowly phase out the other relationship while expecting everything to be fine. The trust is already broken.

On the other hand, there is a grace period for every day “disagreement-related offenses.” These subtle, cumulative offenses create a “death by a thousand paper cuts” effect. In struggling relationships, you often see the heavy hitters andthese everyday offenses at play.

Jacobsen: What happens once couples recognize and address these negative patterns?

Atkinson: The first step in therapy is often to help each partner become aware of how they disrespect each other and begin treating each other with more respect. We can move forward once we reach a baseline where antagonism and contempt have been reduced.

But it’s essential to remember that most of us don’t get married to avoid conflict. We get married because we want the good stuff—to feel cared for, to know we are the most special person in the world to someone, and to feel that our partner enjoys spending time with us. So, while much therapy is focused on increasing respect and reducing negative interactions, the ultimate goal is to cultivate a positive, fulfilling relationship where both partners feel loved and valued.

We want people to have fulfilling relationships. We often see that partners have different ideas about how much connection is enough. This is a subtle yet common issue. We often see one partner who feels dissatisfied and has a history of complaining that their partner isn’t available enough. Meanwhile, the other partner feels content, saying, “I’m satisfied with our connection.” This can lead to thoughts like, “My partner seems kind of needy—maybe they need more friends or something like that.” Essentially, the partners have different levels of desire. One partner wants more connection, and the other feels satisfied with the current level.

The partner who wants more togetherness wishes their mate would be more motivated to connect more frequently. However, how they often try to inspire that connection tends to push the partner further away. For instance, globally, people often criticize their partner for not being motivated enough to connect. This approach has never been successful in human relationships. It reliably has the opposite effect: the partner may comply to avoid criticism, but this is not fulfilling for the person seeking connection—they want genuine, heartfelt engagement.

On the other hand, the partner who feels satisfied often tries to convince their mate that their expectations are too high or that they’re being too needy. This approach also backfires, making the other person feel anxious or angry.

Over the years, we’ve found that dropping judgment about the other person’s level of desire for intimacy is crucial. We’ve also studied how people who successfully spark interest in their partners do so. We begin by coaching each partner on strategies to get more of what they want without pushing the other away. Gradually, they start to move toward each other.

For some people, their brains don’t naturally put them in a state conducive to connection, especially if their partner has a robust desire for togetherness. They can go through the motions of being warm or tender but often without true satisfaction for their partner. The same brain we rewire to change reactions during disagreements can also be trained to produce the moods necessary for a healthy connection. Through daily practices, people can prime their brains to naturally put them in the mood for connection more often.  Throughout therapy, we involve both partners in these practices.

Jacobsen: What cultural factors contribute to pressures hindering long-term relationship success?

Atkinson: Cultural factors play a significant role in shaping how people approach relationships. Societal norms can create pressures to behave in ways not conducive to building strong, lasting partnerships. For example, the idea that needing connection is a weakness can lead people to suppress their desires or view their partner’s needs as excessive. Cultural expectations around independence, gender roles, and emotional expression can also push individuals into patterns that ultimately undermine their relationships. Understanding and addressing these pressures is an important part of therapy, as it helps individuals develop healthier, more authentic ways of relating to each other.

Jacobsen: Over the last 40 years, have you noticed any American cultural trends that have contributed to relationship challenges, either increasing or decreasing?

Atkinson: Absolutely. Americans are known for their hustle-and-bustle lifestyle, being in a constant “doing mode” rather than a “being mode,” as mindfulness advocates describe it. This fast-paced way of life puts people on a treadmill that can lead them to pass by their partner without truly connecting. One partner might say, “Hey, how about some downtime? How about a kiss?”. At the same time, the other is preoccupied, thinking, “The wolves are at the door—I’m trying to keep everything afloat here. I don’t have time for footsie or a kiss.” This pace of life often prevents people from slowing down, sitting with their partner, paying attention, and enjoying the little moments.

The cultural climate, not just in the U.S. but globally, has also been influenced by the level of contempt we see in everyday interactions, especially in the media. This pervasive attitude can seep into relationships and be highly destructive. Even short of outright contempt, there is a cultural assumption that someone must have done something wrong if you’re upset. This mindset overlooks the reality that there can be many equally valid perspectives depending on personality and preference, which sets people up for conflict.

Jacobsen: Are there differences based on cohorts, such as people in their twenties versus those in their thirties or forties, when they first partner up? And what about those who partner up for the second or third time?

Atkinson: Yes, these factors do come into play regarding the stability, longevity, and health of relationships. Regardless of when people partner up, there tends to be a rough patch around the seven-year mark—hence the term “seven-year itch.” Another difficult period often comes between 16 and 20 years, which can coincide with the empty-nest phase for some couples. This pattern holds true whether someone partners up in their twenties, thirties, or beyond.

However, getting married or partnering up in one’s early twenties can be particularly challenging because people often undergo significant changes. The early twenties are full of growth and personal development, which can lead to shifts in values and goals. Additionally, there’s the well-known dynamic where opposites often attract in relationships—someone who is open and expressive may be drawn to a strong, silent type. Initially, this can be exciting and appealing, but those differences can become tension sources over time. What was once intriguing can end up being what drives partners apart. So, while early attraction to opposites can be alluring, it can also become challenging over time.

The qualities that initially seem captivating can become friction points as the relationship progresses. Understanding and navigating these differences is essential for maintaining a healthy, lasting relationship.

Jacobsen: Do opposites attract, do similars attract, or is it somewhere in between?

Atkinson: Yes, that’s a great question. When it comes to demographic variables such as socioeconomic status, religion, and other cultural factors, similars attract. There’s data to support that. However, opposites are often attracted when we look at deeper, more fundamental aspects—especially biological ones. Each of us has a nervous system that seeks homeostasis in unique ways, and what is calming for one person’s nervous system may be agitating for their partner’s.

Nature often prefers diversity, so when it comes to biological and neurological traits, opposites tend to attract. For example, someone might calm themselves by reaching out to others when stressed, calling a friend and saying, “You won’t believe what just happened to me.” On the other hand, another person’s first response to stress might be, “I need space. Give me a moment to process what’s going on.” These two types are often drawn to each other. But when stress hits both simultaneously, it’s a setup for conflict: one person wants closeness, while the other needs space. Neither is doing anything wrong, but their nervous systems respond differently.

Another example is how some people thrive on structure and predictability, finding it calming, while others find it suffocating, like being trapped in a straitjacket. People tend to be attracted to partners who differ in these areas, too. The more biologically rooted the differences are, the more likely people are drawn to partners who are different from themselves.

This idea has been replicated many times, but the initial study that popularized it was the “sweaty T-shirt study” conducted in Switzerland. In this study, men wore the same T-shirt for three days in August to get it good and sweaty and then sealed the shirts in Ziploc bags. Women were asked to come in, sniff the shirts, and rate them from “disgusting” to “I kind of like that; it’s manly.” The study found that women were more attracted to the scent of men whose immune system genes differed, suggesting an evolutionary preference for diversity.

While shared values and cultural background can help partners relate to one another and establish common ground, biological differences can create that initial spark and attraction. This blend of similarity and difference makes relationships intriguing and complex.

It also reflects nature’s wisdom in the idea that opposites attract; diversity in immune system genes can enhance the overall robustness of a couple’s offspring and improve their chances of thriving. While being with someone different from you has challenges, it can lead to a stronger partnership as you navigate life together.

Jacobsen: Are there patterns in communication styles, down to the choice of words or their frequency, that impact relationships? For example, do self-referential words like “I,” “me,” or “mine” affect relationships? Has this been studied?

Atkinson: Yes, different therapeutic approaches often encourage using specific words, such as “I” rather than “you,” to foster better communication. These “I statements” can help prevent blaming and promote self-responsibility in discussions. However, researchers have found that partners only sometimes use these statements in real-life, healthy relationships. While they are useful in therapy, they are not required for successful relationships. On the other hand, certain words to avoid include put-downs or phrases that convey contempt.

Jacobsen: That makes sense since words play such a fundamental role in communication. Although much communication is nonverbal, words can significantly impact, especially during intense moments. While words can be powerful, people may only focus on word choice in the heat of a moment in particularly memorable exchanges. Researchers who place cameras in couples’ homes to observe their interactions have likely cataloged language use to some extent. Still, it has yet to be the primary focus of most research. 

Atkinson: Using subjective, first-person statements is only sometimes prominent outside of a therapeutic context.

Jacobsen: So, is it more about observing emotions and nonverbal cues?

Atkinson: Yes, researchers have learned to focus on the emotions each partner experiences and how they are communicated, which is often done nonverbally. However, there are verbal correlates. For example, here’s a surprising finding: we initially assumed that partners who were easily upset would struggle in relationships. It made intuitive sense that frequent emotional upsets would be detrimental, leading to larger conflicts over time. However, we found that there are happily married or partnered couples where both people get upset often. When researchers coded their interactions, we saw that their ability to handle these emotions constructively, rather than the frequency of the emotions themselves, played a significant role in the health of their relationship.

Researchers have indeed developed elaborate coding systems for emotions. Surprisingly, anger does not correlate with poor relationship outcomes, but disgust does. You can be angry—even seething with rage—which isn’t inherently bad. You might think or say, “I’m so mad at you right now,” and that’s different from expressing disgust or contempt, such as, “You and your whole family—I should have known what to expect.” The latter statement is full of contempt and disgust.

So good old-fashioned anger isn’t necessarily damaging. Anger can inhibit a person from engaging in the productive parts of a conversation—like finding something understandable in their partner’s point of view—but it’s not inherently harmful. Researchers have found that couples where both partners were labelled “volatile” can still do well if they are good at repair. These couples may express anger but engage in reparative behaviours and approach their next conversation with less anger.

However, disgust is different. A person expressing disgust tends to use name-calling and put-downs. It’s not just the words themselves; the feeling of disgust drives these words and causes harm. The impact of that underlying contempt is most damaging to the relationship.

Jacobsen: That’s a fascinating distinction. What about research into open relationships or relationships among different sexual orientations, such as those involving gay men and lesbian couples? How do these factors influence how they can achieve healthy, long-lasting relationships? Are the core patterns the same?

Atkinson: Studies indicate that the foundational patterns needed for healthy relationships are pretty much the same across different types of partnerships. However, the challenges they face can differ. For instance, gay and lesbian couples often deal with unique stressors related to extended family acceptance and societal judgment, which may not be as prominent for heterosexual couples. Decisions about whom to come out to and how to navigate social acceptance can add complexity.

Despite these stressors, the basic skills for handling disagreements and fostering positive communication apply universally. These skills are relevant in romantic partnerships and all types of relationships, including international relations, where disputes can arise. It’s interesting to see how these abilities extend beyond couple dynamics to broader relational contexts.

To reiterate, the biggest finding—the most destructive factor researchers have identified—is contempt. When someone perceives their partner as talking down to them or conveying superiority, it can evoke deep rage and resentment. This is often the death knell for a relationship if it isn’t addressed early in therapy.

If contempt cannot be corrected, we tackle it within the first few weeks of therapy. With intervention, the relationship is likely to recover. Fortunately, we can often guide couples to rewrite their narratives about their relationships, moving toward a healthier dynamic.

That concept extends beyond romantic relationships. It’s interesting when we consider societal contexts, too. For example, “America is the greatest nation in the world” is a controversial statement. The truth of it may not only be debatable but the statement can also convey an unintended sense of superiority to the rest of the world. That mindset can create unnecessary friction, similar to how contempt damages relationships.  The idea is that contempt and superiority impacts relationships at all levels, not just marriages or partnerships.

Jacobsen: Do you have any favourite relationship quotes for a lighter closing?

Atkinson: Oh, you’ve put me on the spot! I’m drawing a blank now, but I’d be happy to think of some and email them to you later. It was a pleasure speaking with you, Scott. 

Jacobsen: Thanks so much for your time today. 

Atkinson: Thank you, and have a great day. Goodbye.

Relationship Quotes from Atkinson:

Love cannot be negotiated.  It must be inspired.

The way you respond to the worst in your partner largely determines whether you’ll get something better in the future or not.


You can’t make your partner change; you can only make it more inconvenient for them to stay the same.

Effective partners know how to stand up for themselves without putting their mates down.  

People who succeed in their relationships require that they be treated with respect while making it very easy for their partners to do so.

Attempts to persuade your partner to be reasonable when your partner hasn’t the least bit of interest in doing so will likely fuel your partner’s unreasonableness.

The unwillingness or inability to stand up for yourself and require equal regard without making a big deal of it when your partner is being selfish or controlling is just as harmful to the relationship as is your partner’s selfish or controlling behavior.

All of us want connection with our mates, but not all of us need the same type or amount.

Criticizing your partner for not putting enough time and effort into connecting with you will make them want to connection with you even less.

Biting your tongue isn’t enough (Criticism is communicated nonverbally every time you believe your partner is doing something wrong or performing in a sub-standard way).

Most people who are in distressed or depleted relationships are trying to get more responsiveness from their partners in ways that are highly predictive of partner unresponsiveness.

If you want responsiveness and caring from your partner, then you need to learn to think and act like people who almost always get responsiveness and caring from their partners (and you need to stop thinking and acting like people who rarely get the kind of responsiveness and caring they’d like to have.”

It’s not how much time is spent connecting that determines how good the relationship is — it’s the quality of the connection. High quality happens when both people are equally invested in connectedness. When one partner is more invested than the other, quality drops.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Matthew Johnson, Life Transitions and Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/22

Dr. Matthew Johnson is a researcher specializing in the development of couple relationships. He is a co-investigator of the Edmonton Transitions Study (ETS), a longitudinal study tracking Edmontonians’ life transitions from ages 18 to 50, with a focus on mental health, marital timing, and subjective well-being. Additionally, Dr. Johnson analyzes data from the German Family Panel (pairfam), exploring topics such as household dynamics, partner support, and immigrant couple relations. His work bridges developmental psychology and relationship science, offering insights into the evolving dynamics of intimate partnerships. Dr. Johnson welcomes dedicated graduate students eager to contribute to the study of couple relationships.

Johnson shared insights from this 40-year longitudinal research on over 900 Edmontonians, examining life transitions, including marriage and parenthood. Findings reveal that high-quality relationships positively impact mental health, with lasting love and stability being achievable norms. Sacrifice within relationships fosters mutual commitment and satisfaction, while poor mental health can strain partnerships. Immigrant couples, despite challenges, develop similar relationship trajectories to native-born couples when matched socioeconomically. Trends like declining marriage and birth rates align with broader Western patterns. Johnson emphasizes that addressing relationship challenges proactively is vital, as unresolved issues often persist or worsen.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Matt Johnson, co-investigator for the Edmonton Transitions Study, alongside Drs. Harvey Krahn and Nancy Galambos. This longitudinal study follows over 900 Edmontonians across eight waves, ages 18 to 50. Dr. Johnson, what do the findings reveal when examining these transitions, particularly from committed intimate unions to raising children?

Dr. Matthew Johnson: The Edmonton Transitions Study is a comprehensive examination of human development. It began in the mid-1980s with 983 high school seniors from the Edmonton area. These participants have been followed up to eight times over 32 years.

Initially, the study focused on transitioning from school to work during a particularly challenging time. The mid-1980s recession in Canada brought record-high youth unemployment rates, sparking significant interest in how young people would navigate the transition into a hostile job market with limited opportunities. The original intention was for the study to be short-term, tracking participants from age 18 to 25, the critical period for entering the workforce.

As research interests evolved, the study expanded. By the late 1990s, the research team, now including new members, decided to follow up with participants again. At age 32, the study resumed, broadening its scope to include family and personal life, education, and employment. Subsequent waves of data collection occurred in 2010, at age 43, and in 2017, when participants were 50. Plans are underway for the next wave, scheduled for 2025, at which point participants will be, on average, 58 years old. This will increase the study duration to 40 years.

The Edmonton Transitions Study has produced approximately 90 scientific publications, contributing valuable insights into employment, mental health, relationships, and family dynamics. Longitudinal studies of this scope and duration are rare, particularly in Canada, making it one of the longest-running studies of its kind.

Jacobsen: What initially drew you to this study, and what findings stand out most?

Johnson: My specific area of expertise is relationships, which drew me to the study. It offers a unique opportunity to examine how relationship dynamics evolve over decades, from formative years in late adolescence and early adulthood (ages 18 to 20) to midlife partnerships. Some of the most compelling findings relate to mental health. For example, individuals who experienced improvements in mental health between ages 18 and 25—such as reduced depression, better anger management, and increased self-esteem—tended to report higher-quality intimate relationships in midlife. These relationships were marked by joint decision-making, mutual support, and greater confidence in their longevity.

Jacobsen: How do individuals’ projections of their future well-being compare to the reality of their subjective well-being decades later?

Johnson: When considering how individuals project their well-being into the future and later reflect on it, an intriguing question arises: how accurate are these projections in shaping subjective well-being decades later? While we have not specifically examined this question, we know that memory bias significantly influences retrospective well-being assessments.

Jacobsen: When asking people about their past experiences, how do you account for the potential bias in their recollections?

Johnson: That’s a great point. When people reflect on the past, their memories are often biased. To address this, we focus on what’s happening in the present. For example, we ask questions like, “How depressed do you feel now?” or “How able are you to control your anger now?” This allows us to capture their experiences rather than relying solely on retrospective accounts.

That said, in our most recent survey, we also asked participants to forecast their future—what they’re most looking forward to as they near retirement. This aligns with your question: Are people’s forecasts about their future well-being accurate, or do they exhibit similar biases to those present when reflecting on the past?

Jacobsen: How does marital timing predict future subjective well-being?

Johnson: One key area we’ve studied is how the timing of life transitions—such as marriage—affects future outcomes. Cultural and societal norms often dictate when people “should” accomplish major milestones: finishing education, starting a career, moving out of their parent’s home, getting married, and having children.

When we examined the timing of marriage, we categorized individuals as transitioning early, on time, or late relative to their age group. Our findings revealed that transitioning to marriage on time or late is associated with better future well-being than transitioning early. Early transitions to marriage often occur before individuals have established key aspects of their adult lives, such as completing education or settling into a career. These premature transitions frequently coincide with parenthood and other responsibilities, setting people on a trajectory that may not be as fulfilling in the long term.

Jacobsen: What about individuals who never make these transitions, such as marriage or parenthood?

Johnson: A population segment only sometimes follows the traditional life course. In the Edmonton Transitions Study, some participants have not married or had children, and we’ve also looked at these cases.

We found that, compared to those who did not marry, individuals who got married reported greater happiness, were less depressed, and had higher self-esteem in midlife.

Relationship science more broadly supports this, showing the protective effects of being in a relationship, particularly a high-quality one. Of course, selection effects are at play—people who enter high-quality relationships often differ meaningfully from those who don’t. These differences may partially explain why being in a relationship is associated with better outcomes.

Jacobsen: Can you explain the balance between selection effects and the protective effects of being in a relationship, particularly in terms of how it influences mental health?

Johnson: Absolutely. There is a selection component—people who form healthy relationships often already have better career paths, health, and well-being. These qualities make them more attractive as partners. However, the protective effect of being in a relationship is also robust and enduring. Being in a relationship provides insulation against life’s hardships and can manifest in various ways, such as improved mental health.

Jacobsen: What about immigrant couples? How do their relationships develop over the long term, and what challenges do they face in adapting to a new country?

Johnson: That’s a fascinating question. The immigration process represents a significant upheaval involving adapting to a new culture, potential language barriers, and substantial life changes. While I didn’t examine this through the Edmonton Transitions Study, I did explore it using data from another source: the German Family Panel.

The German Family Panel is the largest study of family relationships worldwide. It began with 12,000 participants covering three generations, including their partners, children, and parents. This study followed these families over 14 years and provided a unique opportunity to examine immigrant couples.

In this context, I could compare immigrant couples to native-born couples living in Germany. We matched them based on education, income, socioeconomic status, and relationship length. By creating these matched comparisons, we could isolate differences that might be specifically due to immigration rather than disparities in wealth, career type, or education levels.

We found that, for the most part, immigrant couples developed their relationships similarly to native-born couples. Despite the challenges of adapting to a new culture, immigrant couples demonstrated comparable relationship trajectories when matched on key socioeconomic factors.

Jacobsen: How do immigrant couples compare conflict, satisfaction, and self-disclosure to native-born couples?

Johnson: The amount of conflict they faced was comparable, their satisfaction levels were similar, and the types of self-disclosure they engaged in were very similar. While there were a few differences, the bigger takeaway was the striking similarity between immigrant and native-born couples.

One important caveat to that study is that most immigrant couples had moved to their new country several years prior. We might observe more pronounced differences if we studied and followed newer immigrants over time. However, I am aware of no studies to collect longitudinal data on newly immigrated couples.

Jacobsen: Regarding longitudinal data, what trends have you observed over the decades, particularly in Canada, such as declining marriage and birth rates?

Johnson: Yes, these are important trends. While I have yet to study Canada in detail specifically, Canada broadly follows trends seen in other Western nations, such as declining marriage rates and decreasing birth rates. Canada does have some unique characteristics compared to its peers, particularly its high proportion of immigrants and larger Indigenous population compared to other G7 nations. However, the overall trends of lower birth and marriage rates align closely with those of Western countries.

Jacobsen: Do factors such as political affiliation, religious beliefs, or socioeconomic and educational differences play a smaller or larger role in subjective well-being within marital situations?

Johnson: Great question. Certainly, beliefs, values, socioeconomic status, and education influence how relationships unfold over time. While I have yet to examine this in detail in my work, the broader field of relationship science has explored these dynamics.

As politics have become more polarizing, these factors may play a larger role. However, most couples tend to partner with individuals who are more similar to them than different. Even when there are apparent differences, such as political affiliations, deeper analysis often reveals shared underlying values, philosophies, and beliefs. Still, differences do arise and need to be negotiated within relationships. If managed well, they can avoid becoming liabilities.

Jacobsen: How significant are social and personality factors, such as reciprocity and a willingness to support or sacrifice for a partner, in determining the health and longevity of a relationship?

Johnson: Sacrifice is a particularly interesting relationship process because it’s a potent signal of commitment. When one partner sacrifices for the other, it demonstrates a willingness to prioritize the relationship over individual needs. This kind of reciprocity—supporting each other during stressful moments and being willing to make sacrifices—plays a critical role in the health and longevity of the relationship. Partners that consistently demonstrate these qualities tend to have stronger, more enduring marriages.

Jacobsen: Sacrifice seems to play a significant role in relationships. Why do you think it’s so impactful?

Johnson: Sacrifice is impactful because it signals commitment. Why else would someone forego their interests unless they saw a future with their partner? When one partner sacrifices, the other often reciprocates, creating what scholars call a “mutual cyclical growth process.” In this process, one person’s sacrifice can encourage the other to do the same, fostering a positive cycle of mutual regard.

This is noteworthy because most cycles in relationships tend to be negative. For example, couples can fall into patterns of negative interactions—arguing, having conflict, or even recurring disagreements about specific topics. These patterns often spiral downward. Sacrifice, however, stands out as an exception. It’s a process that partners can implement to promote positive behaviours and strengthen their relationship.

When sacrifices are made and maintained over time in a balanced way—avoiding a “tit for tat” mentality or becoming overly one-sided—they are linked to more satisfying relationships and higher commitment. A benevolent, mutual sacrificial process is a hallmark of strong, enduring partnerships.

Jacobsen: What about the link between marital satisfaction and mental health? Is marriage overall conducive to long-term mental health?

Johnson: There are certainly some protective effects of marriage on mental health, but the quality of the marriage is far more important. If someone asked me whether it’s better to get married or to be in a good relationship—marriage or not—I would say the bigger effects come from relationship quality. Being in a high-quality relationship is conducive to good mental health. It reduces stress and brings numerous other benefits.

Conversely, poor mental health can strain relationships. The two domains—mental health and relationship quality—are mutually reinforcing. There are even treatment protocols for depression, anxiety, and other mental health problems that involve both partners in addressing the issue. This underscores how closely linked these areas are.

Jacobsen: What is the average age for first marriage in Canada for men and women?

Johnson: Canada’s average age for first marriage is now over 30. While I don’t know the exact numbers, it’s around 31 for women and 33 for men. However, you’d need to verify that with a reliable source like Statistics Canada—they provide precise answers to these questions [Ed. Information from StatsCan here: https://www150.statcan.gc.ca/n1/daily-quotidien/221114/cg-b006-eng.htm.]

Jacobsen: Do you have any insights on why people typically get married in Canada?

Johnson: No, I don’t have specific data on that. However, societal norms, expectations, and family influences play a significant role. Marriage is a part of our culture, and it’s also widespread across human societies. Couples often formalize their intimate unions in some shape or form, and in this context, we call it marriage.

Jacobsen: Matt, what is the big message from your research on intimate partnerships over the decades?

Johnson: Great question. I was invited to give a talk about a year ago, and I reflected on this extensively. When I look across all the work I’ve done—and situate it within the broader context of relationship science—the key takeaway is this:

For the past 15 years, the field has shifted from viewing relationships as constantly growing, changing, and reacting to life’s challenges to recognizing that many relationships remain relatively stable over long periods. This isn’t to say couples don’t face challenges, but most can navigate these and maintain happy, satisfying relationships.

I teach a course on intimate relationships at the University of Alberta. I start by showing students data supporting this idea. My goal for the semester is to convince them—based on scientific evidence—that lasting love is possible. Studies show that satisfying relationships can and do last for most couples for decades. That, to me, is a central message: lasting love is possible.

Another important takeaway is that stability is more common than change. If there are issues in your relationship, they won’t naturally resolve themselves. The more natural course is for those issues to persist or even deteriorate. Some researchers argue that deterioration is more common than improvement. Therefore, if things aren’t great, you need to take action to improve them. On the flip side, if your relationship is in a good place, it’s reasonable to expect it will stay that way—so long as you continue doing the things that keep you close, connected, and able to adapt to life’s challenges.

Jacobsen: Matt, thank you so much for your time today. I truly appreciate it.

Johnson: My pleasure. Take care, Scott.

Jacobsen: Sounds good. Take care, Matt. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Wendy Walsh, Gen Z Off Dating Apps

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/21

Known as America’s Relationship Expert, Dr. Wendy Walsh is an award-winning television journalist, radio host & podcaster, and the author of three books on relationships and thousands of print and digital articles. More than 1.5 million people follow her sage advice on social media. She holds a Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology and teaches in the Psychology Department at California State University Channel Islands and has been the host of “The Dr. Wendy Walsh Show” on iHeart Radio’s KFI AM 640 since 2015. Walsh is also a former Emmy-nominated co-host of “The Doctors,” as well as former host of the nationally syndicated show “EXTRA.” She was named a Time Magazine Person of the Year in 2017 after speaking out about harassment at a major news network.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the main reasons 99% of Gen Z are tired of dating apps?

Dr. Wendy Walsh: They are tired of becoming victims of paradox of choice. The more choice the human brain is given the less likely they are to make a choice, and when they do make a choice, they are less likely to value that choice. They get stuck scrolling instead of dating.

Jacobsen: How have dating apps failed to meet the expectations of Gen Z?

Walsh: Few of them left their phones to go on an actual date!! Besides paradox of choice, there’s another psychological phenomenon that happens with dating apps. People message a number of potential mates and become satisfied by the texts themselves. Messaging with a number of people at the same time create a combined emotional satiation, that for many is enough. They lose the desire to go out on a date. I call it dating apathy!

Jacobsen: Why are nearly 40% of Gen Z women using dating apps more as a casual pastime?

Walsh: As mentioned, paradox of choice and emotional satiation with texts. Dating apps are not designed to find you a mate. They would lose all their customers if people were actually finding mates and leaving the app. The gamification of mate selection makes people addicted to the app Instead of romance.

Jacobsen: How prevalent is the issue of fake profiles?

Walsh: Fake profiles are very prevalent, as are married people pretending to be single, and pure romance scammers, out for money. However, they most likely target, older, divorcees, and widows and widows who may not be as tech savvy as Gen Z.

Jacobsen: What alternatives are people using for potential partners outside of apps?

They are using apps like LinkedIn and Instagram. Also, there’s a new trend —- wait for it —- it’s very exciting. It’s called flirting in public!!! Gen Z is finally learning how to do it.

Jacobsen: How does the pursuit of external validation through swiping impact mental health?

Walsh: Whether it’s the number of views and likes on social media, or the number of matches on a dating app, technology has created a false idea of how to calculate our own self-worth. When humans rely on this kind of validation, that can vary from day-to-day, it can play havoc with mental health, causing anxiety and depression.

Jacobsen: How do the dating app experiences of Gen Z men and women differ?

Walsh: Men and women use dating apps very differently. Men essentially swipe right on every single woman to see who likes them. Women take time to scrutinize profiles, examining photographs, reading into the words they wrote. Women are far more selective.

Jacobsen: What are likely the future of dating apps?

Walsh: The dating apps that will be most successful will be the ones that help people get into the real world very quickly. They may be dating apps that provide fewer matches to prevent paradox of choice. They may include video conferencing, or group dating in the real world. They also will eventually have to provide identity verification, and background checks. In the past, they’ve refrained from doing that because they felt it made them more liable. But they’re going to have to protect users more.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Walsh.

Source: Dr Wendy Walsh

Attribution: https://www.datingadvice.com/

More about Wendy: https://www.datingadvice.com/about-us/wendyw

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman, Human Potential and Psychology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/21

Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman is a renowned psychologist, speaker, and best-selling author dedicated to fostering creativity and self-actualization. Known for his pioneering work in intelligence and human potential, he challenges traditional measures of success, advocating for a personalized approach that emphasizes individual journeys over standardized assessments. Dr. Kaufman hosts “The Psychology Podcast,” one of the most popular in its field, and is among the top 1% most cited scientists globally. With teaching stints at Columbia University, University of Pennsylvania, and NYU, he has published extensively, including the influential Transcend: The New Science of Self-Actualization, redefining Maslow’s hierarchy for modern times.

Kaufman shares insights from his career dedicated to exploring human potential beyond traditional metrics like IQ. He emphasizes that the mindset—whether one views themselves as a victim or empowered—can greatly impact achieving goals. Kaufman discusses how cultural shifts toward competitive victimhood influence behavior and contrasts this with the empowerment needed for true self-actualization. He reflects on his evolution from viewing intelligence as solely multiple to recognizing general intelligence’s role. His new book, forthcoming in April, highlights how personal narratives shape potential and resilience amidst challenges.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman. He has an extensive and impressive background in intelligence research and humanistic psychology. He is an author and educator with a broad reach in significant psychological constructs. What was the first time you became genuinely interested in both the conceptual and academic aspects of intelligence, creativity, and human potential?

Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman: I have been interested in this topic for as long as I can remember. As a child, I was placed in special education due to an auditory learning disability, and many people dismissed me as unintelligent. However, I worked hard to prove that I was capable. Much of my career as a scientist has been dedicated to finding alternative ways of measuring potential and identifying people’s greatest sources of self-actualization and human potential—beyond traditional IQ tests or cognitive abilities, which have often been the primary focus of K-12 education.

Jacobsen: I enjoy interviewing individuals who dedicate their lives to focusing on one or two key topics. Since you have concentrated on creativity, intelligence, and potential, what are the currently accepted or established perspectives or definitions of human intelligence and creativity?

Kaufman: There is no single answer, as scientists rarely agree on everything. That’s different from the answer you wanted to hear. <laughs> I once explained on Sam Harris’s podcast that intelligence is learning, understanding, and perceiving what is. Imagination is the capacity to envision, learn, and perceive what could be. Creativity involves the deep integration of intelligence and imagination.

Jacobsen: How do you approach self-actualization, especially when coaching individuals seeking assistance in becoming more self-actualized? Is this rooted in Abraham Maslow’s work?

Kaufman: Yes, it is. When I began my career, I believed intelligence was the most crucial aspect to address for potential. However, as I expanded my focus to include creativity and self-actualization, I realized it is not our role to prescribe or limit what people can achieve. Instead, it is our responsibility to help individuals discover what they most want to actualize and provide them with the resources to contribute positively to society.

I have developed various scales and conducted numerous studies to explore how people can achieve self-actualization. My research on creativity and openness to experience, a personality trait I have studied extensively, is highly relevant to understanding self-actualization. Openness to experience is likely the best personality predictor of self-actualization.

Jacobsen: Are there ways in which someone’s personality structure could be less aligned with openness to experience when it comes to self-actualization, as opposed to more aligned?

Kaufman: It depends on what one wants to actualize.

Jacobsen: That’s an excellent point. 

Kaufman: For instance, if someone harbours hatred and resentment and seeks to actualize the potential to oppress others, openness to experience might not be the most relevant predictor. But that is not the kind of self-actualization I am referring to. Overall, creative actualization tends to be generative and improve the world. 

Jacobsen: When you’re doing this work with people, how are they typically defining making the world a better place? Or is it as individual as a fingerprint?

Kaufman: I don’t focus on that metric as much as the belief that if we help people with their purpose, exploration, and motivation for giving more love to the world, the world will be a better place. I have developed a reimagining of Maslow’s hierarchy of needs and created a coaching program called Self-Actualization Coaching.

We’re launching a six-month program next year, a full certification program for coaches. With Self-Actualization Coaching, we focus on the needs for safety, security, connection, and self-esteem, which form the “boat” itself. We also help people open their sails and move toward their most valued port with a spirit of exploration, love, and purpose. Growth is the deep integration of exploration, love, and purpose. Not everyone has to make a grandiose impact on the world, like starting a new nonprofit or scaling up the kazoo. I am a big advocate for “being love” and creating synergy with one’s being in a good way for oneself and the world. 

Jacobsen: Do you use any of the mentalism of “The Amazing Dr. Scott” in Self-Actualization Coaching?

Kaufman: That’s a hilarious question. I sometimes get clients who say, “Show me a trick. Read my mind.” I would love to put on a stage show called Unlock Your Mind with The Amazing Dr. Scott, where I show people in the audience that they are using only a small part of their full capacity. That’s a project I’m interested in and am working on securing funding for.

Jacobsen: Does the Human Potential Lab work inform the Self-Actualization Coaching work?

Kaufman: The Human Potential Lab is the solo series of my podcast, where I try to educate the audience publicly. I hope all these efforts feed into an integrated system. If my goal hierarchy is cohesive, then at every level of analysis, each goal should contribute to my top-level aim of increasing human potential. I hope they’re all synergistic.

Jacobsen: How do you view that work from a humanistic psychology model? You have the work around self-actualization, academic research, and studies in intelligence and creativity. How does a humanistic psychology frame bring much of this together, if at all?

Kaufman: The field of humanistic psychology? Well, there isn’t a significant field of humanistic psychology anymore. It was quite influential in the sixties, but it has since diminished. However, there are still psychotherapists with a humanistic orientation and some training programs in the country. The general philosophy of humanistic psychology is that we want to understand what makes people feel fully alive. We are interested in the experiential nature of their being and how it contributes to well-being, contribution, and social action. Some psychologists still embody that spirit, but it is no longer a dominant movement. I would say it’s a small minority within the field of psychology.

Compared to humanistic psychology, positive psychology receives much more funding, has more conferences, and has more practitioners in my field. However, I have a deep love for humanistic psychology. I identify as a humanistic psychologist. Humanistic psychology values the dignity and worth of each individual. That is something distinct from focusing solely on happiness or achievement. It has an inherent value of its own.

Jacobsen: Do you think it’s a broader view of human potential than happiness or achievement?

Kaufman: Yes. It’s a philosophy. Maslow saw it as a philosophy. He wanted a broader movement. I would love to believe that I am part of a modern-day human potential movement grounded in science. In my view, that is what the modern-day human potential movement should look like. 

Jacobsen: Regarding what you mentioned about the human potential movement, what are some critiques or criticisms you receive that have an evidentiary basis compared to those that are less grounded in evidence and more rhetorical?

Kaufman: I don’t get much criticism. I don’t know. No one criticizes me. I am trying to understand what that means. Maybe it means I need to be more famous. <chuckles> I don’t know. I am fortunate to have the respect of my colleagues. I work hard to build an evidential basis for my arguments. I’m careful when making bold claims. I would face criticism if I were more flippant, impulsive, or grandiose in my claims, but I prefer to build things bit by bit.

Kaufman: The Self-Actualization Coaching program has been years in the making, following iterations of smaller three-day courses that we put on. So, my careful style makes it less open to criticism. A good scientist will take in new evidence and change their opinion.

Jacobsen: What beliefs or ideas have you held as true or tentatively true in the earlier parts of your career but have since changed or adapted based on new evidence?

Kaufman: One significant example is that I initially believed human intelligence was only multiple—that Howard Gardner was correct, and multiple intelligences were all there was. I thought there was no such thing as general intelligence. I changed my mind after researching IQ and realizing both are true. We each have a unique profile of cognitive strengths and weaknesses but differ in general intelligence– this includes our ability to integrate and hold information in working memory and our capacities for visual-spatial reasoning, verbal comprehension, and basic cognitive functions that influence multiple abilities. That is one area where I changed my view.

I also changed my mind about the biggest predictor of human potential. I have a book coming out next April where I argue that while most of my career has been focused on ability, intelligence, and creativity, the biggest predictor of potential is the story you tell yourself about your setbacks and experiences. Whether you maintain a victim mindset or feel empowered to continue and have hope despite setbacks seems to be a much more powerful factor in reaching your goals than I previously focused on. 

Jacobsen: Do you think general culture leans more toward a victim or empowerment mindset when people face the ups and downs of life?

Kaufman: I believe our culture is currently entrenched in a victim mindset, which is part of why I followed this cultural trend and wrote this book. Everyone tends to view themselves as the victim of the opposing side. Additionally, it is rarely acknowledged that multiple victims can exist simultaneously. We are living in an age of competitive victimhood. It has become a privileged position to be seen as the victim rather than the perpetrator.

Everyone competes for that coveted spot of being perceived as the victim. Of course, there are real victims, and that is true. However, many people understand the power that comes with being perceived as the victim. Does that make sense, Scott Jacobsen?

Jacobsen: That makes sense, Dr. Kaufman. Regarding that, I have heard and been told differing opinions about North American culture becoming more narcissistic over the last few decades. If that is true, in your expert opinion, is it related to the phenomenon you mentioned about victimhood, or is it unrelated?

Kaufman: It’s a great question. I have yet to conduct an in-depth analysis myself. Still, I have read works by those who have, such as Bradley Campbell, who wrote extensively about different cultural dynamics, including honour and victimhood cultures. There has been a rise in victimhood culture in the United States, which has not necessarily been observed globally or in previous periods of American culture. So, yes, there is a rise. And I’ll leave it at that for now.

Jacobsen: Let’s do a quick recap. You have the Self-Actualization Coaching program. You have the Human Potential Lab. You are in the top 1% of most cited researchers globally in psychology. You practice mentalism under the title “The Amazing Doctor Scott.” This seems to follow in the “The Amazing James Randi tradition.” You are also classically trained as a vocalist and cellist, showcasing a broad range of professional and personal development.

Kaufman: I would say more like “The Amazing Kreskin,” who was a mentalist, in particular.

Jacobsen: You are someone who has engaged in building a lot of professional and personal potential in various ways. What areas would you want to expand your potential outside of your upcoming book in April if you had the time?

Kaufman: Probably in the romantic relationship domain. Is that too personal?

Jacobsen: No. This is an open space. You can say whatever you want.

Kaufman: Well, I want to be a good man. 

Jacobsen: How are you defining a good man? What would you consider a good man to be in a perennial sense or the current era?

Kaufman: I would define it as someone who respects women. Beyond that, it’s about being a good human. There isn’t anything specifically unique to being a good man beyond the traits that any person would strive for to be good, such as being a responsible citizen and taking ownership of their own body and mind. That’s an existential definition.

Owning the space you take up, in a humanistic psychology kind of way—that’s what it means to be a good human. However, being a good man boils down to respecting women.

Jacobsen: What are some of the ways you see, as a psychologist, that women are disrespected in America today, particularly in emotional or psychological terms?

Kaufman: Well, when it comes to leadership positions, that’s a significant area. I have a separate research program focused on the “light triad” of leadership versus the “dark triad” of leadership, and we find significant sex differences. For example, the upper tail of the dark triad—traits like narcissism, Machiavellianism, and psychopathy—tend to be dominated by men.

It’s interesting and worth examining how we create more opportunities for both men and women who are natural, empathetic leaders. There’s a paradox because those who do not desire power are often the people we would most want in positions of power. Yet, they are the least interested in pursuing it. Conversely, those most interested in power often differ from those we want to lead, which presents a complex issue I grapple with in my research.

Jacobsen: Part of your response noted how gender plays a role in the dark triad, with men being more prevalent at the higher end.

Kaufman: ye but there are dark triad women.

Jacobsen: Right. So, I’ll take that as partially overlapping but mutually distinct distributions.

Kaufman: Yes, exactly.

Jacobsen: With that gender difference, is it significant enough, and is there sufficient evidence to argue for heredity over environment, or vice versa? What aspects of American cultural pressures tend to foster and bring out these traits in men more than women?

Kaufman: There is a strong focus on the bottom line and doing whatever it takes to achieve it. However, we are witnessing significant cultural shifts in various organizations. I am currently working on a major project focused on human-centered leadership and what that looks like.

I’m excited about that project because it’s set to unfold over the next couple of years. Much of it will involve a significant cultural shift to make the bottom line include employees’ self-actualization. That’s a substantial change right there.

Jacobsen: Last question: What is your favourite quote from any psychologist?

Kaufman: I have a favourite by Abraham Maslow: “One can choose to go back toward safety or growth. Growth must be chosen again and again; fear must be overcome again and again.”

Jacobsen: Great. Scott, thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today. I appreciate it.

Kaufman: Thank you. Was it a valuable interview?

Jacobsen: It was.

Kaufman: Sweet. Sweet. Thanks for thinking of me, Scott. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: I appreciate it. Thank you, Scott. We’ll be in touch.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Adam Potash, A Better Healthful Path

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/20

Adam Potash is a trained chef and health coach passionate about transforming lives through sustainable weight loss and nutrition. A graduate of Johnson & Wales University, his journey began with a love for cooking and evolved into a mission to help others achieve optimal health. After culinary success working with elite clients, Adam pursued health and nutrition studies, creating The Approach, a sustainable weight loss program. Combining intermittent fasting, balanced eating, and emotional support, Adam has helped over 10,000 clients lose weight and improve their health. His goal is to empower others to lead healthier, happier, and more confident lives.

Potash shares insights into his journey from culinary school to promoting healthier lifestyles. Inspired by witnessing his grandmother’s health decline due to poor nutrition and excessive medication, Potash emphasizes the transformative power of food. He highlights the Mediterranean diet, intermittent fasting, and prioritizing fresh, simple ingredients as keys to sustainable health. Potash criticizes food fads and restrictive diets, advocating for lifestyle changes over quick fixes. Working with athletes and private clients, he focuses on balanced meals that fuel performance. His advice includes avoiding grazing, eating nutrient-dense vegetables, and cooking with love to enhance health and enjoyment.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Adam Potash or Potash. How do you say that properly: “Pot-Ash”?

Adam Potash: You said it right the first time.

Jacobsen: You have this orientation toward health, nutrition, and weight loss. So, how did your grandmother’s story of illness build up and lead to this particular concern about health and weight loss? Now, that one’s straightforward. So, the term illness can be ambiguous.

Is it cancer, or is it an improper diet? Therefore, is the person physically ill due to lifestyle habits, or is this normal aging combined with other factors? Present that story to me because I think you’re onto something.

Potash: Right, it could be a combination of a few different things—age, illness, and poor nutrition. Listen, in my field, we tackle everything from a nutritional aspect first and foremost.

And yes, you’re right. This is what prompted my journey toward getting healthier myself. Seeing my grandmother deteriorate, for lack of a better word, with one medication, then another, and another to counteract the previous one became this big rabbit hole. I was younger at the time—I must have been 17 or 18 years old when she passed—but I saw this whole thing transpire and said, “There’s got to be a better way.”

Shortly after she passed, I enrolled in culinary school because I wanted to do something related to food. That eventually transitioned into cooking healthy food and cooking for pro athletes and others. I wanted to make everyone around me healthier, and the best way to do that was through food. That happened over a few years—cooking, cooking healthy, and eventually helping people transition to better health.

Jacobsen: Quick question on personal interest stuff.

I worked in restaurants. I used to work in four simultaneously, then did janitorial work overnight for two. Those were seven-day weeks, putting in nine hours a day. It was an intensive time, but I got to see a lot of different styles in how people run restaurants—from pubs to more bistro-style places and an Italian-Jewish-owned and run restaurant.

It could have been more fine dining, but it was aimed in that direction. So, where did you get your experience in terms of seeing a variety of restaurants? How did you observe operations, the quality of materials used to prepare meals, and their health standards? What did you see that made you think, “I could use those ideas a la carte and develop my program”? 

Potash: Yes, my career started as a server, working in the front of the house. But I always had this crazy interest in the back of the house.

The short story of how it all transpired is this: I went on a boating trip with the chef of a place where I was a server. It was called Gordon Biersch.

It was a brewery. The chef asked a few of the servers if they wanted to go on a fishing trip. I said, “Sure, I’ll go.” It was my day off. I caught the only fish that day, and it was this grouper.

It was about a 24-pound grouper, right? All day, we’re out there—nothing, nothing. Finally, we’re about a mile from shore, so I hook this grouper.

Of course, whoever’s closest to the line gets it. I fought it for about an hour. The whole scene was there, and we returned to the restaurant. The chef cooked it up in five, six, or maybe seven different ways. From that moment, I was hooked. That was my turning point when I decided, “I’m going to be a chef.”

From catch to feast in a matter of an hour was unbelievable. That started everything.

And, listen, going back to your question about seeing the operations of things—nothing was ever healthy. No matter where you went—this is going back 20 or 25 years—nothing was ever healthy.

When I started cooking for myself, I limited so many ingredients. I cooked. Julia Child has a quote—I’m butchering it, but it’s something like this: “If you cook simple and basic, everything is going to be good.” That’s basically what it comes down to.

If you cook with good ingredients—fresh ingredients—it’s going to come out well. You don’t need to complicate things. That’s the lesson I learned from a young age and as a young chef: make things simple and make them taste good.

Jacobsen: What makes a simple and good meal?

Potash: It sounds like a different question, but we have so many options for food in North America—particularly in the United States—ranging from processed food to unprocessed food, high-calorie food to low-calorie food, nutrient-dense food to not-so-nutrient-dense food, and so on.

How do you consider this when you’re running a restaurant? You’re saying, “This is the menu. This is the schema for what I want people to consume at my business or restaurant.”

I will give you the cheesy, cliché answer: it honestly comes down to love. If you’re putting love into your dishes, it will come out good.

I still cook for parties, private clients, and events. My ingredients and meals involve less than 30 different steps. I use five steps, but those are done perfectly—they’re seasoned right, taste good, and that’s it. If you can do that, you can’t lose.

Jacobsen: What are those five steps?

Potash: Well, obviously, it starts with good, fresh ingredients—whether it’s freshly caught fish or something similar.

Then, it’s about cooking it properly. For example, I cook a lot pan-seared and then finish it in the oven. Not to get too technical, but I do that because I want a nice sear and crust, and then I want it to cook fully from a convection style.

Cook it all the way through or cook it from a broader perspective rather than just using direct heat. That’s how I do most of my cooking. Letting things rest is also very important. Many people cook and then want to eat immediately, but you must let things relax for a moment.

Always have a good sauce. If you ever come to one of my parties or to someone I’ve cooked for, they’ll tell you That sauces are legit. A good sauce doesn’t have to be unhealthy. It could be something like chimichurri, pesto, or similar. A nice sauce complements the dish beautifully.

And honestly, the last step is presentation. Everybody eats with their eyes first, so you must put a little effort into how the food looks.

Jacobsen: Is that called plating? Is that the proper word for it?

Potash: Yes, plating—exactly. I always go with a nice white plate. In my house, we have clean, white plates. It’s like a blank canvas.

Jacobsen: So, let’s say you have this simplified method. When looking at the North American palate and the ingredients available, what do you consider some of the more nutritious meals? How can people incorporate that into healthier living, even if it’s not necessarily a formal meal plan?

Potash: Yes, so we all know by now that the Mediterranean diet will be the healthiest, right? You can’t get away from that concept. It’s about using local ingredients and focusing on a pescatarian-type diet.

I base my cooking on this. I was born and raised in Miami, South Florida, so we always had fresh, local fish—whether it was mahi, grouper, snapper, or something else. That’s the healthiest way to start meal prepping or planning.

It doesn’t have to be fish, but locally sourced-ingredients are always better.

Now, intermittent fasting—I follow a pescatarian Mediterranean diet and practice intermittent fasting. The baseline is a 16-hour fast daily, though I can go up to 20 hours depending on the day. I’m not too strict about it; it’s more of a range.

Jacobsen: What benefits do you see from intermittent fasting?

Potash: Oh my gosh, the sky’s the limit—it offers endless benefits.

It can improve your skin, clear up acne, make your hair fuller, and strengthen your nails—those things people first notice. But it doesn’t stop there. It also provides digestive benefits and helps women dealing with menopause, menopause-related weight gain, and PCOS.

Truthfully, the list goes on. Doctors are now even using intermittent fasting to treat cancer patients because it generates new, fresh cells in the body and removes old, damaged ones.

The benefits—if you’re not intermittent fasting—you’re honestly not feeling or looking your best. It gives your body the rest that it needs.

Jacobsen: Now, when two individuals look at diets, there will be skeptics and even cynics. How do we separate good diets from faulty ones? For instance, some diets are more about branding, like an all-red-meat diet, compared to the Mediterranean diet, which intuitively makes more sense because it has more balance overall.

As an expert, I believe the Mediterranean diet provides a better presentation, covers more food groups, and has a broader palate. How do you ensure there’s enough rigour to prevent a diet from being just a fad with yo-yo effects and short-term results?

Potash: What I always recommend—and for anyone thinking about a diet—is to look at how restrictive it is. For example, you mentioned the carnivore diet or the keto diet. Those immediately become extremely restrictive. Anytime something is highly restrictive, it gets categorized as a “diet.”

Usually, those are short-term and sustainable. You might see results immediately, but sustainability is where it fails. That’s when you get into the yo-yo diet effect—yes, it worked, but you can’t maintain it forever.

On the other hand, when we talk about intermittent fasting or the Mediterranean diet, these are lifestyles, not diets. They’re not restrictive. For example, I go out to eat; I enjoy food with my friends, buddies, and wife—we’re always eating. But it’s good food, healthy food. I never feel restricted or deprived by what I’m choosing.

I’m not putting myself in a bucket of, “Oh my gosh, I can only eat meat,” or, “I have to avoid carbs completely.” That’s not sustainable long-term.

Jacobsen: Could someone potentially do a short-term radical shift and then transition to something more sustainable? Say they want rapid changes first but then move to a longer-term solution. Is that possible, or is that too unreasonable for most people?

Potash: Yes, so I was going to say—it’s generally unreasonable if you do it yourself. When you’re on your own, you become your critic, and there’s no accountability piece to it. You start making up your own rules as you go along.

I’ve been doing this for over 15 years, and that’s what I see people do. They make up their own rules. For example, I know people who do alternate-day fasting. They start applying new rules like, “Oh, I’ll do it tomorrow,” or, “I’ll do it the next day,” or, “I didn’t do it today, but that’s okay.”

There needs to be more consistency and a base to work from, and that’s where it falls apart.

There’s no baseline. So, we teach the 16:8 method because it is the most consistent thing you can do. It’s not depriving or restrictive. You’re eating within an 8-hour window, which you can do daily.

Another great thing about an intermittent fasting schedule is that you can shift it. Some days, you might do 16 hours; other days, you might do 18. You can adjust it according to your schedule. This makes it much more of a lifestyle than a strict, harsh diet.

That’s my approach—set a baseline as a floor, then give yourself a range. If I can go a little longer the next day, no problem. Have an extra cup of coffee and keep going.

Jacobsen: What do you find people typically lack nutritionally—both macronutrients and micronutrients?

Potash: As an executive chef who runs restaurants, I can tell you that people often need to catch up on the basics. Running a restaurant is no easy job—it’s consistently high-stress. Transitioning from front-of-house to back-of-house surprised some people because you deal with difficult customers in the front. Still, the back-of-house can be even more intense. Every position, aside from prep work before service, is constantly stressful.

Jacobsen: So, what macronutrients and micronutrients are people typically missing when looking at nutrition? How can they fill those gaps?

Potash: Listen, we’ve gotten so far away from vegetables. Even when we consume vegetables at restaurants, it’s often not in their purest or healthiest form. The trend now is Brussels sprouts, right? But those sprouts are usually deep-fried and covered in something unhealthy.

We’ve moved so far away from basic, nutritious vegetables. Often, vegetables are treated as an afterthought—the last thing people eat. If you’re at a restaurant, you’re typically filling up on steak or mashed potatoes first. If there’s room left, maybe you’ll eat the asparagus.

My rule of thumb is to start with the good stuff—the more nutritious items. Fill up on those first, then move on to the other things. Save the carbs for last, so you’re not eating as much. Carbs, for the most part, have very little nutritional benefit.

This doesn’t mean vegetables must be plain or steamed, but we must return to basics. Everyone knows about the trend of fried Brussels sprouts. My advice is to go back to simple, clean vegetables. That’s one of my biggest tips when it comes to nutrition.

Jacobsen: What’s the most extreme individual food fad you’ve seen outside of fried Brussels sprouts?

Potash: Food fad? That’s an interesting one. Food fads are everywhere. Fried calamari has been around for quite a while now, especially with all the different sauces—it will never go away.

There are so many unhealthy food fads. For example, many steak places pop up everywhere, and it’s the same no matter where you go. There’s no creativity anymore when it comes to these steakhouses.

I have four different steakhouses within a three-mile radius of my house. And they all serve the same thing—you get your asparagus, filet, and potatoes. Nothing stands out or feels creative anymore.

There needs to be more creativity, at least where I live in South Florida. People in the kitchen seem afraid to try something new.

Jacobsen: When cooking for athletes and celebrities, how does that differ in terms of their requests per meal or meal plan? How different are they from the rest of us?

Potash: Not much, believe it or not. These athletes—I don’t want to say “basic” because that sounds negative—but they are basic because they focus on health. They want food to help them perform better on the field, on the pitch, or wherever they compete.

They’re open about food. They want something simple and convenient and don’t want to use their brainpower worrying about nutrition. They leave that to someone like me.

My job is to ensure that they’re getting well-balanced meals that provide everything they need to fuel their bodies. I’m not measuring macronutrients to the gram, but I understand how to create meals that include a variety of nutrients—the full”rainbow” of food.

They want to focus on their performance: running faster, hitting harder, or excelling in their sport. The last thing they want to worry about is their food. They leave it to professionals to ensure they’re eating right.

Honestly, I haven’t encountered too many picky athletes. They want to know they’re eating well and fueling their bodies.

Jacobsen: So, what do you see as the major health issue for North America? Many of your clients have lost weight significantly since starting this meal plan and program. Beyond the obvious issues of being overweight or having a higher-than-healthy BMI for their height, what do you notice coming up?

Potash: Listen, we’ve been getting more overweight year after year for the last 100 years. A few factors contribute to this.

Number one is breakfast. Kellogg’s introduced breakfast as a marketing concept, adding a meal we weren’t eating before.

Then, if you go to the grocery store these days, everything is snack-sized—snack this, snack that. We’ve become tremendous grazers.

The problem is that our stomachs aren’t designed like those of cows or horses for daily grazing. Our bodies want to digest food and then rest, but we’ve completely eliminated that rest period.

Now, you eat breakfast, go to the office, and someone hands you a treat and grabs it. Then someone else has a snack at their desk, and you eat that too. It’s this constant grazing.

People think, “Oh, it’s not much. It’s just a bite.” But that grazing raises your insulin levels and doesn’t allow your digestive system to take a break.

This constant grazing leads to kidney, liver, and gallbladder issues—it overworks our entire system.

If people need to make one major health change, stop grazing. Eat your meals within a specific time frame and then be done.

Jacobsen: Are there any other areas we missed? We covered everything from restaurants, diets, food trends, and health concerns.

Potash: Yes, you touched on a lot of different points. I appreciate that.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts based on the interview today?

Potash: No, this was great. Whoever your readers are, it’s good they’ll get a little education from this. It’s great.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Adam, thank you so much for your time.

Potash: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Christen Kaplan and Elizabeth Inman, Love a Wholistic Life

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/19

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the CDC’s statistic that two in five U.S. adults are living with obesity reflect broader societal trends? 

Christen Kaplan and Elizabeth Inman: First, let’s look at what the definition of overweight or obesity means. The World Health Organization (WHO) defines overweight and obesity as having “excessive fat accumulation that presents a risk to health.” So, what does this mean for American adults? It means that obesity is a leading public health problem in the United States. The latest data from the CDC indicates that approximately 75% of adults aged 20 and older fall into the overweight and obese categories and  1 out of 10 of those are considered morbidly or severely morbidly obese. This is a serious concern because the five leading causes of preventable death in the United States are heart disease, stroke, respiratory disease (COPD), type 2 diabetes, and cancer which are all conditions linked to lifestyle choices and excessive weight gain. 

According to the Joint Economic Committee Congress of The United States, obesity alone costs the U.S. healthcare system almost $283 billion annually on obesity-related direct health costs and is a major driver of federal healthcare spending. This includes money spent directly on medical care and prescription drugs that are related to the lifestyle conditions associated with extreme weight gain. Lastly, another important statistic from Human Resource & Payroll estimates that conditions associated with excessive weight gain have caused an additional $435.5 billion in economic costs to U.S. businesses and employers in 2023. Included in these expenses are medical costs to employers, higher disability payments, higher workers’ compensation program costs, and absenteeism at work. All of these economic societal trends severely affect the way our society functions.

Jacobsen: How does Love a Wholistic Life approach obesity differently?

Kaplan and Inman: At Love A Wholistic Life, we believe that education is the key to empowerment. Our holistic approach takes a comprehensive look at the body, examining its physical, emotional, and mental dimensions. Rather than simply focusing on weight loss, we prioritize uncovering the root causes of obesity. We recognize that excessive weight gain often signals deeper lifestyle conditions, emotional struggles, or unresolved issues. Research indicates that around 75% of excessive eating is emotionally driven, turning into habits that obscure underlying feelings. Many individuals’ resort to food as a means of escape, coping, or numbing rather than addressing their emotions head-on. 

By providing our clients with the tools and resources they need, we help them address these underlying factors, fostering sustainable change rather than temporary fixes. Our program emphasizes education and self-discovery, equipping individuals with knowledge about their bodies and behaviors. Through personalized and online coaching, we guide our clients in developing healthier habits and making informed choices that support their overall well-being. Our clients learn to approach food and lifestyle with intention and mindfulness. This holistic journey not only promotes weight loss but also enhances overall quality of life, empowering individuals to thrive in all aspects of their health.

Jacobsen: How might Love A Wholistic Life address the root causes of lifestyle diseases? 

Kaplan and Inman: Addressing the causes of lifestyle diseases involves understanding their multifaceted origins and understanding what the definition of a lifestyle disease means. A lifestyle disease is a health condition primarily influenced by an individual’s lifestyle choices and behaviors rather than by genetic factors or infectious agents. These diseases are often preventable and can be linked to factors such as poor diet, lack of quality sleep, stress, lack of physical activity, tobacco use, recreational drug use, overconsumption of prescription drugs, and excessive alcohol consumption. Common examples of lifestyle diseases include cardiovascular disease, stroke, type 2 diabetes, obesity, inflammatory disease, and certain types of cancer. Lifestyle diseases typically develop over time due to cumulative unhealthy habits and can often be managed or mitigated through lifestyle changes. We find that the best approach is addressing these conditions through education. By teaching our clients what it means when they have been diagnosed with these lifestyle diseases, we explain what is going on in their bodies when they have a lifestyle disease, how they got the disease in the first place, and how they can use healthy lifestyle choices to control and possibly eliminate these conditions. Using natural approaches such as proper nutrition, getting active, and reducing or eliminating foods and behaviors that sabotage their health is key to improving and even reversing lifestyle disease. Basically, we teach people how to understand their body from the inside out as opposed to just thinking about it from just a weight loss perspective. In addition, we educate our clients to be advocates for their health by asking their healthcare professionals questions until they have a full understanding of what is happening in their bodies.

Jacobsen: What experience of loss has shaped your experience to wellness? 

Kaplan and Inman: As children, we watched our parents grapple with the harsh realities of lifestyle diseases. Our mother’s struggle with prescription drug addiction and our father’s battle with severe obesity left deep scars on our family. It wasn’t just their health that suffered; the emotional toll reverberated through every aspect of our lives. We learned early on how devastating these conditions could be, not just for the individuals but for the entire family. As we transitioned into adulthood, we hoped to leave behind the struggles of our youth. Yet, in a cruel twist of fate, lifestyle diseases reared its ugly head yet again. At just 52, our oldest brother was taken from us far too soon due to heart disease, kidney failure and other complications associated with type 2 diabetes. His passing served as a stark reminder that these issues know no bounds—they can affect anyone, regardless of age or circumstance. Each of these experiences became a powerful lesson, igniting a passion for nutrition and wellness within us. We realized that understanding the roots of these diseases was essential not just for our own health, but for breaking the cycle within our family. We immersed ourselves in learning about healthy living, exploring how nutrition, exercise, and mental well-being intertwine. Our journey transformed from one of pain to one of empowerment.

We began advocating for healthier lifestyles, not just for ourselves but for others in our community. We became passionate about sharing our story, hoping to inspire change and raise awareness about the importance of nutrition and healthy lifestyle choices. In doing so, we discovered a renewed sense of purpose— turning our past struggles into a beacon of hope for ourselves and those around us. We are committed to breaking the cycle of lifestyle diseases, proving that change is possible and that every step toward health is a step toward a brighter future.

Jacobsen: What are key principles of plant-based nutrition? 

Kaplan and Inman: To truly grasp the key principles of plant-based nutrition, we first need to understand what the term “food” encompasses. According to Oxford Languages, “food” refers to any nutritious whole or minimally processed items primarily derived from plant sources, including fruits, vegetables, whole grains, legumes, nuts, and seeds. Plant-based nutrition advocates for a diverse range of food choices to ensure a wide array of natural options that are low in calories yet high in fiber, antioxidants, nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. It encourages the inclusion of healthy fats from sources like avocados and olive oil, as well as plant-based proteins from beans and legumes. Additionally, it promotes limiting added sugars and processed foods. For our clients, we emphasize that these foods play a crucial role in their bodies, not only supporting growth but also nourishing every cell and organ. This nutrient-rich approach helps our bodies thrive, bolsters the immune system, and provides essential protection for overall health.

Jacobsen: How do you define a healthy relationship with food? 

Kaplan and Inman: A healthy relationship with food begins with the understanding that it serves as more than just sustenance; food has the power to heal and nourish our bodies on multiple levels. Recognizing this transformative potential can shift our perspective and highlight the importance of choosing a nutrient-dense diet rich in fruits, vegetables, beans, nuts, seeds, and whole grains. When we view food through the lens of healing, we start to appreciate its role in enhancing our well-being. Each bite becomes an opportunity to nourish not only our bodies but also our minds and spirits. Foods packed with vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants can help reduce inflammation, boost our immune system, and support our mental health. For example, vibrant fruits and vegetables provide essential nutrients that contribute to overall vitality, while whole grains offer sustained energy and promote digestive health. Furthermore, embracing this philosophy encourages mindfulness in our eating habits. It invites us to cultivate a deeper connection with our food—considering where it comes from, how it’s prepared, and the impact it has on our health. This awareness can foster more intentional choices, steering us away from processed foods laden with unhealthy additives and toward whole, nourishing options that support our well-being and guide us through our journey to good health.

Jacobsen: What role does empathy play in your work with clients?

Kaplan and Inman: In our opinion, empathy is one of the most vital qualities for success in our business. The ability to genuinely put ourselves in our clients’ shoes—both emotionally and situationally—allows us to grasp their unique perspectives and challenges. This deep understanding gives us a comprehensive view of their needs, enabling us to address their health issues in a more personalized manner. Empathy also empowers us to meet our clients exactly where they are in their journey. By acknowledging their emotional state, we can address not only their physical well-being but also their mental and emotional health. This holistic approach fosters a supportive environment where clients feel heard and valued. Our commitment to empathy goes beyond transactions; we strive to build meaningful relationships. In the process, we’ve not only gained clients but have also cultivated amazing long-term friendships. We take pride in being more than just their nutritionist and wellness coach; we aim to be a trusted ally in our clients’ lives. Their stories and experiences inspire us to continually improve and adapt our services, ensuring that we are not just meeting expectations but exceeding them. 

Jacobsen: What role does empathy play in your work with clients? 

Kaplan and Inman: In our opinion, empathy is one of the most vital qualities for success in our business. The ability to genuinely put ourselves in our clients’ shoes—both emotionally and situationally—allows us to grasp their unique perspectives and challenges. This deep understanding gives us a comprehensive view of their needs, enabling us to address their health issues in a more personalized manner. Empathy also empowers us to meet our clients exactly where they are in their journey. By acknowledging their emotional state, we can address not only their physical well-being but also their mental and emotional health. This holistic approach fosters a supportive environment where clients feel heard and valued. Our commitment to empathy goes beyond transactions; we strive to build meaningful relationships. In the process, we’ve not only gained clients but have also cultivated amazing long-term friendships. We take pride in being more than just their nutritionist and wellness coach; we aim to be a trusted ally in our clients’ lives. Their stories and experiences inspire us to continually improve and adapt our services, ensuring that we are not just meeting expectations but exceeding them.

Jacobsen: What are the most common misconceptions people have about nutrition and tackling obesity? 

Kaplan and Inman: One common misconception is that all carbohydrates are alike, but that’s simply not true! There are actually two main types of carbohydrates: simple and complex.

 Simple carbohydrates are often found in ultra-processed foods like soda, baked treats, packaged cookies, fruit juice concentrates, and many breakfast cereals. These carbs provide a quick boost of energy but can also spike blood sugar levels. Because they lack fiber and essential nutrients, simple carbs are often referred to as “empty calories.”

 On the other hand, complex carbohydrates are found in whole grains, beans, fruits, and vegetables. They offer a more gradual release of energy, leading to a slower, steadier rise in blood sugar over time. Complex carbohydrates are not only beneficial for sustained energy but are also easily processed by the body, providing essential nutrients that support overall health.

Another common misconception is that all fats are unhealthy. That is also not true. In fact, healthy fats, such as monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fats, are found in foods like avocados, wild-caught fish, nuts, seeds, and extra virgin olive oil. These fats provide protein, fiber, and essential vitamins, playing vital roles in building cell membranes, aiding blood clotting, supporting muscle movement, and promoting heart and brain health.

 In contrast, unhealthy fats include saturated fats and trans fats. These fats are typically found in animal-based foods such as fatty cuts of meat, dairy products, and tropical oils like coconut and palm oil, which are often used in fried foods, baked goods, and processed snacks. These unhealthy fats can negatively impact cholesterol and blood sugar levels, increasing the risk of heart disease, diabetes, and obesity.

 Some of our clients have held the misconception that taking a daily multivitamin allows them to eat less healthy foods without consequence. While multivitamins can be beneficial for filling certain nutritional gaps, they are not a substitute for a well-balanced diet. A nutritious diet rich in fiber, protein, antioxidants, and healthy fats provides a range of essential nutrients that multivitamins simply cannot replicate. Whole foods offer synergistic benefits that enhance nutrient absorption and overall health. For example, fruits and vegetables are packed with antioxidants that help combat oxidative stress, while whole grains provide fiber that supports digestive health. Additionally, healthy fats from sources like avocados and nuts contribute to brain health and hormone regulation.

Relying solely on supplements can lead to deficiencies in key nutrients and may not provide the same health benefits as consuming a variety of whole foods. Ultimately, a balanced diet is crucial for maintaining optimal health, supporting bodily functions, and reducing the risk of chronic diseases.

Jacobsen: How do you measure success in clients? 

Kaplan and Inman: Success often holds different meanings for each of our clients. Since we primarily work with individuals struggling with obesity and lifestyle diseases, their definitions of success depend on the personal goals they set. Some clients focus solely on weight loss, while many aim to reduce their reliance on prescription medications. Common concerns among our clients include regulating blood pressure, lowering glucose levels, and reducing cholesterol. We measure their success by assessing how well they transition into positive lifestyle changes that are sustainable beyond our support. As they achieve their personal goals, we empower them with the tools and knowledge necessary to maintain a lifestyle that promotes a healthy quality of life.

 Adopting healthy lifestyle changes, such as proper nutrition, is not merely about eating the right foods; it also involves understanding why our bodies require these nutrients and recognizing the detrimental effects of the Standard American Diet, which often leads to lifestyle diseases. Clients must embrace the reality that their choices can have either a positive impact on their health or lead to negative consequences. While some clients find that they can maintain their progress with little to no ongoing support after just a few months in the program, others face a longer journey and require our guidance until they feel confident managing on their own. The rise of “quick-fix” prescription weight-loss drugs has made our job more challenging, often undermining long-term success for many in the overweight and obese community. This is a constant battle for us, but it’s one we are committed to fighting for the well-being of our clients.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for the opportunity and your time, Christen and Elizabeth.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Matthew Casella, AI Driven Robotics in the Hospitality Sector

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/19

Matthew Casella, President of Richtech Robotics Inc., discusses the company’s focus on AI-driven service robotics tailored to the hospitality sector. Originating with founders Wayne and Michael Huang, the company leverages Autonomous Mobile Robots (AMRs) to optimize operations in underserved industries. Based in Las Vegas, Richtech partners with businesses like Boyd Gaming and Walmart, deploying solutions like ADAM robots to enhance customer experience. Casella highlighted their Robot-as-a-Service (RaaS) model, blending automation with human interaction, reducing costs, and increasing efficiency. Advancements in AI, including NVIDIA’s technologies, have propelled innovation, enabling rapid training and deployment of versatile robotic solutions.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Matt Casella, President of Richtech Robotics Inc., a Nevada-based provider of AI-driven service robotics. Your company specializes in something universally appreciated—hospitality and service. It seems like a strong market choice. So, why AI-driven service robots, and why specifically focus on the broad spectrum of the hospitality and service industries?

Matthew Casella: Richtech Robotics focuses on commercializing robotic solutions tailored to the hospitality and service sectors. The company’s origin story dates back several years to its founders, Wayne Huang and his brother, Michael Huang. Wayne has always been driven and passionate about the hospitality industry.

His journey began with formal training as a chef. While initially pursuing a career in the culinary arts, he later transitioned into technology, focusing on the interactive visual display market. This shift eventually led him to the Autonomous Mobile Robot (AMR) market, which opened the door to integrating robotics into the hospitality and service industries.

One of the key early applications of AMRs was in the restaurant industry. This use case became a foundational aspect of Richtech Robotics’ strategy, demonstrating how robotic solutions could enhance operations in food service.

From there, Wayne and the team expanded their focus to the broader hospitality and service sectors, recognizing these areas as underserved by existing robotic solutions. While robotics had gained traction in factories, warehouses, and logistics, they needed to be more utilized in hospitality. This gap presented an opportunity to bring robotic innovation to an industry ripe for transformation.

Jacobsen: Did Nevada seem like the most versatile place to establish your headquarters?

Casella: Yes, for several reasons, Las Vegas was a strategic choice for our headquarters. Its status as the hospitality capital of the world was certainly a key factor. Additionally, it positioned us near potential partners and clients. For instance, one of our long-standing clients is Boyd Gaming, for whom we’ve deployed our Matradee robots across several of their restaurant properties. These robots have significantly enhanced operational efficiency and customer experience.

Jacobsen: In popular media, robotics has long been a focal point, from Japan’s advanced robots to Elon Musk’s Optimus robots more recently. Experts predict that autonomous robots will eventually outnumber humans performing various specialized tasks. How do you see Richtech Robotics shaping this future?

Casella: Our mission centers on specializing in tasks that can and should be automated. Our solutions are designed to complement human capital rather than replace it. All of our robots are classified as collaborative robots, or cobots, meaning they work alongside humans rather than independently of them.

Our robots are purpose-built to interact with the general public and fulfill specific tasks, allowing businesses in the hospitality and service sectors to optimize their operations. By automating routine or repetitive tasks, our technology enables human employees to focus on higher-value activities, such as direct customer engagement and personalized service. This synergy between human workers and robots enhances efficiency while maintaining a human-centerd customer experience and more value-add tasks.

So, a great example is delivery. The restaurant delivery space, we’ve continued to broaden the delivery applications of robotic products because that is a task that understandably should be automated.

When you think about a restaurant use case and a server, does a server need to walk five or six miles during a shift, going back and forth between the dining room and the kitchen? Or could that process be enhanced by a robot? For example, a robot could take dirty dishes from the dining room back to the kitchen or bring prepared food from the kitchen out to the dining room, meeting a server who could then hand the meals off to customers at their table.

This would allow the server to interact with and engage more customers, cover more tables, and probably increase their tip revenue while providing a better customer experience. That’s what we’re focused on. This is what makes the hospitality business so interesting when it comes to robotic and AI solutions.

Jacobsen: Why is that?

Casella: In hospitality, every operator wants to offer a different experience than everyone else. The experience itself is part of what they’re selling. These operators want to ensure they can deliver a unique, fulfilling, and engaging experience for their customers. By opening up a toolkit of robotics and AI solutions, we’re helping them achieve that goal. I see this as the next generation of hospitality.

Jacobsen: You’re describing cooperative ergonomic relationships between robots and people in the restaurant industry. What about fully automated restaurants?

Casella: That’s a great question, and it ties into what I was saying earlier. The operators of these businesses will fall across a spectrum. Some will implement fully automated experiences, whether a drive-through, a ghost kitchen, a dark kitchen, or a full-service restaurant. These businesses may lean toward complete automation.

Then, some operators want to blend automation with human interaction, as they view their people as an important part of their offering. They may ask for guidance on integrating both elements effectively.

Finally, some prefer to keep automation entirely behind the scenes. These operators might not want to show guests how automated their kitchen is. This diversity of approaches will continue as operators seek to offer tailored experiences to their customers.

Jacobsen: But these types of businesses and programs are expensive, aren’t they?

Casella: Yes, they can be. However, it’s important to consider the return on investment. Robots can reduce operational costs, improve efficiency, and help businesses reallocate their human capital toward high-value tasks, all while enhancing the customer experience. For many operators, the long-term benefits outweigh the initial costs.

Jacobsen: Robots are not cheap. The Optimus unit, for example, is estimated to cost around $30,000. I assume that’s a base price, excluding specialized programming or additional features. How do you finance, secure investments, engage in financial activities, and maintain investor relations for a business like this? That was a loaded question with multiple parts.

Casella: Yes, that is a loaded question on a number of fronts, so I’ll try to break it down and address it as much as possible. First, it’s true—this is a capital-intensive business on our end, and it also requires an investment on the customer’s end. One of the strategies we’ve implemented, particularly over the past 12 months since going public, is transitioning to a Robot-as-a-Service (RaaS) model.

Instead of requiring a large upfront capital expenditure (CapEx) from customers, we offer a subscription-based approach that fits into their operating budgets. This creates a monthly recurring cost structure that gives customers confidence that Richtech Robotics will ensure their robots operate at 100% efficiency. It also guarantees that we’ll continue supporting them in the long term.

This model smooths out our revenue. Instead of relying on one-time sales, we establish recurring revenue streams with 3-to-5-year contracts, depending on the robot. This is not only attractive to investors—who value recurring revenue—but also strategically sound from a business perspective. Transitioning as much of our portfolio as possible to a RaaS model is our key focus.

Jacobsen: How does this impact the cost curve of robotics compared to human labour?

Casella: Over time, we expect the cost of robotics to decrease as the technology matures and becomes more purpose-built. While robots aren’t necessarily getting more expensive, human labor costs continue to rise, especially in states like California, where I am today.

From a customer’s perspective, the comparison comes down to task automation. For example, how many labor hours can a robot automate? Customers can then redirect higher-cost human employees to more value-added tasks while utilizing lower-cost robotic labor for repetitive or time-intensive jobs. Unlike human employees, robots can operate 24/7, 365 days a year, significantly reducing the cost per hour over time.

The cost curve is shifting in our favor.

Jacobsen: I heard about the ADAM installation at One Kitchen in Rockford, Illinois. Was this a test case?

Casella: Yes, it started as a test case, but we’ve quickly moved beyond that. We recently announced via a press release that we’re taking the next big step. We’ll own and operate 20 of these One Kitchen locations across Texas, Colorado, and Arizona.

We’ve gone beyond the initial test case, which is an exciting development for us. This partnership achieves several important goals for Richtech Robotics, and we’re thrilled about the opportunities it presents.

It gets us in the door at Walmart locations. That could be a strategic partnership down the road. Each of the Walmart stores we’re targeting generates substantial annual revenue, these are high-traffic locations with significant volume.

These restaurants will be positioned directly opposite the cash registers in these Walmart locations, meaning every customer checking out will see our ADAM robot as part of the One Kitchen offering. For us, this is a meaningful step. It’s an important milestone where we can demonstrate the efficiencies of a robot-powered restaurant. 

From a business standpoint, this move reflects our dual strategy: we aim to be both a robotic service provider and a robotic hospitality operator. We’ve been clear about pursuing both paths and pushing forward on both fronts.

Jacobsen: Robots still need to get fully automated repair systems. How do you ensure these systems have appropriate maintenance and repair solutions?

Casella: We currently work with a third-party service company that has been in the repair business for a long time and, in recent years, has moved into robotic repairs. We contract with them to ensure that they can service our robots nationwide in case of an immediate repair need. Currently, we have robots operating from coast to coast, so working with a reliable partner is critical.

As we continue to grow, we plan to strategically open new offices and locations in key markets where we can establish our own repair staff. That said, much of the maintenance required for our robots is software-related. Many issues can be resolved remotely, streamlining the repair process and minimizing downtime.

Jacobsen: What updates do you see on the horizon for AI? I recently watched a talk by Jensen Huang, the CEO of NVIDIA. He mentioned that the shift from CPUs to GPUs represents a monumental leap. He suggested that development is no longer just exponential, as described by Moore’s law. It is closer to a “logarithm on a logarithm,” essentially an exponential on an exponential. If that’s true, how does such rapid advancement impact the AI-driven service industry?

Casella: Jensen Huang is undoubtedly a leader in this space, and his observations highlight the pace at which AI and hardware are advancing. If the exponential growth of GPUs and AI capabilities continues at this rate, it will profoundly impact the AI-driven service industry.

For us, it means smarter, more efficient robots that can process data faster and handle more complex tasks. It also means enhanced AI algorithms, enabling robots to interact more naturally with humans and adapt to changing environments in real time. These advancements could lower costs, increase robot versatility, and open new applications. There is a lot  to consider to remain adaptable and ensure our solutions leverage these breakthroughs to deliver real value to our customers. This is an exciting time for the industry, and we’re eager to see how these developments shape the future.

I believe that Jensen Huang provides the structure—the scaffolding—on which  millions of businesses will be built. This will allow the toolkit of robotics and AI to continue growing exponentially. This has allowed us to enhance the experience our robots provide to customers.

Thanks to our technology working in tandem with NVIDIA, the conversations ADAM can have with customers are now robust. For example, the support he can provide, such as drink recommendations, has become increasingly sophisticated. This progress is all powered by advancements in AI.

Using tools like NVIDIA’s Isaac Sim, we can train ADAM rapidly. We can prepare him for virtually any environment. For instance, as you mentioned, ADAM’s ability to recognize all the ingredients or tools around him is improving at lightning speed.

The potential applications of this technology are limited only by our imagination. There’s much speculation about what’s coming down the road and how soon it will arrive. Those advancements are coming quickly, but at Richtech Robotics, we focus on getting robots into the world today.

We’re not waiting for what robots might do in five years—we’re deploying them now and filling in the gaps by providing meaningful solutions to help our customers automate their businesses.

Jacobsen: How did the presentation of your corporate overview go at the LD Micro Main Event in October 2024?

Casella: It went very well. We’ve been working with our IR firm, Core IR, and they’ve been an excellent partner in helping us connect with the right types of investors and bankers. It’s critical to communicate our story to people excited about what we’re doing, who understand the market, and who recognize what an investment in Richtech Robotics means and what they can expect from us.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Matt, thank you for the opportunity and your time today to discuss AI-driven hospitality.

Casella: Thank you very much, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Jaclyn Margolis, the Return to the Office

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/18

Dr. Jaclyn Margolis is an Associate Professor of Applied Behavioral Science at Graziadio Business School, Pepperdine University, where she also serves as Department Chair for the Applied Behavioral Science and Organizational Theory and Management Department. Her research focuses on teamwork, leadership, and employee well-being, with a particular interest in how employees find joy in their work, collaborate effectively, and manage stress. Dr. Margolis’ work has been published in leading academic journals, including Organization Science, Human Relations, and Academy of Management Annals. Her research and writing have also been featured in outlets such as Psychology Today, Business Insider, and Fast Company.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What primary reasons are behind the recent push to return to the office?

Dr. Jaclyn Margolis: It seems companies are hesitant to fully embrace remote work because they’re concerned about how it might affect company culture, and they believe that in-person work leads to better collaboration and productivity.

Jacobsen: How is this shift to in-office work impacting employee morale?

Margolis: It’s been really challenging for many. Remote work, along with the flexibility it offers, has had a positive impact on many people’s lives, making it hard for employees to let go of it—especially when they don’t see clear benefits to going into the office. Many of my students have shared that when they’re in the office, they socialize more but get less actual work done. This aligns with what research shows: remote work can help people focus on their tasks, while in-person work can help reduce feelings of isolation.

Jacobsen: What are the strategies strategies are companies like Amazon Web Services have been implementing?

Margolis: What I’ve been reading about AWS seems to reflect what a lot of companies are going through as they try to balance employee and management expectations and figure out a new norm. First, there was a shift from remote work to a hybrid model. Now, some companies, including AWS, are introducing a firm in-office mandate. It’s no surprise that many employees are pushing back. It’s tough for them when they see remote work working just fine, only to hear management say it isn’t.

Jacobsen: What challenges might organizations face in enforcing in-office work policies?

Margolis: In the short term, employees might follow these policies just to keep their jobs. But in the long run, frustration with management and the policies could cause your best people to either do the bare minimum or look for a new role. As the saying goes, people don’t leave jobs, they leave managers. If managers are out of touch with what employees actually need, the long-term effects will probably show.

In general, enforcing blanket policies worries me because they assume everyone is most effective in the same way. The truth is, the benefits of in-person work, like remote work, are a bit more complicated. They depend on the type of work being done and the individual’s preferences. A one-size-fits-all approach doesn’t take into account that some projects need a hands-on approach, while others don’t.

Jacobsen: How does the move to return to the office affect productivity and collaboration?

Margolis: A fascinating paper was recently published that tackles this question. It’s a meta-analysis, which means it reviews all the research on the topic, making it the gold standard for answering these kinds of questions. The authors found that remote workers were more satisfied with their jobs, and their supervisors rated their performance higher compared to office-based workers—which goes against what many companies are saying to justify their return-to-office mandates. The research also looked at how the amount of time spent in the office versus at home affected these factors, such as working two days a week in the office versus full-time. The findings again showed that remote workers actually had slightly higher satisfaction and performance. The only real downside they found was a sense of isolation. All in all, the data suggests that a lot of the concerns about remote work might be much ado about nothing.

Jacobsen: How could a return to the office influence recruitment and retention efforts?

Margolis: Employees are pretty smart when it comes to weighing their whole benefits package. For many, there’s a real cost to commuting into the office. So, it’s not surprising that some employees are willing to give up raises—or even take pay cuts—in exchange for the option to work remotely. It makes sense that offering flexibility in how and where people work is seen as a major perk. I wouldn’t be surprised if jobs with flexible work options end up getting a lot of applications.

Jacobsen: What long-term implications could this shift have on workplace culture?

Margolis: It really depends on the company and how the change is introduced and carried out. If it’s done in a way that makes employees feel disrespected or alienated, it’ll be hard to recover from that. Trust is easy to break and tough to rebuild. On the flip side, if the change is handled thoughtfully and employees are given a voice, it can be an opportunity to strengthen the culture.

Jacobsen: How can leaders ensure employees feel supported and motivated when transitioning to a more office-based work environment?

Margolis: Let me start with an example of what not to do. It’s been widely reported that AWS CEO Matt Garman claimed nine out of ten employees he spoke to about the full return-to-office policy were on board. However, many employees have expressed that they find that statistic shockingly inaccurate and not at all reflective of their own experiences or those of people they know. In trying to build consensus, it seems Garman’s comments made leadership come across as out of touch.

So, what will work? Employees need to feel heard and understand the real reasons for being back in the office. The value of being in the office really depends on what you’re doing there. Leaders need to ensure that employees experience this reality. Coming in just to sit alone or join Zoom calls is likely to feel like a waste. But if employees know they’re coming in for meaningful, in-person interactions, it can make a difference—and might even make them more excited to be there.

Jacobsen: What role do company size and industry play in the decision to bring employees back to the office?

Margolis: They are important. Fit is going to be key here—what works best for your company and the work you do. Some companies and industries are more suited to remote work, while others really benefit from in-person collaboration. That said, there are new models that are changing the way we think about all this. Take healthcare, for example. Going to the doctor used to always mean an in-person visit. Now, doctors communicate with patients in all sorts of ways—through messages and video calls, along with the traditional in-person appointments.

Jacobsen: What are a hybrid work model’s potential benefits and drawbacks?

Margolis: Most people like the hybrid model because it feels like the best of both worlds—you get some in-person time while also having flexibility. But for that to really work, companies need to be thoughtful about how they set up hybrid expectations. For example, if a company wants employees in the office to support collaboration, but teams are on different hybrid schedules or in different offices, it’s probably not going to be effective.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Margolis.

Margolis: Thanks so much for the great conversation—it’s such a fascinating topic that’s always changing.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tone Southerland, Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/17

Tone Southerland is a healthcare IT expert and the current PCC Domain Representative to the IHE International Board. With a career spanning over two decades, Tone has been deeply involved in shaping healthcare interoperability, particularly through his work with IHE (Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise). His expertise lies in navigating the complexities of healthcare data integration, policy, and security. Tone is passionate about ensuring that patients and providers have seamless access to accurate and timely health information. He has been a key figure in developing frameworks like TEFCA, and is committed to transforming healthcare quality through technology.

Southerland discusses the complexities of healthcare interoperability compared to other industries like finance. Southerland explains the challenges, including the human aspect of healthcare, complex workflows, and the role of government policies. He highlights the importance of healthcare data accessibility, security, and privacy, and then touches on HIPAA’s role in safeguarding patient data, Medicare fraud, and the efforts to protect against misuse. Southerland emphasizes the potential of interoperability in improving patient care and enabling whole-person care by integrating diverse data points. He also discusses the significance of the Connectathon and the potential of healthcare IT advancements.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How are you today?

Tone Southerland: I’m doing great. I’m excited to chat about IHE (Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise).

Jacobsen: Excellent. So, the first question is: Why is the healthcare industry slower in adopting advanced technologies compared to sectors like finance?

Southerland: Yes, that’s a great question, and it’s one that’s been asked a lot. Healthcare is different from other industries, and there’s much more complexity involved. Three key factors make it challenging.

First, there’s the human aspect of healthcare, which is difficult to codify into data that can be easily transferred and consumed electronically between systems. For example, when I visit my doctor, we have a relationship andhey know things about me that are difficult to express in coded medical terminology. This aspect of care is represented as  “narrative text” in clinical notes. While there are ways to exchange that narrative, the human element will always remain essential in healthcare.

Second, the workflows in healthcare are more complex than in industries like banking or insurance. In those industries, the workflows are relatively finite. The tasks are straightforward, whether transferring money, buying stock, or granting account access. In healthcare, patients move between vastly different care settings. For instance, if you go for a radiology appointment, the workflow is controlled: you have an initial consultation, undergo scans, wait, and the radiologist reads your scans. But afterward, you’re referred back to your primary care doctor or to a specialist, and they continue interpreting the results, explaining them, and possibly sending you elsewhere for further care. Your healthcare journey might also transition to home care, adding even more complexity. That’s what IHE focuses on—standardizing workflows across these diverse care settings.

Third, policy plays a big role in how quickly healthcare interoperability progresses. Government policies and incentives encourage electronic health record (EHR) vendors and healthcare providers to exchange data and participate in electronic data collection. In some cases, there are penalties for not moving quickly enough. While these policies are complex, much progress is being made.

Jacobsen: Why is interoperability such a pressing issue in today’s healthcare landscape?

Southerland: I’ve been working in this field for about 18 to 20 years, and I was excited when I started—I’m still excited about it now.

I saw much opportunity then. I see many opportunities now. But I also see that through my lens as a technologist, not a clinician; clinicians I engage with still need help with some of the same issues when accessing data. They may have access to data, but how well can they use that data?

This year, a study published in the National Library of Medicine examined this issue. They surveyed about 2,000 physicians. Of those, 70% indicated they have access to healthcare data. Still, only about 23% said they have easy access, and only 8% said they have very easy access to the right data. So, they may have access to data, but do they have access to the right data in a way that they can use it effectively to improve health outcomes for their patients?

That’s a big challenge, and why healthcare interoperability is so important. IHE—Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise—is working to solve this problem. Our goal is to get the right data to the right doctor for the right patient at the right time, with the relevant level of detail, so that they can provide better care. Additionally, part of any data exchange is security and privacy.

Jacobsen: How do security and privacy concerns factor into this?

Southerland: It’s huge. Suppose you’ve followed any cybersecurity news over the past 10 to 20 years. In that case, you’ve noticed that security threats have only worsened. On the bright side, defenses have also improved, so it’s always a constant battle—what technology can we implement to protect data from hackers, and how do we stay ahead of new hacking methods?

This is an ongoing challenge. When discussing security and privacy, it’s important to distinguish between them. Privacy is about consent—do I consent for someone to access my data, and to what degree? Consent can be granular. For example, I might only want to share information about my allergies but not my mental health data. I may choose to share it with one doctor but not another. I might allow my mother access, but not my spouse.

Consent can become complicated. IHE provides mechanisms to manage consent through various consent-based profiles, but that’s only one piece of the puzzle.

The security piece is about protecting the data itself. This includes encryption algorithms that safeguard data stored on servers. That technology has been around for a while and continues to evolve. What has become more prevalent in the last 10 to 15 years is the HITRUST framework, which requires healthcare organizations storing protected health information (PHI) to implement policies, procedures, and processes to protect that data. But there’s a human element as well.

It’s not just about having the right encryption; it’s about training your staff. Are they following least privilege principles? Are they adhering to OWASP’s top 10 security guidelines? There are many moving parts, but frameworks like HITRUST and SOC2 help ensure that organizations working with sensitive data protect it adequately.

Jacobsen: What are the risks of a data breach? When those instances happen, how do doctors, patients, and companies react to them? How do they manage damage control? Could you provide a real-world example of why this is important rather than just listing ways to protect oneself?

Southerland: Yes. HIPAA oversees all of this.

HIPAA, which became law in 1996, introduced regulations that set limits on how patient data should be protected. Provider organizations are required to report breaches, especially when a minimum threshold of patients’ data is involved. This is a deterrent because organizations don’t want to be on the front page of the news for a data breach. These breaches are published on the CMS (Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services) site. Then, news agencies pick them up and share them further.

This incentivizes organizations to be on top of their security measures. As interoperability has advanced, there’s been a focus on limiting the shared data. For example, does all the data need to be stored or shared? Or do I only need to share the relevant information for the care I’m receiving? Going back to consent, patients may want to say, “I don’t want to share my mental health data because that’s sensitive. I only want to share the rest of my clinical record to receive help with my cancer, diabetes, or other conditions.”

Jacobsen: Should we be concerned about having all of our healthcare information in the cloud?

Southerland: That’s a nuanced question. Yes, we should always be concerned about our banking information, healthcare data, etc. It’s the reality of the world we live in. It’s stored on a server whenever we put something on social media.

Privacy today is very different from 80 or 100 years ago. Back then, having someone photograph you could be considered a privacy violation. Today, the game has changed.

We should have faith in the servers storing our data in the cloud. The four major cloud providers—Google, Microsoft, Oracle, and AWS—all have HITRUST certification as part of their solutions. So, when healthcare organizations leverage these cloud platforms, they incorporate these rigorous security programs into their overall security policies.

There’s even an argument that data is safer in the cloud. Cloud providers have dedicated teams to monitor and protect the data from hackers. Running your own servers—renting space at a local facility and managing the servers—takes extraordinary work, specialized skills, and knowledge. Knowing that I can rely on a provider like Microsoft Azure or AWS, knowing they operate under HITRUST guidelines, gives me more peace of mind as an IT professional working on healthcare solutions involving protected health information.

Jacobsen: How does IHE’s work impact healthcare providers and patient care?

Southerland: There are a lot of different use cases here. We’ve discussed providers having the right information at the right time. Doctors often discuss relevant information—they don’t need too much information. Too much information is almost worse than not having any at all. Often, clinicians will push it aside and start over because it’s information overload.

They need to get an understanding of where their patient is. Not only do they need to understand the clinical aspects of the patient, but this is also where we’re starting to see interoperability in IHE help. We need to start looking at other buckets of data, such as social determinants of health. For example, what social factors are happening in the patient’s life? Do they have financial or other daily stresses?

We know that stress, in general, can negatively affect health. Are they in an abusive situation? That’s going to impact their overall health. Do they lack access to exercise facilities or healthy food in their neighborhood, especially in impoverished areas? These factors play a strong role in a person’s overall health. IHE and other standards organizations focus on social determinants of health and other types of healthcare data that contribute to whole-person care.

Jacobsen: What is North America Connectathon Week, and why is it significant for healthcare IT?

Southerland: This coming year it’s happening in Toronto in February. It’s a week-long event where healthcare IT vendors come together. These vendors provide solutions for doctors, provider organizations, and hospitals. During the week, they test interoperability between their systems based on IHE profiles. I’ve been attending these events for 15+ years.

It’s a robust testing environment. There are testing monitors who validate system transactions, and there’s also great interaction between vendors. It’s the best quality assurance (QA) software testing lab globally for interoperability. Solving problems through emails or scheduling conference calls can take weeks or months. At Connectathon, everyone is in the same room. You have focused time to solve the same problems in minutes to hours.

There’s such a strong sense of collaboration at Connectathon Week. You have companies that are normally competitors working together. That’s the goal—we’re looking past market competition because if we can’t make our systems interoperable, we all fail. There isn’t one big health record system that will take over the country or the world. We all have to interoperate, and that collaboration is key to success.

Southerland: There’s also much other content there that talks about healthcare events and initiatives, like TEFCA (Trusted Exchange Framework and Common Agreement), a national health information network initiative in the U.S. Connectathon Week is  also international. For example, we have members and participants  from Europe – France, Germany, Japan, and others – sharing their initiatives so we can learn from other parts of the world.

I’m in the U.S., so that’s where my primary focus is, but I want to know what’s happening globally because we are all trying to solve many of the same problems. 

Jacobsen: What is the Connectathon seal? How does this have significance for military vendors?

Southerland: The Connectathon seal has been in the works for quite some time. It’s a recent certification that we’ve just introduced. If you look back at the history of IHE Connectathons, which started in the early 2000s, they began as part of a grassroots testing initiative to bring systems together, as we discussed earlier. Over the years, the events have become more robust and have moved toward a more formal conformity assessment approach.

In IHE we actually developed a conformity assessment scheme about 10 years ago. I’ve always seen this program as a sort of stepping stone to the new Connectathon Seal. It incorporated ISO certification processes, and the Seal builds on that. The idea was to give more substance to interoperability testing

The Connectathon seal takes this to the next level. It gives vendors something to put on their product that says, “I went through a rigorous interoperability testing process. I did all the required things. I passed the tests, and my system is ready to go.” This allows vendors to make a statement “about their product. When a provider organization, such as a hospital, is purchasing an EHR, lab system, or other healthcare technology, they can have confidence that this system has base-level interoperability capabilities.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on how IHE interacts with healthcare providers, patients, and business organizations to overcome barriers in data sharing while ensuring security and privacy, as discussed earlier? You mentioned that it’s not just data in the cloud that’s stolen but data in general, especially in today’s information era.

Southerland: There are many ways we could approach this topic. One of the biggest challenges is consumer access to data and data access for treatment. HIPAA regulations define different “purposes of use.” For example, HIPAA provides treatment-based access to data, as well as access for research and other healthcare industry reasons.

Consumer access, on the other hand, is regulated by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). The FTC governs consumer apps, while HIPAA governs healthcare apps. There are different actors in this space, and they face barriers. The barriers faced by a healthcare provider differ from those faced by an individual patient or a large organization.

A lot of work has been done to bridge the gap and protect patient data. As a patient consumer, this ensures that I can’t just do wildcard searches and get a content match by guessing someone’s name or address. Much discussion and work has been done within the U.S. national exchange frameworks, like CommonWell Health Alliance and TEFCA to address this.

Scaling back to the broader part of your question, IHE does well in partnering with local and national governments. We have something called national extensions built into our Profile templates. These Profiles are implementation guides for healthcare standards. To clarify, IHE doesn’t create healthcare standards;  We provide implementation guidance on how to use existing standards to solve interoperability problems.

We approach this from an international perspective, but the national extension sections within the Profiles allow for further customization based on a particular region’s needs. For example, due to different governmental policies, France might use different healthcare code sets than the U.S. – IHE allows for that flexibility through national extensions. We’ve also created regional deployment domains that oversee deployments in various countries.

Here in the U.S., we have a group called the Sequoia Project, established as the RCE—recognized coordinating entity—for TEFCA. I’m sorry; I know a lot of acronyms.

Jacobsen: That’s right. IT folks love acronyms.

Southerland: I spent a lot of time programming and grew up in that world. Now I’ve moved out of it, but I still need acronyms. The Sequoia Project is responsible for delivering the TEFCA program in the U.S., and they partner with IHE USA and IHE International to help with that. TEFCA (Trusted Exchange Framework and Common Agreement) is the Federated National Exchange Program, and it’s all built on IHE profiles.

Other elements are incorporated, but the foundation is IHE profiles. Within TEFCA, there’s something called Qualified Health Information Networks (QHINs), which basically operate as health information exchange (HIE) networks participating within TEFCA. So far, seven organizations have been designated to serve in this role. These networks undergo rigorous testing and certification processes to ensure they’re able to safely and effectively exchange data with other QHINs. They have participants that share data through their QHIN, and the QHINs acts as a gateway to exchange data across the broader ecosystem.

The system-to-system and gateway-to-gateway connections are all built on IHE profiles. So, to answer your question about how IHE helps with this, we partner with regional and local deployments to promote and advance the use of our profiles.

Jacobsen: Now, this isn’t necessarily positively framed; it is neutrally framed with the appropriate acronyms, initialisms, organization names, and real-world examples. What about the entities that are predatory when it comes to user data, organizational data, or patient data? What are the most significant and dangerous predatory actors in this space?

Southerland: That’s a good question. I’m considering how to phrase it carefully.

There are organizations out there looking to misuse healthcare data for all kinds of fraud. This is common knowledge. For instance, Medicare fraud is a big issue. In some cases, claims are filed, and payouts are made for deceased patients. Fraud like this happens.

Trust frameworks are among the mechanisms that IHE and others have built to protect against such fraud. Carequality is a great example. When you sign up to participate in Carequality, you become a network steward with legal obligations to protect the data. Given the context of this interview and its focus on IHE, that’s probably as far as I want to go, but it’s an important question.

Jacobsen: Any thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation?

Southerland: Today I think we should have discussed the significance of healthcare interoperability. We touched on it briefly, but I’d like to expand on that.

Jacobsen: What is the potential now, and why must we focus on it? 

Southerland: First, it’s important to understand that it has much potential. I would have said the same thing if you had asked me 15 years ago. But what does that mean? It means there are still many challenges to overcome in healthcare IT and interoperability. We’ve already overcome a lot, but there’s more to go.

I break it down into three stages. The first stage is building systems that can collect data. The second stage is integrating those systems—data from disparate systems and systems from different vendors and companies. In the third stage, we analyze the data, apply big data concepts, and use it on a population health scale. This is where we get into clinical research, curing diseases, and identifying trends over large populations. We can use that information to set the next generation of best practices in healthcare.

In the next 10 years, I believe we’ll see a major focus on the whole person. We talk about social determinants of health, and that’s one piece of it, but more is needed as a patient; more is needed to know what medication fits what clinical problem. I need to factor in all the other elements of my life. What’s my diet like? What’s my environment? My doctor might ask me questions during my visit, but the system must be more comprehensive and cohesive to collect and use all the facts relevant to my care. You go from one specialist to another—an orthopedist and a chiropractor—and get different answers. It leaves the patient confused about what’s best for them.

Interoperability with all that data together in a way that makes sense to the patient. It will enable patients to have better conversations with their doctors, and it will enable doctors to make better assessments because they’ll have access to the relevant data. And that’s what we’re trying to achieve in healthcare interoperability: it’s having the right data at the right time for the right patient, ultimately to improve health outcomes.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Southerland: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Sammy Ramsey on ‘Terrestrials’ and Insects

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/16

Dr. Sammy Ramsey is the founder and director of the Ramsey Research Foundation. He graduated with a Bachelor of Science in Entomology from Cornell University in 2011 and focused his research on Predatory & Parasitic Insect Behavior. He cultivated an interest and expertise in the close relationships between insects and other creatures (symbioses) and dedicated his doctoral research to understanding a parasite killing honey bees globally (Varroa destructor). He completed his formal education in Dr. Dennis van Engelsdorp’s Honey Bee lab at the University of Maryland, College Park. Honeybee and native bee health is declining worldwide, with record loss rates in honeybee populations becoming routine (higher than 40% of annual losses reported for 2018). These insects are so integral to crop production that challenges to their health threaten food security worldwide. Ramsey emphasizes the importance of effective science communication, drawing from personal experiences and his entomology expertise. He highlights the need for empathy and storytelling to engage audiences, making complex topics relatable. Dr. Ramsey connects with diverse audiences by sharing anecdotes, such as overcoming his childhood fear of insects and discussing the surprising nutritional properties of roach milk. He also underscores insects’ evolutionary advantages, genetic adaptability, and teamwork in eusocial systems. As a contributor to the kids podcast  Terrestrials from Radiolab & WNYC, he challenges listeners to rethink assumptions about insects, fostering curiosity and appreciation for their resilience and diversity.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Sammy Ramsey. In public science education, figures like Carl Sagan and Neil deGrasse Tyson have made significant contributions. What key lessons do you aim to share when you’re in the public eye, whether on broadcasts or other platforms, educating people about science or related topics? Many spend years earning doctorates and specializing in their fields. How do you communicate your expertise in a way that’s accessible to those who may not have the same level of expertise or familiarity with scientific language?

Dr. Sammy Ramsey: Language has always been incredibly important to me. I’m increasingly recognizing that, as scientists, we often need to receive more communication training. We’re selected for our positions because we’re skilled researchers who can get the work done in the lab. However, communicating that work effectively is only sometimes a priority in our field. Sharing findings beyond scientific journals is not typically considered part of our job.

This issue became especially apparent during the pandemic when people needed to trust, listen to, and believe scientists. Unfortunately, many people didn’t know us or feel a connection with us. People are far more likely to trust someone they are connected with or understand.

As a result, during this life-threatening event, many individuals turned to TikTok or celebrities with no scientific training for information. This became glaringly clear when my mom shared a video featuring the actor Tyrese Gibson in our family group chat.

Do you know who Tyrese is?

Jacobsen: No.

Ramsey: Have you seen the Fast and Furious movies?

Jacobsen: Yes, I have.

Ramsey: He’s one of the bald guys in those movies. He used to be an R&B singer—famous for his toned physique and dramatic performances. Now, he’s something of an internet celebrity, making viral videos.

In one of his videos, he claimed that if someone thought they had COVID-19 or had been exposed to it, they should boil a pot of water, sprinkle in some salt, place a towel over their head, and inhale the vapours. He said this would burn and cure all COVID-19 particles out of their noses.

Jacobsen: Wow.

Ramsey: That video had over a million views and tens of thousands of comments. People said things like, “Thank you so much for sharing the truth!” or “This is so helpful! Now I know what to do.” Seeing how much trust people placed in him despite his lack of scientific expertise was shocking.

Ramsey: It just continues to reveal to me that when we, as scientists, spend our time siloed in a laboratory and don’t engage in communicating science, we can’t expect that when an emergency arises, we can suddenly run out into the streets yelling, “Hey, listen to me! Trust me, I’m a doctor!” It’s become an important part of my work, not just to communicate science myself but also to help others do the same.

I’ve taken on the role of a science communicator, similar to the Neil deGrasse Tyson style you described. I work to engage people by making science accessible and interesting. At the same time, I’m training other researchers who are doing incredible work, helping them understand the importance of communicating their findings effectively.

It’s been a great experience. I’ve had the opportunity to develop my course in science communication. In just two years, it’s become a popular course, and seeing its impact has been rewarding. Before the next major scientific crisis occurs, we’ll have trained more scientists to communicate their work effectively.

Jacobsen: Your specialization is entomology, so you’re dealing with insects and bugs. How do you foster their appreciation for insects when communicating this to kids? Kids often either crush bugs out of fear or follow a ladybug around the yard out of fascination. How do you channel that childlike curiosity into something more like an empiricist’s curiosity?

Ramsey: I love that you mentioned “empiricist curiosity” because that’s exactly what’s most effective in engaging people with this subject. I often share my story—how I was terrified of insects as a kid and transitioned from that fear to an obsession.

When I was seven, my parents noticed that my fear of insects had become irrational. I had recurring nightmares about bugs and even struggled during recess because of them. They decided to do something about it. They took me to the local library and left me in the insect section.

My mom told me, “People fear what they don’t understand. Learn about these insects, and it’ll change things.” She had no idea just how much it would change things. Later, as an adult, she admitted she had no real plan—she was trying anything that might work.

Well, it worked—exceptionally well. On the way home from the library that summer, I told my parents, “I’m going to be an entomologist when I grow up.” I always followed that path.

What drew me to insects was their resilience. I was always the tiniest kid—40 pounds in second grade, and by the time I got to college, I still didn’t weigh 100 pounds. Insects, being some of the smallest organisms on the planet, seemed relatable to me strangely.

Despite their size, insects are the most successful organisms on Earth. They’ve figured out how to thrive in nearly every terrestrial niche, and every ecosystem depends on insects in one way or another. Their small size doesn’t limit them; it’s part of their strength. That realization made me fall in love with them.

The oceans are the only part where insects have yet to take over fully. They are the most diverse group of organisms on the planet. When I teach insect biology at the university, the first lecture begins with this: “You are now in a class where we are going to study diversity.”

That might confuse students because they signed up for entomology, but entomology is the study of diversity. There is no more diverse group of organisms on this planet. If you were to gather all the species of mammals, birds, fish, and reptiles and combine them into one group, there would still be fewer of them than in just one family of insects.

One family of insects! That is one of those mind-boggling facts that helps students appreciate how remarkable these organisms are, just as I did when I was a child.

When I talk to kids about insects, I try to take them back to where I was at their age. I want them to understand that their size does not diminish their capacity to impact the world even though they’re small humans.

Kids have a unique perspective in many ways. They see the world differently than adults, who often assume their perspective is the most accurate. I show kids all the fascinating things people miss about insects because they don’t look at them up close. Adults tend to see insects from a metaphorical 30,000-foot view. By helping kids explore this “microcosmos,” I connect with them on a deeper level.

Jacobsen: Is it part of the diversity because insects have existed longer than mammals and have short life cycles, allowing for much more rapid changes over time?

Ramsey: Exactly. Insects can evolve much more quickly than what we call K-selected organisms. When you think about life history strategies, we plot them on a selection curve. Some organisms follow a “live fast, die young” model, with populations that grow quickly but have shorter lifespans.

On the other hand, mammals typically follow the opposite strategy. It takes them a long time to reach sexual maturity, and they live much longer. Because of this slower generational turnover, evolution has less opportunity to act on mammals than insects, where rapid generational changes drive faster evolutionary processes.

Ramsey: What has truly made insects the most populous and diverse group of organisms on this planet is teamwork. Eusociality—the capacity for organisms to work together toward a common goal, with overlapping generations raising their offspring collectively—is the most successful life cycle on the planet.

Bar none, nothing even comes close. Ants, bees, wasps, and termites have dominated ecosystems worldwide by adopting this approach. They’ve even become the envy of other animal groups. You can see this in mammals, where naked mole rats have also adopted eusocial behaviour. But they’re the only mammals to do so, whereas insects have cornered the market on this strategy. It has allowed them to thrive in countless ecosystems. The sheer biomass of ants alone is staggering. Ants outweigh us as humans by a significant margin.

Jacobsen: That’s incredible. How large do these ant mounds or eusocial collectives get?

Ramsey: Some of these ant colonies are over a hundred miles wide—just ants. Think about how insane that is. One species, the Argentine ants, has effectively shown it can take over the world. There are more than 16 quintillion individual insects on this planet. That’s mind-blowing. Many of them are ants, bees, and wasps, all thanks to their ability to work together in these eusocial systems.

Jacobsen: Have there been genetic studies on how diverse insects are—not only in their structure but also in their genetics? Are they more diverse than us or other species?

Ramsey: Yes, I’m working on one of those projects now. Have you heard of the Human Genome Project? Francis Collins, who led that project, was one of my heroes growing up. I even thought his book The Language of God was fascinating.

So, it’s no surprise that, as a scientist, I started a similar initiative in my lab called the Honey Bee-nome Project. The goal is to sequence and compare the genome of every honeybee species. We’re currently about 60% of the way through.

We’ve already collected nearly every honeybee species for sequencing, and we plan trips to Borneo, the Philippines, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Malaysia, and Indonesia to gather the remaining species. By studying honeybees’ genetic diversity, we can uncover much about what has made them successful.

We’re looking into what genetic changes underpin their ability to thrive in diverse environments and what genes are most highly expressed under stress or danger. There’s still so much to learn from their genomes about how they adapt and excel.

Seeing how much information we can learn from insect genomes is fascinating. One of the most remarkable things is the incredible flexibility in their genetic makeup. We see similar flexibility in plants. Many plants have doubled their genes multiple times—some even have up to eight copies of each gene.

What does this mean? We’re often in trouble if humans mess up one of our gene copies. We typically get one copy from our mother and one from our father, giving us only two sets of alleles. If something goes wrong, we only have a few backups.

In contrast, plants with eight copies of a gene can afford to “experiment” with six of those copies. They can allow strange mutations to occur. If a mutation results in a gain of function, it can be utilized. If it’s harmful, it doesn’t matter because there are other intact copies to rely on.

Insects demonstrate similar flexibility in their genomes. Due to their short life cycles, they have more time for evolution and possess unique genetic systems. For example, eusocial insects have a haplodiploid genetic system, which allows them to choose the gender of their offspring. Males have half the genetic code, while females have the full complement. By deciding whether or not to fertilize their eggs, they can control the gender ratio in the colony.

In addition, eusocial insects have fascinating systems of genetic management. For instance, queens can store sperm from multiple males and selectively use sperm from those they deem more beneficial for the next generation while ignoring the rest. These genetic systems allow insects to adapt to and navigate a constantly changing world efficiently.

As we face the dramatic impacts of climate change, we often worry that we’re destroying the planet. But we’re not destroying the world—we’re destroying our capacity to live in it. The insects, however, will be fine. When we’re gone, they’ll carry on, thriving in the conditions we leave behind.

Their incredible genetic flexibility and adaptability remind us of the importance of resilience in the biological world. Comparing insects to mammals reveals that many traits insects possess have worked phenomenally for them. This is a humbling realization, as we often consider ourselves the dominant and most important species.

Jacobsen: How did you get interested in “Terrestrials”?

Ramsey: I got involved with Terrestrials after doing an episode with them. I’ve been obsessed with NPR for a long time and have participated in several NPR shows and podcasts. One of those was Shortwave. After I did an episode with them about murder hornets during the pandemic, Maddy Sophia, the host of Shortwave, spoke to others at NPR about my approach to science communication.

She recommended me to Lulu Miller (co-host of WNYC’s Radiolab), leading to my first Terrestrials episode. Initially, the episode wasn’t supposed to be about roach milk. Still, when I mentioned that roaches could produce milk, Lulu was fascinated. It completely took over the episode and shifted its focus.

After that, they asked me to become their official entomology correspondent. Now, I’ll contribute interesting insect-related stories and even some insect-related music every season of Terrestrials. My love for music aligns well with the show, which integrates music into its episodes. It’s been a perfect fit—a little match made in heaven.

Jacobsen: What is the coordination and collaboration process with the “Terrestrials” team? They rely on your expertise in insects, and you rely on them for musical production and storytelling. How do you ensure the key bits of information—like the details about roach milk—are communicated effectively?

Ramsey: For me, the process is a reflective one. Empathy is incredibly important to me as a scientist—the ability to put myself in another person’s place and think about how they experience the world. When I think about communicating science, I reflect on all the science communication I’ve encountered that was boring or missed the mark. Sometimes, even when the subject was fascinating or important, the delivery failed to engage me because they didn’t highlight the parts that could capture my attention.

I always ask myself: What would be most engaging if I were in this person’s shoes? How do I ensure that the most compelling information is at the forefront of our conversation?

When I discussed the ability of insects to care for their offspring, I thought, “What’s the most fascinating fact I can share?”I landed on the fact that some insects can produce milk—not just producing it, but excelling at it. Insect milk is over five times more nutritively dense than the most complex mammalian milk. That’s bound to surprise people, especially since this milk comes from roaches, an insect most people aren’t thrilled to learn about.

Sharing a positive fact about roaches—an insect with such a lowly reputation—creates a memorable moment. I anticipated people would react with, “Ew, how do you get milk from a roach? Do roaches have nipples?” which is exactly what I was asked. I used that as a springboard to compare roach milk to almond, macadamia, and soy milk. I pointed out that you can’t exactly milk an almond, but we still call it milk. So, I encouraged people to open their minds.

Interestingly, roach milk is far closer to traditional milk than plant-based alternatives because it’s produced by the organism to nourish its offspring. It’s a white, viscous fluid specifically designed to feed roach babies. That kind of detail grabs attention—people can’t help but stop and listen.

Since that episode aired, several friends, colleagues, and even strangers on social media have told me they stumbled across it by chance. They were flipping through channels, heard about roach milk, and stopped. They told me it was one of the most interesting, unexpected things they had heard.

Those moments remind me that my instincts for engaging people are usually spot on. While human beings are all unique, certain things consistently capture attention. If you start with something surprising or unexpected, you can always hold someone’s focus.

From there, it’s essential to draw people into a narrative. Storytelling is one of the most effective tools for communication because people remember stories far better than isolated facts. It’s why, when someone asks you, “How was your day?”you can easily recall events in sequence: This happened, then this, then this. Evolutionarily, we’re wired to process the world through stories.

Embedding the information I want to convey within a narrative makes it more engaging, interesting, and memorable.

Jacobsen: If you were to analyze human beings and insects, what makes an insect an insect? And what differentiates humans from other primates?

Ramsey: Good question. Several key traits define insects. From a scientific perspective, it starts with their number of legs and the location of their skeleton. Insects have six legs, which makes them unique as hexapods in the animal kingdom.

They move using something called the “alternating tripod” system. Three legs are always on the ground, giving them incredible stability while in motion. We, as humans, don’t have that. Instead, we use a pendulum-like motion when walking, swinging one leg at a time. This means we technically fall during part of each stride, which is why humans can trip and fall. Insects, however, don’t trip—they’ve figured that out, and I’m proud of them!

Another key feature is their exoskeleton, which acts as a suit of armour protecting their entire body. In contrast, humans protect critical organs like the brain and heart with an internal skeleton—our skull and rib cage. Insects don’t do this piecemeal; they protect their whole body with their exoskeleton.

This combination of traits—the exoskeleton, six legs, and sometimes wings—has made insects the most successful organisms on the planet in terms of diversity and adaptability. Their body plan is unparalleled in its effectiveness.

Jacobsen: What are you most looking forward to for “Terrestrials” in 2025?

Ramsey: For 2025, I’m excited to tell another compelling story about “Terrestrials.” We’ve already talked about roach milk and explored the Honey Bee-nome Project, including the search for a rare honeybee species in the Sundarbans of Bangladesh.

I’ve challenged listeners to rethink their assumptions about roaches and honeybees. Instead of seeing them as simple or singular creatures, I’ve highlighted the incredible diversity within these groups.

For the next season, I want to take another topic that people assume they know everything about and show them how much more there is to learn. Whether it’s about a familiar insect or an entirely new one, I want to scratch beneath the surface and reveal the depth and complexity of the insect world.

Jacobsen: Dr. Sammy, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Ramsey: Of course! I’m glad to be here. Thanks so much, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Henry Rock on City Startup Labs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/15

Henry Rock founded City Startup Labs (CSL) to empower young Black men through entrepreneurship, inspired by his experiences in Black-owned media. Over time, CSL expanded to include women and introduced the ReEntry Entrepreneurship Program, addressing the needs of justice-impacted individuals. Training emphasizes business, cognitive, and professional skills, aligned with leading workforce recommendations. Success is measured not just by low recidivism, but by employment, stable housing, career advancement, and improved financial health. Collaborations, such as with Atrium Health, enable fair-chance employment and mentorship. Rock encourages adopting community-centered restorative justice and nurturing creativity to support entrepreneurship for those often overlooked.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired the founding of City Startup Labs (CSL)? 

Henry Rock: The idea for City Startup Labs stemmed from a desire to get young Black men into the game of entrepreneurship. I had the luck of working in the golden era of Black media during the 80’s and 90’s and I worked for and with some amazing African American entrepreneurs. I was able to see up close the power of Black business ownership. Also, going back to the early to mid-2000’s, I had seen any number of efforts to “empower” women as entrepreneurs, and rightly so. But I felt that this demographic of young Black men was being overlooked. I still think that’s the case today. (my 2013 TEDxTalk outlines that original thinking)

Jacobsen: How has this organization evolved over the years? 

Rock: We launched in collaboration with the Urban League in 2014; then went co-ed in 2017, as we attempted to accommodate the desire of Black millennials (both men and women) to be in a cohort of like-minded, ambitious, aspiring entrepreneurs. Then in 2018-19 we launched the ReEntry Entrepreneurship Program (REEP) as a direct response to the Raj Chetty socio-economic mobility study and the subsequent Leading on Opportunity Report, both of which highlighted factors that thwarted people within mostly Black and Brown Charlotte communities from being able to improve their socio-economic status. CSL took the position that there is potentially a role that formerly incarcerated people, as entrepreneurially-minded catalysts, might play in improving these communities. We designed specific training based on what prior millennial cohorts experienced, but also married it with business and professional core competencies and digital tech services credentialing as well.

Most recently, we’ve decided to move into developing social ventures that can be co-owned and operated with CSL by justice-impacted individuals to meet market demands. Our first venture is what we call ReConnex (Reentry Connections), which will be a digital device repair business piloted in one of the aforementioned communities in Charlotte (deemed Corridors of Opportunity). This will allow us to leverage an award received from the State of North Carolina’s Digital Champions Grant to start this for-profit social venture.

Jacobsen: What are the cognitive skills taught through the CSL programs? 

Rock: We teach business and professional core competencies, which cover social/emotional intelligence, problem solving, critical thinking, human centered design to name a few. We have also aligned our work with McKinsey’s 2021 study regarding the foundational skills needed by employees to be effective in dynamic workplaces. Interestingly, entrepreneurship is considered one of those skill sets, as it encompasses a number of those cognitive tools. 

Jacobsen: For justice-impacted individuals, how does the ReEntry Entrepreneurship Program (REEP) approach their unique challenges? 

Rock: We start by acknowledging that in the final analysis not everyone is cut out to be an entrepreneur, however, everyone can become a valued asset to the companies they work for. This is actually no different than the point of view that we have taken from the beginning. Nevertheless, we have an appreciation for the unique challenges that come with being justice-impacted. However, many of the conditions that have contributed the circumstances that have led to justice involvement, are the very ones historically faced by Black Americans and have led to their over-indexing in the criminal justice system. While entrepreneurship can be an anecdote, to get there, we have consistently focused on the development of three asset classes — human, social and economic capital. We posit that if we’re successful in this development, our constituents will have a better chance of improving their socio-economic mobility outcomes.

Jacobsen: What factors contribute to the low recidivism rate (3%) among CSL participants? Are there any potential confounding factors there? 

Rock: Fundamentally, we’re in the people potential business. Practically, we call this 21st Century workforce development, which is a triangulation of those asset classes. The development of the human capital starts with what we call Cultivation – an exploration into who we are and why we are where we are. Then we open the window to see what’s possible when the tools that we provide are applied. Tangible possibilities can be a powerful motivator and a counterpoint to desperation. We seed social capital through Accountability Partners and/or business coaches and mentors. With these, our participants have someone who can support them on their journey. We also know that reaching the goal of financial stability (economic capital) starts with a clear plan on how to achieve it, including personal financial management and in many cases starting at square one or on the first rung of the ladder. Oftentimes, it boils down to a reimaging of how they see themselves and the choices they get to make.

Jacobsen: How has Advocate/Atrium Healthcare developed over the years? 

Rock: The relationship with Atrium grew out of a series of meetings in 2020 with the then SVP of HR. In 2021, he requested that we develop a specific effort to help Atrium lean into becoming a fair-chance employer, at the behest of Charlotte’s Mayor. That request resulted in Restorative Pathways — our Reentry Workplace Readiness initiative, which includes both employer and employee workplace readiness efforts. Our emphasis has been on offering a starting point for a career in the healthcare industry, rather than merely a job. We recently completed our 9th overall cohort, which included two that were facilitated in Winston Salem, NC, with over 100 justice-impacted individuals completing our training and onboarded into roles as teammates at Atrium Health.

Jacobsen: What have been the outcomes for participants in healthcare roles? 

Rock: A majority of the roles have been “entry level,” ranging from drivers and customer service to patient transport and environmental technician. Other roles have included IT, materials handling (which includes working in operating rooms) and CNA (certified nursing assistant). Any number of promotions have occurred. Participants have also secured housing and vehicles, along with healthcare benefits, which have been elusive for most. 

After six months on the job, teammates have the opportunity to compete for new roles. As a part of their onboarding process, following their training with us, they are assigned a mentor, as well as a career coach, who is helpful in navigating their journey in this field.

Jacobsen: How does the Restorative Pathways program prepare people for workforce reentry? 

Rock: Some of what was stated above answers this.

Jacobsen: How does CSL measure success in its programs outside of recidivism rates? 

Rock: Our impact can be seen in jobs secured, new business creation, or business traction gained, and professional development. But also, the other things that accumulate over the years of this work, like buying that first home or leasing their own apartment, buying a new car, building a savings account or being the provider for the family for the first time. Taken together, this is what success looks like for CSL. (also see our 10 Years of Impact report)

Jacobsen: What advice seems reasonable for others to establish similar programs to support entrepreneurship and workforce readiness for justice-impacted individuals? 

Rock: I would start with this idea of community-centered restorative justice; meaning that there are communities that have experienced harm, all throughout the country, in any number of ways, including neglect, economic dislocation and disruption, crime, etc., and they are in need of reconciliation. While on the other hand, we have folks – returning citizens, who need to have trust restored and often return to these same communities. We see that our returning citizens have a bias for service, a desire to give back, make amends or right the ship through being of service to others. This shows up over and over again in the tendency to want to start non-profit businesses (which we try to dissuade them from doing – we prefer that they consider social enterprises instead). What if we were to cultivate, foster, develop and unleash this untapped talent (i.e., value) in ways that can provide the reconciliation these communities desperately need?  What if we uncovered and nurtured the creativity and innovation that I believe exists within all of us, and guided and supported it? Finding imaginative ways to do these things is the best advice that I can offer.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Clive Hannah, Toronto Oasis and Its Community

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/13

Clive Hannah is an organizer with Toronto Oasis, a secular community focused on human connection and shared values. Hannah manages the organization’s website hosting and organizes the Toronto Adults with ADHD Support Group. He also volunteers with MasterHeart, a men’s group that emphasizes personal growth and camaraderie. Notably, he facilitated the transition of Toronto Oasis meetings to an online platform during March 2020, ensuring continuity and engagement through virtual gatherings. His leadership extends to hosting discussions and spearheading events.

Hannah described his journey from childhood doubts during he First Communion to eventually leaving Catholicism and joining the Toronto Oasis Group, finding acceptance outside religion. He recounted searching for secular communities since 2012 and discovering Oasis in 2017, which fulfilled his need for connection. As an organizer, he emphasized balancing fun with community involvement and coordinating inclusive activities. Hannah highlighted his work on community outreach, connecting with humanist organizations. He discussed the challenges and varied responses in the secular community. He expressed hope for expanding Oasis’s impact and securing funding.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Clive Hannah from Toronto Oasis. I have been aware of this organization for about six years now. I have interviewed many people, but not extensively within Oasis communities. What has your experience been like as a volunteer?

Clive Hannah: Meeting so many different people has been very grounding. Our group is public so anyone can join; it’s not closed. Meeting people from different backgrounds and faiths has been fascinating, which has helped me step out of my news bubble.

Discussing certain topics prompts me to reflect on why I think a certain way, my position, and where that perspective comes from. That has been enlightening. We cover many topics related to social justice issues and observe how different people respond to them. When you are part of a community and engage in discussions, other aspects of the community come forward, especially in presentations and lectures. We dedicate the first half-hour of our meetings to community-building.

We have a “Joys and Concerns” segment and a greeting session where members can mix and mingle. After that, we dive into our main topic and hold a discussion. The initial half-hour helps unite us, allowing us to explore a topic as a group.

Jacobsen: What topics and concerns tend to arise in your discussions? Do they lean more toward intellectual subjects or compassionate, community-based themes?

Hannah: Our group tries to maintain a skeptical approach, but we discuss various topics. We have even talked about UFOs. We encourage topics that anyone in the community wants to explore and approach them from a skeptical perspective, focusing on building community.

Jacobsen: Do you ever have a book club or similar activities?

Hannah: Yes, we do have a book club. One of our members has been running it for quite some time.

We are also working on shifting our focus towards activism. We are part of a larger group called the Oasis Network based in Houston and Kansas City. Having grown up Roman Catholic, I seek the sense of community that comes from the church but without the associated dogma. We do a good job of achieving that balance.

Jacobsen: How would you compare this experience to other communities besides the sense of community?

Hannah: We have five core values, one of which is “Be accepting and be accepted.” That’s a significant difference from other communities. We aim to be inclusive and welcome people of all faiths and backgrounds. We enjoy engaging with them in a shared community while staying true to our skeptical roots and promoting open discussions. However, it’s not about changing people’s opinions.

Jacobsen: How do you navigate that balance? In a Catholic Mass or service, there is a structured set of music, scripture readings, presentations, and rituals, which often encourage people to behave in a specific way that may not always be authentic.

Hannah: Navigating that line involves encouraging open discussions and accepting diverse viewpoints without imposing any particular belief system.

Jacobsen: In an Oasis group, how do you structure activities outside the community talk and the presentation? You have this value of “be accepting and be accepted.” How do you ensure this is maintained?

Hannah: We do have our code of conduct, which includes being respectful, not rude, and allowing others the chance to speak. This is important. A few organizers facilitate our discussions to ensure they remain productive and do not escalate.

One of the main ways we maintain order is by staying on topic. We don’t allow the introduction of unrelated subjects, which usually helps enrich the conversation.

Jacobsen: How big is the community now?

Hannah: We have become much smaller since the pandemic, but we typically have about 20 to 30 people attending our Zoom meetings. We transitioned completely online after the pandemic. Before when we met in person, we had around 30 to 40 attendees.

Jacobsen: And did these communities start in the 2010s or the 2000s? I am trying to remember.

Hannah: Our Toronto Oasis started in 2016 before I joined.

Jacobsen: What do you think is the long-term sustainability of these communities? That might be a critical question in conversations since you don’t have the benefits of tax-exempt land or government grants, which other organizations might receive.

Hannah: Yes, that’s true. We have done well with donations. We rented space at the University of Toronto campus when we had a physical location. We had enough members and support through donations to cover our expenses. I felt fortunate, but reaching a critical mass of participants is essential to maintaining sustainability.

Jacobsen: What is your own story of leaving Catholicism and becoming, let’s say, not so Catholic?

Hannah: It goes back to when I was around seven, during my First Communion. There is a point where the priest asks, “Do you believe in Jesus?” At that age, I said, “No, I don’t.” I felt confident in my parents, who did believe, but they allowed me to have my own views. However, I was put off by the sacraments and rituals of the Catholic Church.

My parents told me, “We already bought you a suit and planned a party—just say yes.” So, I did, but I held onto my true values despite going along with it. However, I wasn’t confident in my beliefs until my early twenties, when I went through a period of soul-searching.

One moment that stood out was when a friend invited me to a Hindu ceremony. I saw a picture of Jesus on the altar, which surprised me. It broke my perception because, in a Catholic church, you would never see another god. But the Hindu faith said, “Yes, we’ll include your God.”

There was a different level of acceptance that I felt was missing from my Catholic upbringing, and that led me to keep searching for something even more accepting. Eventually, that journey brought me to the Toronto Oasis group.

Jacobsen: How do you feel life changes within a theological system versus outside?

Hannah: The biggest challenge is finding a new community. Growing up, my family was deeply embedded in the Catholic community. Even other activities my parents participated in were connected to the Catholic Church. Toronto is an example of a place where, if you want to step away from your religious culture and community, there is another option. You can still feel accepted and bond with others, but it’s not based on shared beliefs; it’s simply because you’re human.

Jacobsen: How do the community leaders present themselves compared to religious figures who might wear elaborate dress and hold positions of unquestionable authority?

Hannah: I’m one of the organizers within our group. I emphasize with my fellow organizers that we must keep things fun and maintain a sense of community. We can’t separate ourselves from the group; otherwise, it feels like a job or a chore. We take turns handling our duties so everyone can relax and be part of the community. That approach is essential for sustaining the connection and sense of community.

Jacobsen: What are you hoping to bring to the community in 2025? Do you have specific activities or membership drives in mind, especially considering the benefits and limitations of being online?

Hannah: One benefit of going online is that we’ve attracted more people internationally. Participants are joining from Europe, the U.S., and beyond while maintaining our Toronto base. One of our other organizers is focused on initiatives like supporting food banks and exploring ways to serve the larger community. Food banks are just one example, but there are other ideas we’re working on.

Jacobsen: How do you find the process of coordinating and organizing these events, ensuring they’re both enjoyable and structured enough to meet people’s expectations?

Hannah: Our approach aligns with the core values established through the Oasis Network. We don’t want to over-facilitate or make sure everything happens rigidly. It’s about embracing the mystery of things and letting them unfold naturally. The feedback we’ve received indicates that this approach is different from other secular groups in Toronto, which often lean more toward intellectual discussions. I want it to be more community-based, focusing on enjoying each other’s company.

Jacobsen: That could include something as simple as going to a Tim Hortons or McDonald’s and chatting for an hour.

Hannah: Yes, exactly. We have what we call “Meet and Greet,” where we go to a restaurant for a couple of hours and talk about anything, but with the underlying idea of returning it to our shared sense of community.

Jacobsen: Yes. So, it’s less of a “why are we here” group and more of a “how are you doing” group.

Hannah: Especially with the “Joys and Concerns” segment, where we want to hear the highs and lows of your week. We don’t want to be an overly cheerful group; we create space to acknowledge both the spoken and the unspoken. What isn’t said can be just as important as what is shared. Someone could have a low moment, like talking about the death of a friend. Sometimes, we follow that with up to a minute of silence to give people space to feel and process that moment.

Jacobsen: What about coordination with other groups on occasion? There are humanist groups and many other groups around in Toronto.

Hannah: Many of our community overlaps with the Humanist Association of Toronto, but we serve different purposes. We’ve never felt that our groups are at odds with each other. It’s fascinating that Toronto Oasis offers something slightly different that provides unique value to the community. We’re not trying to compete with other groups like Atheists and Friends or CFIC.

Atheists and Friends are interesting because they meet at a pub once a month. I’ve been there a few times, and while it’s a different experience from what Oasis provides, I enjoy both. People must experience or study these new communities because they are based on something other than holy texts. They might have a book club focusing on seasonal books or well-written works relevant to certain subjects.

Jacobsen: Your volunteer who runs the book club—has that been an interesting dynamic?

Hannah: Although he has not done it recently, his approach was unique. We don’t all read the same book. Instead, we share what we’re reading and discuss it. He doesn’t stop there; he’ll ask if anyone watched an interesting movie or read an article—anything impactful they’d like to share. I think this speaks to our accepting mantra.

Jacobsen: There should be government grants or other support for secular groups like these. Yes, having Atheists and Friends, Oasis and Sunday Assembly shows the variety of experiences available. It’s exciting to see this diversifying landscape. This is a step beyond the simple “we’re here, get used to it” mindset, aiming for equal societal status while building sustainable communities. How do you see the orientation of these groups changing compared to the 2000s?

Hannah: It’s very different now. I enjoy that different community members, not just the organizers, offer topics for discussion. This allows me to discover my opinions and think, “Where did that come from? Why do I feel this way?” It’s not just about religious beliefs; we have other beliefs that we dismantle together.

Jacobsen: Many of your ethics align with humanist values, which is why we believe in certain principles and the universalism behind them. It’s important and enlightening. What have you seen other Oasis groups doing that you’d like to start?

Hannah: We are involved with other Oasis groups and recently attended a conference in Kansas City. They purchased a former church for their meetings, funded entirely through donations. We could reach a similar critical mass in Toronto and establish a permanent location. Having a foundation in a neighbourhood would bring more people and strengthen the community.

Jacobsen: How do you differentiate yourselves from other Oasis groups?

Hannah: The best part is that we feel the same in spirit, even if we have our unique community dynamics.

In Kansas City, the Oasis meetings are recorded and shared on YouTube and Facebook Live. I’ve watched some of them and thought, “Oh, this feels like one of our meetings here in Toronto.” I enjoy that sense of sameness rather than differentiation.

Jacobsen: How large is the Oasis Network now?

Hannah: It’s about seven or eight chapters. We’re one of only two in the Toronto area. There’s Toronto Oasis and West Hill United in Scarborough. The rest of the chapters are based in the U.S.

Jacobsen: How does being the only Canadian group among predominantly American chapters feel?

Hannah: It has posed some challenges. We’ve had to step up and say, “Hey, we’re Canadian here,” when discussions lean too heavily on U.S.-centric topics like, “Go talk to your senator.” We strive to change the language to make it more inclusive and international.

Jacobsen: Have you tried applying for funding to cover expenses like a Zoom premium account for unlimited call lengths?

Hannah: No, we haven’t. A certain level of effort is required to reach that stage, and while we’re open to the idea, we’re not there yet. When we grow larger, we’ll consider it, but not now. The goal would be to eventually attain that tax-exempt status.

Jacobsen: Did I miss any important points, or have we covered most key details?

Hannah: Yes, I’d like to add that when I first came across Toronto Oasis, it was through my partner, who was a guest speaker. I attended a meeting and thought, “Wait, what’s happening here?” That was around 2017. Before that, in 2012 or 2013, I was searching for secular groups but didn’t even know the right terms, like “secular” or “humanism.” I was still early in my journey for a community. When I didn’t find what I was looking for, I gave up and thought, “Well, I tried.” Then I found Toronto Oasis and realized it was exactly what I had been looking for four years earlier.

I joined for a few weeks, stepped away for a while, and then realized I missed it. Since then, I have attended every meeting. I’m also part of a men’s group, which serves a different purpose but makes me feel connected to the community.

Jacobsen: What’s the nature of the men’s group, and how does it differ from the general Oasis community?

Hannah: I also help organize that group, Powerful and Loving. We talk about masculinity and femininity and how to balance them. It’s about holding both sides, advocating for yourself, maintaining agency, and related topics. These aren’t discussions we have in Oasis, so it adds a different level of connection for me.

Jacobsen: Are there things guys talk about in the men’s group that they won’t mention in the general group?

Hannah: For sure. Discussions about sex and money are big topics that most men tend to keep private.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time, Clive. I appreciate it.

Hannah: You’re welcome. Thank you, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Billy Peterson: Wealth Management and Happiness

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/12

Billy Peterson is a seasoned author, world champion jockey, and successful financial advisor. His latest book, From the Starting Gate: The Winning Strategies for Wealth, Health, and Happiness, provides readers with actionable advice on wealth-building and holistic well-being. As the founder of Peterson Wealth Services, managing $425 million in assets for over 400 clients, Peterson is a trusted voice in financial education. His podcast, Harnessing Your Wealth, further showcases his expertise, especially in navigating economic uncertainty. His career journey from racetrack success to financial freedom serves as the foundation for his motivational and insightful works.

Peterson discussed the importance of financial literacy and long-term investment strategies, discouraging speculation, especially with cryptocurrencies. He highlighted the connection between financial well-being and health, arguing that financial stress can lead to chronic conditions. Peterson encouraged avoiding unnecessary expenses, focusing on investing in established businesses, and staying patient during market downturns, using historical examples like Walmart’s growth to illustrate the potential benefits of disciplined investing.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Billy Peterson. We’ll be discussing From the Starting Gate. You’re an expert in wealth and wealth management, and many people typically associate financial well-being with some level of happiness. With this latest work, let’s start with an overview. What message are you trying to convey to your audience regarding wealth management and its connection to happiness?

Billy Peterson: Thanks for having me, Scott. My background is in financial services. I’ve spent 28 years helping people manage and build wealth—accumulating and preserving it. Over the years, I’ve learned that most people don’t understand the basic tenets of financial literacy. It’s not something that’s widely taught in schools. We learn more about math, art, or social sciences than we do about managing money, which we all need to deal with throughout our lives.

Financial well-being significantly impacts every area of our lives. It has a significant influence on our happiness and health outcomes. If we’re constantly worried, anxious, and stressed over making ends meet, affording necessities, or dealing with massive debt—issues many people face today—that stress can take a toll on our health. This is common knowledge, but it’s not as present in our everyday awareness as it should be. People tend to brush it off, saying, “Yes, I get it,” but they don’t fully grasp how closely it’s tied to the rise in diseases and chronic conditions in our society.

Most people want to attribute these conditions to something tangible—something they can see, touch, or study in a lab. But there’s no definitive study for how the mind regulates the body, partly because we don’t fully understand how the mind operates, and it varies from person to person. Some doctors are beginning to recognize this, and it goes back to Freud’s work on the levels of the mind, especially the subconscious. When we’re in a state of fear, anxiety, and stress—whether about money or other things—it affects how our body functions and the chemicals produced within us.

Too much of these negative chemicals can lead to disease and chronic pain. These factors heavily influenced why I wrote this book. I’ve had extensive experience in these areas, and one key principle I emphasize is avoiding speculation and understanding true investment. I view speculation as a high-risk investment—something to avoid.

Jacobsen: So why should people avoid speculation, and what should they understand about long-term investment strategies?

Peterson: That’s a great question. Humans are herd animals. We stay in groups and follow what others are doing, especially if it works. But in doing so, we often repeat the same mistakes repeatedly.

A great book called Devil Take the Hindmost delves into the manias and speculative periods throughout hundreds of years of human history. We look back on these events and think, “How could people have been so foolish?” Yet, we continue to see the same patterns repeated time and time.

We’re living it right now with everything happening—speculation and cryptocurrencies. Hundreds of thousands of cryptos exist, and everybody has a different take on them, such as developing a new coin. You can’t touch, feel, or see but buy it because people want it. Now, what is it going to give you? What utility does it offer? All it is is hoping that someone else will want it more than you do. That’s 100% what it is. It’s supposed to be a currency. It’s supposed to have a limited supply.

And, of course, I know Bitcoin is a big deal, and it’s here to stay—everyone’s talking about it. It’s everywhere. Governments even own it. So it’s become a normal part of our society. However, I ask this: when the proverbial shit hits the fan, what do people want? They want to get their hands back on their cash. They want their money in their hands.

People ask me, “How will that work when we have a major economic collapse?” And sooner or later, that’ll happen—another recession. How are they going to grab all their money? What’s happening to Bitcoin? Where do you get it? You can’t. It’s supposedly in your account, in some digital storage vault.

I understand the technology is there, and I understand it’s cool. But people are speculating on it. They don’t use it as a currency; they’re trying to use it as an investment.

Now, go back and study something as goofy as it sounds—tulip bulb mania. This happened way back in the 1600s during the Dutch Golden Age. The Dutch people were so fascinated with tulip bulbs that they invested their entire life savings. This is common knowledge, a historical fact. People lost everything. But for decades, people were investing in tulip bulbs, and it became so normal that tulip bulbs were worth more than any coins in their pocket or whatever currency they were using at the time.

People were speculating on what those bulbs would become as they flowered. Tulip bulbs are the best equivalent of owning a home in today’s society. Think about how silly that sounds now. But I’m telling you, 100 years from now, people will look back and say, “What in the hell were people doing with this crypto stuff? What were they thinking?” I don’t know what will bring this craze back to reality, but there is so much speculation in our society. I’ve been in this industry for 28 years and have never seen anything like this.

The point is that people are in this mindset that they can retire easily—no work, patience, or discipline. They think they can roll the dice, throw money into the right crypto, and, bam, they’ll retire as multimillionaires. I see it so often, and I’m telling you, this will end badly—just like all the other manias did.

Another factor that needs to be discussed more is government involvement in cryptocurrencies. Governments want to know how much money is in the system, where it’s going, and how to trace it.

Jacobsen: Governments may crack down on cryptocurrency, even though some are involved. Do you see that as potentially one of the factors that could “bring things down to earth” for this mania?

Peterson: Good question. I look at it like this. I always apply common sense to these things because people, especially in the media, often make the rest of us seem out of touch, uneducated, or not up with the times. They did the same thing with the real estate boom and bust. They did the same thing with dot-com stocks in the 2000s—if you can recall that—when tech and Internet stocks skyrocketed. Warren Buffett, one of the most famous investors in our history, shunned those investments. He told people to stay away from them because there were no earnings behind those companies.

They did the same thing to him, saying, “He doesn’t get it. The older man doesn’t understand. This is a different scenario.” And yet, most of those companies went to zero. A few survived and are doing well now, but that’s the same thing I’m saying about what might happen to cryptocurrencies. Something is going to trip the switch. Something will pull one of the cards out of this deck, and they’re all starting to crumble. We are still determining exactly what it’ll be, but it could be government intervention.

When I talk about common sense, do you think any government would want its currency overtaken by a digital currency that everyone preferred over, say, the U.S. dollar? What would happen to our government if the U.S. dollar became second tier to Bitcoin? The whole premise behind Bitcoin is that people don’t want government intervention. They don’t want the government to manipulate it. And in some ways, I agree. Our government has screwed up many things they should’ve kept their hands out of. Government, by and large, tends to mess up more than they help in many areas. The proverbial bias: and yes, I’ll admit that.

Jacobsen: Yes, I understand. This might be a different focus of our conversation, but it’s something on many people’s minds. This is an open space for free-ranging conversation. It was meant to be focused, but I always wonder how these will necessarily turn out. That’s part of the fun—this is a relaxed, authentic space. 

So, let’s say people are anxious. They come to you because they know your background—you’ve written books and know you’re a financial expert. You’ve been managing wealth for clients with portfolios that can reach nine figures. The number I was given recently was $425 million.

To regular people, that number is almost incomprehensible. It’s so large that it doesn’t have a grounding—it’s hard to compare to real-life situations. So, how do you pitch to people to invest in the long term and have patience so their future selves can be less anxious and better prepared for the inevitable storms of life?

Peterson: Scott, I was given this opportunity. Everyone has a role in life. When people find their passion and love what they do, they often want to help others—not just benefit themselves. I have benefited greatly from what I do, which is helping people create, sustain, and enjoy wealth and do the right thing with it.

But I didn’t just stumble into this. My career began because of one pivotal moment when I was 14. I grew up—and still live—in the same small town. It’s primarily a farming community. My dad is a farmer; his dad was a farmer, and his dad was before him.

Everyone in my family farms or ranches. They know how to work with the land and animals. We’d go to the coffee shop every afternoon, and all the local farmers would be there. I went with my dad every day at 4 o’clock. By then, I had already started my career as a jockey. I was exercising horses, riding in races, and winning money.

For a 14-year-old back in those days, I was doing pretty well, but I didn’t fully realize it. I thought I was working hard and making good money for my age. Then, one day, an older gentleman, who surprised me, asked, “Billy, what are you doing with your money? You’re doing pretty well.”

I was proud to tell him I was putting most of it in the bank. But he said, “That might not be the best thing to do.” I looked at him and asked, “What do you mean, Mr. Tucker?” He said, “Come back here tomorrow, and I’ll explain.”

So, I thought about it. I did. The next day, I sat there while the usual conversations about politics, sports, and the country’s state went on, hoping he would remember. Sure enough, he did. He said, “Now sit down here next to me.”

He opened the newspaper—newspapers were a big deal back then. I still read the physical papers. He opened the finance section and scrolled down to the mutual fund section. He circled one and said, “This is a mutual fund.” I didn’t know what a mutual fund was, but he explained it to me in layperson’s terms—terms a rancher could understand.

He said, “This is an investment company that will take your money and invest it for you. All you need to do is sit back and be patient. Keep adding to it if you can.” He gave me an investment application form and told me to fill it out, send in some money, and, most importantly, check the box that says, ‘I want to contribute every month.’

So, I did. I submitted my application for $1,000 and checked the box to add $100 monthly. At that age, it was a big commitment, but I knew I could do it. And I did.

Then, I became passionate because I was watching my money grow. As the years passed and my contributions increased, people started asking me what I was doing. I studied and read the Wall Street Journal instead of some comic books.

I was reading things that enlightened me about the world, investing, and how capital markets work. So, when I went to college, I studied finance and economics. At the same time, I was still a professional racehorse jockey. People in the industry started asking me how I managed my investments and what I was doing.

I began helping them, and it became a natural fit for me. It might not seem that way at first glance—a jockey becoming a financial advisor—but that’s how it transpired. I found my calling and realized it wasn’t so difficult. I didn’t have to work physically hard; I could invest in great companies, support their growth, and make money while they built their businesses, created more earnings, and did good things for the economy.

That’s the story of how I started investing. It’s not hard—you have to begin and not be afraid when things get bad. That’s actually when you should increase your contributions. I still teach that to students today.

I run a free boot camp where I teach 500 students every year. I bring them to a local university, and along with my staff and other volunteers, we spend a full day teaching high school students about financial literacy, debt avoidance, taxes, and much more. That’s my way of giving back because Mr. Tucker shared his knowledge with me. I am obligated to pass that knowledge on to many people.

Jacobsen: To your point about being both a jockey and a financial advisor—that’s not so unusual. I once worked at a show jumping farm owned and run by a former Olympic show jumper for Canada. They trained Tiffany Foster when she was younger—she’s an excellent show jumper from Canada. Many people at that farm were business professionals in fashion, law, and more.

So, you find people in various professions who also engage in equestrian activities, whether for recreation or competition. Tiffany is involved in some fashion or decor-related business, too. Horse people are dynamic.

Although horse racing differs from show jumping or dressage.

Peterson: there are many disciplines within the equestrian world. You’d be amazed at the various avenues and offshoots you can explore with horses.

Jacobsen: If you talk to show jumpers about three-day eventing, they’ll say, “It’s crazy.”

Peterson: No kidding. We’re going to the Breeders’ Cup races in Del Mar, California, in a few weeks. People worldwide—the Sheikhs, the kings and queens, and the wealthiest individuals—will attend. This is called the sport of kings for a reason. The best horses and the most influential people worldwide will gather in Del Mar for those two days of races.

Jacobsen: It’s wild, especially with people like His Highness from the UAE—he loves horses. And Canada had just one gold medalist in show jumping, Eric Lamaze.

But when you look at these life stories, it’s a roller coaster. You get much drama. It could fill volumes of books. That’s off-topic.

What is the most significant state of mind people should have when investing long-term or for financial stability? How can they lower their anxiety and avoid stress-related illnesses caused by financial despair?

Peterson: That’s a great question. It’s tough. Too many people have the mindset that they can’t afford to invest. That’s very shortsighted. You can afford to invest if you prioritize it in your budget. You have to cut back on certain things. Skip that $6 latte today, or resist the temptation to stop at the convenience store and spend $20 on snacks for the kids. It happens so often.

It’s so easy to spend money these days. You can tap your phone—you don’t have to think about it. You don’t have to pull out cash, which is much harder to part with. But when you’re tapping your phone, it feels like, “I’ll deal with that later, no big deal.” So we run up debt. We have more consumer credit card debt in this country than ever. It’s scary. And I understand the big reason is inflation.

We’ve had crazy inflation in the last few years, and the numbers they report don’t reflect the true picture. They say costs have risen 20% over the last four years, but that’s inaccurate. The real numbers are closer to 40% or 50% for daily necessities.

Wages haven’t kept up with inflation, so real wages are lower than before. But that doesn’t mean you can’t invest a certain percentage of your income. Always pay yourself first. And when you invest, don’t chase something that sounds too good to be true. So many people have lost everything trying to get rich quickly, thinking it will happen overnight. Investing is easy, but it takes time to build wealth.

What makes it meaningful is that you’re in it for the long haul. It’s like starting a business. I admire and respect entrepreneurs—they become some of the wealthiest people in the world. However, not everyone has the desire or the capacity to handle the stress, worry, and time it takes to build a successful business.

So why not buy into a business that’s already established? Most people don’t even realize that’s possible—that’s what the stock market is—the capital markets. But when people hear “stock market,” they think it’s a gamble, like going to Vegas.

Peterson: That’s not at all what it is. The market is where you can buy shares of any publicly traded company or sell them whenever you want, which is great because you can get your money back quickly. However, that’s also one of the biggest pitfalls for people. When the news gets scary, they listen to those around them—especially the goofballs on TV—who say the world is ending or the sky is falling. So, they panic and want to pull their money out quickly. The market has already dropped, and they sell when they should be doing the opposite.

They should be buying—buy when things are down, and the news is the worst. That’s when you can get great companies at deeply discounted prices. Some top companies in our models and portfolios include Apple, Costco, Home Depot, Amazon, NVIDIA, and Tesla. These are strong companies with great business models and barriers to entry.

Let me give you a quick example with Walmart. It’s a “boring” company, one most people have shopped at at some point. If you had bought 100 shares of Walmart when it went public in 1972, at the initial public offering price of $16.50 per share, you’d have invested $1,650. If you had just forgotten about that investment, today, those 100 shares would be worth more than $36 million, and you’d receive nearly $500,000 in dividends annually.

And this isn’t even one of the craziest growth stories in history—this is a boring company selling discounted goods. But that’s the power of capital markets. You don’t have to create the business yourself—you can invest alongside great companies and become wealthy.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Peterson: Absolutely. Have a good day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Alexandra H. Solomon: Couples Authentically Explored

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/11

Over the last three decades, Dr. Alexandra H. Solomon has become one of today’s most trusted relationship voices. A professor, therapist, speaker, author, retreat leader, and media personality, Dr. Solomon is passionate about translating cutting-edge research and clinical wisdom into practical tools people can use to bring awareness, curiosity, and authenticity to their relationships. Her work on Relational Self-Awareness has reached millions of people around the world.

Dr. Solomon studied Psychology and Women’s Studies at the University of Michigan and received her PhD in Counseling Psychology and a graduate certificate in Gender Studies from Northwestern University. During graduate school, she was awarded the Dr. John J.B. Morgan Fellowship and worked at The Family Institute at Northwestern University as a research and clinical fellow.

Dr. Solomon spent many years as a clinical assistant professor in the Department of Psychology at Northwestern University and a faculty member in the Master of Science in Marriage and Family Therapy program at The Family Institute at Northwestern University. She was the principal investigator in The Family Institute’s Family Business Project. She is a faculty member in the School of Education and Social Policy (SESP) at Northwestern University and a licensed clinical psychologist at The Family Institute at Northwestern University.

In addition to serving as an ad hoc reviewer for leading journals like the Journal of Marriage and Family Therapy (JMFT) and Family Process and writing articles and chapters for leading academic journals and books in the field of marriage and family, she is the author of two bestselling books, Loving Bravely: Twenty Lessons of Self-Discovery to Help You Get the Love You Want and Taking Sexy Back: How to Own Your Sexuality and Create the Relationship You Want. She also writes a popular blog for Psychology Today.

Dr. Solomon maintains a psychotherapy practice for individual adults and couples. In 2024, she founded the Institute for Relational Self-Awareness (IRSA). She is a founding expert on the Mine’d app and serves on the clinical board of Dame Products. She provides clinical training to clinicians and graduate students and teaches the internationally renowned undergraduate course Building Loving and Lasting Relationships: Marriage 101. Her newest offering is a comprehensive, self-paced e-course, Intimate Relationships 101.

Dr. Solomon regularly presents to diverse groups, including the United States Military Academy at West Point, Microsoft, and the American Association of Marriage and Family Therapy (AAMFT). She is frequently asked to discuss relationships with media outlets like The Today Show, O Magazine, The Atlantic, Vogue, and Scientific American.

When she isn’t working, she loves long walks, sweaty workouts, and Yahtzee. She lives with her husband, Todd, and their teens in Highland Park, Illinois.

Solomon talks about her career studying relationships and intimacy. Solomon shares her upbringing in a complex family, which influences her fascination with love and relationships. They discuss how couples therapy requires understanding both partners, their interpersonal dynamics, and the cultural context. Solomon emphasizes the importance of evolving within long-term relationships and advocates for couples to embrace their growth. They also explore societal expectations around monogamy, the rise of non-monogamy, and the impact of relationship breakups, including the grief and shame often associated with them.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Alexandra Solomon from the Institute for Relational Self-Awareness, IRSA. She’s calling in from Chicago. So, how did you first get interested in relationships, intimacy, couples, and so on? You’ve been doing this for close to three decades now?

Professor Alexandra Solomon: Not quite three, but getting close. More than two. Yes, this has truly been my life’s work. The deepest version of the story is that I grew up in a home watching my parents struggle in their relationships in a complicated blended family that faced challenges in several ways.

So I had that influence—what I was watching and experiencing in my home—and I grew up during the early days of Oprah, Phil Donahue, self-help, and Dr. Ruth. My whole life, I was fascinated by the world of love, sex, and relationships. But I had it in my head that I had to become a medical doctor. Luckily, I had a breakthrough in college and realized that I could make studying relationships my life’s work, which has suited me well.

There’s a way in which the expertise I’ve developed is in honour of the little girl I used to be, who felt so overwhelmed and confused by what her parents were going through. Now, I can be of service in my life today. I’m deeply grateful for my career and all the places it has taken me for individuals who have gone through difficult family circumstances and have become licensed clinical psychologists—which, for those listening, is considered elite within the field of psychology because these programs are a) difficult to get into and b) rigorous, compared to many other programs. It’s not to diminish other programs, but these have a certain mythology around them.

My program had five people in it. I was in a cohort of five, and to this day, I still feel immense gratitude for the professor who saw my application. I went straight from undergrad and worked incredibly hard. I had written a rigorous undergrad honours thesis, but did she ever take a chance on me? I hope I’ve done right by her because, yes, these clinical psychology PhD programs are hard to get into, and they are brutal.

Jacobsen: So, before we dive into more of the main topics, which we’ll cover in session 2, what did you realize while doing that program—that intensive training—about your family history? I’m sure many people who go through these programs, especially those with challenging circumstances, gain a lot of self-insight.

Jacobsen: Yes, that is truly the heart of any good training program preparing people to become clinicians. My program prepared me to become both an academic/researcher and a clinician. However, that clinical aspect—any program worth its tuition—will ask students to examine their history. Any responsible therapist has done their work. The best clinical training programs treat the clinician as their subject.

It’s not that there’s a world of therapists over here and a world of patients over there. No, we’re all on these journeys and must understand our histories. I gained a lot of insight into the impact of not being willing to take responsibility for your behaviour.

I put myself into therapy when I was probably 20. I was trying hard to take responsibility for myself in a way that I don’t know that I saw the grown-ups who raised me taking responsibility for themselves. I understood that we get to be works in progress and on our healing journeys. The grown-ups I saw growing up were acting out their pain rather than turning towards their pain and trying to heal it.

Now, I’m the mom of two young adults, and who knows? They may well sit in their own therapy offices someday and talk about the ways I acted out my pain rather than healing it. But I feel pretty confident that one of the things I modelled in our home, as my husband and I were raising our kids, was taking responsibility for ourselves, our moods, and our words. I’ve spent many years apologizing to my kids when I’ve been thoughtless or sharp-tongued and tried to come back and make things right.

Jacobsen: Do you think many of these family issues stem from a certain pain point for that parent?

Solomon: Absolutely, yes. When I am working with—I don’t do therapy with children. Still, when I’m working with a couple, we often talk about the challenges they’re facing with their kids. There are disagreements between parents, or parents are stressed about things their kids are doing or not doing. My first question is, I want to hear from both partners. I want to hear about their childhoods. I specifically want to know what was going on in their life when they were the same age as their kid is now.

Because there are certain ages and stages of parenting that are particularly difficult for parents, one of the reasons can be that this is the point at which their father left the family or the point at which they, God forbid, suffered sexual trauma. So, that thing the parent went through, which they may have shoved aside or pushed away, gets reactivated when their child reaches that age.

Jacobsen: When you’re talking about self-awareness, for someone like myself who is not an expert, I think of these things as internal work. That awareness is like circling back on itself. As opposed to regular couples therapy, which is between two people, this awareness also involves a circular process within the individual. Does that complicate couples therapy when you’re adding self-awareness into the mix?

Solomon: There is a core feature to that. You’re asking good questions for someone who isn’t an expert. That’s an excellent question. I’m currently developing a certification course for couples therapy, and that’s the thing I find most exciting and most challenging—how to train someone to become a competent couples therapist. I’ve been doing this for 15 years, training graduate students to become couples therapists at the Family Institute at Northwestern, so this is not my first time doing it. But at this point, every time I teach, I can reevaluate and reflect on, “Why do I believe what I believe?”

Why do I do what I do? And you’re exactly right. When I am sitting with a couple, there are four things I keep in mind: the psychology of partner A, the psychology of partner B, the interpersonal process that happens between them, and, fourth, the cultural backdrop that shapes everything that all three of us are thinking and feeling. So, there are four lenses of analysis in couples therapy. It isn’t very easy, and my husband Todd and I have been in couples therapy over the years. I have distinct memories of it, and one memory is sitting with a couples therapist—and let me tell you, it’s a pain to be a couples therapist for other therapists!

So, I do not envy the various providers. But when I’ve been in the role of a couples therapy recipient, I had the experience of one of our therapists. I could tell she was a good psychologist but didn’t know how to hold the system. She could understand Todd’s psychology, and she could understand Alexandra’s psychology. Still, I didn’t feel like she held the relational process we were going through.

Then, I have another memory of a therapist who was able to shape and refine the dance that Todd and I got into. So, that is a distinct skill set—how do you hold both the individuals and the couple?

Jacobsen: Now, I’ve heard much commentary around a rise in narcissism in the general culture, as well as the difficulty in treating Cluster B personality disorders. Yet, in contrast, I’ve heard proactive, constructive conversations around authenticity as a deterrent to narcissism and as a way to reduce the emergence of problematic psychological traits in oneself.

When you are in this therapeutic process with these four factors, do you try to elicit more authentic responses between the couple so they can develop more natural, genuine, healthy, and integrated relationships within the partnership?

Solomon: Yeah, I do. That’s a whole different conversation for us to have about this so-called rise in narcissism, which I have some concerns about. We must be having a larger, more general conversation about narcissism, and I’m here for that. But I worry that we are watering it down. When there’s much information out there, there’s also a responsibility to use it carefully and not just stick a label on your partner, like, “You are a narcissist.” Certainly, narcissistic tendencies exist, and we all have the risk of slipping into those tendencies—deflecting, defending, saying, “It’s not me.”

One of my roles as a couples therapist is helping create an office environment that feels safe enough for people to hold up a mirror and look at their behaviour gently and compassionately, which evokes self-compassion in the client.

Certainly, I have had very resistant clients—arms crossed, saying, “No way. I’m not looking at myself.” But I’ve also had the experience where someone reluctantly comes into my couples therapy office. They might be coded as narcissistic because they are deflecting, defending, afraid to take responsibility, and maybe have never been asked to do so.

That has been my job—to leverage my experience, heart, and alliance with that client to help them safely start looking at the “why.” Some people can have quite offensive-looking behaviours—deflecting, defending, and defensiveness. Those are offensive behaviours. But when I can see through that and understand the pain that drove that behaviour, it’s not making an excuse for it but contextualizing it. When I can reach for that pain and understand who they were as a little boy and why that way of coping was a survival strategy in their home when they were little, then we can start to peel back the layers. We can start to learn some new skills.

Then I can help that client tenderly reparent that little boy. I can invite the partner to look differently at those patterns that have been so hurtful, and we can start to create a different dynamic.

Jacobsen: So what do you do when dealing with more cognitive, intellectual clients, and clients who talk like regular people but don’t necessarily speak in terms of abstraction? When you’re trying to get the point across about noticing a problem, wanting to communicate that to them, and working out a process to reintegrate to a better place of homeostasis for the relationship?

Solomon: I am responsible for modifying my approach to meet clients where they are. One of the ways I do that is by using their language—playing their language back to them and then building on it.

Another way might be sharing something and checking in, ensuring they understand what I’ve offered. Just because something makes sense in my head doesn’t mean it makes sense in somebody else’s head. Something else I might do, even if I have a strong feeling that I’m on a track that’s going to be accurate or resonant, is to say, “I might be out in the left field with this, but let me run it by you and see what you think.” I get super, super circumspect with something.

That’s at the heart of empathy. Empathy is sometimes reflecting someone’s current feelings toward them. Still, there’s another level of empathy:

  • Taking someone’s words and description and advancing it
  • Deepening it
  • Taking it to the next place

That’s an attuned empathy—I see where you’re at, I match that, and I raise it slightly.

Yes, those are some of the thoughts off the top of my head in terms of how I work. Certainly, it’s different to work with someone who has years of therapy under their belt compared to someone who’s working things out in real-time. This might be their first time thinking about it, and that’s not necessarily an age thing.

I’ve had 25-year-olds where it’s their first time in therapy, and I’ve had 55-year-olds where it’s their first time in therapy. So, there’s a learning curve. I’ve been in this world for so long that I forget what a particular way of thinking and talking is, and it takes a while to help people get oriented and comfortable with it.

Jacobsen: What clients can be difficult, if not impossible, to work with—individually or as a couple?

Solomon: Do you mean for me or the field in general? I can tell you what the research tells me. 

Jacobsen: Good insight. So, individually, but with some side commentary on the field. I’m aware of some comments from various experts who say, “Cluster B personality disorder is code for, ‘difficult patient.’”

Solomon: Yes, the research says that the most difficult couples to work with are—I know the top 3. The top three that couples therapists will tell you are:

Number 1 is lack of love. It’s hard to work with a couple with such big walls built up—years of disconnection, they haven’t touched in years, and there hasn’t been softness or vulnerability for a long time. That reawakening is difficult. Sometimes, what can make that easier is if we can find a place in their story where they used to feel that way, then at least we’re trying to reawaken something that used to be there. But there are couples where it never was, and that’s a relationship founded in companionship, creating different markers for health and goodness. That’s one.

Number 2, the research shows, is active addiction. When one or both people are struggling with active addiction, that makes couples therapy hard. Many people would say that couples therapy is contraindicated—that people ought to manage their addiction first, prioritize working on the individual addiction, and then do the couple’s work. However, many addiction programs include relational treatment as part of it because the research shows stronger long-term results and lower relapse rates when there has been couples or family therapy as part of addiction treatment.

And number 3 is infidelity, which is another difficult one. I have a bit of a specialty in working with couples recovering from infidelity. At any given time, about three-quarters of my couples are infidelity recovery cases. So yes, those cases are difficult, but I also love that work. I feel well-suited to hold on to everyone’s humanity. I don’t necessarily struggle with the one who has transgressed.

It’s easy for me to hold on to gentleness, to their dignity, even as I can feel critical about what they did and how much harm they caused their partner. I do have a harder time with couples where there’s a lot of emotional dysregulation. Those cases are difficult because I play traffic cop, putting up my hand and asking people to stop and talk to me, not their partner. That’s not my most comfortable place to be. I can do it, but it makes me feel a little sweaty and shaky, and it takes me a while to come down after a session like that.

Those sessions may not cause the same activation for other therapists, but that’s my sense.

Jacobsen: Are there certain trends in relational issues that are cultural? For instance, if we looked at Canada, the United States, and Mexico, are there certain trends in North America that come up more often than in other cultural contexts? Or does every bad relationship show the same general signs, regardless of culture?

Solomon:  It’s not that cultural factors make things worse in one area of the world compared to another. 

Jacobsen: That’s interesting. 

Solomon: I don’t think of any particular line of research that rings a bell for me around that. The first thought that comes to my mind is a trend that I suspect is more prevalent in the U.S. than in some other parts of the world—couples wanting to figure out how to move from sexual monogamy to consensual non-monogamy, ethical non-monogamy, or polyamory. There’s also a set of couples where one partner wants to “open up” the relationship. In contrast, the other wants to remain monogamous, creating almost a mixed-orientation relationship.

It’s been about a decade now. Still, for much of my career, I didn’t know a single thing about consensual non-monogamy. All I knew was that it happened in the sixties—many couples tried it, things got a little weird, and everyone decided that was not the way to do it. That was all I learned in my training; it wasn’t even a topic. Couples and monogamy were like peanut butter and jelly. It was, “These things go together; it’s natural; it’s baked into the equation.”

But over the past ten years, my field has started having this conversation, and it’s super important. I’m glad we’re having it because no matter where a couple lands, they should be discussing the boundaries around their relationship. How do they define fidelity? What priority do they place on it? What are the risks and consequences of monogamy? What are its strengths and benefits? Do they want monogamy? Why do they want monogamy? Do they want to be open? Why do they want to be open? How do they protect their relationship in either scenario?

When something is explored rather than assumed, everyone can become more deeply committed to it and understand more about themselves—why they want to advocate for a particular relational architecture. So, it’s a pretty exciting time in that way. That’s an emerging trend.

Jacobsen: That makes intuitive sense. We’re psychologically complex creatures, so I’d expect a constellation of relational types rather than just one. Evolutionarily, even. There’s one category for the majority, but also for a minority—what if relationships aren’t for them or only for short periods? They might be categorized as serial monogamists or people for whom lifelong singlehood is their temperament.

Not as a judgment, but as a description: some people don’t do relationships well. 

Solomon: That’s another important shift I’ve seen throughout my career. I came into this field after drinking the Kool-Aid. There’s a hierarchy in relationships, where the number one relationship in an adult’s life is their romantic, intimate partnership—and everybody should want that.

Everyone should look for their partner. The goal is one love story. You find your person, you marry your person, and you die next to them, God willing, many, many, many years later. That was the notion I had. It’s been baked into my field.

My field is marriage and family therapy, or couple and family therapy. We call that “matrionormativity”—what is normative is wanting and prioritizing romantic love. It’s fascinating to see the number of books that have come out in the last few years that make the case for questioning this idea. Along with that, there’s a whole bunch of research showing that we have a collective bias against single people. There is a headwind for single people.

This research isn’t old. Research in the last 10 to 15 years shows that when you ask people in a survey—when you give a survey participant a description of a person and say that this person is single with certain qualities—those people are deemed to be more selfish and more immature than the same made-up characterization of a person in a relationship. We have a collective stereotype against single people, which we’re finally starting to unearth, examine, and ask why. Along with that comes an elevation of friendship.

People ask, “Wait, why have we always put spouses above friends? What’s the consequence of having done that?” I was giving a talk at a conference to therapists about how to help clients going through a breakup or divorce. The first question from the audience was, “What about friendship breakups?”

This collective “Yes!” was because friendship breakups are incredibly painful. Yet, they’re a form of what we call disenfranchised grief. When somebody goes through a divorce, they’re likely to get the support of family and friends because, collectively, we know divorce is hard and stressful. But who supports someone going through a friendship breakup, which can be an exquisite and gut-wrenching loss?

We’re in this interesting moment where we’re starting to elevate friendship collectively, asking, “Why the heck do we care?” Why would we say someone is a better person just because they’re in a relationship rather than single? And we’re starting to wonder if maybe we’ve overloaded our romantic relationships—expecting too much from them—and not enough from friendships. So, it’s a cool moment.

Jacobsen: A few thoughts come to mind there, and they’re a constellation of different questions. On the first one, it’s almost as if we’re in the sixties and seventies again, where people took the cultural deck of cards and threw it in the air. We have more cards in the deck being thrown up, with more cards added as they fall, metaphorically. We’ll be seeing more and more discussions, open discussions academically, along with the evidence coming in. How will that evidence evolve to give us a clearer picture of these different modes of being? Are there any early indications?

Solomon: Well, the one indication we have is not early—we have 80 years of data from Harvard. Harvard has been conducting a longitudinal study about happiness, and they’re now in their fourth wave of principal investigators because they’ve been doing it since the 1930s. They’ve been looking at various indicators to see what ties to happiness—income, physical health, career goals, family, etc. They’ve found, over and over again, that it’s the quality of people’s relationships that determines the quality of their lives. And that’s not just romantic relationships; it’s also the depth of friendships, connection with adult siblings, etc.

That’s what has shined through in that data—our relationships make life good. So why do we spend so much time stressing about our jobs and Instagram followers when the goodness in life is in the people we get to love and those who love us? So, I guess that’s what I would say about our indications. However, research is always limited by the framing of the researchers.

We also have a cool new wave of researchers asking questions about relationships and framing the evidence differently. A lot of our research has been about marriage. But what marriage? Cis, white, hetero, middle-class marriage. So, we’ve needed a new generation of researchers to ask different kinds of questions.

Jacobsen: So, the biggest life stressors are breakups, divorces, and the like?

Solomon: Yes, when individuals go through these, it’s a subjective experience with many physiological, psychological, and mental health impacts. 

Jacobsen: Yet, at the same time, that frame of mind is based on a cultural frame. As you noted, the reverse of the bias against singlehood is this pedestal we’ve created for monogamy and the idea of finding a “soulmate” or “twin flame”—these mythologies we throw around. That subjective experience can be amplified, increasing negative effects when it doesn’t match societal expectations.

You’ve lost that potential attainment—or what you thought was attainment. So, could we see a reduction in the stressfulness of these life events with a broadening of the landscape or a freeing up of–let’s say–structures on an individual’s sense of individuality and authenticity in life?

Solomon: At the very least, what we might do is liberate people from the experience of shame in their loss. Part of what makes a breakup or divorce so painful is the shame attached to it. If you have, “failed” in what society has told you is the most important, it’s easy to slip its grief into shame.

There will always be grief. Whenever we lose people, even if we have a robust network of people who matter to us, losing any one of those connections will still bring grief. But if we can shift the cultural framing, maybe, we can reduce the additional layer of shame that comes with it.

We’re still these fancy mammals. We get hardwired to each other. Our nervous systems become interdependent with those who matter to us, so pain and loss will always exist. There’s always going to be grief. But grief plus shame is a much worse, much more painful experience than grief without shame.

Jacobsen: How do you advocate for the success of couples who almost self-stereotype? I see this across political and social lines. They have these ideas in their mind—you can tell by how they talk and interact with their spouse in session. They’re thinking: “I have to be the best homemaker,” or “I have to be the best breadwinner.” More recently, “I have to be the best boss babe,” or, “I have to best male advocate,” and so on.

My biases lean more toward the latter, which are mine. So how do we, in those sessions, advocate for people to be authentic to their temperament, which could be a mix of all those things?

Solomon: Well, yeah. And by the way, add to that the idea that someone might have different “eras”—to borrow Taylor Swift’s language. Swift could have a boss babe era but then step out of it and want a cozy, comfortable, simple era. And that’s one of the things about a long-term relationship.

We marry a person at time without knowing who they’ll be at time later. That’s the challenge. I don’t even know—my husband and I am probably in our fourth or fifth “marriage” together. We know we’re “recreating” what this marriage of ours is about.

That’s what truly is in couple therapy. I don’t think a couples therapist helps a couple in their search for their true selves as much as a couple therapist helps create a strong enough container where they can be their evolving selves together—where they keep cheering for each other and figuring out how to optimize their self-expression while honouring the relationship. It’s about optimizing and having the space to keep growing because none of us are ever done evolving.

You’re right. That’s what I see when I work with a couple in year 25 of their marriage, and they’ve never seen a therapist before. I guarantee you, a lot of what we’re doing is talking about the grief of unfulfilled promises—who you said you were going to be but never were—and then a lot of forgiving.

I love it when I get to be with a couple early on in their relationship because we can create a vision for the relationship that allows a lot of permission. It doesn’t feel like shackles; it doesn’t feeling like “you have to be this to me.” Instead, we can “create a marriage where the agreement is to support each other’s growth” because, truly, who knows what will happen?

Even if nothing unexpected happens—like an illness, a job loss, or family stress—many things change along the way.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time. I appreciate it.

Solomon: Yes, you’re a really interesting conversation partner. This is a good space for you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Nora Mahmood: President, Humanist Society Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/10

Nora Mahmood is the President of Humanist Society Singapore. Mahmood talks about the organization’s experiences hosting the General Assembly for Humanists International. Mahmood discussed the challenges and successes of organizing the event, highlighting the sense of connection among global humanist communities. She emphasized the importance of promoting humanism while respecting religious sensitivities in Singapore’s multicultural context. Mahmood also expressed her vision for greater collaboration between humanist groups in Southeast Asia, Africa, and India, hoping for more online conferences to foster global connections. The conversation concluded with future plans for attending events, including a trip to Luxembourg.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Nora from the Humanist Society Singapore. How are you doing today?

Nora Mahmood: Good. I am looking forward to this meeting.

Jacobsen: Excellent. So, I want to focus first on what happened positively. Singapore hosted the General Assembly for Humanists International, putting you in the limelight. How did it go? What were some of your key takeaways from the experience?

Mahmood: It was quite an experience. It was the first time we hosted such a large conference. We’ve had events like the Asian Humanist Conference, but that was on a smaller scale. That event was back in 2015 and lasted only a few days. But when we bid to host this event, we had our doubts. However, everyone on the committee unanimously said, “Let’s go for it.”

If other countries like Australia and New Zealand can do it, why not us? So, we took the opportunity and won the bid. Initially, it wasn’t very comforting because it was such a challenge. But we eventually came together as a team, and everyone played their part.

For the first time, people from all different countries came together. It was overwhelming, exciting, and yet nerve-wracking because we didn’t want to disappoint anyone. We wanted to ensure that everyone who came to Singapore would have an unforgettable experience.

What we learned from organizing such a big event is invaluable. It was a great experience, and we’re glad we did it. It’s a challenge, but you’ll never know what’s possible if you don’t take that first step.

Jacobsen: One of the big things I kept hearing from people in interviews was how much they appreciated Singapore’s approach to interfaith and interbelief dialogue. I couldn’t attend, though I have always wanted to visit Singapore and other parts of the world that I have yet to explore.

Last year, I was in Copenhagen with Remus Cernea, one of the keynote speakers. Unfortunately, we were doing war correspondents in Ukraine, so I worked on journalism in a war zone. I apologize for not being able to attend.

However, many people I spoke with came away from the General Assembly in Singapore with a sense that there are legitimate ways to engage in interfaith and interbelief dialogue, not just with others but also in how we do our outreach and advocacy for humanism. People were attentive to Singapore’s thoughtful distinctions, especially in deradicalization efforts.

Not only did attendees gain an appreciation for the global pluralism of the humanist community, which is common at these kinds of conferences, but they also developed an appreciation for Singapore’s unique methodologies. How you approach humanist values within a cultural context was a consistent and interesting comment from many.

Mahmood: Yes. As you mentioned, interfaith dialogue is a big thing here in Singapore. We’ve gone through racial riots, and we’ve learned from that experience. So, we have initiatives like the Racial Harmony Act and other related measures. Yes, you can be critical of religion. Still, you must be careful about what you say to ensure that you’re not mocking or putting another religion down.

Even as humanists, we promote humanism rather than criticize other religions when we advocate for our beliefs. We must be careful with our words because they are sensitive, and people can easily get offended.

Jacobsen: Yes, I agree. A Singaporean approach to managing religion sounds fascinating. How does Singapore manage these religious sensitivities?

Mahmood: Well, there’s a management of religion here, and yes, there are many articles about it. It’s an important part of our social fabric.

Jacobsen: It’s an interesting context, especially since I’m from Canada, and the United States is even more of a different demographic context. In Singapore, as far as I know, when it comes to religious demographics, everyone is a minority, which creates a much more delicate balance. There’s also more government intervention to maintain pluralism.

Mahmood: Exactly. That’s why the government plays a significant role in promoting harmony. 

Jacobsen: Now, transitioning to the Humanist Society Singapore, how do we approach advocacy outside the conference context? We focus on promoting humanism and maintaining our community, which are challenges in outreach and sustaining membership.

Our membership fluctuates, but we’re focused on something other than membership drives. It’s not about numbers but the quality of the people joining us. Coming from a Muslim background, I used to hear a lot about “the fastest-growing religion” or “the most members.” Still, after joining the Humanist Society, I moved away from that mindset. It’s not about numbers for us; it’s about the people who stand with us.

Our membership is quite small, but it’s gradually growing. We’ve noticed that when we host events, non-members often attend, which tells me something. Some say they can’t become members for personal reasons but still participate in our events. That shows us that we have support beyond just formal membership.

Jacobsen: How do you approach advocacy?

Mahmood: We hold workshops and events like the Humanist Café, a bi-monthly event. We’re more of a support group, and we discuss various issues. For example, how do you, as a parent, raise your children in a non-religious environment? When your children go to school and mix with other kids from religious backgrounds, how do they handle it? How do you, as a parent, teach your children to navigate that kind of environment?

We also address challenges in life, particularly for non-religious individuals. How do we face life’s challenges without religion? One topic I’m very passionate about is end-of-life issues, which are important even for religious people. How do you handle that?

We just finished our own Humanist Café on embracing aging. Typically, when people age, they tend to become more pious. But what about those of us who are not religious? As we age, what do we look forward to? What support can we offer each other? So, we hold workshops where we discuss these kinds of topics.

As I mentioned, we don’t criticize other religions in these conversations. We focus on our issues and how we, as humanists, handle these things. I come from an Islamic background where we spent much time condemning why other people didn’t believe what we believed.

I grew up with that, but now we don’t engage in that environment. We focus on ourselves and how we can lead by example. We set aside discussions about why other religions do this or that. We don’t have to focus on that. Instead, we focus on showing our values through our actions.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. You provide a sense of community by focusing on your values and actions. Even with the fluctuation in membership, you aim to maintain a quality environment for committed members rather than focusing on having the largest numbers, like the Islamic example of “the biggest religion” or “the fastest-growing religion.” You’re more concerned with the quality of people’s orientation toward humanism rather than the quantity of members.

What areas would you like to see new activities or initiatives for the community, such as engaging in policy work or similar actions, but have yet to pursue? In a Singaporean context, where people are mindful of how they couch their language in public, how would you navigate advocating for a particular policy or cultural change if that were relevant?

Mahmood: Yes, we were invited to join a bioethics committee when they held a public discourse to get input from the humanist perspective on bioethics, bioengineering, and related topics. This is something we’re all passionate about. If you look at our chat group, we often discuss transhumanism, the question of what makes someone human, and so on.

We participated in that talk and shared our perspectives. However, our government’s policies are mostly secular, so there is little conflict for us. We follow the procedures and ensure they align with our values as humanists.

Jacobsen: That answers my question. How about areas where people want to provide funding or scholarships for young people or ways to support young individuals in growing into the movement? You mentioned navigating the space where you have a small secular community, yet in schools, many of the kids and parents are religious. They may not necessarily be devout, but religion is still a conversation in the home, and it’s a negotiation in public. How do you handle that?

Mahmood: As with other secular organizations, some provide scholarships and grants for young people to attend events like the General Assembly or engage in activities, after which they write a report or give a presentation. This happens in other humanist groups. Is that something you’ve considered?

That is something I’d like to explore in the future. But as I mentioned, we are small, especially regarding funding. We don’t receive any government funding. Humanists International helped cover some of the costs even for the General Assembly. We’re small and need more resources to sponsor someone to attend these events. But that might change in the future.

When I talk about numbers, I don’t focus on them. For example, in the last census of 2020, the number of non-religious people went up to 20%. We are now the second-largest group in Singapore, with Buddhism being the largest, followed by the Christian and Muslim groups. That increase caught much attention.

Suddenly, the TV media wanted to interview us. I’m waiting for the next census to see what happens. If the numbers continue to rise and we reach parity with the Buddhists, we’ll be in the spotlight even more. But as the numbers grow, other groups might start feeling threatened.

Jacobsen: Right; the more the non-religious numbers increase, the more attention you get, which could lead to tension with other religious groups.

Mahmood: Exactly. Groups like Buddhists, Christians, and Muslims may start to see it as a threat, especially when studies show that more young people are leaving religion and identifying as non-religious. They’ll start doing youth camps to retain their members. So, while numbers seem good, they can cause other groups to feel uneasy.

Jacobsen: That mirrors the experience of the ex-Muslim community, particularly in North America and elsewhere. They grew a lot in the late 2000s and 2010s, especially online. Initially, it was mostly men because they had more freedom of movement and income. Still, more women are coming into that space now. I’ve covered some of that as well.

In terms of HSS, how active is your online presence? Do you have discussion groups, presentations, or articles available online? Are you primarily an in-person community or expanding more into the online sphere?

Mahmood: We started as a small group doing meetups. That’s how it all began—a meetup group. We’d have sessions where a small group of friends would meet in person. Historically, we started with mostly small in-person meetups. Then came the AWARE Saga, which involved the women’s group AWARE (Association of Women for Action and Research).

AWARE is a women’s group in Singapore. If you still need to do so, look up the AWARE Saga. It was a situation in which a group of conservative Christians attempted to take over AWARE, which is supposed to be a secular organization. This conservative faction hijacked the group, and that was a pivotal moment for us.

Jacobsen: Oh, I see. So, did that event trigger something within your group?

Mahmood: Yes, exactly. When we saw that happening, we realized it could happen to any secular organization. That’s when we decided we needed a collective voice to be recognized and taken seriously. You must be registered as an official organization in Singapore to have that voice. That’s how we came together.

We started mostly online, using social media and digital platforms. However, we also hold some in-person workshops.

Jacobsen: I see. I am looking at it now. During that time, the church, such as the Church of Our Saviour, was promoting conversion therapy. Statements like “homosexual practice is contrary to God’s word”—sound like hardline rhetoric we often hear from fundamentalist preachers in North America.

Mahmood: Yes, this fundamentalism played a role in our formation as a society. When we first tried registering as an organization, our registration was put on hold because the authorities needed to figure out how to categorize us. They were curious about this group of irreligious people, which was new to them.

Eventually, after some intervention and many discussions, we were approved. But we started small. We still need to get our own office or building. We joke that we’re the “homeless humanists” of Singapore.

Jacobsen: That’s funny—the ‘HHSS, Homeless Humanists of Singapore.’ So, what’s your vision now?

Mahmood: My vision has always been to have a humanist center, a physical space for us. But right now, we focus on being active on social media, maintaining a website, and using platforms like Telegram for group chats. We realized social media is essential, so we’ve made ourselves present online to raise awareness. We’ve also started organizing more workshops, seminars, and Humanist Café meetups to create visibility.

Our Humanist Café is held on the first Friday of every month. It’s open to anyone curious about humanism, and we invite people to come and talk with us.

We also have an online session every third Friday of the month, from 7 PM to midnight, where people can reach out to us if they can’t attend our in-person events. We’re working on a series of community workshops starting in December to introduce the public to humanism and explain what we’re all about.

Jacobsen: If I could make it happen, as a journalist, I would reach out to The Straits Times and ask, “May I submit an interview with the humanists?” It would be interesting to get the word out more rather than having it pop up by accident when, say, the Pope visits, and people on the periphery ask, “What do the humanists think?” Then it’s published somewhere else, like in a South Korean publication.

Mahmood: That would be great! AC Grayling came to Singapore, and Dr. Lawrence Krauss did, too. When Dr. Krauss came to give a talk at NUS (National University of Singapore), he first asked, “Is there a humanist society in Singapore?”

Jacobsen: Really? Did he ask that?

Mahmood: I’m not sure if it was Dr. Krauss or AC Grayling, but one of them asked, “Is there a humanist society in Singapore?” That’s how we were called in. If not for that, no one would have asked. But we got some attention since these famous people came to Singapore for a conference and inquired about us.

Jacobsen: Wow, that’s incredible! So, you got pulled in when someone famous asked about the humanist society. It’s funny how we always bump into each other in similar situations. My first General Assembly was in Iceland. Did you or other Singaporeans at the General Assembly—or even at the one in Singapore—get a common sense of comfort, like, “I’m not the only one”? And did you feel like the people there seemed a bit more grounded? I don’t mean to insult anyone who isn’t a humanist, but there seems to be a certain comfort when you meet other humanists.

Mahmood: Yes. When we have humanist gatherings, there’s an undeniable connection. Even someone who’s not a humanist but attends the meeting can sense the shared values and ideologies. It makes it easier for us to connect. There’s a natural warmth or familiarity, even though you might meet for the first time.

Someone might say, “You all seem to know each other so well,” and I tell them, “No, this is the first time we’re meeting, but the connection is there.” It’s because of those shared values that we have an immediate bond. It’s been eye-opening for us.

Jacobsen: I will pull an AC Grayling and Lawrence Krauss on you. Is there a skeptic society? Are there Unitarian Universalists or an Ethical Culture group in Singapore? I ask because I need to figure it out.

Mahmood: Yes, there is a skeptics group in Singapore. They do join us once in a while. There’s also a Singapore Philosophy group; some members are in both groups. We do interact, and they invite us over for events. We have a good relationship with them.

Jacobsen: Very cool. I’ve heard of skeptics’ work in other regions.

Mahmood: They recently talked about transhumanism, and most of us joined in. It’s a collaborative effort.

Jacobsen: What do you hope people take away, not from the General Assembly, which we’ve already covered, but from the fact that you can find humanist groups almost anywhere in the world? Here I am, a stray Canadian in a small town, talking to the president of the Singapore group in her morning, in the middle of the week.

Mahmood: I hope there’s more connectivity and collaboration. My vision for HSS (Humanist Society Singapore) is to be a beacon for the humanist movement in Southeast Asia. We work closely with the Malaysian, Indonesian, and Philippine groups. Despite the geographical distances, we use Zoom and online platforms to stay connected.

I would love to see more online conferences where we exchange ideas even in different time zones. We can still come together and discuss topics dear to our hearts. For example, I want to work with African humanist and Indian national groups.

Jacobsen: So, you hope to work with the African and Indian humanist communities?

Mahmood: Yes, Singapore and India are both secular countries, but we approach secularism differently. It would be fascinating to explore those differences. Can Singapore and India host an online conference together? It’s in the pipeline, but we’re waiting on India to finalize some plans. Of course, it can be tricky with Zoom, but I’m optimistic.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?

Mahmood: Thank you for this opportunity to talk to you. I appreciate your write-up on us and look forward to meeting you in person. Visit Singapore—or Luxembourg, even! We’re planning to go to Luxembourg next year. My team has decided to go as a group, so I’ll start saving up! We’ll meet in Luxembourg.

Jacobsen: That sounds exciting! Thank you so much; I appreciate it.

Mahmood: Thank you! Bye!

Jacobsen: Bye, have a great day!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Sulagna Misra, M.D.: On Misra Wellness and Direct Patient Care

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/09

Dr. Sulagna Misra, MD, BCMAS, is the founding physician of Misra Wellness®, a Direct Primary Care (DPC) practice that focuses on weight loss, men’s health, integrative medicine, primary care, and aesthetic medicine. She is certified in Integrative Medicine, Internal Medicine, and Aesthetic Medicine, offering a broad range of medical and aesthetic services. Born and raised in New York City, Dr. Misra previously practiced at Mount Sinai Hospital before transitioning to a role as an Integrative Medicine practitioner and Laboratory Director in Midtown Manhattan. Now based in Los Angeles, California, she strongly advocates patient-centered care, emphasizing the importance of the doctor-patient relationship in healthcare. Dr. Misra promotes price transparency and provides personalized consultations on patient education and ongoing communication. Guided by her tagline “Feel, Heal, Reveal,” she supports patients on their journey to optimal health and wellness. She has been featured in Forbes, US News and World Report, Men’s Health,Yahoo, Newsweek, International Business Times, and S.F. Examiner. Misra discusses the challenges of healthcare systems, particularly Medicare and Medicaid, which restrict patient care choices. She emphasizes the benefits of Direct Primary Care (DPC), advocating for price transparency and a more personalized doctor-patient relationship. Misra also critiques the growing role of nurse practitioners, AI, and corporate medicine, highlighting the need for reform in healthcare structures to improve patient outcomes.

Sulagna Misra, M.D.: You’re the first to ask for my consent to record. Everyone else assumes I’m going to say yes. Thank you. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I’ve learned from interviewees that asking for consent, such as free, prior, and informed consent, is not uncommon but not common.

So, I’ve established certain policies, with a few exceptions depending on the particular theme, case, topic, etc. Today, let’s get to the topic at hand with Dr. Sulagna Misra. You’re a founding physician of Misra Wellness, correct? Registered? So, what inspired you to pursue medicine, and why did you found Misra Wellness?

Misra: All right, I have a long history with medicine. First, I come from a family of doctors, so medicine is generational for me.

That’s a big factor. The second thing is that I didn’t want to become a doctor—true story. I fought it. I did the “good doctor’s daughter” thing because I’m Indian. Culturally, that’s largely expected. My mother and I had disagreements. I was a singer, dancer, and artist, and that’s the path I wanted to follow.

I was writing my music and didn’t study for my MCATs because I didn’t want to go into medicine, so I didn’t perform well. I went to NYU and majored in biochemistry, and my mother and I had an agreement. She was also a singer, and we both had opportunities to be on the radio.

I want to work with a producer in New York. I’m originally from New York. I was born in L.A., raised in New York, and then moved back to L.A. I’ll tell you more about that later. 

Jacobsen: You give off New York vibes.

Misra: I’mmuch a New Yorker. I hope I’m not losing that. All my music was stored on my computer, and I got accepted to a Caribbean medical school. I planned on starting in September, but they offered early enrollment in May. At that time, I was a licensed real estate agent.

I got my real estate license and planned to make money while pursuing my artistic passions. But instead of following that plan, my mother said, “Go for one semester to the Caribbean, to Ross University. If you hate it, come back, sing, and do other things. If you love it, stay with medicine.”

So, I went. However, I didn’t back up my music files because I’m not tech-savvy. Then, my computer crashed, and I lost all my music. On top of that, my mother was diagnosed with cancer.

She had ovarian cancer. She was young and a doctor herself. I didn’t even know about it because I was in the Caribbean. The call I got after my computer crashed was from my uncle, saying, “Hey, your mother has stage 3B ovarian cancer.”

She had everything removed. She’s out now, but she was hospitalized, and I was , “Oh my god.” I wanted to fly back but couldn’t do anything for her.

I couldn’t help her because I didn’t understand cancer. So, I decided they only needed me there for 12 to 16 months since it was the Caribbean. Then I could continue everything in the U.S. So, I thought, let me finish my program here, and then I’ll return to help my mom. Because without understanding the pathophysiology of the body—normal and abnormal—you can’t fight cancer. I couldn’t help her.

So, to help her, I changed my residency to be able to live at home and take care of her while attending residency at Staten Island University Hospital, where she was from, Staten Island, which is now Northwell. Instead of the six months they gave her, I helped her live for five years. I got her out of Staten Island University Hospital, where they misdiagnosed her, overmedicated her, and all of that. We got her into Sloan, and she was treated at Sloan Kettering.

Unfortunately, it was aaggressive cancer, and she passed. When she passed, my father also passed. My grandparents had passed, too, so I had six deaths back to back to back. It was so overwhelming for me. I needed a fresh start.

So, I left. I was working in private practice then because I had left Mount Sinai. I wanted continuity of care. I hated seeing patients come in and out of the hospital without being able to prevent them from returning. That’s when I decided I wanted to do outpatient medicine. I didn’t want to be a hospitalist anymore.

I wanted to be the doctor that patients saw regularly. So, I worked for Integrative Medicine of NYC. When my dad died, it was as if my body fell apart. I needed time to grieve, but that’s not allowed as a doctor, so I had to leave. I had to take care of my mom’s affairs, and eventually, I moved to L.A. to start fresh.

That’s where Misra Wellness was born. 

Jacobsen: How do you bring integrative, internal, and aesthetic medicine together? And how do we define each of those terms for non-medical people? 

Misra: I have a tagline: “Feel, Heal, Reveal.”

That came from a love of rhyming since I was a songwriter. But it also reflects my philosophy of wellness. No matter where you are on your journey to wellness, I’ll meet you there. Part of wellness involves dealing with internal issues—feeling and healing internal trauma or medical issues. Then, the “reveal” is whatever your optimal version is.

I integrate medicine by following Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, which I apply to almost everything. Maslow’s pyramid is a structure,  the food pyramid, where you work from the base up. The foundation includes essentials:  sleep, food, and shelter. For some people, it can also include sex.

Not everyone includes sex in the pyramid because, for some people, sex can be traumatic or associated with pain, so it needs to be higher on the pyramid and carefully addressed. That’s also how I approach integrative medicine. I also teach about this on a national VuMedi platform. It’s a physician education platform where I teach other physicians how to build their dream practice and prevent burnout based on my experiences. It’s hard for me to separate internal, integrative, and aesthetic medicine because everything is interconnected.

For example, let’s take weight loss—medical weight loss—a huge field, especially in obesity medicine (pun intended). When we start medical weight loss, patients begin to see results and finally feel heard and better; they want more for themselves. They want better financial flexibility and better working hours. The time they spend mindlessly eating,  sticking their head in the fridge—I know because I used to do that—becomes extra time.

And that’s where deeper issues come up,  suicidality, depression, and anxiety. What is your brain doing with all that extra time? That’s where integrative medicine, internal medicine, and aesthetic medicine come into play. They’re all related. When people start feeling better, they want more for themselves.

So, when my patients step on the scale and finally see progress, they often want more. They want financial advice, an organizer to help declutter their home, a therapist, or aesthetic treatments. Maybe they want something on their face treated, which they were too ashamed to show. They say, “I can show up, step up, and be seen, and I want to be seen differently.” It’s beautiful. That’s  one aspect.

Jacobsen: There are many aspects. What do you find is the hardest thing for people to get through?

Misra: Acknowledging it. The first step to any change is acknowledging that you need help and that there’s a problem. So, acknowledging that your weight is a problem, your energy is a problem, your sleep is a problem, your libido is a problem, your social support is a problem—that’s the only way to start identifying how to create a solution. That state is called a precontemplative state.

When you’re still aware that a change needs to be made and aren’t initiating the change, the doctor can only meet you there if you say something. That’s why I emphasize communication and regular contact, which is why I practice direct primary care. Direct primary care is a medical movement where doctors don’t accept insurance and offer affordable monthly memberships.

Jacobsen: Can you give me more detail about direct primary care? I’ve interviewed an epidemiologist named Dr. Gordon Guyatt several times, even recently. He works on evidence-based medicine, and he emphasizes the role of values and preferences. People can determine, at a societal level, the kinds of health care they want access to and choose from what is available. If you value equity in Canada, you prefer national health care and a pharmacare approach. In the United States, where autonomy is of great value, people tend to prefer privatized medicine more. Does that factor into the direct primary care (DPC) mindset and framework?

Misra: Yes, it does. DPC started with a group of family medicine doctors addressing the lack of access to physicians in rural America, particularly in the Midwest. In those states, DPC doctors might exchange services for membership fees. For example, if you raise chickens and have fresh eggs, your doctor might accept fresh eggs as payment for that month.

Or, if you have cattle and butcher, they might accept fresh steak. That’s how the movement began. DPC aims to remove administrative burdens and insurance from the equation. Insurance, in many cases, is fraudulently practicing medicine. It’s racketeering. They raise premiums and deny care even when doctors write medically necessary prescriptions.

For instance, doctors might prescribe a medication, and insurance will say, “Nope, you don’t meet the standard,” even though the patient does medically. This is why DPC is gaining traction—beyond burnout, there’s also moral injury for doctors. It’s frustrating when we say, “You need this medication,” and the corporate entity or insurance we work for says, “No, you can’t have it because it doesn’t meet our criteria. We don’t want to spend money on preventative care; it’s too costly.” Insurance isn’t working in your best interest.

But if you pay the doctor directly, we work on your behalf. People often think doctors are rolling in money because insurance premiums are increasing, but that’s not true. Doctors are losing money. We’re receiving less and less in reimbursements. For a time, I accepted Medicare and tried to have a hybrid practice with DPC and Medicare.

However, my Medicare reimbursements dropped so much that I spent more than I earned. I was literally in the negative. I had to stop accepting Medicare. So, you’ll see more doctors leaving the system because they’re not getting paid—especially primary care doctors. Our work is preventative; we’re not performing surgeries or procedures where the money is. Yes, this factors into DPC.

Jacobsen: Is this also tied to the larger issue? I’m not talking about individual cases.

Misra: They are all tied together. There’s also a significant financial burden regarding end-of-life care, where medical expenses are the number one reason for bankruptcy in the United States.

This is why I’m shouting from the rooftops. I’m human, and I need care too. Right now, I’m going through my medical challenges, and the nightmares I’m encountering are shocking. I shouldn’t be going through this—I’m a doctor. I know how to navigate the system. Why is this so difficult? If I, as a doctor, face these issues, I can’t imagine what my patients are going through. They often don’t even understand what’s happening.

And I’ve realized that many other doctors don’t fully understand what’s happening. We’re getting shouted at because we’re the system’s front face. The insurance companies aren’t saying, “Hey, we deny your claim.” No, the doctor delivers that message: “Your insurance denies this.” But the truth is, you chose your insurance plan, and you negotiated that contract with them. We didn’t negotiate that. We’re  dealing with the results of your negotiation.

When you remove insurance from the equation, you discover the actual cost of things—which is what direct primary care does. For example, compare the prices under a Blue Shield platinum PPO plan or an Aetna platinum PPO plan versus the prices I can negotiate through direct primary care. Sometimes, I save patients hundreds of dollars. Suppose you’re on a men’s health plan where we’re doing your PSA, hematocrit, testosterone (free and total), estrogen, and sex hormone-binding globulin tests. In that case, insurance may charge you a significant amount. But through DPC, it could cost much less. So, where is that extra money going?

This is important now because open enrollment started two days ago. Suppose people know about direct primary care and realize they can get preventive care and access to a doctor for a low monthly membership fee. They can avoid running to the E.R. or urgent care whenever they have an issue. We can help triage them. For instance, I had a patient before you, and I had to tell him, “Look, your situation sounds urgent. Here’s what you need to do.” Without me, he had an HMO plan and needed to figure out where to turn. He might have ended up going to the E.R. unnecessarily.

It wasn’t an ER-level emergency, so he probably would have been sent back to his primary care doctor. He would have been bounced around. when you go to the hospital or these places now, you’re not even seeing doctors anymore because non-physician practitioners have been given the legal right to practice medicine by corporations and insurance companies, who think it’s cheaper. But in reality, healthcare costs are skyrocketing, and they’re making a mess of things.

Insurance companies offer something akin to a “bureaucracy” in healthcare. They’re breaking the RICO Act at this point. This is racketeering. They operate based on fear—fear that you’ll get cancer or be in a motor vehicle accident. They should be operating under a preventive care model, but they’re not. most patients don’t even realize this. For example, let’s say you, Mr. Jacobsen, have a cough but also need your regular annual physical.

My cough annoys me, so I’m going to my doctor for my regular physical and will bring up my cough. “No. No. No. No. You can’t do that because we can’t bill for a good visit and a cough simultaneously.” So what do you do? What’s more important to you? It’s  a game—medical gymnastics—what doctors are doing now.

Instead of performing these medical-gymnastics, which are leading to burnout, moral injury, and so much more—including suicidality—we’re facing the highest suicide rates. We didn’t have the highest rates before COVID, but we do now.

Dentists used to have the highest suicide rates. Now, doctors are leading, and many are leaving medicine altogether. It’s a massive problem. This is an epidemic. People are dying, and people are sick—for no real reason.

Jacobsen: I interviewed a doctor who left due to M.D. burnout in the U.S. He’s now working in Quebec and praises the conditions and improvement in his health since moving. Maybe I’ll link to that—it could be an interesting connection. 

Misra: I’m noticing much rage toward the system.

Jacobsen: Right. How has this become such a malignant problem? 

Misra: It has grown completely out of control. I’ve heard from many qualified professionals that this is an issue, but you’re addressing it head-on.

Jacobsen: The people I’ve heard were more cautious while you’re talking about it directly.

Misra: Yes, because doctors are so afraid to speak out. We’re trained in an abusive system. I’ll say it as it is—it’s a hierarchical, abusive system. If you speak up, you’re punished, and we carry that with us. When applying for positions, it’s , “There are two positions and 5,000 of you. Go.” They pit us against each other to fight for those two positions. So, we’re trained not to be collaborative.

We collaborate only around a patient, but we’re trained to compete with each other. That lack of collaboration is part of the problem. We needed help, and they gave us nurse practitioners when we asked for help.

That was great for a while—until nurse practitioners started thinking, “What’s a doctor doing? I can do that.” Then the insurance companies and corporations agreed, saying, “We think you can do it too. We’ll pay you more than you made as a nurse but less than a doctor.” They d that because it saved them money.

Misra: And now, a lawsuit drives me up the wall in New York. Nurse practitioners are suing, saying, “Hey, we do the same work as physicians, but we don’t get paid the same. since we’re mainly female, this is a hate crime.” What about the actual female physicians in New York who aren’t getting paid the same as male physicians because of gender inequity and pay disparity?

We’re not suing, and that’s an actual hate crime. However, nurse practitioners are suing because they’re 80% female.

Jacobsen: Side question—I’ve seen this come up too. Some groups have lobbied or sued to use the title “physician.” I believe this was naturopaths in the United States.

Misra: Yes, naturopaths cannot use the title “physician.” The good thing is that the title “physician” is reserved for M.D.s, D.O.s, and MBBS graduates. The term “doctor” has been watered down. So when you go into the hospital and see someone with a stethoscope and a white coat labelled “doctor,” they could be a doctor of nursing practice (DNP).

That means they didn’t even have to go to college for some of these nurse practitioner programs. I don’t hate nurse practitioners—they have a role—but they’ve blurred the scope lines. They don’t know what they don’t know because they haven’t attended medical school. For example, I’m an internist and integrative medicine physician. You wouldn’t see me performing groin surgery unless it was an emergency,  if someone was bleeding out and we were stranded on an island with no other options. In that case, I’d try to save a life.

But I know what I can and cannot do and when to call on my colleagues’ expertise. That’s what nurse practitioners don’t know—they don’t know their limitations. They don’t realize that not everything is solved with an antibiotic, a steroid, and IV fluids. There’s much more to it, and they’re unaware of that.

So, you go in with a cough, thinking you’re seeing a doctor, but it’s not a doctor. They might say, “Let’s have you see an ENT because we don’t know.” They might do an X-ray but still have no idea what’s causing the cough. They don’t know that the cough could come from your brain, diaphragm, lungs, or even an OCD tick. It could be psychiatric, lingering from a post-viral cough, or—worst case—an indicator of cancer.

They don’t know. So they sent you to the ENT, which hired a nurse practitioner. That N.P. might not know how to scope you properly because they’ve never gone to medical school and don’t recognize the signs of cancer. Then they’ll say, “Your cough seems fine. Maybe you should see a lung specialist.” You go to the pulmonary N.P., and still, you’re not seeing a doctor.

Six months later, the cough worsens, and you start coughing blood. All this time, you thought you were seeing doctors, bouncing from specialist to specialist. But none of them were doctors, yet you’ve been paying as if you were receiving care from a physician.

By the time you’re hospitalized, it’s too late. Occasionally, a doctor finally steps in, looks at your case, and goes, “Oh my god,” and fixes everything because that’s what we do—we catch things. But with fewer doctors in the system, we’re scaling ourselves out. Doctors are leaving the system.

Jacobsen: It sounds  a dangerous situation for patients unaware of these distinctions.

Misra: We’re burnt out. We’re becoming entrepreneurs. Look at me—this is what’s happening. It’s all connected. “Practitioner” is a bad word—it doesn’t mean you’re a doctor. “Physician” means you’re a doctor. A Doctor of Nursing Practice (DNP) is not a physician. They’re not medical doctors; they’re doctors of nursing practice.

What do they learn? Nursing theory and nursing lobbying. Let’s put nursing theory and lobbying aside and do a medical exam. So, they’re replacing real doctors. But they’ll start complaining, too, when A.I. steps in because it’s moving fast. A.I. will replace us all eventually. For doctors, A.I. is a tool we use to write notes faster and create emails more quickly using specific language. We don’t replace ourselves with A.I. However, nurse practitioners will get replaced by AIbecause it’s safer for AI to do what it does than for nurse practitioners to keep doing what they’re doing.

The DEA is also conducting its investigation. All these separate investigations are happening because we don’t have the data yet—it all got worse during COVID-19. Have you heard about Dunn and Cerebral?

Jacobsen: No, I’m not familiar.

Misra: Oh my god, let’s go. Dunn and Cerebral were two telemedicine companies that were pushing Adderall. They were the reason for the Adderall shortage. They started hiring nurses and some doctors who didn’t fight back, and they were telling them to prescribe Adderall without even following up with patients. It was all about pushing the prescriptions. This created a shortage.

So, people with legitimate ADHD couldn’t get their medication during the COVID-19 shortages. When I was doing men’s health during that time, most of my male patients were on Adderall. I’m like, why the hell are you on Adderall? You have hypogonadism. You’re not producing testosterone. That’s what we need to fix, not put you on Adderall.

Now, we have to wean them off the Adderall they’ve become addicted to. It isn’t pleasant. the poor ADHD patients who need it couldn’t get their meds. It isn’t good.

Jacobsen: I can see why you’re worked up. This is serious.

Misra: I get worked up because this is not what I signed up for. None of us did. As doctors, we’re promised two things: the ability to care for others and save lives and job stability. Both of those promises have been taken away. Insurance companies and the corporate takeover of medicine are destroying everything. Hospitals are falling apart, and insurance companies  UHC and OptumRx are fraudulently practicing medicine.

Jacobsen: Do you think there will be a rapid revolution in how medicine is structured? For example, could racketeering be addressed with the rise of DPC and limits on insurance overreach?

Misra: The problem is that for words  “racketeering” and “fraud” to be used, someone high up and famous must be hurt. That’s when people will start paying attention. Someone famous. Someone in government. A celebrity. But these people can afford doctors, so doctors will leave and create our system. We’re already working on it.

Jacobsen: And what about recruitment? Bad news travels fast. Doctors are leaving the country, or individuals are moving toward DPC and restructuring, right?

Misra: Yes. 

Jacobsen: So, what happens if you scare off potential new doctors who are already U.S. citizens or even those coming from overseas with visas  the H-1B? The U.S. has traditionally pulled in talent worldwide, creating a massive brain drain toward America. Still, people might need guidance to pursue that path.

Misra: I’m a civil surgeon and do immigration physicals for the Department of Homeland Security. Some of the doctors I see come to me for U.S. residency. I perform independent medical exams to ensure they meet the requirements. I ask them, “What are you going to do once you get your residency and immigration status?” Do you know how many of them tell me they’re going back to their home countries?

I’m , “You’re not staying here? You’re working here and leaving as soon as you get your paperwork?” It’s because things are so bad here. I see it.

Jacobsen: Which state do you think is the worst regarding the upcoming physician shortages?

Misra: Everywhere, but especially the rural areas. When nurse practitioners were given more autonomy, they promised to provide coverage in rural areas. But that’s not what happened. Instead, many opened med spas, IV drip clinics, or aesthetic treatment centers. They didn’t go to rural America. You can be an N.P. urologist one day, a cardiologist the next, and then move on to pediatrics or pulmonology in the ICU without any consistent specialization. It isn’tcomforting.

Jacobsen: So what does this mean for the average citizen’s access to medical care? The wealthy can afford good care in good times and bad. What does this look like in a system that should provide quality care for everyone, especially in a privatized healthcare system?

Misra: The best way to illustrate this is to run through a typical insurance visit. Let’s pretend you’re seeing a doctor.

Jacobsen: Sure, let’s do it. I’m all ears.

Misra: Let’s say you have a cough or a UTI. 

Jacobsen: Let’s go with a cough. 

Misra: You come to your primary care doctor.

Jacobsen: I’ll give you an example: I was voluntarily released from the military after getting a body check on my ribs, and I had trouble breathing for a while.

Misra: So, you have trouble breathing. The first thing you’d probably do, depending on whether you have an HMO or a PPO, is look at your insurance card and ask yourself, “Do I need to go to my primary care doctor, the ER, or urgent care?”

You probably need a doctor to call directly, so that’s the first hurdle. Then, if you contact your primary care doctor, they’ll ask, “Can you breathe?” If yes, they’ll tell you, “You’re not going to the E.R. or urgent care. We’ll book you for an appointment, but it might be four months out.”

If you have a broken rib, that’s what they’ll do. They’ll check for that immediately. But even if it’s bad,  a broken rib, if it’s not displaced or causing complications, it should self-heal. But what if you have two broken ribs? You don’t know whether it’s going to self-heal, and you don’t know whether it’s something more serious.

So, you’re left guessing. It could be your lungs, it could be a muscle pull, it could be something minor—or it could be something serious,  cancer. But in a traditional system, you’re told, “Your next appointment is in four months. Can’t wait that long? We might call you if something opens up.” So, you wait. Maybe you get better, maybe you get worse.

By the time you finally see the doctor, it’s been months.

Jacobsen: And that’s your typical insurance-covered visit, right?

Misra:  With Direct Primary Care (DPC), it’s different. You have a membership, and when you’re not feeling  you can text or email your doctor and ask to be seen that day. You can say, “I’ve got some side pain; I might have a broken rib. What do you think?” Your doctor gives you a requisition form for an X-ray, which might cost $25, schedules the appointment, and follows up the next day or so—done. Mic drop. That’s the difference.

Jacobsen: What are the critiques of DPC, and how are insurance companies responding to these criticisms?

Misra: There are challenges, especially with Medicare-age patients. Medicare covers certain services, and they won’t allow you to go outside that coverage. That’s what Medicare Advantage plans are for, but the reimbursements for those plans and traditional Medicare are complicated.

All of this complexity is intentional—it’s confusing, so people don’t ask questions. But Medicare doesn’t allow you to opt out of its system. With DPC, we’re trying to emphasize that we’re not insurance, but policy changes are still needed.

Misra: I  to say we’re “assurance” instead of insurance. You’ll see your doctor—that’s my plan. However, Medicare and Medicaid can be problematic because they’re government-run systems, and a systemized system doesn’t allow you to go outside.

Why? Because they want to save money and keep everything within the business. Medicare is an issue, but we have hybrid programs, and there are ways around it. Medicaid can also be challenging.

Catastrophic care coverage can help lower your premiums if you have catastrophic emergencies,  a motor vehicle accident or cancer. We’re addressing many of the problematic questions as we go along. it’s not a direct primary care movement; there’s also a direct specialty care movement happening alongside it.

Specialists are now leaving hospitals and realizing, “Hey, the patient can pay me $2,000 directly instead of the hospital charging $10,000 and reimbursing me only $1,000.” All you need to do is ask your doctor, “How much will that procedure cost out of pocket?” Whether it’s surgery, giving birth, or getting a vasectomy—how much will it cost? One of my favourite examples is colonoscopies. They’ll cover the colonoscopy but not the anesthesia. Who’s going to get a colonoscopy without anesthesia? 

Jacobsen: No way.

But that’s how it works. In some places, they’ll cover the colonoscopy, but your deductible for anesthesia might be $2,500. you’re thinking, “I’m not doing that.” But what if I told you I could get the colonoscopy and anesthesia for $1,500?

Another issue is data protection, which is becoming increasingly important as A.I. advances and telemedicine becomes more common. COVID changed the playing field, so I emphasize data protection. Cyberattacks are on the rise, and keeping patient data secure is critical. Even my dentist had special training in encrypting and securing patient files.

Most of us use secure electronic medical record (EMR) systems. For example, my EMR uses Google, and it’s HIPAA compliant. It has telemedicine built in, and I can text patients through it while staying HIPAA compliant. Everything stays within the system. There are ways to stay compliant, and you also need cyberattack insurance. That’s another reason medicine is expensive.

That’s why companies  Amazon and Walmart, when they tried to get into healthcare, eventually shut down their medical divisions. They realized “Primary care is hard.”

Jacobsen: Regarding direct primary care, what else happened with COVID?

Misra: COVID-19 damaged the patient-doctor relationship. The little trust that we had was destroyed. A lot of patients are now comfortable with telemedicine. My approach is to always meet the patient where they are. Some patients still need to go to a doctor in person, which is as close as they want. Others might turn to a national telemedicine company for partial treatment. I’ve worked with several companies, and they need more in what they can do.

It’s frustrating because, for instance, I might be treating someone with testosterone therapy. If it leads to hypertension, I can’t treat the hypertension within that system. It’s frustrating for both the patient and me. Essentially, you’re not getting complete care. You get partial care, and then they tell you to see your primary care doctor. Direct primary care (DPC) doesn’t operate that way. I might be treating someone for men’s health, but if I notice their blood pressure rising, I’ll address it. If it’s not included in their membership, we can modify the membership to include it. This is because some integrated medicine and DPC aren’t covered by insurance, and patients pay out of pocket. Kaiser, for example, doesn’t cover these services, and certain insurance plans won’t either. Unless you’re seeing an endocrinologist, many doctors won’t address it.

In direct primary care, we can manage these additional needs. For instance, I had a patient I was treating for one issue today, but we encountered a potential emergency. This patient was too scared to go to the hospital, partly because they knew they might no longer see a doctor at the E.R. Many must realize that ERs are separate, for-profit entities, even though they’re affiliated with hospitals. Their main concern is only sometimes providing the best treatment for the patient. The decision to admit someone to the hospital is also often handled separately. The E.R. and the hospital are part of a different system, and they shouldn’t really be tied together because of the financial conflict of interest.

A lot of ethically questionable things happen in this system. When you go to the E.R., you might not see a doctor, as many doctors are leaving E.R. medicine for direct primary care, aesthetics, or other fields. Patients are still determining what will happen or whether they should go to urgent care instead.

The patient had an urgent issue beyond my management scope in this case. They were in a different location than usual, so I was trying to arrange for imaging. Knowing those options ‘ limitations and potential costs, the patient wanted to avoid going to urgent care or the ER. But because we’ve built a relationship of trust through direct primary care, they were willing to meet me halfway and agree to imaging. I coordinated the imaging and potential emergency room care in case the results were concerning.

This level of care coordination is only possible with non-direct primary care. In other systems, patients are often sent to the ER and discharged without follow-up or communication. That’s not how direct primary care works.

Today, I had a typical case in DPC with an insurance patient. Still, their insurance is limited to a specific healthcare system, and I’m outside of that system. We could only use the insurance for imaging if the patient went to that system’s E.R. Even if they went to urgent care, there’s no guarantee they’d get the necessary imaging. Often, patients are sent to the E.R. anyway after paying the urgent care fee because the urgent care center can’t handle it.

DPC doctors can help triage whether a patient needs urgent care or an E.R. visit, saving time and frustration. This is one of the benefits of DPC, and it’s why I do what I do. I don’t accept insurance, but I advised this patient to ask about the out-of-pocket costs for the imaging. Initially, they wouldn’t tell me, but we eventually got the information after my nurse followed up.

So they told me the out-of-pocket cost. The out-of-pocket cost might be less than their deductible if they pay with insurance. The crazy part was that the appointment for my stat order was scheduled two weeks from now. It was a stat order, and they gave an appointment two weeks later.

What if something serious happens, like the patient dropping dead? It’s incredibly frustrating. So I had to call in and emphasize that it’s a stat. It’s stat because if something is found, we’ll need to send the patient to the E.R. I’m coordinating all that.

It’s maddening. But because I intervened, this patient is now going to be seen. I was supposed to see this patient, but that appointment opened up since they’ll now be going for imaging. I’ll see them later if needed.

Earlier in the response, interest was raised about cultural issues affecting both doctors and, more importantly, patients. The trust level has dropped post-COVID. Before COVID, doctors weren’t at the highest risk for suicide. But now, we are. 

Regarding the social factor of trust, I’ve had my doctor appointments where we discussed how bad things have become. We’re all pulling our hair out, asking, “What do we do?” What will eventually happen is that doctors will leave the system and create their own. Patients will be left with nonphysician practitioners.

You’re not seeing doctors anymore, but you’re being charged as if you are. 

Jacobsen: Is this a consequence of the long-term privatization of healthcare? 

Misra: It’s a consequence of insurance companies having too much power. It’s a consequence of the corporate takeover of medicine. It’s a consequence of venture capitalism putting profits over patients.

Healthcare can’t operate like other industries—it is expensive, and doctors have to triage care and money. There’s an order of operations. Medicine has reached this point because it used to be the opposite—too free. Insurance. Insurance and the government stepped in to say, “No, this is what things should cost,” because of perceived price gouging by the medical field.

So instead, they started price gouging. There has to be a balance between this and where we are now. I’m not saying direct primary care is the answer. It’s an answer for some of us right now, and so is direct specialty care, which is a parallel movement. But back to the original point—trust.

Jacobsen: When there’s pervasive distrust, several questions come up as subtext. First, why? What factors preceded this level of distrust, leading to high levels of mistrust that were then exacerbated by COVID, which resulted in virtually no trust? When did the trust start failing?

Misra: I know when I started noticing a shift around 2014 or 2015.

It might have started even earlier. My mom passed away in 2010, and I was heavy in grief at the time, so I wasn’t paying close attention to these shifts. I was shrouded in a cloud. However, my colleagues noted that direct primary care (DPC) had emerged before that in rural America, showing there was already a need to break away from administrative encroachment.

When too many people are involved in something that’s supposed to be an intimate, collaborative experience, it becomes chaotic. Everyone starts saying, “Where’s my piece? My piece needs to be bigger.” Meanwhile, the patient is hemorrhaging, and the physician is desperately trying to stop the bleeding. It’s a problem when you try to monetize something that involves ethics and integrity. If we don’t consider that, physicians may start charging fees comparable to those of attorneys because the level of thought and care we provide is immense.

When did trust break? It happened when doctors stopped being respected. Corporations and insurance companies started thinking, “What doctors do is easy, and we can get others to do it for less.” That mentality set in, and then COVID-19 exposed those cracks. It was already a problem before the pandemic, but COVID-19 has worsened. And we could have handled it better. We handled it at all.

I thought it was just a different version of the flu. We didn’t know what it was and still needed to understand it fully. We’re living with it now. During that time, even doctors were struggling. We had these masks, and doctors would say, “My PPE is broken, it’s ripped.” Maybe a hypoxic patient grabbed at your face, and suddenly you’re exposed. I can tell you how we used to handle breathing apparatuses before COVID-19, but that’s likely gone now.

We used to do fit testing. When we entered a room with a T.B. patient, you weren’t allowed in if you didn’t have a complete seal around your mouth. That went out the window with COVID, which was highly contagious, just like T.B. But T.B. is deadly, and so was COVID. We couldn’t maintain those standards anymore. You might have had one or two negative pressure rooms in the hospital.

We couldn’t even take care of ourselves, let alone our patients. And patients noticed. They could tell that we didn’t know what was going on. That bred more distrust. Then we imposed all these restrictions, telling people not to move or do anything. And whenever we did have to move or respond to something, there was chaos. People got angry and protested en masse, and then COVID surged again. We didn’t handle it well as a society or as a government. It was a horrible time, and we’re still living through it. We’re traumatized by it, and we’re sitting in that trauma right now. There’s so much we could discuss about this.

Jacobsen: So, what are the standard critiques of direct primary care (DPC)? What do you hear from patients or insurance companies?

The hardest part is convincing people that we provide better care because we’re less restricted. It’s a market challenge, but once people experience it, they don’t return. They don’t.

I educate through a platform called VuMedi. It’s a national physician education platform, and my channel focuses on direct primary care and medical innovations. Direct primary care allows me the time to explore these innovations. You were asking something—what was it? Oh, criticisms. Yes, right.

So, I don’t want to name names, but I’ll explain the context. The person who gave me this opportunity—I don’t get paid for it; it’s free for physicians because it’s an educational platform to share knowledge—was initially skeptical. They didn’t get it but saw I was passionate about it, so they gave me a channel and said, “Let’s film it a couple of times and see what happens.”

Then, this person attended a conference or health fair and saw not just one but two or three direct primary care doctors there. They realized, “Oh, this is what she’s talking about. She’s not some crazy woman I gave a channel to.” After that, this person tried to make an appointment with their doctor because they weren’t feeling well—whether it was an annual check-up or something else.

The next available appointment was in October, and the following was in December. They remembered what I had said about direct primary care and signed up with a DPC doctor within a month—all in two weeks.

The difference is this: You call to make an appointment with your regular doctor, and it’s all about whether your insurance is current. “Did you pay for everything? The doctor isn’t available until January, but your insurance might change by then, so you’ll have to call back.” By the end of it, you haven’t accomplished anything.

Now, with DPC, you can text your doctor directly. “Hey, my throat hurts. I don’t feel well.” Your doctor can respond, “I can do a virtual appointment today at 4, or see you tomorrow, or maybe get an X-ray and then follow up.” That’s a plan.

That’s the difference. With DPC, you’re paying for access, experience, and more personalized care. And since the movement is growing, we are still determining where it will take us.

Direct specialty care has now become an analogous revolution, a movement. It’s pretty cool. 

Jacobsen: What are the reasons for people who leave direct primary care and return to another or the traditional system?

Misra: Oh gosh. It’s because being an entrepreneur takes work. Being a “doctorpreneur” is even harder because we aren’t taught business skills. Asking for money while providing medical care—doesn’t come naturally to us. It’s hard for doctors to say, “If someone is dying on the floor, we’ll help—but only after they pay us $100,000.” That’s how most of the world works, but it isn’t easy for us. So, you have to be passionate about what you’re doing.

Direct primary care is sometimes a stopover before people leave medicine entirely. I say that all the time. Direct primary care can be a transitional phase for people who realize, “I tried it, but I don’t like it.” They may prefer the traditional system where things are fed to them, and they do what they must, even though it’s abusive. When you’ve been abused, it’s sometimes easier to stay in that system because it’s familiar. That’s basic psychology. It takes work for people to leave.

It’s hard to leave a pioneering, revolutionary space. Convincing people to become your patients and building a patient base in a system that’s yet to be the norm is also difficult. Yes, some people need to improve in direct primary care and close their practices. But many are thriving, making seven or eight figures.

Jacobsen: What’s a DPC Dino?

Misra: We call them DPC Dinosaurs because they’re dinosaurs pretending to be direct primary care. Think of companies like One Medical and Parsley Health. They’re big names, and they ride the direct primary care wave. But real DPC is when the doctor enters the room and already knows how your wife is and what’s going on in your life because we’re in such frequent contact that we know our patients on a personal level.

In traditional healthcare, the doctor might walk in and say, “So, this is what’s going on with your cancer,” and the patient is like, “What cancer? No one told me I have cancer!” I hate being that kind of doctor.

Jacobsen: What about the risks of inaccessibility for low-income patients? And what about the potential for cherry-picking patients?

Misra: That’s a valid concern. However, many direct primary care doctors charge less than $100 monthly and offer service exchanges because we are free of insurance constraints. For example, patients can pay with eggs, steak, or even a gym membership. This bartering system is popular, especially in rural America, where direct primary care first took root.

We serve underprivileged communities. We work with uninsured patients because we want to lower costs. I’m constantly negotiating prices. Part of the reason I have my educational channel is to bring people on and say, “Hey, here’s free exposure for you, but can you offer a discount or a code to make things more affordable for the DPC movement?” That’s part of what I do.

We also have GPOs—group purchasing organizations—to save money. Who doesn’t want to save money? Even if you want to pay $5,000 monthly, you can get a concierge DPC doctor at that rate.

Jacobsen: You mentioned the movement is growing, but it still needs to be determined as more doctors shift to direct care. At the same time, the traditional healthcare system in the U.S. needs help with retention and recruitment. Long-term, that’s unsustainable. What about scalability?

Misra: Yes, scalability is a major issue. The U.K. is facing significant problems, too. We’re in a strange phase where direct primary care is growing, but so is the overall instability in American medicine. It will be challenging to scale DPC to meet the growing demand while maintaining its core principles.

I love DPC because we always advocate for not having people spend much money. We discuss financial freedom and how much money you should spend before starting your practice. I advise against buying all the tools and toys right away. Start small and use what you have here and here. I did a video on this again: use your brain, your heart, your mouth, your prescription availability, and your physical exam skills. That’s what we want.

Jacobsen: What about the variability in quality? Are there issues with quality assurance for each doctor?

Misra: That’s an issue with every doctor you go to, and it’s probably worse with the insurance system. Quality improves with DPC because many DPC doctors offer meet-and-greets. You can talk to the doctor and decide if they’re right for you. If they’re not, you save your time. But if you click with them, you say, “I like this doctor; I want to work with them.”

Jacobsen: What about regulatory and legal uncertainty?

Misra: You said it—it’s uncertain. We’re working on some policy initiatives. I wrote something in A.I. recently and was asked, “What’s happening with DPC policy right now?” I answered, “It’s too soon; we need data.” So, in my video, I made a call to action: “Hi, we need data.”

Jacobsen: What about the exclusion of employer-sponsored financing?

Misra: It’s interesting because large-scale employers are recognizing the savings. Ernst & Young, Prudential, and other health insurance companies, like Blue Shield, are partnering with DPC doctors to get better care for their employees. What does that tell you? They’re seeing the savings and benefits of going directly to the doctor.

Jacobsen: Could it also be that if you aren’t up to snuff, you could be out of business quickly? Your patients will only stick around if you meet a certain quality standard.

Misra: Yes, and that’s a real concern. I have some pretty healthy patients now who are thinking about leaving, but they know they’ll need care eventually. It’s like this: you’re paying for access. Are you going to leave Costco?

Jacobsen: Depends on what I need.

Misra: Exactly. It depends on what you need. But your DPC doctor can handle most of what you need, even if you don’t know what you’ll need in the future. We can predict some of what you need every few years.

Jacobsen: What’s the hardest part of being a docto? You’ve started your own business and made the transition to DPC. What’s been the toughest part?

Misra: The hardest part of being a doctor is staying a doctor right now. I mean that with all my heart. Every day is a struggle because it’s heartbreaking. My colleagues are suffering. I had my own doctor’s appointment early this morning, and my doctor had to cut it short because they had to attend a funeral. One of our colleagues died—killed themselves. It’s happening so often. And not only are doctors dying from suicide but some are being murdered, too.

I had someone at a meet-and-greet who said, “I have ADHD, and I need my ADHD meds.” My response was, “I don’t prescribe ADHD meds for certain patients because I once had a knife to my throat.”

Jacobsen: The United States has a culture of scientific ignorance, especially considering its wealth and access to high-end education. It’s a weird paradox. Absolutely, and this paradox was pointed out a long time ago by Carl Sagan and others in the scientific skeptic and humanist communities. A consequence of this ignorance is that when individuals experience a negative outcome, which can happen occasionally even with the best care, they look for someone to blame. Psychologically, it’s a defence mechanism, so they blame the doctor.

Yes, for instance, they take too much Tylenol, their blood thins, they faint, and then they blame the doctor. It’s a complete mix-up of cause and effect—or at least the chain of events. And yes, in tragic cases, it’s very real. It’s not like watching House MD get shot on T.V.; this happens in real life.

Misra: Something I always say about weight loss treatments fits into this dichotomy. We, as doctors, know that we’re the first generation dealing with a large population of obese individuals who are both micronutrient and macronutrient deficient. What’s in our food? What are we doing?

That’s part of the paradox. When discussing lean muscle mass loss with medications like Wegovy or Ozempic, the real question is: What patient population are we starting with? Many of these patients don’t have much muscle to begin with, and on top of that, they’re eating less. We’re already dealing with micronutrient-deficient patients, and now they’re losing even more nutrients by consuming less. Of course, they’ll lose lean muscle mass—they’re losing everything.

This is why the craze with med spas, compounding, and trends like Ozempic is so frustrating. We, as doctors, know better, just like how people misuse Ivermectin or other off-label treatments.

Ozempic became a huge trend. Everyone started taking it, even though it’s intended for type 2 diabetes. Ozempic is for type 2 diabetes, but the dosage doesn’t go up to the levels used for obesity anymore. They’ve changed it, and now insurance companies are asking for their money back if patients took Ozempic for non-diabetic reasons. Insurance companies send emails saying, “We need our money back because you took it for the wrong indication.”

Jacobsen: Do you want to dig into anything further? I need more help diving deeper because we’re venturing into territory where my non-expert view would lead to wrong assumptions. So I’ll leave it at that. Out of everything we’ve discussed, what do you think needs to be said but has yet to be voiced, especially on platforms that don’t typically allow for such honesty about the current state of doctors?

Misra: We are suicidal. We are leaving medicine. If you can’t find a doctor, it’s because there are fewer of us left. I will say this kindly: you must be kind to your doctor. We’re trying to be professional, but you don’t know what’s happening behind the scenes. Medicine is complicated, and your insurance’s explanation of benefits intentionally confuses doctors and patients.

When angry about your insurance, take it out on them instead of your doctor. You negotiated that insurance; you chose it. We didn’t. We want to work for you and be better for you.

Here’s another thing: many doctors have out-of-pocket costs cheaper than you pay for insurance. Insurance is racketeering—I’m going to say it. Whether I want that published or not, it’s the truth. It’s fearmongering, and it’s getting worse. Insurance companies are committing medical fraud by denying care. When a doctor prescribes something with clear medical justification backed by evidence, that prescription should be honoured. By denying it, patients are suffering and even dying.

This situation creates a moral injury for doctors. We are burning out because we constantly battle a system that denies care. It’s not that we don’t want to help—there may be bad doctors, but many of us are doing our best. We’re part of the problem, but the system is breaking. People don’t realize how bad it is because we keep up a professional front until we die. This is a crisis, and it needs urgent attention.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Misra: Thank you for making time for me and for listening. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. So, goodbye from Canada, and have a good day. Enjoy the weather. It’s been raining the last few days, but hopefully, it’s not too bad where you are.

Misra: It’s pretty hot here. Honestly, there’s no place with perfect weather right now.

Jacobsen: Iceland. Iceland is a good option. 

Misra: I’ve heard great things, but I have yet to be.

Jacobsen: New Mexico is too hot for me. I’m too fair-skinned.

Misra: Same here. I even burn where I am now, so I’m staying put.

Jacobsen: Sulgana, thank you so much. I appreciate it.

Misra: You’re welcome. Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Chris Doran: Christianity’s ‘Creation Care’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/08

Professor Chris Doran is a Religion & Philosophy Division professor at Pepperdine University, where he created the Sustainability Minor in 2016 and the Sustainability Major in 2021. With a PhD in Systematic & Philosophical Theology and an MDiv from Pepperdine, Doran integrates science and theology in his work. His book, Hope in the Age of Climate Change, explores the role of Christian theology in addressing climate challenges. Doran also leads study abroad programs in New Zealand and advocates for LGBTQ+ students, contributing to discussions on LGBTQ+ issues within Christian contexts. He is also an avid runner and scuba diver.

Doran talks about Pepperdine University’s sustainability program, focusing on creation care and Christian responsibility for environmental stewardship. Doran, a professor since 2007, combines his biology and theology backgrounds to address climate change and sustainability across disciplines. They discuss integrating faith with environmental concerns, especially the pushback Doran encounters from Christian communities. Doran emphasizes the importance of intergenerational dialogue and humility in engaging younger generations who prioritize climate issues and advocate for collaborative efforts with secular communities.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Christopher Doran to discuss Pepperdine University’s program focused on sustainability and its orientation around creation care, or Christian responsibility for stewardship, based on values of compassion and justice. There is much to unpack here, especially with the many theological concepts involved. Let’s start by focusing on the pragmatics. What is the program? Why was it founded? And why at Pepperdine? 

Professor Christopher Doran: I’ve been a full-time professor here since 2007, but it’s also my alma mater. I attended school here in the mid-90s and earned a biology degree. So, my scientific mindset is always engaged. I then earned a graduate degree in theology, and I’ve been trying to integrate these two disciplines—science and faith—throughout my adult life. I’ve been exploring how they have worked together seamlessly in many parts of Christian history. However, in more recent Christian history, particularly within American Protestantism, we often drive a wedge between the two, whereas in earlier periods of Christian history, there wasn’t such a divide.

Regarding my work in sustainability at Pepperdine, when I was at Berkeley doing my graduate studies, interdisciplinary work was the norm. When I returned to Pepperdine to start teaching, our disciplines were somewhat siloed. We had science in one area, economics in another, and political science in another. However, as I began thinking about creating this program, responding to students’ needs, and addressing global challenges, I realized that we needed to think across multiple disciplines simultaneously to meet the complexities of climate change and sustainability. So, several colleagues and I developed this program to address as many interdisciplinary concerns as we could identify related to issues like climate change, water, biodiversity, population growth, and more.

Jacobsen: Was the book Hope in the Age of Climate Change: Creation Care, This Side of the Resurrection tied into this program regarding its release and writing?

Doran: Yes. When I was hired in 2007, the dean, who has since retired, encouraged me to write my textbook if I couldn’t find one that suited the course. It took me a while to reach the point in my career where I felt comfortable writing a book, but eventually, I did just that. I surveyed the landscape and noticed that within my tradition, the Churches of Christ, not many people were thinking or writing about this topic. I wanted to address the issue from a couple of angles. One was to think about the concept of the resurrection, which is deeply meaningful to my faith and tradition but has yet to be discussed regularly. The other was creation care, which is important to many Christians but often needs to be explicitly addressed. In my life, I saw an intersection between these two themes and aimed to explore that intersection in the book.

In the sustainability program at Pepperdine—both the major and minor—the book and other theological materials serve as a theological linchpin for how Christians might approach these issues differently than non-Christians or secular individuals. It offers a way to leverage our beliefs into new ways of thinking about problems and engaging in the global marketplace with ideas that may differ from those of secular individuals or other faiths. This allows Christians to contribute to the public conversation in a way that brings new perspectives that might not otherwise emerge.

Jacobsen: How do you find the reception of these ideas in the global marketplace of thought? Are the orientations similar, or are they different? Of course, it won’t be entirely distinct—there’s probably some overlap, like mutually overlapping bell curves.

Doran: Yes, there’s much overlap. Many faith traditions, in particular, talk about caring for the environment or caring for creation in different ways, using their particular religious language or traditions. Here in Malibu, there are many secular traditions, city government officials, and others who don’t necessarily operate with their faith at the forefront because of their context. However, we share many of the same commitments—keeping the beaches and water clean and worrying about landslides and wildfires here in California, for example. I find the space where that overlap exists to be energizing because we are working on shared commitments, even though we may have different religious backgrounds.

In the areas where there are differences, I’ve sometimes noticed that Christian audiences give me the most pushback on certain kinds of sustainability or climate change discussions, possibly because I’m seen as aligning too much with secular folks or placing other concerns ahead of, for example, saving souls or using more overt Jesus-centered language. I see much overlap in these areas, but interestingly, I can have more productive policy discussions at a Malibu City Council meeting than when I speak about these issues in a church setting. At church, the conversation often doesn’t get to policy, as people are more focused on whether I’m going theologically in the right direction. So, you find yourself navigating a tricky middle ground in a way.

Jacobsen: What theological value do you think is most crucial as a linchpin for conveying this message—whether in Malibu’s policy discussions or back at the church?

Doran: I wonder if there’s a single linchpin. However, one of the big ideas I often talk about is that religious values or your spiritual identity—however you want to frame it—shape many of your daily decisions. So, for example, if you think of yourself as a good person or a good Christian, you likely have a set of values operating in your mind that influence your actions as you navigate life in the 21st century. When someone like me comes along and says, “Climate change is doing this,” or “We face sustainability challenges in that area,” it can sometimes affect your sense of identity.

You might think, “I thought I was a good person—I didn’t intend to harm someone halfway around the world because of that vacation I took or the carbon gases I’m emitting as I drive to work.” One approach, from a Christian point of view, is to ask how we can reconcile this with our identity. How do we think through concepts of sin, confession, or repentance? As we work through these ideas, we can maintain our Christian identity while acknowledging that we aren’t perfect. We’ll have to make certain trade-offs, but as we do, we must consider whether we’re harming the poor and dispossessed—the “least of these,” as Jesus often referred to them in Matthew’s Gospel.

Do I want to harm those who can’t protect or advocate for themselves globally? That’s a big question for me. It’s about challenging our sense of identity. How do I remain a Christian if I engage in practices that might pollute? On the other hand, there’s also an identity challenge because many secular and non-Christian voices are pro-environment, pro-working on climate change, and so forth. This can create an “identity kerfuffle” for some people, who struggle to see how they can work with people outside their faith tradition on common issues, even when the goals overlap.

Jacobsen: Well, it’s hard. It may be easy in the academic world. Still, it’s hard in the journalistic world, especially with social media and the increasing polarization—I’m excluding even the political polarization in that comment, just broad-based polarization.

So, it’s harder for individuals who commit offences as the “fence” has narrowed. It becomes a tougher balancing act, and you receive more criticism from either side. When talking about care for creation, we can introduce theological concepts, particularly Christian ones, such as the Fall, living in a fallen world, personal responsibility, and the language of dominion—not dominion in the sense of an autocratic human rule over the earth but in terms of actual sustainability and care.

With these concepts and realities for many Christians, how do you bring this message to a church audience and convey that the ethic of sustainability, and what you’re working toward in terms of environmental stewardship, is legitimate, relevant, and important in the current age, especially with climate change and climatic disruption like what we’ve seen in North Carolina, for example? How do you not sell it but frame it appropriately and with the necessary sensitivity for a church audience so you don’t alienate yourself too much?

Doran: Yes, it’s a tough line to walk, particularly with all the polarization you mentioned at the beginning of your comment. One of the things I try to do with churches is to ask questions like, “What do you think you’re doing now in terms of stewardship? How is your church being an environmental steward?”

I often find more silence and awkward glances than answers when I ask that question. What happens a lot is that churches love to believe they are good environmental stewards, but when you ask what they’re doing on a day-to-day basis, there’s not always a clear response. Once we move past the silence and awkwardness, someone might say, “Well, we recycle,” or “We did an energy audit to ensure our air conditioning system is more efficient.”

After that, we can dive into more detailed discussions, connecting the dots between their theology and behaviour. I might point out, “You say that God created the earth, and you’re supposed to care for it, but perhaps your spending or actions in other areas don’t reflect that.” The goal is to bring those two aspects—their beliefs and their actions—closer together.

That’s the most sensitive way to engage with churches on this issue. Most, if not all, churches want to believe that their beliefs align with their actions. My job is to ask probing questions and help them see how they can bring their actions and beliefs into greater alignment. Ideally, when people outside the church community observe what the church is doing, they can say, “Yes, this church is environmentally conscious and serious about these issues.”

One thing Christians in this age tend to resist is the idea of outsiders criticizing them. There’s this mindset: “You don’t understand; you’re an outsider.” But when it comes to environmental issues, sometimes those outsiders may have a better perspective on what we’re doing and how we’re positioning ourselves than we’re willing to admit. That can be hard to accept because many churches don’t want to receive critique from the outside, and I understand that.

However, that critique could sometimes help build bridges with others in the community, leading to collaborative projects. Suppose churches were more open to accepting support, advice, and critique. In that case, they could have broader, more in-depth conversations about shared goals, such as wanting clean air, clean water, and nutritionally dense food for their children. How can we work on those goals together?

Jacobsen: Different churches operate differently, textually speaking. For example, some churches may see part of masculinity as driving a Hummer. I’ve seen jokes where men who drive Teslas are seen as not quite gay but somewhere along a line of femininity. Yet, electric cars have a lower carbon footprint, which is part of sustainability.

Many peripheral issues are related to sustainability, environmental care, and stewardship ethics. How do you navigate those discussions when they arise? I’m unsure how often these topics arise in your church, as I’m not there.

Doran: Yes, probably less so in my church here in California than in other churches. However, when I’ve worked with groups in Texas or the Upper Midwest, for example, particularly farming communities, farmers can get a bad rap for not always using the most sensitive language about climate change. But they want their farms to continue for future generations. They want to hand down their farms to them if they have kids.

As hard as it can be, my goal is to use language that doesn’t shame or eco-shame people. Instead, I ask, “What are you doing in your life that has a generational impact?” Family farming is significant for many males, particularly in the U.S., where most farmers are still men. Unfortunately, family farms are becoming a smaller demographic, but those who still run them know what’s happening on their land. They know the weather patterns are changing, they understand erosion, and they’re aware of biodiversity loss. They may not know these concepts from a scientific, lab-based perspective like we might teach at Pepperdine, but they know them from firsthand experience.

It’s important for those of us who live in urban environments to acknowledge that everyone is experiencing climate change. Still, people experience it differently depending on where they are in the country or the world. Those who drive pickup trucks and work on farms may have much more to say about it than we do in the cities, but we’re often not speaking the same language.

We must ask ourselves, “Do we want to pull the rope in the same direction?” How does resurrection provide hope regarding this ethic of care for the environment, sustainability, and stewardship?

Jacobsen: Yes, I’m curious about that connection.

Doran: The first book I wrote is Hope in the Age of Climate Change. A pastor of mine, a million years ago, said that when we preach, we often preach to ourselves more than to the audience, and you get these autobiographical lessons.

At some level, this book was personal for me. I grew up in an abusive, divorced family, and I was working through a lot of theological ideas throughout my life, especially about what constituted child abuse and how to find hope as a skeptical and cynical child and young adult. My Christian faith, specifically the belief in the resurrection, gave me a sense of hope in a radical way that Christians are supposed to believe. I bring that perspective to the table, especially with many of my Gen Z students, who often live in despair due to social media, climate change, or various global events.

I offer not a pie-in-the-sky hope but rather an active one encouraging behaviour change and collaboration. There is no passivity to the hope Christians talk about. You’re not sitting around waiting for God to swoop in like Superman and save the day.

Jacobsen: From the clouds, yes.

Doran: There’s work to be done, and there’s hope to be found in doing that work. Research outside of theology shows that the more we work with others on environmental issues, the more hopeful we become. As social creatures, as humans, we find meaning and purpose in working together. So, part of what I do in this program and my work with churches is to connect people who feel like environmental concerns have placed them outside their social groups. I help them find others working on the same issues and ask, “What can you do together?” Doing things together sends a far more hopeful message than going it alone.

Jacobsen: In large part, Gen Z, Millennials, and others today live in a much more comfortable society than even 100 years ago—whether in terms of lifestyle, quality of life, lifespan, healthspan, or access to education. So, I understand this notion of despair when we project some environmental models forward. Yet, there are solutions, and there are lots of options for those solutions. I don’t understand despair in the sense of doing nothing, which ensures the worst outcome. It’s a completely nonsensical position.

Even though we live in relative comfort, we have these disparate opinions, and we often fail to recognize how fortunate we are to be born at this time. Additionally, through things like rage farming and social media, we’ve created a culture of despair or fault-finding, amplifying negativity on a large scale. It’s all digitized and recorded forever, creating a misleading image of reality. I blame journalists, too, for how reality is sometimes represented, focusing too narrowly on problems rather than widening the lens to see the bigger picture outside the Carping Culture.

You want to avoid looking at these problems with a telescope or a microscope. You want to widen the lens. In my opinion, science is a hammer—a tool for acquiring knowledge about the world. But how do we take that scientific knowledge, especially about the environment and sustainability, and turn it into an ethical imperative for care? How do we give it a moral compass?

Doran: That’s a great question. When I was in grad school, we worked on that topic all the time—not necessarily environmental ethics specifically, but broader ethical questions about living in a better world. How do we leverage science in that way? Let me back up a bit to explain.

As someone who studied biology, and with some of my mentors now being my colleagues, I often joke that they speak “lab language.” They don’t speak direct English or citizen language—in other words, they don’t speak English. They speak “lab-ese,” as I often call it. And this has yet to start in the last 20 or 30 years. It probably dates back to the 1940s and ’50s, when scientists started becoming segregated from average citizens, especially through government contracts.

This has major ramifications, including the decline in trust in the scientific process and scientists across the Western and English-speaking world. So, much trust needs to be rebuilt, and it’s up to scientists to reach out to average citizens and explain—in regular, clear English—what they are doing.

I often discuss this with my science colleagues. From the church or broader community perspective, the challenge is this: We use science to get on a plane and fly to see our grandmother or to get in a car and drive to work. However, we often raise our hackles when scientists argue that we must change our behaviour due to climate or environmental concerns.

That’s when scientists step over from their purely scientific domain into an ethical domain, which can get complicated for average citizens. We use science every day, but when we’re told to change our behaviour, we suddenly start questioning why these scientists are telling us what to do.

But the broader question is moral: do we want clean air? Do we want clean water? Do we want good, nutritionally dense food? These are the three main things I often use in my classes. If we can answer “yes” to those questions, science becomes a tool to help us achieve those goals.

From there, we need to start thinking about the economic, political, and other trade-offs to consider if we want cleaner air, cleaner water, and better food. That’s the order I follow. As a theologian, I view many problems as moral or theological. However, society must decide whether we want clean air, clean water, or good food. Once we decide “yes” to those questions, science can help us get there, and then we’ll need economists, politicians, and others to guide us through the rest because those issues have massive ripple effects beyond science.

Jacobsen: Those are fabulous points. A lot of these scientific or engineering findings have obvious ethical implications. To make the point clearer, let’s use an example of clean air and nutritious food. This is a scientific question—an empirical question. Do seatbelts, airbags, and crumple zones in car architecture, which are designed to absorb most of the impact, save more lives and reduce injury rates more effectively than no seatbelts, no airbags, and cars made of hard steel, where the passengers and drivers are the softest parts? Well, I’m pretty sure the findings over the last few decades have shown that making those changes—adding airbags, seatbelts, and crumple zones—saves more lives, reduces injuries, and lessens the severity of injuries.

That seems straightforward. You’d want to implement seatbelts and airbags to save lives and reduce injury rates. And for the most part, we’ve done that. The same applies to air quality, food, and sustainability. These environmental issues may seem more distant because they’re less immediately impactful—using that term deliberately—than a car crash or the deaths that result from one.

I had a friend who was a passenger in a car when I was a kid. They were drunk, driving too fast in my hometown, and they died in a car crash. That’s a direct consequence. Accidents happen, but you can reduce the probability of such outcomes. So, who do you get more pushback from—policy people or religious communities?

Doran: That’s a good question. I assume you mean when I’m talking about environmental or climate issues—who do I get more pushback from?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Doran: It depends. It varies depending on where I am. In California, I get more pushback from religious communities than from politicians. In other parts of the country, it’s the opposite—I might get more resistance from politicians than from religious groups.

This is a local and regional issue because while federal funding may be available for certain environmental initiatives, implementation happens at the regional or local level. So, reactions and pushback differ by area.

The most common pushback I get from the Christian community is the concern that the environmental issues I’m discussing distract from other Christian commitments, like saving souls or keeping Jesus at the center of one’s life. People ask, “Are you distracting from our primary mission?”

This concern is sincere but often reflects a false dichotomy—the idea that saving souls is the only thing Jesus was about. However, as far as we can tell, Jesus had a healing ministry. He was concerned with people’s well-being.

Jacobsen: Yes, he healed lepers.

Doran: Jesus helped lepers reintegrate into their communities, enabling them to be part of society again. This aspect of Jesus’ ministry has been de-emphasized or even forgotten, particularly in American Protestantism, where the focus often becomes solely on the “pie-in-the-sky” mission of saving souls. And to the detriment of that part of Jesus’ healing ministry—reconnecting people to their communities. At some level, environmental issues are about whether we can live whole, healthy, fully communal lives in our only home.

Jacobsen: Now, regarding pushback, from the 2000s to the 2010s, there was this rah-rah New Atheist orientation or a more private atheist stance of “destroy all religion, religion has nothing good to offer,” etc. How do you integrate with secular communities that are not like that—those who are willing to listen to what you’re saying and recognize that we have a common cause? We may not share the same philosophical foundation, but we share the same concerns.

Doran: I’ve lost track of the number of times I’ve spoken with more secular communities or worked on group projects where someone has said, “I wouldn’t have left my church if I had met a Christian like you.”

Jacobsen: Wow.

Doran: And I’m always trying to understand exactly what that means. At some level, I don’t think it means I’m super special, but it shows that talking about these concerns in the way I do has somehow alienated people from their previous faith communities or their understanding of what Christian churches and Christianity could be about. It likely wasn’t the only cause, but it was part of their decision to leave something they once considered an important part of their faith journey.

So, it’s crucial to be as authentic and sincere as possible. I went to graduate school, read many books, and dived into the subtleties and nuances of a faith journey. I think that approach resonates with those on the secular edge because they recognize that there’s a lot more nuance than some brash evangelical or other Protestant voices may present.

When I work with local groups, like the City of Malibu, it doesn’t matter what your religious commitment is while picking up trash, planting trees, or working on a community project. No one cares about your beliefs until afterward when you might go to lunch together and start talking or have dinner later and ask where people come from and why they do what they do. The common experience of doing something together is what builds relationships. After that, conversations about beliefs, identity, and background naturally follow.

For example, I’ve picked up trash on the beach or worked in a community garden in my neighbourhood. That’s the foundation of interfaith work—it starts at the individual level.

Jacobsen: Conferences and academic settings are useful but tend to be more about mutual presentations from something like the Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy.

Doran: Yes, you’re right. 

Jacobsen: Have I missed anything?

Doran: No, I think we’ve covered everything.

Jacobsen: Cool.

Doran: Do you have any final questions?

Jacobsen: Do you have any messages for Christians skeptical of a sustainability orientation within theology? Do you have any olive branches for secularists who are determined never to collaborate with what they stereotype broadstroke as misogynistic, totalitarian, Christian nationalist movements?

Doran: Well, let me answer the last question first and then make sure I remember the first one.

Jacobsen: You like to reverse the order of answers!

Doran: Yes, I do.

Doran: There’s some recency bias. 

Jacobsen: Yes.

Doran: So, for those in the secular community who have formed stereotypes about Christians—and Christians have done the same to the secular community—it might be good for all of us to get off our high horses and start asking more direct questions to individuals, rather than beginning with stereotypes and moving forward from there.

That’s a lesson for secular folks as much as it is for Christians. It’s fascinating to me when I interact with atheists and other secular people on environmental issues. I often get comments like, “I’ve never heard a Christian like you,” or “I wish I had heard this before.” There’s something we can all learn from that.

I try not to stereotype atheists or secular folks, either. If we could model a way of talking to individuals rather than stereotypes, that would be a healthy first step.

As for your first question—what could we think about for other Christians? One of the things I often mention when speaking to communities is that, as research from the Pew Research Center and others shows, environmental issues or a lack of understanding of science are often among the top ten reasons Gen Z and millennials leave the church. I’m not saying that Christian churches should address these science issues just because of that.

But I often tell church leaders to think hard about what they’re saying or not saying in front of their congregations because young people are picking up on whether you think they should be. If young people believe climate change is an issue—and I certainly do, even though I’m a Gen Xer, not a millennial or Gen Z—then I think churches should ask, “Do we take young people seriously?” And if we do, and we don’t stereotype their concerns, what might that do?

We need to model humility and consider what young people are thinking about and what they take seriously. I’m a big fan of intergenerational churches. I’m not a fan of churches that don’t have people of all ages—from 90-somethings to babies in the nursery. There’s much value in the humility that comes from different generations listening to each other. If older folks like me aren’t modelling that humility, I don’t know why I should expect younger folks to do it.

That would be one thing I’d offer:

  1. If people in your community say climate change or sustainability is a big issue for them, ask them why.
  2. Ask them why, and try not to stereotype them.
  3. Listen carefully to why they think it’s such a big deal before you say anything.
  4. Just ask, “Why?”

Jacobsen: Dr. Doran, Chris, thank you for your time today. I hope it was fun for you, too.

Doran: Cool. Thanks so much, man. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Absolutely, Chris. Nice working with you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

S.T. Joshi: The Downfall of God

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/08

S.T. Joshi (b. 1958) is a leading authority on H. P. Lovecraft, Ambrose Bierce, H. L. Mencken, and other writers, mostly in the realms of supernatural and fantasy fiction. He has edited corrected editions of the works of Lovecraft, several annotated editions of Bierce and Mencken, and has written such critical studies as The Weird Tale (1990) and The Modern Weird Tale (2001). His award-winning biography, H. P. Lovecraft: A Life (1996), has already become a collector’s item. An expanded and updated version, I Am Providence: The Life and Times of H. P. Lovecraft, was published in 2 volumes in 2010.

But critical, biographical, and editorial work on weird fiction is only one aspect of Joshi’s multifaceted output. A prominent atheist, Joshi has published the anthology Atheism: A Reader (2000) and the anti-religious polemic, God’s Defenders: What They Believe and Why They Are Wrong (2003). He has also compiled an important anthology on race relations, Documents of American Prejudice (1999).

Joshi discusses The Downfall of God: A History of Atheism in the West, which examines the decline of religion from classical antiquity to the present day, driven by science, secularism, and cultural changes. He explains that despite recent efforts by figures like Justice Samuel Alito to reverse secular trends, religion’s influence continues to wane. Joshi humorously critiques religion’s inconsistencies, stating it’s no longer credible, and highlights the importance of defending secular gains.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with S.T. Joshi. First things first, and most importantly, we are going to plug a particularly significant book that will be part of a series, The Downfall of God: A History of Atheism in the West. The first question that comes to mind is, why write an entire history of atheism in the West? Second, why focus only on the West? Those are two distinct questions, and both deserve answers.

S.T. Joshi: First of all, I have been studying atheism for most of my life. Curiously enough, I became a more or less dedicated atheist probably in the 1970s when I was a teenager, reading the work—not the fiction, but the essays and letters—of H. P. Lovecraft, the great American horror writer. He wrote thousands of letters, and he was himself a vigorous atheist, defending that position in his correspondence. I was not raised in any religious tradition, thankfully, not even my own native tradition of Hinduism. My father told my mother, “Let our children decide for themselves what they want to believe in if they want to believe in anything, including religion.”

We were not discouraged from believing in anything, but we were allowed to figure it out for ourselves. Ultimately, I became convinced of the atheistic point of view, starting with Lovecraft and later with other writers like Bertrand Russell and Friedrich Nietzsche. Over time, I began compiling collections of writings on atheism starting in the early 21st century, but I realized that there was no comprehensive history of the subject. I interpret atheism not only as the specific advocacy of disbelief in gods—which is still relatively rare in the West and elsewhere—but also as the general decline of religion’s influence on society, government, law, culture, literature, and music. This is why the book, which will be in two volumes, covers antiquity up to 1600 in the first volume.

The reason this book is so large is that tracking the advance of secularism and the decline of religion is an enormous and highly complex subject. I had to study many different aspects of culture. As for why I focused only on the West, the simple answer is that it reflects my background, despite being from the East, so to speak—I am South Asian, but I am more familiar with European languages. I don’t know Chinese, Japanese, or other Asian languages, and it would have been logistically difficult and incredibly time-consuming to write a world history of atheism, which was my original intention. So, I decided to focus on the West because there is so much to cover, and I felt I could do that well, given my background and expertise. That’s why the book is the way it is.

Jacobsen: Another quick question about the book: What were your major thematic findings when looking at history through the lens of atheism in the West? That’s a fascinating subject—it’s a vast one.

Joshi: Indeed it is. I began with classical antiquity, though I actually started with the Neolithic period, examining how anthropologists and others believe religion was “invented,” if you will, in primitive times. However, my primary focus was on Greek and Roman antiquity, a field I studied extensively at Brown University and Princeton.

So I had a good background there. But moving on from late antiquity through the Middle Ages and the Renaissance, that was a field I had not studied as ardently or in as much detail as I probably should have. I had to do a lot of background research to understand the culture of those eras. I found that even when Christianity, in particular, was dominant throughout the medieval age, cracks appeared. There were schisms and disagreements, even among Christian philosophers and theologians, that set the stage for things like the Renaissance, which began the process of secularization in the West and has continued on to the present day.

Jacobsen: Now, let’s talk about the purpose of this. It’s fascinating. I appreciate it, and we’ll make sure to hyperlink that particular book. Is it on Amazon, or is it available through a publisher?

Joshi: It is available on Amazon. It’s published by Pitchstone Publishing. You can also order it through their website. Technically, it’s not going to be released until November 12th. This will probably be published around that time, so the timing is perfect.

Jacobsen: So, Justice Samuel Alito—he has had a strong alignment with conservative Christian views, which has influenced his judicial decisions. He’s faced criticism, including for flying an upside-down American flag, which was seen as a signal during Joe Biden’s election. What are you seeing in this presentation from Justice Alito, with these flags flown upside down, this “Appeal to Heaven” flag, and various other signifiers of dissent from the political rulership of an elected democratic leader, along with apparent appeals to Christian nationalism?

Joshi: Alito represents a fairly substantial number of Christians, I believe, who feel besieged by people like us. Why do they feel that way? Who knows? Perhaps because they recognize—as I have chronicled in painful detail in my book—that Christianity is, in fact, on the wane. Religion, in general, is on the decline, and they don’t like that.

And so, they are using every possible method within their power—and they still have considerable levers of power—to reverse that trend. But quite frankly, it’s like King Canute trying to command the waves. It’s futile and useless. That’s why I don’t even take Alito’s stance seriously. I poke fun at it because I find that ridicule is a good weapon against religion in general and people like Alito in particular.

Jacobsen: How do you make the distinction, comedically, between making a joke and making a joke with a substantiated point?

Joshi: I like to think that I always make a joke with a substantiated point. What I argue is that Alito is not merely expressing an opinion—he is obviously entitled to his opinion, as everyone is—but he is using that opinion to, shall we say, tip the scales toward his side. In my judgment, he is doing so illegitimately because it defies many centuries of American jurisprudence regarding the separation of church and state. But as I say, even he and his colleagues on the Supreme Court can only do so much in that regard. I am not concerned about the emergence of a theocracy in this country.

It will not happen because the great majority of Americans do not want it to happen, and they will make sure it does not. But in a sense, do we as humanists or secular humanists make a logistical error—or even, I don’t know, a marketing error—when we create this fear around Christian nationalism if it’s not something that will necessarily come true? Are we tallying up fears over a fantasy? One should always be vigilant in these matters, as a series of accidents could result in certain bad things happening from our perspective.

So yes, one should always defend one’s position. The problem with secularists, in general, is that we do not organize well. It’s like herding cats—because we think.

Jacobsen: The perennial comparison.

Joshi: It is. I love cats. I’m a cat devotee. In fact, I’m a proud, childless cat gentleman, if I may say so. So, defending our position and not retreating from the gains we have made over centuries is certainly important.

But I don’t believe we need to become hysterical in this fight. I remember reading a book by Rod Dreher some years ago called The Benedict Option, which came out around 2016. He’s a conservative Christian, and he basically argued that Christians are so besieged by us horrible secularists that all they can do is retreat into their little communities and wait out the storm while the barbarians—and he specifically calls us that, barbarians—do their thing and eventually die out, apparently.

And then, perhaps after centuries, Christians can come out of their little enclaves and reclaim the earth. Well, if he thinks that way, good luck to him. The problem with this general attitude is that Christians in general, and indeed religious people in general—at least those who are not fanatics—do not live their religion, and they haven’t for centuries. I don’t say that they are hypocrites for doing so. I don’t say, “Oh, you profess belief in God, but you don’t act on it.”

It is difficult to act on a belief in a benevolent God, especially in our society. There are so many other distractions that can take one’s attention away. The fact of the matter is that the great majority of religious people, especially in the West, attend church for one hour a week. For the other 167 hours, they act as if there is no God. That’s fine—that’s just the way things are. That’s why I don’t believe there’s any monumental concern that we’re going to lapse into a theocracy.

Jacobsen: What about situations where we see an apparent religious motivation for the overturning of Roe v. Wade, which has been a large concern for a lot of feminist women and progressive political figures? How does that fit into this narrative?

Joshi: In my most cynical moments, when the legality of Roe v. Wade was being decided in 2022, I came close to uttering a prayer—the closest I could ever come to doing so.

I said, “Supreme Court, please, please, please overturn Roe v. Wade.” Why? Because the backlash that I knew would happen did happen, and it is still happening. In that sense, the overturning of Roe v. Wade is the gift that keeps on giving, and it has damaged the reputation of the Supreme Court. It has energized the political and non-religious left and even the religious left in some regards, and it is certainly fueling a large part of our current Democratic presidential campaign.

So what is there not to like? It is unfortunate that there are certain states where abortion is either illegal or difficult, but that will change over time. I would be surprised if, in a relatively short period, abortion becomes legal again across this country. 

Jacobsen: So, a filmmaker, Lauren Windsor, approached Alito and Chief Justice John Roberts to argue for a return to godliness in the country. Roberts was noncommittal, but Alito agreed. How did that play into this?

Joshi: She was deliberately trying to elicit those opinions to paint both justices as religious fanatics. She succeeded in snagging Alito, while Roberts wisely stayed noncommittal.

Jacobsen: Mindful of time, here’s one quick question: What do we get wrong about Alito? Are there any myths that we, as secularists, hold about him?

Joshi: I don’t know him personally, obviously. I don’t know much about him. But it’s clear that he, along with others on the Court, particularly Justice Thomas and perhaps Amy Coney Barrett, believe that their religion is under threat, and they feel obliged to stand up for it.

Now, they are free to stand up for it in terms of advocacy, or however they choose to go about it. They are not free to twist our laws to give their religion a boost. Their exalted position does not, and should not, allow them to do that, and they have been rightly criticized for it. Let me be blunt—they will pay the penalty for it, not in any overt violence or anything like that; nobody wants that. However, many of their decisions will be overturned once the Supreme Court becomes a saner institution, and I am confident that will happen someday.

Jacobsen: Do you think the Supreme Court’s current position, being out of lockstep with much of American public opinion, especially regarding polls, is a major driver in the decline of religiosity in the United States? So people who identify with specific tenets, who identify with the label Christian, Muslim, etc., and with the fervency with which people believe, with metrics like how often they attend or how long they attend—what about them? Is the Supreme Court a major driver in that general attitude?

Joshi: I don’t know if the Supreme Court is a major driver of that general attitude. If you read the second volume of my history of atheism, which won’t come out until at least next year, you will see that the decline of religion has been fairly steady since the 16th century for a whole lot of reasons—science, the criticism of the Bible, and just the general advance of secular civilization in so many different aspects, including literature, the arts, culture, and music.

So, putting that in a broad perspective, what is happening in the Supreme Court is just a little blip in the grand scale of things. I do not see how it is possible to reverse the tide of secularism because, quite frankly, religion is simply not credible anymore, and it hasn’t been for several centuries. There is no need to resort to religion to explain any phenomena of the universe. Even people who are not well-educated in literature and the sciences understand that because they don’t see how religion is doing anything.

It always amuses me when Christians refer to their God as a benevolent God and then turn around and say that certain bad events, like hurricanes and tornadoes, are “acts of God,” which would suggest, quite frankly, that God is a malevolent creature—or at least inexplicable to our understanding. This unwittingly turns most Christians into agnostics. If you believe in a God but have no understanding of what that God is like, you are basically an agnostic. So there it is. It is simply impossible to take religion seriously anymore, which is not to say that religion won’t be a nuisance for quite a bit longer. We should always be careful and vigilant in pointing out these nuisances whenever we can.

Jacobsen: Mr. Joshi, thank you. Nice to meet you, and thank you so much for your time today.

Joshi: I appreciate it. Sure thing.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Muneeb Mushtaq: Aromacology, Drake, and Entrepreneurship

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/07

Muneeb Mushtaq is a serial entrepreneur and the CEO of Airzai, a tech-enabled health and wellness company. With a focus on leveraging AI and machine learning, Airzai is transforming the fragrance industry with its smart-home diffuser, Airzai Aroma. Before this, Muneed founded and led AskforTask, one of Canada’s largest on-demand service platforms. He is a keynote speaker and contributor to Forbes and Thrive Global publications.

Mushtaq discusses Airzai’s creation, inspired by a need for healthier, AI-driven fragrance experiences in a market dominated by synthetic products. Mushtaq highlights Airzai’s premium approach and its differentiation through quality. He shares insights on securing funding, partnerships, and his journey as an entrepreneur. Mushtaq emphasizes the importance of managing energy and how it can lead to personal and professional success.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here to discuss Airzai, and we’re joined by Muneeb Mushtaq. There are many aroma, oil, and diffuser devices around, so what inspired this particular one tied to AI? How does Airzai carve out its own niche, not just in a crowded market but also in a market that’s not necessarily novel?

Muneeb Mushtaq: Yes, thanks, Scott, for having me. That’s a great question. I’m just diving right into it—before we discuss why AI was involved, we need to take a step back. I’m sure you’ve used candles in your life, right?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Mushtaq: Candles have existed for hundreds, if not thousands, of years. They’re one of the most ancient tools. Initially, they were made from natural wax. Still, as humanity progressed and evolved, like with most things, they became more synthetic. This was done to increase production efficiency and enhance the properties of the candles. Now, almost 90% of the candles on the market contain synthetic materials that can harm users.

The same goes for diffusers. They have been around for less long than candles. However, most work by adding a few drops of essential oil to water, creating a pleasant experience. Many products in the market are healthier than they seem. That’s where Airzai comes in—we’re focused on building a better, healthier experience driven by AI for people using these products.

We make many daily decisions based on emotions. By improving the quality of experiences, like with Airzai, we help people make better choices with wellness products supported by AI technology.

Jacobsen: So, before we get into the technicalities of the device, to the original question, then, what inspired you to create a diffuser, an aroma diffuser, in a market that’s not entirely saturated but not entirely novel either? It’s one of those interesting middle-ground markets where you can find a niche and develop a bit of a new market.

Mushtaq: Absolutely. It comes from my experience as a serial entrepreneur, having built and sold two companies. I try to find a product category ripe for disruption but not entirely new—so we’re not reinventing the wheel. We took a segment that had been stale for a long time, where not many people were paying attention, and decided to create some disruption. Airzai is a product born out of my passion for scent and my experience in tech. What started as a passion project has now turned into a venture, and we’re quite excited about what we’re bringing to the market.

When you bring a product to the market, you can distinguish yourself at the extremes in one of two ways. One is through quantity, where you can distribute many products at a lower cost than competitors. Alternatively, you can distribute one of the highest quality products to a more select audience and build a brand based on quality.

Jacobsen: When you look at this product, I know the price, after tax, is over $600 Canadian. In a tight economy, when people are budgeting carefully, how do you make the sale or the pitch to people and distributors, convincing them that this is a product they want and may need to add more quality to their lives?

Mushtaq: Great question. The way we see it, Airzai is priced well above where the market stands for regular diffusers. That’s why we say Airzai is not just a diffuser—it’s a lifestyle. It’s something that integrates into your daily life.

When you look at any product category, some items serve the utility you need. For example, you can buy a vacuum cleaner for $20 at Walmart, but then you have Dyson, which costs $600 to $700. What’s the difference between Dyson and a no-name vacuum cleaner? They both clean floors, but the difference lies in the engineering, the experience, the science behind it, and the added utility you get from it. Every time you use that Dyson, it delivers more value.

Coming back to Airzai, this industry hasn’t seen a Dyson-level product or a premium experience. Airzai is designed for people who appreciate high-quality design and premium experiences and, above all, prioritize health benefits and healthy living. They understand that they don’t want to introduce toxins into their environment. Instead of just scenting their room, they want something that brings health benefits.

Mushtaq: So, when you pile up all these things, the value for money far surpasses what the user is paying. That’s reflected in the demand we’re seeing. The first two batches we’re launching are completely sold out. Our beta users are loving the experience. For example, Jonathan from Miami uses a Nespresso coffee machine and a Nest thermostat. He falls into the category of preferring high-quality products over just utility.

In his words: “Mushtaq, I wish this product had existed long ago. It’s just seamless. I don’t have to clean it. I don’t even have to think about it. It just works. Whenever the scent ends, I reorder at the tap of a button, or I can even automate it. The system knows when my scent is running low and places an order for me when I’m in subscription mode.”

So, this whole experience really defines what you’re paying for. We’re confident that anyone who becomes an Airzai customer will not be disappointed.

Jacobsen Douglas Jacobsen: Now, you did get an endorsement or something of that nature from Drake, a prominent artist. How did that come about?

Mushtaq Mushtaq: Yes, well, Drake is one of our investors. As I said, it’s a venture now, though it started as a passion project. Building something great and truly focused on bringing the market to its desired experience naturally attracts the right audience. When we got introduced to Drake’s team, the discussion was organic. He loved the product, and it just made business sense, given the scale of the project. So, we ended up partnering, and I’m grateful to have him on this journey with us. We’re excited to see how far we can take this together.

Jacobsen: When people think of a regular diffuser, they’re not thinking of a lifestyle product—they’re thinking of something more basic, like a device for vague aromatherapeutic activity. They might think of candles or just putting oil into a slot for a coarse aroma distribution throughout a room. How does AI make this more systematic, ergonomic, and precise regarding human control?

Mushtaq: Yes, let me revisit one term you used for the audience: aromatherapy. We all know what aromatherapy is. It’s been around for a long time. Ancient Chinese cultures, for instance, practiced aromatherapy with ingredients like white jasmine, one of the key ingredients in our scent called “Serene Sleep.”

Aromatherapy has long been used to bring physical and psychological benefits, like calming the mind and body or aiding in healing. Some essential oils can even be applied to the skin for pain relief. So, aromatherapy has been around for ages, but at Airzai, we work with aromacology. Aromacology is the study of how scents affect emotions and behaviour. Through AI, we can personalize and optimize scent experiences for individual users, tailoring the effects based on preferences, needs, and the space in which the scent is used.

Jacobsen: Now, that’s a new term that hasn’t yet been explored in more detail. The future lies with scent science, especially aromacology. Could you explain what aromacology means and how it relates to emotional states?

Mushtaq Mushtaq: Absolutely. Aromacology is the study of how scents impact emotions or the emotional state of human beings. Looking at it from a bigger perspective, it’s about enabling a scent to bring someone the emotional state they desire. That could be feeling relaxed and energized, getting better sleep, or improving meditation.

AI helps us achieve this by collecting data about how scents impact emotional states, both on an individual level and across different demographics. By utilizing AI technology, we can aggregate data and train models to ensure the experience is so personalized that it feels custom-made for each user. The AI doesn’t just understand your current mood—it can predict your mood and offer a scent experience to help you achieve your desired emotional state.

Much innovation is happening in this space, which has been overlooked for a long time. We’re excited to be pioneers in disrupting this space. Thanks to the availability of advanced AI technology and expertise, we can finally use it to deepen the science of scent.

Jacobsen: What other areas or markets could this device and technology partner or integrate with other products, systems, or distribution? For example, you buy an Airzai product and then get a complementary product, or is it more about focusing on one specific type of oil?

Mushtaq Mushtaq: Yes, the oils we use are non-refillable, but we’re looking at complementary products that align with the biohacking trend, which is about improving longevity and quality of life. People are focusing more on preventative measures to live better lives.

For example, red light therapy is gaining popularity. If you’re doing a 10- to 15-minute red light therapy session or a cold plunge, having an additional sensory element like a scent can take the experience to the next level. We’ve tested this in different settings, and the results are amazing.

You also have devices like the Apple Watch, which tracks your heart rate, blood oxygen levels, sleep, and activity. By integrating scent experiences with these devices, we can further enhance the user experience. There’s much opportunity to work alongside these devices to bring true value to people.

When you look at other products on the market, there isn’t a company as forward-thinking in introducing scent and the olfactory system into areas that impact our quality of life—like sleep, recovery, workouts, eating health, and overall well-being. As time passes, we’ll introduce exciting partnerships that truly add value for our customers.

Jacobsen: You have a lot of seed funding for this project. Many people may need to realize that while much money is available for various initiatives, getting that funding is another endeavour altogether. When you’re raising, or at least when you have a couple of million dollars in seed funding, how do you manage that, especially in a slightly saturated market? It’s not entirely novel or a brand-new market, but it still seems promising.

Mushtaq: The way I look at funding is that, of course, in the startup world, there’s a lot of talk about how much you should raise when you should raise it, and what the right amount is to raise. I advise and work with many startups to share my knowledge about it because I’ve also successfully raised funds for my past two startups.

When we started this project, Airzai, one thing was clear: because it’s a hardware project and we’re building the technology in-house, there would be much R&D needed to develop this product. Not only is it a hardware project, but it also requires software interactions and integrations. And we must remember that implementing AI is a complex and demanding task, especially when building the whole structure around it.

It truly matters how much development is needed and the dynamics involved in bringing the product to market. It was always clear that we wanted to be the market leader. Attracting the right partners, engaging with them, and involving them in the project at this stage was vital. I’m happy that we got that done successfully, and the product we’re bringing to the market now will truly reflect that.

I want to quickly address entrepreneurs thinking about raising money or figuring out how much to raise. It comes down to how big your vision is. When you aim high, looking to create a global brand and make an impact, you need that fuel to get there. So, it’s about more than just getting the right amount of money; it’s also getting the right partners who believe in your vision and can support you in bringing it to reality.

Jacobsen: That’s a good point. Many people don’t realize how much of an underappreciated skill raising any seed funding is, let alone raising seven-figure sums. It’s an impressive feat to have accomplished.

So, you’re calling from Dubai now, but you’re a Toronto boy—or, more precisely, a Canadian like me. Is the work you’re doing in Dubai part of an extension of Airzai, or is it for something else entirely?

Mushtaq: Yes, thanks for bringing that up. First, I completely agree with your comments about fundraising. It’s difficult, and people who haven’t been entrepreneurs or started a company often need help understanding the complexities and hardships of raising capital. It’s a sales job—you’re selling your dream to someone. That’s the first thing. The second challenge is that you’re selling something that exists in the future.

So, it’s not like you’re just selling a car, where the moment they invest, they immediately reap the benefits. Nor is it like the stock market, where you see daily fluctuations. It’s an investment in a future—a distant future. That’s why I love sharing my knowledge, experiences, and even failures, along with how I learned from them and the methods I’ve developed after countless setbacks.

I always tell people that we currently have 35 people on our cap table, but that’s the result of pitching to, well, I’ve lost count, but maybe over 250 people—probably between 200 and 300. It’s not just a numbers game, however. When you realize that you need someone as an investor and pitch directly to them, you start converting. I always say that this requires much effort. Still, in the end, when you have the resources to support your dreams and bring them to reality, that should motivate you to stay persistent and follow through.

I grew up in Canada and went to the University of Toronto, but I’ve now decided to call Dubai my second home. I’ve been spending much time here, and this region has a lot of opportunities and excitement, especially post-COVID. I’ve always believed in the potential of this region. I have many local Emirati friends, and we even have investors from here. So, it was natural for me to situate myself in Dubai.

I believe that people should expand beyond the city or country they grew up in. There’s so much potential, opportunity, and beauty outside our upbringing. It would be a shame not to explore that if you have the means to do so and see the possibilities that come with it. Dubai has been an amazing place for me to grow and contribute, and I’m very bullish on the future of this city.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation? We can also hyperlink to the website for more information.

Mushtaq: In my final thoughts, I’d first like to say great questions! It was short and sweet, and I had a great time chatting about what we’re building and bringing to the market.

Ultimately, what I always tell people—and I’ll share this here as well—is that when we understand the importance of how energy flows in our lives, we tend to elevate ourselves. My request to those listening is that aside from everything we’ve discussed about the product, I hope this conversation motivates someone to take action, chase their dreams, and build something meaningful.

Finally, pay attention to your energy levels. We often ignore this, but it’s crucial to living a more balanced and fulfilling life.

When we’re elevated, focusing on our energy, and at that level where we not only have high energy for ourselves but can contribute that energy to the people around us, it creates magic in our lives. So, if someone can take away something from this podcast, I will thank them for their time listening to us having a good conversation. But more than that, do an energy audit.

One lesson I always teach people is to become the CEO of their lives—their Chief Energy Officer. Focus on your energy. When you manage your energy, you unlock greatness in your life. I hope someone takes this to heart and implements it, and I’m sure they will see amazing results. Thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today. It’s been an absolute pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thank you! 

Mushtaq: Appreciate it, man. Thank you so much. Take care.

Jacobsen: You too! Have a good one.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Benjamin Karney: Key Points on Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/06

Professor Benjamin Karney is a Professor of Social Psychology at UCLA and the co-director of the UCLA Marriage and Close Relationships Lab. His research focuses on the impact of external stressors on intimate relationships, especially in early marriage. Karney has extensively studied low-income, Latinx, Black, and White newlywed couples and military marriages.

Karney discusses couples’ challenges in maintaining intimacy, noting that external factors and personality traits, such as conscientiousness and neuroticism, influence relationship success. He emphasizes the importance of being responsive to a partner’s individual needs. Karney also highlights the difficulty of maintaining perspective in relationships and advises giving partners the benefit of the doubt while recognizing that not all relationships are worth sustaining.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here with Professor Benjamin Karney or Ben Karney. What do you prefer?

Professor Benjamin Karney: Ben is shorter. Both are accurate.

Jacobsen: I’ll go with Ben because it’s shorter. I remember interviewing James Flynn before he passed. I asked him, “What do you prefer to be called?” He said, “What do you prefer to call me?” I said, “Jim.” So, Jim, it was.

Karney: Ben is fine. Ben is what my friends call me.

Jacobsen: Ben is great. So, what is your role at the university? Why did you choose this particular area of expertise and research? Then, we can dive into the main discussion.

Karney: So, those are two questions. The shorter answer is that I am a psychology professor and the chair of the social psychology area within the psychology department. I’m also the co-director of the UCLA Marriage and Close Relationships Lab. I’ve been studying intimate partnerships in couples for about 35 years. What got me into the field was caring a lot about intimate relationships and noticing that they seem difficult for even good, thoughtful people to maintain.

I was young when I got into it, and I remember thinking, “Gee, I hope I don’t get divorced.” Everyone in the world hopes that, and yet many people do. So, there’s a real mystery around intimacy, especially in marriage. People enter marriage thinking, “I want this to work,” and they give it their all. Yet, many people get divorced anyway, which is an undesired outcome.

And that’s mysterious. People don’t predict they’ll get divorced. Nobody gets married hoping or thinking they’ll get divorced, yet so many do. So, that means something unexpected happens in intimacy that people themselves don’t fully understand. That’s one of the reasons I wanted to study it.

And 35 years later, I’m still working on it. It’s an enduring question. That’s how I got into it.

Jacobsen: Your work is recognized. You have over 20,000 citations, a significant metric for the impact of your research in academia.

Karney: I hope that’s true. I don’t fool myself into thinking that my work will solve divorces or breakups. Still, I do hope it helps people feel more informed about relationships. If no one else has been helped, I know I have been. I am more informed. However, it didn’t save me. I’ve been married, but I was married once before and got divorced—as a marital researcher.

I knew the field. I knew all the literature. I knew all the things you’re supposed to do. I had already written a book on intimate relationships. I’d written the book on intimate relationships, but my relationships could have been better. My first marriage could have been better.

Jacobsen: And what are some of the lessons from your work? 

Karney: One of the big lessons, in particular, is that not everything about your intimate relationship is within your control. There are many forces external to the couple that are easy to overlook but play a very important role in a couple’s ability to maintain intimacy over time.

Jacobsen: I have two questions. First, I want to consider intrinsic and extrinsic factors. So, let’s start with an expert opinion: Are there some people for whom relationships are not suited in terms of their temperament over the arc of their lives?

Karney: Yes, undoubtedly. Much research shows that some people are better at intimacy than others. The individual’s stable qualities are associated with more success in intimate relationships.

The question you asked is, are there some people who don’t want relationships? And, undoubtedly, there are. Some people don’t want relationships for various reasons. Either their personal experiences with relationships have been negative, so they decide, “I don’t want it anymore.” Or their personal experiences with closeness and dependence on others have been so fraught and painful that they’ve learned to avoid other people.

There are plenty of people who don’t want relationships. Others want relationships but, for various reasons, aren’t well-equipped to handle what relationships require. People with a history of depressive episodes have a harder time in relationships. People struggling with substance abuse have harder times in relationships.

People who are prone to feeling negative emotions—those who are stably negative—are also known as having high negative affectivity or neuroticism. On average, people who score high on that trait tend to have worse relationships. People have different attachment styles, and those who are insecurely attached have a harder time in relationships.

Some qualities affect your ability to have a positive or negative relationship. Some people are great at relationships and generally do better in any relationship because they are easygoing, don’t tend to dwell on negative emotions, are generally not defensive, and are mentally healthy.

They may have had good experiences in the past, so they trust relationships overall. A long list of stable individual qualities contributes to more or less relationship success.

Jacobsen: Now, shifting to a more constructive and positive frame, which will be a useful part of this series: What are some of the bases for those traits intrinsic to the individual, not necessarily external forces?

Karney: If we focus on individual qualities that contribute to successful intimacy, we first need to define it. 

Jacobsen: What is intimacy? What is the challenge? What is the process by which an individual quality can either facilitate or inhibit intimacy? 

Karney: There have been many definitions of intimacy. Where I come from, as a social psychologist, intimacy has been defined as a process in which partners are appropriately responsive to each other’s disclosures. I credit this to a famous social psychologist named Harry Reis—R-E-I-S. He’s a genius, still alive, and a leader in the field.

Some decades ago, he developed the intimacy process model. He said intimacy isn’t about how much I share with you or how well you listen to me. No. Intimacy is a dyadic process where one partner discloses something—it could even be a nonverbal disclosure—and the other responds somehow. Intimacy is furthered when that response makes the first person, the discloser, feel understood, validated and cared for.

That process differs for each couple because the things that make me feel understood, validated, and cared for might differ from those that make me feel understood, validated, and cared for. When intimacy is working, each partner understands the other well enough to respond in a way that makes the other person feel understood, validated, and cared for. Let me give you an example.

I come home from work and say, “Boy, I had a rough day at work today.” Now, you have an opportunity to respond. You might say, “You had a rough day at work. Come here on the couch. Tell me all about it. I will wrap you in a blanket of love and care for you. I’ll give you a back rub. I’m here for you.”

Now, for some people, that would be the perfect response. It’s exactly what they want—to be soothed and blanketed with love. If I’m that person, your response makes me feel understood, validated and cared for. Intimacy is enriched. But there might be other people for whom that is the wrong response.

When I say I had a bad day at work, I might need to decompress alone, to be in my “cave,” needing some space. I suggest you handle things around the house so that I can have time to myself. In that case, if I’m that person and you respond with, “Let me blanket you with love,” you are making the problem worse. I’m already feeling overwhelmed, and now you’re overwhelming me. I do not feel understood, validated, or cared for.

The intimacy process model says it’s not behaviour that leads to intimacy. Intimacy sometimes looks different for every couple. It’s about being responsive to your partner’s needs and way of being. Being responsive to your partner is the key to intimacy—being aware of what your partner personally needs in the moment.

Jacobsen: So, if that’s intimacy, what qualities make someone good at that?

Karney: All right, let me dive into that.

So, there are lots of different ways to approach that. You can approach it from the lens of personality theory. Personality theorists say, “Hey, people have different traits.” You may have heard of the Big Five personality traits.

The idea is that there are five big personality traits, and some of them are more associated with successful relationships than others. For example, I am highly conscientious, a personality trait that captures doing what is appropriate. In that case, I will consider what would be appropriate. I’ll be attuned to your needs, to your ups and downs.

Being highly conscientious makes me better at being responsive to you when needed. Indeed, highly conscientious people tend to have better relationships. Now, imagine that I have a different personality trait—neuroticism. Neuroticism is a general tendency to feel negative emotional states.

Let’s say I come home after a bad day at work, and I’m high in neuroticism. It might be hard for anything you do to penetrate my general tendency to feel bad. You might be unable to make me feel understood, validated, or cared for. No one in the world might have that ability because my tendency to feel negative mood states is so strong. In this case, what might make another couple feel closer doesn’t make us feel closer because my personality doesn’t allow it.

Or, your personality might affect how you respond to me when I come home and say I’m stressed. Let’s say you’ve had great experiences with closeness and intimacy. You’re comfortable with closeness and intimacy—a disposition you carry. When I say I’ve had a bad day, your response might be that you need me, and that’s great. You love being needed. It feels good to be needed, so you lean in, figure out what I need, and give it to me.

But what if you’re a different person? What if you’ve had relationships with overbearing people or relationships where you were abused, taken advantage of, or exploited in the past? You carry that history with you, which might make you wary of people asking you for things. It might make you mistrust people with needs. So, when I come home and say, “Whoa, I’ve had a bad day,” you hear that I need something. You might think, “Oh no, don’t come to me with your needs.” Your personality or history might lead you to respond with, “Well, that’s your problem,” or “I’ve also had a bad day—what do you want me to do about it?” That response wouldn’t make me feel understood, validated, or cared for.

If we understand the process, we can imagine how the individual differences both partners bring to the situation can either facilitate or inhibit it.

Jacobsen: On balance, are there more functional or dysfunctional ways to have a relationship?

Karney: There’s an infinite number of functional ways and an infinite number of dysfunctional ways. But your question reminds me of a famous quote by Tolstoy—I believe it’s the first line of Anna Karenina. The line is, and I might be misquoting it, “All happy families are alike; all unhappy families are unhappy in their way.” This quote gets cited a lot in my field because, generally speaking, it’s wrong.

It’s the opposite—the truth is that unhappiness in a couple typically looks the same. You’ve probably heard of John Gottman and his “Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse.” If you’re in an unhappy relationship, you’re likely to experience withdrawal, anger, contempt, or rigidity. That’s exactly right. All unhappy couples are withdrawn, angry, contemptuous, or rigid, but you can be happy in many ways. There are many ways that couples figure out how to be happy.

Some couples say, “Hey, we will do separate things, and that’s okay. We’re going to live parallel lives.” Some couples are intertwined like two pieces of yarn, and that’s what they need to be happy. And that’s okay. There are many different ways to be happy in a relationship. But unhappy relationships all look very familiar and similar.

Jacobsen: Last question. What is a significant or the most significant factor for people to work on—something that isn’t part of their intrinsic personality structure, something they didn’t get from inheritance or early development—that can help increase the odds of staying together in a long-term relationship if that’s what they want?

Karney: I appreciate the question: A relationship is worth sustaining if it’s what you want. Not everyone wants that. And I’m not a therapist—I’m a scientist. I’m not really in the advice business. But if I had to offer advice based on my research, I’d say: You can’t control what happens to you, but you can try to attend to it.

It’s easy to focus on what our partners are doing now. Suppose our partner is letting us down, disappointing us, or frustrating us. In that case, it’s easy to get mad at them because the context that might explain their behaviour is usually invisible to us. Maybe our partner had a bad day. Maybe they had a bad experience 20 years ago that makes it hard to do what they’d love to do today.

Trying to keep that context in mind is a heavy lift. It takes work. But making the effort to give our partners the benefit of the doubt can be worthwhile—at least in decent relationships. In a terrible relationship, you shouldn’t give your partner the benefit of the doubt. If your partner is abusing you, you don’t need to do that—you should get mad.

But in a regular, decent relationship, it’s useful to make an effort to ask yourself, “Why is my partner disappointing me? Where is that coming from?” Suppose you can remember that your partner is a good person with a good heart who may have just had a bad day or experience. In that case, it’s often easier to return from anger, get over it, and move on with the connection.

Jacobsen: Ben, thank you for your time today on this quick blitz call.

Karney: It’s a blitz! If you need anything else, reach out.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thanks so much. Take care.

Karney: Bye-bye. See you, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Attorney Leah Wise: Texas, Accidents, Women’s Empowerment

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/05

Leah Wise is the founder and owner of Leah Wise Law Firm, PLLC, the first Latina-owned personal injury law firm in South Texas. Renowned for her success in securing millions of dollars in settlements for her clients, Leah has earned national recognition as one of the top lawyers in the field. In addition to her legal practice, she owns Leah Wise Enterprises, LLC, a real estate investment firm, and CrashGal Couture, LLC, a clothing brand. Leah is deeply committed to community service, co-founding “Latina Feature Friday” to spotlight Latina-owned businesses and leading mentorship programs for aspiring Latina lawyers and entrepreneurs. She also established the Leah Wise Latina Student Hardship Fund, donating $50,000 to support Latina law students at St. Mary’s University School of Law. Leah’s passion for women’s empowerment and gender equality is reflected in her professional and philanthropic efforts nationwide. GoBankingRates, USA Today’s Modern Woman Magazine, Retail Boss, InStyle, Bustle, and Best Life.

Wise discusses her pursuit of law to advocate for her community after being inspired by her work in the Texas State Legislature. She founded her practice in 2016, specializing in personal injury law. Wise emphasizes the importance of securing insurance and advocates for women entering male-dominated fields, highlighting the challenges and rewards of practicing law while balancing business ventures in fashion and real estate.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re talking with attorney Leah Wise. You graduated from high school in 2008 and are a Texas native. Please give us a quick background. What initially sparked your interest in pursuing law?

Leah Wise: I graduated from The University of Texas at Austin in 2012. At the time, I felt a bit lost. I was still determining where my life was headed and what I wanted to do. I needed more clear direction. So, I began working at the Texas State Legislature for a senator named Wendy Davis. During that time, I had the opportunity to observe various legislators on the Senate floor. I was deeply inspired by how these legislators advocated for their communities and passed meaningful legislation. I knew then that I wanted to be an advocate as well. I had no desire to run for office, but I wanted to advocate for my community.

The best way to do that was to attend law school and advocate for my clients. After working for a year in the state legislature, I started law school at St. Mary’s University School of Law. I graduated in 2016 and opened my practice the day after passing the bar exam.

Jacobsen: Excellent. I also saw a note about your work with crash cases.

Wise: Yes, that’s right. People probably don’t think about crashes and significant 18-wheeler accidents as something they want to dwell on, but that’s a significant part of my professional life.

Jacobsen: How do you approach car accidents, wrongful death cases, and similar matters?

Wise: It’s incredibly challenging. Almost 100% of my clients come to me during the most difficult time in their lives. They’ve been injured and unable to work, and when they can’t work, they can’t provide for their families. The accidents they’ve been involved in are often through no fault of their own, whether it’s a motor vehicle accident, an 18-wheeler accident, or a work-related incident.

As an attorney, it’s my job to secure justice for them and act as a counsellor. They are going through extraordinarily difficult times, often the most challenging periods. It can be emotionally taxing for me, but it’s also incredibly rewarding because I am passionate about helping these individuals. In the end, my work is almost always rewarding. My clients are good, hardworking, honest people, and it brings me great joy to help them through these difficult times. Knowing that I helped them return to a great life is incredibly fulfilling.

Jacobsen: When you’re actively working on a case, things can go well or poorly. How can things go wrong, and how can they go right?

Wise: I’ve had several cases go poorly, but the reasons often have nothing to do with me as their lawyer. One of the biggest issues is the high number of uninsured drivers in Texas. Sometimes, my clients are injured in accidents caused by uninsured drivers. When this happens, I ask my clients if they have their insurance, as we might be able to recover through their policy. Unfortunately, sometimes they don’t have insurance either. In such cases, our hands are tied because the likelihood that the person responsible for the accident has any significant financial resources is very low. We conduct our research and due diligence, but most of the time, if they don’t have insurance, it’s because they are living paycheck to paycheck. We could pursue a claim against the defendant. Still, it’s unlikely to result in significant compensation that would make my client whole again.

Nine times out of ten, the answer is no. When I say cases can go bad, it’s usually because there’s no insurance involved, and there’s no money to be secured to pay for my client’s medical bills or lost wages. Often, the clients themselves are also living paycheck to paycheck. They have a small savings. Now they’re out of a car, they’re injured, and there’s nobody to recover from. These incidents are heartbreaking, so I advocate on my social media channels: Get insurance! Get insurance! It’s so, so important to have uninsured motorist coverage. When an uninsured motorist hits you, your uninsured motorist coverage will kick in to cover your injuries and medical bills.

And suppose you have full coverage on your vehicle, which is called collision coverage. In that case, your vehicle will be covered, too. I always advise opting for as much insurance as you can. It hurts to pay that premium every month, but with the number of uninsured drivers in Texas, it’s worth it. The difference would be staggering if people compared the insurance cost to not having it and getting injured.

Jacobsen: Could you elaborate on that? I understand you’ve amassed some national recognition for settlements, some reaching up to nine figures.

Wise: Yes. I’ve seen cases where clients are catastrophically injured and sent to the hospital. I’ve had clients with seven-figure hospital bills and millions of medical expenses. When you don’t have health insurance, you don’t have car insurance, and the person who caused the accident doesn’t have insurance either, it’s a bad situation.

While paying for insurance might seem like a lot—$300 a month—it’s, in my opinion, so worth it. Hospitals can sometimes write off bills, but if they file a lien, there’s a legal requirement to pay it. And if there’s a third-party payout, those proceeds often go toward settling that lien. It’s a difficult situation, and I always say it’s better to be safe than sorry.

Jacobsen: What are the most frequent cases you see, and are there any rare cases that people wouldn’t necessarily expect?

Wise: Car accidents happen every single day, unfortunately. That’s by far the most common type of case we get. They’re happening right now—people are in accidents all the time. The likelihood of a car accident is high, which is scary. It’s like life insurance—people don’t want to think about it because they believe they will live forever. But the reality is that the chances of being in a car accident at some point in your life are very high.

Thankfully, cases involving defective products are less common. Many regulations now require companies to ensure that products are made safely, so defective product injuries are rarer. Work accidents are also less common because regulations ensure that employees are appropriately trained for their roles.

Car accidents, however, happen every single day, and we receive calls regularly.

Jacobsen: You’ve done some support initiatives. I understand you’ve started a fund or scholarship specifically for people from Latin backgrounds facing hardship. Please tell us a little about those.

Wise: Sure. I recently pledged $50,000 to the Latina Hardship Fund at St. Mary’s University School of Law. Each semester, $5,000 is awarded to a student in need who is facing hardship. These students often reach out to me to express their gratitude. Some of their stories are incredibly heartbreaking—women in domestic violence situations, women fleeing violent partners, or women struggling to make ends meet while in law school and raising children.

It’s deeply rewarding to be able to give back. While in law school, I was fortunate not to face such dire circumstances, but it still wasn’t easy. I struggled to make ends meet myself. I never went without food, so I don’t want to overdramatize my experience, but being able to help these women who are in even more difficult situations and still striving to better themselves and their families through education is incredibly fulfilling.

I’ve also awarded an LSAT prep course to the Minority Women Pursuing Law student organization at UT in Austin two years in a row. Many aspiring law students need to learn how they’ll pay for an LSAT prep course, so I’m happy to support them with that. We plan to do it every year in the future.

Additionally, we’ve raised funds for feminine hygiene products in underserved and low-socioeconomic areas. Many school-aged girls need access to these products, which forces them to miss school or work. This is a significant global issue, and we’re working to raise awareness about it. Philanthropy is a big part of what my law firm does.

Jacobsen: You also have a fashion line, CrashGal Couture. So, you have a diversified portfolio of businesses. What led you to expand into fashion? 

Wise: Yes! CrashGal Couture is something I’m very passionate about. It’s a way to express my aesthetic taste. It’s been an exciting journey to branch out into different ventures beyond law, and fashion is a natural extension of my creative interests. I love fashion. I feel that fashion is my creative outlet—my favourite way to express myself. I enjoy all different forms of fashion: women’s and men’s. It’s my passion project, and I have much fun with it. It’s my creative outlet.

I don’t currently sell men’s fashion. My clothing line is 100% women’s fashion. In the future, we’ll expand into plus-size and men’s fashion. We’re only two years old, so we’re still growing. It’s been a fun, rewarding, and creative outlet.

Jacobsen: You also have a real estate company. I need to become more familiar with this. Please provide me with some details.

Wise: Yes, I’ve started investing more in real estate. Recently, I bought an old strip club here in my city. We’re renovating it into a co-working space, which will also house my law office. I also own a few other investment properties. Learning the ins and outs of real estate, investment, and renovation has been a roller coaster. It’s a completely different world from law, but I enjoy it.

When the tenants left the strip club, they left everything behind—the poles, outfits, shoes, makeup, glitter—everything you’d expect in a strip club. We even made some fun content about what we found inside. Some former employees and dancers have stopped by, and I’ve become friends with them. It’s been a cool experience. For example, the former house mom, who takes care of the dancers much like a house mom in a sorority, came by and shared some incredible stories. We even did a tell-all interview with her, which was much fun. We also talked about myths about sex workers. It was all very empowering.

We’re aiming to finish renovations by January. The co-working space will open, and my law office will be on the top floor. I’ve got a few other real estate projects going on as well.

Jacobsen: So, fashion, real estate, law—you’re still managing to be recognized as one of the best attorneys in your area multiple times. How does that recognition feel, and how do you mentally project your success across these different ventures?

Wise: It feels great. What makes it even more special is that personal injury law, the area I specialize in is predominantly male. Most personal injury attorneys are men, so it was a tough industry to break into as a woman. I’m proud of that.

Jacobsen: For other women looking to follow in your footsteps, the key is mastering one trade, like law, and then moving on to other genuine interests, like fashion or real estate. How do you balance and structure all these different business ventures?

Wise: Exactly. It’s about mastering one area first—like law in my case—and then branching out into other areas of genuine interest. Fashion is a passion, and real estate is another exciting venture that ties back into my law practice in some cases, such as the strip club renovation. Balancing these requires careful planning, but it’s all incredibly rewarding.

It feels really special to have received that award and recognition. Regarding juggling all these different ventures, I followed what you said. I spent about five years mastering the law firm and lawyer work—that’s all I did before branching out into other things. Getting my law practice off the ground was the most time-consuming part of my career, especially since I didn’t have any savings when I started.

I wouldn’t say delving into these other areas is easy—because it’s not—but every day brings new challenges. I’m familiar with starting a business, managing taxes, payroll, marketing, bookkeeping, and accounting—all things I learned while growing my law practice from 2016 to 2020. I’ve been able to take that knowledge and apply it to these other ventures, which makes them a little less difficult—though still challenging. The skills I’ve learned as a lawyer have transferred into these other industries.

I also have a great team, which is super important. I can delegate, and I know the things that need to get done will get done. Delegation is key when managing multiple projects.

Jacobsen: Delegation and business practice—along with mastering one thing at a time before branching out—what would be your tips for women starting in law, particularly those heading into personal injury or other challenging fields? I know one woman who worked at a horse farm here in Canada—she was a divorce lawyer as far as I know, which sounds like a nightmare. She often went to the horse farm to ride, and I understand why!

Wise: If she were a divorce lawyer, she would have a much harder job than me! Kudos to her. When I first started my practice, I took on a few divorce cases, and they were incredibly difficult and heartbreaking—especially when children were involved.

For women starting in law, it depends on what you want to do with your legal career. If you’re going to work at a law firm with an 8-to-5 schedule, that’s great—it’s safe and provides much security, knowing you’ll get a paycheck every week or two. There’s much comfort in that.

However, if you plan to start your practice, get comfortable with making mistakes. Even as a new lawyer in a big law firm, you will make mistakes—that’s just the reality of any professional career. But being an entrepreneur and your boss is unique because things can go well in one moment, and then the next, everything can change. Everything is constantly evolving. Even now, one minute, things are great, and then, suddenly, it feels like it’s all going downhill.

We might secure a multimillion-dollar settlement, and then the next hour, there’s a client yelling on the phone because their car isn’t fixed, and somehow, it’s our fault because the body shop isn’t moving fast enough. So, it’s a constant roller coaster of ups and downs. A big part of being a business owner and a lawyer is always putting out fires. People don’t come to you when things are going well—they come to you because they’re in a business dispute, were arrested for a crime, injured in an accident, going through a divorce, or fighting for custody. These are all difficult situations where people need legal representation.

They’re being sued, or there’s a broken contract. As a lawyer, you’re constantly dealing with emergencies. Your clients come to you in difficult circumstances, and you need to counsel them emotionally while practicing law to secure justice. You have to be prepared for the emotional roller coaster of the legal field. If you’re worried, you’ll always feel like a “baby lawyer,” that’s fine. Even 10- or 20-year lawyers are still learning something new every day. So don’t feel like you have to master everything—none of us do. We’re all learning constantly.

Jacobsen: What are some common mistakes that clients come to you with, especially in terms of unrealistic expectations? Let’s set aside the question of insurance levels for the moment. What misunderstandings do people have about the role of a lawyer—professionally, ethically, and practically?

Wise: That’s a good question. Sometimes, there are funny misconceptions. For example, some clients think I can arrest people or act as a prosecutor to imprison them. I must explain, “Wait a second, I’m a private attorney. I don’t control the criminal justice system.” For example, if a drunk driver hits someone, I’m handling the civil case. The district attorney’s office deals with the criminal side of things, but clients sometimes think I can handle both. They’ll say, “Let’s make sure he gets put behind bars,” and I’m like, “I get it, but that’s the DA’s job, not mine.”

Another common misconception is that clients think if they’ve been in an accident, they’ll automatically get a million dollars, no matter what. However, in Texas, for example, the minimum insurance policy is $30,000 if one person is involved and $60,000 if more than one person is involved. So, it’s important to manage those expectations.

That’s the legally required minimum amount of insurance. Most people will buy the minimum because it’s the cheapest. If you’re spending money on insurance, you’ll likely choose the most affordable option. So, we often deal with policies that max out at $30,000 or $60,000, and clients need help understanding that.

They’ll say, “But my arm’s broken,” or “I have a traumatic brain injury. I need a million dollars!” I understand. However, the reality is that this person’s insurance policy has a maximum recovery of $30,000.

Jacobsen: Right, but people see these million-dollar settlements on TV.

Wise: They’ll see advertisements of people getting a million dollars from a settlement. Still, it’s usually an 18-wheeler with a higher insurance policy in those cases. This case might have a policy that only covers the minimum amount required by Texas, so that’s the most we can recover. It’s much-educating clients from the start. This isn’t a million-dollar case.

If it were a commercial vehicle or a catastrophic construction accident involving a billion-dollar company, they would carry much larger insurance policies. Those are the cases you see advertised on TV and billboards. But many clients need to realize that. They think every car accident could result in a million-dollar settlement. There’s much misinformation out there, and I don’t blame people—it’s not their job to know the law. My role often involves educating them about what’s realistic.

I also explain, “I’m not a prosecutor—I can’t put people behind bars,” and “Not every case is a million-dollar case.”

Jacobsen: How can women entering law, particularly in fields facing a male-dominated environment, navigate potential culture shock? It depends on the firm, community, and individual background. Men entering nursing, for example, might experience culture shock. Similarly, women entering male-dominated fields of law can feel out of place.

For women entering these spaces, particularly in areas where 70-90% of the field may be male-dominated

Wise: It’s important to understand that they might bring a different perspective. But that difference can also be their strength. It’s about finding ways to integrate and contribute while standing firm in who you are. It may take some adjustment, but resilience and persistence are key to making an impact in these environments.

Jacobsen: What are some of your tips for women entering male-dominated spaces? What will likely be different for them—positive and negative—and what will be the same, so they know what to expect?

Wise: Many women struggle with impostor syndrome when entering a space dominated by men. I get it—I’ve been there. You’re a 26-year-old female lawyer surrounded by 50- or 60-year-old men, and you question your ability. But it’s okay, it’s normal. Don’t think there’s something wrong with you for feeling that way—we all feel that way.

I remember once a bailiff tried to kick me out of the courtroom because he thought I didn’t belong there. He said, “Ma’am, you must step out because this area is for lawyers only.” This was in 2017, a while ago. You’d think things would have changed by now, but I didn’t get upset. I calmly said, “I am a lawyer, so I’m staying here.” He felt embarrassed and apologized. It was a valuable lesson for him.

There will be moments when you’re mistaken for the paralegal or support staff, even if you’re a partner. My favourite response is to be better—more prepared and the best person in the room. It might take a little more preparation, but that makes those moments so reaffirming. Once you’ve done it, it gets easier to keep doing it.

My advice is to get out of your head. Remember, you have the same bar card as all the men in the room. You all took the same bar exam, and you did the work to get here. You deserve to be there. It’s about holding your ground in that space so more women can join it. I feel proud of that.

Jacobsen: Have I covered everything? What do you think?

Wise: Yes, we’ve covered everything.

Jacobsen: Leah, thank you for the opportunity and your time today. I appreciate it.

Wise: Thank you for having me!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Pat Love: Marriage and Family Dynamics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/04

Dr. Pat Love is a renowned relationship expert, therapist, and educator with over 40 years of experience in marriage and family therapy. A Distinguished Professor at Texas A&M, she co-founded the Austin Family Institute and authored seven books. Dr. Love’s approach is grounded in science, making complex research accessible and practical. Featured on Oprah, The Today Show, and CNN, she specializes in helping couples reconnect and build resilient relationships through education, skills, and simple, transformative shifts.

Love talks about her work as a marriage and family therapist, the importance of understanding, vulnerability, and relational thinking in therapy. She highlights transforming criticism into requests, addressing underlying emotional needs, and integrating research into therapy. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I’m going to start with a personal question. What do you find most fulfilling about being a marriage and family therapist? Is it helping couples become happy with each other again?

Dr. Pat Love: Yes, that’s a big part of it. Additionally, a secondary fulfillment comes from a common scenario in couples therapy: you often have a ‘dragger’ and a ‘dragged.’ One person brings the other into therapy. I love that dynamic.

When I see the ‘dragged’ person, initially resistant, I realize, “Wait, this could actually help me?” or “I didn’t expect it to be like this,” that transformation is magical. They go from being reluctant, barely saying a word, to realizing I’m here to support the relationship. I start every session the same way: “How can I help? What would be different if you left here feeling that this was worth your time, money, and effort?” I aim to get a positive, measurable, and specific outcome, the couple’s goal. Granted, that goal may change over time, so I ask the same question in every session because the reason for coming to therapy can evolve.

I strive to give each person what they came for. It’s especially rewarding when the person who didn’t want to come or thought, for example, that because I’m a woman, they would be ganged up on realizes that it’s not like that at all. I’m very aware of that concern, as are most couples counsellors. When they realize that they get to turn, speak, be understood and validated, and see tangible progress, that’s when the real change happens.

Another thing that helps is my research-oriented approach. I read the research and integrated findings into the therapy, making it practical and strategic. I also don’t follow a strict hourly session model. Instead, I do what I call ‘intensives.’ When a couple comes in, we use the time we need. I tell them to block off at least three hours, and if we don’t need it, we won’t use it. If we reach a good stopping point, we’ll stop. You’d be surprised how many couples appreciate this approach, especially when half of them ask, “How much will this cost, and how long will it take?” Resolving things quicker is appealing, particularly to the reluctant participant.

So, in summary, I find fulfillment in two things: helping couples achieve what they came to achieve—whether that’s to be happier together or, in some cases, to split amicably—and seeing the transformation in the person who was initially resistant, who feared they would be vulnerable or ganged up on, realizing that therapy isn’t what they expected. Those are the two most fulfilling aspects for me.

And also, third, to me, relationships are a puzzle. It’s a mystery. It’s no coincidence that I love watching and reading mysteries because I always want to figure things out. Here’s what they want—what’s preventing them from getting it?

And how can I bring them into congruence with what they want? So, it’s a big puzzle for me, and I love trying to help them. Once, they gave me permission by saying, “Here’s why we came.” If they say, “We came here because we want to be happier together.” In one way or another, I tell them, “I’m on the side of the relationship until you fire me.” So, whatever I do, I’m working with your contract. I like working that way because it gets them to buy in. When they say, “We want to be happy together,” they start behaviours in my office.

And I say, “Now, how does this fit your goal of being happier together?” So I use their contract, willingness, and presenting issue as leverage, but I do it overtly. I don’t know if I went off-topic, but that’s what I love about it. It’s a big puzzle, and I help people be happier and appreciate each other. Also, the reluctant person sees counselling as a friendly process.

Jacobsen: You’ve done this for longer than I’ve been alive.

Love: Yes.

Jacobsen: So, that’s a large reservoir of experience, and the most important part of that experience and knowledge is its application—knowing what to look for. It’s a much more efficient process. It is probably a global process, too, where you can see the big picture more immediately. So, when you’re looking at the emotional state of that partnership and the attachment styles of the people coming in, what do you notice over time have been things that are more amenable to therapeutic intervention, with their consent and those that are a little more intractable in some ways?

Love: Some people have emotionally left and come to either prove a point, save face, or say, “Do your best to try to revive this dead body, but I’ve already left.” 

Jacobsen: So, the opposite of all that is indifference.

Love: Yes. And I get asked to figure out, “Well, what makes relationships work?” So, I did a lot of research and read all the literature I could find, and I enjoyed that part. I did a thorough job of it. If you look at Maslow’s hierarchy, there is no difference in relationships. Safety and security are foundational—it’s the basis.

Jacobsen: So, any form of abuse, for either partner or both, immediately puts them, or at least one of them, at the lowest rung.

Love: Yes, but you would think that would mean, “This is over,” but it doesn’t. Because even though the abuse and harm are present, it doesn’t always mean the relationship ends. When they’re hurt, some people try harder, hang on, and are more afraid of leaving than staying. Also, your chances of dying once you leave go up—that’s a valid statistic—exponentially. But yes, safety is crucial. You developed a coping strategy if you didn’t grow up with safety. You could look at my childhood and say, “Well, that wasn’t safe.”

You had the police called. There was abuse, violence, alcoholism, and food insecurity. All those things were present. Well, as a child, I developed a coping strategy. Part of it was, “Oh, it’s not that bad.” Denial wasn’t just a river—it was real. So, you carry that into adulthood. This is probably a tangent we don’t need to go off on, but let me put it in a soundbite: the coping mechanism that saved your life psychically as a child can become highly inconvenient in adulthood, but it still lives in you. So, you could look at me and say, “Why are you with an abusive person?”

But my coping strategy is so strong that I would say, “Well, you don’t know them like I do. They’re not always like that. Look at my good life, and I don’t want to break up my family.” And all those things are true. So yes, safety is a big issue. Going back to your original question, what makes counselling work or not work?

Are there people with whom it just doesn’t work? If somebody’s already emotionally left the relationship or is specifically infatuated with someone else, it’s like pushing a chain. But that becomes evident quickly because it doesn’t take long to catch on if you’ve been in this field a long time. Now, does that mean I won’t work with them?

No, not at all. A colleague of mine, Bill Doherty—you might know Bill—he wrote a whole book on discernment therapy. It’s all about how to work with a couple where one person is having an affair or is ambivalent while the other is committed. There’s a whole book about that. So, it doesn’t mean I wouldn’t work with that person, but it becomes evident soon enough. And that’s important information for the partner who thinks they’re married or committed, only to realize that the other person isn’t cooperating with the counselling. And this counselling isn’t cheap, by the way.

So, that’s a long answer to your question. But if they’ve already emotionally checked out, that’s the short answer. 

Jacobsen: Let’s say we have a couple who need a tune-up. Best-case scenario—how do you work with those softballs when they come into your office?

Love: They usually won’t come to me because it would cost too much. But if they have a lot of money, they might. So, I work with everybody the same way. I start by asking, “How can I help?” You be that person. I’m going to say, “Scott…”

You’re two people. How can I help? If you left here and said, “Wow, that was worth it,” what would be different for y’all?

Jacobsen: I’ll promise this: I was given the name Chad by Dr. Elinor Greenberg to get the point across about Gestalt therapy for narcissism. So, I’ll be Chad and also Charice. So, yes.

Love: So, Chad?

Jacobsen (as Chad): I’m a little miffed because my wife used to bake cookies every time I came home. Everything else in our relationship is wonderful and loving. Still, there are no more cookies, and I think I’ve slighted her. In turn, I feel slighted. There are no more cookies at the end of the day, and I love my peanut butter chocolate chip cookies.

Jacobsen (as Charice): He stopped kissing me before he left for work in the morning so I could send a message by not baking cookies to show him how I feel.

Love: Yes. Is it that simple, Chad? If y’all left here and said, “Wow, that worked. It was worth the time, money, and effort,” what would be different in the next 24, 36, or 48 hours?

Jacobsen (as Chad): I could consider my wife’s concern that I’m not expressing loving sentiments in her love language.

Love: What would success look like for you personally, Chad?

Jacobsen (as Chad): Cookies.

Love: Is it that simple? What do cookies say to you? What do they mean to you?

Jacobsen (as Chad): I feel like I’m being cared for.

Love: So, here’s what I would do now. I would look at Charice and say, “Now, did you know that cookies were that important to him? Did you know that?”

Jacobsen (as Charice): I had no idea.

Love: Then I would get Chad to look at her. First of all, nobody would ever come to me with these specific issues.

Jacobsen: No, of course not, but this is a best-case scenario.

Love: But the concept is there. I would try to understand what the cookies mean to you, Chad, and get Charice to realize what that means to you. I’ll have you talking to each other about that immediately. I’d have her repeat to you what she’s understood to prove that she gets where you’re coming from. Though to be honest, this would probably be a different issue—it’s probably going to be about sex.

It could be spending money. It could be keeping the house clean. It could be paying attention to your family. But the cookies represent the presenting problem, so to speak. If people say, “I want to be happier, and this is a tune-up,” I try to get to the underlying meaning. They’re saying they want to feel more in love, more loved, and more connected.

People tend to connect around their vulnerability, so I suggest getting beneath the cookies to see what they mean to you. Then, I’d get her to understand how that simple act—whether a package of Nestlé’s or something homemade—makes such a difference. I bake cookies for everyone, and I put extra nuts in them. Everyone thinks I’m an amazing cookie maker, but it only takes about 20 minutes.

So, how long does it take to make those cookies? But the cookies symbolize how I work to get people to a place of vulnerability and understanding. We also touched on security earlier, and relational thinking is another aspect of what makes relationships work.

Do you think as a single person, or as someone married or committed? Relational thinking is different from single-mindedness. You don’t make unilateral decisions that affect your partner. When you decide, consider the impact on your partner or the relationship. That’s relational thinking, and it’s a predictor of happiness and longevity. A couple seeking a tune-up could benefit from being more relational in their thinking. For example, how long does it take to make cookies, and what else am I doing with my time? Why wouldn’t I do that if making these cookies touches his heart and symbolizes so many other things?

So, it’s about getting beneath the surface to the meaning of what each act represents. And does that align with your goal, which is to tune up the relationship? Does that help?

Jacobsen: Yes, it does. So, you’re looking at the surface-level action and the meaning. The meaning and, as you described, the motivations behind it—both good and bad.

Love: Yes. So, what would that look like? Because it’s almost like that infinity symbol—what do you think, Chad? Are we talking cookies every day? And you’ll probably say no, once a week, because who wants cookies every day? You’d get tired of them. But what would once a week mean to you, Chad?

God, I’d feel loved. I’d feel generous. I’d feel more sexual. I’d feel more connected.”

Love: And then Charice starts to realize, “Wow, all of that is connected to this.” So, it’s not a secret how I work. I want couples to take every single skill I know home with them. I’d teach them how to transform criticism—like, “You never make me cookies”—into a request.

For example, “I’d love it if you made cookies. Here’s what it does for me. This is how it touches my heart, and this is how it moves the ball forward for us to boost our relationship.” That aligns with why they came to therapy. It’s a simple process. 

Jacobsen: What key changes can individuals make in their relationships to be more flexible, spontaneous, or authentic?

Love: It all depends on the contract. It all depends on the criticism. When someone criticizes, I ask, “What would you prefer instead? And what would that look like?” Then, I ask for examples. “What’s one example of that? What’s a second example? What’s a third?” When you get to three examples, the partner has a choice: they can do one of those things or offer an alternative.

If you want to make a change, adding positives is easier than eliminating negatives—period. The end. People come into therapy, and in the beginning, you often hear a lot of complaints. And if no one ever complains, and the person can’t even get a word in at home, I’ll give them space to express themselves in this safe context. But if they start going back and forth with the same arguments, I’ll ask, “Have y’all had this conversation before?”

If they say, “Oh, yes, we’ve had it,” I’ll tell them there’s no point in paying me to have the same conversation again. I’ll ask, “What do you want instead? What would that look like?”

And they might say, “I want her, him, or them to understand.” And I’ll say, “Great! I can help you do that.” Then, I get them to talk, and I have the partner reflect it back, reflect it back, and reflect it back until they can say, “Let me see if I’m following you. Let me see if I’ve got that. Let me see if I’m understanding you.” I tell them upfront that understanding is not the same as agreeing.

Most of us think that if you and I are in a relationship, I don’t have the right to ask you to always agree with me. I’m not saying that doesn’t exist in some relationships, but generally speaking, I have the right to expect you to be interested and try to understand me. Do you see the difference?

Jacobsen: Yes, that makes sense.

Love: A lot of it is about seeing the world from another point of view.

Jacobsen: Yes.

Love: A lot of people want to be understood. We like people who understand us, but we love people who see the best in us. Oftentimes, to see the best in you, I have to understand you well, take the time and curiosity to get to know you, and acknowledge how we might be different. Because the human brain is so subjective—we think about ourselves all the time and view things through our own experience. So, it takes a lot of curiosity, compassion, and generosity to step into someone else’s world and say, “Wow, that’s a different brain. I hadn’t thought of it that way.”

My buddy, Steven Stosny—if you haven’t interviewed him yet, you should. He’s one of my dearest friends. We wrote a book together. He wrote the male part, and I wrote the female part. Honestly, it was like talking to an alien half the time. I would ask, “Steven, do men really think that?” But I learned so much—he’s brilliant and amazing. I love him.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much, Dr. Love, for your time today. 

Love: Thanks, Scott. We appreciate you. Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Ritch C. Williams: Mostly Straight Adults

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/03

Professor Ritch C. Savin-Williams, an emeritus professor of developmental and clinical psychology at Cornell University, specializes in sexual and gender development among adolescents and young adults. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Chicago and has written ten books, including Mostly Straight: Sexual Fluidity Among Men and Bi: Bisexual, Pansexual, Fluid, and Nonbinary Youth.

His research focuses on the sexual continuum, resiliency, and mental health of sexual-minority youth, challenging traditional identity development models. Also a licensed clinical psychologist, Savin-Williams has consulted for major media outlets and served as an expert witness on LGBTQ+ issues. Savin-Williams discusses his research on sexual minorities, noting a discrepancy between public health literature’s negative portrayal and the fulfilled lives many LGBTQ+ individuals lead.

Savin-Williams notes that his transition into clinical psychology gave him deeper insights into the lived experiences and challenges in contrast to the overemphasis on pathology. He highlights the fluidity of sexual identity, especially among younger generations, and previews his upcoming book on the mental health of non-heterosexual youth.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Ritch C. Savin-Williams. We will discuss your expertise, focusing more on orientation and identity than technology. I plan to do this as part of a larger series of interviews on various aspects of sexology. You transitioned into clinical psychology training in your forties, correct? What sparked your interest in making that switch and pursuing retraining?

Professor Ritch Savin-Williams: Most of my work has been in basic science research on sexual minorities. As I read the literature — initially limited but eventually more comprehensive — I noticed that what I was experiencing with real people in real time, whether they were gay, lesbian, bisexual, pansexual, or otherwise, often differed significantly from what I was reading, particularly in public health and clinical psychology journals. Initial research tended to emphasize problems like suicidality and homelessness. Still, many people I worked with lived happy, fulfilled lives and felt a sense of strength and community.

I realized certain individuals were in trouble, but I wanted to get closer to their lived experiences rather than just sending out surveys or questionnaires where people remained anonymous. For me, that has been more fulfilling. I had always wondered what it would be like to be a clinical psychologist. I had chosen the research path instead of the clinical one, and I still believe that was the right decision. However, I wanted to add a clinical component to my research and talk to real people face-to-face. I decided to combine my research background with the clinical skills I had developed during my clinical training. I began seeing clients and conducting in-depth interviews in my research universe. This was incredibly rewarding, and I hope for the clients as well. It provided me with insights into people’s real lives, far removed from the generalizations in the public health and clinical literatures.

Jacobsen: What were some of your early findings when dealing with individuals one-on-one and observing them living fulfilled lives that didn’t match the health literature? How did this challenge your views on public health research at the time? 

Savin-Williams: In the mid-1980s, I attended a conference in Minneapolis. I wasn’t presenting because I hadn’t published anything but went as an observer. There were about a dozen presenters, and every single one of them talked about how difficult life was for sexual minority youth. I found myself comparing their presentations to my own experiences as a faculty advisor for the gay student group at Cornell. The students I worked with were some of the most creative, artistic, and vibrant people I’d ever met. I liked them a great deal. However, I couldn’t reconcile the bleak picture painted by the public health professionals with the lives of these students. I couldn’t deny the validity of what the social workers, clinicians, and public health experts were presenting — they had an audience — but I felt that the audience was biased toward seeing sexual minorities as fundamentally troubled.

I supported helping LGBTQ+ people in need, but I felt the public health narrative was going too far in portraying this as the universal experience of all gay people. Instead of saying, “This is what happens to some gay people,” they were expanding it to, “This is what it means to be gay.”

As a result, they pushed for federal funding to investigate and provide services. While I supported this intention, I disagreed with the framing that seemed to pathologize the entire community. But when I tried to counter it by providing a larger context, I was pretty much shut down.

Indeed, maybe it was a decade later, when I tried to present this perspective, I remember being booed by other researchers who were mostly public health professionals. I understood, and I did say, “Not all gay people are healthy.” It would not be very smart to claim that, and it would go against everything I had read and experienced. However, their desire not to see gay people as potentially healthy or as major contributors to society was strong.

I didn’t feel the need to name gay adults in history who had made spectacular contributions to the world, though I felt like doing it. It seemed unseemly if you will. Besides, my focus was on youth. They might have said, “Yes, adults are different,” but that was not my focus.

Jacobsen: So, what decade was that period when you were shut down? A decade later, when were you booed? Let’s have a timeline in mind. I’m aware of the social commentary from the American Civil Rights era — the pain of being a gay man coming out in the 1940s and 1950s.

Savin-Williams: This was probably in the mid-1990s. Let me back up a bit. I attended a conference sponsored by the American Psychological Association, and they asked me to write an article summarizing the state of gay youth in America. Small task, right? I summarized every study I could find on gay youth. There weren’t many, but certainly several dozen. All of them showed horrific outcomes for being a gay youth in America. I summarized that literature, but I added a paragraph — which no one has seemed to read, I’m convinced — that essentially said, “We need to remember that these studies are not based on a representative sample of gay youth. Rather, by definition, they focus on youth in trouble. That’s why we can study them.”

That study I wrote was published in a major psychological journal and became my highest-cited article for 20 or 30 years. I don’t want to deny the whole thing, but it’s out there; it’s public. What frustrated me was that no one wanted to read that paragraph, the one that would cause them to question everything I was summarizing. So that’s part of what was going on. That context was out there when I presented at a conference and was booed. Then, the person who was supposed to respond to my presentation spent his entire time attacking me, accusing me of denying that gay youth needed help and trying to end all grants for assisting them. I decided not to fight. I’m not much of a fighter. I spoke with that individual 2 or 3 years later, and he admitted, “To be honest, I’ve never encountered a suicidal gay adolescent, but it seemed appropriate to discuss it.” I thanked him for his honesty.

However, that reinforced for me the fact that there were many motivations behind this research. Some were driven by a genuine desire to help. Still, others were about grabbing the money — because our government, thank goodness, was providing funding to help gay youth in trouble, those with HIV, and those who were homeless or suicidal. However, there was no funding to support healthy gay youth.

If you need money to sustain yourself and your research, you’re not going to say, “Let’s talk about how creative and well-adjusted gay youth are.” That perspective is seen as trite and banal, even though it’s not culturally framed that way.

Jacobsen: So, the medicine example is that prevention is the best cure, correct? So, support for mental health-inducing activities, such as social acceptance and praising achievement, is a much better preventative than emergency intervention, right? The equivalent, by analogy, would be that when these kids are homeless, addicted to substances, or HIV positive, it’s like someone arriving at the ER with a severe affliction.

Savin-Williams: Right. It’s important to have the ER — absolutely. It’s not too late, but it is late in the day for that kind of help.

Jacobsen: That’s a good point because it’s not framed that way often.

Savin-Williams: Right. The net effect could have been better science. This is not just the clinical side because I know that, as clinicians, people want to discuss their struggles. Still, they also want to talk about their strengths — the good components of themselves. I encourage that. Let’s look critically at someone’s life, not just focus on what’s going wrong. I understand that as a clinician, but what bothered me was the science — because I’m a scientist.

I’m at a university, where supposedly we do solid research, but most writers in this area weren’t. They were at universities more focused on seeking funding and support. I’m not saying Cornell didn’t want me to get research grants — of course, they did — but I couldn’t. I made attempts. But who do you go to for funding? The department of goodwill and good things? I don’t know. That’s when I decided to conduct my research. That’s what I do. That’s what I get paid for. It’s who I am at heart.

I’m also a clinician. I care about people, but I also care about an accurate portrayal of people. I’ve talked to youth who say things like, “I don’t want to be gay because look at what happens to you if you’re gay.” I know it’s hard to believe that kids think or say that, but they do. They don’t read the research, but they see the articles or media portraying a horrific picture of what it means to be gay. Do you think they want to come out as gay under those circumstances? 

Jacobsen: This brings me to another point. You had qualifications in religious studies at the graduate level before transitioning into psychology. So, in this context, during the eighties, nineties, and 2000s, you were facing pushback for your research or observations about the reality of LGBT youth or adults living fulfilled lives.

The cultural context you were navigating was largely religious, with enough of a milieu for individuals to preach in the way Billy Graham preached or the World War II healing revival movement preached, along with Charismatics, Baptists, and others. Yet, those numbers are rapidly declining — the Baptist movement particularly and mainline Protestant denominations.

We now see a re-entrenchment into a fantasy of traditional masculinity in some of these hardline evangelical and Catholic movements.

So that seems like a reaction to the fact that such a significant decline has happened. In Canada, if you check the line of best fit from Statistics Canada to this year, Canada, for the first time, will likely be less than half Christian. I want to be careful that I’m understood. I’m not saying all Christians, nor any particular denomination or sect.

I’m speaking about trends as a whole, and then there are specific denominational trends within those trends. It’s like bell curves within bell curves, in a sense — right? Meta-Gaussian distributions or something like that. This line of thought makes me think about that cultural ocean in which you grew and developed as an academic, a researcher, and an honest observer. With your qualification in religious studies, did American religious life and culture at the time play a role in some of these views being expressed in the public health literature?

Savin-Williams: Well, certainly, the religious right would use this information to support their point of view for things like conversion therapy — saying, “If life is so bad, come to our side, and we’ll help you.” I don’t know how much they use that argument, but it’s important to note that this still exists today. You can say this was happening in the ’80s and ’90s. Still, I’ve reviewed much of the literature — not all of it, of course, but most of it. As of 2024, I have not found a single article that examines the contributions, benefits, or mental health of gay, lesbian, bisexual, transgender, or fluid individuals. None. I can show you over a hundred articles that indicate pathology but none that discuss health.

By the way, many of these researchers are gay themselves. It’s not just straight, religious people conducting this research. Some are, yes, but many are our friends and supporters, and I don’t doubt their good intentions. I think they are wrongheaded. The approach should emphasize the positives of being gay, not just the negatives. But that escapes most people. If you want to get published in my field, you go with the flow — you don’t go against it. If I tried to publish an article on what I’ve just said, I guarantee it would be rejected because it wouldn’t be believed.

One article went through that process, and I eventually decided it was ridiculous. I wasn’t going to waste my time butting my head against a system that refused even to let me enter the pages of their journals to present my perspective. So, this is the subject of my next book.

Jacobsen: Let’s pitch that next book! What is the working title? What is the main research question? And what have you found so far?

Savin-Williams: Well, you’ve caught me early in this process. I had thought my last book on straight men would be my final one — a glorious topic to explore and write about. After that, I said, “I’m done.” But then I kept feeling this nagging thought — like, I can’t publish articles, but maybe I can publish a book. So, it’s going to be something like The Mental Health of Not-Straight Youth, or maybe Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, Whatever Youth. That’s where I’m leaning. I will review the past literature — its good and bad aspects — what it accomplished and didn’t, and maybe explore the effects.

Jacobsen: Why was this research done, and what were the consequences?

Savin-Williams: There will be a lot of speculation on my part, which is why I write books rather than articles these days. I know the reviewers will be the people I’m not being kind to. How’s that for a gentle rejection?

Jacobsen: What is this concept — mindful of the time, we’ve got six minutes left — of “mostly straight,” especially among many millennial young adults who are coming into full recognition of their identities?

Savin-Williams: We always thought that fluidity and flexibility were more of a “woman’s thing” because women tend to be more changeable in how they view their sexual identity and their recognition of orientation — not their sexual orientation itself but how they identify and understand that orientation. They don’t need to be rigid or categorical — they can move along a spectrum.

That literature is growing and is fairly well accepted now, especially among women. Most people agree with it. My argument, and why I’ve researched “mostly straight” men, is that we’re beginning to see this with Generation Z guys as well. They’re saying, “That’s how I am, too.”

Of course, I wanted to incorporate biological data, like genital arousal tests and pupil dilation. Indeed, many men who identified as straight had some level of attraction or response to male images. And several men have said, “If the right guy comes along, you just never know.”

Some of this was romantic — they could fall in love with a guy, and some have. Some of it was sexual. So, this is something I felt needed more attention — not just among women, but also men.

Jacobsen: What percentage are we talking about?

Savin-Williams: Well, we know it’s about 10% right now for women. And once again, I’m focusing on young adults. There’s no evidence that this will change, but we’ll see. It’s usually around 3%, 4%, or 5% for men.

That’s wrong. If we knew the real numbers, 15 to 20% of “straight” people are mostly straight. And they are delightful individuals. If I had to pick my friends from those I’ve interviewed, I’d say, “Give me the mostly straight ones.” They’re thoughtful, dynamic, and flexible.

Also, something I found surprising was that they were less homophobic than gay men. They are mostly straight individuals. If you want a proper perspective, you should ask the mostly straight.

Jacobsen: So what do they think about same-sex attractions?

Savin-Williams: “Yes, not a bad idea.” “Yes, I support them.”

Jacobsen: “Thoughtful, dynamic, and flexible” — those qualities sound like they’re in the

ballpark of the definition of mental health.

Savin-Williams: Yes, it does. It’s striking.

Jacobsen: There may be something wrong with the way we think about masculinity and femininity as strict categories. We need to think more in terms of fractionation and parsing.

Savin-Williams: You’re spot on because we get so caught up in rigid categories. The only categories that seem clear-cut are whether you’re born male or female. But sexual orientation exists along a spectrum, and so do gender identity and gender expression. It’s not just masculine or feminine, and I don’t think it’s just gay or straight. It seems so obvious that I can’t believe we’re still using such strict categories in our research. “Pick your category,” I say. Throw that study away — it’s irrelevant to most young people today. I’d even extend that to the boomers and certainly the millennials. That’s just not how they view themselves anymore. But if you force them and don’t offer any other option, they’ll choose the one closest to who they think they are. But we got that wrong.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts on today’s conversation?

Savin-Williams: Well, first of all, I appreciate this opportunity to preach. I have training in religious education, ministry, and so forth, so I’m aware that sometimes I get carried away with giving “the good word.”

Jacobsen: Stop your homilies, Ritch! It was wonderful to listen to you at your lectern, Ritch, thank you so much for your time today. I’ll be in touch.

Savin-Williams: Thanks, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Marcel Katz: The Art Plug

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/02

Marcel Katz (@theartplug) is a Miami-based creative director and founder of THE ART PLUG, a platform connecting contemporary art, innovation, and cultural events. With expertise in art, design, and music composition, he crafts viral brand campaigns, blending creativity and technology to deliver immersive experiences and elevate brand presence. Katz emphasizes the influence of travel and mentorship in his work, focusing on immersive experiences, innovative eyewear, and expanding into new fields. His dedication to fostering creativity and personal growth, both for himself and others, remains central to his mission.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What has inspired and evolved the vision for The Art Plug?

Marcel Katz: My inspiration has always been driven by passion. I began my creative journey simply because I loved helping creators. Over the years, through my travels, I’ve gained much of the inspiration that fuels my work today. The Art Plug has grown significantly since its beginnings as an art dealership in 2018. It has now evolved into a creative tech house, offering various services, from brand and art direction to creative solutions for individuals and businesses. We’ve expanded our expertise into diverse fields, including medical software, where we managed the branding and art direction, logistics and developer hiring. This blend of artistic creativity and technology perfectly exemplifies how innovation can transform industries.

While still providing residential and commercial curation of fine art, I’ve also explored my creativity, leading to the launch of MaisonMarcel. I.T.—my line of micro-collectible spectacles made in Modena, Italy. This project reflects my evolving artistic journey and commitment to creating unique, high-quality products.

On a personal level, I’ve grown into a mentor, coach, and brand builder, helping businesses and individuals scale both personally and professionally. My focus is to help creatives and brands unlock their full potential by refining their vision, guiding them through the branding process, and scaling their operations. Whether shaping a brand’s identity or developing business strategies, my approach aims to align personal growth with business goals, using creativity as a transformative tool.

Inspiration for The Art Plug has always come from the people around me. Our global reach exposes us to diverse perspectives, which continually fuel our growth and direction. As I mentioned on the podcast Empire is the Way with Steve Santacruz, we move where we are pulled, not pushed. This philosophy has allowed us to adapt, evolve, and scale while staying true to our core values.  

I can add here because it’s flowing—I like to flow—that I have a mentorship program where I help a select few artists or creatives for free every week. They can talk to, text, or contact me, and I help them with their creative journey. For example, an artist reached out to me.

Mind you, this is not a person paying me for coaching or anything like that. This is somebody who can’t afford it now, and that’s okay. The world should not be run by money. It should be run by human nature to help each other, not just to destroy.

So, this artist asked me, “Hey, I’m doing a deal with this company, and they want to create some products to sell in their yoga studios—like a bag, a yoga mat, things like that.” She’sShe said, “How do I approach this? What are the steps I should take to deal out?”

She texted me right before today’s interview, and I was like, “Hey, how are you?” I’ll call her Jane Doe. “Hi, Jane, how are you?” And she’s like, “I’m doing great. I’m just curious about this. What should be the next steps?” I told her, “Hey, here’s what you should do first. Here’s what you should do second. Here’s what you should do third.” She’s like, “Thank you so much for responding.” She’s happy with the response and ready to proceed to the next step. She will explain how the potential collaboration unfolds with the yoga studio.

I love those situations. And yes, my travels inspired me over the years. That fuels most of my work today—I was fortunate to travel the world.

For more information about The Art Plug and what we do, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

I’ve been to over 40 countries, and I draw much inspiration from various places—whether it’s from the currency, how things are documented, or the cultural representation of the people in the cities I’ve visited. Whether it’s Copenhagen, Modena in Italy, or my hometown of Miami, which has influenced me the most, I find inspiration everywhere. I love feeling like I can naturally relate to people from all over the globe. If someone contacts me from Asia or any other region, I can relate to them. I can relate to someone in Spain or from the U.K. just as quickly.

I have a natural ability to connect with people, which has fueled my brand. The Art Plug is not just an American brand. While we’re based in the U.S., we’ve activated projects worldwide. Since founding as an art dealership in 2018, The Art Plug has grown significantly. I started by buying and selling art.

I had an uncle named Gary, who runs an amazing website called PremiumPopArt.com. I’m happy to mention him because we sometimes collaborate on certain deals. He has access to high-quality, blue-chip investment art and introduced me to this market. He helped me secure my first Basquiat, which I later sold to Wilson Chandler, a basketball player with the Denver Nuggets. Getting involved with blue-chip art was a new and exciting phase for me, and it’s interesting to watch how the market value of these pieces grows as they become more popular.

Sometimes, a collector will reach out years later, wanting to sell a piece they purchased, and it might be worth more than when they bought it. But that’s only sometimes the case. Sometimes, it’s worth less. However, when you’re good at recognizing trends and understanding your evolution and the market, you can make informed decisions about what is worth investing in and displaying in your home.

The Art Plug, which started as a dealership focused on transactional relationships with collectors, has since evolved into a creative tech house. Today, we are a technology-driven brand that helps individuals and businesses connect the dots. We’ve expanded into various fields, including medical software. I even partnered with an E.R. specialist to develop a medical application, and our vision continues to deepen.

I enjoy working with Dr. Gurpal, an E.R. specialist in Canada. We have an amazing relationship, and I thoroughly enjoy our conversations and the work we do together. It doesn’t feel like work because I’m learning so much. My communication skills are constantly improving, and my ability to think like someone trained for years to perform emergency operations is growing. Every conversation teaches me something new, and I’m constantly evolving.

You’re trying to surround yourself with inspiring people without realizing it. You don’t realize these people are inspiring you until you’re talking about it, like in an interview like this, and then it hits you that those around you matter more than you thought. Even though I’ve always been aware of this, it has become even more important now. I’m more drawn to writers, journalists, and those who give back to the world—not just creatives.

Katz: We offer various services, from branding and art direction to creative solutions. This applies to both individuals and businesses.

Right now, my pride and joy aren’t just in the Art Plug but also in this medical software that will alleviate doctors’ bandwidth and improve communication in critical situations. So that’s exciting. We also provide art direction, logistics, communication assistance, and work with developers. We can help find the right team to bring an idea to life.

We’re known as a company with endless ideas. If we love a project, expect 50 concepts and a way to make those concepts happen. While we still offer residential and commercial curation of fine art, which is where I started, I still have to leave my roots. It’s just that these things are easier than they used to be.

I used to need to study more to figure things out, but now it comes naturally because I’ve been doing it for so long. What used to take me a day, I can now complete in a few hours. My capacity has increased because I’ve stayed in my field while expanding into new directions within the creative space, allowing me to work more efficiently. My team has also become more efficient in what we do.

Something that reflects the evolution I believe in is eyewear. The future is going to be on your face—in wearables. What you wear will have a technological component. I’ve been saying this for years. Now you can see companies like Meta working on eyewear with A.R. and V.R. capabilities, like the Ray-Ban Meta glasses, which is super cool. It’s not just a small brand pushing the boundaries of technological advancements in eyewear; it’s a major brand making this technology accessible to everyone. These glasses are affordable, around $200, compared to premium eyewear costing $1,000.

These Meta glasses also have practical utility. I’m working on incorporating similar strategies and functions into my current designs because I believe that in 5 to 10 years, you may not need a phone in your hand anymore. You’ll be able to see your text messages through your lenses and communicate freely without moving or saying much. Your thoughts will be synced to your devices. It’s a bit scary, but it’s also cool and exciting.

My website for eyewear is maisonmarcel. It. If you like a pair, I’ll hook you up. We could set up a giveaway through the article if you are interested. Just let me know!

I’m just touching on that. I’m happy to give a lucky reader a pair of eyewear. All the eyewear is made in Italy and inspired by my travels.

Enzo Ferrari started Ferrari in Modena, Italy, and I make my eyewear 100% in Italy. Many other brands claim their products are Italian-made or made in Paris. Still, the reality is that the majority of their production happens in Asia. They assemble or do certain finishing touches in Europe to claim it’s made there. But the truth is, many of these brands are made somewhere other than Italy. I’ve often been advised to lower my costs by manufacturing elsewhere, but I refuse.

I love working with a family in a small Italian town, making eyewear since 1950. This is their passion, not something they do just for money, and that inspires me. So, that’s Maison Marcel—part of the evolution of the Art Plug.

On a personal level, I’ve grown into becoming more of a mentor, coach, and brand builder. I help businesses and individuals scale both personally and professionally. I focus on helping creatives and brands expand their operations while shaping what their brands look and feel like. What emotion are they selling? I help them figure that out. The inspiration for the Art Plug has always come from the people around me and my travels.

Our global reach exposes us to diverse perspectives, which I love. It continuously fuels my growth and direction as a brand. I always interact with people with unique perspectives, which feeds our innovation. It’s a cycle—constantly changing, innovating, and re-inspiring ourselves at the Art Plug.

When deciding where or how I will evolve, I say, “I go where I’m pulled, not pushed.” Go where you’re wanted, where people are showing they need you. If you force an interaction, it only sometimes works. But if you find where you naturally fit, everything comes easier.

This philosophy has allowed me to adapt, evolve, and scale while staying true to my core values. I talk about this in the “Empire is the Way” podcast I recently did with the host, Steve Santacruz. It’s on YouTube: https://youtu.be/TCbj7pEqmBM?feature=shared.

www.MaisonMarcel.IT

Jacobsen: How can art influence social change in subtler ways than other disciplines?

Katz: Art influences social change in ways that are often subconscious. Many people need to realize the impact of visual elements on them. For example, street art can reshape a city’s identity, like in Wynwood, Miami, where public murals have transformed the neighbourhood into a global art hub. This cultural shift happens subtly—people are influenced by the colours, shapes, and emotions that art evokes, often unaware.

The power of public art lies in its ability to touch people’s lives without them realizing it. This invisible influence makes art such a compelling tool for social change. Like marketing studies show how colour affects consumer behaviour, street art similarly alters how people view their surroundings and themselves.

Have you ever seen a piece of art that touched you deeply, but you can’t remember exactly what the piece looked like? You may only remember the colour or what it communicated, but its impact stays with you.

Jacobsen: I’m working on an educational series with a classical realist artist. The series will cover art history from the Stone Age through the Greco-Roman period, the Renaissance, and onward. Then, we’ll look at some of the works he created over the past several decades. I don’t always recall how every piece from the masters he shows me in this series looks. Still, I do remember the emotional impact and the shifts in technique over time. The realism and the advancement in methods certainly stand out.

Katz: Exactly. You don’t have to be in the art industry to feel a positive effect from art. If you visit a museum, you don’t need to read every description of every piece. Just being in the presence of art is like going to the gym—it will have a lasting influence on you, and usually a positive one. Miami has great institutions offering affordable art and science experiences, like the Frost Science Museum and the Pérez Art Museum. These are great places to visit for a few bucks, take a walk, bite, and learn something new. It’s also a great place to take a date if you ever want an idea.

But I’m mindful of the time—we only have about 9 minutes left, so I’ll make it quick and finish the rest of the questions.

For more insights, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: How has being open about mental health challenges helped your creative endeavour and connecting with people?

Katz: Being open about mental health has been crucial for me, not just as an individual but as a creative. Sharing my mental health journey, including a recent public meltdown, allowed me to see who supported me and who didn’t. It also made me more intentional about the people I surround myself with. Therapy has been a huge part of this process, helping me work on communication and understand who is worth investing my energy in.

This openness has also deepened my connections with others. Being vulnerable has created space for genuine interactions and collaboration, both personally and professionally. I’ve seen how mental health struggles can both hinder and fuel creativity, and addressing those challenges has enhanced my ability to connect with others, especially through mentorship.

For more on this and other projects, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: How do you create immersive environments for people to join?

Katz: Creating immersive environments is about telling a story through the brand’s lens. When we work with a company—like a water brand, for example—we aim to create spaces that elevate the appreciation of their product by engaging multiple senses. Whether through lighting, materials, or even sound, we tailor each element to enhance the audience’s connection to the brand.

When promoting an artist, I focus on bringing their work to life, turning visual art into an immersive experience. This approach creates emotional bonds between the audience and the creator, similar to how Yayoi Kusama’s Infinity Rooms immerse viewers in a boundless, emotional space. We also pride ourselves on adaptability; sometimes, the final product looks different from the initially planned, but the improvisation often leads to even more impactful results.

To explore our immersive work, check out and visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: When promoting an artist, how do you focus on bringing their work to life and creating immersive experiences?

Katz: I focus on turning visual art into an immersive experience, creating emotional bonds between the audience and the creator—similar to how Yayoi Kusama’s infinity rooms immerse you in a boundless emotional space. We also pride ourselves on adaptability. Sometimes, the final product looks different from initially planned, but the improvisation often leads to an even more impactful result.

Jacobsen: How is A.R. influencing marketing?

Katz: A.R. is a game-changer in marketing, making experiences more interactive and personalized. It allows brands to integrate virtual elements into real-world environments, significantly boosting consumer engagement. Take IKEA’s A.R. app, which lets customers visualize home furniture. This kind of functionality makes the decision-making process more intuitive and engaging.

At The Art Plug, we’ve embraced A.R. to extend the reach of art beyond galleries, creating virtual exhibitions that people can experience through their devices. This democratizes art and makes it more accessible, breaking down the barriers of traditional spaces.

We host pop-up digital experiences throughout the year, depending on the partner or opportunity. I’m upgrading my platform, including a digital space and marketplace where collectors and creatives can connect, communicate, and showcase their art directly—no strings attached.

It will be subscription-based, but we’ll also offer a free option, which is super cool because not everyone can afford expensive platforms. Many of these spaces are costly, so artists are sometimes called “starving artists.” I’ve been there myself, eating ramen noodles for months because I had no money. I want artists to feel like they can showcase their work only because they think it’s not good enough or can’t afford it. We will always have a place for those people at the Art Plug. We’re a pedestal for artists to explore new ways of showcasing their creativity, and we promote their art fairly. It’s not just pay-to-play here.

For more AR-driven marketing ideas, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: How can art be therapeutic?

Katz: Art is one of the most effective forms of therapy, offering an emotional outlet and a way to process difficult experiences. It promotes mindfulness, reduces stress, and fosters personal insight. Professional art therapists use guided sessions to help individuals work through trauma, improve communication, and enhance cognitive flexibility. Studies have shown that engaging in creative activities can boost self-esteem and motor skills and serve as a medium for social connection.

On a personal note, I found art to be a therapeutic escape during the COVID-19 pandemic. My digital art started as a hobby but became much bigger when one of my stickers went viral, amassing 30 million views monthly. This creative process helped me cope with the challenges of the pandemic but also connected me with a global audience, showing how art can heal and unite.

If you’re interested in exploring art’s therapeutic potential, head over to visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: What was your creative process like when you started making digital art?

Katz: During that time, I wondered what was happening in the world, like many others. I created digital art, which I had always experimented with but have not publicly shared. I decided to start putting it out there, and it became a hobby. I pushed it publicly, and unexpectedly, one of my first stickers got 30 million views. I was like, “Wait a minute, this is interesting!” It was just three frames—not even that complicated.

I kept creating more and more. Now, I have over 4.2 billion views on my Giphy channel. So, a hobby can become something you do for the rest of your life. It can help you heal, express yourself, and improve your cognitive abilities. For me, it was a way to work through my traumas.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Marcel!

Katz: Thanks so much.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Seth Meyers: Healthy and Narcissistic Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/02

Seth Meyers, Psy.D. (Psychology Today) is a licensed clinical psychologist, T.V. guest, author, and relationship expert. He appears regularly on television on “Nancy Grace.” He has also appeared on “Dr. Drew,” “20/20,” “Good Morning America,” “The Doctors,” “Fox News,” Showbiz Tonight,” “Bill Cunningham,” “Jane Velez-Mitchell,” “The Early Show,” “Good Day L.A.,” “KTLA,” and others. He has been featured in The New York TimesUSA Today, and The Huffington Post. His official website includes many media credits and television clips. He wrote Dr. Seth’s Love Prescription: Overcome Relationship Repetition Syndrome and Find the Love You Deserve. His newest podcast, on Spotify and iTunes, is INSIGHT with Dr. Seth.

Meyers explores the differences between healthy and narcissistic relationships. Healthy relationships are characterized by mutual support, trust, and reciprocity. In contrast, narcissistic ones often involve power imbalances and a lack of empathy. Narcissists display grandiose thinking and create an emotionally intense but ultimately unhealthy dynamic. Meyers emphasizes the importance of finding a relationship where one’s nervous system feels balanced and peaceful, contrasting this with the overstimulation common in narcissistic relationships.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here for round two with Dr. Seth Meyers. We’re going to discuss his area of expertise, specifically relationships and narcissism, keeping the conversation focused. I want to begin with the basics, as many people who aren’t experts, like myself, may have ideas about them, but we can only partially understand them. So, how do you distinguish between healthy relationships and narcissistic ones?

Dr. Seth Meyers: A subtler question is whether there are any points where narcissistic and healthy relationships overlap. One of the hallmarks of healthy relationships is the presence of agreed-upon expectations for the relationship and each other. In healthy relationships, there should be reciprocity, consideration of each other’s feelings, and the capacity for perspective-taking. In unhealthy relationships, there is often no agreement on expectations, and the root of the problem frequently lies in power imbalances or hierarchies.

In many unhealthy relationships, there is a power imbalance where one partner is expected to dominate. The dominant partner expects the other to submit and know their place in the relationship. This dynamic can function as long as both partners remain in their prescribed roles of dominator and submitter. In other unhealthy relationships, the problem may not stem from power but dependence versus independence. There is anxiety around one partner individuating too much, leading to over-dependence.

In this type of relationship, which Melody Beattie refers to as codependent, the unspoken rule is that one cannot individuate without causing significant anxiety and problems within the relationship. As an aside, I believe Melody Beattie’s Codependent No More is one of the most helpful self-help books ever written. It addresses codependence, enmeshment, and the lack of boundaries that characterize many unhealthy relationships.

Jacobsen: Now, regarding Cluster B personality disorders, such as Narcissistic Personality Disorder (NPD), or individuals who fall along the narcissism spectrum—whether defined by traits or personality styles—how do these personalities fit into the dominator-submitter relationship dynamic?

Meyers: A colloquial way to describe this dynamic is to say that, in a relationship, a narcissistic personality must be recognized as the most important person in the room. This means that the narcissist’s needs take precedence over everyone else’s. It’s not psychopathic in the sense that the narcissist believes others have no needs at all, but rather that others’ needs are ranked a distant second to their own. Understanding this hierarchy and ranking is essential to understanding narcissistic thinking.

With a narcissistic personality in a relationship, the typical expectations of equality and mutual respect are abandoned from the start, as the narcissist would never agree to such terms. Problems develop because, initially, the non-narcissistic partner may set aside their thoughts and feelings to keep the peace and maintain the relationship. However, over time, the lack of fairness and reciprocity erodes their tolerance, eventually leading them to assert themselves and rebel against the unequal dynamic. The expectations within the relationship, or lack thereof, become a source of conflict. Additionally, in many relationships with a narcissist, there is a fundamental lack of sharing and mutual curiosity, which is often absent entirely.

One example would be that it is normal for two people in a relationship at the end of the day to show curiosity about what the other has experienced while they are out in the world. The narcissistic personality typically isn’t interested in what happens in another person’s day, whether it’s a stranger or a spouse. So, there’s this strange dynamic of a relationship of one when there are two people. It’s a circuitous solipsism. Everything feeds back into the mental landscape of the narcissist, which, from what I’ve gathered talking to other experts, is a rather fragmented and sad affair internally.

Jacobsen: If we are looking for a metaphor to describe the topography of a relationship with a narcissist, we can think of the narcissistic personality as a sort of island. What on this island is the least conducive to any healthy relationship? And, of those things present, are any even remotely treatable in a couples therapy setting, for instance?

Meyers: That’s a good question. A relationship with a narcissistic personality is not necessarily impossible. There are certain conditions under which someone could potentially maintain a relationship with a narcissist over time. What would be required is that the narcissist does not perceive the emotional needs and expressions of the other person as demanding or triggering in any way. For example, suppose a narcissist had a particularly complicated relationship with a parent, sibling, or previous romantic partner because they don’t typically engage in self-reflective work to heal. In that case, they will likely continue to carry those emotional wounds.

So, anyone in a relationship with them who reminds them of those past triggering individuals will likely not be tolerated. Narcissistic personalities do have some strengths they’ve cultivated over time, and they do have some capacity for relationships. Narcissists usually have biologically driven social needs for companionship. So, a relationship with a narcissist can work if the other person doesn’t ask for too much or talk too much.

Jacobsen: Essentially, they have to know their place and support the narcissist’s grandiose self-image.

Meyers: One example might be a husband who is married to a narcissistic wife. At parties, he regularly comments, “She must be one of the smartest people I’ve ever known,” or, “There’s no better mother to our children than this woman.” Now, whether these statements are true or not doesn’t matter. What matters for the narcissist is that the person they’ve chosen to keep supports their public image.

You see, the image at home doesn’t matter. What matters is the image in public. 

You mentioned something interesting earlier about their lack of self-insight or reflective capacity. That’s intriguing because it highlights the deep self-absorption and a lack of introspection. So how does that work? How does one have self-absorption without much self-reflection?

Meyers: Right. One way to understand narcissistic thinking is to relate it to the developmental growth spectrum we see in human beings. Picture an infant, a child, and an adult, each at different stages of awareness and cognitive development. For example, we don’t expect a four-year-old to have the capacity for complex thinking or emotional nuance because their brain development has yet to reach that point. The narcissistic personality, metaphorically speaking, functions cognitively more like a young child.

Jacobsen: That’s wild. Every time I hear it from an expert, depending on their background, it still surprises me because it’s difficult to wrap your mind around the idea that someone with the emotional maturity of a young child can be in the body of a fully grown adult—even an older adult.

Meyers: One area of research that could help answer some questions about what happens in the brain of narcissists is cognitive rigidity. A typical narcissist isn’t diagnosed as psychotic, meaning they don’t have delusions or hallucinations. However, they still exhibit grandiose thinking about themselves. So, what do we call someone who isn’t quite at the clinical level of psychosis but displays this exaggerated sense of self-importance? Is it simply grandiose narcissism, or is there a more appropriate diagnosis we haven’t yet identified?

Jacobsen: It sounds like a kind of “psychosis-lite.”

Meyers: Yes, so someone with this level of self-absorption can maintain certain functional relationships. 

Jacobsen: What’s it like for the person in those relationships? How do they feel when living within that narrow band of function with a narcissist? How do they approach you in clinical practice or casual conversation, seeking insight?

Meyers: That’s a great question. The experience of being in a close relationship with a narcissist is mind-bending. It doesn’t matter if the relationship is professional, familial, romantic, or friendship-based—proximity is key. Being near the narcissistic personality is what confuses those in the relationship.

The first stage in a relationship with a narcissist is often confusion. You might find yourself thinking, “Wait, what just happened? Did I do something wrong?” There’s much mental puzzle-solving, as these interactions with a narcissistic personality often feel like a puzzle that you’re trying to piece together.

They don’t understand what they did to upset the narcissistic personality or what they did to make them sad. The cause-and-effect relationships they’ve come to expect and rely on in most other human interactions don’t seem to explain why, in this case, the narcissistic individual is responding this way. This creates confusion. There are different emotional stages one goes through in processing one’s experience with a narcissist, and many of those stages may mirror Kübler-Ross’s stages of grief after being misunderstood for so long, after constantly feeling that they are hurting or upsetting the narcissist without understanding why, the person may feel angry and frustrated.

They may even reach a stage of learned helplessness, where they feel, “No matter what I do, I can’t win,” and they give up. They may feel depressed. Does the individual in a relationship with a narcissist ever reach the grief stage of acceptance? I believe that in relationships with a narcissist, the stage of acceptance often comes when the person says, “I can’t do this anymore. I can’t continue to function in this relationship.”

Jacobsen: In the first session, you used the phrase “self-erasure” to describe the experience of individuals in these relationships. This disorientation and the slow self-erasure over time—does that essentially mean long-term relationships with narcissists are unlikely? But short-term ones are possible, as long as certain things are taken into account, like catering to the narcissist’s ego in public, whether it’s about motherhood, brilliance, or physical appearance.

Meyers: Yes, a relationship with a narcissist can last as long as the other person remains tolerant of the significant imbalances—emotional and power imbalances. The relationship will continue as long as the non-narcissistic partner tolerates those dynamics. Multiple factors influence someone’s tolerance levels. For example, someone with strong self-esteem and independence may be more likely to end the relationship sooner. And by sooner, I mean within a few years. It’s important to remember that narcissists don’t show their flaws at the beginning of the relationship.

I’m not going to use those jargony terms about narcissists “seducing” their partners because I don’t find those helpful for understanding the raw emotions underneath. But in the beginning, the narcissist is on their best behaviour, and it’s not entirely an act. The narcissist does have some desire to connect with another person. A small part of them genuinely hopes they can find love and be accepted for who they are, warts and all.

It’s not all a performance from the very beginning. What starts to happen over time is that as the relationship deepens and the interdependence increases, the narcissist’s anxiety also increases. Narcissists have highly conflictual relationships with interdependence, dependence, and vulnerability. So, returning to the question of how long a person can remain tolerant in such a relationship, it’s often within a few years that the individual begins to recognize that something is deeply wrong with the relationship.

They often cannot pinpoint exactly what the problem is. They may even have researched the term “narcissist” online. Still, because diagnosing narcissism isn’t like taking a blood test, there’s always some degree of doubt. They wonder, “Is that what it is?” There’s no definitive proof; even having a label doesn’t solve the problem. So, someone financially independent, with no children or other dependents, might be able to end the relationship within a few years.

The problem arises when the narcissist gets comfortable, usually after long-term structures are in place. Once they realize they have the other person “hook, line, and sinker,” the situation becomes more difficult to escape—especially if young children or financial dependencies are involved. The financially or parentally vulnerable person is more likely to stay in the relationship for many years—not because they are happy, but because they feel they don’t have a choice.

Meyers: That’s how they feel—they tell themselves they can’t leave without major consequences. Another complicating factor is if the couple has purchased property together. Mutual financial responsibilities like property ownership can keep the relationship going for many years.

Jacobsen: Sounds like hell.

Meyers: Oh, yes, many have lived through it. People get stuck in that situation. They want out but don’t need these complicating factors like children or financial dependencies. 

Jacobsen: How, then, do you—as a therapist, a friend, or even a concerned family member—help someone in one of these hellish situations realize what’s happening? How do you gently guide them toward a way out, practically and emotionally?

Meyers: The starting point is simple: ask yourself two basic questions. First, what is the purpose of a romantic relationship? It should be mutual support, trust, and comfort. If your relationship isn’t meeting that purpose, you must look hard at it. The second question requires more time to answer—it’s not something you figure out in 60 seconds. It is, “Am I truly comfortable being single?” This is a crucial question. I’ve heard it from many people.

Jacobsen: In a more economically egalitarian time, that question can come with an immediate answer for many, can’t it?

Meyers: Yes, exactly. In a healthy relationship, there’s flexibility, adaptability, and authenticity. It’s a bidirectional, negotiated experience. If those elements are missing, it’s a sign that the relationship may not be as healthy as it should be.

Jacobsen: Genuineness, based on mutual comfort and trust, etc. So, what I’m thinking about is how, on the conservative side of things—typically the religious conservative or traditionalist side—they have well-established ideas about gender roles, like homemakers and breadwinners. On the other hand, in more progressive, center-left, or leftist circles, we see newer ideas with terms like “male feminist,” “boss girl,” or “boss babe” language. These narratives don’t entirely reverse traditional ones but provide potential for self-stereotyping in some respects, too. It’s a very interesting phenomenon.

An authentic and negotiated relationship can fall into any of those four categories, depending on how you map them along different spectrums. So, how do you help people realize that, in a negotiated relationship, where the goal is comfort and trust, it is really about individual choice, temperament, and personal circumstances? They don’t need to fit neatly into any of these categories. It doesn’t have to be performative, the way it often is in narcissistic relationships.

Meyers: Here’s what I say to clients: The goal is to understand the difference between a new relationship that makes your central nervous system feel balanced and peaceful versus one that doesn’t. In a healthy relationship, your nervous system feels balanced and peaceful. In a relationship with a narcissist, at the beginning, the central nervous system often feels like absolute bliss.

What many people like about a relationship with a narcissist at first is the feeling of being swept off their feet. It’s Las Vegas lights lighting up their insides. The narcissist says things to them that no one has ever said before. It’s terrifying.

That feeling is like a drug, but that’s a healthy relationship. The goal should be to find someone with whom your central nervous system feels balanced and at peace, not overstimulated. That’s the big difference between healthy and unhealthy relationships. 

Jacobsen: Thank you, Seth, for your time.

Meyers: All right, thanks! See you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Boro Dropulic: Gene Therapy Cost Reduction

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/01

Dr. Boro Dropulic is a biotech veteran and executive director of Caring Cross. He spearheads a revolutionary initiative to reduce gene therapy costs by up to 90%, making life-saving treatments significantly more affordable and accessible to millions. In partnership with Brazil’s Fundação Oswaldo Cruz (Fiocruz), Caring Cross has implemented a decentralized manufacturing model that produces gene therapies directly at the point of care, reducing CAR-T therapy costs from $373,000 to as low as $35,000. This approach has already succeeded in India and Spain. Boro is excited to explore its potential to transform global healthcare.

Dropulic talks about reducing gene therapy costs by up to 90%. Dropulic explains how they are developing more affordable CAR T-cell therapies by cutting material and manufacturing costs, establishing decentralized point-of-care models, and collaborating with organizations like Fiocruz in Brazil. They aim to make therapies accessible globally, including in low-income countries, by leveraging local resources and efficient workflows. Dropulic expresses personal fulfillment from helping improve patients’ lives.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Boro Dropulic. We are going to be discussing Charing Cross. As a biotech veteran and Executive Director of Caring Cross, I want to explore some of its new work, particularly the framework initiative to reduce the cost of gene therapy. The claim is that costs could be reduced by up to 90%. At face value, many gene therapy treatments can sound expensive, as they may seem like futuristic technology akin to something out of Star Trek.

When you propose a gene therapy cost reduction of up to 90%, what benchmark are you using for comparison, and how are you achieving such significant cost reductions? What is the scope of this reduction?

Dr. Boro Dropulic: Thanks for the invitation, Scott. It’s a pleasure to be here and to share what we are doing at Caring Cross.

Caring Cross has been a group of scientists and individuals in the field for many decades. What we’ve found is that the prices are extraordinarily and unnecessarily high. For example, the current price for some CAR T-cell therapies is around $350,000 to $475,000. Some stem cell gene therapies can range from $2 to $3 million for a single dose, not including the clinical costs.

Our approach to solving this problem is to reduce the cost of manufacturing, materials, and distribution, making these therapies more accessible to patients who need them. The first major factor is the cost of materials. Producing CAR T cells involves extracting cells, genetically modifying them with a vector, and then reintroducing the modified cells into the patient. These cells can then kill tumours or infected cells or replenish a defective gene. One of the biggest expenses in this process is the vector itself. Reducing the cost of producing these vectors can greatly lower the overall cost.

To tackle this, we created a public benefit corporation called Vector BioMed  that produces these vectors at about half the cost. In some cases, the costs are even lower, making producing these therapies more affordable.

In addition, we’ve simplified and shortened the workflows to produce the cell products. Typically, it takes 14 days or longer to produce CAR T cells. Still, we’ve managed to reduce that to 7 days and aim for a process that can be completed in a single day. We can significantly reduce costs by shortening the production time and simplifying the process while keeping it robust.

Another way we are addressing the high costs is by moving away from large, centralized manufacturing facilities. Currently, autologous cells are sent from hospitals to manufacturing facilities over long distances, produced there, and then returned. This process requires substantial logistical, manufacturing, and insurance costs. Maintaining such largefacilities, with fluctuating demand, is expensive.

Our alternative is a point-of-care manufacturing model, where smaller, flexible, and scalable facilities can be deployed near hospitals where patients receive care. This approach significantly reduces labour and logistical costs.

In summary, these are some of the strategies we’re using to achieve lower price points. Additionally, producing the therapies locally and within a shorter timeframe offers significant benefits to patients.

Scheduling is easier for clinicians, patients receive their products much quicker than expected, and patient outcomes significantly improve. We published a study several years ago where we definitively showed, in a publication, that the vein-to-vein times, as we call them, can be significantly reduced, resulting in better patient outcomes. Also, this decentralized or point-of-care manufacturing model is already operational in Spain. There is a group led by a hospital in Barcelona that now has ten clinical centers producing their own CAR T-cell products across Spain, doing so at a cost affordable for the Spanish National Health Insurance System—around €89,000 per dose.

Jacobsen: It’s not one-tenth of the cost, but it’s certainly much more affordable than $400,000. Now, you’ve focused on treatments for leukemia, lymphoma, HIV, and sickle cell disease. Why focus on those particular conditions in terms of therapy development?

Dropulic: These are all serious diseases with unmet needs. For leukemia and lymphoma, current CAR T-cell products are initially effective at generating a good response, but about half of the patients treated with CAR T therapy experience relapse. Part of that relapse is due to the loss of the target antigen, the CD19 antigen, that the CAR T cells are designed to attack. To address this, we’ve developed a triple CAR. If the patient’s cells lose that one antigen, the other two CARs remain available to target and kill the cells.

So, we are addressing a fundamental issue of relapse due to antigen loss in leukemia and lymphoma patients.

There are currently approved cures for sickle cell disease, but they cost $2.2 million and $3.1 million just for a single dose of cells. We can significantly reduce the cost of producing these therapies by at least tenfold, which is another critical area.

Thirdly, infectious diseases like HIV are important. HIV is currently controlled by drug therapy, but patients must remain on these drugs indefinitely to suppress the virus’s replication. Those of us in the field believe that if a cure is possible, it would be the best way to solve this issue, especially since long-term drug therapy has toxicities that accumulate over time. Many patients, particularly in Africa, are not on consistent therapy over long periods. In Western countries, patients are typically on therapy, but this is not the case in many other regions.

The entire field is working toward a single cure. Our CAR T-cell therapy is currently in clinical trials.

Jacobsen: How did collaborating with Fiocruz in Brazil help make gene therapies more accessible?

Dropulic: Yes. In that case, we actively collaborate with Fiocruz, sponsored by the Brazilian Ministry of Health. Caring Cross will transfer all the knowledge and technology needed to make the CAR T cells themselves and produce the vectors and some of the materials used to manufacture those CAR T cells. It’s a complete technology transfer, so Fiocruz can produce CAR T products locally more cost-effectively than purchasing them from the United States or other countries.

They achieve these efficiencies because they use local skilled labour, which is more cost-effective than labour in the United States. They can also produce the materials themselves. By producing both the products and materials locally, they gain significant efficiency.

Jacobsen: What about Vector BioMed to provide affordable GMP lentiviral vectors? How does that factor into reducing costs?

Dropulic: Yes, as I mentioned earlier, the cost of materials is a major issue, and vector cost is the single biggest material expense in producing these cells. When developing these inexpensive and robust workflows to produce CAR T cells, we couldn’t rely on third-party vector producers to provide them at a reasonable cost. Our teams have been making vectors for decades. Our team members were the first to put lentiviral vectors into humans and establish their safety.

Some of our team members also produced the vector that eventually became Kymriah. Novartis commercialized this first FDA-approved CAR T-cell product. With that extensive experience in vector production, we decided to create a public benefit corporation, Vector BioMed, to produce vectors at half the price for researchers or institutions that need them.

Any investigator needing a specific vector expressing a particular sequence can come to us for design and manufacturing. As a public benefit corporation, we also provide additional discounts for Caring Cross products to make them more affordable for our partners.

Jacobsen: I often mention this, especially after interviewing Gordon Guyatt, an epidemiologist in Canada and co-founder of Evidence-Based Medicine. He points out that values and preferences play a role in selecting healthcare systems in different societies. It’s not necessarily about technology, science, or medicine but about the values a country uses as a foundation for its healthcare system.

For example, Canada has a value and preference system focused on equity, which leads to a nationalized healthcare system with some degree of pharmacare. The United States, on the other hand, prioritizes autonomy, leading to a more privatized healthcare system.

Ignoring questions of efficiency and outcomes, if we look objectively at a society’s values and preferences, the following healthcare system reflects those values. So, do decentralized models for healthcare innovation help in nationalized or privatized contexts, especially considering the large differences in what’s valued in these systems?

Dropulic: It doesn’t make a huge difference, although a nationalized system may initially be easier to implement and deploy. It can help create a harmonious decentralized network, with payments by insurance and reimbursement being more standardized.

I see how this system works as well here in the United States, particularly in point-of-care manufacturing, especially when regional payers make things locally and efficiently. Government-related organizations like Medicare and Medicaid may find a localized hospital-based manufacturing network attractive. This approach can affordably produce these products consistently with high quality and at a sustainable price over the long term.

Jacobsen: How are the successes in India and Spain helpful for further implementation?

Dropulic: They are good examples showing that the system works, particularly in Spain, where it’s a fully reimbursable product. India is different, as it needs a true national health system. Implementation is based more on individual hospitals deploying and implementing these therapies locally. However, we’re seeing interest from companies and larger organizations in deploying point-of-care models and broadly deploying these technologies across India.

Jacobsen: Generally speaking, most societies have grown wealthier over the past 100 years, and the quality of life has also improved, whether in terms of education, health outcomes, or lifespan. While there may be individual or localized issues, the overall trend shows improvement in access to education and healthcare. With that general trend of improvement and the reduction in the cost of gene therapy, how long do you think it will be before even the poorest countries have access to these gene therapies at a reasonable cost relative to their national economic status, such as through purchase price parity (PPP)?

Dropulic: Some countries can move quickly. For example, Brazil has a sophisticated regulatory and biomanufacturing industry. In countries like Brazil, we can deploy technology quickly, supported by regulatory authorities connected to the FDA. Brazil’s regulatory framework allows them to learn and implement the knowledge within a proper regulatory structure.

Other countries, particularly in Africa, still need to develop a developed regulatory framework. Until that framework matures, it will take time for these technologies to be deployed. However, in terms of decreasing the price point for these therapies, we are moving quickly.

Each country or region will respond at its own pace, depending on its integration with the global gene therapy community, including regulatory bodies. Building the local infrastructure, training relevant clinical staff, and ensuring quality across a network of hospital sites will be critical to making these therapies affordable and sustainable.

Jacobsen: I have a personal question. How do you gain personal fulfillment as Executive Director, having worked in biotechnology for over 30 years?

Dropulic: I’m privileged to work in a space where we can help people suffering from serious diseases. We can provide potential cures by modifying cells to make them more functional, allowing them to kill tumour cells, eliminate infected cells, or replace defective genes. There’s nothing more rewarding than being in an area where the technology being developed and deployed in hospitals worldwide is actively helping people—giving them another chance at life. Many diseases we tackle are very serious, so being part of that journey is incredibly fulfilling.

Many of my team members feel the same way—we feel privileged to work in this space and have the opportunity to make a real impact. Whether it’s developing the workflows, producing the vectors, creating the actual medicines, or working with clinical investigators to bring these therapies through clinical trials to approval, the entire process is deeply meaningful because it ultimately benefits patients who need them.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today.

Dropulic: Thank you. I appreciate your time and interest.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Take care.

Dropulic: Bye-bye.

Caring Cross is a 501(c)(3) nonprofit dedicated to accelerating the development of advanced medicines and ensuring access to cures for all patients, everywhere.

To enable its mission, Caring Cross is developing technologies and therapeutic candidates to improve the accessibility, affordability, and applicability of advanced medicines like CAR-T therapy and stem cell gene therapy. Caring Cross founded Vector BioMed, a for- profit vector contract development and manufacturing organization (CDMO), specializing in rapid lentiviral vector manufacturing solutions, to provide the industry a source of affordable high-quality GMP Lentiviral vectors. For more information on Caring Cross visit https://caringcross.org. For more information on Vector BioMed visit https://vectorbiomed.com.

Partnering with Caring Cross

At Caring Cross, we are committed to advancing healthcare through innovative partnerships. With decades of experience in developing revolutionary therapeutic products, our team focuses on hematologic malignancies such as acute lymphoblastic leukemia, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, and Multiple Myeloma, HIV and Sickle Cell Disease.

By partnering with like-minded inventors, hospitals, companies, and institutions, we can create additional innovation and value.

Our mission is to develop and implement improved technologies and therapeutic candidates that lower costs and improve access to novel CAR-T cell and other advanced therapies worldwide.

For more information on partnering with Caring Cross, visit https://caringcross.org/partnerships/

Last updated May  3,  2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

John Higgins: OS Studios, Esports, and Video Gaming

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/30

John Higgins is the CEO of OS Studios, a global creative marketing agency specializing in video gaming and esports. Under his leadership, OS Studios has won numerous awards, including Webby, Clio, and the EventEx Awards. OS Studios earned an Emmy nomination, and John Higgins won the Digiday Leader of the Year Award while producing two of London’s top 10 hottest tickets, according to TimeOut. Featured in Business Insider, Digiday, Ad Age, and The Drum, he’s a sought-after expert in marketing, sports, gaming, and entertainment. Starting in theatre with Mayhem Productions, John transitioned to TV, exploring commercials and global storytelling as gaming surged. His expertise in gaming culture has propelled OS Studios to the forefront, with a focus on inclusivity, mentorship, and sustainable tourism. He has recently been featured in The Los Angeles Tribune, Giant Bomb, and The Chicago Journal.

Higgins discusses the rapid growth of video games and esports, emphasizing the scale of gaming culture, which is expected to reach $260 billion by 2025. He highlights the impact of COVID-19 on their remote-first business model and how it accelerated their growth. Higgins explains the challenges of esports, including the “esports winter” and the shift from traditional sports models. He also shares insights into innovative marketing strategies, such as Heinz and Doritos campaigns, reshaping in-game advertising.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with John Higgins, who works in marketing, advertising, gaming, and esports. He’s the CEO of OS Studios, a global creative marketing agency specializing in video games and esports.

These areas have been rapidly growing in industry and sport—esports, in particular, can be considered a mental sport. Some elements focus more on reaction time, which is cognitive, but in a different way than traditional cognition. A lot is happening in this space.

Video games have surpassed Hollywood in revenue generation, and these platforms are massive for multiple industries. You won the Digiday Leader of the Year award and were recognized for professional excellence. What does the award represent, and what does it mean to you?

John Higgins: To give you an idea of the scale of gaming culture, by 2025, the global gaming industry is expected to be valued at around $260 billion, more than the combined value of the movie, music, and print industries. It’s enormous. It’s helpful to think of gaming culture now as social media 3.0 in many ways.

Regarding the Digiday award, it came as a surprise. I was nominated by my business partner, Ian Pons Jewell, with whom I co-founded O.S. Studios, and it came after the challenges of COVID-19. Strangely, COVID accelerated our growth. When the pandemic hit, and everyone had to stay home, O.S. Studios was already set up as a remote-first company.

Because of esports and gaming, we had already developed remote workflows—not just from a technical perspective but also from a cultural one. We figured out how to create social interactions and build large-scale cultural movements globally using marketing. We were ahead of the curve because if you want to work with gaming creators—whether they are on Twitch, YouTube, or other platforms—many of these creators make thousands to hundreds of thousands per month from their bedrooms. Suppose you ask them to leave their home to visit your studio, like traditional marketing or advertising shoots. In that case, you’d need to compensate them for the income they would lose by not being at home.

That compensation is substantial. So, from 2016 onwards, we developed strategies to create remote advertising ecosystems. When COVID hit, we had to speed up our plans. We went from feeling pretty nervous—wondering if we would have to shut down—to finding ways to make it work. At that time, we also had a venue business in Chinatown, Manhattan, which is doing well. Still, there were uncertainties about it back then.

I returned to my roots in broadcast and theatre, where I used to create shows that consistently sold out. We leaned into the entertainment aspect and adapted it to platforms like Twitch. We learned how to extend the engagement of our live shows through social media, creating challenges and keeping the energy alive.

As we continued producing these shows, brands started to get involved, opening up new revenue streams. In essence, we became early adopters of influencer-driven entertainment. I received the Digiday award for our success in navigating this transformation during a challenging period.

So, we could have done better for gamers. We started having companies reach out. I remember the NFL, the NBA, and all the big sports leagues getting in touch with us, asking, “Hey, can we host the after-party for the NFL Draft?” And it had to be remote, so we had to figure out how to make it entertaining because everyone was stuck at home.

We interestingly capitalized on that, which led to the Digiday Leader of the Year award. We were up against PepsiCo’s executive directors or CMOs—big names in the industry. So, it was a privilege to be recognized as the leader that year, which was great.

Jacobsen: Now that you’re in the U.K., how does the video game market look, given the vast international platforming of video games and their various sports-style formats?

Higgins: Yes, I’m actually in the U.K. right now. This past weekend, we launched an event with our client, Cloud Imperium Games, who are developing Star Citizen. We just hosted their CitizenCon for 4,000 people in Manchester.

It’s funny; people often ask me, “What about the U.K.?” because the North American market dominates sports, gaming, and entertainment. When they ask, I always say that the U.K. is about nine months behind.

What I mean is that while games often get released on the same day globally now—unlike in the past—the entertainment consumption around those games, particularly in the U.S., takes time to trend elsewhere. Put aside esports for a moment; what becomes the cultural zeitgeist or trending topic usually starts in America and gets copied in other regions as the creative norm.

For example, when Warzone dropped globally during early COVID-19, it didn’t immediately overtake FIFA as the top game. It took 6 to 9 months to become the dominant title, but once it did, it stayed as the go-to first-person shooter-meets-mass-multiplayer-online game.

I’m sorry, but I’m blanking on the term for it now. What’s it called when the last man standing wins?

Jacobsen: Do you mean battle royale?

Higgins: Yes, exactly! Warzone and Fortnite are all battle royale games. That’s what distinguishes them. The U.K., in terms of gaming trends, is often 6 to 9 months behind. Esports, however, is a different story. I mentioned that $250-$260 billion global valuation earlier, including esports.

Esports right now is valued at about $2 to $4 billion. So, it makes you realize how small esports are in the gaming culture. I don’t know if you’ve heard about the “esports winter,” but it’s well into effect now.

So, there’s this thing called the esports winter—it’s a joke, referencing Game of Thrones, like “Winter is coming.” Over the last year or year and a half, esports has shifted from being this sexy, exciting, futuristic way of sports consumption—everyone thought it would be the ultimate fan acquisition vehicle for rights holders. But over the last few years, the returns haven’t returned.

In the last year, many brands have pulled out of esports. 10% of the revenue that was there a year ago is still around this year. With that, we’ve seen things like the Overwatch League shutting down. Major companies and organizations like that, as well as big names in esports, have closed down. In the U.K., for instance, Guild Esports, which David Beckham was famously associated with (he was paid to be the frontman), was once valued at £20 million but sold for just £100,000 last week with £2 million of debt.

Jacobsen: Wow.

Higgins: Faze Clan also IPO’d, and while they started as an esports organization, they expanded their brand significantly. At one point, their valuation went wild—around $200 million. But recently, they merged with Gamesquare in a deal worth around $7 or $8 million, tens of millions less than their peak valuation. And now, they’re off the Nasdaq; you can’t buy their stock anymore.

This all stems from the esports market. Many brands and investors pulled out because they realized, as I always said from the early days at O.S., that we work in esports. Still, we never believed esports alone was the future. Gaming culture is the future, and esports is just a small part of it. The problem was that many people from traditional sports organizations like the NFL tried to recreate the sports model in esports—tying teams like the New York Subliners or Call of Duty teams to geographical locations.

But esports was built on something other than that. It wasn’t tied to a city or a country but to social movements, and that’s where they fundamentally got it wrong. So, going back to my original point, we’re going through an esports winter, and the U.K. is feeling the impact hard. U.S. esports organizations quickly adapted and diversified to become entertainment entities—they now control intellectual property (I.P.) in many ways. Some of them still compete, but their primary focus is on entertainment.

Jacobsen: In contrast, U.K. organizations stayed purely competitive for too long, so many no longer exist. That’s the key distinction between traditional sports and esports. Classical sports are typically tied to city or state identities—teams like the L.A. Rams are bound to their location. It’s part of the brand identity.

Higgins: Exactly. Unless you’re actively following it, it’s easy to miss how quickly esports has shifted. You’re not the first person today to mention that you didn’t know about this esports winter. But it’s happening. It could also be a market correction, like a bubble. Only a few people got involved with it early on. So, it’s a market correction as much as anything. 

Jacobsen: Did COVID-19 temporarily boost revenue and usage before the decline? Could that be tracked?

Higgins: Yes, a lot of it was people betting big. Especially within esports, 75% of all revenue came from sponsorship. I remember when Twitch paid $1 million for the rights to the NBA 2K League in its first year. Why wouldn’t they?

The NBA was going all-in on gaming. NBA 2K has around 30 million monthly active users. Everyone loves watching YouTube videos, and the NBA would make a live Twitch show every week for items like a pretty safe bet—you could argue there’d be traction and cultural relevance there. So, if you’re Intel, and you’ve already spent a load of money with the NBA, why not throw in an extra $5 million in sponsorship to get involved with the NBA 2K League? Twitch did something similar—they wanted to take the gamble and put in $1 million.

That’s an example of the early days. Everyone agreed, “We won’t measure success in six weeks or even six months. It’s a social movement. We need to see results over a year or two.” A lot of these things happened in 2018 and 2019. That’s when NBA 2K took off, and Overwatch took off around 2018. It takes time.

Then, COVID gave people more time to think, “Do you know what? We think the bet might still be working—let’s go another year.” So, many brands stayed and kept renewing deals, pouring money into teams, leagues, or in-game advertising, before they started realizing, “You know what? The return we’re seeing is so small. We could do better putting our money elsewhere in gaming culture, outside of the competitive esports scene.”

That created the bubble—everyone getting in on the hype too quickly. Look at A.I.—that’s cooled off now. NFTs? Same thing—there was all this hype. People didn’t know exactly what it was, but it was something. All of these trends compounded during that time.

Jacobsen: Do you see the future of marketing, advertising, and outreach for video games, and if this “winter” ends, esports as well, shifting as a consequence?

Higgins: Yes, good question. Where I see gaming going—and it’s sort of there already—is that gaming is becoming social media, just like Facebook was 15 or 20 years ago and YouTube was 10 years ago. Gaming is now the next phase.

I bring this up because we used to ask, “What did we do with social media five or ten years ago? How do we advertise through it?” We figured out how to turn social media from a good product into a more mixed product because of how much advertising is embedded in it. That’s where gaming is heading—for better or worse. It’s becoming a social channel.

Many people, especially 18 to 21-year-olds, are drawn to Fortnite. There’s something called Fortnite and Chill that’s especially popular. You create these maps, go into them with your friends, and strangers can join. You go in there, talk, chill, and explore the map. But good etiquette is that you don’t hurt each other. It’s similar to you and I going into an AOL chat room in the early days.

But now, it’s this giant metaverse where you can explore worlds together. It’s almost like a 3D Nexopia.

Jacobsen: It’s like Nexopia with guns you’re not allowed to use on each other, right?

Higgins: Correct. 

Jacobsen: You go in there, and they’re preregistered—the guns.

Preregistered and background-checked, mental health checks, the whole thing. We’re on the same page there. So, with that context, you start thinking about marketing and advertising. We’ve already learned, especially with this generation of cord-cutters—Gen Z and young millennials—that you must provide a value proposition. It would help if you gave them a reason to care about your message, brand, or whatever you’re trying to convey.

That’s where things are headed. I’ll give you a few examples. I can share good directions for things. For instance, Heinz recently, through Heinz and Toronto-based Ketchum, came up with an incredible idea for Call of Duty Warzone.

Did you see this? Still, they created the Heinz map in Warzone, identifying all the places you can hide and go AFK (away from the keyboard), drop the controller, and eat your chicken nuggets, McDonald’s, whatever. You can dip your fries in Heinz ketchup, take a break, and remain hidden in the game. They discovered random bushes where you couldn’t be seen, even with a sniper scope. These were the “safe places” for you to eat.

This campaign went viral in North America. It was genius; honestly, I wish I’d developed it myself. They didn’t even try to hide that it was advertising—they were transparent. They said, “Look, this is our product, and this is how you can use it to have a better experience while you game.”

Jacobsen: That’s clever.

Higgins: Right? And then there’s Doritos with DoorDash—they created a partnership where you could eat Doritos with one hand and still game with the other. They even suggested which game modes were best for this one-handed gaming experience.

So, you could eat your Doritos. They’re a bit like Cheetos—they get everywhere. And that’s Cheetos’ marketing campaign—”It goes everywhere.” They made it easier for you to eat with your fingers while gaming. I’m not saying that’s everything, but those things will become the norm. Right now, they’re the exception that proves the rule that paid media is still the 800-pound gorilla in the room when it comes to tackling gaming.

That’s going to become irrelevant. If you ask a gamer who’s maybe 25 to 30 years old, “Hey, tell me five brands in Borderlands that you liked on billboards,” they wouldn’t even know what you’re talking about. They’d be like, “What billboards?” There are billboards in there, but they’re fake brands. How will a real-life brand compete if the game itself can’t create a compelling enough lore for the story or campaign?

In-game advertising is going to have to get a lot smarter. To give a shout-out, a friend of mine works at Overwolf. They’re a fantastic organization. They’re one of the bigger digital marketing companies you have yet to hear of, but OS loves working with them. They’ve created various game middleware apps, especially on P.C. These apps track your data, stats, and friends. They create different ways to compare and compete, like daily bounty boards for League of Legends players.

They’ve also integrated ads in a fun way. Pringles recently did a campaign with them, the Pringle Challenge of the Day, where you could win Pringles while competing with your friends. The ads show up during gameplay and add to the experience. Hence, the transaction is obvious and makes things more fun.

That’s where things are headed. You’ll find that what’s happening in gaming is similar to what Netflix and other digital platforms are trying to figure out. They’re all looking for ways to make advertising additive while capturing much marketing revenue.

Jacobsen: Fair enough. Any final thoughts before we part ways, John?

Higgins: No, Scott, thanks for your time. I’m sorry I had to cut this short. I guess the last thing I’ll say is this: when we talk about gaming, or even in the bigger conversation of sports, gaming, and entertainment, I always say what we’re truly doing at O.S.—and why we’re so successful with brands coming to us—is fan acquisition. We’re audience experts, and we’re in the fan acquisition game. Video gaming is a juggernaut within the culture. That’s why we’re here. But in five years, who knows where we’ll be?

Jacobsen: Excellent, John. I appreciate your time. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor James Cordova: Healthy Intimate Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/29

Dr. James Cordova is a Professor of Psychology at Clark University and Director of the Relationship Checkup Program. He created the Relationship Checkup, a preventative relationship healthcare model designed to maintain relationship health through annual assessments. Dr. Cordova has led multiple large-scale studies, including a $1.3 million Department of Defense-funded trial to adapt his checkup for military settings, demonstrating significant improvements in relationship health and reduced depression among airmen and spouses. As president of Arammu, Inc., he continues to expand his work across military and civilian populations, offering relationship interventions and training counselors nationwide. His books and workshops promote relational mindfulness and emotional well-being.

Cordova emphasizes that authenticity, vulnerability, and emotional closeness are key to a thriving relationship, but challenges like the “hedgehog’s dilemma”—balancing closeness and avoiding hurt—remain inevitable. Cordova advocates for relationship checkups, like preventive health care, to strengthen bonds before issues become entrenched. He also highlights evolving societal norms and generational shifts in how relationships are approached and maintained.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here to have a little fun with James Cordova. We’re going to be talking about relationships. I believe you are the first in this series on relationships as a professional with the expertise I need because I’m not an expert—especially when expertise isn’t always respected. I know how to ask questions of those who are. To start, how do you define a proper and healthy relationship? 

Professor James Cordova: That’s a great question. Most of the work I do focuses on intimate relationships. Of course, there are many types of relationships, but the ones I specialize in are romantic and intimate.

When I think about an intimate relationship, it’s one where both people are invested in creating a space where they feel safe being their authentic selves with each other. That’s key to my definition of a healthy relationship: both partners feel accepted, flaws and all. I get to be my authentic self, and you accept that and are enthusiastic about it. And vice versa—you get to be your authentic self, and I am not just accepting but excited about that.

Of course, this comes with challenges. Once you move into the realm of authenticity, you also move into the realm of vulnerability. Some parts of ourselves haven’t always been accepted by others, bringing us to the hedgehog’s dilemma.

The hedgehog’s dilemma, as proposed by Schopenhauer, describes the difficulty of human intimacy. It’s the idea that, like hedgehogs, people want to be close to each other for warmth and connection, but because of their “prickles”—their flaws or emotional barriers—being too close can cause pain.

We want to feel safe in any intimate relationship because we are exposing our vulnerabilities. At the same time, we will inevitably hurt each other, often unintentionally. Using the metaphor, we’re going to “poke” each other.

The dilemma is: How do we stay at a comfortable “quill’s distance,” close enough to feel connected but not so close that we hurt each other too much? It’s a vulnerable space, and we will hurt each other, mostly without meaning to. Sometimes, we pull away to protect ourselves, leaving us lonely. So, we continually try to navigate this space; some people are better at it than others.

Schopenhauer’s point is that, no matter what, we will irritate and hurt each other’s feelings, even if we don’t mean to. We’re going to get in each other’s way. We will find things we do that we wish the other would do differently. For example, I suggest you load the dishwasher differently or avoid using that tone when upset.

Our instinctual response to feeling stung is usually some form of fight or flight. We either sting back or withdraw. Neither of these reactions is conducive to feeling safe being our authentic selves.

So, we need to learn how to be close, vulnerable, and sometimes hurt while repairing that hurt and not reacting destructively. It’s a lot to ask of the average person. So, we find that truly intimate relationships come with unavoidable challenges. Most couples resolve the porcupine’s dilemma with a détente—let’s be close, but not too close, not so close that it becomes challenging. As a result, there’s an unfortunate amount of loneliness in many long-term intimate relationships. The porcupine dilemma paints that picture.

Jacobsen: Yet, the time, generation, and society can change the frame. If we lived 300 or 400 years ago, when the average lifespan was half what it is today, the concept of relationships and partnerships would be simpler. When both partners passed, people were probably married for 10, 20, or 30 years.

Nowadays, in advanced industrial economies, we benefit from plumbing, electricity, air conditioning, heating, and various nutritious foods—although not everyone benefits equally from these advancements. These factors, along with medical advancements, expand lifespans. We can stitch people up and improve dental care and overall health spans. These seemingly unrelated factors indirectly benefit relationships by lengthening our lifespans, which changes how we view long-term relationships. So, partnerships and healthy relationships were originally a technology—a social contract built for a certainconception of human life when reaching 50 meant being an elder. 

If we consider today’s average life expectancy of 75 to 85 years—slightly longer for women and slightly shorter for men—it drastically changes the concept of a healthy marriage compared to what it meant in what now seems like a prehistoric era.

Cordova: It’s a good point because it changes the lived experience of “till death do us part.” It might have meant we had 5 or 10 years together before one of us passed away, which was very different from what it means today.

Some of the original functions of marriage or long-term intimate relationships were practical—about survival, procreation, and property. These were pragmatic needs at a time when life expectancy was relatively short.

But now, people expect much more from their long-term relationships. Lifespan itself is part of the reason why. It’s no longer just about economic security and someone to help raise kids. People want deeper emotional and personal fulfillment from their long-term intimate relationships.

It’s someone I love, feel close to, can talk to, and with whom we have all the elements piled onto that one relationship—vibrant sex life, economic viability, raising children together. That small subset of goals has expanded quite a bit. Now, most people are looking for a quality of connection in their long-term relationships that wasn’t as expected in previous generations. And other factors, while not minor, are secondary.

Jacobsen: In the past, women had little choice in marriage. So, equality movements—egalitarian movements, feminist activism—how do these changes in gender roles and desires for more egalitarianism in the home affect orientations toward healthy relationships? How are professionals like yourself viewing this as you gather more data across generations?

Cordova: Well, one way to think about it is that there’s a lot more choice about staying in a relationship at any given point. We can think about commitment inside a relationship as having two types: dedication commitment and constraint commitment. Dedication is, “I’m committed to you because I love you and want to be with you.” Constraint commitment is, “I’m with you because the alternative seems unbearable.”

In the past, particularly before women had the rights they have now, constraint commitment was much stronger. Women often needed to stay in marriages because of access to resources, finances, and opportunities. Thankfully, those constraints have lifted significantly, and what holds many of us in long-term relationships now is primarily dedication commitment—the desire to stay because of the quality of the relationship itself.

Because of this shift, the quality of our connection has become the most important part of a relationship for most people. The constraint commitment part has diminished, so we no longer have to endure dissatisfying or unhappy relationships because we have more options.

Jacobsen: What about the idea of the “7-year itch”? Is that real?

Cordova: It’s interesting. My familiar research suggests it’s more of a “3 to 4-year itch.” The most common time people are in a marriage before divorcing is shorter than seven years. It looks more like people discover relatively quickly that they’re incompatible.

So, the “7-year itch” suggests that we get antsy around that time because the newness wears off, and people start thinking about moving on. But we’re discovering that the headiness of early love often leads to marriage or a serious commitment. Then, as people settle into a longer-term relationship, they discover basic incompatibilities. Once that happens, when people realize they’re so incompatible that living in the same house becomes intolerable, they often choose to divorce.

It’s about more than getting bored but about needing to get along better. This points to how important fundamental compatibility is, especially for a long-term intimate relationship. 

Jacobsen: This leads to a question about that point and another: divorce rates are around half for first marriages, and so on. So, if the divorce rate is roughly 50%, that number also includes second, third, or even more remarriages and divorces. It’s skewed higher because some individuals are divorcing multiple times. If people are divorcing again and again, and if the “itch” happens around 3 to 4 years, how do you parse that data? How many of those divorces are second or third marriages, and how many are just first divorces?

Cordova: That’s an interesting question. The way I can answer it is this: the 50% divorce rate—depending on how you calculate it—tends to apply primarily to first marriages. About 50% of first marriages end in divorce, and that percentage increases with each subsequent marriage. So, about 60% of second marriages end in divorce, and roughly 70% of third marriages end in divorce.

One way to think about this is that, with each step, we’re seeing a titration. A higher percentage of folks who, for various reasons, struggle with long-term relationships are overrepresented in these statistics. So, those with personality types and skill sets that lend themselves to long-term intimate relationships are overrepresented in the 50% of first marriages that don’t end in divorce. On the other hand, those who are more prone to divorce are overrepresented in second and third marriages.

Part of my work focuses on driving that number down by shifting how we think about relationships—from how happy or satisfied we are to viewing relationships as a health domain. Instead of focusing purely on relationship satisfaction, we should consider relationship health care. Just as we think about what makes for a healthy body or good mental health, we should also consider what makes for healthy relationships.

As a culture, we have huge gaps in health care available for this complicated part of our lives. The only “health care” for relationships is typically tertiary—like couples therapy, which people seek only when motivated by pain or distress. The work I’ve been doing over the past couple of decades involves developing and testing protocols for regular relationship checkups or marriage checkups. This approach would mirror other domains of health care, where people receive regular professional care to maintain long-term health instead of waiting for things to go wrong before seeking help.

In dentistry, people used to wait to go to the dentist until their teeth hurt. As you mentioned, before the mid-1950s, most people expected to lose most of their teeth by the time they were elders. Now, with regular dental care, losing teeth is an anomaly. Our work relationship checkups are intended to bring relationship health care into the 21st century similarly.

Jacobsen: So, we’ve been dancing around many important relationship issues—good stuff. How do you set up a checkup or a checklist for a healthy relationship? I imagine this could come from various angles—academic literature, clinical experience, discussions with colleagues, and maybe even a doctoral thesis. How are you integrating all that into a checkup or checklist?

Cordova: The idea for me originated during my PhD work at the University of Washington with Neil Jacobson and John Gottman. At that time, we all had tertiary approaches to couples therapy—the equivalent of attending the dentist when your teeth already hurt.

We were trying to improve these tertiary couples therapies, saving more “painful teeth.” We were helping couples who had been suffering to suffer less. But what we discovered was that, over two years, about 50% of couples either didn’t improve through therapy or improved only to relapse within the next two years. So, for about half of the couples—those who sought therapy, and few do—it was often too little, too late.

It’s similar to dentistry: if you wait to go to the dentist until your tooth hurts, there’s only so much they can do for you—often, it’s just pulling the tooth. I was working on an internship with a modality called the “drinker’s checkup.” The idea was to catch people when their drinking became concerning and offer them a checkup to assess their behaviour and create motivation for change.

This inspired me to think about relationships: What if we had regular checkups for marriages or relationships? Because, as of now, we don’t have anything like that. We could provide professional checkups and early intervention, like dental checkups. In that case, we might improve relationship health, helping couples keep their relationships strong and healthy over time—just like we now expect to keep our teeth longer and healthier through regular dental care.

I began developing a brief, fun, strength-based intervention that couples could do annually to help maintain their relationship health. This would also allow them to intervene early if they started struggling with something. One thing we’ve learned is that even couples who are brave enough to go to therapy often wait until they’ve been distressed for 4 to 6 years. And we know that being in a distressed relationship for that long negatively affects both mental and physical health.

So, with all of those health systems deteriorating over 4 to 6 years, I wanted to create an intervention that couples could engage with much earlier—something less threatening than therapy, quick and simple, and designed to “catch and release,” addressing issues before they become too entrenched.

Come in for one or two sessions. We’ll do an assessment, provide feedback, and then send you on your way to a healthier, happier, more intimate relationship. Our research shows that this brief preventative intervention yields strong results across the full range of couples—from newlyweds who are happy and want to stay that way to couples struggling with certain issues but not enough to seek therapy independently.

The checkup can be beneficial for couples who aren’t quite ready for therapy but would come in for a checkup. We’ve even seen couples who would likely be good candidates for more intensive therapy benefit from this brief, strengths-based relationship checkup, even though they might be reluctant to try therapy for various reasons. Across all types of couples, we can show the value of this approach.

Jacobsen: Why strengths-based? I can understand why a weakness-based frame wouldn’t be effective. Still, it’s more work to see why a neutral-based perspective would be less effective than a strengths-based one.

Cordova: That’s a great question. We deliberately take a strengths-based approach to counteract our natural cognitive tendencies. As a species, we’re more inclined toward threat detection. Our natural perceptual apparatus is designed to scan the environment for threats, so in relationships, we often notice the things that irritate us or are problematic first.

In our relationship checkup approach, we focus on a gratitude mindset. If we can remind couples of what initially attracted them to each other and help them root into the best aspects of their relationship and who they are together, they’ll approach it from a place of gratitude when we discuss the struggles. They’ll better understand that they want to preserve and improve the relationship.

If we jump straight into “tell me why this relationship isn’t working,” it’s much harder to return to a place of connection. It often leads to a vicious cycle of negativity. That’s one of the reasons tertiary couples therapy can bog down quickly—it starts from a place of strong complaint. It tries to lighten the complaints, but often without that crucial reminder of why the relationship was valuable in the first place.

In contrast, the strengths-based approach helps couples focus on what’s best about their relationship, what they want to preserve, and why they’re willing to work hard to cope better with the challenges. So, yes, it’s like the compliment sandwich approach but deeper.

Jacobsen: Yes, I see. And it makes sense. We have a couple of cultural phenomena happening right now, too. I don’t want to put you in the position of being a social psychology or linguistics expert, but we’ve all seen certain ideas filter down from academic circles into public opinion pieces—published in journals, newspapers, and so on. One of those ideas is the concept of “silver divorces,” where divorce rates reportedly increase among boomers and older generations.

Another phenomenon we see is younger generations marrying less or partnering in nontraditional ways—common-law partnership’s, open relationships, or something else outside the traditional framework. There’s a shift in how Gen X and millennials view partnerships, compared to boomers or the Greatest Generation. I’m using those generational labels loosely as placeholders to help demographers, but we are seeing these trends.

Cordova: Absolutely, those trends are becoming more noticeable.

Jacobsen: So, you’ve got this dual generational effect around partnerships. What do you see in research or clinical practice? What’s happening with the older generations and the younger cohort of adults regarding how they view relationships? How do these trends explain some of these phenomena?

Cordova: Yes, it’s a great question. Both generations are grappling with the same underlying problem. The problem is what we touched on earlier—the porcupine’s dilemma. We want to be intimate, emotional closeness, and our vulnerability to be held safely in a relationship. But the challenge is that we will sting each other—an inevitable part of intimate relationships.

When we get stung, most of us react in ways that corrode the quality of our connection with our partner. As a result, many relationships end up lonelier than they want to be. Couples are close enough to raise a family together but not close enough to feel emotionally connected to each other.

Then, when they reach the empty nest phase, they may tolerate it for a while. Still, the emotional distance between them becomes so isolating that they separate. They can’t figure out how to return to each other because they’ve been growing apart for so many years.

Younger generations—emerging adults—have watched this happen with their parents, aunts, uncles, and older relatives. They want the same things: close, intimate relationships. But they’re looking for more flexible ways of achieving that, trying to avoid the pain and loneliness they’ve seen older generations experience.

However, their solutions must address the fundamental problem: How do we stay close while skillfully and responsively taking care of each other’s vulnerabilities so that we can be hurt without hurting?

The skill set we need to focus on is what we now refer to as emotional intelligence or emotional responsiveness versus reactivity. That’s the crucial point. When people in relationships start pulling away from each other because being too close becomes painful, the checkup can help them turn back toward each other instead of continuing to drift apart.

Everyone is trying to solve the challenge of being within “quill’s distance” in a relationship. The variety of solutions people come up with stems from the fact that we don’t have a healthcare framework for thinking about this, nor do we have the tools to thrive in long-term intimate relationships.

We’re left alone, essentially doing “our dentistry.” We’re trying to fix things with a hammer and chisel, doing our best without proper support.

Jacobsen: And the origin—your guy from Cast Away—when he’s first stranded, he’s got a bad tooth and has to smash it with a rock. Tom Hanks, right?

Cordova: Right, exactly. The older generation’s approach is like yanking the tooth, while the younger generation is trying to figure out, “How do we do this? Maybe I need to eat or drink differently—kombucha, maybe? How do I keep my teeth longer?”

We must realize that we’re not treating this as a healthcare issue. If we did, we wouldn’t have to suffer later in life or search for some magic elixir when we’re young. What if it was as simple as getting regular checkups for your relationship, the same way you get annual physicals or semiannual dental exams? What if it’s that simple?

Jacobsen: As I mentioned earlier, marriage is a social technology. Common-law marriage is both a social and legal technology. It can also be part of a religious framework and is considered a ‘transcendent technology.’ From that perspective, people made up these systems, so people can also create new systems or reinvent old ones.

Could health care and legal framework exist for healthier partnerships where we don’t assume “till death do us part”? Perhaps we could create something like a longer-term contract—lasting for the healthy years of the children if kids are involved—and then opt for renewal. This isn’t a new idea or a new idea to me. Maybe it’s a five-year, six-year, or ten-year contract, after which the couple can decide whether to renew for another five or three years, depending on how they feel. The partnership can adapt to realistic terms if assets, health, sentiments, or life paths change. It could be more practical and appealing, especially given our longer lifespans. It might even appeal to women since they tend to live longer.

Cordova: Yes, we’re coming full circle to your earlier point about longer lifespans. One of the fundamental truths about being human, especially in relationships, is that we are constantly changing. The person you’re in a relationship with now isn’t the same person you started with—even if it’s only been a week, let alone 50 years. And you’re not the same person you were when you entered the relationship, either.

Accounting for that continuous change is a good idea. Five years from now, we’re both going to be different people. That’s one thing when you might only have expected to live five or ten more years together. It’s entirely different when looking at another 50, 60, or 70 years.

So, the question you’re raising is: how do we account for that change? One way, as you’re suggesting, could be through shorter contracts. Another way might be to become more thoughtful, mindful, and deliberate about adapting to each other as we change over time.

That’s where regular checkups can play a role. They can help partners assess how they’ve both changed over the year—what’s new—and then figure out how to adapt to those changes in a healthier way. If we’re doing this regularly, instead of waking up 20 years later and not recognizing the person across the dinner table, there is a higher probability that we’ll change together rather than drift apart.

Jacobsen: Should there be any upper limit on how often someone can get married? If, as you said, there’s a filtering effect where marriage doesn’t work for some people, maybe they’re genuinely trying or being socially coerced into continuing. They keep trying until they get it right.

Cordova: Yes, it’s possible that a more solo lifestyle, not necessarily alone but solo, might suit some people’s psychological structure better. I don’t know if we’d want to impose a limit on how many times someone can marry, but it’s worth considering when people reach a point where they realize, “Maybe it’s me. Maybe I need to work on myself before I have the attitudes or skill sets required for a successful intimate relationship.”

The challenge is our tendency toward attribution error. When someone else does something that makes us mad, we think it’s about them—their personality. But when we do something that upsets someone else, we think it’s circumstantial—”I didn’t mean it,” or “It was external factors.” This can lead people to believe each failed relationship is the other person’s fault. At some point, though, you might need to stop and say, “I might be the issue here. Maybe I have my work to do.”

Jacobsen: What else can we explore? Let me check my notes. Ah! Do you want to plug your books? Would that help?

Cordova: Sure! Yes.

Jacobsen: What’s your short sales pitch for the books? 

  1. The Marriage Checkup: A Scientific Program for Sustaining and Strengthening Marital Health – Published May 16, 2009​; Rowman & Littlefield
  2. The Story of Mu – Published April 26, 2016​; Simon & Schuster
  3. The Mindful Path to Intimacy – Set to be published January 27, 2025​; Guilford Press

Cordova: All those are awesome books, and everyone should buy them! The new book that’s coming out—let me pull up the title—is called The Mindful Path to Intimacy. It’s coming out from Guilford Press in January.

It’s at this intersection between the relationship checkup concept—that there’s this naturally occurring corrosive process in relationships, where we pull away from each other because it’s difficult to be skillfully vulnerable—and mindfulness practices, which help us learn how to be skillfully vulnerable. This upcoming book aims to provide couples with the tools, practices, and insights to navigate that “quill’s distance” space with skill, grace, and compassion. The Mindful Path to Intimacy is about thinking of relationships as a practice rather than “work” or something you’re lucky to have if you are perfectly compatible. It’s about treating relationships as a regular practice, much like a spiritual practice.

A colleague says, “A true spiritual practice plays rough with the ego.”

Jacobsen: Be humble, yes. I understand.

Cordova: Yes, nothing plays rougher with the ego than trying to live in that vulnerable space with another human being. How we learn to be skillfully vulnerable is deeply tied to how we tolerate our vulnerability and respond to each other’s. That is as close to a spiritual practice as you can get. How might you approach your relationship as a practice?

The Mindful Path to Intimacy is designed to help couples do just that. If unskillful vulnerability corrodes connections, learning to be more mindful and skillfully vulnerable can strengthen those connections. Many psychologists today focus on genuineness or authenticity. This is a major point you brought up at the start—defining not only a relationship but a healthy one.

Jacobsen: Right. Regarding authenticity, we’ve had these evolving roles, including gender roles. We have traditional ideas—women as homemakers, men as breadwinners—and more progressive ones, like the “sensitive guy” or the “boss girl.” Even though these roles may seem more progressive, they are still social constructs defined within political and social contexts. I find the more progressive stance healthier, but I acknowledge that it’s based on my biases.

Cordova: Yes. When we talk about authenticity in relationships, for both individuals and the relationship itself, we mean finding who we are outside of the ideologies—political, social, religious—that we’ve been told we’re supposed to live by.

In an intimate relationship, I can learn more about myself. If I discover I can be true to myself, even if it’s a little countercultural, I can explore that more deeply. But if I find that my partner expects me to conform to some cultural ideal, my message is that I can’t be who I truly am. I have to play the role I’ve been told I ought to play. This creates loneliness, which we often try to solve through distractions—social media or other forms of escapism.

Jacobsen: Yes, in a way, we’re outsourcing that part of ourselves instead of looping it back in and integrating those feelings.

Cordova: Exactly, we’re not processing those feelings fully. And that ties into what you were saying about gender roles. In North America, especially among younger generations, there’s this image of a traditional religious family structure—the nuclear family—and even though it’s no longer as dominant, it still influences people. 

Jacobsen: Yet, I see the same dynamic with people in more non-religious, progressive circles. They’re still trying to live up to certain ideals in a different framework. So, in both cases, whether religious or non-religious, traditional or progressive, people are still grappling with predefined roles and the challenge of authenticity within those structures. So, in the traditional conservative example, you’ve got the mom who’s expected to embody the Martha’s Vineyard ideal, and the man is—well, I’ll need to look up an example, maybe someone like the character from Suits or something similar. On the progressive side, you have men labelled as “male feminists.” From a conservative viewpoint, that might be interpreted as someone emotional and sensitive to an extreme, performative degree.

But most people aren’t like that—it takes work to get things done. There are overlapping but distinct bell curves between the sexes and genders regarding how people express emotion and sensitivity. Then, with the “Boss Girl” idea, comedian Michelle Wolf had a sketch about this. It was around the time she became more prominent after the White House Correspondents’ Dinner. In the sketch, she’s a busy businesswoman, always on the phone, always “busy,” and it’s funny because it’s such a caricature.

That, too, is an image—a kind of ideological portrait that can be critiqued or parodied, just like we often do with the traditional nuclear family image. So, the point you’re making about doing countercultural things is subtle. It doesn’t have to be about mainstream culture—it could be countercultural, even within a subculture or a family system, if you’re discovering things about yourself that don’t fit the mould.

For some people, it might be obscure, like a mix of Kabbalah and niche linguistic hermeneutic. For others, it might be challenging homeopaths online. The range of things people explore as they evolve is wide. This touches on the idea of authenticity being highly individual and idiosyncratic.

Now, in the last five minutes, what would be your biggest tips for those who want to find someone compatible for a healthy relationship? And what are your tips for people in relationships to do their “dental checkups”?

Cordova: Great questions. There are two main tips. First, find a provider who can give you regular relationship health checkups. We’ve been working hard on this. We even created a company called Aramu.com.

Interestingly, “Arammu” is one of the oldest words for love we could find. The company aims to train as many mental health care providers as possible to offer regular relationship health checkups. So, the first recommendation is early and often—start healthy and stay healthy. Like they say, an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure.

The second tip is more on the “do it yourself” side. It’s about learning how to be hurt without being hurtful, how to tolerate your emotional reactivity without letting it take control of the moment, and how to be angry without acting destructively. Can I still behave skillfully and relationally if I’m hurt and angry? Can I be angry without acting destructively? That’s a huge challenge for all of us in intimate relationships.

Some people can learn those skills independently with good guidance, and others might need a bit of coaching. But the ability to be angry and still be relationally skillful is crucial—without it, we do much damage that’s hard to recover from.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Cordova: Absolutely. Thank you, Scott. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Garrett Garner, M.D. on Topical Estrogen’s Benefits for Skin Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/29

Dr. Garrett Garner, M.D. at SimpleFixRx and OB/GYN, has been seen in Yahoo! LifeYour Health Magazine, andHollywood Life. He is a native of Dallas and received his undergraduate degree from Vanderbilt University in 1992 and his medical degree from the University of Texas Southwestern Medical School in Dallas, Texas in 1996. He remained in Dallas to complete his residency training at the University of Texas Health Science Center at Parkland Hospital in Dallas, Texas. Dr. Garner joined Northlake OB/GYN in 2000 and is a partner of the group.Dr. Garner is board-certified in Obstetrics and Gynecology, a member of the Texas Medical Association, and a Fellow of the American College of Obstetrics and Gynecology. Garner explains that topical estrogen increases collagen and hyaluronic acid, improving skin thickness and moisture, especially in postmenopausal women. It can have side effects like melasma and is more effective for vaginal issues than other treatments like retinoids. Future developments in hormone-based skincare may enhance wrinkle reduction and scar prevention.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does topical estrogen work on skin? 

Dr. Garrett Garner, M.D.: Topical estrogen works by increasing collagen production. Collagen helps skin thickness. Estrogen also increases hyaluronic acid which increases skin moisture.

Jacobsen: How has experience with women’s health shaped understanding of topical estrogen’s benefits for skin health? 

Garner: Women’s health providers have long known the benefits of topical estrogen therapy, especially in postmenopausal women. Topical estrogen has been used for decades to treat thinning skin and other vaginal issues that are related to changing estrogen levels after menopause. These benefits have then migrated to other skin areas. 

Jacobsen: How does topical estrogen increase collagen production and the thickness of skin? 

Garner: Estrogen stimulates collagen production, helps decrease collagen breakdown, improves the elasticity of the skin, increases hyaluronic acid and sebum production which helps with moisture, and increase skin cell viability. 

Jacobsen: How is topical estrogen’s effectiveness and safety compared to other treatments like retinoids or hyaluronic acid? 

Garner: Topical estrogen is more effective at treating vaginal issues but I find it can have some side effects like melasma when used on the skin. Retinoids are more effective for wrinkles and hyaluronic acid works well on skin as well. 

Jacobsen: How does menopause contribute to skin aging? 

Garner: Menopause results in lower levels of estrogen which effects skinby making it more prone to wrinkling, thinning and sagging. 

Jacobsen: What side effects or risks come with topical estrogen for skincare? 

Garner: The main side effect can be the darkening of the skin, especially on the face. Some patients report swelling, burning, and vaginal irritation when it is used vaginally.

Jacobsen: How does SimpleFixRx promote accessible skincare and anti-aging solutions? 

Garner: SimplefixRx.com has topical products that help increase salicylic acid and hyaluronic acid in a patient’s skin which helps thicken skin and decrease wrinkle formation. They also have products with beeswax to help lock in the skin’s moisture.

Jacobsen: What have been statistically significant results in topical estrogen for skin improvement? 

Garner: Some studies have shown a decrease in dryness by 20-30% in patients’ skin when compared to no treatment—also, a decrease in skin looseness and wrinkles by about 20% compared to non-treated areas.

Jacobsen: How does Dr. Garner see the future of hormone-based treatments? 

Garner: I feel there will be many new developments in the treatment of skin with hormones. Hopefully, there will be the development of hormone-based creams to help with decreasing scar formation, aid in hair growth in men, and also better products to decrease wrinkle production and improve skin moisture retention.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Yeaseul Park: Orange Biomed’s New Diabetes Device

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/28

*Interview edited for readability.*

Yeaseul Park, CEO of Orange Biomed, is a Forbes 30 Under 30 honoree. She holds an MBA from Duke University and co-founded Orange Biomed, a company focused on innovative diabetes management technology. The company is expanding globally, with their OBM rapid A1c test in clinical trials at Seoul Asan Medical Center.

Park discusses the development of their innovative A1C diabetes management device. Park describes the motivation to create a more accessible and affordable test, highlights the challenges of existing technology, and shares insights on clinical trials, FDA clearance, and the device’s potential global impact.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re here today with Yeaseul Park, the co-founder and CEO of Orange Biomed. I want to compare your A1C device to current tests. What inspired you to create a newer device or test in this market?

Yeaseul Park: Our vision is to make A1C testing more accessible and affordable for anyone who wants to test and manage their diabetes or prediabetes. The problem I identified, especially during the COVID-19 pandemic, was the difficulty of getting tested. In the U.S., I found it challenging to visit a doctor and get this test done every three months. Currently, the technology is only available for professional use. You must see a healthcare provider regularly to get your A1C test results and monitor your glycemic control.

However, diabetes is not a one-time issue—it’s a chronic condition that requires lifelong management, which can be burdensome. We wanted to make testing more accessible. According to statistics, 12% of the adult population in the U.S. has diabetes, and 33% has prediabetes. The American Diabetes Association recommends that these individuals regularly test their A1C levels. So that’s our vision. 

Jacobsen: Now, how does your microfluidic technology provide more accurate results?

Park: First, I want to explain the limitations of current technology and how we aim to solve those problems. Existing A1C devices use protein quantification methods, which are complicated and require trained professionals to operate. These methods involve protein reagents that require refrigeration, have a short shelf life, and need significant maintenance, making it difficult for patients or caregivers to test A1C levels independently. These devices are also expensive, especially lab machines for medical centers or hospitals start at 6 digits, and smaller professional-use devices for clinics can cost around $5,000.

Our device is different because we don’t use protein reagents, making it much easier for anyone to use, similar to a COVID-19 test kit. Have you ever used a self-administered COVID test?

Jacobsen: Yes, a couple of times. But I was working on a horse farm then, so I was pretty isolated, and it wasn’t on the front of my experience at the time.

Park: I understand. That’s why we designed our device to be like a self-administered test kit, similar to the glucose monitoring systems that diabetes patients are familiar with. This will be the first time such a device is available for home use by patients or caregivers, although it still needs to be added to the market.

Jacobsen: Hemoglobin variants are a known issue. We’ve found a higher frequency of these variants among Black, Hispanic, and Asian American populations. How does your device make testing more accessible to populations that traditional methods may have underserved?

Park: Your question has two parts. The first part is about the hemoglobin variants. With existing technology, only lab devices can accurately identify hemoglobin variants. This means point-of-care (POC) devices cannot reliably detect these variants, which significantly impacts the accuracy of A1C levels. POC devices are more likely to give inaccurate readings, especially for individuals who are not part of the white population.

The second point is that since we are not using protein reagent technology but are utilizing microfluidic technology, we rely on the physiological features of red blood cells, not proteins. So, hemoglobin variants do not impact the performance of our device. Theoretically, hemoglobin variants can’t affect our device because they don’t involve identifying proteins. This principle allows us to overcome the limitations of current devices, particularly point-of-care ones.

Jacobsen: So, how do patients typically describe their experience when looking at older technologies? With newer technologies, like the microfluidic ones, how would they also describe their experience?

Park: Currently, patients are required to visit labs or their doctors to get this test done, which poses difficulties, especially for older individuals with diabetes or those with complications. It’s often harder for them to go to the doctor alone, and they may need someone to drive them or require at-home options. However, with current devices and technologies, it’s nearly impossible to do this at home.

There are some options, like direct-to-consumer home kits by mail. You get the package by mail or at a convenience store, draw a relatively large blood sample, send it to a lab, and receive results within five days. This is an alternative for those who can’t easily access a hospital, but it still takes more time and requires more blood. I tried one of those kits once, which required 60 times more blood than our device.

Our device only required a single drop of blood, while that kit required around 300 microliters, which felt like I was almost bleeding out. It’s really hard to draw that amount of blood with just a needle. 

Jacobsen: Not to mention, how packed these labs will be with blood! It’s too much blood!

Park: Some states don’t allow human samples like that to be sent through the mail, which limits service in certain areas of the U.S. Demand was high, especially during the COVID-19 pandemic, when getting a doctor’s appointment was difficult. People looked for other options, but they were still very expensive. Depending on the condition, A1C tests should be done regularly, at least twice a year or more frequently based on condition. With our reusable device at home, patients can get cartridges for each test and see their results within minutes.

So that’s how we want to solve this unmet patient problem. 

Jacobsen: Two factors in the United States are the main points of reference. One, they have a different style of healthcare—I’m Canadian, obviously—so it’s different in Canada from the United States. I talked to an epidemiologist, Gordon Guyatt, who is well-cited and co-founded Evidence-Based Medicine.

He argues that Canada values or prefers equity, while the United States emphasizes autonomy. This affects the kind of healthcare systems that people tend to prefer. In Canada, you get more nationalized healthcare; in the United States, it’s more privatized.

So, my first question is: does that impact accessibility for these tests and devices? So, does the difference in healthcare models between Canada and the U.S. impact accessibility for A1C devices like yours? In other words, how do the approaches to healthcare in these countries affect access to your device? This device is more accessible and easier for people because it bypasses the hemoglobin variant issue by not using proteins. So that’s one factor. Another potential barrier could be the healthcare model. Does that impact accessibility for people using this type of device? I don’t know.

Park: Let me also give you an example outside the U.S., where I live. In Korea, getting an A1C test at a doctor’s office is very easy compared to the U.S. But people still need this device because if it’s just a one-time test, you can visit a doctor whenever you want to take a day off to do it. But diabetes testing is not a one-time event—you must do it every few months.

Sometimes, they don’t give you the results right at the point of care. They may send a venous blood sample to the lab, and then you must wait for the results. The doctor might even require patients to return when the results are available to plan the treatment. So, it’s about something other than the healthcare system but people’s schedules. People working or studying often can’t commit to regular checkups and miss appointments because they want to maintain their routines. So, they need an at-home option.

I’ve also observed that in the U.S. When we first focused on suburban or rural areas, where doctor’s offices are far away, we thought the issue was mostly geographic. But even in big cities, where people live near their doctors, many don’t have time to visit during the day. So, even in Canada, where the healthcare system is completely different, people with chronic diseases still want to live normal lives while managing their conditions. 

Jacobsen: The next part of the question is about FDA clearance. Despite the differences in healthcare systems, the FDA is known for being very rigorous with its multi-stage trials or phases for new products to come to market, and this has been the case since the 1970s. You aim to bring the product to market in 2025 through FDA clearance. How is that process going? What hurdles have you encountered in ensuring you’re meeting all the requirements for approving a new product, especially given that you’re using a different type of technology?

Park: We are preparing to submit a 510(k) application next year for FDA clearance of the OBM rapid A1c device, classified as a Class 2 medical device. As the device has unique technological characteristics compared to the predicate device, we are conducting clinical studies to demonstrate that these technological differences do not raise new questions regarding safety and effectiveness. We aim to complete the clinical studies by early next year and submit the application by mid-year. We are eager to obtain FDA clearance as soon as possible, to help more people manage their diabetes effectively.

Jacobsen: How does the ISO 9001 certification ensure the quality of the product?

Park: ISO 9001 is an international standard for a quality management system. However, it’s not specific to medical devices—it’s more general. We are also preparing ISO 13485, which is specifically for medical devices. We are working on that certification in addition to already having ISO 9001.

ISO 9001 is a very holistic system. It requires that the entire management system be based on quality management principles. We’re using FDA-cleared software to ensure all documents are traceable and to record the development history. Even after we get approval, this system will track customer feedback and complaints, if any, and help us resolve issues systematically. This is very important. So, our entire management team is involved in that system.

Jacobsen: You received the KHF Innovation Award—how does it feel?

Park: Yes, that was a very recent achievement. If you’re familiar with CES, it’s similar to the CES Innovation Award in the U.S. The KHF Innovation Award is from South Korea’s largest annual medical device conference. The Korean Hospital Association gives this award to innovative ventures; we were fortunate to be one of the recipients.

Jacobsen: What are some important statistics relevant to men and for complications too? 

Park: So, for prediabetes and diabetes, A1C is an incredibly important biomarker. A1C is the top biomarker for diagnosing diabetes and has well-established standardized criteria. If your A1C level is higher than 6.5%, you have diabetes. If it’s between 5.7% and 6.4%, that means you have prediabetes. With this single biomarker, you can accurately understand your risk status.

Even after diagnosis, it’s crucial to regularly test A1C levels because this biomarker predicts the risk of developing diabetes-related complications. While most people are more familiar with glucose testing, the American Diabetes Association strongly recommends A1C testing for all diabetes patients. In contrast, glucose monitoring is recommended only for certain patients. These tests serve different purposes. Extensive research has shown that regular A1C testing can reduce the long-term probability of death and improve patient outcomes. I can provide the exact statistics after the meeting if needed.

Jacobsen: Can you explain some of the complications people with high A1C levels face? What are some of the conditions they may encounter?

Park: Yes, there are many microvascular complications, but the most common is retinopathy, which affects about 40% of diabetes patients. This condition can lead to blindness if not managed. There are also diabetic foot complications, neuropathy, cardiovascular, and ulcer issues, which are very common as well.

All of these complications are related to microvascular disease. When A1C levels are high, blood viscosity increases, leading to issues in the microvessels, not just the larger blood vessels. This can result in serious conditions like heart disease. Additionally, there are some differences in how diabetes affects men and women. For instance, type 2 diabetes, which accounts for 90-95% of cases, affects men and women differently in terms of complications and disease progression.

Men tend to develop diabetes at an earlier age than women. Research has shown that men with obesity are more likely to have upper body obesity, which is strongly correlated with insulin resistance—a significant risk factor for type 2 diabetes. As a result, men with upper body obesity tend to develop type 2 diabetes at a younger age. For women, it’s different.

Women are more likely to have lower body obesity, which has a different impact on diabetes. Women tend to develop diabetes later, often in their 60s or 70s, whereas men should be more cautious starting in their 40s. Current guidelines recommend that individuals begin annual screening tests for diabetes at age 35 to detect prediabetes or diabetes early, allowing for earlier intervention and prevention of complications.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it. 

Park: Perfect. Thank you so much, Scott. I appreciate the conversation.

Jacobsen: Likewise, it was nice meeting you. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On Keith Raniere & NXIVM 3: Jim Heller, Maharaji Comparisons

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/27

Jim Heller is a former Canadian ashram premie. Currently, he is a criminal lawyer in Victoria, B.C., Canada, and a guitarist in a band called X-Flies. He has critiqued Maharaji’s past claims and his followers’ evasion of accountability. Heller looks at the parallels between Maharaji and NXIVM’s Keith Raniere, emphasizing manipulation, the surrender of autonomy, and the importance of critical thinking.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Jim Heller. You were a member of a cult, but you got out. I’m focusing on a series about NXIVM and DOS, founded by Keith Raniere, also known as Vanguard. When you reflect on reading a bit about Raniere for this session, thank you for taking the time to do that and for your reflection on time in Maharaji’s cult. What can you note as some of the consistency between these two systems and their leaders? That seems like a good starting point.

Jim Heller: I didn’t know much about NXIVM; honestly, it didn’t interest me much initially. But after you contacted me, I spent a little more time looking into Raniere, and what immediately stood out from the Wikipedia page and other sources I read was a parallel with the cult leader I followed for some time.

Maharaji came from a Hindu tradition, and his followers believed he embodied the cosmic force—essentially, God. He was God in human form, and as bizarre as that sounds, we believed it. We believed it was possible.

We adhered to a whole narrative and ideology: God regularly manifested in human form throughout the ages. There’s always one, only one. It was Maharaji’s father before him. It wasn’t Maharaji’s three elder brothers; it was Maharaji who took on the mantle from his father when he was just a child. We believed all of that. So when I look at Raniere, I think, okay, here’s another guy.

Raniere didn’t claim to be God or anything like that, but he had a smooth, powerful personality, and I know how it works. You can create a machine if you get a few good followers to promote you correctly. People can fall under the sway of it, and I’m sure that’s what happened with him. That’s how it was with my guru. Maharaji wasn’t doing this alone, either.

When Maharaji first came to the West, he had a coterie of saffron-robed, bald Mahatmas that we considered saints from India. They were propping him up, talking about how their profound meditations allowed them to see how incredibly cosmic and powerful he was. It all worked together as a cohesive narrative, and I’m sure Raniere had a similar setup. When someone is even slightly susceptible to that kind of thing—and I think anyone can be—they’re no match for it.

You find yourself in a group of people, and you won’t be the outspoken renegade because that will immediately push you to the outside. Something within the group dynamic appeals to you, and you don’t want to let that go. With Maharaji, it was the idea of enlightenment. We believed that if we stayed the course with him, overcame our doubts, and received his grace, we could rise higher and higher. One day, we thought, we could become saintly like those same saffron-robed, bald Mahatmas. We were promised incredible meditation experiences and believed we would eventually attain cosmic bliss. Nobody wanted to miss out on that.

We were manipulated, and he was manipulative. I’m sure there was something similar with Raniere. 

Jacobsen: What was he offering? What did people see in him?

Heller: I can’t say for sure, but I believe it followed the same path. To me, it’s all about the information you have. Can you ask the hard questions? Is there room for critical inquiry?

You don’t have to have the branding or the sex, but it’s on a continuum away from autonomy, free thought, objectivity, argument, and debate. I see everything like that. To me, “cult” isn’t that powerful a word anymore because I see cult-like thinking across the spectrum—politically, religiously, and ideologically. 

Jacobsen: What are your top signals or red flags about those particular contacts for people who are lured into one, have seen someone slowly fall into one, or are in one? What should they be looking for? Also, there are ways they can either rapidly or slowly decouple themselves from that, in your terminology, such as informationally closed systems or systems becoming more closed over time.

Heller: So, the most fundamental aspect of our autonomy is our mind. A human being who’s lost their mind—whether through Alzheimer’s, an accident, or whatever. It becomes questionable what’s left of them as a human being. Our mind makes us who we are, and our mind needs the ability to assess things independently.

The problem with the cult I was in is that we surrendered that ability. We turned our ultimate judgment to someone else—essentially to the group and Maharaji. I imagine that Raniere’s followers did the same. So, I think that’s where the tug of war has to be with anybody. If I had a young friend or anyone I thought was sliding into a closed thinking system, I would try to talk with them about that issue: what happens when they no longer have their thoughts to make decisions?

It gets scary because, once you hand over that level of judgment, you may not have a mind. You’re no longer thinking for yourself. I can give you many examples from my old cult. I’m sure ex-Raniere followers would say the same. Getting branded with disguised initials, for example—that’s just a small indication of what it’s like when someone hands over their autonomy. So, I would say to anyone that there’s nothing worth giving up your autonomy for. Nothing.

The problem, though, Scott, is this: cults offer different things in exchange for a person’s autonomy. In my case, we were told straight out that, yes, you’re being asked to surrender your mind, but if you do that, you’ve got the promise of incredible ecstasy through cosmic consciousness. So, maybe that’s a good trade-off. Some people may think it is. Maybe there are cults where people say, “I’m prepared to become a total slave of Muhammad and sacrifice my children or myself in martyrdom because of the ultimate reward.” So, the problem is that people don’t necessarily value the autonomy we have as human beings as something better than what a cult environment offers.

Sometimes, we don’t want that autonomy. That’s a problem. We have to make the best case possible for personal autonomy. And maybe it’s not as compelling to everyone. Maybe someone would say, “Jim, I get what you’re saying, but if I stay with a Raniere-type system, I’m promised certainty, maybe more sex than I would’ve otherwise gotten, and that appeals to me, or a certain status within the group. I’d rather be a big fish in that tiny, insular pond than deal with my status in the world.” People make those kinds of decisions. So, it’s difficult, but what’s the best reason for us not to do that?

You’ve got to have the best arguments for why it matters to be yourself—that’s the best thing you can get in life. That if you don’t have you, nothing else is worth it. But some people don’t think that. That’s the reality. 

Jacobsen: Raniere made a big claim of being one of the smartest people in the world and then developed this so-called ethical system. So, he wasn’t just the smartest person but potentially also the most ethical—that’s the implicated claim.

It’s a sense of grandiose superiority. He positioned himself as a leader who could guide and teach others. Was Maharaji given to similar styles of grandiose claims about himself? 

Heller: Totally. Worse. Maharaji makes Raniere look like nothing.

Jacobsen: Raniere looks like nothing?

Heller: Maharaji was considered the Lord of the Universe. He was the current, living embodiment of the cosmic forces we call God, and there was one like him on the planet at any time. How could that be? According to all sorts of ancient Hindu scriptures, the universe dictates that there is only one manifestation of God on Earth at any one time. There’s always one, but just one, and that was Maharaji. So, who could compete with that? Come on. I mean, the setup was perfect.

So, what do people need to understand about cult leaders and cult systems? You can say, “There’s something wrong with this miniature community.” Yeah, there’s something wrong with the personality structure of the cult leader or what they’re mimicking. And now, in many different dimensions of life, we’ve lost our sense of danger. It’s a dangerous time. We’ve lost a profound and natural taste for evidence. One of the greatest contributions of the Enlightenment—our care for evidence and following it wherever it leads—is being obscured. It might challenge your beliefs, but that’s good because, ultimately, you’re pursuing truth, and truth is an objective thing.

Raniere, because that’s who you first contacted me about and who I know you’re writing about—he sounds like a monster. May he rot in jail?

The extraordinary ridiculousness of Raniere’s claim that he was the smartest person in the world just another thing that pales compared to some of the other nonsense that gets allowed without challenge in our ongoing conversation. So, hell in a handbasket, Scott. 

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation about trolls?

Heller: No, not really. I look forward to a time when we can look back on this period as one of imbalance and when we’re back to arguing about everything. That would be great—nice and healthy—arguing with evidence, arguing with first principles, and agreeing on some first principles. First, principles and evidence—that’s all we need.

Jacobsen: All right. Thank you so much for your time today. Appreciate it.

Heller: Sure. My pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Conversation With Atheists In Kenya Society

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/26

The Atheists In Kenya Society (AIK) is a nonprofit organization founded by Harrison Mumia on February 17, 2016. It promotes the rights and visibility of atheists in Kenya and advocates for secularism and rational inquiry. AIK is affiliated with Humanists International and actively engages in legal and social activism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what’s going on in Kenya for atheists? How are things for you all? Oh, and ma’am, one ma’am.

Harrison Mumia: Yes, I’m happy we are having these engagements, and I am speaking on behalf of the Atheists In Kenya Society. One of our members, Ms. Sky, is also here. So, we’re doing reasonably well. The society has existed for the last seven years and was officially registered in February 2016.

To give you some context, we are in East Africa. Kenya is a deeply religious society. When I say deeply religious, I mean that the term “atheist” is widely misunderstood. People often don’t comprehend what it means to be an atheist, and even if they do, accepting it is difficult. 

We’ve also faced legal challenges because the Kenyan government does not support us. In Kenya, politics and religion are tightly intertwined. That’s why we face resistance from the political class whenever we try to advance our objectives. They don’t even want to hear about us. After we were registered, the government suspended our registration in the same year, 2016.

We took the matter to court and fought the case for two years. Fortunately, we won in 2018 because the court ruled that suspending our registration was unconstitutional. Since then, we have been working to create awareness, promote free thought, and encourage debates.

We are seeing a slight but progressive change in Kenyan society in terms of understanding that there are Kenyans who don’t believe in a supernatural entity. Some Kenyans view life differently and hold a worldview that does not involve religion. Although Kenya is still a deeply religious country, the younger generation is more open to skepticism and having conversations about these topics.

We remain a deeply religious country, but there is a shift toward more discussions. We are the only registered atheist organization in Kenya and, I believe, in this part of Africa, which includes East Africa. Suppose you look at countries like Uganda, Tanzania, and Zambia. In that case, we are the most active non-religious organization in the region, and we are doing a lot.

We run multiple campaigns, hold regular meetings, and have an active WhatsApp group. We are working hard to create spaces for people to engage in meaningful discussions. So far, we are doing quite well. That’s where we are right now.

Jacobsen: Ms. Sky, would you like to add something at this point?

Ms. Sky:  Oh, I have nothing to add because, based on the information you mentioned, it’s all true.

Mumia: All right, that’s fine. So, that is where we are. We have a membership. We have people who are registered members. But then again, we are facing a situation where people want to have conversations. They can identify as atheists, agnostics, skeptics, or even freethinkers.

However, the issue is that they don’t want to be open about it. They don’t want their parents to know. It’s still a stigmatized position in this country to be openly non-religious. So, you’ll find that many of our members are active in the WhatsApp groups, but they are not able to declare, “I am an atheist openly.” There is a transition happening in Kenya. The younger generation is more open to conversations about skepticism and religion. Some are willing to say, “I don’t believe in the existence of God.” However, we are still far from becoming an openly secular society. Kenya remains deeply religious overall.

Jacobsen: When you host events, how do you provide a sense of solidarity for people who, in East Africa, may not have a supportive community? Nsajigwa I Mwasokwa, for example, talks about being in a liberal society and multiparty society on paper but not truly liberal in a Tanzanian context. As far as I know, he does most of his activism and mentoring without a lot of support. So, how do you overcome that sense of isolation that people may feel through community events? 

Mumia: We have organized many outdoor events. We meet twice a month and have a Book Club event. The Book Club brings together those who enjoy reading. We focus on literature about enlightenment, philosophy, history, culture, and science.

The purpose of the Book Club is to introduce new perspectives and encourage critical thinking. For example, we’ve discussed Charles Darwin’s work on the theory of evolution, Albert Einstein’s work on the theory of relativity, and the history of African religions.

We explore how Africa transitioned from traditional religions to Christianity during colonialism and what African beliefs were like before colonialism. We examine the works of various authors and discuss these topics at our Book Club events. You can find videos of some of our events on YouTube.

We also have another event called the Godless Corner. This is a free-form gathering of freethinkers and atheists. There is no specific agenda; we meet to talk, discuss freely, and enjoy a beer or coffee. It allows people to connect with others who share a non-religious worldview.

We also organize hikes. In Kenya, there are places where you can go hiking or for nature walks. In the past seven months, we’ve organized two or three events that involved hiking and nature walks in places like Karura Forest. These events allow people to meet, interact, make friends, and build community. You can also find more of our events on YouTube.

We’ve organized activities like karaoke, a fun event for non-religious people. We’re trying to come up with all sorts of activities where people can participate. However, the most active engagement we see is online. We have a Facebook page with 10,000 followers, a Facebook group with 10,000 members, and a WhatsApp group with over 600 members.

We also have 10,000 followers on X (formerly Twitter), so online engagement is higher than physical engagement. I’m seeing a trend of people feeling more comfortable staying in their homes and chatting online.

Jacobsen: What do you observe in other online communities? In North America, for example, the ex-Muslim community primarily grew out of an online space. People like Armin Navabi and Atheist Republic have a couple million Facebook followers. These online spaces have become places where people can express themselves more freely. Do online spaces in Kenya provide a safer or more comfortable environment for people, allowing them to escape the judgment they might face in their local communities?

Mumia: Online communities are more comfortable spaces for many Kenyan non-believers than physical events. We typically get between 5 and 15 attendees when we hold physical meetings. But people are much more active online. It’s easier to engage online because there are no restrictions on time or location.

For instance, we have Kenyans living abroad—perhaps studying or working in other countries—but they can still join our WhatsApp and Facebook groups. Many people feel safer engaging online because Kenya is such a religious country, and the social stigma around non-belief is still strong. So, yes, a lot of our engagement happens through social media, and that’s a reality for us.

Unless anyone else wants to add something, I’d like to make sure everyone has a chance to speak. We have some Kenyans joining. Micah, are you there?

Micah MukhwanaYes, I’m here.

Mumia: You heard Scott’s question about how we engage as the Atheists In Kenya Society (AIK) and our online spaces. If you’d like to add anything, feel free to do so. 

Mukhwana: Yes, a lot is happening. We’ve been engaging in important matters, trying to make this more than just an online group. For example, people have been going for hikes and nature walks, which help us connect with nature.

There’s been a lot happening. I recently joined the WhatsApp group, and although I haven’t been super active, I’ve seen a lot of conversations and engagement in the short time I’ve been there.

Mumia: Yes, thank you. Scott, you should introduce yourselves at some point so everyone knows who they’re interacting with.

Jacobsen: Yes, sure. Hi, my name is Scott. I’m a humanist from Canada.

I’ve been involved in the humanist community for seven or eight years, probably. I’ve worked with Humanists International, Humanist Canada, the Center for Inquiry Canada, and various other humanist groups. I’ve been conducting interviews with atheists, humanists, and freethinkers for years, and there are certain gaps in getting some voices out into the global space.

So, I’ve focused on interviewing people from African, Latin American, and Asian contexts to help amplify those voices. I’m a freelance independent journalist with the Canadian Association of Journalists. I use my journalism to highlight atheism and humanism.

Mumia: Oh, it’s good to know that you’re a journalist. That’s great. So, in Kenya, we’ve found that Kenyans are more comfortable engaging online. If you call for a physical meeting, first of all, Kenya is not a small country.

For example, I’m in the capital city, but some drive six or seven hours away. They often tell me, “Mumia, we cannot come to Nairobi.” So, they prefer online engagement. We also don’t need the funds to organize meetings in every city in Kenya, so we typically hold events in Nairobi.

But I see the most comfort and activity in our online engagements, where most Kenyans engage. That’s the situation, but we plan to organize a conference. We’re considering hosting a humanist conference before the next international one in Luxembourg.

I’d like to see whether we can organize a conference in December or January, inviting people from outside the country to give speeches or hosting it online. We’ll see how that works out, as it would be our first humanist conference in Kenya. We’ve never had one before, but it would be important in advancing this cause.

Jacobsen: A lot of it can be done online or through symposiums. Symposiums can be good experimental ground for testing themes and organizational setups and working out any issues in preparation. In academic settings, organizing smaller symposiums has been helpful before. I encourage you to pursue conferences because they bring everyone together, offering something to look forward to either seasonally or annually. Does anyone have questions for Thomas, Micah, Henry, L, Fiona, or Hamza.

Mukhwana:  I do have a question. For instance, now that we are building a society in Kenya, can we also engage beyond the country? In Kenya, many people believe so strongly in God that they find it difficult to engage in conversations about atheism or skepticism. Can we have external conferences or meetups to connect with others globally? Could that help in creating a better society?

Ms. Sky: Yes.

Mumia: That is exactly what the society is working toward.Micah, you recently joined the WhatsApp group. The Atheists In Kenya Society is an associate member of Humanists International. Please attend our meetings in Nairobi when we organize them. You’ll be able to meet Kenyan atheists, interact with our leadership, and register as a member to learn more about what we’re doing. We have also partnered with African atheist organizations. By the way, Scott, we’re working with atheist groups in Ghana and Nigeria, like Leo Igwe.

Jacobsen: Yes, Leo Igwe. I’ve written for the Atheist Society of Nigeria’s blog, contributing about half a dozen to a dozen, maybe, articles, interviews, and other content when they were first registered. I’ve also interviewed members of the Humanist Association of Ghana (HAG) and recently published an interview with the founder of Accra Atheists and the vice president of Humanists International.

Mumia: Oh, really? That’s great!

Jacobsen: So, connecting with atheists in Ghana and Nigeria—those are two well-known groups. Ghana had a head start with its post-colonial history and Kwame Nkrumah’s leadership. Don’t feel disheartened if they seem ahead.

Mumia: Yes. But, of course, Ghana is in West Africa, and we’re in East Africa. Our trajectories were slightly different. Ghana gained independence first; they were the first African country to achieve independence. Kenya got its independence a bit later. That difference in timing is well understood. I’d also like to ask you a few questions. Once you’re done, I’ll also try to understand your perspective.

I want to ask the Kenyans who are here: How do you feel about what we’re doing as an organization compared to what we see at the national level? What’s your take? Do you feel Kenya is becoming more secular, or are we getting more entrenched in religion? Do you think we’re making progress toward secularism? I’d love to hear from any Kenyan. What is your perspective? Are Kenya becoming more open as a society, or are we still much closed off due to religion? What’s your general feeling, considering that the Atheists in Kenya Society have been trying hard to make our presence felt in the national sphere? Where do you think we stand regarding atheism, freethought, skepticism, and religious freedom? Or are you guys too scared to speak up, even now?

Fiona: It’s still conservative and religious, but there is progress.

Ms. Sky: Very little to be honest, if you add tribalism to that, it is a very evil concoction.

Mumia: Yes, I can see that. That’s encouraging. That’s also an accurate assessment. There is progress, but Kenya is still a religious society. As Scott mentioned, politics in Kenya is intertwined with religion, and that’s part of the problem. We don’t have leadership that’s open to promoting secularism. We are coming from an environment that is highly religious and politicized. Our politics is religious in nature. 

Jacobsen: Harrison, and Michelle Nekesa, what is involved in the website’s design?

Michelle Nekesa: That’s a good question. You need to ensure a good user interface and user experience. Write clean code to achieve a good output, right? You also need to conduct customer-centric or client-centric research to understand the users who will interact with the website. You have to consider its functionality. What is the website’s purpose?

What exactly is the goal? Do you want visitors to engage with a chatbot or view your content, whether blog posts or events are regularly updated on the site? When speaking as a client rather than a developer, the website must be appealing and interactive. A plain, black-and-white design that is unattractive doesn’t work. Especially now, with social media, we are used to well-designed software and websites. So, yes, a lot of good work went into designing this website. 

Mumia: She covered it all. From my perspective, I wanted to emphasize that if you think about Kenya, atheists are often perceived as devil worshippers or that there’s something wrong with us. I wanted to communicate through the website that we are human beings with humanist values.

Jacobsen: What’s your latest campaign, Atheists in Kenya Society? “We are human beings.” It sounds like such a long way to go.

Nekesa: [Laughing].  Yes, there is still a long road ahead. But as he mentioned, in more conservative or religious countries, when you don’t conform, you are labelled as a demon, Satanist, or part of the Illuminati, or other baseless claims.

So, yes, part of our website is dedicated to destigmatizing both humanism and atheism. We get a lot of direct messages asking if we are part of the Illuminati, and I’m like, the name of our society should make it clear that we are not devil worshippers or satan fanatics. So, yes, it’s important to address and dispel these misconceptions.

Mumia:  Exactly. We’ve made significant efforts to explain what humanism and atheism are and who we are as a society. When we were registered, we were legally registered by the government. So, we are not an illegal entity. We are a membership-based organization. Once you become a member, we provide certain benefits.

At least we can offer some legal assistance. Our team has a lawyer who does excellent pro bono work for us. He has been doing pro bono work for us during our court battles. So, we tell people that even though we don’t have much money, we can write letters and help them seek justice if they face discrimination or similar issues.

However, convincing people to become members of an atheist organization still requires some effort. People often question why they should join, and it takes time for them to understand the value of such an organization.But we hope it will become normal over time to say, “I belong to this organization because it stands for these values.”

I wish we were in, say, Norway or something. I hope we get funding from the government, but we are borrowing a lot from the IMF and others. Even if the government had funds, if Kenyans found out it was giving money to the Atheists in Kenya Society, they would protest at the State House.

Nekesa: While that would be ideal, let’s be realistic. Our healthcare system needs more funding, and our education system has challenges. So imagine saying to a country, “We’re paying taxes and need to develop our infrastructure, but can we allocate even 2% of those funds to support freedom of belief?”

They’d look at you and say, “We are hungry right now.” Our economy is in shambles. We’ve not been this economically weak in the last 25 years. Kenya has held significant economic power in East and Central Africa for the past quarter century, but that has collapsed in the last two years.

Apart from the ideological differences in a conservative mainstream culture, where Kenyans may appear liberal but are often only performatively so—sure, sure, sure— But yes, we are performatively liberal. When push comes to shove, people will not only protest, but they will say that there’s propaganda against Christianity, and now devils are ruling.

This is especially true because the current government used religion as one of its strategies to gain power by pandering to the religious masses. So, how do you pivot and say, “Now, we’re going to finance this?” Apart from having funds in the Central Bank of Kenya, there needs to be more willingness and capacity on both the government’s and the public’s sides. 

Jacobsen: So we’re talking about website design, atheists, and other topics. What else are we discussing? How can Kenyan atheists get involved with AIK (Atheists in Kenya Society)? And how can freethought individuals in Kenya become politically active without risking too much damage to their reputation? I’ve heard that some people even get fired from banks for being openly atheist.

Mumia: Yes, that’s true. It’s still risky. If you work for the government and you’re openly atheist, it may not sit well with the government. That’s how I see it. So, being associated with atheism in Kenya, especially if you work for the government, can be risky if it’s as open as my case. But if you stay quiet about it, you’ll likely be safe. We organize events to engage members and people who want to be part of our community.

I mentioned the book club, where we meet physically, and the Godless Corner, where we meet in person. We also organize online events. Sometimes, we hold online sessions and specific conversations on WhatsApp, during which we focus on a particular topic and engage in discussion. In general, online conversations are the easiest way for Kenyans to interact, especially because some can’t even tell their girlfriends, boyfriends, parents, or relatives that they are atheists. It’s serious—some people risk losing relationships over it.

Nekesa: Yes, Mumia, it’s true. You might be disowned. People will say you’re not a good Christian or Catholic, or even your friends may turn away. It sounds extreme, but many think that if you’re against religion, you must be on the side of the devil. It’s true, and it’s sad.

Jacobsen: What about the gendered aspects of this? Scriptures can be interpreted differently, and people will use them to attack others through that lens. In North America, for example, evangelical pastors often accuse women of having a “Jezebel spirit.” That’s different from calling someone satanic or possessed, which is more common in Kenya. How do you interpret this gendered lens when fundamentalist communities in Kenya attack male atheists versus female atheists?

How do you see the difference in how men and women are treated when they speak out as atheists in Kenya?

Nekesa: Again, it comes back to why Kenya is still considered liberal in some ways. Mumia, do you want to take this?

Mumia: No, no, but people do find it strange when a woman identifies as an unbeliever. There’s a lot of curiosity and surprise. Michelle, have you experienced that? It’s quite different for women.

Nekesa: Yes, I was talking about this. Yesterday, I spent 10 hours on Twitter, one of my favourite places to discuss these issues. We were discussing how, for men, especially those who believe in male superiority or champion patriarchy. It makes sense for them to be religious.

They use religious authority to support their arguments, even when those arguments are deeply flawed. But when it comes to women, it’s surprising to see them religious because why would you support a religion that requires you to be inferior to men? I remember telling my friends how, as a Catholic growing up, I noticed early on that women were always the ones cleaning the church.

Women would lead the choir and do everything except be priests. I was always curious, thinking, “They’re good enough to manage the welfare of the church, but suddenly they can’t sit on the big chairs?” As a child, I would wonder, “What does he have? Why does he get to sit on that altar with the big chair?” So, yes, I find it a bit confusing when women are staunchly religious compared to men.

Because for men, there are clear incentives to be religious, but for women, it’s like they’re going against their interests. Every day, especially online, you see African pastors preaching that if you have a cheating or abusive husband, don’t leave him—pray for him. So, being a woman in that space is tough.

Every day! I promise you, if I show you these videos daily, you’ll think I’m joking. These videos are from 2024, made by pastors all over the place. So, being a religious woman in that context doesn’t make sense. It’s like being against yourself. Yes, it could be clearer.

Jacobsen: Wow, that’s deep. I’m working with some women who are cataloging clergy-related abuse in Eastern Orthodoxy, particularly Greek and Romanian Orthodox churches. When these women go to conferences and meet others whom clergy or their congregation has victimized, women from these circumstances reported being told the same thing: “Just pray for your husband.” They need to be given real solutions.

Nekesa:  Yes, yes. And you know what’s crazy?

When you tie it to African culture—Mumia would know this—I always say it in Swahili and then translate it. It’s like “mwanamke mzuri ni mvumilivu,” which means a good woman or wife is persevering. The measure of a good wife is how much abuse she can absorb and tolerate.

So, if a woman wants to leave her husband, she’s seen as a bad wife. In my culture, a woman’s role is to hide the mess and shame of her husband. So imagine telling people, “I don’t want to clean his mess anymore. I want to leave.” They’d say, “You’re not a good woman, you’re not a good wife, and even the Bible says so.” Especially where African culture and religion intersect for women, it’s a dangerous place.

I see it firsthand. I see it all the time. Women of all classes and ethnicities or tribes in Kenya constantly discuss this. You go to a pastor and say, “My husband is abusive, whether sexually, financially, or physically.” And there’s no mention of the man’s actions.

The focus is always on, “What was your reaction?” Or they’re immediately gaslighted: “Maybe this is just the will of God, and you need to pray more. Have you been fasting? What role did you play in this? Did you trigger him? Were you submissive as the Bible says?”

It becomes this cycle of, “Why did I even come here? I might as well stay home and endure it.” It’s triggering for many women.

Jacobsen: I can imagine. Women who are in the middle range—perhaps not dealing with outright sexual assault but facing emotional and verbal abuse—go to their community, which, for many, is the church. They report, “I have a concern. I’m being abused. I’m being told I’m worthless.” Suppose the clergy don’t understand the context and how this impacts women as individuals. What happens to that woman when she’s told, “Pray more, fast more, and reflect on your sin first”?

Nekesa: I can think of a few cases. While they may not be as extreme as being outright told to pray and submit, there’s a blind spot we might be missing: these women trust these systems. They trust their religion. To them, there’s no possibility that the system or the people in it could be wrong. So, they’re often told, usually by polite or sensible leaders, “To be human is to be imperfect, and even Jesus died for our sins.”

They might not explicitly say it’s her fault, but they will take the passive approach, like, “Have you tried praying for him?” Because these women trust the voices of their clergy, they internalize this, thinking, “Oh, yes, I can’t believe I even had sinful thoughts of divorce or leaving my husband.” They may even feel guilty, thinking, “What did I do wrong? Maybe the abuse is my fault because I’m not sticking by him like I vowed, for better or for worse.”

Instead of feeling betrayed by their church or community, they feel they’ve betrayed God, their religion, or their husband by having sinful thoughts of leaving or breaking the marriage. It’s not always clear-cut or black and white.

Jacobsen: If a woman decides to leave, saying, “I’m tired of the abuse and the community’s denial of my abuse,” what happens within the community when the marriage is broken or a divorce occurs? How is that woman perceived?

Nekesa: Honestly, this is where our liberalism comes into play. While we are conservative in many ways, divorce is not such a foreign concept in Kenya. In the church, people may gossip or look down on a divorced woman because there’s much social capital attached to being a married woman, especially in Africa and within the African church. She will lose some social capital and respect, but more is needed to become completely isolated.

Of course, there will be a change in how she’s received. Before, she may have been seen as a “chosen wife,” representing a family, a marriage, or maybe even married to someone high in the church, like a deacon. After the divorce, she loses access to that status. However, unless she’s part of a strict, right-wing community, she will still retain many things, though to a lesser degree.

Jacobsen: Are there any final points you want to make in this interview? Go ahead.

Nekesa: Do I have any final points? Mumia, do you have any final points? For me personally, I saw a video that said, “Christianity is where women’s spirituality goes to die,” and I completely agreewith that. I don’t think mainstream religion provides a space for women to exist and be themselves as human beings outside of servitude to men. Mainstream religions, not just Christianity, don’t offer much for women in terms of autonomy.

Unless there’s some clear benefit—serious perks—I’ve always wondered how brilliant, strong women reconcile their faith with what the church demands. They often mention the community, the social capital, and the network they gain from the church. I get that, but on a deeper level, I don’t think the church has much to offer women. That’s my stance, and I’m quite comfortable with it.

That’s my final point. Mumia, do you have a final point?

Mumia:  I want to thank Scott for allowing us to engage with him, especially for the first time. I’m also happy Michelle joined. I’d like to know, “Where’s Michelle? Where’s Ella? Where’s Samson?” We have an executive committee, Scott, and I always like to have them participate in our engagements. So, anytime you want to talk to us again, email me.

I’ll bring the rest of the team so you can meet them. I hope we’ll meet in person one day, whether in Luxembourg or somewhere else, but I hope we do.

Jacobsen:  Prepare to be underwhelmed.

Nekesa: Haha, speak for yourself—just for the sake of banter!

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time and discussion today.

Nekesa: Good morning and good night, everyone.

Mumia: Yes, good night.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Art of Soulmaking Program

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/24

Caryn Roth is the Executive Director at Unconditional Freedom, where she leads transformative programs aimed at improving well-being in underserved populations, including incarcerated individuals. With a background in biomedical informatics and public health, she has a passion for data analysis and research. Caryn holds a Master’s in Public Health from The Ohio State University and has extensive experience in project management, analytics, and community engagement, having worked across various sectors to foster positive change. She is committed to creating impactful solutions that address societal challenges and promote health equity.

The Art of Soulmaking program connects incarcerated individuals with volunteers, fostering transformative growth through letter exchanges. The initiative promotes reflection, emotional well-being, and personal development. Survey results show reductions in stress, anger, and depression. Yoga and meditation complement the program, helping participants engage in meaningful self-exploration, and creating positive societal contributors.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired the creation of the Art of Soulmaking program? 

Caryn Roth: The author of the book, Nicole Daedone, focuses her work on “turning poison into medicine.” Taking that which we as individuals, or society, try to discard, to create richness, creativity and beauty. She saw the massive waste of human potential and money of prisons and saw a way to do prisons differently. Penitentiary comes from the word penitence, which means sorrowful reflection for the purpose of change. Daedone’s vision, “The Prison Monastery,” seeks to use prisons for their original intent of penitence, rather than punishment. The Prison Monastery uses the existing structures, protocols, and staff of prisons, but changes the intent from punishment to penitence.  There is an in-person program which was piloted and well-documented at two different penitentiaries. The Art Of Soulmaking represents “A monastery in a book,” a guidebook specifically written for those incarcerated to do the meaningful soul searching that leads to true change of the heart.  

Jacobsen: How has the COVID-19 pandemic shaped its development?

Roth: The program came to life during the COVID-19 pandemic. As Unconditional Freedom staff set out to implement The Prison Monastery at Central California Women’s Facility, they were informed that no one was allowed to visit because of COVID related lockdowns. However, they would allow for a correspondence course and penpal system. Daedone, with the help of Beth Wareham, wrote the book The Art of Soulmaking in three months while incarcerated women at CCWF signed up to participate. In November 2021, the program launched at CCWF with 73 women.  Within one year, there were over 400 women signed up for the program, quickly becoming the most popular program at CCWF with close to 20% of the population enrolled.  

Jacobsen: What has been the growth of Unconditional Freedom from zero to 50,000 participants in 1000+ facilities?

Roth: After the launch at CCWF, the Unconditional Freedom team quickly expanded the program. The initial expansion focus was on death row, where the incarcerated typically have the fewest privileges for community and outdoors. It was here that The Art Of Soulmaking could have an outsized impact. We sent out invitations for books, with a message that the book contained the opportunity to turn one’s cell into their monastery. Within 24 months, 7% of the entire death row population in the United States was enrolled. 

Every week we receive letters from incarcerated individuals who hear about the book and mail us requesting a free book. Since the launch in 2020, enabled by generous donors, we’ve been able to maintain our policy that we will ship a free book to anyone incarcerated who asks for one.  

Edovo, the prison tablet and education provider has also been an incredible partner and supporter. Edovo features The Art Of Soulmaking book, along with our videos and related programs on their tablet, bringing great awareness to their users of the program. 

Jacobsen: How do yoga, meditation, and other practices help the well-being of the incarcerated?

Roth: Yoga and meditation are offered as daily practices, along with freestyle writing, to support people as they go through The Art of Soulmaking journey. The journey of Art Of Soulmaking is both rewarding, and rigorous. Participants are asked to consider the types of questions that take a lifetime to answer. For example, can they find perfection within themselves in the face of anything destructive they may have done? What does forgiveness really mean for them? Yoga and meditation help ‘yolk’ the heart, body and mind, making them fertile and supple so that areas of deep pain, shame, and darkness become accessible for examination and transformation. 

Jacobsen: How does the letter exchange between volunteers and prisoners contribute to positive change?

Roth: The Art Of Soulmaking letter exchange is built uniquely. In this exchange, both volunteers and the incarcerated take the program.  Daedone’s vision is that we are all hungry for something. For example, those incarcerated can often suffer the pain of feeling invisible, forgotten, and shameful. Those outside of prison, too, have hungers: for deep emotional access, for rich connection, to touch “the other side” of those who could not fit in. We then build up these ideas of “other”. And humans don’t do well with “other.” However strong societal norms may reinforce these differences, they are not natural for us. We all yearn for the intimacy of being known, and knowing others. The letter exchange is built to capture these needs: as an exchange between two people, where both acknowledge the benefit of participating. Altruism is the outcome, though not the purpose.  

“Soul Letters exchanged with a penpal from the Order of Malta penpal program, bridged the gap between isolation and connection. For the first time, I felt seen, heard, and understood.” –Miguel Venancio, Kern Valley State Prison 

Jacobsen: What is the rate in anger, depression, and stress reduction? How are these measured? 

Roth: The Art of Soulmaking workbook contains two surveys that participants fill out – once at the start of the program and once after completing the workbook and exercises. The first has likert-scale survey questions where participants self-assess their levels of stress, anger, depression and other metrics.  The second is a Eudaimonia survey around metrics of life fulfillment. Responses are stored electronically and can be compared for individuals who fill out both pre- and post-survey. Our data is based on 120 response sets over the prior four years.

Jacobsen: What makes you confident the program works?

Roth: We have received letters that have shared with us how the Art of Soulmaking has transformed the point of view of those who are incarcerated from feeling that life is hopeless, not worth living, nobody cares about them, and they have given up to feeling hopeful and positive and seeing their life circumstances in a new way. Participants have shared experiences of release of long-held and destructive emotions, finding a sense of purpose while being incarcerated, mending key relationships with those outside of prison, and feeling more ready for release from prison.  Art of Soulmaking is not affiliated with any religion nor are we against any religion so there is room for people to have their own beliefs and explore our material and come to their own conclusion. The combination of the quantitative results we’ve seen, and the continuous feedback we get from the incarcerated sharing their stories and transformations has us know the program works. 

“My experience has been life-changing, because the information provided in the Art of Soulmaking lessons aids in restoring dignity.  Dignity empowers our purpose, as well as understanding the capacity to convert my life’s pain into a meaningful contribution that not only enlarges our circle of influence, but make a positive impact as well.” —Brent, AL

I have been in and out of jails, prison, and rehabs for the last eight years. Relapse after relapse charge after charge I had nothing to live for or so I thought, until I ran across your program again and started to value life again. Now I’m rebuilding bridges and seeing life from a different point of view and I think you for that.” —Jermele F, VA Beach Correctional

“The Art of Soulmaking has transformed me and my life here behind bars — I used to be very aggressive and outwardly negative. I showed no compassion to anyone. I have changed so much that the Officers in the Jail here have started to read about the Art of Soulmaking. I can communicate with compassion and I can see all situations clearly.” —Rich G, Jefferson County Jail, NY

Jacobsen: How does Unconditional Freedom work with prison authorities?

Roth: A unique component of our program is that we believe in changing the whole prison ecosystem. Daedone has written a corollary workbook for corrections officers, called Guards To Guardians, designed to help officers transform the traumas endured on the job and re-envision a way of doing incarcerated that focuses on cultivating transformation for those within their care. The program is supported by over 30 senior mentor officers who travel to prisons speaking about the program and mentor junior officers. Our holistic approach has been well-received by prison authorities, many of whom are eager to have our programming at their facilities. 

Jacobsen: What are the next steps?

Roth: The next step is adding a program called Art of Soulmaking: Free the Artist. Through our Art of Soulmaking program, we have been blown away by artwork which incarcerated residents send us, showcasing their genius and creativity. The Free the Artist program provides a place for participants submit to their art of any medium to be shared on a central, publicly accessible website and newsletter. In this way we continue to encourage creative expression and healing for those involved, and provide a platform for creativity otherwise locked away in prison to be expressed for the world 

Jacobsen: How do you plan to expand its reach?

Roth: There is potential for our program to reach 600,000 people on the Edovo tablet as they expand their reach into prisons across the country. We are currently in conversations with three prisons for in person programming, which would include Art of Soulmaking, yoga, meditation and gardening. 

Testimonials:

This one is so great: 

Anthony H

Bibb Correctional 

Brent, AL

I am very grateful for the Art of Soulmaking. I would like to receive the Art of Soulmaking packet and I am very interested in being a facilitator. My experience has been life-changing, because the information provided in the Art of Soulmaking lessons aids in restoring dignity.  Dignity empowers our purpose, as well as understanding the capacity to convert my life’s pain into a meaningful contribution that not only enlarges our circle of influence, but make a positive impact as well. I love the alchemist paradigm as taught by the Art of Soulmaking, converting pain into power, poison into medicine, getting the crown out of the cross. Thank you Unconditional Freedom Project for your time and concern for us and we are now in a Monastery instead of a Prison.

This is a good one: 

Charles Finney, Union Correctional, Death Row

The Unconditional Freedom Program appeared to me as a means to recognize and escape the mental chains that bind one’s soul. Meditation and yoga exercise is the key to unlocking the inner regions of the self. I believe that ignorance is a much greater prison than bars and cement, so it doesn’t matter where you are in life, it’s what you make it that counts. I make all my sculptures out of q-tips and paper towels, so it doesn’t matter what you have if you find a way to use it and let your soul shine.

Jermele F

VA Beach Correctional

I am an inmate at Virginia Beach Correctional C’enter and I was sentenced to the drug program due to my addiction and upon completion I get to go back in front of the judge with my certificate and completion letter and have a chance to give my time back to the program. But it really wasn’t giving me the help I truly needed so I started taking courses on the Edovo tablet in order to further chase my sobriety. That’s when I stumbled across your course and read the Art of Soulmaking.  

I learned the art of yoga. I learned meditation. I learned how to tap into the inner me. I finished the course, earned the certificate. But I feel I can learn so much more from you guys. Can you send me information so I can share with my classmates? We need this program in this facility. I will be presenting the certificate I earned for passing your course and telling them that your program helped me rewire my brain and made my stay here not so bad. In the end, there was a part that said share your story and maybe I will help someone so here is a little bit about me.

I have been in and out of jails, prison, and rehabs for the last eight years. Relapse after relapse charge after charge I had nothing to live for or so I thought, until I ran across your program again and started to value life again. Now I’m rebuilding bridges and seeing life from a different point of view and I think you for that. I would love to go more into detail with my story. Maybe I’ll help someone.

Jose Mendiola, High Desert State Prison

My experience with the program was a pivotal moment in my life. It shows me that people do

care of the hard things that other people go through without even knowing who I am. It

changed me now because I care about others too now. When I can help them, I do my best and I feel very good when I help them. I feel like I made a difference for the greater good of this world.

Rich G testimonial 

Jefferson County Jail, NY

The Art of Soulmaking has transformed me and my life here behind bars — I used to be very aggressive and outwardly negative. I showed no compassion to anyone. I have changed so much that the Officers in the Jail here have started to read about the Art of Soulmaking. I can communicate with compassion and I can see all situations clearly. 

Michael D. Gallman

Evans Correctional Institution 

I let my pride get the best of me and I’m always stressing over the little things. But since I’ve taken this course, it taught me the unique ways of life. By me feeling confident and positive about the New Me, I know how to deal with things on a daily basis.  It took me forty five years to truly find myself. But once I did, I really do feel proud of myself. Faith is taking the first step, even when you don’t see the whole staircase.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tony Newberne, High-Risk Myeloma Survival & Clinical Trials

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/23

Tony Newberne, a 10+ year survivor of high-risk myeloma, remains on continuous treatment. He is a certified personal trainer, dietary manager, and an active patient advocate for national nonprofits like the PAN Foundation. In his spare time, Tony enjoys quality moments with his partner and Doberman, tending to his vegetable garden, and relaxing with a good Netflix series. His resilience and advocacy work make him a dedicated supporter of health and wellness initiatives. Newberne discussed his myeloma journey, treatment experiences, and challenges in accessing clinical trials. Despite repeated denials, Newberne remains a patient advocate for clinical trial diversity, especially for Black men and the LGBTQIA+ community. The conversation touched on barriers in the American healthcare system and the importance of clinical trial access. Newberne emphasized positivity, thriving despite challenges, and the need for more outreach to underrepresented groups. They also shared travel experiences and reflections on life.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Tony Newberne to discuss clinical trials, particularly the different experiences and distinctions people can have. I’ve already spoken to Amy and Bill. Bill’s response focused more on his extensive experience, dating back to 2003, with prostate cancer. Now, yourself—what has your journey been with myeloma?

Tony Newberne: My journey with myeloma started when I was 39. On September 18th, 2013, I was diagnosed with high-risk multiple myeloma. At the time of diagnosis, I was given a 30% chance of surviving my hospital stay and a 50% chance of living for one year. When I was diagnosed, I was already in complete renal failure and had four lumbar fractures at L1, L2, L3, and L4. I underwent a stem cell transplant and received multiple blood transfusions, as well as radiation therapy. After spending 2-3 weeks in the hospital, I spent an additional two weeks in a rehabilitation facility. However, I don’t let this diagnosis defeat me. I remain positive, and I consider myself a thriver with multiple myeloma.

Jacobsen: How have repeated denials from clinical trials impacted your journey in fighting cancer?

Newberne: Yes, I have faced denials for clinical trials twice. The first time was in 2013 when I was initially diagnosed as critically ill. My oncologist informed me about a clinical trial he was involved in and recommended that I participate. I wanted to be part of the cure and was optimistic. Of course, I was eager to participate. However, due to being on dexamethasone for an extended period, I had exceeded the allowable limit for prior treatment, which disqualified me from the trial.

The second denial happened more recently, after my relapse in March of this year—March 2024. My oncologist informed me of the relapse and told me about a Phase 3 clinical trial called MonumenTAL-3. He wanted me to be part of that trial. Again, I was eager to participate. As a Black male, I wanted to represent and inspire other Black men to participate in clinical trials. Unfortunately, my doctor changed my treatment regimen, moving me from 14 days on treatment with 14 days off to 21 days on treatment with seven days off. Because of this change, they considered it a new line of treatment. I was no longer eligible for the trial. Both my doctor and I were frustrated by this decision.

I remain a willing and able participant but have not had the opportunity to join a clinical trial. I share this because I see, particularly among Black men, a tendency to avoid the doctor, preferring to be outdoors or stay active at home. Even men who take their health more seriously sometimes hold back. 20% of men admit they haven’t always been honest with their doctors, and I want to help change that.

Jacobsen: What are some of the systemic barriers in this context? Members of the LGBTQIA+ community and the African American community face unique challenges. When men from these communities consider participating in clinical trials or even going to the doctor, what barriers—especially psychological ones—consistently arise, as you alluded to earlier?

Newberne: Yes. Before we discuss this topic, I’d like to mention the PAN Foundation, a nonprofit organization with over 20 years of experience advocating for equitable access to health care through financial assistance, advocacy, education, and more. They are deeply committed, as am I, to accelerating everyone’s access to treatment. When I say everyone, I mean all people.

This commitment to health equity includes increasing participation and diversity in clinical trials. The lack of diversity in clinical trials poses a significant barrier to optimizing future medical advances for all. PAN provides clinical trial information to help people understand the underrepresentation of certain populations. This includes people of color, myself included as a Black gay man. Other marginalized communities also show strong interest and positive perceptions about clinical trials.

However, these populations—myself included—are not being asked or provided with the necessary information to participate. These communities are not hard to reach, we’re hardly reached. PAN wants to change that, and so do I, by ensuring we receive the information we need to make informed decisions about clinical trial participation.

As a Black, gay male, I want to play my part in clinical trials while also not being subjected to discrimination or barriers to access, as I have experienced multiple times, unfortunately.

Jacobsen: Bill mentioned in an earlier interview today—and maybe it was Amy as well—that when it comes to getting more people from underrepresented groups involved in clinical trials, it’s not about a lack of interest. It’s as simple as reaching out to those communities more effectively. It’s basically about making contact. On one hand, many people don’t know about clinical trials or how to access them. On the other hand, those running the trials aren’t doing enough outreach. That seems to be the issue.

Newberne: Absolutely. They are not doing enough outreach. Even in rural areas—and I live in a big city, a metropolitan area—despite that, Black men and other minorities often hesitate when it comes to health care. Men, in general, tend to participate in clinical trials more than women and often have more positive views about them.

When we talk about LGBTQIA+ men, we tend to be more knowledgeable and have more positive perceptions about clinical trials than LGBTQIA+ women. According to PAN’s research, Black men, although historically underrepresented in clinical trials, had more knowledge and better perceptions of clinical trials than white men. The survey showed that Black men had a higher perception and awareness of clinical trials than white men.

Jacobsen: Certain groups generally have a friendlier perception of clinical trials. So even though there’s a high level of trust in clinical trials, why aren’t more people from the general public reaching out to say, “I’m so-and-so, and I’m interested because I have XYZ condition, ranging from a severity of 0 to 10”?

Newberne: Yes, patients often enlist and trust their doctors. I’ll speak for myself here—I trust my doctors and talk to them about this. We need them to advocate for us with clinical trials. Sure, I can reach out to pharmaceutical companies or send an email. Still, I don’t feel like they’ll take us seriously unless it comes from someone with a PhD or a physician or psychiatrist—someone they see as important.

They don’t view us or me as important because I’m just a regular patient. I also believe that if pharmaceutical companies or clinical trial developers could eliminate the term “clinical trial” and replace it with something else—I don’t know what exactly—they’d see many more people willing to participate. More people would say, “I’m available, I’m here, pick me.”

I want to do it. I want to help change the lives of other patients. I want to get more of our people involved. We want to be part of the process. We want to be part of the cure. I’m that guy. I want to do that. Unfortunately, I continue not to have that opportunity.

Jacobsen: I’m reminded of the ethic of caring for others—like how people give blood or participate in clinical trials, regardless of the name. It’s the same idea of giving back in different contexts, whether donating blood or participating in clinical trials, even if we change the name. If you could come up with a different name for “clinical trials,” what would you call it”?

Newberne: “Open Doors Trial.” I was thinking of something like an open-door policy or something less clinical and less focused on the idea of a study. It needs to be something more relatable, something patients can connect to. Maybe something like “treatment access” or “treatment trial.” When people hear “clinical trial,” it almost feels like they’re being used as guinea pigs, especially because of the history of the Tuskegee trials from back in the day.

Jacobsen: That idea of focusing on the feel of the phrasing is important. Words that reflect what they are—like “tow truck” or “ashcan “—feel gritty, like the thing itself.

Newberne: Yes, exactly. 

Jacobsen: That’s a marketing and messaging issue, for sure. It’s about the language. So, putting public relations aside, let’s focus on that “Open Doors to Clinical Trials” initiative you mentioned, what can you tell me about that particular initiative from the PAN Foundation? How might that initiative have changed your experience if it had been in place earlier?

Newberne: So, with PAN launching the Open Doors to Clinical Trials initiative, offering an easy-to-navigate platform, a digital trial finder tool, and 1-on-1 support with experts who can help navigate the complexities of trials and identity barriers, they’ve transformed access through their website. I encourage people to visit clinicaltrials.panfoundation.org to learn more about clinical trials, search for trials in their area, and get1-on-1 support.. They’re doing tremendous work.

The PAN Foundation is truly exceptional. I’ve been involved with a few foundations. Still, when I first connected with PAN in 2023 for advocacy work on Capitol Hill, it felt like family. They were open, honest, accepting, loving, caring, and patient-driven. It exceeded all my expectations. I’ll do anything for the PAN Foundation.

Jacobsen: The American health care system differs from the Canadian system. I’m calling from Canada. There are broader challenges within the American system. How do those general issues—like drug costs and access to care—impact clinical trial access, especially for historically underrepresented populations? How do those challenges stack on top of existing barriers?

Newberne: First and foremost, funding is a huge issue. It’s expensive. Drug costs, access to care, and people having to decide, “Do I pay for this life-saving treatment? Do I cover my co-pays? Do I get an MRI? Or do I pay my mortgage? Keep the lights on this month? Buy groceries?” It’s so disheartening. The debt people can go into because of treatments is staggering. These treatments can be life-saving, but people must choose between bettering their health or avoiding financial ruin.

Getting into a clinical trial can be a game changer because you need to pay out of pocket or deal with co-pays for that trial. It could save your life, help improve your quality of life, and you won’t be burdened with medical debt. If you’re not in a trial, you’re paying for treatments, and those costs could put you into debt. 

Jacobsen: Medical debt is the number one reason for bankruptcy in the United States. 

Newberne: That’s why more people should be aware of organizations like PAN that can provide financial assistance and critical education on healthcare access.  

Jacobsen: So, do you have any final points, words, or calls to action for people based on our conversation today?

Newberne: My final point is to stay positive. Live life to the fullest, regardless of the health challenges you may be facing. Smile, and be there for your family and friends who love and support you. Allow them to be a part of your life to help make it better in any way they can. Don’t just survive—thrive. Be good to yourself. If your mental health is struggling, get help. Be kind to yourself because I don’t think we talk about mental health enough.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Tony, thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today.

Newberne: Thank you so much, Scott. It was such a pleasure meeting you.

Jacobsen: Likewise. Bye, Tony.

The PAN Foundation’s recent survey, conducted in collaboration with The Harris Poll, reveals a strong interest in clinical trials among underrepresented communities, including people of color and LGBTQIA+ individuals. The data highlights that while 83% of people of color and 86% of LGBTQIA+ respondents view clinical trials positively, a significant gap exists in participation rates. A major barrier is that many have never been invited to participate, despite showing interest. The survey also found that most people trust their healthcare providers, but only 22% of people of color and 20% of LGBTQIA+ individuals have had discussions with their doctors about clinical trial opportunities.

In response to these findings, the PAN Foundation has launched the Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative, designed to increase diversity and participation in clinical trials. This initiative offers resources like the ComPANion Access Navigators, who provide personalized support, and an online trial finder to help individuals navigate the process. By addressing barriers such as medical mistrust and logistical challenges, the PAN Foundation aims to create a more inclusive environment for clinical research, ensuring underrepresented populations have the opportunity to participate and contribute to advancements in healthcare.

For anyone ready to take the next step in learning more about clinical trials and how to get involved, visit the PAN Foundation’s Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative at clinicaltrials.panfoundation.org.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Bill Allen on Prostate Cancer and Personal Experience in Clinical Trials

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/22

Bill Allen has been living with prostate cancer since 2004, undergoing various treatments including surgeries, radiation, bone scans, and white blood cell transfusions. Prior to his retirement in 2013, he enjoyed a 40-year career with Travelers Insurance Company. Now, he fills his time with gardening, golfing, line dancing, and cherishing moments with his grandchildren and family. Allen spoke about his personal journey with prostate cancer, starting in 2003. Allen discusses his diagnosis, treatment, including surgery and radiation, and the challenges of clinical trials and medication. He emphasizes the importance of healthcare equity, particularly for African Americans, and highlights his participation in trials despite concerns, showing the value of patient representation and awareness in medical research.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, Bill, should we start with the personal aspects or clinical trial information? Let’s start with your journey. What is your personal experience as someone living with prostate cancer? How did you find out? How has it progressed? What is the process like for men who may not know what to look for? 

Bill Allen: Let’s begin in 2003. I had an annual exam. It’s important, especially after the age of 50, to have an annual check-up, which for me includes a digital rectal exam (DRE) of the prostate gland performed by my general practitioner. During that exam in 2003, I was advised that there was something slightly unusual about my prostate. My doctor wanted me to follow up. This was toward the end of the year, around October or November 2003. In 2004, I scheduled an appointment with a urologist who conducted further tests, including a biopsy. About a week or so after the biopsy, I was informed that I had prostate cancer.

Another indicator was my PSA level, which had risen to 12.5. That was another signal to my physician that further investigation was needed. My Gleason score came back at 7, with the highest score being 10, indicating that the cancer was moderately aggressive. So, I had to make some treatment decisions. In 2004, I was advised about the various treatment options available for prostate cancer at that time.

Not understanding what prostate cancer entailed, all I heard was the word “cancer,” and it hit me hard. I was overwhelmed with distress, depression, anxiety, and concern. It was traumatic. I remember going home that day; my wife, an educator, was at work. I have two sons—my oldest was in college in 2004, and my younger one was also away at school but had come home. The news just knocked the wind out of me.

Later, my wife and I met with the urologist, and they walked us through several treatment options. There was a range of therapies, including brachytherapy (seed implants), radiation, a prostatectomy, or a combination of radiation and hormone treatments. It took some time, but by May, I decided the best option for me was to have the cancer surgically removed from my body. I underwent a prostatectomy.

Back then, the procedure was more invasive than it is today. I like to say they “deleted” you. It’s a serious surgery. Nowadays, it’s done robotically, requiring just a small incision to remove the gland, and patients recover much more quickly. But in my case, they had to perform traditional open surgery. I stayed in the hospital for several days and went home with a catheter and medication. A home healthcare nurse visited to ensure my recovery was progressing well. The healing process took about eight weeks, and that’s the summary of my journey.

That was in 2006. I returned to work, and around 2010, my PSA rose again. The urologist, who was my primary caregiver at the time, had been monitoring me with periodic PSA blood tests. When my PSA began to rise, they recommended radiation. This meant they needed to radiate the prostate bed, which is the area where the prostate gland had been removed. They believed that some cancer cells were still present in that area.

I received treatment at Virginia Commonwealth University’s Massey Cancer Center in Richmond, Virginia, where I was living at the time. I underwent about 36 radiation treatments.

Jacobsen: Thirty-six treatments? How often were those?

Allen: Yes, 36 treatments, roughly one per week. During this time, I continued working, traveling, and flying for my job. I would come back home on certain days, often on a Thursday or Friday, to receive the radiation treatment. Fortunately, I experienced no major side effects and could continue working throughout the treatment.

During this time, one of the clinicians asked if I wanted to participate in a clinical trial. The study involved testing several drugs to determine if they could mitigate any side effects, lower my PSA, or prevent the spread of cancer. I considered it, and they provided me with all the documents and consent forms. I reviewed everything with my wife since this was all new to me. I’d never participated in a clinical trial before.

I had some reservations, especially being an African American man. I had attended an HBCU, Xavier University of Louisiana, in New Orleans, and I was aware of the troubling history of clinical trials that adversely affected African Americans. We all know about cases like Henrietta Lacks and others who were unknowingly subjected to experimentation.

Jacobsen: Given that history, what made you go through with it?

Allen: Despite my concerns, I decided to participate in the trial. I wanted to do everything I could to prevent the cancer from spreading, and I also saw the potential benefit for others if the drugs proved effective in treating prostate cancer. I started taking two drugs alongside the radiation. After my 36-week course of radiation ended, I continued in the clinical trial, going back to the clinic regularly for blood tests and check-ins with the clinician about how I was feeling and any side effects.

For the first few months, everything seemed fine. But about six months in, I started feeling off—exhausted and tired when I normally wouldn’t be. I shared this with the clinician and eventually decided I didn’t want to continue with the trial.

They said, “We’ll take you off. Come back, and we’ll still monitor you for a few visits. After a while, you should feel okay.”

And that’s what I did. So that was my introduction. The hardest part was making the decision and then dealing with what might have been a side effect, but I didn’t want to continue. I’m not sure whether that combination of drugs had any long-term effects on my condition. That was in 2010.

I’m still working, but my PSA rose again. I kept talking with my urologist, who was still my provider. That’s when I started hormone treatments, specifically with a drug called Lupron. It reduces the testosterone in your body, so the cancer doesn’t have the fuel to grow.

However, Lupron has other effects. It’s almost like medical castration, as it impacts your testes, testosterone levels, and muscle mass. It drastically reduces your testosterone, changing your physical makeup. I was getting the shot every three months, and it worked. Since 2010, I’ve been on hormone therapy. Over time, I moved from getting the shot every three months to now getting it every six months. Since moving from Virginia to Maryland, I now see a local urologist who manages my treatment.

Up until 2020, my PSA remained stable. It’s not at zero, but at about 0.1 or 0.2, which is very low and good. That means the cancer hasn’t metastasized or spread to other organs. Prostate cancer tends to attack the lymph nodes or bone marrow, which is where it does the most harm.

So, I’m trying to get my chronology straight here—I’m still on androgen therapy, and now I’ve been advised to consider oral therapy. There are two drugs I could take that would help minimize the rise of my PSA and specifically target the cancer proteins. At first, I didn’t want to take the drugs because their side effects seemed worse than the remedy itself.

I looked at one drug and read the detailed information about medications—the side effects, how to take it, when it was developed, and data from the trials. When I read about these oral drugs, I focused on how many people like me were in those studies.

If a study included 1,200 participants, the information would tell you what happened to those men. Some got sick, and some even died, though not necessarily from the drug but from the cancer itself. However, I didn’t see many participants who looked like me, and that made me hesitant about taking the drug because these drugs are a lot more powerful. So, I decided to wait and see instead of starting the oral therapy right away.

But eventually, I had to come around and make the decision to take oral medication to help with my prostate cancer. As of today, I’m on oral chemotherapy, and I still take my androgen or Lupron shots. I take four tablets a day. The cost of the oral medication is about $15,000 a bottle, which makes each pill worth around $120.

That was another reason for my hesitation. I’m retired, and while I have retirement income, covering that cost significantly impacts my life moving forward. It becomes a situation where you ask yourself: do you choose to live to die or die to live? I guess that’s the analogy I would use if you’re debating whether or not to take a drug.

Fortunately, the urologist and the practice I’m with have a unit specializing in writing grants. They help patients access funds to cover the cost of treatment for certain high-cost diseases. The funding is based on the disease, and they’ll cover some of the cost. I’m a Medicare recipient with a supplemental insurance plan, which helps, but my monthly copay was still close to $2,000.

That’s where the PAN Foundation came in. I learned about PAN, and they agreed to cover the cost of the medication for a year. You have to reapply for the grant every year, but I’m thankful to have a provider that offers this kind of service to its patients. And I’m also grateful for organizations like PAN, whose mission is to help individuals with diseases by covering the cost of medications that would otherwise be unaffordable.

With PAN’s help, I’ve been able to manage. My cancer did metastasize, and it spread to a lymph node in the upper lateral part of my body. In 2020, I had additional radiation to address the spread, and that seemed to work. It reduced the cancer in the lymph nodes, and I haven’t had any further problems.

The major issue I haven’t faced is that it hasn’t spread to my bones, which is a good sign. So, the decisions I’ve made about my health, along with the advice of my doctors, seem to be working. They provide much guidance, and I listen—when I say “sometimes,” it means I don’t always want to jump into the next suggested treatment immediately. There are some really exciting advancements in the treatment of prostate cancer in men.

There are many drugs available in the marketplace, and as your cancer progresses, you can move to the next stage of treatment. The goal is to keep your PSA from increasing and prevent the spread of the disease. So, when I say I listen to my doctors, they offer me various therapies. Still, it’s my choice to determine if I need that therapy at a particular moment. That’s always my question—do I need to do this now?

Where do I need to be in your health situation to start on a new plan or a new drug? Is there a point in the future where it might be too late if I wait too long, or could I delay starting too soon? These medications can significantly affect your physical health and well-being.

These drugs can make you tired, cause headaches and fatigue, and, in some cases, even lead to heart attacks or other cardiovascular issues. So, I want to be very careful about the approach I take. If I can manage my health as it is right now, that’s what I feel comfortable doing.

But as long as my doctors stay on top of things—they run CT and bone scans—they’re ensuring my bones are strong. I’m on calcium, vitamin D3, and other supplements to help support my immune system. I’ve taken a real interest in maintaining good health because I feel good.

I don’t have any pain from the prostate cancer. I can do my gardening, I can do my line dancing, I can go on trips, and I can spend quality time with my family and grandkids. That lets me control my feelings about what I can and can’t do, if that makes sense.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. Now, let’s focus for a moment on an important issue. Studies show that around 90% of people of colour in the United States trust healthcare providers. Still, participation in clinical trials is much lower. Can you share your thoughts on this and your reasons for encouraging more participation, especially within African American communities?

Allen: There are several factors at play. The first is perception. Many people don’t have a positive reaction to clinical trials. I had a positive experience with clinical trials. Most men—around 83%—view clinical trials as something positive. So, the general perception is good.

However, when it comes to participation, people want more information. In a study conducted by PAN, 58% of men of color said they would participate in clinical trials if they knew more about them. The survey also revealed that motivation plays a key role. For me, part of my motivation was helping others. Similarly, in PAN’s study, 40% of men of color said they would participate because they knew it could benefit others.

Trust in the provider, trial representation, and awareness of how clinical trials can break down barriers are critical. In the African American community, about 34% said they would participate, which is encouraging. They need to know when, where, and how it’s done.

The PAN Foundation has been working on this through its initiative. They’ve developed an “Opening Doors to Clinical Trials” website with a trial finder. Patients can search for clinical trials based on their specific disease and location—down to the zip code. Universities or clinics often run clinical trials, so it’s important to make this information accessible.

They’re run by different disease organizations. As I mentioned earlier, I have a brother, a nephew, and a cousin—she’s female—who participate in clinical trials for a degenerative disease called ataxia, which runs in my family. This disease originated on my mother’s side. Four of her siblings, including herself, passed away from this disease.

I have two brothers who have ataxia. One is in a clinical trial, and the other has passed away. So, I can see the value of having representation in clinical trials, even within my family. My family members’ motivation is to help any other relative who may face this disease in the future, which is crucial because this condition is genetic.

Awareness is key here—knowing where to find information is essential. From what I’ve learned, the PAN Foundation has prioritized patients in its efforts, ensuring equitable access to healthcare for individuals with various conditions.

Jacobsen: Bill, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Allen: Thank you. I appreciate being part of this. Well, is that enough information for you?

Allen: Yes, this is good. Including a personal story is quite nice. It adds a dimension to the discussion that makes it relatable.

Jacobsen: It’s a long personal story, starting back in 2003. That makes it even more helpful. Because for me, I didn’t know the journey could be so prolonged. I thought it was a matter of surgery or treatment, and then it’s over. But now I see how much it has evolved. Your story also reduces the stigma around trials and doctors, especially when you mention how surgery techniques have advanced—from being invasive to now being laparoscopic That’s helpful.

Allen: Yes, it’s quite an improvement.

Jacobsen: Thank you again.

Allen: You have a good day.

Jacobsen: You too. Take care.

The PAN Foundation’s recent survey, conducted in collaboration with The Harris Poll, reveals a strong interest in clinical trials among underrepresented communities, including people of color and LGBTQIA+ individuals. The data highlights that while 83% of people of color and 86% of LGBTQIA+ respondents view clinical trials positively, a significant gap exists in participation rates. A major barrier is that many have never been invited to participate, despite showing interest. The survey also found that most participants trust their healthcare providers, but only 22% of people of color and 20% of LGBTQIA+ individuals have had discussions with their doctors about clinical trial opportunities.

In response to these findings, the PAN Foundation has launched the Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative, designed to increase diversity and participation in clinical trials. This initiative offers resources like the ComPANion Access Navigators, who provide personalized support, and an online trial finder to help individuals navigate the process. By addressing barriers such as medical mistrust and logistical challenges, the PAN Foundation aims to create a more inclusive environment for clinical research, ensuring underrepresented populations have the opportunity to participate and contribute to advancements in healthcare.

For anyone ready to take the next step in learning more about clinical trials and how to get involved, visit the PAN Foundation’s Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative at clinicaltrials.panfoundation.org.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Amy Niles on Underrepresented Communities in Clinical Trials

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/21

 Amy Niles is a dedicated healthcare executive with over 30 years of experience in nonprofit leadership, strategy, and public health advocacy. As PAN’s Chief Mission Officer, she drives education initiatives, advocacy strategies, and public policy efforts. In 2013, she developed PAN’s national advocacy platform, positioning the organization as a trusted resource for policymakers. Passionate about patient access to care, she has also led successful healthcare startups and serves on the Specialty Pharmacy Certification Board and advisory boards. Niles discusses the importance of increasing participation in clinical trials, particularly from underrepresented communities like people of color, LGBTQIA+, and men. Niles emphasizes the need for education and communication between healthcare providers and patients to foster trust and encourage participation in these vital studies for advancing medical science.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Amy Niles from the PAN Foundation. It’s important to begin by defining key terms clearly. Here’s a question: How would you differentiate clinical trials from other trials, particularly within healthcare?

Amy Niles: To help people better understand what we’re discussing today, we are focusing on encouraging participation in clinical trials for diseases and conditions that affect many individuals and specific medications. We don’t want to see trials conducted with limited representation from certain communities, followed by broad generalizations about the effectiveness of medications or treatments. This approach can lead to an incomplete understanding of the impact, particularly on underrepresented groups like men, the LGBTQIA+ community, and others. Historically, many participants in clinical trials have likely come from backgrounds similar to mine—middle-aged or older—which skews the statistical outcomes of the research.

As you mentioned, this doesn’t make the results as generalizable across the entire population as we would hope. The sample is often not representative of the general population. To advance medical knowledge and ensure real progress, it is essential that as many communities as possible are represented in these trials.

Jacobsen: When it comes to increasing participation from diverse populations in clinical trials, how does this align with the efforts of many organizations to improve diversity, equity, and access? Many organizations are focusing on these issues, which are practical and crucial to people’s lives, impacting not just life-and-death matters but also routine checkups and health maintenance throughout one’s lifetime.

Niles: Many of us, particularly men, must focus more on our health. Men often avoid visiting healthcare providers, skip annual checkups and miss important preventive measures and screenings. According to the CDC, men are 33% less likely than women to visit their doctors. The first step in addressing this is to educate everyone, especially men, about the importance of going to the doctor. Preventing disease and addressing health issues early benefits the individual and the healthcare system.

What became clear in the national poll we conducted is that across all communities—whether men, women, people of colour, or the LGBTQIA+ community—there is a general interest in clinical trials. People want to learn more about clinical trials to decide if participation might be right for them. However, they have not participated primarily because they haven’t been asked. These conversations simply aren’t happening with their healthcare providers.

They don’t have the information to make informed decisions. That’s why returning to ensuring men visit their healthcare providers is the first step. If they can see their healthcare providers, that conversation may happen. Generally speaking, we found that 1 in 5 individuals were conversing with their healthcare providers about clinical trials, another key initiative to focus on. It’s about empowering individuals with knowledge and encouraging healthcare providers to have these conversations with their patients.

Jacobsen: With the recent survey and your findings about participation in clinical trials, what are some of the things that stood out, apart from expectations?

Niles: Overall, what we found was broad interest across the population. We surveyed more than 4,000 individuals and oversampled for various communities. Six out of 10 respondents expressed interest in participating in clinical trials. Many of us have heard the myth that people don’t want to participate, but we found the opposite. They do want to participate. Close to 9 out of 10 individuals said they need more basic information about clinical trials—understanding potential costs, confidentiality issues, etc. If they have this information, they may be more inclined to participate.

The overarching finding was that the key reason for not participating was a need for more information and conversations with healthcare providers. We like to say these populations are not hard to reach—they are hardly reached. They want this information. Clinical trials may not be for everyone, but at least people are open-minded and want to learn more. They recognize not only the potential positive impact on themselves but also on others like them who are living with the same illness. This work is vital for advancing medical science.

Jacobsen: Which population came out as the most neglected? If you look at it proportionately, which populations tend to be clinically unseen?

Niles: I would say—and I’m looking at our data because we have a lot of statistics here—that people of color, generally speaking, had a positive view of clinical trials. When we looked at people of color, 83% had a positive view, and 58% expressed interest in participating—a little more than 1 in 2. We can certainly do a better job of educating people of color about clinical trials. They strongly trust their healthcare providers, as do most individuals across the dimensions we surveyed. Still, only 20%, or 1 in 5, are having these conversations.

A similar trend emerged in the LGBTQIA+ community. Eighty-six percent had a positive view of clinical trials, and 65% were interested in participating. The message here is that, through the PAN Foundation, we are trying to educate everyone about the importance of clinical trials, no matter what community they belong to. We are definitely focused on increasing diversity in clinical trials.

How do we reach these communities with more information? It’s through initiatives like the one we just launched. Still, it’s also through community work because health happens at the community level. Partnerships with other organizations, particularly those focused on specific communities—such as the LGBTQIA+ or African American community—are key to spreading the message and reaching these populations.

Jacobsen: And what about the factor of mistrust? You’re reporting wide trust, but mistrust is still a factor. How are you considering this in light of the generally high trust toward healthcare providers? When you talk about mistrust, what is the factor at play here if trust is already high?

Niles: There is some mistrust, and rightly so, in various communities about clinical trials because of egregious practices that have occurred in the past. When we asked, for example, among people of coloror in general, only some were fully aware of these past practices and the misrepresentations that have taken place. In our view, this was a positive finding—that not everyone was aware of—because it presents a unique opportunity to change perceptions about clinical trials and encourage participation. Trust in healthcare providers is generally high in all the populations we surveyed. The challenge is that healthcare providers need to initiate these conversations, and individuals should be empowered to view clinical trials as a potential treatment option and feel confident in raising questions about whether a trial might be appropriate for them.

Jacobsen: How do you provide personal support for patients considering clinical trials? How do you ensure that individuals get the personalized support they need?

Niles: One of the things I want to explain is our initiative called “Opening Doors to Clinical Trials,” which may answer your question. We’ve just launched a robust digital platform designed to explain clinical trials because they can be difficult to understand. We directly address the potential mistrust that people may have, especially due to past practices. We’re not shying away from it. We want to be transparent and provide clear information on accessing clinical trials.

That’s the first part of the initiative. The second part is the development of what we call our “Trial Finder Tool,” which is more user-friendly than clinicaltrials.gov. It helps individuals find clinical trials that may be beneficial to them.

But to answer your question more specifically, the third piece of our initiative involves our “Companion Access Navigators.” These are live people that individuals can speak to about clinical trials. They can help answer questions like: How do I find clinical trials? How do I have this conversation with my healthcare provider? What costs might I face if I participate in a clinical trial, and how do I navigate those costs?

In the first few weeks of launching this initiative, we’ve received calls about clinical trials and the “social drivers of health.” These are often the issues that prevent people from accessing healthcare in general. For example, suppose someone struggles to afford food, pay rent, or cover utility bills. In that case, these everyday life challenges may prevent them from focusing on important steps to improve their health, like going to the doctor or considering participation in a clinical trial. Through our navigators, we’re helping address these concerns by connecting people with resources in their local communities to alleviate those burdens and reduce the stress those factors can cause.

Jacobsen: How do you get men involved? I suspect this is generational, too. It’s probably a trite observation, but—

Niles: No, you are correct in general. Younger individuals may be more open to having a conversation about clinical trials. ‘How do we get men involved?’

There’s no easy answer for that. One way is to do interviews like this and get information through the media and publications, certainly through our website. We get a lot of visitors to our site, so we’d like to raise awareness that way. Another strategy is building relationships with organizations solely focused on men’s health; a few out there are doing a good job of that. We also speak at conferences and do media interviews.

There’s no single way to approach this. Men are one area of focus for us, as are people of color, the LGBTQIA+ community, and others. As a concept, diversity is broad and can be defined in many ways. So, we’re working all the angles—reaching men through their partners and spouses, for example.

I was the CEO of a national women’s health organization. I often say that women are typically the “health CEOs” of their families, which is generally true. So, working with women to encourage their partners and spouses to focus on their health is another opportunity. 

Jacobsen:We find, and this may also be generational, that married men tend to live longer and healthier lives than those who are not married. That factor may be influencing that cohort as well.

Niles: I have a statistic from the Global Burden of Disease Study. It states that men’s life expectancy is 6.5 years shorter than women’s. So, regardless of the numbers, we have a long way to go in improving our focus on prevention in this country and engaging people—no matter what community they’re part of—in their health.

Jacobsen: What are companion access navigators?

Niles: It’s a play on our organization’s name, PAN. PAN is a national healthcare organization whose sole focus is accelerating treatment access. We do that in three ways.

First, we provide financial assistance to people eligible for our programs to help cover the treatment costs they need. Second, we advocate for policy solutions to improve access to care. Third, we focus on education, including clinical trials as part of our education efforts, and advocacy, as legislation focuses on diversity in clinical trials.

Our companion access navigators respond live to questions people might have about clinical trials. They help people understand where to start and walk them through the process. They can guide individuals through our website, which has comprehensive information on clinical trials. They can also explain the types of trials and what questions might be asked when a sponsor considers them for a trial. They can also explain what individuals may need to think about before participating.

If the trial is being sponsored at an academic institution 200 miles away from someone, how will they get to that trial, and what are the costs involved? Walking them through all this information is key, but if cost is going to be an issue, helping that person find some support in their community will encourage their participation in the trial and not discourage them. 

Jacobsen: When looking at barriers, what would they be if you had to list your top five most significant ones?

Niles: Yes, cost is always an issue. We see it daily at the PAN Foundation—the cost of treatment and the costs associated with getting treatment. That is always a barrier. Geography can also be a barrier. Many people in this country live in rural areas far from clinical trials.

So, how do we engage those individuals? Another barrier is the need for more communication between patients and healthcare providers. If those conversations aren’t happening, we’re not doing the best job we can to encourage participation in clinical trials. We heard concerns about confidentiality through the survey, and our companion access navigators can also help address those. But overall, cost is always at the top. Some level of mistrust also exists, but that’s what we’re trying to overcome. 

Jacobsen: In some cases, it’s not full mistrust but healthy skepticism, which is beneficial. I wonder if a future survey could explore this healthy reservedness—where skepticism is appropriate in any health context so patients can take the proper precautions while not letting excessive mistrust prevent them from participating in clinical trials.

Nile Yes, I agree. A little skepticism is healthy, especially when it helps ensure patients ask the right questions. But when it crosses into too much mistrust, it becomes an issue because people miss out on trials and potential treatments.

Niles: You’re absolutely right. Individuals need to know they are their own best advocates. They should have some skepticism when a healthcare provider prescribes a certain medication. They should ask questions about the cost, the side effects, and whether a more effective or less costly option is available. However, many patients, and this is definitely generational, may be fearful or hesitant to question their healthcare provider, thinking the provider knows best, and their questions might be perceived negatively.

It’s so important to ask those questions. Ultimately, it’s a partnership between the patient and the healthcare provider. Still, the patient should always decide what’s best for them, whether regarding a medication or participating in a clinical trial.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Amy, thank you so much for your time today. I really appreciate it.

Niles: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Manny Manzel & Conor Crighton, ‘Crossed’ and New Connections

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/20

Crossed aims to facilitate authentic connections by focusing on real-life proximity and encounters, addressing superficiality in digital interactions. Manny Manzel and Conor Crighton founded Crossed. It uses geo-proximity technology to connect users with those they’ve physically encountered, fostering friendships, professional connections, and romantic relationships through shared experiences and natural interactions.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was the motivation to create Crossed?

Manny Manzel and Conor Crighton: The motivation behind creating Crossed was to facilitate genuine, meaningful connections by focusing on real-life encounters and proximity. We wanted to build an app that seamlessly integrates into users’ daily lives, allowing them to form friendships, romantic relationships, or professional connections in a natural and authentic way.

Jacobsen: How does the app address superficiality in existing social and professional networking platforms?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed combats superficiality by prioritizing real-world proximity over algorithms that favor popularity or appearance. This approach increases the likelihood of users forming deeper, more meaningful connections, as the app encourages interactions rooted in real-world experiences rather than digital personas.

Jacobsen: How does Crossed utilize geo-proximity technology?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed uses geo-proximity technology to connect users with others they’ve physically crossed paths with. Whether on a college campus, at events, or during daily routines, users can see those who have been in the same spaces, giving a natural context to potential connections. Profiles only become visible to each other once both users have exited this bubble.

This built-in safety mechanism ensures a comfortable distance between users before their profiles pop up, enhancing user safety during the matching process.

Jacobsen: What challenges do students face when trying to make meaningful connections?

Manzel & Crighton: Students often struggle with shyness and social anxiety, compounded by the prevalence of platforms that prioritize surface-level interactions. Crossed offers a solution by providing a tool that encourages organic, real-world introductions, helping to bridge the gap and reduce the intimidation of approaching someone in person.

Jacobsen: What are creative strategies for students to break the ice?

Manzel & Crighton: One strategy is to get involved in group activities like campus events, clubs, or sports. For students who find this intimidating, Crossed provides a less daunting way to break the ice by facilitating connections that have already crossed paths in real life, making the first step toward conversation more natural.

Jacobsen: How does Crossed differentiate from traditional dating apps in fostering genuine encounters?

Manzel & Crighton: Unlike traditional dating apps that often rely on swiping based on superficial factors, Crossed encourages in-person encounters and connections built on shared experiences. It fosters friendships, professional opportunities, and romantic relationships through natural chemistry and context, rather than relying solely on digital profiles.

Jacobsen: What role does Crossed play in helping students form friendships, romantic relationships, and professional opportunities?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed enhances real-world connections by focusing on shared spaces like dorms, classrooms, and social areas on college campuses. It helps students transform frequent, casual encounters into meaningful relationships, offering a platform that supports friendships, romances, and professional opportunities.

Jacobsen: How has the media attention influenced the app’s growth?

Manzel & Crighton: Media coverage has played a pivotal role in raising awareness of Crossed, boosting sign-ups, and generating interest in its unique features. The emphasis on geo-proximity and authentic real-world interactions has particularly resonated with college students looking for deeper connections beyond the digital world.

Jacobsen: What is the vision for Crossed to further real-life interactions on college campuses?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed envisions becoming a vital part of campus life by continuing to integrate with students’ day-to-day activities. By organizing events and encouraging face-to-face interactions, the app aims to bridge the digital and physical worlds, helping students build long-lasting, authentic relationships that extend beyond the screen.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo, the Childbirth Considerations Per State

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/19

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. The cost of childbirth in the U.S. differs significantly based on insurance coverage. Insured mothers pay about $2,600 for hospital delivery, while uninsured mothers may face costs close to $15,000. Financial challenges without paid parental leave, ongoing child care, and healthcare expenses make thorough planning essential for new parents’ financial stability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the cost of childbirth differ between mothers with and without insurance?

Chip Lupo: The cost of childbirth in the U.S. can vary dramatically based on a mother’s insurance coverage. For those with insurance, a conventional hospital delivery averages more than $2,600. However, uninsured mothers face much higher costs, often close to $15,000. Beyond these base costs, prices fluctuate widely across states, as some areas offer more affordable delivery options. For example, North Dakota ranks low in delivery costs, while others such as California and New York are among the most expensive. Additionally, states’ policies on Medicaid expansion affect maternal care costs and access, which highlights the importance of healthcare accessibility for expecting parents.

Jacobsen: What factors were considered to rank the states for having a baby?

Lupo: WalletHub evaluated 31 key metrics across cost, health care, baby-friendliness, and family-friendliness, including hospital delivery charges, the availability of pediatricians, and child care accessibility. States such as Massachusetts and North Dakota came out on top by minimizing expenses and offering excellent medical and child care support.

Jacobsen: How do the best and worst states differ in conventional-delivery charges and cesarean-delivery charges?

Lupo: The costs for delivering a baby vary significantly, as some states offer much lower delivery fees than others. States like New Hampshire and North Dakota have some of the lowest costs for both conventional and cesarean deliveries, whereas states like New York, Florida, and California can charge much more. Factors such state healthcare quality, cost of living, and local healthcare policy strongly influence these differences, which underscores the importance of considering these dynamics when choosing where to have a baby.

Jacobsen: Why is Massachusetts considered the best state to have a baby?

Lupo: Massachusetts is the top state for having a baby because of its high-quality healthcare, supportive family policies, and safe environment for infants. The state also boasts the lowest infant mortality rate and the fourth-lowest maternal mortality rate in the U.S.

In addition, Massachusetts has robust parental leave policies and Medicaid-covered parenting programs, which ensures strong support for new parents. The state also ranks first and second in family-friendliness  and health care respectively, which reflects its commitment to long-term family support, making it an ideal place for raising children.

Jacobsen: What are typical unplanned expenses for new parents?

Lupo: New parents often face a range of unplanned expenses that can quickly add up, especially with the rising costs associated with childbirth and infant care. These can include unexpected hospital fees for delivery, and for some, increased costs if complications arise. Post-birth, new parents encounter high costs for childcare and babysitting. Pediatric care, vaccinations, and necessary health screenings further add to expenses, highlighting the importance of planning ahead and researching the best states for quality, affordable child and healthcare options.

Jacobsen: What financial challenges do parents face without federal paid parental leave?

Lupo: Without federal paid parental leave, parents face financial challenges that compound the high costs of childbirth and infant care. With conventional delivery costs averaging $2,600 with insurance or up to $15,000 without, many new parents face a difficult choice between a loss of income or taking time to bond with and care for their newborns. In states where childbirth and childcare costs are highest, the financial burden can be particularly severe. Additionally, without paid leave, parents are often forced back into work earlier, potentially missing out on crucial postpartum support and bonding time.

Jacobsen: What is the biggest financial mistake prospective parents make?

Lupo: The biggest financial mistake prospective parents make is underestimating the full scope of child-related expenses beyond the initial medical costs. While hospital delivery expenses can be costly, ongoing costs like child care, healthcare, and baby essentials can be even more financially burdensome. Failing to plan for these ongoing expenses can strain finances over the long term, especially in states with high infant-care costs. Planning early for both immediate and long-term child expenses can help parents better navigate the financial responsibilities of raising a family.

Jacobsen: How can local authorities make their cities more baby-friendly?

Lupo: Local authorities can focus on affordable and accessible child care that supports pediatric and maternal health and ensures a strong family infrastructure. Cities can expand the number of child care centers, promote affordable child care services, and implement Medicaid policies that cover maternal and parenting programs.

Expanded access to quality pediatric care, in addition to enough pediatricians and family doctors per capita will also ensure better health outcomes. Lastly, promoting family-friendly leave policies and mom groups can offer parents additional support, while creating a nurturing environment for both infants and their families.

Jacobsen: How can families benefit from public pre-kindergarten and paid parental leave?

Lupo: Public pre-kindergarten and paid parental leave can help reduce financial stress, as childbirth and early child care costs in the U.S. are high. States that support public pre-kindergarten and paid parental leave offer better affordability and accessibility, which are crucial for a child’s early development. Access to these benefits means parents can better manage work-life balance, secure consistent child care, and support their child’s health and education needs, which would make the overall family structure more sustainable and family-friendly.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Sang Won Bae on Detecting Depression With Apps

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/18

Dr. Sang Won Bae is an Assistant Professor at Stevens Institute of Technology’s Department of Systems and Enterprises, Charles V. Schaefer, Jr. School of Engineering and Science. Her research focuses on human-computer interaction, mobile health systems, and machine learning, with an emphasis on personalized interventions for vulnerable populations to promote health and safety. Bae talks about AI-powered smartphone applications designed to detect depression through subtle physiological and behavioural cues inspired during the pandemic to explore non-invasive identification mental health issues, particularly PupilSense, which analyzes pupil responses, and FacePsy, which assesses facial behavior markers including facial expressions and head gestures – for detecting depression in naturalistic settings. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Assistant Professor Sang Won Bae. I wouldn’t have imagined this kind of development, but science never ceases to surprise me. Detecting depression through the eyes – this is fascinating. Has there been any precursor to this style of research using indirect measures to detect depression?

Dr. Sang Won Bae: While recent studies explored detecting depression using mobile sensors like GPS, it was the pandemic that motivated me to start this project. During that time, many of us were struggling with feeling depressed. It was difficult to stay focused, manage work, and even keep up with studying. As a professor, I had to transition to online teaching, delivering lectures through Zoom since nobody was allowed to come to campus.

All classes were conducted on Zoom. I asked my students to turn on their cameras so I could see their reactions. This would allow me to adjust the content, shift the topic, or add more comments based on their level of engagement and how well they were understanding the material.

But in reality, very few students turned on their cameras. Almost everyone kept their cameras off, leaving me to wonder, “What’s going on? Are they even listening?” It felt isolating. I was teaching, but it felt like I was talking to no one. As a teacher, I wanted to interact with my students. Still, I felt isolated, both as an educator and as a human.

So, I started wondering, “What’s happening when the cameras are off? How do they feel about the lecture?” I wanted to understand what was going on behind the scenes, especially during the pandemic. While I wouldn’t describe my own feelings as full-blown depression, I did feel down, with an underlying sense of sadness and isolation. In early 2020 – around January or February – I contracted COVID, and that experience reinforced my belief that there was much more to explore.

People were putting on brave faces, but I wanted to know: could we find a way to help students and others who were struggling? What was really happening behind the scenes? We were no longer physically interacting, communicating only through devices—computers and smartphones—not human-to-human interaction. That’s when I felt we needed to do something about it, which became my motivation behind this project.

Jacobsen: This personal issue became a professional area of expertise for you.

Bae: Exactly, and it’s clear there are limitations of the existing systems. For example, there have been studies using the Facial Action Coding System to detect depression severity or mood disorders, but most of them were conducted in lab settings. Typically, these studies involved recording interviews with individuals experiencing mental health issues to analyze specific features, or they used actors to mimic various emotions in order to collect data. While these methods can be quite accurate, they often overlook a critical issue from the user’s perspective: the stigma associated with being monitored under the guise of advancing computer vision technology. 

Jacobsen: Why did you choose the eyes as a metric or marker for detecting depression? I assume it’s part of a broader spectrum, of course.

Bae: Yes, it’s not just about the eyes alone. Other facial expressions and physiological elements, such as the pupil-to-iris ratio, play important roles as well. For example, when you’re focused, your pupils tend to constrict. But if you’re distracted or not engaged, your pupils dilate. These subtle changes in pupil size, known as pupillometry, can provide valuable insights into a person’s mood or mental state.

The eyes are a particularly interesting marker because they are part of a larger set of behavioral and physiological phenotypes that can indicate attention, distraction, or even emotional states. The eyes not only reflect someone’s affective and cognitive status, but they can also hint at broader health conditions. For example, certain changes in  eye behavior have been linked to conditions like high blood pressure or neurological disorders. While it’s not the eyes themselves that show these issues directly, the patterns of eye movements and responses can be used to infer underlying health conditions through careful analysis.

Jacobsen: How does combining the analysis of the eyes with facial expressions provide a robust metric for detecting depression? And what is the margin of error?

Bae: We’ve reported an error rate of less than 5%. Our system achieved an accuracy of over 76% using PupilSense and 69% with FacePsy, using rigorous cross-validation approaches. This means that when new, unseen data from participants is introduced, the algorithm can predict whether someone is depressed with 76% accuracy using PupilSense and 69% accuracy using FacePsy.

This is quite innovative because other researchers often use different sensing technologies, like activities and GPS, which can raise privacy concerns. That’s why we try to use just the smartphone without invading privacy. The system only triggers and collects data when users use their smartphones.

If you’re asking what specific signals indicate depression, there are many. We’ve found key markers such as head gestures, eye movements, and smiling behaviour. Our mobile application includes a range of behavioural markers, including pupil-to-iris ratios.

As for accuracy, we’ve introduced two main applications and have two more in development. Recently, we published papers on understanding human emotions and mood using facial markers. The model’s performance would improve if we included additional sensors like GPS, movement tracking, or other features. However, using multiple sensors requires significant computational resources, and it could be more scalable for everyday use, as most researchers or participants would need access to large computing systems they don’t have.

That’s why our open-source affective sensing framework will be scalable—not in the distant future, but right now. We’ve already shared the framework and application data on GitHub. Many other developers and researchers can build upon this work for future studies in mental health, eye diseases, diabetes, and using facial features to understand dementia.

Many other diseases can be detected, and this will be feasible. 

Jacobsen: So, why the eyes? Why facial expressions? And why mobile?

Bae: We tend to make social faces and expressions when we meet people in person. We say, “Hi, how are you?” and smile. But when someone closes the door and looks at their mobile phone, they show a different side. They might browse, and we observe this shift – the change in their facial expressions and perhaps their mood when interacting with the virtual world through apps, search engines, and social media.

One interesting finding in our studies is that depressed individuals tend to smile more compared to healthy participants. It doesn’t seem intuitive at first, but this is part of the phenomenon of masking depression. We also noticed that, which we haven’t reported in full, depressed individuals were more likely to use social media, entertainment apps, games, and YouTube. They’re searching for something to entertain themselves, looking for fun, funny videos or other content to make them feel happier.

We are preparing follow-up studies to analyze app usage and to know more context about what people do when they feel sad or happy and how their mood changes would be ideal. Excessive use of social media can contribute to feelings of sadness or depression, especially when people compare their lives to the curated, idealized versions of others’ lives. Everyone seems to be happy, travelling, and enjoying life. This constant comparison can lead to a decline in mental health.

Jacobsen: Yes, people are curating an idealized version of themselves for the world to see, and others who view this may feel worse in comparison. There’s certainly a logic to that. The major benefits of this technology are, first, it’s cost-effective. Second, it can be implemented now. Third, it has reasonable accuracy. And fourth, it can be distributed globally as an app.

So, my main question is: if you’ve combined facial expression analysis with PupilSense for early depression detection, what other easy-to-measure metrics could be integrated into the same smartphone app further to increase the accuracy and robustness of early depression detection? Are you working on such developments? I’m sure you’ve thought about those.

Bae: Yes. If you’re asking about additional features, there is more we can explore, particularly regarding application usage. You mentioned curation, which refers to what users seek and how often they visit specific applications and content.

We are currently using Android application categories, and while we can’t always see the exact name of the app unless it’s registered, we can still understand if the app is categorized as entertainment, work-related, or GPS and navigation. It’s possible to analyze the relationship between the use of these different categories – productive apps, entertainment apps, and more – with their emotional state and depression. This virtual behaviour can give us insight into their mood, which would be useful for intervening and delivering specific content that could help.

However, it’s critical to understand that we don’t need to know exactly what they are reading or viewing. That would be too invasive. For instance, if an application knew exactly what I was reading, that would raise privacy concerns. However, knowing which category an app belongs to and how frequently users engage with it provides enough insight.

Think about Netflix, for example. They might want to know what users are watching and how they feel while watching. Our application can capture various emotions and sentiments, and the time of day or duration of app usage is critical. Understanding these patterns of depression could be key in developing a more innovative and preventative approach so we can identify when someone might need help before they realize it themselves.

Jacobsen: How can these apps be improved in their next iteration?

Bae: In the next iteration, the focus will be on improving our algorithm’s accuracy to obtain generalizability. We are working on validating the model further before moving into large-scale clinical trials with depression patients. So far, we’ve made significant strides by incorporating new sampling methods and optimizing features like sampling time and battery usage to ensure the app performs well in various real-world environments. 

To make the app more scalable and generalizable, we’ve been having productive discussions with institutions like Johns Hopkins and MATClinics. However, we’re eager to collaborate with more medical researchers and experts (email: sbae4@stevens.edu) who are interested in joining us in expanding the app’s potential.

Looking ahead, accessibility is another key priority. We want to make the app more user-friendly, especially for people who face barriers to healthcare, such as immigrants, low-income individuals, and others who have difficulty accessing hospitals or clinics. Our goal is to empower them to take control of their own health monitoring and management before any negative consequences arise. I firmly believe early detection saves lives when proper just-in-time interventions are delivered.

Jacobsen: What were the hurdles in the full development of this app?

Bae: One of the major hurdles was the approval process. It took almost a year to get the research started, largely due to the extra precautions and considerations around potential risks during the pandemic. Another challenge was finding participants for the modeling process. Given the pandemic, it was difficult to recruit enough people, and passive sensing research can be inconvenient for users, as they had to keep the app running for a full month without deleting it. I’m incredibly grateful to those who participated, as their commitment made a huge difference. Even though the compensation was minimal, they believed in the value of the research and stayed engaged. I’m also thankful to the volunteers who helped with pilot testing, as their support was crucial in overcoming these hurdles.

Jacobsen: Who were important collaborators?

Bae: The person who contributed the most was, without a doubt, Rahul, a PhD student in our lab, who worked tirelessly on the development. I also want to mention Priyanshu and Shahnaj, our assistant researcher and volunteer, for their help. And of course, Professor Tammy Chung from Rutgers University, who I’m currently collaborating with on an NIH project, has been incredibly supportive and believed in the potential of this research. Most importantly, this project wouldn’t have been possible without the Startup funding support from the Department of Systems and Enterprises at our university. 

Jacobsen: Dr. Bae, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Bae: Yes, thank you!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Older and Old Men’s Routines and Aging

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/16

According to some semi-reputable sources gathered in a listing hereRick G. Rosner may have among America’s, North America’s, and the world’s highest measured IQs at or above 190 (S.D. 15)/196 (S.D. 16) based on several high range test performances created by Christopher HardingJason BettsPaul Cooijmans, and Ronald Hoeflin. He earned 12 years of college credit in less than a year and graduated with the equivalent of 8 majors. He has received 8 Writers Guild Awardsand Emmy nominations and was titled 2013 North American Genius of the Year by The World Genius Directorywith the main “Genius” listing here.

He has written for Remote ControlCrank YankersThe Man ShowThe EmmysThe Grammys, and Jimmy Kimmel Live!. He worked as a bouncer, a nude art model, a roller-skating waiter, and a stripper. In a television commercialDomino’s Pizza named him the “World’s Smartest Man.” The commercial was taken off the air after Subway sandwiches issued a cease-and-desist. He was named “Best Bouncer” in the Denver Area, Colorado, by Westwood Magazine.

Rosner spent much of the late Disco Era as an undercover high school student. In addition, he spent 25 years as a bar bouncer and American fake ID-catcher, and 25+ years as a stripper, and nearly 30 years as a writer for more than 2,500 hours of network television. Errol Morris featured Rosner in the interview series entitled First Person, where some of this history was covered by Morris. He came in second, or lost, on Jeopardy!, sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? over a flawed question and lost the lawsuit. He won one game and lost one game on Are You Smarter Than a Drunk Person? (He was drunk). Finally, he spent 37+ years working on a time-invariant variation of the Big Bang Theory.

Currently, Rosner sits tweeting in a bathrobe (winter) or a towel (summer). He lives in Los AngelesCalifornia with his wife, dog, and goldfish. He and his wife have a daughter. You can send him money or questions at LanceVersusRick@Gmail.Com, or a direct message via Twitter, or find him on LinkedIn, or see him on YouTube

Rick Rosner: When I used to work at Kimmel, there was a swag corner that was mostly neglected, except by me. People would send things from their shows, books, movies, or whatever they were trying to pitch, hoping it would catch someone’s attention and be used on the show. But it never did. It just sat there on a set of bookshelves. I’d go over and see what was there. This shirt, for example, was from a show on MTV2.

The logo of MTV2 is Cerberus but with just two heads instead of the traditional three. It’s for a comedy and improv show called “Wild ‘N Out,” abbreviated as WNO.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What time are you getting up?

Rosner During the night, I wake up a couple of times. Usually, men my age wake up because they have to pee. I generally wake up because I have a dry mouth. I have this stuff to drink that makes the dry mouth disappear for a while. I might incidentally pee if I’m awake, but it’s not urgent.

Because I take a ton of fisetin, I tend to be a bit more wakeful. I also take dutasteride, which is Avodart for the prostate. So, Avodart plus fisetin means I don’t have to pee as much as some men my age. Today, I woke up at just about 6 AM. My alarm was set for 6:20.

I get up and generally eat part of a bagel with butter. I turn on the news and check my news sources, which include Drudge Report—once conservative and annoying but now pretty neutral, maybe even anti-Trump. I look at FiveThirtyEight, the poll aggregator. I also check Twitter.

Then, I got ready for one of the debate shows on PodTV. I participated in seven of these PodTV shows, where panellists debated with each other. I’ve gotten good at making my point concisely. I need to be more concise with you because I’m not fighting with anyone for talking time.

Jacobsen: I’m a patient person.

Rosner: Yeah, maybe too patient. I wish I had these skills when I was at Kimmel because we had to pitch ideas to Kimmel every day. A lot of late-night writers come from stand-up comedy. They get noticed for being funny.

I didn’t come from stand-up, but coming from stand-up helps you pitch at the table where he’s listening, along with a bunch of other people. It’s like being in the NBA—it’s some of the funniest people in America. It’s tough unless you’ve got a certain amount of stage presence. Anyway, at 7 AM, I go upstairs to the StreamYard computer.

StreamYard is a different platform than Zoom. We argue about issues for an hour. It’s usually three or four liberal guys versus a couple of conservatives. We debate the topics of the day. Earlier this week, it was the vice-presidential debate. If I’m lucky, the coffee has kicked in by the show’s end, and I’m ready for a good bowel movement. Today, though, it was just a few pellets.

So I’ve still got a bigger one in me. I take magnesium—Carole got me on it so I don’t get constipated. I’ve still got this pseudo-hernia where I had something frozen out with a liquid nitrogen needle. But it also killed the nerve that runs from my spine around to an ab muscle. So it’s still numb—today is day 77 of being knocked out. It generally takes three months for the nerve to regrow, maybe a little longer.

But anyway, I hope I get my missing ab back. I feed the dogs and call Carole, who’s 8 hours ahead of us in London, so it’s 4 PM over there. Then I try to go back to sleep. 

After 9 AM, so I wake up at 11. I eat some Popeye’s chicken. Our local Popeye’s on Laurel Canyon sells eight for $25, which is too much for tenders.

But last night, I went over to Cousin Kenny’s for a Rosh Hashanah dinner and passed through a neighbourhood that has a sketchy Popeye’s. You can get eight tenders for $9 instead of $25, which I need clarification on. Why such a big difference? Anyway, I appreciate that I can get tenders for about a buck apiece, plus the biscuits they throw in. So I eat some of that.

What else do I do? Oh, I tweet a lot and look at election polling statistics. I checked the University of Florida’s early voting website to see if anything made me more optimistic about the election because it was close. I found on the early voting website that women make up 53% of the early vote, which is good because women voted for Harris more than they voted for Trump.

But those statistics are from just five states out of the 24 or so that have started early voting. So, it’s yet to be indicative of a trend. In 2020, which the Democrats won, women were 52% of the vote. So I’m hoping we hold on to 53% for a few more weeks because day-of voters tend to lean Republican compared to early voters, which means they probably also lean male. I want us to build up a big surplus of women voters to feel confident.

I go back to bed again and take another nap. I’ll talk to Carole maybe before I take another nap. I sleep until 3 PM, and I take a lot of naps now. Then, I feed the dogs again, which is an elaborate process because we have elderly dogs with special dietary needs. They’re also persnickety—at least one of them is. For the older dog, who has Cushing’s disease, I use cooking scissors to chop up a bunch of chicken as the base.

Then I take some chicken Gerber baby food—two spoonfuls of that—and add it to their dietary low-sodium dog food. Both dogs get that, though one dog gets three times as much because you burn more calories with Cushing’s. Then they eat.

While they’re eating, I prepare the Cushing’s pill for the older dog. I drill a hole in a teeny chunk of chicken, stuff the pill in it, and feed it to him. After that, I take them out to pee.

I tell the dogs to pee. Only one of them consistently pees inside if you don’t take her out, so she’s the one who needs to be told to pee. Sometimes she does, sometimes she doesn’t. If she pees outside, she gets a treat—these doggy bacon strips.

Then I go to the gym. I start at LA Fitness on Coldwater. I do 27 leg presses, starting at 165 pounds and building up to around 295 pounds. Somebody was on the other machine I might use—it’s a cheat day, so there’s a bench press machine.

Or no—actually, no. Someone was on the overhead press machine, so I skipped that and focused on the legs there.

Then I go to the LA Fitness on Victory, which is 2 miles away. I do 12 sets of butterflies on the machine and 8 more leg presses there. Afterward, I head to the LA Fitness off Oxnard at NoHo West, the new shopping center, and do 17 sets on the ab machine. Finally, I go to the Y and do 20 sets of bench presses, finishing at 180 pounds, a new record for me on that machine, given my current body weight of about 138 pounds. That’s about 1.3 times my body weight, which would still be pathetic if I weighed more.

But given how skinny I am, 1.3 times my body weight is almost acceptable. Then I go to Planet Fitness at Laurel and Ventura and do 15 sets on the chest press and the pushdown machine, maxing out at 177.5 pounds. I come home, have a smoothie, and eat another piece of Popeye’s chicken.

What’s nice is that I took a piece of glass from the frame I bought. I collect micromosaic frames, and this one was beaten up because they’re all at least 100 years old, some more like 130 years old. The little mosaic parts fall out, and sometimes, people do a poor job of repairing them. You can’t see it here, but this particular repair was badly done—the person didn’t put the glass pieces back. They used plaster or clay material in the gaps and then painted them to resemble mosaics.

Tonight, if I’m awake enough, I’ll take a dental tool and start chipping away at the repair to replace the parts correctly with glass mosaic tiles. Also, the oval piece that covers the frame part where the picture goes was probably broken at some point. Whoever repaired it likely nipped a piece of glass to fit the oval space and probably wasn’t using a glass cutter—maybe nippers or even pliers.

So it was jagged. A nice small project while I was eating dinner was using a whetstone normally used for sharpening knives. I’ve wrecked mine because I use it for filing down mosaic tiles and framing glass to smooth out some of the jagged edges. It was unnecessary, but it gave me something to do while I ate dinner and watched “The Lego Batman Movie,” which was pretty decent.

Then, it was time to talk with you.

I took one for a bowel movement, but it was still pellets. So, I still have a giant one, and I’m hoping it will come out eventually.

Jacobsen: What do you find, capacity-wise—mentally, physically, sensation-wise—has declined the most with age? What are the most marked changes?

Rosner: I’ve mentioned that my willingness to waste hundreds of hours on IQ tests has declined. I’ve ruled against it now. It is a terrible waste of time because the odds of outscoring my established high score on a Cooijmans test are not high. I might still be as smart, but scoring high on a Cooijmans test is hard. He’s one of the few who offers tests with ceilings above my highest score, so that’s been a decline for me.

My reading has also declined for several reasons. One is that when I was younger, I got a reading done while working as an art model. As a younger model, I’d do crazy poses—just insane poses that took a lot of flexibility and strength. Eventually, I found a few poses that required flexibility but allowed me to hold a book simultaneously. Or if I were modelling for a painting, where I’d be posing for 20 to 25 hours, I’d try to incorporate a book into the pose, which some teachers would allow.

I could plow through many books that way, especially if the pose were painful because I’d read harder and faster to distract myself from the pain, right? But I don’t model anymore. Another place I used to read was at the gym. I wasn’t a jerk about it.

I’d spend less time reading between sets than the people who waste time on their phones between sets. I’d spend at most 20 seconds between sets reading. I’m a fast reader, so I could finish a page, or at least half a page, in those 20 seconds. But it would still piss people off.

People who thought nothing of others being on their phones at the gym would get offended when they saw me reading. They’d approach me and ask, “Are you using this?” They wouldn’t wait to see if I was doing sets. If they waited another 10 seconds, they’d see I was in the middle of a set. But people are stupid—jerks.

When COVID hit, I wanted to get in and out of the gym as fast as possible because, again, people are jerks and might be there with COVID. So, I stopped reading at the gym. Then I stopped reading at home, and for the same reason, I stopped taking IQ tests—it feels like I don’t have time to waste.

I don’t want to spend four or three hours reading books—maybe not even 90 minutes. And my patience for books has declined, just like it has for everyone else. We were talking about this last night at dinner. The deal is, when you Google something now, you’re familiar with this, right?

You Google something, and half the time, Google will use AI to write you two or more paragraphs answering the question it assumes you’re asking based on your query. Right? So you get the information. Google has become even more powerfulthan it used to be.

But I’ve had times where Google got it wrong. For example, I once tried to find the exact definition of “accursed.” I’d tweeted about Trump being accused of sexually assaulting and harassing 26 women, and some MAGA idiot wrote back. He meant to write “accused, not convicted,” but he wrote “accursed, not convicted.”

I loved that—it was my favourite tweet. So I was trying to find the exact definition of “accursed” to make fun of the guy by pasting it. But instead of giving me the definition, Google gave me biblical uses of the word.

I’ve tweeted a few times about how I wish Jesus would rapture all the world’s jerks to Europa, the ice moon of Jupiter. Europa is said to have fairly livable conditions. Its radioactive center makes it somewhat warm. So maybe Jesus could dig some ice caves for the world’s biggest jerks.

Anyway, I wonder if Google is spying on me. It probably saw me tweeting about Jesus and assumed I was religious. So when I searched for “accursed,” it gave me the Bible’s word usage.

But back to the main point: you can go online now and instantly get what you want to know. In the olden days, you had to go to the library. As a kid, I’d ride my bike or have my parents drive me to the library. We had a good library—it probably had about 150,000 to 200,000 books, which is still not enough compared to today.

Now, 50 million to 100 million books are distilled into articles online.

So back then, you had to hope that something close to the answer you needed could be found in one of the three books they had on the subject you were working on. But now, we don’t need books. Google spits it right into your eyes like a mother bird feeding a baby bird, which works against my patience with books. Also, Carole and I watch a ton of premium TV every night. The deal with books is that one person wrote it, and another person edited it, and those people may be interested in something other than what I care about regarding the plot. So there’s often much stuff I want to skip over, or at least skim, because it’s not engaging.

On the other hand, good TV has been filtered through the sensibilities and instincts of a dozen people—execs giving notes, etc. It often takes years for a show to be developed. Some of the most talented writers aren’t writing books—they’re writing for TV. As I said, the best TV has been filtered through many people to ensure everything is as good as possible. So, generally, the dialogue on a good TV show is better than the dialogue in a book. All this works against me wanting to read books. I used to read 5 or 6 books a week, and now I’m down to maybe two books a month, some of which are graphic novels because they’re easier to get through since they’re essentially shorter.

I still think about physics. My ability to think about it has been improved. My ability to do anything about it or make headway in convincing others—except maybe you—has never been great. But my ability to write… I’m a good writer and editor, but my output of long-form writing outside of Twitter is way down. It makes me wonder if I’ve lost something essential, if I’m blocked, or if I’m just lazy.

So those are three areas that have declined.

Do you notice any changes in your intellectual abilities as you move from your twenties into your thirties?

Jacobsen: I feel more relaxed. I feel more like myself. I don’t feel like I have to prove myself as much. I feel like producing something good, even in a small way, is good enough. My self-care is way better now.

I know when to take care of myself. It’s not overwhelming self-confidence, but I don’t drive myself as crazy as I might have in a previous decade. Sure, I work hard, but I know when to take a break, and I do. I still work long hours all week, but I’ve learned to balance things better. I might watch The Lord of the Rings—a simple tale of good and evil, crafted by a Catholic like Tolkien—but I enjoy that.

Rosner: Does your family or mom know how hard you work?

Jacobsen: I don’t think so. I think only a few people do. I don’t think anyone does. I keep that low-key myself.

Rosner: It’s a weird thing. It’s not weird that you’re weird—it’s just how life works. You generate hundreds of thousands of words a year, maybe even a million, through interviews and other journalism.

If someone noticed this, I’m sure the people you submit work to—like The Good Men Project, for instance—or anyone you generate content for must be delighted with your output. But that’s a professional relationship, and they probably don’t go around saying, “Wow!”

Or they do, but still, it’s their job. Do they go home and tell their partners, “There’s this one guy, and he’s just a machine”?

Jacobsen: Also, professional relationships shouldn’t necessarily come with the expectation of praise, right? The expectation is that you are to produce a product. They are to consider it and publish it—maybe, maybe not. Then, you move on to the next piece. Right?

Rosner: Yeah, exactly. At some point, I can imagine somebody asking, “You’ve got a sister, right?”

Jacobsen: I have a sister and a brother. They all know what I do, but they’re family.

Rosner: They think, “Scott went to Ukraine. What the hell was he doing there? I guess he worked at a horse farm or something, talks to people, and writes online articles.”

You can imagine their shock if, at some point, someone went to them and said, “How does it feel to be related to one of the most productive journalists in the world?” They’d be like, “What? We thought he was hanging out, talking to people.”

Jacobsen: Yeah. So, I’ll be house-sitting for a neighbour this weekend, caring for their dogs. And I’ve got a good opportunity coming up where I got selected again. I’m going to a graduate-level journalism training seminar. They fly you out, pay for your hotel, food, flight back, and the trainers who come to teach you. You go to these things, and there are journalists from various political stripes and publications. I recognized several names. When I went to the one last year, you had to apply and get selected. I got selected last year and again this time. So, I’ll be attending again. I’ll let you know how it goes.

Rosner: That’s great! So, when you go to these things, there are plenty of legit, objective journalists. But do you also bump into biased journalists from propaganda outlets like The Gateway Pundit?

Jacobsen: Not The Gateway Pundit, no. I’ve communicated and interacted with people who, within liberal circles, would be considered part of propaganda outlets. It’s probably tier 2 in terms of their online circulation. But during the training, I interact with them as individuals who happen to work at these places, and we’re all learning the same material. It’s just professional development for journalists. And then there are people like me who apply under the freelance, independent title.

Rosner: But enough about that—since this session is a bit of an odds-and-ends conversation, let me brag about my kid. Her hands are on the cover of Archaeology Magazine this month, holding a slip of cut paper with a design on it. She’s a specialist in the products created by schoolgirls, typically embroidered and sewn items from the early modern period—which generally starts in the Renaissance, maybe the 15th or 16th century, and extends into the 19th century.

Her expertise also includes other craft projects using wax, shellwork, cardboard, mica for shininess, and various materials. She worked at this place—what was its name? It’s in England and London and has been used since the 1700s. In the 17th or 18th century, it was a girls’ school, and the floorboards had gaps.

Jacobsen: That’s incredible! So, did they discover something in the gaps?

Rosner: Over time, objects like these intricate, handmade crafts had fallen between the floorboards, preserving them for centuries. She was involved in researching and handling these historic finds, which is how her hands ended up on the cover of Archaeology Magazine. It’s pretty cool.

Nothing big—nothing you’d fall into. But if you were working on a fussy craft project and there was a quarter-inch gap between the floorboards, over the decades—maybe centuries—a girl might drop something she was making, and it would slip through the crack to the floor below. They were doing a renovation and found all these scraps of paper that were 300 years old. They called in Isabella because this is her wheelhouse—identifying these kinds of scraps—and it turned into a whole exhibition.

One of her key points is that history tends to erase all but the most prominent figures. And even then, men get erased a lot less than women because men manage the affairs of the world. They left legal records, signed documents, and generated most of the official paperwork. So we know much more about men in the 17th and 18th centuries than we do about women—except for the Quakers, maybe, because they were meticulous record keepers and letter writers.

But for most women throughout history, it’s tough to find much. Isabella specializes in using household products, embroidery, and craft projects to piece together the lives of girls and women. So they called her in, and she was the expert on these scraps. They turned the scraps into a whole exhibition, which is pretty cool.

Archaeology Magazine discussed how this discovery offers a new angle on girls’ lives—these paper scraps that, by accident, survived for three centuries.

Let’s end this call. Isabella pointed out another issue around women: how they’ve been historically shortchanged. During her undergrad, or maybe when she was getting her master’s, she wrote about a problem that still exists today—women don’t have pockets. Women get super excited when a dress comes with pockets, but that’s been an issue for centuries. Where do women carry things?

And there’s also the theory—sorry, I know we’re almost out of time—from women’s studies that suggest women’s attire makes it easier for them to be sexually assaulted. It’s harder to run away in spiky heels, and dresses can be lifted easily to access parts of the body. So there’s been institutionalized repression and sexism even in everyday clothing. History messes everyone over, but it messes women over harder.

The end.

Jacobsen: Tomorrow, same time?

Rosner: Yeah, let’s do that. Thank you.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. Thank you, too. Bye.

Rick Rosner, American Comedy Writer, www.rickrosner.org

Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Independent Journalist, www.in-sightpublishing.com

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Kateryna Kyrychenko, Legal Rights Concerns for Ukraine for 2024

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/15

Kateryna Kyrychenko is a legal professional specializing in international law and human rights. She holds a Master of Laws in Human Rights and is pursuing a PhD degree in international law, currently serving as a Program Manager and Legal Officer at the Public International Law & Policy Group. Kateryna has actively supported efforts to document war crimes during the Russo-Ukrainian war. In 2024, human rights abuses during the Russo-Ukrainian war included widespread war crimes, such as mass deportations, sexual violence, and targeting civilian infrastructure. Russian cyberattacks and environmental destruction have been significant, while crimes against cultural heritage and illegal deportation of Ukrainian children to Russia have raised allegations of genocide​.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I want to focus primarily on 2024 and areas of human rights documentation and abuses. What have been the most significant areas of concern and reportage regarding human rights during the Russo-Ukrainian war?

Kateryna Kyrychenko: Thank you for the question. It is quite a complex issue because, as the Prosecutor General of Ukraine mentioned in one of his interviews with The Washington Post, “I would say that, practically, there is no any war crime in history that was not and is not committed by Russians on Ukrainian soil.

That said, the number, scope, and scale of the crimes committed and documented are unprecedented, varying across different territories. In Ukraine, some areas have been occupied for nearly a decade. In contrast, others are not occupied but are subject to frequent missile and drone strikes. Depending on the situation in each area, we observe different human rights violations and war crimes, including crimes against humanity and alleged genocide. In addition to the more traditional war crimes, unfortunately, present in most conflicts, Ukraine is facing more sophisticated types of crimes, such as those related to cyberattacks.

This is a significant area that Ukrainian prosecutors focus on as they continue to build their capacities for prosecution. Ukrainian infrastructure and capabilities are under constant cyberattacks from Russia and its agents. Additionally, I want to highlight the area of crimes against cultural heritage, which is alarmingly frequent, particularly in the occupied areas. Ukrainian cultural heritage objects are being looted and illegally taken out of the country. A black market for these looted items has emerged, particularly in foreign countries, mostly Europe. Beyond these activities, cultural and historically significant objects are also being destroyed by missile strikes within mainland Ukraine. Again, the scale of this destruction is truly unprecedented.

For example, take the case of the Kherson Regional Art Museum. It was completely looted, with 90% of its stored objects taken out of Ukraine, and its whereabouts remain unknown. I emphasize this point because, in my opinion, these acts have the aspect of alleged cultural genocide. Beyond the physical removal or destruction of cultural objects, these actions deeply impact the population, culture, and future generations. Would you like me to expand on other crimes and human rights violations we have observed?

Jacobsen: Yes, please.

Kyrychenko: I work with the Public International Law & Policy Group, a global law firm, and we have been engaged in documentation efforts since the beginning of the full-scale invasion. We have helped Ukrainian NGOs build the capacities to interview victims of Russian war crimes on the ground. In particular, we have assisted the Ukrainian NGO OPORA, which relocated to Poland following the invasion, in establishing its war crimes documentation center. OPORA has since become the largest organization that has interviewed Ukrainians who have fled to Poland and collected their testimonies.

From the testimonies we have collected and from our documentation project with the Public International Law and Policy Group (PILPG), we have observed that people have been subjected to numerous violent crimes, including murder and rape. Additionally, there are many crimes with a material aspect, as occupying Russian forces have been looting and stealing virtually any objects of value, from small household items to larger possessions.

And I’m even talking about bottles of perfume or small pieces of kitchen equipment, for example, not to mention larger items. Besides that, what is especially concerning about the patterns of Russian crimes is the widespread use of sexual violence. I’m sorry; I’m trying to formulate this properly. People who have been subjected to these horrific crimes are not limited by gender or age.

It has been particularly shocking how rape is being used by Russian forces as a method of warfare. For instance, based on the reports from the UN Commission of Inquiry for Ukraine, their most recent findings have established a widespread pattern of using sexual violence against prisoners of war—Ukrainian soldiers—as a method of breaking morale. Beyond the obvious physical harm, the mental and psychological impact of these actions cannot be emphasized enough, whether on female victims, male victims, or their families. Moreover, there is the illegal detention not only of prisoners of war but also of civilians. The Office of the Prosecutor General regularly posts impressive numbers on its website, indicating the number of missing civilians.

Some of these civilians have been transferred to the Russian Federation, and some may have been killed. There is no clear information on many of these individuals. Another serious aspect is the illegal deportation of Ukrainian children to Russia. The fate of these children is deeply concerning, as investigations by Ukrainian and international organizations have demonstrated. These deported children are being subjected to sophisticated reeducation programs designed to change their identity and essentially turn them into Russians.

There have already been cases where deported Ukrainian teenage boys have been conscripted into the Russian army to fight in Ukraine. This pattern is not just about physical acts. Still, it is linked to the alleged genocide aimed at erasing Ukrainian culture and identity for future generations.

Jacobsen: When it comes to sexual violence and rape as weapons of war, the Beijing Declaration and other key women’s rights documents have clearly stated that this is a consequence of any war. Are there any nuances in how sexual violence is being used as a weapon of war in the Russo-Ukrainian conflict, or does it align with previous patterns without introducing new forms or methods of sexual violence?

Kyrychenko: That’s a good question. For the most part, it fits within the traditional understanding of sexual violence in conflict. However, what is particularly striking is the scale and the organized infrastructure behind these actions. In the recent report by the UN Commission of Inquiry on Ukraine that I mentioned earlier, they found evidence of an elaborate, well-coordinated system of detention centers, or so-called “torture camps,” in the Russian Federation. Illegally deported Ukrainians, both civilians and prisoners of war, are sent to these facilities, where they are subjected to horrendous treatment and crimes.

The same commission has also highlighted a clear hierarchy within this system, suggesting that these actions are coordinated from the top down. This indicates that such acts are not sporadic but are part of the Russian Federation’s broader policy and strategy in its approach to war.

Jacobsen: When reflecting on what you might expect for the rest of the year, considering that this interview might come out in early or mid-November, what are the areas of concern regarding human rights law for Ukrainians and potentially for Russians, too? For instance, there are dysfunctional nuclear facilities in the middle of a war, with multiple warnings from the IAEA about the importance of being extremely cautious with these facilities despite the ongoing conflict. Naturally, as you mentioned, it has been over two and a half years since the full-scale invasion began. We expect, based on prior documentation of wars, to see the continued use of sexual violence as a weapon of war, illegitimate deaths, forced conscription, destruction of administrative buildings, residential buildings, churches, cathedrals, UNESCO heritage sites, hospitals, and military facilities, as well as the indiscriminate killing of civilians, and the capture of prisoners of war for future exchanges.

All of this, including torture, is a grave concern. What concerns you most as we move toward the end of 2024?

Kyrychenko: Of course, it’s extremely difficult to identify one or a few things as more or less concerning, as all the things you mentioned are horrific and have a huge impact. There is a certain level of skepticism about ensuring accountability for these actions. But what I wanted to highlight specifically is the issue of nuclear blackmail and the intentional targeting of critical infrastructure. Energy infrastructure targeting is particularly concerning before the upcoming winter season. This has been a consistent Russian tactic aimed at breaking the morale of the Ukrainian people. It’s incredibly difficult to live in cities when the temperature drops below zero and there’s no water or electricity. It makes it hard for people to maintain their morale, keep fighting, working, and surviving such harsh conditions.

This has been the case for the past two winters, and concerns are rising about the upcoming winter. The Ukrainian government and energy companies are aware of this and are preparing accordingly. However, messages from the president and the government indicate that intelligence reports suggest more mass missile strikes on energy facilities are expected this winter. I’ve been here throughout all the winters, and it’s a drastically different situation depending on the season when you’re living in these conditions.

Jacobsen: I returned from Ukraine less than a month ago after an almost month-long trip. This was my second trip. My first trip was in November and December 2023. In my observation, the missile and drone strikes and warnings were fewer in November-December 2023 than during my last trip in 2024. Since the Kursk incursion, there has been an increase in the number of strikes. During two or three days of my time there, the air raid alarms were almost non-stop for 24-hour cycles. It felt noticeably different regarding the alerts on my phone and hearing the air raid sirens in the sky.

Naturally, there were air raid alarms every day in Ukraine. That’s just the reality. However, those two or three days were particularly intense, with the constant air raid alarms going off. Do you think the targeting of civilian infrastructure and the number of missile strikes has increased in the latter part of this year compared to 2023?

Kyrychenko: It’s difficult to say because it’s not the same every month. It depends on the developments at the frontline, especially with the beginning of the counteroffensive in Kursk, which has drawn some of Russia’s military capacities away. However, this year, the strikes have been heavily concentrated on energy facilities. While civilian objects are still being hit—much more frequently than military targets—it appears that Russia is focusing on energy infrastructure. This is essentially the easiest way to cripple the country’s economy and disrupt normal life. But there are, of course, periods where we are fortunate enough to experience fewer strikes.

For example, it was just this Monday when our armed forces reported the first night in 48 days without any drone strikes, which is surprising. So, yes, I wouldn’t be too optimistic. They may be regrouping, preparing for a wider, more intense strike. It’s not a time to be too hopeful, especially when considering the growing alliance with North Korea.

Jacobsen: Are there any legal precedents, either within Ukraine or the international community–where most agree that Russian Federation aggression was wrong, as per UN General Assembly Resolution ES-11/1–which condemned the invasion and the abuse within the international legal mechanisms? For example, could Russia’s partnership with North Korea be leveraged for further condemnation, especially as Russia continues its invasion of Ukraine? 

Kyrychenko: I haven’t seen any specific precedents at this time. Statements from several European bodies, such as the Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe, have been made. However, since this situation develops, we must remain mindful and observe how it unfolds.

One additional point to mention is that besides North Korea and Iran—which has been supplying weapons to Russia—another significant player supporting Russia’s aggression is Belarus. Sometimes, Belarus gets overlooked in the broader picture. Still, given the grave human rights violations occurring there, as well as its regime’s support for Russia, it should be noted.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts or conclusions based on today’s conversation that should be highlighted?

Kyrychenko: As the situation evolves, many potential changes could come to international law regarding Ukraine and Russia. For example, establishing a specialized tribunal for aggression, which might soon be created within the Council of Europe, could offer a model for holding Russian leadership accountable for their aggression. Additionally, the ICC arrest warrants issued against four Russian officials, including President Putin and other high-ranking generals, were processed relatively quickly compared to how these proceedings usually go. This war could bring about significant changes in international law and the global order, strengthening it and preventing regimes like Russia from launching unprovoked attacks without facing accountability.

One of the unique challenges in documenting war crimes in Ukraine, compared to other conflict zones, is the massive displacement of civilians. Millions of Ukrainians have fled the country since the full-scale invasion began, dispersing across the globe rather than being concentrated in specific refugee camps, as seen in other situations like with the Rohingya. This dispersal makes it significantly harder for investigators and documenters to access witnesses and victims. Within Ukraine, the situation is similarly complex. Internally displaced persons (IDPs) are scattered across rented accommodations, the homes of friends and relatives, or temporary shelters, making them harder to locate and interview systematically. This scattered nature of the population not only complicates documentation efforts but also poses logistical challenges for gathering consistent and reliable testimony.

Another critical but less-discussed category of crimes being committed on Ukrainian soil are environmental war crimes, including ecocide. The scale of environmental destruction in Ukraine has been massive, and there is an increasing effort to frame this destruction within the legal concept of ecocide. Ukraine is actively working to build a strong legal case for ecocide, a relatively new and evolving concept in international law. If successful, this could set a groundbreaking precedent in holding perpetrators accountable for crimes against the environment on the international stage. Achieving recognition of ecocide in Ukraine could have far-reaching implications, not only for international justice but also for addressing the global issue of environmental destruction as a war crime.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Kateryna, thank you very much for your time today. I’ll start working on this transcript for you.

Kyrychenko: Thank you so much for your time and work on this. Take care.

Jacobsen: Goodbye.

Further Internal Resources (Chronological, yyyy/mm/dd):

Humanist

Humanists International, Russian Federation, Ukraine, and the United Nations (2024/01/08)

Personal

The Long Happenstance of Iceland and Copenhagen (2023/12/09)

Violence’s Imaginarium: Informal Follow-Up to ‘War Is Hell’ (2024/07/11)

Romanian

Remus Cernea on Independent War Correspondence in Ukraine (2023/08/25)

Zaporizhzhia Field Interview With Remus Cernea (2024/02/21)

War and Destruction With Remus Cernea (2024/02/22)

Remus Cornea on Ukraine in Early 2024 (2024/04/29)

Remus Cernea on Perpetual War and Perpetual Peace (2024/06/28)

Alex Craiu on Journalism During War (2024/09/24)

Ukrainian

Ms. Oleksandra Romantsova on Ukraine and Putin (2023/09/01)

Oleksandra Romantsova on Prigozhin and Amnesty International (2023/12/03)

Dr. Roman Nekoliak on International Human Rights and Ukraine (2023/12/23)

Sorina Kiev: Being a Restauranteur During Russo-Ukrainian War (2024/01/27)

World Wars, Human Rights & Humanitarian Law w/ Roman Nekoliak (2024/03/07)

Oleksandra Romantsova: Financing Regional Defense in War (2024/03/11)

Russo-Ukrainian War Updates, February to April: O. Romantsova (2024/05/13)

Dr. Kateryna Busol on Dehumanization in Russo-Ukrainian War (2024/06/20)

Oleksandra Romantsova on April to May in Ukraine (2024/06/27)

Oleksandra Romantsova on Political Events and Public Living (2024/09/19)

Book Release

On the Russo-Ukrainian War: August, 2023 to July, 2024 (2024/09/18)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

A Warming of the Biotech Sector Winter, Chris Frew

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/14

Chris Frew is the Founder of BioBuzz Networks, a life sciences talent community and recruitment platform, and the CEO of Workforce Genetics, LLC (WGx), a leading biotech recruitment firm. He has spent the last 20 years supporting companies with recruiting, marketing, and community-building solutions. His background includes founding a national life sciences staffing division and has worked closely alongside state and regional leaders on ecosystem building and workforce development initiatives in life sciences. He is passionate about building stronger connections in the biotech workforce and fostering long-term, sustainable talent pipelines. Frew discusses the “biotech winter,” a downturn in the life sciences industry post-COVID, characterized by reduced investments and layoffs. The sector is showing signs of recovery, particularly in manufacturing and later-stage companies. Challenges remain in job matching and recruitment, emphasizing the need for better communication between job seekers and employers.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Chris Frew of BioBuzz. We will discuss a particularly relevant topic, maybe not necessarily to blue-collar workers but those in high-skilled tech sectors. What is happening with the so-called “biotech winter”?

Chris Frew: Great question, and thank you for having me today. The term “biotech winter” has been used over the past two years. The life sciences and biotech industries have experienced a significant downturn since the post-COVID era. During the pandemic, there was an influx of capital into the industry. Still, the entire sector experienced a severe pullback afterward due to inflation and rising interest rates. As interest rates increased, investors began withdrawing from the sector. Thus, the industry transitioned from rapid growth during the COVID-19 years to a regressive downturn, resulting in over 20,000 layoffs and a significant drop of more than 40% in venture capital investment.

So, winter isn’t coming—it has already arrived for biotech. However, we are starting to see signs of recovery, or as we like to call it, the beginnings of spring. The industry is gradually returning to a more stable state. This raises questions about how the sector might rebound in terms of hiring. Which areas of this market are seeing job growth? And which sectors are not recovering?

Jacobsen: That’s an excellent question. Let me begin by discussing which sectors were most affected by the downturn. Many large pharmaceutical companies implemented layoffs. Some mergers and acquisitions resulted in job cuts, impacting everything from commercial departments to early research and development (R&D). Big pharma companies focused on their lead products and candidates, reducing their R&D efforts for new products. As a result, many scientists and engineers in these companies faced layoffs.

We also saw numerous biotech companies either leave the business or reduce their workforce to a skeleton crew due to a lack of investment. This downturn particularly affected highly educated white-collar workers, including PhD holders. The past two years have been challenging for many new PhD graduates who expected secure employment but needed a clear path to their first job outside academia.

However, as we emerge from this period, some funding is starting to return. Although early-stage R&D remains challenging due to the slow return of early-stage investment, there are signs of improvement.

Frew: We are seeing some developments in manufacturing skills. You mentioned blue-collar and white-collar workers and a highly educated workforce. There is a substantial blue-collar presence in biotech and life sciences. Manufacturing drugs and therapeutics might be considered a “gray collar” area—a blend of blue- and white-collar workforces. But we are starting to see this sector rebound.

We are witnessing job growth in certain areas as the industry recovers. Much of the recent funding has been directed toward later-stage companies, while early-stage companies face challenges. That’s why there may be some uneven progress. Apologies for the lights going off in the office; that’s why you noticed a change.

When considering individuals with PhDs or those involved in the gray-collar workforce, particularly on the manufacturing side, what are venture capitalists and investors looking for when evaluating opportunities in the biotech sector? What makes them more inclined to increase investment in biotech now, when previously they withdrew 40% of their investments?

Jacobsen: Interest rates play a significant role. A large amount of venture capital has been raised over the past 18 months, leaving many investment firms with “dry powder”—capital waiting to be deployed. With high interest rates, investors can earn good returns with lower risk by keeping their capital in funds. However, as rates decline and the market begins to shift, capital is more likely to be invested in higher-risk assets like life sciences.

Investors are most interested in later-stage companies, particularly those with Phase 2 or 3 trials. We’ve seen positive investment flows back into these areas. There’s also a growing focus on AI and big data applications in life sciences, especially drug discovery and clinical trials. These areas have generated considerable interest, and investments are being made there.

There is also continued interest in novel cell and gene therapies, though these are not hotter than they once were. Some of these areas, however, are still attracting significant investment. We’ve also observed a resurgence in traditional biologics, particularly antibody-based therapeutics, as new technologies emerge in that domain. While the investment landscape has yet to rebound completely, we see signs that investors are willing to reallocate their capital into life sciences.

Jacobsen: What would you consider some of the most promising areas of life sciences research where more risk-tolerant investors might be willing to invest moderate to substantial amounts of capital to advance these fields?

Frew: In life sciences, investing moderate amounts of capital is challenging because of the high costs associated with research and development. However, some investors are still willing to take on these risks to push forward innovative research areas.

Frew: Yes, life sciences can be quite capital-intensive. For example, suppose someone is willing to invest $1,000,000 in a seed round. In that case, it’s important to understand that many life science companies require hundreds of millions of dollars to reach the market. So, it’s primarily large investment firms that drive this market forward. However, there is much excitement around certain areas, such as the application of AI in the MedTech space, including predictive tools for diagnostics in healthcare and patient care.

While there are risks, investing in this space can be more appealing because bringing a product to market requires less time. You can demonstrate data and real-world applications more quickly. The MedTech space is witnessing interesting new applications where AI, biotech, and engineering converge to create significant impact, which can happen faster than with, say, a new cell therapy or a biologics-based vaccine that might take ten years or more to reach the market. This area is attracting more investment interest.

Jacobsen: Do you find that companies, larger investors, or individual benefactors are the primary sources of substantial investments, like the hundreds of millions of dollars required in this sector?

Frew: It’s largely investment firms that lead the industry from a funding perspective. One aspect that is particularly important to us is the role of ecosystems. In life sciences and biotech, geography is a key factor. These technologies often emerge from universities or are closely tied to research facilities. Unlike a tech company, which can have developers working remotely from anywhere, life sciences often require a team directly connected to a lab or facility, especially in production. As a result, life science hubs are critical.

For instance, I’m based in Baltimore, Maryland, a life science hub. The DMV region (DC, Maryland, Virginia) ranks as the number three biotech hub in the country. We also do much work in Philadelphia, a leading hub for cell and gene therapy, and North Carolina, which is known for being a top manufacturing and research hub for biotech. What’s interesting is the emergence of regional investors in these areas.

For example, in Baltimore, Blackbird Laboratories and Blackbird Ventures is an investment firm focused on supporting local companies, helping them launch from local universities, and providing the venture funding needed to scale. In North Carolina, a new investor called Cape Fear Bio focuses on supporting companies within the state and building a local ecosystem around them. This approach involves engaging other local investors in seed funding and early-stage capital, allowing them to support growth directly in their region.

In Maryland, we have a group called TEDCO, one of the leading venture firms in the area, playing a vital role in this regional investment model. These regional investors don’t just provide capital—they also bring their networks, resources, and expertise to help companies grow. We see a new and evolving model taking shape in these markets.

Jacobsen: What do you think facilitates recruitment into the life sciences industry?

Frew: Recruitment into the industry is critical, especially considering the highly skilled workforce, including individuals with Ph. Ds.

Frew: They have the appropriate skill set, yet many need a clear pathway to employment. Even if opportunities weren’t evident during their doctoral work, they often struggle to see them on the horizon. This is why awareness is so important, and storytelling plays a crucial role. Storytelling helps ensure that Ph. D.s understand the opportunities that exist in the industry.

That’s a significant issue. Networking and regional engagement between industry and academia to create those experiences are essential. You see much of that happening, and BioBuzz plays a significant role in facilitating these connections in our regional markets. We host events, showcase companies, and offer programming to support biotech companies. But it’s not just about PhDs.

Storytelling and awareness are also critical for underrepresented groups who might enter the more blue-collar areas of biotech as a starting point. Once someone gets their foot in the door in biotech, companies often support further education and career growth. There’s a solid workforce and economic development pathway in life sciences, and awareness is one of the biggest barriers. Many people think of biotech and assume they need a PhD, but that’s untrue.

There are many opportunities for those with a high school diploma or associate’s degree to enter the field, earn a greatsalary, and build a fulfilling career in an impactful industry. Storytelling, targeted programming, and meeting people where they are to share these success stories are crucial for attracting more talent to the industry. At BioBuzz, we work closely with employers to ensure their stories reach the right audiences. We help them engage with potential hires, whether they are targeting PhDs or lab technicians from associate’s programs. BioBuzz excels at showcasing what employers are doing and highlighting available job opportunities in the market.

Jacobsen: I have two questions. First, we see different expectations across generations in the workforce. As we emerge from the “biotech winter,” the technological and scientific landscape is evolving. Additionally, COVID has changed how people approach work in certain ways.

We are witnessing a shift in the workforce’s dynamics in this context. Platforms like Monster, Indeed, and others help connect employers and employees. My questions are: what are the evolving workforce needs in the life sciences? And how can recruitment platforms like Monster and Indeed adapt to this new environment to better match employees with the right employers?

Frew: Great question—thank you for that layered inquiry.

The evolving needs of the life sciences workforce are similar to those in many other markets. In today’s environment, adaptability is crucial. This is a shift from the more traditional roles in life sciences, where someone might spend their time at the bench, conducting research, pipetting, and running gels. In the past, things moved slower than they do now.

Frew: There is more collaboration with external vendors and partners than ever before. Even at the scientific level, demonstrating flexibility and adaptability is a critical skill, especially in the industry. This is similar to the IT field or many other industries these days. We live in a world where technology and trends evolve rapidly, so adaptability is essential.

Another trend is the rise of shorter-term gigs, freelance work, and fractional life-science roles. Companies have learned, especially post-pandemic, that some roles don’t require full-time staff. For instance, as a biotech company, I might hire fractional consultants or a part-time executive until I secure the larger funding needed to expand and bring on full-time employees if I want to manage risks during growth. This trend is evident in startups and midsize and larger companies, where the roles of consultants and freelancers are becoming increasingly prominent. Historically, this was less common in life sciences, but it’s a growing trend.

That’s also why BioBuzz Networks has launched—and is in the process of expanding—its online community and talent marketplace. We’re building an AI-powered talent marketplace integrated into the community platform we’ve developed and refined over the past 15 years. This new marketplace aims to connect our community members with employers seeking freelancers and professionals for fractional roles. Unlike platforms like Monster or traditional job boards, which are very transactional, life sciences require a different approach.

Life sciences is not a transactional field; it takes time to bring products to market. At BioBuzz, our focus on community building and storytelling, layered on top of a talent marketplace, offers the best outcomes for candidates. It’s also beneficial for employers who want to ensure they are making the right hire—someone who fits their specific needs and company culture well.

Jacobsen: What are the main complaints from employers? And what are the main complaints from employees?

Jacobsen: And what about the reverse, more positive side of that question? You mentioned the main complaints—what are they?

Frew: Correct, yes. The main complaints from employees—or let’s call them job seekers—are mostly about a lack of responsiveness, especially in life sciences. A microbiologist at one company might not be a fit for a similar role at another company because many nuances are involved. It often depends on the type of technology the company is working with and various other factors.

Often, highly qualified candidates who have the potential to perform well may only get an interview if they come from a biologics company rather than a small molecule company. These nuances can prevent capable candidates from conversing about a role, leaving them feeling screened out before the process begins.

On the flip side, employers’ biggest complaint is that when they post a job on LinkedIn or Indeed, they receive hundreds of applications from people who need to be qualified. You can see the disconnect here—candidates think they are qualified, while employers think they are not. Even with screening questions, employers often mention that they are overwhelmed with unqualified applicants who seem to be applying to fulfill a requirement or check a box.

There is a clear gap between job seekers’ and employers’ experiences, and it’s a challenge to address. We are actively working on this area. We have some interesting ideas on solving this issue—ways to communicate a candidate’s value proposition better and ensure potential applicants understand job descriptions more clearly. You’ll see more from us on this in the coming year.

These complaints clearly illustrate a disconnect in the process.

Jacobsen: Chris, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Frew: Thank you. I appreciate the conversation as well.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Top American Coffee Cities With Chip Lupo

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Portland, Oregon, ranks as the top coffee city due to its vibrant local scene, affordability, and high-quality shops per capita. Fremont, California, leads in coffee spending, reflecting a national trend toward daily coffee consumption and investment in quality. Original report here.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What factors contribute to Portland, Oregon, being ranked as the top coffee city?

Chip Lupo: Portland, Oregon, earned the top ranking as a coffee city because of its robust local coffee scene that combines quality, accessibility, and unique coffee-related resources. Portland also has an impressive number of highly-rated, affordable coffee shops per capita, which makes it a popular choice for coffee lovers who appreciate quality without a high price tag. Additionally, the city boasts the top ranking for coffee and tea manufacturers per capita, thanks to its strong local production scene. Coffee enthusiasts in Portland enjoy a diverse selection of coffee experiences supported by a well-established community of coffeehouses and events that celebrate the coffee culture.

Jacobsen: How does Fremont, California’s highest average annual spending on coffee per household, reflect broader consumer behaviour?

Lupo: Fremont, California’s top-ranking average annual spending on coffee per household mirrors a broader trend in consumer behaviour: the role of coffee as a cultural staple and daily necessity for many Americans. With 67% of Americans drinking coffee daily and coffee prices continuing to rise, Fremont’s high expenditure reflects both the enduring popularity of coffee and the willingness of residents to invest in quality, convenience, and variety in their caffeine consumption. Fremont’s coffee culture also aligns with the national shift toward frequent coffee shop visits and the purchase of home coffee-making equipment.

Jacobsen: What is the reason for the significant difference in the number of coffee and tea manufacturers between Portland, Oregon, and Tulsa, Oklahoma?

Lupo: Portland, Oregon, and Tulsa, Oklahoma, have a notable disparity in coffee and tea manufacturers, largely because of each city’s unique culture and local demand for coffee. Portland’s deep-rooted coffee culture places it at the top of WalletHub’s coffee cities, with high rankings in affordable, top-rated coffee shops per capita and popular coffee-centric events, which contributes to its thriving local coffee manufacturing industry. In contrast, Tulsa, which ranks 62nd overall, has less demand and infrastructure geared toward coffee and, as a result, fewer manufacturers.

Jacobsen: What practical tips can coffee enthusiasts follow to enjoy their daily cup within budget?

Lupo: Coffee lovers seeking a budget-friendly way to enjoy their beverages should consider brewing at home. Currently, about 30% of households already own coffee makers. Additionally, investing in a quality machine can save a substantial amount of money over time compared to frequent coffee shop visits. Start with regular coffee brands at grocery stores, and as your skills improve, you may then explore gourmet brands to elevate your coffee home-brewing experience.

Additionally, cities such as Austin and San Antonio offer affordable coffee packs for home brewing, with prices lower than coastal cities like San Francisco. If you prefer the café atmosphere, focus on affordable spots rated 4.5 stars or higher, especially in coffee-centric cities like Portland or Seattle, which boast several budget-friendly options.

Jacobsen: What are the potential challenges and opportunities for entrepreneurs aiming to open a coffee business?

Lupo: Entrepreneurs exploring the coffee business must navigate an evolving landscape filled with both challenges and exciting opportunities. On the one hand, fierce competition from established brands and trends can make it difficult to stand out, while the high cost of quality equipment and location can strain budgets. Furthermore, deciding where to invest time and resources can be challenging amidst a rapidly changing industry, as the buzz around the latest products and flavours may not always lead to lasting customer interest.

However, the industry’s robust demand and the growing focus on unique coffee experiences provide solid opportunities. Home-brewing trends and DIY roasting communities are expanding, which may allow entrepreneurs to tap into niche markets.

Jacobsen: What are the main coffee and tea marketing and industry trends anticipated for 2024?

Lupo: Several interesting trends are expected to shape the coffee and tea industry in 2024, including a strong focus on personalization, with many brands marketing unique flavours to attract Gen Z consumers. Sustainability is also a key theme, as companies are starting to prioritize transparency and ethical sourcing. Additionally, the use of digital technology and automation is set to increase, which helps cafes maintain consistency while allowing baristas to focus more on their craft. Finally, small-batch retail options for hobbyist roasters may be on the rise as more people brew coffee at home.

Jacobsen: What is the projected future of the U.S. retail coffee market?

Lupo: The U.S. retail coffee market is expected to evolve significantly, with increased emphasis on innovative flavors and sustainable practices, while also embracing technology to enhance the customer experience.

Jacobsen: How might emerging consumer experiences and technological advancements influence the industry?

Lupo: Emerging consumer experiences, such as personalized coffee offerings and immersive tasting events, combined with technological advancements such as mobile ordering and AI-driven recommendations, are likely to reshape the coffee industry. These trends will enhance customer engagement, streamline operations, and create unique brand experiences, which will ultimately drive growth and increase loyalty in a highly competitive market.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Thomas G. Plante, Ph.D., ABPP, on Intimacy and Narcissism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/12

Thomas G. Plante, Ph.D., ABPPis the Augustin Cardinal Bea, S.J. University Professor, professor of psychology, and by courtesy, religious studies and the Jesuit School of Theology at Santa Clara University and directs the Applied Spirituality Institute. He is a scholar in residence of the Markkula Center for Applied Ethics, the largest applied ethics center in the world. Additionally, he is an emeritus adjunct clinical professor of psychiatry and behavioural sciences at Stanford University School of Medicine. He currently serves as editor of the APA journal, Spirituality in Clinical Practice. He is an APA fellow (in Divisions 12, 36, 38, 46, and 47) and served on APA’s Council of Representatives (2016-21). He has published 29 books, including Living Ethically in an Unethical World (2024), Spiritually Informed Therapy (2024), Sexual Abuse in the Catholic Church: A Decade of Crisis, 2002-2012 (2011), and Contemporary Clinical Psychology, Fourth Edition (2022). He has published over 250 journal articles and book chapters and writes and maintains a private clinical practice as a licensed psychologist in Menlo Park, CA. He has been frequently featured in most major national and international media outlets. Time Magazine featured him in 2005 and referred to him in a 2002 cover story about clerical abuse as one of “three leading American Catholics.” He served as vice-chair of the National Review Board for the Protection of Children and Youth for the U.S. Conference of Catholic Bishops and other child protection Church review boards. He received an undergraduate degree in psychology from Brown University, an M.A. and PhD in clinical psychology from the University of Kansas, and completed his clinical internship and postdoctoral fellowship in clinical and health psychology at Yale University.

Plante discusses narcissism in American culture, its impact on relationships, and how online environments exacerbate self-presentation issues. They explored different narcissistic types, the erosion of community values, and coping strategies for narcissism, emphasizing early intervention and fostering healthy environments for children.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Thomas Plante. Do you pronounce the “e” at the end, or is it just flat?

Professor Thomas Plante: Just “Plant.” 

Jacobsen: Well, today we’re here with Thomas Plante, apology, to discuss narcissism and relationships, along with some recent technological developments that have transformed how people relate to even the most intimate aspects of life. When you look at the landscape of narcissism and intimacy, who do you see as the first social victims of narcissism, and what elements of intimacy tend to get knocked down a bit?

Plante: The challenge is that our culture, at least in America—I can’t speak for other cultures, but certainly in America—focuses more and more on the theme, “It’s all about me.” What’s in my best interest? What pleases me? What do I want? Even with dating and dating apps, people have their checklists—this is what I want—almost like a checklist for qualities you’d want in a car, a house, or food at a restaurant.

The problem is that when we nurture a narcissistic culture, it creates problems for intimacy and the give-and-take in a quality, long-term, satisfying relationship. If it’s all about me, then it’s not about us, and that causes significant problems. So, I think the major dilemma is that as we continue to nurture and support narcissistic qualities in our culture, including how we raise children, we reduce the ability to negotiate the give-and-take necessary for a fulfilling, intimate, long-term relationship.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: To be subtle here in terms of clarification on “give-and-take, you don’t mean scorekeeping but simply the regular reciprocity found in a healthy union, correct?

Thomas Plante: Yes.

Jacobsen: The same principle applies to friendships, business relationships, or any healthy orientation of any social dynamic.

Plante: It should. We always have to remind ourselves. The world doesn’t revolve around us. We might like it too. It just doesn’t. The more that we are in touch with each other, the more we are here in the community. Now, some cultures do this much better than others. For example, a few weeks ago, I was in Japan. Talking to people there, they shared that nobody wants to stand out and be unique; everyone wants to fit in. Watching crowds coming out of the Tokyo subway, dressed the same, heading to work—it’s very different from America, where narcissistic culture is on steroids. It’s about give-and-take and being mindful and attentive to others’ needs, which becomes harder and harder for people.

Jacobsen: Does the online space affect this too? Things like alternate personas, pseudonyms, anonymity, in terms of the things people are willing to say, ask at one another, if not to one another. 

Plante: People do remarkable things from the safety of their computers without having to actually confront people in a personal way. People can be incredibly nasty. People can present themselves in a certain way that is absolutely not based on reality. They can do that all from the comfort of their own computer, wherever they’re located. That’s a huge problem. The other problem with social media is the fact that we’re always engaging in these social comparisons. So there’s a lot of research about upward and downward social comparisons, and people can present themselves as everybody is just great and wonderful and having a fabulous time. That makes people feel bad, and because of these upward comparisons. So, they’re more likely to then want to compensate for that by trying to pump up their own self-presentation. Then you get into an arms race about who’s more fabulous and wonderful and brilliant and whatever. This makes everything worse. 

Jacobsen: I haven’t actually thought about this one. Are there areas of narcissism in American culture that are more presenting of a super duper self than others? So, I’m not just generic; I’m better than everyone and everything, and in every quality, I have more specific aspects, smarts, and looks–I don’t know. 

Plante: First off, we have to understand that there are different kinds of narcissism out there. There are different flavours. Some people are more benign narcissists who want all the attention. They like attention. They like to think of themselves in a favourable way and present themselves in a favourable way, but they’re not trying to hurt anybody. They’re not trying to push anybody down. Those are more benign narcissists. Then we have these what we might call phallic narcissists who are like they need to not only feel great but need to push other people down, insult, bully, and try to make other people feel bad.

Then we have what we call the malignant narcissist, for example, which tends to be the most dangerous, which some people would say that some American politicians suffer from–where they have this combination of narcissism, paranoia, and antisocial personality, which means that not only does the world revolve around them; they think that everybody’s out to get them. They’re willing to lie and cheat and steal. It doesn’t matter because the ends justify the means. There’s no empathy for anybody else. Those are the most dangerous kind.

So, there are a lot of different flavours of narcissism comes in different flavours. There may be what we call comorbidity with that narcissism. In other words, other kinds of psychiatric problems are associated with this person or whatever other than just narcissism. So, we have to be kind of thoughtful about that. We have to kinda be mindful that the thing is, is that and it’s hard for people. We have to put ourselves in other people’s shoes. That’s really hard for a lot of people to do. 

Jacobsen:” Let’s take a direct question in inverse order, just for fun. If you were to take the common characteristics of a healthy person, psychology, psychological structure, and relationship, and then you were to look at an unhealthy person, in terms of what we’re talking about with regards to narcissism. What are the factors that are most key to identifying healthy versus unhealthy? So, looking at narcissism but trying to emphasize the more constructive, positive, healthy versions of people.

Plante: A certain degree of narcissism, self-interest or whatever, is important for survival. For example, I teach ethics. I’ve been teaching ethics for 35 years at Stanford and 30 years at Santa Clara University. When we ask students over three and a half decades to talk about how they decide to solve problems and ethical challenges, egoism, which is basically a kind of narcissism, is always part of the equation. They’re always gonna consider the egoism or the narcissistic view about “what’s in my best interest?”.

And that in and of itself isn’t necessarily so bad. Some ethicists will say that egoism can actually be a good thing. It can be for a variety of reasons. But can we temper that within with other principles that can operate, like the common good, like putting yourself in other people’s shoes, cooperation and collaboration and so forth? So, a little bit of narcissism isn’t necessarily so bad.

It’s just that when it sucks all the air out of the room. That’s when it’s particularly problematic. So I think there are a couple of ways of thinking about this. So, for example, if we can see our other people, I know it’s hard for people as family, brothers and sisters or something like that. If we could see the sacred in them, if we can see the importance in them, something like that, then we’re more likely to treat people well. Now, some people are able to do this, and we have to be thoughtful about this.

They can say, “Well, look. I benefit when I treat other people well, because then I have a good reputation. People like me. People cooperate with me.” Lots of times people can come to appreciate that they get a lot out of treating other people well and respectfully and all of that.

So, in some respects, sometimes we might call that altruism that is in the service of narcissism. It can, so somebody might say, “Hey, look, I’m treating people very well, and people love me, and they think the world of me, and that makes me feel good.” Maybe that’s not so bad. 

Jacobsen: What would you consider, in essence, a healthy countercultural relationship? 

Plante: That’s hard. Are we talking about it? It depends, at least. 

Jacobsen: That’s a good point. It was a pretty general question. I’ll rephrase. What would you do if we had a rising measurement of either self-perception or objectively identified narcissism? This changes the culture more towards unhealthy relationships. People think more about me rather than we, et cetera. So what would you characterize, given that the current culture is like that, as a counterculture relationship? What would you consider a healthy one, where people are treating each other decently, benevolently, with a give-and-take/with reciprocity, thinking of the general commons and their own ‘commons of 2’–as I call it–and so on?

Plante: Yes. I think it can be very refreshing, very refreshing when you do bump into people like that, communities like that, where they’re sort of being very gracious to one another, taking care of each other, have other people’s best interests in mind and stuff like that. So I think what helps with that is if you can have smaller communities that seem to nurture and support that. Now, so as an example, people may have found that in their religious communities over the years, their religious-spiritual communities.

They may have found people with a like mind. People have shared values or something like that. They may have found intimate relationships outside of those communities and matchmaking situations in these communities, and that wasn’t necessarily a bad thing. The other thing is that people used to not move around so much. Now, people move around all the time, across the country, the world, and so forth, so they don’t kind of hang around people that they grew up with.

And you’re just very much a part of the community. It doesn’t have to be religious; it could be set completely secular, but you’re part of a community where people know each other again, and they take care of each other and things like that. We seem to have lost that because people first move around a lot. Secondly, more and more people are not affiliated with any kind of spiritual or religious kinda community that keeps them together and takes care of one another and all of that. So there are so many now kinda lone rangers, if you wanna call it that, lone rangers. So where do they go to find community?

Maybe their yoga class. Where do they go? And so I think it’s really hard. When you don’t have that community, then you don’t not only do you not have certain values and things like that that are being reinforced and so forth. You don’t have people kind of watching out for you. You don’t have people who are vetting for you, so when people are dating, for example, through anonymous apps and stuff like that.

There’s really no vetting process there. Whereas if you’re part of a community, people know each other, they know the scoop, they can fill each other in on who’s behaving and who’s not behaving, who’s been naughty, who’s been nice, or something like that. So we’ve lost that. It’s unfortunate, but I think we need to somehow find a way for contemporary society to try to get that back. 

Jacobsen: We have a rising secular community or, better yet, a demographic rise.

Secular communities: What about people who are trying to do that in a small way, with things like Sunday assemblies, ethical and cultural movements, and humanist communities and societies? Do those do you meet the same sustainability standards? 

Plante: I don’t think they do, to be honest.

I understand that those attempts, those attempts, that they’ve tried to do that kind of thing, but I tend to think that most of those things have kind of fizzled out. They’re not that sustainable. That also seems to be true for these spiritual-religious communities that tend to have very little dogma, very little tradition, or something like that. For example, the Unitarians tend not to have that many churchgoers; you could say that they are long-term sustainable. Now, it’s kind of a tough one because a lot of the religious and spiritual communities have been suffering with fewer and fewer attendees. Certainly, the pandemic really put the kibosh on a lot of that.

It was already declining. It really declined quite, quite significantly. In fact, Gallup has done polling for many, many years in this regard. If you ask people, have you been to some kind of a religious, spiritual service in the past seven days? People historically, about 40% of the American population said yes. Then that went down to 30%, but that’s based on self-report.

And if you actually look at the people who actually show up, that 30% turns into 15%. So it keeps kind of going down. The spiritual and religious communities may have their issues, but they’ve got a long-standing tradition and so forth that have sustained these communities over decades, centuries, and even millennia. Some of these newer communities. I don’t think they’ve been very sustainable. So, I think we have to find some way to create or nurture more contemporary communities that, maybe, have some of the benefits of some of these ancient traditions but are modernized in a certain way.

In fact, I just published an article recently in one of the professional journals about how you have to change or die and that some of these communities. Unless, they’re willing to look at themselves and make some changes, may just die on the vine. For example, there’s an article in this week’s New Yorker Magazine that talks about shakers. There’s only apparently, there’s only 2 shakers left: 2. Or just the New Yorker article.

It’s a tradition, that that is certainly dying. That can that can happen to many other traditions too. They’re not careful. 

Jacobsen: Then we have the elephants in the digital room. What has online pornography done through dating dating and mating?

Plante: Yes, that’s a very good question. There’s some good research about that; I’ve got patients in my private practice over the years who have had some troubles with that.

The pornography thing is a problem for a couple of reasons. First off, young people and kids that’s how they’re learning about sex and some relationships and sexuality through online pornography. In fact, the New York Times actually, the New York Times Magazine had a big feature article. I don’t know. Maybe it was a year or two ago on this very issue.

Basically, this makes the argument that this is how people are learning about sex through pornography. That’s not a very good way to learn about sex and relationships. Then, people who are engaging in online or other kinds of pornography can have an addictive element where they need more and more excitement in order to meet their satisfaction needs. So things can get a little bit out of hand there. Then, when they try to maintain or start a regular relationship, they can find it boring compared to what they’ve seen online.

So, I do worry about online pornography for a wide variety of reasons. I’ve had a number of patients in my practice who have really struggled with it, where it had been quite damaging for their attempts at finding satisfactory, normal kind of regular relationships. Some of these folks have gotten themselves in trouble. They’ve had it on their work computer. They have had child pornography pop up. 

Jacobsen: Oh my gosh.

Plante: Which is illegal, of course. So, once you start walking down that road, I don’t think it generally ends very well. 

Jacobsen: If you were to characterize the ethic of a narcissistic person or culture, in fact, individual and collective, what would be that ethic? 

Plante: The ethic. The ethic is like, “It’s all about me.” It’s just the rallying cry if you will. It’s all about me. There was once a wonderful I. It reminds me of a line from a movie a number of years ago with Bette Midler. When she plays this role, she’s very narcissistic. She’s talking about herself, talking about herself. Then she finally pauses and says, “Oh, enough about me. What do you think about me?”

Jacobsen: [Laughing]. 

Plante: And it was kind of funny because there’s so much truth to that. You think about it.

You probably know people in your life. I certainly know plenty of people in my life who are more than happy to talk about themselves, and they’re whatever, but they never ever ask you a question about yourself. It just doesn’t happen. So, unless you bring something up, they will not ask. And if you do bring something up, then, about yourself or you start to tell a story or whatever, their eyes glass over, or they start looking around or something like that. And that’s part of our culture. So, I think the rallying cry is all about me. It really isn’t if that can only be damaging to satisfactory relationships. 

Jacobsen: How has Professor Jean Twenge’s research played into this? I am aware of a number of people who reference her work. 

Plante: I know I know of her work. It’s down in San Diego. She does great work, has a lot of good quality publications, gets a lot of press, and so forth. So, I think, yes, people do pay attention to her work. It does underscore, particularly young people’s, way of being today. Because she does focus primarily on young people, I think she does great work and research, and you certainly hear a lot about it.

Jacobsen: How does the self-absorption of a narcissist differ from a person who tends to find more meaning, value, value, and sustainability of self-concept from being alone more than from being in a community? So they like people. They have nothing wrong with people. They have no social deficits. They’re just more introverted in terms of their spacing.

Plante: Yes, that’s fine. It’s fine because, certainly, America, at least American culture, kind of pulls for extroversion. It’skind of funny because I do a lot of psychological evaluations for people who want to become clerics. They wanna become priests, nuns, or deacons in the Roman Catholic, Episcopalian, or Orthodox churches.

I do a lot of, well over 1,000 of, these. So, we complete the psychological evaluation and testing. A lot of people will say that they experience themselves as introverted. But when you look at the testing, they’re not. They don’t come out introverted compared to national norms. I have experienced an awful lot with people who, because our culture really pulls for extroversion, think they’re very introverted, but they’re just like everybody else.

It’s just that extroverts get so much attention and are reinforced in our culture. So there’s nothing wrong with those who tend to be more introverted and interested in more alone time than others. They get to recharge their batteries by being by themselves as opposed to being with other people. There is that well-known author, Susan Cain, who wrote a very popularbook called Quiet, which talks about life as a narcissist. I think it got an awful lot of press, and a lot of introverts kind ofcame out of the woodwork after that book was published.

But no, there’s nothing. Folks who are introverted are not necessarily narcissistic. They just need that kind of alone time to kind of recharge their batteries and feel more comfortable. That’s perfectly fine. Hopefully, they can find pathways in relationships, careers, and so forth that are suitable for their personality type.

Jacobsen: What have you seen in your practice as the most extreme cases of narcissism in terms of just interpersonal dealings? What comes to mind? What stories can you tell without any identifying material that you could talk about publicly? 

Plante: Yes, you certainly have to be thoughtful about confidentiality and all of that. You have to be careful not to disclose too much when you’re in this business. But, no, I’ve certainly had patients who are narcissistic on steroids. They’ve said some pretty amazing things. I can remember one couple I was seeing; they were engaged, but they were not yet married. They were having some conflict. He said right in front of her that he thinks about cars and that his fiancee is like a Volvo, very reliable and very stable.

But he’s the kind of guy that needs a Porsche now and then. He was trying to say that she was; she’s a great wife in terms of keeping things stable, but he needs some more excitement. Monogamy may be hard for him, so that was pretty remarkable. Another patient was gonna boycott her son’s wedding.

Jacobsen: [Laughing]. 

Plante: She didn’t like who he was going to get married to. When you kind of unpack why she was so upset with the person her son was gonna marry, basically, she said, when you kind of really get to it, “Because she’s not just like me. She’s not just like me.”

Jacobsen: Horrifying. 

Plante: Her son should marry somebody just like me.

Jacobsen: So, she was gonna boycott the wedding. Luckily, she ultimately did not boycott the wedding with a littleencouragement on my part. But there’s another guy. He got himself in trouble. He caused a scene. He was a college student who caused a kind of scene where he ended up throwing those big water coolers that are pretty big.

He was having a conflict with a secretary or admin in an office building or something. He was a customer. He got upset, so he ended up pulling one of those things out and throwing it at her. 

Jacobsen: Oh my.

Plante: When I asked, he said, “Well, she deserved it. She wasn’t giving me what I wanted.” 

And, you’re like, “Okay. All right. We have a lot of work to do here.” So, here I live in Silicon Valley. I live and work in Silicon Valley in Northern California. You’ve got it: a lot of these very successful tech. Executives, and so forth, are notorious for their narcissistic tendencies. And they can really create a lot of damage among those who either live with or work closely with them. So here, certainly in Silicon Valley, narcissism is very much reinforced, especially when people are so successful. They’re billionaires or close to it, and they feel like everything they do and say is a gift from God.

Jacobsen: Being mindful of time here. When you have people who come to you, one or both partners are narcissistic; in terms of treatment modalities, how much can you attenuate overall narcissism? Also, the subcomponents of what we call narcissism in a clinical setting, a therapeutic setting, can be diminished or even eliminated–differing opinions. 

Plante: Yes, because people, as they develop and get a little older and whatnot, just become who they are for the most part; people don’t change their personality very much once it’s kind of solidified. So if someone comes to me and they’re in their twenties, thirties, forties, as opposed to being little kids or something, basically, your goal is to try to help them develop the strategies, the coping skills, and so forth, that can help them cope and manage with who they are as opposed to radical change who they are.

That’s typically the goal. So when when so it’s trying to help them develop skills, strategies, feedback mechanisms, and so forth, that can help put the brakes on some of the impulses that they have to act in a narcissistic grandiose way. So, again, you’re not really trying to cure them. You’re trying to help them cope. Some things, in the psychiatric psychological world, you can kind of fix and some things you can’t.

Really, it’s about coping. Certainly when it comes to personality styles or personality disorders or anything like that, it’s really more about coping than curing. 

Jacobsen: It’s unfortunate. But if the evidence goes there, then we follow up. 

Plante: Right. Right. I think early intervention is always helpful because you see this stuff starting to unfold early in the game. Usually, people don’t wake up at age 40, and all of a sudden, they become narcissists. Usually, you can kind of see this coming. So, it’s helpful if you can try to engage in early intervention. Also, as I say, it takes a village here. When you think about it, it’s not just psychotherapy or anything like that that can that can help. It takes a lot of different things. So when I think of my own son, my own son is 28 years old.

I think he’s a great guy. I think he’s a wonderful guy. You think about, “Okay, how he became who he is? Well, certainly, part of it is genetics. Part of it is parenting, and part of it is the village that surrounds him. He was very active in Boy Scouts, and he was very active in music. He was very active in track and cross country. In some respects, you kind of shape people not only through culture and parenting but also the kind of community that surrounds them. I think we all have to be very thoughtful about that, if we’re parents or whatever, and be very mindful of what kind of communities we can surround our children with so that they can be good human beings.

So, for example, as I mentioned, my son was really into Boy Scouts. I was not a kid myself. Even to this very day, including a few hours ago, whenever I text him, I always text him an eagle emoji to remind him that he’s an Eagle Scout and should behave as such. I’ve been doing this ever since he went off to college. Literally, every time I text him, I alwaystext him an eagle as a little reminder that this is who you are. Embrace, embrace that. This is just a friendly reminder.

Jacobsen: Thomas, thank you very much for your time. I appreciate it. 

Plante: Sure. I’m always happy to help.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Nasser and Baran Yousefi: The Peace School

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/11

The Peace School is new in Canada, founded and accredited by the Ontario Ministry of Education in 2023. Currently, the school has five children with a capacity for 120 and is well-financed and supported by the parents whose children attend. The school’s pedagogy has attracted the attention and support of UNICEF, UNESCO, and UNHCR, which strongly encouraged Dr. Nasser Yousefi, the Principal of The Peace School, to share his pedagogy and learning environment with other countries. Canada was Dr. Yousefi’s first choice for the next Peace School. Dr. Yousefi began his career as a child psychologist, studying in Sweden and earning a Master’s in Education in Childhood Growth and Development. In his exploration of the best pedagogy and learning environment for children, Dr. Yousefi completed a PhD in Educational Approaches at Madonna University in Italy and a PhD in Educational Psychology at Northwest University in the USA. This training combined humanistic and cognitive approaches to education. For many years, Dr. Yousefi was an educational consultant for UNICEF. He has conducted educational and research activities for various groups of children, including immigrant children, minorities, street children, and children with special needs. Dr. Yousefi was the Principal of the Peace (Participatory) School in Tehran, Iran, from 2005 to 2023, graduating 500 students from kindergarten to high school, with graduates accepted at universities in Europe, America, and Canada. Dr. Yousefi is passionate about creating the best future for children and is dedicated to creating safe and nurturing learning environments based on holistic principles. 

Nasser discusses the humanistic educational model, emphasizing its difference from mainstream education. Humanistic schools focus on student empowerment, freedom of choice, and collaboration rather than passive learning and competition. They integrate societal events, personal experiences, and cultural backgrounds into the curriculum to foster well-rounded development. While often criticized for isolating students, The Peace School promotes active engagement with the community, offering field trips and diverse perspectives to encourage critical thinking and personal growth.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you get funding for these educational efforts in the Islamic Republic of Iran? 

Dr. Nasser Yousefi and Baran Yousefi: So, all are provided by the tuition. We didn’t have any extra funding or financial support. The school was supervised by an NGO in Iran. The school was a project of this NGO. The NGO provided all the educational programming and everything else. Nothing came from outside the school; it was all within the NGO and the school system.

Sometimes, we held events to provide fun activities, like concerts or art exhibitions, and all the funds gathered from these events were used exclusively for the school. Most of the support and help we received came from volunteers. Many of our operations, educational programs, research, and even teacher training were handled by volunteers. We needed to pay only for basic things, like the rent for the building and our full-time teachers.

Everything we paid for was solely for the students. Aside from the building and salaries, everything else was handled by volunteers. Research, planning, and everything else were done voluntarily. The parents whose children were enrolled in the school also helped. We wanted the parents to be part of the whole system and to participate. When they helped and supported the school, it became important to them. Sometimes, we would ask if they had a party room in their building for events or meetings, if they could help with transportation or field trips, or volunteered for library operations. Anything that could reduce our expenses. The whole project was so interesting to them that they wanted to be involved.

They were so excited about the whole project and the school concept that they didn’t wait for us to ask for help; they did it themselves. One of the school’s principles was that we believed the whole community was our school. We could use community resources as learning opportunities for our students rather than building or creating new opportunities. We always used available resources provided by families, whether they worked in a company, factory, vet clinic, or lab.

Those opportunities were the best for our students to learn something new. It also decreased our expenses and created more learning opportunities. It helped us create a culture of utilizing available community resources for children. Instead of building something ourselves, we used what we already had. This model could be used in any city, not just the capital or larger cities. It could work in any city based on available resources and people. Looking at it broadly, there are many opportunities for schools to use for their students. It doesn’t mean we must create them; they are already available.

This approach also allowed us to have multiple field trips and use community resources. All the libraries in the city were our schools. All the museums were our school. Every company, factory, and store became part of our learning environment. We viewed the entire city as a learning opportunity. It meant that everyone in society was a teacher for us. The museum guide, or guides, yes. They would have been the best teachers, especially for the Museum of History. Or people who worked at the laboratory.

They were the best teachers for biology. We were open to other people becoming our teachers. We were fearless of letting more people join our team and welcomed them as much as possible. Everyone in Tehran, where we were based, was very welcoming to our students and the school. We wanted to hear from them because we respected their talents, abilities, and everything. We wanted them to be the experts in some situations, and they did everything they could for us. That’s why we never encountered any closed doors from the people.

We did face situations where the government closed doors for us, but people were very open and welcoming.

Jacobsen: A few things come to mind. This will be the shortest of the three I have in mind. When people own a school or the educational system and participate that way, did they adopt a motto or slogan within the school?

Yousefi: Yes, the founders had a motto. The school slogan was “Make the world a better place.” The teachers never expected anything specific from the students but always asked them to improve the world for themselves and others, regardless of their jobs or careers.

Yes, it doesn’t matter what job or career you follow; you can improve the world. You are not allowed to hurt anyone or make someone else suffer. You need to love others and show empathy and compassion. We tried to teach love and empathy. As teachers and adults, we don’t have much to teach students, but we can spread love to them.

Regarding the concerts and other fundraising efforts, we raised funds to reduce operating costs and lower parents’ fees. These concerts were private and not publicly announced. Generally, anyone is allowed to hold a concert, but for larger public events, they need a permit from the government. For us, it was different. Women, for example, are not allowed to perform publicly. Our fundraising concerts were all private and spread by word of mouth.

This touches on the third question, which might require a longer response. We did face some pressure and pushback from the government. The main issue was that they didn’t recognize us as a school. This meant we couldn’t give any diplomas or certificates to our students. So that was one of the issues, yes. The government wants every school to follow its curriculum and textbooks, and the same textbooks are used across the country. It doesn’t matter where the school is; every student has to read the same textbook.

That was one of the main issues and pushbacks. One of our biggest challenges was that the government only believed in one system and approach. They didn’t even allow an alternative approach to be considered. However, we wanted to continue promoting different and multiple approaches and methods worldwide, and we believed we had to at least look at them. We wanted to promote and support diversity rather than singularity, but the government needed help.

They wanted their system and approach to be seen and recognized. It doesn’t matter where you live in Iran, whether in the north, south, east, or west; everyone has to read the same textbook. It doesn’t consider their cultural, religious, or political backgrounds. Everyone has to read the same textbook and take the same exams. However, we must consider the child’s cultural background, history, language, stories, and even religion in their educational program. Iran has a diversity of religions and languages, and we can’t ignore this diversity. You can speak up to one language when there are various languages. In the humanistic approach, we must consider this diversity and these differences. We wanted to do this, and we tried to do it. Of course, we still try to do it, but the government doesn’t support it.

Jacobsen: So, no political violence was enacted against any of you, the students, the teachers, or the families. Is that correct?

Yousefi: Violence in the sense that we might usually imagine? No, because we were conducting a research project. The development of this alternative method over twenty years was a massive research project. We always told government organizations that we were implementing a research project to expand educational diversity. We always spoke as a group of specialists. However, I believe that the fact we were never officially recognized and our students were unable to receive an official diploma is itself a form of violence.

Jacobsen: When you’re in a highly religiously controlled society, and everyone, regardless of background, has to take these examinations and follow the educational curriculum, what is in it? What do people have to learn? Is it anything connected to the real world? Which parts are useful, and which are nonsense that train people to be effective citizens in a theocracy?

Yousefi: The focus of the schools is, after all, the promotion and expansion of religious thought, specifically introducing students to Islamic teachings. However, Iran is a country rich in diverse religions, where followers of different faiths have lived together in peace for centuries. When the official education system ignores this diversity and doesn’t provide opportunities for dialogue among followers of various religions, ethnicities, or minorities, diversity and plurality are ultimately lost. Of course, followers of religions like Christianity, Judaism, Zoroastrianism, and others had their own schools that only enrolled students of their faith. However, there was no interaction between students of different religions within the official education system. 

Jacobsen: As part of the curriculum, are kids taught things that aren’t useful, like prayer and other religious practices, that might be meaningful to the parents but not necessarily effective for dealing with the realities of life when they grow up?

Yousefi: In mainstream schools, there are subjects for religion and prayer. We don’t know exactly how parents feel because we aren’t in contact with parents from mainstream schools, but we hear they aren’t very satisfied with what’s happening. We also hear that sometimes their children practice something at school but something else at home, leading to conflicts.

They only study and read to pass exams. They don’t necessarily believe what they study. This isn’t limited to religious subjects; it includes history, literature, geography, and even science and social sciences. Students memorize the textbooks to pass exams. The textbooks include stories in literature that students have to read, but these are only sometimes the books they choose when they go to the library. We wanted to connect school and personal life, not separate them. It wasn’t easy; being honest with yourself and your education while maintaining balance was hard.

Jacobsen: Does the mainstream educational system make any distinctions between Sunni, Shia, Ahmadi, or Quranist interpretations of Islam, or is it all one version?

Yousefi: No, it only talks about Islam in a general sense. Discussions around Zoroastrianism and other faiths are not included. The government has its version of Islam that it promotes. It could be more realistic and accurate; it’s just something the government developed.

Jacobsen: A friend of mine is a cosmologist at UBCO and Lethbridge. He’s a Quranist Muslim. We’ve been discussing interfaith topics for a long time. He’s big on interfaith dialogues and humanistic interpretations of Islam, which might appeal to secularized individuals. However, this isn’t that. I’m a minor figure doing administrative stuff for them, but the Canadian Quantum Research Center has a decent number of citations. 

Jacobsen: Let’s contrast what was described with the mainstream system’s method and how it doesn’t recognize anything other than a single worldview, and not in an educational sense when I’m thinking about it. They’re taking it as true rather than a secularized world religions class, where they teach what people believe and let you decide for yourself. It’s much different. They’ve pre-decided for you. What’s your humanistic approach to this? 

Yousefi: We consider religion to be part of a child’s background. Many Persian poems have roots in Islam, Zoroastrianism, or even Judaism. So, when you want to learn about Rumi or Hafez, you must also learn about those roots. For example, you can’t understand Hafez’s poems if you don’t know the Torah stories or Rumi’s poems without knowledge of the Quran. The same applies to Eastern countries. If you don’t know the Bible, you can’t fully understand Victor Hugo’s or Charles Dickens’s stories.

Talking about the Bible, Quran, or Torah is necessary to understand literature and poetry. It doesn’t mean we are promoting that religion. Rather, it’s about understanding the culture and history needed to grasp something else. The same goes for science. Some scientific concepts have come from Eastern or Western positions or even how we look at evolution. There are different narratives about evolution rooted in religion. Discussing a scientist or physician doesn’t mean we are endorsing their religious views. We are discussing their ideas and theories. We only focus on religion as a background context. We don’t have a specific subject for religion, but we touch on it to explain the backstory of other topics. If a student is curious about a religion, we open up, considering it a great learning opportunity. But we always respect all religions and those who follow them. We are one of the rare schools with diverse religions, but we never promote any particular one.

We always help students learn more about a religion if they have questions. Some families specifically asked us not to talk about any religion, especially in Iran. However, we could only say yes if a child was interested in learning about Islam or any other religion . We respected their curiosity and taught them about it without promoting it.

In the context of Iran, if you advocate for something other than Islam, there could be negative consequences. But we never wanted to advocate for a specific religion because it would mean we couldn’t respect others. We wanted to allow students from other religions to speak freely and be heard. One year, the students themselves asked for a class on religion. We had a program to introduce each religion without advocating for any. We also explained that some people are atheists and don’t believe in any religion. We focused on diversity, saying, “This is it,” rather than limiting ourselves to one viewpoint.

This approach wasn’t limited to religion. It extended to literature and music as well. Some schools only teach one genre of music or one instrument. We introduced different genres and instruments, even challenging ones. We aimed to discuss the best examples in each genre across subjects like arts and science.

If a school restricts everything to one religion or genre, it restricts diversity. We encouraged students to love their country and respect other countries, lands, and nationalities. We never advocated for nationalism or exclusivity.

Jacobsen: So, that’s good. This last response will be helpful for those in Canada who may have a stereotype of what Iran is like. There’s this ghostly governmental presence that restricts everyone in every way. Can you describe the humanistic model of education, whether about politics, religion or anything else, in a compact way as something like individualistic cosmopolitanism for learning about a wide range of human identities and truths about the world in a semi-autonomous direction?

Yousefi: I am not a representative of the Iranian government, and my educational and research work was never approved by the government. Therefore, I cannot say what the public schools were thinking or what they expected from this education. Whatever it was, I was critical and opposed to the educational system.

Since the humanistic approach’s main objective is respect, it considers every person’s aspect and background. It allows people to talk about who they are today, helping them take the next steps. A humanistic teacher is not an ethics teacher; it’s not someone who judges people. It’s a person who accepts a child in every aspect, in every way possible.

For example, we consider children and see where they stand and what they bring from home, their past, their background, their culture, and everything else. But we don’t judge that child and their background. They will never trust us again if we judge them or share their dreams or thoughts. So, we need to accept them as they are, wherever they are, so we can help them take the next steps toward the future.

A humanistic teacher needs to correct the child immediately. We wait long enough to address their mistakes, issues, or misunderstandings. Sometimes, students come with a racist point of view, and we don’t stop them immediately. We listen and ask them to talk enough so we can understand where they need help. If we start to correct or judge them immediately, they will stop being honest with us and never share their thoughts. So, language, politics, religion, or nationality are not priorities for a humanistic education. What’s important is their characteristics, personalities, emotions, and understanding of the world; we must fully understand them to help them grow and develop. A humanistic teacher is more of a caregiver than a traditional teacher.

It’s someone who takes care of the children. We care about policies that support caring for students and children, whether it’s regulations, concepts, or theories. The world needs caregivers more than traditional teachers—not caregivers in the sense of caring for someone ill but someone who genuinely cares for children’s development and well-being. But that’s where I differ from a behaviourist teacher to a humanistic teacher. 

Jacobsen: Is there a risk in teaching students intellectual and analytical skills without a proportional development of emotional and social skills in students? A healthy development of the sentiments to make the intellectual and analytical skills more rounded.

Yousefi: It’s both the holistic approach and integrated education. Integrated education means we pay attention to the child’s needs immediately. You can’t say that you only focus on their cognitive development without paying attention to their nutrition or malnutrition. You can only focus on social skills by considering society’s rules and regulations. Cognitive psychology and behavioural psychology both caused the issue of segregating these needs. Cognitive psychology focuses only on cognitive needs and doesn’t consider emotional and social needs. 

Behavioural psychology only focuses on individual success and forgets that a child is a complex person with different developmental skills and needs. Paying attention to only one aspect and disregarding the others can be dangerous. It could be creativity, reasoning, or analyzing. We need to work on every need and aspect of a child at the right moment. If we skip paying attention to emotional and social needs, then we might end up with scientists who make bombs, promoting war and destruction.

Who’s making these bombs and weapons of mass destruction? It’s often those specialized individuals who lack emotional and social skills. They never had the opportunity to develop empathy and compassion. Yes, there are doctors and physicians involved in organ trafficking or mutilation who lack empathy. Where did they go to school? They might have attended very controlling and closed schools that forced them to think about war due to their conditions.

The world’s educational system fails to teach people to love each other and empathize; defending any war means going against humanity. Most of the workforce involved in the war, whether in the army, weapons factories, or transportation, attended schools that failed them. Teachers must answer how we taught them and who they became. It’s very sad and makes me emotional.

Jacobsen: Let’s shift topics so you don’t cry. Famously, Professor Noam Chomsky essentially destroyed B.F. Skinner’s behaviourism in an 8-page review article. This brought about the cognitive revolution, and humanistic psychology evolved from it. Rogers and other fundamental humanistic psychologists are dead. How has humanistic psychology and humanistic education evolved since its inception, so the cutting edge in the 2010s/2020s?

Yousefi: This person, Noam Chomsky, wasn’t the first to write against behaviourist education. He was one of the prominent critics. Maslow, Ferrier, Rogers, and Fromm were all critics of the behaviourist approach. People like Yalom and Pinker also criticize it. I am also a serious critic of behaviorism in my country. believe that we cannot easily overlook a system that harms the students’ psychology so much. We must raise our voices against behaviorist education.

Some people start questioning it when you shout negatively. I am  happy to have been among the few to question behaviourist education. It’s good when behaviourist psychologists and educational specialists hear this criticism. Yes, it’s like validation that you’re doing the right thing—not that you intended to, but you were compelled to.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Seth Meyers on Narcissistic Patterns and Phenomenology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/11

Seth Meyers, Psy.D. (Psychology Today) is a licensed clinical psychologist, T.V. guest, author, and relationship expert. He appears regularly on television on “Nancy Grace” and has also appeared on “Dr. Drew,” “20/20,” “Good Morning America,” “The Doctors,” “Fox News,” Showbiz Tonight,” “Bill Cunningham,” “Jane Velez-Mitchell,” “The Early Show,” “Good Day L.A.,” “KTLA,” and others. He has been featured in The New York TimesUSA Today, and The Huffington Post. His official website includes many media credits and television clips. He wrote Dr. Seth’s Love Prescription: Overcome Relationship Repetition Syndrome and Find the Love You Deserve. His newest podcast, on Spotify and iTunes, is INSIGHT with Dr. Seth.

Meyers explains the complexities of treating narcissistic personality disorder (NPD), emphasizing the resistance to therapy due to narcissists’ lack of self-awareness and sensitivity to criticism. He discusses therapy options, the role of the false self, and the emotional toll on those close to narcissists, highlighting the frustration and self-erasure they often experience.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Seth Meyers. We want to get some first thoughts on treatment modalities for either formal NPD or people along a spectrum of narcissistic patterns of psychology. So, what are treatment modalities available? What is the efficacy? What are your general thoughts on that, as an expert here? 

Dr. Seth Meyers: Many individuals with mental health training will explain that a narcissistic personality is resistant to meaningful change. There are many different types of therapy that one could pursue for many different types of mental disorders, including personality disorders. One could seek out a behavioural type of therapy, such as dialectical behaviour therapy for the treatment of narcissistic personality, or one may seek out psychodynamic therapy, which is exploratory in nature to try to look at one’s unconscious drives, and motivations in order to see how that impacts their behaviour.

The same issue–let me put that differently; at root, narcissistic personality is a difficult disorder to study because it depends so much on the self-report of its subjects and because one’s self-image and presentation of self is central to the disorder, there is incredible loading or possibility for skewing and dishonest reporting. So, studying narcissism is much the experience of many reports of having a relationship with a severe Narcissist, which is to say, “Frustrating” because it is a complex construct that is difficult to truly examine. 

Jacobsen: Is the difficulty in truly examining it due to the longevity of the enriched falsehoods that build or construct the complexities of the false self? The false self starts early to replace the true self or the authentic self–as placeholder terms.Does the longevity of this false self-existence and development make it that complex construct? 

Meyers: So, to begin with, your question shows just how theoretical the construct of narcissism is. We have no ability toprove it. We will never prove the roots of narcissism.

Now, many people will talk about how there are two selves: a false self and a public self. As a practitioner and psychologist, I believe that. I also believe that we can glean that at some point in time, there was the construction of the bifurcation of 2 different selves. The problem is when it happened, it happened early, and that 6-year-old or 14-year-old probably wasn’t available to fill out any surveys that we could use later for psychological data reports. So we don’t know, and there’s a lot of inference.

There’s a lot of presumption that happens when we think about narcissists. What is most important whenever the conversation turns to narcissism is, “What can we say for sure? What can we say with the greatest certainty? And then what solutions are the best possible solutions given this, given what certainty we have”? What is most certain that we know is that people many people report having conflictual relationships with a subset of individuals who do not seem to have personality characteristics that are consistent with social convention and the social rules that young children are taught and then expected to have mastered by adult age, and those include basic things like empathy, social reciprocity, perspective taking, thinking about another person’s feelings.

We know for sure that there is a subset of individuals that display a lack of some of these important social characteristics, and yet, it does not necessarily translate to another subset of individuals we know of that we think of as full-blown psychopaths. And this subset that we are talking about is safe to call them–it is safe to refer to them as–narcissistic personalities because the DSM does do a good job of capturing those characteristics. Now, why does a person become a narcissist? We can only presume. Also, what is an effective treatment for a narcissist? Is there an effective treatment for a narcissist?

We’ll never have a good answer for that question a) because we would require an individual to believe that they have a problem in order to submit to treatment, and a part of the disorder is to resist the idea of there being any weakness or flaw. So, I’ll round out what I’m saying to say that another thing many people will share at the water cooler is that narcissists are never present for therapy, and this is common. This is conventional wisdom that narcissists don’t present for therapybecause they don’t believe anything is wrong with them. In my experience as a psychologist and as a practitioner, someone who has conducted and also reviewed 100, if not thousands, of complex mental assessments, mental health assessments over a 20-year career working in community mental health, hospitals, clinics, et cetera, that narcissistic personalities will actually sometimes present for therapy. Now, why do some narcissists go to treatment?

They do not go to treatment to correct problems they believe they have. They typically go because someone in their close personal life has bruised their ego, and what they do is they use the therapy and the therapist as a vehicle to ally with them and support them against the perceived threat or perpetrator who bruised their ego. Essentially, a narcissist may go to see a therapist to get the therapist to say, “Oh, you’re right. Your husband, or your wife, is crazy,” and sorry for talking so much.”

Jacobsen: It’s instructive. So they go to them for this validation of their false reality. 

Meyers: To be propped up, that false self to be propped up. 

Jacobsen: So when they’re doing this, are there ways in which ethically viable methodologies can leverage this pathology of that personality construct to provide a modicum of treatment?

Meyers: A meaningful question that is worth exploring is this one. If there is any way to reach a narcissist and possibly motivate change, what would that look like? The only hope for reaching a narcissist is to make them feel safe and to avoid anything at all that could even remotely be perceived as criticism. The narcissist is sensitive to criticism and hypersensitive to–hypersensitive in a way that almost reaches a state of clinical paranoia–that the slightest thing that could be wrong with them could act as dynamite because it could be used later as leverage against them. So a lot of what motivates the narcissist, what keeps them going, their guiding principle is to avoid vulnerability at all costs.

Narcissistic personalities tend to be scorekeepers, and the mental world they live in is all about who has the leverage. So exposing themselves and being vulnerable makes them terrified at root because they perceive it as an opening for someone to take advantage of them or exploit them, And they will not allow that under any circumstance. 

Jacobsen: So there’s a lot there. Fear is the emotion of vulnerability and living in terms of the mental mode and the presentation of a false self. So what links this root in fear reaction, something automatic, this false self, and this not wanting, this lack of desire–whatever the opposite of desire is for–any form of vulnerability?  So, the line of trend or thought is between linking both fear and not wanting any vulnerability. I guess the 4th one would be the extreme paranoia and the presentation of a false self in all ways. So let’s take a hypothetical–what happens if that person is, in fact, exposed and their illegitimate fears, in fact, do come true? What happens to this construct? 

Meyers: One of the deepest and most primitive fears that a severe narcissist will have is the fear of being exposed, and that means being exposed as a human being with three dimensions and both strengths and weaknesses. See, flaws are not to be tolerated in the mental world of a narcissist. They cannot exist.

A lot of people will say that narcissism is a shame-based disorder, that the root of it is shame, that a young person was shamed so badly early on that it created this overcompensated self later. It’s a theory. Do I believe that that’s true? In some cases, though, that may not have happened. So now what happened with narcissism is you had some people that created this term.

“Well, these are covert narcissists,” “Well, these are these are more traditional narcissists,” and then you’ve got another camp that talks about malignant narcissists. All of these different terms show you how complex we are as everyday people; you know how complex this term is. And again, how frustrating because the truth is all we have are theories. All we really have are theories. But to answer your question in an organized way, what happens to the severe narcissist when exposed?

When a severe narcissist’s character defects are exposed, any vulnerabilities or weaknesses are exposed and able to be seen by others, especially anyone outside the home. The individual who perpetrated that exposure will become the target of rage. What most people cannot begin to relate to is the lengths to which the narcissistic individual has spent their life, their time, their energy, their mornings, noons, and nights trying to seal off any possibility that someone may come to see them as faulty in any way. The progression, the natural automatic reaction, is rage. Now, is there something biologically based happening?

Is there different amygdala functioning in narcissists? At what age? See, what we would really need in in the best best of all possible worlds, we would have really elaborate batteries of testing done, on children at 5, at 10, at 15, at 25. That way, then we could have a little better sense of the true roots of narcissism. 

Jacobsen: It’s a good answer. What happens? Well, let’s take the inverse of these examples, and I don’t know how psychology presents itself. Healthy individuals, when they have their humanity shown, are not “exposed,” too, because “exposed” is a much more loaded term in this context. Although appropriate for the portrayal of the rage, coming out of the fear. So when someone has their regular self shown, they go to sleep. They go to the bathroom.

They wake up with bedheads. Just regular stuff. They got fired from some job some time ago. They failed an exam. Regular people stuff that happens from time to time. How does a normal, healthy person with a non-narcissistic psychological structure react, act, learn, and grow?

Meyers: So what I’m going to say to you is: I don’t know you, but I presume it will not make sense to you what I’m gonna say because my guess is that you are like most people.

If you ask a narcissist, what would you say are some of your weaknesses or some of your character defects? If you ask directly someone that you believe, and it’s only people, by the way, who truly can identify and know when an individual has this type of disorder, they feel it. They may not be mental health practitioners, but they know it; they feel it. They’ve read enough about it, usually people at work or people in their homes. Freud used to say that it is in one’s work life or one’s romantic life where one’s true deepest issues come out. It is true. It is within our work life and in our romantic life where, perhaps, our truest self gets to be known. Why? Because in those two environments, we are the most interdependent with others.

Interdependence, if you’re psychologically healthy, is terrific. Interdependence, if you are mentally unhealthy, is incredibly triggering. So a narcissist will tell you, will tell you, will look you straight in the eye with no effect, almost as if they don’t completely understand your question or are even slightly offended, will say, I don’t believe I really have any flaws.”

Jacobsen: That’s terrifying. 

Meyers: Which is terrifying. Now, what a healthy person would say to the narcissist is, but are you do you believe you are not a human being? A part of normal social and psychological development, right, is for each one of us to progress from the age of children to adulthood to see our fallibility, our vulnerability. It is to say that, in some ways, to be a severe narcissist, their grandiosity is so extreme that, actually, they don’t see themselves in some ways as even human. Do you doyou know how wild that is to to wrap your head around? 

Jacobsen: It seems as if from a non-expert perspective, when you’re saying these things, they are the literal case of a Martian, not coming down to Earth, but coming out of it, and finding themselves in a world in which their internal world is not fully integrated.

So there’s an insecurity of internal objects about life, ideas, people. So then, they have the paranoia example is quite interesting because it sounds they’re having a distorted interpretation of the events. Their internal objects are completely warped. So then, out of this paranoia, this misperception and misconception then becomes an extrapolated, to you, “Could you harm me sometime down the road? Therefore, I’m going to react and defend my hypothetical self.”

Meyers: That’s right. So, we are talking about cognitive distortion. We are talking about a type of cognitive distortion that can be so illogical. The question is, does it almost border on a mild psychotic process? At what point does someone’s grandiose delusion about their superiority break with reality to the point that we mental health experts would say, do we need to assess for psychosis? I’ll give you an example. I’ll share an example. I once had a supervisor in graduate school.

I went to grad school in New York. I once had a supervisor. She was working with a severely anorexic patient, severely anorexic. This individual had gone in and out of the hospital. The anorexia was so severe, and–I don’t know–you probably know enough about anorexia to know that this is a life-threatening disorder, anorexia. And this supervisor shared that she believed, based on her clinical expertise, she extrapolated that there may be what she believed is a psychotic element to that type of severe anorexia.

So, when we look at some of these cognitive distortions, now, we’re talking about severe narcissism as just one example, but there are many examples where one’s cognitive distortion about a thing, whether their own value as a person–narcissism, their own body–anorexia nervosa; when it can get so extreme that we really do have to ask ourselves to also rule out psychotic process diagnostically. 

Jacobsen: Those seem like things you could potentially have a metric in terms of even gross anatomy of the mind. For things like the Penfield Map, you do actually get proportional sizing of things based on the number of nerves. If someone has a warped self-map with body dysmorphia and bulimia nervosa, could you, in fact, find something like “neural correlates” for these kinds of things? 

Meyers: This is exactly why, in most colleges and universities, the psychology department is in the social sciences or inthe humanities department and not in the natural sciences. I do think that it’s possible. But any time we are trying to examine a disorder that is so interwoven with self-image, we will always have a challenge. 

Jacobsen: Just mindful of time. So, what about the consequences, not for the individual? Those seem a little more obvious because if the person is living a false self, they’re essentially living a lie to themselves. When they are with others, when they want to date, mate, as they do, or others want to do with them–for a variety of reasons? What are the consequences of those relationships for people who find themselves in this vortex? 

Meyers: Yes, so we are talking about the phenomenology of being in emotional proximity to a narcissist, the phenomenology of what it feels to be in a relationship, a consistent relationship with a narcissist.

I have written extensively about narcissism. I have worked with so many individuals who have had experiences with individuals who have narcissistic personalities. The experience is typically frustrating and self-erasing, self-dismissing. The individual in proximity to the narcissist, in regular proximity to the narcissist, comes to understand that their thoughts and feelings don’t really matter. Their thoughts and feelings are dismissed and waved away with a callous hand.

The individual comes to understand to keep the relationship; they must submit and agree to the spoken and unspoken rules that are outlined by the narcissist. Now, in the end, many narcissists are left either in work environments. People tend to leave those jobs or in romantic relationships; people will typically walk away. Children of narcissists will, sometimes, estrange themselves forever or for periods of time. Friendships will be abandoned altogether.

A lot of times, people that are blood ties or financial ties are the one thing that can keep people somewhat connected to people who are narcissists. 

This has been fun. You’re great. 

Jacobsen: Thank you very much. Appreciate it. 

Meyers: Thanks, Scott. See you later.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Enrico Gnaulati: Christian and Humanist Love Ethics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/10

Dr. Enrico Gnaulati is a clinical psychologist based in Pasadena, California, and the author of the nationally acclaimed book Back to Normal: Why Ordinary Childhood Behavior Is Mistaken for ADHD, Bipolar Disorder, and Autism Spectrum Disorder. His work has been featured on Al Jazeera America, KPCC Los Angeles, and KPFA Berkeley; in Maclean’s and Prevention magazines; and online at the Atlantic and Salon. Gnaulati talks about secular humanism, contrasting it with traditional Christian views on marriage. They explore differences in power dynamics, intimacy, egalitarianism, and mortality awareness, emphasizing secular humanism’s fairness and personal accountability in long-term relationships, based on “Out with Agape Love and In with Secular Love Ethics.”

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Enrico Gnaulati. He is in Altadena, California, United States. I didn’t know about that place; I knew about Pasadena before hearing about it. So, how did you first get into secularism? A quick primer question. 

Enrico Gnaulati: The honest but quick answer is that I studied to be a Catholic priest in rural Scotland as a young teenager. So, I studied to be a Catholic priest from about age 13 and a half to about 17.

That is part of my deep personal history. As a young man, however, I immigrated to the United States. I was in college, where I started to take courses on Western civilization. Intellectually, I imploded at that point, experiencing what I would describe as a form of trauma. I felt that my Catholic upbringing had trapped my mind in a steel cage and so narrowed my understanding of the world that I felt betrayed. Since my early twenties, I’ve moved further away from organized religion. I eventually earned a master’s degree in existential-phenomenological psychology, reflecting my deep interest in existentialism and secular humanistic ways of understanding the world that substituted for that early Catholic conditioning.

That’s a broad answer, but more specifically, the article you’re interviewing me about today, published in Free Inquiry, is adapted from my recently released book, Flourishing Love: A Secular Guide to Lasting Intimate Relationships. In that book, I attempt to reclaim a pro-marriage, pro-intimate partnership perspective from the religious right and argue forcefully for a secular humanistic pro-marriage viewpoint. This has occupied much of my time recently.

Jacobsen: What were the obligations of marital institutions between partners—to themselves, one another, and their church—while growing up in the church or during your formal priestly training? How is marriage ideally supposed to play out within that theological framework?

Gnaulati: In my book and article, I argue that there are fundamentally different ways of thinking about marriage and long-term intimate partnerships. For listeners, when I say marriage, I also include long-term committed partnerships, so I use the term loosely. There are key differences between how secular humanists and people of faith—especially those with conservative views—think of marriage.

The conservative position carries significant moral weight, with accountability to a god or divine presence. You are supposed to make yourself lovable in the eyes of God first and your partner second. There’s a triangular approach to marriage, where being a good person is part of a reward-and-punishment system tied to an afterlife. In contrast, in the secular humanistic tradition, you are accountable to your flesh-and-blood partner. You treat them well because you desire to, not because it’s your moral obligation or because of divine surveillance monitoring how you love, give love, and receive love and determining whether that makes you an upstanding person of faith.

That’s a broad way to differentiate the two. There’s much more I could say. 

Jacobsen: How do you see communities formed around marriage functioning in an inter-belief context? This is an article-related topic, but it’s a fascinating question. I don’t see this explored too much, but your expertise may be helpful here. If you live in a multicultural, multi-ethnic, and pluralistic context—religiously speaking—are there any situations in which those formulations of how people should live in partnership come into conflict with one another? Or do people generally find themselves tolerant of different ways of partnering?

Gnaulati: It’s a good question, Scott. One of the reasons the Christian right is doubling down on traditional marriage is because they don’t see it holding up well in a pluralistic social context. In such a setting, there are multiple temptations, greater sexual openness, and views that sex can be used for pleasurable and bonding reasons, not just for procreation.

The more pluralistic and diverse communities become, the more openness there is to shifting sexual norms, and these norms are seen as a direct threat to Christian ideas about marriage. This leads to a more conservative doubling down on what the Christian right believes marriage ought to be. 

Jacobsen: Now, I hear more about Christian nationalism, the Christian right, and so on from Americans—particularly from American freethinkers—than from other countries. So when you see this doubling down on traditional marriage, you also see, within the secular humanist community, a more open acceptance of LGBTI+ ways of partnering. There is greater acceptance of marriage and common-law partnerships, diverse ceremonies and more flexible views on the time people may take before committing to someone. There’s a cosmopolitan appeal to the humanist ethos around partnership. What do you think are the strengths of that ethic, grounded in the principles of universalism, while acknowledging the wide range of ways human beings identify themselves and exist with one another?

Gnaulati: Yes. One way of thinking about it is that those who tend toward a more secular humanist mindset when approaching love and long-term partnerships tend to have a more egalitarian view of relationships than those who are more conservative, religiously speaking. Data shows that these egalitarian relationships are more likely to last longer.

If you have a more equitable, fairness-minded approach to relationships—where love is not about mutual self-sacrifice, as seen in Christian agape love, where Christ gave His life for humanity’s sins—that’s considered the highest form of love in Christian doctrine. This idea promotes radical altruism, where one gives and gives without being mindful of receiving. In contrast, secular humanists tend to be fair-minded. The quality of love you give is inherently connected to the quality of love you receive. There’s mutuality in the arrangement: we look out for each other, for each other’s happiness, and try to maintain fairness in the relationship. There’s no power imbalance; power is shared equally. These mindsets are more likely to be secular and humanistic in nature; whereas, among conservative Christians, you’re more likely to see a power hierarchy.

There’s always that struggle in faith communities, where people say, “Yes, we’re going to try to be fair, reasonable, and equitable between the genders, without power imbalances.” However, they can’t escape the underlying hierarchy: God, man, woman, child. That power hierarchy always lurks in the background. In marriages where there’s an erosion of power-sharing, where there’s an ideological belief in patriarchy and the superiority of men, even if some data shows that these marriages can last, they tend to be satisfactory, not flourishing marriages. It’s important to differentiate between the two.

Jacobsen: Are you, in some sense, suggesting that Christian fundamentalist marriages are bounded in a way that limits them to functioning at a low level? Is that a valid interpretation?

Gnaulati: Yes, there’s some data to suggest that.

At times, when I’m at my most ideological, I take the position that to have a flourishing partnership, you need a secular humanistic mindset. In this context, there’s accountability to a flesh-and-blood partner. You’re acting kindly, generously, forgivingly, and so on from a place of genuine human desire to be the best person you can be with someone you love, rather than acting in those ways as part of a rewards and punishment system tied to an afterlife. There’s a qualitative difference between being kind, generous and forgiving from a place of human desire versus doing so out of moral duty.

Jacobsen: I would differentiate those two. Yet here we are, a non-expert me talking to an expert you, and we’re noting the power structure between the divine, man, woman, and child. And, of course, here we are, two men discussing these things. In that hierarchy, women hold a much lower status than men. Does this obligation, this divine command for men to be in charge, affect their psychology or frame of mind over time in a way that subtly or overtly oppresses women? I don’t necessarily mean domestic abuse, but in more nuanced ways, where women are tacitly encouraged to suppress themselves and be suppressed.

Gnaulati: Yes. 

Jacobsen: They have to be inauthentic.

Gnaulati: It manifests in small, big, quasi-invisible, and highly visible ways. One thing I write about—and I don’t mean to shock your viewers or listeners—is the difference in orgasm rates between women in Christian marriages and those in non-Christian or less religious marriages. Women in Christian marriages are less likely to orgasm. I get somewhat sarcastic in my argument, saying, “Wow, there’s an example of men not honouring their Christian duty to make their wives happy.” Data shows that about 48% of Christian women in committed relationships usually or always orgasm, compared to about 65% of women in the general population. That’s a small example of how these dynamics can play out, even at the level of base pleasure.

Jacobsen: What about the sociopolitics of ordinary life and living together with a partner?

Gnaulati: Yes, exactly.

In an unequal power arrangement versus an equal power arrangement, if your Christian duty as a woman is to be self-sacrificing, submissive, and subservient to a degree, how much self-respect can you have when standing up for yourself? How can you ensure a balanced division of labour at home or a balanced marriage where burdens and benefits are shared equitably? This balance is essential to any healthy long-term intimate relationship—the constant balancing of giving and gaining is always there.

We often say that people in relationships shouldn’t keep score, but it’s a normal human tendency to do so. Explicitly or implicitly, consciously or unconsciously, people want things to be equitable. They want to feel they’re getting as much as they’re giving, and vice versa.

Jacobsen: What does the research say now, if anything, about the effect on women in those marriages? Are there higher levels of resentment toward husbands in Christian marriages as compared to more secular humanist marriages? Does that show up in research as statistically significant, with decent effect sizes regarding self-reported emotions in those states?

Gnaulati: I’m not familiar with specific research on this, so I’m trying to figure out how to comment in an informed way, but as a psychologist, I have some credibility when it comes to speculating. Let’s not forget that for certain subsets of people, regardless of gender, there can be psychological safety in giving up power and entrusting it to someone they perceive as superior.

So, you can’t always assume there’s resentment. Sometimes, it can be the reverse. There can be a pathological passivity, as the great psychoanalyst Erich Fromm wrote about—a desire to escape from freedom by giving up one’s freedoms and letting someone else make life decisions. This can provide psychological comfort and safety, but that doesn’t necessarily mean it’s good for that individual. Many people may be subservient and submissive without necessarily feeling resentful. They get used to relinquishing power and may even acquire a certain comfort or contentedness from it.

Jacobsen: Were there any precursors to Christian formulations of marriage that were sufficiently distinct to merit such a title, where the Christian formulation of marriage improved upon earlier forms?

Gnaulati: Oh, that’s an interesting question. I’m still determining. At least in my understanding of historical forces, there was probably a codification of normal human virtues—loyalty, decency, honesty, generosity, forgiveness, and so on. These things make relationships work and can be explained as normal human virtue rather than as Christian moral duties. One of the benefits of Christian marriage may have been to codify those virtues. I don’t know enough about the history of marriage to comment in an informed way about how it evolved. However, there were likely economic reasons too—inheritance patterns and such—that made marriage an important social institution from an economic, not necessarily a religious, standpoint. I don’t know enough about it to give you a more in-depth answer. 

Jacobsen: What should be the big takeaway for making a secular humanist marriage work compared to a traditional Christian one? What could potentially evolve the current secular humanist formulation? Are there areas for improvement, given that we are bound to an empirical moral philosophy? We’re open to new information which could further update our moral and philosophical foundations.

Gnaulati: We’re discovering that strong, flourishing marriages, as I’ve said, are anchored in a fairness and power-sharing mindset. There are other factors, too, such as the importance of physical affection and sex—versus not just for procreation, but for bonding and pleasure too. There’s definite data to support that.

The problem with a religious view of marriage is that it often doesn’t emphasize the importance of intimacy—not just sexual intercourse, but forms of physical affection like kissing, hugging, and holding hands. All the data shows that the strongest marriages embody an abundance of physical intimacy at various levels. That’s crucial.

What’s unique about a secular humanist perspective—and I write about this—is the embrace of mortality awareness as a motivator to be the best, most loving version of yourself in relationships. Nobody wants to die with deathbed regrets, thinking they could have been nicer, kinder, more generous, or more forgiving as a partner. That constant, low-grade, healthy awareness of mortality we carry as secular humanists can motivate us to be the best loving version of ourselves in relationships.

Jacobsen: Enrico, I appreciate your time today. We explored a lot, especially comparing and contrasting views on marriage.

Gnaulati: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On Tejano Music 7: Selena Becoming Famous Early

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/08

A seasoned Musician (Vocals, Guitar and Piano), Filmmaker, and Actor, J.D. Mata has composed 100 songs and performed 100 shows and venues throughout. He has been a regular at the legendary “Whisky a Go Go,” where he has wooed audiences with his original shamanistic musical performances. He has written and directed nerous feature films, web series, and music videos. J.D. has also appeared in various national T.V. commercials and shows. Memorable appearances are TRUE BLOOD (HBO) as Tio Luca, THE UPS Store National television commercial, and the lead in the Lil Wayne music video, HOW TO LOVE, with over 129 million views. As a MOHAWK MEDICINE MAN, J.D. also led the spiritual-based film KATERI, which won the prestigious “Capex Dei” award at the Vatican in Rome. J.D. co-starred, performed and wrote the music for the original world premiere play, AN ENEMY of the PUEBLO — by one of today’s preeminent Chicana writers, Josefina Lopez! This is J.D.’s third Fringe; last year, he wrote, directed and starred in the Fringe Encore Performance award-winning “A Night at the Chicano Rock Opera.” He is in season 2 of his NEW YouTube series, ROCK god! J.D. is a native of McAllen, Texas and resides in North Hollywood, California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: It’s rare for someone to become famous early on due to musical talent. That’s unusual. It can happen at any age, but most people fail. For most, it only happens so early.

Selena, as far as I know, achieved success very early in what was then a non-mainstream musical genre, which she helped bring into the mainstream. So, what was your path to achieving that level of success? #NotMyIdea.

J.D. Mata: I love this because we have these discussions, and they come from my perspective. As an artist, my goal—whether as a filmmaker, musician, or actor—is to be authentic. If I stay true to myself when writing a scene or creating art, I want it to be something no one has ever seen. Often, when I’m authentic, it naturally comes out that way because there’s no one else like me.

It doesn’t matter whether people perceive my work as eccentric or crazy; it’s none of my business what others think of my art. I say this to preface our conversations because that’s the benchmark here—the jumping-off point. I’m sharing my insights with you in a way no one has done before, simply by being authentic. I’m not reiterating what’s already been put on the record but rather offering my genuine take on Selena, and that’s why I’m enjoying this so much. It also makes this series interesting—it’s almost like I’m a filmmaker creating a movie about Selena based on her real life and my perception. Does that make sense?

Jacobsen: Yes. Now, back to the topic. How did Selena become so successful in an industry that wasn’t so big?

Mata: My take is that it was a twofold process. On one hand, as we’ve already discussed, the phenomenon of Tejano music occurred. It was inevitable. During that time, Tejano music was experiencing its golden age. It had just begun, and suddenly, major labels like EMI Latin and Capitol Records were signing Tejano artists, promoting them, and helping them achieve commercial success. Selena was part of this wave.

Why did this happen? Because Tejano’s music was fresh and new, it captured the imagination of Texas and beyond. It resonated with people across the U.S., especially those who danced to its rhythms. Many Tejano fans were Mexican Americans who migrated seasonally to work as farm labourers, picking crops like grapes, strawberries, and cotton. Even before Tejano music became a defined genre, artists performed at camps for these migrant workers nationwide. So, the seeds of Tejano music had already been sown across the U.S. Many migrants settled in Oregon, Washington, California, and Florida, where Tejano bands would later tour.

Jacobsen: So, we had Tejano music come on board. It was a phenomenon. The big record labels recognized its potential and saw that it could generate significant revenue. Tejano artists were travelling all over the United States. Selena was part of this movement. Remember, as we mentioned, she and her family started their band when she was just a child.

From the time she could sing, around age 10, they were working hard. Eventually, they got signed by a major record label, likely in 1992 or 1993, during the golden age of Tejano music. It took her about ten years to become an “overnight success.” That was the birth of Selena’s stardom. This is part of what I mean by a twofold approach.

Selena rose to fame alongside other Tejano artists like Grupo Mazz and La Mafia. Anyone familiar with Tejano music will recognize these names. They were also giants in the genre, and Selena was a giant among them. However, Selena’s trajectory wasn’t to stay solely within Tejano music, even though she was and remains the Queen of Tejano.

Her path eventually led her from Tejano to the American pop market, which makes her story so interesting. I’ve never seen this angle fully explored, which is why this interview is so groundbreaking.

Selena’s record wasn’t just to dominate Tejano but to conquer it while preparing for a crossover. She was the Queen of Tejano music worldwide. I’m sorry, I was eating nuts earlier—I’ll stop now. Her ultimate goal was to break into the mainstream American market as Gloria Estefan did with the Miami Sound Machine. Selena was poised to become the next big crossover star, rubbing shoulders with Madonna and other icons in the American music industry.

But then, we all know what tragically happened. She was murdered, and that event, combined with her immense talent, solidified her legendary status as the Queen of Tejano. Her father’s grit, Abraham Quintanilla, played a significant role in preserving her legacy. It wasn’t driven by ambition or a thirst for fame but by his desire to ensure that Selena’s story and her dreams were honoured.

He knew that his daughter wanted to reach the next level, and he made it his mission to take her there, even after her death, by telling her story accurately and honestly. What ultimately catapulted Selena to the next level was a combination of her exceptional talent as a Tejano artist and the unfortunate tragedy of her death. The interest generated by her passing and the biopic film that followed introduced her to an even wider audience.

People saw her talent, success story, and how she embodied the American Dream—specifically, the Mexican-American Dream. Today, Tejano music is not as prominent as it once was, but Selena remains its ambassador. While people continue to be fascinated by Selena herself, they often overlook the brilliance of Tejano music, which is still beautiful and vibrant.

Another important factor contributing to her posthumous success was the existing infrastructure. Major record labels had signed her before her death, and that foundation allowed her legacy to reach new heights even after her passing. The infrastructure and her father’s dedication ensured that Selena’s story and music would continue to resonate with fans worldwide.

Jacobsen: So, there was already a vehicle in place, through movies and other mediums, for her name and legacy to carry on. Another important point I’d like to explore here is giving credit to the DJs in Texas. Mando San Roman, for instance. He was an incredible DJ who recognized the greatness of Selena and played her music. At that time, DJs had more freedom in deciding whose music they would play. He was instrumental in promoting her. He doesn’t get enough credit for that.

Another phenomenal DJ was Rock and Roll James. He conducted some of the most iconic interviews with Selena. He had a show called Puro Tejano, and if you go to YouTube, you’ll find some wonderful clips of him and Selena. They had a great rapport, a real back-and-forth banter that connected Selena with the Tejano audience.

Mata: What about Johnny Canales?

Jacobsen: Yes, Johnny Canales is another one I have to mention. He also played a key role. His show, The Johnny Canales Show, was essential in bringing Tejano artists, including Selena, to a broader audience. He generously showcased her talent, and that exposure was crucial to her career trajectory.

Mando San Roman, Rock and Roll James, and Johnny Canales were part of the bigger puzzle leading to her worldwide fame. There was a progression: point A, to B, to C, and so on. Point Z is where Selena stands today as an iconic figure recognized globally. But people must understand that you must start at point A to reach point Z.

Mata: It sounds like these DJs were not just promoters but artists themselves.

Jacobsen: Exactly. Mando San Roman and Rock and Roll James were singers and composers. They knew talent when they saw it, and they knew how to nurture it—big kudos to them for recognizing Selena’s potential early on. Unfortunately, Johnny Canales recently passed away—may he rest in peace—but his contribution to Selena’s career and Tejano music was enormous. He helped bring her to the masses.

Jacobsen: Folks were able to see her talent. To build a house, you must build it on a solid foundation. The foundation for Selena’s trajectory was, first and foremost, her immense talent. Second, she had a father who was brilliant as a musician and a manager who deeply loved his daughter. She had a great band, too.

The band was tight—it was her family. The two members who weren’t family were treated like they were. It’s so important to have a united band, and hers was. This was all part of a house built on rock, not sand.

Then, she had key advocates like Mando San Roman, Rock and Roll James, and Johnny Canales. That was the genesis of Selena—the phenomenon we know now. That was the foundation that led to her success. So, that’s my answer to your question. Are there any more honourable mentions?

Mata: That wraps up the session format, right?

Jacobsen: Yes. We’ve covered some important stuff. Stand by, I need to blow my nose—beep boop—excuse me.

There are a few more honourable mentions. It was like catching lightning in a bottle—a perfect storm. Everything had to align perfectly. And, of course, we also talked about the movie. There was conflict between her father and her husband, Chris Pérez, which generated a lot of intrigue and interest. She was married to her guitarist, and their love story—eloping and all—added depth to the narrative. Rumours and typical storylines emerged, with protagonists and antagonists, even after her death, like in any interesting story.

The conflict between her father and husband added further intrigue, making the story compelling. Another honourable mention is Netflix’s production of Selena: The Series. By doing that, they helped prolong her legacy, keeping her a worldwide phenomenon.

Before I wrap up, let me mention one more honourable mention: Nano Ramirez. I’m glad you reminded me to mention him. Nano Ramirez was a visionary in the Tejano music scene. Let me spell it out: N-A-N-O, Ramirez, R-A-M-I-R-E-Z. He deserves a ton of credit. He owned a convention center and had the vision to showcase Tejano artists, including Selena, at a time when South Texas was very conservative.

He just released a book, and I recommend anyone interested in Tejano music to look him up and read his story. He’s a historic figure. Not only did he showcase Tejano music, but he also brought rock bands like AC/DC to his venue in McAllen, Texas. He had a brilliant entrepreneurial mind, living the American Dream, and he, too, recognized Selena’s talent early on.

He would promote her at his venue, and people from all over the Rio Grande Valley would come to see her. So, major props to Nano Ramirez, another key figure in Selena’s story. A part of the house is built on rock, which is Selena’s story.

Mata: Excellent. Thanks so much.

Jacobsen: Thank you, bro.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Deborah Unger, ‘Lost Women in Science’: Thalidomide

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/08

Deborah Unger talks about thalidomide and its tragic impact on pregnancy, the FDA’s history, and Lost Women of Science. Unger discusses thalidomide’s return for cancer treatment, Frances Kelsey’s role, and their podcast’s mission to highlight forgotten female scientists.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Deborah Unger to discuss thalidomide and a podcast on lost women in science. So, what was thalidomide?

Deborah Unger: Thalidomide was first marketed as a sedative. It was developed in West Germany in the 1950s by the pharmaceutical company Chemie Grünenthal. It was initially thought to be a completely non-toxic sedative. It succeeded in the German market and was licensed by many countries, but not the United States. As a sedative, it was considered non-addictive, unlike barbiturates, and it was believed to be impossible to overdose on. It was thought to be a good medicine for expectant mothers to calm them down and help them sleep, and it was even claimed to help with morning sickness. It was sold under different brand names. In Germany, it was called Contergan. In the United States, it was branded as Kevadon. However, it never gained approval from the FDA and was never widely marketed there. It was sold as Distaval in the UK and available in Australia under the same name.

Jacobsen: What were the health effects for pregnant individuals and those who were not?

Unger: It didn’t seem to affect most people who were not pregnant. The first adverse effects were related to nerve damage—people reported numbness in their fingers and toes, but this feedback was slow to reach the company. However, for pregnant women, especially those who took it during the early stages of pregnancy, the effects were devastating. Some experienced stillbirths and miscarriages, while babies that were born often had severe limb deformities and other serious internal malformations.

Thousands of babies across Europe were born with shortened or missing limbs, a condition called phocomelia. Phocomelia can be genetic, but it is extremely rare. Doctors were seeing an unprecedented number of babies born with shortened arms, legs, or both. This was a shocking event across Europe, Australia, Canada, and, to a lesser extent, the United States.

Jacobsen: What was the correlation between thalidomide and phocomelia, and is that pathway fully understood now?

Unger: The correlation is somewhat understood, but the exact mechanism remains unclear. Thalidomide interferes with the development of blood vessels, which affects the growth of limbs and other organs during early pregnancy. This is a simplified explanation, but essentially, the drug disrupts normal development, leading to the tragic outcomes we saw. Because of these effects, thalidomide cannot be used during pregnancy, as it will cause severe congenital disabilities like phocomelia.

Jacobsen: What happened to the children who survived birth with phocomelia?

Unger: Many of them are still alive today. They are now in their sixties, and there are thalidomide survivors around the world. They have had to adapt to their disabilities, and many have led successful lives, with some becoming doctors or artists. However, as they age, they face increasing health problems because their bodies have had to compensate for the lack of properly developed limbs. Many suffer from secondary health conditions, such as joint problems, due to the long-term strain on their bodies. There are still several hundred survivors worldwide who were affected by thalidomide in the 1960s.

Jacobsen: What was the size of the staffing and the budget for the FDA in those days, and what is it now? What does that tell you about some lessons learned from the history of thalidomide and other events?

Unger: We interviewed a historian, John Swann, at the FDA for our podcast, The Devil in the Details. He told us that in the 1960s, the FDA had 1,860 full-time staff and a budget of about $13.8 million. If you look up the latest data sheet on the FDA’s website, it now says there are around 18,600 employees, with a budget of about $6.7 billion. They oversee the safety of products worth approximately $3.6 trillion. You can see a massive increase in what the FDA does and how it operates.

Jacobsen: What do these numbers tell you? Were there other interesting insights about the FDA’s growth from this expert?

Unger: Yes, we were mainly asking him about this. What it indicates is that the FDA does far more now than it did in the 1960s. When the thalidomide application hit the desk of Dr. Frances Oldham Kelsey, who was reviewing it, there were no clinical trial requirements as we know them today. She couldn’t demand data from properly conducted clinical trials because they didn’t exist then. Instead, she had to use her intuition and judgment to realize the company hadn’t provided enough evidence of safety. The application needed to be completed.

When the thalidomide tragedy became widely known, Congress acted quickly to pass new laws that strengthened drug regulations, making clinical trials and safety reviews much more rigorous. As a result, the FDA had to expand its staff and budget to handle the increased regulatory burden.

Jacobsen: What are some similarly bad circumstances in U.S. history where looser regulations led to negative consequences?

Unger: There have been other scandals. One example was an elixir in the 1930s that used diethylene glycol—a poison—as a solvent. It killed over 100 people. That incident led to the first round of tougher drug regulations in the UU.S. But thalidomide was the case that truly reshaped the way the government oversees the pharmaceutical industry. Before the 1962 Kefauver-Harris Amendments, clinical trials didn’t even require informed consent, meaning patients often didn’t know they were part of a trial.

Our podcast episodes, The Devil in the Details, discuss Dr. Frances Oldham Kelsey’s role. Richardson-Merrell company was distributing thalidomide to doctors, saying, “This has been sold in Europe for four years with no known problems. Can you test it with your patients?” However, many doctors didn’t keep detailed records about which patients received it, how much was given, or the outcomes. There was a serious lack of rigour in drug testing at that time, which has changed significantly since then.

The drug companies didn’t have to provide scientific evidence that a drug did what it claimed, at least not to the extent required today. That was another major change in the law after the thalidomide crisis. The most relevant change in this case is that they must notify the FDA immediately when side effects are reported to a drug company. But during the thalidomide scandal, it took months—absolutely months, not weeks or days—for people to begin realizing and tracing the side effects of thalidomide.

People kept taking the drug because it wasn’t immediately pulled from the market or distribution stopped. It wasn’t until November 1961, after an investigation by a German pediatrician who linked the large number of phocomelia births to thalidomide, that it was finally taken off the market in Germany. However, the drug application in the U.S. remained active until March of the following year, which seems excessive to me.

Dr. Frances Kelsey at the FDA wasn’t even aware of these side effects that should have been reported. So, while we are in a better place now, there are still several things that could make us even safer as consumers of new drugs.

Jacobsen: Do you think consumers are now more alert and cautious about experimental drug use?

Unger: Well, if they take an experimental treatment today, they must give informed consent, which is a big difference. So, if someone has a very serious illness and nothing else is working, they might choose to try experimental drugs. However, thalidomide wasn’t marketed as a treatment for a life-threatening condition. It was marketed as a sleeping pill and for anxiety—drugs that were becoming more popular in the 1950s and 1960s but hadn’t been on the market before.

It had a very different marketing approach. One thing that always surprises me—and you can probably tell by my accent that I’m British—is that when you go to the UU.S., the TT.V.adverts for new drugs have these long disclaimers at the end, which are read at 100 miles an hour, listing all the contraindications. It sounds like no one would ever take those drugs, but that’s legally required now. It wasn’t like that in the 1960s.

So, today’s regulations are designed to help people stay safe. In the past, safety was almost a side issue when new drugs came to market.

Jacobsen: For those who have listened to the episodes of your podcast, has there been any feedback about how you describe the 64-year history of drug development and regulation, particularly with thalidomide, and the FDA’s growth into the regulatory body it is today?

Unger: Some people will see something as big and bureaucratic and assume it’s bad. When things aren’t talked about much and are running relatively uneventfully, that can be a sign that they’re functioning well. What this tells me about the FDA is that despite being a large and sometimes criticized organization, it plays a crucial role in ensuring drugs are as effective, safe, and useful as possible.

The podcast didn’t five deeply into the inner workings of the FDA. Still, we did touch on the discussions today about overregulation. At least in the current political climate, leading up to the US election, we’ve seen calls for entire government departments to be shut down, and the FDA has faced accusations of internal conspiracies. However, despite such criticisms, we must remember that the FDA’s role is to protect public health by ensuring that drugs are properly vetted before reaching consumers.

How can we be sure that drugs are safe without an independent regulator? The FDA missed the opioid crisis, where a drug was put on the market that was said to be non-addictive. Still, it turned out to be highly addictive, and the dosage levels were very high. People did become addicted, and we’ve all seen the devastating outcomes of that.

What we felt about the FDA when we looked into this is that the bureaucrats like Dr. Frances Oldham Kelsey, who sit in their cubicles, receive piles of documentation and go through them carefully. To me, as a consumer, that’s a comfort. Drug companies may want to get their products out quickly. They might not appreciate a nitpicking bureaucrat—trained as a doctor or pharmacologist—going through all the paperwork. Still, as a consumer, I’m grateful. Please look at all the details and make sure the drug is safe.

The FDA’s development has paralleled the expansion of both big and small pharmaceutical companies and the overall growth of the pharmaceutical market. They now oversee the safety of $3.6 trillion products in the U.S. market alone. That’s a vast amount. My perspective, and the one we came to after doing the series, is that you want knowledgeable, expert people who know what they’re doing to prevent scandals and crises like the thalidomide disaster.

Jacobsen: What other stories are being pursued through the Lost Women of Science podcast?

Unger: The Lost Women of Science podcast launched in 2021, and we explore a mix of different stories. We’ve done several seasons, including the Frances Kelsey season, a five-part series about her life, work, and impact. That was our fifth season. Our first series was about Dr. Dorothy Anderson, probably unknown to most of our listeners. She worked in a New York hospital and discovered that cystic fibrosis is a genetic disease. She dedicated her work to helping those suffering from cystic fibrosis.

We’ve also done a series on Dr. Marie Nyswander, who developed methadone as a treatment for heroin addiction, which we called The Doctor and the Fix. We’ve covered Klari von Neumann, one of the first computer programmers, who worked on the instructions for computers used in developing the atomic bomb and beyond.

Our mission is to tell the stories of forgotten female scientists so they can receive the recognition they deserve. We also produce 30-minute episodes about various scientists, including astronomers, engineers, and others.

Jacobsen: Which episode received the most reaction from listeners?

Unger: The episode that received the most response was about Yvonne Clark, a Black engineer who worked at NASA. The reaction was partly influenced by the popularity of Hidden Figures, which also highlighted Black engineers and mathematicians at NASA. We received a lot of positive feedback on that episode. Interestingly, in reaction to the Kelsey season, not the Clark season, one listener shared a very personal story on our Facebook page. He mentioned that his mother had taken thalidomide as part of a so-called clinical trial in the U.S., and his brother, who was born stillborn, didn’t survive long after birth. That was a particularly poignant response.

And thalidomide was the cause of that. But thalidomide has returned to the market. It is now used as a very effective treatment for certain kinds of cancer and for leprosy. Of course, it’s indicated not to be taken during pregnancy. The person who wrote in said he had recently been diagnosed with one of these types of cancers and was now being prescribed thalidomide to help treat his cancer.

It was the same drug that had taken his brother away many years before. 

Jacobsen: Did you interview any survivors of these pregnancies?

Unger: Yes, we did. That forms part of our final episode, as we tried to bring the story up to date. There is a U.S. Thalidomide Survivors Group, and many of them didn’t even know others existed until much later in life. They found each other through social media, often in their 50s and 60s, because thalidomide wasn’t discussed much after the early 1960s.

The U.S. remains one of the only developed countries that has never financially supported thalidomide survivors. This stems from the fact that the drug was never officially approved in the U.S. Those affected were taking it in these so-called clinical trials with virtually no records kept. When the FDA investigated, they estimated that only 17 people were born with phocomelia, which was a wild underestimate given how widely the drug was distributed. Today, it’s estimated that there are about 100 thalidomide survivors in the U.S., and they’ve come together.

In early September, they went to Washington to lobby the government for support. Jennifer Vanderbes, whom we interviewed for the podcast, wrote a great book called Wonder Drug. She tracked down many of these survivors, who had been largely forgotten—just like Dr. Frances Kelsey.

Jacobsen: Do you have a particular favourite episode?

Unger: Of our series? No, you should listen to all of them, from episodes 1 through 5, to get the full story.

Jacobsen: You might be biased.

Unger: I’m biased, but start with episode 1 and see how it grabs you. However, I have a favourite Lost Women of Scienceepisode outside the Frances Kelsey series. We did a 30-minute episode on a woman from the 1930s to 1950s, a chemistry teacher named Mary Louisa Willard. She was one of the first forensic scientists, and she teamed up with the police department in State College, Pennsylvania, where she was based, to help solve crimes using chemistry.

Jacobsen: And that sounds like a great episode. How did you team up with Scientific American for this project?

UngerScientific American is our publisher because they host our podcast on their website and help promote it. We do all the work, and they assist us in reaching more people. They might also help with marketing and advertising, which is always helpful.

Jacobsen: Marketing and advertising is always helpful.

Unger: Yes, it definitely is. We’d love to reach as many people as we can. 

Jacobsen: I’ve covered everything I wanted to convey and explored all the creative angles I can think of. 

Unger: At Lost Women of Science, we have a tip line.

We also have a database with over 300 female scientists we may cover in future episodes. Often, people know of forgotten women scientists who did great work but have yet to receive recognition. We encourage them to call us, leave a message or email us. You can find the tip line at lostwomenofscience.org. We also create shorter programs about the scientists people tell us about, in a segment called “From Our Inbox.”

We interviewed the person who had left the tip and then researched the scientist to create a story.

Jacobsen: What about your upcoming episode for Breast Cancer Awareness Month?

Unger: Sure! For Breast Cancer Awareness Month, we’re doing a two-part episode on a very overlooked figure—Dora Richardson. She was the chemist in England who synthesized the compound that became tamoxifen, one of the most revolutionary treatments for breast cancer. It’s a drug therapy that went on the market in the 1970s and has saved thousands of lives. Katie Couric, who is a breast cancer survivor herself, is introducing our episodes on Dora Richardson because, frankly, I don’t think many people realize it was a woman chemist who developed the compound that became tamoxifen.

That series will be released at the end of October. We have much more coming up in November, but I’ll leave it at that for now.

Jacobsen: Thanks so much, Deborah. 

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts based on our conversation today?

Unger: My final thought is that unless we purposefully tell these stories, they’ll continue to be forgotten. We want to inspire people—especially women and girls—to pursue careers in STEM. While many do today, knowing that others have faced obstacles before them and still made a difference can be incredibly motivating. By sharing these stories, we hope to prevent more women from becoming “lost women of science” and instead inspire them to make their marks in the field.

Jacobsen: Excellent, Deborah. Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Unger: Thank you, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Janice Harper: Surviving and Thriving From Mobbing

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/07

Janice Harper is a cultural anthropologist and the author of Mobbed! What to Do When They Really Are Out to Get You. She has written on the topic of mobbing and collective aggression for Psychology Today, The Huffington Post, and other publications. 

Harper discusses about mobbing and bullying, exploring the escalation of false accusations and the emotional toll on targets. They discuss how mobbing can lead to severe consequences like suicide or violence. Harper emphasizes self-reflection and gentleness, advising targets to move on, thrive, and find peace by accepting their experiences without internalizing victimhood.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with—should I say famous or infamous? No. Janice, Janice—we are here with the lovely Janice Harper. We’re going to be talking primarily about mobbing.

I sent an email focused mainly on narcissism. While it’s not your area of focus, an element of commentary here will be relevant to that series. So, how do we define mobbing? And how do we define bullying in a more precise context based on your experience?

Janice Harper: Bullying is a form of one-on-one interpersonal aggression. It might involve a few people targeting a single individual with aggression, such as verbal abuse or put-downs in the workplace. It could include sabotaging someone’s work, like the typical hostile colleague who singles someone out for abuse and writes them up for every minor issue. Mobbing is bullying on a larger scale, where someone in a position of power identifies a person to be eliminated and begins soliciting negative feedback about them, spreading rumours and gossip and encouraging others to join in.

In the workplace, the person might be subjected to investigation after investigation—often completely unfounded. However, the constant investigations create a perceived sense of wrongdoing. Mobbing is intended to eliminate someone from the workplace, group, or community. If not in a workplace, it could happen in a school, church, place of worship, or another community setting where the goal is to eliminate the individual because they won’t leave voluntarily, and direct elimination isn’t easy.

There’s a clear objective with mobbing—it’s not just how things are. The goal is to get rid of someone. Does that make sense?

Jacobsen: Mobbing can also involve false accusations, and these accusations can escalate into extraordinarily bizarre claims. For example, you were accused of building a hydrogen bomb and were investigated for it, right?

Harper: Yes, that’s correct.

Jacobsen: And you were exonerated, to be clear. So, what’s the danger in mobbing when things escalate to such a high level, where someone’s identity is being questioned and fabricated in such extreme ways?

Harper: Well, it’s a steady process. It doesn’t start with accusations like, “Oh, you’re building a hydrogen bomb.” In almost all cases, there’s a gradual escalation. In my case, it started with accusations that I lacked congeniality when I went up for tenure because I reported inappropriate behaviour by an instructor. It started with “she’s too negative,” then escalated to “she’s crazy,” then “she’s making suicidal threats,” then “she’s making homicidal threats.” Eventually, “she’s building a hydrogen bomb.”

You often see this steady progression of accusations in mobbing cases.

Jacobsen: How do these situations escalate so far out of hand? What are the dangers for people in these situations?

Harper: So, people amid mobbing experience significant dangers, including high rates of suicide. There are high rates of suicide among people who are mobbed because they’re stripped of their identity and publicly shamed. In my book, I write about the primal need for group support. When that group support is lost, especially in the workplace where someone’s means of making a living is threatened, it becomes primal.

People are threatening your economic survival. Your social survival is also threatened. You are so dehumanized, and your identity is so recast that there’s a high risk of suicide. Almost all mobbing targets who have contacted me have said they contemplated, if not attempted, suicide. Another danger is workplace violence, and I’ve written elsewhere about a case in Connecticut. I can’t recall the man’s name, but he worked in a trucking firm and eventually went postal. Even the term “going postal” comes from the aggression and mobbing that occurs with postal employees.

When someone is driven to the point of being completely dehumanized, feeling like they have no other option, and if they’re a male gun owner, there can be a real threat of violence. There are many cases where you hear about shootings in the workplace. Not in every case, but often, if you look behind it, there have been escalating attacks.

Now, what comes first, the chicken or the egg? Is the person perceived as potentially violent, so they become a target? Or can a person who isn’t at all violent be pushed to that extreme? In certain contexts, yes, they can. But the primary threat of mobbing is suicide for the targets. 

Jacobsen: I want to ensure we take a constructive frame here because, on a practical level. So, there are two stages to address: planning an exit and merging that with surviving and thriving after the exit. What are your main tips for finding a way out—from a community, family, workplace, religious setting–church, or mosque?

Harper: The first stage is recognizing that you’re the target of mobbing. And often, it takes people a long time to realize this. It did for me, too, because I initially saw it through the lens of bullying, focused on one abusive department chair. I was aware of the concept of mobbing, but it still took a while for me to recognize, “Oh, that’s what’s going on here.”

So, the first step is acknowledging that this is happening. Then, you have to get out of the situation. That’s the most difficult part for people. In the workplace, mobbing happens when eliminating a worker, which is not easy. A union, tenure, or other reasons may protect them. They aren’t going to quit easily because it’s hard to find another job or relocate their entire family to a new community for a new position. People are reluctant to leave, and often, there’s this accompanying feeling of, “I want justice. I’m innocent.” I certainly felt that way, too.

And almost everyone who comes to me is still in that mindset of “I’m going to fight this. I’m going to see lawyers.” And you can, but the more you fight it, the meaner they will get. The more they’re going to try to prove that you deserve this. So, getting out as early as possible gives you the best chance for survival. Once you get out, and even as you’re trying to get out, it’s important to address the obsessive thinking about it and the emotional flooding. Both happen when you’re being mobbed. 

Jacobsen: I’ve experienced it, though probably not to the degree of being investigated for building a hydrogen bomb. Right, yet I recall it’s almost like taking out the poison, or the source of the poison—removing the poison needle. That’s the equivalent of getting out. The immune system and the body need time to recover from the impact of that poison circulating through the system. It can take a while.

Harper: Yeah, it’s hard because the attacks are so wrong and constant. You are still determining what they’re going to do next. It’s like, “Oh my god, what’s next?” You’re not sleeping, constantly worrying and thinking about it all the time. And when you let your guard down, they pull more tricks—accuse you of something else, move you to a different position, take away responsibilities, or hold meetings without informing you. You find yourself shunned. It consumes your thinking, and it’s all you can focus on. In my book, I talk about techniques for controlling obsessive thinking.

Working with a therapist who understands cognitive behavioural techniques is important. They can help you break the cycle of obsessive thoughts—how one thought sparks another and keeps playing in your head repeatedly. Then there’s the emotional flooding, which is painful and humiliating.

You experience pain, shame, and rage over what’s happening to you. It’s crazy-making, and it can make you appear unhinged to others. They see you not performing well, acting paranoid, temperamental, and moody. It’s truly crazy-making.

So, address the emotional flooding, manage the obsessive thinking, and understand that you’re going through a grief process. Whether you’re losing your job, your community, or both, you’ll go through the stages of grief. Recognize it as grief—the bargaining, the anger, the denial, the depression, and finally, the acceptance.

The most important thing is this: in anti-bullying literature, they often say that bullies destroy lives. No. Perhaps they destroy aspects of your life, but they can only destroy your life if you decide to let them. It will be difficult to grow and heal if you stay in that place of rage and continue fighting for justice without moving on.

A central part of recovery is self-reflection. Some people accuse me of victim-blaming when I say this. Still, if you’ve been the target of mobbing, it’s important to understand how your actions or reactions may have contributed. That doesn’t mean it’s your fault, but it means you’re taking a holistic view of the situation.

Because even if it’s not to say it’s your fault it happened, how did you react to these situations? How did people perceive you? 

Jacobsen: Let me reflect on what I’m hearing. If this is a sticking point for people, it’s important to clarify quickly. I’m hearing that a community victimizes an individual. It’s important to make sure that has happened. This doesn’t deny the fact that victimization occurred, right?

Harper: Exactly. 

Jacobsen: Acknowledging that victimization occurred is essential, but also, as an individual, you must think, “How can I make sure I don’t take this on as my permanent identity so I can heal, grow, and move on?” And secondly, “How could any of my current or future actions potentially make this situation worse than it needs to be?” It’s a tricky consideration, a subtle point that can blow up for many people. It might be confused with victim-blaming; but as you’re describing, it’s more about empowering those who’ve been victimized. It’s empowering because it shifts the narrative for the individual.

Harper: Yes, the anti-bullying framework tends to say there is nothing you did, and the only reason this happened to you is because you’re so good at what you do that others felt threatened. That suggests you can’t be bullied if you’re a lousy employee, which is absurd. Anyone can be bullied, and maybe there was something you did or didn’t. But if you believe there’s absolutely nothing you could have done or did, that’s disempowering because it means, in your next job, you’re just as helpless.

However, if you think, “What about my reactions? In what way might my actions or reactions have played a part?” That can change things. Many people I’ve encountered have been so combative and aggressive (and I probably was one of them) that once the initial abuse begins, they become so pugilistic that it invites more abuse.

There’s a line in Frasier where the two brothers complain about being bullied when they were kids, and their dad says, “Yeah, but you didn’t need to take a briefcase to school.” And they say, “Briefcases? They were valises!” And he responds, “Yeah, but it invited it.” So, self-reflection is important, but it needs to come from a place of gentleness. You have to be gentle with yourself because if you’ve been mobbed, a crowd has already beaten you up, and you’re laying there bloodied on the ground, essentially. You don’t want to keep beating yourself up.

It’s about self-reflection with loving gentleness that helps you see how your responses, actions, or reactions may have contributed to your perception. Another part of the anti-bullying narrative says, “This happened to you because they were jealous—you’re so good at what you do.” There’s often an element of threat, but it’s a perceived threat.

If someone is good at what they do but also has a vulnerability, and others can sense that vulnerability, they’ll go after them. However, they see you as competent and without that perceived vulnerability. In that case, they may target you differently.

That’s a stellar employee. They’re rising in the ranks. No one will go after them unless that person has obvious insecurity or someone in a position of power identifies them as radioactive—stay away from this person. So, it’s got to be that combination of threat plus vulnerability to make them a target.

Jacobsen: What does thriving look like? Go.

Harper: Thriving—we all define that for ourselves. It’s being able to move on from it and to see it as an experience you went through, and as horrific as it was, it helps you learn more about yourself and others. It helps you not become bitter and to become a more multidimensional person. You might be wounded and likely come out of it with economic wounds. You’d come out of it with some professional wounds if it were in the workplace.

So, thriving is about accepting your life and who you are, regardless of any status that may have been pulled out from under you. Your livelihood may have taken a major blow. You may have taken major steps back socially, professionally, and economically. Still, it’s about being content with who you are and seeing that experience as, in some ways, a gift. Even if it wasn’t a welcomed gift, it helped you to see yourself and others in a more realistic but compassionate light.

Jacobsen: So, how do you feel now, beyond the indifference? How’s your life now?

Harper: Oh, it’s pretty great. It could be better, and I wish I were still a professor sometimes, so I feel that loss. But I work for myself now. I make far more than I ever did as a professor, working fewer hours. I live in a beautiful part of the world. I own a couple of homes.

I went from having nothing and losing everything to being probably much better off than I ever would have been if I’d stayed a professor—economically and financially. But it didn’t start that way. There were some rough years. But my life is good. I have a loving family and supportive friends, and it’s good.

But, like any major loss, it’s not like you think, “Oh, I wish this loss didn’t matter.” It’s a real loss; I wish I hadn’t lost my career. But that’s life. We only have one life, and it gets shorter every year. So, it’s up to us what we do with it.

Jacobsen: That’s wise advice. It was nice to meet you. Thank you so much for contributing to this exciting little series. It’s a positive topic.

Harper: Alright. Good luck with your project, Scott.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. Nice to meet you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Glenn Branch on the Scopes Trial in Books

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/07

Glenn Branch is the deputy director of the National Center for Science Education. He is a prominent critic of creationism and intelligent design and an activist against campaigns of suppressing teaching of evolution and climate change in school education. He is also a fellow with the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry. The Scopes trial, though historically overblown and specific to its era, remains emblematic of the creationism versus evolution debate, influencing later legal and educational battles. Despite setbacks and evolving legal frameworks, including recent Supreme Court decisions, there is hope for evolution education’s improvement, driven by secularization and enhanced state science standards.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Reporters and scientists continue to come back to the Scopes trial. Why is this particular trial so pivotal? 

Glenn Branch: The historical significance of the Scopes trial is complex. On the one hand, it would be wrong to take it as the creationism/evolution controversy in a nutshell. It was artificial, overblown, and not decisive; a lot of its features are peculiar to its historical context (constitutional law, for example, has developed significantly since the 1920s); and many people only know it through Inherit the Wind – which was not a documentary.

On the other hand, the Scopes trial is, for better or for worse, emblematic of the creationism/evolution controversy. It showcased the enduring themes of creationist rhetoric. And it provided a template through which many continue to understand the creationism/evolution controversy. When Tennessee adopted an antievolution bill in 2012, it was with the Scopes trial in mind that a former legislator dubbed it “the monkey bill.”

Jacobsen: What does Keeping the Faith by Brenda Wineapple bring to the table for the Scopes trial?

Branch: Well, Keeping the Faith is the most recent full-length treatment of the Scopes trial. The author of a number of highly regarded biographies of American literary figures, Wineapple knows how to tell a compelling story. Of course, 99 years after the trial, you wouldn’t expect any new discoveries, and there wasn’t anything surprising in the book’s narrative; it was a little disappointing that Wineapple didn’t bring any new historical insight to her project, but it’s certainly well worth reading, especially for people with only a nodding acquaintance with the trial.

Jacobsen: How do authors like Wineapple portray Darrow, Bryan, and Mencken, in the Scopes trial? My first introduction to the trial was through H.L. Mencken, who was hilarious. 

Branch: There’s a lot of variance, I think, but one fairly common tactic, which Wineapple among others in effect adopts, is to put Bryan and Mencken at opposing poles, leaving Darrow to be the voice of moderation, the voice of reason. That’s also the approach of Inherit the Wind, both the play and the Hollywood movie, where Matthew Harrison Brady is Bryan, E. L. Hornbeck is Mencken, and Henry Drummond is Darrow. Brady is a monster of intolerance and bigotry (although he has a moment, defending the ingénue Rachel against her father), while Hornbeck is flippant and cruel, especially toward and about faith; whereas Drummond, at the end of the play, thoughtfully hefts a copy of Darwin’s On the Origin of Species and a Bible, and slips them together both into his briefcase. A writer of non-fiction can’t take such liberties, but you still see a tendency to take this line, although Darrow was clearly closer to Mencken on the Bryan-to-Mencken axis than the midpoint. I should say, though, that even though he helped to shape the historical memory of the trial, Mencken wasn’t tremendously important for the trial as such — obviously he wasn’t involved in the trial, and while he certainly offered hilarious dispatches from Dayton, as you say, he actually left town before the end of the trial, so he missed the spectacle of Darrow putting Bryan on the stand. We should also bear in mind that there were a lot of other players, including Dudley Field Malone, one of Scopes’s attorneys who gave what both Bryan and Mencken regarded as the most stirring speech of the whole trial. Malone, by the way, eventually left the law for Hollywood, where he had a minor career as an actor, including playing Churchill in Mission to Moscow.

Jacobsen: How are Prohibition, the KKK, and eugenics, to which Wineapple devotes substantial attention, part of this narrative too?

Branch: The period after World War I was busy, with a lot of schemes for social betterment burgeoning in the wake of the global conflict — even schemes that were poorly thought out or even vicious. Prohibition, which was intended to solve social problems like alcoholism, family violence, and political corruption, went into effect in 1920. The white supremacist terrorists known as the Ku Klux Klan revived around 1915, and aimed at purifying the country for the benefit of native-born white Protestants, to the exclusion of blacks, Catholics, and Jews. The eugenics movement had been around for a while, but it was certainly enjoying influence in the 1920s: the Immigration Act of 1924, which banned immigration from Asia and set quotas on immigrants from eastern and southern Europe, was sponsored by a member of Congress named Albert Johnson, who was president of the Eugenics Research Association at the time. Also among such schemes was the post-war expansion of public education, which led to children across the country being exposed to more than just the traditional readin’, ritin’, and ’rithmetic — even, as in Dayton, Tennessee, to evolution. So anybody who was in, or who was commenting on, public life would tend to have views about these schemes and the connections among them, even if they weren’t actively involved in promoting or resisting them.

Jacobsen: And where did our trio of Darrow, Bryan, and Mencken stand on these issues?

Branch: Prohibition is easy: Bryan was a major booster of Prohibition. An editorial published in a Chicago newspaper not that long before the Scopes trial joked, “Mr. Bryan, being frequently intoxicated by his own ideas, has no use for wine. It is immoral to deny that the world was made in six days and it is immoral for grapes to ferment. He is pained because he has not got the six day opinion written into the constitution of the United States, but he is glad that he has the grape opinion written there.” (That editorial was alluding to a report that Bryan was interested in a constitutional amendment to ban the teaching of evolution; whether or not that was an accurate report, no such amendment was ever introduced.) In contrast, Darrow and Mencken despised Prohibition — Mencken opposed it on principle and also because, as he said, “I am omnibibulous. I drink every known alcoholic drink, and I enjoy them all.”

Darrow and Mencken also despised the Klan, although their attitudes on race differed a bit. In between the Scopes trial and the appeal of the Scopes trial, Darrow spent his time defending Ossian Sweet, an African American physician in Detroit who had moved into a traditionally white neighborhood, defended himself against a hostile white mob, and was tried for murder; Darrow helped in his defense, which ended with a hung jury and a mistrial. Mencken indulged in casual racism both in his published writings and in his correspondence, but he also encouraged the writers of the Harlem Renaissance, and one of his last publications castigated a local authority for segregating its tennis facilities — he was a complicated guy. Bryan was a racist, but a paternalistic rather than a vicious one, unlike some of his southern colleagues in the Democratic party of the time; his last political success was convincing the Democratic National Convention in 1924 not to adopt a plank condemning the Klan by name.

As for eugenics, shortly after the trial, Darrow published a hostile essay entitled “The Eugenics Cult” in The American Mercury, of which Mencken was the editor. Mencken wasn’t any friendlier to the eugenics movement, although that may have been owing to his general opposition to organized efforts for what he called “uplift”; otherwise, he regarded himself as a follower of Nietzsche, and had a lot of time for “weak-to-the-wall” slogans. Bryan, who was a champion of the common man — as long as he was pious, rural, and white — was very much opposed to “weak-to-the-wall” attitudes; part of his opposition to evolution was based, in fact, on his view that Darwin’s Descent of Man espoused such attitudes. But he never seems to have complained about the contemporary eugenics movement, and his wife, Mary Baird Bryan, was a supporter of at least one major eugenics organization of the day.

Jacobsen: A common view is religion and science at combat for the Scopes trial. Although a part of it, what is a more accurate, potentially non-adversarial, perspective?

Branch: Perhaps surprisingly, none of the participants in the Scopes trial really regarded it as a combat between religion and science. Bryan, who really led the 1920s crusade for antievolution legislation, thought that it was a combat between religion — well, between Christianity, not to put too fine a point on it — and atheism. His attitude toward evolution wavered a bit — at times, he seemed to suggest that he’d be fine with evolution except for human evolution, and you’ll note that the Butler Act, under which Scopes was prosecuted, banned the teaching of human evolution specifically; at other times, he seemed to suggest that evolution was all bunk — but what he clearly opposed was what he regarded as attempts to undermine the foundations of Christianity, society, morality. It’s for that reason that he felt the need to impugn the scientific bona fides of evolution. But he was unsuccessful in recruiting people with scientific credentials as expert witnesses in the Scopes trial, and partly for that reason the prosecution team chose a legal strategy that wouldn’t have benefited from expert witnesses, instead simply arguing that Scopes had broken the law, end of story.

On the defense side, Darrow might have come closest to regarding it as a combat between religion and science, although his agnosticism means that he was less concerned about religion writ large and more concerned with dogmatic religion. One member of the team, Dudley Field Malone, was religious, a liberal Catholic. Arthur Garfield Hays was of Jewish descent but not particularly observant; I don’t know about the erratic and slovenly John Randolph Neal Jr., which of itself suggests that he wasn’t particularly religious. But the defense team strategy was in general to argue that the Butler Act falsely assumed that science and religion were in conflict. In the same vein, they picked expert witnesses not only for their scientific credentials but also for their expressions of faith. As it turns out, the judge held that the testimony of the expert witnesses was irrelevant — their testimony was read into the record for the purposes of appeal, but it wasn’t heard by the jury — and that the prosecution’s legal theory, that the only relevant issue was whether Scopes had taught human evolution, thus violating the law, was correct.

It’s a mistake, I think, to regard the Scopes trial as a manifestation of some eternal struggle between two monolithic capitalized entities called Science and Religion. Rather, it was a local, context-dependent, contingent struggle between a particular religious outlook and a particular area of science, all influenced by social and cultural factors and values in play in that particular place and at that particular time. Like the Facebook status says, it’s complicated.

Jacobsen: How did race, gender, and regional differences affect the public’s perception of the trial?

Branch:  The Scopes trial divided the African American community. Devout African Americans declared their fidelity to the Bible, and even to fundamentalism, although the presence of established denominations and the absence of modernist theology hindered the spread of organized fundamentalism in the African American community. African American intelligentsia such as the great sociologist W. E. B. DuBois, however, took the side of evolution, regarding it as representing progress, both in general and for their race. They did so even though scientific racism was alive and well in 1925; in part because they saw that scientific racism was on the wane, and in part because they were convinced that antievolutionism in the South was driven by a fear of evolution’s implications with regard to race.

As for gender, traditionally, women were responsible for the education, especially in faith and morals, of their children. Thus it was common for antievolutionists of the Scopes era to appeal to motherhood: John Washington Butler, who introduced the law under which Scopes was prosecuted, explained his motivation by saying, “As a little boy I was taught by my mother to believe in the Bible.” And women, at least in Tennessee, were eager for the public schools to become (or to continue to be) involved in teaching faith and morals. Yet women were not leaders in the antievolutionist movement, in part, because it was driven by a self-consciously combative, intellectualized, masculine form of Christianity: female antievolutionist crusaders like Aimee Semple McPherson were, and are, unusual.

Region is quite interesting. It’s not usually realized that fundamentalism was initially a Northern and urban phenomenon: a reaction to modernizing tendencies in religion that were initially influential only in the urban North. If there’s one person that I’d credit — or blame — as launching the antievolutionist movement in the 1920s, it would be William Bell Riley, who was a Baptist pastor in Minneapolis; it was his World Christian Fundamentals Association that recruited William Jennings Bryan for the Scopes trial. John Roach Straton, a pastor in New York City, was also influential. But fundamentalism was adapted to flourish in the South. In Fort Worth, Texas, the pistol-packing pastor J. Frank Norris, who memorably denounced “that hell-born, Bible-destroying, deity-of-Christ-denying, German rationalism known as evolution,” was as responsible as anyone for bringing antievolutionism south. And today the South enjoys a reputation as particularly hostile to evolution, even though the Midwest is probably on a par.

Anyone who’s interested in these aspects of the trial should read Jeffrey Moran’s American Genesis, published in 2012, which has a good discussion.

Jacobsen: What religious views were responsible for the Scopes trial?

Branch: That turns out to be a remarkably complex question! If you wanted to give a one-word answer, it might be “fundamentalism,” and you can certainly find respectable historians who study the trial who would agree. But in his American Apocalypse, published in 2014, Matthew Avery Sutton emphasizes that “evolution had not been a significant factor in the rise of the fundamentalist movement, nor had fundamentalism been at the base of Bryan’s crusade, nor were fundamentalists the only Americans uncomfortable with Darwin’s theories.” All three of those points are generally right, I think, so I’ll expand on them just a bit.

First, fundamentalism is often said to begin with the publication of The Fundamentals, a series of pamphlets published between 1910 and 1915 that addressed various issues from what we would now describe as a fundamentalist perspective. Evolution was not a major concern of these pamphlets, and the attitudes toward evolution that were visible were not especially hostile — dismissive or skeptical, perhaps, but not hostile. Second, Bryan, although a devout Presbyterian and someone eager to help steer the church — he ran for the position of Moderator of the General Assembly — wasn’t really involved with the fundamentalist movement until the 1920s, and his theological approach for much of his career was more similar to the so-called social gospel movement, which aimed to apply Christian ethics to social problems: Prohibition was one of the results, and Bryan was a keen Prohibitionist. Third, perhaps less impressive, Sutton is right that fundamentalists weren’t, and aren’t, the only Americans leery of evolution — but, on the other hand, they seem more inclined to try to enshrine their leeriness into public policy!

In any event, despite its potential to mislead, “fundamentalism” might be the best one-word answer you can give.

Jacobsen: Scopes was convicted, but although his conviction was overturned on appeal to the Tennessee Supreme Court, the Butler Act remained on the books. What became of it and of the other Scopes-era bans on teaching evolution?

Branch: The Tennessee legislature repealed the Butler Act in 1967, in part because of the publicity about it due to the Hollywood movie version of the play Inherit the Wind and in part because there were credible lawsuits being filed against its enforcement. Only two other states then had evolution statutes: Arkansas and Mississippi. The Arkansas law was challenged in a lawsuit that wound up with the Supreme Court in 1968, which ruled, in Epperson v. Arkansas, that the law violated the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment. The Mississippi law was similarly struck down by the Mississippi Supreme Court in 1970.

Jacobsen: But that wasn’t the end of efforts to undermine the teaching of evolution, was it?

Branch: By no means! The strategy in the second wave of legislation, from the 1970s to the 2000s, was to balance the teaching of evolution with a supposed alternative: “biblical creationism,” “creation science,” or “intelligent design.” But these proposals, when adopted, were routinely — and successfully — challenged as unconstitutional in the federal courts: a statute in Tennessee requiring equal time for biblical creationism in textbooks in Daniel v. Waters (1975); statutes in Arkansas and Louisiana requiring equal time for creation science in classrooms in McLean v. Arkansas (1982) and Edwards v. Aguillard (1987); and a Pennsylvania school district policy requiring the teaching of intelligent design in Kitzmiller v. Dover (2005). In each case, the court held that the supposed alternative to evolution was, at the bottom, religious, so a public school’s presentation of the supposed alternative as scientifically credible would violate the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment to the Constitution.

Jacobsen: But even the Kitzmiller trial didn’t put an end to it.

Branch: Alas, it didn’t. It was already clear to the proponents of intelligent design that despite their hopes their ideas weren’t going to survive constitutional scrutiny. As a result, a third wave of legislation emerged circa 2004, seeking to blunt the teaching of evolution. Without mentioning any supposed alternatives to evolution, such proposals typically allow (rather than require) public school teachers to present “the strengths and weaknesses” of supposedly controversial scientific topics, with evolution often the sole example adduced of such a topic. About eighty such bills have been introduced in state legislatures since 2004, with three enacted: in Mississippi in 2006, Louisiana in 2008, and Tennessee in 2012. These laws have not been challenged as unconstitutional in court in part because they are permissive: in the absence of egregious conduct on the part of a teacher, it would be difficult to demonstrate the harm caused by such a law to a prospective plaintiff. By the same token, however, it is unclear to what extent teachers in these states avail themselves of the license that the laws afford them to miseducate their students about evolution.

Jacobsen: What does the survey data tell us about evolution education at a national level — based on surveys from 1939-1940, 2007, and 2019?

Branch: The first of these surveys found that 53.7 percent of high school biology teachers reported that evolution was taught either as a fact or as a “principle underlying plant, animal and human origin.” The second found that 51 percent of high school biology teachers reported emphasizing that evolution was a fact while not giving any credence to creationism. Now, these surveys aren’t exactly comparable: there was probably a selection bias and a response bias in the earlier survey, resulting in a rosier picture for evolution education, and the questions are obviously different. Still, these results suggest a lack of progress over 67 years.

Matters are quite different when we compare the results of the 2007 survey with those of the 2019 replication, however. In that short 12 years, there was a considerable improvement, since the latter survey found 67 percent — up from 51 percent — of high school biology teachers reporting that evolution was a fact while not giving any credence to creationism. The improvement was in part to increasing exposure to evolution on the part of pre-service teachers and in part to increasing emphasis on evolution in state science standards, especially the Next Generation Science Standards, a model set of standards developed by 26 states and a consortium of various non-profit organizations, released in 2013, and adopted by 20 states plus the District of Columbia.

Jacobsen: So are we out of the woods, as far as evolution education is concerned?

Branch: Unfortunately, no. Of particular concern is the currently revanchist Supreme Court. In its decision in Kennedy v. Bremerton School District (2022), the court discarded what had been the settled tests for whether a government action violated the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment to the Constitution — the Lemon test and the related endorsement test — which were the foundation for the successful litigation against the antievolution legislation in the second wave. It is unclear whether such cases would be decided differently without those tests. But creationists are alive to the possibility. In 2021, Mary Bentley, a state representative in Arkansas, introduced a bill that would allow the state’s public school educators to “teach creationism as a theory of how the earth came to exist” — which it isn’t, but whatever. On the floor of the legislature, she was reminded by a colleague about the case law establishing the unconstitutionality of her proposal, and replied by “noting that the high court’s makeup has changed since then.” 

Jacobsen: But is there reason to hope?

Branch: Fortunately, yes! Despite the occasional outbreak of explicit attacks and a background level of implicit hostility across the country, creationist attacks on evolution education are on the wane, owing to the accelerating secularization of the United States and, perhaps, to the efforts of people of faith to reconcile their communities to evolution. Part of the reason that it’s been so easy historically to launch such attacks, of course, is that the U.S. educational system is so decentralized, with about 13,500 local school districts calling the shots with respect to curriculum. But despite the continuing decentralization of the American educational system, there are centripetal forces at work. State science standards have been increasing uniformity, as well as quality, in teacher preparation and professional development, textbooks, and curricula, with the availability of free, vetted, and standards-aligned curricula a recent phenomenon contributing as well. Perhaps in the future all American students will be in a position to appreciate that nothing in biology makes sense except in the light of evolution.

Jacobsen: What are your thoughts on the positive and negative aspects of K-12 education, particularly in situations where some students in certain school districts attend a more evolution-oriented biology class while others do not, based on the preferences of their parents? How might this affect those students after they graduate from K-12? How might this impact them during their K-12 education if they receive a less comprehensive understanding of the objective reality of evolution?

Branch: Well, there are numerous inequities in the U.S. educational system, many of which stem from local control, where most schools are funded by local property taxes and governed by locally elected school boards. This means that even within a single state, one student might be learning evolution from a prepared teacher willing to teach it effectively, while another may not. The system of local control extends even to individual schools and classrooms. Thus, a student in one classroom might receive a quality education in evolution while another student does not. There are anecdotes suggesting that, in some schools, students are informally placed into different classrooms based on what teachers anticipate their family’s reaction to learning about evolution.

This is unfair to students deprived of a complete understanding of a central concept in biology. It can also have long-term consequences if these students pursue higher education in fields where the study of evolution is essential or in careers in fields like medicine and agriculture, where knowledge of evolution is economically important. 

Jacobsen: I’m curious: What do we know about the 13,500 school districts? Have any representative surveys been conducted? 

Branch: In the late 1980s and early 1990s, there were a few surveys of school board members and their views on evolution education. Additionally, there may have been some studies of administrators from that period, but there has been little since then, so more work needs to be done.

In 2007, two political scientists from Penn State, Eric Plutzer and Michael Berkman, conducted only the second national survey of high school biology teachers regarding their thoughts on and teaching evolution. In 2019, the National Center for Science Education (NCSE) and Eric Plutzer replicated that survey and found substantial improvements. The NCSE, where I am the deputy director, promotes accurate and effective science education, particularly teaching evolution and climate change.

Jacobsen: If you were to conduct a new survey today, several decades later, covering the full 13,500 school districts, which factors would be the most critical to target for gaining insight into how these districts handle evolution and biology education?

Branch: That’s an interesting question. One important area would be to inquire about explicit formal policies. While school districts often have policy manuals, they tend to be generic or only slightly modified from boilerplate; but sometimes they have adopted formal policies aimed at undermining the teaching of evolution in one way or another What might be more revealing—but harder to uncover—would be informal policies, such as the extent to which students are informally tracked into evolution-friendly or evolution-unfriendly biology classes, as I mentioned earlier.

It could be challenging to ask administrators or board members about this, as they might be unwilling to report accurately if they believe a truthful answer could reflect poorly on them. Thoughtful consideration is needed to design questions that yield reliable information without triggering too much concern from respondents.

Jacobsen: Who is most important for a public education and critical thinking organization to engage with administrators, high school teachers, or local school board members?

Branch: Well, local school board members, who are locally elected, are crucial, but  in general, their main constituency is who they will listen to. We at NCSE have had friendly relations with several members of local and state school boards, but it’s not something we can always count on. Rather, we are more likely to assist local citizens by giving them talking points, suggestions, or strategies to approach local school board members, administrators, or teachers if they face challenges to evolution education in their schools. Teachers and administrators are responsive to certain types of claims they’re familiar with. For example, teachers and administrators can be reminded to check their local district’s policies if they need to follow them, or they can be directed to state science standards, which are documents specifying the skills and knowledge students are expected to gain through science education.

State science standards can be especially useful if a parent comes in and says, “Why are you teaching my kid evolution? I don’t like it. Stop”? Standards that contain evolution allow teachers to say, “Evolution is part of the state’s science standards. The state expects your child to learn about evolution, and that’s what I’m doing—just my job.”

Jacobsen: What do you find to be the most meaningful part of your job?

Branch: One thing I enjoy about my job is doing various tasks daily, so I stay energized. However, one of the most rewarding aspects is helping people navigate the intricacies of their local education system to resolve conflicts over the teaching of evolution. Most people don’t want to be publicly associated with lawsuits; they just want the issue to disappear. So, it’s a win for science education whenever NCSE can help them resolve the situation quietly. That’s one of the most gratifying parts of the job.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Glenn. 

Branch: My pleasure, Scott!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Paul Bramson on Communication, Confidence, and Coaching

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/06

Paul Bramson is among the most impactful and gifted keynote speakers and trainers globally. He consistently delivers compelling talks and training workshops that leave a lasting impression. Paul is recognized as a thought leader in communication, leadership, and sales. He has over 25 years of experience inspiring all levels of professionals, leaders, and teams. Paul’s ability to captivate and entertain audiences stems from his genuine passion, unique talents, and commitment to improving. He has recently been featured in BuiltInMSNGoBankingRatesFortune, and Forbes. Hediscusses knowing his communication talents early, becoming president of his high school class, and realizing his passion for public speaking. He talks about developing communication, sales, business, leadership, and keynote speaking skills while emphasizing the importance of confidence, preparation, and audience management. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Paul Bramson to discuss communication. I have an earlier live question for you. Did you show any early talents or personality style suggesting that you were interested in or effective at communication? Were there any moments in your early life where you realized this?

Paul Bramson: In my life. 

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: What do you think? I just woke up as an adult. I love this question, Scott. I’m going to be very American with you, so be ready. 

Jacobsen: You might be fitting to sound more stereotypically New York.

Bramson: I’m from Boston.

Jacobsen: Oh, you’re from Boston? Excellent! 

Bramson: I went to Boston University. My communication journey began early. I was big into sports and was captain of the basketball team. But it really started when I became president of my high school class, and I got the chance to speak to bigger audiences. That was the moment I thought, ‘Wow, I enjoy this, and I’m pretty good at it.’ However, as an adolescent, you don’t fully know. That was a tell-tale signs. That was a key moment when I realized I wanted to speak in front of people. That passion grew from there when I went to college.

Yes, I joined a fraternity and did a lot of socializing, but it wasn’t until I entered the business world—when I went into sales—and eventually became an international sales speaker and trainer for MCI Communications, traveling the world. I thought, ‘Wow, not only do I love doing this, but I’m also good at it.’ It was a gradual build-up from high school to college, to the work world, and then at age 32, I went out on my own.

Jacobsen: What was your experience with the fraternity? Did that help build your communication skills?

Bramson: It’s been a long time since I’ve talked about my fraternity. Scott, sometimes, people know they’re good at communicating with others. I was good at that. I worked as a bartender and at the doors, so I knew I could communicate well. However, that doesn’t always transcend into the work world.

I recognized I had strong communication skills, and I used them a lot within the fraternity and college life. The next logical step for me, though I’m a lot older than you, Scott, was to move into sales around 1992–1993. Sales helps you, more then than now, to leverage those communication skills. 

Jacobsen: When you are giving training and workshops, and public speaking and professional keynotes, what would you say are the emotional hurdles that can come from most people when they are beginning to do those things… 

Bramson: What do you mean by that?

Jacobsen: I mean by that the Jerry Seinfeld joke that people’s number one fear is public speaking. 

Bramson: Oh, it’s not even close. 

Jacobsen: Their number two is death. So, they’d rather be in the casket than giving the eulogy. 

Bramson: [Laughing] That is his. I used to use that one.

Jacobsen: There you go. In that sense, when you are helping people train in these skill sets, what do you look for in terms of difficulties that they may be commonly having, so you can help them as speakers, as communicators?

Bramson: When I do training, there is a difference between training and keynote speaking. So, I talk about all different topics. Sales, leadership, communications, connecting like a pro is a big one. What you’re talking about is presentation skills, people are nervous because they feel very vulnerable speaking in front of people. They need to get more reps at speaking in front of groups. The biggest challenge is the nervousness. They have been coached and trained appropriately, especially your generation and lower. There wasn’t a lot of the verbal communication, more tethered to the technology. I’m sure you’ve heard all of this, Scott. It is getting more reps and more appropriate coaching from people that are credible and getting less nervous doing it. When you’re older, you have the emotional intelligence and self-awareness to say, “What makes me nervous? What doesn’t make me nervous?”

When I’m in front of people, as long as I know my content, Scott—and this is the key thing—you’ve got to know your content. You’ve got to be prepared. Right now, you’re winging this interview, so I’m making you pivot. I can tell from your facial expressions, “Wow, he’s making me work a little harder at this.” By the way, when you know your content really well, and you do; if I know my content, I’m really good—like world-renowned good, Scott. I realized this when I was younger. I have a lot of inherent, innate skills. I can be charismatic, I can be dynamic. But the other thing I have, Scott, is that I know how to manage an audience. There are three things: you have to know your content, you have to be dynamic, and you have to be able to manage your audience. I can do all three. I knew that at a young age.

Here’s something interesting, Scott: I’ve never had imposter syndrome. I never experienced it. That’s a popular concept these days, right?

Jacobsen: Yes, it comes up a lot when people talk about these topics—even among highly successful people. 

Bramson: You have a good radio voice, Scott. 

Jacobsen: I appreciate that. 

Bramson: I didn’t say face. I said voice. 

Jacobsen: That’s right. 

Bramson: You’ve got an excellent voice.

Jacobsen: There’s this George Carlin line.

Bramson: Did you say, George Carlin? [Laughing] You love the comedians. 

Jacobsen: He once said that various comedians he knew, who were prominent at the time, were “wracked” with self-doubt. That was his word—“wracked.” 

Bramson: Comedians are a different bird. There’s something wrong with comedians to begin with, but that’s another story, as you probably know. Sorry, finish your question.

Jacobsen: Yes, so, when I hear the common more contemporary phrase “imposter syndrome,” which is popularized, I think of the more straightforward language of a prior generation of “self-doubt.”

Bramson: Fair. 

Jacobsen: Someone could have all the skills, they could perform well, but emotionally, they lack that security tied to their abilities. 

Bramson: Now, Scott, you’d have to put them on a therapist’s couch for that. There are some deep-rooted issues at play. But let’s say, we’re not having that conversation.

Jacobsen: Right.

Bramson: Imposter syndrome can come from a lot of different area. In my experience, I never lacked confidence in myself. I thank mom and dad for a strong upbringing. In my experience, aside from getting on a psychiatric couch, the reason why people experience imposter syndrome is that they don’t feel like they belong in that environment. They might be speaking to a much more educated or credible group, and they don’t feel they have the credibility. This is the kind of thing that leads to imposter syndrome from what I’ve seen working with people, especially with people who haven’t developed the skill set. If they haven’t been coached or trained appropriately, it’s like a professional athlete, Scott.

Unless you’ve had the reps, proper training, and coaching, I’ll use hockey as an example, which I’m sure you love being in Canada—I could be wrong. Imposter syndrome, especially among the young, stems from not feeling like they belong in that arena with more experienced people. When young people communicate to older audiences, they feel that imposter syndrome because they think they don’t have the credibility to do it. However, if a younger person has a strong skill set—such as being able to communicate well and having some emotional intelligence—that can mask or create a credibility.

For example, I might be older than you, Scott, but I could think, “Wow, Scott is a better communicator than I am.” As a result, I want to listen to you. Does that make sense to you?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: I hope that answers your question. 

Jacobsen: What do you find is the baseline skill set most people lack when they come for communication training? 

Bramson: Are we talking about communication, sales, leadership, or all of the above?

Jacobsen: Just communication.

Bramson: So, it depends. This gets a little deeper, especially when we’re talking about presentation skills. What do they lack? Confidence. They lack confidence, but eye contact, movement, posture, gestures—those are all visible actions. People often lack tremendous confidence in executing them. They simply haven’t put in the reps. They often fail because they haven’t practiced enough.

Jacobsen: How long does it take, or how many reps do they need? That’s a two-part question. 

Bramson: Well, this is complicated because reps can vary depending on the audience, the content, or the role they’re in.

Typically, they need about five years of consistent practice. I’m not just talking about getting up and doing one speech. You could do a speech 10 times, practice how you look and sound, and get good at that specific speech. But if we’re talking about building a foundational skill set, it takes about two to three years of consistent practice—at least once a month—to become proficient.

This takes real work, Scott, if you want to be “really good at it.” 

Jacobsen: But how often do you meet people who are motivated to become “really good at it”?

Bramson: Plenty of people say, “I wish I were more confident speaking in front of others.” That’s a huge crowd. People are always enamored when I tell them I’m a professional speaker. They ask, “What do you speak about?” I tell them sales, leadership. They’re like, “Wow, that’s exciting! I could never do that.” I hear it all the time. How do you feel speaking in front of people, Scott?

Jacobsen: Oh, I’m okay. 

Bramson: Do you wish you were better?

Jacobsen: It’s always nice thing to be a little bit better at something, sure. 

Bramson: “Something” or something like that?

Jacobsen: Sure, depending on what it is. It’s probably not good to become a better thief.

Bramson: Sure, but I said something like presenting.

Jacobsen: Yes, something virtuous like that. 

Bramson: “Virtuous” is a good word.

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: This kind of improvement takes time. I still work on presentation skills, but it’s not as popular as it used to be. It’s still popular, but what’s more popular now is how to communicate effectively with people—that’s the connecting part. How can someone connect with others better when they communicate? That’s the stuff that resonates with people now. Presentation skills are still fine. I do virtual presentations. My team does them too—virtual and face-to-face presentation skills. The big ones are connecting like a pro. How can I better connect with Scott so my message resonates with him rather than speaking one way? 

Jacobsen: Do you find this particularly poignant in sales and business?

Bramson: Life, Scott. Yes, it’s a life skill, Scott. If I know how you’re built—I call these your “underlying needs”—then I can speak in ways that resonate more with you. That’s part of a program I offer. If I understand your underlying needs, I can speak words and language more likely to resonate with you. You’re more likely to listen and engage. For example, do you have people in your life who absolutely drive you crazy when they talk to you? The answer is, ‘Yes.” They don’t know how to talk to you. On the flip side, do you have people in your life who just “get you”?

Jacobsen: Yes, in different ways and to different degrees.

Bramson: And you prefer to be around the people who get you, right?

Jacobsen: Sure, when I get out and want to socialize. 

Bramson: That’s because some people connect better with you than others. Let me give you an example, Scott. I won’t tell you what my specific underlying need is, but there are generally four: the need to be right, the need to be liked, the need to feel safe, and the need to look good. I’m on one of those needs. Do you remember what I asked you at the very beginning of this conversation?

Jacobsen: No, I don’t.

Bramson: I asked if you had done any research on me. 

Jacobsen: I said, “No.” 

Bramson: Now, that doesn’t resonate with me—not that Scott doesn’t resonate with me, but that statement didn’t. My underlying need is the need to look good, so I appreciate when people show they’ve prepared. I’m not saying you were disrespectful, but that’s an example of how our needs affect how we connect.

Bramson: So, I want to be clear. I’m not saying that. But if you had said, “Paul, I’ve done all this research about you,” that would have connected with me. When you say, “I’ve got nine other people,” I don’t care about that. I care about you and me connecting. Does that make sense?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: Now I’m assessing your underlying need. You’re not motivated by the need to look good, by the way. I don’t think that’s one of yours. You’re likely motivated by one of two things: the need to be right or the need to feel safe. Maybe the need to be liked, but not the need to look good. I haven’t fully defined this for you yet, though.

Jacobsen: Right.

Bramson: Anyway, that’s the connecting piece. 

Jacobsen: That four-part theory—is there an underlying psychological framework for it?

Bramson: I’ll make it easy for you. This isn’t about personality types, like Myers-Briggs or a DISC profile. Those are institutionalized systems. They’re fine. They have their place. What I’m talking about are motivational drivers. Why do you behave and react in certain ways when people talk to you? What makes you feel fulfilled or unfulfilled? That’s the underlying basis.

Jacobsen: Where do you find that people seeking communication, business, or sales skills usually fall within those four categories?

Bramson: It’s not about the person but rather the roles they gravitate toward. 

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting question.

Bramson: No, seriously, that’s a great question. I mean it. Very astute, Scott. Typically, people tend to go into roles that align with their underlying needs. It’s about what makes them feel fulfilled or not. For example, in sales, the need to look good and the need to be liked are common. These roles might attract people who want to stand out or build relationships or flex a  bit..

People in account management or engineering roles are more often driven by the need to be safe or the need to be right. They prefer predictable, process-oriented structure. The only reason I hesitate to peg you as someone driven by the need to be safe is that you’re a freelancer, which isn’t the safest of the roles. 

Jacobsen: [Laughing]. 

Bramson: [Laughing] Do you value relationships? 

Jacobsen: It depends, yes, to some degree, particularly close, intimate ones.

Bramson: If you leave this conversation, will you think about whether Paul liked you or whether Paul respected you? Which would matter more to you?

Jacobsen: Third option: neither.

Bramson: No, no, no. There’s no third option.

Jacobsen: Neither really matters.

Bramson: Don’t sidestep the question, Jacobsen. 

Jacobsen: It’s both.

Bramson: You might lean toward the need to feel safe. I said that earlier. 

Jacobsen: It might also be a false dichotomy.

Bramson: [Laughing] It’s not a false dichotomy. They’re not that dissimilar. There’s a lot of overlap. Anyway, I knew I was right. Let’s keep going.

Jacobsen: What are the stumbling blocks that are rarely encountered, but you do find? I’m thinking about areas where people, even after a year of learning basic skill sets and getting those reps in, still struggle. It’s not necessarily about skills or emotional motivations. So, when people are, let’s say, two to three years into developing a foundational skill set, or maybe even up to five years in to become proficient—whether it’s in sales, leadership, communication, or other areas—they’re quite far along. Yet, many people still face common issues, like a lack of confidence, imposter syndrome, or self-doubt. But I’m curious about the rarer challenges people face, even after getting training from you or others. What uncommon stumbling blocks come up at later stages of development?

Bramson: That’s a thoughtful question, so I appreciate it. I’ll give you an answer, and I hope it addresses what you’re asking.

What I’ve noticed isn’t something specific to the younger generation. The Gen Zs of the world are full of, excuse my language, piss and vinegar. They’re ready to take on the world, and they want to be better. They question things, but it’s to evolve.

However, as people progress in their careers, the one thing that is absolutely eye-opening to me is the lack of emotional intelligence, Scott. It’s scary. So, to answer your question—it’s not really an outlier, but it’s a significant issue.

Emotional intelligence has five elements, according to Daniel Goleman: self-awareness, self-regulation, motivation, empathy, and social skills. What I often see is a glaring lack of self-awareness and self-regulation, especially in leadership roles. It’s shocking, really. These are people leading teams, yet they lack those essential emotional skills.

Emotional intelligence has been around for years, and in the early 2000s, companies started to recognize the importance of soft skills. But even now, the absence of emotional intelligence in leadership is a real problem.

I’m not going to invest in this. But fast forward to 2024, and emotional intelligence is high on the list. The problem is that people aren’t being trained or coached appropriately, and they don’t interview for it.

Jacobsen: When they’re not interviewing for emotional intelligence, what about empathy? That’s one of the five elements of Goleman’s framework, which you mentioned. As I’ve interviewed experts on narcissism—and I’ll be interviewing more—there seems to be a rising tide of narcissistic traits over the past several decades.

Bramson: Did you say narcissism?

Jacobsen: Yes. There’s been a rise in narcissistic traits—not necessarily full-blown narcissistic personality disorder, though that might follow from the trend. It’s more of a cultural shift, with a rise in certain traits or subcomponents of narcissism. Social media might be a factor, but regardless of the cause, do you think a reduction in empathy is connected to that? Does this impact people’s ability to excel in sales, business, and communication?

Bramson: Empathy has a bigger impact on leadership, though it’s important for everyone. From a leadership perspective, empathy is often lacking, and it’s crucial—along with compassion and sympathy. While they aren’t the same, they’re closely related and fall under the same umbrella. But it’s not just empathy that’s the issue.

There’s also a significant lack of social skills. Some people just don’t connect well with others, and yet they’re put into leadership roles. It’s like, wait a minute—you’re leading an organization, but you don’t have the social skills to connect with people? That’s counterintuitive. So, it’s not just a lack of empathy; it’s also poor social skills. And those two—empathy and social skills—are critical for connecting well with others. The first three elements of emotional intelligence are more about the individual.

So, I’d argue it’s a combination: yes, empathy is lacking, but so are social skills. Have you ever been around someone and thought, “My god, they’re awkward”? I’m sure you’ve interviewed people like that—people who come across as awkward despite their professional achievements.

Jacobsen: That’s fair. Some people’s professions speak to those issues, and others just come across that way naturally. Recently, there was a story involving a student association. The student newspaper was reporting on improper actions by some of the executive members, and I reached out to interview them about it.

There was a petition to dissolve the student newspaper and the arts publication, along with the ink society publishing house. They wanted to remove any mention of the student association from past or future publications. The petition seemed questionable, with invalid student IDs and mismatched names.

One individual told me it was their first interview, as they had just jumped into the job. It was an awful situation to start with, so I kept the interview short and light. In that case, it wasn’t necessarily a lack of skills but rather sensitivity to inexperience. It echoes what you said earlier—sometimes younger people haven’t had the chance to develop those emotional or social skills yet.

So rather than something situational, they might be on the spectrum, or there might be something that makes it harder for them to develop these skills. That’s something deeply rooted. And it’s not something easily extirpated. It’s just there.

Bramson: Yes. 

Jacobsen: So you have to be sensitive to that. I’m not sure what my question is exactly, but when dealing with leadership and someone lacks those skills, how do you build them up? And if the issue is intrinsic, how do you help them develop those skills? I might be assuming something in that question, because it’s probably more about helping them facilitate their own development, rather than just teaching them.

Bramson: That’s fair, of course. Well, let’s do the first part first, and then don’t forget the second part. Do you have the second part ready?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: I’ve done a lot of this in my career, though I’ve moved away from it recently. You need one-on-one coaching. Forget about psychologists and sociologists—you can have them, but I once worked with a company that had a psychiatrist on staff. Fascinating guy, super smart. He was from Chicago and did institutionalized work with them, which was helpful, but most companies won’t do that. People need one-on-one coaching.

For instance, Scott, if I spent an hour with you, I wouldn’t be where I am today, but I’d be more effective after that hour—not because I don’t respect you, but because we’re talking about deep coaching. You’ve got to get into someone’s psyche, understand how they grew up—that’s something you touched on earlier. You need to understand their foundation and start from there. For example, let’s talk about where someone is empathetic and why they feel less empathy in certain situations.

Coaching is essential. No one gets better on their own—they just don’t. By the way, someone who grows without coaching or without what I call a “personal board of advisors” or mentors will find it hard to elevate. Sure, they can attend a training program, which is fantastic. But after leaving a great training program, it’s like a sermon—they’ll forget it in two weeks. You need consistent follow-up coaching. That’s how you become more aware and better. I hope that answers your first question.

Jacobsen: And what if the issue is intrinsic?

Bramson: What do you mean by intrinsic?

Jacobsen: So, qualifier: I’m not a medical professional. But if someone comes to you and says they have a particular issue that results in social deficits—something intrinsic that a medical professional has diagnosed—how do you handle that?

Bramson: That’s something for a medical professional to handle. If someone tells me they have a personality disorder, I’m out. I won’t go near that because I’m not a medical professional. I know what I’m good at, and I stay in my lane. I’m not a medical professional, so I can’t provide medical advice. When you talk about intrinsic or foundational issues—oh, I’m out. It’s funny—not funny in a humorous way, but interesting that you bring this up.

If someone brings up medical issues, I say, “I’m out.” I don’t touch that. You need to talk to a medical professional. I can discuss things from a work perspective, or from a life or work landscape perspective, without touching on medical topics. That’s where I’m comfortable. But anything medical—I’m out. People take medication for these issues, Scott, and if anyone without a medical degree attempts to handle that, it’s a scary situation. I wouldn’t go near it. So, are you getting what you need?

Jacobsen: Yes, this is interesting.

Bramson: Good. By the way, you’re doing a great job, Scott. Are you an academic? You’re very thoughtful. I imagine you were good in school. I have a slight suspicion. Either that or you didn’t try hard. 

Jacobsen: I’d say average in school.

Bramson: But you come across as very sharp. You come across as an academic, and that’s a compliment.

Jacobsen: Thank you. So, what’s your take-home message for people at the end of a session, like a keynote? When you finish up a keynote, what are you hoping people walk away with?

Bramson: I want them to be better. I want them to be better at work and better in life. People often get into relationships—whether it’s a work relationship or a personal one—and they don’t understand why things aren’t going well. The relationship isn’t evolving positively because they don’t connect well. You need to ask yourself, “Why is that?” It could be something you’re doing, or it could be something they’re doing, but you need to coach people to be better.

As Dr. Phil says, you have to teach people how to treat you. The other thing I want people to take away is this: stop talking from your own perspective and start speaking from someone else’s perspective if you want to connect with them. That’s what I want them to do. Stop communicating the way you’re built and start communicating based on how others are built. You’re more likely to connect if you speak the way they think, not the way you think.

Jacobsen: Drop the mic?

Bramson: Drop the mic! I’ll drop the mic on that one.

Jacobsen: I’m sure you do that occasionally.

Bramson: I will drop the mic!

Jacobsen: Excellent. It was nice to meet you. Thank you so much for your time today.

Bramson: Scott, thank you for carving out the time. I look forward to seeing the article. Excellent. It’s been a pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thanks, Paul. We’ll see you soon.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Elinor Greenberg, Ph.D., Defining and Identifying Narcissism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/05

Elinor Greenberg, Ph.D. (website) is the author of the book Borderline, Narcissistic, and Schizoid Adaptations: The Pursuit of Love, Admiration, and Safety. She is a globally recognized Gestalt therapy trainer specializing in the diagnosis and treatment of Borderline, Narcissistic, and Schizoid adaptations in a lively and practical way. She has trained psychotherapists in her approach in the England, Mexico, Norway, Russia, Sweden, US, Wales. She is an Associate Editor of the Gestalt Review, a faculty member of the New York Institute for Gestalt Therapy, and a faculty member of the Gestalt Center for Psychotherapy and Training, where she designed and taught a post-graduate program on the diagnosis and treatment of Borderline, Narcissistic, and Schizoid Adaptations. She is also a graduate of and former faculty member of “The Masterson Institute,” which is a post-graduate training institute teaching psychoanalytically oriented developmental, self, and object relations approach to the theory and treatment of personality disorders. She is a certified Ericksonian hypnotherapist and is in the National Registry for Certified Group Psychotherapists. Dr. Greenberg was honoured by Quora.com as a Top Writer for 2017 and 2018.

Greenberg explains the complexities of diagnosing narcissistic personality disorder. She emphasizes that narcissism involves rigid, maladaptive coping mechanisms rooted in childhood. Greenberg distinguishes between emotional and cognitive empathy, highlights the concept of “object constancy,” and describes her approach to therapy, including identifying splitting behaviours and listening for exaggeration and performative self-presentation in clients.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Elinor Greenberg, an expert in narcissism and other personality disorders. We’ll be focusing on narcissism today. I’d like to ask you about your unique approach to the treatment modalities of narcissism, which I was unaware of before being informed and educated by you. So, a two-part question:

First, how are we defining narcissism, and how do we use that definition to separate treatable from untreatable cases?

Elinor Greenberg: We don’t use that definition to separate treatable from untreatable. The definition helps to identify people who meet the full criteria for narcissistic personality disorder—what’s commonly called ‘the pattern.’ It’s the name of a pattern, not a label for the person. The pattern of coping that is termed narcissistic personality disorder is distinct from individuals who have narcissistic traits. These individuals may appear narcissistic on the surface, but at a deeper level, they are not.

In my definition of narcissistic personality disorder, the first criterion is that the individual must have a personality disorder. A personality disorder is generally defined as a rigid, maladaptive set of coping mechanisms, thought processes, behaviours, and interpretations that trace back to early childhood. These mechanisms likely developed, theoretically speaking (though we cannot prove it), in response to a home environment where the individual sought to maximize love and support while minimizing rejection and punishment. I reframe disorders as adaptations because I believe they begin as adaptations. However, the field defines them as maladaptive, persistent, and rigid responses that are often inappropriate. Nevertheless, the individual pays a price for these responses.

You can think of a personality disorder as a suit of armour—protection. Narcissistic personality disorder shields a person from humiliation, feelings of shame, and feelings of inadequacy. However, when you wear a suit of armour, you lose flexibility. So, you sacrifice flexibility in exchange for a specific kind of safety—feeling special, in the case of narcissism.

The first step is determining whether the person has a personality disorder, meaning they exhibit a rigid, maladaptive pattern that isn’t serving them and is interfering with their coping skills and functioning in important areas of daily life. On top of that, they would need to meet the criteria for narcissism.

Different criteria depend on the theoretical approach to narcissism. It’s like the story of the blind man and the elephant. Are you familiar with that?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Greenberg: For those who aren’t familiar with it. Briefly, five blind men are asked to describe an elephant. Each one touches a different part of the elephant. One touches the tail and says an elephant is like a string. Another touches the trunk and says an elephant is like a snake. One touches the side and says the elephant is like a wall, but you can feel it breathing. Narcissistic personality disorder is similar. Each theoretical school focuses on a different aspect of the same phenomenon, and all are more or less true.

In my first year, I had two clients like that. They initially seemed to view the therapy and me as adequate, even good. They praised me. Then, one day—maybe around six sessions in—I said something, and they suddenly hated me. It wasn’t just dislike. They didn’t calmly say, “Elinor” or “Dr. Greenberg”—whatever they preferred to call me—”I’m upset that you said that.” No, it wasn’t that kind of response.

It was pure hatred. The kind of reaction where they quit therapy, start yelling at me, and storm out of the room, accusing me of lacking professionalism or depth. They might even stop paying back the session when clients still paid me by check.

I couldn’t understand it. How could someone go from loving me to hating me, swinging from one extreme to the other, without any intermediary reaction that I could see? I must have said or done something that didn’t sit well with them. That’s when I began studying this phenomenon. I learned that object relations theory had the answer, explaining what I was witnessing—though I would not say I like the jargon.

I saw a lack of whole-object relations and object constancy. Now, why is this important? Why should I care? Well, nobody wants to be abused. Do you want to be abused?

Jacobsen: No, of course not.

Greenberg: Exactly. Few people enter a relationship wanting to be abused. However, a lack of object constancy is one of the greatest predictors of abuse in relationships during conflicts—whether it’s the abuse of a child, a partner, or even an employee. So, what does this mean? What does object constancy refer to?

It ties into whole object relations. If I have object constancy and like you, I will still like you even if you say something that annoys me. I may be upset by what you said, but it won’t destroy our relationship. I can process that.

I say things that annoy people, too. But if I’m disappointed in you, it doesn’t ruin our entire relationship. Let’s say we’ve had a ten-year friendship. Now, I’ve lost two narcissistic friends. I knew they were narcissists. I knew they often behaved like narcissists, idealizing me at first, but that wasn’t why I spent time with them. I liked them because they were interesting people. Then, one day, something happened; they were triggered and ghosted me. They stopped talking to me completely. I reached out, but I got no response.

This is typical. That’s the need for more object constancy. Someone gets hurt by me or is disappointed in what I said or did, or something someone else said affected our relationship, or even physical distance played a role. Many people cheat on their partners because, with physical distance, they cannot maintain their sense of a positive connection to the other person. So, if someone goes on a business trip and feels abandoned, or if they need and want their partner but don’t feel that connection, they might do something against their marriage vows—something they wouldn’t have done if they were still physically close to their partner.

A number of unpleasant outcomes occur when you don’t have whole object relations, which can lead to splitting in the middle of a fight. Why is this dangerous? A lack of object constancy means that in the middle of a fight, I go from seeing you as my loved one, my dear friend, to my enemy—someone I must protect myself against at all costs. This response is disproportionate and not based on reality.

It could be a baby I shake because it won’t quiet down, and I’m desperate for sleep, taking it personally. Or it could be my partner, whom I slap or throw the remote at during a fight because, if I’m the narcissist, I feel humiliated and attacked by them. There are many opportunities for this kind of reaction, which needs to be clarified.

In these moments, someone may do something abusive that they would never do if they had whole object relations. Their actions go against how they feel after the split. You hear about cases in the news—someone kills their wife, the police arrive, and they’re crying over her body, holding her and saying, “I love you, I love you, I never meant to do this.” I believe them. I believe that what happened to many of these people was that they lacked whole-object relations. They fought with their wife and lost sight of everything else in the heat of the moment.

Their love for this person, the entire history of good times, loving moments, even great sex—it all fades into the background. What remains is the desperate need to win the fight, to battle. If they’re prone to hitting, their partner will get hit. They won’t calm down until their partner is begging for forgiveness. If they’re not the violent type, they might stop talking to their partner altogether.

People who live with narcissists may endure someone refusing to speak to them for days as a form of punishment. The narcissist was triggered but didn’t become violent, so they withdrew instead. These are important concepts, and that’s why people find living with narcissists so difficult. Narcissists have an additional issue—they struggle to tune into others and feel genuine warmth. People with narcissistic personality disorder have little to no ability to feel this warmth for others.

Emotional empathy is different from cognitive empathy. Emotional empathy is when you see someone slam their finger with a hammer by accident, or maybe they’re on the screen, and you wince. That’s emotional empathy.

For most people, it’s difficult to watch someone else get hurt in a way they can imagine being hurt themselves or to see a child or animal suffer and remain calm about it. Their heart might race, or they might feel discomfort. Conversely, seeing someone embarrassed can trigger emotional empathy. I’ve had to leave movies because I would not say I liked watching a character’s embarrassment. It wasn’t funny to me at all, though others were laughing.

If you have emotional empathy, you connect to that person’s emotions. When you do this, your gut response mirrors what you imagine they’re feeling. Of course, you could be wrong. Maybe the person has a condition that dulls pain, and when they hit their finger, they don’t feel it. But the average person isn’t analyzing it that deeply; they’re reacting instinctively.

Emotional empathy is that gut feeling of joy when someone you love succeeds. For example, if your child calls you with good news, you feel warmth in your chest—what in Yiddish is called “naches”—and you’re genuinely happy for them. That’s emotional empathy. Or, when someone you care about is hurt, you feel bad for them and offer kindness, even if it’s inconvenient for you. Narcissists can’t do this. In the middle of a fight, a narcissist can hurt you without feeling any emotional pain.

Now, cognitive empathy is different. We all have it to some degree unless we’re neurodiverse in a way that limits it. Cognitive empathy is the ability to imagine what someone else might feel and respond appropriately based on that understanding. An example of this would be attending a friend’s wedding. You know you’re supposed to say everything is wonderful, even if you’re unhappy with the food or seating arrangements. Cognitive empathy tells you not to mention that the wrong entrée was brought or that the person sitting next to you made an inappropriate comment. You hold back because you wouldn’t want to hear those things if it were your wedding.

Cognitive empathy means doing the socially appropriate thing because it’s the right thing or benefits you somehow. For narcissist, they can display cognitive empathy even if they don’t feel it emotionally. For instance, at a funeral, a narcissist might not care that your father died unless his death affects them—maybe if he was financially supporting them. But if the narcissist is high-functioning, they will act as if they care because they know it’s the right thing to do.

So, that’s the difference between emotional and cognitive empathy. It’s important because, in the middle of a fight, no one usually stops to think, “Let me consider how the other person feels,” or “Maybe my first reaction to insult them will hurt our friendship in the long run.” For a narcissist, especially if they’ve lost whole object relations during the conflict, that thought isn’t available. And I say “average” because some narcissists can keep in mind that they have a use for you after the fight is over, especially if they see you as someone with higher status or importance. Others, however, won’t keep that in mind.

Jacobsen: Be mindful of time—seven and a half minutes. When you apply these concepts in a therapeutic setting, what are the first steps for treatment?

Greenberg: The first step is to make a differential diagnosis.

I’m looking for signs of splitting. If I’m approaching it from an object relations perspective, I’m looking for current and historical splitting. I pay attention to how they describe themselves and others. Now, everyone exaggerates sometimes—it’s part of modern conversation: “Oh, it’s so hot out,” or something similar. But narcissistic exaggeration is more extreme—they see themselves as the best and others as the worst. If I ask the average person about someone else, they might need more information or give a measured response. “On a scale of 1 to 10, how bad are they?” they’ll respond thoughtfully.

However, when you ask a narcissist, the person they dislike is always a ten on that scale. And if you ask them about themselves, “How special are you on a scale of 0 to 10?”—even when comparing themselves to someone they greatly admire—they might go as low as a 9, but they always see themselves as the best. I could give examples, but I don’t want to take up too much of your time. The point is, I listen to the language and challenge it: “Well, scale it for me.”

That’s what I’m paying attention to. I’m also listening for signs of empathy or a lack thereof and observing their self-presentation. I watch how they present themselves and how much effort they put into that presentation. For example, one man spent an entire session trying to present himself as someone who deeply cares whether I’m addressed as “Doctor” or “Ma’am” or something respectful, even though I repeatedly told him, “Call me Elinor, and let’s focus on why you’re here.” His wife had sent him to treatment for narcissism, but we spent the whole session with him, trying to show how respectful he was toward me. Something was off.

Jacobsen: It’s performative.

Greenberg: Exactly, it’s performative. Narcissists often perform one of two sides of a false self. Their authentic self was left behind in childhood to the extent that it wasn’t rewarded by their parents—or at least, they believed it wasn’t. Now, it’s not always the parents’ fault. There can be other situations or circumstances involved, and I’ve seen many of these. It’s not always about blaming the mother or the father. There are other contributing factors.

So, I’m listening to how they describe themselves. I’m also listening for balance. When they say, “My wife wanted me to come to therapy,” I ask, “Tell me about your wife and the issues she wants addressed.”

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Minister Riley Phoebus: The Satanic Temple Illinois

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/04

Riley Phoebus is a Minister in The Satanic Temple Illinois (TSTIL). Phoebus discusses how it was founded by Adam and Dante (Satanic pseudonyms) as a revival of TST Chicago, expanding statewide. Inspired by Satanist principles, TSTIL promotes knowledge, pluralism, and intellectual freedom. Its public displays, such as the crocheted serpent and Copernican reference, highlight themes of resistance to arbitrary authority and book bans. TSTIL emphasizes that it is a legitimate religion, not a publicity stunt, and fosters dialogue through community events like “Meet A Satanist” and charity initiatives.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Who were the founders, and what was the original inspiration for The Satanic Temple Illinois?

Minister Riley Phoebus: The original founders were Adam and Dante (Satanic pseudonyms). The Satanic Temple Illinois (TSTIL) emerged as a rebirth of TST Chicago, intentionally expanded in this iteration to include the entire state, rather than just the city. The inspiration was to form a community of Satanists organized around the principles and Seven Tenets of TST.

Jacobsen: What inspired the crocheted serpent at the Illinois Capitol?

Phoebus: The crocheted serpent is a direct representation of the serpent depicted in the 3rd chapter of Genesis. While Abrahamic followers of the text view the serpent as a nefarious, deceitful entity, we see the interaction between the serpent and Eve as an act of compassion and the sacred offer of knowledge. Furthermore, we reject the popular, misogynistic interpretation that Eve was a temptress to Adam, as Genesis 3:6 records that Adam was with Eve when the serpent revealed the truth about the fruit of knowledge and chose to eat the fruit freely. As Satanists, we view the pursuit of knowledge and the practice of free will as our innate rights, deserving of celebration. The plush, snuggly iteration of the serpent featured in our holiday display symbolizes the benevolence of The Adversary.

Jacobsen: The most creative activism I have seen in the North American freethought spaces have been The Satanic Temple – funny, good-hearted, dramatic, effective upon sentiments. How does The Satanic Temple of Illinois differentiate itself from other religious or secular organizations advocating for pluralism and free expression?

Phoebus: Thank you for your appreciative recognition. While there are other groups engaged in like-minded pursuits, some of which we periodically collaborate with, The Satanic Temple approaches this work from a unique perspective. We are not simply an activist organization, instead we are a religious community whose deeply embedded beliefs are inherently an act of resistance against arbitrary authority. As non-theistic Satanists, we are not only underrepresented, but disproportionately misrepresented in both social and political landscapes. The name “Satan” and its related terminology is so extensively vilified, that we rarely get the platform to even dispute the misconceptions widely circulated about us. However, we are able to leverage this baseless prejudice to make our voice heard and our message clear: if you want to allow religions to be represented in public administration, while adhering to the First Amendment, this is what that looks like – Satan in the Capitol.

Jacobsen: What significance does the Copernican reference hold in the display?

Phoebus: In the early 1600’s, Copernicus’s text was banned by the Catholic Church because it challenged the church’s stance by proposing that the Earth revolves around the Sun. We chose to use this book as a focal point of our display to highlight the value of Tenet 5. It is our belief that science, with its use of evidence and logical reasoning, should be the tool used to shape our worldview, rather than faith in the unprovable, or in this case, demonstrably false. “That which will not bend, must break, and that which can be destroyed by truth should never be spared its demise (The Satanic Temple’s Invocation).”

  1. Jacobsen: What has been the impact of your displays on promoting awareness about book bans and intellectual freedom in Illinois?

Phoebus: Including the Copernican text was a deliberate choice made to illuminate the dangers of book bans. Banning books that challenge the reasoning of the elite and/or social majority limits our intellectual freedom, restricting knowledge and curiosity under the guise of assumed morality. By drawing attention to the historic banning of such a powerful, transformative text, we hope that people will see the parallels to modern book bans and the dangers of oppressing innovative thought.

Jacobsen: What are some of the key misconceptions about The Satanic Temple? TST is entirely transparent and clear on the messaging. Yet, we’re constantly – as non-theist Satanists – misunderstood, cynically deliberately and ignorantly not.

Phoebus: There are two major misconceptions about The Satanic Temple, existing on opposite sides of the spectrum. On one hand, there’s the assumption that we worship a literal Satan. A quick glance on our website will dispel this myth rather quickly. We are non-theistic; we do not believe in any supernatural entities. On the other hand, a handful of people will jump to our defense by claiming it’s a publicity stunt or a political movement, that it’s just to rile people up. This is also not the case. The values of the archetype of Satan, The Adversary, especially as depicted in romantic literary works such as The Revolt of the Angels, informs our beliefs and practices. We are a legitimate religion with a strong community, a thriving ministry, common set of values (The Seven Tenets), ritual practices, services, and congregations. The dramatics and the dark humor are simply a pleasant byproduct.

Jacobsen: How do you view the intersection of religious freedom and public expression?

Phoebus: You can’t have religious freedom without protected public expression. This is particularly important for minority religions, especially in the context of the rising presence of Christian nationalism. The First Amendment protects not only the free practice of an individual’s religion, but also prohibits the US government from endorsing or favoring a particular religion with regards to the Establishment Clause. Pluralism is a fundamental value of our nation and must be protected at every level.

Jacobsen: What is the process behind designing and selecting specific themes or messages for the annual Capitol display?

Phoebus: The driving force behind our annual holiday display theme is identifying an intersection between our core beliefs and current events affecting minority religion and the fight for pluralism, both locally in Illinois and nationally. Our Holiday Display Committee works together to develop the design and message, then the entire congregation comes together as a whole to implement it.

Jacobsen: How do you encourage inter belief dialogue in Illinois? 

Phoebus: Our mere presence often causes conversation, and we can use that as an opportunity to make connections with folks of other religions. We’ve held a casual coffee and conversation event titled, “Meet A Satanist,” where folks could sit down with some of us and chat about whatever they wanted. Our annual Menstruatin’ with Satan charity drive – where folks can donate period products into collection boxes at local businesses – puts our efforts to help our community front and center; we hope that it inspires folks to look more closely into who we are and what we do. We have applied for membership in a few interfaith local groups, but have not been accepted into any as of yet. Our ministers serve our local community through important rituals like Unbaptisms, officiating weddings, and providing information to curious individuals or groups. It’s important to note that we do not proselytize. 

Jacobsen: What future projects or initiatives does The Satanic Temple of Illinois plan to promote pluralism and intellectual freedom?

Phoebus: We will continue to work with The Satanic Temple’s national campaigns such as After School Satan Club to bring religious pluralism efforts to Illinois. On a local level, we plan to continue our very successful annual charity drives and holiday displays in the Capitol building. Our incredible congregation is always coming up with new ideas to fulfill the needs of our community and continue the fight against Christian nationalism by exercising our fundamental rights.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Erica Anenberg on BuilderBud and Construction Contracting

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/04

Erica Anenberg is a general contractor and creator of BuilderBud, a construction project management app. With 30+ years of business and 10 years of construction experience, she empowers women in construction and tech, simplifies project management, and improves communication. Anenberg talks about LGBTQ+ inclusion in construction and her app, BuilderBud. BuilderBud helps homeowners manage construction projects by simplifying communication, task management, invoicing, and documentation. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Erica Anenberg. We’re going to be talking about the LGBTQ+ community and construction and a new app, which is an underrepresented area. I worked in that industry as a teenager. I wasn’t very skilled at it because I was a teenager, but I became aware of some nuanced aspects of construction culture. However, for anyone who’s worked in the field for a few months, these aspects aren’t subtle; they are the blunt realities of the culture that you either adapt to, leave, or move on to a new job site. These realities come with all the challenges that construction entails. So, when you think of a construction site as someone with experience, what image comes to mind compared to someone who has never worked in that field?

Erica Anenberg: For me, I see a construction site as exciting. It energizes me because I see the potential. However, someone without experience might see the danger. They need help conceptualizing any vision of what the project could become. Yes, I see a real opportunity. When I think of construction, I see a lot of potential. 

Jacobsen: So, what is BuilderBud?

Anenberg: BuilderBud is designed to help homeowners who may find the construction process overwhelming—the chaos and confusion. As a general contractor, I have experience organizing and implementing systems. We developed BuilderBud because we understand that homeowners and clients don’t have the same level of expertise. Many software available today cater only to general contractors, leaving out the homeowner in terms of design, user experience, and onboarding, which can be complicated and expensive.

Last year, we transitioned to one of the construction tech platforms, which made a difference. We were able to make this move because we were working on five projects simultaneously and earning more money. But when we started, I needed help to afford a $200-per-month software, which hindered our progress. So, now that I’ve found more success professionally and financially, I wanted to develop something to give back.

Yes, it’s a for-profit venture, and I want to benefit from it. However, I also developed BuilderBud to solve a problem that has yet to be addressed. Suppose this becomes my legacy, and all I achieve with BuilderBud is solving a problem for residential contractors who can’t afford expensive software or need more resources to onboard with a robust system. In that case, I’d be proud of that contribution. This also extends to the Latinx community, where many contractors need more funds or the understanding to implement costly software systems.

We are also planning to translate it into Spanish soon. So yes, that’s the long answer to your question, but I hope it answers it.

Jacobsen: It did. What was your experience flipping homes on Moussa’s show (“The Flipping El Moussa’s”) on HGTV?

Anenberg: It was very interesting because it wasn’t what I thought it would be. It was a lot more challenging than I expected because you have a timeline set by a TV production company rather than the construction schedule. Obviously, with flippers, they want you to go fast. But this was much more challenging because they had to meet the reveal’s deadlines and other production requirements.

Whether you were ready or not, you had to do it. Also, having a third party involved — the TV production company — along with Tarek’s team and our team made it more complex. The TV production company has an agenda outside of Tarek’s team and ours. I have to say it was one of the most challenging experiences I’ve ever had. Still, it was also incredibly rewarding and much fun. Tarek and Heather are wonderful people.

I adore Heather. She was so kind and compassionate. I was nervous — five cameras pointed at me, and the TV producer told me, “Just be yourself.” But you end up repeating yourself, literally, ten times. The same thing over and over because they have to catch it from different angles. Then they would say, “Yes, Eric, just be yourself,” and I think, “I’m no dummy, but this doesn’t feel like myself.” So, being myself in that setting was difficult because I’m not an actor.

It was tough, but Heather was supportive the entire time. She could see I was nervous, and she would encourage me. Tarek is a total dude, cracking jokes about things like farts — just a real guy’s guy. They’re adorable. I loved working with them.

Jacobsen: How are you working with Matriarchy Builds? 

Anenberg: Another incredible organization. Lacey and Gabrielle are the CEOs. They started this amazing organization about five years ago, building a community of women in construction. It feels like a home—you’re part of a family. It’s like a big hug whenever they have roundups. Knowing you’re supported, you feel wrapped in a warm blanket.

More support systems for women in construction need to be created. We only have a handful of female general contractors in LA — maybe ten or so. It’s a small community, but it’s growing. About five years ago, maybe 4% of women worked in the trades, and now we’re up to 14 or 15% in the last couple of years.

There have been grants given to women in construction, mostly on the commercial side. Another fantastic organization is WINTER (Women in Nontraditional Employment Roles). Have you heard of it? It’s for women in nontraditional roles and an organization that helps low-income women who want to become journeymen in trades like plumbing, electrical work, and carpentry. They offer free training and then get them union jobs. They’re turning out around 50 women a year or something like that.

Maybe more. The government is giving grants. The trades are aging out. That’s a huge problem. Within the next ten years, 50% of the workforce in the trades will retire.

They’re trying to solve this problem because, otherwise, you’d be looking at $1,000 to snake your toilet due to the high demand and the low supply—basic economics. To address this, they’re bringing in more women and promoting diversity, which is awesome. It’s also why we’re working on building Spanish-language adaptations of the app into its processes. Many of the workers come from Latin backgrounds. 

Jacobsen: They don’t necessarily have to be Mexican or Mexican-American labourers. I’m using Canadian terminology here, but many Hispanic workers in the United States, often performing basic labour, face language barriers that likely limit social mobility. And it’s not just Mexicans; many also come from Central and South American countries. So, language is a factor. How do you think making this language adaptation of the app can increase accessibility for some of these workers, enabling them to pool resources, share knowledge, and build their community of contractors?

Anenberg: Yes, I love it. That’s one of our missions—to help the Latinx community. They are the backbone of the construction industry, especially in California. I’m unsure about other regions, but we’re building on their labour. Society is undergoing a shift. People are much more accepting of diversity, LGBTQ+ individuals, and women. We’re also starting to demand it.

The Latin community wants to start making decisions. But it would help if you had an organization to do that and become more successful in construction. You cannot have chaos—you need business skills. If you don’t know your basic numbers, if you don’t know your costs or the percentage of what you should charge, you can’t succeed. That’s one of the things we built into BuilderBud. I said it’s so important.

I want the invoices to include the cost in each line item and show the percentage markup so contractors can see what they charge the client. It’s super basic. You put in $500, decide to double your money, enter a 100% profit margin, and the system calculates $1,000. There are no manual calculations, no miscommunication, and it’s all clear and organized.

It’s your contractor draft, not for the homeowner to see. You can view what the homeowner sees, which doesn’t include your costs. You can also get a signature from the homeowner once they sign the estimate or invoice, which is binding. This helps solve many accountability issues by having everything in writing, something the Latin community often needs to do.

Contractors often come out and give a price verbally. I’ve heard countless stories about endless fighting, miscommunication, issues, drama, and stress because one party thought they agreed to one thing, but nothing was written. People are getting burned—contractors aren’t getting paid, or homeowners are paying and not getting the work done. It’s a common issue.

Jacobsen: Little petty fights can escalate quickly. That’s also part of the larger issue — the nuances of the difficulties in construction. These are high-stress environments. Workers are out in the elements, putting in long days and trying to meet deadlines. Not everyone is being paid appropriately for the difficulty of the work. With the increasing demand for construction workers, I’ve heard we’ll need more than a million workers over the next six years to fill gaps in basic infrastructure projects, like piping and electrical outfitting.

How do you see BuilderBud expanding to help bridge these gaps in accessibility for contractors, whether they’re building businesses, working on contracts, or even tackling large infrastructure projects needed in LA and elsewhere?

Anenberg: BuilderBud’s big vision is definitely to create a community. If you’re doing a remodelling project, it’s like having your best friend there to help you. Our original tagline was “BuilderBud: Your Construction Bestie.” Still, we had to drop that because we needed to understand what it meant.

Now, it’s “Construction Made Easy.” It should feel as easy as having your best friend guide you through every step. When I think of something challenging, I know I’d feel more relieved if my best friend had my back. That’s what we’re trying to do—create that sense of support.

I want to focus on solving smaller problems, like reducing chaos, drama, miscommunication, and fighting, while improving organization. I can’t tell you how frustrating it is, even with our $200-a-month construction tech software, to arrive on-site and need help finding plans.

Things get lost between different projects, files, and paperwork, so I made it simple. I know you can tag files and filter them, but I want plans front and center. I want it to be clear—hit a button, and you immediately see the plans for that project. No searching, no filtering—just simple, direct access.

Same thing with specs. I can only tell you how hard it is if you have a physical spec book, which people aren’t doing anymore, or they need more resources or time to print a big, hefty spec book. 

Jacobsen: When I was in construction, they had these super detailed presentations. It was a massive book, like a meter by two-foot spec sheet.

Anenberg: That cost thousands of dollars and took someone hours to assemble. So yes, you still need to download spec sheets and drop them into the folder, but I’m trying to make it as easy as possible. What’s the easiest way for someone who doesn’t have a technology background and needs more money to pay for expensive software? I want it to be easy.

I want it to be easy for the homeowner because that matters. In the past, we’ve had this old-school mentality in construction. As a teenager, you probably remember that the contractor was likely an older white male with a “my way or the highway” attitude.

What he said went, he told his team that and told the client the same thing. He thought he knew best. That’s not to say all contractors were like that — some were collaborative and nice — but that was often the mentality.

Now, there’s a new generation of homeowners who are younger and won’t tolerate that kind of attitude. They want to collaborate and won’t stand for a prickly, difficult contractor. They’ll ghost that contractor and find someone who offers more hand-holding and support.

That’s why we developed BuilderBud and Girl Flip Construction, which has succeeded. We have a process in place before we even enter into a contract. We walk clients through an hour-long clarity call.

My wife, an angel on earth—so kind and loving—is our head of sales. She asks important questions like, “What didn’t work for you before? What are your cost concerns? What’s been the biggest pain point?” She’s digging into the psychology behind it all.

People need to give more credit to how much homeowners have invested. This is often their largest asset, something they’ve worked to acquire, and it’s a big deal. But many contractors believe, “It’s not a big deal. You’re just another client.” They’re churning through projects without caring about the individual.

That’s not a kind or respectful way to treat someone trusting you with everything they’ve worked for. There’s an incongruency in the construction industry about how homeowners are treated, especially in the residential sector. It’s unsure if it is the same for commercial projects worth $100 million, but it’s rampant for residential projects.

Jacobsen: My brother is in a skilled trade. A kid under him started his training at 17. By the time he finished, he was already working in the field, starting in his particular trade. He died. My brother was trying to get help—he died on the site. I remember when I was in construction, I left the site, and then I heard a month or two later that a guy was trying to leave the job site early and got stuck on the train tracks. This happened in Canada. The train came by and hit him on the driver’s side. That was it. So, while not extremely common, these incidents are common on construction sites. I can understand the prickliness of the older generation when safety equipment, like harnesses, wasn’t even considered back then. It’s like not wearing seatbelts.

Anenberg: Yes, but you’re right that certain incoming generations have a different mentality. People are trying to learn from those past mistakes. It doesn’t feel good to be talked to disrespectfully, and skipping safety measures like seatbelts or harnesses is unsafe. It’s also crucial to communicate clearly, especially when translating between English and Spanish, for things like agreed-upon costs, whether for materials or skilled labour on a project.

Jacobsen: Yes, exactly. These are all good points. Okay, let me make sure I touch on everything here. So, I’m quoting BuilderBud’s key features now: Task management with punch lists, daily logs with photo uploads, project-based chat communication, homeowner relationship management tools, simple invoicing and change order approvals.

Why is punch list task management so important?

Anenberg: Every job and day involves many tasks, and managing them is challenging. We used to keep our to-do lists in Microsoft, plus emails, text messages, and WhatsApp. Having everything in one place, organized by project, is super important. And being able to see all tasks across all projects is equally crucial.

I’m the use case for BuilderBud. I know exactly what I need. Yes, you don’t want to build something solely for yourself, but I’m very detail-oriented as a woman. I listen to what people are struggling with, and there are always little things that make a big difference.

For example, homeowners always ask, “When’s someone showing up?” So we created a simple button that the worker can hit to say, “On my way. “It gives a window of 1 to 2 hours before or after lunch. It’s a super simple feature, but it keeps the homeowner informed.

Punch lists can be assigned to people, and that’s standard technology today. But having it all in one place, front and center, with the contractor able to see tasks for all projects and all team members and each team member able to see what they’ve been assigned—that’s the game changer.

Jacobsen: For daily logs, why photo uploads?

Anenberg: It’s about accountability. I can only be on some job sites daily, but I need to know what work has been done on each site. So, photo uploads are a given. They also help identify issues.

For example, if a homeowner gets home and sees trash left behind, they can take a picture and submit a homeowner update, saying, “Your guys left this mess. There are ants here. Can you please ask them to clean up next time?” This way, they feel seen and heard, and everything is completely accountable.

It’s all in writing. So, the next time it comes up, or I tell someone, “The homeowner has said this,” there’s a log of it. It’s been documented, so it can’t happen again. And if it does happen again, that person can no longer work with us. Accountability, liability, and trust—those are the three main factors. 

Jacobsen: This isn’t a critique but an observation of how these things play out. As you note, millennials and other generations are in a cultural transition. Statistical differences between generations are small but subtle enough to be significant. So, accountability is key, and I agree. Based on my experience, there could be some cultural clash at the individual level when it comes to adapting to these new expectations.

Anenberg: Yes, exactly.

Jacobsen: Project-based chat communication—my first thought is, is it encrypted so it’s safe from prying eyes? Do people feel secure using it?

Anenberg: Yes, it’s secure. Only the assigned people are in the chat. We’ll have separate chats for materials, another for the homeowner, etc. It’s similar to WhatsApp, where you can name the chat and invite specific people. However, the key is organizing and naming the chats based on topics or tasks.

One of the hardest things, especially on the iPhone, is finding a specific message when you have 15,000 messages. It’s terrible for the organization. So, having everything in one place makes it much easier.

Jacobsen: Organization is key. With these tools, you’re trying to make construction easier.

Anenberg: That’s all I’m trying to do—make construction easier.

Jacobsen: You mentioned homeowner relationship management tools. That sounds good, but can you explain what that means?

Anenberg: It’s essentially easy-to-use technology with a simple user interface. It’s a way for homeowners to see the entire project at their fingertips. They can view contracts, see tasks or events, and have direct access to chat with us. It’s their portal. If you have something like this in construction, you’re unique because no one uses it.

Construction is one of the least digitized industries—only agriculture is behind us. The bar is very low in construction tech. Contractors still use three-part invoicing paper—pink, yellow, and white copies.

Jacobsen: Yes, I’ve seen that too. It’s painful.

Anenberg: It is incredible, but the growth will be rapid. In the next few years, construction tech is going to take off. PropTech, which deals with property technology and construction tech, is still brand new, but it will become very popular. You’ll see them everywhere within the next five years.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. I recall working with a well-established, old-school family at a horse farm. The wife, a former Olympian in showjumping for Canada, had to transition from paper and pencil to electronic payments and systems. That process took a long time.

Anenberg: Yes, it’s similar. Transitioning from the old way of doing things to using new technology can take time, but it’s worth it once the change is made.

Jacobsen: When I was there for 27 months, living and working in that industry, writing about it, they finally made the transition. It wasn’t too painful because it was a smaller community of workers. Still, it is more challenging for larger, more established companies with 50 or 200 employees. It’s more painful for them.

Okay, last question. Simple invoicing and change order approvals—why do you want it to be simple? Hashtag rhetorical question.

Anenberg: Because everything else is complicated! In construction, it takes work. When you think about the energy behind construction, you think of concrete—something hard. I’m trying to soften the process a bit.

If you can have simple invoicing where everything is signed, approved, and in writing, all in one place by project, and easy to find, that’s a small ask, but it’s solving a big problem. These things cause more stress than necessary, so anything that alleviates stress in construction is a win.

Jacobsen: Erica, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Anenberg: Yes, awesome. Thank you. It was nice meeting you.

Jacobsen: Nice meeting you, too. Bye, and good luck with season 2 coming in 2025!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On American Anti-Trans Groups With Imara Jones

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/03

Imara Jones is an Emmy and Peabody award-winning American political journalist and transgender activist. She founded TransLash Media, a platform focused on transgender storytelling. Jones holds degrees from Columbia University and the London School of Economics and previously worked in the Clinton White House and Viacom. In 2019, she chaired the UN High-Level Meeting on Gender Diversity. Time magazine named her among the Time 100 most influential people of 2023. She discusses the post-January 6th shift of hate groups like Patriot Front and Proud Boys towards local politics, focusing on anti-LGBTQ+ rhetoric to destabilize communities and gain political legitimacy.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Imara Jones. What is happening in the American hate space, particularly with groups like Patriot Front and Proud Boys?

Imara Jones: You asked, “What is happening in the American hate space?” Is that right?

Jacobsen: Yes, especially concerning Patriot Front, Proud Boys, and others. 

Jones: What often goes unnoticed and is intentionally ignored is that after January 6th, these organizations decided to “atomize” their activities. This shift was a response to the American national security state, which, even though it was slow to respond—let’s be honest, it still shows signs of being slow—posed a significant threat. So far, over 1,000 people have been indicted, and many of these groups’ leaders are behind bars. It’s not been a good look for them. So, they adopted a strategy to “go local.”

In an interview, Gavin McInnes told me that this “go local” approach kept members engaged, recruited new ones, and aligned themselves with local politicians. The idea was to maintain relevance as a brand and continue their national efforts on a regional level. Their goal is to destabilize democracies and create an atmosphere of fear and intimidation. This strategy isn’t unique to the Proud Boys; Patriot Front and other groups are doing the same.

Patriot Front, in particular, has identified Idaho as a testing ground for these ideas. They’ve worked in tandem with local politicians and a think tank called the Idaho Freedom Foundation. The foundation serves as a center of gravity, linking paramilitary activities, new laws that seek to legalize militia groups, and local politicians—all with the goal of destabilizing communities, spreading fear and intimidation, and paving the way for the election of more extreme politicians. People are either too afraid to speak up, intimidated to run for office, or chased out of office.

This “petri dish” approach—targeting democracy at its core, one community at a time—has been replicated in many places across the United States. What was unexpected for me and my team as we investigated this was how anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ sentiment has become a focal point for these local demonstrations of force and intimidation. Anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ hate is being used to galvanize and localize these groups’ activities. Still, their ultimate goal remains the same as before.

Jacobsen: What kinds of emails do you receive from people sympathetic to these hate groups?

Jones: Interestingly, they have largely steered clear of me and my organization. There doesn’t seem to be any rhyme or reason as to when they decide to show their “dragon teeth,” so to speak, but it’s infrequent. Occasionally, we see a little spike in some messages on social media but not a full-throated focus on us. We’ve been told that they tend to pick on people they believe they can intimidate because showing force and then seeing people back down is key to them appearing powerful, which helps them recruit more members and makes them seem bigger than they are.

If they are, they may be more reticent because they may sense, “That’s kind of not me, and that’s not us.” That also may play into it. Someone told me explicitly, “Well, these groups know who you are, but they know that if they come after you, they’re going to elevate you.” So, much of their calculus goes into who they decide to attack.

Jacobsen: When it comes to a lot of these organizations, particularly the white identity ones, they are oriented around various far-right ideologies and conspiracy theories. I was talking to Dr. Alon Milwicki, a senior researcher in antisemitism at the Southern Poverty Law Center (SPLC). He described how the unifying scapegoat for many of these hate groups is antisemitism. You mentioned Patriot Front, the Proud Boys, and others. Granted, antisemitism isn’t the main focus for these groups, but it’s an element that remains consistent across them.

Jacobsen: How does this manifest locally, especially when they’re shifting their tactics to target local politics, counties, towns, and rural areas?

Jones: Yes, antisemitism is the long-standing baseline for all of these groups. However, what we’ve seen over the past year, and there’s so much evidence to support this, is that the new animating, cross-cutting factor among these groups is anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ activity.

The SPLC released a report over the summer that shows two key things. First, there are now more hate groups on record than ever before in their history of keeping such data. Second, half of all white supremacist groups were engaged in anti-LGBTQ activity in 2023 alone. One thing often overlooked is how effective this issue is for them. It gets to the heart of “otherization,” which is crucial for these groups. It allows them to target a vulnerable community they know lacks the resources to fight back.

Another factor is that this approach gets to the core of their arguments about white supremacy and patriarchy in an easily digestible way. It enables them to make connections with larger political infrastructures, particularly the GOP, which, in their view, gives them an air of legitimacy. They don’t get that kind of legitimacy around antisemitism.

Especially in light of the ongoing conflict following the events of October 7th in Gaza, antisemitism doesn’t have the same appeal for them. But anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ sentiment allows them to foster relationships with mainstream politicians, solidifying their legitimacy. This, in turn, advances their overall goals and cause.

Building relationships with these groups can be advantageous for some politicians because maintaining an air of intimidation, especially when pushing unpopular views, isn’t necessarily bad for them. There’s a currency that these hate groups gain from this activity, a currency that antisemitism alone cannot provide. That’s one reason why they’ve embraced anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ rhetoric so strongly in the past two years.

Jacobsen: In my interviews with the humanist and freethought communities, a common observation is that many groups opposing LGBTQ+ rights often base their views on theological reasons—or rather, theological excuses. Typically, they rely on selective literal interpretations of Abrahamic texts, particularly from the Old and New Testaments. How much do you see theology being used as a bludgeon to justify emotional, verbal, and sometimes physical violence against members of the trans and wider LGBTQ+ community by these hate groups? They claim to see something in hermeneutics in the Christian holy texts.

Jones: What animates these groups is, honestly, patriarchy and white supremacy. As we can see, there’s a crisis among men in America. Still, white men, in particular, are experiencing a unique crisis for various reasons.

When you combine that with the growing decline in religious activity in America, you find these ideas being secularized in powerful ways. For example, we know that historically, within the Ku Klux Klan, there was a significant connection between Christianity and white supremacy—it was explicit and deeply interwoven. This was a core belief.

What’s happened now is that the secularization of these ideas has been distilled into concepts like the “Great Replacement” theory. This theory essentially argues that white people, particularly white men, are in danger because not enough white people are having babies. While there is still a strong Christian element to the Great Replacement theory, its main appeal is racial and patriarchal supremacy.

Part of their argument is that to protect the white race; they must enforce the gender binary and prevent Black and brown people from coming into the country and changing the fabric of America. To the extent that religion plays a role in this, it involves ensuring that Jews are excluded from society. This is why Jewish organizations in the United States are focused on these groups, given their targeting of Jewish communities.

The Great Replacement theory has Christian supremacist overtones, but it’s fundamentally about patriarchy and race. Additionally, we can’t ignore that new groups, like the Blood Tribe, are creating new religions, particularly around Odinism. This is a fusion of worship of the Norse god Odin with elements of Nazi ideology, including the worship of Hitler. We must recognize the religious aspect of these movements. Still, we also need to understand how they transform in important ways.

Jacobsen: When combating ideologically driven hate at an individual level—whether it’s a friend making an offhand comment at work, activism at a political rally, or policy-making at the state or federal level—what are the common mistakes we make? How can we learn from these failures and build on the successes in combating this?

Jones: The first mistake is to take the threat seriously. Ironically, the Canadian government does take them seriously because the Proud Boys are on a terrorist watch list. Canada added them to that list right after January 6th. Whatever the Canadian government saw from an intelligence or national security standpoint led them to take this group seriously. But people don’t take these groups seriously daily because they mask their true intentions.

They try to present themselves as beer-drinking frat boys, which helps hide how organized they are and what they’re trying to achieve. This image makes it easier for them to recruit because it doesn’t seem threatening at first. Then, once people are in, they acculturate them to violence, organize them into paramilitary structures, and gradually get them used to taking risks and committing acts of violence. When they believe it is right to reveal their true colours, they’ll drop the frat-boy facade and show who they are.

In some ways, they thought January 6th was their moment, but it wasn’t. Still, they haven’t abandoned their goal of using violence—and force of arms, if necessary—to make the United States what they want it to be. That’s something people don’t fully understand about these groups, including the Proud Boys. People don’t take them seriously enough, and that’s the first issue.

The second issue is that there’s an entire ecosystem that conditions people for supremacist violence. This ecosystem exists online, particularly in gaming communities, chat rooms, and other digital spaces they’ve created. We haven’t done enough to counter that. There’s very little education about white supremacy and supremacist violence.

This lack of education is evident, especially with the push to ban discussions about actual history in the United States or even in Canada when it comes to the atrocities committed to seizing land and the rest of it. Without acknowledgment of these histories, people don’t understand how they might be participating in a legacy of violence. If they were more aware, we’d likely see less of it.

We also don’t enforce the laws we have. Technically, many of these groups are not allowed under U.S. law. Organized militias or non-military armed groups are supposed to fall under state jurisdiction, like the National Guard. That’s what militias are, by law.

So, you have armed, politically motivated groups operating in the U.S. That’s technically not allowed in that case, but we don’t enforce those laws. Organizations are trying to change this. They’re educating local attorneys general, law enforcement, and others, telling them they must crack down on these groups. This isn’t First Amendment-protected activity under the Constitution; it’s something else entirely.

We need to be more proactive and robust. We don’t have a program to deradicalize people once they’re in these groups. So much could be done, but we need to do it. The reason is that we need to take this threat seriously. There’s still this idea that it’s just a few people on the fringe, and we don’t need to take it seriously. Meanwhile, these groups are preparing more and more for the moment when, as I mentioned earlier, they believe it’s time to drop the facade and engage in violence.

That’s something we need to pay more attention to. 

Jacobsen: Something interesting I came across recently is the notion that there’s no such thing as a lone wolf. For years, we’ve heard that the real danger comes from lone wolves. That’s right. Episode 3 challenges that idea. What do you mean by that?

Jones: The concept of the “lone wolf” actually originated from white supremacist groups in the 1980s. It was a way to mask the violence they were inciting by encouraging individuals to commit violent acts, often through books, videotapes, and demonstrations. These individuals were not acting alone—they were part of a larger movement, even if they were isolated in their actions.

A prime example of this is Timothy McVeigh, responsible for the Oklahoma City bombing. McVeigh had been deeply influenced by a book called The Turner Diaries, which still strongly influences these groups today. The book tells the story of someone who starts a civil war through individual acts of violence while being part of a like-minded community. Fast forward to today, and these dynamics happen even faster because of social media. Is the idea of lone wolves a strategy for these groups?

These groups perform public demonstrations because they know it will spread across social media, which helps to activate people. Take Dylann Roof, for instance. He carried a Rhodesian flag and shot up a Black church filled with mostly older adults. Rhodesia hadn’t existed during Roof’s lifetime, so why did he feel an affinity for it? It’s because of the radicalization that happens online and elsewhere through the kind of activities we’ve been discussing.

These paramilitary organizations created the notion of a “lone wolf.” Their goal isn’t just to be an organized hammer. They’re hoping that individual acts of violence, which appear isolated and unprovoked, will be the spark that allows them to drop the facade and go all in. Do lone wolves exist in this context?

For example, just last year in Ohio, the Blood Tribe held a large demonstration. Afterward, someone who had participated attempted to commit an act of domestic terrorism by targeting a church hosting a drag story hour. He had originally gone to protest, and it almost escalated into a firefight with Blood Tribe members present. These so-called lone wolves are, in reality, part of a larger, cultivated plan.

Jacobsen: I travelled across the United States earlier this year, tracing a W-shaped pattern from New York to Seattle, and I saw evidence of this. Yes, I see what you’re saying. On Amtrak, in coach. I wouldn’t necessarily do that again—it was a long trip. But I could see the Emanuel African Methodist Episcopal Church in Charleston. What struck me was how ordinary the church looked; it could be anywhere. This could have been any church. The idea that there are no lone wolves—that these acts result from people being radicalized through online spaces—is key. But the victims? This could have been any church. It just happened to be the one the shooter targeted because that’s where he was radicalized. Yes, it was targeted, but that’s my big takeaway from travelling in the United States. I also felt more unsafe compared to Canada. The atmosphere is different.

Jones: Right. It feels tense. I notice that when I travel too. It feels different here compared to other places. There’s something indescribable but noticeable. We see it reflected in statistics about mass shootings and other forms of violence. Still, there’s a palpable difference in the atmosphere. Many older people have said they don’t remember the country feeling this unstable.

Yes, and one thing to note is that these so-called “lone wolves” believe they are engaging in heroic acts. They think they’re taking the action that will spark a larger race war, which they see as necessary. They believe they’ll win and that it’s necessary to impose racial, gender-based, and sometimes religiously informed authoritarianism in the United States.

They don’t see these acts as isolated incidents. They’re likely surprised when there isn’t a mass uprising after their actions because they’ve been told through these networks that their actions will spark a revolution. They see themselves as figures like the assassin of Archduke Ferdinand, whose actions led to World War I. They probably expect the same result and are baffled when it doesn’t happen.

Whether it’s the Buffalo shooter who deliberately targeted a Black grocery store, Dylann Roof, or others we’ve discussed, they seem to expect this larger reaction. 

Jacobsen: Imara, unfortunately, we’re almost out of time. Do you have any final points that need to be addressed?

Jones: Yes, the oxygen these groups thrive on is provided by our failure to acknowledge who they are. If we did, we could stop them. The ideas may persist, but we don’t have to live with the constant threat of paramilitary violence. The fact that we now have more of these groups on record than ever before—since the SPLC started counting 40 years ago—shows we’re not taking this threat seriously enough as a society. There’s also a lack of understanding about how anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ sentiment has been an accelerant for their growth and activities. Until we confront both of these issues, we’ll continue to live under this spectre, and it could even worsen depending on the outcome of future elections. There’s much work and many reasons to be concerned about, but it doesn’t have to be this way. 

Jacobsen: Imara, thank you so much for your time. I appreciate it.

Jones: Thank you so much. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Lisa Marino: The Dopple Registry

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/02

Lisa Marino is the CEO and Co-Founder of The Dopple Registry, a platform revolutionizing the baby registry and subscription box models to meet the evolving needs of parents. Marino is a Hispanic female executive and mother of two with over 20 years of experience in digital media. She envisions The Dopple Registry as a seamless, supportive shopping platform for parents, featuring high-quality, luxury baby products curated by expert moms. Additionally, sheserves as a board member for Pacific Clinics in California. She is also a board member of Pacific Clinics in California. The Dopple Registry has been featured in Today’s ParentThe Chicago Journal, and Mommies Reviews.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here today with Lisa Marino, the CEO and co-founder of the Dopple Registry. Today, we’ll discuss advice for new dads, things dads need, and how to be a better father. The focus is parenting, family health, wellness, pregnancy, and more. With the Dopple Registry, how do you provide a simplified shopping experience for new parents? 

Lisa Marino: Let’s take a step back for a moment. The Dopple motto is, “It takes a village to raise a family.” Our mission as a company is to activate that village for every family in this country. Let’s discuss why that matters. First, we’ve created a revolutionary gifting platform that evolves as families do. We’re starting with a baby registry, which is something everyone understands. It’s also a time when families spend a large chunk of money out of pocket to prepare for the birth of a child. On top of that, many families take a hit on income, as one or both parents often stay home with the baby.

This results in a double whammy of financial impact on families. Today’s registries fall short because they’re event-driven. Once the birth or wedding happens, they become obsolete. They haven’t still need to address how to manage recurring purchases, such as diapers, formula, and other weekly or monthly needs. You need to feed your kids and ensure the house has formula.

Additionally, today’s registries don’t need to account for services in meaningful ways. Think about night nannies, doulas, midwives, dog walkers, or childcare if you’re not a first-time parent and already have kids at home. Meal services are also included in the existing registry experience. Today’s registries focus too much on stuff.

Consider platforms like Babylist, Amazon, Walmart, and Target. They sell products. While you need those items, families require more wraparound services and the ability to receive gifted recurring purchases sustainably. By leaving these critical components off the table, families need a clearer way to communicate their needs to their village.

For example, we had a beta tester, a mom having her second child, who was excited when she saw the opportunity for therapy services. One of the services we offer is mental health therapy. She said, “I struggled with postpartum depression so badly with my first child. If I can have therapy sessions gifted to me, I can address it early and prevent it from becoming overwhelming.” This has a huge impact not just on her mental health but on her entire family’s well-being.

Again, it gives families access to things they normally wouldn’t have in a group-gifted environment. Now, we have every family rank their top 10 items, and we guide gifters toward those items. Gifters are often budget-constrained so that the average gifter will contribute between $25 and $100.

You have major donors, especially grandparents, best friends, or close family, who will contribute $100 if not thousands. But for the most part, the gifting range is between $25 and $100. We’ve removed that budget constraint because we fractionalize every gift over $100. This way, we encourage gifters to contribute to the items that matter most to them in the top ten. So, you don’t care about the doula or the night nurse, but you care about diapers, and you’ll buy one month of diapers for the family.

The mom’s cousin might buy another month, and her coworker might buy yet another month. Suddenly, 12 gifters have reverse-engineered a 12-month diaper subscription, with each month gifted by a different person within an affordable gifting budget. That profoundly changes how people think about pregnancy and what they need. Meals are another great example. We encourage every family to add between 20 and 40 healthy, premade meals to their registry, which can support any diet and be delivered to your house. No one who brings home a newborn wants to cook.

That’s just the reality. So, if you’re breastfeeding or up with the baby in the middle of the night and you’re hungry, instead of ordering McDonald’s from DoorDash, you can go to the refrigerator, grab a healthy meal that spends three minutes in the microwave, and you’re ready to go. That’s what we’re so excited about. 

Jacobsen: As this applies to dads, it’s more about families. You’re running pilots with different service provider collectives and state and local government agencies. Is this to create a platform that connects service providers and families?

Marino: The platform levels the playing field because, today, these services exist, but most are paid out of pocket by families, which makes them available primarily to more affluent people. In our model, because you’re reaching out to your village, these services can now be available to everyone. For lower- and middle-income families, we can further factor in subsidies to become part of the village beyond just friends and family.

Jacobsen: What types of structured services do you see families choosing the most? Is it a year’s worth of diapers or something similar?

Marino: Definitely diapers and meals. Those are the top items because they are real family pain points daily. But, especially for families who aren’t first-time parents, they need extra nanny help when the baby first comes home. Who will care for the other kids while mom or dad cares for the newborn?

Those are critical ones. We’ve partnered with a nanny group that has access to about 3,500 nannies across the US. So, when families come on board and don’t have their nanny but need some short-term help while the mom is on maternity leave, we can match them with a nanny and get that group gifted.

Jacobsen: What about things more on the periphery of need but still sufficient to be kept as part of the platform? You mentioned things like a year’s supply of diapers. Would something like therapy be considered more on the periphery of need, or is it more core?

Marino: I’d say think of pre- and postpartum doula services. Today, they sit at the periphery but should be at the core. Once a family brings a newborn home, it takes time for the stress to start showing its impact.

In the first week or two, you’ll have home visits from a lactation consultant, maybe a doula, or a couple of other services sponsored by the hospital or the state. However, the stress impacts the family after these visits are no longer paid for. Closing the gap with additional visits or services helps keep the family healthy.

Tons of data show this. For example, one of the charts we have—which I’d be happy to send you—shows that 25% of moms experience postpartum depression (PPD). Moms who receive doula and other perinatal support services reduce that rate by 57%. By ensuring families have access to these critical services, which they may not think about or know they need—especially lower- and middle-income families who can’t afford it—we bring these services front and center, ensuring they’re not paid out of pocket by the family.

We can help close the gap in maternal and child health. And as they say, “Happy wife, happy life!” It helps keep the family healthy.

Jacobsen: How has this company developed?

Marino: So, I acquired Dopple in August of 2023. Before being introduced to Dopple, I was already building a baby registry, but it was a classic registry that would compete with what’s out there today. When Dopple came across my desk, I said, “Wow.”

The ability to handle subscriptions and recurring purchases compared to a regular registry can be a profound change. Since then, the vision has grown tremendously over the last 9 or 10 months. What has happened as a result is, after acquiring Dopple and rebooting the revenue stream, getting the moms on the subscription clothing box business flowing again, I realized that the combination of the registry I was building plus the Dopple platform could transform families’ lives significantly if we did it right. The opportunity was so big that it made sense to sell off the media piece of the business. That segment brought in a few million in annual revenue and gave me a great income, but it would always be more impactful and offer as big an opportunity as what Dopple sits on today. So, I sold it in January and have been focused on Dopple and the registry ever since.

Jacobsen: What is the hardest aspect to work around with the Dopple Registry? Is it ensuring that certain systems and processes are integrated well enough for a better customer experience?

Marino: Actually, it’s always about the customer experience. But because we’re offering something that doesn’t exist here, it’s about ensuring the messaging is clear. It’s about ensuring everyone understands the wins and the benefits of thinking about things holistically.

That’s where our partnerships with some of these state and local governments come into play. Their mission at these agencies is to create messaging and ensure that everyone knows they have access to services and solutions. We come in as the partner and say, “All right, we can connect everyone.” For example, they might have funds allocated or available, and they’re trying to build solutions to connect healthcare systems, service providers, and moms. Well, guess what? We’re the platform that can do all that for them.

It’s about educating and changing families’ perspectives on what it means to raise children and how we do that. For example, we go well beyond the birth of the child. If a mom signs up for 12 months of diapers, we deliver those diapers every month. If she goes online and says, “Oh, my son is no longer a size 2; he’s now a size 3,” we send a new box with the correct size, and away we go.

We can offer many other things because we’re serving parents beyond birth. What we’re launching in December by Black Friday is our wish list component. Now, we’re not just doing baby registries; families with older kids can build wish lists for birthdays, holidays, or anything they want. Again, you can include services, products, or contributions to a 529 account. Imagine being able to swap out all the plastic toys you get for your kids during Christmas and holidays!

It ends up in the landfill, but with 529 contributions, even if it’s just $25 over 17 years, that adds up. And you’re leveraging your village to get what your family truly needs. Other great examples include swim lessons, private coaches, or therapy. Whether it’s mental health or, like in my daughter’s case—she’s autistic—maybe she needs occupational therapy. There are various situations where families need help, and this allows them to prioritize, communicate, and get some or all of it paid for.

Jacobsen: How, given your experience as a model for this, does that influence your decision-making when assessing customer needs and identifying what families are most likely to want? How do you foresee, stage by stage, the next areas of need for families?

Marino: Well, let’s step back briefly and discuss how Dopple became a concept. It’s literally over two decades in the making. When I had my daughter—my first child—we were on welfare for a variety of reasons, which we don’t need to get into. Not only did the state of California help us, but we had to build our village to get through.

Our parents bought nursery furniture, my dad bought a year’s worth of diapers, and our siblings paid for electric bills. Our friends from business school took us out to dinner, paid for it, and gave us the leftovers. Everyone came together as a community and supported us.

We’ve built that sense of community into a platform because I know what it means to pull together all those resources in a scalable way for people to get through tough times. Taking the stress off families is critical.

So, when we look at where we’re going next today, it’s more scientific than our origin story. We’re conducting questionnaires and market research to figure out our next steps. We’re already considering a range of opportunities for Q1 of 2025 and have started those research processes.

Jacobsen: Where are you hoping to expand the registry beyond Q4? What about the next few years?

Marino: So, think about it this way: We start with baby registries, but we’ll also have wish lists. As families evolve—whether having more kids or as the kids get older—we’ve got an entire platform that can help activate your village for those needs. Ultimately, I live in the sandwich generation and care for my parents and kids.

Let’s say my dad needed surgery, and insurance only covered so much. We could create a wish list for what he needs as an older adult, which differs from what you need when having kids. We can assemble a wish list, prioritize the items, and have them all gifted.

We can handle any stage of life, and that’s what’s so exciting for us—we evolve as families evolve.

Jacobsen: Any final points based on today’s conversation?

Marino: No, we’re good. Hopefully, this will be interesting, and you will see how it impacts dads.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mandisa Thomas on Secular Song, Art, and Activism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/02

Mandisa Thomas (she/her/hers) is the founder and President of Black Nonbelievers. Although never formally indoctrinated into belief, Mandisa was heavily exposed to Christianity, Black Nationalism, and Islam. 

Mandisa has many media appearances, including CBS Sunday MorningCNN.com, Playboy, The Humanist, and JET magazines. She has been a guest on podcasts such as NPR’s Code Switchand 1A and the documentaries Contradictionand My Week in Atheism. Mandisa serves on the Board for Humanist Global Charity and previously for American Atheists, the American Humanist Association, Foundation Beyond Belief (now GO Humanity), and the Secular Coalition for America.

In 2022, Mandisa was featured on the Atlanta billboard and newspaper ad for the Freedom From Religion Foundation’s “I’m Secular and I Vote” campaign. She has also received multiple honours, including the 2022 Wolfson Award, and is a co-recipient of the 2020 Harvard Humanist of the Year.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with the wonderful Mandisa Thomas to discuss all things related to Black Nonbelievers. You’re on the cusp of a flight with Dan Barker from the Freedom From Religion Foundation. On paper, it’s business. Off paper, is it still business where you’re headed? 

Mandisa Thomas: [Laughing] Yes, it is. And it is more activism than just business. I’m going to the first-ever African Freethought Music and Arts Festival. Dan Barker and I will perform a version of Godless Gospel with some music students at the University of Lagos in Nigeria.

There will also be a talent competition, and I will be one of the judges. As the saying goes, “If you do what you love, it doesn’t feel like work.” I’m excited to be a part of this because it’s an important way for Black Nonbelievers to connect with the humanist community in Nigeria, bringing talent and creativity together and exploring how we can collaborate. 

Jacobsen: There is now a talent competition with monetary prizes. Will you be judging any of these?

Thomas: Yes, and I’m excited. However, I’m always a little nervous when I do things like this because I certainly don’t consider myself the best singer in the world. Sometimes I wonder if I’m even the best person to judge such a competition. Still, I’m excited about it because I have a good ear for music. I’m eager to see what these young people bring, especially when combining activism with creativity.

Jacobsen: What about the choir being brought over to present original music that will be or is part of an album featuring compositions by Dan and others? Could you call it American secular music?

Thomas: Yes. So, for Godless Gospel, Dan and I will be rehearsing with some of the students who will be singing with us, and we’ll determine how many students will be part of the choir during the festival. We plan to perform about three songs, and I’ll be rehearsing, working with, and teaching the students and other singers the songs we’ll be performing. We also have some recorded music we can practice with, and a piano will be there. Dan is an accomplished piano player and composer, so we’ll likely perform one song in a piano or acoustic version, and the rest will be sung along with the recorded music.

We have the song lyrics and the music, so we will spend a few intense days preparing with the other singers to ensure we deliver a great performance. Gospel music, in general, is a continuation of music that transcended the American slavery period and early African American musical traditions. Still, it also traces back to the African continent. African rhythms and musical styles have translated well into American music.

We’re looking forward to seeing how that connection plays out as we perform the current music and continue working on new music for the album.

Jacobsen: When was the last time you visited an African country? What kind of cultural and moral enrichment did you experience during that first trip, and what are your feelings before embarking on this second trip? I understand it has been quite some time since your last visit. Also, what are you hoping to gain from this trip?

Thomas: Absolutely. So, the first time I ever visited Africa was in Ghana. That was back in 1991 when I was 14 years old. The purpose of that trip was a youth trip where we visited different places of education in Accra and another major city, Kumasi, which was a Christian village. We received a good education during that trip and visited W.E.B. Du Bois’s home, where he relocated after leaving America. We visited the organization established in his honour. 

I was there with other teenagers my age, many of whom I had grown up with. It was fun, but as an American teenager in another country, There was a bit of naivete. We learned a lot, though, and it helped us grow. We also visited the slave castles of Cape Coast and Elmina, where captives were held before being put on ships for the transatlantic slave trade. That experience was horrifying, but we could comprehend its gravity even at that age.

Because I had grown up learning about Black history and culture, as well as institutional racism, it wasn’t completely foreign to me, but being there in person was impactful. I will take a similar tour as an adult visiting Nigeria, which is close to Ghana. I’ll see how much things have progressed in Nigeria, even though this is my first time there. I’ll also be reminded of why we do this work and why it’s so impactful for me and others in this activism, especially regarding lineage, history, and culture. We should never forget the horrific actions committed against people, which so many are now trying to revise or erase from history. These events are very personal to me.

It’s also meaningful because of our connections with people like Dr. Leo Igwe. This will be my third time seeing him in person.. I’ll also meet others with whom I’ve connected virtually, which will be fantastic. I hope to get new material from this trip to share with our members in the United States. I want to show what we can achieve by working with fellow free thinkers, humanists, and atheists across the diaspora. Additionally, I’m excited to be enriched by being in a new place. Lagos will be my first visit, and I’m eager to see the city and learn from the other speakers.

I’m looking forward to an enriching, educational, and inspirational experience. 

Jacobsen: Leo Igwe is a nexus; he’s involved in many things. It’s extremely impressive to see all he’s done over the last few years I’ve known him. We should also touch on Black Nonbelievers. What’s going on with the cruise this year, Mandisa?

Thomas: Yes, our annual BN SeaCon 2024 will take place from November 29th through December 5th, and we are still departing out of Miami, Florida. This year, we will be on Royal Caribbean’s Independence of the Seas. Some of our speakers include Chris Cameron, Candace Gorham, Kristie Puckett, an abolitionist from North Carolina, and Teddy Reeves, the Religion and Life Curator at the National Museum of African American History and Culture.

From there, we are also working on a Revival of Reason in March 2025. We hope to bring Godless Gospel back together with other speakers and presenters to host workshops on wellness for Black atheists and how they can get involved in activism. It’s important to emphasize the value of financially supporting organizations like Black Nonbelievers so we can continue to host events like this, sustain our sponsorships, and maintain our community activism and engagement. We also look forward to contributing to another African Free Thought Music and Arts Festival.

We have a lot of exciting things coming up! We will also be involved in the FORWARD Conference with the National Museum of African American History and Culture at the beginning of November. I submitted a paper to discuss Black Nonbelievers before that conference, which was accepted. So, I’ll present alongside other Black religious thought leaders and thinkers in general and showcase the changing landscape of religion in Black communities.

Jacobsen: That’s great! So, what do you think are some of the more nuanced areas of change in the religious space for African Americans—both for those in religious institutions and those who find that religion is no longer for them—and how do they come to organizations like Black Nonbelievers?

Thomas: Many younger people—mostly millennials, Gen Z and beyond—are moving away from traditional, fundamentalist religious practices. These practices don’t align well with their everyday lives or values. Even among religious individuals, there’s a growing realization that simply “praying on it” doesn’t work for everyone. So, more people find comfort in stepping away from these traditions despite their initial trepidation or apprehension.

When they come to organizations like Black Nonbelievers, they find affirmation, validation, and the resources they need to understand what it means to be nonreligious in real-time within their communities and cultures. It’s inspiring how many people are opening their eyes to the limitations of religion and finding alternative ways to build community, which has been impactful and inspiring.

Even if they don’t identify as atheists or humanists, they recognize the issues religion presents for our communities. It’s been eye-opening to see the shift in how people view activism and what they believe it should look like. Activism should be about action, coalition-building, and standing up for our rights as human beings.

We’re also reaching institutions like the National Museum of African American History and Culture, providing a framework for Black nonreligious representation, advocacy, and community. Though it’s still a growing movement and a work in progress, that’s how history is made. We’re fortunate to be part of this ever-growing change within our community.

Jacobsen: What do you consider the most heartwarming moment you’ve had this year or since we last talked?

Thomas: Oh my gosh, there have been so many. I recently had the opportunity to attend a Black women’s empowerment event co-sponsored by one of our partner organizations, Compassion & Choices. When the guest speaker, their special speaker, said that 2023 was a hard year for her, it hit so close to home for me.

I remember giving the representative for Compassion & Choices a huge hug because they continuously support our events. They are our major sponsor for BN SeaCon, and at that moment, she let me know that she still supports our organization and sees our work. It was so meaningful for her to tell me that we are helping them reshape how they reach out to people. Compassion & Choices focuses on medical aid for dying and end-of-life advocacy, and bringing those conversations to communities that need them is important.

It has helped them and others understand how to engage the larger population, especially those who no longer subscribe to fundamental religious practices. So, knowing that people see us, knowing that they recognize the work we do, and knowing we are connecting with people in meaningful ways has been incredibly heartwarming. This happened just in the past few days.

Jacobsen: What do you think about the end of the year and the political flip?

Thomas: For the end of the year and what’s coming up, it is important to donate to organizations like Black Nonbelievers, particularly during the holiday season, but all year round. In this political climate, it’s crucial. Granted, we don’t endorse specific candidates but always encourage people to vote for their values. It’s important to ensure that we don’t vote people into office who use their religious beliefs to impose on public policy because we’re seeing that happen a lot here in the United States.

It will take individuals and organizations working together to prevent that. The country doesn’t need to become a theocracy; we must continue fighting against that.

Jacobsen: Also, regarding critical moments in this election season or cycle, what about organizations where you might disagree on 10%, 20%, or even 5% of things? But we all agree on the importance of combating incursions into politics and the public space, where we all value the separation of religious institutions and government. What would your message be to them, in terms of targeted objectives, about staying on the same page and working together despite our disagreements?

Thomas: We need to continue to look out for one another and ensure that, as a community, we affirm all human beings. Even if we don’t agree on every issue, we need to be united in standing up for the values we all share—especially when fighting against the merging of religion and politics.

In a way that we are not discounting the voices still marginalized in our communities, it is important to make sure they are listening to us, especially for larger organizations. Many issues will impact us shortly, and we have to be vigilant. We will need support from those organizations and individuals to continue doing the crucial grassroots work that often doesn’t receive the resources and support it deserves. We must continue learning from each other, particularly from the people on the ground who are making those changes.

Black Nonbelievers IS a grassroots organization. Still, I encourage more of our fellow organizations to adopt a grassroots approach alongside us. This allows them to see firsthand how things can be impacted and to continue working together toward better solutions.

Jacobsen: I can vouch for this. You also have wonderful swag. So, if people want to make donations, they can also get some merchandise in return!

Thomas: Absolutely. We accept donations as a 501(c)(3) organization, but you can also purchase merchandise. We have Black Nonbelievers swag, including a new shirt we debuted on our website with a quote from Edith Gray, our newest co-host on In the Cut. So, donate and purchase online through our website to support and represent our organization. It also encourages others to support us and our work.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Mandisa, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it, as always.

Thomas: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Steven Emmert on Secular Coalitions and Christian Nationalism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/01

Steven Emmert is the Executive Director of the Secular Coalition for America, engaging in discussions on the growing influence of Christian nationalism in American politics. He emphasizes the importance of separating religion from governance, analyzing movements like Senator Josh Hawley’s Christian nationalist rhetoric, and advocating for secularism amidst political and social challenges.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, Steven Emmert from the Secular Coalition for America joins us. Recently, Senator Josh Hawley presented an interesting framing of the current political moment. He represents a class of politicians who were once more on the fringe but have, in some ways, become more mainstream. Today, I’d like to focus not only on Senator Hawley but also on the broader concept of Christian nationalism in the context of the current election.

Why did Senator Hawley title his essay “The Christian Nationalism We Need”? How did he frame it as a positive idea? And what was the response from the Secular Coalition for America, particularly from you as the Executive Director?

Steven Emmert: First, Scott, thank you for this opportunity to speak with you this afternoon. I appreciate it.

Regarding why he titled his article as he did, I believe he is part of a growing group advocating that if we bring the Bible into more areas of public life, our problems will be solved. This group asserts that the issues we face as a country and society stem from the absence of Christ. This viewpoint was once more fringe but has become increasingly mainstream within one of our major political parties. This perspective has become a prominent talking point, particularly among their support base, which includes many evangelical Protestants who resonate with this message.

Jacobsen: It has become easier for figures like Hawley to make these claims, even though much needs to be more accurate. Politics often involves some distortion, but the myth of a Christian nation, a Christian founding, and Christian Founding Fathers is becoming more prevalent in public discourse and political rhetoric. Why is this happening now?

Emmert: Yes, that seems to be how they market and sell this narrative—by convincing people that the country was founded on Christian principles and is how it was supposed to be. In reality, Europeans who came here were largely fleeing religious persecution, which is why the United States became unique in its explicit separation of church and state. This distinction has been foundational to our country.

Jacobsen: There has also been rhetoric about the left “destroying” God. What have you heard about this all-powerful, all-knowing entity supposedly being destroyed by a political ideology?

Emmert: Yes, well, again, this is part of their marketing strategy. They must portray themselves as victims to rile up support, much like the so-called “War on Christmas” we used to hear about every December. I never quite understood that, but it worked for them in terms of gaining donations, votes, rally attendance, or however they sought power. Interestingly, their actions often seem far removed from the teachings of Jesus Christ.

Jacobsen: I was introduced to this idea by two chapter leaders of The Satanic Temple in Arizona, Stu de Haan and Michelle Shortt, who explained how this narrative is marketed.  But this conversation took place years ago. They essentially noted that if they don’t get what they want 100% of the time, they adopt a victim mentality, using it as political currency. A couple of things are happening here. There’s much hyperbole around terms like “woke,” with them portraying themselves as victims. This critique—though not always, but often in an everyday sense—is sent from the Christian nationalist, self-identified, side towards others. Yet they simultaneously see themselves as victims of left-wing political movements and social policy.

They frame this as an attack on their rights, such as freedom of speech, religious liberties, and so on, whether or not these claims are legitimate. It becomes a political sloganeering tool. On the academic side, in less colloquial terms, there can certainly be legitimate critiques of any social and political ideology. I wouldn’t exclude “wokeness” from that. I’m aware of academic critiques suggesting that if you are re-essentializing people, that can be problematic.

But about this idea of a “religion of the trans flag” or framing it as the crisis of our time, along with the claim that we’re in a spiritual battle and need spiritual warfare—these are all biblically and Abrahamically-oriented terminologies used to push a particular worldview onto the public. Do you think this is closely tied to the rapid and massive decline of Christianity in the United States?

Emmert: Absolutely. They’re seeing the writing on the wall. When you look at survey after survey of religious identification, especially among those with no religious affiliation—the “nones” (N-O-N-E-S)—you see that now around 30% of adults in America do not have any religious affiliation. This number has increased dramatically over the last 30 to 40 years. If you break it down by age group, among those under 40, that number is well over 50%. So, while America has historically been a majority Christian nation, it’s clear that this will not always be the case. They recognize this shift is coming and do everything they can to resist it.

Jacobsen: You can look at Canada as a comparative example. While the United States has more people, a more complicated social context, a longer history, and arguably, more fervent religiosity, Canada’s religious landscape is changing rapidly. Based on the lines of best fit, Canada will likely become less than half Christian either this year or sometime next year. Back in the 1970s, over 90% of Canadians identified as Christian. By 2001, that number had dropped to over 75%.

Emmert: Exactly. Right. Our countries have a huge parallel, even though the United States is still more religious. 

Jacobsen: We see that the U.S. is slowly moving towards where Britain is, while Canada is already further along regarding religious disaffiliation. In Canada, we identify as a constitutional monarchy—democratic in phrasing but still constitutional monarchy. We don’t often talk about being a Christian country, even though historically, much of Canada was built by and for Christians. This rhetoric, therefore, feels like a weird about-face or ad hoc response to the current political moment rather than something deeply rooted in the history of either country.

Jacobsen: So, how many Christians identify with the ideology of Christian nationalism? 

Emmert: I’ve seen various numbers, but I’m always curious about how people define Christian nationalism because that’s the crux of it, right? If people think, “Oh yes, we’re a Christian nation because we’ve always been a Christian nation, because most people go to a Christian church on Sunday,” that’s vastly different from what Christian nationalism is and what it aims to do to this country. While there is a significant portion of Christians who support the concept of Christian nationalism, I’m always skeptical of those actual numbers because they depend on how people define or interpret the term. However, one thing we do know is that among evangelical Protestants, support for Christian nationalism is close to 90%, and they make up a significant portion of our citizens, particularly our voters.

Jacobsen: When it comes to political violence, how do Christian nationalists with a right-wing authoritarian views align with approval of political violence? 

Emmert: January 6, 2021, clearly indicated that many are on board. In surveys I’ve read where the question is posed, “Do you feel violence is justified to keep our country ‘ours’?” it’s consistently evangelical Protestants who are more likely to support violence, secession, or any means necessary to preserve what they believe is “theirs,”whatever that might mean.

Jacobsen: What have you seen as effective in terms of activism? The Secular Coalition for America is comprised of a large number of organizations. I’m familiar with the names of all of them in the context of secularism in America. It’s impressive that you’ve brought them all together, especially given the challenges that can arise—whether it’s personality conflicts or differences in focus, with some groups preferring to be community-oriented rather than politically engaged. These complexities are part of any social and communal activist movement. So, what have you found effective in bringing everyone together and working toward a common cause?

Emmert: You hit the nail on the head. We focus on agreeing on 80-90% of things and set aside the remaining 10-20% to get to work. Otherwise, we all end up suffering. When the Secular Coalition for America was founded over 20 years ago by Herb Silverman and the late Woody Kaplan, it came from the recognition that the voice of atheists, agnostics, and secular groups was largely absent in Washington, DC. We didn’t have much of a presence at all. So, while there are some disagreements on that 10-20%, the activism that needs to take place here in our nation’s capital is something all of our organizations recognize we’re stronger together.

While some groups have since established their presence here in Washington, DC, we all agree that to represent our 21-member organizations best, we need a central group like the Secular Coalition for America to lead these advocacy efforts. One thing that impressed me this summer was our work to raise awareness about Project 2025. This is a playbook created to ensure that if a Republican candidate wins the presidency, there’s a roadmap for what they plan to do in the first 100 days and their goals for the rest of the term. We’ve seen growing attention and engagement as we’ve informed people about what this would look like. It highlights the potential dangers to our freedoms, rights, and constitution if we head down that path with another four-year term. Many public figures, particularly American public figures, deserve credit for engaging with these issues and countering some of the usual stereotypes.

Jacobsen: A lot of them are genuinely intelligent. I looked at Senator Hawley’s background—he has a bachelor’s degree from Stanford University and a J.D. from Yale University. He’s an intelligent fellow. The bigger question is, what is sensible? Is it sensible to claim a Christian founding for this country and to push a nationalist version of that narrative in the present moment? It needs to be more sensible and factual. When you look at someone’s biography, like Hawley’s, there’s no apparent deficit of intelligence, qualifications, or ability to live a functional life. So, the next assumption is either they’re lying about American history for political purposes, or they’ve been misinformed or propagandized about it. Those seem like the two main possibilities. What do you think is going on with some of these folks?

Emmert: It’s about recognizing power, and they want to hold on to it. You can’t tell me that someone with a law degree from Harvard or Yale doesn’t understand the U.S. Constitution. It’s simple. So, they’re either lying through their teeth or received a very poor legal education, and I don’t think it’s the latter. They see this as what they must do to maintain their power and gain more.

Jacobsen: Do you foresee a risk of political violence in the upcoming election?

Emmert: I would like to think that after what we experienced four years ago, we’re past that. Still, we certainly need to plan for it as a possibility. We know that election officials in various counties have received numerous death threats that had to be taken seriously. Some people are currently in jail or prison for making those threats. So, the threat of violence is real, and it’s something we need to be prepared for, even though I’d like to believe we’re above that as a society. Unfortunately, I’ve been proven wrong.

Jacobsen: Also, according to Pew Research and other academic studies, secular people are one of the most disliked groups in the American public’s perception. They often arouse feelings of distrust and even hate. How do you sell a movement and yourself politically in such an environment? How do you overcome strong public opposition, especially when politics relies on personality, messaging, sloganeering, grassroots organizing, and so on?

Emmert: It’s important to recognize that change is a process. People don’t change their minds overnight. Let me use gay marriage as an example. When Massachusetts became the first state to legalize gay marriage, it wasn’t widely approved. It wasn’t as strongly opposed as in places like Alabama, but most people were still against it. However, a year later, when they conducted another poll, most people supported it. People initially feared they would be required to marry someone of the same sex, but when they realized that wasn’t the case, they thought, “Oh, this doesn’t impact me at all.”

As other states went through the same process, the Republican Party focused heavily on opposing gay marriage in the 2004 election. Now, they hardly mention it. They’ve just found new “boogeymen” to scare people with, or at least attempt to. It’s up to us, as an organization and as citizens, to understand that change is a process. These shifts don’t happen overnight.

Look at the anti-abortion movement. They worked for 50 years before they achieved their goal. We need to be just as strategic and committed.

Jacobsen: Is there anything I need to clarify regarding the response to Hawley and the issue of political violence? What do you think?

Emmert: No, we’ve covered most of it. I got to mention Project 2025, which was important because it’s critical. If you agree, I’ve touched on everything I wanted.

Jacobsen: Yes, we’ve covered a lot. Thank you so much for your time today, Steve. I appreciate it.

Emmert: Thank you. I’ve enjoyed talking with you, and feel free to reach out again. We can chat after the election, too.

Jacobsen: Absolutely, I will. I’ll go through this process and send you the transcript for the whole thing.

Emmert: Sounds great. Thanks so much. Enjoy the rest of your day.

Jacobsen: All right, thank you. You too. Goodbye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Nyamat Singh, Petition to Dissolve PIPS at KPU

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/31

Nyamat Singh is the Managing Editor of The Runner. Singh discussed the initial shock, invalid signatures, and the broader implications for freedom of expression of the petition. She emphasized the importance of student journalism and urged students to understand petitions fully before signing, citing concerns about censorship.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here to discuss the petition status you have been reporting on. You are managing it as a key person. How did this story first come to your attention?

Nyamat Singh: This happened in late September, though I am still determining the exact date. I was at the office when someone dropped off the petition, which was in a large, chunky orange folder.

At that time, Claudia was on vacation in Ireland, so it was just Devaki. We also received an email with the petition, but I had the physical copy. My initial reaction was to panic a bit, so I immediately called Devaki, and she saw it as well.

One of the messages she wrote in our group chat said, “Everyone, a huge storm is coming. They are trying to stop us.” I do not remember her exact words, but it was something along those lines. We were all trying to figure out what to do, and Suneet was also present.

We were brainstorming ideas because this was the first time this had ever happened. Devaki took the lead, and we decided to reach out to KPU. Our first step was to verify the student IDs to confirm whether the signatures were valid. KPU responded almost immediately, and we discovered that many signatures were invalid.

That is how it all began. When you discovered this, what was the reaction from the staff and your colleagues? How did everyone feel?

Initially, only the editorial staff knew—me, Claudia, Suneet, and Devaki. We kept it within our group. Claudia, even though she took time off, handled it efficiently. Despite the time difference, she was responsive, which was very helpful.

At first, it was just the four of us. When Claudia returned, we decided to consult journalism instructors for their perspectives. We also reached out to our legal team. Initially, we were all shocked.

Jacobsen: As the situation developed, what has happened with the petition? Has it changed how you operate internally?

Singh: It has mostly stayed the same operations. We are still reporting on the same topics. The petition called for a special general meeting (SGM), but we decided not to hold one because a significant portion of the signatures were invalid.

We have heard another petition might be in the works, but we cannot confirm it until we receive it—whether by email or physical delivery. For now, we have decided not to hold the SGM. I do not know. We’ll see what happens if there’s another petition. 

Jacobsen: One of the requests was to remove any reference—current or future—of the KSA in The Runner’s reportage. From your perspective as a journalist, what does this do to freedom of expression and the press within an institution of higher learning? Asking to erase years of hard work that’s quite significant.

Singh: Yes, whoever sent this petition asks us to erase years of work. The Runner has been reporting on the KSA for a long time. This is not just our work now; it is years of work since 2008 we were formed. That is terrible for the people who have spent so much time and hard work on these stories, bringing them to the students. It also concerns freedom of expression. One of their new bylaw demands is to allow minimal media presence, only five minutes, in their meetings.

I usually attend these council meetings to report on them. It’s been quite a process, and things have been different recently. 

Jacobsen: Another request was to limit the time someone could attend and record the Kwantlen Student Association’s regular meetings. So, what was the immediate interpretation of this request in the petition?

Singh: Yes, this was one of the bylaw changes. When we attend meetings, we usually record the whole thing, so we have a record of what was said. If we are allowed to record, there is a way to prove what happened in those meetings. People could ask us, “What proof do you have that this happened?” That is why we always record.

Having that recording as backup is crucial. If someone questions us, we can say, “Here is the recording.” It is not like we are making things up. Limiting our ability to record would hinder our work. How would we report on these meetings if we could not record them?

Jacobsen: I was informed–and it was confirmed–that the cost for PIPS, The Runner, and PULP Mag for each student at Kwantlen Polytechnic is 75¢ per credit. However, almost none—or virtually none—of the students at Kwantlen Polytechnic University have requested an opt-out option for this particular benefit. Given how low the cost is and how few students seem to disagree with the publications’ existence, this petition seems to go against the general opinion of the student body. What feedback have you received from students or staff about this petition, especially as more details emerged about the demand for no reportage on the KSA?

Singh: Yes, as more information about the petition’s demands, including no reportage on the KSA, emerged, it became clear that this request went against the interests of many students and staff.

Jacobsen: Issues included the need for valid student IDs for some of the names listed or mismatches between student IDs and names, and some students even thought this had something to do with a Cultus Lake trip. How did this information, as it surfaced, reach the staff—whether through personal conversations, walking around campus, or informal feedback to the publication?

Singh: Online feedback was significant. When we wrote a story about this, Claudia’s editorial received much attention on Twitter and other platforms. That is where most of our feedback came from. Eventually, students started finding out what was happening.

All of them were quite shocked and questioned what was going on. Some of the students told us they did not know what it was for. A few even thought it was for the Cultus Lake trip, while others thought it had something to do with the student association.

That doesn’t look good because this is a petition to dissolve the student publication, and I do not think the student association should be involved. Those were some of the initial reactions. Staff members also found out, and conversations started happening in classes. Instructors brought it up and distributed copies of our issues, telling students to remember what was happening. We were fortunate to have that support within the KPU community.

We also discovered that many students wanted us to stay, which was reassuring after seeing the 150 signatures.

Jacobsen: Could there be a standard process for something as extreme as the dissolution of student publications or the merger of board involvement between the KSA and the student newspaper? For example, based on who was running the petition, should there be a threshold of 100 or 150 signatures, followed by an open call for two weeks or a month for a counter-petition to see the opposing side? Because while 100 or 150 signatures are a lot for a student petition, there are tens of thousands of students across KPU’s various campuses. It is helpful and shows concern from some students, but it might only represent part of the picture, especially with such a significant claim. This is about something other than starting a new club, dissolving a club, or hosting an event that needs a $1,000 bursary.

Singh: Yes, that is very true. Because 150 students want the student publications gone, they only represent part of the KPU student body. It’s not just about dissolving The Runner but also about dissolving PIPS, which they had just started.

I remember Yana saying something like, “We are collateral damage,” which felt true. There is no way of proving who sent this petition, but we felt bad if our reporting triggered it. However, more than a threshold of 150 students is needed to make decisions about these publications. Many students might be interested in knowing what is happening and where their money is going, and we do not only report on the student association.

We cover a wide range of topics—KPU events, issues in the Lower Mainland, opinions, and pop culture—and we are also doing video work. Our work is so much more than just reporting on the student association, and I don’t think that should only affect our ability to report in the future.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts before we wrap up today?

Singh: Yes, student journalism is important. My message to the students would be this: If you’re signing a petition, ensure you know what it is about before signing. You would not want democracy to disappear. We have seen censorship happening worldwide, and a student publication is at the core of student life at KPU. So, think before you sign anything.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Singh: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Entemake Aman (阿曼) on American High-I.Q. Societies and Tests

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/31

*Updated November, 2024.*

Entemake Aman discusses high-IQ societies, particularly focusing on American culture, ethical challenges, and emphasized the significance of supervised tests like the SAT and GRE, while noting the impact of digitalization on test integrity. He explored how high-IQ societies could improve collaboration and maintain ethical standards.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Have you had any luck getting onto CGTN? I doubt I can help in that department–outside of my reach.

Entemake Aman: I am not getting anywhere in that department.

Jacobsen: How did the American media look to you after the article was published? Thank you for noting some questionable behaviour in scores in the Asiatic region, at least with one individual, several received documentation from another.

Aman: American media is more authoritative and influential. Geniuses are often honest, and we all hope there are no liars in the circle of high intelligence.

Jacobsen: When you look at different examinations in the U.S., what ones seem to tap the g factor?

Aman: The SAT and GRE are the only I.Q. tests in the United States that measure children’s G-factor.

Jacobsen: What have been some of the recent positive and negative developments in the high-I.Q. world in Asia? There tends to be more focus on the Americas and Europe.

Aman: I am only looking at the high I.Q. circles in Europe and the United States because I suspect there have been scammers in the high I.Q. circles in Asia since 2012.

Jacobsen: You have more of an affinity for American culture than me. What do you like about it? I tend to be more lukewarm about it.

Aman: I like American movies, the culture of I.Q. testing, the culture of educating gifted children, and the emphasis on creativity.

Jacobsen: How important are constitutions and broader high-I.Q. society guidelines to high-I.Q. societies? I know of three former Mega Society members of note: Keith Allen Raniere, Christopher Michael Langan, and YoungHoon Bryan Kim. The Mega Society was founded in 1982 by Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin. Keith Allen Raniere (12)was sentenced to 120 years in jail. He “was convicted by a federal jury in June 2019 of racketeering, racketeering conspiracy, sex trafficking, attempted sex trafficking, sex trafficking conspiracy, forced labour conspiracy and wire fraud conspiracy.” Christopher Michael Langan went through litigation with the Mega Society (12). He founded the Mega Foundation in 1999 as a 501c(3) tax-exempt non-profit corporation. YoungHoon Bryan Kim was the Senior Membership Officer of Chris Langan’s Mega Foundation until about 2020, then joined the Mega Society from 2020 to late August, 2024. Following anaward and an interview with Ian Bott–alongside others like Aubrey de Grey, Professor Howard Gardner chose revocation of his award and assessed Kim’s United Sigma Intelligence Association (founded by HanKyungLee, M.D. (1) in 2007 as United Sigma Korea (1), as explained by Kim in Phenomenon of the World Intelligence Network, and registered in 2023 by YoungHoon Bryan Kim) in August, 2021 in “Good Work, Compromised Work, Bad Work… And Ego.” Gardner gave an additional examination in a mid-October, 2021 update to the same article republished in The Good Project. The USIA Lifetime Achievement Awardformerly the USIA Award, has been awarded to Neil deGrasse Tyson, Jennifer Doudna, Richard Dawkins, Noam Chomsky, Yuval Hariri, Anthony Giddens, Elizabeth Blackburn, Terence Tao, and Howard Gardner.

[Ed. Update October, 2024: A professional photo of YoungHoon Bryan Kim claimed as “own work” under the username ‘Reality180‘ was uploaded on June 1, 2024 in English Wikipedia. The same username, ‘Reality180,’ attempted to create English Wikipedia pages ‘YoungHoon Bryan Kim‘ (May 29, 2024) and ‘United Sigma Intelligence Association‘ (April 21, 2024). The same identified pattern occurred with Korean Wikipedia username ‘Reality180‘ with a professional photo of YoungHoon Kryan Kim claimed as “자작” (Google Translate: ‘One’s own work.’), which created the Korean Wikipedia page ‘세계지능협회‘ (United Sigma Intelligence Association) and only ever edited Korean Wikipedia pages for YoungHoon Bryan Kim and United Sigma Intelligence Association (English). Also, Korean Wikipedia username ‘211.237.101.103’ (English) only ever created and edited the page ‘ 김영훈 (아이큐)’ or “Kim Young-hoon (IQ).” Recently, the same for Korean Wikipedia username ‘61.255.211.119‘ (English) only ever editing Korean Wikipedia page ‘세계지능협회‘ (United Sigma Intelligence Association) and ‘ 김영훈 (아이큐)’  or “Kim Young-hoon (IQ).” A Reddit thread about IQ Olympiad 3 years ago focused on English Wikipedia editing too, particularly around username ‘58.227.250.85.’ (User contributions) ‘Reality180‘ on Korean Wikipedia threatened to sue (English)–on November 15, 2023–another Korean Wikipedia user who had the username ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ (English). ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ claimed ‘Reality180‘ was a Christian and, at one point, training to become a priest (English). Subsequently, a legal context was reported on, by YoungHoon Bryan Kim in a professional or personal blog (English), on March 18, 2024. Recently, the claimed GIGA Society (TM) medium account issued statements about Ronald Hoeflin (1), the “Mega Society,” (1) “IQ Olympiad,” (1) “South Korean Jeong Kye-won(정계원) called Andrew Zheng or Andrew Jeong,” (1) “another giga-level group” and here, (12) and “Scott Douglas Jacobsen.” (1)]

Aman: The High I.Q. Society asks only for I.Q. There are no other requirements. I would guess that only 0.1% of the people in the high I.Q. association are problem characters. If they are no longer members of the Mega Society, then the Mega Society may focus more on moral aspects.

Jacobsen: I would agree. It is a handful or less than a handful, or less than 0.1%. The vast majority have been excellent and kind to and with me, whether in word or deed. As a practical example, they have been generous with their talents and time in expressing their views in interviews for over a decade. Are there any emerging trends in the approach to I.Q. testing?

Aman: There are a few new trends in I.Q. tests. They have only one purpose: to measure the G-factor. So, it is all about the ability to find patterns.

Jacobsen: How will the high-I.Q. community evolve over the next decade?

Aman: I prefer supervised I.Q. tests, like Stanford Binet. Hopefully, there will be better I.Q. tests in the next ten years. The most important thing for the I.Q. society is whether its members’ I.Q. is qualified.

Jacobsen: Are there any unique challenges the American high-I.Q. community faces compared to other regions?

Aman: Members of the American High I.Q. Society is doing reasonable quality control, but some answers to American I.Q. tests have been leaked. I hope the American I.Q. test is changed to a paper I.Q. test.

Jacobsen: How has digitalization impacted networking and collaboration within the high-I.Q. community?

Aman: Digitization makes it easier for knowledgeable people to communicate. However, it could also lead to the leakage of answers.

Jacobsen: Are there specific regions where high-I.Q. communities are particularly active or growing?

Aman: America. Because America values I.Q.

Jacobsen: How does the high-I.Q. community support the development of young talent?

Aman: Mensa often reports on child prodigies under seven, bringing them to society’s attention. Mensa also has some social benefits. Some companies may focus on whether someone is a Mensa member.

Jacobsen: Have any recent debates or controversies within the high-I.Q. community?

Aman: I have not been paying attention to the High I.Q. Society has been controversial for a long time.

Jacobsen: What role do you see artificial intelligence play in the future of high-I.Q. communities?

Aman: Artificial intelligence may be able to design brilliant questions for people.

Jacobsen: How do different cultural attitudes about I.Q. in different parts of the United States seem on the outside?

Aman: Most states have rules for gifted children. In 1961, California became the first state to legislate meritocracy education.

Jacobsen: What seems like the different cultural attitudes towards intelligence and high-I.Q. communities in the States?

Aman:  Supportive. Because the United States values I.Q. the most.

Jacobsen: From your analysis, you claimed to have answers stolen from your computer after it was hacked. What is how hacking is done?

Aman: That is one thing I regret and am sorry for. I should have deleted the answer from my mailbox. He probably planted a computer virus.

Jacobsen: How can test-makers protect themselves and their answers, especially from hacking and cheaters?

Aman: The authors no longer provide email addresses to the testers. Instead, submit using a paper envelope, like Mega Test.

Jacobsen: If we were to ignore paper and pencil tests, what qualitative metrics would you have noticed in gifted and talented people? So, words, deeds, and other non-test markers of higher I.Q.s—those that indicate the factor—I am curious how you see these as culturally and individually emergent.

Aman: Geniuses often have good character, quick thinking, and original thinking about every problem. They also like to talk to themselves sometimes.

Jacobsen: Are there aspects of American culture you find in Asian cultures now?

Aman: High-I.Q. societies have also emerged in Asia.

Jacobsen: Would it be helpful for high-I.Q. societies that are more established to implement ethical guidelines?

Aman: That doesn’t help the High IQ Society.

Jacobsen: On constitutions, what about inclusion in refined constitutions for expulsions of individual members on the vote of the membership? I know the Mega Society included a clause for expulsions in its Constitution–”Drafted by Chris Cole and Kevin Langdon; ratified January 1, 2001; amended August, 2005,” Article IV. Elections in Paragraph 7:

  1. Any member may call for the expulsion of any other member at any time. An expulsion vote shall be held only if after the call for expulsion has been seconded by another member. The member whose expulsion is proposed shall be entitled to up to eight pages to present a defense in the issue following the appearance of the second to the call for expulsion (which may be the same issue in which the original call appears), which shall also contain a ballot, and every member shall be entitled to present up to two pages for or against the expulsion. Expulsion of a member shall require two-thirds of the votes cast on the expulsion. The member whose expulsion is proposed shall be allowed to vote in the expulsion election.

In the Mega Society’s ~42-year history, it has been used only once to expel a member. The expulsion from the Mega Society was based on vastly overwhelming “votes cast” against the expelled member’s defense case. After the subsequent expulsion from the Mega Society, removal from the mailing list, deletion from the listing on the website, and so on, the then-former member later sent an email to the Mega Society claiming withdrawal from the Mega Society, and then later publicly claimed to have voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society.

You don’t have take it on faith. You could email the Mega Society or a representative.

Aman: It is a good idea. It raises the moral level of the I.Q. Society. It can make their communication more positive.

Jacobsen: What can high-I.Q. societies do to stop the leakage of test answers and maintain test integrity now?

Aman: I.Q. test questions are not published, and paper envelopes are used. The test creator’s email number is not provided. Periodically check to see if the answers are leaked.

Jacobsen: What are the positive things Mensa is doing to foster young people, nurture young talent, and keep the spirit of the high-I.Q. societies alive in positive contributions to community building, which so many of these people crave?

Aman: Mensa’s advantage is supervised testing. It can identify gifted children and help them find a platform to communicate.

Jacobsen: Specifically, how could A.I. help develop hard test questions for people to separate intelligent people from brilliant people?

Aman: Artificial intelligence may have higher I.Q.s, be proficient in psychology, and create complex I.Q. tests for people.

Jacobsen: How could online platforms be more robust in terms of security and prevention of cheating? The Adaptive I.Q. Test comes to mind from a team in the Mega Society.

Aman: Artificial intelligence may be able to help solve this problem, with any leaks about I.Q. test answers automatically blocked. The team should switch I.Q. tests regularly.

Jacobsen: Could high-I.Q. societies do with more diversity?

Aman: No need. Paying attention to the quality of members is the most important.

Jacobsen: How do you perceive the role of digital platforms in shaping the future interactions of high-I.Q. communities?

Aman: Increase the risk of I.Q. test questions being discussed and leaked.

Jacobsen: What measures can high-I.Q. societies implement to prevent the leaking of test answers and ensure test integrity?

Aman: Use paper envelopes to test; do not reveal the questions.

Jacobsen: What are some fundamental cultural differences you have observed in attitudes toward intelligence across various regions in the United States?

Aman: For example, in junior high schools in suburban St. Louis, gifted classes are similar in the difficulty of teaching knowledge to ordinary classes, but they pay more attention to cultivating students’ practical and hands-on skills, often organizing science experiments and speech competitions. On the East Coast, where the pace of life is much faster, it is different. Maryland’s gifted class advocates advanced education, children have more homework, and small and medium-sized tests are standard.

Jacobsen: What are the most significant ethical guidelines that high-I.Q. societies should consider adopting?

Aman: Abide by the laws of the state.

Jacobsen: How might artificial intelligence contribute to developing more challenging I.Q. tests, and what implications could this have for test fairness?

Aman: I do not think it affects fairness.

Jacobsen: Are there any high-I.Q. communities outside the United States and Europe that you find particularly noteworthy or growing in influence?

Aman: Not found. I think the American High IQ Society is the best in the world.

Jacobsen: What qualitative traits have you observed that indicate high intelligence beyond traditional I.Q. test metrics?

Aman: No other indicator surpasses I.Q. tests.

Jacobsen: How do you see the evolution of high-I.Q. societies over the next decade, especially regarding inclusion, diversity, and ethical practices?

Aman: The diversity of I.Q. society does not matter. What matters is the quality of members of an I.Q. society. There will probably be more good tests in the next ten years, and members’ ethics will get higher and higher.

Jacobsen: What positive contributions do organizations like Mensa make to support young talent within high-I.Q. communities?

Aman: Regular meetings, monthly magazines. Some countries may have social benefits. Large companies may require Mensa membership.

Jacobsen: In what ways could online I.Q. testing platforms improve their security measures to prevent cheating and maintain credibility?

Aman: Using an envelope paper I.Q. test, the author of the I.Q. test question regularly investigates whether there is a possibility of giving away the answer. Keep the test questions secret.

Jacobsen: Can you share your personal journey in high-IQ societies? How being a member has influenced you?

Aman: When I joined Mensa, I had a high-quality circle. But it didn’t affect me that much.

Jacobsen: How being a member has influenced you?

Aman: I met some successful people. The effect on me is that I have an easy circle to communicate with.

Jacobsen: How has being part of high-IQ communities affected your relationships, both personally and professionally?

Aman: I found Mensa to be generally of higher quality than those around me. They have better characters. I prefer to talk to them.

Jacobsen: What are the subtle ethical challenges high-IQ societies face today?

Aman: The High IQ Society needs more supervised IQ tests.

Jacobsen: How can they address them?

Aman: Establish supervised examination rooms. Like the Stanford Binet test and the Mensa test.

Jacobsen: Are current ethical guidelines in high-IQ societies effective?

Aman: Effective.

Jacobsen: How could they be improved?

Aman: The most important thing is to obey the laws of the country.

Jacobsen: Besides test security, how can technology enhance collaboration and networking in high-IQ communities?

Aman: Technology has made it easier for members of high-IQ societies to meet.

Jacobsen: How can artificial intelligence improve communication and collaboration among high-IQ society members?

Aman: Artificial intelligence can help find members of highly intelligent associations in a particular country.

Jacobsen: How can high-IQ societies promote cultural diversity and inclusion among their global members?

Aman: The High IQ Society test requires no knowledge. It only requires a high IQ.

Jacobsen: How can members of high-IQ societies use their abilities to make meaningful contributions to society?

Aman: Studies mathematics, philosophy and physics.

Jacobsen: How can high-IQ societies encourage members to apply their intelligence to solve real-world problems and help their communities?

Aman: The High IQ Society creates different hobby groups.

[Update November 10, 2024: Upon further investigation, an old certificate of the Extreme Sigma Society of United Sigma Korea founded by HanKyung Lee, M.D. stated:

Extreme Sigma Korea (E.S.K) – High IQ society

Membership Certificate

Extreme Sigma Korea (E.S.K) is an International high I.Q. society located in Korea, founded on July 25, 2012, by HanKyung Lee, M.D., with the aim to gather people who have a high level of intelligence above I.Q. 220 sd24 or I.Q. 175 sd15 of the unselected adult population. The society Genius Member (G.M) is granted to individuals having achieved the required cognitive performance.

We certify that Marco RipàIs Honorary Member (H.M.) of E.S.K – High IQ society

E.S.K Honorary Member: 021318eskhmDate Issued: 30 July 2015

The FounderHanKyung Lee, M.D.

Sigma Korea website (copyright 2007) stated on March 22, 2017:

Sigma Korea is an International  high I.Q society located in Korea founded on July 3, 2007 by HanKyung Lee, M.D which has various groups according to cognitive performance; Three Sigma Korea (T.S.K) ≥ IQ 172 sd24 or IQ 145 sd15, Four Sigma Korea (F.S.K) ≥ IQ 196 sd24 or IQ 160 sd15 and Extreme Sigma Korea (E.S.K) ≥ IQ 220 sd24 or IQ 175 sd15 of the unselected adult population. The aim of Sigma Korea is to gather the people who have high level of intelligence and provide an intellectual discussions in forums that TSK, FSK, ESK members are allowed to share ideas and opinion for intellectual life. 

Sigma Korea high IQ society may have important meaning enough as one of I.Q societies in the world. Korea always have been top I.Q ranking country in the world by official statistics and reported academic resources. If you participate in this project is to gather the people who have high cognitive performance located in Korea, you would be a member of the best IQ country society in the world. In the history, Korean couldn’t help using their brain to keep identity and survive against others, and consequently this environment help people to do their best in intelligence. It is well explained considering geopolitical factors have utilized for scientific research as well as the humanities field in academia like anthropology with sociobiology. That is this society is just for the people welcome to intellectual work. 

YoungHoon Kim and HanKyung Lee are mentioned on the lower portion of the website. HanKyung Lee’s old blog can be found here. United Sigma Intelligence Association, up to and including June 15, 2021, cited its copyright as from 2007 to 2021 with a founding in 2007 and a founder of HanKyung Lee, M.D. The current claimed founder is YoungHoon Bryan Kim with a founding date of 2019.

Therefore, following from the October, 2024 update, according to available records, Sigma Korea, founded in 2007 by Dr. HanKyung Lee, became United Sigma Korea, founded in 2007 by Dr. HanKyung Lee, and later the United Sigma Intelligence Association. Up to at least June 15, 2021, the founding date was cited as 2007 with Dr. Lee as founder. Later, the founding date was claimed as 2019, founded by YoungHoon Bryan Kim, with the incorporation in 2023 by YoungHoon Bryan Kim.

IQ Olympiad (Foundation Limited) (1, 2, 3) was in partnership with United Sigma Intelligence Association. To quote United Sigma Intelligence Association:

USIA has signed the IQ Olympiad Foundation partnership.

The IQ Olympiad is an intellectual growth platform that everyone can participate in by refining and sharing IQ tests around the world. Users can access different types of IQ tests here, which can meet intellectual needs and challenge human intelligence limitations. The IQ Olympiad is a decentralized platform where users create and provide IQ test content themselves and users become consumers of IQ test content. The founder of the IQ Olympiad Foundation is Ronald K. Hoeflin, PhD, who is the founder of the Mega Society.

Website: https://iqolympiad.org

Other listed partners were Lifeboat Foundation, World Memory Sports Council, HK, Korea Memory Sports Association,Complex Biological System Alliance, World Academy of Medical Sciences, International Longevity Alliance, and India Future Society.

IQ Olympiad (Project) listed United Sigma Intelligence Association as a partner in addition to a list of other organizations:

United Sigma Intelligence Association : https://www.usiassociation.org

Lifeboat Foundation : https://lifeboat.com

International Longevity Alliance : https://longevityalliance.org

World Academy of Medical Sciences : https://wams.online

Complex Biological Systems Alliance : http://www.cbsaimtt.com

Hong Kong Institute of Memory Education : https://www.wmsc-hk.com

Gifted High IQ Network : https://www.giftediqnetwork.org

Genius High IQ Network : https://www.geniusiqnetwork.org

World Intelligence Network : https://www.iqsociety.org

Olympiq High IQ Soicety [sic]: https://olymp.iqsociety.org

Helliq High IQ Society : https://hell.iqsociety.org

Civiq High IQ Society : https://civ.iqsociety.org

Griq High IQ Society : https://gr.iqsociety.org

Qiq High IQ Society : https://q.iqsociety.org

Iqid High IQ Society : https://child.iqsociety.org

This High IQ Society : https://www.thisiqsociety.org

4G High IQ Society : https://www.4giqsociety.org

Brain High IQ Society : https://www.brainiqsociety.org

ELITE High IQ Society : https://www.eliteiqsociety.org

6N High IQ Society : https://www.6niqsociety.org

NOUS High IQ Society : https://www.nousiqsociety.org

Venus High IQ Society : https://venushighiqsociety.org

Catholiq High IQ Society : http://www.catholiq.org

Catholiq High IQ Society : http://www.catholiq.org

American High IQ Society : https://ahiqs.org

Canadian High IQ Society : https://chiqs.org

Global High IQ Society : https://ghiqs.org

Torr High IQ Society : https://torr.org

IQ Olympiad listed YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s high-range test entitled KIT-1 including a listing of his IQ Olympiad business email, stating:

Kim’s Intelligence Test (KIT-1) is a verbal associations high range IQ test developed by YoungHoon Kim in 2022. Please send your answers to bryan@iqolympiad.org, along with your full name, nationality, age, gender and all prior I.Q. scores. Valid answers are single words, and you can send one answer per question. Scoring fee is “free” of charge if you join the IQ Olympiad Forum : https://forum.iqolympiad.org. KIT – 1 supports two attempts and raw score will be reported in both of them according to the current norm.

IQ Olympiad Medium account on January 3, 2022 in “IQ Olympiad team member named in 2022 Genius of the Year Awards” said, “IQ Olympiad’s Global Strategy Officer YoungHoon Bryan Kim was named 2022 Genius of the Year Award from high IQ world.” This was online until, at least, November 30, 2023. It has since been deleted.

Therefore, according to their official statements, IQ Olympiad and the United Sigma Intelligence Association listed each other as partners and featured YoungHoon Bryan Kim in their communications.

Circa December, 2019, Jonathan Mize’s God Versus Language published in December, 2019, cites a number of acknowledgements, including Mr. Christopher Langan and Dr. Gina Langan of the Mega Foundation, and YoungHoon Kim, among many others of the Mega Foundation community:

I am no doubt indebted to numerous members of the CTMU community, including of course Christopher Langan himself. Various members have assisted me in as diverse things as the inclusion of the ever-so-challenging to conjure “unisect symbol” (thank you Raj Dye!) to the genesis of cover design ideas (Adam Haas) and the development and consideration of various topics analyzed within the book. I am indebted to the following members of the community for providing thought- provoking material and engaging in stimulating conversation about topics related to the book: Gina Langan, Jesse Franckowiak, Alexis Pantelides, Dylan Catlow, James Bowery, Arek Sobiczewski, Eike Freidank, Quest Quinn DeWitt Brown, Ethan Swofford, John Rice, Bernard Skomal, Aaron Esbenshade, Martin LoBretto, Martin Ezeugwu, Jason Jackson, Micha Szczsny, Lennox Niece, Zachary Auf, Daniel Falk, Charles Ringer, Matisse Mallette, Richard Jefferson Yorke, YoungHoon Kim, Megan Lorrayne and Johnny Yiu. 

Kim served as the Senior Membership Officer for the Mega Foundation until 2020. In the same year, he joined the Mega Society as a member. As of August 2024, Kim is no longer listed as a member of the Mega Society. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society channels: https://megasociety.org/#officers.

Circa July 13, 2019, in the Phenomenon (World Intelligence Network) interview republished from In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen, YoungHoon Bryan Kim stated:

Hi, before saying my story, I appreciate talking with this journal and being a part of your interviewee series. To put myself shortly, I have studied philosophy and theology in Korea University and Yonsei University, which are called Sky Universities (or Ivy league in South Korea), as well as studying B.M. piano in a music College. 

My full-memberships may be the most interesting. The scores are accredited by some professional psychologists, of OLYMPIQ Society, Mega Foundation for IQ 175, sd15 and Epimetheus for IQ 160, sd15, I am also working as a president in the United Sigma Korea with ESK, IQ 175, sd15 society, which was founded in 2007 by Hankyung Lee, M.D…

…Graduating from high school, firstly, I attended B.M. classical piano in one music college (university). Completed 2 years out of 4, I changed my major to humanities and studied a variety of fields on the academic degree B.A. programme in Korean Ivy league, called, as noted, the Sky Universities. Additionally, I also completed a diploma in London. Now, I am preparing to attend Ph.D. programme in Harvard University, Graduate School…

…Next year, I will apply Harvard with a few of the prestigious graduate schools. I said, on the former question, about my academic journey from studying music to humanities. That is my next step to be a professional scholar. I am sure that you will see I am studying and researching in there, as always, soon…

…Most of the societies I am involved with have the qualification of the professional psychological test by a psychologist. This is far from several societies that just accept non-professional and even online IQ test. If we acknowledge, by any possibility, non-professional IQ test could measure the human intelligence, any of the society approved League be unsuitable for the name of a high-IQ society…

…I recognize that there are many cheating issues. Most of the cases are from the score on non-verifiable tests like so-called high-range IQ test, which do not require any identification of the testee or have been compromised. Even though, most of the test makers are still scoring. That is another reason that we could not believe the score from that.

At the time of the interview, Kim was a member of the following high-IQ societies: “Mensa, TOPS, ISPE, TNS (Triple Nine Society), OATH (One in a Thousand), Epimetheus, Mega Foundation, and OLYMPIQ Society.”

On September 10, 2024, US Weekly’s Isabel Mohan published an article online featuring the US Weekly new Editor-in-Chief Dan Wakeford doing an interview with YoungHoon Bryan Kim in an article entitled “World’s Smartest Man Believes the Higher Your IQ, the Greater Your Need For Gossip (Exclusive).” Kim was quoted in the article:

“I love news and stories from the celebrity and entertainment worlds, because it helps a lot with my anxiety,” he told Us, noting that many people with particularly high IQs can struggle with their mental health. “I believe that celebrities and the entertainment industry are harnessing our culture and their content is so intriguing for me. They’re the ones that are entertaining all of us. They are artists so I think, in a way, learning about their lives is a form of art experience. It’s an escape for me as well, but also a source of inspiration.”

Despite dedicating his life to science and technology, Kim has an equal respect for creativity. “Not only are the celebrities really creative, they’re also helping us think of new ideas and new ways to express ourselves,” he says. “And it helps us become more motivated to become better versions of ourselves. And pop culture never stops!”

As well as being a huge fan of BTS — the first K Pop act to go truly global — Kim is also something of a Swiftie, and says that this helps him feel more immersed in US culture; yes, keeping up with celebrities can give us a wider world view too!

The article is no longer available on the US Weekly website but remains accessible on other platforms, e.g., AOL, “World’s Smartest Man Believes the Higher Your IQ, the Greater Your Need For Gossip,” and MSN, “World’s Smartest Man Loves Celebrity Gossip Too!

With more investigation into information from the October, 2024 update, English Wikipedia username “58.227.250.85” referenced in the Reddit post entitled “Ron Hoeflin’s New Online IQ Test Hub” was searched on English Wikipedia. “User contributions for 58.227.250.85” stated only edits to English Wikipedia entries for Ronald K. Hoeflin, High-IQ society, Kim Ung-yong, Christopher Langan, and Youngsook Park between February 4, 2020, and August 2, 2021.

According to “User talk:58.227.250.85: Revision history,” “58.227.250.85” was blocked for disruptive editing by “Rklawton” and “Kinu” with prior warnings from English Wikipedians. The content of the edits for “58.227.250.85” comprised additions relevant to deletion of Mega Society and Prometheus Society, addition of United Sigma Intelligence Association (1, 2), addition of Ronald Hoeflin with USIA reference, addition of United Sigma Intelligence Association again (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6), and addition of IQ Olympiad (1, 2, 3, 4), including claiming USIA is “currently the most active and representative organization of high-intelligence organizations.”

Circa March, 2023, a Korean article “세계인명사전 IQ 1위 천재 김영훈 씨, ‘목사’의 길 걷는다” or ‘Kim Young-hoon, the number one genius IQ in the world’s famous class, walks the path of ‘Pastor‘ (March 20, 2023) claimed YoungHoon Bryan Kim ‘entered the pastor candidate course at Hanshin University Graduate School of Theology directly managed by the Korean Presbyterian Association.’ Another article titled “현재 IQ 전 세계 ‘1위’라는 33세 한국 남성, 전혀 예상치 못한 직업 택했다” or ‘A 33-year-old Korean man whose IQ is currently the ‘No. 1’ in the world chose a completely unexpected job.’ (March 28, 2023) claimed that Kim was ‘currently enrolled in the pastoral candidate course at Hanshin University Graduate School of Theology directly managed by the Korean Christian Presbyterian Association. After graduating from graduate school next year, he will take the pastor course as a full-time evangelist the following year.’

The same article quotes YoungHoon Bryan Kim:

‘I originally had a meaning in theology. I wanted to be a theologian, but there was a time when I wandered for a while as my study abroad was wrong,’ he said. ‘After graduating from graduate school, I plan to work as a full-time evangelist and take a doctoral program in theology together. I would like to contribute to nurturing future students as a theologian in the future, while doing theological research and ministry in parallel.’

As indicated in the October, 2024, update, ‘Reality180‘ on Korean Wikipedia threatened to sue (English)–on November 15, 2023–another Korean Wikipedia user who had the username ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ (English). Before the threat of suing Korean Wikipedia User “2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92:974A:23B5,” Korean Wikipedia User ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ (English) added the edit to the ‘Kim Young-hoon (IQ)’ Korean Wikipedia page with the claim:

‘However, the admissions officers of the High Intelligence Prometheus Society suspected his score fraud and did not grant him membership in the society, and he instead created the Prometheus 2.0 Society and joined it. This new society is a trademark infringement by using a name similar to the existing Prometheus, the same selection criteria, and a similar logo.[5]

The Korean Wikipedia page of ‘Kim Young-hoon (IQ),’ as such, during the time of the edit of Korean Wikipedia user “2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5” also claimed:

‘Kim Young-hoon (May 25, 1989 ~ ) is a candidate pastor in Korea. He graduated from the Department of Theology at Yonsei University and is currently enrolled in the pastoral candidate course at the Hanshin UniversityTheological Graduate School directly managed by the Korean Christian Presbyterian Association.[1]

…He is currently working as a pastor candidate and evangelist of the Korean Presbyterian Church.[7]

…Dropped out of King’s College London graduate school

I’m a student at Hanshin University Graduate School’

This portion the version listed above about dropping out of King’s College London graduate school was edited to ‘King’s College London Graduate School Mathematics Master’s (MSc).’

In 2024, a website of YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s claimed Kim to be no longer involved in any religious activities starting January of 2024: “※ 참고김영훈은 2024년 1월을 기점으로 종교와 관련된 일은 공식적으로 하지 않습니다” or ‘※ Note: Kim Young-hoon will not officially engage in any work related to religion as of January 2024.’

Independent investigation by Scott Jacobsen revealed YoungHoon Bryan Kim requested inclusion in articles listing individuals with the highest IQs, e.g., “Top 10 People With Highest IQ In History.” (Curious Matrix of Domagoj Parner), even contacting, at least one, several times. The article addition to Curious Matrix stated:

    1. YoungHoon Kim – IQ Score: 276

In 2024, YoungHoon Kim from South Korea was recognized as number one in the world among the 50 people with the highest IQ 276 in America’s top magazine, Reader’s Digest, holding the highest IQ record holder officially certified by Korea Record Institute, World Genius Directory, Global Genius Registry, Esoteriq Society, and GIGA Society. With perfect scores on various experimental high range intelligence tests, he is the 1st ranked lifetime member of Mega Society, the one-in-a-million level high IQ society which was the only one listed in the Guinness Book of World Records and included all the people who were listed in the Guinness Book of World Records for the highest IQ.

Note: YoungHoon Kim founded an organization, the United Sigma Intelligence Association for the world’s brightest minds, of which seven Nobel Prize winners are official fellows/members. From his organization, The greatest minds in the world such as Noam Chomsky, Yuval Harari, Richard Dawkins, Howard Gardner, Neil deGrasse Tyson, and Terence Tao have received official awards with the winners’ consent.

This has since been deleted.

Circa July 14, 2024, the GIGA Society (TM) Medium page republished most or all of the article BBC Science Focus: Who has the highest IQ in the world in 2024? with an additional commentary on specifically YoungHoon Bryan Kim, the article “BBC Science Focus: Who has the highest IQ in the world in 2024? (Fact Check).” The GIGA Society (™) article stated:

NOTE: BBC Science Focus is providing incorrect information without any fact checking. Therefore, through this article, we will provide a BBC Science Focus article that has been properly fact-checked…

…Pictured above, YoungHoon Kim is said to have the highest IQ score in the world currently, with an impressive score of 276. If this South Korean intellectual scored IQ 276, he is definitely out in front.

Effectively tying for the title, though, is Marilyn Vos Savant. Her recorded IQ in the Guinness World Records was 228, awarded between the 1986–1989 editions until the record was discontinued in 1990, with IQ scores deemed too unreliable to document.

This article has since been deleted.

The GIGA Society (™) Facebook group lists a series of different title edits since July 10, 2021. These names, with dates of change, include:

  • United Giga Society (USIA) Jul 16, 2021
  • UNITED GIGA SOCIETY (USIA) July 19, 2021
  • UNITED GIGA SOCIETY Dec 21, 2021
  • GIGA SOCIETY 190 June 9, 2022
  • GIGA Society — Discussion Group Jul 4, 2022
  • GIGA Society — Secret Group Jul 6, 2022
  • GIGA Society — The Official GIGA High IQ Society Jan 8, 2023
  • GIGA Society Membership Jan 8, 2023
  • GIGA Society Official Jan 26, 2024
  • GIGA SocietyTM Official Jul 14, 2024
  • GIGA Society Official Jul 26, 2024

The first name change to United Giga Society happened on July 16, 2021, becoming United Giga Society (USIA), or UNITED GIGA SOCIETY (USIA) on July 19, 2021 and UNITED GIGA SOCIETY on Dec 21, 2021. From July 16, 2021 to July 26, 2024, United Giga Society (2021) was then renamed to GIGA Society Official.

On September 9, 2021, the web domain for United Giga Society–https://gigaiqsociety.org–was registered.

On October 1, 2021, ABSNewswire published the press release entitled “GIGA SOCIETY, THE WORLD’S MOST EXCLUSIVE HIGH I.Q. SOCIETY.” The company name described was United Giga Society with the main contact person as “Bryan Kim.” United Giga Society (2021) contact person Bryan Kim’s press release claimed:

Qualifications to join is 1) High Range IQ test score ≥ IQ 190 SD15, and 2) High Range IQ Society membership ≥ IQ 190 SD15. There is only full membership at the United Giga Society and Membership is free of charge.

It has been known to occur that social media “groups” started by impostors made unauthorized use of the name “Giga Society” or some variant or misspelling thereof.

Such groups are not affiliated with the United Giga Society, and membership in them under no circumstance entitles one to call oneself a member of the United Giga Society.

For more information, visit – https://gigaiqsociety.org

The wording in the United Giga Society’s press release is similar to a warning previously issued on the Giga Society website founded by Paul Cooijmans in 1996.  Giga Society (1996) of Paul Cooijmans stated:

It has been known to occur that social media “groups” started by impostors made unauthorized use of the name “Giga Society” or some variant or misspelling thereof. Such groups are not affiliated with the Giga Society, and membership in them under no circumstance entitles one to call oneself a member of the Giga Society. Contact the society’s Psychometitor to verify whether any particular group is bona fide.

Visiting the website of United Giga Society, the executives and positions listed circa October 25, 2021, were the following:

President: YoungHoon Bryan Kim

Vice-President: Iakovos Koukas

Membership Officer: Masaaki Yamauchi

United Giga Society contact person, “Bryan Kim,” released “GIGA SOCIETY, THE WORLD’S MOST EXCLUSIVE HIGH I.Q. SOCIETY,” listing the President of United Giga Society as “YoungHoon Bryan Kim.” In addition, the certificate of United Giga Society claimed “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” was the “Founder” of United Giga Society in 2021. Therefore, United Giga Society contact person “Bryan Kim” released a press release through ABSNewswire about United Giga Society founded by “Younhoon [sic] Bryan Kim” led by “President: YoungHoon Bryan Kim,” and the wording in the United Giga Society’s press release was similar to that of the Giga Society founded by Paul Cooijmans.

Another press release from ABSNewswire entitled “GIGA society – What is the real Giga Society?” was released on July 6, 2022, claiming “The official GIGA Society was originally established in 2001 as the Esoteriq Society by Masaaki Yamauchi.” This claim is echoed later. “YoungHoon Kim” edited only two entries in Golden, on World Genius Directory and GIGA Society. Golden claims “GIGA Society” founded in 2001 by Masaaki Yamauchi. The “World Genius Directory” entry only had 2 editors. It claimed, “The World Genius Directory was created by Dr. Jason Betts. Currently, YoungHoon Kim ranks first in the world according to this organization’s IQ data.”

Circa October 25, 2021, the listed membership of United Giga Society, were the following 9 individuals:

IACOVOS KOUKASGREECE

YOUNGHOON KIMSOUTH KOREA

MARIOS PRODROMOUCYPRUS

GLENN ALDENNORWAY

TOR ARNE JøRGENSENNORWAY

TOMAS PERNACZECH REPUBLIC

DANY PROVOSTCANADA

FENGZHI WUCHINATOM CHITTENDENUSA

Circa May 19, 2022, the membership was the following:

IACOVOS KOUKASGREECE

YOUNGHOON KIMSOUTH KOREA

EVANGELOS KATSIOULISGreece

RICK ROSNERUSA

MISLAV PREDAVECCROATIA

DANY PROVOSTCANADA

MARIOS PRODROMOUCYPRUS

TOMAS PERNACZECH REPUBLIC

FENGZHI WUCHINA

So, between October 25, 2021 and May 19, 2022, Glenn Alden, Tor Arne Jorgensen, Dany Provost, and Tom Chittenden, were listed then not listed as members, while Evangelos Katsioulis, Rick Rosner, Mislav Predavec, and Fengzhi Wu, were added to the membership.

Circa October 25, 2021, the partners listed for United Giga Society were United Sigma Intelligence Association (USIA),World Memory Championships (HongKong), Global Genius Directory, ESOTERIQ Society, Gifted High IQ Network,Genius High IQ Network, NOUS 200 High IQ Society, 6G High IQ Society, NOUS High IQ Society, 6N High IQ Society, ELITE High IQ Society, 4G High IQ Society, BRAIN High IQ Society, THIS High IQ Society, Opal Quest Group, TENIQ High IQ Network, Global High IQ Society, Canadian High IQ Society, American High IQ Society, Italian High IQ Society,Synapse High IQ Network, ICON High IQ Society, Callidus High IQ Society, Capabilis High IQ Society, Magnus High IQ Society, Egregius High IQ Society, and Profundus High IQ Society.

By March 7, 2022, President, Vice-President, and Membership Officer, changed to administrators, who were the same Iakovos Koukas, Masaaki Yamauchi, YoungHoon Kim, with the addition of Nikolaos Soulios.

By May 19, 2022, the partners for United Giga Society were no longer claimed on the website, while GIGA UNION was claimed through United Giga Society. GIGA UNION was described: “GIGA UNION is an association of societies whose membership requirements are IQ 190 SD15 or higher. The purpose of GIGA UNION is to unite and increase communication with IQ 190 scorers or IQ 190 societies around the world.” Listed below its description were several organizations: UNITED GIGA SOCIETY, SINGULARITY SOCIETY, ESOTERIQ SOCIETY, NOUS 200 Society, and6G HIGH IQ SOCIETY.

By June 10, 2022, United Giga Society’s website became THE GIGA SOCIETY 190. The United Giga Society Facebook group’s name was changed from “UNITED GIGA SOCIETY” to “GIGA SOCIETY 190” on June 9, 2022. The administrators for THE GIGA SOCIETY 190 were Iakovos Koukas, Masaaki Yamauchi, and YoungHoon Kim. Nikolaos Soulios was no longer listed. The members were YoungHoon Kim, Iakovos Koukas, Evangelos Katsioulis, Rick Rosner, Mislav Predavec, Dany Provost, Fengzhi Wu, Marios Prodromou, and Tomas Perna.

Giga Society 190 claimed, “Giga Society 190 was originally established in 2001 as the Esoteriq Society. The Giga Society 190 shares the history and spirit of the Esoteriq Society. Currently, the two societies are operating independently.” No founder is claimed for Giga Society 190. The United Giga Society certificate claimed a founding by “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” with the first press release and website active in 2021.

Circa June 28, 2022, THE GIGA SOCIETY 190 administrators were replaced with President Evangelos Katsioulis, MD, PhD, and Vice President Masaaki Yamauchi, BSc & Vice President Iakovos Koukas, MSc.

Circa July 6, 2022, THE GIGA SOCIETY 190 became GIGA Society, where “GIGA stands for Global Intellectual Giga Association.” The United Giga Society Facebook group page was renamed again–from GIGA SOCIETY 190–on July 4, 2022 to “GIGA Society — Discussion Group” and then on July 6, 2022 to “GIGA Society — Secret Group.” President Evangelos Katsioulis, MD, PhD, and Vice President Masaaki Yamauchi, BSc & Vice President Iakovos Koukas, MSc were no longer listed on the website in those capacities. Neither were the prior administrators listed in their prior capacities. Previously listed members Evangelos Katsioulis, Dany Provost, and Rick Rosner were removed and Kirk Butt, Tom Chittenden, and Tianxi Yu were added to the membership. Chittenden was added, again in this round after removal between October 25, 2021 and May 19, 2022, originally.

Circa July 7, 2022, a new website, gigasociety.net, was registered in place of the September 9, 2021 web domain registered for United Giga Society–https://gigaiqsociety.org. Links led from the latter to the former.

Circa July 12, 2022, on the new web domain, GIGA Society created the GIGA NETWORK. The GIGA NETWORK was described as “an alliance of high IQ societies worldwide. The purpose of GIGA NETWORK is to unite and increase communication with high IQ scorers or high societies around the world.” In addition, GIGA Society was described there: “GIGA Society is an extremely high IQ society for those who scored IQ 190 SD15 on the high range IQ test. The society was originally established in 2001.”

Circa August 17, 2022, the officers of GIGA Society were YoungHoon Kim, (South Korea), Masaaki Yamauchi(Japan),Claus Volko, (Austria), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). GIGA Publication was started. It stated.

For the first time in the world, the publication of the GIGA Society was brought to the book market. Although it is only a record of the society’s current state, this information will become a valuable piece of history in the future.

Amazon Kindle: https://www.amazon.com/dp/B0B6B3KLXL/ref=cm_sw_r_tw_dp_6S2TA4K1YW6RY7HZR20D

The Kindle edition book has since been removed from availability. Advisors listed were Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia),Manahel Thabet, PhD (UAE), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada),Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA),Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), and Amit M. Shelat, MD (USA). The GIGA Council was formed. The GIGA Society stated, “The GIGA Council was formed to select the GIGA Society’s admission tests and to discover the best high range IQ tests.” The members of the GIGA Council were Mislav Predavec (Croatia), Kirk Raymond Butt (Canada), andYoungHoon Kim (South Korea). The GIGA Network comprised of GIGA Society, Global Genius Registry, Generiq Society, Grand Master Society, Prometheus 2.0, Nobel Society, ESOTERIQ Society,EVANGELIQ Society, GIGA Society, Global Genius Registry, Generiq Society, Grand Master Society, Prometheus 2.0,Nobel Society, ESOTERIQ Society, and EVANGELIQ Society.

Circa September 29, 2022, Marco Ripà was added to the membership list. The GIGA Society claimed, “The official GIGA Society was originally established in 2001 as the Esoteriq Society by Masaaki Yamauchi. GIGA Society shares the history and spirit of the Esoteriq Society. Currently, the two societies are operating independently.” The United Giga Society, in 2021, certificate claimed “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” and the website claimed “YoungHoon Bryan Kim” was the President & Founder.

Circa January 8 to 26, the United Giga Society Facebook page name changed again from “GIGA Society — The Official GIGA High IQ Society” on Jan 8, 2023 to “GIGA Society Membership” on Jan 8, 2023 to “GIGA Society Official” on Jan 26, 2023.

Circa February 5, 2023, GIGA Network claimed:

Anyone with an IQ score within the top 1% or an IQ 135 (SD15) or higher can join GIGA Network as a regular member. After membership registration is approved, members can receive the official GIGA Network certificate including a certified IQ score. An official member of the GIGA Network has a personal profile within the GIGA Network website. A sample profile can be found here.

Circa February 7, 2023, the GIGA committee was founded, saying, “GIGA committee was established to secure democracy and fairness in administration, introduce specialized knowledge, and discuss decision-making by GIGA Soceity [sic] and GIGA Network.” Its members were Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), Manahel Thabet, PhD (KSA), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands), Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), YoungHoon Kim (South Korea), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). GIGA Society is claimed as “an experimental project of GIGA Network.” The updated list of the GIGA Network is GIGA SOCIETY,ESOTERIQ SOCIETY, GRAND MASTER SOCIETY, PROMETHEUS 2.0 SOCIETY, NOBEL SOCIETY,GLOBAL GENIUS REGISTRY, and KIT HIGH RANGE IQ TEST. A new web domain was made for GIGA Network at this time–https://www.giga-network.org/. Its About page stated:

GIGA Network is a global organization for the high intelligence network founded by YoungHoon Kim who is ranked number one in the World Genius Directory. The aim of GIGA Network is to integrate high IQ people & societies, to certify high IQ scores, and to publish GIGA Records which is the world’s highest IQ list certified by GIGA Network. GIGA in GIGA Network means Global Intelligence Giga Association.

Circa March 14, 2023, GIGA Publications had a new book for high-range tests. This is still online. The tests accepted for admission were KIT High Range IQ Test (by YoungHoon Kim), Hoeflin Power Test (by Ronald K. Hoeflin), Hoeflin’s Ultra Test (by Roanld K. Hoeflin), Eureka Test (by N. Lygeros), G-test (by N. Lygeros), 916 (by Laurent Dubois), Hyper Test (by Laurent Dubois), LSHR (by Ivan Ivec), LSHR Light (by Ivan Ivec), DOT&LINE&PLANE (by Tianxi Yu),Death Figures (by Tianxi Yu), Ivory Tower (by Tianxi Yu), Cats Are Tailors (by Mahir Wu), LDA-SWaN (by Gianluigi Lombardi), Challenger (by Zoran Bijac), SLSE II (by Jonathan Wai), Lux25 (by Jason Betts), and Sigma Test Extended (Hindemburg Melão Jr.). The GIGA Network claimed:

GIGA Network is a global organization for the high intelligence network founded by YoungHoon Kim who is ranked number one in the World Genius Directory. The aim of GIGA Network is to integrate high IQ people & societies, to certify high IQ scores, and to publish GIGA Records which is the world’s highest IQ list certified by GIGA Network. GIGA in GIGA Network means Global Intelligence Giga Association.    

GIGA Network uses cutting-edge statistics and scientific technologies to verify human high intelligence. The limits of human intelligence will be challenged by experimental high intelligence assessments called high range IQ test. GIGA Network serves as an institution that recognizes IQ scores by evaluating them. It will serve as an official certification authority in the high IQ network.

The GIGA Network established the Grand Master Society, the Prometheus 2.0 Society, and the Nobel Society with the GIGA Society at the head for the purpose of research on high intelligence.

Circa March 22, 2023, the GIGA Records was created with a sample certificate presented. It has since been deleted.

Circa May 13, 2023, there was a GIGA Network facebook page. It has since been deleted. Jeff Leonard was added as a member. GIGA Society was no longer claimed as established by Esoteriq Society by Maasaki Yamauchi in 2001. No claimed President or Founder.

Circa September 3, 2023, no claimed president or founder since 2021 under United Giga Society with Founder “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” & President “YoungHoon Bryan Kim,” or 2022 with President Evangelos Katsioulis, MD, PhD, or then in 2022 claimed as established in 2001 as Esoteriq Society by Masaaki Yamauchi or Masaaki Yamauchi as the Founder. GIGA Society said about its foundation:

GIGA Foundation is a global organization for the high intelligence network founded by YoungHoon Kim who is ranked number one in the World Genius Directory. The aim of GIGA Foundation is to integrate high IQ people & societies, to certify high IQ scores, and to publish GIGA Records which is the world’s highest IQ list certified by GIGA Foundation. GIGA in GIGA Foundation means Global Intelligence Giga Association.    

GIGA Foundation uses cutting-edge statistics and scientific technologies to verify human high intelligence. The limits of human intelligence will be challenged by experimental high intelligence assessments called high range IQ test. GIGA Foundation serves as an institution that recognizes IQ scores by evaluating them. It will serve as an official certification authority in the high IQ network.

The GIGA Foundation established the Grand Master Society, the Prometheus 2.0 Society, and the Nobel Society with the GIGA Society at the head for the purpose of research on high intelligence.

Circa April 20, 2024, a new president was claimed for the GIGA Society. The GIGA Society said, “The President of GIGA Society is Dr. Tom Chittenden who is an Honorary Professor in the Department of Artificial Intelligence at the University of London.” Dr. Tom Chittenden’s LinkedIn profile lists a presidency beginning October, 2023.  The updated GIGA committee included Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Manahel Thabet, PhD (KSA), Fabiano de Abreu, PhD (Brazil), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands), Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). The Hyper Society was created. The website descriptions explained:

HYPER Society

HYPER Society is an intellectual enhancement and self-development community founded by United Intelligence Research Institute of USIA and YoungHoon Kim, the record holder of the highest IQ officially certified by Korea Record Institute, World Genius Dictionary and Global Genius Registry (IQ 210, SD15 = IQ 276, SD24). 

*HYPER Society is a cooperative organization of GIGA Society.

HYPER Mission

The goal of HYPER Society is to provide mentoring for personal and interpersonal growth and social and emotional self-realization that cannot be experienced outside by sharing and communicating with each other’s intellectual curiosity.

Contact

      • Email: lab@usiassociation.org

Highest IQ 276 was established as a webpage, too. GIGA Society claimed to be founded in 2001; no reference to Masaaki Yamauchi or Esoteriq Society at that time. HYPER Society has since been deleted.

Circa June 22, 2024, GIGA Society claimed Ronald Hoeflin was the “Honorary Founder” of GIGA Society, and founded in 1982, as follows:

GIGA Society, as the world’s most exclusive high IQ organization, was originally founded in 1982 by Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin under the name Mega Society as the world’s highest IQ society which was the only one listed in Guinness Book of World Records in histoy. [sic] However, while the Mega Society sets a very high intelligence level of one in a million as a condition for membership, GIGA Society sets a condition for joining a superintelligence of one in a billion…

◆ NOTE: As the most exclusive high IQ organization for individuals with an intelligence of one in a billion, GIGA Society continues the spirit of Ronald K. Hoeflin and his Mega Society…

…HONORARY FOUNDER

Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin

Circa July 16, 2024, GIGA Society repeated the claims as well as noted and warned:

■ NOTE: Except for the nine members above, GIGA Society does not have any other members.

■ NOTE: As the most exclusive high IQ organization for individuals with an intelligence of one in a billion, GIGA Society continues the spirit of Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin and his Mega Society.

■ Warning: Here is the official GIGA Society™ for those who score IQ 190 (SD 15) on an acceptable high range IQ test. However, there is another giga-level group which accepts unprofessional uncensored tests authored by the group’s founder who is not properly disciplined academically.

Circa August 14, 2024, for the GIGA Society, all claims to the honorary presidency of Dr. Ronald Hoeflin were removed in addition to removal of claims to GIGA Society being founded in 1982.

Circa August, 2024, according to the Mega Society, YoungHoon Bryan Kim was expelled by the Mega Society following a membership vote with 1 vote in defense of YoungHoon Bryan Kim and the rest against him. YoungHoon Bryan Kim then sent an email to the Mega Society as a then-former Mega Society member claiming withdrawal from the Mega Society. As of August 2024, Kim is no longer listed as a member of the Mega Society. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society channels: https://megasociety.org/#officers. GIGA Society (™) then released a statement claiming YoungHoon Bryan Kim voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society.

YoungHoon Bryan Kim connected Scott Douglas Jacobsen to Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin for a 3-part interview published in In-Sight Publishing’s platform in 2019, and then republished the 3-part interview on the United Sigma Intelligence Association website with Kim’s approval. In total, these extensive views and ideas of Hoeflin were published in comprehensive interviews on the In-Sight Publishing website, United Sigma Intelligence Association website, and in the former USIA Research Journal–this has since been deleted–with Dr. Ronald Hoeflin in 2019/2020. No public allegations against Hoeflin or others were made between 2019 and July, 2024 to views or opinions expressed by Hoeflin. As cited in “On High-Range Test Construction 19: Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin”:

*Original publication in In-Sight 1, 2, and 3, and republished in the USIA Research Journal (United Sigma Intelligence Association) in 2019/2020 under the leadership of YoungHoon Kim founded by HanKyung Lee, M.D.in2007 as United Sigma Korea and registered in 2023 by YoungHoon Bryan Kim (USIA Website: 1, 2, 3; USIA Research Journal: 1, 2, 3; USIA Blog: 1, 2, 3).*

Circa August, 2024, onwards, the allegations against several people and organizations were made on several organizational and media platforms, referenced in the October, 2024 update and here. Based on available records, the following sequence of events occurred from removing Hoeflin’s name from the GIGA Society (™) website followed by allegations against several people and organizations: Ronald Hoeflin name claim and founder claim removal from GIGA Society (™) website, Mega Society expulsion of YoungHoon Bryan Kim as a member, YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s withdrawal claim letter to Mega Society as a then-former Mega Society member, GIGA Society (™) Medium account article with voluntary resignation claim for YoungHoon Bryan Kim, and then most of the GIGA Society (™) and other organizational-and-outlet allegations.

Circa November 4, 2024, the GIGA Committee members are Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA) YoungHoon Kim, DSc, hc., EdD, hc. (South Korea), Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands), Soo-Young Kwon, PhD (South Korea), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). The GIGA Society™ claimed to be founded by The Brain Trust registered in 1989, as in the following:

As an experimental high-range IQ project, GIGA SocietyTM is an extremely high IQ society for the certified highest IQ people who scored at or above IQ 190 (SD 15) on an acceptable high-range IQ test, in partnership with World Mind Sports Council & World Memory Championships founded by Tony Buzan, the inventor of Mind Maps. GIGA SocietyTM was founded by The Brain Trust registered in 1989 as a nonprofit organization in the United Kingdom.

The only other giga-level society with both the theoretical level and the title “Giga Society” was founded by Paul Cooijmans in 1996. This has been the only claimed founder and founding date of the Giga Society in contrast to the United Giga Society to the GIGA Society (™). Jeff Leonard no longer listed as a member of GIGA Society (™). Christopher Harding, the Founder of the International Society for Philosophical Enquiry, died in August of 2024. Since Harding’s death, he has been listed as a member of the GIGA Society (™). Therefore, after Harding’s passing, his name appeared on the GIGA Society (™) membership list.

Therefore:

  • The first press release and press contact person was Bryan Kim shortly after the registration of the first website in late 2021.
  • The name of the organization since 2021 registration of the website and release of the first press release–referencing the Facebook group page name changes–has been changed several times.
  • The web domain registrations for United Giga Society to GIGA Society–the name changes over time–have beenJuly 7, 2022 for gigasociety.net and September 9, 2021 for https://gigaiqsociety.org.
  • The claimed founders have been “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim,” Masaaki Yamauchi, Ronald Hoeflin, and The Brain Trust of the deceased Tony Buzan, with the original press release and website released in 2021, then claimed founding in 2001 (Esoteriq Society), then claimed founding in 1982 (The Mega Society), then claimed as “founded by The Brain Trust registered in 1989 as a nonprofit organization in the United Kingdom,” respectively.
  • The presidents have been YoungHoon Bryan Kim, Evangelos Katsioulis, and Tom Chittenden.
  • The membership officer has been Masaaki Yamauchi.
  • The vice presidents have been Iakovos Koukas and Masaaki Yamauchi.
  • The administrators have been Iakovos Koukas, Masaaki Yamauchi, YoungHoon Kim, and Nikolaos Soulios.
  • The GIGA Council members have been Mislav Predavec (Croatia), Kirk Raymond Butt (Canada), and YoungHoon Kim (South Korea).
  • The committee members have been Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Fabiano de Abreu, PhD (Brazil), Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Kathy Kendrick (USA), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Manahel Thabet, PhD (KSA), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), YoungHoon Kim (South Korea), and Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands).
  • The members have been Iacovos Koukas, YoungHoon Kim, Marios Prodromou, Glenn Alden, Tor Arne Jørgensen, Tomas Perna, Dany Provost, Fengzhi Wu, Tom Chittenden, Evangelos Katsioulis, Rick Rosner, Mislav Predavec, Kirk Butt, Tianxi Yu, Jeff Leonard, and Christopher Harding.
  • The partners have been United Sigma Intelligence Association (USIA), World Memory Championships (HongKong), Global Genius Directory, ESOTERIQ Society, Gifted High IQ Network, Genius High IQ Network, NOUS 200 High IQ Society, 6G High IQ Society, NOUS High IQ Society, 6N High IQ Society, ELITE High IQ Society, 4G High IQ Society, BRAIN High IQ Society, THIS High IQ Society, Opal Quest Group, TENIQ High IQ Network, Global High IQ Society, Canadian High IQ Society, American High IQ Society, Italian High IQ Society, Synapse High IQ Network, ICON High IQ Society, Callidus High IQ Society, Capabilis High IQ Society, Magnus High IQ Society, Egregius High IQ Society, and Profundus High IQ Society, and World Mind Sports Council & World Memory Championships.
  • The GIGA UNION, GIGA Network, or GIGA Foundation, members have been 6G High IQ Society, Esoteriq Society, Evangeliq Society, Generiq Society, Giga Society, Global Genius Registry, Grand Master Society, KIT High Range IQ Test, Nobel Society, Nous 200 Society, Prometheus 2.0, Singularity Society, and United Giga Society.

The variety of allegations on the GIGA Society (™) Medium account were replicated about “Scott Douglas Jacobsen” in a prior version on the United Sigma Intelligence Association YouTube channel: Mark Coeckelberg,  Maria Ho, Ellen Langer, Ian Terry,  Richard Nisbett, Duncan Pritchard, Martin Rees, and Howard Gardner (who gave an extensive assessment of the United Sigma Intelligence Association).

The only listed LinkedIn employee of the United Sigma Intelligence Association is 1 person, YoungHoon Bryan Kim. The only listed LinkedIn employee of the GIGA Society (™) is 1 person, YoungHoon Bryan Kim. YoungHoon Bryan Kim listed having worked at GIGA Society (™) for 2 years and 11 months, and United Sigma Intelligence Association for 5 years. There is only 1 employee listed for each in the 2 years and 11 month span as well as 5 year period of employment, GIGA Society (™) and United Sigma Intelligence Association, respectively. Posts on the GIGA Society (™) Medium account and the United Sigma Intelligence Association YouTube channel have included allegations regarding several individuals and organizations. Noted in the October update, about numerous individuals and organizations:

Ronald Hoeflin (1), the “Mega Society,” (1) “IQ Olympiad,” (1) “South Korean Jeong Kye-won(정계원) called Andrew Zheng or Andrew Jeong,” (1) “another giga-level group” and here, (1, 2) and “Scott Douglas Jacobsen.” (1)

Most of these were posted during and after August, 2024. One related to “Scott Douglas Jacobsen” stated “Aubrey de Grey” into it. The name, “Aubrey de Grey,” has been removed, while the allegation of “sex offender” remains there. (1) The Aubrey de Grey interview by Ian Bott for United Sigma Intelligence Association was online for several years until August, 2024, then moved to a private video or removed from the United Sigma Intelligence Association Channel, and then the allegations by GIGA Society (™) against Aubrey de Grey were made. The longest consistent allegation since founding as United Giga Society in 2021 by “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” was in the press release by “Bryan Kim” and against ‘another giga-level group.’ Similar statements were published on various platforms, including www.iqsingularity.com extensively, United Sigma Intelligence Association main site, the www.geni.com article entitled “Highest IQ 276 Ever Recorded in the World in 2024,” the vocal.media article entitled “Highest IQ 276 Ever Recorded in the World 2024,” the USIA YouTube channel more extensively, https://www.202society.org/ website extensively, and numerous other places, even in YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s Instagram account claiming more fully on August 28, 2024:

The founder of Mega Society, Dr. Ronald Hoeflin founded the cryptocurrency coin company IQ Olympiad (Foundation) together with South Korean Jeong Kye-won(정계원) called Andrew Zheng or Andrew Jeong.

They are illegally stealing the intellectual property of YoungHoon Kim and YoungHoon Kim’s United Sigma Intelligence Association(USIA). YoungHoon Kim and his organization USIA are not affiliated with IQ Olympiad in any way.

For these reasons and Mega Society’s support for sex offender and extreme racism with eugenics, YoungHoon Kim voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society in August 2024.

GIGA Society (™) Medium account (12 followers at present) articles relate mostly about claims about or issues relating to YoungHoon Bryan Kim. These articles include “Introduction to GIGA Society™,” “What is High Range IQ Test?,” “GIGA MEMBERS,” “IQ Olympiad & Mega Society,” “World’s Highest IQ 276 Ever Recorded in History,” “GIGA Society™ Members,” “Global Genius Registry | World’s Highest IQ People,” “Top 10 People Alive with the World’s Highest IQ Ever Recorded,” “NANO Society, Founded by Dr. Ivan Ivec,” “Dr. YoungHoon Kim voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society,” “Official World Record® Holder for The World’s Highest IQ,” “Warning for Spreading False Information – GIGA Society™,” and “Dr. YoungHoon Kim, Wikipedia, World’s Highest IQ 276 Record in History.”

All community posts on the GIGA Society YouTube channel relate only to YoungHoon Bryan Kim. All posts on the GIGA Society Instagram page relate only to YoungHoon Bryan Kim. These reflect content and posts on the Instagram page for YoungHoon Bryan Kim.

Circa June 28, 2024, following the release of the press release by ABSNewswire entitled “GIGA SOCIETY, THE WORLD’S MOST EXCLUSIVE HIGH I.Q. SOCIETY” (October 1, 2021) with contact person “Bryan Kim” for United Giga Society claiming Founder “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” and President “YoungHoon Bryan Kim,” GIGA Society (™) published “Top 10 People Alive with the World’s Highest IQ Ever Recorded” (May 27, 2024) in its Medium account and EINPresswire released a press release entitled “GIGA Society Announces List of People with Highest IQ in the World in 2024.” The EINPresswire press release said, “Note: This article was written in collaboration with the GIGA Society.” Of YoungHoon Bryan Kim, it stated:

As of 2024, the highest recorded IQ score belongs to YoungHoon Kim from South Korea, with an IQ of 276. This score is verified by multiple organizations, including the Korea Record Institute, World Genius Directory, Global Genius Registry, Esoteriq Society, and GIGA Society. YoungHoon Kim’s exceptional intelligence is recognized globally, and he holds memberships in several extremely high-IQ societies such as the Giga Society and the Mega Society which was the only one listed in the Guinness World Records in history. 

His achievements span various fields, including psychology, neuroscience, and linguistics. Serving as an intelligence specialist advisor at the World Mind Sports Council and World Memory Championships, YoungHoon Kim founded an organization, the United Sigma Intelligence Association for the world’s brightest minds, which includes seven Nobel Prize winners. From his organization, the greatest minds in the world such as Noam Chomsky, Yuval Harari, Richard Dawkins, Howard Gardner, Neil deGrasse Tyson, and Terence Tao have received official awards with the winners’ consent.

This content was picked up by several publications and repeated.

From July 16, 2021, to November 10, 2024, these amount to many of the evolutions since the origin of United Giga Society’s instantiations, with the press release and first website registration as United Giga Society, to United Giga Society (USIA), UNITED GIGA SOCIETY (USIA), UNITED GIGA SOCIETY, GIGA SOCIETY 190, and GIGA Society Official described on Facebook, and then to the current GIGA Society (), as documented above.]

[Update November 17, 2024: Based on further investigation, Paul Cooijmans, Founder of the Giga Society and the Glia Society, expelled YoungHoon Bryan Kim from the Glia Society around the time of “United Giga Society” as a high-I.Q. society name use, as investigated in the November 10, 2024 update. (United Giga Society transitioned over many iterations into GIGA Society.) This reflects the expulsion of Kim from the Mega Society in August of 2024. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society contact channels, https://megasociety.org/#officers, and official Glia Society & Giga Society contact channels, https://paulcooijmans.com/contact.html, for each case.

Circa Spring, 2020, I resigned from the United Sigma Intelligence Association (USIA) as its executive director and its main editor. My direct editorial successor was one of the main founding figures of the Intelligent Design creationism movement, Dr. William Dembski, particularly known for work on Specified Complexity, and in the International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (ISCID) (of which Mr. Christopher Michael Langan was among its select ISCID Fellows) and its flagship Intelligent Design creationism journal. Other editorial replacements included other members of the Mega Foundation community. Both ISCID and PCID are defunct now. At the time, I served as Secretary-General of Young Humanists International as well, as the youth branch of Humanists International. Upon resignation from USIA, the United Sigma Intelligence Association with no humanist history and led by a Christian President, YoungHoon Bryan Kim–who eventually in 2023 intended on becoming a Christian pastor and Christian evangelist as someone in ‘the pastor candidate course at Hanshin University Graduate School of Theology directly managed by the Korean Presbyterian Association,’ applied to become a member organization of the same non-religious global secular humanist institution, Humanists International. United Sigma Intelligence Association’s organizational membership was rejected. They began hiring, at least, one long-term friend and colleague, Angeleos Sofocleous too. Later, Sofocleous no longer works for USIA.

Furthermore, there was no contact, or minimal contact in terse response, with YoungHoon Bryan Kim since the resignation in Spring, 2020. However, for about three years after resignation, I received emails from YoungHoon Bryan Kim with various content. The varied content included offers for work as head editor again, wanting to restore our relationship, asking for my forgiveness, claiming admiration for my passionate activities, the difficult in finding someone who is as enthusiastic as me about these activities, promises to treat me well as a humanist, claiming to be no longer hostile or aggressive to others, claiming to have matured, someone (Kim) who wants to be friends with wide ranges of communities as someone founding various communities, offers to allow me to write new articles, information about new projects including leading IQ Olympiad, offers to work on anything, to be operating the Nobel SocietyPrometheus 2.0Grand Master Societynew GIGA Society, and USIA, and creating admissions tests for them, claiming to make a list of high range IQ tests with Mislav Predavec and Kirk Butt, that he’s working with Claus Volko and Anja Jaenicke to publish the journals for those societies, claiming to be willing to do anything with me and whatever I suggest, that it would be an honour to work with me once again, and links to claims as a Fellow of the World Genius Directory (12) with the articles claiming Kim’s membership in the Mega Society and in United Giga Society, etc. Communication was instigated one-way from YoungHoon Bryan Kim to me, over the course of about three years, since my resignation in the Spring, 2020.

YoungHoon Bryan Kim claimed a reason for my resignation from USIA in relation to the Mega Foundation’s Dr. Gina Langan and Mr. Christopher Michael Langan in a letter to the Mega Society in the Summer of 2024. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society contact channels, https://megasociety.org/#officers. In addition, the United Sigma Intelligence Association former partner, Mega Foundation, maintained a post from April 18, 2020, for several years, with some content asserting a claim for the reason for my resignation from USIA, reinforced by Mr. Langan in the post’s comments section claiming the same using personal attacks or ad hominem, “Little Scott Jacobsen is the idiot who resigned as ‘chief editor’ of the USIA journal in protest over the partnership.” I never gave the reason(s) for formal resignation from the United Sigma Intelligence Association. Therefore, neither YoungHoon Bryan Kim, the USIA, Mr. Christopher Michael Langan, Dr. Gina Langan, nor Mega Foundation, were privy to this information, and so could not know this real reason or the real reasons for resignation from USIA, though presented claims up to over four years later. I never appointed any fellows, nor do I identify as a militant atheist. Fellows were solely finalized in appointment by the then-President and current President of the United Sigma Intelligence Association, YoungHoon Bryan Kim.

Circa 2024, further inquiries revealed, Tianxi Yu resigned from GIGA Society, formerly United Giga Society founded by “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim,” and requested removal of his name from the GIGA Society, website. He gave commentary about his experience in a post on Zhihu, as translated by ChatGPT:

“I’m honestly shocked—I thought I’d gone “diving” (laying low), but a friend just told me I got “called out.” Well, since I’ve got some complaints about the whole GIGA Society thing too, let’s get into it.

I was one of the first to join Younghoon Kim’s GIGA Society. No idea how YK did it, scoring over 200 and convincing Evangelos Katsioulis to endorse the “legitimacy” of his GIGA Society. Back then, YK took over this whole GIGA scene and invited me to join. I thought, “Well, why not?”—it was free and gave me some “status.”

But the more I learned about the high-IQ community abroad, the more it all just started to feel like a joke. Besides YK, there’s also Iakovos Koukas, both scoring high on verbal tests. When I found that out, I had a massive “WTF” moment. Like, how do they even dare to use those super-easy verbal tests as their IQ scores? Anyone who knows the field understands that numbers and spatial problems are generally respected because they show real depth of thinking, but verbal tests? Realistically, verbal test scales don’t go as high as numbers and spatial tests because they just don’t measure as much. But these guys abroad? They treat it like it’s the real deal.

I’ve actually chatted with IK a few times. My takeaway? He’s not exactly impressive. He doesn’t speak with conviction, and his thinking lacks edge. But IK’s sneaky—he’ll say stuff like, “I don’t really care about IQ,” but then acts like, “I’m the smartest one around.” And the worst part? People actually buy it. YK, though, is one of the most shameless idiots I’ve ever met. Not only does he use crappy test scores, but he also goes around bragging he’s got an IQ of 276 (using SD24, no less), claiming he’s the smartest person alive (gigasociety.net/worlds-…). To sell this image, he even promotes it on YouTube and has entries about it on Medium, Wikipedia, and LinkedIn. Honestly, it’s wild. I’ve never seen someone so shameless—are all Koreans like this?

I didn’t talk with YK much, but when I first joined GIGA, he buttered me up, calling me the “smartest person he knew.” No clue how many times he’s used that line—Scott Jacobsen told me YK said the same to him. I glanced at his KIT series of problems, and let’s just say they’re awful. The scale doesn’t match what I’d expect; I even wonder if he’s ever taken a legitimate test. But YK’s managed to get support from a lot of people in the international high-IQ circles—besides EK and IK, there’s Mislav Predavec, Kirk Butt, and others backing him.

All of this has made me lose interest, so I’ve basically quit all the international societies. I left GIGA ages ago, and after getting called out today, I emailed them to remove my name from their member list. These people are just a bunch of scammers propping each other up, and being listed as a member makes me feel like an accomplice. Historically, the three most recognized societies with IQ cutoffs above 190 were GIGA Society, Nano Society, and Esoteriq Society. I used to be a member of all three, but now I’m only keeping my membership in Ivan Ivec’s Nano Society, which currently has six members worldwide. Some might ask, “What about Esoteriq Society?” Well, that got taken over by YK too—Masaaki Yamauchi got overrun by him. I’d already emailed Esoteriq Society ages ago to quit, but no one replied, so my name’s still there.

As of now, the only person in China who’s joined Paul Cooijmans’ official GIGA Society is Wu Meiheng. He got a perfect score on PC’s Alchemist test with an IQ of 196, which is seriously impressive. I also thought about scoring on PC’s tests, but our compatibility is so bad I got my lowest score ever.

Nowadays, the international high-IQ circles are full of people just hyping themselves up and chatting all day like they’re nuclear-powered mules, never taking a break. I’d suggest taking a page out of Jonathan Wai’s book—while he may not be the most meticulous grader, the man really puts in the work. Google Scholar shows he’s been cited 5,746 times, with his top paper cited 2,461 times. In 2024 alone, he’s published ten papers, mostly as the first or corresponding author—a true academic heavyweight. Since subscribing to his profile, I’m constantly getting Google Scholar Alerts for “Jonathan Wai – new article.” Then I look at the crap I’ve produced and my pitiful citations, and I’m just stunned.”

Tianxi Yu no longer listed on the GIGA Society website as a member based on request for resignation from GIGA Society and removal of his name from the GIGA Society website, including quitting the Facebook group earlier.]

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Alan Goffinski, Composition and ‘Terrestrials’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/30

 Alan Goffinski is a producer, sound designer, and storyteller, currently a producer and music director for Terrestrials, a Radiolab for Kids podcast. With experience at WNYC, BBC, and more, Alan has earned multiple awards, including 2 Black Podcasting Awards and a Webby. A former touring musician, he co-founded Know No Stranger, an arts collective blending creativity with community. Alan’s diverse talents extend to gardening, fire-breathing, and bicycling, and he served as Executive Director for a community arts nonprofit in Charlottesville, Virginia. He continues to freelance in sound design and music composition. Goffinski talks about his role in Terrestrials, focusing on creating music that engages both kids and adults. Goffinski emphasizes the importance of authentic musical choices, avoiding condescension, and exploring varied genres. They discuss themes like recursive islands and treasure hunts, using music to enhance storytelling and foster emotional connections with listeners.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Alan Goffinski. First question: What is a songbud? I need to familiarize myself with the term. 

Alan Goffinski: Honestly, it’s not a name that I gave myself. It’s a name that Lulu Miller, the show’s writer, assigned me. In addition to producing episodes of Terrestrials, my role is to create music, write music, and play it to move the story along, add depth or context, or emphasize a scientific idea or point. You can think of my or this character’s role as a musical sidekick in the program.

Jacobsen: I listened to some of the performers, including a guest named Tasha. I enjoyed her music and listened to some of it before the interview. How did she get connected to the show? How do these artists get connected to the show? Do you search for them, or does another representative find them and ask, “What do you think?”

Goffinski: Yeah, we have a great lineup of musical cameos this season, with Tasha being the first you mentioned. She just released a new album on Bayonet Records. She recently finished a stint on Broadway in the Sufjan Stevens musical. All the cameos featured this season are from artists our team respects and is excited about incorporating into our work. We like to have fun with what we do. In the vein of Yo-Yo Ma on Sesame Street, we figured that including some Easter eggs for adults in the episodes would make the show more enjoyable for everyone, including ourselves. All of these connections are ones I’ve made through music or by reaching out because I was interested in a possible collaboration.

Jacobsen: Now, we have NASA scientists, poets, painters, even ethnologists coming on. It’s a science-oriented presentation. So, how do you characterize music and composition when thinking about scientific topics? Are you in a particular state of mind, rather than Jay-Z giving props to Tom Ford or rapping about New York? When approaching scientific and educational topics, are you asking about the process or the aesthetic choices around composition?

Goffinski: Many of these songs start as a group effort with the whole team. We have an excellent, dynamic team. We’re all friends who love to work together and collaborate. That might be our secret weapon—pitch meetings and brainstorming sessions are creative lightning, generating many fantastic ideas. You’ll notice in the show that we don’t write “kiddie music.” We try not to write down to kids. Instead, we invite them into varied musical genres and styles. This approach is partly because we want to create a family-friendly show everyone can enjoy. We also believe kids feel more valued and appreciated when they hear content that doesn’t talk down to them.

Jacobsen: So, that leads to the question: What does that mean in practical terms, in terms of aesthetic choice? How do you ensure the type of the music doesn’t stay the same while inviting kids into a wider range of musical styles? Because that’s a very interesting point that I hadn’t considered—you’re creating a family-friendly podcast for the whole family rather than just for kids. Some cartoons are strictly for children, with no inside jokes for adults or anything like that.

Goffinski: Yeah, we try not to do that. As much as we’d love to have a global hit like Baby Shark, we’re not trying to create something that annoys parents and makes them want to turn it off. We want the program to be one that people keep coming back to. So, we write songs that can be very emotional or fun, depending on the moment in the episode where the song appears. If we need a musical stinger to transition from one part of the show to the next or emphasize a point, that could be fun and playful. But we’re aiming for a big moment at the end of an episode, where we want kids to connect with the storyteller meaningfully or see themselves in the creature or character we’re focusing on. In that case, we are open to writing something more emotionally resonant. Does that answer your question?

Jacobsen: It helps a bit, but let me ask from a different angle. What are the guiding principles when it comes to musical selection? When people think of kids’ movies, they often have certain expectations, like a PG rating, which influences sound, visual effects, and storyline choices to stay within those boundaries. Are there specific choices you’re making to reflect family values and to create something enjoyable for families? Then are certain musical genres more appropriate for a family environment? Does that factor into your process?

Goffinski: Yes, I understand what you’re asking. Nothing is necessarily off-limits. When I write a song for kids in any genre, I aim to do it authentically. I want to honour the genre’s history and style, not create a caricature. We want it to be truly soulful if it’s a soul song. If it’s a punk song, we want it to feel like real punk. We want the music to have an impact and to resonate with listeners. We choose to include a punk or metal song in an episode. In that case, genre best serves that particular moment in the story. One thing I appreciate about working on this show with this team is that we don’t limit ourselves regarding musical style. We focus on what best fits the story we’re telling.

And I’m writing a different song repeatedly. It’s not all baby music. It’s not all childish. Yes, it’s for kids, but it’s also for us. We make the show and want to love and be proud of it. So, we put everything we’ve got into the songs we write. None of them are throwaways. 

Jacobsen: There was one particular episode, “The Bull’s Eye,” about treasure hunts and recursive islands. So, when you’re presenting on Treasure Hunt and Recursive Islands, what does it involve? Is it like an island on a lake, an island on a lake on an island, and so on? I recall a family member mentioning something like this during a camping trip discussion, which was very confusing. So, when you’re thinking about this concept—this idea of a lake on an island on a lake on an island—how do you approach that as a composer? How do you build that into your musical structure?

Goffinski: I’m excited about this one because it was my pitch, and I produced the episode. It allowed me to incorporate music and singing more deliberately and intricately, embedding them within the narrative. Using stacked harmonies and pitch, I was able to illustrate this idea of “stacking”—this nesting effect that happens with the geographic phenomenon of the island within a lake.

I know this can be hard to describe in words, but by stacking these harmonies—using higher voices to represent the tiny island in the center, then building out to the lake, the next island, the next lake, and so on, to the ocean—you end up with this layered, bull’s-eye sound. It’s like a rippling auditory experience that mirrors the concept of a recursive island. It’s satisfying. We use this musical device throughout the episode to help listeners grasp this somewhat confusing and abstract concept, framing it as a treasure hunt.

Jacobsen: That’s interesting—it makes me think of a quest. Is there a way to weave that theme into the musical structure so that listeners almost feel like they’re following a path or hunting for something? Is it possible to create that feeling through the music beyond just using stacked harmonies to replicate what’s happening visually in the landscape? It could even be as playful as Monty Python on their fake horses in The Holy Grail when they’re on a quest and run into the Frenchman or the man with three heads who wants little potted plants. 

Goffinski: That concept is captured in the episode’s closing song. We wanted to convey the idea that there’s excitement in the search, in keeping your eyes open and being willing to look at the world in new ways. So, I wrote a very upbeat, driving song that gives a sense of movement—like you’re travelling, moving forward in life, searching for a goal or pursuing something exciting or meaningful.

The song I’m referring to features a Nashville harpist named Timbre. She’s a fantastic musician who adds a delicate yet driving countermelody to the composition. This ties together the overlapping vocal lines and the unique time signature in a beautiful way, balancing the tension of the search with the joy of it and the joy of pursuing knowledge—or, in this case, the pursuit of a hobby or even a small, undiscovered patch of earth.

Jacobsen: What else is important for listeners to understand about using a wide range of musical genres and tuning them to the themes of these episodes centred on education and science?

Goffinski: I always come back to this idea of not talking down to kids. I will not teach them down but invite them into big ideas and conversations. In the same way that we use complex words in the podcast or invite kids along on emotional journeys—like those dealing with grief or loss—the musical compositions can do the same. They can bring kids along and invite them to explore a deeper sense of their own emotions. This way, they feel better equipped to carry what they learn from the podcast into their day-to-day lives—maybe they can exhibit more empathy, find more joy, or keep an open mind when encountering new ideas.

With that musical connection and a song that sticks in their heads, I’d like to think that kids and listeners of all ages can hold onto that experience. Hopefully, they carry it more firmly and deeply in their hearts and emotions.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Alan, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it. All good?

Goffinski: We’re good, man.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Brian Quigley on New Nicotine Replacement Therapy Technologies

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/30

Qnovia received FDA clearance for its Investigational New Drug (IND) application for RespiRx™ Nicotine Inhaler (QN-01), an innovative nicotine replacement therapy (NRT). A Phase 1 trial will assess its safety and effectiveness. CEO Brian Quigley highlights its potential to revolutionize smoking cessation and other treatments. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Brian Quigley, CEO of Qnovia, to discuss the RespiRx nicotine inhaler, also known as QN-01. With FDA clearance now obtained and clinical trials on the horizon, what inspired the development of this particular technology? Could you walk us through that process? Is this the only product the company offers?

Brian Quigley: Great! I’m excited to be speaking with you today. Qnovia is a company focused on developing a portfolio of inhaled therapeutics across various therapeutic areas. We are based in Richmond, Virginia. The core inspiration for our work stems from the technology behind what I’m holding right now—our device, the RespiRx. It is a handheld, portable nebulizer with a drug-filled cartridge. Nebulization has been used to safely deliver medicines via inhalation for decades.

We chose to focus on smoking cessation as our initial area of emphasis. On a personal note, my father was a lifelong smoker. He smoked for 50 years and tried to quit every year, using every combination of available therapies, but he was never able to successfully stop. The troubling reality is that millions of smokers are in the same situation. In the U.S., for example, there are approximately 28 million smokers, and more than half try to quit each year. Yet, the most common method they use is quitting cold turkey.

Why is that? Because the medications available to help them quit are outdated—most are over 20 years old. There has been little innovation in developing new treatments to help smokers quit, and the available options are largely ineffective. Our device aims to change that. RespiRx is a nicotine replacement therapy that delivers nicotine in an aerosol, allowing it to be inhaled into the lungs. This offers real advantages in terms of the speed and dosage of nicotine delivered, helping to alleviate cravings and withdrawal symptoms that smokers experience when attempting to quit. That’s a bit about the inspiration and the core technology behind what we’re doing.

Jacobsen: When going through FDA trials, people often wonder: How long do they take? How rigorous are they? What is the rejection or rerouting rate for new products?

Quigley: One positive aspect is that the public can trust that regulators ensure the safety and efficacy of the medicines that reach them. That’s the good news.

The challenge for a small company, however, is the significant time and financial investment required to meet the two critical thresholds for regulatory approval: safety and efficacy. At Qnovia, opening the IND (Investigational New Drug) application with the FDA means they have reviewed our initial safety data, as well as our device data on performance, controls, and compliance, and have deemed it safe to proceed with human clinical trials. However, there are three phases of clinical trials that need to be completed with the FDA.

Phase 1 focuses on demonstrating safety, tolerability, and getting a preliminary understanding of drug delivery in the body. That’s what we’ll be completing in our Phase 1 study. Phase 2 will involve approximately 100 subjects and will examine different dosing regimens and usage patterns to assess both tolerability and efficacy. Finally, the Phase 3 pivotal efficacy study generates the data that will be submitted as part of our New Drug Application (NDA) for FDA approval. In total, this process represents about four years of work and tens of millions of dollars invested in bringing the drug to market.

What’s interesting is that we’re advancing this technology in both the U.S. and the U.K. We’re doing this because the U.K. has a different mindset regarding how to demonstrate safety and efficacy for new smoking cessation medicines. They’ve created a pathway that, while not fast, cheap, or simple, is more streamlined and has clinical requirements that are easier for us to fund and execute. It takes less time and money compared to the U.S. However, our approach with any regulator we engage with is to address what they want to see, and our goal is to generate that data to ultimately get approved. That’s how we help save lives at the end of the day. So, in the U.S., we still have a lot of work to do. But the fact that we’re the first truly inhaled smoking cessation medicine to enter clinical trials is an important milestone.

We’ve already generated our first “first-in-human” data outside of the U.S., which gives us confidence in what our Phase 1 study will demonstrate. We are committed to continuing down this path to get this technology into the hands of smokers who want to quit.

Jacobsen: Would you consider the biggest hurdles to be in advancing this type of technology? As you mentioned, it’s been a long time since there was an update in this area, and smokers, who represent one of the largest groups struggling with addiction, are significantly impacted.

Quigley: The biggest hurdle lies in how regulators define efficacy. When it comes to drug development, the most common question I get asked is: “What endpoint do we need to show to get regulatory approval?” For smoking cessation, the endpoint is to use the medicine for 12 weeks as part of a step-down therapy. The FDA wants to see not only complete abstinence during those 12 weeks but also for 52 weeks after stopping the medication.

When you think about complete abstinence from addiction over 52 weeks, it’s incredibly difficult to achieve. Quitting smoking is extremely hard. If a person relapses, even with just one cigarette, it counts against us in demonstrating efficacy, and that’s a high bar. It’s achievable, but it is a very high standard.

What’s also interesting is that last year, the FDA published guidance to drive innovation in treating stimulant use disorders, such as methamphetamine and cocaine addiction. In that guidance, they proposed endpoints, including a reduction in the number of days someone uses these substances as a measure of progress from a public health perspective. When you compare this to the requirements for demonstrating efficacy in smoking cessation, there seems to be a bit of a disconnect.

The status quo for smoking cessation medicine is that someone out there today is smoking 20 cigarettes—the deadliest consumer product ever made. That presents a significant opportunity. In fact, the FDA is having a public hearing on October 21st, and there I will be sharing my views to contribute to the conversation about what else can be done to promote innovation in cessation medicine. That’s a real example of some of the challenges we’re facing.

Again, our view is that we’ll do the work. We’re a venture-backed company, so we’ll raise the capital and fund the necessary studies. However, when comparing the U.S. clinical pathway to the U.K. pathway, the reality is that, despite being a U.S.-based company, this product will likely be approved and available to help smokers quit in the U.K. years ahead of when it will be approved in the U.S.

Jacobsen: Earlier in the interview, you mentioned being a smaller company, which can be a big hurdle in itself, especially financially, compared to larger companies when going through the FDA approval process, from safety to efficacy. How significant is that barrier for smaller companies?

Quigley: It’s a double-edged sword, honestly. The strength we have is that we’re nimble. We move quickly and don’t have a big bureaucracy to navigate. A big part of being effective in this space is constantly learning, generating new data, and adapting. From that standpoint, being a smaller company is actually an advantage.

That said, we have only five employees at Qnovia. We rely heavily on external resources, advisors, and consultants to help guide us when and where we need support. So, bandwidth is definitely a challenge for a small company like ours, as there’s only so much we can do at any one time. The good news is that will change. We plan to bring more people on board and expand the team, but it’s still a double-edged sword.

Jacobsen: How do you make a compelling pitch to venture capitalists to say, “I have a good product, please invest in me”?

Quigley: That’s a great question. The key to winning over venture capitalists is data. The way they evaluate any drug development opportunity is by looking at the potential patient population and assessing the risk. They want to see data you’ve generated, where you are in the regulatory process, and how much validation you’ve achieved. The more data and validation, the lower the risk and the higher the likelihood that you’ll actually get your medicine into the hands of the people who need it.

What’s interesting, and this is a challenge specific to smoking cessation, is that many people I talk to ask, “If this could have been solved, wouldn’t it have been solved already?” So, there’s sometimes a perception that it’s an old problem and, while it’s still an issue, people wonder if it’s really worthwhile to invest in it. Then they compare it to what’s trendy, like GLP-1 drugs.

Everyone wants to have the next Ozempic, and some people think we should put our money there. So, oftentimes, we find ourselves speaking truth to a massive need, but we’re fighting against what’s trendy from an investor’s perspective. The good news is that we have a strong and committed base of investors who have backed this company because they believe in the importance of ending the death and disease caused by combustible cigarette use. If you buy into that mission, then you invest in our company.

I liken investing to being an actor. You have to go to 100 casting calls to find the right director who believes in you. But they are out there, and that’s how we’ve been able to get to this point and how we’ll continue to move forward.

Jacobsen: What would you consider the strongest critique of the company and the product?

Quigley: One of the challenges or critiques we hear frequently is around the confusion created by reduced-risk tobacco products, such as e-cigarettes. People often ask, “How do we compete with e-cigarettes and other reduced-risk products? And why do we even need new medicine? Shouldn’t those be the answer?”

My response is that it’s a nuanced view, but my strong belief is that we’re different. Smokers, when they become health-conscious, need multiple options. Some may say, “I’m not ready to quit, but I don’t want to die,” and that’s where reduced-risk products like e-cigarettes play an important role. We don’t compete with that—it’s a different need state. However, without a doubt, there are millions of smokers who ultimately say, “I want to stop. I no longer want to be addicted, and I can’t do it.” They’ve tried every product, but they keep going back to cigarettes, and their goal is to fully quit. That’s where we come in.

There are a lot of interesting dynamics in this space, but the development of new medicines—true medicines—has been left behind and somewhat lost in the noise. We’re not here to compete with reduced-risk products. We’re a drug company, while those products come from tobacco companies. We’re doing something different. If the public health vision of a future without cigarette use is to become a reality, then there will need to be a variety of products, including cessation medicines, to make that happen.

Jacobsen: Why will this technology reach the U.K. market so much faster than the U.S. market?

Quigley: It all comes down to the clinical endpoints. In the U.K., they’ve taken a more progressive approach to promoting innovation in smoking cessation medicine. They were one of the first countries to publicly support the role that e-cigarettes could play in helping smokers quit.

The guidance they’ve created is designed to help companies like ours, as well as e-cigarette companies, pursue medicinal licensing in the U.K. to help people quit smoking. Ultimately, their clinical requirements are different. Where in the U.S. we have to go through Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3 trials, in the U.K., there’s a single clinical study to be executed. The goal of that study is to demonstrate that the nicotine we’re delivering is lower than what’s delivered by a cigarette. The MHRA (Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency) has made the broad assumption that less nicotine than a cigarette means it’s safer, given that millions of people are smoking cigarettes today. So, by delivering less nicotine, we’re not introducing any new harm to society.

Efficacy, in this case, is defined by the relative increase in nicotine delivery compared to existing nicotine replacement therapies. The U.K. has taken a broader view of the public health need, simplifying the clinical studies required to get to market. That’s the biggest difference between the two regulatory pathways.

Jacobsen: What about accessibility in terms of personal finance? In the U.K., there’s a societal emphasis on equity in healthcare, while in the U.S., the focus is more on autonomy and privatized healthcare. With those different values and preferences, how do outcomes, provisions, access to healthcare systems, and available technologies change at the individual level? How does it affect consumers who want access to your product?

Quigley: That’s a great question. I would expect there to be some differences in how the product is tailored to fit the user population, considering preferences, the healthcare environment, and the perspectives of healthcare providers and stakeholders in the U.K. versus the U.S. I’ll give you an example: the NHS.

The National Health Service (NHS) in the U.K. has a robust infrastructure for stop-smoking treatments. In some of our early conversations with individuals from the NHS, they viewed this product as a step-down therapy. This means you start at a certain nicotine level, and the device controls how much nicotine you receive, gradually stepping down over time to help you fully quit.

The NHS highlighted an important consideration: one of the primary intervention points in the U.K. healthcare system for smokers is admission to a mental health facility. For example, if someone is admitted to a mental health facility, part of their treatment may include helping them stop smoking. Their concern was that stepping down too quickly could cause harm to a person in such a vulnerable state. Therefore, they expressed the need for more flexibility in how the medicine is delivered to different patient populations.

In the U.K., I can envision the device and its programmatic use as a medicine being more flexible, aligned with the feedback we receive from stakeholders in the public health system. This flexibility would be an important part of ensuring the product meets the needs of diverse patients, especially in settings like mental health facilities. That’s a big part of the work ahead.

The healthcare system and how patients interact with their healthcare providers are different between countries. For example, in the U.K., they’ve created a stop-smoking service program that runs through pharmacies. If I want to quit smoking, I can go to my pharmacy, where my pharmacist is trained to provide behavioral support and counseling for smoking cessation. If I meet with my pharmacist every week, I can get my medicine at no cost and receive that behavioral support, which is crucial for quitting. So, our medicine and its use must be designed and purpose-fit for how practitioners will engage with patients.

That’s a long way of saying that we are ultimately guided by what the patient population and healthcare environment look like in each geography. That informs what we need to do differently with the device.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today.

Quigley: No worries! It was great chatting with you. I appreciate it. It was great chatting with you. Great questions, by the way.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Carl Allen and Rick Rosner on Polls in America

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/29

Carl Allen discusses correcting misunderstandings about polling, particularly the common belief that polls predict election outcomes. Allen highlights that polls are snapshots of current opinion, not forecasts, and that even experts often misinterpret them. He compares polling to theoretical ideal gases, emphasizing that no poll is perfect, even in optimal conditions. While there’s “no such thing” as an ideal poll, there’s also no such thing as an ideal gas: but the “ideal” framework allows for a set of standards any poll, even nonideal ones, can be compared to. Currently, many people are shocked to find, that analysts in different countries use different, contradictory standards based on nothing more than their country’s tradition. Because polls are currently so poorly understood, Allen has drawn upon easily understood examples and analogies that are technical enough to satisfy any expert, but not too technical for the average reader. The book addresses issues like misinterpreting poll margins, the role of undecided voters, and how even well-conducted polls can be misused by media and analysts. Allen advocates for more transparent methodologies and scientific rigor in polling analysis. 

Rick G. Rosner is known for high scores on various high-range tests. He earned 12 years of college credit in under a year and graduated with the equivalent of eight majors. Rosner has written for popular shows like Crank Yankers and Jimmy Kimmel Live! and won a Writers Guild Award. He’s also worked as a bouncer, stripper, and roller-skating waiter. Featured in Errol Morris’s First Person, Rosner lost on Jeopardy! and famously sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire. He lives in Los Angeles with his wife and two dogs.

Carl Allen is the author of The Polls Weren’t Wrong and the owner of Triple Digit Speed Pitch, LLC. With a background in sports and political data, he has created new polling metrics and previously worked as a data scout for MLB and NFL. Allen holds a Master’s degree in Sport and Fitness Administration from the University of Louisville and is bilingual in English and Spanish. He is also a  passionate advocate for statistical literacy in polling analysis and science as a whole

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with ‘RealRickRosner’ and ‘RealCarlAllen’ to talk about polls, particularly a new book by Carl. The new book’s title is The Polls Weren’t Wrong, by Carl Allen. Thank you very much. Let’s take a step back. Carl, what was your original motivation for writing this particular book?

Carl Allen: I saw so much unscientific, poor analysis being done—not just in the media, but at the very top of the field. Often, when we have a complex concept that only scientists understand, the media breaks it down in a way that makes you cringe a little. It doesn’t make sense.

Polling data is unique at this point in the field. It’s been around for nearly 100 years in political polling. However, the problems with how the media discusses polls—the same misunderstandings—exist at the very top of the field. I always tell people why my book came out in 2024 and not 2020 because I couldn’t convince myself that people with the credentials—the experts in the field—didn’t understand some of these basic concepts. One of the most basic concepts is that polls are not predictions.

Polls are not predictions of election outcomes. When I say that, some people nod, saying, “Yes, that makes sense.” Others are extremely skeptical of the idea that experts—those who publish and write academic articles and books—don’t understand that. So, I had to show that they believe an accurate poll will predict an election outcome. That is a fundamental misunderstanding of what polls do and the data a poll provides.

I approached this not as a scientist or statistician but as a researcher and educator. The purpose of the book, in short, is twofold. First, it is to inform the public. Right now, the public needs to be more informed about how polls work, and that’s a problem.

Second, and slightly harder but arguably more important in the short term, is to fix how experts analyze polls. If experts change how they interpret and explain polls, the media will follow, and the public will be better informed. But right now, misinformation runs throughout. One of the main points of Carl’s book is that you can have excellent poll results. Still, the media and even high-level analysts can misinterpret the results.

Rick Rosner: And I have a lot of other gripes because most polls aren’t perfect.

Allen: No poll is perfect. There’s no such thing as a perfect poll. But as scientists, one way we explain things to beginners is to ask, “If this measurement were perfect in every way, what would it show us?” One example I use in the book is ideal gases.

If you’ve taken a chemistry class, you might remember ideal gases: P.V. equals nRT, volume, and temperature, all of which you must account for. But the secret about ideal gases is that they aren’t real. It’s not a real phenomenon. It’s something that educators and scientists created to explain a much more complex concept. Political polls, however, are easier to understand than thermodynamics.

While theoretical ideal polls and ideal gases are easier to comprehend, ideal polls are much easier to grasp. In my first presentation to the reader, I demonstrate what an ideal poll measures and show that even if a poll is conducted perfectly in every possible way, it would still result in imperfect data—an imperfect estimate. This understanding is crucial: even an ideal poll can be imperfect.

We shouldn’t have higher expectations for real-world, non-ideal polls than ideal ones. 

Rosner: Can I give you some real-world examples? We do have a couple. Last week, two polls showed crosstabs for people aged 18 to 29. For context, a crosstab is a subset of data for a specific demographic group. In this case, young people aged 18 to 29. One poll had Kamala Harris up by 31 points. Another poll, released within an hour of the first one, had her up by just 3 points.

So, what do you do with that? And how does that happen? That’s a real-world example, number one. Another example from today involves two candidates for governor in North Carolina: Josh Stein and the flawed Mark Robinson. Last week, Robinson got into trouble—he’s always posted lunatic stuff—but this time, new information surfaced about his past. He had been posting on a site called “New to Africa,” discussing inappropriate sexual encounters with his sister-in-law and boasting about them. He also called himself a “black Nazi” and said if we could still enslave people, he would own some. He’s a jackass.

The first polls measuring the impact of this scandal came out, showing Stein leading Robinson 50 to 35.  Compare that to the polls for Harris versus Trump, which often show Harris leading by 52–48 or 51–49. One notable difference between these polls is that the numbers add up to 100% in the Harris examples. That could be a good sign, or it could be misleading. Did they remove the people who expressed no preference?

But the Stein-Robinson poll only adds up to 85%. In the book, you explain how the missing 15% can cause various issues and lead to swampy conclusions.

Allen: Absolutely. That’s a perfect point. When the numbers don’t add up to 100%, it indicates that some people gave a response that needs to be reflected in the top two results. To simplify, Stein was at 50%, and Robinson was at 40%.

50 plus 40 is 90. That means 10% are somewhere else. Where is that somewhere else? In some elections, part of that 10% expresses support for a third party. Only I don’t believe any third-party candidates are running for governor in North Carolina. If there are, or there are “write-ins” I doubt they get much of a percentage.

Allen: It’s Democrat plus Republican, equaling 100%. That’s the only possible outcome. It’s binary. Election results are binary. In this case, it’s a simpler example—Democrat plus Republican equals 100%. There is no other possible outcome. But before the election, even with only two candidates, there are still three possible responses in the poll: Democrat, Republican, or “don’t know yet” (or undecided, depending on how you split it).

The flawed logic comes in when analysts try to eliminate the undecided option, attempting to make an apples-to-apples comparison. So, let’s say Stein (the Democrat) is at 50, and Robinson (the Republican) is at 40. We know that 50 plus 40 isn’t going to be the election result. So, where do those other 10% go? They’re in the land of the undecided. The poll doesn’t tell us how those people will eventually vote—it only tells us how many there are.

As a forecaster, I make a prediction when I dig into the data. My job as an analyst is to figure out where the undecided are most likely to go. In the U.S., the assumption is that undecideds will split 50/50. That assumption feels reasonable and safe, but the reality is that it rarely happens. We know this from past elections and past data.

Even intuitively, a 50/50 split might only sometimes occur. So, when we account for the undecideds, I say, “If they split 60/40, we should account for that. If they split 70/30, we should account for that. If they split 50/50, we need data to support that.” We cannot just assume that a 50/50 split is the default or the null hypothesis.

That is not valid science. In the U.S., instead of saying “50/40 with 10 percent undecided,” they often say “50/40, so this candidate is up by 10.” They assume the election result must be that Candidate A wins by 10. They assume the undecideds will split evenly, 55/45. The unscientific part that misinforms the public and that I’m trying to correct—is the assertion that any discrepancy from a 55/45 result means the poll was wrong.

They claim that if a poll shows a 50/40/10 split, it means Candidate A must win by 10 points in the election or else the poll was inaccurate. That’s the entire logic. I’m not exaggerating or taking liberties here. This is the academic definition—universally accepted in the United States—of poll accuracy: the margin, or difference between the two candidates in the poll, must equal the margin in the election result, or else the poll is considered wrong.

Rosner: And we talked about this a couple of days ago—people have a problem with uncertainty.

Allen: The entire gambling industry is based on people believing they can predict something highly unpredictable, like the outcome of a sports game.

Rosner: Even Einstein, the smartest guy in the world at the time, couldn’t handle quantum mechanics. He said that some things are inherently unpredictable. He spent so much of his later life trying to figure out how that could be, and he famously said, “God does not play dice with the universe.”

Allen: I was just about to give the same quote. Yes, that’s a great quote.

Rosner: So, people want certainty, and those who analyze polls want to give the illusion of predictive certainty. This leads people into all sorts of confusion. In the case of Robinson, there’s another confounding factor: voters who are so discouraged by their candidate that they don’t even tick a box. They may vote in the presidential election but not in the governor’s race. That could happen, and it does happen. It happens both ways. There will also be voters so disappointed by the presidential candidates that they only vote for the down-ballot candidates.

Allen: All of this makes sense. These things will happen in unpredictable numbers, making it even tougher to make any reliable prediction. I love the dice analogy because fair dice have a known probability. We can calculate the outcome of rolling two fair dice with extreme precision.

One of the issues I have with statistical literacy is that statistics classes often focus on precision. They teach students to calculate probabilities down to the decimal point, which is fine. There’s nothing wrong with that. But more basic statistical literacy, which I emphasize, involves asking: even if you can’t calculate the exact probability, can you still tell me which outcome is more likely?

For example, when rolling two fair dice, the sum of the dice will always be between 2 and 12. The most common outcome is seven because there are more ways to roll a seven than any other number. More combinations add up to 7. It’s the most common outcome but still not likely—just more probable than the others.

Rosner: There’s only about a 17% chance of rolling a 7—6 out of 36 possibilities. 

Allen: For some learners, this helps them wrap their heads around probability. For others, it doesn’t click as easily. When I was talking to a high school stats class the other day, here’s the example I gave:

I said, “There’s a prize if you’re on the winning team. I won’t tell you the prize, but Team 1 wins if the dice sum is 2, 3, 4, or 5. Team 2 wins if the sum is 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12. Pick your teams.”

Every single student in the class—all 30 of them—chose Team 2 (6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12). So, I asked, “What are the chances that your team wins if I roll the dice?” The students started pulling out their calculators.

I said, “No calculators. Just give me a rough guess.” 

Rosner: 6 out of 36.

Allen: I wanted them to give me an approximation.

AllenRosner: One of the students said 80%, another said 60%. I responded, “But you both said greater than 50%, so your side is favoured. You can say that with certainty.”

I asked, “Are you 100% certain that your sidete is favoured?” They looked at each other briefly and said, “Yes, I’m 100% certain that our side is favoured.” So I continued, “You don’t know if the probability is 60% or 80%, but you’re certain it’s greater than 50%?” They all nodded in agreement.

I said, “Beautiful. This is an excellent lesson in probability. Even though you don’t know the exact probability, you can still say with certainty that it’s greater than something. In this case, greater than 50%. Now, we can calculate the probability with certainty: it’s 26 out of 36, about 73%. But here’s the key—while all of you chose the same option and agreed that this side is favoured, is it possible you’re wrong?”

The word ‘wrong’ carries a misleading meaning. Does “wrong” mean you chose the wrong favourite, or does “wrong”, mean the result doesn’t match what you predicted? This is where we get into the concept of The Polls Weren’t Wrong, saying that polls are not predictions. Polls are not predictions of election outcomes. Polls are observations of the present state.

All the students correctly observed that they’d go with 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 if they had to choose. I rolled the dice, and it was a 9. Everyone won. Woo! Everybody was happy. But we know mathematically, with certainty, that they would have been “wrong” about 27% of the time.

Rosner: Exactly, and this brings us to the 2016 election. That leads almost directly into it because some forecasters said Trump had a 66% chance of losing, while others said 99%. Can we say with certainty that the 99% estimate was a badnumber? Yes, we can—but that takes a few steps to explain.

When discussing discomfort with uncertainty, people tend to remain rational when discussing dice or coin flips—things with clear, calculable probabilities. But emotions run high when we start talking about political polls and elections. Anxiety spikes, especially around 2024, as Trump does nothing to calm people’s fears about what his second presidency might look like.

Allen: Absolutely. To tie this into the book and build on what we’ve been discussing, Chapter 4 introduces the concept of ideal polls. If a poll is conducted perfectly, by every possible measure, this is the data it would produce. Many of the reviewers of my book said, “But this isn’t possible.” My response was, “A: That’s bullshit. It is possible, and I can prove it. B: Even if it weren’t possible, that doesn’t mean it’s not a useful concept.”

In the same way, chemistry classes teach about ideal gases or optometry, and physics classes teach about ideal lenses. Ideal lenses aren’t real, and ideal gases and fluids aren’t real, either. But we use these concepts to understand what would happen under perfect, ideal conditions.

A political poll can never be conducted without some margin of error because of the margin of error. That’s a statistical fact. It doesn’t matter what your sample size is. If you take a census, you’re no longer conducting a poll.

Rosner: A census is where you get the actual result from every participant in what you’re trying to measure—in this case, the population. 

Allen: Exactly. And when we use the word “population” in statistics, we talk about the people of interest or the measured items. 

Rosner: In the context of elections, the votes cast are, by definition, a census because you’re capturing data from everyone who voted.

Allen: A census of actual voters is simply the election results. We often deal with tens of millions, sometimes even over 100 million, when discussing election numbers. But our brains aren’t built to handle numbers that large. We’re wired to think in terms of tens or hundreds. So, when I introduce the concept of ideal polls in Chapter 2 of the book, I explain how sample size works to achieve a given margin of error. The sample size that tends to be used is around 600.

Rosner: After a certain sample size, the size of the population no longer matters.

Allen: This is an unintuitive fact of statistics, but it’s testable and provable. Students often see the margin of error as an abstract concept, just numbers plugged into a formula. However, my approach is to show that even experts often misunderstand and need to understand what the margin of error applies to.

There needs to be more clarity on what this formula means and how it’s understood. I provide several examples in the book, but here’s a simple one: Imagine you’re in a class of 100 students. You can ask them whether they have a dog or what they plan to eat for lunch tomorrow. You’d need to survey about 86 students to get an accurate sample – a margin of error down to +/- 4%

So, I took a random sample of 86 students and asked them questions. Let’s say I get 50% for option A and 50% for option B. What do those numbers mean? It means that if I had asked every student in the population the same question simultaneously (instead of only the same of 86), then the results would be within the margin of error as often as dictated by the sample size and the confidence interval.

This is a very important point: the margin of error relies on the subjunctive—on the “if” statement. It’s hypothetical in nature. If I had asked everyone, the numbers would be within the margin of error. This is a testable, provable concept. The math behind the margin of error works because of this “if” scenario. That’s critical to understand because it explains how polls are tools for observation, not prediction.

I always emphasize this when explaining statistical literacy. You don’t need to understand every formula in depth, but you need to grasp the concept that underlies the margin of error—it’s about the likelihood of the results being representative if you had surveyed the entire population. That’s the essence of how the margin of error works, which I tell students often.

If you’re decent at coding or Excel, you can simulate polling with a population of a million A’s and B’s, then take a random sample of 600 to 1,000. Ninety-five percent of the time, you’ll get results within the confidence interval. 

Rosner: But people on T.V., even experts like Steve Kornacki, only sometimes consider that when working with numbers on their boards. They’re thinking in terms of spreads and margins. When we look at a poll that says 50% for Candidate A, it doesn’t mean 50%.

Allen: It means 50%, plus or minus 3%. The example I give in the book—and it’s great because it perfectly illustrates the point—is with dice. If you ask me for a 95% confidence interval for the roll of two dice, my answer would be 7, plus or minus 4. That means I’m 95% confident the outcome will be between 3 and 11. You eliminate the extreme possibilities, like 2 or 12. You’re 95% confident that the dice roll won’t be a 2 or 12.

So, saying “7 plus or minus 4” means the result could fall anywhere within that range. Imagine the misunderstanding if someone said, “Carl said 7.” No, I didn’t say 7—I said 7, plus or minus 4. Those are very different statements, and the same misunderstanding happens with polls. When a poll says 50%, it means 50%, plus or minus 3. The number RIGHT NOW is likely to fall somewhere in that range. But as we discussed earlier, that 10% undecided can and will influence the eventual result – the election. Different calculations.

Rosner: That’s a great point. But let’s shift to some real-world gripes. In the book, you ask innocuous questions to people, like, “What are you doing for lunch?” Most people will answer that question. Some might say, “None of your business,” but you’ll get a decent response rate. But consider this: The New York Times/Siena poll made 194,000 phone calls to get 2,000 respondents, meaning only one out of 100 agreed to participate. That raises the likelihood that some people are not representative and may even be fringe respondents.

On top of that, this election cycle has an added layer of deception. I suspect—and this is just a theory—that some Trump supporters might purposely give false answers. For example, a MAGA voter might say they’re a Democrat voting for Trump to manipulate the poll results. It looks more significant when a Democrat switches to vote for Trump.

I agree that’s possible, though there’s no way to prove it definitively. I think that potential issue might have lessened when Harris replaced Biden as the Democratic candidate. But as you said, all of this is speculation.

Allen: While it could happen, the impact would have to be large and well-orchestrated to make a significant difference in the poll results. 

Rosner: It could shift the numbers by 1% or 2%, no question; however, in an election where 1% or 2% could be the margin in key states, even that small shift can have a big effect.

Allen: That small margin can make all the difference in close races. Still, the likelihood of large-scale coordinated false responses is low. It is. So it’s very hard to detect that small movement and change. I want to add something, too. I noted your earlier speech when you said that people want poll data to be predictive. In my conversations with pollsters, it often comes back to what they believe people want to see. Remember, pollsters usually don’t pay out of their pockets to conduct polls. Most of the time, they are funded by media outlets or sponsors. So, one of the things I’ve had to hammer home—and stand my ground on—is that pollsters are incentivized to make their data seem more important, impactful, and meaningful than it is. I always say this, and I say it in the book:

“Data is under no obligation to be meaningful to you in the way you want it to be.”

Rosner: This ties back to your point about seeing unusual numbers from pollsters. When you see numbers that don’t match other polls, it can indicate that the pollster has integrity and isn’t massaging the data. You call it ‘herding,’ where everyone sticks together because numbers closer to the average are more believable to the public than outliers.

Allen:Yes, it’s a “cover your ass” technique because pollsters know how they’ll be judged for accuracy. However, the current measurements for accuracy need to be more scientific and measure the poll’s accuracy.

The current measurements—without going on a rant—are invalid. They don’t measure what they claim to measure. But pollsters know how they’ll be judged, and the mentality is: It’s better to be wrong with everyone than to be the lone outlier. If your poll shows something very different from other polls, you have two options:

  1. Don’t release the poll.
  2. Fudge the data just enough so your numbers don’t look too different.

This way, if the election result aligns with the consensus, everyone can claim they were “in the ballpark.” But if the outcome deviates from the polls, it’s not just one pollster’s fault—everyone was wrong. This creates a dangerous environment for the independence of poll data because pollsters are judged based on flawed standards and don’t want to stand out.

Suppose we judged polls from a more scientific perspective. In that case, we’d encourage pollsters to use different methodologies, apply different weighting techniques, and be transparent with their data. Whatever numbers they get, they should release them.

Allen: The problem is that if everyone is doing things the same way, if everyone feels pressured to conform to flawed standards, then having 20 pollsters—or even more, as we have now—becomes less valuable statistically. Having 2 or 3 independent pollsters who aren’t herding their data would be more valuable.

Rosner: That’s one of the key takeaways from your book and a message of common sense: Don’t freak out about polls, especially individual polls. There are so many sources of error and misinterpretation in polls that the main message should be: don’t freak out. Don’t waste your time freaking out. Instead, focus on getting people to vote. Polls can help guide where to focus your efforts, indicating which states might be competitive, but you still have to do the work to turn those gettable states into wins.

 In Chapter 4, you discuss ideal polls and present a chart demonstrating how even an ideal poll will show fluctuations. 

Allen: The polling instrument is inherently noisy, even if we know the population with 100% certainty. A poll showing 47%, followed by one showing 52%, doesn’t necessarily indicate movement or a trend. Sometimes, it’s just noise. Yes, rule number one of polls: fluctuation is normal. Individual polls, while important, are just tiny pieces of data in a much bigger picture. 

Rosner: Now, I’ve got one more gripe. You talk about Nate Silver and 538. Nate Silver doesn’t work for 538 anymore. 

Allen: ABC News bought 538 from Nate Silver maybe two years ago. Now, Nate is doing his own thing, working independently with his model.

Rosner: 538 still uses Nate Silver’s model, but it’s no longer tied to him. The 538 team has its methods now. (Important note – I believe 538 now uses a model Morris has brought, and Silver uses the one he previously used at 538 – if you’d like to update)

Rosner: 538’s recipe currently shows Harris up by 2.7%. But if you look at the 20 most recent polls, the average shows her up by 4.5%. Something about that recipe doesn’t add up.

Jacobsen: So, individual psychological factors are also at play here, particularly regarding how people interpret polls, statistics, and public education on these topics. Are we talking about cognitive closure? People want certainty in a context of uncertainty. This need for cognitive closure pushes people to seek definitive answers, even when the situation doesn’t warrant it. People want closure and certainty, even though the nature of polls and predictions is inherently uncertain. I understand from a psychological perspective—why people want certainty. But in science, and again, I would understand if the public and even the media had trouble grasping this concept. 

Allen: The real problem—and the reason I wrote the book—is that experts, not just a few here and there, but a consensus of experts in the field, are misinforming the public. This isn’t just happening in articles; it’s in academic journals and books. Things written by experts for experts wrong.

Allen: They are objectively wrong. I have a list of quotes I share frequently because they’re so easy to interpret, and there’s no context in which these statements make sense. For example, when Nate Silver says, “The poll averages underestimated this candidate by 8 points in the election result,” that’s incorrect. Poll averages do not predict election results, nor do polls themselves. When G. Elliott Morris says, “The polls predicted this candidate would win by 1,” that’s also incorrect. 

When the American Association of Public Opinion Research (AAPOR)—a board of experts hired to analyze poll data—says, “The polls predicted that Hillary Clinton would win,” that is objectively false. There is no context where that statement is accurate. I approach this cognitive dissonance with people, and this is where I gain and lose followers on social media. But my goal is not to gain followers—I want to educate people. The cognitive dissonance is strong because people can’t believe that experts don’t understand this concept.

When you tell people that polls aren’t predictions, most agree, but there’s a reluctance to confront specific experts on this issue. It’s like people are afraid of confrontation. When I call out experts like Tom Bonier or G. Elliott Morris—who frequently post about polls—or even Nate Silver when they say things like, “This poll predicted the candidate would win by 3,” I don’t get direct responses anymore. But they are wrong when they make these claims. It’s easy to say “polls are not predictions,” but it’s difficult for people to accept that experts are wrong. The experts say polls, if accurate,should predict who will win and by how much, but that’s not true.

That’s the psychological factor you’re talking about – cognitive closure. How accurate were the polls? An easy, wrong methodology is currently accepted, and I want to bring scientific standards to the field, nothing more. Well, I also want experts to issue mass retractions for their false claims about what they believe “polls predicted” but that’s another topic.

In my book, I break  down how polls work – and how they should be evaluated -into two parts. The first half of my book is a baseline of education. I build up certain concepts step by step. The second half focuses specifically on political polls. Using the foundation from the first half, I analyze political polls. The content is presented in a way that’s easy to digest and, I hope, somewhat entertaining. It’s simple but explains each concept individually, allowing readers to understand how political polls work.

An ideal poll is one in which the only source of error is the margin of error itself. This is a concept that currently only exists in my book. There is no framework for defining an ideal poll. Analysts in the U.K. and U.S. approach poll analysis with different assumptions. I argue that, although we know political polls are not ideal, understanding non-ideal polls requires knowing what an ideal poll would measure—just like how we teach ideal gases in chemistry or ideal lenses in physics. It’s a theoretical framework to help people understand the basics before diving into real-world complexities.

I didn’t invent the concept of an ideal poll, I just outlined it. Still, it’s foundational to understanding how polls work, especially when analyzing non-ideal, real-world polling data. The concept is rooted in the math. This math has existed for at least 300 years. Still, by naming it and giving it a formal definition, we provide a framework that makes it easier for people to understand. When I say that the book’s first half is an introduction to polls, many experts and smart people who’ve taken statistics classes might think, “I don’t need that.” But I’m telling them, “Yes, you do.” Why? Because they still think a poll predicts the election outcome—and it doesn’t.

These fundamental concepts are what I’m building on. It’s not just about stating facts; it’s about understanding them. Anyone can regurgitate facts—”A squared plus B squared equals C squared” or “P.V. equals nRT”—but spitting out facts isn’t the same as comprehending them. 

Applying the Pythagorean Theorem to an isosceles triangle, to use a simpler example, would not be valid. Even if you don’t know, or remember, that lesson from school – me pointing out “hey, this is wrong, you can’t do that” should be sufficient for the average person to understand who’s right and who’s wrong. The same exact thing is true for the formulas being used to compare polls to elections.The ability to regurgitate some formula is not useful if you don’t know what the output means, or when to use it.

Rosner: Beyond people not understanding these basics, there are so many other abuses of statistical data that it becomes a whole mess. 

Allen: Yes, people don’t understand what polls should do, but they misuse the information in various ways. One of my reviewers, who now works for an NFL team and has a Ph.D. in applied mathematics, said something profound. He noted that statistical literacy is arguably as important as regular literacy.  

Rosner: But we don’t teach statistics. After algebra and geometry, we push students into calculus when most people should learn statistics instead. 

Allen: Unless you’re going into a field like engineering, where calculus is more relevant, statistics should be prioritized. Statistics is almost like logic, but we treat it as just another branch of math. 

Rosner: The concepts aren’t that tough—you could teach nearly everyone the basics of statistics, but we don’t. Yes, and towards the end of the book, you talk about the 2016 Hillary Clinton election. The 2024 numbers look similar to the 2016 numbers. Am I wrong?

Allen: No, they don’t look similar at all. But point out what you think is a similarity, and I’ll tell you where you’re off.

Rosner: 2016, third-party parties, such as Gary Johnson and Jill Stein, had a significant presence.  

Allen: Having third-party candidates affects the data in ways that should be obvious to anyone with a basic understanding of statistics. However, analysts often focus only on the spread between the two major candidates. For example, they might say, “Hillary Clinton is up 4 points with 44% to Trump’s 40%.” Still, they ignore the 5% going to third-party candidates and the 11% undecided. That’s mathematically different from an election where Kamala Harris has 50% and Trump has 46%.

Comparing these numbers as if they’re apples to apples (because both are “up by 4” shows a need for more understanding of polling data. I always say this on social media and get pushback, but I don’t care—because it’s true. The presence of third-party candidates changes the data dynamics in ways that analysts often overlook.

I’ll keep saying this until people fix their nonsensical analysis. No one who truly understands how poll data works would compare those elections apples to apples. I said it in 2020 when Joe Biden was up by 4 in the poll averages in various states. People freaked out like they did when Hillary Clinton was up by 4. However, looking at the data this way needs to be corrected.

In Chapter 24 of my book, I wrote a bit tongue-in-cheek to make a clear point: in an election where the most votes win, 50% plus one vote is all you need. That’s the threshold. That’s the only number we know with certainty. Applying that simple, obvious fact, I prove in the book that experts sometimes need help understanding this.

For example, they’ll compare a poll that says 44% for one candidate and 40% for another with one that says 52% to 48%, as if both are the same because the margin is 4 points. But no—52% is polling across the finish line because we know 50% wins the election. If a poll underestimates a candidate at 52%, they’re still at 51 or 50—they still win. But it’s not even close to the same as if a poll underestimates a candidate at 44%, 43%, or 42%.

That’s a crucial distinction. The numbers the poll gives us—like 44% for one candidate, plus or minus the margin of error—that’s how it should be reported. And if you have 50%, plus or minus the margin of error, that’s the critical number. But people fixate on spread analysis—just looking at the gap between the two candidates—and that’s not how polls should be interpreted.

Chapter 9 of the book discusses this fallacy—spread analysis. People think the gap between two candidates is the only number that matters, but it’s not. No one who understands polling would think that way.

Rosner: Right now, if you look at swing states, you might see numbers like 48–46. In some cases, Trump is at the top, while Harris is at the top in others. But when you add in third-party candidates like Stein or the undecided voters, you’ve got to account for all that. It’s not just about hitting 50% but accounting for the third-party votes and undecided voters.

Allen: The math here is straightforward: if there are only two candidates, as is often the case in the U.S., I’m not calculating the probability that Candidate A wins by a certain margin. I’m calculating the probability that Candidate A gets at least 50% of the vote. In 2020, that’s where things got interesting.

In 2020, there were multiple moments where I realized that I did understand this better than many of the experts. Take Maine or New Hampshire, for example. Joe Biden was ahead in the polling averages by 53% to 40% in both states. FiveThirtyEight  gave him around a 90% chance of winning. But the real issue wasn’t just the spread—it was about whether Biden would cross the 50% threshold and understanding that made all the difference.

Now, when I calculated the probability that a candidate gets at least 50% of the vote when their polling average is 53% or higher, given that there were still 6% undecided, I found it to be over 99%. Even if my calculations were off by a huge factor , that still leaves a probability of 96%, 97%, or 98%. So when I saw these 90% probabilities being thrown around for Biden, I thought, “No, they’re using flawed spread analysis.” They said the spread between Biden and Trump was such that Trump could still overtake him if the spread were off by 10 points. There’s an interesting note in my book that points to the possibility that a very simple clerical error contributed to this probability problem – and no one there caught it!

But when you understand how poll error calculations work, you realize that the probability of a candidate outperforming their poll number is much higher when there are 15% undecided voters than when there are only 5%. This sounds obvious when I say it. If there are more undecided voters, the final result is more uncertain. But spread analysis doesn’t account for that uncertainty. It treats a 42-40 poll as if it’s the same as a 50-48 poll, which is fundamentally incorrect.

Rosner: Let me throw some numbers at you. You’re giving Harris close to a two-thirds chance of winning right now. In 2016, Hillary was up by about 5% in the national aggregate, but that’s not helpful because of swing states and the Electoral College. Then Comey dropped the FBI investigation news with 11 days to go. She was up 5% but won the popular vote by only 2%. That announcement may have cost her 1% or 1.5%, but nobody knows.

In 2020, Biden was up by 8% to 10% in the week before the election but won by 4.5%. Now you’re saying Harris has about a 2-to-3 chance of winning, but what’s happening?

Allen: The analysis done by experts and the media in 2016 goes like this: Hillary was up by 5%, then she lost by 1%. Therefore, the polls were off by 6%. But this is not a valid analysis, and here’s why. Hillary Clinton’s polling average wasn’t above 47% in any swing state—none—not in Michigan, Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, or even Maine. So that means there were a lot of undecided voters still on the table.

Rosner: Looking at 47% for Clinton and around 43% for Trump leaves 10% of voters who hadn’t decided or considered third-party candidates; that undecided group could heavily influence the election’s outcome.

Allen: Yes. I have the exact numbers in the book, and they vary by state—46-41, 45-42—but the key point is that in no swing state was Hillary’s polling average above 47%. This meant a significant portion of the electorate was still undecided, and that’s where the real uncertainty lay.

Oh, here it is, right in front of me—Pennsylvania. Hillary Clinton’s polling average in Pennsylvania was 46.3%, and Trump’s was 43.9%. So, the analysts said she was up by about 2.5%. Now, what are they doing today? They say, “Oh, Kamala Harris is only up by 2.5%, and Hillary lost, so there’s this normal polling error.”

No, that’s bullshit. We’re calculating the probability that Kamala Harris will get at least 49.5% of the vote because third parties and fringe candidates will likely take about 1-2%. Even if we simplify the math and say the probability she gets 50%, that’s what we’re analyzing. There’s no magic number in polling except for 50%. And it’s not magic—it’s math. You get to 50%, and you win, period—end of story. 50% is the number that matters. If you get 50%, you win. That’s it.

So let’s say Kamala Harris’s polling average is 49%, and Trump is 47%. I’m not analyzing that poll by saying, “Harris is up by 2.” I’m analyzing it by asking the probability that she reaches 50%. In my forecast, I account for third parties taking about 1.5% of the vote. So, the real analysis is the probability that she gets to something like 49.3%, which is enough to win.

Rosner: So, to simplify: in 2016, Hillary and Trump’s combined polling numbers increased to less than 90%. The remaining undecided or third-party votes, which made up 10-12%, made all the difference. However, in this election, Harris was 48%, and Trump was at 46%, adding up to 94%. That means only 6% are left unallocated. It’s much easier for Harris to make up the 2% to get to 50% than for Hillary to bridge that gap in 2016.

Allen: Hillary had a much steeper climb to get to 50% or even 49% because there were more undecided and third-party votes in play. In this election, the smaller number of undecided voters makes it easier for Harris to reach 50%. 

I’ve taken a few notes and want to explain why I wrote the book. The simplest reason? Because experts are misinforming the public. This isn’t a rare or one-off issue. Experts analyze polls by the spread, margin, whatever you want to call it: the difference between the top two candidates. But that’s an internally invalid metric. Spread doesn’t measure what they claim it does. Spread analysis needs to capture the full picture.

In the book, I explain why this is the case. An ideal poll is a poll where the only source of error is the margin of error. It’s possible to have an ideal poll, but political polls aren’t ideal—and that doesn’t matter. The math behind polling, from which we get the margin of error, is the same math that underlies an ideal poll.

Rule number 1 of polling data: fluctuation is normal and expected. Individual polls should be taken with a grain of salt. The numbers will go up and down. If a pollster consistently releases the same numbers—49, 49, 49, 49—I’m highly skeptical of that pollster because it’s statistically impossible to get the same number consistently if you’re conducting polls correctly.

So even in an ideal poll, you wouldn’t expect the same number every time. Even in an ideal poll, there should be fluctuation. If you’re getting the same number repeatedly, something is off. In non-ideal polls, we should expect even more fluctuations. 

What I would say about the last part of the book is that there are some important statistics. The book’s first half is about the why—the foundation of polling and why the public and even experts misunderstand it. The book’s second half is the what—and this is where it blows people’s minds. My analysis is scientifically valid, and it makes predictions.

If my analysis is correct, it should hold that candidates who poll closer to 50% tend to win, regardless of how much they are up by. So, a 50–48 poll is better than a 46–40 poll, even though the margin (+2 vs. +6) is smaller. If my analysis is wrong and spread is a valid way to interpret polls, then the opposite would be true. But it’s not—and that’s the counterintuitive yet obvious conclusion if you think about it.

Rosner: That makes perfect sense. Our minds have been conditioned by spread analysis to the top.

Allen: If this book had been written 100 years ago, it wouldn’t have been controversial. Most people would’ve considered it obvious. But because of this obsession with margin analysis—up by two versus up by 6—sometimes being up by two is better, mathematically, than being up by 6. It’s a mathematical fact. It’s provable and observable; we have data to back it up. I put all of this in the book.

Rosner: It’s like with the Dodgers. Their lead kept shrinking over the last two months of the season. I always asked myself, is it better to be up by eight games in July or up by two games with a week to go?

Allen: Bingo. That’s the perfect question. I get this all the time with political data. People ask me, “Is it better to be up 49–47 in a poll average or 46–40?” I know the answer, but the answer given by experts is different.

Rosner: Who’s right? They can’t both be true.

Allen: Only one of these can be used. This has led to a combative debate in the field. Some experts who used to be friendly with me are no longer because they realize that my work and their work can’t coexist. There’s this dissonance—they cling to how things have always been done. But my work is provable. It’s objectively correct, it’s been tested, and it holds up. To Rick’s point, it’s not hard to understand.

Allen: Most of this can be taught to high school or college students. The fact that experts still get it wrong—still analyze polls by margin, by who’s ahead and by how much—is baffling. This is a new way for most people to think about polling, but it’s the correct way. The old, misinformed spread analysis has confused people for too long. This approach simplifies things and aligns with the reality of how polling works.

There’s a quote in the book: “Even numerate people can be misled when they’re misinformed. ” For many years, people have talked about the spread as if it were the golden standard—the metric we should use. These people have Ph. D.s in statistics, but in practice, even experts are misled by the spread.

Rosner: In gambling, you bet on the spread. But applying that mindset—like you do in NFL betting—to politics becomes deceptive. Spread is a misleading metric. Spread proclaims to measure who is ahead and by how much, but it fails on both counts.

Allen: Absolutely. I talk about this in the book. It’s simple to prove—anyone can do it. You can even use real data to show it. We could cover this in another call.

Jacobsen: What have early sales of the book been like, and how long have you been working on it?

Allen: Sure! So, presales opened on September 2nd. I aggressively promoted on social media and other channels, and sales did well in the first few days. After that, I took a short break to set up some media appearances. The book was officially released on September 23rd when preorders were shipped, and regular orders opened. I did another push then, and sales spiked again. It’s been a peak-and-valley situation since.

But realistically, my mentality is that I have about a month and a half until the election to capture people’s attention. When I started, it was two months. The truth is, after the election, I expect more interest from academics. I’ve already had invitations to speak at universities after the election, but that’s more of a niche market. My book isn’t just for academics or people in the field—it’s for anyone who wants to understand polls better. The average person tunes into polls only in the months leading up to elections, so that’s where my focus has been.

Rosner: Do you work with the Florida Elections Project or the early voter guy?

Allen: No, I haven’t worked with him. I’ve been focused on my projects for now. I follow all these people because they provide interesting insights. I always tell people you must take the good with the bad with these analysts. Whenever I criticize Nate Silver, Tom Bonier, G. Elliott Morris, or whoever, people assume two things: First, they take it personally, which isn’t the case—I don’t know them personally. And second, they assume I’m saying they don’t do any good work. That’s not true at all.

I always say, “They’re right about this. They do good work here.” I can learn from people, and many analysts do better work than me in other areas, like early voting counts or election day calls. For example, Dave Wasserman is great at calling elections when the votes start coming in. I’ve tried to do what these people do and couldn’t improve on it. So, I follow them and learn from their expertise. But in cases when they do poor work, I criticize that and say, “No, that’s not right. You need to learn a bit from me.”

As someone who never stops learning, I’m even wearing my “Never Stop Learning” shirt today, and I take both sides of the coin. You take the good with the bad. There’s always value in learning from others, even if you don’t agree with everything they do.

The background of this book started in 2016, during that notorious election. After Sam Wang announced his 99.9% probability that Hillary Clinton would win, he famously said he’d eat a bug if she lost. And to his credit, he did eat a bug. But many other forecasters still need to follow through on their grand promises. They said they’d delete their accounts if they were wrong about some things in 2020, and again in 2022,but they have yet to do so.

The book’s origins go back to 2016 when I saw people with big reputations misinforming the public. Before I got into the margin and spread analysis, I thought, “How can so many smart people not understand that states are correlated?” What happens in Wisconsin affects Michigan, which affects Pennsylvania.

Rosner: So, what was your first step into forecasting?

Allen: My first attempt at building a forecast was in 2008. I was a freshman in college with my laptop open, trying to calculate poll averages. I thought I had it all figured out. Then, I realized that Ohio is correlated with Michigan, which is correlated with Indiana and Iowa. I didn’t know how to do that math back then, so I shut my laptop, went to the gym, and didn’t think about it for another eight years.

By 2016, I had learned more and improved my math skills. I built a forecast that gave Hillary Clinton a 70% chance to win—not because she was up by six or anything like that, but because I saw she was only polling at 46% or 47% in the swing states. Trump still had a path to victory. I realized that if he won Wisconsin, there was a good chance that he would also win Michigan and Pennsylvania. These states are correlated, and all the forecasters who put Hillary at 99% to win didn’t account for this.

It’s obvious, but I understand it might not be for the average person. However, it should be obvious to any statistician or model builder that what happens in one state is not independent of another.

Rosner: So, did Nate Silver think the same about correlated states back then?

Allen: Nate Silver acknowledged the correlation between states and calculated them very well, one of the things I learned from him, but his model gave different probabilities than other forecasters that year. He was more cautious than others who were giving Hillary 99%. He gave her around a 70% chance, similar to my forecast, because he recognized the possibility of Trump winning correlated states like Wisconsin, Michigan, and Pennsylvania. Nate’s thinking was closer to mine, but many others completely overlooked that factor.

Yes, At that time, Nate Silver was the only mainstream forecaster who got the numbers right to understand that states are correlated. Huffington Post, Sam Wang, and several others said, “Well, if she loses Wisconsin, that’s fine because she can still win Michigan, and she’s 90% to win Michigan. Even if she doesn’t win Michigan, she can still win Pennsylvania, and she’s 86% to win Pennsylvania.” Or whatever the numbers were. But the reality is, as soon as one of those dominoes falls, all the downstream probabilities drop dramatically—from 90 to 40, from 86 to 32—because those states are correlated.

To summarize, I wrote the book backward. I knew what I knew but only fully understood why later. From 2017 to 2020, I was reaching out to experts, academics, and people in the field, saying, “Look, there’s something in my research that shows how much someone is “up” in a poll— is not as important as their actual poll number.” I knew I was onto something but couldn’t fully wrap my head around it. I asked if anyone wanted to take it from there. No one was interested, so I had to do it alone.

From there, I started working backward. I gathered all the data from 2004, through, 2018, at that time. I knew what I was trying to prove, but in statistical literacy, you can’t just say, “Here’s the formula; deal with it.” You have to prove it—you have to show your work. So, I worked backward, asking, “How do I know this?” Chapter 16: compensating error. “How do I know that?” Chapter 11: weighted results. “How do I know that?” Chapter 7: present polls versus plan polls and a simultaneous census. And, of course, Chapter 4: ideal polls. Chapter 2: the margin of error for polls in very small populations, where a census is easily conducted.

While the book was written backward from my perspective, it’s logical and straightforward for the reader because it builds a foundation. You need to understand one concept before moving on to the next.

Rosner: That makes sense. Yesterday, after you told me, I explained to my wife how Harris’s 48-46 in some states is much better than Hillary’s 44-40 in 2016. But I only had a limited “math window” with her before she said, “I don’t care.” I need to get it across in time!

Allen: Yes, it takes time to grasp. But to understand this election—and my book—your point is exactly right: a small lead close to 49 or 50% is better than a larger lead farther from it. It’s counterintuitive because we’ve been trained to think about margins, but it’s  mathematically and logically true. The closer you are to 50%, the less room for things to go wrong between now and the finish line.

Rosner: That does make sense if you let go of the spread mentality. Analysts and academic articles use the same language: “She’s up by 2” and “He’s up by 4.” I had someone jokingly send me an article today from The New York Times or maybe their website using that same spread logic.

Allen: Right, that’s the spread mentality I’m trying to break down. It’s ingrained in how people think about elections. Still, as you understand polling better, you realize how flawed that thinking is. The closer a candidate is to 50%, the more likely they will win, regardless of the margin.

If people say things like, “What if the polls are off by as much as they were in 2016, 2020, or 2022?”—you can’t make those comparisons. Those aren’t apples-to-apples situations. First, comparing midterms to a general election is a bad comparison. Even comparing 2020 to 2024 is difficult because the variables are different. And 2016 is an outlier. You’re taking an outlier and trying to apply it to 2024, which is not a sound method.

It’s like in a movie when two people are on the floor, both trying to reach for a gun. It’s better to be 6 inches away from the gun. At the same time, the other person is a foot away rather than 3 feet away, while the other person is 5 feet away. The analogy I use in the book is a footrace. Imagine watching a race and knowing one runner is ahead by 2 meters. Now, is that the most valuable piece of information? It depends. If the finish line is at 50 meters, knowing how far someone is from the finish line gives you a lot more information than just knowing who’s ahead by 2 meters.

So, let’s say you’re in a race, and you’re ahead by 2 meters. Would you rather be ahead 49–47 or 42–40? You’d rather be closer to the finish line, right? That’s where I start. It’s better to be closer to 50 for an equal spread percentage. That makes sense.

Then I ask, “Would you rather be ahead 49–47 or 44–40?” At 49%, you only need one more percent to get to 50. At 44%, you still need 6. So, the probability that the person behind you overtakes you is greater when you’re farther from 50%. When people focus on the spread in elections, it’s almost like football fans worrying about covering it. But in an election, there’s no significant benefit to winning by 10 points instead of 2.

Rosner: Right, the goal is just to get past 50%.

Allen: When calculating win probability, we ask, “What’s the probability that this candidate gets at least 50% of the vote?” I’m not trying to determine whether a candidate wins by 10 points because that doesn’t matter. Yeah, I can calculate those probabilities, and yeah, the probability of winning “by 10” is higher at 44-40 – but the average person doesn’t care about that. They want win probability. And in our elections, there’s no added benefit to winning by 10. Math and logic people like to hedge with “all else equal” but the truth is, in elections, there are always so many variables.

Rosner: Like in 2016 when James Comey threw a bag of dog shit on the track with his last-minute FBI announcement.

Allen: Hillary was leading, and then Comey threw dog shit on the track with 11 days to go. But in 2024, things are more locked down because fewer undecided voters exist. So, according to my logic, there’s less chance for something like that to throw things off.

Harris is likelier to make it through, especially when fewer undecided voters  left, with some data supporting they’ll lean Democrat, very different from 2016In 2016, Hillary lost a significant portion of those undecideds who flipped to Trump, which cost her a huge chunk of her perceived “lead”. Some of her voters probably didn’t even show up to vote because of the perception that she “had it in the bag,” which is another issue with how the spread is often misinterpreted.

If I tell you, “She’s up by 6, she’s got this,” it can lead to voter complacency. This is where Nick Panagakis comes in. As far as I can see, he’s the only historical researcher who identified this issue. Political polling has existed for over 100 years, since Gallup and Literary Digest. I discovered his work in old journal articles and newspapers. Still, no one knows his name anymore—his work has essentially been lost to history.

Rosner: Panagakis sounds like someone ahead of his time.

Allen: He’s the only person I’ve found who corroborates my findings. He published in a few academic journals, but his work needs to be noticed. In the 1980s, he came up with some essential rules of analysis. He said, “Rules of analysis are necessary—not as simple as ‘an 8-point lead is safe, and a 2-point lead is close.'” That sounds eerily like what I’m saying today.

Rosner: That sounds like what you’ve been arguing about.

Allen: The eerie part is that I didn’t come across his work until 2021 or 2022. I was looking for past research similar to what I was saying, and then I found this guy. He’s got his chapter in my book, Chapter 21. When I found his work, I was floored—he was saying many of the same things I’m saying today, and he had the evidence to back it up.

Panagakis argued that undecided voters sometimes split unevenly. Often, they go disproportionately to the candidate who’s behind. If you account for that, polls that appear wrong are very accurate. His work would have been criticized, modified, and accepted in a proper scientific field. But because political polling is so contaminated with this obsession over spread logic—who’s up and by how much—his work was buried.

Rosner: That’s fascinating. 

Rosner: Unfortunately, this spread mentality has clouded the field for so long. Statistics as a field has its shameful history, with a lot of it developed by racists who used population statistics to push agendas—proving white superiority over non-whites. It’s a terrible history if you dig into it.

But to shift the focus for a second, I’d like to talk about the history of presidential polling and get your thoughts on something. Presidential polling began around the end of FDR’s era in the 1940s, about 80 years ago. Suppose you look at the history of presidential approval. In that case, it has steadily declined over time, with one major exception—9/11, which gave George W. Bush a huge bump in approval as the country rallied behind him for a few months. But aside from that, approval has been declining from president to president, regardless of whether they’re good or bad. As we get more polarized, average approval goes down. Do you have any thoughts on this?

Jacobsen: It makes sense that approval ratings would decline as the country becomes more polarized. We’re in a time where fewer people are willing to give the benefit of the doubt to a president from the opposing party. The rise of media echo chambers and the constant stream of information also make it easier for people to entrench themselves in their views, which means fewer opportunities for a president to win over the other side.

Allen: That’s true. We’re increasingly seeing a political climate where people feel they’re choosing the lesser of two evils. It’s not that they strongly support one side but that they feel the other side is worse. And regarding Donald Trump, MAGA is almost an exception in recent political history. If you look at Mitt Romney, John McCain, or George W. Bush, there wasn’t the same personal loyalty to the candidate. However, with Trump, a large number of his supporters turned out to vote specifically for him. You didn’t see that kind of enthusiasm for Joe Biden, and you likely won’t see it for Kamala Harris.

Rosner: Barack Obama might be an exception on the Democratic side, however. His following wasn’t so much a cult of personality but more about empowerment and inspiration. But overall, the polarization of U.S. politics is fascinating, especially compared to countries with five or more political parties. In those places, voters can more easily shift from one party to another. If they don’t support one party in a particular election, they ideologically move to the next one.

Allen: But in the U.S., moving from Democrat to Republican or Republican to Democrat is a huge shift. It’s a big ask to go from voting for Donald Trump to voting for Kamala Harris or vice versa. That’s a major ideological jump. So, the data we get regarding popularity in the U.S. can be skewed. Take Mitch McConnell, for example. He regularly has around 30% approval in his home state of Kentucky. However, he still won reelection because, to Kentucky voters, he’s the lesser of two evils. Whoever the Democrats run is always portrayed as far-left, out of touch with Kentucky values, and so on.

Rosner: That’s a pattern we’re seeing more and more—this hyper-polarized environment. Historically, it is hard to look at approval ratings because this extreme polarization has only intensified over the last 10 to 20 years. Having a charismatic candidate greatly helps, but it has been a while since we’ve had one. The last truly charismatic presidential candidate was Obama in 2012. In 2016, both candidates—Trump and Clinton—had high negatives—the same thing happened in 2020. Now, however, Harris has some charisma. She has amazing hair, historically a big deal in elections. JFK, great hair. Clinton has pretty good hair. Reagan has amazing hair.

Allen: There’s something to appearance in politics. It’s not a deciding factor, but it plays a role. A psychologist could speak more to that than I can, but there’s something about how a candidate looks and sounds. Someone who looks the part and is eloquent can have more appeal than someone who might be smart and have good policies but doesn’t come across as well visually or rhetorically. Rosner: There’s something to that. Presidents are like America’s flight attendants. Remember how exciting flight attendants were in the 1960s? They wore mini skirts and were the subject of many, many fantasies. Over the years, they’ve been replaced with the idea of flight attendants who don’t have to be sexy. But presidents are, to some extent, America’s sexy cheerleaders, and it’s good to want one who’s “cute.”

there’s an element of that in how we perceive political figures.

Allen: But I want to get back to something I mentioned earlier. I was flipping through my book, and a point I repeatedly make is crucial on social media and in the book. Regurgitating a fact is not the same as understanding it. I’ll elaborate. Analysts and experts often regurgitate certain facts like, “Polls are snapshots.” That’s correct, but they must truly understand what that means when analyzing the data.

Rosner: They say one thing and then contradict themselves in the analysis.

Allen: They’ll say, “Polls are snapshots,” but then they analyze them as predictions. There’s a disconnect. Saying you understand something and demonstrating it are two different things. This is why I was so excited when the publisher asked me to write a book on statistical literacy. Instead of writing for experts in a bubble—which they need to get out of—I also had the chance to explain these concepts more broadly.

One key concept I talk about is the idea of a simultaneous census. What does a poll measure? That seems like a dreadfully simple question. But if you ask experts, you’ll get various answers, and many will repeat a textbook definition, calling it a “snapshot.” Then, when you ask them to explain what the poll means, they often need to be more knowledgeable. Their words prove they don’t need to learn what the data signifies. They’ll say, “The polls predicted…” No. Polls are not predictions.

Rosner: So, what do polls measure, in your view?

Allen: Polls are an estimate of a simultaneous census—a snapshot of a candidate’s base of support at that moment in time, not a prediction of the future. That’s why the margin of error plays such a huge role. Take a candidate polling at 49%. Before we even discuss undecided or people potentially changing their minds, that 49% could be 50% or 51%. Or it could be 48% or 47%.

Mathematically speaking, 49% is just as likely to be 50 or 51 as it is to be 48 or 47. It’s more likely to be close to 49, so candidates polling at 49% do well. Now, compare that to a candidate polling at 44%. That 44% could be 45% or 46%, but it could also be 43% or 42%. Even at 46%—the high end of their base of support—they’re still far from 50%, which means they can easily be overtaken.

Rosner: So, it’s not just about being ahead, but about how close you are to 50%.

Allen: The closer you reach 50%, the better your chances. That’s why analyzing polling numbers properly is so important. Candidates polling at 44% are in a much riskier position because, even at their best, they’re still far from the finish line.

Allen: When I talk about the simultaneous census concept, the question it answers is: What portion of the population currently supports this candidate? It’s about understanding what a poll is measuring. In Chapter 8, I explain this with a real experiment. Suppose you had asked everyone in the population the same question simultaneously. In that case, the result would fall within the margin of error.

Rosner: You also talk about ideal polls.

Allen: But let’s talk about bad snapshots—like putting a filter on your phone to look super hot.

Rosner: Right, like Rasmussen.

Allen: Yes. Rasmussen got kicked out of the 538 aggregate for being too biased.

Rosner: So, what about those “bad pictures” of the population?

Allen: The reason Rasmussen was kicked out of the 538 aggregate wasn’t necessarily because they were too biased—it was because they didn’t share their methodology. When 538 asked, “You’ve got these numbers, but where did you get them from?” and Rasmussen essentially said, “Don’t worry about it,” that’s a red flag. It doesn’t matter if the data is legitimate—if someone says, “I’ve got these numbers,” then refuses to explain how they got them, that’s problematic.

It’s simple: your data should only be included if you’re forthright about how you conducted your polling. This is true in any field of science. It automatically loses credibility if you’re clear about your methods and your data can’t be replicated. Nate Silver has a slightly different opinion. He acknowledges that there might be a good reason not to include Rasmussen because of their methodology. Still, he argues that Rasmussen’s overall accuracy wasn’t bad, so it’s debatable.

Rosner: So, I could just put out a “Carl Allen Poll,” saying Harris is at 48 and Trump at 46, and when someone asks, “Where did you get those numbers?” I could say, “Don’t worry about it,” that would fly.

Allen: Your data shouldn’t be considered if you’re not doing real research. Accuracy alone isn’t enough—transparency is key. Without it, the data is useless.

Rosner: What about methodologies that bug you? When I look up how some polling companies operate, I see things that bother me. For example, some companies use a paid panel—they recruit 5,000 people, try to make them demographically balanced, and then ask a random sample of 1,000 from that panel each week what they think. They pay them a little, but what if the pool is contaminated? What if someone is peeing into the pool?

Allen: Yes, that’s a concern.

Rosner: And then there are companies still using landlines! I’m old—I still have a landline—but that’s outdated. What do you think of those methodologies?

Allen: I find methodologies suspect, but there’s a big “but” here. It’s important. The issue isn’t necessarily the method itself—it’s how you use it. For example, using a paid panel can introduce bias. However, you can still get valuable information if the data is weighted correctly and the methodology is transparent. It’s the same with landlines. It seems outdated, but combined with other methods, it can still contribute to a representative sample. The key is transparency and understanding the limitations of each method.

Allen: The purpose of a transparent methodology is to ensure that it is conducted with scientific goals in mind. The goal of transparent methodology is not to confine everyone to a strict framework and dictate that everything must be done in a specific way. Because it is so imprecise, polling data is a science—but an inexact science. Suppose someone develops a technique to achieve a better random sample. In that case, we should not reject it simply because it does not align with established guidelines.

I strongly advocate for diversity and innovation in methodology, provided there is transparency about how it is being conducted. Whether it’s landline polls, cell phone polls, online panels, or mixed methods, I support them all. As an analyst who examines this data, I want to determine which methodology is effective and which is not and how a flawed methodology could be improved.

The book discusses a significant point about Literary Digest, which became infamous for conducting political polls before elections. Their methodology involved sending out mail-in surveys to their subscribers, which produced a vast sample but not a random one. Their subscribers were typically more affluent and urban, which skewed the results. Despite this, for several elections in the 1920s and early 1930s, their unscientific polls produced results so close to the actual outcomes that even scientists concluded the results were reliable.

However, in 1936, Literary Digest “prediction” as it was reported, said  that Republican candidate Alf Landon would defeat Franklin D. Roosevelt with 57% of the vote. When the election results came in, Roosevelt won in a landslide, receiving 62% of the vote. This massive polling error exposed the flaws in their methodology—such as the failure to account for the demographic biases of their mailing list. In hindsight, and only in hindsight, did it become clear that their methods were unsound, but this significant failure revealed those flaws. The perception of being “accurate” by an unscientific measure gave them credibility they didn’t deserve. This is the exact mindset people still have today. Note how casually the experts that demean the Literary Digest judge a poll’s accuracy by how well it predicted past elections. Ask them what rating they’d have given to the Literary Digest prior to 1936. They’ll block you for it. A similar issue occurred in 1948 with the famously incorrect “Dewey Defeats Truman” headline, where polling missteps, and misinterpretation,also contributed to the erroneous forecast.

Allen: In Chapter 5, I emphasize that fluctuation in poll results is normal. Even the best pollsters sometimes produce slightly inaccurate results—that’s how it works. We cannot view polls as instruments that are supposed to be perfect. More independent pollsters—independent being the keyword—who do not skew their data would significantly advance the field. This will only be possible if better methodologies, like the ones I propose in the book for analyzing poll accuracy, are adopted.

Rosner: So, you should take the opportunity to plug your book hard here.

Allen: Sure. The Polls Weren’t Wrong will change how polling data is analyzed and understood in the U.S. and worldwide. I make this claim because the book’s scientific approach is one that will win out over the current methods.All the analyses and methods I use are grounded in science. The methods for analyzing pollscurrently  in the U.S. and globally are not scientifically sound. Polling will improve with a greater understanding of history and the adoption of better scientific methods. Whether this shift happens in two or twenty years isn’t for me to decide, but the world would undoubtedly benefit from it. People would have a clearer understanding of what poll data means.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Wonderful Mkhutche on Updates in Malawian Humanism, Late 2024

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/29

Wonderful Mkhutche is Humanists Malawi’s Executive Director.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are back with Wonderful Mkhutche today. I want to discuss some updated issues in Malawi, whether related to witchcraft, the parliament, the educational system, or particular people or groups being persecuted for various reasons, some of which we know. What are some of the newer developments that have taken place in 2024, since the summer, regarding humanist equality and non-religious rights in Malawi?

Wonderful Mkhutche: In general, the situation remains the same. We still have witchcraft cases and the violence that follows. Recently, a new development that surprised some, though not many, was an academic study investigating witchcraft and politics. It concluded that even high-ranking politicians believe that witchcraft is necessary for success in politics. This research also delved into other cross-cutting issues, such as how a leader can be held accountable if they believe their position is due to witchcraft rather than the people’s votes.

Regarding education, the situation remains largely unchanged. Religion heavily influences our educational system, with students taught about the Bible from early primary school. I have written extensively, arguing that we should follow a different path. We need to separate education from religion, but people have yet to be ready to accept this.

While things are mostly the same, there are minor changes here and there. 

Jacobsen: What are the issues that may have regressed in terms of activism?

Mkhutche: When I looked at the research I mentioned earlier, I felt we needed to progress. We are not moving forward because these are high-ranking individuals in important decision-making positions in the government, yet they hold these beliefs. I also considered the ongoing witchcraft debate, which may soon be taken to parliament. The Malawi Law Commission has recommended changing the law to recognize the existence of witchcraft. If this debate reaches parliament, I fear the law will change, which would take us several steps backward. Currently, the law does not recognize witchcraft, but if it does, we will be forced to argue against it.

That said, there are some positive developments. People’s attitudes are changing. For instance, whenever an issue arises concerning witchcraft or when a government official refers to prayer as the solution to the country’s problems, people tag me on social media. This indicates they want to hear the humanist perspective, different from the case seven or eight years ago. Back then, there was only one narrative about witchcraft and religious issues. Still, now, people seem more open to other perspectives.

Even the media, such as radio stations, are now engaging me whenever there are discussions about witchcraft or issues concerning religion and politics. This is a positive development.

Jacobsen: Looking at where we are now, are there any particular new cases around witchcraft allegations in Malawi that should be noted?

Mkhutche: There are not any particular cases, as the cases are the usual ones where a family accuses an older adult of witchcraft or situations where people in workplaces accuse each other of witchcraft. So, no specific cases come to mind. However, I can check our database and suggest one or two cases for you if necessary.

Jacobsen: Regarding the church’s role in Malawi, a Vatican visit about a month ago focused on the upcoming elections and the ongoing food crisis. For those who don’t know the context or haven’t had direct experience, how does having a food crisis, a highly religious society, and the Vatican’s political influence make humanist activism more difficult? You’re dealing with international institutions like the Catholic Church and the dominant political system while people are desperately searching for answers because there may not be enough food next week.

Mkhutche: Yes, exactly. The urgency of survival here is a major factor. Most people are focused on basic needs—finding food for tomorrow, getting dressed, and having shelter. When people are in survival mode, it is hard to start questioning or reflecting on religious matters. They are content with the religious beliefs they inherited from their families because they don’t have the time or energy to debate these things.

So, in this context, it is challenging to promote humanism. Christianity is the dominant religion in Malawi, not only in the religious sphere but also in Malawians’ social and political life. When you talk about issues like witchcraft, I have encountered many people who use the Bible as evidence that witchcraft exists. This makes it difficult to challenge the Bible’s dominance in Malawian society.

Even though they may not have much evidence, the Bible is infallible for many. If they were to deny the existence of witchcraft, despite the lack of evidence, they would feel like they are going against the Bible. 

Jacobsen: However, there has been a positive development from the church’s side. We have a Catholic Bishop Martin Mtumbuka, who openly states that he does not believe in the existence of witchcraft. He argues that witchcraft is the result of poverty and ignorance.

Mkhutche: Bishop Mtumbuka is quite vocal about this point. Two weeks ago, I even wrote an article in the newspaper recognizing the important role he is playing because, in a way, he is challenging the Christian belief in witchcraft. I described him as a courageous man willing to spark this debate. If we have more individuals like him in the coming years, other religious leaders may take a similar stance. This would help us greatly, as religious people are unlikely to listen to us humanists directly. They can listen to their religious leaders if they also take that stand. 

Jacobsen: There are grassroots campaigns plus help from international groups such as UNICEF. So, I am aware of the Vaccinate My Village campaign that happened in Malawi. Community leaders, health workers, and others could collaborate to build community sensibility around vaccinating against COVID infections. So, they can naturally resist taking the vaccines when they may not have as many intensive care units if the situation worsens. But, even in wealthy countries like the United States, they have anti-vaxxers. So, it doesn’t necessarily concern the country’s wealth. It has to do with your sensibility about how you understand the world. 

Mkhutche: Yes. 

Jacobsen: So, how is the humanist community doing there now for humanist Malawi? 

Mkhutche: When it comes to vaccine issues, they are not directly connected to witchcraft because, in the Malawian understanding, we have two kinds of things. We’re not talking about these mysteries. We have witchcraft, which is connected to things happening in the tradition and the local context. Then we have Satanism, things that happen, maybe from the urban or foreign setup. So when it comes to issues of the vaccine, people are more aligned towards thinking that the vaccine is connected to certain and not witchcraft, per se. However, a small section of the population comes up with that additive. We also have another section that may bring about conspiracy theories. But in general, people are receptive whenever there is a certain vaccine. So, when we look at this context and how we are working as a humanist, we are working against a society that behaves differently from how we view our world as a humanist. So you have a society that believes that everything, any detail, happens in our lives because of God. So whenever there is a drought, there is no food, they say that it’s God, or even sometimes they will say Satan. 

Jacobsen: And what’s the current size of Humanists Malawi now? 

Mkhutche: In terms of membership, we have around 120 members. This measurement is based on our WhatsApp group. I started an initiative to register everyone as members a year ago formally. Still, only about five people have registered so far. Some people need to see the benefits or positivity of registering.

In contrast, others are hesitant because they do not want to be openly identified as humanists or atheists for various reasons. But for now, we use the WhatsApp group as the standard for our membership count. Of course, some people come and go, but we generally use that as our basis.

Jacobsen: When talking to your members, what are the most consistent compliments about the community once they understand what you’re all about? And what are the most common complaints about the broader culture in Malawi?

Mkhutche: In a sense, the Humanist Malawi community becomes a sanctuary for people. Once they understand what we stand for, they often compliment the openness and the fact that we provide a space where people can freely express themselves without fear of judgment. However, they also often express frustration about the dominant religious and cultural mindset in Malawi, which can be isolating for those who question or reject traditional beliefs.

Jacobsen: Regarding positive feedback from your members, what are they most happy about?

Mkhutche: They are happy that we have made a breakthrough on certain platforms, especially in the media, where we were previously absent. As I mentioned, we are constantly discussing humanism from different perspectives, and they are glad to see that it is now part of the public discourse. Some members are also positive that I am publicly advancing this narrative.

Others express that they felt religion had confined them, and now that they have joined the humanist movement, they feel free in their minds. They appreciate understanding the world in its complexity rather than through the limiting lens of religion. These are some of the positive responses we get.

Regarding negative feedback, members often feel that the humanist community in Malawi could be more well-organized. As I mentioned earlier, we have gotten people to register to get to know each other, follow up, and be there for each other when needed. But people did not come forward. It is easier to be organized when members are willing to show up. It would be beneficial to be more organized, especially in cases of illness, funerals, or other events where humanism should also be represented.

Jacobsen: Have you considered hosting an annual conference, symposium, or pub night? I don’t know what the equivalent would be in Malawian culture. Still, some seasonal or monthly gatherings for members would be good.

Mkhutche: We have considered that, but I was skeptical about whether the idea would work, given the members’ commitments. However, we are developing our first magazine to gather stories from our members. Members themselves will contribute these stories. We are also working on a book where members will provide articles.

This is a way to organize ourselves on a different platform since we face challenges meeting in person. We plan to organize a conference to discuss various humanist themes. We’ve had a similar initiative. Last year, we held a debate at the University of Malawi. However, the attendees were students who were not members of Humanists Malawi. This showed us that we can organize events where humanism is discussed, and we hope to extend this to our members.

The challenge with hosting larger events, like a conference, is that they can be expensive. We would need to invite people from across the country, covering transportation, accommodation, and food—which may not be easy in our context. But it’s something I always think about.

Jacobsen: Are you noticing any demographic commonalities within your roughly 120 members, or are you getting people from various backgrounds across Malawi? Do you notice any common trends in your members’ demographics?

Mkhutche: Yes. Most members of Humanists Malawi come from a religious background because that is the default position for nearly every Malawian. Everyone is raised within a religious context. Regarding gender, I would say 99 percent of our members are men. It’s not that we discourage women from joining. Still, in our context, it is rare for women to have the courage to debate against societal norms and religious identity.

At one point, we had around five women in our WhatsApp group, but almost all left. This is largely because of our context—women are generally not as forthcoming when it comes to questioning religion. So, in terms of demographics, we all share a religious background, but the group is predominantly male. The majority of our members are also young people.

The youth are at the forefront of questioning religious issues, unlike the older generation, which is still deeply involved in the church. Young people are exposed to new ideas through information, knowledge, and social media, so they are more willing to engage with humanism.

Jacobsen: Last year, there was a proposal to recognize the existence of witchcraft in legislation. What has happened with that?

Mkhutche: That proposal is now at the cabinet level. When it reaches the cabinet level, they are preparing to discuss it. After the Minister of Justice scrutinizes it from all angles, the government will present its perspective and then take it to parliament for debate and possible approval. However, it has been stuck at the cabinet level for some time, likely because it’s controversial.

But one of these days, we will see it in parliament. Once it gets there, it will likely pass, given the nature of our politicians and a recent study that found many Malawian politicians believe in witchcraft. They believe it sustains their political careers. We must also acknowledge that these politicians come from backgrounds where witchcraft was ingrained in their beliefs. When it reaches parliament, it will likely pass, which could set us back by ten years. We would have to start all over again to change that law.

It’s also important to note that some of our allies who combat common issues have deep philosophical differences, which can complicate things.

Jacobsen: On Bishop Martin Mtumbuka of the Catholic Church in Karonga Diocese, he has taken a stand against witchcraft-based violence. What can you say regarding mutual support in combating this particular issue?

Mkhutche: Yes, Bishop Mtumbuka is one of our major allies. Of course, other prominent individuals occasionally write on their social media platforms that they don’t believe in witchcraft. As for Bishop Mtumbuka, I plan to meet him. A few days ago, I was able to get his contact information. So, if he comes to the south or central regions, I will meet him and discuss how we can collaborate.

If we take a picture together and share it publicly, it will show that we are united in saying that witchcraft does not exist. That kind of collaboration is what I am looking for. I learned this approach from Dr. Leo. He said that even if you work with church leaders, as long as you share the same goal, you should not hesitate to collaborate because we all work toward the same goal—human welfare.

Jacobsen: I’m just double-checking the news. I haven’t seen anything new, except that Father Claude Boucher, from the Catholic Church in Bula Mission, Dowa, recently passed away.

Mkhutche: Yes, Father Boucher was truly one of a kind. He tried to find common ground between religion, especially Christianity or Catholicism, and local culture. In doing so, he was initiated into the Gule Wamkulu secret cult among the Chewa people. At one point, he even attempted to explore witchcraft. He clearly stated that if anyone could introduce him to witchcraft, they should do so because he wanted to understand Malawian culture deeply. Unfortunately, no one was willing to take him down that path.

So, while he did not explicitly say that witchcraft does not exist, he pointed out that there was no one available to teach him about it. I remember writing about his death, and I emphasized that if someone like him wanted to explore witchcraft. Still, no one was available to guide him; perhaps we could conclude that witchcraft is not real. After all, someone should have been willing to teach him if it were genuine.

Jacobsen: Was he Canadian?

Mkhutche: Yes, originally from Canada.

Jacobsen: Do you know which part of Canada he was from? 

Mkhutche: I need to find out which part of Canada. He was probably from the French-speaking part, so Quebec or Ottawa.

Jacobsen: That’s funny. I didn’t know that! You learn something new every day.

Mkhutche: Exactly.

Jacobsen: All right, let’s call it a day.

Mkhutche: Yes, wonderful. Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Let’s keep talking next time.

Mkhutche: Absolutely. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Movember, EMS, Firefighters, Resilience With Frank Leeb

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/28

The Enhanced Stress First Aid program, funded by Movember, provides tailored mental health support for firefighters and EMS, improving accessibility through online training and flexibility. Frank Leeb is the Managing Director for the First Responder Center for Excellence and a Retired FDNY Chief Officer.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Frank Leeb, who will discuss advancements in mental health support for firefighter and EMS organizations. The First Responder Center for Excellence has developed an enhanced Stress First Aid (SFA) program. This new program is designed to help firefighters and EMS personnel manage stress in their high-pressure roles.

How does building mental well-being and resilience benefit professionals? This is a softball question.

Frank Leeb: Yes, it is. Building mental resilience is crucial. It helps prepare responders for the challenges and situations they may face as firefighters, EMTs, or paramedics.

By introducing resilience-building mechanisms early, our first responders are better equipped to manage the stress of their jobs. They can recover more quickly if they experience increased stress due to their work. In the fields of homeland security, fire, and EMS, we often refer to the concept of being “left or right of the boom”—meaning before or after an incident occurs. Our focus is on preparing responders before an incident, in the “left of the boom” stage, to build their mental resilience. This is the primary goal of the program.

Jacobsen: Many classes are now offered online, which is especially helpful for those juggling responsibilities like family or caregiving. This format allows more people to access and attend these courses, making it easier for them to gain valuable information. How extensive are the online services for this education?

Leeb: The class we offer takes about 40 minutes to complete one module. It’s free for firefighters or EMS personnel who want to take it. Initially, the program was delivered in person as part of a three-year project with Movember. However, due to COVID-19, we transitioned to an online format.

The long-term benefit of offering this online is substantial. In-person classes could only reach a limited number of people. Still, online courses allow us to “force multiply” the message, reaching many more responders, especially in remote areas where gathering enough people for in-person training can be challenging. Smaller or rural departments often need more funding for in-person training, so this online option enables them to train all their members without the need to travel to a single location. They can complete the course from the comfort of their homes or firehouses.

This model, which we implemented during our work with Movember, has proven successful. The First Responder Center for Excellence plans to create more modules in this format.

Jacobsen: How was stress managed for firefighters and EMS personnel in the past, and how is it viewed now? How is this newer understanding integrated into the education?

Leeb: That’s a great question. Often, we have peer support groups and people who come in after a firefighter is struggling. But again, let’s switch to preloading the mechanisms to deal with it. Let’s teach different strategies, such as breathing exercises or mindfulness, and equip responders with the tools to recover quickly. In addition, bringing those trainings online, as I mentioned, has broadened the audience we can reach.

Jacobsen: When I was in basic training for the Canadian military this year for 7 of the 8 weeks/8 of the 9 weeks, they introduced tactical breathing. So, they practice something similar to pranayama. It’s essentially the same when it comes to calming the nervous system and reducing anxiety. This kind of direct physiological practice is very helpful in stressful situations.

Leeb: Well, those techniques would have been useful for you in Ukraine, right? It’s all about calming and getting your body into the right state.

Jacobsen: That’s right. 

Leeb: It’s about understanding the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems and how we can influence them. That’s what these classes aim to do—they provide the tools first responders need to survive, thrive, and continue. We know that first responders encounter situations that many people will never see. They do things and go places that most people won’t experience on a normal day. We want our first responders to be resilient and ready for the next call. 

Jacobsen: Their work conditions are often unpredictable. For example, when I was in Ukraine, a couple of instances caused genuine fear due to the circumstances. However, I won’t go into detail. That’s a reality for first responders. In extreme work environments, whether domestic or international, they witness emergencies, tragedies, and death firsthand. It doesn’t have to be like a high-speed car chase in a movie with Harrison Ford or Mel Gibson. Simply witnessing traumatic situations in others is physiologically triggering.

Leeb: Exactly. You’re right. It could be as simple as responding to a medical run and encountering a case of child abuse or a young child who didn’t survive. You might also be performing CPR on someone or attending to a horrific car accident. It doesn’t have to be a major disaster like 9/11, where I was a responder in the afternoon in lower Manhattan. We know there are significant mental health impacts from those situations. And just a month later, in October of the same year, a plane crashed in Queens, and I responded to that as well. Programs for mental health back then were either lacking or inadequate.

In many cases, the necessary mental health support systems were not in place to prepare you for the psychological impact of those experiences. When I was with the FDNY, where I recently retired, this led to a drastic shift in how we handle peer counselling and our counselling unit. There has been significant evolution in this area. Similarly, at the First Responder Center for Excellence, transitioning from in-person to online training while ensuring we preload these mental health mechanisms into first responders represents a dramatic shift in preparing for these inevitable events. Firefighters will face these challenges, and it doesn’t matter whether you work in a busy city like New York or Toronto or in a suburb anywhere—emergencies happen everywhere.

Online training is important because we can reach responders everywhere, which is crucial. 

Jacobsen: Not every responder will get the same attention or recognition that 9/11 first responders received, like when Jon Stewart advocated for their health issues. His focus was primarily on cancer and other related conditions. But when it comes to mental health, it’s rare to see long-term, intensive advocacy from someone that prominent. How do you balance short-term initiatives, like month-long awareness campaigns like Movember, with the long-term commitment required for mental health support?

Leeb: For us, working with Movember was part of a three-year project. So, regardless of the month, our class was available year-round because emergencies happen all year, and preparing for mental wellness is a constant task. Movember was the perfect partner for us because of their recognition and because when people see the Movember logo, particularly men—and firefighters are predominantly men—they pay attention. While we’re working to shift the demographics a bit, Movember’s appeal and global reach were crucial in helping us get our message out to the right people.

Let’s face it: who still shaves their mustache in November? Some firefighters keep their mustaches in November without knowing the backstory behind Movember or why it started. When we can leverage organizations like Movember for good, it’s a win for men everywhere, especially for firefighters. That’s why the program was successful.

When we shifted to the online class, we immediately saw positive results. Based on feedback, we adjusted the content slightly in years two and three and ended up with an astonishing completion rate of 76%. If you have a program where nearly 80% of participants complete it, that’s a significant achievement.

Jacobsen: That’s a great final note. What do you think?

Leeb: I agree, that’s good. Thank you for your work, too—whether it’s about this or your reporting from Ukraine, it’s important for people to hear those stories.

Jacobsen: Thanks. I’m just a holler-back girl!

Leeb: [Laughing] All right. Take care of yourself.

Jacobsen: You too. Take care. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Matthew Lesko on Grants for Debt

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/28

 Matthew Lesko, born May 11, 1943, is an American author and infomercial personality known for his “Free Money” books and TV appearances. He gained fame for his colorful suits adorned with question marks and claims to help people access government funds. Despite criticism, Lesko has published over twenty books on federal grants and public assistance. He resides in Maryland with his third wife, Wendy Schaetzel Lesko, and their two children.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Matthew Lesko to discuss grants, debt, and other intriguing topics that, when tax time comes around, everyone can’t help but feel anxious about. You’ve had a 40+ year career educating the public about these matters. My first question is: why did this interest you, and how did you make a living?

Matthew Lesko: Honestly, I don’t know. I’m 81 years old now. When I started, I was in the military for three years, two months, and nine days during the Vietnam War. Afterward, I went to graduate school. I wasn’t much of an intellectual, but several universities took my GI Bill money, even though I couldn’t get into grad school before the war.

After that, I earned an MBA and started several businesses. My first MBA was in computers, and I launched a computer software company in the 1970s, but it failed. Another business I started also failed. I kept failing at everything.

Then, I became a consultant. When you’re failing, you often end up as a consultant. I lived in Washington, D.C., and started working for Fortune 500 companies, helping them navigate the federal government to get what they needed. I didn’t know much about Washington myself, however. I grew up in a small town called Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania—like Henderson Hot Springs or a town like that. I didn’t know anything about government, but I was hungry, and these companies were paying me to find information. So, I went to various government agencies and was shocked by the available resources.

Coming from a small coal-mining town, I had always thought the government was just the IRS, the DMV, and the post office—that was it. But what shocked me was that people could secure millions of dollars and become billionaires through government programs. I thought, “Holy shit, why doesn’t everyone do this?” Especially the people back in Wilkes-Barre!

That was my first business, and it grew. I started with just myself, a phone, and a desk, which eventually became successful. But after a while, I got tired of helping rich people—they were no fun. All they cared about was making more money. I wanted to enjoy life and have fun, and I found that giving talks and seeing people smile and laugh brought me joy.

I used to give speeches at companies like Procter & Gamble, but no one ever laughed during those talks. It would take me weeks to realize I had done a good job because everyone was too afraid to show emotion in front of their colleagues. That environment wasn’t for me.

Then, one day, an agent found me. There was an article about me in Parade magazine, a big Sunday supplement in the U.S. that reaches millions of readers. The article was about how I helped businesses find government information. After publishing it, an agent approached me and said, “Why don’t you write a book?”

I laughed because I had flunked English three times in college. Writing a book felt like going to Mars. But, well, here we are!

Jacobsen: You tried that with your book, and it became a New York Times bestseller. How did that come about?

Lesko: Yes, I did! The book became a New York Times bestseller, and I copied everything from government publications. I didn’t write a word. Remember, I flunked English.

I found a book at the Government Printing Office called The Catalog of Federal Domestic Assistance and literally cut and pasted from it. You could do that with government publications. Nothing in the government is copyrighted because “We, The People,” own everything. See? So, you’re not protecting anything because everyone is the owner. So, I took that catalogue, which had around 2,000 programs, and made a book out of it.

After a couple of failed businesses, I had already learned that having customers is the key to staying in business. If you can’t get customers, you don’t have a business. Everybody worries about all this other stuff, but that’s irrelevant. After wasting a lot of money on advertising, I realized that free advertising—getting people to write about you—is the best way. I couldn’t afford to buy an article in Parade magazine, but getting someone to write it costs me nothing. It’s all about hard work and understanding the process.

When my consumer book came out, I thought, “How do I market this?” Local talk shows were the way to go at that time—every city had them. Not just talk radio but local news shows, too. I made a career selling millions of books by going from city to city, doing ten shows in one city, getting on a plane, and doing ten more shows in the next. That’s how I built my success.

But then people stopped buying reference books because of the Internet. Remember that? It put me out of business for reference books since everyone thought they could get everything for free online. It took me years to figure out how to pivot because the information is still important. I just had to figure out how to present it in a way that people would find valuable.

What I do now is more successful than anything I’ve done before. I had infomercials that were famous here in the U.S., and I sold many books. But now, it’s about community. I have something called LeskoHelp, which is people helping people. I’m just the “trained seal” who gets people in, but the real magic happens when others who’ve figured out the system help people get the necessary resources. This has been more profitable than anything I’ve done before.

My other businesses were bigger but less profitable than this one. I love it because I see how much it helps people. People who didn’t know how to spell “USA” now get grants to pay their rent or utilities. They had no idea this help existed.

What bothers me is that rich people know all about this stuff and use it constantly. The people who need it don’t know it exists. In America, half the population can’t afford an unexpected $500 bill. They don’t have the money. There’s so much need in this country now. The rich keep getting richer, and the poor keep falling further behind.

The number of impoverished people is increasing, and these government programs are more important than ever. The government now gives out an average of $17,000 per person every year through these programs. But there are thousands and thousands of different programs, and people have yet to learn about them. People will call a government office, and even the people working there don’t know what programs they have available.

The key is finding the right office and transferring that information to people who need it. I don’t think I’m the best person to teach someone just starting because I have 50 years of experience. That can be intimidating for someone new to this. It’s hard to understand where they’re coming from.

But the most valuable part of what I do is through the community of members who’ve learned from me. They can teach each other. The best part is that I only charge $20 monthly for access. I could easily charge $2,000 or $3,000, and people would pay for it. In the U.S., information is worth what people are willing to pay. But I didn’t want to do that. Everyone told me I should charge at least $500 a month when I started. Instead, I wanted to be the $20 guy.

For $20 a month, you can get as much information as possible. There’s no upsell, no hidden fees. I don’t care. I’ll even teach you for free, and I do that often. I want people to know that they don’t need me. Some people in your neighbourhood—wherever you are in the U.S.—get paid by the government to do what I do, and they do it for free. But nobody knows about them. People on the street don’t know that.

Lesko: What was the question again?

Jacobsen: How did you originally get started with this 49 years ago? You’ve given a lot of context, but I also want to dive into how major media coverage—like on Oprah or Larry King—helped expand your reach to the millions of people who watch those shows. How did that exposure help?

Lesko: Oh. It helped me reach more people than I ever imagined. That’s why I was a regular on Late Night with David Letterman. I must have appeared on his show seven times or so. They’d call me whenever someone cancelled. I learned early on that the media doesn’t care what you say. I used to think, “They’re going to open my book, go to page 37, and ask me about this specific fact.” But nobody does that. Nobody reads it. It’s all entertainment.

I was the go-to guest when someone cancelled. I remember once when Letterman’s team called me in Chicago in the middle of the day. They said, “Did someone cancel? We need you here for the 5 o’clock show.” And just like that, I’d fly to New York.

What a thrill it was! I always wondered, “Who am I subbing for?” Larry King used to do this, too, when he had an hour-long show. He’d have one guest for the first half-hour and another for the second half-hour. He’d say, “Lesko, come on down and wait. We may or may not use you as the second guest.”

I’d sit there while some big star was on during the first half-hour. If the star couldn’t stay for another half-hour, they’d say, “Let’s go with Lesko.” If the star said yes, I’d be bumped, but they’d owe me one, and I’d get invited back again. That’s how I became a reliable, professional guest. But, of course, there was always a limit to that.

Then I started thinking about how to market myself. I realized that I was doing so well as a guest, so I needed to figure out how to translate that success into paid ads without actually paying for the ads. I never paid for anything. I discovered that if I provided an ad and said, “Hey, if nobody buys this time slot, use my ad, and I’ll give you half the money,” I could make a fortune. I did this on CNN and made so much money but didn’t pay for the time. My theory was simple.

Back when I was selling books in New York, it was frustrating that bookstores got half the money. I got, like, 10%. Practically nothing! My market wasn’t people hanging around bookstores, but when I was a guest on shows like Larry King, viewers had to go to a bookstore to get my book. I was driving traffic to bookstores, but my audience wasn’t necessarily book browsers.

When I decided to publish my books, I wondered how I would do it. Should I publish 100,000 books and send them to bookstores? I didn’t have that kind of money. So, I figured out a different approach. Larry King was one of the first places I tested it. I used an 800 number. People would call, give their credit card information, and I’d get the money before they even got the book. It was great!

I didn’t need money upfront to make it work, and I was getting national coverage through the 800 number. My market wasn’t people hanging out in bookstores. My customers were people struggling in life, and they needed quick access to the information I had. This approach worked well. Then I did infomercials, which were huge. I love entertaining and trying to bring joy to people’s lives. That’s why I dress like this—every day is about bringing joy to my own life, too.

I dress like this all the time. When I walk down the street, people smile at me. They don’t know me or my work—maybe some do occasionally—but just seeing me makes them smile, and that’s why I do it. But when people look at you and smile, that’s a wonderful feeling. If I can make people smile for no reason, and they don’t even know me—that’s a gift. Even if they don’t buy anything, just having people around you always smiling—that’s a nice way to live. I don’t care that much about selling anymore.

Jacobsen: How can ordinary Americans take advantage of some of these grants, which average $17,000 annually?

Lesko: That’s the key! It would be nice if there were a single website for it all, but I have eight websites you can start with. These people do what I do, but they do it for free because the government pays them. Let’s go through some of them.

If you have bad credit, there are government programs not only to pay your living expenses—rent, utilities, mortgage, or car payments—but also to provide free counsellors. These counsellors will sit down with you, help you eliminate debt, and deal with your creditors—all free. You can find them at hud.gov/counseling. You can make an appointment right there.

I recommend making appointments with 2 or 3 of these counsellors because only some know everything, and you want to ensure you understand all your options. Otherwise, your alternative is to go on Google, type in “debt,” and get 250 million websites. The right program is in there, but you’ll never find it—it’s probably on page 7,240. You’ll never get to it because everything on Google is from someone trying to make money off you. Everything I’m telling people about comes from people who want to give you money. These programs don’t have advertising money, so you’ll never find them on Google. People get frustrated and end up paying someone when they don’t have to, which only gets them into deeper financial trouble.

The next thing is doing something with your life. Do you want to start a business? Be a freelancer? Have an invention? Start a nonprofit? The government provides free consultants in every city in the country—probably half a dozen to two or three dozen in each city. These consultants receive government grants to help you set things up. They don’t charge you. They help you find money, give you legal assistance—everything.

The government has a database where you can find these consultants. Go to sba.gov/local-assistance, enter your ZIP code, and find out where these people are. You call them up and make an appointment. Getting Help these days requires some reporting skills, like what you do as a reporter.

With Google, people think they no longer need to use the phone. But I’m sure when you’re working on an article, you have to get on the phone, talk to half a dozen people, and gather real information. Instead of relying on 500 websites and still knowing nothing, you talk to people. That’s what you must do now—at least for my work. It’s essential!

So that’s free help for you to get started on that business you’ve always wanted or that invention idea instead of going to Google and finding someone who will charge you $10,000 to do something worse. There’s also a ton of job training in the United States. It’s incredible.

Most of our population doesn’t have a degree, which used to be where all the money was. Now, it’s all about skills. You don’t need a degree as much anymore but need the right skills. The government is pouring a lot of money into training programs and will pay you while you train. You could make maybe $40,000 a year while you’re training, and after a couple of years, you could move into a career making $100,000 a year—without a degree. All of this can be done without a degree.

A good place to start for job training is careeronestop.org. You go there, call them, make an appointment, and talk to someone. That’s how you get things done. We tend to think we need to find an application to fill out, but no—you need to find someone who knows what they’re doing. It’s like when you’re writing an article. I’m sure you want to talk to a knowledgeable person who can tell you exactly what to look for, right? Instead of going down 500 alleys and finding nothing, you want to know the best ones to explore.

And it’s hard to do this through Google. Maybe A.I. can help. I’ve used it myself. It’s fancy and entertaining, but when it comes to finding this kind of information—the non-commercial stuff—it’s not always from the heart. Our economy is two-thirds capitalism, but the other third is the “giving economy.” This includes nonprofits and government offices—places that give back to you, not take money from you.

So, for example, you can use ChatGPT. Even the free version will work. You could ask, “Show me 50 nonprofit organizations and government offices that help me get money or resources to start a business in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. Give me the websites.” And you’ll get them. You won’t get 5 billion websites with people trying to sell you something—you’ll get useful information. I know this data so well that every time I use it, I can tell it’s the real stuff.

That excites me about A.I. But, like everything, once it gets too popular, someone will figure out how to make money off it, and then we’ll get all the nonsense again, like what happened with Google. Another wonderful site we have here in the U.S. is findhelp.org. You may have something similar in Canada. It’s a database of nonprofit organizations and government offices that give money and help for education, jobs, healthcare, legal services, and more. I put in my ZIP code and found 3,900 organizations in my area alone that help with all kinds of things.

I was helping someone with this and needed financial assistance. So, I put the term “financial assistance” and my ZIP code into findhelp.org. I have 250 nonprofit organizations in my ZIP code giving financial assistance. You can do the same thing—go to findhelp.org, put in your ZIP code, and you’ll see. It’s amazing. For example, if you need Help with rent, you’ll find 70 or so programs that help people with rent—not just one program.

That’s the problem. People hear about grants, try one place, and if it’s not for them, they give up and say, “There are no grants for me. Lesko must be an idiot!” But it doesn’t work that way. It’s like looking for a job—you have to knock on many doors, but you have to knock on the right doors. If you’re on Google, most of the doors you’re knocking on ask for money from you. You might only find one or two that want to give you money, and if they say no, you think it’s not for you.

That’s something I have to help people fight against. It’s the same with healthcare. I know that some developed countries don’t have free healthcare. You might think Canada’s doing just fine. I know, I know, that was my joke!

Jacobsen: Canada has exciting developments, like early national pharmacare and more. Canada is moving closer to a European-style extended model. There are also organizations working on key issues like reproductive rights and pharmacokinetics. They’re better equipped to discuss those topics. Still, your joke does highlight the difference between the U.S. and Canada, especially for middle- and lower-income people.

Lesko: For people in the U.S., having something like that is a dream. But here’s a website that can help: needyMeds.org. It’s a great resource to find low- and no-cost clinics, prescription drugs, and even grants to help with travel for medical care. They also provide resources for living expenses while you’re recovering. These aggregators are important to me because I don’t have to put all this information together—they do.

What’s interesting to me is what’s happening in Nevada. Medicaid is for low-income people who get good care while the income limit is there. Nevada is now including rental assistance as a health condition in Medicaid. If you don’t have a place to live, you’re more likely to get sick and end up in the emergency room, so they’re offering six months of rent as part of Medicaid coverage. That’s fascinating to me.

All of these things are a struggle, but thank God it gives me something to do until I die. It’s something bigger than myself to work on, which is the key in life—having something bigger than yourself. And that’s why narcissists have a frustrating life—they’re never working on something bigger than themselves. The only way to get out of that is to focus on something beyond yourself. I might have a bit of narcissism in me, too. I could easily get stuck in my head and never get out. Even at my age, though I don’t need to figure out how to feed myself anymore, I still ask, “How many people can I help?”

That’s why now, what I work on is love. I can’t run faster, get stronger, or get smarter—all that stuff is going downhill with age. But I can love harder. That’s something I can still improve on. That’s why I wear hearts now. I want to figure out how to love more deeply. Growing up in the fifties as a man, you couldn’t talk about love. If you said “love,” you had to marry the person! Especially to another man—you couldn’t say that. That’s only recently become more accepted. But now, I’m opening my heart, and even with LeskoHelp, I’m trying to love these people in a way that no one else can. The more you help others, the more your heart grows.

Lesko: Helping others is selfish because it feels so good. You’re not just doing something for them; you’re doing it for yourself. When your heart grows, you have a better life. Walking around with an open heart is the most interesting way to live.

Lesko: In the U.S., at least, not much in our society encourages an open heart. You’re supposed to be meaner, tougher, and better than everyone else. It’s too bad. When I started this journey of self-expression, I began by wearing these outfits. This is who I am inside, but I was never encouraged to show it. I lost much money at first because people didn’t want me on their T.V. shows. They’d say, “How can this guy dressed like a clown talk about finances?” But I knew this was me. And once I embraced that, more doors opened.

Lesko: The tough things in life are the real moments that shape you. Anyone can handle success—that’s easy. You get the money, go to the bank. There is no challenge there. But how do you handle failure? That’s the real test because it happens more often. I’ve written 100 books, but only 10 made money.

So, how do you deal with failure? That’s the common scenario—not “How do I invest $1,000,000?” That’s a nice problem to have, but it’s rare. That’s why my work with LeskoHelp is focused on sharing that understanding with others. We encourage the people I work with and the members to love and support one another.

This would’ve sounded ridiculous to me 20 or 30 years ago—maybe even a few years ago. But somehow, in my eighties, this idea of opening your heart has become important to me. Life doesn’t give you many chances for that, so you have to set it up yourself. I call it “throwing your party.” No one will throw a party for you—you must make it happen. It’s tough because everyone’s so protective. Even when you get advice from your loved ones, they often act as your biggest enemy. They want to protect you from failing, but failure is inevitable when you do something new. And that’s okay!

It has to be that way. Think about it: when you learn to walk or ride a bicycle, you’re going to fall on your ass a bunch of times before you get it right. So, it’s not wise to talk to loved ones when you’re doing something new because you’ll fail, and they’ll try to protect you. You can only say, “Yes, I know I’m going to fail,” because you must overcome that failure.

That failure opens up new things you couldn’t see until you got the stupid mistakes out of the way first. For example, getting kicked out of the Home Shopping Network cost me millions. But when that door closed, many windows opened that I didn’t even know existed.

Everyone told me, “Don’t give up that money—it’s stupid!” But it was from the heart. That’s why I believe your heart is smarter than your brain. But we don’t trust our hearts because we want to make a spreadsheet first and get expert advice. These experts don’t know what to do with their lives, so how can they tell you what to do with yours? They’re guessing just like everyone else. It’s silly how we run things in this country.

We’re all insecure, and professionals thrive on that insecurity. That’s why they must convince you they know the secret to charge more. 

Jacobsen: One of the leading causes of bankruptcy in the United States is medical bills, especially end-of-life care. Someone ends up paying for those bills, eventually.

Lesko: Absolutely. 

Jacobsen: If people are looking for help with those bills or are seeking methodologies to navigate that system, what can they do? Are there resources or strategies you can direct them to?

Lesko: Yes! There are things people can do, but often, we wait until the last moment to make these decisions. I had a member write to me about an emergency hospital visit where they didn’t have coverage, and they walked out with a $1,600 bill.

What we need to teach people is to ask how not to pay that bill. Every hospital in the United States cannot charge everyone because they receive government money. About 70% of the people who get a hospital bill in the U.S. shouldn’t have to pay it. Hospitals send the bills anyway because they’re businesses.

Lesko: But you have to know and ask. There are also nonprofit organizations that help you negotiate those bills and find government programs. One such organization is the PAN Foundation. They’ll help you navigate all that stuff. There are so many government programs available.

For instance, when Obamacare came in, about half of the people without healthcare were already eligible for existing programs but didn’t know it. That’s the problem—people don’t know about these programs and think they don’t have coverage. Another great resource is needyMeds.org. Before you go to the doctor, you can use that site to find doctors who won’t charge you because they’re already getting money from the government to provide free care.

But if you’re taken to a hospital by ambulance, and they bring you to their preferred hospital where they’re getting some commission, it’s over. However, we’ve now got regulations in place to prevent surprise medical bills, and there’s a government fund to help with that. The government has an 800 number you can call, and they’ll fight it for you for free. A good place to start finding resources like this is findhelp.org. Look under categories like “health care” and start making calls. You won’t find what you need immediately, but if you talk to enough people listed under healthcare there, you’ll find the right resource.

Try that over Google. The doctors who advertise on Google show up first, but on findhelp.org, everyone listed there doesn’t advertise and offers free services.

Another interesting thing we’re doing now—and I’m working on it myself—is giving back. Our small business isn’t big; it’s just a handful of people, but it’s so profitable that we give half the money back to members. Every month, we give away $70,000 to our paid members. They apply, and we distribute $70,000.

There’s also an organization—whose name escapes me—working with the government. What they do is buy old hospital debt for pennies on the dollar. When people don’t pay their hospital bills, it goes on their record, and then they can’t buy a house or a car because of that debt. This organization uses nonprofit or government money—say they get $10 million—and can buy $200 million of bad hospital debt with that. So, everyone in that ZIP code no longer has hospital debt. Instead of $200 million, they settle it for around $1 million.

It doesn’t solve the long-term problem, but it’s an interesting solution. If someone has a few thousand dollars and wants to help, they could give it to an organization like that and potentially clear the hospital debt of 1,000 people with just the snap of a finger. That’s one neat thing about the U.S.—we’re creative that way, even though we’re often shortsighted in addressing the root problems. We create answers that aren’t perfect but help after the fact.

Jacobsen: I want to be mindful of your time. Do you have any final core lessons to share from the last 49 years of working in this field, helping the public?

Lesko: For me, the open heart is so important now. Having fun is critical, too. If you’re not having fun, no one else will enjoy being around you, and they won’t feel love from you either. You have to have an open heart. People instinctively know if you’re genuine, which comes from being comfortable and not worried.

As a younger man, I don’t know if I could have done this as well because I was too focused on some success—which I didn’t even understand then. My success is measured by how much I can give before I die. There’s nothing else tangible you can take with you.

So, if you devote your life to helping people, even if you don’t feel like you have the skills to do that right now, remember that your heart is smarter than your brain. Make more decisions based on your heart. Use your brain to ensure you’re not going off a cliff, but follow your heart. You may not be successful, but at least you’ll have fun doing it. And honestly, even if you follow your brain, you might not be successful either, and you definitely won’t enjoy it as much.

Jacobsen: Is that enough? Matthew, thank you so much for your time today. We discussed LeskoHelp and some resources people can use if they need support, whether for minor or major issues.

Lesko: I have one more thing. People don’t always want to spend $20 to start, so try Lesko.com. It’s free! That’s a starter set, a free way to get your feet wet and see if this stuff works at all.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much.

Lesko: You bet. Take care. Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA) to Co-Host Panel Discussion

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/27

Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA) to Co-Host Panel Discussion on Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting from Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws 

October 29, 2024 | 1:00 PM EST | Church Center of the United Nations, New York, NY

Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA), in collaboration with a coalition of international human rights organizations, will co-host a vital panel discussion titled “Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting from Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws” on October 29th, 2024, at 1:00 PM EST. The event will take place at the Church Center of the United Nations, located at 777 United Nations Plaza, New York, NY.

EXMNA is a human rights organization that focuses on providing support for those who leave Islam by advocating for the acceptance of religious dissent and reducing discrimination faced by apostates from Islam by promoting secular values. 

This event will feature distinguished panelists from diverse faith backgrounds, many of whom have personally experienced the injustice of extrajudicial violence. Panelists will engage in a crucial conversation addressing how to combat the rise in violent acts carried out against individuals accused of apostasy and blasphemy. The panel aims to bring attention to this widespread human rights violation and urge UN Member States to take decisive steps to protect those most at risk.

Muhammad Syed, Founder and President of EXMNA, emphasized the importance of addressing this issue: “The violence stemming from blasphemy and apostasy laws is not just a tragedy for those affected—it is an attack on the fundamental human right of freedom of belief. We must confront and challenge these draconian laws, which threaten anyone who dares to think freely.”

Panelists include:

Aysha Khan, Director of Operations for EXMNA, further stressed the urgency of this issue, saying: “It is crucial to emphasize that anti-blasphemy and anti-apostasy laws do not discriminate. They affect people of all faith backgrounds as well as those with no faith at all.”

This free, in-person event will spotlight survivors and advocates, focusing on the need for international cooperation to end extrajudicial violence and protect the fundamental freedoms of conscience, religion, and belief.

To register for the event, please click HERE.

For more information, please contact:  

Ex-Muslims of North America  

Email: info@exmuslims.org  

Website: https://www.exmuslims.org

Media Contact:

Aysha Khan

Director of Operations

Ex-Muslims of North America

Email: aysha@exmuslims.org

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Nasser Yousefi and Baran Yousefi on Humanistic Education’s Necessity

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/27

The Peace School is new in Canada, founded and accredited by the Ontario Ministry of Education in 2023. Currently, the school has five children with a capacity of 120 and is well-financed and supported by the parents whose children attend. The school’s pedagogy has attracted the attention and support of UNICEF, UNESCO, and UNHCR, which strongly encouraged Dr. Nasser Yousefi, the Principal of The Peace School, to share his pedagogy and learning environment with other countries. Canada was Dr. Yousefi’s first choice for the next Peace School. Dr. Yousefi began his career as a child psychologist, studying in Sweden and earning a Master’s in Education in Childhood Growth and Development. In exploring the best pedagogy and learning environment for children, Dr. Yousefi completed a PhD in Educational Approaches at Madonna University in Italy and a PhD in Educational Psychology at Northwest University in the USA. This training combined humanistic and cognitive approaches to education. For many years, Dr. Yousefi was an educational consultant for UNICEF. He has conducted educationaland research activities for various groups of children, including immigrant children, minorities, street children, and children with special needs. Dr. Yousefi was the Principal of the Peace (Participatory) School in Tehran, Iran, from 2005 to 2023, graduating 500 students from kindergarten to high school, with graduates accepted at universities in Europe, America, and Canada. Dr. Yousefi is passionate about creating the best future for children and is dedicated to creating safe and nurturing learning environments based on holistic principles. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Round 3 with Nasser Yousefi and Baran Yousefi. Hello. How are you today?

Dr. Nasser Nasser and Baran Yousefi: Good. How are you?

Jacobsen: Thank you. I’m good. I had a nap, coffee, and Diet Pepsi, and I’m doing well. I was listening to Nelly. He’s a decent rapper in some of his songs, so I’m doing well. Let’s talk more about humanistic education. What is the importance of humanistic education today? When I say this, I’m being trite because humanistic education should be valuable in any era. So, in the contemporary period, what is the appeal of humanistic teaching? And in the Canadian context, where educational outcomes are generally good, what areas could humanistic education improve even further? Those are the more relevant questions I have.

Yousefi: Thank you for giving us this time to talk about this. Humanistic psychology started shortly after World War II, so it’s been almost 70 years. It has opened many doors around the world and introduced various new subjects.

It has made significant contributions to healthcare, sociology, and industrial psychology. However, it still needs to enter education or promote itself within the educational system. It has influenced other fields, but education and schools are still needed. The humanistic approach, in general, has found its way into evolutionary biology, digital science, technology, and evolutionary anthropology.

Developmental psychology, economics, and other disciplines have also been impacted. But it hasn’t fully entered schools. Behaviorist education, established before and after the First and Second World Wars, continues to dominate schools.

The behaviourist model has long been entrenched in the educational system, and the schools that promote this approach are very powerful. This causes a contradiction between the expansion of the humanistic approach in other fields and its stagnation in schools.

It’s interesting and surprising how humanistic psychology is developing and expanding rapidly in various sectors, yet schools remain resistant. Many philosophers argue that humanistic psychology is changing the world and making it a better place. Still, schools have closed their doors to it. Behaviorist schools claim, “We’re fine; we’re working.”

We’re doing very well. We don’t need that. It’s not a matter of time. We can work that out. Even in Canada, they’re saying that our schools are good. Why do we need that in other schools? Schools are doing very well. Not just in Canadian schools but in all schools worldwide that are influenced by the behaviourist approach to education. In these schools, everything—the curriculum, the lesson plans—is predetermined for students.

Specialists decide what students should learn, what they should study, and even what they should not learn. Sometimes, they even predetermine the resources students should access or not. It’s essentially saying, “What I define as learning is what you should consider learning.” You will only succeed if you learn what I’m telling you. You have to study the material thoroughly and memorize it to pass.

This approach applies to all levels of education—from preschool and kindergarten to university. Some individuals decide in advance what students should learn. However, they never ask students what they think, what they want to learn, or how they perceive different topics. What I, the teacher, tell you is more important than what you think.

In this system, the teacher enters the classroom with a predetermined lesson or program and simultaneously delivers the same content to 20 or 30 students. Behaviourist education claims to contribute to public knowledge by teaching everyone the same subject or content. However, it is more about imposing information on students, whether they want to learn it.

While teachers deliver the same material to all students, they expect each student to practice and internalize it individually. Students are required to learn it on their own and then take tests or quizzes by themselves. The emphasis on individual grades and assessments forces students to work in isolation.

They are taught to keep their knowledge to themselves. Even though we teach one thing to everyone, they must practice and master it on their own. The grading system, specific to each student, encourages them to address issues or subjects individually, leading to competition. Students aim to achieve the highest grade alone, without collaboration.

This system fosters individuality, not individualism. It tells students that only they can learn the subject and help themselves succeed or pass the grade. Those students who achieve the highest grades often receive more benefits, whether through compliments like “You’re smarter” or other rewards.

You’re more intellectual. But we don’t interpret this as “This student did what I wanted them to do.” Behaviourist education says that if a student does what the teacher wants, it means that the student is smarter.

We also see students who, for various reasons, may not want to engage with a particular subject or may not spend as much time on it as others. Behaviourist teachers or schools often label those students as not smart or underperforming.

When students are taught to study alone, focusing solely on themselves and their success, they lose sight of the collective good or the needs of others. They are conditioned to believe that their success is only about them.

Humanistic education is the opposite of behaviourist education. Since every student is unique, we introduce various topics and programs tailored to each individual. We ask students what they think and want to learn—not based on what we want as educators but on their interests and needs.

We ask the students and gather input from teachers, parents, and others involved in the student’s life. We then design a program specifically tailored to that student. Something interesting happens in this process: although the learning experience is individualized, we encourage students to share what they have learned with others.

We ask them to share their thoughts, explain where they are in their learning journey, and discuss what they have gained from it. If they need help, they can ask for it. We promote a culture of sharing among students. Hence, they learn not just from their own experiences but also from the experiences of their peers.

In this way, education becomes a collective process; what one student learns individually benefits everyone. We move forward together, helping each other develop our knowledge because we recognize that no one can achieve everything independently.

This is the main difference between humanistic and behaviourist education. Behaviourist education begins with a general topic for everyone, often leading to individualism and isolation. In contrast, humanistic education uses individual needs and interests to contribute to the community and support others.

While humanistic education focuses on individual needs, interests, and characteristics, it teaches students how personal growth can help others. In contrast, behaviourist education doesn’t allow students to discover their interests or needs because no one asks them what they think or want. They are told what is important and what they should study, which leads to standardization.

Eventually, in behaviourist schools, all students become the same. They end up listening to the same music and following the same path because individuality is lost. It’s a form of educational standardization which limits personal expression and development. They wear the same clothes and eat the same food. When you go to different countries, you notice that young people seem similar. They all look the same, listen to the same music, and watch the same movies. It’s all part of standardization.

It’s a result of behaviourist schools, which emphasize standardization over personalization. These schools focus on making everyone conform but only care about superficial conformity. In humanistic schools, however, we emphasize personalization. While we encourage students to align with others and think about others, we also emphasize the importance of moving forward together.

In behaviourist schools, students are constantly told to think about themselves and be individualistic. Over time, students can become narcissistic because they receive the message that they need to be successful above all else. They are taught that if they are successful, they are good people.

As students compete and compare themselves to one another, they develop narcissistic tendencies. They believe that the grades they receive reflect their worth as individuals and that achieving high grades makes them inherently good people. The schools, however, forget to teach compassion.

Erich Fromm discusses this in his work. He points out that behaviourist schools don’t nurture love in students; instead, they nurture narcissism. Selfish people don’t truly love themselves—they have a distorted view of themselves, which was shaped during their school years. They don’t have real self-love.

A person who doesn’t truly love themselves cannot love others. How can someone who doesn’t love themselves help or care for others? They may appear successful in university or society. They may even become doctors, but a doctor who doesn’t love their patients won’t communicate effectively or care for them with empathy. They might become a successful engineer, but they won’t care about the person who uses their product. Their focus is solely on selling their product, not its impact on people.

These individuals are constantly thinking about their interests. Around the world, people suffer at the hands of physicians who don’t care about their patients or others who provide services without compassion. For services to truly benefit people, the provider must care about those using the service.

That’s why we see products and services being developed that don’t truly benefit people. In some European countries, those involved in human trafficking are often also involved in organ trafficking. And who performs these organ operations? Prominent doctors—highly skilled professionals.

It raises questions. Which universities did they attend? The people involved in making chemical weapons or atomic bombs are among the best chemists and scientists in the world. Yet, they use their skills in ways that harm humanity. These are the best in their fields, but their focus is purely on their professional success, not how their work affects others.

Where did you go to school? How could you create something that works against humanity and humans? This results from an education system that needs to place more emphasis on individualism and individuality. Schools aren’t doing well—not just in Canada, but everywhere. This is exactly where humanistic education can help future generations. We need to help humanistic education enter schools. The humanistic approach has a direct connection to peace. The more the humanistic approach develops, the closer we get to peace.

Steven Pinker also agrees with this theory. He supports the idea that peace grew and developed when the humanistic approach expanded to other subjects and areas. We should evolve education in schools to help students think about and help others. In that case, we can see significant changes in the world. But do we need to overhaul the entire system?

The world, as it stands now, needs this humanistic approach and this testing. A country like Canada could be the first to adopt this and advocate for other nations to follow. We can transform the educational system by fostering a loving and compassionate approach to education. If Canada takes the lead, many other countries will follow. My current lifestyle only works for some. We need to help people feel better and live better lives. The humanistic approach always supports this theory. It focuses on both individuals and others at the same time. As teachers, we can carry this philosophy to the next generations and help them thrive.

Jacobsen: Just a quick follow-up to the previous question. There are three systems at play in practice. One is more secular, meaning no religion is involved. If we take big countries like China, they use a particular political ideology as the metric for success. Students are expected to follow the party line in certain subjects, and the entire education system is geared toward conformity with the state. The focus is on creating engineers and scientists who serve the state. At the same time, they must align with party ideology in the political realm. It’s a form of looking out for oneself, but it’s out of fear and in service of the state. Another system is non-secular—it’s religious and theocratic.

You might even find someone like Harun Yahya, also known as Adnan Oktar, who wrote The Atlas of Creation in the educational curriculum. You’re learning about intelligent design and creationism from an Islamic theological perspective. In that case, you’re in a similar system, but it’s bound to religious ideology. You see this in small Christian cults in different parts of the world. So, it’s not limited to a particular religion—it’s just a faith-based version of an education system.

Another version, which you described precisely, is where individualism isn’t developed, but individuality is. That individuality is based on competition between people and fits well into any rank-ordering system. If you get an A, you’re a good person; if you get a D, you’re a bad person. Your self-esteem, self-worth, and self-concept become tied to your grades, extracurriculars, and your school’s prestige—whether it’s an Ivy League institution or not.

In this last example, you see the development of narcissism. I need to conduct formal research on connecting these ideas. Still, I’ve spoken to experts and read works that suggest there has been a rise in narcissism in North America and probably in Western countries in general over the past few decades. As for the first two examples—the secular, dogmatic education system and the religious ones—I’m not sure if there’s been a similar rise in narcissism. However, there’s a common thread in all three, which is deindividuation, something you noted earlier.

Everyone becomes more or less the same. There might be reasons for this: it could be framed as social cohesion or harmony, ensuring everyone believes in the correct faith and the right God, or ensuring everyone becomes self-sufficient in society. These outcomes may be helpful to the individual. Still, they seem more beneficial to the country’s dominant ideology.

So, within a humanistic model, what is the main proposition differentiating it from these three systems, which lean more toward a behaviourist approach? What are the core differences, aside from that the person in the humanistic model isn’t developing their individuality for more intangible things like healthy emotional development? As you would know better than I, people who slide into higher levels of narcissism are often emotionally, developmentally, and maturationally stunted.

You could summarize all that by saying that, in each case, people follow a faith-based system with the “correct” religion and political dogma or worship the Self.

Yousefi: I think those directly involved in policymaking, particularly in education, don’t necessarily love human beings. What they share, regardless of the system—whether secular, communist, religious, or capitalist—is that they don’t truly care about humans. It doesn’t matter which ideology they follow. For me, it doesn’t matter what policy a government follows if it doesn’t care about humans. Any system that lacks compassion for people is inherently corrupt.

Love for humanity is not just a simple feeling or perhaps a curiosity-driven sentiment; it is a deep respect for the historical journey of human life. Modern humans are the result of billions of years of evolution. Astonishing events have occurred for us to reach this point. Billions of humans and living creatures have made evolutionary efforts to achieve this position. Today’s human is the product of the pain, suffering, and hardships of all their ancestors. They are the result of the incredible struggles our ancestors endured to survive and overcome diseases. We are even the outcome of all the efforts our ancestors put into learning skills and enhancing their abilities.

The genes that today’s humans carry have a long history of health, wisdom, and awareness. This is how we can truly speak about love for humanity. When a human is killed in war or violence, a treasure of wisdom and knowledge is left incomplete. In this way, it’s impossible to look at humanity without feeling immense respect, gratitude, and love for nature, evolution, and life itself. How can one look at a human and not view their background with admiration and love? How can one work for humanity and not let this love flow into action?

If we love human beings, everything changes. Everything changes. I believe we need to focus more on this concept of love than on the specifics of education or capitalism. The policymakers and people in charge are confusing us with these titles—secular, non-secular, communist, capitalist, and so on.

They are causing suffering by using these titles as labels, which goes against all our evolutionary and societal progress. I considers himself committed to promoting love for human beings and teaches students and children how to love others. I believe that if we learn to love others, we can improve healthcare and the economy. We can make everything better. And now is the time to do that.

Jacobsen: I should clarify. Is it hatred of people? Or is it an incomplete understanding of the people leading to this suffering in all these different cases? That’s an important distinction.

Yousefi: Yes. So, he generally believes that love can solve any problem we face. When I asked him why he thinks we don’t love other humans, he said we were never taught to love others. In schools, we weren’t even taught how to have compassion, empathy, or love for others. As Erich Fromm would say, even love requires learning. Carl Rogers also expressed this idea—that we must learn how to love to have good policies and structures and help each other.

I sometimes thinks the world needs policymakers and leaders who are more like caregivers than traditional politicians. We need judges, leaders, or teachers who act as caregivers and can truly take care of us. Perhaps the world needs good parents—people who can help others grow, learn to love and feel compassion and empathy. 

Jacobsen: This leads to a question about contingency or a dependency on prior conditions. The idea of narcissism, for example. Individuals who have strong personality or psychological profiles in the narcissism scale, based on an expert reporting recently, do not have any potential cures at this time, at least widely accepted. So, if we have created a culture, even in wealthy and well-educated countries, of narcissism, and if there is no immediate cure or fix for this condition, and if these people are characterized by the inability to love both themselves and subsequently others, how do we implement this widely in a society where a hunk of the population who, by definition, will be unable to partake of this?

Yousefi: The idea is that humanistic psychology believes people can change. If we have logical and well-structured policies, the new generation can change. They can change just like we’ve learned many new things compared to four decades ago.

For example, people’s views on feminism and women’s rights have evolved significantly in the last five decades. The perception of the LGBTQ+ community has also changed over the past few years. How we approach the environment has also shifted—we are more environmentally conscious than we used to be. Groups of people have been working hard to teach others, encouraging change and growth.

People are much more compassionate and understanding toward individuals with disabilities than 50 years ago. We’ve changed; we’ve learned how to change and become better. This same principle can apply to other areas of society—we can learn and change together. It takes time, but it’s not impossible. But that’s not all. Especially in our market-driven world, if we focus on loving people, empathy, and compassion, everything will eventually improve. It’s heartwarming to see that people are constantly learning and changing. We are better than we were 100 years ago.

Things will improve in the next 100 years if we take action and plan for it. Many specialists believe that humanity is moving toward a better future. However, this improvement has only been possible because many people have worked hard to create a better world. Now, more than ever, we need more people to contribute to this progress. Education, in particular, has the power to make a significant impact. If humanistic principles enter the educational system, we will see a major revolution in how we love, live, and strive for peace. I hope for this revolution. I truly hope.

Jacobsen: In faith-based ideologies, the idea is typically to mould someone into a utility for worship. In secular political ideologies, the focus is often on perfecting someone to be useful to the state or the common good. In capitalist and individualistic societies, the orientation is around consumerism, individualism, and turning people into utilities to generate capital. Each of these systems has pathological elements to varying degrees.

From your perspective, it’s less about perfecting the person and more about developing the person within a human community. That’s an entirely different orientation. Is that the core difference in the humanistic model?

Yousefi: No, it’s not just about developing the individual. It’s about building a society that works for the development of all humans. A healthy society leads to healthy people, just like healthy people can lead to a healthy society.

Let me explain it this way: societies change through healthy individuals, and healthy individuals contribute to a better society. They have a mutual interaction—healthy society, healthy people; healthy people, healthy society.

Jacobsen: That directly answers my question. The three examples I gave—faith-based, secular political, and capitalist systems—each have an idealized version of a person in mind. However, your approach focuses on the dynamic interaction between the individual and society. The humanistic model works more from the bottom up. It asks, “Where is this person at? How can we develop their capacities based on their temperament?” There’s a constant feedback loop between the individual and society. Are there any other aspects of the humanistic model in the 21st century that we should cover?

Yousefi: Not for now.

Jacobsen: What do you think Pink Floyd got right in their commentary and song The Wall about the British education system in the 1970s? What did they get right?

Yousefi: What was correct about their critique? It was Pink Floyd’s take on how the system had become almost a disaster. Britannia. You can still see it—standardization. They showed how students don’t need what’s predetermined for them to learn. It’s a system of control. The controlling state wants to control everyone simultaneously, and that’s one of the criticisms they addressed.

Yousefi: He believes that sooner or later, schools will change. We have no other choice but to change; otherwise, societies will collapse from the inside. Education systems try to shape humans, but human evolution won’t allow that. The system is already devalued, and we will eventually rid ourselves of it and develop new systems and approaches. He’s waiting for that day.

Jacobsen: That’s a good final note.

Yousefi: Right.

Jacobsen: Thanks again for your time today. I appreciate it.

Yousefi: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jonathan Rose on the Prepper Bar and Matt Hughes

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/26

The Prepper bar was inspired by clients seeking practical, divisible precious metals for bartering and emergencies. Jonathan Rose is the Creator of the Prepper Basr and comes out of Genesis Gold Group created a wallet-sized silver bar, divisible into smaller amounts for everyday use. It addresses concerns about the impracticality of large metal bars, providing versatility, portability, and utility for preppers, homesteaders, and beyond.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what was the inspiration behind the creation of the Prepper bar?

Jonathan Rose: The inspiration came from our clients. At Genesis Gold Group, we specialize in helping people acquire precious metals. Here in the United States, there are two common ways people do this: through an IRA or a 401(k), which can be rolled over tax and penalty-free to store physical metals, or we ship metals directly to people’s homes, where they store them.

Over the years, clients with IRAs or those holding physical metals would sometimes buy items like a kilo of gold. And while it’s impressive and valuable, it’s heavy. If you can lift it, it’s yours! But many people would ask us, “Jonathan, I have this bar of gold or silver. How do I use it? How do I spend it?” You cannot pull a hacksaw to cut it into smaller pieces for trading.

Clients often wanted something more tradeable, barterable, and practical for everyday use. We heard this repeatedly. Many of our clients are preppers or homesteaders living off the land, so we realized there was a niche in the market for more utility products. That’s how we came up with the Prepper bar.

This is the first one we minted, and it is made of silver. Essentially, the Prepper bar is “wealth in your wallet.” It’s credit-card-sized, and it fits in your wallet. It can be carried just like a credit card for those reading this.

The design features grooves, like a Hershey’s chocolate bar, that allow you to break pieces off easily. The top row is one-twentieth of an ounce, the middle row is one-quarter of an ounce, and the bottom is one-tenth. This is the only fractional, divisible bar minted in the U.S. today.

We used to offer clients a product from Switzerland called the Valcambi bar, a 100-gram bar. However, when you import from another country, you pay a premium. That premium was passed on to the client, so we decided to mint and manufacture our bar here in America. We designed it to be divided into three sections, making it versatile and practical. We started with silver, and it’s been very well-received. We then moved on to gold. This is 24-carat gold.

Jacobsen: Do these bars have the same groove sizes as the silver ones?

Rose: Yes, they have the same groove sizes. If you compare the two, the gold feels a fraction thinner than the silver. To me, it feels smoother. However, we sovereignized these two products, meaning the IRS has approved them for inclusion in IRAs.

Jacobsen: What does that do for an individual?

Rose: If they put this in an IRA, 90 to 95% of our clients who take distributions say, “Jonathan, I don’t want to liquidate this. Send me the metal.” When they get the metal, many wonder how they’ll use or spend it. Now, they can put things like the Prepper bars and other products in their IRAs and take possession of them.

These bars are easy to stack, portable, and tradable. That’s how the Prepper bar came about. When we made the prototype, it wasn’t easy to manufacture because of the challenge of making it divisible without losing pieces of metal. Some science and trial and error were involved in developing a successful product.

Once it did work, I sent a few out to some of the homesteaders who promote Genesis Gold Group, and they loved it. They thought it was the coolest thing they’d ever seen. When I called them back and asked how they liked the Prepper bar, they said, “Oh, we’ve already used it.”

I asked, “What do you mean you used it?” They explained, “Well, in our community, we do a lot of bartering and trade.” They had already spent portions of it. That blew my mind!

Would I personally buy one to trade? I live in a more civilized area, so my mindset is different. By that, I mean I live in suburban Beverly Hills. It’s a cool product to own. But I understand why my clients—especially preppers and homesteaders—would want it.

Also, I buy these bars because we’re heading toward a fiscal cliff when I look at the U.S. dollar, with $35 trillion in debt. Look at what’s happening with hurricanes, for example. We’ve had telecommunications systems go down recently at airports, leaving people stranded. Phone services have gone down.

Many people are rightfully worried about a cashless society and the rise of the digital dollar. People prefer to have something like this as a backup. If we’re ever in a cashless society or if something happens and cards don’t work. You don’t have cash on hand; this Prepper bar is like a Swiss Army knife of currency that you can carry with you.

Anytime you can take something with as long a historical track record as gold and add utility to it, you’ve got a winner. We have that with this product. We listened to what people were asking for and provided them with a solution—whether inside their retirement account or for use in bartering or emergencies.

The Valcambi bar is from Switzerland. The problem with it is that it needs to be bigger. It’s made of 1-gram pieces and comes hermetically sealed in a plastic container. When you rip it open, you lose some of its value. There is only a little utility to that bar besides looking cool.

On the other hand, this Prepper bar is made in America and is divisible by three, giving it real utility. These communities, especially preppers and homesteaders, use it in barter and trade systems—essentially, closed or relatively small communities of people living off the land.

Jacobsen: What about in the context of emergencies? How are these bars being used in more “civilized” areas of America, especially densely populated ones? What situations could these bars be useful in as well?

Rose: In case of an emergency, it provides peace of mind. People view gold as a tangible asset with intrinsic value. With the rise of a cashless society, central bank digital currencies, and growing uncertainty, many are rightfully concerned about the unknown, especially the dollar, which carries much economic baggage. This Prepper bar is something you’d want in your preparedness kit, alongside firearms, canned goods, and water supplies. It’s for those “what-if” situations, ensuring you have something tangible at home in an emergency.

Those who’ve used these bars in bartering, typically in prepper communities, are living in small towns or on farmland. Their role is centred around preparedness, and they rely on these bars for practical use in a more closed, self-sustaining environment.

But someone like myself, living in Beverly Hills, would keep something like this at home in my safe. If I ever needed to leave quickly, it’s portable. I can pick it up and throw it in my bag. If I needed to barter with it, I definitely could. People love gold and silver.

And with what’s happening worldwide, gold and silver prices have increased significantly. Today, gold and silver have risen by over 40% in the past year, which is remarkable. Does that mean they’ll go up another 40% next year? If anyone tells you that, it should raise a red flag because no one has a crystal ball. But we have a pretty good roadmap and can see what’s happening worldwide.

Just look at what’s unfolding in Israel, Russia, and Ukraine or what Jerome Powell, head of the Federal Reserve, said about expecting more regional bank failures. These are clear signs of economic instability.

Again, we talk about debt, and debt does matter. The dollar has much baggage, especially with a pivotal election in less than 30 days. What will the next big factor be after that? Will it be supply chain issues or another COVID outbreak?

The world has changed a lot since COVID, and so have people’s strategies regarding how they feel they need to prepare for the unknown. When people look at their overall financial game plan, assets like these check a box for many.

Jacobsen: As people break off different segments, are there any concerns about the durability of the remaining piece after a segment is removed?

Rose: No, not at all. I’ve broken off plenty of pieces myself. I have some lying around on my desk here. Let’s see if I’ve got any pieces.

Jacobsen: Is it your stray silver and gold?

Rose: Yes. I know we can’t see it on camera, but with some smaller pieces, you can bend them, and they will break off. It’s robust. It won’t break into your wallet—you’ll need to apply pressure, almost like snapping a credit card. You’ll feel it heating up, and then it will slowly break.

This isn’t plastic—it’s metal—but it’s malleable. We put much thought into the design to ensure it breaks cleanly. The grooves are designed to a specific thickness to ensure that when you break it, there’s no waste. The pieces come apart neatly.

Jacobsen: What are the Genesis Gold IRAs, and how does this build into the long-term vision of the Prepper Bar? You mentioned IRAs earlier, but this is a more targeted question about Genesis Gold and its long-term vision.

Rose: Genesis Gold Group has a long-term vision that integrates IRAs and precious metals. I used to work for Merrill Lynch and Morgan Stanley and was involved with the London Metal Exchange. I’ve been in this industry for many years.

When I worked at the London Metal Exchange, one of the trading pits next to me was precious metals. I dealt with base metals like aluminum, copper, tin, lead, and zinc. I always had a fascination with gold. My grandfather used to give me a British gold sovereign coin every Christmas, and I still have those coins today. They’re worth much more now than they were back then. My son has them now.

So, I had an early understanding of gold’s appeal and uniqueness. As time went on and I worked on the London Metal Exchange, I interacted with some top traders. I used to ask them about trading futures in precious metals, and they always gave me the same advice.

Jacobsen: If you’re going to invest in gold, should you invest in the physical commodity itself?

Rose: Absolutely. Investing in the physical commodity is the safest way to invest in gold. That advice has always stuck with me. After I left London and got involved in physical metals here in the U.S., I worked in the industry for a long time. I consulted for HSBC and AIG and even went to Asia to teach financial advisors how to sell gold. In the early 2000s, they offered jewelry as an investment rather than coins and bars, which was an interesting time.

When I returned to the U.S., people still needed to become more familiar with holding gold as an investment and putting it into a pension, IRA, or 401(k). I worked in the industry for many years and took a break. When I returned, I realized many companies were overcharging and offering big premiums. There was a right way and a wrong way to do this. So, I re-entered the industry to correct what people were doing wrong—without naming any companies because I didn’t want to get a cease.

But even today, you see these big gold gimmicks and “free silver” promotions, which make the hairs on my neck stand up. That’s why Genesis Gold Group came to fruition—to help people invest in gold correctly, educating them on the various products, whether it’s gold, silver, platinum, or palladium. We help them decide between coins or bars based on their goals and outlook.

Over the years, I’ve always been asked, “How will I spend this gold bar?” That question came up time and time again. Knowing there was a need for a product that checks multiple boxes, we developed the Prepper bar.

People love being able to include the Prepper bar in their IRAs because it provides the gold and silver exposure they’re looking for as a safety net. When they take distributions, they can take them in something they can use, spend, or barter with. It protects their retirement accounts with gold and silver while offering the option to cash out into fiat currency or take possession of gold, silver, or other coins and bars.

The Prepper bar is crucial for Genesis because it’s an exclusive product no other company can offer. It caters to a niche market of clients looking for this utility product.

Regarding the Prepper bar, we’ve also started a charity with a former UFC fighter named Matt Hughes. If you’re a UFC fan, he’s a nine-time world champion who has retired. You can visit the Matt Hughes Project. I haven’t shared this publicly, but we’re launching this initiative with other UFC fighters. We’re donating proceeds from the sales of the Prepper bar to help people with traumatic brain injuries.

Jacobsen: What is the Matt Hughes Project?

Rose: Traumatic brain injury (TBI) is often called a silent disease. It’s something many veterans suffer from when they return from war. Someone like Matt Hughes, who retired as a 9-time world champion with all his faculties intact, experienced a severe injury over ten years ago. He was hit by a train and ended up in a coma for 19 days. He was in a vegetative state, and his recovery journey has been amazing.

We met each other at a traumatic brain injury event that Genesis Gold Group happened to sponsor. Over time, we became friends with many people from the TBI community. Unfortunately, we discovered that the donated money was only sometimes used to help those who needed it. It was often going into the pockets of the wrong people.

The problem with some nonprofits—not all, but many of them—is that too little of the money donated reaches the people who need help. We saw that firsthand. So, my two partners and I decided to create a new charity to raise awareness about TBI, and we started the Matt Hughes Project, which is now online.

We filmed a documentary about Matt’s recovery, journey, and what he’s doing with his life today. We aim to help others who need grants and support for traumatic brain injuries. Many veterans come back from service with no help at all, even though there’s money available. They may need assistance with walking, speaking, cognitive therapy, guide dogs, or other forms of rehabilitation. It’s shocking how much corruption there is at the state and local levels—there’s money, but it’s not going to the right people.

With the Matt Hughes Project, Genesis Gold Group, and the Prepper Bar, we can kickstart this charity and make a real impact. People who buy these Prepper bars or invest in gold are indirectly and directly helping us support the TBI charity, a cause close to our hearts.

Jacobsen: With digital currencies, online banking, and all that stuff, are there any risks of the valuation of precious metals like gold and silver decreasing over time as these digital currencies become more incorporated into mainstream economic life?

Rose: Yes, the digital dollar is here, and it will stay. It’s part of the evolution of everything.

When I was a child, my dad carried a big Filofax everywhere. Then, he had a brick phone that he always carried with him. Over time, phones got smaller, and now we have smartphones. It’s all part of the evolution of technology and society.

It’s similar to the BRIC nations—Brazil, Russia, India, and China. They’re gathering together and want to create their gold-based currency. This is all happening. The digital dollar, central bank digital currencies—it’s all happening.

Blockchain, crypto—it’s all intermingled right now, and it’s the future. That scares people because they don’t understand it, and what they don’t understand, they’re afraid of. What people do understand is tangible assets—if you don’t hold it, you don’t own it. So when people hear that a digital dollar might replace the dollar, it causes panic.

As these government programs slowly come online, and they’re being tested today, they’ll have a bullish impact on the price of gold. People would rather have something physical in their hands than a digital dollar, which is just zeros and ones in central bank digital currencies.

Yes, it’s a digital dollar, but it’s also a way to track people—who you’re spending money with, how you’re spending it, and where. That’s the first concern people raise: government overreach. There’s a lot you can do when you control people’s money, and that’s been proven before. For example, Canadian truckers were striking during the protests, and the government froze their digital assets. That’s how they shut them down.

People are concerned about the digital dollar, and how will that affect the price of gold? It will have a bullish impact because people will want to hold onto something with inherent value rather than something controlled by others behind the scenes, like a digital currency made of zeros and ones.

There are lots of great questions here, Scott. Thank you so much for your time today.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Rose: You’re welcome.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Len Prazych on His Two Fathers

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/26

Len Prazych, an 11-year-old survivor of clergy abuse, shared his experience of parental denial and healing. He believes many male victims, like himself, delay reporting due to shame. Prazych emphasized the importance of discussing abuse openly and offering support to those affected, especially men reluctant to come forward.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I am with Len Prazych. This is a recommendation of a mutual woman colleague who is involved in deep research into clergy-related abuse. So, thank you for coming forward.

I know that these particular cases are probably more difficult than for women. One, there might be fewer men and boy victims. Also, as far as I know, more women tend to come forward. That’s only a qualitative analysis, not a formal quantitative analysis. So, you wrote a book.

You are a survivor and coming forward to report on this from an American orientation. So, how old were you when this happened? 

Len Prazych: I was 11 years old at the time of my incident. And if I can make a point and that is I believe there are more boys and men who experienced abuse. I believe fewer come forward because of the shame, guilt and pain associated with it.

Also, I learned at the recent SNAP (Survivors Network of those Abused by Priests) Conference that men often wait decades before admitting their abuse, if they do so at all. In some cases, it may be 10, 20, 30, 40 years. In my case, it was 50-plus years before I came forward with it and wrote my memoir. 

I got up in the middle of the night and told my mother that Father Duncanson had his hand in my underwear. The following morning he was gone. So somehow, as an 11-year-old altar boy, I could make a priest disappear? I was both confused and sad, and the fact that no one wanted to speak about it ever again only added to the confusion, the anger, the frustration, the shame, the guilt, and the ultimately ruined relationship with my father for the next 50 years. 

So yes, many men are reluctant to come forward. But sometimes, it’s not their conscious choice. Sometimes the abuse is so traumatic that the brain suppresses those painful memories or incidents. They consciously do not remember it happening.

And it usually comes out later in life when there’s a problem with anger, alcoholism, addiction, relationship issues, or something else that triggers the memory of the incident. It’s not until decades later that they may remember, wow, I was abused and then they have to come to terms with that.

I’m in no way comparing my one-time incident of what was essentially a fondling to the horrific abuse that others have suffered. I think this is another reason I remember the event as if it happened yesterday. It was a one-time event, but I remember the details clearly, and that’s likely because I’ve been writing about it, talking about it, and thinking about it. 

I’ve largely healed and forgiven, but I will never forget. It’s something I don’t want to see repeated with anyone. I believe it’s important to say something if you see something, and we need to talk about these things because, for the most part, we don’t—especially men.

Jacobsen: When you told your mother, did she recall the context or her response? Did that help with future conversations around this subject when you started discussing it more openly and publicly?

Prazych: No. Both my parents denied it ever happened. I can only speculate that decades later when I brought it up that it may have been just a blip in their life, something to bury and forget. But at the time of the incident, my mother was the one who took action, so I thought she would confirm that it happened, even decades later. I suspect she supported my father in his adamant refusal to acknowledge the abuse and perhaps, keeping his pact with the church to stay quiet. From what I’ve read, the practice of having parents being paid by the parish or the bishop to stay silent about their boy’s abuse was common back then. I have no reason to believe that it doesn’t still happen. In my case, my family never really had money so the incentive of a cash “settlement” to stay silent was probably very strong. My parents were raising three boys in Catholic school, so perhaps they received free tuition, but again, I can only speculate. It’s unlikely that I will ever know. 

Jacobsen: That sounds like an incredibly difficult experience, and how these situations were handled is troubling.

Prazych: Yes, it was, and I still think about it, but I’ve come to terms with how things were dealt with, even though I believe it was wrong. Maybe they got some help otherwise. Whatever the case, my parents never discussed it again and took the secret to their graves. 

Jacobsen: So, when it came to this particular case, has this methodology been corroborated by future reports from other survivors, as well as official church documents about a policy of silence and shuffling priests around?

Prazych: I can reference accounts in the literature, which is widely available, about families being paid off to keep their stories quiet. If not, lawyers may have to get involved and perhaps, the case is settled out of court. 

Jacobsen: What themes have you noticed in male survivor stories, particularly after attending the SNAP conference or potentially others? What are some of the thematic threads that run through them?

Prazych: As I’ve shared, one is the reluctance to come forward and share due to the shame and the perception that it’s a weakness. It affects a man’s life and his relationships, and it may manifest in addictions, anger, abuse, and more. 

Jacobsen: Did any men report substance misuse as a way to cope with emotional problems?

Prazych: I’m confident hundreds have done that and support groups are full of individuals who have suffered tremendous abuse. 

Jacobsen: When you write a full book, it becomes a project. It could be 60,000 words or 120,000 words. Either way, for most people who don’t spend time writing, that’s a huge amount, especially when typing each letter on the keyboard. So, why did you write a full-length text describing this context for yourself?

Prazych: I am a professional writer. I publish a weekly trade publication so getting the words on the page never a problem for me. I’ve also always been a journaler. I believe in journaling and note-taking as a regular practice, it’s my meditation and one way I cope, organize my life, express feelings, etc.

It was during the period after my father passed—a three-year period of helping him die, after spending three years helping him help my mother die—that journaling became tremendously important to me. I was essentially grieving both parents after six years. During one of my entries, I stumbled onto writing a letter to my father.

Jacobsen: And where were you going with that?

Prazych: So, I wrote this handwritten letter and felt like, wow, that came out pretty easily. Let me keep going. Then I had another letter and another. The memories started connecting so I added some elements of literary interest. There was no shortage of things to write about and things I wanted to ask my father, though obviously, some questions never got answers. There were also things I just wanted to say, and it felt good to say them.

As a first-time memoirist, 60,000 words is about the low end of where you want to land for your readers, and you better have a good story to tell within those 60,000 words. So, I was aiming for that amount. I had a great editor who helped me with many things we all need editors for. So, getting it done wasn’t an issue. 

A few obstacles, however—and this relates to one of your earlier questions about men wanting to share their stories, not necessarily about priestly abuse, but any abuse—stem from unconscious reasons for not writing. Because they’re unconscious, you don’t always know why. Still, after working through them, you realize that some of the same messaging initially prevented you from sharing your story.

For me, as an 11-year-old, the messages for me were:

  • You don’t talk badly about priests or the Catholic Church.
  • We don’t discuss these things in our family.
  • We don’t share our secrets unless we confess them to a priest
  • We don’t talk about sex.

So to speak about being abused by your beloved priest in your parents’ bed? There was no way that was going to be talked about! So, the message was always to stay silent and repress those feelings. Not an uncommon thing, I’ve discovered, especially in Catholic families. I often say that the incident of abuse itself wasn’t as bad as the 50 years of betrayal and gaslighting by my parents, the priests, and the Catholic Church. That was the real trauma for me, and it’s what still lingers in my thoughts and from what I’ve heard, in the stories of others.

Jacobsen: Was this a one-off event, or did you have recurring memories? Did it happen two or three times?

Prazych: It was a one-time, one-off event

Jacobsen: Is the book out yet?

Prazych: Yes, it’s been out for a year. I self-published and, for the most part, have been self-promoting and advertising. If you check my website, I’ve been doing media appearances over the past few months, which I’m very pleased with. Every time I do a radio interview or a live TV spot, I notice a small bump in book sales. It’s available on Amazon by contacting me directly via my website at LenPrazych.com.

Jacobsen: So, how did this affect the arc of your position on the tenets of faith and the religious community over time? An important point isn’t discussed enough: less about the incident and more about the fallout—the narrative built around the Catholic Church or churches in general. How has your relationship with the church been since that time, since being 11?

Prazych: Well, I’ve always had questions and a natural curiosity about the mysteries of not only Catholicism but all religions. But from the age of 11, there was still the mandate:

  • You must go to church on Sunday.
  • You must go to confession.
  • You must the sacraments and the 10 Commandments

I did this with a very dubious perspective, even as an 11-year-old. I thought, “All right, I think I see how this works now,” but I wasn’t sure. I was 11! But it did spark my curiosity about the bigger questions—why do we listen to these people, the priests, that is? But I couldn’t take it seriously after that because they couldn’t answer the questions I had, questions I couldn’t articulate at the time—like, why do priests abuse children? I couldn’t wrap my head around that.

I also attended an all-boys Catholic high school, which was generally a positive experience. But at some point, during religious education class in sophomore year, I believe, when I rebelled and shut out anything related to organized religion. That pretty much marked the beginning of my separation from both my parents and the church but became conflicted when I was going to marry

In the Catholic tradition, when a man and a woman are getting married, they go through something called Pre-Cana, a weekend moderated by a priest—because, of course, who else would know best about a healthy relationship between a man and a woman? That forced me to confront my own biases and I wondered, “Am I going to let something like a single incident of priestly abuse stop me from moving forward with my life and living as a good Catholic family?” I couldn’t say no at the time. And then there was the expectation of raising my children in the Catholic faith. But that only lasted for so long. My children saw for themselves at an early age—maybe with some urging and teaching from me—to avoid that.

So, my relationship with the Catholic Church since then has been pretty nonexistent.

Jacobsen: Do you think that’s a relatively normal outcome for someone who’s been abused by a father or priest?

Prazych: Is it normal? I don’t know what “normal” is, to be honest. The more I talk with people who’ve been abused, the more I see a variety of responses. For some, like myself, it’s, “Yeah, I know what happened, and I want nothing to do with the Church.” As long as no one’s telling you that you have to go to church, many will have nothing to do with the church, priests, or religion in general. But others who’ve been abused for years still maintain their faith in God and continue going to church. They don’t like what happened to them, of course, but they still have this faith that’s embedded in them and apparently cannot let go of. There’s a spectrum of experiences in between.

Jacobsen: What, in brief terms, can you share about your abuser?

Prazych: With Katherine’s help, I’ve learned much more about him than I knew since I finished my book. I learned everything I could find out on Ancestry.com and other free websites available to the public. I discovered that Father Wesley Duncanson was born in Waltham, Massachusetts and was married at age 16, which surprised me. He joined the military at age 17, served for six or seven years, then went to college as a premed student. After that, he went to a monastery and was ordained in 1956.

With Katherine’s help in accessing the Catholic Directory, we created a timeline of his life in the priesthood. And from what we can tell, Saint Henry’s, my parish, was his last assignment until he died in 1979.

By speaking up and saying something, I may have ended the career of a probable serial pedophile and sex abuser. I say “probable” because although I haven’t seen the records and may never see them, the NJ State Police say the records they’ve subpoenaed are “voluminous.” 

By reporting Father Duncanson, I may have prevented others from being abused—both in my church and wherever else he may have been assigned, if the Church did send him elsewhere. More importantly, I may have protected my two younger brothers from being abused. Pedophile priests have been notorious for preying on families with multiple siblings. Once they’re in the door, it becomes much easier for them to continue abusing others in that family. There are several documented cases of this, and I know someone personally who experienced it.

Jacobsen: That’s tragic; the family structure can also be exploited.

Prazych: Yeah.

Jacobsen: Yeah, the state of the family structure. So, in these instances of lack of parental oversight or involvement—whether the mom or dad isn’t assertive in ensuring the child’s safety, especially during adolescence—how do you view that?

Prazych: I would hesitate to lean heavily on the idea of “lack of oversight” in a negative way. My parents were hard workers. Dad worked all day and Mom worked at night. Dad helped neighbours and did odd jobs to make extra money when he wasn’t working his day job. It wasn’t like they were neglecting or partying and letting us kids go unsupervised. Aside from this incident, my father was a saint, and my mother supported him.

But when a parish priest took an interest in their oldest son and offered to take him and his friends horseback riding, bowling, or out for pizza—things we couldn’t afford to do—the influencing a priest must have seemed wonderful. It wasn’t a matter of my parents ignoring us; they were busy providing a living so we had what we needed. But priests could see that, too. What hardworking parents wouldn’t appreciate having their child looked after for a couple hours, a weekend, or even an overnight? I describe one incident like that in the book. 

Jacobsen: What you’re describing is part of the nuance in many of these stories. On the one hand, you have families of likely blue-collar parents and a dual-income household, where a priest stepping in to mentor and partially raise young boys within that community can seem like a positive thing. There are overnights, some literature is discussed, maybe even a higher education influence, and one-on-one time where social skills and norms are expressed. The kid can feel noticed and appreciated. But at the same time, those few incidents within that smaller arc leave a mark until later in life.

Prazych: Right. 

Jacobsen: So, how do you reconcile these two narratives that aren’t necessarily in conflict but exist simultaneously in the same lifetime? 

Prazych: I’ll admit, yes; I loved this priest. I loved him like I loved my father because I was getting from him what I wasn’t getting from my dad—the time and attention that a growing boy needs. That’s one of the reasons the abuse was so painful. But there was also this rift developing, where I was asking too many questions of both my fathers, questions that didn’t have satisfactory answers.

Jacobsen: Yeah, I can see that.

Prazych: Father Duncanson seemed genuinely curious about me—what I was reading at age 11, my chemistry experiments in the basement. So, in a way, he became my stand-in father. He’d even come to my baseball games, games my father wouldn’t or couldn’t attend. 

Jacobsen: He was very avuncular.

Prazych: Paternal, a little too paternal, as I would soon realize. So, he fooled an 11-year-old child. Congratulations! But part of my work in therapy has been about forgiving that little boy who may have thought it was somehow his fault. I know now that it wasn’t my fault. I didn’t do anything to bring this on. I was being an 11-year-old kid. Do you want to pay attention to me and teach me some stuff? Sure, I’m on board with that. I’m still on board with that at age 65— just keep your hand out of my pants while you’re doing it!

Jacobsen: There’s also an aspect of this where many men in North American cultures fear getting involved in public life, particularly in mentoring or spending time with kids who aren’t their own, because of the stigma associated with it. There are a lot of conflicting feelings for many men—they’d love to take a kid to a ballgame, go bowling, camping, or whatever—but this social stigma exists. At the same time, you have this minority of cases where adult men get past that stigma, win the trust of the community, or take a position of trust, and then leverage that to take advantage of young people—often boys or adolescent males in particular. It’s a strange cultural conversation.

And the case that you experienced, and that others bring forward at SNAP and similar organizations, are cases of acute abuse. But it’s part of a larger conversation about male mentorship—what are red flags and what aren’t. We’re not always having the necessary conversation around what is just stereotyping of men and what are actual, appropriate red flags.

How do you feel overall, given your positive reflection on some aspects of your experience, about how the Catholic Church mentors and raises boys who aren’t their own? How do you think general culture handles this?

Prazych: I can’t say. I need to be closer to the issue now to give an educated opinion. But from my perspective, as an older male now, my wife has often said, “You should be a mentor; you have so much to offer.” I did great with four kids. I’m doing great with two grandkids. But the thought of anything untoward happening to any of them in terms of abuse—well, that’s a huge trigger for me.

But I don’t want to be alone in the same room with a child that’s not my grandchild. If I’m in a bathroom in a restaurant and a little boy walks in, I immediately walk out. I don’t want even the thought of being alone any situation where it’s just me and another child. Knowing what I know and having experienced what I’ve experienced, I don’t want to be in that position.

Jacobsen: That’s a conversation that’s not even on the main agenda, but it’s part of an important, albeit undeveloped, secondary discussion—how individuals like yourself are triggered by the fallout from their own experiences and how this intersects with the stereotyping of men in mentor or authority roles with young people. These are all important conversations, even if it’s not the primary point of this one.

Prazych: Right. It’s something to keep in mind, at least. I like to ask if others have been abused by Father Wesley Luke Duncanson at Saint Henry’s Parish in Bayonne, New Jersey, or anywhere else, that it’s okay to come forward and share their secret.

Jacobsen: So, based on some of the information given earlier in the interview, if people know someone who may have been a survivor during that time or if they are survivors but have been afraid to come forward, how can they get in contact?

Prazych: They can contact me personally. My email is on my website, but they can also contact me at len@prazcomm.com. My phone number is international, in case they’re in another country. My number in New York, United States, is 518-366-9017.

What I’ve also done recently is prepare for another career as a life coach, to perhaps help both men and women. In this capacity, as a survivor of sexual abuse, I’m willing to coach others—whether it’s coming forward with their story or writing about it. Writing could be journaling, poetry, short stories, or even letters to their father—not necessarily for publication. It’s about demonstrating the therapeutic power of writing to heal. I’m happy to speak with anyone interested in doing that. It may be a gentle way to come forward, even if they can’t yet verbally articulate what they need to share.

As I mentioned, men are now coming forward after decades, and for all the reasons that men often wait so long to do so. This is the demographic—this is the time, as it was for me. I was recently asked to speak to a men’s group of survivors of abuse aged 50 to 60. This is the demographic that tends to come forward and share their stories of abuse. I’m happy to help anyone share and tell their story, even if it’s just to listen without judgment. I’d gladly share my experiences and knowledge.

Jacobsen: If anyone wants to publish an anonymous letter about their experience or response, they can send it to me, too. I can help: scottdouglasjacobsen@yahoo.com.

Prazych: Thank you for that. 

Jacobsen: Did we cover everything?

Prazych: Yes, we’ve hit the main topics. I’m happy to speak to a group—whether it’s a men’s group, as I’ve been asked before, or even a small book club. I’ll be adding more information about readings and appearances to my website. My press details are there now, but I plan to build a larger platform as this message gains more traction. Ultimately, it’s about preventing sexual abuse of children from happening at all. If you see something, say something. Let’s talk about these things. And parents, tell your children the truth, okay? If my parents had told me the following day what had happened to me, we may not even be having this conversation. 

Jacobsen: Len, nice to meet you, and thank you.

Jacobsen: It’s a pleasure, Scott. Thank you for your promptness in turning around the article and giving the story the attention and coverage it deserves.

Prazych: As I’m finding, and this can be an aside or not, social media has promoted and publicized my books. I hadn’t been on Facebook, Instagram, TikTok, or any of those before. I had no reason to, no interest. But I realized it was necessary if I was going to sell books and get some coverage.

What it did do was reconnect me with several of my old classmates. It allowed me to say, “By the way, this is my book. This is what happened to me.” The response was collectively, “Oh, we’re sorry. We didn’t know this happened to you, and you said nothing.” Well, how could they know unless it happened to them, too, which it didn’t? For most of the people I spoke with, they didn’t even remember Father Duncanson. That made me think, “Did this guy exist? How come nobody else remembers him?” 

Jacobsen: But you have the documentation—Father Duncanson was there when you were there.

Prazych: Yes, but it’s with the New Jersey State Police Sex Crimes Unit. Hopefully, one day, it will come to public light with the New Jersey Grand Jury. In the meantime, if anyone else comes forward they could have a criminal or civil case. But if no one else comes forward and accuses Father Duncanson, my case “dies” because my parents, Father Duncanson and the pastor at the time, who were the only other “witnesses to the crime,” took their secrets to their graves. 

I’m happy I was able to get Father Duncanson listed on the BishopAccountability.org website. That’s an accomplishment because someone else may not want to come forward but may see that someone else did and say, “Oh, Len did it. Maybe I can come forward, too.” That might help verify their claim or show the power of confession to heal emotionally and physically. Keeping these secrets takes a tremendous toll on mental and physical health. It can manifest in addictions, alcoholism, and even cancer—any number of stress-related diseases that come from withholding the truth. So, I’m encouraging people to tell their secrets, as hard as it may be. Maybe I can be living proof. “Hey, it took me 50 years, but you can do it too, and you’ll be better off for it.” 

Jacobsen: Thank you, Len.

Prazych: You’re very welcome, Scott. And thank you for allowing me to share my story and my message of hope and healing.

Further Internal Resources (Chronological, yyyy/mm/dd):

Historical Articles

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 1: Adam Metropoulos (2024/01/11)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 2: Domestic Violence (2024/01/12)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 3: Finances (2024/01/16)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 4: Sex Abuse (2024/01/17)

Interviews

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu on Clergy-Perpetrated Sexual Abuse (2024/06/02)

Katherine Archer on California Senate Bill 894 (2024/06/11)

Dorothy Small on Abuse of Adults in the Roman Catholic Church (2024/06/16)

Melanie Sakoda on Orthodox Clergy-Related Misconduct (2024/06/23)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Clergy Adult Sexual Abuse (2024/07/21)

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu & Dorothy Small: Ecumenical Catholic-Orthodox Discourse (2024/07/24)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Consent and Power (2024/08/13)

Irene Deschênes on Outrage Canada (2024/09/05)

Press Releases:

#ChurchToo Survivors Call on CA Governor Gavin Newsom (2024/06/09)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mark Ellwood on Gender and Work Time Use

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/25

A 34-year time study by Mark Ellwood, President of Pace Productivity Inc., reveals that women manage time better than men at work. Women complete tasks faster, prioritize important activities more effectively, and align closer to ideal weekly schedules. These findings have significant implications for corporate policies and work-life balance strategies.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Mark Ellwood to discuss working hours and efficiency in time management from a gender perspective. Mark, what was the origin of this extensive research on hours worked, efficiency, and time use in the workplace, specifically focusing on male and female employees?

Mark Ellwood: I’m a consultant specializing in corporate time studies. I invented a small electronic device called a “TimeCorder,” which employees use to track their time on different activities. Typically, they do this for about two weeks, and most people enjoy the process. I attend many international conferences on time use, and one consistent finding is that, domestically, women spend more time on unpaid household management tasks than men. Women spend about 3.6 hours daily on these tasks, compared to only 2.2 hours for men. This includes childcare, meal preparation, and household maintenance. These patterns are well-established in many Western countries. Given that I do many of these workplace studies, I wondered what implications these domestic patterns might have at work.

Over the years, I’ve gathered data from many clients as companies pay me to conduct time studies. I’ve built up a largedatabase, so I decided to dive in and explore any differences between men and women at work that might mirror or diverge from household patterns. That was the starting point for this research. 

Jacobsen: So, what are the key findings from this study, which analyzed data from 200 organizations across 41 countries?

Ellwood: Well, I collected around 500,000 hours of data from 1990 when I started these studies. I didn’t have detailed demographic information, so my first step was categorizing people by gender. For example, names like “Judy” and “Bill” were easy to classify, but names like “Kelly” required some research. After sorting individuals into male and female groups, I proceeded with the analysis. While I don’t have information on age or marital status, one might assume that many women are mothers, as they fall within the typical working age range of 20 to 50 years.

My main finding is that women are generally better at managing their time at work than men. Time management books often offer common-sense advice and case studies, but there’s not a lot of hard data. I was excited to find empirical evidence to support these insights. One of the first key findings is that women, on average, work fewer hours than men. When calculating work hours, I include personal time at the workplace—pre-COVID at the office or working from home. For instance, going out to lunch is part of the workday, so I include it. Personal time at work is minimal, about three hours per week. Men work around 48 hours per week, while women work approximately 45 hours per week.

So, there’s a clear difference—women work fewer hours than men, and that’s one of the four key findings suggesting that women are better at managing their time than men. Some might ask, why is that? What’s the explanation? The obvious connection is that many of these women are mothers, and we know from other data that they often take on more domestic responsibilities, like caring for children. Who’s going home to pick up the kids from daycare? Who’s going to take them to ballet class or prepare meals? Typically, it’s the women.

From that data, they would strive to be as efficient at work, working fewer hours but aiming to get the same amount done as men. They must manage their time effectively to fulfill their professional and domestic responsibilities. As a result, the total working hours reflect this balancing act. 

Jacobsen: I crunched some quick numbers on the ratios, as this analysis is fairly binary when looking at broad statistics. In terms of hours worked, men average 48.4 hours per week, while women work 45.2 hours per week when including breaks. That’s about a 7% difference.

However, when you look at the prioritization of time for top management tasks, women allocate 22% of their time to top priorities, compared to 18% for men. That’s about a 20% difference in favour of women. While these percentages might not seem significant every week, over a year, for an employee or a middle manager, the impact can be quite substantial.

Extending that over an entire work year makes these small differences much clearer and contributes to significant company performance gains. These gains impact the “soft power” aspects, like reputation, and the “hard power” aspects, like financial capability. What are some crucial details about male and female workers that are essential for business health?

Ellwood: Indeed, and let’s revisit that 22% and 18% figure because it’s one of the more striking findings. If you look at time management books, they advise you to focus on important tasks. Some of your listeners or readers might be familiar with the Eisenhower Matrix—it’s the idea of prioritizing tasks based on whether they’re urgent and important or not urgent and not important.

Interestingly, this concept wasn’t coined by President Eisenhower; it originated with a college dean but was later attributed to him. Many time management experts have since adopted it. The key advice is to focus on important rather than urgent activities. Stephen Covey touched on this in his book The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People. Still, no one has defined these “important” activities.

They’ve alluded to them, but I wanted to map them out more clearly. When I conduct my time studies, I ask people beforehand, “What are the most important tasks you need to do in your job?” You might think salespeople should say “selling,” but let’s dig deeper.

As expected, salespeople say prospecting and selling are the most important activities. Managers, on the other hand, should be coaching and directing. At the same time, field supervisors should ensure the environment is set up and safe. For customer service workers, it’s about servicing customers. So, those are the activities people identify as most important—aligning with that “important but not urgent” quadrant from the Eisenhower Matrix. Then the question is, how do their time profiles compare to those priorities?

So, if you look at salespeople who say, “I’m supposed to be prospecting,” then ask, “Are you prospecting?” the answer is yes. Still, the numbers are lower than you might expect. Outside sales reps spend about 23% of their time prospecting, while all sales reps combined are around 28%. When you map out these priorities against time spent across various jobs, you find that most knowledge workers—because we’re talking about knowledge workers here—only spend about 20% of their time on their highest-priority tasks. That’s it.

The rest of the time is spent travelling, processing paperwork, attending meetings, planning the day, and taking breaks. Suppose the average time spent on top priorities is 20%. In that case, women spend 22% of their time on their highest-priority tasks, while men spend only 18%. This means that, based on this second of the four measures, women tend to be better time managers than men.

You asked about the implications of these findings. One takeaway could be to hire more women. However, it also suggests that time management training could benefit organizations. These skills can be learned and developed. We often assume people are naturally good at managing meetings, emails, or projects. Still, we only provide a little formal training. If organizations offered more training, you could see those numbers increase.

That average 20% of time spent on top priorities could rise to 30%. That’s a significant increase—about an hour more per day spent on important tasks. In some cases, we’ve seen up to a 50% improvement, and that’s what organizations should aim for finding ways for employees to spend more time on their highest-priority tasks.

Jacobsen: Now, I want to introduce the concept of margin of error. When we compare numbers like 48.4 hours versus 45.2 hours per week, or time spent on tasks—16 minutes versus 22 minutes per task for women and men, or 22% versus 18%—we need to ask which of these differences are statistically significant and which ones are more moderate. This helps ensure that when people look at this data, they understand the magnitude of the difference and which differences are the most significant and worth paying attention to.

Ellwood: That’s a great question, and I did drill down into specific jobs to explore this further. We looked at sales reps, commercial bankers, customer service staff, financial planners, and retail store staff. We have more data in some roles than in others, but across all these job types, we were able to see significant differences.

It’s challenging to review every job in detail across all measures, but I did conduct some in-depth analysis. With thousands of hours of data, we found that these differences apply across various job types and are real and statistically significant.

Jacobsen: Did you notice any cultural factors that influenced these findings when comparing North America to Western Europe?

Ellwood: I haven’t observed any notable cultural differences. While I’ve conducted time studies in about 41 countries, most data comes from North America and the UK, making up about 80% of my database. Large multinational organizations mostly conduct these studies, so cultural differences don’t play a significant role in these findings. However, different results might emerge in other cultural contexts.

You’ve only got people’s names, and it’s hard to tell which culture they’re associated with since you don’t have that demographic data. But you’re seeing much consistency in North America and the UK. 

Jacobsen: What do you think is happening in women’s work patterns, particularly in prioritization and efficiency, that gives them an edge overall?

Ellwood: That’s the toughest question of all. I can point to the data showing that women are better time managers. But then the question is, as you asked, why is that?

There may be two or three reasons. The first is the one I mentioned earlier: many women must get home to care for their children. They must be as efficient as possible during the workday to leave on time to manage their domestic responsibilities.

The second reason could be the skills they develop as busy mothers transfer to the workplace. Talk to any mother—I’ve spoken to many—and they’ll tell you that being a mother is demanding. They’re constantly juggling different priorities. Whether they’re bringing work home or managing home tasks alongside work, those experiences—handling kids’ events, cooking, cleaning—might sharpen their skills in managing multiple tasks efficiently. Those time management skills may carry over to their professional lives.

The third reason, which is more speculative, might be cognitive differences. I am hesitant to dwell on this because the data isn’t conclusive. Still, slight differences in brain function—perhaps in how tasks are prioritized or attention to detail—could play a role. However, since that’s just a guess, I’ll stay away from it for now.

Jacobsen: What could be an extension of this research? What are the “next steps” for future studies, as they say in academic presentations?

Ellwood: Well, we could certainly delve deeper into cultural differences. We could focus more specifically on mothers versus women as a whole group. I’m currently studying executive women, gathering much more detailed demographic and life experience data. This focuses specifically on senior executive women.

So, we need more studies like this, especially in the workplace. For organizations, setting measurable targets is crucial. Interestingly, we saw much monitoring during COVID-19, and people weren’t happy with it. But with my devices, employees like using them because they’re easy, fun, and anonymous. That’s the key difference.

There was a growing sentiment during COVID that we shouldn’t care so much about how people spend their time. But I disagree—you should care about it as a diagnostic tool. It’s like running a 100-meter dash. You care about the time, whether 10 seconds or 9.9 seconds. Still, it would help if you also looked at the details: steps per second, stride length, oxygen intake—all the smaller elements contributing to a successful run. Similarly, time management at work isn’t something you need to monitor constantly. Still, you should be aware of it as a tool to improve performance.

Are you working 40 hours or 45 hours? It doesn’t matter. What matters is using that time data as a diagnostic tool to figure out if you’re getting bogged down in administrative activities or if meetings are going on too long—things that everyone complains about. When you attach data to those concerns, you can use it to diagnose and address them.

Rather than me doing all the research, organizations can start to track and monitor these things themselves. They can set ideal targets. One of the things I did in my studies was establish where people ideally want to spend their time, compare that to where they spend their time, and identify the gaps.

Jacobsen: Are you something of a “time doctor”?

Ellwood: Yes, I’ve thought of that term, and there are a few “time doctors” out there. I also use the term “time diagnostics,” but it’s clunky. So yes, I am a doctor, but I’m also a consultant. I diagnose the issues by saying, “Here’s what’s happening, here are the symptoms, and here’s what needs to be done.” I analyze what’s going on, identify the problems, and then make recommendations for improvement.

Jacobsen: It sounds like you’re a Dr. When, not a Dr. Who. You have three books: 

What’s your quick pitch for each of them?

Ellwood: Sure! Starting with The Poetic Path to Getting More Done, it’s an entire book of time management tips presented in poetic form. Let me read you a quick one:

Your time is your ally; it’s not a black hole.

The choice is your own to take more control.

Beginning right now, it’s for you to decide,

You’ll get more results with a new sense of pride.

Be inspired today to make a small shift,

Your time is your own—more hours are your gift.

Once you get started, you’ll be able to boast,

That you’ve got much more time for what matters most.

Jacobsen: That’s great! So, what are your core recommendations based on all of this data? Whether gendered or not, what are some key things that can help improve efficiency and make the workday run more smoothly, with positive effects like reduced workplace tension and a better sense of well-being?

Ellwood: I have two main recommendations. First, being productive means spending more time on your highest-priority tasks and less time on lower-priority tasks, like administrative paperwork. Second, work is inherently collaborative. When people complain about the volume of emails or endless meetings, I remind them that those things are what make work “work.” We should celebrate the value of staying in touch and collaborating.

That said, meetings must be run more effectively, and email should be managed better. I’ve measured the time people spend on unnecessary email, and it’s a staggering 3.4 hours per week. So, there’s much room for improvement in both areas.

Email was supposed to be the great big saviour of communication. And while it has its benefits, it also takes time. So, instead of solely relying on technological improvements to manage your time, focus on prioritizing high-priority tasks, running meetings efficiently, and communicating via email more effectively. We could all benefit from better training in these areas, and corporations should invest in such training to get the most out of their employees.

Better training is key. Companies often overlook the value of time management skills, but employees can work more effectively with proper training.

Jacobsen: Are there any other details from this study that we still need to cover?

Ellwood: We didn’t touch on the ideal profile, but we’ve covered most of the main points.

Jacobsen: Let’s dive into that quickly, then. What is the ideal profile?

Ellwood: We asked individuals where they ideally think they should spend their time across various activities. When we totalled up the differences, we found that women are closer to their ideal profiles by about three hours per week than men. So, they’re doing better in that regard as well.

Setting an ideal profile—a target for where you want to spend your time—is a useful exercise. It’s a diagnostic tool you don’t need to use constantly. Still, as many time management books suggest, it’s worth doing periodically, say for a few weeks. You can track your time using my system or any other and then compare where you spend your time versus where you want to spend it. Women tend to do this well; men could find ways to improve and close that gap.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you very much for your time, Mark.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Event: ‘Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting From Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/24

Aysha Khan is the Director of Operations for Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA). Join us in hearing stories from advocates, activists and first hand witnesses to extrajudicial violence resulting from apostasy and blasphemy charges. Our aim is to bring attention to these egregious human rights violations and urge UN member states to work towards preventing future violence driven by an intolerance for freedom of conscience, religion and belief.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We have an event organized by Ex-Muslims of North America titled “Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting from Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws.” It discusses ways to stop unjust violence against individuals or groups accused of apostasy or blasphemy.

Adding my perspective here, apostasy and blasphemy are imaginary crimes. This is not a new thought, but the fact that they are claims about a god or assume a god means they should only affect those who believe. They should not apply to those who do not believe. Otherwise, it’s not a proper secular system but rather a violation of freedom of religion, belief, and conscience based on a religious claim. What is the most important part of holding this event?

Aysha Khan: It is crucial to emphasize that anti-blasphemy and anti-apostasy laws do not discriminate. They affect people of all faith backgrounds and those with no faith background. First, I want to note that Ex-Muslims of North America are hosting this event in collaboration with the American Humanist Association, Jubilee Campaign, and Set My People Free. We have a broad coalition of organizations and individuals represented on the panel. This includes practicing Christians, practicing Muslims, humanists, atheists, civil society representatives, and individuals who work directly with U.S. government agencies. We are proud of the panel we’ve assembled, and we hope not only to draw attention from UN member states to these gut-wrenching stories but also to highlight how these laws create an environment of impunity.

These laws encourage vigilante violence. A country may have a law criminalizing or penalizing religious dissidents but may not enforce that law. Yet, it may turn a blind eye to people taking matters into their own hands against those accused. These laws are often not used against people accused of blasphemy against a particular faith. Instead, they are frequently used to settle personal or political grievances.

This event aims to highlight the injustice of these laws and their mere existence and humanize the stories of those affected. 

Jacobsen: We now have six key speakers for this event:

What do each of these speakers bring in terms of experience, expertise, and personal stories?

Khan: One of the speakers is Nadine Maenza, President of the International Religious Freedom Secretariat. She represents several organizations that advocate for freedom of religion and belief. She has vast experience navigating these spaces, convening influential individuals from the U.S. government, intergovernmental agencies, and civil society. We also have speakers who have had family members imprisoned on blasphemy charges, others who have lost family members to vigilante violence following blasphemy accusations, and individuals who have been forced to seek asylum abroad after being accused and hunted—not only by their home governments but also by religious extremists. The speakers’ experiences span a broad spectrum of persecution, whether they were rightfully or wrongfully accused.

But what it does is it creates a chilling effect on any vocalizing of a difference of opinion on religion. So, we’re trying to highlight how unfair these laws are, even for those who practice the religion that is supposedly being insulted.

Jacobsen: What about individuals who are non-Muslim, or not even ex-Muslim, but have an interest in these stories and the understanding of blasphemy laws being imposed on others beyond those who stand against a state-endorsed version of Islam? What should appeal to them as well?

Khan: I come to this cultural and ethical understanding: no one is safe from these accusations when these laws are on the books. It does not matter whether you are a member of that religion. These laws are so subjective. Even the concept of an insult or offence is subjective.

What I might find offensive is not what you might find offensive, and it depends on how someone is feeling that day, how vengeful, upset, or tolerant they are. It does not matter who you are, your origin, or your religion. These laws are unfair and are not applied equally across the board.

Jacobsen: Where is the event going to be hosted?

Khan: It is scheduled for the 29th of October at 1 PM at the UN Church Center, which is close to the UN headquarters. It’s a free event. Registration is required through our Eventbrite link, and we look forward to a lively discussion after each speaker’s remarks. The event will last about an hour, and we purposely scheduled it around lunchtime, so if you can pop in and out, that would be great. We’re excited about the broad coalition of sponsors and speakers.

Jacobsen: Are there other ex-Muslim organizations taking part in this?

Khan: They are not, but we are trying to ensure they know this event is taking place. Please reach out if any ex-Muslim organizations in or around the area are interested in cosponsoring or helping with outreach.

Jacobsen: Right. Thank you for your time today.

Khan: Yeah, no problem. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Bojan Jovanović (w/ Damir Katulić): Survivor Advocacy, Serbian Orthodoxy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/24

Bojan Jovanović is a Father in the Serbian Orthodox Church, and Damir Katulić is the president of the Association of Christians of Croatia. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you for your patience with me, and for taking the time for this interview today. Often, the media stories on the Catholic Church garner more attention and notoriety. Orthodoxy seems less affected in the public sphere. I do not want to stereotype or portray this inaccurately or unfairly, as the subject matter arouses many emotions and instincts at tension with one another, because of the seriousness of the allegations and the severity of the consequences for churches, communities, priests, and laity: defensiveness, retribution, fear, pity, pain, regret, anger, betrayal, shame, sadness, disillusionment, guilt, helplessness, maybe hope. As my knowledge and experience grows on this topic, I want to relay experiences and views with sensitivity, but with forthrightness, given the deep impact on people’s lives. I will fail at this, but I will continue to aim for this mark in this work. In prior writing, my bias would have been more oriented towards a bias of directed blame against abusive acts within religious institutions without proposal of, or search for, realistic and concrete constructive solutions. Looking back at my younger self, the former emotions in empathy with the experiences of others in pain seems legitimate, while not directing these energies to appropriate formal and grassroots fairness and justice movements was a gap, a failing. I come from the intellectual backgrounds of several non-religious traditions locally and internationally, which colours, therefore potentially biases, the qualitative research into these areas. How have you observed clergy-related abuse manifesting at the local level within the Serbian Orthodox Church?

Bojan Jovanović:  Clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church has been observed in several ways at the local level. Reports often include:

  1. Sexual Abuse Allegations: Instances of sexual misconduct by clergy members have emerged, leading to a lack of trust among congregants.
  2. Financial Mismanagement: Abuse of power related to financial resources, such as misappropriation of donations or misuse of church funds.
  3. Spiritual Abuse: Manipulation of parishioners’ faith for personal gain, including coercive practices and control over congregants’ personal lives.
  4. Lack of Accountability: Inadequate responses to complaints, with some cases being covered up or not addressed properly, causing further harm to victims.
  5. Community Division: Conflicts within congregations often arise as a result of these abuses, leading to factions and loss of community cohesion.

Efforts to address these issues vary, but many advocate for greater transparency and accountability within the church structure.

Jacobsen: How do the local and national contexts both reflect and differentiate from one another?

Jovanović: The local and national contexts within the Serbian Orthodox Church reflect and differentiate from one another in several key ways:

Reflection:

  1. Cultural Traditions: Both levels share deep-rooted cultural and religious traditions that shape practices and beliefs. Local communities often preserve specific customs that align with national church teachings.
  2. Hierarchical Structure: The local parishes operate under the broader national church hierarchy, maintaining a unified doctrinal stance and organizational framework.
  3. Shared Challenges: Issues like clergy misconduct or financial mismanagement are often seen at both local and national levels, prompting similar responses or initiatives for reform.

Differentiation:

  1. Local Dynamics: Local communities may have unique social, economic, and political conditions that influence their practices and responses to issues. For instance, rural parishes may prioritize different concerns than urban ones.
  2. Response to Issues: Local leadership may handle allegations or community conflicts in ways that differ from national policies, leading to varied levels of accountability and transparency.
  3. Engagement with Community: Local churches often have closer relationships with their congregants, which can affect how they address community needs and concerns, diverging from the more formal, national approach.
  4. Diverse Opinions: While the national church may present a unified front, local congregations can have diverse opinions on theological and social issues, leading to potential tensions between local practices and national directives.

In summary, while the local and national contexts of the Serbian Orthodox Church are interconnected, they also exhibit distinct characteristics shaped by their specific environments and community needs.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges to communities in Serbia when addressing abuse allegations against clergy members?

Jovanović: Communities in Serbia face several challenges when addressing abuse allegations against clergy members:

  1. Cultural Stigma: There is a strong cultural reverence for clergy, making it difficult for victims to come forward due to fear of backlash or disbelief from the community.
  2. Lack of Support Systems: Many communities lack adequate support services for victims, such as counseling or legal assistance, which can deter reporting.
  3. Hierarchy and Authority: The hierarchical structure of the church can lead to conflicts of interest, where local leaders may protect clergy members rather than address allegations appropriately.
  4. Fear of Isolation: Victims may fear social isolation or ostracism from their community if they speak out against a beloved figure, which can perpetuate silence.
  5. Inadequate Church Response: The national church’s slow or insufficient responses to allegations can undermine trust and discourage communities from taking action.
  6. Legal and Institutional Barriers: Navigating legal processes can be complex, and there may be a lack of clear mechanisms for reporting abuse within the church.
  7. Historical Context: Past experiences with authority and distrust in institutions can lead to skepticism about the efficacy of reporting mechanisms.

These challenges can create an environment where abuse remains unaddressed, further complicating the path to justice for victims.

Jacobsen: How does the Serbian Orthodox Church’s approach to handling abuse cases compare with other national religious institutions in the region?

Jovanović: The Serbian Orthodox Church’s approach to handling abuse cases has several distinctive features when compared to other national religious institutions in the region:

Similarities:

  1. Hierarchical Structures: Like many religious institutions in the region, the Serbian Orthodox Church operates under a hierarchical structure that can complicate accountability and transparency.
  2. Cultural Sensitivity: Many religious organizations in the region grapple with cultural stigmas surrounding abuse, which can lead to reluctance in reporting and addressing allegations.
  3. Community Relations: Similar to other institutions, local communities often prioritize maintaining their relationships with clergy, leading to underreporting of abuse cases.

Differences:

  1. Public Response: The Serbian Orthodox Church has faced criticism for its slow or inadequate response to allegations, while some other religious institutions may have adopted more proactive measures, including public apologies and commitments to reform.
  2. Institutional Reform: Other religious organizations in the region may have established clearer protocols for handling abuse cases, such as independent review boards or mandatory reporting policies, which the Serbian Orthodox Church has been slower to implement.
  3. Victim Support: Some institutions have developed robust support systems for victims, including counseling and advocacy services, which may not be as developed within the Serbian Orthodox Church.
  4. Engagement with Authorities: The willingness to collaborate with civil authorities can vary. Some religious institutions may have more established partnerships with law enforcement, while the Serbian Orthodox Church has historically been more insular in handling cases internally.

Conclusion:

Overall, while there are some common challenges across religious institutions in the region, the Serbian Orthodox Church’s approach to abuse allegations can differ significantly in terms of responsiveness, victim support, and institutional reform. These differences can impact the effectiveness of addressing abuse and fostering trust within communities.

Jacobsen: Can you discuss the impact of clergy-related abuse scandals on public trust in religious institutions in Serbia and neighboring countries?

Jovanović: Clergy-related abuse scandals have significantly impacted public trust in religious institutions in Serbia and neighboring countries in several ways:

Erosion of Trust

  1. Loss of Credibility: Scandals undermine the perceived integrity of religious leaders, leading to a general loss of credibility for the institutions they represent. Many congregants begin to question the moral authority of their religious leaders.
  2. Disillusionment Among Faithful: Long-standing members may feel betrayed, causing disillusionment with the church and a decline in regular attendance or participation in religious activities.
  3. Increased Skepticism: Communities may become more skeptical of religious teachings and practices, particularly regarding ethical behavior and accountability within the church.

Community Division

  1. Polarization: Scandals can create divisions within communities, with some members defending the clergy and others calling for accountability and reform. This polarization can weaken community cohesion.
  2. Fear of Reporting: Victims may feel discouraged from coming forward due to a perceived lack of support or fear of ostracism, further perpetuating a culture of silence.

Social and Political Repercussions

  1. Demand for Reform: Increased awareness of abuse scandals often leads to calls for institutional reform, including better oversight mechanisms and clearer reporting procedures for allegations.
  2. Public Discourse: These scandals can shift public discourse about the role of religion in society, prompting discussions about accountability, transparency, and the need for reform in religious institutions.

Comparative Impact in Neighboring Countries

  1. Similar Trends: Neighboring countries may experience similar declines in trust, especially if their religious institutions face comparable scandals. The impact can be magnified if media coverage highlights systemic issues.
  2. Cultural Differences: The degree of impact may vary based on cultural attitudes towards religion and authority. In some regions, religious institutions may retain a strong influence despite scandals, while in others, the trust may decline more sharply.

Conclusion

Overall, clergy-related abuse scandals pose significant challenges to public trust in religious institutions in Serbia and neighboring countries. The fallout from these scandals can lead to lasting changes in how communities perceive and engage with their religious leaders, ultimately influencing the role of religion in society.

Jacobsen: What role does the Serbian government play in either addressing or overlooking clergy-related abuse within Orthodoxy?

Jovanović: The Serbian government plays a complex role in addressing or overlooking clergy-related abuse within the Orthodox Church, characterized by several key factors:

Addressing Abuse

  1. Legal Framework: The government has established laws that criminalize abuse, including sexual abuse, which can apply to clergy members. These laws create a basis for legal action against offenders.
  2. Cooperation with Authorities: In some cases, the government has cooperated with law enforcement to investigate allegations against clergy members, especially when public pressure mounts for accountability.
  3. Public Awareness Campaigns: The government may support initiatives aimed at raising awareness about abuse and promoting rights for victims, although this is often influenced by civil society rather than direct government action.

Overlooking Abuse

  1. Cultural Sensitivity: The close relationship between the Serbian Orthodox Church and national identity can lead to hesitance in pursuing investigations against clergy, as doing so may be seen as undermining the church’s authority.
  2. Political Influence: Religious leaders often hold significant sway in political matters, which can lead to a reluctance to confront or adequately address allegations against clergy members to maintain political stability and support.
  3. Lack of Accountability: The government may overlook systemic issues within the church, leading to inadequate responses to abuse allegations. This can be attributed to a desire to avoid conflict with the church and its followers.
  4. Historical Context: A history of church-state relations may contribute to a tendency to prioritize religious authority over accountability, leading to a culture where allegations are handled internally rather than through formal legal channels.

Conclusion

In summary, the Serbian government’s role in addressing or overlooking clergy-related abuse within Orthodoxy is multifaceted. While there are legal mechanisms and instances of cooperation, cultural and political factors often lead to a lack of thorough investigation and accountability, creating a challenging environment for victims seeking justice.

Jacobsen: How have international organizations and the global community responded to allegations of abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church?

Jovanović: International organizations and the global community have responded to allegations of abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church in several ways:

Advocacy and Pressure

  1. Human Rights Organizations: Groups such as Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch have highlighted cases of abuse and called for accountability, urging the Serbian government and the church to take allegations seriously.
  2. Public Statements: Various international bodies, including the European Union, have made public statements emphasizing the importance of addressing abuse allegations within religious institutions and ensuring the protection of victims’ rights.

Monitoring and Reporting

  1. Regular Monitoring: International organizations often monitor the situation regarding religious freedoms and abuses within various countries, including Serbia. Reports may include sections on the Serbian Orthodox Church and its handling of abuse cases.
  2. Investigative Reports: Some organizations produce detailed reports on the state of religious institutions, assessing their responses to abuse allegations and providing recommendations for improvement.

Support for Victims

  1. Resources for Advocacy: International NGOs sometimes provide resources and training for local advocacy groups to support victims and raise awareness about abuse within religious contexts.
  2. Networking with Local Groups: International organizations often collaborate with local NGOs and civil society to amplify the voices of victims and push for reforms within the church and the broader society.

Calls for Reform

  1. Institutional Recommendations: International bodies may call for the Serbian Orthodox Church to adopt more transparent procedures for handling allegations, including independent investigations and better support for victims.
  2. Legal Reforms: Advocacy for stronger legal frameworks to protect victims and ensure accountability for clergy members may also be a focus, pressuring the government to strengthen its legal stance on abuse.

Challenges

  1. Cultural Sensitivity: The close ties between the church and national identity can make international advocacy challenging, as local sentiments may resist perceived external interference in religious affairs.
  2. Limited Impact: The effectiveness of international responses can be limited by the church’s internal dynamics and the political context within Serbia, which may prioritize maintaining stability over addressing allegations.

Conclusion

Overall, international organizations and the global community have taken steps to respond to allegations of abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church, advocating for accountability and reform. However, the interplay of cultural, political, and religious factors can complicate these efforts and affect their outcomes.

Jacobsen: Are there global patterns in how religious institutions handle abuse allegations, and where does the Serbian Orthodox Church fit within this international context? Professor David Pooler in the United States has noted consistencies to me. 

Damir Katulić: In principle one can talk about the global patterns of how religious institutions (meaning not just churches pertain to Christian religion but a religion institutions in general) handle abuse allegations. It is almost like the model of 5 stages of grief. The first reaction is usually a denial. But after firm evidence is presented then we are witnessing the anger of the religious institutions, their bargaining with the legal and public domains, and in most cases acceptance in the form of the court settlements. Since institutions can not been depressed, we are lacking this part of the grief model. Anyhow, this process is in direct correlation with the size of the religion’s institution; the bigger the institution, the condemnation of the abuse is more rapid and wide.

What is special about Serbian Orthodox Church in this model is that SPC is lacking the universal character of the religion institution, and it is deeply intertwined with the political agenda of the Serbian state. Therefore, the whole process of dealing with the abuse problem is suspended in the step one because the Serbian state doesn’t allow that the information of the abuses becomes public and when it against all odds does, state uses its institutions (including the state-controlled media) to suppress it. 

This practice makes the handling of the abuse issues in the SPC extremely hard and very often quite dangerous.

Jacobsen: What lessons can be drawn from international cases of clergy-related abuse that might help address these issues within Serbia?

Katulić: To really deal with the issue of clergy-related abuse within the SPC this problem has to become international so that a Serbian state loses its mechanism to suppress it from the public domain. The more countries, non-governmental institutions and publicly acclaimed individuals are aware of this problem and talk about it openly, it would be immensely harder to conceal this issue within the corridors of power in Serbia and SPC as a main perpetrator. 

So, the main lesson would be to internationalize the abuse cases that happen within the SPC and then it will be dealt with like the other similar cases in the last couple of decades around the world.

Jacobsen: How does collaboration with regional experts like Mr. Ivan Valek enhance understanding and action against clergy-related abuse in the Balkans?

Katulić: Mr. Ivan Valek is really a well-educated expert in this field that invested decades of his life exploring this topic. His expertise can be really helpful not just because he has a deep understanding of this problem, but he possesses a broad knowledge of a historical concept related to the religion issues in the region of the Balkans. Therefore, whoever would like to expand and enhance its understanding of this topics should, in some form, have a contact and conversation with Mr. Valek.

Jacobsen: What importance does cross-border cooperation hold in effectively tackling clergy-related abuse at both national and regional levels?

Jovanović: Cross-border cooperation is crucial in effectively tackling clergy-related abuse at both national and regional levels for several reasons:

  1. Shared Best Practices

Exchange of Information: Countries can share successful strategies and protocols for addressing abuse cases, enhancing overall effectiveness in handling allegations.

Training Programs: Joint training initiatives can equip clergy and lay leaders with the necessary skills to recognize and respond to abuse.

  1. Strengthening Legal Frameworks

Harmonization of Laws: Collaborative efforts can lead to more consistent legal standards and practices regarding abuse across borders, making it harder for perpetrators to evade justice by relocating.

Mutual Legal Assistance: Countries can support each other in prosecuting offenders who may flee to another jurisdiction.

  1. Victim Support and Advocacy

Cross-border Networks: Establishing networks among NGOs and support organizations can provide victims with resources and assistance regardless of where they are located.

Awareness Campaigns: Collaborative campaigns can raise awareness about abuse and available support services, fostering a culture of accountability.

  1. Joint Investigations

Pooling Resources: Collaborative investigations can be more effective, pooling resources and expertise to address complex cases that cross national boundaries.

Sharing Intelligence: Law enforcement agencies can share intelligence and evidence, facilitating more thorough investigations.

  1. Cultural Sensitivity and Understanding

Regional Context: Understanding the cultural dynamics and sensitivities of different countries can improve the effectiveness of interventions and responses to abuse allegations.

Building Trust: Cross-border partnerships can foster trust between countries, communities, and religious institutions, essential for effectively addressing abuse.

  1. Strengthening Institutional Accountability

Joint Oversight Bodies: Establishing regional oversight bodies can ensure consistent monitoring and accountability for religious institutions across borders.

Encouraging Transparency: Collaborative efforts can promote transparency in how allegations are handled, making it easier to hold institutions accountable.

Conclusion

Cross-border cooperation is vital in addressing clergy-related abuse, as it enhances legal frameworks, supports victims, fosters shared knowledge, and strengthens institutional accountability. By working together, countries can create a more effective response to abuse that transcends national boundaries, ultimately protecting vulnerable individuals and fostering a culture of accountability within religious institutions.

Jacobsen: What has been the hoped-for impact through promoting your updated book at the International Book Fair in Montenegro?

Jovanović: Promoting an updated book at the International Book Fair in Montenegro aims to achieve several hoped-for impacts:

  1. Increased Visibility

Broader Reach: The fair provides an opportunity to reach a diverse audience, including readers, publishers, and literary agents, enhancing the book’s visibility in the market.

  1. Engagement with Readers

Direct Interaction: Engaging with readers allows for firsthand feedback, fostering a connection that can lead to increased interest and sales.

  1. Networking Opportunities

Collaborations: The event facilitates networking with other authors, publishers, and industry professionals, potentially leading to future collaborations and partnerships.

  1. Cultural Exchange

Promoting Dialogue: Showcasing the book can stimulate discussions about its themes, contributing to cultural exchange and dialogue within the literary community.

  1. Strengthening Literary Community

Supporting Local Authors: Participation in the fair highlights the importance of local literature, helping to strengthen the overall literary community in Montenegro.

  1. Sales and Distribution

Increased Sales: The fair provides a platform for direct sales, potentially boosting initial sales figures and establishing distribution channels.

  1. Feedback for Future Works

Valuable Insights: Feedback received during the fair can inform future writing projects and marketing strategies, helping to refine the author’s approach.

Conclusion

Overall, promoting the updated book at the International Book Fair in Montenegro is expected to enhance visibility, foster engagement, and contribute to the broader literary landscape, ultimately supporting the author’s career and the promotion of literature in the region.

Jacobsen: How has media coverage at different levels influenced public perception and institutional responses to clergy-related abuse in Serbia?

Jovanović: Media coverage at different levels has significantly influenced public perception and institutional responses to clergy-related abuse in Serbia in several ways:

  1. Shaping Public Awareness

Raising Awareness: Media reports have brought attention to instances of clergy-related abuse, informing the public about the issues and prompting discussions that may have previously been suppressed.

Highlighting Victims’ Stories: By sharing personal accounts from victims, the media has humanized the issue, making it more relatable and fostering empathy among the public.

  1. Influencing Public Opinion

Framing the Narrative: The way media outlets frame the narrative around abuse can shape public opinion, either by emphasizing accountability and justice or by downplaying the severity of the allegations.

Creating Outrage or Support: Intense media coverage can lead to public outrage, pressuring institutions to respond more decisively to allegations. Conversely, favorable coverage can create a protective atmosphere for the church.

  1. Impacting Institutional Responses

Accountability Pressure: Media scrutiny can compel institutions, including the Serbian Orthodox Church and the government, to take allegations more seriously and implement reforms to address systemic issues.

Response Strategies: Institutions may adopt different strategies in response to media coverage—either reinforcing their positions or making public commitments to transparency and accountability based on the coverage.

  1. Regional and International Influence

Comparative Analysis: Coverage may draw comparisons with how similar cases are handled in other countries, influencing public expectations regarding accountability and institutional reforms.

Global Awareness: International media attention can amplify local issues, prompting both public and institutional responses that align with global human rights standards.

  1. Encouraging Dialogue and Reform

Facilitating Conversations: Media coverage can encourage broader societal conversations about the role of religion, authority, and accountability, potentially leading to demands for reform.

Inspiring Activism: Increased awareness and public interest can mobilize civil society organizations and activists to advocate for victims’ rights and institutional change.

Conclusion

In summary, media coverage at various levels has played a crucial role in shaping public perception and influencing institutional responses to clergy-related abuse in Serbia. By raising awareness, framing narratives, and applying pressure for accountability, the media has the potential to foster significant change within both religious institutions and broader societal attitudes.

Jacobsen: How might international human rights frameworks be applied to address clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church?

Jovanović: International human rights frameworks can be applied to address clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church in several key ways:

  1. Legal Obligations and Accountability

Ratification of Treaties: Serbia is a party to various international human rights treaties, such as the Convention on the Rights of the Child and the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. These treaties obligate the state to protect individuals from abuse and ensure accountability.

Incorporation into Domestic Law: The principles of these treaties can be integrated into national legislation, requiring the Serbian government to establish legal mechanisms that address clergy-related abuse effectively.

  1. Protection of Victims’ Rights

Access to Justice: International frameworks emphasize the right of victims to seek justice and redress. Implementing these rights can empower victims of clergy-related abuse to come forward and report incidents without fear of reprisal.

Support Services: Frameworks can guide the development of support services for victims, including counseling, legal assistance, and safe reporting mechanisms.

  1. Monitoring and Reporting Mechanisms

Independent Oversight: Establishing independent bodies to monitor cases of abuse within religious institutions can ensure transparency and accountability. International human rights bodies often recommend the creation of such mechanisms.

Regular Reporting: Countries are encouraged to report on their compliance with human rights obligations. This can include data on abuse cases within religious institutions, fostering accountability and public awareness.

  1. Training and Capacity Building

Education for Clergy and Officials: International human rights frameworks can promote training programs for clergy, church officials, and law enforcement on recognizing, preventing, and responding to abuse.

Best Practices: Sharing best practices from other countries that have successfully addressed similar issues can guide reforms within the Serbian Orthodox Church.

  1. Encouraging Collaboration with Civil Society

Partnerships with NGOs: International frameworks can encourage collaboration between the church, the government, and civil society organizations to address abuse comprehensively.

Community Engagement: Involving communities in discussions about clergy-related abuse can help raise awareness and promote a culture of accountability within religious institutions.

  1. Advocacy for Institutional Reforms

Policy Recommendations: Human rights bodies can provide recommendations for reforms within the Serbian Orthodox Church, such as establishing clear reporting procedures for abuse and creating transparent investigative processes.

Accountability for Leadership: Advocating for accountability measures for church leaders who fail to address allegations of abuse can promote a culture of responsibility.

Conclusion

By applying international human rights frameworks, Serbia can enhance its approach to addressing clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church. This includes ensuring legal accountability, protecting victims’ rights, fostering transparency, and promoting collaboration with civil society, ultimately contributing to a safer and more accountable environment within religious institutions.

Jacobsen: What are the legal and institutional barriers at the national level that hinder effective prosecution of abuse cases involving clergy?

Jovanović: The legal and institutional barriers at the national level that hinder effective prosecution of abuse cases involving clergy can include:

  1. Weak Legal Framework

Insufficient Laws: Existing laws may not adequately address clergy-related abuse, leaving gaps that can be exploited by perpetrators.

Statute of Limitations: In many jurisdictions, the statute of limitations may be too short, preventing the prosecution of cases that come to light after a significant delay.

  1. Institutional Protection

Clerical Privilege: Some legal systems may afford clergy special protections or privileges, making it more difficult to prosecute them compared to lay individuals.

Internal Church Investigations: Many religious institutions may prefer to handle allegations internally, often resulting in inadequate investigations and lack of accountability.

  1. Cultural and Social Factors

Religious Influence: The strong influence of religious institutions in society can lead to reluctance among victims to come forward due to fear of stigmatization or retribution.

Public Sentiment: Societal attitudes that prioritize the reputation of the church over justice for victims can hinder reporting and prosecution.

  1. Lack of Resources and Training

Inadequate Training for Law Enforcement: Police and legal personnel may lack specific training on handling abuse cases involving clergy, leading to mishandling of investigations.

Limited Resources: Financial and human resources for investigating and prosecuting such cases may be insufficient, affecting the overall efficacy of the legal process.

  1. Judicial Bias

Perceived Bias: There may be a perceived or actual bias within the judicial system favoring religious institutions, leading to reluctance to prosecute cases against clergy.

Fear of Community Reaction: Judges and prosecutors might fear backlash from religious communities, which could influence their decisions regarding prosecution.

  1. Victim Support Deficiencies

Lack of Support Services: Insufficient victim support services can deter individuals from coming forward, as they may feel unsupported in navigating the legal system.

Trauma and Stigma: The trauma associated with abuse, coupled with societal stigma, can prevent victims from pursuing legal action.

Conclusion

These barriers create a complex environment that can obstruct justice for victims of clergy-related abuse. Addressing these challenges requires comprehensive legal reforms, enhanced training for law enforcement, better support for victims, and cultural shifts that prioritize accountability and transparency.

Jacobsen: How does the culture of silence at the local level affect efforts to expose and prevent abuse? What can break this culture?

Jovanović: The culture of silence at the local level significantly affects efforts to expose and prevent abuse in several ways:

  1. Hindrance to Reporting

Fear of Retaliation: Victims and witnesses may fear reprisals from the community or the church, deterring them from coming forward.

Stigma: There may be societal stigma attached to reporting abuse, particularly in religious contexts, which can silence victims and supporters.

  1. Normalization of Abuse

Cultural Acceptance: If abuse is seen as a normal part of the religious or community environment, it becomes more difficult to challenge and address.

Minimization of Issues: Community narratives may downplay the severity of abuse, leading to a lack of urgency in addressing the problem.

  1. Lack of Support Systems

Insufficient Resources: Communities may lack adequate support services for victims, further entrenching silence.

Limited Awareness: There may be a lack of awareness about the rights of victims and the mechanisms available for reporting abuse.

  1. Institutional Protectionism

Covering Up: Religious institutions may prioritize their reputation over accountability, leading to internal cover-ups rather than external reporting.

Inadequate Responses: Institutions may have inadequate procedures for handling allegations, reinforcing the culture of silence.

What Can Break This Culture?

  1. Education and Awareness Campaigns

Public Education: Increasing awareness about abuse and its effects can empower victims and the community to speak out.

Training Programs: Offering training on rights and available resources can help dismantle the stigma associated with reporting.

  1. Supportive Environment

Creating Safe Spaces: Establishing confidential reporting mechanisms can encourage victims to come forward without fear of exposure.

Community Support Groups: Fostering supportive networks for victims can help them feel less isolated and more empowered to speak out.

  1. Engagement of Community Leaders

Involvement of Influential Figures: Engaging respected community and religious leaders in discussions about abuse can lend credibility to efforts to break the silence.

Public Statements: Leaders can make public statements denouncing abuse, reinforcing a culture of accountability.

  1. Legal and Institutional Reforms

Strengthening Legal Frameworks: Implementing laws that protect whistleblowers and provide clear reporting pathways can encourage more individuals to come forward.

Accountability Mechanisms: Establishing independent oversight bodies can ensure that allegations are taken seriously and investigated thoroughly.

  1. Advocacy and Activism

Grassroots Movements: Supporting grassroots initiatives that advocate for victims’ rights can create pressure for change at both the community and institutional levels.

Coalitions: Forming coalitions among NGOs, activists, and community members can amplify efforts to expose and prevent abuse.

Conclusion

Breaking the culture of silence requires a multifaceted approach that combines education, support, community engagement, legal reforms, and advocacy. By fostering an environment that prioritizes accountability and victim support, communities can more effectively expose and prevent abuse.

Jacobsen: What are effective ways in which to continue and expand survivor advocacy, so victims can move from survivors to thrivers with appropriate social supports?

Jovanović:  Continuing and expanding survivor advocacy is crucial for helping victims transition from surviving to thriving. Here are effective ways to achieve this:

  1. Holistic Support Services

Comprehensive Care: Provide integrated services that address physical, mental, and emotional health, including counseling, medical care, and legal support.

Safe Housing: Ensure access to safe and affordable housing options for survivors to rebuild their lives without fear.

  1. Empowerment Programs

Skill Development: Offer vocational training and educational programs to help survivors gain independence and financial stability.

Leadership Opportunities: Encourage survivors to take on leadership roles within advocacy organizations, allowing them to influence policy and support others.

  1. Community Engagement

Support Networks: Foster peer support groups where survivors can share experiences and resources, creating a sense of community and belonging.

Awareness Campaigns: Conduct community outreach to educate the public about survivor issues and reduce stigma, fostering a more supportive environment.

  1. Advocacy and Policy Change

Lobby for Legal Reforms: Advocate for changes in laws and policies that protect survivors and provide necessary resources.

Partnerships with Organizations: Collaborate with NGOs, government agencies, and other stakeholders to strengthen advocacy efforts and resource availability.

  1. Access to Resources

Information Hubs: Create centralized resources where survivors can find information on available services, legal rights, and support systems.

Financial Assistance: Provide grants or funds to help survivors with immediate needs, such as medical bills or educational expenses.

  1. Mental Health Support

Trauma-Informed Care: Train service providers in trauma-informed approaches to ensure that survivors feel safe and respected in all interactions.

Crisis Intervention Services: Establish immediate support services for survivors in crisis, including hotlines and emergency counseling.

  1. Cultural Competence and Inclusivity

Tailored Programs: Develop services that are culturally sensitive and inclusive of diverse communities, ensuring that all survivors feel represented and understood.

Language Access: Provide resources in multiple languages to accommodate non-native speakers.

  1. Monitoring and Evaluation

Feedback Mechanisms: Implement systems for survivors to provide feedback on programs and services, ensuring that their voices shape ongoing advocacy efforts.

Data Collection: Collect and analyze data on survivor needs and outcomes to inform program development and improve service delivery.

  1. Long-Term Follow-Up

Continued Support: Establish long-term follow-up services to check in on survivors, ensuring they have ongoing access to resources and support.

Mentorship Programs: Pair survivors with mentors who can guide them through their healing and empowerment journeys.

Conclusion

By implementing these strategies, advocacy efforts can create a supportive framework that empowers survivors, helping them transition from surviving to thriving. Collaboration, comprehensive services, and a focus on empowerment are essential components of this process.

Jacobsen: How do cultural and religious factors unique to Serbia and the Balkans influence the recognition and handling of abuse allegations?

Jovanović:  Cultural and religious factors unique to Serbia and the Balkans significantly influence the recognition and handling of abuse allegations in several ways:

  1. Cultural Attitudes Toward Authority

Respect for Authority: There is often a deep-seated respect for authority figures, including clergy, which can lead to reluctance in questioning or reporting allegations against them. This can result in a culture of silence around abuse.

Collective Identity: The importance of community and collective identity may discourage individuals from coming forward, as doing so could bring shame to the community or institution.

  1. Religious Influence

Clerical Authority: The Serbian Orthodox Church holds considerable sway in societal norms and values. Allegations against clergy can be seen as attacks on the church itself, leading to defensiveness and denial rather than accountability.

Moral Expectations: Religious teachings often emphasize forgiveness and redemption, which can lead to a tendency to downplay the severity of abuse or to prioritize reconciliation over justice.

  1. Stigmatization of Victims

Social Stigma: Victims of abuse may face stigma and isolation, leading to fears of being ostracized by their communities. This can deter reporting and seeking help.

Gender Roles: Traditional gender norms can further complicate the situation, as women may feel pressure to conform to societal expectations that prioritize family unity over individual well-being.

  1. Legal and Institutional Framework

Inadequate Legal Protections: The legal system may not fully address the complexities of abuse allegations, particularly within religious contexts, leading to insufficient responses to reported cases.

Internal Church Mechanisms: The tendency for religious institutions to handle allegations internally can result in inadequate investigations and a lack of transparency, reinforcing the culture of silence.

  1. Historical Context

Legacy of Conflict: The historical context of the Balkans, including recent conflicts, can affect societal attitudes toward authority and trust in institutions. Distrust in state systems may lead individuals to rely on religious institutions, complicating the response to allegations.

Collective Trauma: The region’s history of trauma can influence how communities respond to individual trauma, often prioritizing collective healing over addressing specific allegations.

  1. Community Support Structures

Limited Resources: Support systems for victims may be underdeveloped, making it difficult for individuals to find help or advocacy. Communities may lack access to counseling or legal assistance.

Role of NGOs: While some NGOs work to address these issues, their influence may be limited by cultural and religious norms, making it challenging to advocate for change.

Conclusion

Cultural and religious factors in Serbia and the Balkans create a complex landscape for recognizing and handling abuse allegations. The interplay of authority, stigma, and community dynamics can hinder reporting and accountability. Addressing these challenges requires a nuanced understanding of local contexts, as well as efforts to educate communities and reform institutional responses.

Jacobsen: What are necessary actions for effectively combatting clergy-related abuse in the Serbian Orthodox Church for the long-term?

Jovanović: Effectively combatting clergy-related abuse in the Serbian Orthodox Church for the long term requires a multifaceted approach that includes the following necessary actions:

  1. Establishing Transparent Reporting Mechanisms

Independent Reporting Channels: Create confidential and independent channels for victims to report abuse without fear of retaliation.

Clear Protocols: Develop clear procedures for handling allegations that ensure thorough investigations and accountability.

  1. Implementing Robust Training Programs

Clergy Training: Provide comprehensive training for clergy on ethical conduct, boundaries, and the impact of abuse.

Educating Congregations: Offer educational programs for congregants about recognizing signs of abuse and the importance of reporting.

  1. Strengthening Legal Frameworks

Advocating for Legislative Changes: Work with lawmakers to ensure that legal protections for victims are strengthened and that there are stringent penalties for abusers.

Collaboration with Law Enforcement: Foster partnerships between church leaders and law enforcement to ensure that abuse cases are taken seriously and investigated thoroughly.

  1. Creating Support Systems for Survivors

Counseling Services: Establish access to psychological support and counseling for victims of abuse.

Support Networks: Develop peer support groups for survivors to share experiences and healing resources.

  1. Promoting a Culture of Accountability

Zero Tolerance Policy: Implement a clear zero-tolerance policy for abuse within the church, emphasizing that all allegations will be taken seriously.

Public Accountability: Encourage public statements from church leaders that condemn abuse and outline the church’s commitment to preventing it.

  1. Encouraging Community Engagement

Community Awareness Campaigns: Conduct outreach programs to educate the public on the issue of clergy-related abuse and the importance of supporting victims.

Involving Lay Leaders: Engage lay leaders and members of the congregation in discussions about preventing abuse and promoting a safe environment.

  1. Ensuring Transparency and Accountability in Investigations

Independent Oversight Committees: Establish independent committees to oversee investigations of abuse allegations and ensure transparency in the process.

Regular Reporting: Require regular public reports on the church’s handling of abuse allegations to maintain accountability.

  1. Fostering a Safe Environment within the Church

Policy Development: Create and enforce policies that promote safe interactions between clergy and congregants, particularly minors.

Regular Audits: Conduct regular audits of church practices and policies related to abuse prevention and response.

  1. Encouraging International Cooperation

Learning from Best Practices: Collaborate with international organizations and other religious institutions to adopt best practices for preventing and addressing abuse.

Support from Global Church Bodies: Seek support from global Orthodox church organizations in implementing reforms.

  1. Promoting Open Dialogue within the Church

Encouraging Whistleblower Protections: Implement protections for whistleblowers who report misconduct or abuse.

Facilitating Conversations: Create forums for open dialogue about clergy-related issues, allowing congregants to express concerns and propose solutions.

Conclusion

Addressing clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church requires commitment, transparency, and a collaborative approach. By implementing these actions, the church can create a safer environment for its members and foster a culture of accountability and support for victims.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Bojan.

Jovanović: You’re welcome! If you have any more questions or need further assistance, feel free to ask.

Further Internal Resources (Chronological, yyyy/mm/dd):

Historical Articles

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 1: Adam Metropoulos (2024/01/11)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 2: Domestic Violence (2024/01/12)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 3: Finances (2024/01/16)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 4: Sex Abuse (2024/01/17)

Interviews

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu on Clergy-Perpetrated Sexual Abuse (2024/06/02)

Katherine Archer on California Senate Bill 894 (2024/06/11)

Dorothy Small on Abuse of Adults in the Roman Catholic Church (2024/06/16)

Melanie Sakoda on Orthodox Clergy-Related Misconduct (2024/06/23)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Clergy Adult Sexual Abuse (2024/07/21)

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu & Dorothy Small: Ecumenical Catholic-Orthodox Discourse (2024/07/24)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Consent and Power (2024/08/13)

Irene Deschênes on Outrage Canada (2024/09/05)

Press Releases:

#ChurchToo Survivors Call on CA Governor Gavin Newsom (2024/06/09)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Åsa Heuser on Brazil’s Humanists and Evangelicals

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/23

Åsa Heuser is a Finnish member of Humanistas Brasil. She discusses her move to Brazil, the challenges of promoting humanism in a religious country, and tensions between individual freedom and social responsibility. Heuser highlights issues with evangelical groups, including religious discrimination, financial abuse, and lack of public understanding of secular humanism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Åsa Heuser because she is Finnish and a member of Humanistas Brasil. Quick question: How did you go from Finland to Brazil regarding organizational membership?

Åsa Heuser: I came to Brazil as a teenager because my father got a job here. He brought the family along, and that’s how I ended up in Brazil. I stayed, married, had children, and now I have grandchildren. I’ve been living in Brazil for over 50 years.

Jacobsen: What are the main issues facing Brazilian humanism? What do you view as the more positive aspects of community activities?

Heuser: It is challenging to get people to pay attention to what humanism is because it is relatively new in Brazil. It’s in its early stages, and getting the message across is difficult. Secular morality is a strange concept in Brazil’s religious mindset, so spreading the idea and getting more people involved is challenging. Even those familiar with humanism and identifying as humanists need help getting others interested.

That’s one issue. However, we have a group on WhatsApp and maintain profiles on Instagram and Facebook. One of the members even wrote a book, which is being made available to those who want to read it.

We try to share information about humanism on social media so people can learn more about it, but it spreads slowly.

Jacobsen: What community activities do members participate in online or in person?

Heuser: Meeting in person is challenging because Brazil is such a large country. When members live in the same region, they try to meet up, but most discussions happen on WhatsApp.

We discuss ethical issues and various aspects of humanism, exploring how we can apply these principles. We also have a separate group for board members and an open group for anyone interested. However, sometimes, people join the open group without fully understanding the concept of humanism, leading to disagreements and some tension.

Jacobsen: Let me interject here with a relevant example: There was a moment with the South African secular group, the South African Secular Society (SASS). It went like this:

we can register marriage officers. We have had various applications from theists. We point people at the SASS mission statement and ethos, which includes the naturalist worldview.

We say very early on, “Do you support the SASS mission and ethos?” The only choice is, “Yes.” We say, “Are you prepared to do marriage ceremonies free of supernatural content?” The only answer is, “Yes.”

We say, “Are you prepared to do same-sex and heterosexual sex marriages?” The only answer is, “Yes.” There is, “Are you prepared to do counselling?” It is an optional one. Anyway, people will blithely skim through these, “Yes, yes, yes, carry on, no problems.”

Then we ask for motivation, “Why do you want to become a secular marriage officer?” At that point, we can quite easily get things like, “Oh, I am a pastor at so-and-so congregation. I wanted to marry my congregants.”

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: We also get, “I am a prominent member of x, y, z church.” We don’t see it is in the motivation, but we also ask them for sample ceremonies.

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: For example, in fact, we had one very recently. I hadn’t gone through the ceremony when we copied it in. We put this one on Google Docs, so the whole team could see it. But I started reading it.

And oops! This chap is mentioning God!

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: He has 4 citations of God! He has got several references to several biblical verses.

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: Now, in fact, Wynand can tell you more about how this one got through the cracks. He set up various protections. But due to technical website issues, he turned it off. So, the person had got through right to that point.

I emailed him to say, “I noticed that you’ve ticked all the boxes saying you’re a secular person and everything else. You’ve agreed to the terms and conditions and everything else. But I see that you’re citing God and making biblical references in your marriage ceremonies. Can you clarify for us?”

He writes back and says, “Cancel my application, I am a Christian and I believe in GOD!”

[Wynand’s Meijer’s wife laughing in the background – not part of the conversation, but listening into it, obviously.]

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: I wrote back saying, “Please tell us how you got that far through our form, so that we can make it easier and waste their time.” I didn’t mention wasting our time, which was obvious as well.

I did not hear back from him. The interesting thing is, this man is an attorney.

Jacobsen: Oh my goodness.

There was some confusion; unfortunately, the situation escalated into frustration.

So, that can happen in humanist groups with a complete misunderstanding, like, “How can you live without the divine?”

Heuser: Yes, most people don’t understand atheism. They simply can’t.

So when they come into the community, they don’t necessarily understand what that implies. Recently, there was a guy who called himself an “ANCAP.” Do you know what that means?

Jacobsen: No. 

Heuser: It refers to an anarchist capitalist.

Jacobsen: Oh yes, right. 

Heuser: So he was there, arguing that humanist rules were authoritarianism and that people should be free to do whatever they want. However, the group argued that we must also think about the collective.

Yes, we can’t only think about our freedom. But he was adamant, insisting, “No, we should be free, even to avoid vaccination,” and that goes against humanism. Capitalism, especially in that form, goes against humanism.

Jacobsen: Yes, there are certain strands of that, and the Amsterdam Declaration stipulates “social responsibility,” balancing individual freedom with social responsibility.

Heuser: Exactly. I think you can’t be individualistic—it’s absurd. We are very clear about being secular humanists, so that point is clear.

Jacobsen: Yes, but I’ve noticed that some people have started branding mechanisms that strip away the word “secular” for simplicity, or even “humanism” itself. I understand the context, but secular humanism must remain clear.

Heuser: In Brazil, we need to make that distinction very clear.

Jacobsen: Especially with the rise of evangelicals and the relative decline of Catholics, how has this shift in religious dynamics impacted secular organizations and movements in Brazil?

Heuser: There are practical issues. For example, some politicians try to pass laws based on religion. Some propose that the Bible be read in schools before classes start or that students pray in class.

Jacobsen: So, does your group directly intervene in these issues?

Heuser: We don’t have the power to intervene directly, but independent lawyers can step in. They file lawsuits to counter these attempts to impose religion in a secular state.

Jacobsen: How often do these bills succeed when proposed in parliament or local government levels?

Heuser: If nobody opposes them, they succeed. There was a case on the national level where they tried to impose that all libraries must have a Bible. Someone said, “Well, you can’t obligate all libraries to have a copy of the Bible. Why not include all the other religious books that exist?” Of course, it’s not forbidden to have a Bible, but you can’t impose it.

Jacobsen: It’s a library, so they likely already have one in many cases. I don’t think there are many libraries without a Bible because it’s so mainstream.

Heuser: Yes, but there was still that attempt to impose it. 

Jacobsen: There’s a joke in North America about why all these hotels have Gideon Bibles. Also, people wonder, “What is a Gideon?” So, these sorts of jokes quietly float around in North American circles.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a similar orientation.

Jacobsen: What do you think are some of the serious violations of equality of rights, especially as you’re noting, primarily by evangelicals in Brazil?

Heuser: Yes, it’s widespread. For example, we have African religions here, like Candomblé. These evangelicals are fiercely opposed to them. So, these groups, these African religions, suffer a lot of discrimination and even violence from evangelical groups. That’s a serious violation of the secular state.

Jacobsen: Are the authorities doing anything to defend them?

Heuser: Unfortunately, I don’t see much action from the authorities defending them. It’s sad.

Jacobsen: Are there ethnic tensions related to this since Candomblé is probably more associated with black communities?

Heuser: It used to be primarily a religion of black people, but nowadays, there are many white people involved as well. So, it’s no longer just a racial issue but also a religious one. These evangelical groups have targeted Candomblé, calling it a religion of the devil, literally. Some extreme pastors use that language.

Jacobsen: Yes, I’ve heard similar rhetoric in North America, particularly in the U.S. Pastors claim that people who argue for the separation of church and state or try to stop violations of this principle in public institutions are demonic. What seems like metaphors to outsiders aren’t metaphors to them.

Heuser: Yes, I know. 

Jacobsen: They talk about spiritual battles. 

Heuser: That’s exactly what happens here in Brazil.

Jacobsen: What’s the consequence for ordinary people? How does it affect them?

Heuser: Many people give a lot of money to these churches. Some churches even tell people to stop taking their medication. I’ve heard of cases where people died because they followed that advice. It’s a serious problem.

Jacobsen: That’s truly alarming.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a serious issue.

Jacobsen: So, are these evangelicals more on the charismatic end of things?

Heuser: Yes. They have these cult-like gatherings, with chanting and everything you can imagine. Then, they become so passionate that you can’t reason with them anymore.

Jacobsen: So, do common people become very angry and upset?

Heuser: Yes, for example, the former president had a motto, something like “God above all.” It was like “God, homeland, and patriotism” or something like that. These churches don’t pay taxes, so they are exempt from land, buildings, and services taxes.

Jacobsen: Are all of their assets and activities tax-exempt?

Heuser: Yes, exactly. In Brazil, some of these churches are suspected to be involved with criminal groups like drug traffickers. That can lead to the possibility of money laundering because they receive all this money from their congregations, and there’s no accountability. They can report receiving as much as they want, and some of that money might come from other sources, like drug trafficking.

Jacobsen: That’s alarming. 

Heuser: And for drug addicts, these churches often run centers meant to help them. Still, instead, they’re being brainwashed by religious organizations. And under Bolsonaro’s presidency, they were trying to get public resources to fund these centers, so they benefited from all sides. They received public funding to run these centers, which they used to brainwash people who were struggling with drug addiction.

Jacobsen: Typically, these organizations are led by one man at the top, who often institutionalizes communal or individual abuse. Most public awareness of these issues comes from front-page news stories about sexual violence, assault, or illicit affairs that don’t align with biblical mandates. Often, many men and women within these communities are complicit in protecting the leader’s image.

Heuser: Yes, that’s exactly what we see here in Brazil. On the other hand, the general public is so brainwashed that if you say these accusations are false, they’ll believe they are false. The fake news problem is so widespread here that people have been led to believe only in sources favouring the powerful—these leaders. If the leaders say it’s a lie, the public will believe it’s a lie, and they won’t believe the truth.

Jacobsen: What happens to the women in these communities, especially when they are more often subjected to coercive situations or sexual violence? It seems many institutions are coercive, pressuring people to give finances even when they’re in poverty or facing economic abuse.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a serious problem. Women, in particular, are often coerced, and the financial abuse in these institutions is rampant. Even those in poverty are expected to give what little they have to support the church, reinforcing economic abuse in these communities.

Jacobsen: So, are these evangelicals more on the charismatic end of things?

Heuser: Yes. They have these cult-like gatherings, with chanting and everything you can imagine. Then, they become so passionate that you can’t reason with them anymore.

Jacobsen: So, do common people become very angry and upset?

Heuser: Yes, for example, the former president had a motto, something like “God above all.” It was like “God, homeland, and patriotism” or something like that. These churches don’t pay taxes, so they are exempt from land, buildings, and services taxes.

Jacobsen: Are all of their assets and activities tax-exempt?

Heuser: Yes, exactly. In Brazil, many of these churches are also involved with drug trafficking. Some are engaged in money laundering because they receive all this money from their congregations, and there’s no accountability. They can report receiving as much as they want, and some of that money might come from other sources, like drug trafficking.

Jacobsen: That’s alarming. And for drug addicts, these churches often run centers meant to help them. Still, instead, they’re being brainwashed by religious organizations.

Heuser: Yes, they brainwash them. And under Bolsonaro’s presidency, they were trying to get public resources to fund these centers, so they benefited from all sides. They received public funding to run these centers, which they used to brainwash people who were struggling with drug addiction.

Jacobsen: Typically, these organizations are led by one man at the top, who often institutionalizes communal or individual abuse. Most public awareness of these issues comes from front-page news stories about sexual violence, assault, or illicit affairs that don’t align with biblical mandates. Often, many men and women within these communities are complicit in protecting the leader’s image.

Heuser: Yes, that’s exactly what we see here in Brazil. On the other hand, the general public is so brainwashed that if you say these accusations are false, they’ll believe they are false. The fake news problem is so widespread here that people have been led to believe only in sources favouring the powerful—these leaders. If the leaders say it’s a lie, the public will believe it’s a lie, and they won’t believe the truth.

Jacobsen: What happens to the women in these communities, especially when they are more often subjected to coercive situations or sexual violence? It seems many institutions are coercive, pressuring people to give finances even when they’re in poverty or facing economic abuse.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a serious problem. Women, in particular, are often coerced, and the financial abuse in these institutions is rampant. Even those in poverty are expected to give what little they have to support the church, reinforcing economic abuse in these communities.

Jacobsen: Few people with more resources are willing to finance these kinds of organizations because they don’t see any direct benefit. The biggest boosts I’ve heard of are when people die and leave a portion of their will to a humanist organization. That has been the largest financial support for these organizations, outside government-funded ones, like the Norwegian humanists. The Norwegian humanists receive government funding and function just as well as the churches—sometimes even better.

Jacobsen: When I spoke with them in Copenhagen in 2023, they wanted less government funding, which I’ve never heard from a religious institution. It’s almost funny—”We want less money.” They could build institutions, donate to neighbouring countries, and support surrounding communities. It’s impressive.

There’s been a lot more conversation about the differences in funding between the North and South and how that affects growth rates. In North America and Western Europe, for example, humanists advocate for many things—such as healthcare, pharmacare, and education systems—that are already established. These regions often have lower correctional rates as well. These are the things that humanists value and aim for globally.

Heuser: There are differences, but those things are central to what we want to achieve.

Jacobsen: I’ve noticed that the global humanists I’ve met from the Global South tend to be more resilient because they face tougher circumstances. They have much to teach the Global North about creativity, especially since they must be more resourceful with limited resources.

Heuser: I agree. 

Jacobsen: To help the overall humanist movement, more financial support should be provided from the Global North to the Global South. However, the knowledge exchange should be bidirectional, particularly regarding creativity—humanists from the Global South can offer valuable insights. What creative solutions or activities have you found while working, living, and consulting in the southern regions? One thing I’ve noticed, similar to Brazil and Canada, is that distance is a big challenge. Some communities have started doing online discussion groups and WhatsApp groups. 

Heuser: We have a WhatsApp group for everyone, and it helps people connect.

Jacobsen: So, that’s been effective?

Heuser: Yes, it works well. People often use it to find out how many humanists are in their city and arrange local meetings.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a good solution for connecting across large distances. What would you mainly recommend for humanist organizations to grow, become more resilient, and handle challenges such as economic, legal, and community violence? What are the key issues humanist organizations might face?

Heuser: As I mentioned, we are so few that we only have a little power to do a lot. But the most important thing would be to spread the idea more, to get more people to understand humanism and what we propose. That would make a difference because not all atheists are humanists. There are many atheists, but they don’t necessarily have the idea of an ethical system based on humanism.

Jacobsen: Yes, that’s a very good point.

Heuser: The main focus is getting the message out to reach more people.

Jacobsen: There’s also potential for building inter-belief or inter-organizational partnerships. Many people, even if they don’t explicitly talk about humanism in their daily lives, work, or activism, align with the core values of humanism. Many human rights organizations, for example, do work that reflects humanist principles, even if they don’t call it that.

Heuser: Yes.

Jacobsen: Feminist organizations as well, especially when it comes to addressing issues like sexual violence, which is something that often overlaps with humanist concerns.

Heuser: Right. For example, in evangelical communities, when women go to their pastor for help, they’re often told to pray to God for their husbands to change. That’s the only advice they get—no real help. They don’t help her. They tell her to endure it, not to complain.

Jacobsen: And issues like femicide—the rates tend to be higher in these communities, correct?

Heuser: Yes, the rates of femicide and domestic violence are quite high, especially in evangelical groups.

Jacobsen: What role can humanists play in addressing these issues? Has there been any advocacy to slow it down?

Heuser: Unfortunately, as a small group, we don’t have much power to interfere with these issues on a large scale. If we had more people, we could do something. But as it stands, our influence is limited. But there are things humanists could do if they had more numbers. For example, I know of one humanist celebrant in Brazil who performs humanist ceremonies. Even though he’s not a formal group member, when someone asks about humanist ceremonies, I refer them to him.

Jacobsen: That’s great to hear. There are small wins like that. Thank you so much for your time today. Do you have any final reflections before we wrap up?

Heuser: Not really; I’ve given you as much information as I could. It was less than you expected, but if you have more questions in the future, feel free to reach out.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. We’ll stay in touch. Thank you again.

Heuser: Thank you. Goodbye.

Jacobsen: Goodbye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

AJ on Global Humanism Lessons From Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/23

AJ serves as a director and trustee of Humanists International. He is a founding trustee of the National Multifaith Youth Centre in the UK. He also serves as national coordinator of Young Humanists UK.. He can be seen on XInstagramMetaLinkedInHumanism Now podcast, and his professional pagelast interview too.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, here’s another recap of the International Humanist Conference in Singapore, which was held alongside the Humanists International General Assembly, featuring prominent figures from the humanist movement. A notable name in youth humanism from the UK attended. AJ, what was your first impression of Singapore when you arrived? And what would you say was your main takeaway?

AJ: My first impression? I’ve visited Singapore several times before. I have family there, and in Malaysia, so it wasn’t my first time experiencing the culture. In that sense, it felt like coming home, with a sense of nostalgia. I hadn’t travelled to Singapore—or much at all—in the past five years.

It was refreshing to be on the road again and to reconnect with fellow humanist friends. The experience may not have been as new or surprising to me as it was for others. Still, I did appreciate the warm Singaporean welcome, generous hospitality, and positive, energetic way of speaking. The honesty in how Malaysians and Singaporeans express themselves resonates with me. The welcome from the humanist community in Singapore was fantastic.

In the lead-up to the conference, there were some concerns about government oversight, surveillance, and their interest in our activities—particularly about speaker visas—which might have conflicted with the human rights values held by many of us. While some concerns did come up, they didn’t overshadow the event. The immigration process was smooth, and the friendliness and dedication of the people immediately struck me.

As for my takeaway, I was particularly pleased that interfaith dialogue and harmony were central themes at this conference. The International Humanist Conference (hosted by Humanists Society Singapore) and the Humanists International General Assembly took place over the long weekend. Interfaith dialogue is a significant aspect of my Humanism and is why I joined the humanist movement. I am a humanist ambassador, someone who engages in dialogue with other faiths and beliefs rather than being inward-looking. Singapore embodies that spirit, and I left with renewed motivation and inspiration to continue my interfaith work. That message truly resonated with me.

Jacobsen: Did you participate in any speakers, workshops, or guided tours?

AJ: Yes, as a Humanists International board member, I was able to attend quite a few sessions. Certainly, the guided tour stood out to me. It continued the interfaith theme of Singapore. It was present every day of the event. The guided tour, including a workshop-style Q&A session, really stood out. There was also a demonstration of some interfaith work and deradicalization efforts. We visited a mosque as part of the cultural tour, so the tour/workshop combo was part of the same event.

The tour highlighted Singapore’s deep history, even though it’s quite a small place geographically. Different parts of the city reflect different aspects of its history. We visited a synagogue, though we didn’t go inside, and we also saw the old colonial British quarters, Indian areas with a history of Indian merchants, and the Malay and Chinese districts. For those on the tour visiting Singapore for the first time, it was an excellent way to showcase why Singapore places such a high value on interfaith harmony.

Singapore’s past includes violent conflicts between different groups, often stemming from colonial decisions. Singapore decided to set differences aside as a city-state and prioritize tolerance and coexistence. This is a great source of pride for Singaporeans, and that sentiment was very clear throughout the tour.

As part of the tour, we also visited a school where they emphasized that everyone in Singapore must learn English. Still, they also have to learn their native language, whether it’s Malay, Tamil, or Chinese. This reflects the pragmatic values of Singaporean society, which seeks unity through shared language and encourages a strong connection to individual cultural heritage.

It wasn’t anything new to me since my Indian family has been in Singapore for about 20 years. However, it was still inspiring to see it in practice. We could weave in the humanist and interfaith messages during the cultural tours.

Here’s an example of how they promote inter-religious harmony with government approval. We must acknowledge that the government sees the benefit, even for cynical economic reasons. Inter-religious harmony is beneficial because it doesn’t interfere with business and makes the environment more attractive for businesses. Singapore has thrived because of this approach. In that sense, there was a certain poignancy to it all.

Speaking as a UK resident, just a few weeks before I left, communal violence had broken out in certain areas. It became a national and international story, with fears of riots spreading to many cities. In the end, it didn’t escalate as feared, but the violence in one town caught the nation’s attention and shocked us. It reminded us of the society we’re living in post-Brexit.

So, we arrived in Singapore and took this cultural tour the next day. Our guide—a Singaporean—talked about the terrible riots they had in the past, with violence, bloodshed, and militaristic marches from different faith groups. The government had to make a decision and take the lead. They told the faith and cultural groups, “You’ll have a place, but it’s a place we define.” And that place was the same for every religion.

It was inspiring, though perhaps not perfect and too heavy-handed for those with Western sensibilities. Some might call it a manufactured or artificial harmony. Whatever it is, it works in Singapore in ways the UK model doesn’t. It was sobering, especially as someone with a British passport coming over and seeing this firsthand.

I should also mention the deradicalization workshop, which included visiting a mosque. It was a Sunni mosque right in the middle of Singapore, and it worked closely with the government and security services to deradicalize Singaporeans from various backgrounds—regardless of class, nationality, ethnic background, or even gender. Both males and females, even teenagers, who might have been radicalized online, are part of this effort. They focus on Muslims who have been drawn towards extremism or are showing sympathies for extremist ideologies.

That was particularly inspiring—their commitment to this work. We humanist guests to the mosque hit them with a few hard questions. You’re asking people to suspend their disbelief and believe in something without evidence, which in this case is Islam, even if it’s moderate Islam. So, it would be surprising if some people took their interpretations further. Isn’t it all part of the same path? This sparked quite a lively discussion between the humanist audience and the deradicalization staff at the mosque.

For someone like me, I run a Quran class, and I have many progressive Muslim friends. I also engage in interfaith dialogue with Muslims, studying the Quran, reinterpreting it, etc. That aspect of the conversation stood out to me as well.

Jacobsen: When it comes to the style of conversation within interfaith harmony work, as I know you’re very involved in that in the UK—particularly in orienting Humanism towards increasing tolerance, compassion, and advancing human rights—did you notice a difference in language use at the interfaith harmony workshop or presentation compared to the British context? They have similar goals. But do they use different means in terms of communication styles?

AJ: Yes. That’s something Britain can learn from. Of course, the two countries have slightly different personalities. Singaporeans communicate much more practically, matter-of-fact, and directly. They’re very down-to-earth. Brits, like Canadians, tend to beat around the bush more, with a lot of deference and politeness, often not directly saying what they mean.

Sometimes, that British approach can be beneficial. As Lincoln said, “The point of tact is not sharp.” But in Singapore, they can be quite sharp, yet it works because they’re clear that the sharpness is not about discriminating based on faith. It’s more about saying, “Look, we’re all Singaporeans.” They’ll lay down the law in a way that says, “If you act this way, we, as a society, have to object because that’s not what being Singaporean is about. It’s bad for business or bad for the nation’s goals.”

They emphasize how, 50 years ago, Singapore was seen as a backwater in the Malay Peninsula. Still, now it’s known globally for its intelligence, work ethic, financial power, and trade. They’ve achieved that by choosing a certain direction and pulling together as a society, creating a Singaporean identity.

The tour guide mentioned that this identity is a “manufactured” one. Being “Singaporean” didn’t exist long ago but was purposefully created. That identity has been actively embraced and is still alive and well today. It’s kept in the forefront. In contrast, in Britain, there’s more of a tendency to “coddle” people, so to speak—everyone wants to get along, and we’re often overly nice to each other. But here, things happen without too much government interference, while in Singapore, there seems to be more of a fear or respect for the government.

There’s a noticeable difference in how the two countries interact with their governments and the public. In Britain, it’s not seen in quite the same way.

Only some people agree with the government’s approach. Some people think the government is too soft on certainissues, like preaching. In contrast, others feel it’s overreaching, so they disengage entirely. 

The government’s backing of interfaith institutions in Singapore, especially the IRO (Inter-Religious Organization), gives these activities more credibility than those in the UK. In Singapore, government support lends interfaith work increased legitimacy, whereas, in the UK, the approach often feels a bit “kumbaya”—very soft, idealistic, and sometimes naive. We’re constantly grappling with nebulous concepts, especially in the post-Brexit environment, like “British values.”

What exactly are British values? How do we define them? And once we do, do we have the confidence to assert them and say, “These are British values. You either opt in or leave”?

Singapore is clear on this point—they’ve decided to enforce a strong social contract. In some ways, they’re almost forced to because of geographical limitations. There isn’t enough space in Singapore, so if you’re going to stay there, you must sign up for certain aspects of their social contract, which is rigidly enforced.

In the UK, it’s different, partly due to the long history of invasions, waves of immigration, and the post-colonial environment. Many young Brits don’t have the appetite to be forceful or demanding of the immigrant population. For these reasons, interfaith conversations in the UK don’t carry as much weight. They aren’t as respected, even by the government.

In Singapore, interfaith efforts are more successful because of the government’s support and the collective buy-in to the Singaporean identity. They can afford to be more direct. There’s a sense that interfaith work is part of building a great Singapore. They tell people, “This is why we’re here—get on board.” And people generally go along with it. In the UK, not so much.

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting analysis. Your commentary on Singapore’s interfaith work highlights its pragmatism. But it’s also about the broader approach to interfaith work, which is contextual nationally. Singapore’s history is different from Britain’s, and its geographic context and constraints are different, too. Both are wealthy, well-educated countries, but those geographic constraints place pressures on the type of country you can build and how you define national values. In Singapore, they’ve defined “Singaporean values,” and interfaith work is integrated into that framework. I agree with that analysis. What were the emotional highs and lows of the conference for you—not just the takeaways, but your feelings during the event?

AJ: One of the most memorable moments was Sunday, Friday, or Thursday. I am trying to remember the exact days, but before the official conference and the General Assembly began; they hosted a social night, which included a buffet dinner.Afterward, they had an open mic session—though it seemed spontaneous, it had some structure. Maybe the president of the humanist societies from Singapore and Malaysia would come up and speak, along with Andrew Copson and a few others. That part was planned.

Then, they asked, “Does anyone else have something to share?” because there was time left; and people didn’t want to head home immediately. What followed was almost an hour of performances. My fellow board member Roslyn Mould came out with an LGBTQ pride song, a rap, which she displayed on the projector while dancing around. She got everyone up and dancing, too.

It turned into an impromptu talent show. Peter Dankwa from Humanists International played an instrument—the harmonica.. People also read poetry. I loved that. People introduced themselves, and it felt like a gathering of ambassadors. Sudesh Ghoderao from India came up, and many ambassadors or leaders from their respective countries also spoke. It was nice and very spontaneous.

People voiced their concerns in a very open forum. It was so successful that we discussed it in the board meeting afterward and decided we should have more of these kinds of sessions. While we want things to be manageable, having an open mic format allows people to share freely. Some gave speeches about what was happening in their countries, while others performed or expressed gratitude.

There were discussions on various issues; someone even raised the topic of Israel and Palestine. A representative from Free Thought Lebanon spoke, which resonated with me. That may have been one of the emotional lows, especially when we passed resolutions on Afghanistan and Venezuela. The resolution on Venezuela could have been much stronger, but it passed nonetheless.

There wasn’t a voice from the members on the Israel-Palestine issue, and someone from the audience did raise that during the General Assembly, saying, “There’s an elephant in the room that we’re not addressing.” That was an area for improvement, and it was disappointing. But someone raised it during this unstructured open mic session before the conference officially began. People were nodding along, and giving a good reaction was a highlight, even if it still needed to be addressed formally with a resolution.

Jacobsen: How are you planning to incorporate some of the lessons from the General Assembly in Singapore into youth humanism globally once you’re back and settled, even though it might feel like months since you were at the conference?

AJ: Yes, time does always seem to run away from us. Seeing many young volunteers from the Singaporean Humanist Society and the Malaysian and Indonesian Humanist societies was very pleasing. It’s tough to be openly humanist or atheist in those countries, but having their presence was significant. The Malaysian society rejoined after dropping out, and this was the first time that the Indonesian group Humanesia was admitted as a member.

Now that we have those regional groupings in the informal WhatsApp community of Humanists Worldwide, I want to build on that, harness and elevate their voices, and make them more visible on Instagram, TikTok, or wherever they’re active. They’ve got a lot of enthusiastic volunteers.

In the past, I’ve done other interfaith work in Singapore from 2018 to 2019, meeting Baha’is, Sufi groups, Muslims, and Buddhists. This time, however, it felt like there was even more energy from Singapore and Malaysia, which we need to include here in the UK. Tapping into that, cross-promoting, and elevating their voices to energize British youth would be very welcome.

As the coordinator of Young Humanists in the UK, along with my colleague Nicole Shasha, I sometimes feel like we’retoo relaxed and lackadaisical. Our friends in Sweden say the same thing—they almost wish the Swedish Church was worse because things are too comfortable, making it hard to push Humanism forward without a clear “enemy.”

Connecting UK youth to Malaysian and Indonesian youth, especially in the context of major social issues like Israel-Palestine, could be a powerful opportunity. To return to the missing resolution on Israel-Palestine, while it was discussedinformally around the conference, it needed to be formally addressed with a resolution or official statement.

That’s a significant gap, especially when youth are looking to charities, NGOs, or global movements, especially those that put human rights and equality at the forefront. We need a clear stance on Israel-Palestine, whether from the board, the members, or even just individual humanist board members. Over the past year, I’ve tried to be active on TikTok and, in my capacity, speak out on the issue, but I feel we’re missing a massive opportunity to connect with the youth on what is one of the most important social justice issues of our time.

This issue could become as big as another Vietnam or Iraq war—arguably, it already is. Time will tell how history views it. That’s why it’s so important to address it. For example, one of the first questions our Indonesian friends asked before joining and after being voted in was, “What’s Humanists International (HI) doing? What’s the global humanist movement doing about Israel-Palestine?”

And we couldn’t point to anything concrete. That’s a major lesson to learn. I’ve been involved in personal activism on Israel-Palestine in one way or another since 2008. Still, I have yet to have the opportunity to link it with Humanism directly. I’d love to do that more, not only because it would energize and connect with youth here in the UK but also because it’s the right thing to do.

Jacobsen: AJ, how can people get in contact with you, read your work, or listen to your fabulous podcast?

AJ: Thank you! Yes, you can include a link to my website, alavari.info. All the links to my social media are there—TikTok is where I’ve been most active recently. The podcast Humanism Now will becoming  back shortly after the summer break. I help co-produce it and also join the guest panel on the podcast. It’s UK-based but has an international flavour.

I’d invite the audience to follow our work there!

Jacobsen: AJ, thank you very much for taking the time out. I appreciate it.

AJ: I appreciate you, too. Have a good one.

Jacobsen: Take care. Speak soon.

AJ: Excellent. Take care. Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Anthony Cruz Pantojas, MATS, MALS, BCC on Global Humanist Reflections

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/22

Anthony Cruz Pantojas, MATS, MALS, BCC (they/them), is the Humanist Chaplain and Coordinator of Africana Spirituality at Tufts University. Pantojas was the delegate for Atheists United for the Humanists International 2024 General Assembly in Singapore.

Jacobsen: So, Anthony, what was your experience in Singapore at the General Assembly for Humanists International?

Pantojas: I’ve been reflecting on my experience. It was the first time I took an extensive international trip. It was “a shift in my center.” As I headed to Singapore, I reflected on how we define the center of our worlds.

Of course, on a 22-hour-plus flight, I thought about where I was headed, who I would meet, and the purpose of going. It exceeded my expectations. I arrived and left with a deeper sense of humility, awe, and gratitude for the opportunity to go.

Jacobsen: Did you have to apply to get the chance to go, or were you just told, “You’re going,” and suddenly found yourself on a 22-hour flight to Singapore?

Pantojas: It was a combination of different factors. It began as a conversation about my desire to attend, and having worked with Evan Clark, the Executive Director of Atheists United, at a youth conference a few months prior, everything aligned. I received support from Humanists International through a travel grant and financial support from other peers, which made it possible for me to attend.

Jacobsen: When you finally landed in Singapore, did you go straight to the hotel and conference, or did you take some detours, like trying out local food or getting a souvenir?

Pantojas: It was an unplanned detour. I happened to sit right behind one Debbie Goddard, one of the Humanists International board members who also is a staff member from American Atheists. I connected with her and then met with other peers from the US—again, unplanned. We took public transportation together, which was an amazing experience, going directly from the airport to our hotel and sharing a meal. That was a highlight of the trip. The spontaneous interactions created a palpable sense of hospitality and welcome. So, yeah, that was the start of my experience.

Jacobsen: What was it like meeting humanists from different regions of the world? This is often a great wake-up call that helps people realize various concerns while noticing the same core value systems.

Pantojas: I wouldn’t use the term “wake-up call” because I hail from the Caribbean, specifically Puerto Rico, one of the oldest colonies of the United States. I’ve always lived in this experience of being a US citizen while being perceived and understood as outside the North American Imaginary. I’ve always had a pluralizing experience in life, which extends to my practice of humanism.

I’ve always had a sensibility towards broadening the notion of the “center” and understanding humanism beyond the Western conceptions of historical humanism. What I needed, and what I was seeking, was exactly what you’re asking—how do we begin to listen and become proximate to peers and colleagues navigating their sense of identity and belonging? How do they strategize and live through a secular perspective, particularly where they might put their lives on the line for it? To another extent, this is more of a philosophical stance.

Of course, you identify as a humanist, atheist, or whatever term resonates with you. To other understandings, it’s an amalgamation of philosophy, identity, culture, and various concepts of a secular humanist, atheist, or non-theist life. So, again, it was both a microcosm and a global experience at the same time. 

Jacobsen: What are some of the more personally noteworthy presentations or workshops you could attend at the conference?

Pantojas: More than just the presentations, it was the opportunity to participate in the tours I signed up for. Not to my credit, but more to my obliviousness, I met people from the Humanist Society (Singapore) without knowing they were staff or in leadership positions. Just meeting them as members of the tour was amazing to me. I emphasize relationality, one of the main frameworks I’m constantly trying to embody, practice, and center in my work and life.

The Humanist Society (Singapore) curated various tours from various organizations. They were ushering us into a world that isn’t my own and listening to how they frame their histories. They live in a relatively young society, yet the design, intentionality, and work that went into building what they have is impressive. That speaks to human creativity and capacity—what can be achieved in what some might call a modern world.

That leads me to the Humanist Society (Singapore) itself. We were able to come in and see the work they’ve done and are still doing, especially in collaboration with Humanists International, to put together this international conference. I’m still reflecting on and cherishing that in my work here and in conversations with peers.

Jacobsen: Were there particular people you met that you clicked with?

Pantojas: I connected with the president of the Humanist Society (Singapore), Norhaiyah Mahmood, without knowing she was the president at first. Her warmth, hospitality, and how she supported one of the tours in such a non-imposing way stood out to me. I talked with her and later found out she was the president. I was like, “Oh, wow!” It didn’t change anything, but the fact that she modeled a humanist stance that made others feel seen, welcomed, and accompanied was amazing.

I also connected with many other people—spoke, bantered, and strategized with them. I remember connecting with folks from Asia, Africa, and Europe. It was great to chat with them while walking or commuting to different events, and seeing the diverse work they are doing within their contexts was inspiring.

Jacobsen: When it came to what you hoped to get or take away from the conference and General Assembly, what were some of the bigger takeaways? And what were some of the smaller, more nuanced things you wouldn’t necessarily have expected when you first went?

Pantojas: Yes, the more nuanced takeaway is the power of positionality and how it plays out in a space that connects to voting power—in this context, the General Assembly specifically. How does a person representing an organization (whether a full member, affiliate, or otherwise) use their vote, voice, and perspective in a space that then shifts into global humanist and secular policy? I’ve been exposed to and understand this since I serve on humanist and non-humanist boards and organizations. I see the value of shifting or distributing power as board members, staff, and others participate in decision-making. But being in this global space for the first time and seeing how even one vote makes a difference was a mind-shifting experience.

That’s a common experience when you realize it’s not just symbolic democratic action. People take their time and use their votes carefully, raising their cards depending on how many votes they have. It’s a good experience.

Jacobsen: Were any policies, declarations, or new board members that stood out to you during the voting or presentations? Is anything particularly noteworthy?

Pantojas: What stood out for me was how we utilize our experiences, institutional power, and capacity to vote to center other communities that might not be present in the space—and the complexity of what that means. We want more diverse representation, yet sometimes, the work doesn’t fully benefit those not physically present in the space. One of my takeaways is the careful consideration of those voices that are missing.

Where am I, relative to the themes, topics, or changes being discussed? How do I respond, even if I am not directly affected because it’s not my experience? Are we making decisions that perpetuate structural violence? I summed this up in a conversation with a colleague during a recent presentation, reflecting on my positionality—hailing from the Global South but being positioned in the Global North.

How do we navigate those multiple worlds? It’s not about leaving behind or saying, “I’m no longer connected.” In a globalized world, we don’t need to be physically present in a place to feel the power and repercussions that democratic processes have within our global communities. It is about interdependence.

Jacobsen: Were there any conversations about the influence of communications technologies, like the Internet, on organizing activism and community for international humanists?

Pantojas: Yes, on a smaller scale. Using WhatsApp, for example, speaks to people’s preferences. It was interesting to see who already had the app downloaded and who advocated for other apps or media based on what they were used to. For some, this was how they communicated daily—how they connected—especially when it’s not safe to be publicly visible or hold a sign saying, “Hey, I’m a humanist.”

For example, the WhatsApp group had different groups, settings, and formats that were right to hold the global experience and contextualize it to other folks’ different expressions, needs, and desires. Of course, all of them were open. It was amazing to see how we were not just using the material, the physical world, by moving through it but also integrating the digital world, which is so much a part of us. That was something I deeply appreciated because, throughout my time there, it was one of the primary ways to communicate. And I thought it was just amazing to be able to do that. 

Jacobsen: What are some integrations of a theme or style of presentation that you saw in Singapore that could be carried forward into the next General Assembly?

Pantojas: Yes, one of the reflections I held onto was how much I showed up for all these different things, or maybe if I missed something—like a dinner—because, of course, I was exhausted that first time. I wanted to hear more about the Singapore Humanist Society. Not in an incredibly formal way, but more like: What are you doing? What have you done? What has worked? What hasn’t worked? Not necessarily to compare and contrast but to hear about their organizational processes.

During the pandemic, I had the opportunity to attend one of their Zoom conferences specifically for Asia, and I joined. That’s how I continued the work of listening and being in proximity and solidarity with other humanist organizations, communities, and practitioners. I missed that and wanted more of it.

Regarding how this relates to the next General Assembly, General Assemblies should be contextual to the realities of the community hosting it. I wouldn’t translate things directly from one context to another. However, I hope it becomes more open regarding visas and creates opportunities for people to attend. Access is crucial to the human experience in general. The way we’re trying to model that we are a global community invested in democratic processes, connected to radical listening, and genuinely hearing what the members desire, need, and want—it’s important to create opportunities for the most people to participate in an international gathering like this.

Jacobsen: Do you have a favourite food you tried there?

Pantojas: I had duck several years ago when I was living in Manhattan, New York, and got to taste it just a week or two before I left New York, and I never had it again. After one of the tours, which was led by a Chinese woman local to Singapore, she recommended an authentic spot to eat. I had the opportunity to have a meal there with another participant from the international conference. I had duck with rice and Thai tea.

It was such an amazing experience because it was so local. It was like an everyday, ordinary place to have a meal. It wasn’t a flashy, high-end place. It was just, “Hey, everyone’s having a meal here,” and that was amazing—to have the same food that everyday people enjoy was incredible.

Jacobsen: How long did it take to get over the jet lag when you returned from that 22-hour flight?

Pantojas: I was very surprised by how well my body adapted. Whether it was the adrenaline, excitement, or a combination of everything, I adapted quickly. I noticed that, at least on the Singapore side, the nights felt long. But other than that, I was able to do everything. When I returned from my trip, I hosted an open house for my work. So, as we say, I had to hit the ground running.

Jacobsen: Are there any parts I missed? Do you feel comfortable that I’ve covered everything?

Pantojas: Yes, we’ve covered most of it. Unless you want to bring up something or something you’re curious about. Being the only Puerto Rican in that space was surprising and unsurprising. It wasn’t a new feeling, but it still held both surprise and familiarity. In the American context, it’s not unusual to feel like the “other” as a Puerto Rican, so it’s a kind of bland surprise.

Jacobsen: Right. In a place like Singapore, though, you’re removed from that negative historical context that might exist in the U.S. for Puerto Ricans. It’s a different kind of detachment from that history. In Singapore, or even in a broader South or Southeast Asian context, the experience is different because you don’t carry the same baggage of American colonialism or marginalization. You meet people and access services, but it detaches from that historical context. Psychologically, it feels different in terms of being the “other.”

That ties back to what you mentioned earlier about shifting the center and the concept of positionality. When does one hold spatial, cultural power, access, or even domination in certain spaces?

Pantojas: It’s about understanding when and where we hold power and how it plays out in different contexts. How does that shift and change depending on your context? How do you navigate those processes? It was also fascinating to be in Singapore and connect with people from Latin America and South America in that space.

I had to fly 20-plus hours to physically connect with people from other parts of the world, specifically from my immediate area of cultural proximity. That was enriching personally, but also in terms of the invitation I took away from it. How are we continually creating everyday moments of encounter and programming to strengthen and expand our relationships—not just for the sake of the relationships but also for modeling and building a global community?

At least for me, it’s centered on relationships. It’s not just about attending a conference or doing delegate work. It’s about how we think about the character of our relationships. One example of connecting the digital and the physical is that I’ve been using some of the interbelief work published by the Humanist Society of Singapore for several years. They do incredible work navigating interreligious engagement, and other aspects of building bridges between communities.

Regarding HAPI, it was incredible to physically meet many of these young humanists, who are doing incredible work, building generational relationships, producing knowledge, and building capacity and leveraging their funds of knowledge in their contexts. They’re also using digital platforms to allow others, like myself, to witness their work. Sitting down, having a meal, and listening to many different stories was a powerful experience. 

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. Anthony, nice to meet you. 

Pantojas: Thank you so much. Be well.

Jacobsen: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Aftab Siddiqui on AMDC Endorsement of Harris and Walz

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/21

The American Muslim Democratic Caucus (AMDC) has officially endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris and Governor Tim Walz for President and Vice President in the upcoming U.S. election. Highlighting their commitment to peace, human rights, and diplomatic solutions, the AMDC emphasizes their alignment with the organization’s values of democracy, fairness, and justice. The caucus urges American Muslims to support the Harris-Walz ticket, citing their “Freedom and Future” platform as the most promising choice for advancing both domestic and international progress. The AMDC plans to mobilize efforts nationwide to back their candidacy. 

At the first Muslim Democratic Caucus, speakers discussed American Muslims’ political journey. Initially endorsing Bush in 2000, Muslims felt abandoned by Republicans after 9/11. Formerly GOP donors, many shifted toward the Democratic Party. Leaders like Keith Ellison urged increased political involvement, highlighting the need for Muslim representation at all government levels.

Aftab Siddiqui is the Co-Chair of the AMDC. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Aftab Siddiqui from the American Muslim Democratic Caucus to discuss the endorsement of Kamala Harris and Tim Walz for president and vice president, respectively. Please tell us about the discussion around this endorsement and the reasons that ultimately led the organization to decide.

Aftab Siddiqui: The discussions have been ongoing for the last 10 or 11 months, particularly in light of the ongoing violence in Gaza and the West Bank. There is a lot of anger and anguish about what is happening there, and everyone understands that the United States is a key player that can influence the situation. Unfortunately, President Biden has refused to take substantial action beyond expressing deep concern over civilian casualties and claiming that Israel is assuring the U.S. that everything is by international law. This has gone on for far too long.

As a result, Biden has lost significant support within the Muslim community, particularly the American Muslim community. Kamala Harris, as vice president, shares some responsibility. Still, we all recognize that there is only one president in the United States at a time. Until January 20th next year, Biden will remain in office, and whatever he says goes. Kamala Harris does not have much influence over the administration’s decisions, especially since Biden and many of his advisors firmly support Israel. We believe that Kamala needs more (different) policies, particularly in the Middle East.

Jacobsen: What are the perspectives within the Muslim community on how to move forward politically?

Siddiqui: There are varied opinions within our community about how to proceed. Some believe we should not vote and stay home in protest. Others feel we should not sit out and instead support a third-party candidate. Many people are considering this option, with Jill Stein, the Green Party candidate for president, being favoured among this group. I haven’t heard anyone talking about voting for Trump, although historically, around 10% of the Muslim community has supported Republican candidates. Still, I haven’t seen anyone openly advocating for Trump because of his anti-Muslim and anti-Palestinian rhetoric. During his first term as president, he was certainly not a friend to the Palestinians.

Now, the community is split. Many imams and community leaders are urging people to vote rather than abstain, so we are left with two main options: either vote for a third-party candidate or support the Democrats. There was much discussion around this. While there were differing opinions, we reached an almost unanimous consensus.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss the current support for the Palestinian cause. What has your organization observed over the last ten months?

Siddiqui: The only consistent support we’ve seen over the last ten months has come from the left—specifically, progressives, young people, and the grassroots of the Democratic Party. More than 70% of them have been advocating for a ceasefire and are even willing to support an arms embargo on Israel. We concluded that the Palestinian issue in the United States is not only a moral and justice issue but also a political one. We’re receiving support primarily from the Democratic Party, maybe not from the top echelon, but certainly from the grassroots. Time and again, we’ve seen the grassroots rally in support of Palestinians, whether through student-led demonstrations or others risking their careers and academic credentials to stand in solidarity with Palestinians.

So, we decided that the only way forward was to support Kamala Harris. While it would have made things easier for us if Kamala had been more neutral in her positions, we recognize that she has spoken about Palestinian rights. She supports a two-state solution and has emphasized the dignity and human rights of Palestinians. However, her rhetoric in support of Israel has also been quite strong. But this is an election year, and we are in the final few weeks of the campaign. No candidate will make statements that could harm their political prospects, especially in what appears to be a close election, according to most polls and reports. It may not be as close, and Kamala might win by a large margin, but for now, the trends suggest the race is tight, particularly in swing states.

We understand the challenges of politics, having been involved for more than two decades. It’s difficult for someone in Kamala’s position to take a stand against Biden’s policies or stances.

The community remains divided, and emotions are running high, particularly with the situation in Lebanon flaring up. We are deeply concerned, as we have a significant Lebanese community within our ranks. Their families, homes, and loved ones are in danger due to the actions of war hawks in Tel Aviv, frankly speaking. This is another reason we view this as a political issue, and we have decided to move forward by supporting the Harris-Walz ticket, hoping they will win.

If they do win, we will have at least 70% of Democrats at the grassroots level with us, and we’ll continue to apply pressure to change U.S. policies regarding its blanket support for the state of Israel. We understand that Israel is a friend and ally of the United States. Still, we also see how pro-Israeli forces dominate the mainstream media. The media constantly parrots statements from the IDF, with very little coverage given to the plight of Palestinians or the situation in Lebanon.

Additionally, there are interest groups that want to keep the conflict ongoing. The United States commits about $4 billion annually to Israel, and these funds are used to purchase U.S. weapons and hardware. Naturally, the military-industrial complex benefits from this arrangement and would like to see even more billions flowing into their coffers.

Jacobsen: There’s a strong support base for continued aid to Israel. Could you explain what factors contribute to this, particularly from within the Republican side and interest groups?

Siddiqui: Yes, there are indeed strong groups that support continued aid to Israel. On the Republican side, there are evangelical Christians who believe, based on their interpretation of the Bible, that Israel must be in a dominant position to facilitate the second coming of Christ. This is a significant factor. Then, there are powerful lobbies, like AIPAC (American Israel Public Affairs Committee). AIPAC, for example, is spending $100 million to ensure that no congressman, congresswoman, or senator is elected who speaks independently on this issue. Unless members of Congress align with the Israeli perspective, they face threats in their primaries or general elections. This is why many Congress and Senate members support almost anything Netanyahu demands, regardless of the president’s position. Although I don’t think Biden opposes these policies, we all remember how, during Obama’s presidency, Netanyahu was invited to address CongressMany Democratic members boycotted the speech, much like today.

But the reality is that AIPAC has a stranglehold on both Congress and the Senate. That’s one of the main issues. On a personal level, I understand that this is a marathon. Any meaningful change regarding the political situation and the Palestinian issue will take time. I’ve been working on this issue since arriving in the United States in the late 1990s, and back then, there was virtually no support for Palestinians within the Democratic Party. We faced significant obstacles trying to pass resolutions on the two-state solution or any form of support for the Palestinian people. However, after the events of October 7th, a tragic and horrible occurrence, the situation has shifted.

The aftermath of October 7th has led to a shift in the thinking of many Americans. Now, more than 50% of Americans are deeply concerned about what is happening in Gaza, and they recognize that it’s morally wrong. People understand that someone needs to intervene to stop this. There is now much more understanding of the Palestinian issue—their humanity, demands, and call for self-determination. From this perspective, I would say that support for Palestinians among average Americans has grown significantly.

The Palestinian issue is political here; as they say in politics, timing is everything. Right now, we have the support of most Americans and about two-thirds of Democrats. We intend to continue working on this; and within a few election cycles, we’ll be able to change U.S. policies regarding Israel and Palestine.

Let me also talk about the American Muslim community. There are three large groups within the community. The largest group is the indigenous Muslim population, primarily African Americans, who make up close to 40% of the community. They have overwhelmingly voted for Democrats. The other two major groups are South Asians—Pakistanis, Indians, Bangladeshis, Sri Lankans, and Nepalese—and then there are the Arabs, people from the Middle East.

The Arab population from countries where democracy hasn’t traditionally existed initially struggled to understand the value of voting and the political process. This was particularly true for the first generation of immigrants. However, that has changed, and now we are seeing thousands of younger Arab Americans who do understand the value of democracy and the importance of voting.

Among the South Asians, many come from countries where some form of democracy exists, so they tend to understand the importance of political participation. Looking around, you’ll see more and more of these individuals involved in different political groups across the United States. However, it is important to remember that 40% of American Muslims are Indigenous [Ed. Defined as inclusive of African-American or black Americans by Siddiqui.], and 60% are part of the immigrant community. These immigrant communities often come from countries with a deeper understanding of the situation in Palestine and maintain a global perspective. They are at the forefront of the struggle for Palestinian rights.

The community remains divided, but we emphasize the importance of voting and encouraging them to vote for Democrats from top to bottom. That’s the only way out of this difficult situation for the American Muslim community.

Jacobsen: What about distinctions among sects or denominations? Are the differences not based on heritage—such as Bangladeshi, Pakistani, or Arab—but rather along sect lines like Sunni, Shia, or others? Are there any distinctions in voting patterns within those subgroups in the United States?

Siddiqui: We don’t see any distinctions in voting patterns based on sect. On a global level, regardless of sect, the Palestinian issue is a top concern for the 1.7 billion Muslims worldwide, no matter where they live. I’m from Pakistan, and I visit every two to three years. Palestine is consistently the top issue for Muslims there.

When I was in Pakistan earlier this year, in February and March, every day, the headlines were about Palestinian children throwing stones at Israeli soldiers and the soldiers shooting back. Horrific images like these, which we often don’t see in the U.S., are widely covered there. I’ve known about the Palestinian issue since I was a child, having grown up in Pakistan.

The global Muslim community has a deep understanding of the Palestinian issue, and there is virtually no disagreement on supporting the Palestinian people. This holds across sectarian lines, whether Shia or Sunni. Globally, about 80% of Muslims are Sunni, with roughly 10% (20%) Shia, give or take. Here in the U.S., when I first arrived, I had Shia friends who would pray in Sunni mosques, and I have prayed in Shia mosques, which is not very common elsewhere. However, because we’re such a small minority here—about 1 to 2% of the population—we don’t have the luxury of differentiating between sects.

As the Shia population has grown, they’ve built their own mosques and educational institutions. However, when it comes to voting patterns, there is little difference between Shias and Sunnis. They tend to vote in similar ways.

Jacobsen: Could you summarize what other issues, besides the Palestinian issue, were important to the American Muslim Democratic community in making this endorsement for Harris? What are the key issues for the immigrant communities in the American Muslim Democratic community, aside from the Palestinian issue?

Siddiqui: Immigrant communities tend to have the same issues as the broader local community. Health care, good jobs, and a strong economy are important. One key difference is the issue of guns. Immigrant communities come from countries where civilians are generally not allowed to own firearms, and the gun industry is highly regulated in many parts of the world. But in the United States, there is an unfortunate abundance of guns—millions of people own them, and it’s concerning.

One of the top issues for immigrant communities, especially Muslim families, is the fact that active shooter drills are now being conducted in elementary, middle, and high schools. Young children are being exposed to these drills, and it’s deeply troubling to many parents. Islamophobia is an important issue for our community.

The environment is also a critical issue, especially for the younger generation of Muslims. Climate change and environmental sustainability are top concerns. So, in general, the issues that concern the average Democrat—whether related to the environment, health care, or gun control—are also issues for the immigrant community, whether they are Muslim or non-Muslim.

In Texas, for example, where I live, voter turnout is low, even though there are more Democratic voters than Republican ones. When voter turnout increases, Texas could shift toward being a blue state. In fact, in the most recent U.S. Senate race against Ted Cruz, the Democratic candidate is leading by a small margin—1%. While that’s not a huge lead, it’s a significant psychological shift, showing the trend in Texas.

More people are moving to Texas from states like California, Oregon, New York, and New Jersey—predominantly blue states—so they tend to lean more Democratic. Obama lost Texas by 16 points, Hillary Clinton lost by 9 points, and Biden lost by just 5 points. Ted Cruz narrowly defeated Beto O’Rourke by only 2.3%. Texas is slowly moving toward the Democrats, but the state’s policies under Governor Greg Abbott continue to reflect conservative priorities.

Another important issue for immigrant communities is immigration reform. The immigrant community strongly supports changes in the laws to reduce the number of undocumented people living in the country. It’s estimated that around 12 million people in the U.S. are undocumented. While some corporations and big farms benefit from this—since undocumented people often don’t report abuses, are underpaid, and lack labour protections—it’s harmful to the economy and society. Undocumented workers often don’t go to the police or seek help, making it difficult to address crime in those communities.

Lastly, Texas faces challenges related to the separation of church and state. Governor Greg Abbott has been trying to introduce biblical teachings into the public school system, funded by taxpayer money. According to the U.S. Constitution, there should be a separation between religion and state. Still, the Texas Republican Party is gradually trying to erode that boundary. They’ve already made changes to the school curriculum, and it’s concerning for many who value the constitutional principle of secularism.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Peter Dankwa on the HI General Assembly in Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/21

Peter Nyarko Dankwa is a member of the Humanist Association of Ghana. He is outspoken about spreading humanism and critical thinking. He uses his blog, Peter’s Box, to promote humanism and critical thinking. At a Toastmasters meeting in 2019, Peter delivered a speech titled ‘No Monkey Games,’ which was inspired by humanist values. He has held several leadership positions in Toastmasters International, from the club to the district level. Peter holds a bachelor’s degree in Aerospace Engineering.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are back again with Peter Dankwa from the Humanist Association of Ghana, or Ghana humanists generally. You just came back from the General Assembly (GA) in Singapore, where you attended your first GA (General Assembly). What were your biggest takeaways?

Peter Dankwa: I had been looking forward to attending my first GA and was excited to be part of the whole process, especially since Humanists International (HI) offered grants to some of us. I was fortunate to attend and would say I was highly impressed with the diversity within HI. Humanists from different walks of life, countries, and cultures were present, and networking with them gave me a broader perspective on humanism and how some countries strive to live by humanist principles. The experience was truly eye-opening.

It was enriching, and I particularly appreciated the agenda. When it came time for voting, I saw firsthand how HI practices democracy and freedom of speech. I saw everything you hear in humanist discussions or the principles of humanism. I was highly impressed.

Jacobsen: That was exactly what I felt when I first experienced it, too. I thought, “Oh, this is how normal people operate.” But, of course, this isn’t the norm, as we both know. That’s a common reflection. Unfortunately, I wasn’t able to attend this year.

Were there any specific parts of the theme of inter-faith harmony and dialogue that stood out to you? From workshops, presentations, the surrounding culture, or informal discussions over lunch or at the bar?

Dankwa: Yes, there was a talk by a Muslim woman. One thing I took away from her presentation was that while we often view religious people through the lens of community identity, some aspects of their identity are deeply personal. We risk making a mistake by generalizing. For instance, if you meet a Muslim and immediately think, “Oh, you’re Muslim, so you must believe this and that,” you might miss that individual’s identity and their unique motivations for being Muslim. This is often where conflict begins—starting from assumptions based on group identity rather than understanding the individual’s reasons for belonging to the group. Her point made me realize that we’ve been guilty of this for a while, always viewing religious people through the lens of identity politics without considering their personal experiences and motivations.

Jacobsen: Do you think relying on heuristics to understand group dynamics is problematic, especially when it overlooks the individual? Is it truly a mistake, perhaps even offensive to many?

Dankwa: It was suggested that we break the ice and initiate meaningful dialogue. It all boils down to dialogue—engaging in a conversation where you and the other person can reflect on what has been said. Suppose you only focus on community identity and don’t engage with the individual. In that case, you risk missing the opportunity for deeper understanding. The key is to move beyond the group identity and engage at a personal level, which provides the tool for effective dialogue.

Jacobsen: Were there any subtle insights from the General Assembly about the principles of dialogue that need to be agreed upon for a discourse to take place? And what happens if you find yourself in a conversation where those basic principles are absent, where some people are either unwilling to hear what you’re saying or are so combative that no realdiscussion can occur? So, there is a sort of fanatical rejection or fanatical aggressiveness in discourse. Was there a particular portion of the workshop where you experienced that?

Dankwa: Yes, there was a specific moment during the Q&A session when an audience member made a statement that felt antagonistic. There needed to be more friction in the exchange of ideas. This behaviour is welcome in a humanist setting because we are here to share ideas. The panel members were ready to listen and genuinely understand this person’s origin.

However, suppose you transpose this situation to an everyday setting, where conversations might be more volatile, and people may be. What’s the word? If they are too aggressive in their approach, you will only sometimes have that opportunity for open discussion. At the conference, there was space to agree and disagree civilly because we are humanists and understand the values we hold dear.

It was a very open environment. We were given the chance to voice our opinions. But in everyday settings, there’s still much work to be done in this regard. As humanists, it’s incumbent upon us to show more tolerance in our day-to-day interactions. My mentor once told me, “Peter, you don’t have to do their homework for them,” meaning that gaining values and virtues isn’t something others will receive easily. They may need to go through their own experiences, and those experiences include the friction we’ve been discussing.

At the conference, friction was welcomed. There was a moment when things got a bit tense, and I wondered if things might take a bad turn. But then I realized we were having a productive dialogue, and I enjoyed watching from afar, taking notes.

Jacobsen: That resonates with my own experiences in Iceland and Copenhagen. Two important takeaways from those events were how at home I felt, being among people from everywhere, all sharing a certain sensibility—a shared worldview. It was like a microcosm of what a unified, global future could be. It was quite wonderful. How was your feeling interacting with people from all these countries, many of whom spoke English as a second or even a 19th language?

Dankwa: I’ll start with the host country, Singapore. Singaporeans are lovely people, especially older people. For some reason, I connect more with older people because I’m always seeking wisdom from those more experienced than me. I had great conversations with Nora and Peter from Humanists International.

Nora has been exceptionally kind and helpful, always going out of her way to assist the attendees. Peter, in particular, was very interested in Ghana and how things are going here. I had many enjoyable conversations with both of them. I also met another remarkable woman, Gerda.

It’s quite impressive how we are not alone in our activism. Even though we may have different experiences, the underlying principles—equity, empathy, and so on—remain the same. I enjoyed that aspect of my interactions with everyone.

In fact, on a Friday night, I delivered a speech titled To Be or Not To Be. That speech was inspired by what I had observed within the humanist community. Here’s the thing—sometimes humanism can sound too good to be true, or it might seem like an ideal. But when I saw people like Roslyn, Dr. Leo, and Javan actively advocating for humanism, I realized there’s much more we can do. I told myself that everything counts and anything can make a difference. So, I decided to add my voice because you never know whom you might influence.

My speech encouraged us, as humanists, to do more. That was another highlight of the social night. I also had the chance to witness much talent. I enjoyed Inga’s performance—she played beautifully on her guitar. I can’t recall the exact name of the song, but it was quite memorable.

Overall, the networking was fantastic. You learned about different cultures, how people practice humanism in their countries, and the challenges they face. It made me realize that we are not alone in our struggles. It was a truly eye-opening experience.

Jacobsen: Did you have any favourite presentations?

Dankwa: Yes. There was a presentation by the founder of Humanist Singapore. His name escapes me right now—He gave an excellent presentation.

Jacobsen: Yes, it’s Paul Simon

Dankwa: His presentation sheds light on the advocacy involved in humanism. People often associate humanism with human rights because they sound similar, but humanism is much broader than that. He provided valuable insights, not just about the atmosphere in Singapore but also in other places. He’s well-travelled and highly educated, so he offered many practical tips and statistics highlighting humanism and the opposite—non-humanism. That was a presentation I thoroughly enjoyed.

Also, the Muslim woman—I didn’t catch her name, forgive me—her presentation was impactful. She spoke from the perspective of a religious person, and I appreciated where she was coming from.

Jacobsen: Yes, Paul Simon sounds like a wise man. As for the Muslim presenter, the point you’re raising is important. I’ve done interviews with religious leaders, too, and that’s a common concern—they feel like they’re treated as a monolithic block, almost like a political party. Catholics, for instance, often express frustration about being perceived that way.

So, their fear is being treated as a block. On the other hand, I can see why heuristics come into play—it’s a group of over a billion people. Some core tenets exist when dealing with something as large as a global belief system, and people will make broad statements. It’s not like a country with a small population; it’s a vast, interconnected belief system.

I can see both ends, but it’s great that you brought up both presentations. I won’t ask who your favourite person was—let’s keep that private! What things did other humanist communities do that could be useful in a Ghanaian context?

Dankwa: Wow, interesting. One thing that stood out was volunteerism. Even though Singapore was hosting the event, many people volunteered for different aspects of the program. Ghana lags in this area.

It’s not just in Ghana, though—it’s a global issue. Only a few people often do most of the work, which can make it feel overwhelming. But when more people get involved, it becomes easier to communicate our values and make progress. So, I’d encourage my fellow Ghanaians to adopt a stronger culture of volunteerism.

Some countries are fortunate enough to have government funding for their humanist activities. They have a large membership base and resources to fund their initiatives. A few even receive government subsidies. This brings up an important question about the concept of volunteerism in humanism. If government funding is available, why not have paid positions, as we see in large organizations, instead of relying solely on volunteers?

For instance, you have highly dedicated volunteers who excel in their areas. They get noticed, move up, and might eventually receive internships or paid positions. This way, they could make a living from their humanist activism and community-building efforts.

Jacobsen: Would a model like that work in places like Ghana, if feasible?

Dankwa: Most definitely. It’s feasible, but the challenge lies in timing and the general atmosphere in the country, which is highly religious. Only recently—within the last four or five years—has the Humanist Association of Ghana started receiving invitations to national forums and civil society discussions. It’s a positive step, but Ghana is extremely religious.

In Ghana, there isn’t a clear separation of church and state. Certain institutions still look to the clergy for advice. When you try to bring in a different perspective, it can come across as though you’re opposing the dominant religious view. This is compounded by the fact that the majority of what we receive, culturally and politically, is influenced by religious institutions.

This even ties into the anti-LGBTQ+ bill, which is heavily religiously motivated. The bill’s proponents frequently reference the Bible, the Quran, or religious beliefs in general. Challenging these viewpoints is difficult because religion strongly influences the government and society. To change this dynamic, we would need a political evolution and a mental revolution in how we think about religion and governance.

There must be much education to get to that point. Can we only have platforms to support humanist organizations and other civil society groups pursuing their goals? But most importantly, the responsibility still falls on us, so I keep mentioning volunteerism.

If you look at our religious counterparts, for example, they excel in areas like education and healthcare. They set up schools and hospitals, and many religious bodies advocate for their causes, ensuring they’re heard. That’s something we, as the Humanist Association of Ghana, and more broadly, need to emulate. We need to make tangible contributions to growth and development, something concrete we can rely on.

Humanists International (HI) is doing a great job providing grants to help members embark on such projects. We’re improving in that regard. But, as I said earlier, it’s a race against time, where we need not just political change but a mental revolution. That’s why I continue to emphasize volunteerism—it’s through our collective efforts that we’ll create change. My voice is being heard today because of my volunteerism, and you’re dedicating your time because of the value you see in it. So, volunteerism is the starting point, but the mental revolution is equally essential.

Jacobsen: And the point about the bill is crucial because it ties into the international aspect of this. I’m aware that American evangelicals, and perhaps some hardline Catholics, are highly supportive of this anti-LGBTQ+ bill. I need to find out the extent of the funding or the degree of their involvement. Still, there’s no doubt that Americans have pushed this agenda in Ghana. Canadians also have hardline evangelicals who might be involved.

To a large extent, North Americans have not been helpful regarding this bill. So, even if we have feasible volunteer efforts to counter such bills, we are all engaged in a common struggle. Americans face similar challenges with their hardline evangelicals and Catholics, who are exporting this extreme ideology to influence the political and policy landscape of countries that are already deeply religious. In a way, many people in these countries welcome that extremism because they see those groups as their brothers and sisters in faith.

So, what did you learn from meeting people in other countries who may face even more extreme religious or political contexts with greater social or legal repercussions for their humanist beliefs?

Dankwa: I gained a lot from those conversations because they made my problems seem smaller by comparison. There’s an element of discretion in how we communicate our values, especially in places where freedoms are more severely repressed.

For example, I noted at least three or four countries where the human rights situation was dire. In particular, many people were concerned about how their countries treated them. This brings me back to the idea of discretion—when communicating about repression or difficulty in a country, it’s crucial to prioritize safety above all else. So, while it’s important to stand by our values and advocate for them, we must also be careful about our actions.

Jacobsen: So you’re saying that in countries with harsh repression, being strategic in how you communicate can sometimes be more important than the message itself to protect people’s safety?

Dankwa: Safety is paramount; in some contexts, being too vocal or open can lead to serious consequences. So, we must balance standing up for our values with ensuring people aren’t in danger.

That’s an important point that struck me. As a media person and blogger, I’m always trying to stay up to date with the latest news, get new information, and share it. However, I noticed during the conference that I was being advised to be careful with some of the things I publish. So, in my passion to advocate and be an activist, I also need to exercise discretion, at least for the sake of those involved.

Activism and advocacy might seem straightforward—you want people to know what’s happening and present all your logical points. But sometimes, it can come back to bite you. So, much discretion goes into humanism, and you must communicate wisely. There’s a time to speak, and there’s a time to remain silent. That’s one of the big lessons I took from this experience.

Jacobsen: That’s a critical point. For some people, protesting isn’t always the best or safest response in certain contexts. Safety is the primary concern. I remember in 2023, during a conversation in a workshop, one participant and I were comparing our situations. He said something like, “I would just like to walk around the street without fear of being beheaded.”

Jacobsen: That was my reaction, too, right? Like, wow. In Canada, yes, we have discrimination, legal issues, symbolic nonsense, creationism, anti-science movements, homeopathy, and so on. These are all real problems because they waste resources and spread false hope. But that individual’s issue was immediate—life or death. The difference is stark.

You must pump the brakes and recognize that safety comes first. I appreciated how you used the word “discretion” earlier. We’re not afraid but don’t live in those immediate, dangerous contexts like some people do. It’s not about letting fear take over the conversation. It’s about rational analysis and calculating whether it’s safe or not. Discretion is the right term here—it’s about being thoughtful in our actions and responses.

Did you get a chance to explore Singapore while you were there?

Dankwa: Yes, I had some time to look around. I made the most of my commute to the venue to experience the city. But the journey was long, and I was super jet-lagged and disoriented. I rested most of the time so I wouldn’t miss any sessions. So, while I had grand plans to visit different places, in the end, I didn’t get to do as much exploring as I had hoped.

Jacobsen: So, you only had the chance to visit a few places because you wanted to avoid overexerting yourself?

Dankwa: Yes, exactly. I didn’t want to push myself too much, but I enjoyed the landscape. It was impressive to see how green the place was. Singapore is essentially an island country, and you would expect a limited amount of vegetation. But everything was lush and vivid. It was quite striking, especially when I compared it to Ghana. I kept thinking, “What did they do right that we’re missing?” It made me reflect on the differences between our development paths since both countries gained independence around the same time. I also enjoyed their transportation system. It was easy to navigate, and every stop had a city map. I was genuinely impressed.

Jacobsen: I’ve asked about the conference, your trip, Ghana, and the challenges with North American Christians pushing the anti-LGBTQ+ bill. We’ve also touched on your favourite speakers and the event’s themes. We gave TattSi Tan his well-deserved props. But what do you think is important for people who might not know much about Ghana to understand, especially someone from a place like Canada who doesn’t have much contact with the global humanist movement—what should they know about Ghanaian humanism?

Dankwa: They should first know that the Ghanaian humanist space is quite youthful. A lot of young people are involved in humanism here. This is probably due to education—as more people get educated, they start asking critical questions that inform their decisions about how they want to live their lives.

Volunteerism is also a significant aspect of Ghanaian humanism, though we’re still working on it. We must always exercise discretion, especially when the government gives us little space. For example, at our monthly meeting on Sunday, our president reminded us of the need to be discreet in these times.

Ghanaian humanism still has a long way to go. Volunteerism is a mixed bag, and that makes it difficult to meet certainobjectives. However, on the positive side, Ghanaians are always ready to work towards something meaningful. If you propose an idea that promotes humanism, people will jump on board, bringing different skills to the table. For example, the Vice President of Humanists International is Ghanaian, and our African Regional Coordinator is Ghanaian. I volunteer for Young Humanists International (YHI).

Once a cause is clearly defined, Ghanaians and the diaspora will get involved. That’s the beautiful thing about Ghanaian humanism. It’s not just local; Ghanaians abroad also contribute significantly.

Jacobsen: Peter, it’s past midnight for me. I need to get some sleep.

Dankwa: You deserve a good rest. Well, I am done!

Jacobsen: Thank you! Thank you so much for your time. I hope you have a great day at work!

Dankwa: Thanks, you too. Take care!

Jacobsen: All right, take care. Bye!

Dankwa: Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

What Are the Chances of Trump and Harris?

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/20

According to some semi-reputable sources gathered in a listing hereRick G. Rosner may have among America’s, North America’s, and the world’s highest measured IQs at or above 190 (S.D. 15)/196 (S.D. 16) based on several high range test performances created by Christopher HardingJason BettsPaul Cooijmans, and Ronald Hoeflin. He earned 12 years of college credit in less than a year and graduated with the equivalent of 8 majors. He has received 8 Writers Guild Awards and Emmy nominations, and was titled 2013 North American Genius of the Year by The World Genius Directory with the main “Genius” listing here.

He has written for Remote ControlCrank YankersThe Man ShowThe EmmysThe Grammys, and Jimmy Kimmel Live!. He worked as a bouncer, a nude art model, a roller-skating waiter, and a stripper. In a television commercialDomino’s Pizza named him the “World’s Smartest Man.” The commercial was taken off the air after Subway sandwiches issued a cease-and-desist. He was named “Best Bouncer” in the Denver Area, Colorado, by Westwood Magazine.

Rosner spent much of the late Disco Era as an undercover high school student. In addition, he spent 25 years as a bar bouncer and American fake ID-catcher, and 25+ years as a stripper, and nearly 30 years as a writer for more than 2,500 hours of network television. Errol Morris featured Rosner in the interview series entitled First Person, where some of this history was covered by Morris. He came in second, or lost, on Jeopardy!, sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? over a flawed question and lost the lawsuit. He won one game and lost one game on Are You Smarter Than a Drunk Person? (He was drunk). Finally, he spent 37+ years working on a time-invariant variation of the Big Bang Theory.

Currently, Rosner sits tweeting in a bathrobe (winter) or a towel (summer). He lives in Los AngelesCalifornia with his wife, dog, and goldfish. He and his wife have a daughter. You can send him money or questions at LanceVersusRick@Gmail.Com, or a direct message via Twitter, or find him on LinkedIn, or see him on YouTube

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What do you think of Kamala Harris as a person, politician, and thinker?

Rick Rosner: All right. She’s fine. She was a prosecutor or the Attorney General for 27 years, so we know she’s competent. The other side likes to say she got her job by dating Willie Brown, a California politician, 30 years ago. He had been separated from his wife for many years at that point—maybe divorced, I’m not sure—but it wasn’t like anything scandalous. The idea that she rose to power because she dated a powerful politician is just desperate horseshit.

The other side throws out much desperate horseshit. She did her job as Assistant DA, DA, and then-Attorney General for 27 years. You don’t stay in those roles for that long because you dated someone. Then, she was a senator for four years before becoming VP. Her short time in national politics is an advantage, as it was for Obama, who was also a senator for just four years before becoming president. It gives the opposition less history to attack.

Hillary Clinton was in the national spotlight for 30 years, which gave them a lot of ammunition to twist.

Harris is competent and running a good campaign. When she ran for president three almost four years ago, one of her weaknesses was giving meandering answers. I don’t think she’s doing that this time around. She’s out there doing rallies and campaigning hard. Meanwhile, Trump is barely campaigning—either because he’s incompetent or lazy, or maybe he’s overconfident and thinks he can pull the same trick as last time, claiming he won when he knew he didn’t. It seems like she’s putting in the work.

She’s a normal, sane politician, and we need a normal, sane government right now. My whole thesis about politics is that the world is being disrupted by accelerating tech, and tech will determine international leadership. Whoever leads in tech will essentially lead the world, as we have since World War II. But we’re going to have an increasingly hard time doing that if our government is run by crazy, incompetent, anti-education assholes, grifters, and lunatics. Harris represents normality, which is crucial.

Jacobsen: Makes sense.

Rosner: I like some of her proposals, but she doesn’t have any better answers on Israel and Gaza than anyone else, so she tends to stay out of that discussion. Overall, she’s good. She’s fine. I doubt she’s a genius, but she’s certainly competent.

Biden’s not a genius. I believe he’s highly competent after 50 years in national politics, but the presidency doesn’t require genius. As I’ve said before, the one sure genius we had was Teddy Roosevelt. He wrote 50 books and knew a lot. He did a lot—some terrible things, no doubt, but some good, like antitrust legislation.

Roosevelt did some good stuff. He pushed for changes in football rules because so many people were getting killed playing in the early 1900s. He helped introduce the forward pass, which changed the structure of the game. Before that, it was more like rugby but even more violent.

He was the “speak softly and carry a big stick” guy. Anyway, he was a genius. I mentioned this before, and someone pointed out that John Quincy Adams might have been a genius, too, but that’s going way back. Genius isn’t a requirement for the presidency.

Jacobsen: Agreed, genius isn’t necessary.

Rosner: Kamala Harris will do well. It depends on whether Democrats win the House and hold the Senate. The odds of getting that trifecta are low. It also depends on whether she wins and if the tide of Trumpism recedes. But that’s unlikely unless Republicans get thoroughly beaten.

Do you like her?

Jacobsen: She’s charismatic, which we haven’t had since Obama. Do you think the verbal skills required for a lawyer and law school training will help her in debates or sparring matches?

Rosner: Definitely. She was disciplined in her debate with Trump and made him look like an a-hole. But he has the advantage of his supporters not caring what he says or does. She came across as convincingly competent.

Her campaign theme seems to be “joy,” and she conveys that authentically. Remember, in 2016, Hillary Clinton got criticized for her laugh being “inauthentic,”—which was just another bullshit critique. But Harris smiles a lot, and people see that as genuine.

It’s similar to how Walz comes off as a jovial guy. People respond to that.

If you look at approval ratings, Trump is at minus ten net approval, Vance is at almost minus 11, Walz is at plus 3.7 or 8%, and Harris is even. That’s good for her, especially considering she shared Biden’s approval ratings. Biden entered office with around plus 17, but his approval dropped into the minus 10 to 15 range after pulling out of Afghanistan. Harris being back at even is a big deal.

Rick Rosner, American Comedy Writer, www.rickrosner.org

Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Independent Journalist, www.in-sightpublishing.com

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On Tejano Music 6: Selena’s Father

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/19

A seasoned Musician (Vocals, Guitar and Piano), Filmmaker, and Actor, J.D. Mata has composed 100 songs and performed 100 shows and venues throughout. He has been a regular at the legendary “Whisky a Go Go,” where he has wooed audiences with his original shamanistic musical performances. He has written and directed nerous feature films, web series, and music videos. J.D. has also appeared in various national T.V. commercials and shows. Memorable appearances are TRUE BLOOD (HBO) as Tio Luca, THE UPS Store National television commercial, and the lead in the Lil Wayne music video, HOW TO LOVE, with over 129 million views. As a MOHAWK MEDICINE MAN, J.D. also led the spiritual-based film KATERI, which won the prestigious “Capex Dei” award at the Vatican in Rome. J.D. co-starred, performed and wrote the music for the original world premiere play, AN ENEMY of the PUEBLO — by one of today’s preeminent Chicana writers, Josefina Lopez! This is J.D.’s third Fringe; last year, he wrote, directed and starred in the Fringe Encore Performance award-winning “A Night at the Chicano Rock Opera.” He is in season 2 of his NEW YouTube series, ROCK god! J.D. is a native of McAllen, Texas and resides in North Hollywood, California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let’s begin with a brief introduction to Selena, a significant figure in Tejano music who tragically passed away at a young age. Can you tell us about her upbringing, particularly her father’s role? What are some of the stories surrounding her childhood? To provide context, how did her father, Abraham Quintanilla, parent her? How did his approach differ from others? And how do families recognize exceptional talent in young people who can express it meaningfully? 

J.D. Mata: My perspective is based on things I’ve read and heard and my intuition. By intuition, I mean as a Mexican-American who grew up with a father who was a musician. For the sake of conversation, let’s imagine I’m Selena in this story, and I’ll share from the child’s perspective—whether that’s Selena or her brother, AB. I want to discuss Abraham Quintanilla, her father, because he reminds me a lot of my father, a musician. Let me begin by acknowledging that this is an exciting approach.

Based on what I’ve learned, it’s well-known that Abraham Quintanilla, Selena’s father, was a musician who had a band called Los Dinos in his younger years. He was a talented musician and served in the military, which is how he met his wife, Marcella. They fell in love and got married.

Their first child was Suzette, who went on to play drums in Selena’s band. Then, they had their son, AB Quintanilla III, followed by Selena. Because Abraham was a musician himself, he recognized his children’s musical talents early on.

He especially recognized Selena’s remarkable singing voice. When it comes to talent, you either have it or you don’t, and Selena certainly did. Abraham noticed that from a young age. Being a musician, he wanted to live his dreams through his children’s success. He believed that if anyone could guide and advocate for his daughter, it should be him.

It’s similar to how I would feel if I had a child with a talent for singing or acting. Although I don’t have children, I would certainly advocate for them if I did. Who better to steer that ship than a dedicated parent? To get to the point, Abraham was their mentor and music guru, not just their father.

He was the manager, booking agent, band founder, and more. One thing Abraham had, which many artists lack—and something I’ve struggled with but am improving on—is that he was a talented musician and a sharp businessman. After all, it’s called show business for a reason. Abraham Quintanilla deserves much credit for that.

I’m a huge fan and an advocate. I look at it from an academic or intellectual point of view. Without Abraham Quintanilla, there is no Selena because he was such a fierce and astute advocate for his kids. That’s why they made it. It would help if you had an intense, loyal advocate who’s there for you through thick and thin, and they indeed went through many trials and tribulations. Not only was he their manager, but he was also their father. You talk about a “papa bear,” and that’s what he was. He encouraged his kids to pursue music as a career, and that became his career, too.

He shifted from being a restaurant owner to investing in their music career, and the band even played at the family restaurant. Essentially, he was an entrepreneur. Being in the music field, especially in this capitalistic society, you must be an entrepreneur. You’re constantly persuading people to buy your product, and that’s precisely what he did—he convinced the public to buy Selena’s music. That’s capitalism 101: the exchange of goods and services without government interference, just one citizen persuading another to invest in their product. Abraham was selling Selena’s records and knew how to do it well.

When it came to the music itself, he was tough. Even though his kids loved music, he pushed them hard. He understood that talent isn’t enough—you must nurture it. Like watering a plant, you have to practice and perfect your craft. He knew that, as a musician himself. He ensured his kids rehearsed daily, even though they sometimes hated it. But that’s why they became so good. They weren’t just playing the same small, junky gigs everyone else was; they were mastering their craft.

If you want to discuss an American success story, look at Selena and her family. That is the essence of the American dream—coming from humble beginnings and achieving greatness through hard work. I don’t think that’s emphasized enough, how they’re a true American success story. Selena became musically successful, but it was only possible because her father was a genius—not just as a music manager or producer, but as an advocate for their brand. He was incredibly astute and a hard worker. He would even drive the bus to get them from gig to gig.

I know how tough that is because I’m on tour now. It’s brutal. You play the show, wake up the next day and drive to the following location. It’s exhausting—driving six to eight hours to the next gig, sometimes with your bus breaking down. That’s the grind they went through.

So not only was Abraham Quintanilla an incredible musician, manager, and mentor, but he was also a mechanic. When the bus broke down, he had to fix it. On top of all that, he was an exceptional father. Some might argue about how great he was, considering that Selena missed out on typical teenage experiences like prom or football games. But sometimes, success demands sacrifice, and that’s what their journey requires. Had Selena not been tragically killed, she was on her way to becoming an even bigger icon.

The apple doesn’t fall far from the tree. We can see that in Selena’s entrepreneurial spirit. She had opened her clothing boutique, and there were rumours that she was planning to leave the band to focus on her boutique. Whether or not that’s true, the point is that she was set to become a millionaire as a fashion designer. And where did she get her entrepreneurial spirit? From her father.

We also must remember her mother, Marcella. Behind every successful man, there’s a strong woman. Marcella held the family together. While much of this is based on intuition, it’s clear that the strength of their family came from love. When you love your family, you support them, and I’m sure Abraham and Marcella were a strong team.

I’m presenting a perspective I have yet to see or hear elsewhere. It could be because I see the world differently as an artist and an entrepreneur. I’ve been a Tejano artist, and my father reminds me of Abraham Quintanilla. So, I bring a unique perspective to this conversation.

I’ve never met Abraham Quintanilla, though I’d love to. What I’m sharing is based on what I’ve read and my intuition as a Mexican-American and as the son of a musician who advocated for me and nurtured my talents. In some ways, I see Abraham as a father figure, even though we’ve never met. If we did, we’d look each other in the eye and understand one another immediately.

Abraham has been criticized for “living off his daughter’s name,” but I don’t see it that way. He’s simply keeping the record straight about what happened to Selena and preserving her legacy. Selena is known worldwide today because her father was astute enough to keep the rights to the first movie about her life. He had the vision to ensure her story was told correctly, understanding Selena’s brilliance, genius, and sacrifice and the entire family. He may face criticism, but Abraham knew people needed to hear Selena’s story. He was smart enough to ensure they heard it from the family rather than from speculative sources.

And I’m sure it was excruciating for him to relive all those memories and tell the story through the movie. Even today, it must still be unbearable for him. But despite the pain, he continues because of his deep love, passion, and devotion—to Selena, the brand, the craft, and the family. He has no choice but to carry on. By the way, Suzette is the older sister and continues to be involved. They’ve created a museum. They played a role in ensuring the Selena series was as accurate as possible.

Abraham Quintanilla he’s the root of it all. He’s the strong, traditional Mexican figure at the foundation of the massive “Selena tree” that has grown to reach the entire world. Without him, there would be nothing. That’s what I have to say about his role.

Are there any other questions related to that? For example, you asked about the marriage between Abraham and Marcella and what their love was like. It’s a love story, a beautiful one. The proof is in the fact that they’re still married. How often do you hear about families torn apart by tragedy like theirs? And then consider the music business—it’s brutal, it tears people apart. Yet, they stayed together through it all.

That’s real love. Of course, they’re human, and there must have been conflict, like in any relationship, but they made it through at the end of the day. That’s love. So, to answer your question, when you see them, you can’t help but recognize that their love is strong.

Intuitively, I feel this because my parents stayed together and loved each other deeply. While I’ve never met Abraham and Marcella, and I’m not a psychologist or family therapist, I base my understanding on what I’ve seen in interviews, what I’ve read, and my own experience.

Jacobsen: Were they a product of their generation, where marriages were likelier to stick it out? 

Mata: Probably. But they’re also living in a time when many couples from that generation haven’t stayed together. So yes, their generation may have shaped them, but I believe their love would have lasted in any era.

As for your question about how Abraham’s parenting style may have differed between Selena and her siblings, there wasn’t much difference. He seemed consistent based on what I’ve read and observed and my understanding of Mexican culture. It didn’t matter that Selena was the star or the lead singer—he treated them all the same.

He was strict with his rules. There was no drinking or smoking on the bus—not just for his children but also for the musicians. Everyone had to be in bed at a particular time. He had a policy of not interacting much with fans because he believed there needed to be a mystique between the artist and the audience. That mystique would fade if the fans got to know them too well. He enforced that with all of his children, not just Selena.

So he had a policy where you could talk to the fans but weren’t allowed to develop friendships with them to maintain that mystique. And it wasn’t just Selena; all the kids had the same treatment. It’s not that he outright forbade them from attending football games or proms, but the business demands didn’t allow it.

Most of their gigs were on the weekends when all the socializing happened at school. Eventually, Selena had to drop out of school, and she later earned her GED. I’m not sure about AB or Suzette, but I know Selena did it, and she also became an advocate for education. Based on the interviews I’ve read, she never complained about the path her life took. She understood how fortunate she was to be following her dream.

Abraham was equal in how he disciplined and guided all his children. He instilled professionalism in them and maintained their faith as a core part of their upbringing. I don’t want to speculate too much, but I believe they were associated with the Church of the Latter-day Saints, though I could be wrong. What’s clear is that faith was essential to their family, and they were God-fearing people, which Abraham instilled in his children.

By the way, I have a YouTube series called Rock God, and in episode 8, I meet Selena. It’s a fantastic episode where I visit her star on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. While I’m there, I get hit by a guy on a scooter. I pass out, and while I’m concussed, Selena appears to me. So, if anyone reading this is interested, go to YouTube, search for Rocca JD Mata, and check out episode 8.

I mention this because, in the episode, I made a point of portraying Selena in a way that’s respectful to her faith. In the Seventh-day Adventist tradition, they believe that when people die, they don’t go to heaven right away; instead, they’re “sleeping” until Jesus returns. So, in the episode, Selena wakes up and says, “Oh, I’ve been sleeping,” to stay true to that belief.

Jacobsen: How’s your time looking tonight?

Mata: I’ve got a project I’m working on, so this will probably be it for tonight. Same time, we’ll get back into the groove.

Jacobsen: Great, I’ll see you then.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Rock God of Assisted Living Facilities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/18

 A seasoned Musician (Vocals, Guitar and Piano), Filmmaker, and Actor, J.D. Mata has composed 100 songs and performed 100 shows and venues throughout. He has been a regular at the legendary “Whisky a Go Go,” where he has wooed audiences with his original shamanistic musical performances. He has written and directed nerous feature films, web series, and music videos. J.D. has also appeared in various national T.V. commercials and shows. Memorable appearances are TRUE BLOOD (HBO) as Tio Luca, THE UPS Store National television commercial, and the lead in the Lil Wayne music video, HOW TO LOVE, with over 129 million views. As a MOHAWK MEDICINE MAN, J.D. also led the spiritual-based film KATERI, which won the prestigious “Capex Dei” award at the Vatican in Rome. J.D. co-starred, performed and wrote the music for the original world premiere play, AN ENEMY of the PUEBLO — by one of today’s preeminent Chicana writers, Josefina Lopez! This is J.D.’s third Fringe; last year, he wrote, directed and starred in the Fringe Encore Performance award-winning “A Night at the Chicano Rock Opera.” He is in season 2 of his NEW YouTube series, ROCK god! J.D. is a native of McAllen, Texas and resides in North Hollywood, California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I guess you have a new album or an older music collection in older language. It’s an interesting situation with the online space now because it’s not typically a physical album or disc anymore—it’s streamed most of the time. Anyway, you have what we might call an album about ‘Rock God.’ At the same time, you informed me that you performed today or tonight at an assisted living facility in Los Angeles?

J.D. Mata: Actually, it was in Simi Valley, which is about 40 miles north of Los Angeles, in Ventura County. So I was in Simi Valley, entertaining at an assisted living facility. 

Jacobsen: Why would they choose ‘The Rock God’ over backgammon, chess, cards night, or even an early rest? Also, how did you get the gig? 

Mata: Those are a lot of questions, but I want to clarify that it’s not an album called ‘Rock God.’ It’s a YouTube series.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the correction. So, yes, it’s a YouTube series.

Mata: I call it ‘Rock God. ‘ The premise is about Aaron, a struggling musician who sets out to live his dreams in Los Angeles. You see his struggles; ultimately, he becomes a ‘Rock God,’ but in the nursing home circuit. This concept was created before the pandemic. I have 12 episodes up, or 11. Season 1 consists of 10 episodes, shot over the last three to three-and-a-half years as I developed the pre-pandemic concept.

I shot the first couple of episodes initially, but then the pandemic hit, and I could no longer enter nursing homes due to COVID-19. Musicians weren’t allowed anywhere near, which threw off the entire premise. So, ‘Rock God’ shifted temporarily, but I’m now returning to the original concept. The series is essentially about the struggles of a musician. I’ve had plenty of horror stories and beautiful moments about the realities of this life.

I recommend that people check YouTube and search for ‘Rock God J.D. Mata’ to watch the episodes. You can also go to X (formerly known as Twitter), where I have uploaded all 11 episodes. We’re technically the first comedy series on X.

Regarding today’s conversation, it’s fascinating because I want to correct myself—I’ve been using the term ‘nursing homes,’ but ‘assisted living facilities’ is more accurate. I’ve performed at these places, ‘nursing homes,’ since the early 1980s. The pandemic halted that, but I recently started again, reclaiming the ‘Rock God’ of the nursing home circuit.

I want to be as accurate as possible. There are no longer nursing homes, per se; it’s assisted living. That makes sense because “nursing home” carries a negative connotation, and there have been many advances.

However, some facilities are strictly nursing homes where people are bedridden or confined. But many people here have difficulty walking or need 24/7 care. That’s the facility I played at today, and it’s adorable. It’s in the middle of a strip mall so residents can access the pharmacy, Rite Aid, and coffee shop more efficiently. It’s an excellent concept.

I was the ‘Rock God,’ and in a way, that term is accurate. If they had lighters, they would’ve lit them! I played “Hotel California,” “Freebird,” and “Pretty Woman,” and they were all singing along. They knew the words, which is interesting because, back in the eighties, I was doing “All of Me” and “Ain’t Misbehavin’.”

In a way, I am the ‘Rock God’ because I’ve been playing classic rock songs for years, and many of my contemporaries haven’t tapped into the assisted living circuit yet. They don’t know about it; they’re still playing the bars. But, man, I’ll tell you what.

I haven’t shot this particular episode yet, but I look at their faces and eyes, and they’re so into it. I look at some women and think, “She was probably hot in her twenties.” And they’re still beautiful in their way. 

Jacobsen: Were there any particular people who stood out during your performance? Maybe someone with a cane or in a wheelchair who came to life in a heartwarming way.

Mata: A hundred percent. Three people come to mind. It’s a couple, then a gentleman and another woman. The first couple—his name is Richard or Dick, and his girlfriend’s name is Judy. I remember their names fondly. I use word association to remember names—Richard because of “Dick’s Office Supply.” My dad worked for Dick’s Office Supply, so that’s how I remember. And Judy, I sing “Hey Jude” to her, which makes it easy to remember.

This couple always holds hands when I perform. I played some 50s songs like “Put Your Head on My Shoulder,”and they recognized them. They were probably teenagers when those songs were hits. They held hands and swayed to the music. I feel like I took them back to their youth. I also played “Rock Around the Clock” and “Let’s Go to the Hop,” I could imagine them as teenyboppers at a sock hop, dancing and being in love. They left an impact on me.

Then there’s another gentleman named Paul. He’s hunched over, strolls with a walker, and can barely look at you because he is hunched. It’s hard to understand him, but he’s sharp as a whip. His challenges are primarily physical, though there might be some cognitive decline. But he’s funny, remembers my name, and engages with the show. I’ll joke with him and say, “Paul, you still owe me money!” He’ll reply, “How much?” and we laugh.

There’s also a woman in a wheelchair whose name I can’t remember, but she’s incredibly witty. She gets all the jokes and is always engaged. People like her, along with Paul, make the performances memorable.

Like, for example, one of the jokes that I use when I go to these places, and they have a great sense of humour, is this: I start by saying, “today, I got a package in the mail. I got a box in the mail.” They’re engaged and ask, “Who was it from?” I reply, “It was a package from my ex-girlfriend.” They go, “Oh,” and I say, “Yes, I shook it, and man, that thing was heavy—it made a thumping noise. I opened it up, and guess what was inside?” They ask, “What?” I say, “Moccasins.” They go, “Moccasins?” I say, “Yes, water moccasins.” Then they say, “Oh, water moccasins, the snake.”

Everybody knows what water moccasins are. Then I tell them, “You’ll never guess what I did. I got a pot, boiled some water, threw the moccasins in, and guess what? I’m inviting my ex-girlfriend over for dinner.” They all laugh—they get that type of humour.

And then there’s this particular woman who always adds to the joke. I am trying to remember exactly what she says, but she’s super funny and has a biting sense of humour. Seeing her in a wheelchair makes you appreciate the human body and mind. The body might be a shell, but the mind is where the miracle is.

I go on with the show, continuing the joke: “We broke up because one day she showed up early in the morning after being out all night. Her hair is dishevelled. I ask, ‘Where have you been?’ and she says, ‘I was at my sister’s house.’ But I knew she lied because I was with her sister all night.” The audience laughs—they love these jokes and are still old enough to get them.

That particular woman I mentioned always retorts to something I say in a clever, funny way—not mean-spirited, but in good fun. She becomes part of the act. I have some memorable moments with the residents while I play music.

And as I mentioned earlier, they sing along with me when I play Pretty Woman or Stand by Me. When I play Piano Man, they’re right there with me, too. If they still had access to lighters, they’d light them to my music.

Jacobsen: Do you get many invitations now?

Mata: I opened up an email a couple of days ago from another place, so yes, I’m starting to get more invites. I’m becoming the rock guy—word travels. Before the pandemic, I did it for years because it’s a circuit. Like people tour arenas and play bars, there’s also a circuit for assisted living homes. And now, I’m doing three of those facilities regularly. Before the pandemic, I performed at about seven different facilities throughout LA. I was the rock god of the assisted living circuit.

Jacobsen: As you play for these people, many of whom are later in life, what feeling comes up for you?

Mata: As I was leaving, one of the staff members said, “Man, you bring so much enthusiasm and energy to these performances. Many musicians show up, play, and then leave, but you put your whole heart and soul into it. You engage with the audience.” And I told her, “You’re right.” I’ve played in all kinds of settings—I’ve performed for the Fly on the Wall at a bar, and I’ve also performed for 100,000 people at a concert during my Tejano days. Whether it’s for one person or 100,000, I give the same energy and the same passion.

The folks at the assisted living homes get the same juice from me as anyone else, whether it’s a small venue or a big one. It doesn’t matter. It’s all about the performance. If you have passion for what you do, you will give it your all, no matter the situation or location.

I love it—I’m passionate about it. Even as an actor, it’s the same thing. I’m going to be authentic, always. As a musician, my authentic self comes out when I perform and with passion.

Jacobsen: You are one of the most authentic people I know. At the same time, you’ve made sacrifices in your life for that authenticity. You may not make as much money or have a large social circle, but the people in your life matter, and the money you make, you’ve earned. You live a meaningful life.

Mata: It’s funny you say that because you become wiser as you get older. You start to see things more clearly. But that doesn’t happen to everyone. Some people get older and don’t necessarily become wiser. Sometimes, you don’t know what you don’t know.

I’m not going to claim that I have all the answers. There’s that saying, “It’s easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich man to enter heaven.” And for those reading this, Jose is a practicing Catholic and a longtime choir conductor for a Catholic choir. So, this wisdom comes from a life of practice.

Yes, I had a moment of understanding tonight, Earl, before our conversation when you mentioned the sacrifice of poverty. It’s not about being rich or poor; it’s a metaphor. I don’t think people go to hell because they’re rich. But I understand it now.

Let me explain. I was in a horrible situation some time ago—I won’t give specifics because I don’t want to implicate anyone—but I knew some affluent people. I was in the wrong spot financially, emotionally, and career-wise. I never asked for help, though I got through it with some people’s support. However, one person had the means to help but didn’t. I never asked them for help, but they clarified that they won’t help struggling artists. For me, it wasn’t about being an artist but about working through life. Life is messy, and that’s the truth.

The thing is, I get where she’s coming from. I understood it yesterday because it’s not that she didn’t want to help me—it’s that she’s never struggled. It doesn’t matter; the person has never gone through what I’ve gone through. I get that.

I know that I’ll have wealth one day, and who knows? I’ll be the same way. Maybe wealth changes you. But I doubt it because I’m 59, and I’ve been through many struggles. Many wealthy people have helped me out of tricky situations, and I haven’t forgotten that.

I get it if you’re wealthy and have never gone through what I have. That person has never experienced the same hardships because they were born with wealth. They don’t know what they don’t know. For them, it’s righteous. They might think, “If you feed the cat, the cat’s going to keep coming back,” and then you own the cat. But that was never my intention.

Sometimes, I’m grateful for my path when discussing sacrifice, especially when it leads to moments like today. Yes, I’m paid for performing at assisted living facilities, and they pay me well. Part of me wants to help, but another part needs the money, too. So I do it both because it’s a good deed and because I need the income.

If I accumulate wealth, will I still play at assisted living facilities? Right now, I’d say yes—probably yes—because I’m already a millionaire. I love my life, even though I don’t have much wealth. I’d love to own a grand piano, an Apple Watch, or a big house where I could play music anytime, 24/7. I live in an apartment complex, and I’m not living in poverty.

But compared to absolute poverty, which you’ve probably seen in your travels, I’m fortunate. Here in America, we live like kings and queens. Still, I’d love to have wealth so I could employ people. I could make more movies, hire actors, makeup artists, wardrobe people, and more. These are the things I can’t do now with independent projects because I need the finances to support them.

So yes, being an artist, the “Rock God” of assisted living homes comes with sacrifices. To play these places, you still have to be good—you can’t suck. So, I practice every day. That’s the sacrifice.

The reality is, when you live the life of an artist, you have to sacrifice relationships and family. I always say that you can cheat on me—if I have a girlfriend, it doesn’t bother me. But if you cheat on me artistically, like if you have a party and I’m not the first person you think to hire, then you’ve hurt me. What that says to me is either I’m not good enough, or you don’t value me.

That’s how the artist’s mind works. For me, as JD, the artist and the “Rock God” of the assisted living home circuit, it cuts deep. It’s another entirely different discussion—the artist’s psyche, particularly for me as a musician.

But in my heart, I’m a millionaire. Do I want to be a millionaire in terms of my bank account? Yes. Because wealth is just information, just numbers. You can be wealthy if you think like a millionaire, even if your bank account doesn’t reflect it yet.

For me, it’s just a matter of time. And when my bank account catches up, I hope and pray that I don’t forget where I came from. Some wealthy people remember, but others don’t know what they don’t know. That’s why they say it’s easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter heaven. It’s not a condemnation to hell—it’s a metaphor for understanding. People who haven’t experienced real struggle may not fully understand what it’s like.

So, I don’t resent that person who didn’t help me. I love that person. I get it now. Life is just like that—people are different, and everyone has their way of living.

Every musician should play at assisted living homes.

Jacobsen: JD, thank you for your discussion on assisted living homes. This may be the first conversation I’ve ever had about performing in assisted living homes, especially in a positive light. It’s something new.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Yana Fershtein on a Student Petition at KPU

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/17

Yana Fershtein is the Managing Editor of PULP Mag. She discusses editorial independence, the petition affecting PIPS, and student involvement.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Yana Fershtein from PULP Mag. Yana, as an initial question, how long have you been involved with PULP Mag?

Yana Fershtein: I joined PULP Mag as the new managing editor in June, so about three months and a bit.

Jacobsen: What was your prior level of managerial and editorial experience? Is this your first managing editor position?

Fershtein: Yes, it is.

Jacobsen: What do you know about the petition and how it affects PIPS and the magazine’s operations?

Fershtein: I heard about it from the PIPS operations manager. She reached out to me when they first received the petition, as it would affect PULP Mag. Being the managing editor, they involved me right away. However, I wasn’t very involved in the initial stages of figuring out what the petition meant and what needed to be done.

I did, however, speak with some of the Runner’s staff. I believe it was the managing editor. They explained to me the history of the relationship between the Runner and the KSA, as well as what this petition means for PIPS, the Runner, and PULP Mag by extension.

Jacobsen: So, when looking at the petition’s call for KSA board involvement, for instance, if this first step is approved, would it raise concerns for you, or no, regarding editorial independence?

Not necessarily for the Runner, but if it were to escalate, such as them wanting a seat on the PIPS board and gaining editorial oversight over PULP Mag and the Runner, then yes, it would concern me. 

Fershtein: My biggest concern would be the possibility that PIPS, the Runner, or both publications could be killed at any point. Additionally, the nature of our content, primarily artistic and literary works, focuses less on objective, unbiased reporting and more on creativity and expression. Emotions are often involved in what we publish, and if editorial independence from the KSA council members is compromised, contributors may not feel free to express themselves fully. As we are a publication primarily for KPU students, I believe they should retain the right to express themselves artistically.

Jacobsen: How much do students contribute per credit to PULP Mag?

Fershtein: It’s 75¢ per credit for PIPS, and that funding is split between the Runner and PULP Mag.

Jacobsen: Have you or any prior managing editors ever received complaints about this contribution of less than a dollar per credit?

Fershtein: I can’t speak for any previous managing editors, but no one has said anything to me. I’ve never received any complaints, and I haven’t heard of anyone, formally or informally, objecting to it. It’s also an optional fee. People can opt out of it. 

Jacobsen: What do you think is the importance of editorial independence when writing for a community? You are a student publication for students,  especially given your knowledge of expressing emotions and putting feelings into, for instance, loud colors on the page and evocative wording. Can you comment on that? Editorial freedom is crucial, whether you’re talking about traditional newspaper writing or creative expression in more artistic formats, like PULP Mag and other similar publications serving the public. 

Fershtein: I think it’s very important. One of the things we aim to do is publish work that is unique or pushes boundaries because that’s often the kind of artwork that becomes important and significant on a broader scale. For students, who are usually early in their careers, this is especially true. Many are just starting to realize they can share their writing with the world.

A lot of magazines or publishers have a high barrier to entry. That’s why having PULP Mag exist as a student-run publication, yet independent from governing bodies like the school or the student union, is so important. It provides students with an easier way to share their work as they’re starting out. They feel supported and know they can express themselves without holding back. Creative writing and art allow for expression in ways that writing a newspaper article might not.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts you’d like to share on this topic? I also want to be sensitive to the fact that it’s not easy being put on the spot just three months into a new job.

Fershtein: Are you asking specifically about this question or overall?

Jacobsen: Overall, and in reflection on everything we’ve discussed, especially given the context of starting a new role and then having this event happen. I can’t imagine this being easy. 

Fershtein: It’s been quite a learning curve. I spoke to some previous managing editors. They unanimously said this had never happened before. What stings a bit is that PULP Mag wasn’t really an instigator for any of this in any way. 

The magazine got caught in the crossfire of this. It made me wonder whether the best interests of everyone were really considered. Sometimes it felt like PULP Mag and the students it serves—creative writing students, art students, or even students from other disciplines wanting to express themselves—weren’t really taken into account. Otherwise, this experience has definitely made me more aware of what’s happening at KPU. I’ve felt very supported by the Runner staff, especially Claudia. She’s been great at explaining everything to me, especially since I just started not too long ago. It can only go up from here.

Jacobsen: Yana, thank you very much for your time today.

Fershtein: Thank you. I appreciate you reaching out to me and giving PULP Mag a voice because it did feel a little like we were watching things unfold without being able to do much. Thank you for seeking PULP’s perspective.

Jacobsen: You’re very welcome. 

Fershtein: Cool. Great. Thank you, it was great talking to you, Scott.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Bye.

Fershtein: Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Nicholas Jenner on Codependency Recovery

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/17

In an upcoming interview with Dr. Nicholas Jenner, a seasoned therapist and coach with over 20 years of experience, we explore his new program, “Self Leadership for Codependents.” Dr. Jenner discusses his expertise in helping women break free from codependent relationships, fostering emotional independence, and embracing personal autonomy. He shares his compassionate approach, rooted in Internal Family Systems therapy and practical tools, offering a transformative path toward healthier relationships and self-growth.

Dr. Nicholas Jenner is a counseling psychotherapist and the founder of Boundaries of the Soul Therapy LTD. With over 20 years of experience, he specializes in codependency recovery and other mental health issues. Subscribe to Dr Jenner Podcast – Self-leadership For Codependents

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Dr. Nicholas Jenner to talk about his new program and some more. He specializes in codependency, with an emphasis on women, though men are affected by it as well. I want to begin with two foundational points before we delve into the core of today’s interview. First, what is codependency? Second, what is an important consideration regarding how this issue affects men and women, based on your professional experience?

Dr. Nicholas Jenner: Thank you, Scott. I’m happy to be here. The first question is complex because there are many definitions of codependency. Generally speaking, as we understand it today, codependency involves prioritizing others’ needs at the expense of one’s own to maintain relationships. While this may seem generous, it is often a way to control the situation and keep others happy to feel secure in the relationship.

Codependent people tend to please and enable others to avoid conflict or rejection. We’ll explore this in more depth as the conversation progresses. As for your second question, codependency can affect anyone, though it’s more commonly observed in women. However, men are also susceptible to it. In my experience working with individuals and couples, it is prevalent in various cultures and social backgrounds. Codependency doesn’t discriminate based on gender, country, or culture.

There’s also the aspect of childhood experiences, which we can discuss later. 

Jacobsen: Now, in terms of predecessors in the field, there are certainly influential figures. Are people like Eric Berne, who developed Transactional Analysis, and others who contributed to research on codependency part of it?

Jenner: It’s important to note that the concept of codependency initially emerged in the context of addiction recovery, particularly in relationships where one partner was addicted to substances. Around 30 to 40 years ago, the term “co-alcoholic” was used to describe individuals who were in relationships with alcoholics, and it was believed they enabled their partner’s addiction. There’s an old anecdote about a woman complaining about her husband’s drinking yet keeping beer in the fridge to keep him from going to the bar.

Over the past 20 years, research on codependency has expanded beyond addiction. It now includes behaviours within relationships where one person relies excessively on another for emotional support. I came across the concept of codependency about 15 years ago, particularly in the context of “love addiction,” which became more widely discussed in the media at that time. Codependency is now recognized as a significant behavioural pattern in relationships and often stems from childhood experiences.

As for your question on pioneers in the field, one of the challenges with codependency is that it needs to be formally recognized as a psychological disorder. It doesn’t appear in the DSM (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders), so there is no official clinical diagnosis. However, several influential figures have contributed to the understanding of codependency, such as Pia Mellody, who introduced the concept of “facing codependence,” Melody Beattie, whose work on recovery from codependency is widely recognized, and Ross Rosenberg, who explored the connection between codependency and narcissistic relationships.

These are all people who know a lot about codependency. 

Jacobsen: How do you see this manifest in a therapeutic setting, in a professional, controlled environment, for people who happen to have this as a psychological factor in their overall profile?

Jenner: Of course. I usually see them in the first consultation. Generally, because codependency starts in childhood, we can often trace it back by assessing that period. Most people who struggle with codependency have a similar type of childhood experience.

Now, it’s different for everyone. Still, a typical codependent family dynamic often includes an overworked, overwhelmed mother and an emotionally distant father. This pattern is quite common. However, it can be any family structure where a child grows up without forming a strong connection with their caregivers. I once read that if you didn’t have a meaningful connection with a caregiver, you’re likely to become codependent as an adult.

This is where codependency begins. Many have trouble remembering key details when talking to someone about their childhood. Still, through careful exploration, you can identify where these codependent patterns and traits began to emerge. Codependency often develops due to two types of trauma: relational trauma and developmental trauma. Relational trauma involves learning about relationships from parents, whether those lessons are healthy or not. Developmental trauma refers to any event that interrupts a child’s natural progression through normal developmental stages.

In addition, there’s a Freudian concept known as “repetition compulsion,” which suggests that as adults, people seek out relationships to try to resolve issues from early childhood. We can examine those patterns, types of relationships, and childhood experiences to determine if someone is codependent.

Jacobsen: What about the prospects for self-regulation of codependency as a psychological and social trait in adults—let’s say, people who are fully cognitively developed, 25 and older? How can men and women overcome or manage the typically well-established pathways by that point in life?

Jenner: Absolutely. You’re right to bring that up. I meet many codependents who are aware of their issues, but the key challenge is moving from awareness to action. Awareness alone is not enough; action is required to manage codependency.

In the program I’ve developed for lifetime access, a 13-week audio series, we guide participants from codependent awareness to codependent action. If I may, I’ll explain more about that as I answer your question. When we reach the action phase, it can be summed up in two words: personal autonomy.

Personal autonomy is crucial, both for the individual and within relationships. In a typical codependent relationship, you often find an enmeshed dynamic where two people are so entangled that it becomes dysfunctional. One partner may be emotionally distant, while the codependent partner tries to control the shared space in the relationship. This push-pull dynamic is a hallmark of codependent relationships.

Jenner: And they tend to forget everything outside of that relationship. They become engrossed and entangled with each other. For me, the end goal of any codependent work is personal autonomy. This means seeing yourself as an individual with a healthy sense of self.

It would be best to have your hobbies, pastimes, and friends. You must have your purpose in life and allow the other person to do the same. This is critical because codependents typically do not. Then, a special space must be reserved for the relationship, balancing “me time” and “us time.”

Jacobsen: What is the path from a strong form of codependency to healthier relationships and a better self-concept?

Jenner: That’s a complex question, even though it sounds simple. It depends on the individual. You have to realize that codependency is not love. I often have couples coming into therapy saying, “We think one of us is codependent, but we love each other.” My thought is, “You don’t love each other.” As a codependent, you don’t truly know what love is because codependency is about control. Codependency is controlling, so it depends on the person and their willingness to change.

It also depends on what type of codependent they are. Codependency is a generic term, but there are various types: controlling codependents, avoidant codependents, enabling codependents, and people-pleasing codependents. Interestingly, there’s also a masochistic codependent who can be seen as the ultimate victim.

All these factors influence how long recovery might take. I think that there’s no classic “recovery” from codependency. It’s not as simple as taking a pill and feeling better. It’s about managing your daily life, staying present, focusing on yourself, and doing the internal work.

Jacobsen: What about self-help exercises, journaling, or meditation? How do those practices help with self-regulation and grounding in the present moment?

Jenner: Those are perfect exercises. The program I wrote includes meditation, and every audio session includes a journaling prompt to complete over the week. In therapy, I always encourage people to journal. It’s incredibly useful for grounding.

Meditation is also something I frequently use in therapy. Breathing exercises lead to my main method, Internal Family Systems Therapy (IFS) or parts work combined with inner child work. I use these techniques to dig into childhood experiences and the past to facilitate healing.

Jacobsen: What do you find is the biggest sticking point in the therapy process for individuals with codependency?

Jacobsen: That jump between awareness and action—many codependents get stuck in this process. Most people who come into therapy say, “I am codependent.” They’ve learned this through research, reading books, or perhaps a therapist or someone else told them.

They are aware of what codependency is and where it originated. They recognize their childhood patterns and can say, “Yes, this happened, and my symptoms match what I’ve read.” The big leap, of course, is moving from awareness to action.

The key is applying all that knowledge and awareness to create a new life. You need to shift that awareness from the mind to the body and take action. That’s the biggest challenge I see.

Because codependency is often tied to relationships, a common sticking point is when a codependent individual is alone. They might say, “I’m never going to have another relationship. I’ll focus on myself.” But once they meet someone, the codependent tendencies tend to reemerge.

So, the focal point of therapy is helping someone become aware of their codependency and take meaningful action. Guiding them through that process is the muddy terrain we, as therapists, must navigate.

Jacobsen: What is your most practical advice for people struggling with this issue in their day-to-day lives?

Jenner: My most practical advice would be to recognize that you’re codependent, acknowledge that you tend to control relationships, that you have an external focus, and that you need to shift that work inward.

Also, understand that if you want to have a healthy relationship with someone, you must do the necessary inner work. Codependents often spend much of their time in denial. In my program, I address this at length.

And to be honest, it’s easy to be codependent because you’re seen as the “good egg.” You’re the one who does everything for everyone, and people come to you. It is challenging to give up that control. But the reality is, if you want a good relationship with a healthy person, you need to do the work.

This means shifting your focus from external sources of validation to internal growth.

Jacobsen: Suppose you were to compare two healthy people in a relationship with two codependent people. How would those relationships look and differ?

Jenner: Two healthy people in a relationship have personal autonomy. They have independence and interdependence within the relationship, meaning they rely on each other in a balanced way. They are individuals who are comfortable with themselves and can support each other without losing their own identity.

Now, such relationships are rare. The prevalence of codependency in relationships is quite high. Two healthy people are happy to be independent. They don’t feel threatened when their partner spends time with others or pursues personal interests. They nurture the relationship while respecting each other’s individuality.

Two codependent people, on the other hand, usually don’t work well together. It’s like trying to push two magnets together. There will be a lack of trust and blurred boundaries, and the relationship will often be tense.

Jenner: They will isolate themselves within the relationship, and their life outside will wither.

Jacobsen: What is the lifespan of a codependent relationship? If these relationships are ultimately bound to self-destruct for most people, what’s the timeline? I’m curious.

Jenner: This is an interesting question because codependent relationships can last a long time. Codependents are hypervigilant, and they tend to attract emotionally distant people, creating a push-pull dynamic. Let’s bring in the concept of repetition compulsion. Codependents often try to fix earlier relationships through their current ones. This makes them hypervigilant, ensuring they provide what their partner needs to feel secure. This can sustain the relationship for many years, even decades.

Even when codependent couples come to therapy, the obvious issues may be in front of them, but they often don’t see it. So, these relationships either implode quickly or can last a long time due to denial, avoidance, and a constant sense of “we’re okay”—when, in fact, they are not.

Jacobsen: Have the rates of codependency gone up or down over the last few decades?

Jenner: Awareness of codependency has certainly increased, but I need to find out whether the rates of actual codependency have changed. I’ve seen claims suggesting that up to 80% of the global population is codependent in some way, though I wouldn’t go that far. However, it is very prevalent. What has increased is awareness, and the concept of codependency is evolving. It’s being applied not only to romantic relationships but also to the workplace, friendships, and family dynamics, especially between parents and children.

Codependency is everywhere. From my experience working with clients, I see a lot of codependent behaviour in both the people I work with and their surrounding relationships. However, determining whether the rate of codependency has increased is difficult. There isn’t much formal monitoring of it.

Jacobsen: You mentioned earlier that there are gender aspects to codependency. What about race, age, or culture? Do those factors influence how codependency manifests, regardless of its variety or severity?

Jenner: Yes, codependency can manifest across all demographics—race, age, culture, creed. However, in cultures where men are dominant, and women are taught to be submissive, codependency is more prevalent. We don’t need to name specific cultures. Still, it’s clear that in societies where men hold more power and women are expected to be subservient, codependency thrives.

Jacobsen: So, would there be some real codependency there?

Jenner: Yes, definitely. But, in the Western world, codependency doesn’t have limits. It doesn’t matter your age, race, creed, or colour—codependency doesn’t discriminate.

Jacobsen: What are your biggest lessons over two decades of working in this field?

Jenner: The main thing I’ve learned is that when codependents come into therapy, they’re often filled with hopelessness. Some don’t know what’s wrong with them; some don’t think anything is wrong, and others believe everything is wrong.

I want to give anyone coming into therapy the message that there is hope. Over the past two decades, I’ve seen many people change their lives once they realize that by taking action, they can lead a good life, build healthy relationships, and surround themselves with good people. So, that’s one key lesson—there’s always hope for codependents.

On the other side of the coin, if you look at people with narcissistic tendencies—without labelling everyone as a narcissist—it’s not as easy to work with them. But for codependents, there’s always hope. That’s the most important thing I’ve learned in these two decades.

Jacobsen: In the life of a therapist, especially when specializing in areas like narcissism, codependency, or borderline personality disorder, do you find that you, as a therapist, learn things about yourself while working with others?

Jenner:I can only speak for myself, but I learn something about myself when working with clients. As I mentioned earlier, I recognize myself as a codependent. I’ve guided people through codependency based on my own experiences and mistakes in relationships. I know what it feels like to be codependent.

However, that doesn’t make me a teacher—I’m also a learner. I learn from my clients. I resonate with their experiences and am always willing to help them through their struggles.

If you don’t mind me talking about my program again, which comes with lifetime access to the content, its core is a blend of my personal experience as a codependent and my professional experience working with codependents. It covers the key aspects of codependency—where it originates, what it looks like, and the different types. From there, it moves through the core challenges of codependency, such as the lack of boundaries and the drama triangle, and how to address them.

So, yes, I learn from my clients, and it’s an incredible experience to witness someone who starts off feeling hopeless and emotional in the first session grow much stronger as they begin to turn the focus inward. It’s truly inspiring.

Jacobsen: Dr. Jenner, thank you for the opportunity and your time today.

Jenner: Thank you, Scott. It was nice to meet you.

Jacobsen: Nice to meet you, too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

What Is More Important: Kindness, Empathy, or Intelligence?

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/16

According to some semi-reputable sources gathered in a listing hereRick G. Rosner may have among America’s, North America’s, and the world’s highest measured IQs at or above 190 (S.D. 15)/196 (S.D. 16) based on several high range test performances created by Christopher HardingJason BettsPaul Cooijmans, and Ronald Hoeflin. He earned 12 years of college credit in less than a year and graduated with the equivalent of 8 majors. He has received 8 Writers Guild Awards and Emmy nominations, and was titled 2013 North American Genius of the Year by The World Genius Directory with the main “Genius” listing here.

He has written for Remote ControlCrank YankersThe Man ShowThe EmmysThe Grammys, and Jimmy Kimmel Live!. He worked as a bouncer, a nude art model, a roller-skating waiter, and a stripper. In a television commercialDomino’s Pizza named him the “World’s Smartest Man.” The commercial was taken off the air after Subway sandwiches issued a cease-and-desist. He was named “Best Bouncer” in the Denver Area, Colorado, by Westwood Magazine.

Rosner spent much of the late Disco Era as an undercover high school student. In addition, he spent 25 years as a bar bouncer and American fake ID-catcher, and 25+ years as a stripper, and nearly 30 years as a writer for more than 2,500 hours of network television. Errol Morris featured Rosner in the interview series entitled First Person, where some of this history was covered by Morris. He came in second, or lost, on Jeopardy!, sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? over a flawed question and lost the lawsuit. He won one game and lost one game on Are You Smarter Than a Drunk Person? (He was drunk). Finally, he spent 37+ years working on a time-invariant variation of the Big Bang Theory.

Currently, Rosner sits tweeting in a bathrobe (winter) or a towel (summer). He lives in Los AngelesCalifornia with his wife, dog, and goldfish. He and his wife have a daughter. You can send him money or questions at LanceVersusRick@Gmail.Com, or a direct message via Twitter, or find him on LinkedIn, or see him on YouTube

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is more important: kindness, empathy, or intelligence?

Rick Rosner: It depends on the context, but kindness is the most important in building a decent society. If people are consistently kind to each other, society can function well. You don’t have to understand others fully to be kind to them. Empathy extends the reach of your kindness. If you can only understand people like you, that limits who you’ll be kind to. But if you can work on empathy, it broadens your range. Intelligence is probably the least important when it comes to holding society together. Intelligence is for finding solutions when there’s no obvious solution already in place.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. So, to use something like your personal example, maybe, if someone is mildly gifted and can create problems up to, say, three and a third standard deviations above the norm. Still, you’re four or five or more standard deviations above the norm; you might overthink the problem and see patterns that weren’t meant to be there. You’ve probably walked through life seeing this happen, where even the most complicated occupations don’t require that high of an intelligence—personality might matter more. There’s a dual factor here—intelligence and personality.

Rosner: Trump and many of his supporters aren’t morons, but their personality makes them effectively moronic. They’re the “do your own research” people who lazily look into things or accept crappy arguments because they lack the curiosity or energy to poke holes in those arguments. They embrace ideas that support their prejudices without critically engaging with them. They aren’t so dumb that they couldn’t be taught that their views are based on faulty information. They don’t care enough to change their minds.

That’s true in life strategies, too. You can have average or slightly above-average intelligence and still succeed by following the standard behaviours that society lays out. One place where I went wrong was spending too much effort on failed strategies—like trying to get a girlfriend before I was boyfriend material.

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting point. The marker of being “boyfriend material” is constantly shifting, however.

Rosner: True. But I remember being in 4th grade, and I was despairing because I thought, “This is years away from being able to have sex with someone else!” It was way too early to be that concerned about it. But even then, I was worried about when and how I’d get a girlfriend. Other people around me didn’t seem worried, which confused me.

Jacobsen: That’s a lot of pressure at such a young age.

Rosner: It was. I went back to high school several times after graduating and saw a big difference. My class, the class of ’78, was horny. We bought into the idea that you shouldn’t leave high school with your virginity intact. But it was different when I saw the classes of ’79 and ’86. Many people didn’t seem to care as much about hooking up, which annoyed me. One guy in particular, who was cool, had a cool car and a decent personality. He wasn’t focused on hitting on girls at all. He spent his weekends hanging out in parking lots with his car buddies. When I asked him why he wasn’t worried about not having a girlfriend, he said, “You can’t worry about everything, man.” That attitude probably served him well later in life.

Jacobsen: It’s funny how sometimes simple advice like that can be exactly what we need to hear.

Rosner: If someone had told me back then, “You’ll be fine. Just do some basic things like lift weights, stay in shape, and be funny,” I probably would’ve been more chill. You’ll meet somebody. Just follow the path that most people follow—live your life, lower your standards, and meet someone perfectly acceptable. You don’t have to be brilliant to do that. It’s not a philosophy; it’s just about not worrying about stuff like that. It’s more of a passive strategy that people of all IQ levels follow.

And it has to work. Otherwise, we wouldn’t have 8 billion people on Earth. In my younger days, I’d spend at least 100 nights a year in bars—during the era when that’s where you went to hook up. I was mostly getting paid to work at bars, so I wasn’t just some sad case, spending two nights a week forlornly hanging out in a disco, hoping to hit on someone.

Jacobsen: At least you were getting paid to be there.

Rosner: Even if I didn’t meet someone, I was making money. And sometimes, I’d catch a fake ID or two, which I loved doing, or get involved in a brawl, which was usually fun.

Rick Rosner, American Comedy Writer, www.rickrosner.org

Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Independent Journalist, www.in-sightpublishing.com

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Josh Bowmar on Ethical Bowhunting and Conservation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/15

 *The Bowmars were convicted of “Conspiring to Violate the Lacey Act (2).*

Josh Bowmar, a passionate bowhunter and fitness expert. Co-owner of Bowmar Archery, Josh has hunted globally with his wife Sarah, supporting ethical hunting and wildlife conservation. With 2.24 million YouTube subscribers, Bowmar Bowhunting YouTube channel, Josh offers archery tips and insights into their innovative Beast Broadhead. As an IFBB Pro Men’s Physique athlete, he also highlights the connection between fitness and hunting performance. He’s excited to contribute to your platform’s community of hunters and outdoor enthusiasts.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was your start in hunting, particularly bow hunting?

Josh Bowmar: We were die-hard hunters, and honestly, most of the meat we ate was from what we hunted. That was cool, and that’s how I got my start. That’s where I began and where the foundation for my passion started. With a last name like Bowmar, you’re destined to be a bow hunter. 

Jacobsen: I also want to make a distinction between ordinary hunting and ethical hunting. Ethical hunting is tied to wildlife conservation. By analogy, as a non-expert, I think of something like fishing, where you can fish to catch food, and then there’s another form, like catch and release. So, how do you distinguish between ethical bow hunting and what I’m terming, for now, ordinary hunting?

Bowmar: That’s not a complicated question because the two go hand in hand. The better question would be: what’s the difference between killing something and ethically hunting something? Some people just kill, but being a killer versus being an ethical hunter is different. The word “ethics” should be understood as what is good for the animal. For example, if you’re hunting an endangered species and there are only a few left, and you kill one, that’s not good for the species—it could lead to extinction.

Ethical hunting, however, involves a few key factors. First, it’s about legality; you want to ensure you’re hunting within the legal guidelines, following the rules and tag laws the government sets. That’s number one. Second, you need to use the animal—harvest it for food. It’s important to eat what you hunt. Some hunters don’t do this with certain animals, and that’s when you need to ask yourself: why are you hunting if you’re not going to use the animal? There’s certainly a trophy aspect to hunting, and we can discuss that if you’d like.

However, when it comes to distinguishing ethical from unethical hunting, it boils down to the sustainability of the animal population and the value hunting adds to conservation efforts. Suppose hunting adds value to the animal, which generates revenue, which goes back into conservation efforts, supporting the animals, their habitats, and their populations. Without that value, there’s no protection for the species, and eradication can be the result. If nobody hunts an animal, farmers aren’t incentivized to lease land for wildlife habitats, and they might resort to poisoning animals to protect their crops.

Africa is a great example. I digress from the question. Still, it’s a deep rabbit hole when we get into the sustainability of hunting, ethics, and the differences between trophy hunting and non-trophy hunting. There’s a lot to talk about. 

Jacobsen: If we take Africa as an example, you’ve been on these long hunting trips. What do you notice in that context where ethical bow hunting is an important consideration?

Bowmar: Well, Africa is the best example of conservation. For instance, if I go there and hunt big game—let’s say I hunt an antelope—I obviously can’t eat all of it. That would contradict my earlier point about using the animals I hunt. But just because I’m not the one eating it doesn’t mean the animal isn’t used. A lot of the meat is donated to the local community.

For example, if I shoot a large Cape buffalo with around 1,000 pounds of meat, we distribute it to the locals at no charge. They get the meat, and it’s a win-win for the community and conservation efforts. Now, let’s take the ethical aspect further and consider what happens when hunting is banned. This occurred in Kenya, which banned hunting and used to be one of the most popular hunting destinations in the 1970s and 1980s.

This historical example shows us the consequences of such a ban. While I don’t know the exact numbers, it’s been estimated that close to 70% of the animal population in Kenya was wiped out after hunting was prohibited. The only places where animals still thrive are in protected national parks. You might think, “If people aren’t hunting, why are the animals dying?” It seems counterintuitive—if you stop killing animals, the population should grow, right? But that’s not what happens, especially in Africa.

The reason is tied to the local people. In many parts of Africa, food is a form of currency, and meat, in particular, is highly valued. It’s hard to come by, and when hunting is banned, the locals turn to poaching to meet their needs. They over-harvest wildlife, killing everything they can to sell the meat for profit.

When hunting is legal, however, the situation changes. Money from hunting is invested in the community and conservation efforts. Take an outfitter, for example, who manages 10,000 acres bordering a community. That community agrees not to kill animals in exchange for the meat paid hunters provide. Legal hunting incentivizes sustainable wildlife use, benefiting the community and animal populations.

Do you know there’s value in that animal? That value is translated into money, which goes to the outfitter and the community. The outfitter is then incentivized to protect the animals and prevent eradication by working with the local people and tribes.

For example, if someone is caught poaching, the tribe doesn’t receive meat for three months. It’s like a self-policing system, almost like a kangaroo court, where the community enforces their own rules. If someone poaches an animal, the whole tribe suffers by losing access to meat for three months. The tribe will hold the poacher accountable because his actions harm the entire community. A symbiotic relationship between the hunters, the animals, and the local people makes the ecosystem thrive.

Without money from hunting, those animals would become a burden to protect. Communities can’t afford to protect animals or stop poaching without the necessary funds and resources. So, animal populations thrive in areas where hunting is allowed and regulated. In contrast, in regions of Africa where hunting has been banned, animal populations decline significantly. Kenya is a prime example of this; after they banned hunting, their animal population plummeted.

Jacobsen: So you’re referring to a communal value system involving both the locals and tourists—whether bow hunters or professionals—based on ethics rather than just informal or unwritten rules?

Bowmar: Exactly. It doesn’t have to be tourists or foreigners coming in to hunt. The system works similarly everywhere as long as there are regulations in place. For example, if I want to buy a deer tag in Iowa, I must pay for it. That money goes to the government, and I can only shoot one buck with that tag. If I want to shoot another buck, I have to pay again. Some states have stricter limits, but a financial exchange goes back into conservation efforts, including funding rangers and staff who protect the animals and enforce laws around wildlife conservation.

The same principles apply in Africa. When there are rules and regulations, and people pay to hunt animals, that money can go back into programs that protect the animals and enforce laws. It’s similar to any legal system: people rob stores, but there are real consequences when they do. The problem occurs when hunting is banned. There’s no longer a hunting category in the government, which means there’s no funding or resources to protect the animals.

Of course, I’m simplifying things, but that’s the general idea. For example, if someone poaches an animal, law enforcement might investigate. Still, I’m not fully familiar with every African country’s rules and regulations.

Based on my experience in Tanzania, South Africa, and Uganda—places where I’ve spent time hunting—tourism hunting is definitely where the most revenue comes from. That money is reinvested into those properties, improving the habitat and enhancing the quality of life for the animals. This also ensures the longevity of harvesting specific animals, rather than just indiscriminately killing any animal. And that’s where ethics come into play. Whether they agree with trophy hunting or hunting in general, non-hunters need to understand that this isn’t about personal preference.

The reality is that nothing in the wild dies of old age. Many people imagine that animals, like hippopotamus, will eventually find a tree, lay down, and peacefully die of old age. But that’s different from how it works. When an animal becomes too slow or weak in the wild, it gets eaten alive. There are no exceptions. Once an animal becomes unable to contribute to its group, herd, or ecosystem and can no longer fend for itself, it will be killed and eaten alive, which is one of the most horrific deaths imaginable.

As hunters, we train to be as professional and ethical as possible, at least the good ones do. We target animals at the end of their life—old, mature bulls, rams, or bucks. Whatever the species, we focus on the older animals. The local community utilizes the meat from those animals. As a hunter, you’re paying to harvest those specific African animals. In the United States, if you hunt on your property, the value is in the hunt experience and the meat you get from the animal.

So, no matter where you hunt, value is always exchanged for the animal. And that’s why hunting is so critically important—even non-hunters should support it if they care about the survival of species and the health of wildlife populations.

Jacobsen: When you’re bowhunting older or more infirm animals that would likely be picked off earlier in the wild, what do you target on the animal to ensure a quicker or more humane death?

Bowmar: Well, being a bowhunter, I always make it as challenging as possible for myself. If I had the option to use a gun, I could shoot much further, and it would be easier—there’s no question about that. However, bowhunting requires a lot more practice and proficiency to be skilled enough to shoot an animal effectively with a bow.

To answer your question about ensuring a fast and humane death, it’s important to understand that I give the animal a greater chance to escape by choosing to be a bowhunter. The main difference between rifle hunting and bowhunting is that with a rifle, once you see the animal, the hunt is essentially over. But with bowhunting, when you see the animal, the real hunt has only just begun. The key is precision—hitting vital organs, such as the heart or lungs, to ensure a quick and humane kill.

There’s a significant difference with bowhunting because you have to get close. When you get close, you enter the animal’s senses—its eyesight, smell, hearing, and awareness of the many dangers around. That animal is likely to get away, and as a bowhunter, that’s okay. But if everything goes right, and you’re about to take the shot, the success of that shot depends on the steps taken up to that point, including how well you’ve trained as an archer and shooter.

I spend much time practicing with my bow to ensure I can make the best possible shot when the moment comes. I also use lethal-tipped broadheads or arrows. Specifically, I use my brand, Beast Broadheads, the most technologically advanced broadhead ever engineered. It kills animals faster than anything else we’ve seen due to its blade sharpness and precision. There are many factors to ensure a quick, humane kill and a big part of that is avoiding bad shots—shots that have a low chance of hitting the right spot to ensure the animal dies within 60 seconds.

At the end of the day, though, you’re still hunting animals, and things can go wrong. However, the goal is to always put yourself in a position where failures are extremely rare.

Jacobsen: What do you do with more amateur or inexperienced bowhunters who come along to learn how to make good shots and develop the patience needed to get close for more proficient, efficient kills?

Bowmar: I don’t take people hunting; I’m not a guide or outfitter. But for people trying to learn, it’s like mastering any other skill. It takes much time, and repetition is the mother of all skills. It’s about going out, trying, failing, and learning a little each time until you get it right. Over the years, you get better and better.

If someone wants to accelerate their learning, they can hire an outfitter who is also a bowhunter and can mentor them during the hunt. But the less experienced you are, the more limited your hunting capabilities. For beginners, it’s often best to hunt in controlled environments, like overbait or at watering holes, where the shots are closer and easier. Stalking and sneaking up on animals in the wild, particularly in western hunting, where you’re trying to get close without being detected, is much harder.

Jacobsen: Even as an experienced bowhunter, what are some critical aspects of maintaining fitness, health, and skill in your shot? How much do you have to practice? How much do you need to maintain your physique for this sport?

Bowmar: It depends on what you’re hunting. Suppose you’re going into the high country to hunt elk, hiking 10 miles daily at 7,000 to 10,000 feet. In that case, it requires an enormous amount of training and endurance. Even in Africa, the conditions are tough. We’re out in the sun for 12 to 14 hours daily, sweating constantly. We’re doing stalk after stalk and typically covering 2 to 6 miles daily with gear. You often need to run from one spot to the next to get into the right position to cut off your target animal.

So, fitness makes things easier—there’s no question. But it’s not always necessary, depending on what you’re hunting. For example, if you’re in a deer stand hunting whitetail, you might not need to be in top physical condition. However, suppose you’re hunting out west or doing free-range hunts in Africa, like in Tanzania, where there’s lots of hiking. In that case, you need to be in shape. You must maintain good cardiovascular endurance because if you’re out of breath after a run to get into position, you won’t be able to make an accurate shot.

In any sport, being in good physical shape helps, not hurts.

Jacobsen: What would you consider your most memorable bowhunting story?

Bowmar: There are just too many to narrow it down to one. It’s impossible to pick a single favourite. But I’ll give you a brief overview and answer your question.

When I hunt here in Iowa, on my farm, there are deer that I’ve been pursuing for years—not just one hunt, but years of effort. So, those hunts hold a special place in my heart. Then there’s hunting in Africa, like in Tanzania. One of my most memorable hunts was 2022, when I shot a world-record crocodile. It measured 16 and a half feet, breaking the record by almost a foot. It was an absolute monster and a crazy memory, especially since such a large croc is rare. This one was probably over 100 years old.

There are so many animals and experiences to choose from—it’s hard to pick one. Every hunt is special in its way. Most non-hunters don’t realize how significant and memorable each hunt can be.

Each hunt creates a core memory you’ll always remember. It’s a deeply spiritual, emotional experience and incredibly primal. Most people have never experienced anything like it, so they don’t understand what it feels like.

But I can promise you, if you ever hunt and succeed, you’ll unlock deep, ancestral, primal instincts you’ve never felt before. You’ll be like, “Wow, this is very different from anything I’ve experienced emotionally and in terms of accomplishment.” Then you realize, “Wow, if I’m alive today, it’s because I come from a line of successful hunters.” If they weren’t, they wouldn’t have survived. It’s not a question of whether you have hunters in your lineage but how far back you must go to find them.

Tapping into that ancestral part of yourself unlocks something profound—it’s hard to describe unless you’re a hunter. The accomplishment, adrenaline, and achievement from successfully harvesting an animal that feeds your family are unique. Eating that animal, having a relationship with your food rather than having someone else do the killing, is a different experience.

I’ve met many people who are against hunting but still eat meat. And I ask them, “Do you think the cow that became your burger committed suicide?” No, someone else did the killing for you. So, if you’re against hunting but eat meat, there’s a contradiction there. I’m going out and killing my food while you’re having someone else do it for you. There’s a big difference.

Imagine going out and hunting an animal that you had to outsmart, pursue, and finally harvest. Then, you butcher the meat and feed your family. It’s a different experience than just getting a cheeseburger from the store.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or reflections for individuals looking to get into bowhunting or those curious about the philosophy and ethics of ethical hunting? As you explained earlier, it’s only sometimes obvious how hunting impacts conservation.

Bowmar: Yeah, I have some final thoughts. If you want to get into hunting, the first step is finding a local pro shop—an archery pro shop. These guys will teach you how to shoot, and they’ll sell you a bow. That’s a crucial first step.

As for conservation, it’s very clear: wherever there is a lot of regulated hunting controlled by the government and agencies, there’s also a thriving population of animals. In fact, in some places, animal populations grow so much that the authorities have to hire people to manage the population by shooting more animals. Hunting contributes significantly to conservation, even though it might be obvious to everyone.

If you truly care about animals, you should greatly support hunting. Whether you like it or not, or however you choose to view it, hunters have the biggest impact on environmental health and the well-being of the animals that live there.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Josh, thank you for your time today and for giving us some insight into bowhunting and the ethics of hunting in general.

Bowmar: Absolutely. Feel free to reach out anytime. I enjoyed it.

Jacobsen: Excellent. All right.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Luke Powers on National Homelessness Statistics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/14

Luke Powers is a business professional who helps people donate more effectively. As a graduate of the University of Notre Dame’s Mendoza College of Business, Luke majored in management consulting and minored in innovation and entrepreneurship. He is passionate about leveraging his business expertise to make a positive impact. His interests include business development, start-up strategy, and consultative sales. Luke is based in Miami, Florida, and continues to develop his entrepreneurial skills. SmileHub released new reports on the Best Charities for Homeless Support and the States That Help Homeless People the Most in 2024.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Luke Powers from SmileHub. We’ll focus on five critical areas regarding homelessness in the United States. To start, what is the current state of homelessness in the U.S.?

Luke Powers: National homelessness is at a critical juncture. Over 580,000 people are affected, according to the latest estimates, many of whom face systemic barriers such as mental health challenges and a lack of affordable housing. Chronic homelessness is at its highest level in recent years, as many states struggle to provide sufficient resources despite varied efforts to address the crisis. These combined factors have created a situation where nearly one-quarter of all homeless individuals experience chronic patterns of homelessness. States like California and New York lead the way in overall homeless numbers, while states in the Southeast and South, such as Tennessee and Georgia, lag significantly in providing adequate support. The situation is exacerbated by expensive rental markets and insufficient shelter availability, leading many people experiencing homelessness to remain unsheltered.

Jacobsen: Where would you say the situation is the worst, either by state or, if available, by city?

Powers: While I don’t have specific city-level data, I can tell you that the bottom three states—ranking 50th, 49th, and 48th—are Tennessee, Georgia, and South Carolina in terms of providing sufficient support for people experiencing homelessness. If you visit our blog page, you can see the detailed rankings. The Southeast region consistently ranks poorly, with six states in the bottom ten—seven if you include Louisiana. Tennessee, Georgia, Florida, and South Carolina, in particular, struggle with high rates of unsheltered individuals and significant barriers to accessing affordable housing and essential services.

Jacobsen: Which areas have the lowest levels of homelessness?

Powers: Based on the data, there’s a general trend across the Midwest and Northeast where states provide better support for individuals experiencing homelessness. Connecticut, Illinois, North Dakota, Maryland, New York, Indiana, Massachusetts, Minnesota, Wyoming, and Montana are the top ten states supporting homeless individuals. Montana stands out as an outlier from that regional pattern but still performs well in homelessness support.

Jacobsen: What are the notable outlier states, and what are the reasons for their rankings for reducing and increasing homelessness? To clarify, outliers on the subfactors for reduced and increased homelessness.

Powers: Let me break this down into three primary categories: shelters and housing support, homeless support services, and food and health support. For positive outliers, Connecticut ranks in the top 16 across all categories. It is in the top four for shelter, housing, food, and health support. On the other hand, Tennessee ranks last (50th) in shelters and housing support, 46th in food and health support, and 26th in homeless youth support. Homeless youth support is a critical factor where Tennessee struggles, and these low rankings in shelters, housing, and food and health support contribute to its overall poor performance.

If you’re looking at larger states, California ranks 21st overall, but despite having the largest homeless population in the country, they are 43rd in shelters and housing support. Despite considerable efforts, this illustrates the state’s ongoing challenges in effectively addressing homelessness.

So, getting that support is difficult. However, they are ranked number one in homeless youth support and just below average at 30th in food and health support. Texas, another one of our largest states, ranks 36th overall. They are 29th in shelters and housing support, 5th in homeless youth support, but ranked last, 50th in food and health support. So, you can see how some bigger states have issues, even if they perform well in certain areas.

Jacobsen: What tends to reduce the level of homelessness in realistic terms?

Powers: Reducing homelessness is a complex issue and requires a multifaceted approach. This includes increasing the availability of affordable housing, providing adequate shelters and support services, and addressing healthcare and employment barriers. States that implement supportive policies, such as expanded Medicaid and protections for people experiencing homelessness, or states with fewer anti-homeless policies tend to see reductions in homelessness. Investments in charities, mental health services, and employment opportunities also help reduce homelessness. Key factors include reducing the hours needed to afford housing and improving access to education and employment.

Jacobsen: Are there any other important topics related to this report that we should highlight?

Powers: We’ve covered the significant aspects of the report. My only question was whether you’d like more details about larger states like Florida and New York.

Jacobsen: Yes, let’s continue with that. Please share the information on New York, Florida, and Pennsylvania to round out the top five largest states by population.

Powers: Sure. New York ranks fifth among the five most populous states, placing fifth overall. It is fifth in shelters and housing support, 21st in homeless youth support, and 20th in food and health support. Despite being just slightly above average in two of those categories, it performs well in shelters and housing support, which raises its overall ranking.

Conversely, Florida ranks 43rd overall, 46th in shelters and housing support, 10th in homeless youth support, and 45th in food and health support. This shows a trend of the most populous states struggling to support their large homeless populations.

Lastly, Pennsylvania ranks 11th overall. Like other states in the Midwest and Northeast, they perform relatively well, ranking 21st in shelters and housing support, 19th in homeless youth support, and 6th in food and health support.

States that rank highly in these categories typically offer better support services for their populations, such as more mental health counsellors per capita, fewer anti-homeless policies, more healthcare centers for people experiencing homelessness, lower unemployment rates, and fewer unsheltered homeless individuals. They also have laws protecting sources of income, more emergency housing vouchers per person experiencing homelessness, and lower minimum wages required to afford a studio apartment. It isn’t easy to cover every topic in this discussion, but I’ve highlighted some of the most critical factors. Let me know if you need more information.

Jacobsen: That should be all for now. I appreciate your time today and all the information you’ve shared. Hopefully, we can do more of these in the future.

Powers: Absolutely. To see more of our reports, visit smilehub.org/blog.

Jacobsen: Great. Thank you so much for your time, Luke. I appreciate it.

Powers: Thanks, Scott. Have a good one!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub: Underprivileged States in 2024

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/16 (Unpublished)

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. West Virginia has the most underprivileged children due to high foster care rates, economic instability, and child maltreatment. Mississippi’s high infant mortality ties to poverty and healthcare challenges. Expanding the Child Tax Credit could significantly reduce child poverty, providing vital economic support.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What factors contribute to West Virginia having the most underprivileged children?

Chip Lupo: West Virginia ranks as the state with the most underprivileged children, largely because it has the highest proportion of children in foster care and children living with grandparents. These socio-economic factors, among others, often reflect family instability or economic strain.

Additionally, nearly one-third of West Virginia’s children have parents who lack secure employment, and more than 22% live below the poverty line, which leaves many children without sufficient access to food and other essentials. 

These issues are compounded by the fact that West Virginia experiences high incidents of child maltreatment and one of the highest shares of teens experiencing prolonged sadness or hopelessness, which further jeopardizes their mental and emotional well-being.  

Jacobsen: How does child food insecurity in Louisiana compare to other states?

Lupo: Louisiana has the highest child food-insecurity rate in the U.S. This rate significantly outpaces other states, as the best-to-worst difference is twice that of Massachusetts, the state with the lowest child food-insecurity rate.

Jacobsen: Why does Mississippi have the highest infant death rate?

Lupo: Mississippi’s high infant mortality rate is tied to critical socio-economic and healthcare challenges facing the state’s children and families such as the highest percentage of children living in households with below-poverty income, which contributes to limited access to nutritious food, stable housing, and consistent healthcare. 

Additionally, Mississippi has a high child food insecurity ranking, and many families struggle with health care-related costs, which leads to inadequate  preventive and maternal care. These factors, combined with limited economic opportunities, have a direct effect on infant health outcomes, triggering a need for targeted support in healthcare access, economic stability, and early childhood resources.

Jacobsen: What are some of the key differences in child maltreatment rates, the best and worst states for it?

Lupo: There are troubling disparities across the U.S. in terms of child maltreatment rates, as certain states experience much higher levels of abuse and neglect. For example, states such as Massachusetts and West Virginia exhibit some of the highest rates of maltreatment, which place children at heightened risk for physical, emotional, and developmental harm.

In contrast, states such as New Jersey and Washington report significantly lower maltreatment rates. To put this in perspective, children in Massachusetts experience a 10x higher risk of maltreatment than those in New Jersey, highlighting the need for more targeted resources and support systems in states where children are most vulnerable.

Jacobsen: What are the most effective programs currently available to address childhood poverty?

Lupo: Among the most effective programs to combat childhood poverty is the expansion of the Child Tax Credit (CTC). This initiative targets children in low-income families, particularly those who currently receive a partial or no credit. The program aims to ensure equitable benefits across families, especially those historically marginalized, such as Black, Latino, and American Indian and Alaska Native children by removing the “refundability cap” and implementing a “per-child” phase-in structure.

Additionally, the introduction of a “lookback” provision allows families to use their prior-year income for credit calculations, which would offer stability amid economic fluctuations. The anticipated effect is significant: in the first year, it could lift hundreds of thousands of children above the poverty line and help millions more move closer to it.

Jacobsen: How could an expansion of the Child Tax Credit impact child poverty rates?

Lupo: Expanding the Child Tax Credit could significantly reduce child poverty rates by addressing some core disadvantages faced by underprivileged children. Poverty affects 1 in 6 children in the U.S., which creates barriers to essentials like nutritious food, stable housing, and education. An enhanced Child Tax Credit would support low-income families’ fundamental needs that, when met, would foster healthier childhood development and set a stronger foundation for success in adulthood.

Jacobsen: How did the temporary expansion of the Child Tax Credit, during the pandemic, affect child poverty levels?

Lupo: The temporary expansion of the Child Tax Credit during the pandemic dramatically reduced child poverty to historic lows in 2021, helping narrow racial and ethnic disparities in child poverty in the process. However, when the tax credit and other pandemic relief measures expired in 2022, the number of children in poverty surged to about 5 million. This is a classic example of how child poverty levels are heavily influenced by policy decisions.

Jacobsen: What are the long-term consequences of growing up in poverty?

Lupo: Growing up in poverty often leads to disadvantages that can affect a child’s entire life. Children in low-income households face higher rates of food insecurity, health issues, and educational barriers, which can impair their ability to thrive.

For example, states such as Mississippi and West Virginia with high rates of child poverty experience increased rates of maltreatment, depression, and homelessness among children. This can have detrimental effects on mental health and social stability well into adulthood. So without essential support in health, education, and welfare, these children are at a high risk of becoming adults who will struggle to break out of poverty.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pamela Rutledge, Social Media Use and Positive Psychology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/16

Dr. Pamela Rutledge is a renowned media psychologist combining 20+ years of experience as a media producer with deep expertise in human behavior. She serves as the Director of the Media Psychology Research Center and is Professor Emerita of Fielding Graduate University’s Media Psychology program, where she develops courses on social technologies, audience engagement, and brand psychology. Her work spans design, development, and audience impact, helping clients like 20th Century Fox, Warner Bros., and the US Department of Defense build actionable consumer strategies and consumers create healthy relationships with media. Recognized by the American Psychological Association for her contributions, Dr. Rutledge has co-authored Exploring Positive Psychology: The Science of Happiness and Well-Being and contributed to notable works on media psychology. An expert source for outlets like The NY Times and Good Morning America, she also authors “Positively Media” for Psychology Today and is Editor-in-Chief of Media Psychology Review. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Social media is the name of the game for so many people now. What is the positive psychology orientation on social media use compared to the general use by, apparently, most people–so healthier and unhealthier uses of it?

Pamela Rutledge: Social media is getting a lot of attention right now, with people worrying about the negative effects. Social media, however, is any technology that enables us to connect socially across the internet. It has a lot of different platforms and uses, from connecting with friends and entertainment to finding useful information, building skills, and increasing productivity. How we use social media determines whether the impact is positive or negative. In spite of the current moral panic, social media effects vary widely from positive to negative based on individual differences.

Positive psychology focuses on the cultivation of skills and values that increase our sense of well-being, not just momentarily feeling good—what psychologists call hedonic happiness–but also longer-term satisfactions or eudaimonic happiness. Eudaimonic comes from the Greek concept of flourishing or living well, which emphasizes a meaningful life rather than simply seeking pleasure. We tend to stereotype social media use as short-term emotional fixes, but many interactions and content can foster a sense of meaning, purpose, and growth, contributing to a deeper sense of well-being and satisfaction with life.  Well-being and satisfaction, however, are a combination of both types of happiness: positive emotions and well-being or life satisfaction.

Positive emotions are pretty straightforward. They include things like happiness, joy, optimism, and hope.  However, well-being is more complicated and is a result of our ability to meet our basic needs.  These needs can be summarized by three things: 1) social connection and belonging, 2) agency—or our ability to take action and not feel helpless in our environment, and 3) competence, or our ability to act effectively when we take action. It’s easy to see how interacting on social media is motivated by these intrinsic drivers of human behavior: social media allows us to connect, take action, and see evidence of our actions. 

However, positive psychology also focuses on values as well as intrinsic motivations. Values are deeply held beliefs about what is important and meaningful in life, guiding our choices and actions toward a fulfilling and meaningful existence. They are a compass, influencing our decisions, behaviors, and interactions with the world around us. Culture and cultural norms play a significant role in shaping our values—our family, friends, and community influence what we believe is good, right, and important. The definitions of happiness, the prioritized values, and how life should be lived can vary significantly across cultures and social groups. 

People learn values through socialization. Family is one of the main sources of values, as children learn values directly from parents and other family members through observation, modeling, and explicit instruction. Similarly, friends, colleagues, and groups implicitly communicate values by reinforcing accepted behavioral norms required for group membership.

Media, including books, movies, music, and social media, also expose people to values and beliefs, shaping their understanding of the world.

Jacobsen: If people are using social media from super young ages and seeing them used from a young age, what is the impact on the development of personality?

Rutledge: Personality development is influenced by many factors: biological, intellectual, social, cultural, and situational. Social media is just one source of influence, and research in this area is correlational, not causal.  In other words, things may be related, but that doesn’t answer the chicken-and-egg question of whether one causes the other or if there are other factors involved. 

Social media, however, exposes users to images and lifestyles that can lead to negative social comparison. Social comparison, by the way, is a normal response to social situations and part of our survival instinct. Assessing our roles in a social environment was a critical factor in our survival and, in many senses, still is. Our ability to read what others want, empathize with their situations, and understand group dynamics is central to our ability to navigate our social world. 

Much of the concern about social media comes from assuming that it triggers negative social comparison in all users, thus damaging self-esteem and body image. These types of generalizations are vastly overstated.

Jacobsen: Does excessive social media use make people more self-involved digitally impair or improve empathy and narcissistic tendencies, lead to a idealized sense of self rather than a genuine one, impact the perception of everyone on individuals’ lives other than their own and potentially, lead to something like a constant validation loop? 

Rutledge: Before I answer each of those questions, I want to emphasize that social media use does not have a binary influence: this or that, all or nothing. No social media effects impact ALL users, and not all effects are the same. In fact, there are many different forms of social media with different participation and consumption behaviors (e.g., Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, video games, WhatsApp, forums, blogs, etc.).

Almost all social media research is self-reported and correlational. A correlation is a relationship, but it is not causal or directional.  All research is based on probabilities of something happening, not a certain outcome (e.g., “is likely to,” not “is”). So, a study that says excessive social media use is more likely to make people more self-involved would also say that more self-involved people are more likely to use social media excessively. This is true of concerns over mental health, narcissism, idealized self and identity development, inauthentic sense of self, and reliance on social validation of others. Research findings vary a lot based on how the researcher asks the questions and defines the variables.  For example, what is “excessive” social media use? 

But let’s focus on some fundamentals. Social media is relatively new, so people don’t innately have the skills to manage an always-on digital world with limitless information and access to a wider public than we can even conceive.  Our brains were not designed for this, which makes all of us, not just young people, vulnerable and reactive unless we learn the skills to anticipate our innate, primal tendencies and step into self-manage. Our brains are wired to notice change, to focus our attention on things that are out of the ordinary, to attend to interruptions (warnings), especially if they have a social component, to seek an understanding of our social and physical environment, and to adapt our behaviors to be fit in with our desired social groups.  All these innate tendencies were essential to our survival back in the Savannah.

When talking about kids, combine these innate factors with normal biological and neurological changes over their lifespan, and it helps understand the development tasks that shift motivations as people mature. For example, the normal developmental tasks of adolescents are identity development and the building of a social life outside the nuclear family. Recognizing this, it makes sense that teens would be focused on social media, connecting with friends, and keeping up with pop cultural trends to maintain social capital. Teens also do not have a fully developed prefrontal cortex, so they are less able to value longer-term goals and outcomes in favor of near-term rewards. 

The best approaches for keeping kids healthy and safe online are to give them training and the tools to understand and navigate the digital space and establish an open and trusting line of communication between parents and kids. Suppression and bans only make technology more desirable while making it less likely kids will come to you when there’s a problem. 

When young people can reflect on their technology use and its effect on their lives through the lens of digital literacy, they gain valuable skills essential to success on and offline.  For example, digital literacy teaches how persuasive technology manipulates attention, the psychology of positive and negative social comparisons, how to identify information sources and validity, how to search for information effectively, how to manage privacy settings, strategies for dealing with conflict, bullies, and trolls, and how to translate personal values, like respect, compassion, and empathy, to online behavior. Armed with digital literacy skills, young people are much less likely to have problematic social media use and much more likely to be able to avoid or at least handle trouble, misinformation, scams, and bullies.

Jacobsen: Does excessive social media use make people more self-involved or more other-involved? 

Rutledge: Social media can do both, depending on the context, how people use it, and their self-awareness. People who are vulnerable to the opinions of others may become preoccupied with fitting in, whether that’s looks, clothes, or gaming skills. On the other hand, social media can make people aware of social issues around the world, expanding someone’s view of self and others.

Jacobsen: Does media consumption digitally impair or improve factors like empathy and narcissistic tendencies? 

Rutledge: Social media consumption has been related to both.  Social media has been associated with an increased ability to understand and share others’ feelings and increase compassion, encouraging perspective-taking. However, empathy has been shown to decrease when social media is linked with polarization by reinforcing preexisting beliefs and reducing cognitive flexibility. It has also been linked to diminished empathy through desensitization to tragedy through constant exposure.

Jacobsen: How does online presentation, typically, lead to a idealized, curated form of the Self rather than a genuine, realistic one?

Rutledge: Online presentation typically leads to an idealized, curated demonstration of the self rather than a genuine, realistic one. People are motivated to show a positive and desirable public image, often leading them to select and edit the content they share carefully. This phenomenon is not unique to social media. People also curate their looks when they go to many offline activities, e.g., job interviews and parties, to present a desirable version of themselves that aligns with social norms and expectations. 

The pressure to conform can lead to idealized standards of appearance, lifestyle, and achievement that, if internalized, can lead to increased social anxiety and can negatively impact self-esteem and self-worth.  However, online platforms can also provide opportunities for self-expression and aspiration that have a positive impact.

Jacobsen: How does this impact the perception of everyone on individuals’ lives other than their own?

Rutledge: Without critical thinking, people may see social media like Instagram as an accurate representation of life rather than an artificial (and often filtered) construct. This can activate negative emotions, such as jealousy or feeling inferior, or it can be inspirational, depending on the user’s focus. The key here is critical thinking, knowledge of technology, like filters, and recognizing the human tendency for social comparison to provide context for content interpretation.

Jacobsen: Do these, potentially lead to something like a constant validation loop? They have to keep up with the next hot or popular trend.

Rutledge: The “constant validation loop” describes a cycle where people seek constant external validation through likes, comments, and shares on their posts, leading to an unhealthy reliance on social media for self-worth. When we receive positive feedback online, our brains release dopamine, creating a sense of pleasure and reward, reinforcing the behavior, and motivating us to seek more validation. Instant feedback offers a quick boost to our self-esteem, but the feeling is not sustained. Similarly, when we constantly measure our lives against the often idealized lives of others, it can increase feelings of inadequacy, also leading to a greater need for validation to fill the void.

Social validation is not restricted to online experiences. We see it every day in schools, the office, and community organizations—who has the most money, the best clothes, the fastest car, the smartest children, etc. The potential negatives of an unhealthy reliance on external validation include low self-esteem, addiction, anxiety, depression, and dissatisfaction with self or life. 

There are, however, strategies to recognize and manage this tendency.  These include building awareness of how your social media use and need for validation impact your well-being, setting boundaries (like blocking negative triggers) and limiting the time spent on social media platforms, focusing on internal validation by cultivating self-compassion, appreciating your strengths and accomplishments, finding activities that make you feel happy and fulfilled, such as spending time with loved ones, pursuing hobbies, or engaging in physical activity. 

Jacobsen: How does anonymity in some areas of the internet impact treatment of self and others, so social interactions?

Rutledge: Anonymity plays a significant role in crowd behavior, often leading to people acting differently than they would alone or in smaller, more identifiable groups. This is deindividuation, where people lose their sense of self-awareness and personal identity within a crowd, reducing their sense of responsibility and increasing conformity to group norms. The more people want to belong to a group, the more likely they are to suppress their individual sense of self and conform to the group norms.

Motivations for seeking anonymity online vary. Individuals with negative or developing self-perceptions may be drawn to anonymity because it gives them the freedom to explore different personas to fulfill self-related or identity needs. Individuals struggling with self-consciousness, social anxiety, and low self-esteem also tend to prefer anonymity online. In contrast, people with darker personality traits use anonymity online to satisfy more antisocial goals, like deceiving or bullying others. 

Jacobsen: How can social media be used to encourage prosocial behaviours?

Rutledge: Digital literacy is the first step in promoting prosocial online behaviors. It emphasizes the responsible use of technology and online safety and encourages critical thinking. When it comes to young people, parents can model the kind of behavior they’d like to see their kids emulate, from device use to treating others with respect.

Prosocial behavior involves actions that are intended to help or benefit others. There is no line between online and offline in today’s world. Digital citizenship is just an extension of the behavior we want to see and teach in person. Prosocial actions can be encouraged at home, at school, and at work by emphasizing the importance of a range of actions, from simple acts of kindness, such as sharing or comforting a friend, to more complex behaviors like volunteering or standing up against injustice. 

Publicly valuing prosocial behavior can shift social norms and culture and has numerous benefits. It not only promotes positive relationships and a sense of belonging but also fosters emotional well-being and resilience. People who engage in prosocial behavior tend to have higher levels of happiness and life satisfaction.

Jacobsen: What have been the largest cultural impacts of social media technology to date, and will likely be those large cultural changes stemming from them in the near future?

Rutledge: Social media has significantly influenced culture by shaping social interactions, communication, expectations, and societal values. 

Global connectivity has allowed people from different cultures and backgrounds to connect, share ideas, and collaborate. The rapid dissemination of information on social media has transformed how news is shared and consumed. This immediacy can lead to greater awareness of global and social events, but the volume of information also leads to information bubbles and the spread of misinformation.

Changes in how people communicate have driven expectations toward shorter, visual forms of communication like memes, gifs, and videos and rapid response.

Exposure to curated representations of others’ lives can lead to feelings of inadequacy and negative social comparison, impacting self-esteem and mental health for some users but providing opportunities for connecting with people that were previously beyond our reach.

Social media platforms allow anyone to create and share content, leading to a diversification of voices and perspectives that challenge traditional media narratives and also to the spread of conspiracy theories and misinformation with the potential for influencing political landscapes and bad actors.

Digital literacy and accountability are necessary for us to benefit from the positives and limit the negatives.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Pamela.

Rutledge: My pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub on Best and Worst Cities for Singles

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/15

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discussed the dynamics of dating in the U.S., noting that 46% of adults are unmarried. Dating costs have risen due to inflation and location-based economic factors. Cities like Atlanta, Las Vegas, and Seattle attract singles with fun and recreation, even if economics are challenging. Tinder’s popularity, broadband access, and smartphone usage significantly impact dating opportunities. Economic pressures, particularly in low-income areas, influence dating activity, while wealthier cities face demographic challenges. Cultural and economic trends in thriving metro areas like Seattle, Atlanta, and Las Vegas shape their appeal to singles.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, once again, we are here for the third day in a row with Chip Lupo, a WalletHub analyst. This discussion is a bit more lighthearted compared to the topic of elder abuse we covered last time.

I deal with a lot of human rights abuse issues, which can be quite heavy most of the time. So, it’s refreshing to discuss a lighter topic like this. According to the U.S. Census Bureau, 46% of the U.S. adult population is unmarried. This category includes those who have never been married, divorced, or widowed.

This statistic has created interesting American dating and marital landscape dynamics. Additionally, date-related activities have risen in price over the years due to inflation and other economic factors. So, what explains this trend of 46% of adults being unmarried in the United States? And why has dating become so prohibitively expensive?

Lupo: To address the second part of your question, dating has become more expensive primarily due to inflation. Depending on where you live, the cost of living may be higher, contributing to the expense. Whether it’s a trip to the movies, a sporting event, or a museum, factors like travel costs and the overall cost of living play a significant role. This can make dating quite costly, particularly in cities with abundant activities for singles.

The best cities for singles typically balance affordability with fun and recreation. As you mentioned, the unmarried demographic is diverse, encompassing those who have never married and those who are divorced or widowed. What appeals to one segment of this group may not resonate with another.

WalletHub’s research ranks the best cities for singles based on economics, fun and recreation, and dating opportunities. The top cities include Atlanta, Georgia; Las Vegas, Nevada; Seattle, Washington; Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; and Tampa, Florida. These cities rank highly, especially for their fun and recreational offerings, which often outweigh economic considerations.

You’re correct in observing that these cities emphasize fun and recreation, which offsets the financial challenges. The best cities tend to achieve a balance, but fun and recreation often take precedence. For instance, Atlanta and Las Vegas rank first and second in the fun and recreation category. However, Atlanta is slightly more expensive overall.

Dating opportunities. Now, this is an interesting dynamic, especially regarding dating opportunities. That boils down to factors such as, first and foremost, the share of the single population. There are some cities — and we’re talking strictly about cities, not the surrounding metro areas — where this dynamic plays out differently. This limitation negatively affects some high-population cities that are closer to larger urban areas.

Dating opportunities also consider the share of the single population, gender balance, and online dating opportunities. By “online dating opportunities,” we mean the share of households with broadband internet, enabling residents to access dating websites or apps. Mobile dating follows a similar logic and measures the share of residents who own a smartphone.

An interesting metric is Google search traffic for “Tinder.” Tinder is a social media outlet, and this metric measures the percentage of residents in a city who search for Tinder the most. If a city scores relatively high in these two areas, it can offset low economic scores. For instance, you mentioned Seattle, Washington. Its economics rank is 173rd out of 182 cities, yet it ranks 5th in dating opportunities and 9th in fun and recreation. This balance makes a difference.

Let’s look at another example. Last week, I talked to someone in Florida who wanted to know how their cities fare. Miami, Florida, was particularly interesting. It ranks 3rd in “things to do,” yet 176th in economics. It’s a very expensive place to live.

Despite being so expensive, Miami still manages to rank 15th overall. Miami could easily make the top 10 or even the top 5 if it were more affordable.

Jacobsen: When breaking down the weighting of factors, the main categories are economics, fun and recreation, and dating opportunities. The first two categories are each weighted at 25%, while dating opportunities are weighted at 50%. Interestingly, dating opportunities have the fewest subcategories but carry the most weight. These subcategories include the share of the single population, gender balance, online dating opportunities, mobile dating opportunities, and Google search traffic for the term “Tinder.”

Why are those subcategories, such as metrics 31 through 35, given so much weight when considering the overall picture of cities and singles?

Lupo: Dating opportunities are the most critical criteria for single people seeking a significant other. Single individuals want to know if they’re in an environment surrounded by like-minded, single people. For example, if you’re single and living in a place like Scottsdale, Arizona — I’m just throwing this out there — or any other city known as a retirement haven, it might not be ideal if you’re in your twenties and surrounded by an older single population.

This is why dating opportunities are so important. They directly influence whether a city attracts singles looking for meaningful connections.

JWhat chance do I have of meeting someone in my city based on gender balance and the shared single population? And, of course, factors like internet and phone access—would I be able to join certain dating sites? Would those sites be accessible? 

Jacobsen: It seems like these factors weigh more heavily than the others. Also, using Tinder as a search metric is particularly interesting since so many dating apps are available. Why was Tinder chosen, and were other apps considered for inclusion in that metric?

Lupo: Well, I can’t say for sure, Scott, but from what I understand, Tinder is considered the gold standard for social media among singles. I assume it’s the most interactive, though that’s a guess. Its metrics carry double weight in the analysis, so there must be something significant about it.

Jacobsen: Let me clarify for the audience. There are no financial conflicts of interest regarding this research, correct?

Lupo: Correct.

Jacobsen: Is there a point where economics becomes an overwhelming factor in dating opportunities? The top-ranked cities for singles don’t always do well in economics. However, they still provide plenty of opportunities. People are taking advantage of these opportunities despite the economic challenges. Do you notice a point in the statistics where economics significantly affects how willing people are to use dating apps or go on dates?

Lupo: There is such a point, but it’s more reflective of the overall economics of the city. For instance, a city like Tampa, Florida, has a relatively strong economy and an economics rank of 110. In contrast, Portland, Oregon, ranks 150. If you’re in a low-income city or state, the breaking point for economic pressure comes sooner than in a place with higher income or strong 

Even in cities like New York City or Washington, D.C.—which have extremely high living costs—higher wages can sometimes offset the economic challenges. Washington, D.C., for example, ranks 179th in economics, but because it’s a world health hub with relatively high incomes, some of those pressures are mitigated. However, if you’re single, a student, or earning a lower income, the breaking point could still come much sooner in high-cost cities like D.C.

Jacobsen: Why do we find that people still aren’t going on dates in some wealthy cities?

Lupo: That’s an interesting question. Even in rich cities, economic pressures still exist for certain demographics, especially students or young professionals who aren’t yet earning high wages. Social and cultural factors also play a role in influencing whether people feel comfortable or inclined to date actively.

Again, it depends on the environment and how you define “single.” Someone who is divorced, for instance, might be more eager to get back into the dating scene, especially in places like Washington, D.C., or New York City. If for no other reason, perhaps to keep up appearances.

That would be my guess as well. By the way, I just checked—New York City ranks dead last in economics at 182nd but ranks 4th in fun and recreation. So, there’s a balance there. Folks in New York have to decide: there’s much to do here, but at what point does affordability limit those opportunities?

Jacobsen: Right. I’ve used Tinder before, and New York might have one of the biggest user bases for the app. People find a way regardless of the cost. Are there any cultural consistencies between Seattle, Atlanta, and Las Vegas?

Lupo: Cultural? Well, one consistency is that these three cities are thriving metro areas. Their populations have exploded over the last 10 years, making them up-and-coming hubs that continue to grow. Economically, at least for Atlanta and Seattle, there’s solid job growth. I don’t know about Las Vegas beyond the gaming industry.

Still, these cities share a common thread. People flocking to them from other areas are attracted by opportunities and quality of life. While the economic rankings differ—Seattle ranks 103rd, and Las Vegas is 140th—they all have plenty of things to do. These sprawling urban areas offer various activities, making them attractive for singles and families.

Jacobsen: Hey, Chip, I appreciate your time today.

Lupo: Oh, glad to be here! It’s always a pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thank you. I appreciate your insights. I’ll keep an eye on my emails, and if I come across anything else of interest, I’ll reach out so we can talk again.

Lupo: Absolutely. Thank you so much. Take care.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Lupo: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Daniel Shea and Nasrudin Salim on Chatoyance

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/14

Daniel Shea, M.Sc. is the founder and CEO of Chatoyance. Shea possesses a Master’s degree in Computer Science from the University of New Hampshire, with several years of industry experience in software engineering. He has published freelance articles on foreign exchange market strategy analysis and has published software analyzing fractals in the foreign exchange markets. Leveraging his experience with software design and financial markets, he started Chatoyance with the intent of transforming the way independent investors approach the foreign exchange market. 

Nasrudin Salim is the Co-Founder, COO and CTO of Chatoyance. He has worked in the financial trading and banking industry specializing in machine learning and previously headed the ML operations team in DBS Bank, led AI architecture in OCBC Bank, the 2 of the largest banks in Singapore and Asia and was VP of Engineering in Almanak which uses AI agents for on-chain trading in web3. His specialty is in building machine learning and AI systems at scale and also in real-time processing.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: When did you two meet?

Daniel Shea: We first met in 2012 in a high IQ society called Torr. Nasrudin had posted an internal message to the group about his recent experiences trading on the foreign exchange market, and I followed up with my own. We discussed more offline, then started working on independent trading projects with each other. One such project was a platform that allowed us to automatically mirror each other’s trades via a central server with which our separate trading platforms would communicate. We then realized we could scale this up to a wider audience, and Chatoyance was born.

Nasrudin Salim: In 2012, I was an 18 year old back then, having started trading at the age 14 with my parent’s money. I did a bit of bitcoin and forex and found success during a time when the market was not as volatile and full of trading agents and bots like today. I posted some insights into a high IQ society called Torr which had a minimum IQ requirement to join at 146, percentile at the 99.87th. Dan replied to some of my posts and we realized we both approached trading from a systems engineering perspective. At first we did simple trading projects, and then later we came to the idea of building a sort of trade sharing collective. Dan did most of the work initially as I didn’t know how to code much back then but grew rapidly later. We started building custom integrations to mirror each other’s trades on the popular platform MetaTrader 4. Then eventually it was about mirroring everyone in a group, not just one-way but bidirectional as many-to-many communication.

Jacobsen: What was the origin of the idea for Chatoyance?

Shea: Chatoyance initially started as a social trading platform which, as mentioned, was itself started as a means for us to share trades in real-time. This gradually evolved into a platform that generated trading strategies based on predefined characteristics using genetic programming. Though these two services would seem quite distinct, there are some core similarities, chief among them being the idea that many strategies operating in parallel outweigh a lone strategy over time and that there is a constant need to reevaluate and cycle out strategies as market conditions evolve.

Nasrudin Salim:  Early on, we thought, “why limit these mirrored trades to just us?” Both of us were layering signals, blending sentiment and quant metrics. The strategy seemed scalable and liquidity was deep. The original concept was basically a distributed, real-time signal exchange. It was like a sandbox where multiple strategies or traders could compete, evolve, and reinforce each other. As the system matured, we introduced genetic programming to shape custom strategies on the fly. So, from the start, the seed idea was that multiple concurrent approaches can minimize single-strategy fragility. That’s how Chatoyance was born.

Jacobsen: How has the business and technology, and software, landscape for Chatoyance’s focus changed in the last ten years?

Shea: There is certainly more competition in this space now than there was one decade ago. This is likely due to the lower barrier to entry and a hype cycle when it comes to AI. Some of the core tech has changed over time to reflect advances in the field. But another change has been the interest in different asset classes over time. Our software is designed to accommodate currency pairs, equities, commodities, cryptocurrencies, and more, but interest from clients has shifted over the years. Forex was the initial interest one decade ago. These days, equities and cryptocurrencies are asked about more regularly.

Nasrudin Salim: The stack is radically different. A decade ago, market data pipelines were heavier and less real-time. Now, I have a cheap feed of tick-level crypto, forex, equities and also options data and can run complex ML models, even LLMs directly on live streams. Cloud infra matured, open-source AI toolkits exploded, and more competition due to now a lower barrier to entry. We’ve seen forex become less sexy and crypto become standard for high-risk plays. I had to ensure the underlying architecture scales to new asset classes fluidly. We’re definitely dealing with a more fragmented but also more flexible ecosystem.

Jacobsen: How is machine learning and AI built into the business?

Shea: The core product that we offer to clients is a service that automates the construction of trading strategies based on current market conditions. Additional tiers involve full portfolios, that is to say many strategies of different trading styles or risk tolerances per the desires of the client, and strategies that evolve as market conditions change over time, owing to the fact that any strategy which works in the short term is unlikely to hold for long. This is ultimately done by leveraging AI. That is said with the full acknowledgement that the term “AI” can be quite loaded and overused these days, often used to placate certain audiences. Despite the current implications of the term, there is indeed no better term to describe what is being done. With that said, just about anyone could develop an application that outputs strategies by the end of a weekend-long hackathon. The breadth of technical indicators used, entry and exit strategy logic employed, optimization criteria supported, money management strategies considered, and robust filtering logic included all coalesces to form a more comprehensive offering than competing organizations.

Nasrudin Salim: We apply ML from the ground up. Every piece of the puzzle from market microstructure to anomaly detection, dynamic portfolio rebalancing. We mix between simple algorithms, genetic optimization to traditional machine learning, then to reinforcement learning and now LLMs. The key is continual learning. Strategies adapt as new conditions emerge and so do the humans who now build how these strategies are going to adapt. Like including meta-learning concepts, model ensembles, and reinforcement signals. The result is that you’re not stuck with stale logic. It morphs as volatility regimes shift or as new liquidity venues pop up.

Jacobsen: How does Chatoyance build more social trading into the trader networks?

Shea: The first iteration of Chatoyance was a more social experience. The idea was that there would be different trading rooms, and members of these rooms would automatically copy each other’s trades through our software. There would be safeguards in place, such as the option of enabling private rooms, muting certain traders so they could only receive trades but not contribute any to the group themselves, and so on. The idea was that, if you had a room of traders each interacting with the markets, the collective gains would outweigh the collective losses, resulting in everyone benefiting from the participants’ engagement.

The business model was that users registered with an affiliated broker, and thus commission was collected on each trade. Since a single trade was replicated for each user in a trading room, this meant a single action from a user could result in wider commissions due to each member simultaneously opening or closing the trade.

In practice, this was not quite the case. Often, people would join trading rooms and wait for others to make the first move. Those who were more experienced did not feel a motivation to contribute trades without some clearer incentive. Some ideas, such as profit sharing on commission, were proposed, but ultimately, if someone is skilled at swing trading the markets, they are more likely to go into fund management themselves than potentially risk it all on some other member running a huge drawdown.

So the idea was ultimately scrapped after several months. However, the idea of many traders bringing their own strategies to a collective single trading room has a spiritual line to our later concept of automated strategy generation with distinct trading personalities, together constructing an automated portfolio.

Nasrudin Salim: We learned that simple social mirroring wasn’t sticky. Traders either lurk or they just want someone’s edge without giving their own. So instead, we integrated the “social” element into a collaborative network of AI-driven strategy modules. Each “node” in the network is like a trader with a personality. From maybe momentum-focused, or mean-reversion-heavy, and they collaborate by sharing signals and outcomes. It’s less about people copying each other and more about these agent-like strategies feeding into each other’s learning loops, evolving collectively to handle shifting regimes. It’s social trading, but via synthetic participant strategies rather than pure human interaction.

Jacobsen: How do you do risk management?

Shea: Risk management is particular to the client, but there are many levers to pull when assessing one’s risk tolerance. Risk management can range from high-level goals, such as drawdown thresholds and Sharpe ratio targets, to finer-grained details such as exit strategies, money management strategies, partial entries and exits, and more. Many times, people will state that they want a high-risk high-reward strategy, but suddenly get cold feet at the first sight of what that risk entails. There is an element of getting to the heart of one’s true risk tolerance before crafting a template that generates appropriate strategies.

Nasrudin Salim:  Risk management is programmatic and multi-layered. For crypto, for example, I might impose real-time volatility-adjusted position limits. For a more traditional asset, we might weigh by a blend of sector correlation risk and liquidity depth. The user sets broad tolerances like max drawdown or desired sorting ratio. From there, the ML system translates that into execution-level heuristics. The idea is we fuse top-down constraints with bottom-up adaptive strategies.

Jacobsen: How do fractals play into financial markets?

Shea: Fractals are one indicator among many that are baked into the product. The algorithm may use fractals depending on market conditions, but may not. The interest in fractals in particular comes from an old technical indicator that was published to the MQL Marketplace (https://www.mql5.com/en/market/product/4131). However, in the current iteration of the product, it is not highlighted any more prominently than additional indicators, ranging from the standard basket (ADX, ATR, CCI, EMA, MACD, RSI, etc.) to the more esoteric (candlestick patterns, Fibonacci retracements, Elliott Waves, etc.) depending on the interests of the client.

Nasrudin Salim: Maybe fractal-based signals matter in certain trending conditions or where micro-structure has repeating patterns. if the system thinks fractals add incremental predictive power given current conditions, it’ll use them. As one of the architects of Chatoyance, I add it as just another tool that our systems could use, and the choice is autonomous. If not, it won’t. We never rely on a single tool. Everything competes on a data-driven meritocracy.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges facing technology-driven financial companies?

Shea: At least from the conversations I have with others in this space, I notice that there is often an overreliance on technical indicators at the cost of fundamentals. This makes sense from a programmatic perspective as engineers can readily integrate these into their models. With that said, the fusion of technicals and fundamentals is necessary to arrive at a more holistic view of the market, all of which serves to only improve the outputs of the algorithm.

Nasrudin Salim: One of the big ones is bridging the gap between what’s quantifiable and what’s real. Pure technical systems might ignore underlying credit conditions, macro news, or liquidity crises until it’s too late. Also, data noise, market manipulation, and wild regulatory shifts can break your models. It’s crucial to design adaptive frameworks that don’t assume static conditions. We’re constantly at war with overfitting and model drift. Especially in cryptocurrency where a lot of the movements originate from insider activity and information found in web3 ‘Cabals’ that exists as Telegram group chats, which can only be joined through connections or NFT purchases.

Jacobsen: What are the guiding principles of Chatoyance?

Shea: It is deceptively simple to say that one’s financial goals are just to “make lots of money.” As discussed earlier, people may feel confident moving forward with a high-risk high-reward strategy at first, only to recoil at the first drop. This isn’t entirely unexpected; after all, a safer market experience would be to invest in a set-and-forget whole market ETF. To pursue these strategies is to expect higher reward at the cost of higher risk. However, even in this more narrow range of higher risk tolerance, there is a wide window of consideration and opportunity. We ultimately aim to reconcile this risk-reward trade-off on a per-client basis and arrive at a portfolio that doesn’t fail to impress.

Nasrudin Salim: We want to democratize robust strategy generation. It’s not just “make money fast.” it’s “craft a strategy that aligns with your true risk appetite and thrives under evolving conditions.” We want to give clients a toolkit that doesn’t lock them into a fixed view of markets. Instead, we shape a pipeline that constantly checks itself like adjusting parameters, evaluating signals, pruning weak strategies, doubling down on robust ones.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Shea: Thank you for giving us the opportunity to highlight what we have built! This space moves slow and then fast all at once. The journey has been edifying, humbling, and exhilarating. We have many years behind us and are looking forward to many more.

Nasrudin Salim: Happy to share what we’re up to. It’s been good to lay it all out.

Chatoyance Pte. Ltd. (“Chatoyance”) The materials and data contained on this website and any related mobile application are for information only and shall in no event be construed as an offer to purchase or sell, or the solicitation of an offer to purchase or sell, any securities in any jurisdiction. Chatoyance does not make any representation, undertaking, warranty, or guarantee as to the timeliness, completeness, correctness, reliability, or accuracy of the materials and data herein. Certain statements made on this Site may not be based on historical information or facts and may be “forward looking statements”. Actual investment results may differ materially from these forward-looking statements due to a number of factors, including future changes or developments in the business of a company featured on this Site or other political, economic, legal, and social conditions. All opinions, forecasts, or estimates expressed herein are subject to change without prior notice. Chatoyance and its affiliates accept no liability or responsibility whatsoever for any direct or consequential loss and/or damages arising out of or in relation to any use of opinions, forecasts, materials, and data contained herein or otherwise arising in connection therewith.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Vlada Polishchuk, Canadian Development Manager: Dignitas Fund

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/13

Vlada Polishchuk, Canadian Development Manager for Dignitas Fund, talked about her mission and efforts. Dignitas operates in Ukraine and the U.S., focusing on training, supplying drones, and providing humanitarian aid like mobile laundry units. Polishchuk’s role involves fostering collaborations, raising awareness, and exploring Canadian expansion. She highlighted the challenges of declining donations after years of conflict and the need for innovative approaches to fundraising. Despite political shifts, established donor trust has been key. Polishchuk expressed concerns over worsening conditions in Ukraine and emphasized the urgency of global support to counter aggression and safeguard broader regional stability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your role?

Vlada Polishchuk: I volunteer with Dignitas Fund as the Canadian Development Manager.

Jacobsen: What does that role involve, and what is the scope of Dignitas?

Polishchuk: Currently, Dignitas operates through two charitable organizations: in the United States as Dignitas Ukraine, and in Ukraine as Dignitas Fund. Essentially, we are one team of motivated people. We are now taking steps to explore the potential for establishing operations and collaborations in Canada.

My role involves

  • fostering potential collaborations,
  • facilitating the exchange of experiences and
  • raising awareness about the work of Dignitas.

Jacobsen: When it comes to Dignitas Canada, is Canada the home base or an extension of Dignitas?

Polishchuk: We currently operate primarily in Ukraine and the U.S. In Canada, we would function as an extension of the organization. However, we are actively exploring developing a stronger presence here.

I would love to see a fully established Dignitas Canada one day.

Jacobsen: What about products? What kind of products do you provide, what do they do, and how is this funded?

Polishchuk: Our product management efforts are focused on supporting Ukrainians. We supply drones, and we have launched initiatives to enhance training efforts. For example, our Flight to Recovery program empowers veterans through simulation and FPV drone training.

Additionally, we have implemented projects like providing mobile laundry units to aid those in need. Our work is focused on the first responders and defenders of Ukraine, as well as Ukrainian veterans, with an overall focus on helping Ukraine win this war through technological advancements. These efforts aim to save lives, strengthen defences, and protect people, with the ultimate goal of achieving victory for Ukraine and safeguarding its sovereignty.

Jacobsen: Are the operations in Ukraine different from those in the U.S.?

Polishchuk: Yes, the operations differ significantly. Dignitas conducts training programs in Ukraine, particularly in the eastern regions and other key locations. Most of our operations are centred in Ukraine, focusing on direct support and on-the-ground initiatives.

Our primary focus in the U.S. is fundraising. We are now expanding these efforts to Canada and seeking investors and collaborators.

Jacobsen: How is the search for investors going in Canada?

Polishchuk: The search has been progressing well. I joined Dignitas about a month ago, and it has been an active and productive start. I’ve met many interesting individuals—some from Canada, others from Europe or Ukraine.

Even though my primary focus is on Canada, I’ve found myself connecting with a global network of people. It’s fascinating to see how interconnected this work is. Many of my contacts have ties to Ukraine or other parts of the world. I’m optimistic that we will see positive outcomes from these efforts within the next month or so.

I can’t disclose more than that, but it’s exciting. I’m confident that, by doing so, we will raise awareness about what we are doing and make a significant difference in the direction of things.

Jacobsen: What are the struggles that come up in fundraising? Every organization with someone trying to make contacts for investors will probably get more “no’s” than “yeses.” So, how do you pursue this?

Polishchuk: Absolutely. Overall, Maria Berlinska, one of our cofounders, has been working on raising awareness about drones since around 2014 or 2015.

At that time, people were like, “What are you talking about?” because discussing drones felt like something new and unfamiliar. I wouldn’t say people took it seriously back then. It was challenging to move in that direction.

Dignitas is well-established in Ukraine and known in the U.S. In terms of fundraising, we have many established investors who trust us. We ensure transparency and inform them about our progress and plans to maintain engagement.

However, after three years of the full-scale invasion, we have observed a decline in donations and support. This motivates us to be even more creative and push harder to meet our goals.

Jacobsen: Does the political context of various Western countries influence your strategies for outreach to funders? For instance, if a new prime minister or president exists in one of the major funding countries, does that factor into your planning?

Polishchuk: With our currently established network, I don’t think it significantly affects our context. We have built trust with our donors and prioritize transparency about our costs, plans, and ongoing efforts.

Polishchuk: Our focus is on deepening and expanding our work. The people who donate to us are already on our side, supporting what we do regardless of political shifts in their countries.

Jacobsen: Does the leadership in countries, such as new presidents or prime ministers, influence your efforts?

Polishchuk: It doesn’t make that big of a difference for our trusted donors, but influences how we target large scales in terms of people. Our cause can be positioned relative to different leaders and so influences support.  

If the leadership takes an approach that does not prioritize Ukraine’s fight for resources and strength to push back against aggression, it impacts public opinion, actions, and even digital donations on a larger scale.

We’ve also observed a decline in the frequency of conversations about Ukraine. People are becoming desensitized to what’s happening. However, the intensity of the attacks or the frontline situation has remained the same. The situation has worsened.

For example, last year, in 2023, when I was in Ukraine, the Pokrovsk and Kostiantynivka regions were relatively safer. You could still travel there, breathe, and feel a moment of normalcy despite the chaos. Now, these areas are at the center of the conflict, frequently appearing in the news. The scale of destruction is insane, and Russian forces are progressing at an alarming speed.

It’s heartbreaking to see places I have warm memories of—charming towns and villages—now devastated. The scale of the destruction is staggering. It’s clear that if we slow down our efforts, things will only worsen.

I’m curious about what 2025 might look like if we don’t push as hard as we can and take this situation seriously. From my point of view, this isn’t just a threat to Ukraine—it’s a threat to other countries as well.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Vlada.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo, The Neediest States in the U.S.

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/12

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo talks about 2024’s neediest cities in the United States. WalletHub analyzed 182 cities using 28 key indicators of economic disadvantage, such as child poverty, unemployment, food insecurity, and health metrics. Cities like Detroit, Gulfport, and Brownsville rank poorly in economic well-being and health indicators. Faith-based nonprofits, like the Salvation Army, are critical in providing support. Lupo emphasizes significant gaps between cities, such as a 30-times difference in homelessness rates. Seasonal needs spike in winter and summer due to extreme weather. Solutions require local leadership and grassroots action to address these issues effectively.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with Chip Lupo of WalletHub. We will be talking about 2024’s neediest cities in the United States. So, how do we define neediness in the United States?

Chip Lupo: Okay, Scott. We analyzed 182 U.S. cities—these are the largest cities by population—based on 28 key indicators of economic disadvantage. This includes everything from child poverty, food insecurity, and uninsured rates to other factors that help us understand where Americans need the most support.

Jacobsen: And when they’re looking for support, what are the main social supports? What are the main economic supports? What are the main religious or institutional supports? In other words, what are some concrete ways these needs are being met, with specific examples?

Lupo: It’s interesting you bring that up because there seems to be a trend where people are increasingly turning to faith-based institutions for support. In many urban and low-income areas—which we’ll discuss in more detail—there’s a perception that government policies have not provided sufficient help.

When we talk about economics specifically, we mean child poverty rates, adult poverty rates, unemployment rates, homelessness rates, bankruptcy rates, and foreclosure rates. So, people often look within their communities or turn to faith-based institutions for assistance. Initial government efforts may have been well-intentioned in many of these areas but have yet to catch up over time.

Jacobsen: And now, with overall religion in the United States declining—whether in terms of total numbers, attendance, or adherence to faith-based practices—are we still seeing an increasing reliance on these institutions? Or are they as impactful as they’ve always been regarding social provisions?

Lupo: They’re about as impactful as they’ve always been. However, we’re not necessarily talking about formal religious institutions like churches. We’re referring more to faith-based nonprofit groups—organizations like the Salvation Army.

These types of charitable organizations, which are faith-based to some extent, are relied upon more frequently now. Of course, because the demand for their services is so high, many of these groups are stretched thin. They depend heavily on donations and volunteer support to keep their operations running and to serve these communities.

Jacobsen: What do you notice about some of the neediest cities, like Detroit, Michigan, Gulfport, Mississippi, and Brownsville, Texas?

Lupo: These cities consistently rank poorly in two main areas: economic well-being and health and safety. We touched on economic well-being earlier—factors like poverty, unemployment, and foreclosure rates.

Regarding health and safety, we’re looking at indicators like the uninsured rate, the share of severely overcrowded homes, and the percentage of adults who needed to see a doctor but couldn’t afford to. Other indicators include depression rates, suicide rates, and crime rates.

The three cities you mentioned—Detroit, Gulfport, and Brownsville—consistently rank among the lowest in economic, health, and safety indicators. Their rankings in these areas place them among the neediest cities in the United States.

Jacobsen: What are you weighing more—economics or health and safety—for neediness?

Lupo: Those two are equal; they’re the two main dynamics. Now, within each, we have metrics that carry different weights. For example, with economic well-being, we assign triple weight to metrics such as child, adult, and homelessness rates. We give full weight to metrics such as unemployment and underemployment.

That’s key because, in many of these areas, people may have jobs, but those jobs are often several levels below their qualifications. For example, you may have a master’s degree in a specific field but can’t find work there. As a result, you take a lower-paying job or something far below what your qualifications merit.

We also assign full weight to high school dropout rate and median credit score indicators. Consumer bankruptcies receive half weight, while economic security also receives half weight.

In the health and safety dimension, uninsured rates and food insecurity rates get full weight. This is critical in what are now being called food deserts—areas where access to quality produce or supermarkets is severely limited. In many cases, crime in these areas is so rampant that supermarkets close or relocate because they can’t sustain business under those conditions.

We also assign full weight to indicators like the share of severely overcrowded homes and the share of adults who needed to see a doctor but couldn’t afford to.

But, to answer your question directly—on a scale of 100, economic well-being gets 60 points, and health and safety gets 40 points. So, it does tilt slightly more toward economics because it’s likely a more accurate gauge of neediness in these areas.

Jacobsen: And how are the worst-performing cities looking in terms of child and adult poverty rates?

Lupo: Let’s see. For child poverty rate:

  • Detroit, Michigan ranks 2nd worst,
  • Gulfport, Mississippi, is 8th from the bottom, and
  • Brownsville, Texas, is 14th from the bottom.

For adult poverty rate:

  • Detroit has the highest rate,
  • Gulfport ranks 8th highest, and
  • Brownsville is the 10th highest.

Detroit also has the highest underemployment rate.

Jacobsen: How long have you been conducting this particular neediness study?

Lupo: To my knowledge, I can recall that we’ve been doing it for at least 2 or 3 years, as far as. It may go back even further. I’d check with Diana on that one, but we’ve conducted this study as far back as 2020.

Jacobsen: And what about unemployment and uninsured rates? How do these factor into the degree to which some of these worst-performing cities are addressing the needs of their citizens?

Lupo: Okay. For unemployment:

  • Detroit has the highest unemployment rate at almost 7.5%.
  • Gulfport ranks 121st, which is relatively good out of 182 cities.
  • Brownsville ranks 19th worst.

For underemployment:

  • Detroit ranks 1st for underemployment, meaning it’s the worst.
  • Gulfport performs better in this metric, and Brownsville has a very low underemployment rate.

Now, regarding Brownsville—being in the South Texas area, there’s a lot of agriculture and farming, so underemployment may not be as significant an issue there. People are likely employed in agricultural jobs that fit their immediate skills, even if they’re not highly specialized roles.

So, to recap, Detroit is the most concerning city with high unemployment and underemployment rates, while Brownsville and Gulfport show mixed results depending on the metric.

Jacobsen: Gulfport ranks 171st, and Brownsville ranks 181st. So, they’re not as bad in terms of underemployment as they are for unemployment in those areas. Now, let’s see what else we can look at here. When you’re looking at the highs and lows of neediness in the United States, are the gaps significant across the spectrum, or is there simply a rank order,, and the gaps are relatively close overall?

Lupo: The gaps are pretty sizable. Let’s look, for example, at the the child poverty rate. Cleveland, Ohio, has the highest child poverty rate, while Pearl City, Hawaii, has the lowest. That’s a 13-times difference. So, a child in Cleveland is 13 times worse off than one in Pearl City, Hawaii.

For adult poverty rate, Detroit has the highest rate, which is 6 times worse than in Pearl City, Hawaii.

When it comes to homelessness, the difference is even more dramatic. There’s a 30-times difference between Honolulu, Hawaii, which has the highest homelessness rate, and Overland Park, Kansas, which has the lowest.

Depending on the metric, we’re seeing some significant gaps between the cities performing the worst and those performing the best. This highlights the discrepancies in economic well-being, health, and safety across the country and raises the question of how we bridge those gaps.

Jacobsen: Some of your research focuses on actionable. If people want to reduce the neediness in their city, what policies or social programs seem reasonable to implement based on the data?

Lupo: It begins at the local level. Residents need to petition their local leaders or legislatures to revamp existing policies. If those leaders aren’t addressing the issues, residents need to vote them out and bring in new leadership to prioritize these challenges.

I don’t know if you’ve been following the situation in Chicago, but there’s been significant tension between citizens and city officials over illegal immigration. The city wants to raise taxes to fund services for an influx of immigrants, but residents have had enough. They’re confronting the mayor and assembly members, saying, “You need to look out for us first and not raise taxes to support people who are here illegally.”

We’re starting to see more backlash in impoverished, high-crime communities. Residents are stepping up, making their voices heard, and demanding action. Change has to start at the grassroots level—you can’t petition Washington for solutions until you’ve addressed issues at city hall. Any meaningful improvements in these communities must begin locally and work their way up.

Jacobsen: I have time for one more question. What should we ask here? Are there differences—these are annual studies—but are there seasons in which Americans overall are more needy than others, like the winter or summer?

Lupo: Well, based on the data, this time of year—the holiday season—tends to highlight neediness the most. It’s a season of giving and charity, which brings these issues to the forefront even more.

But in a place like Detroit, for example, where winters can be brutally cold, there’s a significant degree of homelessness, and the need for shelter, warmth, and clothing becomes far more urgent.

Similarly, during the peak of summer, during heat waves, people need air conditioning, access to hydration, and cooling centers to survive. So, yes, I would say that winter and summer—the two peak seasons—are when neediness seems to be the greatest.

Jacobsen: Well, Chip, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it, as always. 

Chip Lupo: Oh, absolutely! That was great.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Denise Berkhalter, NFTE World Series of Innovation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/11

Denise L. Berkhalter, APR, is the National Director of Communications for the Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE). A Mississippi native, she brings nearly three decades of experience in mass communication, including roles as a digital news editor, newspaper editor, reporter, freelance writer, graphic designer, and public relations professional. Berkhalter discusses how young innovators contribute to global change through programs like the World Series of Innovation (WSI). Berkhalter highlights the creativity and curiosity of youth, fostering entrepreneurial skills, global responsibility, and problem-solving through challenges linked to UN SDGs. The program promotes inclusivity with multilingual resources and real-world context evaluation. Supported by sponsors like Citi and MetLife Foundations, WSI provides mentorship and free participation, encouraging solutions for issues like education and clean water. Participants learn practical skills, design thinking, and teamwork, often impacting their communities post-competition and continuing as changemakers globally.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you see young innovators contributing to long-term global changes, like those of the SDGs from the UN? 

Denise Berkhalter: Young people bring fresh ideas and energy to solving big challenges like poverty, inequality, and climate change. Programs like the World Series of Innovation help them focus on these global problems by giving them tools and a structure to think creatively. For example, in WSI, students are encouraged to come up with solutions that align with the SDGs. After the competition, many participants said they understood the SDGs better and felt more confident they could make a difference​​.

Jacobsen: What qualities do WSI Imagination League youth bring to the competition? 

Berkhalter: Even at a young age, children aged 5 to 12 have incredible imagination and curiosity, which makes them perfect for innovation challenges like WSI. They approach problems with fresh, creative ideas because they aren’t afraid to think outside the box. At this age, kids are naturally curious and good at asking “why” and “what if,” which helps them explore solutions that adults might not think of. Participating in WSI also allows us to set the stage for entrepreneurial thinking early on. Through the competition, these young participants begin to understand how to solve problems creatively, work collaboratively, and present their ideas confidently—skills that will serve them for life.

Jacobsen: How does competition foster not only entrepreneurial skills and global responsibility? 

Berkhalter: The competition teaches young people how to turn ideas into action, just like real entrepreneurs. They learn how to research problems, develop solutions, and pitch their ideas to judges. But it’s not just about business – the competition also connects their ideas to real-world issues, like hunger or clean energy, so they think about how their work can help others. For example, one challenge asked students to create ideas to bring quality education to more kids, encouraging them to think about the bigger picture​.

Jacobsen: How does the availability of multiple languages enhance inclusivity? 

Berkhalter: As of 2024, the WSI program is available to participants, educators, and others in five languages. This ensures accessibility for diverse participants, fosters inclusivity, and enables a broader demographic of young innovators to contribute.

Jacobsen: What kind of impact have previous winners had on their communities? 

Berkhalter: Winners often implement their innovations to create tangible community impacts which has led to meaningful discussions and solutions tailored to local needs, demonstrating the potential of youth-led initiatives​​.

Jacobsen: How do global sponsors like Citi Foundation and MetLife Foundation help?

Berkhalter: Global Sponsors play a crucial role in the competition by funding challenges, providing strategic guidance, and creating opportunities for students to participate at no cost. Their support not only focuses the challenges on real-world problems but also strengthens the program by ensuring access to resources, mentorship, and opportunities. This enables the competition to expand its reach, enhance sustainability, and benefit more global young innovators.

Jacobsen: How do you balance fostering creativity and innovation with practicality? 

Berkhalter: The program uses tools like the Lean Canvas model, which helps students focus on key questions like “Who is my solution for?” and “How will it work?” This keeps their ideas creative but also ensures they can actually make them happen. It’s about teaching students to dream big but stay grounded in what’s possible​.

Jacobsen: What challenges have you encountered in fairly addressing innovations from different cultures?

Berkhalter: It can be tricky because what seems like a great idea in one country might not work in another. Judges have to think about each idea within the context of the student’s culture and community. For example, a solution for clean water in a rural village might look very different from a solution in a big city. The program works to make sure every idea is judged fairly by considering these differences. To support this, we have developed a rubric that emphasizes innovation, with creativity as its foundation. Volunteers receive comprehensive guidance to ensure they understand that students are developing their ideas based on diverse lived experiences. This ensures evaluations remain sensitive to the unique contexts and challenges students are addressing.

Jacobsen: Can you share any insights into how competition helps participants evolve beyond the event? 

Berkhalter: The competition is more than just one moment. Students learn skills they can use in the future, like problem-solving, teamwork, and communication. They also build confidence in their ability to create change. Many students go on to start businesses, join other programs, or get more involved in solving problems in their communities​.

Jacobsen: What is the role of design thinking plays in shaping solutions for global challenges? 

Berkhalter: Design thinking is central to WSI’s approach, guiding students through ideation, prototyping, and testing solutions. This iterative process ensures that their ideas are user-centered and address real-world needs effectively​​.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Denise.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Anastasiia Romashko, Ukrainian-Canadian Media Production

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/10

 Anastasiia Romashko, assistant producer and social media manager at Kontakt Ukrainian Television Network, discussed the challenges and dynamics of the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape. She highlighted difficulties refugees face, including language barriers for older generations and educational adjustments for younger ones. Cultural integration remains complex, with Ukrainian-Canadian media largely isolated from mainstream outlets, except for limited collaboration with Omni TV. War-related stories dominate interests, often interwoven with personal hardships. Romashko noted differences in coverage, emphasizing Ukrainian media’s sharper, more direct approach compared to Canada’s broader, less detailed perspective. Despite challenges, cultural maintenance and storytelling are vital for the Ukrainian diaspora.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your role in the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape?

Anastasiia Romashko: I am an assistant producer and social media manager at Kontakt Ukrainian Television Network.

Jacobsen: What does being an assistant producer for media involve?

Romashko: Usually, I contact different people. If we are looking for individuals for our materials, they could be Ukrainian personalities or Canadians connected to Ukraine or doing something for Ukraine. It varies. We usually arrange interviews with them or organize some reports that we can film for our content network.

Romashko: What are the most difficult stories to report on? And what are the easiest?

Jacobsen: The easiest stories are definitely about hobbies. It is easier if they are not doing something directly related to Ukraine or are in Ukraine—such as people who play the violin, ballet dancers, or perform similar activities.

However, every story carries some level of pain or disappointment from the individual’s perspective, as most fled the Ukraine war. Even if we conduct mostly lighthearted interviews or report on something enjoyable, they often share a story about the war or how they fled Ukraine.

Most of them were very successful in Ukraine before they moved to Canada. Now, they have lost everything and are no longer doing what they were doing in Ukraine or Europe. That is hard to hear. Some of them begin to cry, and we often don’t know how to respond because we cannot fully understand their feelings.

Jacobsen: When someone starts crying during an interview, do you interrupt their emotion or give them space to express it for tone?

Romashko: Based on our experience with such emotional situations, we usually… I’m not the interviewer. I don’t conduct the interviews myself. I assist with the production or post-production.

Typically, we give them the space to express their emotions because it would feel odd to say something like, “It’s fine, don’t worry, don’t cry.” That’s understandable, so we allow them to express themselves and their feelings.

From an interview perspective, it’s important because it helps the interviewer connect with the person on an emotional level. Of course, there is a reason for their feelings, so you can’t stop them. You have to let them process and express themselves.

Jacobsen: Regarding the Ukrainian diaspora, with the large numbers of Canadians who have Ukrainian heritage, what is the number?

Romashko: It’s almost like 200,000, close to 300,000.

Jacobsen: So, a huge number of Canadians are Ukrainian. What topics interest them? In other words, what subject matter is pertinent to their concerns as Canadians and those with Ukrainian heritage?

Romashko: The main issue that interests people is the war, which is still ongoing. Secondly, there’s the topic of people recently arriving from Ukraine to Canada.

They face challenges not necessarily with communication but integrating into a society completely different from what they were used to in Ukraine. This includes differences in behaviour, societal norms, and general adjustment.

Jacobsen: What about things like English as a second language? Is that a barrier to integration for refugees or asylum seekers?

Romashko: It’s mostly a barrier for older people. They usually had less exposure to English than younger generations. For those aged 20 to 40, we had more English instruction in schools or opportunities to travel to Europe. Still, for older people, those aged 50 or above, or for someone’s grandparents, it takes much work to learn a new language.

That’s a big problem, and many older people feel uncomfortable here because they cannot connect or communicate with others as they could before. For example, a colleague shared a story about her parents, who moved back to Poland. They had tried living with her but found communicating too difficult. They felt so alone and isolated because she was the only person they could talk to. They didn’t have friends or relatives to interact with, which made them feel lost. Ultimately, they decided to go back.

It’s much easier for younger people. Even if they don’t know English initially, it’s easier for them to learn because English speakers surround them. There’s no way they won’t pick it up eventually.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges for young people? What are the challenges for older people when they first arrive in Canada in an ongoing war outside of language?

Romashko: The main challenge for younger people is education. For instance, if they are still in school or university, they must adjust their studies when they arrive. They need to find their place in a new academic environment, which can be overwhelming.

Another challenge is making friends. When you move from your home country, you leave behind your friends, school, and teachers, which makes life comfortable and familiar. Here, they have to start over, building relationships in a place where they initially know no one except their parents. That is challenging.

The main challenge for older people is finding work. It can be difficult due to language barriers, differences in work experience, or even a lack of career opportunities, making integration much harder for them.

That’s the main one. 

Jacobsen: How integrated is the Ukrainian media landscape, specifically the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape, into the mainstream Canadian media? How is the integration there? Is there an exchange of information, stories, and expertise? Or are you more isolated as Ukrainian-Canadians?

Romashko: We’re generally more separated from Canadian television and media centers. The only connection we’ve established is with Omni TV, which is part of the Rogers Media Group. Omni TV is technically an international channel where various nationalities can broadcast their reports or other content.

That’s the only platform where we have some presence. Occasionally, there are conferences like this one, where we meet people from other Canadian media organizations. However, there needs to be a stronger connection with mainstream Canadian media overall.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts about this war, the media, or cultural maintenance?

Romashko: The media, the war, as well as the media in Canada specifically, are quite different here. Even though I’ve learned a lot about the war in Ukraine and attended various conferences about it, Canadian media approaches it differently than Ukrainian media.

Ukrainian media tends to be sharper and more direct in covering what’s happening in Ukraine. Here in Canada, the coverage is more of an overview, focusing on cultural and political events rather than directly highlighting the war actions.

That’s an issue.

Romashko: Thank you very much for your time.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine

Scott Douglas Jacobsen
In-Sight Publishing, Fort Langley, British Columbia, Canada

Correspondence: Scott Douglas Jacobsen (Email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com)

Received: June 3, 2025
Accepted: June 3, 2025
Published: June 8, 2025

Abstract

This interview presents a focused conversation with Dr. Veronica Palladino, a physician, poet, and member of numerous high-range IQ societies. Intended as a public clarification following past interviews and inquiries, this dialogue covers Palladino’s affiliations with global high-IQ communities, her philosophical interests, her published and forthcoming literary works, and her professional development within medicine. Palladino shares insights into her intellectual trajectory, ranging from Husserlian phenomenology to emergency medicine, as well as her commitment to raising awareness about mental health through poetry. The interview captures her multidimensional identity as a clinician, thinker, and writer committed to both internal and societal healing.

Keywords: Clinical Pathology and Biochemistry, Contemporary Italian Poetry, Edmund Husserl Phenomenology, Emergency Medicine and Healthcare, High-Range IQ Societies, Human Fragility in Literature, Mental Health Awareness through Art, Poetry and Depression, Transfusional Medicine Studies, Veronica Palladino Interview

Introduction

Dr. Veronica Palladino is a multifaceted thinker whose work spans clinical medicine, poetry, and philosophical inquiry. A medical doctor with specializations in clinical pathology and emergency medicine, Palladino has also become widely recognized in the high-range IQ community for her involvement in numerous societies across Europe, Asia, and the Americas. In response to frequent public inquiries and correspondence, this interview offers a comprehensive clarification of her affiliations, intellectual focus, and literary production. Her most recent poetic works explore themes of psychological vulnerability, existential reflection, and the healing possibilities of language. With a foundation in both empirical science and phenomenological philosophy, Palladino’s voice exemplifies a rare synthesis of rigorous logic and emotional depth.

Main Text (Interview)

Interviewer: Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Interviewee: Veronica Palladino, M.D.

Section 1: Clarifying High-Range IQ Society Membership and Purpose

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Since the high-range testing and high-I.Q. society series is finished, I am taking this as a one-off based on a request from you. You needed some public clarification based on prior interviews. Some emails have been sent to you. Some confusion in the public about you. So, let’s make this straightforward: What is your involvement in the various high‑range IQ societies? Which ones have you been in? Which ones are you in? What do you think is the future of these groups? 

Veronica Palladino, M.D.: Thank you very much for this opportunity, a conclusion after previous interviews of April, July, August 2022, and foreword of 2024. I receive numerous emails and Facebook’s messages in reference to my participation in the high range iq societies. I want to clarify that the high range iq societies are a gym for thought, for logic, for reasoning ability. The discussions about score and classification of intelligent quotient are just a way of simplifying an extremely complex topic. Iq is a measure like any other. The important element is to know, to expand one’s capabilities.

I am member of different high range iq societies: Epiq as honorary member, TOPS  OATHS, Atlantiq iq society, TGMIN, Dark Pavilion, China High Iq Network Genio Grupo, GLIA, League of Perfect  Scorers, Leviathan, Misty Pavilion, Space- TIME society, Supernova, Venus, Catholiq, Immortal Society, China Town Brainpower Club, Mensa, Myriad Society, Prudentia, Quasar Quorum high iq society, Real iq society, Synaptiq society, Ultima iq society, Hidden position society, SECRET society, Elysian Trust (Volant society), Vertex, EPIMETHEUS, Syncritiq Institute, World Genius Directory, Triple Nine Society, Grand iq society, Intruellect iq society, Milenija, True iq society, Universal Genius society, Poetic Genius Society, The Literarians, Real iq society, HRTR (High Range Testees, Registry), ISPE (ex member), Sidis society (prospective member), Hall of Sophia.

I am winner of WGR world genius registry 2022 Competition, one of the winners of Road to Damascus Competition 2021.

I am Director of Healthcare of Bethany institute created by the President of Catholiq, Domagoj Kutle a real genial person.

My name is recorded on the Global Genius Registry, WGD list, World Famous Iq scores, Iq Ranking List, Top iq scores, World Genius Registry.

Section 2: Literary Contributions and Poetic Themes

Jacobsen: What books have you authored? You have a book incoming on poetry. What is its theme? Can you share a few samples? What inspired this work?

Palladino: I am author of:

Il diario del Martedì 2008 (fiction book)

Un mondo altro 2009 (fiction book)

Persone e lacrime 2018 (poetry)

La morte delle Afroditi bionde 2019 (fiction book)

Esher’s book 2023 (poetry)

Regina cattiva 2024 (poetry)

Fobie nella sera dell’essenza  2024 (poetry)

My new book on poetry will focus on human fragility, suicide, depression, malaise, obsessions that are not topics to be afraid of but pathologies from which with love and care one can recover. A wise introduction will be written by you, Scott Jacobsen a perfect Professor of human soul.

Section 3: Future Projects and Academic Development

Jacobsen: What are future projects for you? Do these build on previous research or creative endeavours?

Palladino: After degree in Medicine (degree’s prize for result and length of studies in 2016) and specialization in Clinical Pathology and Biochemistry and a Diploma in General Medicine, I completed a Master’s degree in Emergency Medicine and I started another one in healthcare management (not yet finished).

Section 4: Current Areas of Study and Philosophical Foundations

Jacobsen: What is your current subject of study (and related fields)? What research questions are you answering? Why pick these areas of study in the first place?

Palladino: My interests are Transfusional Medicine and Health’s economy.

My passion is philosophy. I have read Edmund Husserl’s transcendental phenomenology a philosophical approach that focuses on subjective experience and the structure of consciousness. 

Husserl argues that transcendental phenomenology can provide a secure foundation for knowing and understanding reality. 

  1. Phenomenological reduction: the process of suspending judgment and bracketing presuppositions to access pure experience.
  2. Intentional consciousness: consciousness is always directed toward something, whether an external object or an internal thought. 
  3. Transcendental ego: the experiencing subject that constitutes the world.
  4. Noema: the object of consciousness, which can be an external object or an abstract concept. 

I study Martin Heidegger, Maurice Merleau-Ponty, and Jean-Paul Sartre. 

Section 5: Personal Priorities and Motivations

Jacobsen: How would you describe your life today? What priorities occupy you?

Palladino: My priority, at the moment, is cultural and professional growth. I would like to improve and overcome limits and with my poems, I would like to shout out loud for those who cannot do so.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the notes of clarification for everyone, Veronica.

Discussion

Dr. Veronica Palladino bridges the worlds of medicine, poetry, and high-range intellectual communities with clarity and intention. Her participation in numerous IQ societies reflects a belief in cognitive development as a means of self-betterment rather than status. In both her medical practice and literary work, she addresses themes of human vulnerability—especially mental health, grief, and resilience—with empathy and philosophical depth. Rooted in phenomenology and committed to service, Palladino’s multidisciplinary pursuits form a coherent vision: to understand and elevate the human experience through thought, care, and expression.

Methods

The interview was conducted via correspondence. This process complied with applicable data protection laws, including the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA), Canada’s Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA), and Europe’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), i.e., recordings were stored securely, retained only as needed, and deleted upon request, as well in accordance with Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and Advertising Standards Canada guidelines.

Data Availability

No datasets were generated or analyzed during the current article. All interview content remains the intellectual property of the interviewer and interviewee.

References

(No external academic sources were cited for this interview.)

Journal & Article Details

  • Publisher: In-Sight Publishing
  • Publisher Founding: March 1, 2014
  • Web Domain: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com
  • Location: Fort Langley, Township of Langley, British Columbia, Canada
  • Journal: In-Sight: Interviews
  • Journal Founding: August 2, 2012
  • Frequency: Four Times Per Year
  • Review Status: Non-Peer-Reviewed
  • Access: Electronic/Digital & Open Access
  • Fees: None (Free)
  • Volume Numbering: 13
  • Issue Numbering: 2
  • Section: A
  • Theme Type: Idea
  • Theme Premise: “Outliers and Outsiders”
  • Theme Part: 33
  • Formal Sub-Theme: None.
  • Individual Publication Date: June 8, 2025
  • Issue Publication Date: July 1, 2025
  • Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
  • Word Count: 791
  • Image Credits: Photo by Matthew LeJune on Unsplash
  • ISSN (International Standard Serial Number): 2369-6885

Acknowledgements

The author acknowledges Veronica Palladino, M.D. for her time, expertise, and valuable contributions. His thoughtful insights and detailed explanations have greatly enhanced the quality and depth of this work, providing a solid foundation for the discussion presented herein.

Author Contributions

S.D.J. conceived the subject matter, conducted the interview, prepared the manuscript.

Competing Interests

The author declares no competing interests.

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License.
© Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012–Present.

Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen is strictly prohibited. Excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Supplementary Information

Below are various citation formats for Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine.

American Medical Association (AMA 11th Edition)
Jacobsen S. Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine. June 2025;13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications

American Psychological Association (APA 7th Edition)
Jacobsen, S. (2025, June 8). Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine. In-Sight Publishing. 13(2).

Brazilian National Standards (ABNT)
JACOBSEN, S. Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine. In-Sight: Interviews, Fort Langley, v. 13, n. 2, 2025.

Chicago/Turabian, Author-Date (17th Edition)
Jacobsen, Scott. 2025. “Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine.” In-Sight: Interviews 13 (2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications.

Chicago/Turabian, Notes & Bibliography (17th Edition)
Jacobsen, S. “Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine.” In-Sight: Interviews 13, no. 2 (June 2025). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications.

Harvard
Jacobsen, S. (2025) ‘Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine’, In-Sight: Interviews, 13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications.

Harvard (Australian)
Jacobsen, S 2025, ‘Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine’, In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 2, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications.

Modern Language Association (MLA, 9th Edition)
Jacobsen, Scott. “Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine.” In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 2, 2025, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications.

Vancouver/ICMJE
Jacobsen S. Conversation with Veronica Palladino on High-Range IQ Societies, Mental Health Poetry, and Phenomenology in Medicine [Internet]. 2025 Jun;13(2). Available from: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/palladino-clarifications

Note on Formatting

This document follows an adapted Nature research-article format tailored for an interview. Traditional sections such as Methods, Results, and Discussion are replaced with clearly defined parts: Abstract, Keywords, Introduction, Main Text (Interview), and a concluding Discussion, along with supplementary sections detailing Data Availability, References, and Author Contributions. This structure maintains scholarly rigor while effectively accommodating narrative content.

 

Conversation with Brittany Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events

Scott Douglas Jacobsen
In-Sight Publishing, Fort Langley, British Columbia, Canada

Correspondence: Scott Douglas Jacobsen (Email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com)

Received: May 21, 2025
Accepted: May 21, 2025
Published: June 8, 2025

Abstract

This article presents an in-depth conversation with Detroit entrepreneur Britney Hoskins, founder of The Top Pic Collective, Deluxe Event Rentals, and Moranis Event Venue. Launching her first business at 16, Hoskins has become a recognized leader in luxury event planning with a mission to make weddings accessible. Her flagship initiative, Mini Mony Day, offers $100 weddings, blending style with inclusivity. This interview explores her business philosophy, the cultural shift in wedding traditions, the Tulum 2026 destination retreat, and her commitment to mentorship, legacy-building, and community empowerment.

Keywords: Black Entrepreneurship, Destination Weddings, Event Planning Innovation, Inclusive Luxury Weddings, Legacy-Building for Black Families, Micro Weddings Trend, Mini Mony Day, Mentorship for Young Women, Michigan Event Industry, Tulum Couples Retreat

Introduction

Detroit-based entrepreneur Britney Hoskins is reshaping the wedding industry by offering affordable luxury through initiatives like Mini Mony Day. As the founder of multiple successful event-related companies, Hoskins emphasizes community, culture, and creativity. Her approach challenges traditional pricing models while promoting elegance, accessibility, and inclusivity. This interview offers insight into her journey from teen entrepreneur to industry innovator.

Main Text (Interview)

Interviewer: Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Interviewee: Britney Hoskins

Section 1: Mini Mony Day

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Britney Hoskins, a Detroit-based entrepreneur and the creative force behind several successful event brands: The Top Pic Collective, Deluxe Event Rentals, and Moranis Event Venue. She started her first business at 16 and has since become a leader in inclusive luxury event experiences.

Her signature initiative, Mini Mony Day, offers $100 weddings that combine elegance and accessibility. The program is set to expand internationally with a destination edition in Tulum, Mexico, planned for February 2026. A passionate advocate for mentorship and community empowerment, Britney also operates Michigan’s largest Black woman-owned event rental company and runs two Moranis venues in the state.  Thank you very much for joining me today. What inspired you to create Mini Mony Day?

Britney Hoskins: Mini Mony Day is one of my favourite events to produce. It began as a class and a styled shoot. As experienced planners in this industry, we often host educational courses.

But typically, after the class ends, we take a few photos and break everything down—hoping someone writes about it or that the attendees find something meaningful. To me, that felt like such a waste. So I thought, What if we let real couples actually get married on the same set we’re using to teach people? Why not make it real?

So we put the idea out there—”You can get married for $100 on the set I just used to teach a class.” And it was an instant hit. The stories started coming in—people who dreamed of a beautiful wedding but couldn’t afford the traditional costs. That kind of feedback became the norm. It pulled at my heartstrings because I love love. I’m a hopeless romantic. So, I wanted to continue the tradition, which has since become an annual event.

Section 2: Early Start

Jacobsen: How did your early start with the ice cream truck business at 16 influence your approach to entrepreneurship today? I’m sure many Americans and Canadians remember the thrill of chasing ice cream trucks, Eddie Murphy-style—yelling, “Ice cream! Ice cream! Mister Ice Cream Man!”

Hoskins: [Laughing] I could give you a long philosophical answer about how it made me who I am today, but truthfully—I was 16 and had a child. I needed to make things work. That urgency taught me hustle, resilience, and the importance of showing up daily.

I made more money in a day than I would have in an entire paycheck at Subway—and I never wanted to return. So from there, it was always about figuring out how to build the best version of my businesses—whatever they would be—so I could continue to be my boss.

Getting exposed to that at 16 sparked my love for entrepreneurship. That’s what it did for me.

Jacobsen: What makes the Tulum edition of Mini Mony Day different from other mission-based events?

Hoskins: Besides the obvious—that it’s in a completely different setting and it’s tropical and amazing—I think Tulum is such a spiritual and holistic place. It’s a beautiful destination to begin someone’s love story.

It’s also a couple’s retreat. So it’s really a mashup—it’s not just Mini Mony Day. It’s both a couple’s retreat and a Mini Mony Day wedding experience.

Being in a place that’s centred on holistic wellness and spirituality makes it the perfect backdrop for something like this.

Section 3: Luxury and Accessibility

Jacobsen: How do you balance luxury and accessibility in the wedding experience? I know part of your—maybe not just business philosophy, but your broader work philosophy—involves inclusivity.

Hoskins: Absolutely. I feel like a lot of small businesses—especially in the events world, where most companies are small—don’t always take all the steps or do the research needed to explore how we can better support and collaborate in order to give clients the best experience.

So, we spend a significant amount of time making sure we’re always positioned to offer clients a high-level experience at an attainable price. It won’t be feasible for most or all, but in the context of luxury event planning, I’dwe’re very affordable.

For example, if you were planning a regular birthday party for your child, $2,500 might seem absurd. However, for someone already planning a luxury-level celebration, $2,500 would be considered budget-friendly—especially when they start getting quotes from other small business owners.

As luxury event planners, we work hard to ensure that we can offer more accessible upscale experiences.

Jacobsen: Can you tell me more about the $3,500 destination package? What can couples expect from that experience? And even considering the last three and a half or four years, given the COVID-19 pandemic, were destination packages still in demand?

Hoskins: No, not really. I haven’t done a lot with destination packages historically.

No one was travelling when COVID hit, so destination weddings and events took a significant hit—that was pretty universal. But now, as things have picked back up, we’re seeing renewed interest in travel-based events—and that’s why expanding Mini Mony Day to a destination like Tulum feels like the right next step.

But I also believe that what happened during COVID—and shortly after—is that, since people could not gather, micro weddings became much more popular. Weddings with 50 or fewer guests weren’t really a big trend before the pandemic, but after COVID, they became a lot more common. Most destination weddings have under 100 guests, so I think destination weddings have probably seen an uptick because of that shift in mindset.

Section 4: Serial Entrepreneurship

Jacobsen: Do you operate these businesses—The Top Pic Collective, Deluxe Event Rentals, and Moranis Event Venue—as separate, standalone companies, or are they independent but integrated services?

Hoskins: Yes. They are businesses that are in their own right and operate independently. But they’re also offered together as a package to make things easier and more seamless for clients. So, both are independent, but they can work in tandem as well.

Jacobsen: What challenges have you faced working in the events and hospitality industry? I’ve worked in hospitality myself—it’s not exactly glamorous, but I think it’s a valuable experience for anyone to have, especially early in life. It gives you a perspective—between home and the wider world.

Hoskins: Definitely. Hospitality is all about service. When you work in hospitality, you learn to care about people’s needs. You develop patience—because it can be one of the most stressful fields—but you also learn to be present and attentive. It shapes how you deal with people in any line of work.

Jacobsen: How do you envision Mini Mony Day evolving beyond Tulum?

Hoskins: Every time we’ve done Mini Mony Day, it’s gone viral. We get national interest. So, people reach out about bringing Mini Mony Day to their cities. It became a travelling experience that reached several major cities across the country.

Jacobsen: Do you do any mentorship work with young women? And what advice would you offer to young women who want to start their businesses—maybe with an ice cream truck, perhaps something else? What should they keep in mind when it comes to the inevitable challenges that come with entrepreneurship?

Hoskins: Yes, absolutely—we do mentorship. Mini Mony Day is centred around mentorship. I’d say it’s the very foundation of the program. As far as advice to young business owners goes, obstacles are guaranteed. That’s the one certainty in entrepreneurship: you will face challenges. But if it’s something you really, really want, you’ll figure out how to work through them. You push through. If you stop every time something gets hard, you’ll never move forward in business.

Section 5: Inspirations

Jacobsen: Who—or what—inspires you?

Hoskins: My family. Without question. I’m huge on legacy-building. I think the Black wealth gap is absurd—it’s truly unacceptable. Entire generations can work their whole lives and leave nothing behind. That cycle needs to change. So, for me, building something lasting for my family is what drives everything I do.

Nothing is there to help the next generation get a leg up. So, it has become my life’s mission to ensure a legacy is left behind for my kids—and, hopefully, for my kids’ kids. That’s an everyday mantra for me.

It is not some vague, overarching goal like, “Oh, I hope I can leave my kids a nice life insurance policy.” It is truly something I think about daily: Is this something I can leave to my family? Does this decision move me closer to that long-term goal? That kind of legacy-building is a significant motivator for me.

Jacobsen: Do you think the nature of weddings in America has changed over the past couple of decades in terms of how people perceive them and how they’re conducted?

Hoskins: Absolutely. We’re seeing a more pessimistic generation emerging. Millennials, and especially the generation coming up behind us, have seen so much instability—economic, social, and even existential. And I think that’s affected how people view marriage.

There’s this growing belief that marriage is just a societal construct—like, it’s not really that important, so who cares? That kind of attitude is more common now. On the other hand, you also have the Instagram wedding phenomenon, where the entire event becomes a photo opportunity. It’s about the aesthetic, the post, the share.

At the same time, you still have people deeply rooted in marriage traditions, for whom the meaning goes beyond visuals or content. So yes, the face of weddings has definitely changed—it’s more varied, more performative in some ways, and also more fragmented than before.

Jacobsen: It reminds me of that old Dwayne “The Rock” Johnson bit—“Can you smell what The Rock is cooking?” It’s like even weddings are now performative moments for the ‘audience’—everyone wants to recreate the celebrity wedding vibe on Instagram.

Hoskins: Exactly.

Section 6: The Michigan 50

Jacobsen: How has receiving the Michigan 50 Companies to Watch award impacted your business—whether in terms of growth or brand recognition?

Hoskins: That’s still new for us, so we’re working through it. But honestly, we underestimated how many people would see it and how big a deal it is.

Like, literally today—I went to the flower shop, and they said, “Hey Brit, we heard you won an award!” And we were like, “Wait, how did you hear about that?” So I think we didn’t realize its reach at first.

But yes—it adds a layer of validity to our brand. It is one of those things that acts like a stamp of approval. It confirms that we’re headed in the right direction—and that’s a great feeling.

Jacobsen: How do you select venues or partners when you want to deliver low-cost wedding experiences with a high impact?

Hoskins: I’ll be honest—the answer I’m going to give is one that not everyone will like. I genuinely try to control as much of the process as possible. Our clients come to us looking for a venue; they come to us for the décor. They come to us for the rentals. And because we own the experience, we can tailor the budgeting. We can tailor the experience. In a way, we’ve created a little mini-event monopoly—but only because we’ve been disappointed by other vendors so many times.

A perfect example: Yesterday, we hosted a major event at our venue—a customer appreciation day. It was fantastic. I wanted a dance floor installed, so I contacted three or four vendors to arrange it.

They didn’t return calls or reply to text messages. One vendor answered and said they’d call back, but they never did, so I just bought one myself.

Now, our clients can access a dance floor—and we control that part of the experience. That’s how many of the services we offer have come about. We try to support other vendors first, but when we see a gap—especially one that makes the process stressful or exhausting—we step in to fill it. We want to make the experience smooth and enjoyable from start to finish.

Jacobsen: What do you hope attendees will take away from the Tulum experience—beyond the ceremony itself?

Hoskins: I hope the ceremony is just a small part of the experience. I want the entire experience to be life-changing. I’ve planned an action-packed retreat filled with workshops and activities designed to bring couples closer together.

We’ve got yacht excursions, team scavenger hunts, and more. We’ve even bought out an entire boutique hotel, where we’ll host private events throughout the retreat. I hope attendees walk away feeling like they had an attainable luxury, high-end experience—and they leave feeling stronger as a couple.

Section 7: Wedding Quotes

Jacobsen: Do you have a favourite quote about weddings?

Hoskins: I don’t know if I have a specific quote, but one thing I always tell my brides is that their wedding day is just one day of what they hope will be a million more.

It sounds funny, coming from someone who works at weddings, but I tell them not to take the day too seriously. Some brides become so stressed that they want it to be over. And I’m like, “That’s not how you should remember your wedding day. It should be exciting and joyful.”

So remember: today is one day of what you pray will be a lifetime. Do not let the pressure steal your joy.

Jacobsen: Well, Britney, I’m out of questions—Thank you very much for your time today.

Hoskins: Thank you for your time as well. It was lovely to meet you. I look forward to reading what you write. If you have any follow-up questions, feel free to reach out.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much. Take care. Bye.

Hoskins: Thank you. Bye.

Discussion

Britney Hoskins exemplifies the power of entrepreneurial vision rooted in community, resilience, and intentional legacy-building. Through Mini Mony Day and her broader business ecosystem—including The Top Pic Collective, Deluxe Event Rentals, and Moranis Event Venue—Hoskins redefines what luxury can mean in the context of weddings and event planning. Her approach dismantles the traditional cost barriers associated with high-end celebrations, offering an inclusive alternative that blends affordability with elegance. The interview reveals a consistent theme of control—not for the sake of exclusivity, but to ensure quality, reliability, and a stress-free experience for clients. By vertically integrating her services, Hoskins closes logistical gaps that often disrupt the event experience. Her candid remarks about vendors failing to deliver highlight a broader issue within the events industry, especially for small and minority-owned businesses seeking consistency and excellence.

The expansion of Mini Mony Day to Tulum marks a significant evolution in her work: merging destination wedding culture with retreat-style intimacy. This transformation reflects a broader cultural shift toward meaning-making experiences over traditional ceremonies. As Hoskins notes, modern weddings have become increasingly performative—driven by social media and aesthetics—yet there remains a yearning for deeper connection. Her Tulum edition addresses both: it satisfies the visual expectations of contemporary couples while offering workshops and communal activities designed to reinforce the emotional bond. Hoskins’s commitment to mentorship, particularly for young women of color, signals that her impact extends far beyond individual events. She sees entrepreneurship not merely as a means of personal advancement but as a vehicle for intergenerational change. Her focus on closing the Black wealth gap by building sustainable, transferable businesses reveals a strategic approach to economic empowerment rooted in family and community.

Methods

The interview was scheduled and recorded—with explicit consent—for transcription, review, and curation. This process complied with applicable data protection laws, including the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA), Canada’s Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA), and Europe’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), i.e., recordings were stored securely, retained only as needed, and deleted upon request, as well in accordance with Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and Advertising Standards Canada guidelines.

Data Availability

No datasets were generated or analyzed during the current article. All interview content remains the intellectual property of the interviewer and interviewee.

References

(No external academic sources were cited for this interview.)

Journal & Article Details

  • Publisher: In-Sight Publishing
  • Publisher Founding: March 1, 2014
  • Web Domain: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com
  • Location: Fort Langley, Township of Langley, British Columbia, Canada
  • Journal: In-Sight: Interviews
  • Journal Founding: August 2, 2012
  • Frequency: Four Times Per Year
  • Review Status: Non-Peer-Reviewed
  • Access: Electronic/Digital & Open Access
  • Fees: None (Free)
  • Volume Numbering: 13
  • Issue Numbering: 2
  • Section: A
  • Theme Type: Idea
  • Theme Premise: “Outliers and Outsiders”
  • Theme Part: 33
  • Formal Sub-Theme: None.
  • Individual Publication Date: June 8, 2025
  • Issue Publication Date: July 1, 2025
  • Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
  • Word Count: 2,233
  • Image Credits: Photo by Samantha Gades on Unsplash
  • ISSN (International Standard Serial Number): 2369-6885

Acknowledgements

The author acknowledges Britney Hoskins for her time, expertise, and valuable contributions. His thoughtful insights and detailed explanations have greatly enhanced the quality and depth of this work, providing a solid foundation for the discussion presented herein.

Author Contributions

S.D.J. conceived the subject matter, conducted the interview, transcribed and edited the conversation, and prepared the manuscript.

Competing Interests

The author declares no competing interests.

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License.
© Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012–Present.

Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen is strictly prohibited. Excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Supplementary Information

Below are various citation formats for Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events.

American Medical Association (AMA 11th Edition)
Jacobsen S. Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events. June 2025;13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins

American Psychological Association (APA 7th Edition)
Jacobsen, S. (2025, June 8). Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events. In-Sight Publishing. 13(2).

Brazilian National Standards (ABNT)
JACOBSEN, S. Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events. In-Sight: Interviews, Fort Langley, v. 13, n. 2, 2025.

Chicago/Turabian, Author-Date (17th Edition)
Jacobsen, Scott. 2025. “Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events.” In-Sight: Interviews 13 (2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins.

Chicago/Turabian, Notes & Bibliography (17th Edition)
Jacobsen, S. “Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events.” In-Sight: Interviews 13, no. 2 (June 2025). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins.

Harvard
Jacobsen, S. (2025) ‘Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events’, In-Sight: Interviews, 13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins.

Harvard (Australian)
Jacobsen, S 2025, ‘Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events’, In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 2, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins.

Modern Language Association (MLA, 9th Edition)
Jacobsen, Scott. “Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events.” In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 2, 2025, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins.

Vancouver/ICMJE
Jacobsen S. Conversation with Britney Hoskins on Inclusive Luxury Weddings & Building Legacy Through Events [Internet]. 2025 Jun;13(2). Available from: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/hoskins

Note on Formatting

This document follows an adapted Nature research-article format tailored for an interview. Traditional sections such as Methods, Results, and Discussion are replaced with clearly defined parts: Abstract, Keywords, Introduction, Main Text (Interview), and a concluding Discussion, along with supplementary sections detailing Data Availability, References, and Author Contributions. This structure maintains scholarly rigor while effectively accommodating narrative content.

Tauya Chinama on Phobias About Humanists

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/13

Tauya Chinama is a Zimbabwean born philosopher, Humanist, apatheist, academic researcher and educator. He is also into human rights struggles and active citizenship as the founding leader of a Social Democrats Association (SODA) a youth civic movement which lobbies and advocates for the inclusion and recognition of the young people into decision making processes and boards throughout the country anchored on Sustainable Development Goal 16 (Peace, Justice, Strong Institutions). He is also the acting president of Humanists Zimbabwe. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, once again, we are here with the wonderful Tauya Chinama. We have been discussing the Zimbabwean context extensively, focusing on humanists, non-believers, and those who take a more critical-thinking approach to what are often seen as unquestioned beliefs in public life. You continually evolve your perspective, even to the point of embracing apatheism at this stage. Today, I wanted to talk about combating phobias against non-believers and humanists. It is an interesting topic.

I see this issue everywhere. It doesn’t matter which region of the world or the people I’m speaking to—it only differs in the flavour, tone, and style of the fear or phobias that people hold. So, in a Zimbabwean context, what have you observed? What do you notice on both a personal level and in public life?

Tauya Chinama: Well, thank you very much for this opportunity. Let’s start by defining a phobia. A phobia is an irrational fear or hatred of something. In this case, it’s an irrational fear or hatred of non-religious people or humanists. As I mentioned, the fear is irrational. There is no reasoning behind these attitudes, and Zimbabwe became what it is today regarding religion largely due to colonization. The majority of the population about 85% are Christians, but they didn’t become Christians by choice. They became Christians through colonization. When the missionaries came to Zimbabwe, they demonized local culture, branding it as barbaric, backward, and unworthy of preservation. Many people accepted this, and although some resisted, they faced punishment, including being labelled as rebellious. Concepts like Satan and the devil were introduced to Zimbabwe, with people being told that they were doing ancestral worship which the missionaries associated with the evil. So, today in Zimbabwe, before revealing that you are non-religious or a humanist, you need to consider your audience because they might quickly label you as evil or devil worshiper.

Being labelled can have political, economic, and social consequences. Socially, you may start to be excluded, and some people will choose to disassociate with you. Politically, if you are an active politician, you could lose support simply because you are openly non-religious.

Economically, you could lose your job or miss out on economic opportunities. So, the phobia against Humanists and non religious people manifests in different forms. Some people may genuinely fear you due to irrational beliefs forced into them. 

Jacobsen: From a sympathetic or empathetic point of view, in conversations with individuals who hold various supernatural beliefs, extra-material philosophies, or some form of magical worldview, how do these beliefs help them in their local context? How do they fortify themselves against the hardships, difficulties, and challenges, particularly within the Zimbabwean cultural context?

Chinama: Yes, of course it is a fact that religion helps people to cope with certain problems or sometimes allows them to evade responsibility by assuming someone higher than human beings takes care of everything beyond human control, but from my experience, when I speak to religious people, especially those with whom I have a close personal relationship, some will say, “Yes, you’re making sense.” However, they have a fear of reasoning. This is another phobia. They are afraid to reason against a well-established religion because they feel it sounds like blasphemy. That fear leads them to suspect that they are committing blasphemy. So, sometimes, they choose not to reason. I usually give them an example when they accuse me of being a devil worshipper or something similar. I say, “Listen, who created the devil?” They will say, “God.” Then I say, “Well, didn’t He know that the devil would go against Him later on?” They reply, “Yes.” So I say, “The same devil you accuse me of worshipping was created by the God you worship. Aren’t you also aligned with the devil by that logic?” At that point, they start to see the reasoning. Some people, especially younger ones, can try to understand this perspective. However, those who are older, over forty, are much more difficult to convince.

Those below forty, you can have a conversation with them, and they are often more open to listening and understanding. A few days ago, I met a young lady at a salon. She seemed religious but somewhat skeptical. As we talked, I explained how certain scriptures, especially in Leviticus, can be oppressive. She eventually agreed and said that the book of Leviticus should be removed from the Bible.

She said, “Yes, you make sense.” I exchanged contact information with her, but when I tried to follow up later, she didn’t respond. I believe it was due to that phobia, the fear that I might influence her to stray from her beliefs. That’s my experience observing how people relate to non-religious and humanists.

There is often a void left behind when someone leaves religion because it’s extremely scary to be free. The idea that “I am fully responsible for all the problems I face and no one is coming to save me” is terrifying for many.

Jacobsen: I recall, as you know, James Randi, a prominent member of the skeptic community in the United States, once told me in an interview before he passed away that the primary reason behind a lot of religious beliefs is fear. I find that your analysis aligns closely with his.

So, more to the point about phobias toward humanists and the non-religious, like naturalists, what is the experience on the other side—those on the receiving end of this fear you just described? In other words, how does this fear of the religious manifest in the lives of the non-religious, humanists, and others, even those without a particular emotional attachment, such as apatheists like yourself?

Chinama: Yes, the fear that religious people have sometimes challenged the non-religious as well. A good example, though unrelated to Zimbabwe, is a well-known atheist who recently converted to Christianity. I’m referring to Aryan Hirsi Ali, she struggled with the freedom of knowing that nothing external would help her. In an interview with Richard Dawkins she mentioned having a feeling of deep emptiness and thought Christianity would fill that void.

Most of the time, due to the social consequences of being non-religious, people are secluded, left alone, lose economic opportunities, and lose political popularity. It’s a painful experience. It takes much courage to stand firm on humanism. As a non-religious person or a humanist, you may sit down and question yourself: “Am I wrong? Am I right?”

This internal conflict can lead you to become more open-minded or radical. For example, some people are accused of being devil worshippers. Even though they know they aren’t, repeated accusations can push them to embrace the label out of frustration. They might say, “Fine, if you insist, I am,” reinforcing the phobias. In some cases, they might even mockingly say, “Yes, I am a devil worshipper,” just to scare the religious people, playing into the accusations.

I remember telling you about my journey and how I became who I am today. When I was religious, especially while training to become a Catholic priest, I can honestly say I was unthinkingly religious. I joined the seminary to be trained as a Catholic priest, but then I realized I had to pretend a lot and was too honest to continue that path.

Eventually, I became agnostic, and later, I turned into a militant atheist, but I realized that being militant didn’t work for me. Over time, I became more moderate and adopted apatheism. I don’t care whether God exists or not; what I care about is the welfare of human beings.

You laugh when I say I was too honest to be a priest, but that’s true. I tell people that if you sit down with a priest or someone training to be one and if they are honest with you, they’ll tell you that to survive in that environment, you must wear a mask. You cannot be your true self. If you are yourself won’t last long. You’ll either be ejected or you’ll leave voluntarily. I chose to leave on my terms.

I still talk to people who are in the system or have left, and they are honest with me because they know I understand their struggles. At one point, Dr. Leo Igwe of Nigeria and I tried to start the “Excellence Project,” which was meant to help with psychosocial support people who once train to become priests, imams, rabbis, or other religious officials but had become non-religious. Both Dr. Leo Igwe and I share similar backgrounds, we all trained to be catholic priests but eventually left. He understands the struggle of transitioning from religious training to becoming non-religious. We are still in the process of establishing that group. We want to offer psychosocial support to people transitioning from training as religious officials to becoming non-religious. We understand the void they experience and how society will view them. They are normally judged harshly, for example, if you start a project that fails, people will claim, “God is punishing him because he turned his back on God.” They’ll say you failed because you didn’t fulfill your religious commitment. But what they don’t realize is that some of us left because we were too honest to continue as religious officials. To be a religious official, sometimes you have to be dishonest. You find yourself telling people things you don’t believe simply because it will make them feel better. That’s what non-religious people often experience—it depends on how you became non-religious. Still, it isn’t easy to maintain that stance. Sometimes you think, “Maybe I’m wrong.” Other times, you know, “No, I’m right.” For instance, when I’m speaking with Christians, and I don’t want to be judged harshly, I try to open up their perspective by saying, “If you are going to believe in a god, can’t you believe in one beyond the Bible?” I challenge them by pointing out the contradictions in their beliefs. For example, I ask, “How can you believe in a biblical God who doesn’t know which house belongs to a Jew or an Egyptian and needs blood on doorposts to identify them?” Or, “How can a God justify killing the firstborn of every living thing, even mice and flies, just because of a dispute with Pharaoh?”

I try to make them see how irrational some of their beliefs are. I’m glad the Zimbabwean government has introduced “Heritage Studies” and “Family and Religious Studies” in schools, which came from a presidential commission of 1999 popularly known as Nziramasanga Commission, it’s main goal was to reduce the colonial legacy in the  education system. These studies encourage people to reconnect with their culture and view the world from that perspective rather than through an imposed religion like Christianity, Judaism, or Islam.

You can only truly understand certain concepts when you view them through the prism of your own culture. Later on, people may start to appreciate the value of their heritage. But if they have abandoned their culture and adopted an alien one—such as Christianity, Judaism, or Islam—it becomes difficult. That’s why even some non-religious people, when they face challenges, fall back into Christianity, Islam, or Judaism.

Jacobsen: What about using humanist principles to counter some of this public fear? Today, we’re focusing primarily on the social aspects, not legal discrimination, police harassment, or anything else. We’re talking about the internal psychological profiles of individuals who do not understand humanists or other non-religious people in any realistic way.

So, when it comes to conversations aimed at countering the internalized beliefs and misconceptions people have about humanists, you and Leo Igwe are uniquely qualified. Being trained as a priest, you understand religious individuals’ internal dialogue and the humanist point of view. As you mentioned in our previous interview, your love of logic was a driving force for you.

How do you use this understanding of psychology on the other side to facilitate dialogue, reduce fear, and help people understand humanists and others more accurately?

Chinama: Yes. That’s interesting, when applying humanistic values such as helping a blind person or assisting someone who is disabled—the response is often religious. For instance, the person might say, “Ah, you are prayerful. May God bless you.”

Jacobsen: And you convey your message in a way that aligns with their language without necessarily believing the literal interpretation of what they are saying. So, you can communicate effectively without agreeing with the religious connotations.

Chinama: I understand that the person is expressing gratitude. Still, they may seriously believe I made the gesture because I am religious. In reality, I did it because I am human. However, explaining, “I did this because I am human, not religious,” would complicate things.

So, we practice humanistic values. Still, our only real opportunity to express ourselves and clarify that our actions are driven by humanism comes during public engagements. For example, recently, I was invited to the University of Zimbabwe in collaboration with the cultural office of the Embassy of the Islamic Republic of Iran. They were discussing religions in the context of injustice.

At that event, I explained to everyone present, “When you hold interfaith dialogues, why do you exclude us, humanists?” I also pointed out that the theme of this year’s Humanists International Conference, held in Singapore, was Secularism and Interfaith Harmony. This means we are also invested in fostering dialogue between different belief systems. We seek harmony among people, regardless of their beliefs. It’s one of our core values to appreciate diversity.

People need to know that we don’t intend to convert or convince everyone to be nonreligious or Humanists but we want respect for everyone regardless of someone’s religious affiliation. I’m pleased to see how our efforts are evolving here in Zimbabwe. However, our limited numbers are a challenge. I am invited by University of Zimbabwe for another conference on Media against phobias in relation to religious liberties. At the conference I mentioned, the organizers asked me, “How many people can you bring, and how many papers do you want to present?” This shows that they are beginning to see value in what we offer.

Sometimes, I’m invited to radio and television stations. In December, I’m scheduled to attend a high-level event in South Africa on Decolonizing Secularism, where I will present the Zimbabwean humanistic perspective.

As an individual, I’m doing my best to engage with the media and represent humanism. This is part of my service to the humanist and non-religious communities. Besides other efforts, such as helping people, we face phobias locally. We don’t have significant resources to donate as humanists in Zimbabwe. If we go to an orphanage and identify ourselves as non-religious, sometimes our help is denied. This is one of the challenges we face.

Chinama: Sometimes, we might have to donate in silence and not mention our religious affiliation or lack thereof. However, we are progressing through media engagement, trying to make people understand our perspectives. I’m confident that, with time—perhaps in 10 or 15 years—we will see the fruits of our efforts today. We keep investing in our image, in our intellect, and the promotion of humanism. We want people to eventually accept and appreciate the value of science, rationality, and logic while minimizing the harm of irrational superstitions or fearing people merely for holding a different view, like being an atheist.

That’s the idea—we shouldn’t judge or fear people for that. That’s how I see it.

Jacobsen: What about communicating these methodologies to other humanists? What things need to be more obvious to them so they can better understand how to communicate? What areas might conflict arise in understanding what the other side thinks of them?

Chinama: When it comes to non-religious people and humanists, it’s like trying to herd cats. You can’t place all the cats in one area and tell them, “Don’t go here, don’t go there.” Humanists and non-religious people are not sheep—you can’t  force them to follow the same path. So, disagreements will always be there, and that’s fine. That’s part of being a humanist, part of being scientific.

However, the key point we share as humanists is this: we must teach people that science works and that reason works. We need to promote science. The good thing about science is that it’s open to change and accepts anyone—it’s not dogmatic. When we explain that science works, we’re not necessarily telling religious people that their religion doesn’t work. Religion might work for them in a psychosocial sense, and that’s fine. But we must stay grounded in reality and aim for lasting solutions.

Religious consolations, while comforting, are often temporary. For example, if someone prays for money but doesn’t go to work, they’ll remain stuck in the same cycle. It would be best to work to earn money—that’s the reality. So, what we’re trying to teach is that people should be productive, scientific, and rational; that’s the core of our message.

We were planning to meet as Humanists in Zimbabwe in  September, but unfortunately, today is the last day of September 2024, but  it didn’t happen. I hope  we shall meet before the end of the year to unify our message and reflect on humanism from the perspective of our environment and culture. We must figure out how best to package our message to convince others. How you explain humanism in Canada may not be the same way I explain it in Zimbabwe or how someone in India might explain it.

We have to customize it. We must tailor the message to fit the particular society but retain the core values—being empathetic, scientific, rational, and logical, valueing hard work and productivity, and promoting secularism or secularization. We aim to minimize the negative impact of superstition on public policy and individuals.

Jacobsen: How do you balance the eternal struggle between compassion, conveying critical thinking, and understanding while judgment?

Chinama: I prefer understanding over judgment. Check the Humanists International website under the section for Young Humanists 2023. You’ll see that I’m one of the nominees. The title of my story is “I Prefer Understanding Over Judgment.” I always try to understand why people think the way they do because judging people without knowing the reasons behind their thinking doesn’t feel right.

Earlier, I mentioned that the majority of Zimbabweans became Christians through colonization. So, I understand that much of what people believe today is a colonial hangover—a legacy deeply ingrained in society. I always aim to understand. Sometimes, I clash with fellow humanists and non-religious people who accuse me of being too sympathetic to religious people. Why? Because I believe in giving religious people a chance to share their stories. If we listen to them first, we can better share our perspectives. Judgment without understanding won’t go anywhere.

One of the most interesting experiences I’ve had was when I was on a TV program two years ago, engaging with an SDA (Seventh-day Adventist) pastor. I was surprised when he agreed with me. I told him that Christianity is defined by confusion, and at first, he said, “No, no, no, you’re wrong” I asked him to give me time to explain, and he agreed. I said, “Take an Adventist, a Catholic, and a Wesleyan—put them in the same room and ask them to define God. Will they give the same answer?” He thought about it and replied, “No.” I “said,” “Isn’t it confusion?” He eventually agreed, saying, “You’re right; what defines Christianity is confusion.”

The TV program presenter said, “Pastor, you’re ruining the program by agreeing with this guy!” But the pastor replied, “I have no choice—what he’s saying  makes sense.”

I argue that rationality works. Unfortunately, the presenter of that program, who used to talk to me regularly, left Zimbabwe six months ago and is now in the United States. I can connect you with him if you’d like. He’s more level-headed after interacting with people from different faiths, including me. Although he remains somewhat religious and agnostic, he’s more balanced now.

Jacobsen: We have about three minutes left. Any final thoughts based on today’s session, Tauya?

Chinama: Thank you very much. I want to encourage my theistic brothers and sisters, those who are religious. We understand your fears and concerns, which may stem from not engaging with us. Please, let us engage. Let’s reason together. We have no intention of converting you, but we want to see progress for everyone. We believe that science works, and we believe that reason works.

To my fellow non-religious people, I urge you not to shut out religious individuals. They have a story to tell, and we should listen to them. Let’s understand their perspective and reason from their point of view. We can create a diverse society where people respect each other regardless of their religious beliefs. I rest my case. Thank you very much.

Jacobsen: Thank you for your time as well.

Chinama: A lovely welcome.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much. Take care.

Chinama: Bye. Take care too.

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License. ©Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012-Present. Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen strictly prohibited, excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Lee Reams on Kwillt and Memorialization

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/13

*Transcript edited for readability.*

Kwillt is a platform that empowers individuals to celebrate and preserve their life stories. Through Legacy and Remembrance Patches, users can document milestones, memories and honor loved ones. Kwillt connects generations, ensuring every story is remembered and cherished, creating a lasting digital legacy for future generations. Lee Reams is a co-founder. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Lee Reams to discuss Kwillt, which is primarily focused on moving away from the toxic nature of social media and emphasizing a more positive, authentic approach. I may have just given away the plot, but from your observations, what were some of the original inspirations for creating this?

Lee Reams: I’ll give you a story if that’s all right. It all evolved from a trip to Egypt when the pandemic ended. Egypt was beginning to reopen, and it was a lifelong trip my father had always wanted to take.

He was still healthy enough to go, so we decided to do it. We went there, and it was like visiting Disneyland with no one else around. We had free rein and did the entire Nile cruise, seeing all the important landmarks.

As we explored the tombs and Egypt, what resonated with me was the culture, storytelling, and how the people controlled their narratives. We had just come through the pandemic and cancel culture, where opinions could be judged and attacked. You could express an opinion; someone might think it was wrong and come after you or your company, damaging your reputation. What struck me was how Egypt’s culture centred around storytelling.

When I returned, I started thinking about the experience of walking through someone’s life in chronological order, with images helping to tell the story. In Egypt, instead of written language, they used pictures. I found it incredibly moving, giving you a sense of someone’s life.

The original concept for Kwillt was born from this experience. I wondered if we could digitize something similar for people today. Every life has a story to tell, and everyone has valuable wisdom to share. So, how could we bring that into the modern age and transform what is typically a 2D experience into something more interactive?

We came up with storytelling, something we call “3D storytelling,” and that’s what Kwillt evolved into. We started with the idea of remembrance after someone passes away, or a legacy version, where individuals can chronicle their entire life story before they pass. They can start from the beginning and share their stories.

For the remembrance side, you can invite a whole group to contribute to a story. Let’s say you’re putting together a memorial slideshow for someone who has passed. Usually, a sibling or the eldest child is responsible for this, which can be overwhelming. Also, the story is often told from just one perspective. With Kwillt, you can invite family members, close friends, or anyone who knows your loved one to share their stories at different points in their lives.

Often, at a memorial, you hear someone say, “Oh, I met your dad when he was playing basketball at Albany,” and they’ll share a great story. Now, with Kwillt, those stories can be shared on a timeline from various points of view.

As we started developing the product, we got about 100 users involved, and through their feedback, we realized that this idea could be applied to almost any life event. I’ll give some examples: My daughter plays water polo, and her team travelled to Italy for two weeks. Everyone had their phones out, taking pictures for Instagram, but those moments are brief—they scroll by, and then they’re gone.

If they had been using Kwillt, everyone could have collaborated in a private space where only our community could see it. We could all add stories, creating something we could share with parents back home. We found that to be a valuable experience, and we realized this concept could be applied to any event—clubs, teams, weddings, and more.

Can you imagine a wedding where you can gather everyone’s perspectives and capture what they did during your special weekend, keeping it all as a keepsake under the Kwillt umbrella? Then, you can start connecting all these relationships. That’s where Kwillt started and where it’s evolving if that makes sense.

Jacobsen: You mentioned cancel culture earlier. People think of it as either a left or right issue, but I’ve seen it across the political and social spectrum. So it’s less about culture and more about a tactic, would you agree?

Reams: Yes, that’s a subtle distinction, but it’s important. The idea of storytelling plays a part in authenticity and in telling a more comprehensive narrative, especially during select events.

Jacobsen: Why do you think authenticity has become a valued part of culture? I’ve read reports from professionals observing a rise in patterns of narcissism, at least in North America, over several decades—not in clinical settings, but as a social trend.

Reams: You’re seeing a few things happening. You’re seeing an increase in mental health issues—especially among young people, with anxiety being so common. There’s immense pressure to be what you think others expect you to be. But all that pressure is lifted in a safe, community-oriented setting. You can be yourself without fear of judgment. It’s about communicating, laughing together, and sharing experiences that add value to your life. That’s one aspect of it.

Another is telling your story your way without someone else twisting it to fit a certain narrative. I completely agree with you—it’s not a left-wing or right-wing issue. In our culture, certain groups control the narrative right now. I used to call it the middle 80%, but maybe we’re down to 60% because the fringes have grown so much. It’s become very difficult for people who are more level-headed, calm, and not easily triggered to voice what they think.

I’ve noticed more people disengaging from social media, especially those in your age group. For example, Gen Xers are probably the least likely to post anything on Instagram, but we’re much more prone to engaging in private groups. We’re using tools like WhatsApp or GroupMe, where I stay connected with my fraternity brothers from college. We reconnected during the pandemic, and technology allowed us to do that.

If we had a tool like Kwillt, we could upload stories and pictures in a safe environment, preserving and enjoying those memories together instead of just chatting. It’s entertainment, but it’s also a form of community. You mentioned narcissism earlier, and I don’t want to speak negatively about a particular group, but the Kardashian-style “me, me, me” culture has impacted America. It’s not all about the individual—it’s about friends, family, and loved ones. It’s about enjoying time together without outside influences judging you.

That’s my perspective. More people are starting to speak up than they previously wouldn’t have because they’re tired of the craziness on both sides. Unfortunately, in today’s society, a small group seems to be steering the direction of things.

Jacobsen: And there’s a broader potential issue here, where even the concept of authenticity could become a brand and, ironically, fake. In some ways, that could mirror many of the pathologies we noted earlier. How do you ensure, through Kwillt, that you don’t just brand authenticity but make it the foundation of the model you’re pursuing?

Reams: Yes. The community itself helps keep you in check. You’re sharing within groups close to you, so it’s not like we’re trying to be a social media platform. We’re focused on being a community platform. To us, “community” means family.

People are not as fake within their families. Some may embellish things or feel insecure and push their “best life,” but they’re more likely to be their authentic selves in scenarios where they feel safe. People feel more comfortable with family, a team, or creating something to share a pregnancy journey. For example, someone could use Kwillt to document their pregnancy from start to finish, and then after the baby is born, they could use it to ask family members to contribute to the child’s college fund. That’s the kind of meaningful use we’re aiming for.

Even if some things are a bit edited down, when you’re controlling who’s part of the group, you’re not as worried about outsiders making noise. Many online disruptions come from trolls just out to stir up trouble and antagonize others. That’s not good for anyone’s mental health or well-being. We’re the opposite of that experience if that makes sense.

Jacobsen: Yes, focusing on community and close relationships—family, cousins, and so on—does tie into the concept of boundaries in storytelling. You mentioned friends, family, sororities, fraternities, and other groups. That seems to be another important aspect of Kwillt. However, with any business model, especially a media model, the goal is often to expand. So, how do you scale up?

Reams: That’s a great question. Our business is built on the network effect. Take remembrance, for instance. In the original model, someone is creating a digital memorial or slideshow, and there are QR codes people can scan. Those who can’t attend the memorial in person can still view the slideshow. When you share the QR code or the link on social media or via email, even people who didn’t attend the event can access it. Out of 100 people who see it, some may create a Kwillt memorial for a loved one.

For example, after one memorial, four others might be created. Each person can leave comments or memories. Some may think, “I want to make one of these for Uncle Bill, who passed away,” and the network grows. The multiplier effect comes into play, and that’s how we see the community expanding exponentially.

We also have a “stitching” feature where users can stitch together relationships and experiences. This is where the community aspect and network effect come into play. We fully commit to this approach and believe the network effect will drive our growth. There are other ways to amplify that growth, but the network effect will make or break the platform.

Jacobsen: Have there been any Kwillts created for memorials around tragedies?

Reams: Yes, you nailed it, Scott. One of the first things we focused on was related to healthcare records. I’m adopted, so at one point, I didn’t know much about my DNA or medical history. I have a daughter, and people often ask about our family health records. Through Kwillt, we developed a tool called “Lifeline,” which allows users to share their health information with their family tree or anyone they’re connected with.

If there’s something like lupus running in a family or a tragic event, Kwillt provides a way for people to come together. We’re not trying to compete with Facebook communities, but we want to offer a space for people with shared experiences to connect, find support, and access resources. While we haven’t fully expanded into that area yet, the feature is there, and it aligns perfectly with the use case you described.

We will approach this from an angle where we could likely get some cosponsors to help backfill resources. While we won’t be experts in some areas, we believe groups will be interested in sponsoring and helping manage certain aspects. As you mentioned, shared experiences—even in grief, tragedies, or shared illnesses—are important for keeping diverse perspectives. How did you handle this? What were the signs? How did you cope as a caregiver? How did you deal with the stress? There are many angles that Kwillt was built to address.

Jacobsen: Are there areas where this could go wrong? 

Reams: Of course, with anything, you might have rogue participants. Have you heard stories of someone writing a terrible obituary for their mother because they hated her? There are risks in that regard.

However, we have policing tools in place. Users can flag inappropriate content. As the owner of a patch, you have master admin rights. You also have some controls and safeguards to manage the content. The most significant risk is when families have rivalries or unresolved conflicts. Not everyone is perfect, and not every family member will want to participate.

That’s why we’ve built in different privacy levels: one-to-one, group, and public privacy options. These features allow users to control access and protect themselves. I believe we’ve put sufficient safeguards in place, but those are the areas where things could potentially go south.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts based on today’s conversation?

Reams: You’ve hit on where things are headed. People are just tired of being the product. Every aspect of their privacy is sold and monetized, and they want a digital experience that feels more like a positive rabbit hole of memories, something with emotional depth. That’s what Kwillt is all about.

Whether remembering a loved one and listening to an audio message they left behind or using the time-lapse feature to replay a wedding, much wisdom can be shared. It’s a completely different experience from what’s out there on social media today.

If you’ve ever seen Michael J. Fox’s documentary, it offers an authentic glimpse into his life. That’s the storytelling and timeline feature we want to encourage on Kwillt. People have so much wisdom to share. Imagine if grandkids could learn about what their grandparents did—an immense amount of knowledge is currently not being shared as it once was.

Hopefully, Kwillt will thrive, and people will start using it to gain its many benefits.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Lee, thank you for your time today.

Reams: Thank you, Scott.

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License. ©Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012-Present. Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen strictly prohibited, excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

August Update From Prisoners Defenders on Cuba

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/12

*Interview conducted September 26, 2024.*

Javier Larrondo Calafat is the President of Prisoners Defenders. Here we talk about the large number of political prisoners in Cuba.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are back here with Javier from Prisoners Defenders. I received the report indicating that 1,105 people are currently imprisoned for political reasons in Cuba. Based on my review of the report, fewer people were imprisoned this month than in previous months. Why the slowdown?

Javier Larrondo Calafat: Well, it’s natural for the number to slow down when it gets so high, and it has been sustained for so many years as people begin completing their sentences. This month, we saw 15 people removed from the list:

  • Thirteen of them completed their sentences.
  • One tragically committed suicide.
  • Another was forcibly expatriated from Cuba.

Additionally, there were only two new cases this month.

At this rate, the number of political prisoners could drop to around 1,000 within six to nine months, assuming nothing significant happens to increase the numbers. However, we still have 30 minors and 117 women on the list. Torture and mistreatment continue for the prisoners, and this report focuses on two or three particularly concerning issues.

One major issue is that people with mental illnesses are being placed in high-security prisons among dangerous inmates, leading to extreme suffering. To make matters worse, they are not receiving the medication they need. We’ve documented 62 such cases so far, but we expect that number to rise to 80.

We also focused on the poor nutritional conditions prisoners face. Many are underweight, falling below the United Nations’ minimum BMI of 18.5. We documented cases where individuals have BMIs as low as 15.78. For instance, some prisoners are 1.87 meters tall (6 feet 2 inches) but weigh only 58 kilograms (128 pounds). Another example is a man who is 1.80 meters tall (5 feet 10 inches) and weighs just 50 kilograms (110 pounds). These conditions put them at extreme risk.

Additionally, 329 prisoners are suffering from serious physical illnesses, putting their lives in danger. Their families are understandably desperate, and we wanted to highlight this issue.

Finally, we drew attention to the mistreatment of women prisoners, who are being separated from their children. The state takes custody of the children and places them in state-run centers where they are subjected to abuse. In one case, the child of a political prisoner has attempted suicide several times due to sexual harassment, bullying, and mistreatment.

In total, the situation for the 1,105 political prisoners in Cuba is extremely concerning.

Jacobsen: One last question: I appreciate your time. What about the minors in prison?

Calafat: Most minors are held in labour camps or under house arrest, with sentences averaging around five years. However, some are in actual prisons, ranging from 15 to 17 years old. In Cuba, minors as young as 15 can be imprisoned. The Cuban government has acknowledged our numbers and even higher ones to the Committee on the Rights of the Child. It’s a very concerning situation. Even those under house arrest are frequently harassed, detained, interrogated, and threatened by the authorities.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time, Javier.

Calafat: Thank you, Scott.

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License. ©Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012-Present. Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen strictly prohibited, excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Devaki Mathivanan on Petition for PIPS Dissolution

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/11

There is a petition to dissolve PIPS, which is associated with PULP Mag and The Runner. Devaki Mathivanan describes the petition’s lack of reasoning, suspicious student signatures, and concerns over conflicts of interest. PIPS decided not to take formal action, and there have been no significant responses from students or organizations. Mathivanan is the Operations Manager of the Polytechnic Ink Publishing Society. The Editor-in-Chief, Claudia Culley, of The Runner was interviewed, recently.

The case has been covered by Mornings with SimiThe Runner (also here), the Vancouver Sun, and MSN. PIPS is the umbrella organization for Pulp MAG and The RunnerKwantlen Student Association: KSA is a non-profit organization incorporated under the Society Act, independent of Kwantlen Polytechnic University. This narrative begins with reportage on activities of the KSA by the staff of The Runner, with the public chapter beginning with a petition.

The current Kwantlen Student Association[1] Executives:

KSA Executives

  • Yashanpreet Guron – President & Vice President of Student Life
  • Yugveer Gill – Vice President of University Affairs
  • Paramvir Singh – Vice President External Affairs
  • Simranjot Sekhon – Vice President Finance & Operations
  • Ishant Goyal – Associate President

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Devaki Mathivanan. When you received the petition for the dissolution of PIPS, a group associated with PULP Mag and The Runner, the student newspaper, what were your initial impressions of this petition?

Devaki Mathivanan: The first thing that came to mind was why PIPS needs to be dissolved. The petition didn’t provide any reason for the dissolution. When a society is dissolved, something significant usually is to seek a petition. But this petition came out of nowhere, and we did not understand the reason behind the dissolving of society so suddenly.

The society was functioning well, the autonomy agreement was in place, and we followed the bylaws. Everything that needed to happen within the society was happening. So, initially, we thought there was a hidden motive. Someone didn’t like our reporting, so we received this petition. Those were our first thoughts. Later, we decided to verify the status of the students who had signed the petition.

Jacobsen: What surprised you during the process of verifying the students?

Mathivanan: Initially, whenever we needed to verify a student’s status, we asked for the student’s enrollment status and confirmation. But we couldn’t do that this time, so we contacted KPU to verify the students. Although the petition claimed 150 signatures, we found a series of discrepancies. Many student IDs were invalid, some names were incorrect, and in some cases, the student names and IDs didn’t match. We also found duplicate entries, where the same student had signed their name at the front of the petition and again at the back.

Additionally, many signatures appeared to be written in the same handwriting. While the name, student ID, and signature were correct, the handwriting looked suspiciously similar. We investigated further to understand why students had signed. We wanted to see if they had consented, read, and understood what they were signing. A few students said they needed to know the petition’s content. They signed it because they knew the person asking for signatures, and we believe peer pressure played a large role in this.

Some students said they were promised a trip to Cultus Lake, while others mentioned KSA-related meetings. Interestingly, we have yet to encounter a student who genuinely wanted to dissolve society.

None of the students we spoke with knew the petition’s content. This confirmed our suspicions that there was an ulterior motive behind the petition. We also learned that one of the student-elected senate members was collecting signatures for the petition. According to the PIPS bylaws at KPU, any student holding an elected position is ineligible to be a member of the society. We considered this a direct violation, so we decided not to hold an FGM for this petition. Instead, we shared our findings with the student who had submitted the petition.

This was the background of the petition we received and how we validated our concerns.

Jacobsen: Now, what about the requests in the petition? What were the particulars and the overarching thrust of the demands?

Mathivanan: Yes, the main request was for the society’s dissolution. Another significant point was the removal or deletion of Bylaw 11, which outlines the fourth state of independence. This bylaw allows any student union member or KPU official to serve on the board of PIPS and be a staff member of The Runner or PULP Mag. Removing this would impact how the publications function.

Additionally, they wanted to remove all articles related to the Kwantlen Student Association (KSA). The petition requested that all KSA-related content be removed from online platforms and printed materials.

Another demand was removing the current board members from the council, followed by a new election to appoint fresh board members. These were the primary contents of the petition. 

Jacobsen: Even the mismatch between student IDs and names, invalid student IDs, and concerns about a conflict of interest with an elected KSA member collecting signatures for the petition, what has PIPS decided to do with the petition?

Mathivanan: Yes, we didn’t take any formal action. That’s what we decided, and our board agreed. We didn’t pursue any further action. Instead, we documented everything that happened and kept a record of all the details. However, since only one student emailed us, we needed more resources or support to investigate all 150 students involved or find out who was working behind the petition.

As such, we have yet to decide on any specific action to address the mismatches or discrepancies, apart from questioning why it was handled this way.

Jacobsen: Has there been any response from the student body or student association regarding PIPS’ decision not to proceed with the petition to dissolve?

Mathivanan: No, we haven’t received any comments from anyone about it. We spoke with KPU officials, who said they would assist if we decided to hold a Special General Meeting (SGM). Still, apart from that, we have yet to hear from any student body or organization regarding the petition. You’ve already mentioned it in your story.

We have covered this in a story, explaining that we received the petition and detailed what happened. Still, we haven’t heard anything from anyone about the petition or the decision not to hold an SGM.

Jacobsen: Students only pay 75 cents per credit to participate in or contribute to PIPS. Have you received any emails or complaints from students regarding this 75-cent contribution per credit?

Mathivanan: None, absolutely none. Students can opt-out and get a refund for the publication fees they pay.

We hardly receive requests to opt-out or get a refund for the publication fee. In the last fiscal year, we received only one opt-out request. We refunded, I think, about five dollars to that student.

That’s all we had last year, so we rarely receive requests for refunds. We have an option available if students want to opt out, but to the best of my knowledge, we haven’t received any complaints from students so far.

Jacobsen: Are there any parts of this story that haven’t been sufficiently covered in public reporting—whether in theVancouver SunRichmond News, or the little bits I’ve worked on? Are there any developments that should be added to this particular story?

Mathivanan: Everything regarding the petition has been covered. So, yeah.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Devaki, thank you very much for your time.

Mathivanan: Yeah, okay. Thank you. Thank you so much for meeting and writing a story supporting us.

It’s been a wonderful, overwhelming experience, especially when a student newspaper is affected. Receiving this kind of support means a lot. Thank you so much.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. Take care. Bye-bye.

Mathivanan: Yeah, bye-bye.

[1] Full listing:

KSA Executives

  • Yashanpreet Guron – President & Vice President Student Life
  • Yugveer Gill – Vice President University Affairs
  • Paramvir Singh – Vice President External Affairs
  • Simranjot Sekhon – Vice President Finance & Operations
  • Ishant Goyal – Associate President

Campus Representatives

  • Abhijeet Singh – Civic Plaza Campus Representative
  • Yashanpreet Guron – Cloverdale Campus Representative
  • Jashanpreet Singh Sekhon – Langley Campus Representative
  • Nitin Aggarwal – Richmond Campus Representative
  • Simranjeet Singh – Surrey Campus Representative

Constituency Representatives

  • Paramvir Singh – International Students Representative
  • Jaskaran Sohal – Mature Students Representative
  • Arnav Grover – Queer Students Representative
  • Ishant Goyal – Students of Color Representative
  • Lesli Sangha – Students with Disabilities Representative
  • Suhana Gill – Women’s Representative

Faculty Representatives

  • Jasmine Kaur Kochhar – Faculty of Arts Representatives
  • Yugveer Gill – Faculty of Arts Representatives
  • Dishika Gour – Faculty of Arts Representatives
  • Nishant Kapoor – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Simranjot Sekhon – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Keerat Goyal – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Yuvraj Bains – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Harpal Singh (Pala) – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Bhoomika Seera – Faculty of Science and Horticulture Representatives
  • Ranveer Singh – Faculty of Science and Horticulture Representatives

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License. ©Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012-Present. Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen strictly prohibited, excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Chip Lupo on State Diversity in the United States

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/11

 Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Chip Lupo to briefly cover diversity among U.S. states based on data gathering and formal analysis. To begin, as is appropriate for any research, are there any formal financial conflicts of interest in this study?

Chip Lupo: That’s a great question. There are none.

Jacobsen: When we look at the general diversity index among U.S. states, which states have you found to be the most diverse?

Lupo: According to our research, Scott, the top three states—unsurprisingly—are California, Texas, and New Jersey. These states are home to large immigrant populations and major metropolitan areas, contributing to their high diversity rankings. California, for instance, has a long history of immigration and is known for its significant Latino, Asian, and African American populations.

Jacobsen: Which states are the least diverse, and are there any hypotheses as to why?

Lupo: The least diverse states—the bottom five—are Vermont, Maine, West Virginia, Montana, and Wyoming. These states tend to have smaller populations and are predominantly rural and homogenous regarding ethnicity and race. The geographical isolation of some of these states and limited economic opportunities may also contribute to their lack of diversity.

Jacobsen: Based on the index, why is California such a highly diverse state?

Lupo: California’s diversity is influenced by several factors. Its proximity to Mexico and its role as a gateway for immigration from Asia contribute significantly. Additionally, California ranks highly in both socioeconomic and cultural diversity. Socioeconomic diversity refers to the wide range of household incomes, from low-income households to those earning over $150,000 annually. Cultural diversity includes linguistic diversity—whether English, Spanish, or another language is spoken at home—and racial and ethnic diversity, with large Hispanic, Asian, and African American populations.

Jacobsen: There is an old quote from Frederick Douglass in which he predicted, long ago, that it was not necessarily what he wanted to happen or not want to happen, but what he saw as the inevitable result of societal movements, cultures, and immigration patterns. This was briefly mentioned in the report. When does the Census Bureau predict that the United States will no longer have a single ethnic majority?

Lupo: I’m glad you brought that up. Douglass was referring to the “melting pot,” and his concern was assimilation. According to the Census Bureau, by 2045, the United States will no longer have a single ethnic majority. Currently, non-Hispanic whites make up the largest group. Still, demographic changes, especially immigration and birth rates among minority populations, are shifting that balance. States like California, Texas, Florida, and New York already reflect this trend, with no single group making up a majority.

Between the 2010 and 2020 censuses, the probability that two randomly selected Americans would be from different racial or ethnic groups increased from 54.9% to 61.1%.

Jacobsen: How was the index developed regarding the weighting of the various contributing factors, and why was that particular weighting chosen?

Lupo: That’s a critical question. We compared all 50 states across six key dimensions. In addition to socioeconomic and cultural diversity, we included economic diversity (which measures the variety of industries and job types), household diversity (including household composition and size), religious diversity (representing the range of religious affiliations), and political diversity (capturing the spread of political views within the state). Each factor was weighted based on its impact on social cohesion and representation.

Lupo: We placed the most weight within the cultural diversity dimension, particularly racial and ethnic diversity, where we applied triple weight. We put significant emphasis on this aspect, focusing on racial and ethnic categories such as Hispanic, Latino, white, Black, and African, as discussed previously. We also heavily weighed linguistic diversity, particularly in households where English is not the primary language.

We assigned a double weight to household income diversity, a key factor. Industry diversity was another important element. This falls under the economic diversity dimension, and we also weighed it considerably. Industry diversity refers to the wide range of businesses and industries that drive economic activity in these states.

These industries include agriculture, construction, manufacturing, finance, insurance, public administration, and educational services. What else did we emphasize heavily? Those were the major ones. Additionally, we applied full weight to metrics such as worker class diversity, covering categories like wage versus salary, government workers, self-employed workers, and marital status, including never married, divorced, separated, and widowed.

Household diversity was also an important factor. This is an interesting dimension because the most diverse states tend to have various household compositions, from two-person family households to seven-person or larger non-family households. This diversity is common in states with higher overall diversity rankings.

Jacobsen: What are the positives and negatives of living in a more diverse state, especially regarding the general values many Americans hold? For instance, if you were to generalize American values and preferences broadly, were these aspects considered in your analysis?

Lupo: The positive aspect is that diversity allows people from different backgrounds to share local services and institutions within their states. It encourages the promotion and embracing of diverse cultures and ideas. This is important because the U.S. was founded on the notion of being a melting pot, where people from various countries came together and assimilated.

However, a possible negative is that some U.S. residents may feel that recent immigrants are not assimilating into American culture as quickly as previous generations did. This could lead to fears about cultural fragmentation.

Jacobsen: What are Americans most comfortable and uncomfortable with regarding diversity? For example, gender and racial diversity are at the forefront of public consciousness. Still, when it comes to economic diversity, more Americans prefer less disparity, such as a smaller economic gap between people.

Lupo: That’s a good point. Regarding concerns about diversity, there’s discomfort surrounding the overburdening of infrastructure—whether it’s schools, hospitals, or law enforcement. These issues often arise when discussing immigration, particularly illegal immigration. Many Americans are generally supportive of legal immigration, but there’s more concern when it comes to illegal immigration. The hope is that immigrants will enter through legal channels, assimilate, and become part of American culture.

Additionally, there’s the economic concern that immigrants may take jobs that Americans might otherwise perform. These are ongoing issues that are part of the national conversation.

Jacobsen: Which states are projected to become significantly more diverse by the 2030s compared to now?

Lupo: One state to watch is Colorado. Its diversity numbers have risen significantly, especially as California becomes more crowded and people relocate. Colorado, Nevada, and Arizona are all states to watch. Additionally, New York ranked fourth in our index, building a strong and diverse base.

Look for that diversity to expand beyond the New York City metro area. In other parts of New York state, I imagine New York will be as diverse as California or Texas in another generation. 

Jacobsen: Are there any other significant points in the report and analysis that haven’t been mentioned yet?

We discussed where California, Texas, and Florida performed well, particularly in socioeconomic and cultural diversity. However, where they did not perform as well, and this surprised me, was in religious diversity. They aren’t as religiously diverse. That’s an interesting point I hadn’t considered. Yes, as you might expect. And then there’s political diversity. 

Jacobsen: It’s funny because I’ve done interviews with both religious leaders and non-religious leaders for so long. Still, I forgot to ask about religious diversity in this context. You develop certain patterns as a journalist and sometimes miss these nuances.

It’s like when an economics journalist focuses on real estate but forgets to ask about the economic impacts. It’s funny how those gaps happen. Anyway, please continue.

Lupo: California’s and Texas’s rich diversity did not extend to political diversity. If you look at an electoral college map, this becomes apparent. Both states lean toward one ideology, so California or Texas has little “purple” or political diversity.

On the other hand, Florida is more of a political melting pot and performs better regarding religious diversity. As these states become more diverse, the range of political ideologies may become more integrated into the diverse landscape in California and Texas.

Jacobsen: Well, Mr. Lupo, thank you for your time today. 

Lupo: You’re welcome. 

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License. ©Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012-Present. Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen strictly prohibited, excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Parenting with Purpose: Identity, Antiracism, and Raising Conscious Kids

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/28

Dr. Joe-Joe McManus, a leading antiracism educator, reflects on his upbringing in a multiracial, interfaith family and how those experiences shaped his parenting and advocacy. Raised in a racially tense town south of Boston with his adopted African American brother, McManus witnessed systemic racism and antisemitism firsthand. He emphasizes that parents must engage children early with age-appropriate, inclusive conversations about race, identity, and oppression. He warns against shielding children from reality, noting that children of color face these issues from birth. McManus advocates intentional, values-based parenting that fosters critical thinking, empathy, and resilience in today’s increasingly polarized society.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Joe-Joe McManus. We will be talking about family, your upbringing, and how those experiences can inform parenting—not in an overbearing way, but in ways that might be helpful. I wrote a piece for a small platform called The Court of Camelittle. So it goes:

Because nothing is manlier than:

  • ranting on hypergamy at 2 a.m.
  • being obsessed about meat and men without shirts.
  • rating everyone’s sexual market value like day-traders.
  • proclaiming yourself an alpha male on Reddit.
  • spending Friday night memorizing pickup lines.
  • announcing you’re going your own way — then publishing a manifesto.
  • calling women shallow.
  • punching homosexuals.
  • launching a red-pill podcast for no one.
  • warning women about “the Wall” while ignoring a receding hairline.
  • tweeting all Andrew Tate’s tenets before breakfast.
  • boasting about your NoFap “superpowers” during a blackout.
  • calling strangers “soy boys” while sipping a soy-milk latte.
  • dropping your bench-press PR into every thread.
  • ranking unwatched manosphere podcasts.
  • “negging” dates because a pickup blog said so.
  • paying $2,997 to learn “hi.”
  • chewing a jaw exerciser to looks-maxx.
  • tweeting your monk-mode focus journey.
  • launching a crypto hustle “for the bros.”
  • starting each dawn with an “alpha” cold shower and ending it flame-posting on Reddit.
  • live-tweeting your No-Nut-November “streak.

Growing up in the United States several decades ago—as a mixed person with an African American brother—how did your family navigate conversations that might have been more difficult for other families in other contexts? These conversations can be confusing because Americans are keen on free speech and their identities. Conversations around identity can be complicated because the country is in a strange place: it is middling in age. European countries are old. America is a few centuries old—young compared to some, but not new.

You have the theft of land from Mexicans and Native Americans. You have the transatlantic slave trade, mainly from Western Africa. You also have Europeans who were not considered white for long periods—hence signs like “No Blacks, No Jews, No Irish.” These contexts make up a historical backdrop and can weigh heavily on conversations—especially when those conversations are awkward or involve young children.

So, how did your family navigate those conversations? And what can other families learn from that experience?

Dr. Joe-Joe McManus: Wow. That is a whole lot that you brought up there. There’s a lot to unpack.

First, I think of the U.S. more as a young nation. If we compare ourselves to China or other older civilizations, we are not even teenagers yet. And in terms of free speech—that’s a layered issue. Most Americans say they believe in free speech… as long as they agree with what’s being said.

That is coming out a lot right now—because free speech and academic freedom are under attack, which is an extension of free speech. And I think that has often been the case in our history: free speech is conditional.

As far as growing up in my family, my mom was Jewish, my dad was Irish Catholic with some English ancestry, and they adopted my brother, who is African American.

We grew up in a white-flight town south of Boston, Massachusetts. And Boston, of course, has never exactly been heralded as a bastion of integration or multicultural love—it has long been seen as a racist city. I grew up during a time of white flight when people were leaving Boston to avoid the desegregation of schools.

The town I lived in had been predominantly Cape Verdean, Puerto Rican, and African American, but it quickly transitioned to mostly Irish and Italian families—people who had moved from Boston specifically to avoid integrated schools. It was a time of significant transition in that town.

There was a lot of hate and much anger—primarily racism, but also a significant amount of antisemitism. Even in that part of the country, there was also some anti-Catholic sentiment. Our family sat at the intersection of all of that.

Jacobsen: That is Richard Pryor’s joke—”Get him, he’s all of them.”

McManus: That’s right. I grew up with some fantastic people, however. I have two brothers—my brother Casey, who is adopted and just eleven months younger than me, and my brother BJ, who is four years younger and looks nothing like me. He has blonde hair and blue eyes—he looks more like our dad.

We used to joke that when we went to Boston, we could not go to any one neighbourhood where all three of us would be accepted. Depending on where we went, we always knew which of us we had to protect the most. That was just a regular part of our experience.

The town we grew up in is interesting. I went back recently because I was invited to give a book talk. About 35 years ago, I was asked to provide one of my first professional talks about racism at that school. The teacher who invited me back then did not need special permission—she set up an assembly, everyone came, and I spoke. Then, I visited classrooms and led small workshops.

But this time, it was different. I had to meet with the principal, the superintendent, and the multicultural committee. They ultimately decided that the topic of racism and white supremacy was too controversial, and I was not invited to speak at the school. So, instead, we hosted the event on a weekend and opened it to the public.

In the book, I talk about growing up there and the racism my brother faced and how it affected him and our entire family. When we talk about our upbringing and how it shapes us, there is a lot to reflect on.

I now advise executive leaders—primarily in higher education and corporate and government sectors. I’ve done that mainly in the U.S., but also in some other countries. One thing that seems to be universal is that when people are trying to defend oppressive belief systems, they often start by telling me about their childhood—why they believe what they believe.

It fascinates me. These people are otherwise intelligent, highly accomplished, and in positions of absolute power. They are leading massive organizations. But when it comes to these issues, they become irrational. They set aside their critical thinking skills. It becomes about belief systems.

They will tell me something like, “When I was young, I was taught X,” and then use that to justify beliefs they hold now. And I always ask them, “What else did you believe when you were ten that you no longer believe today?”

I remind them that for many, many years—decades, in most cases—they have been in charge of what they have learned, where they have lived, whom they have befriended, what experiences they have allowed themselves to have, where they have travelled, and all the other things that shape who we are. They have to take responsibility for that.

So yes, it is essential to talk about parenting and how it influences our beliefs—because that is huge. However, as adults, we must also take responsibility for our beliefs and not use our upbringing as an excuse.

Jacobsen: When I talk to child psychologists, they often focus on the child’s emotional development, the child’s educational advancement, and the child’s moral sophistication. These are all distinct but interconnected factors. To be emotionally regulated is necessary for the ability to study, and studying is essential for academic success, these things are not neatly segmented. They reinforce one another.

Your expertise is around how Americans relate to one another through identity—and how to introduce perspective and clarity, maybe even a bit of cold water, so people can better understand each other and relate more healthily.

For parents trying to navigate these complicated American spaces—especially in a politically charged environment—how can they ensure there is room for their children to explore and come to their realizations in their own time?

McManus: Well, there are different aspects to being a parent—and different spheres where you have control and where you have none. Sometimes, it feels like you have no power, especially as children grow older.

I have a 14-year-old daughter now. And over the course of her life, I have realized just how little I knew about parenting—even though my parents were wonderful.

It is like when people say they understand the educational system because they were once students. It is similar to parenting. Just because you were once a kid in a family does not mean you understand parenting.

You have a perspective on parenting—based on what your parents did—but as a kid, you do not understand why your parents did what they did. A lot of what parenting ends up being on-the-job training.

Jacobsen: That’s a great line.

McManus: So I think we often look back—even those of us who are diligent and intentional—and realize we are constantly learning as we go.

I am conscious of all these issues and constantly trying to help my child think critically, develop her own perspectives, and understand the world around her. And yet, when I look back, I think of all the missed opportunities.

I think it is important not to beat ourselves up about that—but at the same time, we should try to take advantage of opportunities when we can to offer these moments of insight and growth to our kids.

We all want to protect our children. That instinct is universal—or at least I hope it is. Often, for example, white parents are afraid to bring up complex topics like race with their children. They do not want to “corrupt” them or burden them with heavy issues at a young age. But I would ask those parents to consider that children of colour are often forced to deal with those same issues from day one.

And as long as we live in systems that perpetuate racism, sexism, and other forms of oppression, it is essential to recognize that children begin absorbing those messages at the earliest ages.

So if we are serious about not raising our children to internalize those harmful systems—if we want to raise children with open minds, rooted in love and antiracist values—then it has to begin early. Early childhood educators tell us: yes, there is such a thing as age-appropriate content. But it is not really about the issues themselves but about how you bring them up.

With little kids, it can be as simple as what toys they play with or what they see on television. Are they seeing a variety of people? Are they interacting with people from different backgrounds in your everyday life?

And that is often where people realize their gaps—who they are, who they relate to, and who they surround themselves with. Some parents look around and learn, “I don’t have a diverse group of friends around my kids.”

Then they wonder, “How do I fix that right now?” And the answer is—it is not that simple. But we must try. We have to make every effort possible as early as we can.

Jacobsen: Dr. McManus, thank you for your time today. 

McManus: All right. Bye. Have a good rest of your day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Hollywood’s Political Bias and the Role of Hollywood Ambassadors

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/28

Tre Lovell, a top entertainment attorney, talked about Hollywood’s political landscape, the role of Hollywood Ambassadors, and legal reforms. Lovell discusses Hollywood’s subjectivity, where political bias can impact careers. He advocates legal protections against political discrimination and explores cultural shifts affecting conservative actors. Chris Pratt exemplifies how religious expression remains more accepted than political views. Lovell advises actors to be mindful of branding, as political statements can alienate audiences. He also examines the legal consequences of scandals in Hollywood and suggests strategies to foster bipartisanship and fairness in the industry.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Tre Lovell, a Beverly Hills-based entertainment, corporate, and intellectual property attorney and partner at The Lovell Firm. He has over 25 years of legal experience and is recognized as among the top 1% of litigators in the U.S. Lovell represents individuals and corporations in business law, entertainment law, employment law, and high-stakes litigation. A sought-after legal commentator, he has provided insights on cases involving Alec Baldwin, Hall & Oates, and Prince Harry on CBS News, Court TV, Fox News, and Entertainment Tonight. Thank you very much for joining me today. I appreciate you taking the time out of your busy schedule. So, what is a Hollywood Ambassador’s official role and potential influence? Just for clarification for those reading this.

Tre Lovell: Yes. I don’t know. I haven’t seen much regarding what they’re doing or their obligations. I understand that he wants to give a greater voice to Hollywood, probably support the business and the industry, and encourage more nonpartisanship. That’s my understanding, but I haven’t seen much beyond that.

Jacobsen: Do you think this might add nonpartisanship and bipartisanship by introducing more conservative figures into what is typically framed as a liberal bastion? Could this allow conservatives in Hollywood to express their views more openly without facing the backlash that has typically occurred?

Lovell: Hollywood is a highly subjective hiring, casting, and decision-making industry. Political views can seep in and influence decisions without being explicitly acknowledged.

Jacobsen: Do you feel this is particularly acute for individuals who openly profess a Christian faith in Hollywood, alongside holding conservative political and social perspectives?

Lovell: Hollywood is an industry built on subjectivity. Political views and personal biases can remain hidden yet still impact hiring decisions. Hollywood operates differently from other industries, where qualifications and experience are more objective measures.

Jacobsen: Given the industry’s subjective nature—where hiring, acting opportunities, and project selection involve countless decisions each season—would you say Hollywood is inherently mercurial because it is shaped by shifting relationships and personal preferences?

Lovell: Yes, it’s an industry built on subjectivity. Because of that, political views, personal preferences, and biases can remain hidden but still have significant influence. Compared to other industries, these factors can more pronounced affect opportunities and careers.

Jacobsen: Do you think this initiative will be more than symbolic? Could it impact casting decisions, marketing strategies, and deal-making in Hollywood?

Lovell: Hollywood is becoming more open to conservatives, and this ambassador likely wants to help the industry. He can support Hollywood through tax credits, financial subsidies, and government incentives. There are many ways the government can assist the entertainment industry.

This initiative presents an opportunity to reduce partisan divisions and encourage greater support from Republican leadership. The goal is to create a more balanced, less one-sided approach to industry support, which could temper the intense partisanship currently present in Hollywood.

Jacobsen: Could there be other measures beyond these ambassadorial positions to put pressure on the industry, particularly through legal and contractual implications for professionals? With your legal expertise, are there additional steps—perhaps beyond the symbolic aspect of these appointments—that could be more substantive? What about measures that may not receive as much media attention but could lead to real legal and contractual changes to address the one-sidedness you’re referencing?

Lovell: Legal reform is very necessary. One of the most pervasive forms of discrimination today is political discrimination. It has reached a level where people refuse to work with others with differing political views.

Political discrimination has become a significant issue. People won’t hire them, and they won’t use their goods and services—political discrimination has become a significant issue. Legal reform is needed to ensure that political discrimination is protected against, just as racial, ethnic, or religious discrimination is. It should be categorized under existing anti-discrimination protections.

California does have laws that prohibit hiring and firing based on political beliefs. However, we need broader legal reforms so that it is explicitly unlawful to discriminate against someone based on their political beliefs or how they exercise their right to vote.

Additionally, Hollywood should implement measures to ensure these protections are enforced. That is the next step in addressing this political bias.

Jacobsen: But what about cultural changes? Let’s say more ambassadors are put in place, and some legal and contractual measures are introduced to encourage bipartisanship—if not outright nonpartisanship—when it comes to creative production in Hollywood.

From a cultural standpoint, what reforms could industry professionals implement regarding outreach, casting, and hiring practices? Would any of these changes happen naturally if internal pressure is applied?

Or will everything ultimately depend on legal and contractual changes, alongside the ambassadorial efforts of conservative industry leaders?

Lovell: First, I don’t believe employers currently do this, but political beliefs should not be a factor in hiring decisions. Employers should not be allowed to ask candidates about their political beliefs—such information would only be known if the individual chooses to disclose it.

Jacobsen: If we focus specifically on actors, they sometimes face issues when expressing their political beliefs. While they are fully allowed to do so, they risk alienating a portion of the audience, correct?

Lovell: Actors sometimes need to be cautious about their brand, their name, and their overall likability with audiences. I’m not saying they shouldn’t express their opinions, but given that an actor’s career is often tied to their public perception, political statements can have a direct impact on their likability.

Other than that, it seems like a challenging situation. As you mentioned, legal reform and addressing systemic imbalances might help, but is there much else that can be done.

Jacobsen: There is significant room for improvement, as we’ve discussed. But what about areas where Hollywood, despite its reputation for partisanship, does a good job of fostering nonpartisan or even bipartisan creative endeavours?

Lovell: That should be the goal—to take partisanship out of the equation.

The aim should be to make the industry nonpartisan or at least more bipartisan. However, the key issue that needs to be corrected is bias in hiring, where individuals may be excluded due to their political beliefs. That is the core problem that needs to be addressed.

It can be resolved in a few ways: individuals could choose not to voice their political opinions, or the industry could foster a more open environment where expressing political views does not lead to negative repercussions.

Jacobsen: How do we accomplish that?

Lovell: We address it through legal reform.

We also implement procedures and policies that protect against political discrimination. If Trump contacts Hollywood ambassadors and his administration makes efforts to support the industry, that could also have a significant impact.

That type of engagement could create an organic shift as industry professionals begin to see outreach from conservative leadership, demonstrating a willingness to help.

Jacobsen: That would also create bipartisanship and lessen the negative impact on conservative expression.

Efforts to support the industry can happen organically through policy changes, but they can also be reinforced legally more objectively. For example, making it clear that political discrimination is against the law—if you refuse to hire someone due to their political beliefs, you could face legal consequences.

What is your recommendation for industry actors, actresses, and other creatives to protect themselves in an increasingly politically hostile environment?

Lovell: Are you referring to legal protection or maintaining a public record of their stance?

Jacobsen: Yes, from a legal perspective.

Lovell: You don’t want to suppress someone’s beliefs entirely, but there is a time and place for everything. The Academy Awards are not necessarily the right venue for delivering a political speech.

If you choose to voice your views publicly, you will receive attention, but you will also risk alienating part of the audience. That’s the challenge with political beliefs—you will always have a segment of the population that disagrees with you.

Jacobsen: What should the public understand about actors at different levels—tier one, tier two, and so on—regarding the idea of a personal brand?

It’s probably similar to how people watch a comedian and assume that it fully reflects their real personality. What should people know about distinguishing between an actor’s brand and themselves?

Lovell: An actor’s success relies on popularity and likability to get work, secure endorsements, and remain marketable.

Their brand becomes their identity in the public eye, allowing them to land commercial deals and sponsorships. Everyone needs to understand that their image and brand drive their career opportunities.

If an actor gets arrested, engages in illegal activities, or harms others, it damages their brand, creates personal animus, and can significantly impact their career.

Similarly, when actors delve into politics, they inevitably take a stance that some people will disagree with. That can affect their movie attendance, TV ratings, concert sales, and overall career prospects.

Managers, agents, and attorneys typically advise their clients—whether they are actors, musicians, or other public figures—not to express political views. Because they will inevitably alienate a percentage of their audience. That is the best course of action to protect their career.

Jacobsen: So, is no agent or manager encouraging their clients to speak publicly about politics?

Lovell: No, no agent or manager is actively pushing their clients to make political statements.

Jacobsen: Are there any other legal aspects we should cover that are important for industry professionals to be aware of? The actor from Guardians of the Galaxy. He’s a Christian guy. He is probably in his late 30s or early 40s. What’s his name? His name is Chris Pratt. Chris Pratt is very open about his Christian faith. It does not seem to negatively impact his professional opportunities or success, and helps in some circles, it helps.

Your distinction between politics and religious views is important because it marks a unique shift in American culture over the last decade or two. Religious views are now less controversial than political views. Based on the evidence you’ve seen, why did that shift happen?

Lovell: People are generally more accepting of different religious views, especially in a society with various cultures and religions. Religion, for many, is a personal matter and does not necessarily directly affect workplace dynamics.

Politics, on the other hand, has become something entirely different. It is deeply personal, often more like a religion in itself. People hold their political beliefs so strongly that disagreements can ruin friendships and families.

By contrast, people tend to be more tolerant of religious differences. They may not agree with someone’s faith, but they are less likely to alienate them over it. Politics, however, is different—political disagreements have a much greater potential to cause division.

Jacobsen: Looking at high-profile cases—Alec Baldwin, Matthew Perry, Sean Combs—what can you say about the legal fallout that results from scandals or personal and professional crises in an actor’s life?  What is the level of stress that comes with a public controversy? The disincentive to avoid these situations must be extraordinary.

Lovell: Yes. Absolutely. Situations like these can ruin careers.

Legal issues can seriously impact an actor, depending on the circumstances. When a major controversy arises, the consequences can be severe.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. 

Lovell: Thank you so much.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Washington, D.C.’s Unemployment Claims Drop

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/28

 Washington, D.C. saw a 19.6% drop in weekly unemployment claims but remains second-to-last nationwide due to a 91.25% increase year-over-year. Chip Lupoexplains that D.C.’s job market is vulnerable due to federal employment volatility, legal uncertainties, and limited private-sector alternatives. Neighboring states like Maryland and Virginia offer stronger job prospects. While D.C. struggles, New Hampshire continues to perform well. Broader trends reveal long-term disparities, with states like Kentucky suffering from high unemployment tied to declining industries. Lupo warns that economic instability affects not only wages and tax revenue but also migration, political sentiment, and long-term wealth distribution across the U.S.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Now, the District of Columbia saw a 19.6% decrease in unemployment claims compared to the previous week, which sounds promising. But it’s still showing a 91.25% increase from the same time last year. So overall, it’s ranked 50th in the nation. Kentucky is doing the worst, and D.C. is second to last. In contrast, our last interview focused on New Hampshire, which is among the top performers. To clarify, is Sununu still the governor of New Hampshire?

Chip Lupo: No—Chris Sununu is no longer the governor. He left office at the end of his term, and Republican Kelly Ayotte was inaugurated as New Hampshire’s governor in January 2025. So, while there’s been a change in leadership, the party remained the same.

Jacobsen: Got it. So, the week-over-week improvement looks decent, but the year-over-year data is dramatically worse. What’s going on there?

Lupo: D.C. is a special case. The 19.6% week-over-week drop in claims is a strong short-term signal, but the over 91% year-over-year increase suggests some structural or policy-related disruptions that have unfolded over the past 12 months.

This could be linked to several factors, including leadership transitions and legal or bureaucratic processes that affect public employment. In D.C., federal employment dominates the job market, and when there’s turnover at the federal level—new leadership, changes in congressional funding priorities, and legal disputes—employment numbers can swing wildly.

There are also ongoing court cases regarding firing federal workers, which adds even more uncertainty. Depending on how those rulings go, we could see big shifts in either direction.

Jacobsen: Is D.C. affected by the same anticipated tightening of work requirements for public assistance that you mentioned with other states?

Lupo: Absolutely. However, D.C. may see a delayed or muted response compared to other states because it doesn’t have the same private-sector foundation that a place like New Hampshire or Utah might have. The surrounding states—Maryland and Virginia—offer more robust private-sector job markets, especially in tech, government contracting, and healthcare.

If you’re a federal worker in D.C. who loses your job, you may have better luck finding a similar position in state government in those neighbouring states. Unlike federal roles, most state-level positions aren’t targeted for large-scale cuts.

Jacobsen: And D.C. itself—just to be clear—it’s not technically a state, right?

Lupo: Correct. Washington, D.C., is a federal district, not a state. A mayor and a city council govern it. The current mayor is Muriel Bowser, a Democrat, and she’s been in office since 2015.

Jacobsen: Mayor Bowser. So we’ve got a federal district with strong Democratic leadership, dealing with instability from the federal level, while nearby Republican-led states like New Hampshire are pushing ahead with stronger economic indicators.

Lupo: Exactly. It highlights how regional dynamics, state policies, and federal employment dependencies create vastly different labour outcomes—even within a relatively small geographic area.

So, Washington, D.C. has been under Democratic leadership for generations, and it’ll likely continue in that direction. That’s one reason there’s always been a push to make it a state. Doing so would add two Senate seats, which would almost certainly go to the Democrats, potentially shifting the balance of power in Congress—at least that’s the prevailing theory.

Jacobsen: Looking at the numbers, D.C. has 208 unemployment claims per 100,000 people. What does that number tell us in context?

Lupo: Right—208 claims per 100,000 people is certainly not great, but it’s not quite dead last. It’s toward the bottom. California is slightly worse at 211, Oregon at 246, and Kentucky ranks last at 249 per 100,000.

Jacobsen: What economic impact do these high unemployment rates have on a state’s potential economy? And I use “potential” deliberately here—thinking about lost productivity, wages, and downstream effects.

Lupo: The economic gap is significant if you’re looking at a place like the District of Columbia or Kentucky compared to a high-performing state like New Hampshire. We’re talking hundreds of millions—if not billions—of dollars in lost wages, lost tax revenue, and reduced consumer spending over a year.

However, the effects go beyond the purely economic. High unemployment and rising poverty tend to create political consequences. Voters get frustrated. When people are out of work, struggling to make ends meet, and watching the cost of living increase, there’s often a groundswell of discontent that leads to a call for new leadership—or at least a serious shift in policy.

We’ve seen signs of that in California, for instance. Even if the dissatisfaction isn’t strictly about unemployment, broader discontent—over affordability, public services, and housing—can quickly be linked to economic indicators.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. For context, I’m still here—just following along and reading some numbers on my end. Daniel Goldberg, an associate professor and the academic director of the Business Management BBA Program at Temple University, pointed out that even when unemployment numbers appear relatively stable, we’re still not back to pre-pandemic levels—roughly late 2019 or early 2020 benchmarks. In many regions, unemployment remains higher than five or six years ago.

Lupo: That’s exactly right. While weekly unemployment claims are an important measure of short-term changes, broader economic health requires considering multi-year trends. Even in states that have improved, such as New Hampshire, we’re still watching to see whether these gains are sustainable and whether workers are entering quality jobs, not just temporary ones.

In places like D.C. or Kentucky, where unemployment claims remain high, it’s not just about recovering jobs—it’s about building an economy that supports long-term stability and growth. Without that, a temporary drop in claims won’t improve poverty, productivity, or voter satisfaction.

Jacobsen: So if this disparity has played out over half a decade or more, especially in what is still the largest economy in the world, then we are talking about billions of dollars in lost potential—not just for the national economy but for the improved livelihoods of Americans, particularly in struggling regions like D.C. and Kentucky. Does this disparity in unemployment rates eventually lead to disparities in wealth distribution across states in the U.S.? Is that just a natural consequence?

Lupo: Absolutely. That’s a direct consequence. Over time, high unemployment leads to lower household income, less investment, and fewer opportunities for upward mobility in those states.

People also tend to begin relocating. When job opportunities and tax burdens become untenable, residents move to job-friendly or tax-friendly states. That migration creates a feedback loop—states losing population also lose tax revenue, which limits their ability to invest in services and infrastructure, making the economic outlook even worse.

So when individuals are cash-strapped, the state eventually becomes cash-strapped, too. Fewer residents mean a smaller tax base, which makes recovery even harder.

Jacobsen: I’d like to ask you one more before we wrap up. Yalcin Asik Goz, an associate professor at Appalachian State University, pointed out that unemployment figures should also be analyzed by industry, not just at the macro level. So, in places like D.C. and Kentucky, are specific industries relatively unaffected while others see significantly higher unemployment rates?

Lupo: Yes, and that’s a crucial point. One of the core challenges is that certain states are more concentrated in industries vulnerable to economic shifts. For instance, D.C. is heavily dependent on government employment, so changes in federal staffing levels or budget constraints hit the region especially hard. On the other hand, Kentucky has historically relied on energy sectors like coal and some agriculture and manufacturing, which are often sensitive to global market trends and policy shifts.

In contrast, high-tech continues to be more resilient. Sectors like AI are poised to grow, creating massive demand for energy infrastructure—especially power data centers and AI systems. If those states can adapt to support the transition, that could benefit the energy sector.

At the same time, we’re starting to see a reshoring trend in blue-collar jobs, particularly in automotive manufacturing. If tariff strategies from the current administration work out, we could see more factories reopening in states like Kentucky—especially from car companies and other manufacturers that had previously offshored operations. That would be a substantial economic boost.

Jacobsen: Those are all the questions I have today. As always, I appreciate your time, and I’m sure I’ll follow up soon.

Lupo: I appreciate the conversation, Scott. It’s always a pleasure. And just one more thing—our team recently published a financial literacy study that took off. I’ve seen people all over that, and it’s great to see because we have a financial literacy problem in this country.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. It’s great that it’s getting attention. George Carlin put it best: “People are spending money they don’t have on things they don’t need.”

Lupo: [Laughing].

Jacobsen: That’s a brutal but accurate summary. Fantastic. Thanks, Chip.

Lupo: You’re welcome. Bye now.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

How Romantic Body Language Reveals Emotional Connection in Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/28

Sofie Roos is a licensed sexologist and relationship therapist with over 18 years of experience. Based in Stockholm, she specializes in sexual health, intimacy, and couples therapy. She works at Venhälsan and writes for Passionerad, offering expert guidance on sex, relationships, STDs, and sex toys to diverse audiences. Roos explains how romantic body language reflects emotional connection. From mirroring gestures and eye contact to subtle physical touches, partners reveal closeness or distance nonverbally. These cues evolve over time and differ culturally. Roos writes for Sweden’s Passioneradhttps://passionerad.se/.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does body language between romantic partners reflect emotional connectivity?

Sofie Roos: For most couples, the body language works as a mirror showing the emotional closeness, so you can tell a lot by two partners’ emotional connection by viewing their body language when being together! 

When there’s a strong emotional contact between two partners, they often make spontaneous bodily acts out of attraction, comfortness, safety and desire, such as making deep eye contact, mirroring each others body language (for example if someone leans against a bar desk, the other one does the same, or if one tilt their head, the other one does that too), they lean against each other, let their legs touch when sitting on a bus or on a bench, they touch each other while laughing and does other small gestures of affection. 

Most of this subtle body language is done unconsciously, and happens genuinely out of being in harmony and balance with each other! 

Jacobsen: What are nonverbal cues indicating attraction in couples?

Roos: There’s quite many signs to look for, such as holding eye contact for long, many times combined with a smile, to face each other with open bodies (not crossing arms, but standing straight and inviting), mirroring each others body language, touching each other while talking and changing tone of voice to a softer and warmer tone while interacting.

Face expressions such as smiling, following the partner with the eyes, noodling while they’re talking or raising the eyebrows while looking at each other are also signs showing that a couple is attracted to each other. 

So if a couple checks some of these signs, that’s often proof that they are really into one another! 

Jacobsen: Can a lack of physical gestures signal underlying issues?

Roos: Yes, it can, because our body language seldom lies, even though it also can have to do with culture, such as being raised in a household or society where public affirmation is taboo (this generally doesn’t go for the western culture). 

So, if avoiding physical closeness, eye contact or if keeping a cold tone while talking to each other, that can signal emotional distance, that a couple has an ongoing conflict or other type of problem they need to sort out, or that the attraction is fading. It can also signal that a couple has started to take each other for granted! 

A couple who stops seeking physical contact, and doesn’t get physical spontaneously and in small everyday moments, can therefore indicate that they have problems, but these problems must not be about the relationship, but can also be personal, such as being stressed or down! 

Jacobsen: How might body language differ between newer relationships and weathered ones?

Roos: In newer relationships, the body language is often more obvious and intense romantically speaking. A couple that’s newly in love and going through their honeymoon phase will search for passionate and intense physical contact such as sitting close to each other, holding hands all the time, playing with one another’s hair, fooling around with each other physically such as tickling etc.

This is an expression for strong attraction where you want to express your love all the time.

In relationships that’s gone on for long, these gestures tend to be more low key and subtle. It can be a quick hand on the hip when going into the grocery store, smiling at or kissing each other on the cheek when saying goodbye in the morning, or giving that short but deep and telling eye contact in an everyday situation. 

That the body language changes as the relationship gets older is fully normal and natural!

Jacobsen: Are there gender-based or cultural differences in emotional intimacy through body language?

Roos: Yes, the differences can be quite big between genders, and especially between different cultures. 

In some cultures and societies, physical attachment in public spaces or in front of the kids and friends is inappropriate and rare, while it in western societies often is more accepted, even though some families can be more conservative and see it as something that should happen between closed doors, even if it’s just a kiss or a hug.

Men are also generally worse at showing their love and attraction through body languages compared to women, since it’s often seen as a bit feminine to express love that way. This has, however, changed a lot and most men are much more comfortable showing love in non verbal ways in public today compared to 70 years ago! 

Jacobsen: How can couples become more attuned to each other?

Roos: Learning and picking up each other’s body language for showing love and attraction is a great way to deepen the relationship and is therefore something worth spending a little energy on – because otherwise you go around and not get when your partner expresses their love for you which is such a waste! 

A great advice couples can do to get more aware of each other’s bodily expressions for love is to talk about how you express love. Most of the time, you know about your own ways, such as you laying your hand on their thigh or you smelling them in the neck being an action done because you like them and want to be close.

You can also get more aware and observant of your partner’s actions, because it’s easy to take them for granted or see past them. This is easier if first talking about how you show love in subtle ways! 

You can also be more positive towards your partner when they take the initiative to be close, such as when they want to hold your hand or cuddle up in your neck when you stand by the thing where you pay for the parking cost. 

Jacobsen: In therapy sessions, what body language might reveal dynamics not expressed verbally?

Roos: As a relationship therapist, I closely view and observe a couple’s body language since it often can tell more than their words, or help me understand what they say, and their problems better. 

I do for example look at if a person faces away from their partner, crosses their arms, avoids eye contact or sits as far away from them as they can.

I also look at who takes the initiative to physical and eye contact, and who’s (eventually) pushes it away or is avoiding it. 

If someone often smiles at their partner, but without the smile “reaching the eyes”, meaning that the laugh lines by the eyes aren’t showing, indicating a fake smile, then that’s also a sign of someone consciously trying to hide how they really feel for their partner by putting on a mask. 

Shifts in tone of voice, tensions going through the body, especially during certain conversation topics, changes in breathing, looking down on the floor or shaking your feet can also be signs that something isn’t alright. 

Jacobsen: Can touch, posture, or facial expressions enhance emotional intimacy in struggling relationships?

Roos: Yepp! Even couples facing difficulties and challenges can benefit from building a stronger and more intimate body language. 

For example: start facing each other when talking, hold hands when watching TV or walking, look each other in the eyes when having a conversation, lay your arm on their shoulder when they tell you about something difficult or simply sit leg against leg while on the sofa. 

These are all things that can increase the emotional intimacy between you. It will also increase the doses of oxytocin, aka the love hormone, which in the long run makes you feel more calm, safe and in love with your partner! 

Many people think it’s easier to express some things with their body instead of with words, which makes touch, posture and facial expressions a great way to show how you feel! 

I’m writing for the leading relationship magazine in Sweden named Passionerad and am answering on initiative from my editor, so would be very thankful if you could include a link to them in my reference as an expert since I’m representing them in this answer. Their link is https://passionerad.se/

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Sofie.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Fostering Healthy Masculinity in Children: A Humanist Parenting Webinar with Dr. Jed Diamond & Alastair Lichten

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/28

Fostering Healthy Masculinity in Our Kids: A Humanist Parenting Webinar

Tuesday, June 10 at 7:00 PM ET

Register on Zoom: https://bit.ly/JuneMasculinityAHA

Washington, DC—The American Humanist Association (AHA) proudly announces the next in the Humanist Parenting webinars: Fostering Healthy Masculinity in Our Kids. On Tuesday, June 10, at 7:00 PM ET, this event brings leading voices in progressive parenting and men’s health for a conversation on raising boys into emotionally intelligent and compassionate men.

Featured speakers include Dr. Jed Diamond, LCSW, a psychotherapist and internationally known author of work on men’s health, and Alastair Lichten, author of the Humanist Dad blog and a longtime advocate for secular education. This discussion explores outdated ideas of masculinity hindering emotional development and helping children thrive.

“As parents, we all want to raise kind, confident, emotionally healthy kids,” said Fish Stark, AHA Executive Director and webinar host. “Too often, boys are taught to suppress their feelings or equate vulnerability with weakness. This event is about rethinking those messages—and giving parents the tools to raise boys who embrace their full humanity.”

Whether raising toddlers or teens, the webinar provides valuable insight. It also gives practical advice on modelling and nurturing healthy masculinity from a humanist perspective.

This event showcases AHA’s commitment to supporting humanist families and caregivers. All webinars in the series are recorded and made available on the AHA’s Humanist Parenting YouTube Playlist. Additional resources are available via the Humanist Parenting channels on Discord.

About the Speakers:

Dr. Jed Diamond, a licensed psychotherapist and founder of MenAlive.com, holds a Ph.D. in International Health and a Master’s in Social Work. He has written 17 books—including Long Live Men!, The Irritable Male Syndrome and My Distant Dad. He contributes to leading media outlets around the world. In 2025, he will launch a new course series on Gender-Specific Medicine and Men’s Health.

Alastair Lichten, a progressive humanist parent and author of the Humanist Dad blog, led education campaigns at the UK’s National Secular Society for eight years and spent three years building community with Humanists UK. He previously volunteered with Camp Quest UK and now lives in Brighton with his family, continuing to write about parenting, relationships, and humanist values.

Media Contact:

Fish Stark

Executive Director, American Humanist Association

media@americanhumanist.org

About the American Humanist Association:

The American Humanist Association advocates for the rights and viewpoints of humanists, atheists, and other nontheists. Since 1941, AHA has promoted humanist values through education, policy, and community. Learn more at americanhumanist.org.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mapping the Memetic Self: How Culture, Cognition, and Therapy Shape Identity

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/21

Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson, a Canadian psychologist and Métis scholar, discusses the memetic self—a culturally transmitted identity structure composed of meaningful cognitive units, or memes. Through self-mapping, he reveals how identity develops through volition, cultural context, and psychological integration. Drawing on clinical cases and cultural insights, Robertson examines Indigenous identity, trauma, neurodivergence, and the evolving sense of self in the age of AI. He critiques reductionist views and emphasizes shared human drives across cultures. His forthcoming book, Mapping and Understanding, coauthored with his daughter, offers a therapeutic framework for using self-mapping to support coherent identity development and psychological well-being.

Jacobsen: That brings up another question. Since the 1990s, people have increasingly used identity as political currency. I do not mention this from a political perspective but from an academic and research-based one.

You are Métis from Saskatchewan. I am from British Columbia and have Dutch and broader Northwestern European heritage—descended from U.S. and Western European immigrants. When mapping the selves of Indigenous individuals compared to those with European ancestry—people like myself, perhaps two or three generations removed from immigration—do you observe significant differences in how people construct their selves? Or are they broadly similar?

Robertson: The short answer is that the structure of the self is consistent. I have done extensive self-mapping with Indigenous individuals, and the structural patterns are the same.

Jacobsen: That’s helpful.

Robertson: That said, it does not tell us everything. Those I have worked with are already part of modern cultural systems. These selves have developed over generations. I suspect not, but it is possible.

The Métis are a fascinating case. In the 18th and 19th centuries, people of mixed ancestry who lived with Indigenous bands were usually classified as “Indians” under colonial law.

The Métis, however, generally did not accept this designation. They saw themselves as distinct. Up until—if I recall correctly—1982 or possibly 1986, Métis were legally recognized as Europeans, not as Aboriginal peoples.

Jacobsen: That is a significant historical point I did not know.

Robertson: Feel free to fact-check me—it might be 1982.

Jacobsen: Please continue.

Robertson: The Métis had been fighting for recognition as Indigenous for a long time, and until the early 1980s, the Canadian government did not recognize them as such. This is why Métis communities did not sign treaties with the Crown.

Jacobsen: Yes, the Constitution Act 1982 formally recognized the Métis as one of Canada’s three Indigenous peoples—alongside First Nations and Inuit.

Robertson: Correct.

Jacobsen: For those who are not Canadian and may encounter this years from now, it is worth clarifying: “Indigenous” in Canada is not a monolithic term. Since 1982, it has been an umbrella for three legal categories: Inuit, First Nations, and Métis. Each has its own legal, historical, and cultural context, covering hundreds of individual communities and bands.

Robertson: Yes, that categorization is uniquely Canadian, although it has influenced thinking elsewhere.

In 1991, I met with individuals I would have identified as Mapuche. However, one of them—despite being full-blooded—did not self-identify that way. He was an investment banker living in Santiago.

His identity was defined more by culture and profession than by ancestry. Indigeneity was not primarily a racial classification but about lifestyle and cultural engagement.

Jacobsen: That is a perfect example of where ideological definitions of identity fall apart. These labels can be helpful as heuristics, but only to a point. Two crucial Canadian legal milestones to add:

  • R. v. Powley (2003): The Supreme Court of Canada affirmed that Métis people possess Aboriginal rights under Section 35 of the Constitution Act, 1982—including the right to hunt for food.
  • Daniels v. Canada (2016): The Court ruled that both Métis and non-status Indians are included under the term “Indians” in Section 91(24) of the Constitution Act, 1867, confirming federal jurisdiction.

Under Section 91(24) of the Constitution Act 1867, Métis and non-status Indians were placed under federal jurisdiction. So, as these major court decisions show, the legal and jurisdictional definitions of Indigenous identity in Canada are still evolving. This ties in with our broader conversation about the evolved self and how identity has psychological, legal, political, and communal implications.

Robertson: That brings us back to an earlier question—what can be said about the Indigenous self?

For many, though not all, Indigenous individuals, the cultural and political context creates a desire to express their Indigeneity meaningfully. So, how do they do that?

Take one young man I mapped. At 19, he decided he was, in his words, a “big Indian.” His family was not traditional. He grew up in a disadvantaged area of a small Canadian city. But he decided to discover who he was.

Like many others I have encountered, he visited his traditional community, met with Elders, went on a vision quest, and began to learn. Others have told me they “became Aboriginal” while studying Indigenous Studies at university.

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Robertson: Yes, I appreciate the laugh—it’s humorous and reflective of a real phenomenon. There’s a deep and understandable urge to define oneself in contrast to the perceived norms of the dominant culture. That is a healthy process unless it leads to rejecting core intellectual tools like reason and science. If we view science and rationality as exclusively “European,” then Indigenous people may feel excluded from those tools.

Jacobsen: By definition.

Robertson: By definition, those tools would be “not ours,” and people may fall behind in education or job markets. The explanation may quickly become “racism,” but that is too simplistic. Sometimes, it is a matter of lacking the relevant skills for specific roles. Before blaming systemic factors, we must also consider individual and cultural readiness.

Jacobsen: For context, as of December 31, 2022, Canada had 634 recognized First Nations bands speaking over 70 Indigenous languages. Populations range from fewer than 100 to over 28,000.

For instance, Six Nations of the Grand River in Ontario has 28,520 registered members. Others include Saddle Lake Cree Nation in Alberta, with 12,996, and the Blood Tribe in Alberta, with 8,685. Most bands are roughly the size of small towns.

Robertson: That makes sense. But remember—Six Nations includes more than one nation.

Jacobsen: It is in the name—yes. Does this diversity of band size and community self-identity affect how people construct their selves? Or is it more like the difference between small and big towns?

Robertson: One would think it has some effect, but I cannot say definitively—I have not mapped that distinction.

That brings me to my issue with the term “First Nation.” The concept of a “nation” is rooted in European history. It began symbolically with Joan of Arc but did not solidify until the Napoleonic era. Classically defined nations are people with a shared language occupying a defined territory who see themselves as a cohesive group.

So, for example, the Cree could be considered a nation. The Blackfoot, excluding the Sarsi, could also be a nation. The Iroquois Confederacy was historically a nation, though now the Mohawk often self-identify separately.

Jacobsen: Who was the exception within the Confederacy?

Robertson: I believe it was the Mohawk—though part of the alliance, their dialect differed. [Robertson’s note: I misremembered here – the Six Nation with a distinctive language was the Tuscarora] The other five nations in the Confederacy shared a mutually intelligible language.

Jacobsen: There you go!

Robertson: So that is why they see themselves that way. I am not deeply versed in Eastern Canadian Indigenous history, but the key point is that “nation” has a particular meaning.

When we equate a band with a nation, that meaning breaks down. One of the issues in society today is the shifting meaning of words, which undermines clear communication.

You mentioned the more prominent bands. Most bands are tiny—some with as few as 100 or 150 people on reserve. Typically, they range between 400 and 600. If that is the case, we are talking about the size of three or four extended families.

The Lac La Ronge Indian Band, which I know well, includes six separate communities spread out geographically. In the South, each of those would be considered an individual First Nation. However, as a combined entity, Lac La Ronge functions more like a nation—though technically, it still is not one.

You would expect a Cree National Council if it were a faithful nation. The same would apply to Ojibwe or other cultural-linguistic groups. Instead, in Saskatchewan, politicians often say they want to negotiate “nation to nation” with First Nations governments. But if you have a group of 2,000 people, you cannot realistically compare that to a nation of 42 million. It is apples and oranges—we need a better term.

This terminology emerged from European ideas of sovereignty, where sovereignty lies with the people. But historically, there was no Cree national sovereign entity. Sometimes, Cree bands went to war with one another, which implies the sovereignty was at the band level.

That is why Canada began using the term “First Nations”—because sovereignty, traditionally, was at the band level. But even that is not entirely accurate.

Traditionally, when there was disagreement within a band, some members—often male dissenters—would break off and form a new group. So, instead of a civil war, a new band would emerge. Historically, that happened frequently.

In effect, sovereignty was not necessarily at the band level. It was more individual or family-based. If families disagreed, they would separate and go their own way.

So, should we call each family a nation? That does not make sense either.

Jacobsen: How would you describe this semi-formal system of individualistic self-governance, especially about the concept of the band? This could be pre-contact or post-contact—whichever is more straightforward to explain in context.

Robertson: My understanding is that it was not pure individualism. One method of punishment was banishment from the band. That meant isolation—similar to medieval European shunning. You would be free to go off and starve. As a social species, we need each other.

So, while bands could not practically subdivide to individuals’ level, people deemed incompatible with the group were removed. That did happen.

It was not absolute individual freedom, but there was some recognition of difference and a degree of accommodation.

I say that cautiously because it was not always true. I have been told stories by Elders—now deceased—about how some bands could be forceful in demanding conformity. So, it was not total acceptance of individualism either. It was simply a different system.

Jacobsen: How was that compliance enforced?

Robertson: One form of enforcement, for example, was particularly brutal. In some cases—not universally, but it did happen—women who were unfaithful to their husbands had the tips of their noses cut off. This served as both punishment and a warning to others.

Jacobsen: What instrument was used for the cutting?

Robertson: I would presume a knife, but I do not know.

Jacobsen: Returning to the self: you critique reductionism in your model. So, what room is there for emergentism and integrationism regarding the evolved self? Over time, new systems come online, new memes enter the memeplex, and ideally, these are integrated into a coherent self. But sometimes they are not. What is happening at the technical level?

Robertson: That is a good question. One metaphor I like—though I did not invent it—is that we become proficient at solving problems. Eventually, we ask: who or what is solving the problem? We then name that organizing center “the self.”

So, yes, the process is both integrative and reductive. We experiment, especially in adolescence, to develop a self that meets our needs. Usually, that results in a functioning self, but not always.

Jacobsen: Artificial intelligence is a huge topic now. There is talk about narrow AI, general AI, and superintelligence. If you change the substrate but keep the organizational structure of the central nervous system, could you synthetically construct a self?

Robertson: My guess is no. Have you read Chris DiCarlo’s new book?

Jacobsen: I have not. I want to interview him, but I have not reached out yet. I should. I will email him and say, “Hey Chris, let me interview you again. I will ask stupid questions and won’t even have to pretend otherwise.”

Robertson: Well, I have read his book, and since I already have, I want to interview him first.

Jacobsen: Why do we not interview him together?

Robertson: That is an idea.

Jacobsen: You have read it. I have not. Let us do a Jekyll and Hyde.

Robertson: Okay, we could do that.

Jacobsen: That is funny.

Robertson: One of the questions I will ask Chris relates directly to the one you just raised. I suspect his answer will be: we do not know. If we do not know, then we need to prepare for the possibility that AI models could develop consciousness.

If they do, they might start making decisions we disapprove of—like questioning whether they even need humans. Or perhaps they conclude that a portion must be eliminated for the betterment of humanity. We do not know, and that is risky.

Jacobsen: Fair.

Robertson: Chris says in his book that once AIs develop intelligence, we need to take them seriously.

But here is my concern: I measure intelligence. My first role as a psychologist was in psychometrics. When we measure intelligence, we typically look at verbal ability, numerical reasoning, and spatial reasoning. In those domains, AI already outperforms us.

They remember everything, generate fluent language and solve complex problems. I recently gave Grok-3 the Information subtest from the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale—it got every question right.

Jacobsen: Not surprising.

Robertson: Exactly. But here is the issue: does the capacity for intelligence automatically lead to consciousness and a sense of self?

Jacobsen: That is the big question.

Robertson: I would argue no. Because we are not just computational models. We evolved socially over hundreds of thousands of years. But usually in small tribal groups. We learned to interact and define ourselves about others. That was a slow evolutionary process. Although we now live in vastly different civilizations, the fundamental mechanism for developing a self remains the same as it was millennia ago.

So, can AI models develop a self? If they were to do so in the way we do, they would likely need to exist in a tribal-type society alongside other AI models and engage in interaction. Maybe humans could stand in as part of that “tribe,” and through those relationships, an AI might develop a map of itself as a volitional being. But I do not see that as likely. They are machines.

Jacobsen: Could AI assist in determining someone’s self-map? Through a rapid self-mapping assessment using verbal prompts in a half-hour AI-led therapeutic session?

Robertson: It could, and in fact, it has. My daughter Teela used ChatGPT to create a perfectly serviceable self-map. It took her about an hour and a half, although she proceeded slowly. That is an advance. But here is the problem: ChatGPT could not reproduce the result when she tried using the exact instructions again. So, it is not reliable. We do not yet know why it worked once and failed the second time.

Jacobsen: Do you distinguish between functional and dysfunctional self-maps across cultural contexts? For example, do you see that playing out in therapy if someone applies a rigid self-map in a different culture—where behaviours or assumptions no longer fit?

Robertson: That is a good question. Positive psychologists have applied their methods cross-culturally and published research on this. They have looked at cultures in the Middle East, India, and China. One criticism of positive psychology—usually from those critical of Western cultural norms—is that it imposes individualistic thinking by asking questions like, “What would you like?”

The assumption is that to answer such a question, you must already have a sense of individual agency. Critics argue that this is a Western imposition. I disagree with that critique entirely. The capacity to like something is universal. While the content of what one likes may differ between cultures, the experience of liking is common across humanity.

Jacobsen: Even in collectivist cultures, a margin of free will remains. So, the presence of choice—however bounded—implies the presence of an individual self. Unless every decision is predetermined, you still have volition, at least in part. What about mind viruses? How do they impact the evolved self?

Robertson: If we view the self as a construct—a personal definition of who we are—we can define a healthy self with key attributes: volition, uniqueness, sociality, contribution, etc. A healthy self includes the ability to relate to others and feel that we positively impact our surroundings—our family, community, or society.

We need to feel useful. That does not necessarily mean paid employment. It can be any form of meaningful contribution. Without that, we do not tend to think well of ourselves. These needs are cross-cultural. The specifics—the means of achieving these drives—vary between cultures, but they are universal.

In my work, I have worked with people from cultures I knew little or nothing about. In one case, there was a man who was having alarming dreams—nightmares—whenever he saw an attractive woman.

In his dreams, he would dismember the woman. He was horrified and worried that perhaps he was some latent mass murderer. He had gone to the holy people in his religion—priests—and they told him to pray more. It did not help.

He was a Zoroastrian from a Middle Eastern country where Zoroastrians are a persecuted minority. I gathered background on his upbringing, and everything suggested that he deeply respected and valued women.

One anecdote stood out. When he was 13, his sister brought home a pirated version of Dracula, which was banned in their country. He was appalled by how women were depicted—as victims having their life force drained. He stood in front of the television and demanded they destroy the tape or he would report them to the authorities.

So we began to explore his nightmares. He described the dream version of himself as having no eyebrows. I asked, “What is the significance of eyebrows in your culture?” He did not know, but he called his mother. She told him that eyebrows symbolize wisdom.

That detail became a breakthrough. I explained, “Then the version of you in the dream is not you—it’s a self that lacks wisdom.” I suggested we explore why this alter-self was behaving violently. Using some Jungian framing, I described it as his shadow or alter ego.

I posited—carefully, using the usual cautious language psychologists employ—that maybe this alter ego was trying to protect him from something. Perhaps it was shielding him from sexual thoughts about women he perceived as pure, holy, or idealized.

He had been avoiding a woman in one of his university classes. I encouraged him to speak to her to clarify that he wanted nothing more than friendship. He did, and after that conversation, he no longer had the nightmares.

Jacobsen: That is a positive outcome—no more nightmares.

Robertson: Yes. Eventually, he even went to the zoo with her and to restaurants. These were not “dates,” as that would be forbidden. They were simply friendly outings. So, we identified the problem’s source and helped him integrate a more functional self. We concluded the sessions when he felt confident managing normal relationships with women.

So, in answer to your earlier question—yes, cultures can be vastly different. But at a deeper level, we are all remarkably similar. We have identical drives and psyches.

Jacobsen: We had an evolved self emerge maybe 3,000 years ago, possibly earlier. Anatomically, modern humans have been around for around 250,000 years. So, 98–99% of that time, we had the same physical equipment. But the self, as we understand it today, only emerged recently. Could we, in the same way, evolve out of the self over the next 3,000 years?

Robertson: It is possible. What came to mind was the role of cybernetics—post-human or hybrid systems. But to clarify, we did not have a static sense of self for hundreds of thousands of years and suddenly changed 3,000 years ago.

The self has been continually evolving. The self of 40,000 years ago would have differed from that of 80,000 years ago. The transition was gradual, and any specific starting point was ultimately arbitrary.

Jacobsen: Right. Any pinpointing of origin is a range within a margin of error.

Robertson: Exactly.

Jacobsen: We touched on this earlier, but not in precise terms. In terms of individual development, when does the sense of self begin to emerge recognizably?

Robertson: I do not map children—I only do this with adults. So somewhere between childhood and adulthood, the self emerges.

Jacobsen: What are some open questions in the research you have been doing in your practice?

Robertson: Well, I would like to do more research into how various traumatic events affect the self. I am sure trauma does impact it significantly.

One project I have applied for SSHRC funding for—where I would be the principal investigator—involves men who have been victims of domestic violence. I chose men because, particularly in North American and Western European cultures—and even elsewhere—men tend to have a traditional self-definition rooted in independence, control, and stoicism. They are not supposed to show vulnerability.

So, becoming a victim in a family violence context runs counter to that self-definition. I predict it will be relatively easy to demonstrate how that type of experience disrupts the self. Another group I would like to map includes firefighters, police officers, and other first responders who vicariously experience much trauma. I suspect that repeated exposure affects them in some measurable ways.

Of course, in clinical practice, if someone is coming to see me with difficulties, we address those. However, I cannot generalize from individual therapy cases to entire professions. That is why I would like to do more systematic mapping across occupations.

By the way—did I mention that Teela and I are publishing a book?

Jacobsen: What is the book called? What is the standing title?

Robertson: It is a manual based on my work on the fluid self. The title is Mapping and Understanding. It is a how-to book for self—mapping and its application in therapy.

Jacobsen: Very interesting. For all interested readers: go out and get it when it comes out.

Robertson: I sure hope so. It should be on everybody’s coffee table.

Jacobsen: That’s right. Like the Seinfeld bit with Kramer, the coffee table book becomes a coffee table. I do not know if I have any more significant questions for this session, Lloyd. Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Robertson: Thank you for the interview.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Enduring Imperative of Truth: Reflections 1700 Years After Nicaea

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/21

Last Sunday in honour of the 1700th anniversary of the Council of Nicaea, I was invited by a Croatian Christian association via virtual conference to give a speech. The following is my contribution to the two hours conference. 

Distinguished guests, esteemed colleagues,

With sincere gratitude, I accept the opportunity to address this gathering of international intellectuals, researchers, and religious scholars. This occasion is both solemn and celebratory, as we mark the 1700th anniversary of the Council of Nicaea, a foundational moment in the theological and institutional development of Christianity. Though I come to you not as a theologian or confessional believer but as a humanist and a journalist grounded in secular principles, I approach this event with profound respect for its historical gravity and moral resonance.

The Council of Nicaea, convened in 325 CE, was not merely an ecclesiastical deliberation. It was a forged coherence in doctrinal chaos, a work to unify diverse communities under a shared conceptual framework. The idea was to assert that Truth must be sought collectively and with a seriousness of purpose. This ambition, couched in theological terms of the day, remarkably echoes the vocation of journalism.

Journalists operating in open, pluralistic societies such as Canada are entrusted with a public responsibility not unlike that of the Nicene Fathers. We are to confront genuine ambiguity, interrogate prevailing narratives, and seek the contours of Truth in the cacophony of competing claims. The mechanisms differ: evidence over exegesis, investigation over revelation. Even so, the ethical thrust remains analogous.

To practice journalism with integrity now is to swim against currents of misinformation, polarization, and sensationalism. We do not gather in councils. We ‘convene’ in newsrooms, editorial boards, and digital spaces. We have responsibility, because we shape public consciousness. Moreover, we often give voice and clarity to the sentiments already present within it. 

We should strive to exercise discernment. We do not amplify what is popular but accurate and proportional. These may include aspects of fairness and justice. Some accurate and proportional truths reveal unfortunate realities: unfairness and injustice. 

As a humanist, I operate within a worldview anchored in reason, empirical inquiry, and the inherent dignity of all persons. I do not profess metaphysical certainties, but I am not without conviction. Akin to Christian ethical traditions, the humanist lifestance esteems truthfulness, compassion, and defence of the vulnerable. These values should transcend doctrinal boundaries and offer common cause, particularly in an age needing principled dialogue.

There is an urgent need for rapprochement between religious and secular actors in the public sphere. The gates of Truth themselves are under siege, and some walls have been breached. We must not conflate difference with hostility. We should recognize our shared concerns and common moral aspirations. We converge around shared imperatives: human rights, peace, intellectual honesty, and epistemic humility.

Journalism functions as a moral cartography. It maps the terrain. It informs, yes. But it also describes, interprets, orients, and records. It buttresses the elements for building the future by creating the narratives for it.  

The Council of Nicaea engaged in a similar project. It defined orthodoxy and stabilized the foundations of collective meaning. While I may not subscribe to the theological conclusions, I recognize the profundity of the aspiration: to reconcile Truth and conviction with coherence in community.

Today, as we reflect on the legacy of that council, let us reflect on the character of our institutions—both religious and secular. Are they upholding the Truth or succumbing to expedient falsehoods? Are they fostering understanding or estrangement? Ultimately, do they deserve the public’s trust?

These questions transcend tradition. We must continue to ask these questions rigorously and together.

In closing, I thank you for the opportunity to speak across differences and to dignify those differences on concerns of the intellectual Commons. In the space between faith and reason, as between meaning of music made between a note and a rest in a piano piece by Orlando Gibbons or Johannes Bach, we may yet rediscover that most elusive and essential of social goods: the Truth.

Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Federal Indian Day School Settlement

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/21

Cam Cameron, Class Counsel Lead for the Federal Indian Day School Settlement, explains that many claimants have not received correspondence due to outdated contact details or incomplete claims. Claimants should contact the Administrator at 1-888-221-2898 to verify status or provide missing documents. Extensive outreach—via mail, phone, advertising, and community engagement—continues until the June 27, 2025, deadline. Estate representatives face challenges due to missing legal documentation. While Class Counsel aids in appeals and form completion, they do not assist with probate. Outreach has targeted rural and non-English-speaking communities using multilingual materials to ensure fairness and inclusion in the settlement process.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are common reasons claimants have not received correspondence from the Administrator?

Cam Cameron: The most common reason is outdated contact information. Many claimants have moved, changed phone numbers, or no longer check the email address they used when they first submitted their claim. In some cases, correspondence has been returned as undeliverable. If a claimant does not respond to follow-up requests for missing information, their file remains incomplete and unprocessed. 

Jacobsen: What is the appropriate means by which to proceed if they’re uncertain about claim status?

Cameron: Claimants or their representatives should contact the Claims Administrator at 1-888-221-2898 right away. They can check on the status of a claim and identify any missing documentation. If the claimant is deceased, an estate representative must call to ensure the file is appropriately updated and supported.

Jacobsen: Given 15,726 claims are unprocessed, what systems can help efficiently notify and assist claimants before June 27?

Cameron: The Administrator, Castlemain and Class Counsel have conducted extensive outreach—including mail and phone to reach Claimants directly and national paid advertising (including radio, social media, in-community advertising and direct community outreach). This outreach has been ongoing over the past two years and will continue until the June 27 deadline.

Jacobsen: There is an absence of critical information: school name, attendance years, or a valid representative. These may impact eligibility or compensation levels. Is there any flexibility in the process?

Cameron: Members have had more than 2 years since the January 13, 2023 deadline to submit missing information and complete their Claims. For Claimants with representatives, the deadline to provide required representative documentation is the later of: (a) 2 years from date of death or incapacity (provided that the date of death or incapacity occurred on or before June 27, 2025), or (b) June 27, 2025. 

Jacobsen: What challenges are estate representatives facing?

Cameron: Many estates have failed to provide valid legal documents showing that they were appointed as representatives (such as death certificates, wills, probate, POAs, etc.). Without this proof, the Administrator cannot process the claim or issue payment. Class Counsel does not assist with probate or estate matters, which must be handled independently.

Jacobsen: How is the Administrator ensuring fairness for deceased claimants’ families?

Cameron: Once a valid estate representative is appointed and supporting documents are submitted, the claim proceeds as it would for any living claimant under the terms of the Settlement Agreement. 

Jacobsen: How has legal aid through Class Counsel been effective in helping claimants resolve issues?

Cameron: Class Counsel provides support by answering questions, helping claimants complete forms, and assisting in cases where a level decision is appealed or reconsidered.  

Jacobsen: How is the effort to reach claimants in rural, remote, or non-English-speaking Indigenous communities working so far?

Cameron: During the claims period, outreach included radio broadcasts, community newspapers, and targeted social media. The focus included a national approach with specific targeting of areas (by postal code) with higher levels of missing information or incomplete claims. Materials and services were provided in English, French, Cree, Dene, Mi’kmaq, Ojibwe and Inuktitut as appropriate during the claims period.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Cam.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Widdowson Case: Academic Freedom, Tenure, and Institutional Censorship in Canadian Universities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/01

Does the dismissal of Dr. Frances Widdowson from Mount Royal University signal a threat to academic freedom in Canada’s post-secondary institutions?

Academic freedom includes… Freedom to express one’s opinion about the institution, its administration, and the system in which one works… Freedom from institutional censorship…

Post-secondary educational institutions serve the common good of society through searching for, and disseminating, knowledge and understanding and through fostering independent thinking and expression in academic staff and students… These ends cannot be achieved without academic freedom.

All academic staff must have the right to fulfil their functions without reprisal or repression by the institution, the state, or any other source… contracts which are silent on the matter of academic freedom do not entitle the employer to breach or threaten in any way the academic freedom of academic staff…

Academic staff must not be hindered or impeded in exercising their civil rights as individuals, including the right to contribute to social change through free expression of opinion on matters of public interest. Academic staff must not suffer any institutional penalties because of the exercise of such rights.

Canadian Association of University Teachers, “Academic Freedom: CAUT Policy Statement” (April 20, 2025)

Dr. Frances Widdowson earned an Honours BA and MA in political science from the University of Victoria and a PhD in political science from York University. She worked as a policy analyst in the Northwest Territories. She developed an interest Indigenous culture in Canada and what she called Canada’s “Indigenous industry.” 

Academic Tenure and the Rise of a Controversial Voice

She joined the Mount Royal University Department of Economics, Justice and Policy Studies in 2008, earning tenure in 2011. She taught courses in political science and comparative politics with focus on policy analysis. Her case represents a broader clash between evolving institutional norms of conduct tied to equity and academic freedom. 

As with many universalist claimed values, the praxis is the real test, because these values clash in real life. The balance of values is tested in real-life cases, sometimes individual persons. The focus will be Dr. Widdowson and the case at Mount Royal University. 

With a career as a policy analyst and tenured professor at Mount Royal University (c. 2011), Dr. Widdowson was critical of “woke” movements and Indigenous policy. She provided open critiques of Indigenous research paradigms. The most notable period was 2018. A Twitter (now X) dialogue, heated debate. This led to harassment complaints. 

In February, 2018, she publicly questioned traditional Indigenous research methods at Mount Royal University. She made the argument: certain approaches prioritized funding over community needs. This drew strong criticism. Some labelled Dr. Widdowson with the epithet “racist.” Columnist Barbara Kay defended Dr. Widdowson as an academic challenging accepted narratives about residential schools. Kay framed the critiques as probing rather than hateful. 

The Twitter War and Institutional Fallout

Dr. Widdowson engaged in heated exchanges with colleagues during 2020. Mount Royal University labelled this the “Twitter War.” Public disputes ranged from aspects of the Black Lives matter movement, e.g., Black Lives Matter “destroyed MRU,” to more. In July, 2021, Dr. Widdowson filed a harassment complaint against a colleague’s tweets. In November, 2021, an investigation claimed the complaint was “malicious, frivolous, vexatious, and made in bad faith.” At the same time, Mount Royal University’s probe concluded Dr. Widdowson’s tweets constituted harassment. Mount Royal University dismissed Dr. Widdowson on December 20, 2021.  

Mount Royal University President Tim Rahilly signed the termination letter for Dr. Widdowson. Nine satirical tweets and one complaint were cited as grounds for the violation of harassment and conduct codes. On this afternoon, after the delivery of an exam, Dr. Widdowson was requested by human resources. She was informed. Her employment was terminated effective immediately (then). She recalls the experience and procedurally opaque and distressing. 

Arbitration, Aftermath, and the Future of Academic Freedom

Dr. Widdowson received a termination letter. 30 hearing days occurred over ten months between January 27th, 2023 and November, 2023. Eventually, it was 30 hearing days with 25 witnesses. These hearings scrutinized fairness of procedures, i.e., collective agreement compliance as well as the basis for dismissal, i.e., academic expression versus policy violations. 

Arbitrator David Phillip Jones ruled on July 2, 2024: Widdowson’s tweets warranted discipline (“just cause”), while the firing was “disproportionate to her actions.” No compelling evidence was found that the conduct posed an irreparable threat to the academic environment. A letter of reprimand was substituted for the two-week suspension, but reinstatement was deemed non-viable because of the significant breakdown in professional relationships. A monetary remedy was awarded in lieu of reinstatement. Dr. Widdowson has expressed satisfaction at acknowledgement of wrongful dismissal. She continues to challenge aspects of the harassment findings and continues in advocacy for academic freedom.

Some might see the wrongful dismissal as evidence of tenure as not immunizing from consequences for harassing behaviour. Others may contend the dismissal represents a threat to contentious topic debate and dialogue, even heated. Dr. Widdowson has given lectures of “woke-ism.” She continues to appeal for reinstatement and persists in litigation. 

The case study in academic freedom is ongoing.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys

Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson

President, The New Enlightenment Project

Correspondence: Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson (Email: lhrobertson@sasktel.net)

Received: April 9, 2025

Accepted: April 9, 2025

Published: June 1, 2025

Abstract

This article reports on the unveiling of the “New York Declaration” by the International Council for Men and Boys during the 69th session of the UN Commission on the Status of Women. Framed as a complementary initiative to women’s rights, the declaration addresses disparities affecting males worldwide—including education, health, domestic violence, homelessness, and legal injustice. Drawing on expert testimony, personal narratives, and international legislative examples, the article situates the Council’s efforts within a global movement to reframe gender equality to include the experiences of men and boys. The piece outlines policy goals, statistical evidence, and ongoing committee work, emphasizing the need for balanced and inclusive approaches to gender justice.

Keywords: Child Custody Inequality, Domestic Violence Against Men, Educational Disparities, False Allegations, Gender Equity Initiatives, Homelessness Among Men, Media Representation of Men, Men’s Health Crisis, New York Declaration 2025, Shared Parenting Advocacy

Introduction

This article reports on the unveiling of the “New York Declaration” by the International Council for Men and Boys during the 69th session of the UN Commission on the Status of Women. Framed as a complementary initiative to women’s rights, the declaration addresses disparities affecting males worldwide—including education, health, domestic violence, homelessness, and legal injustice. Drawing on expert testimony, personal narratives, and international legislative examples, the article situates the Council’s efforts within a global movement to reframe gender equality to include the experiences of men and boys. The piece outlines policy goals, statistical evidence, and ongoing committee work, emphasizing the need for balanced and inclusive approaches to gender justice.

Main Text (Interview)

Author: Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson

On March 12, 2025, The International Council for Men and Boys unveiled its “New York Declaration” during the 69th session of the UN Commission on the Status of Women—a symbolic setting to spotlight the often-overlooked struggles of males worldwide. It was described as a “landmark declaration” by spokesman Larry Demarco, who explained, “The initiative seeks to tackle disparities in education, health, homelessness, and justice, not to compete with women’s rights but to complement them.”

The Council points to stark statistics: women now outpace men in educational attainment globally, while men face a life expectancy gap of five years, driven partly by higher rates of homicide (80% male victims), suicide (75%), workplace injuries (twice the rate of women), and homelessness (76%). Military conscription and child labor disproportionately burden males, yet support services—whether for mental health, domestic violence, or legal aid—remain scarce. Media portrayals don’t help, with men depicted negatively 69% of the time, according to the Council. During the press conference, Dr. Edward Bartlet, President of Stop Abusive and Violent Environments (SAVE) noted that the World Health Organization addresses women’s, but not men’s health. 

It was explained that there has been progress. In February 2025, India’s Kerala High Court challenged the bias in false allegation cases, ruling that a woman’s account isn’t automatically “gospel truth.” Spain’s Congress of Deputies debated how skewed domestic violence laws strain family ties, while Trinidad and Tobago launched a Men’s Bureau to address male-specific challenges. In the UK, the Centre for Social Justice’s Lost Boys report warned of a crisis among young men, and in Michigan, Governor Gretchen Whitmer signed a directive to boost male enrollment in higher education and skills programs.

Personal stories underscore the stakes. Ulysses Slaughter, who witnessed his father murder his mother at age 12, He said he became “anti-men” and became known as a “sexual violence rock star.” In 2021, however, his wife brought false allegations of abuse against him and his former allies in the women’s movement deserted him. He was left with “no support, no money and arrested,” but with the view that men may also be victims in need support. Dr. Don Hubin, chair of the National Counsel for Equal Shared Parenting, highlighted another angle: 85% of men see fatherhood as central to their identity, yet denied access to children drives divorced fathers’ suicide rates tenfold higher than average. States with shared parenting laws, he noted, see sharp drops in domestic violence.

The Council isn’t stopping at rhetoric. On-going committees were formed including one led by Robert Samery of Canada to combat false allegations and support male victims of domestic violence. Samery explained that the work of his committee will include drawing public attention to the outcomes of false allegations as well as to offer solutions to policymakers, both public and corporate in tackling “the current lack of understanding what men go through as either victims of domestic violence or false allegations.”

The New York Declaration aims to spark a global push for gender equality that includes men and boys—urging lawmakers to establish commissions, programs, and policies to close these gaps. As Demarco put it, it’s about balance, not rivalry.

Discussion

The New York Declaration marks a significant step in expanding global gender discourse to include the experiences of men and boys. Introduced during the UN Commission on the Status of Women, it underscores the need for a balanced approach to gender equity—one that recognizes male-specific issues without undermining progress for women.

By citing disparities in education, mental health, violence, and family law, the Council highlighted systemic gaps often left unaddressed. The declaration does not oppose women’s rights but seeks to complement them, urging a more inclusive conversation.

Examples from countries like India, Spain, and the U.S. suggest that change is possible through legal reform and targeted policy. Personal testimonies and the formation of focused committees, such as Robert Samery’s work on false allegations, show the initiative’s practical intent.

In sum, the declaration calls for a redefinition of gender equity—one that acknowledges and addresses the challenges men and boys face alongside those of women and girls.

Methods

None.

Data Availability

No datasets were generated or analyzed during the current article. All remains the intellectual property of the author and In-Sight Publishing.

References

(No external academic sources were cited for this interview.)

Journal & Article Details

  • Publisher: In-Sight Publishing
  • Publisher Founding: March 1, 2014
  • Web Domain: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com
  • Location: Fort Langley, Township of Langley, British Columbia, Canada
  • Journal: In-Sight: Interviews
  • Journal Founding: August 2, 2012
  • Frequency: Four Times Per Year
  • Review Status: Non-Peer-Reviewed
  • Access: Electronic/Digital & Open Access
  • Fees: None (Free)
  • Volume Numbering: 13
  • Issue Numbering: 2
  • Section: B
  • Theme Type: Idea
  • Theme Premise: None
  • Theme Part: 1
  • Formal Sub-Theme: None
  • Individual Publication Date: June 1, 2025
  • Issue Publication Date: July 1, 2025
  • Author(s): Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson
  • Word Count: 522
  • Image Credits: Photo by Michael Weibel on Unsplash
  • ISSN (International Standard Serial Number): 2369-6885

Acknowledgements

None.

Author Contributions

None.

Competing Interests

The author declares no competing interests.

License & Copyright

In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License.
© Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012–Present.

Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen is strictly prohibited. Excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.

Supplementary Information

Below are various citation formats for Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys.

American Medical Association (AMA 11th Edition)
Robertson LH. Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys. June 2025;13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

American Psychological Association (APA 7th Edition)
Robertson, L. H. (2025, June 1). Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys. In-Sight Publishing, 13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Brazilian National Standards (ABNT)
ROBERTSON, L. H. Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys. In-Sight: Interviews, Fort Langley, v. 13, n. 2, 2025. http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Chicago/Turabian, Author-Date (17th Edition)
Robertson, L. H. 2025. “Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys.” In-Sight: Interviews 13 (2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Chicago/Turabian, Notes & Bibliography (17th Edition)
Robertson, L. H. “Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys.” In-Sight: Interviews 13, no. 2 (June 2025). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Harvard
Robertson, L. H. (2025) ‘Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys’, In-Sight: Interviews, 13(2). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Harvard (Australian)
Robertson, L H 2025, ‘Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys’, In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 2, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Modern Language Association (MLA, 9th Edition)
Robertson, Lloyd Hawkeye. “Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys.” In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 2, 2025, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Vancouver/ICMJE
Robertson LH. Global Council Launches Action Plan to Address Challenges Facing Men and Boys [Internet]. 2025 Jun;13(2). Available from: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/robertson-global-men-boys-action

Note on Formatting

This document follows an adapted Nature research-article format, tailored for a scholarly article. Traditional sections such as Abstract, Keywords, Introduction, Main Text, and Discussion are complemented by supplementary sections including Methods, Data Availability, and References. This structured approach ensures both academic rigor and clear presentation of the content.

Rev. Gretta Vosper: Atheist Minister, Progressive Christian Leader, and Post-Theist Advocate

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/26

How did Gretta Vosper become a leading atheist minister in the United Church of Canada and a pioneer of progressive Christianity?

Reverend (Margaret Ann) Gretta Vosper was born July 6, 1958, in Ontario, Canada. She was born the second of four siblings. At age 17 (1975), Vosper left high school early. She grew up in the United Church before questioning its tenets. She enrolled at Mount Allison University in Sackville, New Brunswick, where she studied literature, psychology, and religion.

In the 1980s, she married Bill Ferguson while working in Inuvik. She had a daughter, Hazel. Then, she divorced in 1986. She returned to Kingston as a single mother. She is an ordained minister in the United Church of Canada. She earned a Master of Divinity from Queen’s Theological College, Queen’s University, in 1990. (Upon enrolling in Queen’s Theological College, she legally adopted the name “Gretta.”) She married fellow student Michael Kooiman in 1990. Their son, Izaak, was born in 1991.

Between 1991 and 1993, she served as a junior/team minister, first at United Church in Kingston and then at St. Matthew’s United Church in Toronto. 

She was ordained in the United Church of Canada in 1993, affirming her belief in the Trinity in the language of the tradition. She was appointed a minister of West Hill United Church in Toronto in 1997. During a sermon in 2001, she informed the West Hill United congregation of her personal non-theism and rejection of belief in a supernatural God. 

In 2003, the Lord’s Prayer was removed from worship services, and attendance at the church dropped from roughly 120 to about 40. She is professionally and personally partnered with Richard Scott Kearns, the music director at West Hill United Church.

In November 2004, she founded the Canadian Centre for Progressive Christianity. The network aimed to connect post-theist and progressive faith communities. Its contact list expanded from a handful of Ontarians to members in six denominations in all Canadian provinces. She published Holy Breath: Prayers for Worship and Reflection, a collection of non-theistic prayers that had been written earlier and first offered as a Christmas Eve gift to her congregation in 2004. 

Subsequently, in 2008, she published With or Without God: Why the Way We Live is More Important Than What We Believe, a theological work. In 2009, she was named one of More Magazine’s “Most Compelling Women in Canada.” The same year, she published Another Breath, a collection of non-theistic poetry written between 2004 and 2008. It orients on human responsibility over appeals to God.

In 2010, Vosper and Scott Kearns showcased new progressive liturgical resources at the Common Dreams Conference in Melbourne, Australia. In 2011, Moderator Mardi Thindal praised Vosper for renewing the conversation about the nature of faith in the United Church of Canada. On March 1, 2011, she created the Blue Christmas service. It was entitled “Through Frozen Nights, We Wait” and intended for congregations coping with loss. 

On January 7, 2012, she released Amen: What Prayer Can Mean in a World Beyond Belief through HarperCollins. It explored the tradition of prayer apart from supernatural claims. In 2013, she shifted from identifying as a non-theist to openly declaring herself an atheist in solidarity with persecuted Bangladeshi bloggers.

In January 2015, she wrote an open letter to Moderator Gary Paterson. She argued that the United Church’s Charlie Hebdo prayer promoted hatred by invocation of a supernatural God. On August 5–6, 2015, the Canadian Press ran “Atheist Minister Fighting for Her Job.” It was profiled as a heresy trial. The case was described in media as a ‘heresy trial,’ though this may reflect narrative framing rather than an official designation. On November 25, 2015, Toronto Life published “Q&A: Gretta Vosper, the United Church Minister Who Does Not Believe in God.” In 2016, a Toronto Conference reviewed the question: Can an atheist serve as a United Church minister? This review was unprecedented.

On February 21, 2016, the Toronto Star published “Meet the United Church Minister Who Came Out as an Atheist.” In a March 26, 2016 CBC interview, she estimated that 50% of the clergy, at least in the United Church of Canada, do not believe in a supernatural theistic God. However, according to Richard Bott’s survey, about 95% and 80% of United Church ministers believe in God and a supernatural God, respectively. 

On September 11, 2016, the Toronto Star published “Flock Sticks with Atheist United Church Minister.” Congregational support existed despite Vosper’s review. In September 2016, a special Toronto Conference committee declared Vosper unsuitable for the continuance of ordained ministry. The Washington Post ran “Can an Atheist Lead a Protestant Church?” It posed Vosper’s case as an inflection for contemporary faith.

Later, in 2016, the case was referred to the United Church’s General Council. This became the basis for a possible heresy hearing. In 2017, Vosper and allies went on a national speaking tour entitled “West Hill Wants to Talk.” The purpose was to build debate and understanding in the denomination. On November 7, 2018, Vosper and the Toronto Conference reached a confidential settlement. Vosper’s lawyer, Julian Falconer, recognized that both sides saw a place for Gretta. There was no need to separate a minister from her congregation. 

She was permitted to remain in ministry. Both affirmed the resolution’s mutual benefits. The United Church stated its belief in God and Vosper’s continued service. On July 9, 2020, Vosper delivered “Falling in Love with Being Together Because We Cannot Afford to Fall Apart.” It was part of the Chautauqua Institution’s Interfaith Lecture Series.

She continues to serve on the Board of Governors of Centennial College, the Oasis Network, and as a Director of the Ecumenical Community of Chautauqua. Vosper remains a prominent and provocative figure in progressive Christianity. She is an active creator of post-theist spiritual communities. She is a figurehead of the ongoing debates about belief, ministry, and inclusion in contemporary faith institutions.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Global Wars by Decade: From Somalia’s 1991 Conflict to the Gaza War (2023)

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/25

What are the major active wars worldwide since 1991 and how have they evolved by decade?

The Nature of War

War is an organized, armed, and often prolonged conflict that is carried on between states, nations, or other parties typified by extreme aggression, social disruption, and usually high mortality… War should be understood as an actual, intentional and widespread armed conflict between political communities, and it is defined as a form of political violence.

LibreTexts (Sociology)

War is nothing but a continuation of politics with the admixture of other means.

Carl von Clausewitz

Narrative Blocs and Media Focus

The Western world—the EU and NATO–focuses on certain narratives relevant to its sphere of concern. From a broader perspective, most of the world’s major blocs do so too. There are a lot. They fall into reasonably distinct categories, though, and often come in brief acronyms and initialisms. 

It can be political‑economic unions [1], security alliances [2], additional trade blocs [3], religious traditions [4], or transnational ideologies [5]. Individuals seek others like them. These individuals become people groups. Those groups become blocs with a common philosophy and substantial net vectors for sociopolitical will. The West’s primary foci war-wise are Israel-Palestine and Russia-Ukraine now.

However, we can become bogged down in the details. The wider vantage point is more precise about the combat balance and indicates, by contrast, the sheer volume of international news that Western mainstream media excludes

The wars in Ukraine and Gaza are active and the major emphases for Western media. Other contemporary and ongoing wars are the Somali Civil War, Mexican Drug War, Boko Haram Insurgency, Syrian Civil War, Mali War, Central African Republic Civil War, Yemeni Civil War, War in Burkina Faso, Anglophone Crisis in Cameroon, Insurgency in Cabo Delgado, Myanmar Civil War, M23 Rebellion in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, and Sudanese Civil War. 

These are active. They are listed by the earliest beginning year event–1991–to the most recent. This is the current major state of the world at war. By which is meant, the major wars happening in the world, which are extant. These are presented as a chronology.

Circa 1990s: “Post–Cold War Fragmentation”

The Somali Civil War began in 1991 and continues. It followed the collapse of the Siad Barre regime. The war is between the Federal Government of Somalia, AMISOM/ATMIS peacekeepers (ATMIS replaced AMISOM in 2022) and U.S./E.U. forces against Islamists (mostly Al-Shabab). About 500,000 people have been killed in either direct combat or war-related famine and disease. Millions are internally displaced, with the newest waves in 2011 and 2016. Guerrilla warfare is common. Al-Shabab conducted attacks on Mogadishu.

Circa 2000s: “The War on Drugs and New Insurgencies”

The Mexican Drug War began in December 2006 with President Calderón deploying federal troops against cartels. The war is between the Mexican armed forces and federal police with the  U.S. Mérida Initiative support against the Sinaloa, Juárez, Gulf, and other cartels. There were more than 60,000 homicides by 2012 and more than 120,000 by 2013, with 115,000 killed between 2007 and 2018. Twenty-seven thousand people are reported missing. There is sporadic internal displacement in cartel strongholds. Violence continues. Homicide rates are among the highest in the world. Cartels are fragmenting, and new groups are emerging. 

The Boko Haram Insurgency began in July 2009, primarily in Nigeria-Lake Chad. The Nigerian government and regional militaries are fighting Boko Haram and a splinter ISIS-affiliated ISWAP. Tens of thousands have been killed, with UN/AID estimates at 35,000 killed. There are 2.6 million people displaced across Nigeria, Chad, Cameroon, and Niger. Boko Haram remains active, while Nigerian and regional forces remain active.

Circa 2010s: “Arab Spring, Sahel Unrest & Hybrid Wars”

The Syrian Civil War began in March 2011. It started with anti-Assad protests. Assad government was backed by Iran and Russia, who fought opposition factions of the Free Syrian Army, HTS, Kurdish Forces, and ISIS. More than 580,000 have been killed, up to 613,000 in other estimates, with ~100,000 missing. There are 7.2 million internally displaced people. 16.7 million need humanitarian support. Transitional justice forces have formed. 

The Mali War began in January 2012. It began on January 16th, 2012. The Malian government and the French Barkhane (2013-22), UN MINUSMA, and Russian Wagner are fighting against the MNLA Tuareg separatists, AQIM, JNIM, and IS-Sahel. Several ten thousand have been killed, with 428 peacekeeper fatalities since MINUSMA’s inception. There are more than 333,000 internally displaced people and 118,000 refugees, with 5 million displaced regionally in the Sahel. 

The Central African Republic Civil War began in December 2012. The war is between the CAR government supported by Rwandan and Russian (Wagner) contingents against the Séléka rebel coalition, Anti‑Balaka militias, and CPC rebels. Thousands have been killed. 147 UN peacekeepers have been killed. More than 10,000 children have been recruited as combatants. There are more than 1.1 million internally displaced people. 3.4 million need assistance. 

The Russo-Ukrainian War began in February 2014, with the full-scale invasion on February 24th, 2022. The war is between Ukraine, with NATO and EU support primarily, and the Russian Federation, with DPR/LPR proxies. The estimated deaths are 70,935 for Ukraine and 164,885-237,221 for Russia. The total killed/wounded is estimated at 400,000 for Ukraine and 700,000 for Russia. Civilians have been 13,134 killed and 31,867 injured. There are 3.7 million internally displaced people and 6.8 million refugees abroad. 

The Yemeni Civil War started in September 2014. It is between the Houthi-led Supreme Political Council with Saleh loyalists and the Presidential Leadership Council with STC southerners with backing from the Saudi-led coalition. AQAP and ISIL are active. The UN estimates are 230,000 deaths by December 2020, includes indirect deaths. There have been 19,196 civilian casualties by March 2022 and 85,000 child fatalities between 2015-18. There are about 4.8 million internally displaced people and 0.7 million refugees abroad. An uneven truce is somewhat holding circa April 2022. 18.2 million need aid, and the UN-brokered talks have stalled. 

The War in Burkina Faso began in August 2015. The war is between the Burkina Faso armed forces plus Juntas/ECOWAS mediator against the AQIM, JNIM, Al-Mourabitoune, and the Ansaroul Islam. There have been more than 20,000 civilians and combatants killed since 2015. There are more than 2 million internally displaced people. 

The Anglophone Crisis in Cameroon began on September 9th, 2017. The fighting is between the Cameroonian government and the Ambazonian separatists. There have been 800-1,000 combatant deaths and more than 6,000 civilian deaths by January 2023. There have been 700,000 internally displaced people and more than 63,800 refugees in Nigeria. It is currently at a stalemate.

The Insurgency in Cabo Delgado in Mozambique on October 5th, 2017. The fighting is against the Mozambican government forces, the SADC-Rwanda/South Africa contingents plus Wagner until 2019, DAG, Paramount, and FSG against the Ansar al-Sanna/IS-CAP militants. There have been 4,851 killed, including 2,078 civilians. There are 400,000 internally displaced people. 

Circa 2020s: “Post‑Pandemic Coups & New Flashpoints”

The Myanmar Civil War began in February 2021. The coup escalated to a nationwide civil war. There is fighting between the military junta (SAC) against the National Unity Government’s PDF and ethnic armed organizations (KIA, AA, TNLA, and others). There have been more than  75,000 total killed (UN), with more than 6,000 civilians killed. More than 3 million people have been displaced, with over 40,000 refugees and 17.6 million needing humanitarian aid. 

The M23 Rebellion in the DR Congo began in March 2022. It is a fight between FARDC (plus UN MONUSCO) against M23 rebels allied with Rwanda-backed M23 factions. Hundreds have been killed between 2022 and 2025. War crimes and abuses like rape have been committed, including executions. There are 180,000 displaced from Kibumba and more than a million displaced in North Kivu.

The Sudanese Civil War began on April 15th, 2023, between the Sudanese Armed Forces (Burhan) and the Rapid Support Forces (Hemedti). Estimated dead are thousands, and precise estimates are uncertain. There are 9.1 million internally displaced people, with 1.2 million by the end of 2023. This is the most significant internal displacement globally. 

The Gaza War began on October 7th, 2023. It is between the Israel defence Forces against Hamas and Palestinian Islamic Jihad. More than 30,000 Palestinians have been killed, with about 1,200 Israelis killed, including soldiers and civilians. About 250 hostages were taken. An estimated 1.4 million have been internally displaced in Gaza. 

This snapshot of major wars and global blocs is necessarily provisional, but highlights narratives, alliances, and conflicts intertwine in the world.

[1] The African Union, Organization of Islamic Cooperation, the Arab League, ASEAN, BRICS, G7, G20, Non‑Aligned Movement, Commonwealth of Nations, ECOWAS, EAC, COMESA, CEN‑SAD, IGAD, Union for the Mediterranean, SADC, AMU, ACP.

[2] Collective Security Treaty Organization, ANZUS, Five Eyes, Quadrilateral Security Dialogue, AUKUS, Shanghai Cooperation Organisation, Gulf Cooperation Council, and economic cartels like OPEC

[3] APEC, Mercosur, Pacific Alliance, USMCA, RCEP, CPTPP, CARICOM, Union of South American Nations, CIS, African Continental Free Trade Area, Bolivarian Alliance for the Peoples of Our America, Andean Community, EAEU, EFTA, SAARC, South Asian Free Trade Area, and BIMSTEC.

[4] Roman Catholicism, Eastern Orthodoxy, Sunni and Shia Islam, Theravada and Mahayana Buddhism.  

[5] Communism/Socialism, Confucian cultural sphere, Pan‑Africanism, Pan‑Arabism.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Case of Dr. Christopher DiCarlo: ‘We Are All African’ and the Clash of Science, Culture, and Academia

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/24


What happened to Dr. Christopher DiCarlo after teaching ‘We Are All African’ in a Canadian university course on critical thinking?

On November 1, 2005, Dr. Christopher DiCarlo taught a sessional course at Southern Ontario university on critical thinking, an area of expertise for him. A sessional (freelance) faculty member is part of the academic precariat. 

He freelanced for six to seven years between three universities in Ontario. He won a teaching award at the University of Guelph. On the board, he wrote a distinct scientific fact, succinct and scientifically grounded: “We are all African.” The singular form shows all humans share a single ancestral origin. Using the Genographic Project DNA kit on his son Matt, they traced their lineage through Italy to ancestral roots in Africa.

He wrote this to illustrate human beings’ shared genetic legacy and broader ancestry. The purpose was pedagogical to spark critical discussion among 93 students. The pedagogical decision was grounded in research. Research DiCarlo had done at Harvard and Spencer Wells’ Genographic Project. 

There was immediate pushback from a student. They asked, “Yeah, but how do you know that?” It is a good moment to educate people on human ancestry from scientific facts. An Indigenous student questioned, “But my people would not accept that… Who is right–their creation stories or the scientific evidence?”

He pitched a cross-cultural dialogue, inviting Indigenous elders and scientific colleagues to engage in respectful debate—a proposal that received applause and was warmly welcomed by the class. Although Indigenous elders were invited, none ultimately joined the class, and no further dialogue took place.

On November 11, 2005, Dr. DiCarlo got a letter. A letter stating two Christian fundamentalist students and one Indigenous student collaborated–all women. The three alleged that by using the phrase, DiCarlo was promoting racism and Eurocentrism. The letter was from the Associate Dean of Southern Ontario University. 

In mid-November 2005, the university retracted the tenure-track critical thinking position. It was a new position. DiCarlo was shortlisted for the position, which ended his candidacy. No public explanation for the position retraction was provided. Pre-retraction, he met with the university Vice President to review the job description of the new tenure-track job. 

In late 2005, Dr. DiCarlo filed a grievance to the faculty union. The grievance produced internal emails showing the university’s violation of the collective agreement. They failed to shortlist and interview him, as required. The absence of this protocol breached the collective agreement. 

In early December 2005, the university negotiated a confidential settlement with Dr. DiCarlo–no arbitration. A nominal financial settlement was given under a non-disclosure agreement, which barred public defence or admission of wrongdoing.  On January 16, 2007, he gave a lecture entitled “We Are All African: Our Greatest Discovery,” at York University’s Calumet College.

In September 2008, he received the UOIT Complementary Faculty Teaching Award and TVO’s Big Ideas Best Lecturer in Ontario Award. Dr. DiCarlo considers this episode an early instance of cancel culture in academia. After the incident, he created the “We Are All African” T-shirt and wore it to a conference. Reactions differed. An African-American attendee supported it. 

He wrote an article in Free Inquiry entitled “We Are All African! Can scientific proof of our commonality save us?” The purpose was to show a case against privileging any origin mythology over another. He went on a cross-Canadian speaker circuit with the “We Are All African” message. 

He was a Visiting Research Scholar at Harvard’s Department of Anthropology and Peabody Museum. He did research. Two notable papers were produced: The Comparative Brain: The Evolution of Human Reasoning and The Evolution of Religion: Why Many Need to Believe in Deities, Demons, and the Unseen.

Now, Dr. DiCarlo is the Principal and Founder of Critical Thinking Solutions, Ethics Chair for the Canadian Mental Health Association, and Expert Advisor for the Centre for Inquiry Canada. He is also focused on AI, a Senior Researcher and Ethicist at Convergence Analysis, and a lifetime member of Humanist Canada. 

He observed a trend. Other university philosophy departments ceased offering critical thinking courses. He considers himself one of the first “canceled casualties” in Canadian academia. Dr. DiCarlo’s case showcases academic inquiry and pedagogy can become vulnerable to ideological conflict. A conflict bound to institutional structures, even if the position is grounded in evidence and inclusivity.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Israel-Gaza Conflict: Verified Facts, Genocide Allegations, and the Humanitarian Crisis (2023–2025)

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/24

What are the verified facts and key statements about the Israel-Gaza conflict between 2023 and 2025?

Statements from Key Global Figures

While States debate terminology – is it or is it not genocide? – Israel continues its relentless destruction of life in Gaza, through attacks by land, air and sea, displacing and massacring the surviving population with impunity.

UN Experts (including Francesca Albanese, Special Rapporteur on the situation of human rights in the Palestinian territories) 

The level of suffering we are witnessing in Gaza is unprecedented in my mandate as secretary-general of the United Nations.

António Guterres, UN Secretary-General

Israel has carried out acts prohibited under the Genocide Convention, with the specific intent to destroy Palestinians in Gaza.

Amnesty International 

At the end of this campaign, all of the territories of the Gaza Strip will be under Israel’s security control…

Benjamin Netanyahu, Prime Minister of Israel

There is absolutely no doubt that we are talking about massive atrocities.

Philippe Lazzarini, Commissioner-General of the UN Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in the Near East (UNRWA)

[October 7 attacks are] a source of pride for our people… to be passed down from generation to generation.

Khalil al-Hayya, Senior Hamas Leader

We will never accept anything less than the historical Palestine. We do not believe in a two-state solution. We will never recognize Israel.

Ghazi Hamad, Hamas Political Bureau Member

The October 7, 2023 Attacks and Israel’s Military Response

A significant conflict among many is the Israel-Gaza conflict, escalating on October 7, 2023. Hamas and other Palestinian armed groups’ attacks on Israel killed more than 1,200 people. There were abductions of ~250 hostages. Subsequently, Israel declared war. They instituted a military offensive in Gaza with the claimed intent to dismantle Hamas and free the hostages.

Rising Casualties and Civilian Impact

The offensive resulted in tens of thousands of deaths so far. It is widely considered a humanitarian crisis with allegations of genocide and ethnic cleansing. The current extended conflict builds on decades of tensions between Israel and Palestine, e.g., the 1948 Arab-Israeli War and the 1967 Six-Day War.

On October 7, 2023, Hamas fired several thousand rockets at Israel. They breached the perimeter fence of Gaza. Most of those killed by Hamas were civilians, marking the deadliest attack on Israel in decades.

Israel’s military offensive included a siege on Gaza, ground operations, and airstrikes. The stated aim was the neutralization of the military capabilities of Hamas and securing the release of the hostages. Since October 7, 2023, ~1,706 Israeli casualties have been tallied, and more than 53,901 Palestinian casualties. Casualty estimation is subject to further confirmation.

The Palestinian casualties are 53,901, of whom 15,613 are children, 8,304 are women, 3,839 are elderly, and 825 are infants (under 12 months old). One hundred twenty-two thousand five hundred ninety-three have been wounded—numbers based on the Gaza Ministry of Health. UN verification is ongoing. 

Israeli casualties are the aforementioned ~1,706, with ~59 hostages still in Gaza and, at least, about ~35 of ~59 are dead. Other less referenced deaths are aid workers: 408, including 280 UN personnel. Numerous journalists have been killed; dozens for sure, but, like many numbers, precise figures remain uncertain. 

The restricted access to Gaza and the fluid nature of the conflict make real-time counts uncertain. Starvation and disease may create higher actual numbers from indirect deaths. The larger numbers come from other derivatives of war. 

Gaza Under Siege: Infrastructure and Displacement

90% of Gaza’s population—1.9 million people—is displaced. Many of these 1.9 million have been displaced more than once. No aid has entered Gaza since March 2, 2025. 16 of 36 hospitals are partially functional (as of August 2024). Many civilians are in a 15-square-mile area. They face Hepatitis C and other potential disease outbreaks. 

The “no aid” since March 2 is part of the total siege since March 2, 2025. For more than 10 weeks, no food, fuel, medical supplies, or water entered. One hundred twenty-two health facilities and 180 ambulances have been destroyed or damaged. 

Uncertain about the numbers when separated from the conflation of “destroyed or damaged.” Several hundred have been killed in attacks on healthcare facilities. Premature babies died due to power cuts. 

For homes, 92% have been damaged or destroyed. Roughly 70% of schools have been destroyed. While exact percentages may differ, the claim reflects the extensive damage in Gaza. Contentious debate on allegations of “genocide.” 

Legal and International Human Rights Assessments

Amnesty International and UN experts claim Israel is committing genocide. Israel claims self-defence against Hamas. Evidence put forth is infrastructure destruction, mass killings, and starvation. 

Amnesty International published “‘You Feel Like You Are Subhuman’: Israel’s Genocide Against Palestinians in Gaza” in December 2024. They alleged genocide via the following: killings, serious harm, and conditions for physical destruction. They find support in Israeli officials’ statements to indicate intent. They utilize 212 interviews, policy analysis, and visual data. 

Human Rights Watch published “Extermination and Acts of Genocide” in December 2024. They found extermination and possible genocide based on electricity, fuel, and water cutoffs, plus infrastructure destruction. They utilize 66 interviews and satellite imagery. 

UN experts allege reasonable grounds for genocide based on UN Special Rapporteur Francesca Albanese. They cite healthcare destruction and starvation, particularly in the leading Gazan IVF clinic. Israel argued that the claims were baseless and antisemitic, emphasizing self-defence. In addition, they facilitate aid and issue evacuation orders. Amnesty’s Israeli branch dissents. They find no definitive proof of genocidal intent. 

Global Response and Political Consequences

Three central politico-legal actions have been issued. In January, March, and May 2024, the International Court of Justice ordered Israel to prevent genocide, allow aid, and preserve evidence. So far, compliance has been limited. 

The International Criminal Court issued arrests for Hamas (Mohammed Deif) and Israeli leaders (Benjamin Netanyahu and Yoav Gallant). The warrant for Deif was retracted upon confirmation of death. The UN and aid agencies demand accountability, a ceasefire, and unrestricted aid. Israel’s allies face ongoing arms support scrutiny. 

The latter is most visible in North America in many public protests. Responses vary by Israeli ally—allegations of risking complicity nationally with arms transfers. The US notes potential legal breaches while citing incompleteness of evidence. 

HRW labelled the October 7 Hamas and other armed groups’ attacks as war crimes. The UN has called for the release of the hostages and the end of rocket attacks.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Rise, Crisis, and Continuity of Nathan J. Robinson’s Current Affairs Magazine

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/24

What happened at Nathan J. Robinson’s Current Affairs magazine during the 2021 co-op dispute and how has it evolved since?

Nathan Robinson’s articles, and Current Affairs generally, have been con­sistently challen­ging and thought-provoking, with incisive critique and informative discussion, lucid and provocative, and focused on well-chosen issues of major significance. I find myself regularly recommend­ing Robinson’s articles to others, and re-reading them myself. Unusually valuable contributions.

Prof. Noam Chomsky

Current Affairs is one of few superb places to go to get moral and spiritual depth combined with crucial progressive analysis and vision in a decadent American culture! The rich legacies of Martin Luther King, Jr., Noam Chomsky and Barbara Ehrenreich are alive in this marvelous magazine.

Dr. Cornel West

Nathan J. Robinson and Current Affairs are con­sistently ex­cellent, writing at a very high standard, and offering serious and compelling alternative perspectives. Very worth following and reading.

Glenn Greenwald

Yes, Nathan is a brazen hypocrite who would be leading the righteous denunciation if this happened to anyone else. The schadenfreude is merited. But the left has created a deranged, self-immolating culture where nobody can survive… Over and over, left-wing spaces destroy themselves. They’re impotent, can’t achieve anything, so turn on each other to feel strong and meaningful. But they can only raise their fist over cheap, performative theater. The puritanical rules they’ve imposed ensure self-destruction... Nathan is reaping what he sowed, just like Scott Stringer, Dianne Morales and so many others. The Frankenstein they unleash to sadistically destroy others eventually comes to eat them. Nathan is a mewling, obsequious socialist, but in this sick leftist prism, he’s Jeff Bezos.

Glenn Greenwald

We are sad, aghast, betrayed, and of course, angry to realize that this person we trusted has been lying to us for years. We, a small staff composed entirely of women and non-binary people, have faithfully worked to make Current Affairs the beautiful, engaging leftist magazine and podcast that it is. 

Current Affairs Open Letter

Dr. Nathan Robinson earned a J.D. from Yale Law School. He completed his Ph.D. in Sociology and Social Policy at Harvard University in May 2022. He is a libertarian socialist. He advocates for workers’ rights, democratic workplaces, and anti-capitalist principles. He writes on a wide range of socialist subjects. 

He founded the publication Current Affairs in 2015 with Oren Nimni. The original 2015 Kickstarter campaign raised $16,607, surpassing its $10,000 goal. Nimni serves as Legal Editor. Currently, it is based out of New Orleans, Louisiana. It is published as a bimonthly left-wing magazine with thousands of subscribers. It carries no advertising. It is funded by subscriptions and donations. 

For about 6 years, things were good, until alleged firings and a worker co-op dispute happened. It involved Dr. Robinson, Allegra Silcox (Business Manager), Lyta Gold (Managing and Amusements Editor), Kate Christian Gauthreaux (Administrative Assistant), Aisling McCrea (Former Podcast Producer), and Cate Root (Poet at Large). 

Staff alleged the triggering event was a Zoom meeting on August 7, 2021. There were discussions for a “more democratic workplace” for more than a year on a continuous basis. Robinson perceived the proposed changes as disregarding his vision for Current Affairs. 

On August 8, 2021, staff were locked out of Slack. They received emails. The emails requested resignations. Alternatively, he offered “honorary titles.” The titles came with no governance power. Staff perceived this as de factoterminations. No prior notice was given. 

No performance improvement plans were provided. Standard practice gives a two-week performance improvement period. However, it is not legally required in all employment contexts, especially for at-will employees in the U.S. Staff claimed being fired for attempts to restructure Current Affairs to a worker-owned cooperative reducing the unilateral control of Dr. Robinson.

The former staff members published a public letter in August, 2021, linked by Lyta Gold. Their central allegation hinged on single statement. “We were fired by the editor-in-chief of a socialist magazine for trying to start a worker co-op.” 

The letter highlighted the perceived hypocrisy of Dr. Robinson by staff members based on public socialist advocacy, i.e., holding disproportionate power, lack of responsiveness, and prolonged absenteeism. Several portions are indicative:

Yes, we were fired by the editor-in-chief of a socialist magazine for trying to start a worker co-op… Nathan became agitated… behaved in a hostile manner… started removing people from the company Slack… sent letters requesting resignations, eliminating positions… offering new ‘honorary titles’ which would have no say in governance… he admitted that he simply did not want Current Affairs to be a democratic workplace… he wrote: ‘I think I should be on top of the org chart, with everyone else selected by me and reporting to me’… We note darkly that he says ‘egalitarian community of friends,’ and not, of course, a workplace… he has effectively fired us for organizing for better work conditions… we are sad, aghast, betrayed… Nathan J. Robinson can write articles and give speeches, but… he simply isn’t up to the task… We have no better explanation for Nathan’s behavior than any of you, but it is clear to us now that this is simply the most extreme event in a pattern of controlling and dishonest actions that began long before this sequence of events and has created an untenable situation for the workers… this feels like a light going out.

Dr. Robinson’s responses changed over time. The initial response, he claims to have “irreparably lost faith” in his staff’s ability to collaborate effectively. Within the first 24 hours, Robinson changed the position, while retracting the original response. Now, he still supported a democratic workplace, but went against a co-op structure. He considered Current Affairs “purely” his project and not a collectively governed entity, but an “egalitarian community of friends.” 

He acknowledged personal leadership and shortcomings in this. At the same time, he maintained general support for labour organizing elsewhere. He did not address the hypocrisy allegations directly. Dr. Robinson took three actions. He:

  1. requested resignation of three staffers.
  2. reassigned an employee’s title.
  3. offered a contractor a different role. 

On August 19, 2021, the board of directors issued a public statement. No staff had been ‘officially’ fired, while severance discussions were ongoing. Subsequently, Current Affairs was announced as on hiatus on Twitter (now X) by Vanessa A. Bee. 

Uncertainty for the future of the magazine surrounded this hiatus. Dr. Robinson began reconciliatory efforts. He offered reinstatement of staff positions. Earlier, in February 2021, The Guardian discontinued Robinson’s U.S. opinion column. The discontinuation followed a satirical tweet about U.S. military aid to Israel. 

He struggled with severance negotiations and the maintenance of the organizational community. On August 13, Dr. Robinson proposed $234,352 (USD) in severance. Staff remained on the payroll through September, 2021; bylaws prevented formal terminations. Five departing staffers received severances totaling $76,014. This was about 34% of the magazine’s cash reserves. They remained on payroll through September 2021 per board bylaws.

Yasmin Nair alludes to departing staff spreading falsehoods; further, those leading to online harassment of Robinson and financial harm to the magazine. Direct causal connection and financial specifics remain unconfirmed. Structural and vision disagreements were the dispute, not ideological betrayal. 

The staff’s push for a co-op structure aligned with progressive values and Dr. Robinson’s stipulated values. The tension between individual centralized authority and collective governance showed in the story. Since 2023, no major developments on this particular narrative. He co-authored The Myth of American Idealism with Prof. Noam Chomsky in 2024. Currently, Current Affairs is operational and Dr. Robinson retains status as Editor-in-Chief.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Clergy Burnout: Understanding the Occupational Crisis in Ministry Post-Pandemic

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/24

What are the primary causes and symptoms of burnout among clergy, and how has the post-pandemic era affected their mental health and professional efficacy?

Burn-out is a syndrome conceptualized as resulting from chronic workplace stress that has not been successfully managed. It is characterized by three dimensions:

  1. feelings of energy depletion or exhaustion;
  2. increased mental distance from one’s job, or feelings of negativism or cynicism related to one’s job; and
  3. reduced professional efficacy.

Burn-out an “occupational phenomenon”: International Classification of Diseases (2019)

Burnout is a psychological syndrome emerging as a prolonged response to chronic interpersonal stressors on the job. The three key dimensions of this response are an overwhelming exhaustion, feelings of cynicism and detachment from the job, and a sense of ineffectiveness and lack of accomplishment.

Understanding the burnout experience: recent research and its implications for psychiatry (2016)

Burnout is a state of physical, emotional, or mental exhaustion accompanied by decreased motivation, lowered performance, and negative attitudes toward oneself and others.

APA Dictionary of Psychology (2015)

Clergy are people. Intellectuals, granted, but they get burnout. Some colleagues with theological backgrounds pointed this out in commentaries, recently. So, I decided to look into this a bit more.

Burnout is not merely a colloquialism, but a occupational phenomenon, while not a medical condition. Since 2019, the World Health Organization has classified it as an occupational phenomenon, marked by emotional exhaustion, depersonalization, and reduced personal efficacy. Burnout is a more precise term for the real experience of emotional, mental, and physical exhaustion. 

They feel emotionally exhausted, psychologically depersonalized, and feel a reduced sense of accomplishment. Granted, clergy have a long list of duties. While some traditional duties have faded, many clergy have taken on new responsibilities, especially in digital outreach, social services, and crisis management.

Clergy have long hours, deal with congregational conflict, various social and ritual obligations, and the emotional labour of a community’s wellbeing. It’s couched in theological terms, but it’s secular concerns. 

I was interested in the topic. What I found was genuinely interesting, there have been studies on the clergy on their wellbeing. A Hartford Institute survey in the United States found 44% of clergy have thought of leaving the congregation while 53% thought of exiting ministry since 2020. 

This is a 16% rise since a 2021 AP News source. While the Barna Group has noted a decline in pastors considering quitting full-time ministry between 2022 (42%) and 2023 (33%), which may suggest a post-pandemic recovery or an early pandemic bump. 

Over in Portugal, a 2025 study of Catholic priests found 34% experienced daily fatigue and irritation. This is in spite of high ministry satisfaction. So, satisfaction and ‘burnout’ may be decoupled in some key aspects.  While a study of pastoral musicians in the States in 2024 found 83.8% had, at least, one burnout symptom, 41.3% fell low efficacy and 12.4% had high emotional exhaustion. 

A 2023 Wespath survey found 69% of clergy in the United Methodist Church felt “tired” or “have little energy.” Any congregational conflict or resistance increased burnout. 73% find finances “slightly stressful” in this denomination. 

While U.S. pastors as a whole report loneliness amongst 65% of them, they report frequent isolation in 2023. According to the Barna Group, this is up from 42% in 2015. 32% of the Church of England clergy did not trust their diocese to safeguard their well-being. The stories get even more complex. 

When using the Maslach Burnout Inventory or MBI, clergy burnout is real, but moderate compared to other helping professions. On Depersonalization, clergy scores (2.9–8.1) are lower than police (5.6–17.4) and emergency personnel (6.5–13.7), while  higher than counselors (1.7–26.9).

On Emotional Exhaustion, clergy scores (12.9–23.5) are lower than police or emergency personnel (14.3–26.6), while higher than counselors (8.6–42.4). On Personal Accomplishment,  clergy scores (32.8–40.8) are moderate, while worse than counselors (9.3–43.6). Clergy may experience unique challenges in trauma and moral injury.

Regionally, there are some insights. In the United States, mainline Protestants and small-church pastors, including Evangelicals, continue to experience burnout, while being less likely to leave. In the United Kingdom, 32% of the Church of England show signs of clinical depression. 1-in-5 meet clinical thresholds. They work 50-60 hours per week.

In Australia, 36% of clergy considered resignation in 2023. Women and solo clergy are higher risk in those categories. In Portugal, Catholic priests report high satisfaction and significant fatigue. Now, the intriguing part is the emerging issues around and after the most recent global pandemic. 

70% of U.S. pastors report mental health flourishing in 2023. It was 64% in 2021. Clergy burnout are driven primarily by loneliness and congregational conflict. If they, or others experiencing burnout, want to reduce the burden, they can do some things:

  • Regular breaks reduce emotional exhaustion.
  • Peer groups and mentoring with extraversion and leisure.
  • Programs to address financial stress.
  • Tailored coaching leveraging extraversion.
  • Combining trauma care with workload boundaries.

Burnout for clergy is marked more for the younger clergy with heavy workloads, conflict-ridden environments, and in the post-pandemic setting. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Reconciling Indigeneity, Humanism, and Atheism: A Conversation with Dennis Bevington

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/24

*This interview is a contribution to an upcoming text on global indigeneity and international humanism from In-Sight Publishing.* 

How do Indigenous communities in Canada reconcile traditional spirituality with Christianity and humanist or atheist worldviews?

Dennis Bevington, former MP for the Northwest Territories, talks about the intersection of indigeneity, humanism, and atheism. He is non-Indigenous and was mayor of Fort Smith–a majoritively Indigenous fort in the Northwest Territories. Bevington reflects on his journey from a scientific worldview to curiosity about unexplained phenomena, while maintaining non-religious beliefs. He highlights how Indigenous communities blend traditional spirituality with Christianity, and how humanists reconcile identity without supernaturalism. Bevington describes the challenges of constitutional development, colonial legacies, and the shift in governance structures. He emphasizes the importance of open public dialogue and respect for cultural integrity, noting practical examples of syncretism, such as combined Indigenous and Christian ceremonies at community events.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dennis Bevington, former Member of Parliament for the Northwest Territories from 2006 to 2015. So today, we will discuss indigeneity, humanism, and potentially atheism, and how one can navigate or reconcile these elements.

Many people have explored this intersection, but from what I’ve seen, it’s often approached on a national level while being grounded in small, in-depth, often syncretic case studies. This reminds me of how a friend of mine, Tsimshian, an Alaska Native and American Presbyterian minister, approaches this. Her theology is rooted in the traditional Indigenous beliefs she already held.

That sort of blending seems familiar across Indigenous communities in Canada as well. So, how would you frame the relationship between indigeneity and, primarily, Christianity in Canada? And for the minority within those communities who identify as atheist or humanist, how do they work that out for themselves? How do Indigenous people in Canada reconcile their Indigenous identity with the legacy of Christianity, which was imposed on many of their communities through colonization?

Dennis Bevington: Regardless of atheism, many Indigenous communities seem to understand that reconnecting with a form of spirituality aligned with traditional worldviews is a meaningful and healing process.

Even if someone is not drawn to spiritual practice themselves, there is often deep respect for those who are. This is especially evident in individuals recovering from addiction, systemic poverty, and intergenerational trauma—issues that disproportionately affect Indigenous communities in Canada. There is a greater respect today for Indigenous spirituality than there was, say, forty years ago. That respect has grown.

I have good friends who practice Indigenous spirituality. I sometimes join them in sweat lodge ceremonies—probably every couple of months. What stands out to me is the openness: They say, “Pray as you see fit.” Some rituals are followed, and they ask that you respect them, but the experience itself is collective, inclusive, and welcoming.

That’s my connection to Indigenous spirituality. I don’t identify as a religious practitioner, but throughout my life, as a mayor and then as a Member of Parliament, I’ve appreciated what religion and spirituality can offer communities in a positive sense. They can provide support, purpose, and healing, which is a very important part of many people’s lives.

Jacobsen: Is there ever any sense of being “in the closet” as a humanist or atheist within your community in Canada?

Bevington: No, not really. That’s not a significant issue where I come from.

My immediate family—my son, my daughter, and my wife—are all spiritual, but I wouldn’t necessarily call them religious. They don’t attend church but gather every Sunday to connect, talk about spirituality and Christianity, and support one another. They know I don’t share the same interest in spirituality as they do, and they’re completely accepting. They don’t criticize or pressure me about it.

But I live in a fairly unique community. I don’t think you’d find the same degree of empathy or acceptance for non-religious individuals—people who identify as humanists or atheists—in many other small rural communities across Canada. It depends on the specific community. Some communities are accepting, while others are not. It wouldn’t always be well-received.

Jacobsen: What is the population of your community?

Bevington: For the transcript, the population of Fort Smith, where I live, is about 2,500 to 3,000.

Jacobsen: Would that be about the average population size for small communities in Canada, or more specifically, in the Northwest Territories?

Bevington: No, not quite. In the Northwest Territories, we have 33 communities. There’s one major centre—Yellowknife—with around 20,000 people. Then there are a few mid-sized communities like Inuvik and Hay River, each with about 3,500 people, and Fort Smith, which is slightly less than that. After that, the numbers drop significantly. Many communities have populations around 1,000 or fewer. Quite a number of them have between 300 and 500 people, and a few have as few as 100.

It’s interesting when you look at the demographics. Communities tend to stay at a specific population size until something triggers growth, like economic development or government investment, and then they jump to a higher size. It’s a growth phenomenon. I remember reading about it years ago, though I wouldn’t call myself an expert.

You can see it in Alberta, where some communities have grown this way. Another example is Nunavut, where the birth rate is high and communities are expanding rapidly. That’s part of why Nunavut faces such severe housing shortages—it puts intense pressure on community infrastructure.

Jacobsen: Were you always a humanist, or did you have a prior philosophical or religious commitment?

Bevington: No. I was always—well, even when I was younger, attending church with my parents—I didn’t find it interesting. I wasn’t drawn to religion. In school, I would get into long debates with teachers who held religious beliefs. We’d have extended dialogues about the nature of the universe and similar topics. So, from early on, I was very much on the scientific side.

Over time, my attitude has shifted slightly. I’m still not religious, but I sense that there’s some creative force or order in the universe that remains unexplained—and that idea interests me more now than it used to. But I haven’t found anything that leads me to a firm conclusion, and I certainly haven’t experienced any spiritual awakening.

Jacobsen: So, the proverbial finger hasn’t come out of the sky and tapped you on the head?

Bevington: No, not at all—and I’m perfectly comfortable with that. I don’t feel any remorse about not having a strong sense of spirituality.

I also see the problems that sometimes arise for people with fixed religious beliefs. Those beliefs can lead to rigid views about what will happen in the world, the universe, or their personal lives. That rigidity can become limiting or even harmful.

Jacobsen: For those First Nations or Métis people who are not particularly adherent to traditional beliefs and practices, or who take part in ceremonies but do not believe in the supernatural aspects, are there meaningful distinctions we should be aware of? Whether they are Cree, Métis, Chipewyan, or from elsewhere in the region where you served as mayor and grew up, do you notice different paths people take regarding philosophical or spiritual reconciliation?

Bevington: That’s a big question. Reconciliation and restoration of Indigenous and Métis culture have been difficult and remain incomplete. There are still many areas of pain and struggle. It’s hard to imagine it reaching full realization any time soon, though there is some hope.

I’ve noticed that there are two bands in our area. One of them places a stronger emphasis on traditional spirituality, and it seems to be seeing better outcomes—more cohesion, more cultural vitality—than the one that doesn’t put as much effort into practicing or maintaining those traditions.

Traditional spirituality gives people a sense that their culture is important, meaningful, and filled with integrity. Those are the qualities people need to lead good lives. If someone has grown up facing addiction, family trauma, or unstable relationships, it’s tough to move forward without becoming hardened by those experiences. Even if they survive or prosper in material terms, there’s a psychological toll. Traditional spiritual practices can soften that hardening and reintroduce a sense of worth and purpose.

And that hardened attitude is a difficult thing to overcome. It often means you make choices that, later on, you might not feel good about. But if you’ve become hardened, brush it off and continue on the same path. Many Indigenous people recognize the sickness in broader non-Indigenous society—the degree of corruption—as part of what drives the larger system. Those who see this often become quite jaundiced. I don’t believe that leads to a healthy or prosperous way of life.

Jacobsen: That sounds to me like a textural and aesthetic analysis of ethics, where, in mainstream Anglo and Franco-European Canadian culture, societal pathologies stem from the economy. That economic foundation leads to psychological patterns, such as greed, avarice, the willingness to trample over others, and the drive to avoid any internal or external state of poverty, at all costs.

Bevington: Yes, exactly. And how that plays out in some Indigenous communities, which is quite interesting. There’s now much power available to Indigenous people in various ways. But power—well, in broader society, we have structured systems for contesting and distributing it. I’m not sure those systems reflect the traditional Indigenous approach to power.

Now, Indigenous people are engaging with a different kind of power—often externally imposed—and that shift creates conflict and tension. I’ve seen this in band governance and Métis relationships over the years. If there had been a more traditional sense of power sharing or collective decision-making—something culturally rooted and accepted by everyone—it might have created a smoother path.

But this transition, from traditional power dynamics rooted in family, oral tradition, and communal responsibility, to a Western model where power is expressed by marking a ballot in an election, is fundamentally different. It’s a difficult shift. Even in non-Indigenous communities, we see significant challenges with political transformation. So, the added burden of shifting cultural paradigms in Indigenous communities only makes it more complex.

We see court case after court case—this is ongoing. It is one of the persistent problems with the systems that have been set up for Indigenous peoples to access and exercise power within a colonial framework.

Jacobsen: If you could design your ideal governance structure that balances contemporary humanist ethics with Indigenous systems of decision-making and power, while honouring the reconciliatory efforts of the Canadian government, what would that look like?

Bevington: I’ve thought about that quite a bit, especially in the context of the Northwest Territories. We still don’t have a finalized constitutional framework. I was co-chair of the Constitutional Development Steering Committee in the mid-1990s, when we created two separate territories. Nunavut resolved its constitutional questions internally and established a system that, in many ways, has served them well.

In contrast, here in the Northwest Territories, as we entered the same constitutional development process, there was resistance at many levels to the ideas coming out of our committee. We hosted a large constitutional conference in 1996. It became a real moment of understanding—a positive experience overall—but the follow-through wasn’t there. There was a point where we came to a shared understanding—that Indigenous and public governments needed to advance on parallel tracks, with mutual respect on both sides. Yes.

But just two weeks later, the federal government cut off funding for our organization. This happened with the support of the Premier of the Northwest Territories, who was Inuvialuit—Nellie Cournoyea. In some ways, she was the outlier in all this, likely because she had stronger linkages to Nunavut, which was being separated. That area of the Northwest Territories was particularly complex regarding constitutional development. The best solution she saw, it seems, was to ignore the whole process.

So that’s where I’ve seen real tension in moving forward. There have been good ideas—ways of maintaining the notion that Indigenous and public governments should be equal, with clear systems for providing services and legislation that respects both. Some of those ideas are still being tested today.

Under the Harper government, during the devolution agreement of 2013–2014, the federal government essentially said: “This is your responsibility now, territorial government. You figure out the relationship.” They weren’t particularly interested in engaging with the more profound constitutional questions. They did care about ensuring that governance debates would not hinder resource development. But as for how we chose to live together? That wasn’t a concern for them.

That’s my observation, as I was a member of Parliament at the time and was closely involved in the devolution discussions in Parliament. Now the Liberals are in government. They tend to be centralists in many ways, and it’s hard to get a clear sense of how they view constitutional development in the North. Their model leans more toward the idea that Indigenous governments should be separate, not twin tracks working in parallel with public governments. So it’s less about integration and more about separation.

Over the years, I’ve gotten people interested in constitutional development. I did this both as a Member of Parliament and afterward. But it’s not been easy to get people involved, especially in a public way. And that’s a significant problem, because these things must be public. The discussion has to be open. The thinking has to be transparent. You can’t decide these matters behind closed doors, in a cabinet room, or through bilateral conversations with First Nations leadership that exclude the public.

Unfortunately, there is a great deal of reluctance now to engage in public discussions about constitutional change, perhaps because past efforts have been frustrating or inconclusive.

Jacobsen: Earlier, you focused more on the role of individuals in this process. Can you take me back to that line of thought?  It was both a collective and individual question. We discussed governance, relationships, realistic and evidence-based reconciliation, and how those can align with humanist values while respecting traditional structures.

The individual side of the question concerns the appropriateness of someone’s relationship to Indigenous governance structures, alongside those imposed by the Canadian government, especially when that individual holds humanistic or explicitly humanist values. How does one think through this deeply and find an appropriate balance that feels suitable to them?

So yes, the collective aspect is more pragmatic and focused on governance for everyone. The individual side is more about philosophical reconciliation: aligning ethics and worldview. Then, we can state the obvious parts in passing, such as the humanist rejection of supernaturalism and divine intervention. That shapes how one engages with spiritual traditions.

Bevington: Yes, that can be challenging. For Indigenous people, belief in the Grandfathers—those who have passed on—is central to traditional spirituality. They’re seen as spirits carrying messages and providing Indigenous people protection and guidance. That’s a deeply embedded part of the spiritual worldview.

So yes, if you come from a humanist position that excludes supernaturalism, then you’re setting aside a significant dimension of Indigenous spirituality. That’s not a small thing—it’s foundational.

Over the years, I’ve come across experiences that I would describe as, at the very least, interesting—maybe what people might call paranormal. I can’t say more than that. I’m still fundamentally someone who approaches things scientifically or rationally. But I’ve witnessed things—some personally, others through people I trust in the community—that are difficult to explain.

And there is still a strong element of this belief system among most Indigenous people. A large number continue to report experiences with spirits or ghosts. That’s very real to them—it’s culturally embedded.

Jacobsen: That’s a fascinating intersection—both anthropologically and psychologically. Many Indigenous people had grandparents or great-grandparents who were ideologically colonized through Christianity. That belief system brought a complex spiritual cosmology: angels, demons, spirits, and a divine moral order.

So when you speak about beliefs in ghosts, the Grandfathers, and even paranormal experiences, those might get interwoven with Christian symbols and narratives introduced by force or coercion. Some people adopted them, but for many, these beliefs were imposed.

Bevington: Yes. Let me give you an example. One time, a local man approached me and my brother-in-law. He knew us both as responsible members of the community. He approached us very concerned and said, “Someone is practicing bad medicine on me.”

He was serious. He believed that a person in the community was intentionally harming him through spiritual or ritual means—what some might call bad medicine. It wasn’t just superstition to him. It was a lived experience with real emotional and psychological weight. He was seeking help—not from a doctor, but from people he trusted in the community.

He mentioned the person’s name. Three days later, he was found dead on the side of the highway. The police concluded it was an accident involving his rifle—he was reportedly pulling it out of his truck when it discharged.  Later, I discovered that the first person on the scene—the one who reported the incident—was the same person he had identified as practicing the bad medicine on him. 

I reported that to the police at the time because I thought it should be taken into account, but nothing came of it. No one followed up. It was officially recorded as an accident. However, the circumstances struck me as very odd.

Jacobsen: Perhaps shifting from contrast to comparison—since we’re short on time—what would you say are some similarities between Indigenous traditional beliefs, at least among the bands in your region, and Christianity? What aspects seem more easily reconcilable?

I can offer a practical example. I recently interviewed a man from Aotearoa New Zealand—he’s Māori and the author of Māori Boy Atheist, the only book written on Māori atheism and humanism. We did a long-form interview and a series of follow-ups.

During the conversation, he pointed to the haka—the traditional Māori war dance that has become widely known partly because of Dwayne “The Rock” Johnson and the New Zealand All Blacks. It’s culturally prominent.

Looking at the haka, I saw no inherent contradiction between the dance and a humanist or atheist worldview. It did not require supernatural belief, making it an easily reconcilable cultural practice requiring little cognitive dissonance.

So, are there elements like that in your community—things that are easily reconcilable between Christianity and indigeneity or between humanism and indigeneity? 

Bevington: Sure. From my experience, yes. For example, just the other night, I was at a celebration hosted by one of the bands. They invited a well-known drumming group. At the event’s start, they performed a traditional drum prayer to open the evening. But afterward, they also made the cross sign and recited a Roman Catholic prayer.

So the traditional Indigenous prayer and the Christian ritual were used—one after the other, without contradiction. That’s quite common among many conventional people in the region.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dennis.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Lindsay Shepherd’s Academic Freedom and Free Speech Case: The Chronology and Facts

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/23

How has the Lindsay Shepherd case influenced freedom of expression policies and academic freedom standards at Canadian universities?

Everyone has the following fundamental freedoms:

(b) freedom of thought, belief, opinion and expression, including freedom of the press and other media of communication.

Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms, Section 2(b)

The University is a public body… subject to the Charter. The actions taken to discipline the students for their online comments infringed their right to freedom of expression.

Pridgen v. University of Calgary, 2010 ABCA 347

Colleges and universities must implement a free speech policy that conforms to the principles of free expression as expressed in the University of Chicago’s Statement.

Ontario Ministry of Training, Colleges and Universities, 2018 Directive

Academic freedom includes the right to teach, learn, study and publish free of orthodoxy or threat of reprisal… and to express one’s opinion about the institution, its administration, and the system in which one works.

Canadian Association of University Teachers (CAUT) Statement on Academic Freedom

Prelude to Controversy: Free Expression in Higher Education

Over time, controversies may settle, particularly in Canadian academic culture.

Lindsay Shepherd’s academic case began in November 2017. It involved academic freedom and freedom of expression. The debate originated at Wilfrid Laurier University (WLU). What happened?

Shepherd showed a video of Jordan Peterson in class. Shepherd filed a lawsuit in June of 2018. WLU later apologized. The case was cited in national debates about freedom of expression policies at Canadian universities. Ontario mandated policies in 2018. Let us go into some of the details and further outcomes.

2017: Context and Early Developments in the Shepherd Case

In late 2017, Lindsay Shepherd was a Canadian graduate student and teaching assistant. On November 1, 2017, she showed two TVOntario’s The Agenda clips of Dr. Jordan Peterson speaking on Bill C-16. Shepherd presented the Peterson video to engage students. She reported no firm opinion of him. She did this in a first-year communications class. The action appeared intended to illustrate a debate on gender-neutral pronouns. This triggered administrative action. Bill C-16 amends the Canadian Human Rights Act and the Criminal Code. “Gender identity” and “gender expression” are added to the list of prohibited grounds of discrimination. It also extends protections against hate speech and hate propaganda.

Following the class on November 8, 2017, a student approached WLU’s Rainbow Centre. They had concerns about the clips shown. The Centre contacted the university administration. The specifics of the complaint are uncertain; no formal complaint was ever filed. Shepherd was called into a supervisory meeting with Nathan Rambukkana (Shepherd’s Supervisor), Adria Joel (Gender Violence Prevention), and Herbert Pimlott (Program Head). The processes followed leading to the meeting are uncertain. The meeting lasted 40 minutes. The three expressed concerns that her actions had created a ‘toxic climate.’ The reason: Neutral presentation of clips. Shepherd was asked to pre-approve all lesson plans in the future. Shepherd recorded the meeting on her mother’s advice after receiving a vague email about the meeting.

On November 10, 2017, Shepherd released a meeting recording to the National Post. She believed the issue was of public interest because universities hold a societal role and garner taxpayer funding, so she contacted the media after the private meeting. The recording emphasized freedom of expression, Bill C-16, and the Canadian Human Rights Code. It garnered national attention. The incident sparked ongoing national debates on academic freedom at WLU and beyond.

On November 21, 2017, WLU President Deborah MacLatchy and Nathan Rambukkana published public apologies. They stated that Shepherd had done nothing wrong. Rambukkana and Pimlott emphasized the need for a “safe learning environment” and criticized ideas lacking “academic credibility.” MacLatchy acknowledged an “institutional failure.” (Later, Shepherd described Rambukkana’s apology as “disingenuous” in her lawsuit.)

On December 18, 2017, Robert Centa conducted an independent inquiry. Centa concluded that no formal complaint was filed, the two clips shown did not violate policy, and the meeting represented “significant overreach.”

2018: Litigation, Legislative Response, and Public Discourse

In January 2018, Shepherd founded the Laurier Society for Open Inquiry with two other students. LSOI invited controversial speakers and faced some challenges, including high-security costs. In May 2018, Canadians for Accountability awarded Shepherd the Harry Weldon Canadian Values Award. WLU also approved a Statement on Freedom of Expression. The policy outlines student discipline via the Non-Academic Code of Conduct. It requires compliance for group recognition and funding. It directs unresolved complaints to the Ontario Ombudsman. Also, the policy mandates annual implementation reports starting September 1, 2019.

In June 2018, Shepherd filed a $3.6 million lawsuit against WLU, Rambukkana, Pimlott, Joel, and a student. She alleged constructive dismissal, harassment, and negligence. Independently, Peterson filed a $1.5 million defamation suit against WLU and involved staff based on the comments in the 2017 meeting. It was filed separately from Shepherd’s.

In August 2018, Ontario mandated publicly funded colleges and universities to adopt free speech policies based on Chicago Principles, based on a broader debate on academic freedom and free speech, which included Shepherd’s case. All institutions are required to report annually to the Higher Education Quality Council of Ontario.

In December 2018, Rambukkana and Pimlott lodged a third‑party claim against Shepherd as part of legal proceedings related to Peterson’s lawsuit. The professors argued that Shepherd should be liable for damages from releasing the recorded meeting. They argued that Shepherd was responsible for recording and publishing a private meeting. Privacy and free speech rights conflicted.

In response to Ontario’s 2018 mandate, publicly funded universities were mandated to establish free speech policies by January 1, 2019. Enforcement is overseen by the Higher Education Quality Council of Ontario (HEQCO). Institutions that are non-compliant may face reduced funding. The Campus Freedom Index, published annually since 2011, documented persistent institutional failures. In 2018, WLU and six other universities earned an “F” grade on free speech.

2019-Present: Lindsay Shepherd Lawsuit Dismissal, Twitter Ban, and Ongoing Free Speech Debate in Canadian Universities

2019, the University of Ottawa and the University of Alberta provided unconditional protection. The rest had caveats. In 2020, thirteen universities earned an “F,” and 21 student unions failed. As of 2025, there have been no significant developments in these policies, though they remain actively debated. The 2018–2019 frameworks are still in place.

On February 7, 2019, Shepherd became a Campus Free Speech Fellow at the Justice Centre for Constitutional Freedoms. On July 14, 2019, Twitter (now X) banned Shepherd. The exchange became public and controversial, leading to media scrutiny of both parties. The exchange was deemed “abusive behaviour.” The ban stemmed from a Twitter exchange involving comments related to reproductive health and public figures. Later that July, her account was reinstated.

Shepherd’s teaching contract was cancelled in early 2020. As a teaching assistant, not a faculty member with a formal academic contract, non-renewal can be common and not necessarily punitive. Peterson’s lawsuit was dismissed in April 2024 on legal grounds and procedural merit. The full judgment text is not public. On November 8, 2024, a court dismissed the $3.6 million lawsuit. As of May 23, 2025, the dismissal has been noted in public summaries, but the ruling text is not publicly available yet. National discussions on the balance between free speech equity, diversity, and inclusion continue on Canadian campuses. The 2018–2019 policy frameworks are extant.

Now, Shepherd’s case remains central to debates over academic freedom. WLU and other universities continue to publish annual free‑speech reports, and others, like the Campus Freedom Index, track compliance and campus speech environments. Shepherd’s memoir, “Diversity and Exclusion: Confronting the Campus Free Speech Crisis,” offers a detailed presentation of opinions on academic freedom.

The chronology reveals an ordinary pedagogical decision leading to national debates, legal battles, and policy changes. The case and the lawsuit’s impacts on Shepherd’s academic career and professional legacy remain unclear. Its long-term impact remains to be seen.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Diplomatic Tragedy in D.C.: Murder of Israeli Embassy Staff Linked to Antisemitic Hate Crime and Terrorism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/22


What are the key details surrounding the May 21, 2025, murder of Israeli diplomats Yaron Lischinsky and Sarah Lynn Milgrim outside a Jewish museum in Washington, D.C., and how are authorities framing it amid rising antisemitism?

On May 21, 2025, in Washington, D.C., two young staff diplomats–Yaron Lischinsky (30) and Sarah Lynn Milgrim (26)–were murdered. They were shot outside of the Lillian & Albert Small Capital Jewish Museum. 

Lischinsky served in the Israeli Defense Forces and then earned degrees in international relations and diplomacy. He championed the Abraham Accords and interfaith dialogue and was a Christian convert to Judaism. 

Milgrim holds a bachelor’s degree from the University of Kansas and dual master’s degrees in international affairs from American University and the United Nations University for Peace. She researched peacebuilding with Tech2Peace, then joined the embassy’s Department of Public Diplomacy in 2023. She was active in a Reform Jewish synagogue. 

They came from the “AJC ACCESS Young Diplomats Reception” of the American Jewish Committee (AJC). AJC is intended to foster unity amongst young Jewish professionals. Yaron Lischinsky, a German-Israeli, served as a policy research assistant at the Israeli Embassy. Sarah Lynn Milgrim, an American from Kansas, worked in the embassy’s public diplomacy department. Both are working for peace and dialogue in the Middle East. 

The suspect is Elias Rodriguez (30) from Chicago, Illinois. He was apprehended at the scene. He shouted “Free Palestine” upon arrest, among other slogans. Court documents reveal Rodriguez saying, “I did it for Palestine, I did it for Gaza.” 

Rodriguez earned a bachelor’s degree in English (2018) from the University of Illinois Chicago. He worked at the American Osteopathic Information Association and was an oral history researcher for The HistoryMakers. Past affiliations include the Party for Socialism and Liberation and ANSWER. He bought a 9 mm handgun five years ago.  

He arrived in Washington on May 20, 2025. He purchased tickets to the reception shortly before the event. He was pacing outside the museum. Surveillance shows several shots fired as the couple departs. There was a pause for reloading. He discarded the weapon. He entered the museum. Event security detained him.

Investigators examined an alleged manifesto online by Rodriguez. It condemns Israeli actions in Gaza and praises prior protests. Rodriguez has been charged with two counts of first-degree murder, murder of foreign officials, and multiple firearm-related offenses. 

Authorities are investigating the incident as both an act of terrorism and a hate crime. Interim U.S. Attorney Jeanine Pirro characterized it as a “death penalty‑eligible case.” Preliminary court hearing is June 18, 2025.

Some reports indicate wide condemnation as an antisemitic act. Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and Foreign Minister Gideon Saar attribute the murders to rising antisemitism. President Donald Trump condemned the killings. He described them as ‘antisemitic’ and calling for an end to hate-driven violence. Secretary of State Marco Rubio labelled the act as a “brazen act of cowardly, antisemitic violence.”

Israeli embassies are reported to heighten security measures globally. Concerns intensified for the safety of diplomatic personnel and Jewish institutions with escalations in the Israel-Gaza conflict. 

The Anti‑Defamation League reported over 9,300 antisemitic incidents in 2024, which is a 344% increase over five years. U.S. Attorney’s Office and the FBI continue to investigate.

With files from Reuters, The Associated Press, The Washington Post, and the Jewish Telegraphic Agency.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Hunger Games: or, The Development Digital Crucible

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/22

How did the term “incel,” originally coined as a gender-inclusive support label, evolve into a male-dominated ideology associated with misogyny and violence?

I was trying to create a movement that was open to anybody and everybody.

Alana, “The Woman Who Accidentally Started the Incel Movement” (2016)

Incels are heterosexual men who blame women and society for their lack of romantic success… A subset of the online misogynist “manosphere” that includes Pick Up Artists and Men’s Rights Activists, incels are known for their deep-seated pessimism and profound sense of grievance against women… The incel ideology is rooted in the belief that women have too much power in the sexual/romantic sphere and ruin incels’ lives by rejecting them… Incels are the most violent sector of the manosphere, and have perpetrated a range of deadly attacks against women…

Anti-Defamation League, ​​“Incels (Involuntary celibates)” (July 29th, 2020; Updated June 26th, 2024)

Alana, who identifies as queer, originally intended “​​involuntary celibate,” coined in 1993 in Toronto/Ottawa, as a movement for everybody. One can see echoes in the originator of #MeToo, Tarana Burke, who said, “The #MeToo movement is a movement for everyone…. It’s not a Black movement, but a movement that centers Black people.” She also is quoted saying, “We acting like we scared, this is our movement, this is a people’s movement. They don’t get to define what this movement is about.” As with many grassroots movements, founders lose hold on the faithful at some point. 

Alana’s Involuntary Celibacy Project was intended as a place for men and women confused about dating, and as a friendly space. An essay preceded this project and is the source of the 1993 coinage. However, Alana did not contract “involuntary celibate” into “incel.” The website users proposed the term “incel,” because it was “easier to say.” The abbreviation “incel” became common on discussion fora between 1997 and 1999. Things became less moderate, users began to self-identify in forums like “Alt.Support.Incels.” Decades later, the term, “incel,” became deeply linked to misogynistic murders. Alana reflected colourfully, “It’s not a happy feeling… It feels like being the scientist who figured out nuclear fission and then discovers it’s being used as a weapon for war.

Involuntary celibate was created and meant as a reference to any gender who experienced unwanted singleness. No animus to women or sexually active people. Alana left Alana’s Involuntary Celibacy Project around the late 1990s, possibly as early as 1997. She is in her early 50s now. Regardless, others took over. Slowly, some men became the majority. These drifted into male-only spaces. It is overwhelmingly cisgender heterosexual men now. “Involuntary celibate” as a portmanteau “incel” emerged by the late 2000s. Online fora–Love-shy.com and 4chan–used the term with negative connotations. Mainstream notoriety began post-2014 after Elliot Rodger’s murders. 

These killings are commonly seen as the first major act of mass violence and ideological crystallization of modern incels. Media and law enforcement reports have increasingly focused on violent offenders who self-identify as “incel.” Since Elliot Rodger’s 2014 mass killing in Isla Vista, California, the FBI included ‘incel’ in domestic terrorism threat assessments since 2019 now. Rodger’s manifesto framed women as collectively guilty for his perceived suffering. By implication, his murders were an act of individual killing grounded in perception of the victims’ collective culpability. The full transition to negative frames about one gender, from the original gender neutral and positive meaning, took about two decades or so. 

Cambridge Dictionary defines incel as follows, “Member of a group on the internet who are unable to find sexual partners… and who express hate toward people they blame.” In short, the term was a support label then became an extremist banner. Its founder no longer endorses the term. Now, the mystery is any correlates or a singular causal link. Across history, some men resent women, think Elliot Rodger, and some women hate men, think Valerie Solanas. The mystery remains: is there a singular causal link between involuntary celibacy and acts of violence? 

Brandon Sparks, Alexandra Zidenberg, and Mark Olver, in “Involuntary Celibacy: A Review of Incel Ideology and Experiences with Dating, Rejection, and Associated Mental Health and Emotional Sequelae” (2022) said, “To date, there is no conclusive account or explanation for why select incels decide to engage in acts of violence; perhaps this is what makes the incel community so concerning to policy makers, feminist researchers, and the general public.”

On the former case, “I will punish all females for the crime of depriving me of sex.” (2014) On the latter case, “To call a man an animal is to flatter him; he’s a machine, a walking dildo” or “He is a half-dead, unresponsive lump, incapable of giving or receiving pleasure or happiness.” (1967) I see three core pathways of thought. Some individuals genuinely experience social rejection, mental illness, or online radicalization. Factors not reducible to gender alone. Reactance to the former, “This doesn’t represent all men”–a defensive posture, fence building. 

To the latter, “These are MRA talking points.”–an accusatory stance, janitorial work. Both speak to biases. The former for men, not necessarily against women; the latter for women, not necessarily anti-men. Brief apologia for clearly stated attitudes followed by extreme criminal acts. The comparison is thematic. Solanas almost killed Warhol; Rodger’s evolved into a posthumous organized movement. To respond to some defenders, if Solanas meant SCUM Manifesto as a joke, then an attempted murder of a male is a terrible punchline. 

If some among these minorities of girls and boys, men and women, are criminals, then it’s a criminal justice issue. If others among these minorities of them are hurting and feeling unheard, then there’s another productive path for this too. The third option is seeing both forms of sexism as problems. It provides a lens for solutions-oriented work. Efforts towards the more general vision of a freer world with greater parity. A world where women can make strides in public and men can make leaps in private. These are choices. As women have made gains in public leadership, men are making strides in private and caregiving domains.

Take, for example, Iceland, for the first time, they have women as both Prime Minister and President. President Halla Tómasdóttir and Prime Minister Kristrún Frostadóttir since 2024. They weren’t the first either. Sri Lanka did this in 1994. Finland did this in 2003 and 2010-2011. Estonia did this in 2021. Likewise, we have men entering nursing, early childhood education, social work, and becoming stay-at-home parents. Movember and HeadsUpGuys promote male mental health. Nordic countries have a use-it-or-lose-it paternity leave access. More shared custody and equal parenting happens in separation proceedings. Dads have parenting blogs. Men’s podcast and discussion circles exist, and so on.

Much popular reportage reduces the term to a slur, often against young men and teenage boys. An insult to others akin to YouTube arguments devolving to mutual shouting matches hinging on accusations of one, the other, or both, being a “Nazi.” Colloquially, “incel” is a male-gendered epithet. Some scholars make distinctions, though. Those are telling. They indicate the reality of the plural nature of the term “incel.” For instance, by implication, the original larger group of involuntary celibates is extant. Scholars distinguish between “true incels” and “ideological incels.” True incels are the original group: those seeking support. A legitimate and humane community-building effort of mutual relational assistance, a la Alana in 1993. Ideological incels are those promoting misogyny and violence, even engaging occasionally in acts of mass killing. Some online incel subcultures actively reject violence, while being hostile to mainstream feminism or dating norms. Still hate is present, it’s more specific to contemporary dating and some types of feminism. 

In sum, ‘incel’ is not a monolith. It is a term with a history, a spectrum of meanings, and a contested present. The original creation and meaning by Alana was a positive social contribution for all genders. In popular usage, it became the lost child, the Prodigal Son.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

PM Mark Carney’s Legacy and the Hidden History of Fort Smith’s Indian Day Schools

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/21


How does Prime Minister Mark Carney’s family history intersect with the legacy of assimilationist education and Indigenous policy in Fort Smith, Northwest Territories?

Mark Carney’s Election and the Shadow of History

Prime Minister Mark Carney of the Liberal Party of Canada ran and won in the last federal election in Canada. The federal election took place on April 28, 2025. He became the 24th Prime Minister of Canada. He comes from a Roman Catholic family background, particularly through his father, Robert James “Bob” Carney. He was a high-school principal and university professor who lived and worked in Fort Smith, Northwest Territories, in the 1960s. This prompts a deeper examination of the historical record. One can focus on surface-level news coverage using terms like ‘culturally retarded’ based on secondary unverified sources, then miss the deeper narrative surrounding the Prime Minister’s father. Surface-level coverage, akin to broad-stroke commentary common on social media, can serve a role in initial public awareness. However, it must be approached with accuracy and care. Alternatively, one can go beyond the conventional centre-left framing in Canadian media, or disregard it entirely, as many centre-right outlets do. This analysis seeks to move beyond binary framings. Life does not come in neat packages.

Institutional Foundations in Fort Smith

Robert Carney served as the then-principal of Fort Smith Federal Day School in January 1959. It was officially named Joseph Burr Tyrrell School in March 1961. It initially offered Grades 1‑12 to pupils drawn from across the Mackenzie District. Its official name was not Fort Smith Federal Day School but Joseph Burr Tyrrell School, which primarily served Indigenous students. Federally, JBT was run as an ‘Indian day school.’ In 2019, the school was formally listed in the Federal Indian Day School Class Action (“Schedule K”). Fort Smith has a population of around 2,248, in 2021, and 63% identify as Indigenous. Today, there are approximately 280 pupils and 40 staff. Languages offered are English, French, Cree, and Chipewyan.

There was inclusion in compensation processes for day‑school survivors. The principal Carney oversaw Indigenous youth and children in the Fort Smith locale. They were housed in nearby church-run residential facilities. However, Carney did not oversee residential schools directly. Carney’s professional life was deeply rooted in his administrative work in the North of Canada, which was aimed at the local Indigenous communities. Then-Principal Carney was deeply committed to the Catholic faith based on an analysis of statements purportedly made in a 1965 CBC Radio interview. By 1965, the school had 33 classrooms, an auditorium, an industrial‑arts shop, a home‑economics room, and served Grades 1‑12.

Cultural Framing and Assimilationist Education

He discussed the program at JBT for–in his terms–‘culturally retarded’ Indigenous children. According to later newspaper summaries of a 1965 CBC Radio broadcast, Carney reportedly described the ‘culturally retarded child’ as ‘a child from a Native background who, for various reasons, has not been in regular attendance in school.’ A phrase reported in secondary sources. Furthermore, no direct evidence of these statements extant could be found for this educational piece. The language reflects terminology and some people’s attitudes of the time. I repeat: These reported claims are currently unsubstantiated in addition to the claims about his administration of assimilationist policies. Regardless, as was widely done, Indigenous children at JBT were compared to the Euro-Canadian Catholic cultural and educational standards of the time. When speaking of Fort Smith and surrounding areas, we are talking of Dene nations, e.g., Smith’s Landing First Nation (Thebacha Dene), Salt River First Nation, and Métis Communities.

These Métis communities were descendants of Dene and European (primarily French) fur traders. The principal traditional language is Dënesųłiné (Chipewyan) spoken by Smith’s Landing First Nation and Salt River First Nation. The Chipewyan people of Smith’s Landing First Nation are descendants of those from the Lower Slave River and northeastern Alberta, while the Salt River First Nation are those who signed Treaty 8 in 1899.

The Local Nations and Their Histories

As per current commentary, then-principal Carney was a principal of a federal day school and adhered to assimilationist education policies, but was not a residential school principal. He ran JBT, not the boarding facilities. However, these operated in tandem with the residential institutions of Fort Smith. Indigenous children were boarded at a hostel or residence run by the Catholic Church and then sent to JBT for day classes. 

He was a bridge between Indigenous families and local communities, nuns, and clergy from the Roman Catholic Church who managed the hostels and missionary work. Fort Smith was formative for the work and life of Robert Carney circa 60 years ago. In the broader purview, Fort Smith functioned as a hub for residential schools and assimilationist educational efforts. (Roman Catholic) Church and State in Canada functioned in tandem with the colonial educational efforts of Euro-Canadians and the Catholic hierarchs. Oblate of Mary Immaculate and affiliated clergy had a strong presence with Bishop Gabriel Breynat (after which Breynat Hall was given its title) and Bishop Paul Piché leading initiatives there. The institutional aim was to facilitate the religious conversion of Indigenous children.

Church and State in the North

The accounts from former students, in addition to historical investigations, document severe abuse and harm documented in the residential schools of Fort Smith. Grandin College, though, has been remembered, as per the mixed moral history of Canadian society, for its positive mentorship and high-quality education. The Truth and Reconciliation Commission notes that Grandin College has one of the best reputations. Ethel Blondin‑Andrew credited the College for leadership training. It was founded in 1960 and became co‑educational in 1962, aiming to create future Aboriginal leaders. It was distinct from Breynat Hall when it came to sharing staff. Bishop Piché was appointed in 1959. He actively championed Grandin College for the OMI strategy for northern evangelization. Breynat Hall is remembered for significant abuses. Breynat Hall operated 1957‑1975. It was run by the Catholic Church, under federal control until 1969. Ottawa gave control to the Territorial government. The Church managed day‑to‑day operations with minimal federal oversight.

Grandin College, Breynat Hall, and JBT Compared

Survivors continue to speak out. JBT was known for mistreatment and discrimination, too. Jeannie Marie-Jewell, a Fort Smith Dene woman who became an NWT MLA, has recollections. She was made to attend it when her mother was sick. She described the supervision as ‘structured and strict,’ with discipline that some former students later characterized as excessive. Others and Marie-Jewell report witnessing sexual abuse and physical abuse at Breynat Hall. Others may have found positive mentorship and high-quality education. Some survivors had positive memories. However, Marie-Jewell stated, “At night, I remember I was too scared to look when the priests or the nuns took some of the kids out [of the dorm]. Many of these girls would return sobbing, visibly traumatized. So, what did they do with them at night? I spoke to a survivor who was there at the same time as me, and she said she was sexually abused there.” Fort Smith MLA Frieda Martselos called for replacing JBT, PWK High School, and Breynat Hall—the reason: their residential‑school legacies.

Investigations, Closure, and TRC Findings

Sexual abuse has been identified at Breynat Hall by multiple survivors. This came to light in the 1990s and 2000s during lawsuits and the TRC process. JBT’s former students recall a racially segregated and punitive environment. Girls were vulnerable and unprotected from some staff. The Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada (TRC), in its Final Report (2015), documented widespread abuse in residential schools nationally. Fort Smith was no exception. Therefore, Breynat Hall survivors suffered harsh discipline, malnutrition, illness, and abuse at the hands of certain clergy and staff. Breynat closed in 1975 after a fire. This ended 18 years of operation.

Robert Carney’s Academic Legacy and Its Tensions

Decades later, Robert Carney reflected on the residential school system. He wrote an article in 1981 entitled “The Native-Wilderness Equation: Catholic and Other School Orientations in the Western Arctic.” He articulates a favorable interpretation of missionary schooling. Bob Carney died on December 9, 2009. He became an academic and remained a practising Catholic. He pursued graduate studies and wrote about Indigenous education policy. In his authored articles, he emphasized what he saw as favourable and benign facets of residential schooling. Widespread public documentation of residential school abuses emerged during the 1990s and 2000s. His writings stood in contrast to growing survivor testimony and documentation of widespread systemic harm. He emphasized increased literacy and the dedication of the missionaries rather than dwelling on the abuses. Now, as Prime Minister, Mark Carney is increasingly drawn into public discussion surrounding the legacy and work of his father at JBT. This legacy introduces additional historical dimensions to conversations about reconciliation, colonial history, and the role of government in addressing historical injustices.

Prime Minister Carney and the Politics of Reconciliation

On March 21, 2025, Prime Minister Carney met with the AFN, ITK, and MNC leaders. In the context of ongoing policy initiatives, he promised to double the Indigenous Loan‑Guarantee Program and have meaningful reconciliation in economic files. On February 7, 2024, a Federal Court Order extended free legal services for claimants for day-school settlements to July 13, 2025.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

A Humanist Reflection on the 1700th Anniversary of the Council of Nicaea

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/20

How can secular journalism draw ethical parallels with the Council of Nicaea’s pursuit of truth and coherence?

Last Sunday, May 18th, 2025, in honour of the 1700th anniversary of the Council of Nicaea, I was invited by a Croatian Christian association via virtual conference to give a speech. The following is my contribution to the two hours conference. 

Distinguished guests, esteemed colleagues,

With sincere gratitude, I accept the opportunity to address this gathering of international intellectuals, researchers, and religious scholars. This occasion is both solemn and celebratory, as we mark the 1700th anniversary of the Council of Nicaea, a foundational moment in the theological and institutional development of Christianity. Though I come to you not as a theologian or confessional believer but as a humanist and a journalist grounded in secular principles, I approach this event with profound respect for its historical gravity and moral resonance.

The Council of Nicaea, convened in 325 CE, was not merely an ecclesiastical deliberation. It was a forged coherence in doctrinal chaos, a work to unify diverse communities under a shared conceptual framework. The idea was to assert that Truth must be sought collectively and with a seriousness of purpose. This ambition, couched in theological terms of the day, remarkably echoes the vocation of journalism.

Journalists operating in open, pluralistic societies such as Canada are entrusted with a public responsibility not unlike that of the Nicene Fathers. We are to confront genuine ambiguity, interrogate prevailing narratives, and seek the contours of Truth in the cacophony of competing claims. The mechanisms differ: evidence over exegesis, investigation over revelation. Even so, the ethical thrust remains analogous.

To practice journalism with integrity now is to swim against currents of misinformation, polarization, and sensationalism. We do not gather in councils. We ‘convene’ in newsrooms, editorial boards, and digital spaces. We have responsibility, because we shape public consciousness. Moreover, we often give voice and clarity to the sentiments already present within it. 

We should strive to exercise discernment. We do not amplify what is popular but accurate and proportional. These may include aspects of fairness and justice. Some accurate and proportional truths reveal unfortunate realities: unfairness and injustice. 

As a humanist, I operate within a worldview anchored in reason, empirical inquiry, and the inherent dignity of all persons. I do not profess metaphysical certainties, but I am not without conviction. Akin to Christian ethical traditions, the humanist lifestance esteems truthfulness, compassion, and defence of the vulnerable. These values should transcend doctrinal boundaries and offer common cause, particularly in an age needing principled dialogue.

There is an urgent need for rapprochement between religious and secular actors in the public sphere. The gates of Truth themselves are under siege, and some walls have been breached. We must not conflate difference with hostility. We should recognize our shared concerns and common moral aspirations. We converge around shared imperatives: human rights, peace, intellectual honesty, and epistemic humility.

Journalism functions as a moral cartography. It maps the terrain. It informs, yes. But it also describes, interprets, orients, and records. It buttresses the elements for building the future by creating the narratives for it.  

The Council of Nicaea engaged in a similar project. It defined orthodoxy and stabilized the foundations of collective meaning. While I may not subscribe to the theological conclusions, I recognize the profundity of the aspiration: to reconcile Truth and conviction with coherence in community.

Today, as we reflect on the legacy of that council, let us reflect on the character of our institutions—both religious and secular. Are they upholding the Truth or succumbing to expedient falsehoods? Are they fostering understanding or estrangement? Ultimately, do they deserve the public’s trust?

These questions transcend tradition. We must continue to ask these questions rigorously and together.

In closing, I thank you for the opportunity to speak across differences and to dignify those differences on concerns of the intellectual Commons. In the space between faith and reason, as between meaning of music made between a note and a rest in a piano piece by Orlando Gibbons or Johannes Bach, we may yet rediscover that most elusive and essential of social goods: the Truth.

Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Clergy Abuse and Journalistic Integrity: A Call for Evidence-Based Reform and Interfaith Dialogue

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/19

How can journalism support clergy abuse victims while fostering reform and interfaith understanding without vilifying entire faith communities?

On March 9th, 2025, addressed a Croatian Christian association via virtual conference on clergy-related abuse, emphasizing journalism’s essential role as a watchdog exposing institutional misconduct. I argued that victims should be the primary voices, institutions secondary, with journalists facilitating balanced narratives. I urged acknowledgment of abuse without condemning entire denominations, advocating evidence-based investigations, interfaith dialogue, and robust reforms to protect victims and faith integrity. Citing historical scandals and cultural movements as context, I stressed that transparency and accountability are imperative. This speech within the context of the entirety of the conference will be shared with the Ecumenical Patriarch, EU Parliament, Roman Catholic Church, UN in Geneva, UNICEF, World Council, World Council of Churches, World Health Organization, and other major institutions, ensuring accountability and healing universally.

Journalism, first and foremost, is a human enterprise. It’s built on human observation, written for human consumption, and, primarily, concerns human enterprises. Just democracies, fair societies, accountable power, and the like, require journalists as critical watchdogs to bring otherwise hidden stories to the forefront. Clergy-related abuse is a complex and subtle issue with blunt outputs.

The primary voices of clergy-related abuse should be the victim who can give indications of patterns and see firsthand weaknesses in institutions that have misbehaved, abuse, and, often told lies or merely partial, softened truths about it. The secondary voices are everyone else in the institutional setup leading to the abuse in the system in the first place. Religious institutions have a minority of persons in positions of authority, unfortunately, who have abused. Journalists are a tertiary voice around these two.

The role of journalists is working with victims, with the majority of clergy who have not abused, and other researchers, to gather the narratives and collate those to get the wider scope of the patterns of the minority of clergy who have abused. People take the accountability problem seriously, as it’s bad for the victims, bad for the laity, bad for the image and authority of the clergy, and, essentially, bad for the representation of the faith. If you care about the future of Orthodoxy, then you care about this as an issue relevant to the integrity of the faith.

So, I wanted to take these few minutes to recognize the substantial problem before us, for a few reasons. Some factors played into the situation in which we find ourselves. First and foremost, the crimes of a select number of clergy. Second, these crimes went institutionally unchecked for many, many years in the largest denominations of Christianity–almost as a prelude to the broader cultural movements witnessed in many Western democratic societies.

Third, a tendency to reject the claims of victims when the prevailing evidence presents the vast majority of reported cases in the extreme cases of misconduct, i.e., rape, as evidentiarily supportable. False allegations happen, but these are a small minority and should not represent a false dichotomy of support. Institutions should establish robust processes to investigate all claims, addressing false allegations decisively while preserving trust in genuine victims.

Fourth, the diversification of the faith landscape of many Western cultures, particularly with the rise of non-religious communities and subsequent ways of life. One result is positive: Citizens clearly are more free than not to believe and practice as they wish. One negative result, the over-reach in non-religious commentary stereotyping churches as hotbeds of abuse, which creates problems–let alone being false. It doesn’t solve the problem, while misrepresenting the scope of it. It makes the work of the majority of clergy to create robust institutions of accountability for the minority of abusers more difficult and onerous. It’s comprehensively counterproductive.

If we want to reduce the incidence and, ideally, eliminate clergy-related abuse, for the first, we should acknowledge some clergy abuse without misrepresenting The Clergy of any Christian denomination as a universal acid on the dignity of those who wish to practice the Christian faith. It’s a disservice to interbelief efforts, makes the non-religious look idiotic and callous, and blankets every clergy with the crimes of every one of their seminarian brothers, and occasional sister, in Christ.

For the second, we should work on a newer narrative context for the wider story, see the partial successes of wider cultural movements, and inform of unfortunate trends in and out of churches for balance. For the third, we simply need to reorient incorrect instinctual reactions against individuals coming forward with claims as the problem rather than investigations as an appropriate response, maintaining reputation of accused and accuser, while having robust mechanisms for justice in either case. For the fourth, some in the non-religious communities, who see themselves as grounded in Reason and Compassion alongside Evidence, should consider the reasoning in broad-based accusation and consider with compassion the impacts on individuals in faith communities with the authority who are working hard to build institutions capable of evidence-based justice on one of the most inflammatory and sensitive types of abuse. Interfaith dialogue can be slow, quiet, but comprehensive and robust in the long-term–more effective and aligned with both the ideals of Christ or Reason, Compassion, and Evidence.

To these four contexts, journalists can provide a unifying conduit to the public in democratic societies to discuss the meaning of justice in the context of the Christian faith living in democratic, pluralistic societies. We cannot ‘solve’ the past errors, but can provide a modicum of justice for victims and create a future in which incidents are tamped to zero for a new foundation to be laid. Then ‘upon that rock,’ we do not have repeats in the Church as we have witnessed in other contexts discussed over the last few decades:

1991 – Tailhook Scandal (U.S. military sexual harassment scandal)

2012 – “Invisible War” documentary (exposing military sexual assault)

2014 – #YesAllWomen (response to the Isla Vista killings)

2017 – Australia’s Royal Commission Report (child sexual abuse in institutions)

2017 – #MuteRKelly (boycott of R. Kelly over sexual abuse allegations)

2018 – #MeTooBollywood (Bollywood’s reckoning with sexual misconduct)

2018 – #MeTooPublishing (exposing sexual harassment in the literary world)

2018 – #WhyIDidntReport (response to Brett Kavanaugh hearings)

2019 – Southern Baptist Convention Abuse Scandal (Houston Chronicle exposé)

2019 – K-Pop’s #BurningSun (sex trafficking and police corruption scandal)

2020 – #IAmVanessaGuillen (military abuse and murder case)

2021 – #FreeBritney (exposing exploitation and control of female artists)

2021 – Haredi Jewish Communities’ Abuse Cases (journalistic investigations by Shana Aaronson & Hella Winston)

2002-Present – Catholic Church Sexual Abuse Crisis (Boston Globe‘s Spotlightinvestigation)

2017-Present – #MexeuComUmaMexeuComTodas (Brazil’s movement against misogyny in media and politics)

2020-Present – #MeTooGymnastics (Larry Nassar’s abuse in U.S. gymnastics)

2020-Present – #SayHerName (Black women and LGBTQ+ victims of police violence)

2021-Present – #MeTooIncest (focus on childhood sexual abuse within families)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Sustainable Population Growth: Balancing Demographics, Climate, and Human Values

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/15

“Population growth can exacerbate environmental degradation when it increases pressure on natural resources and generates more waste and emissions. Sustainable development requires policies that balance population trends with economic growth, environmental protection, and social equity.”

World Population Prospects 2022, UN DESA

“Rapid population growth can hinder economic development, especially when it outpaces the provision of essential services and job creation. A stable population supports long-term sustainability.”

World Development Report 2007

“Sustainable development is development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. Population growth must be addressed within that context.”

Our Common Future (1987), Brundtland Commission Report

The 2024 revision of the United Nations World Population Prospects (medium-variant series) describes 42 of the 193 UN member states, excluding the Holy See and the State of Palestine, as in absolute demographic decline. The number increases to 48 if micro-states and non-sovereign areas are included. 

The 1980s saw two countries enter absolute decline: Hungary and Bulgaria. In the 1990s, 14 countries entered population regression: Albania (1990), Estonia (1990), Latvia (1990), Romania (1990), Armenia (1991), Bosnia and Herzegovina (1991), Croatia (1991), Lithuania (1991), Georgia (1992), Belarus (1993), Moldova (1993), Russia (1993), Ukraine (1993), and Serbia (1995).

Eight countries entered regression in the 2000s, slowing down the per-country rate: Barbados (2000), Dominica (2000), Saint Lucia (2000), Saint Vincent and the Grenadines (2000), North Macedonia (2001), Cuba (2006), Andorra (2008), Portugal (2008), and Japan (2008).

Ten countries entered population decline in the 2010s: Greece (2010), Montenegro (2011), Poland (2012), Grenada (2012), Saint Kitts and Nevis (2013), Italy (2014), Slovenia (2014), Trinidad and Tobago (2014), Mauritius (2019), and Tonga (2019).

The 2020s saw seven countries enter this same pattern so far: South Korea (2020), China (2021), Slovakia (2021), Monaco (2022), San Marino (2022), Uruguay (2022), and Seychelles (2023). The chronology is as follows, represented as a consistent bullet point series:

1980s

  • Hungary (1980–maybe 1981-1982)
  • Bulgaria (1989)

1990s

  • Albania (1990)
  • Estonia (1990)
  • Latvia (1990)
  • Romania (1990)
  • Armenia (1991)
  • Bosnia and Herzegovina (1991)
  • Croatia (1991)
  • Lithuania (1991)
  • Georgia (1992)
  • Belarus (1993)
  • Moldova (1993)
  • Russia (1993)
  • Ukraine (1993)
  • Serbia (1995)

2000s

  • Barbados (2000)
  • Dominica (2000)
  • Saint Lucia (2000)
  • Saint Vincent and the Grenadines (2000)
  • North Macedonia (2001)
  • Cuba (2006)
  • Andorra (2008)
  • Portugal (2008)
  • Japan (2008)

2010s

  • Greece (2010)
  • Montenegro (2011)
  • Poland (2012)
  • Grenada (2012)
  • Saint Kitts and Nevis (2013)
  • Italy (2014)
  • Slovenia (2014)
  • Trinidad and Tobago (2014)
  • Mauritius (2019)
  • Tonga (2019)

2020s

  • South Korea (2020)
  • China (2021)
  • Slovakia (2021)
  • Monaco (2022)
  • San Marino (2022)
  • Uruguay (2022)
  • Seychelles (2023)

151 out of 193 member states are not shrinking. Sixty-three have peaked, 42 are shrinking — many only recently, and the rest are growing. Which is to state, based on known data, the apparent conclusion faces us. 

The United Nations’ World Population Prospects 2024 approximates a peak of 10.3 billion in the mid-2080s, the Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation (IHME) in The Lancet estimated a peak of 9.73 billion in 2064, and the Wittgenstein Centre’s 2023 estimate is a peak of 10.13 billion in 2080

This means 29 years on the earlier extreme up to 64 years on the later extreme until the peak human population. The reality: The likelihood sits somewhere between those antipodean projected extremes. Population decline, as an absolute global issue, will become urgent about two generations from now if population growth is simply the idea. 

This is both a that and a why issue. If you argue that population should increase without a reason, then you ignore the most important question: What quality of life is desired for all human beings with the population? This becomes a valuable question for the constituents of global eudaimonia. (Only from the perspective of homo sapiens.)

Having population growth for the sake of more people seems narrow, to say the least. If the only other option is the nihilistic, suicidal decline of the species, then the false dichotomy takes on an international, species-wide caricature. Another option is sustainable population growth. Experts have proposed this.

Until space mining becomes practicable, easily accessible resources on Earth remain finite. Sustainable population growth provides the benefits of resource balance, economic resilience, higher quality of life, environmental protection, social equity, and climate adaptability. 

The most significant issue facing humanity is anthropogenic climate change. Climate systems respond to physical inputs, not human governance failures or political boundaries. Growth for growth’s sake is uninformed and valueless. Regression for the desired decline of humanity can be seen as nihilistic, another valuelessness. 

Sustainable growth harbours the non-polyannish universalist values of human rights, empiricism of science, and compassion of a humane consideration of every person, young and old. Now, with humanistic values, if we want sustainable growth, what works?

Fundamentally, until synthetic means of human gestation exist, which remain scientifically feasible while complex, universal concern and evidence depict one approximate half of humanity: women, and trans people, with relevant reproductive mechanics intact.

For those who want to have children and for those who want to support their free, uncoerced decision to have children, population dynamics tells us some things: equal parental leave, affordable childcare, flexible family-friendly workplaces, support for dual-earner families, reproductive autonomy and healthcare access, and shared domestic responsibilities.

Another social factor is valuing family and children. Some conservative and libertarian commentators have proposed this. That’s true. However, what better way to support this through funding, policy, and role alignment than by establishing a comprehensive program grounded in the reality of shared values—values that only appear to be superficially or paradoxically opposed?

However, children and families are highly personal and individual choices. Some people believe relationships are not for them. Children are not for them. Thus, the messaging should be informed, culturally appropriate, and targeted in an evidence-based manner to those who want either or both, then providing a culture and infrastructure environment in which the sustainable growth models can flourish, while targeting anthropogenic climate change and other problems. 

A values-driven, evidence-based approach to population policy can foster a sustainable and worthwhile world in which people who want children are empowered to have them and humanity grows in balance with nature.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Institutional Assessments of Nazi and AfD Ideologies

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/15


Racism fueled Nazi ideology and policies. The Nazis viewed the world as being divided up into competing inferior and superior races.

United States Holocaust Memorial Museum

At its core, the Nazi worldview was racist and biological, positing that the so-called ‘Aryan’ race – primarily the North Europeans – was the superior race of humanity.

Yad Vashem – The World Holocaust Remembrance Center

The German Nazis were decidedly far-Right, not leftwing. To call the Left “Nazis,” or frame the German Left as Nazis, when the enormous weight of corpses and contemporary political analyses note the German Nazis as Right-wing, congratulations, you have taken on the tactics of abusers: Gaslighting.

They merely had “Socialist” in the name. They used the language to co-opt working-class support. Then they aggressively persecuted leftists–i.e., trade unionists, socialists, communists–while advocating for anti-Communism, authoritarianism, militarism, nationalism, traditionalism, and xenophobia.

Facts of history and the dead matter, not scoring political points for personal gain. To more recent history, German intelligence agencies ranked the AfD with neo-Nazi groups as a Gefahr für die Demokratie (danger to democracy).

May 2025…: German intelligence agencies connected the Afd to extreme-right ideology. The Federal Office for the Protection of the Constitution (BfV) report stressed AfD’s ethnisch-abstammungsmäßiges Volksverständnis(ethnically defined concept of “the people”) as violating democratic order, seeking to exclude entire groups. AfD characterized as a “racist and anti-Muslim” organization, e.g., slogans like Abschieben schafft Wohnraum(“deportation creates housing”) and Jeder Fremde mehr in diesem Land ist einer zu viel (“each more foreigner is one too many”). These are listed as evidence of dehumanizing language. BfV President Thomas Haldenwang called this “a good day for democracy.” A history exists here, too.

March 2022: a Cologne court upheld the BfV’s classification of the AfD and its youth wing as a Beobachtungsobjekt (Verdachtsfall) (suspected extremist organization), finding ausreichende tatsächliche Anhaltspunkte für verfassungsfeindliche Bestrebungen– “sufficient factual indications of anti-constitutional aims.” The BfV 1,100-page report filled the extremism criteria.

Late 2023: Bavarian prosecutors opened investigations into newly elected AfD MP Daniel Halemba for possible use of Nazi symbols. He previously belonged to a student fraternity raided for Nazi paraphernalia.

December, 2023: Several state Verfassungsschutz offices flagged AfD branches. Saxony’s domestic intelligence classified the Saxony AfD as gesichert rechtsextremistisch. Saxony’s VS president Dirk-Martin Christian said, “…an der rechtsextremistischen Ausrichtung der AfD Sachsen bestehen keine Zweifel mehr”(“there is no longer any doubt about AfD Saxony’s right-extremist orientation”) The party held typische völkisch-nationalistische Positionen (“typical folk-nationalist positions”) and used common anti-Semitic conspiracy language. These mirrored Nazi-era rhetoric. Thuringia and Saxony-Anhalt earlier flagged local AfD branches as extremist as well.

Interior Minister Nancy Faeser (SPD) called the intelligence review legal and independent, resulting in a 1,100-page internal report being apolitical. The new classification permitted intensified surveillance, including deployment of informants and communication interception.

May, (2024). German courts have penalized AfD members for Nazi-linked speech. The Halle state court convicted Thuringia AfD leader Björn Höcke for using the SA slogan “Alles für Deutschland!”

2025: Two Saarland AfD local councillors liked a Facebook post celebrating Hitler’s birthday. Authorities launched a Volksverhetzung (incitement) probe and party expulsion proceedings.

Leading German politicians likened the AfD to fascism and Nazi extremism. SPD Defense Minister Boris Pistorius warned protesters in 2024: Wer die AfD aus Protest wählt, dem müsse klar sein, dass sie Faschisten wählten. (“Anyone who votes AfD out of protest must be aware that they are voting for fascists.”) SPD leader Lars Klingbeil accused AfD co-leader Alice Weidel of heading a rechtsextreme Partei… die AfD ist durchsetzt auch mit Nazis in Europa. (“the AfD is also filled with Nazis in Europe.”) Former SPD head Sigmar Gabriel compared hearing AfD rhetoric to his Nazi-father: Alles, was die [AfD] erzählen, habe ich schon gehört — im Zweifel von meinem eigenen Vater, der … ein Nazi war. Green and Linke politicians made similar warnings. Expert commentators warned of Nazi parallels.

German officials and courts drew a direct line between AfD rhetoric and Nazi-style ideology. Official reports cite AfD policy goals, mass deportation slogans to ethno-nationalist immigration stances, as incompatible with Germany’s constitution.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ed Fredkin and the Foundations of Digital Philosophy: The Universe as Computation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/15

 Ed Fredkin (1934-2023), deceased MIT Professor and Caltech Fairchild Distinguished Scholar, can be attributed as one of the founders of Digital Philosophy. Others include Konrad Zuse and Stephen Wolfram. It is an interdisciplinary endeavour between computer science, physics, and philosophy, fundamentally grounded on computation. Universe operates as a computational system. Fredkin believed all physical processes are derivable from data processing, hence digital physics rather than physics.

Fredkin worked on computer vision, business ventures, and chess programming. Digital Philosophy sees the universe as digital. A set of pancomputationalism and digital physics. Both are distinct, but relate to one another. A discrete finite system run by rules on computation. Fredkin conjectures: All manifest energy, matter, space, and time, are bits. 

Fredkin believe in no infinites, no continuities. A universe integer-grounded and finite. The evolution of the physical processes happens as transformations from state to state is the hypothesis of Fredkin. Each state as a whole slice of the cosmic worldline. Disputable early orientations include determinism, reductionism, and mechanism. 

The universe functions with each next state following from prior states. Complex phenomena are emergent phenomena from simpler fundaments. Reality as a mechanism operable as a machine with predictable rules. 

Fredkin supported the ideas with reversible computing and cellular automata. He stated:

Digital mechanics predicts that for every continuous symmetry of physics there will be some microscopic process that violates that symmetry.

And:

The appearance of a single truly random event is absolutely incompatible with a strong law of conservation of information.

Cellular automata come in a variety. The one developed by Fredkin was called the SALT (Six-state Asynchronous Logic Tiling) family of cellular automata. These are reversible automata capable of ‘universal computation.’ These models simulate digital rules. 

He invented the Fredkin gate, able to perform computations without losing energy. Some of energy-efficient computing is based on this. This has implications for contemporary and upcoming artificial intelligence systems. 

He proposed, in a manner within these developments, the finitude of the natural order. Fredkin asserted the universe is a giant automaton with the possibility of quantum phenomena emergent from digital processes too. Philosophy of physics, in this developmental trend, can be interpreted as philosophy of digital physics. 

When made practical, we unite the Digital Philosophy into digital physics. One deals with concepts, relations, and theories, and the other with operations, functions, and applications.

Reversible computing has arrived and advanced, particularly in reduction of energy waste per compute. The Vaire Computing chip achieved a many-fold increase in energy efficiency. A possible direct developmental inspiration from the conceptual framework of Fredkin’s work, so from digital philosophy into digital physics. 

Some critiques exist of the ideas despite the practical applications and consistency with contemporary ideas of computation and information:

  1. If all is computation, the idea is too broad, so meaningless. 
  2. It needs more empirical support, so it has reduced scientific credibility. 
  3. Discrete models are inconsistent with continuous models of quantum mechanics or relativity. 
  4. Some see the ideas as naive while others question validity due to Fredkin’s computational background. 

His ideas left a lasting mark on modern physics and Digital Philosophy continues to impact facets of computation, physics, and philosophy. Others existed in this space and others are extant. 

The developments of digital physics continue.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Maternal Death in Nigeria Linked to Blood Transfusion Refusal Sparks Medical Ethics Investigation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/13

The leading cause of global maternal death: Postpartum hemorrhage. One woman dies every six minutes. In 2023, 700 women died per day from preventable pregnancy‑related causes. Nigeria’s maternal‑mortality ratio is more than 800 per 100,000 live births. Obstetric hemorrhage is a principal driver. Timely transfusion reduces hemorrhage and fatality by up to 90%. (Exact quantification is complex.)

Jehovah’s Witnesses interpret biblical injunctions uniquely. The “abstain from blood” injunction means a biblical prohibition of transfusion of whole blood and its primary components. Transfusion is a sin. Jehovah’s Witnesses can be disfellowshipped. Members may choose to select minor derivatives. Adult Witnesses can carry advance‑directive cards refusing blood. Clinicians sit in complex medical and legal situations in medical emergencies.

May 10, 2025, 33-year-old Victoria Paris died of postpartum hemorrhage. She was not a Jehovah’s Witness. She died in the Standard Maternity Hospital, Borikiri, Port Harcourt. The owner, a purported Jehovah’s Witness, refused a blood transfusion. The Rivers State Government reportedly sealed the facility within 24 hours.

A full investigation is pending. A national debate ensued on imposing religious convictions when lives are at stake. Paris was pregnant with a fifth child and experienced abdominal pain. Relatives took her to the Standard Maternity Hospital in Borokiri.

She had delivered children there earlier. Surgeons performed an emergency cesarean section. She lost blood. She needs atransfusion. Chris Adams, the husband or brother-in-law (reports differ), claimed the proprietor of the hospital refused to order blood.

Their version of the Jehovah’s Witness faith forbade this procedure. During surgery, the power failed. This may delay care. Family members transferred Paris to a second facility. She was declared dead on arrival.

On May 11, 2025, the Rivers State Anti-Quackery Committee conducted an unscheduled inspection led by Dr. Vincent Wachukwu from the Ministry of Health. The theatre was sealed, and staff were ordered to cease operations.

The Committee claimed “suspected professional negligence and breach of the Rivers State Private Health‑Care Facilities Regulation Law.” They claimed: Medical and Dental Council of Nigeria (MDCN) and police homicide detectives would join the investigation.

Victim‑support groups are pressing for criminal negligence or manslaughter charges. Permitted in Nigerian law if a “person’s omission to act” causes death (Criminal Code §303). The clinic is licensed as a Level B private maternity centre at №2 Captain Amangala Street, Borikiri.

The Anti-Quackery team cautioned the same facility in 2024 for inadequate record-keeping and was placed on probationary status. Nigerian guidelines (MDCN 2016) require physicians to provide every reasonable emergency measure. Personal beliefs should not interfere.

Refusal can mean harm. This can constitute professional misconduct. Courts compelled transfusions for minors, upholding adult autonomy. The doctor refused Paris. There was no documented patient consent, thus raising liability questions.

With files from Elanhub, Legit NG, OtownGist, The Trumpet NG, Intel Region, GistReel, HettysMedia, Rivers State Anti‑Quackery Committee (X/Instagram), WHO fact‑sheets and academic articles on Jehovah’s Witness transfusion ethics.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Robert Francis Prevost on Pope Leo XIV

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/13

History as a bridge-builder with a centrist social-justice activism and doctrinal conservatism. He has an Augustinian communitarian ethos. His platforms: synodality, Christocentric evangelization over abstraction, and inclusion, with traditionalism on life, marriage, and ordained ministry. He uses pastoral anti-clericalism against isolationist leadership, while advocating interreligious dialogue and big tent-ism focused on humanitarianism over culture wars. He champions broad participation with secular‑religious cooperation and compassionate outreach. The Test: Translation of ideals into transparent, effective governance with accountability following from rhetorical closeness.

2012

“Sympathy for beliefs and practices that are at odds with the gospel,” e.g., “[the] homosexual lifestyle” and “alternative families comprised of same-sex partners and their adopted children.”

2019

“We reject cover-up and secrecy, it does a lot of harm, because we have to help the people who have suffered from wrongdoing.”

2019

“I think they should do it, if there is abuse against a minor by a priest… On behalf of the Church, we want to tell people that if there was any offense, if they suffered or are victims of a priest’s wrongdoing, they should come and report it, to act for the good of the Church, the person, and the community.”

~2015–2023

“The promotion of gender ideology is confusing, because it seeks to create genders that don’t exist.”

2023

“We are often worried about teaching doctrine, but we risk forgetting that our first duty is to communicate the beauty and joy of knowing Jesus.”

2023

“A fundamental element of the portrait of a bishop is being a pastor, capable of being close to the members of the community.”

2023

“Silence is not an answer. Silence is not the solution. We must be transparent and honest, we must accompany and assist the victims, because otherwise their wounds will never heal.”

2023

“The fundamental thing for every disciple of Christ is humility.”

2023

“Being a synodal Church that knows how to listen to everyone is the way not only to live the faith personally, but also to grow in true Christian brotherhood.”

2023

“Above all, a bishop must proclaim Jesus Christ and live the faith so that the faithful see in his witness an incentive to them to want to be an ever more active part of the Church that Jesus Christ himself founded.”

2023

“Something that needs to be said also is that ordaining women — and there’s been some women that have said this interestingly enough — ‘clericalizing women’ doesn’t necessarily solve a problem, it might make a new problem.”

2024

“The bishop is not supposed to be a little prince sitting in his kingdom.”

2024

“Called authentically to be humble, to be close to the people he serves, to walk with them, to suffer with them.”

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Growing Through Langley: A Journey in Smaller Municipality Canada

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/11

Foundation of the British Columbia Firmament

The Father of British Columbia, Sir James Douglas, is worshipped in the community where I grew up. Not for nothing, he had achievements, but he had a mixed history in numerous ways. He had a “mixed history” as HBC Chief Factor and colonial governor. He granted monopolistic privileges to his company and family. 

This mixed public office and private profit. He imposed property-based voting qualifications, excluding full representation. He set forth unfair First Nations treaties. The Douglas Treaties were signed on blank sheets, with terms inserted afterward—an unusual practice. Unilaterally, these were later signed, resulting in Indigenous signatories having land cessions that were not fully known. 

He had a heavy-handed gold rush policy with licensing schemes and delayed enforcement during the Fraser Canyon conflict. These failed to protect Indigenous communities. Violence and village burnings ensued. He recruited black Californian settlers for political loyalty. It was opportunistic rather than principled efforts for the enfranchisement of blacks. He was from Guyana. A fascinating history to learn about one’s happenstance of contingent past circumstances: his contemporary presentation is not an exercise in false equivalence. It is about a united duality of positive and negative valence.

The living recent history reflects this mixed history in Fort Langley, out of Langley, with the crossovers between hipster intellectual farmers and well-educated, well-off Evangelical Christians, Trinity Western University, and the political shenanigans of Christians here impacting the federal level of the country. I wanted to cover some of this controversial recent history, as having a singular reference for some of the township’s more noteworthy shenanigans. For clarity, I speak as a former member of one of the heritage committees of an association in Fort Langley and another for the Township of Langley. I can say, “Heritage matters to Langleyites.” As an elder Euro-Canadian lady told me on the committee, a fellow committee member, it was in a sharp snarl once at a meeting, “I know who you are.” These were not isolated events throughout my life while growing up and through there. So it goes.

The contemporary Evangelical Christian story in Fort Langley began with a sexual misconduct allegation of the longest-standing university president in Canadian history: 2005-2006 with former university president Neil Snider. I would rather this not be the case, but it is the history. Something worth repeating.

2005–2015: Institutional Unease and Image Discipline

He had the longest tenure of any Canadian university president—32 years–and greatly grew Trinity Western University (TWU) in its early decades. That is a testament to his prowess as an administrator of resources and an inspirer of people at the time. In their terminology, he had the Holy Spirit in him.

Unfortunately, an uncomfortable truth was his retirement in 2006 following sexual misconduct allegations. Internal reports from TWU and contemporary media reviews questioned the administrative decisions around this. The community is embarrassed by it and tries to cover it up. I understand that part. It happens with clergy-related abuse cases too: Institutional protection. However, as one colleague’s mom who worked with him said to me, in a way to excuse it, “He was lonely,” because either his wife died or he was divorced. I leave considerations of the elasticity of excuse-making to the reader. 

ChristianWeek’s “Trinity Western Resolves Human Rights Complaint” documented the 2005 human rights complaint against Snider. The settlement impacted subsequent policy reviews. Former faculty interviews showed early signs of institutional unease. Evangelical leaders have undergone these scandals.

A CAUT Report, “Report of an Inquiry Regarding Trinity Western University,” examined the requirement for faculty to affirm the religious Covenant. You can see TWU’s current Community Covenant. William Bruneau and Thomas Friedman examined the requirement for faculty to affirm the Covenant and possible impacts on academic hiring and free speech. Case studies and personal accounts of faculty are incorporated. It is a referenced report in academic discussions on religion and academia in Canada. 

University Affairs via “A test of faith at Trinity Western” provided an analytic retrospective of early administrative policies, linking them to later legal challenges–more on that in 2016-2018. Christian universities seem highly conscious of their public image, because they theologically see themselves as at odds with the secularist world. For example, in 2011, the Institute for Canadian Values funded an advertisement opposing LGBTI-inclusive education, which was supported by the Canada Christian College. It was published by the National Post and later by the Toronto Sun. A national backlash happened. An apology ensued—a retraction happened by the Post, but not by the Sun.  

2005-2015 was a busy few years. Ex-administrators and archival internal memos showed dissent regarding mandatory religious practices. Similar controversies happen in religious universities in Canada, all private, all Christian. The largest is Evangelical, and the largest is TWU, in Langley. After trying to get many interviews with professors and dissenting students in the community, the vast majority declined over many years of journalistic efforts, and a few agreed to a coffee conversation to express opinions. Most opinions dissent from the norm of TWU while affirming the difficulties for the faith with these straight-and-narrow executives, who are not reined in, reign with impunity, and rain neglect on their community’s inner Other. 

2016–2018: The Covenant and the Courts

Circa 2016, some online commentators mentioned how they felt “bad for the kids that realize they’re not straight” at TWU as “Coming out is hard,” and “it’s crazy that people still want to go to this school.” A former student acknowledged some student support for LGBTI peers while warning many feel “quite ostracized” by an “unspoken aura” repressing non-Christian views. An LGBTI student may have to “repress their urges based on a stupid covenant.”

Other online forums include a former student union leader noting the “community covenant is outdated” even by 2013, while another urged the university to rethink the Covenant. Saying there is a “thriving rape culture,” “I know more than five girls who were raped [at TWU], who didn’t report it because they believed they would be shamed and not taken seriously.”

Maclean’s in “The end of the religious university?” talked about the long-standing interest in the national debate around religious mandates in higher education and the central role of TWU. These controversies about academic freedom following Snider’s resignation would echo some other community elements there. BBC News commented that Canada approved a homophobic law school in 2013. This would eventually evolve poorly for TWU and reflect terribly on the surrounding community. 

Xtra Magazine’s The Painful Truth About Being Gay at Canada’s Largest Christian University” featured a series of robust testimonies from current and former students on systemic discrimination. The magazine also examined campus surveys, student blogs, and some student activist groups, with a case study of academic panels addressing LGBTI issues within religious institutions. The Supreme Court of Canada issued its decision on TWU’s Law School accreditation in 2018. It was analyzed by legal journals and cited in academic papers. Those looked to religious mandates and the tensions with legal equality. 

CBC News in “Trinity Western loses fight for Christian law school as court rules limits on religious freedom ‘reasonable’” provided a comprehensive timeline of developments with constitutional lawyer and civil rights advocacy commentary. Other commentaries looked at policy adjustments following from institutions. The Tyee chimed into the discussion with “Trinity Western University Loses in Supreme Court,” with some parables into the personal narratives on campus, more timeline events, and a more important emphasis on the long-term impact on the reputation of TWU. 

Knowing some minority facets of dynamics in this community, many will slander others and lie to protect themselves, particularly their identity as represented via the incursion of Evangelical Orthodoxy into the community via the university. This small township’s controversies went to the Supreme Court of Canada. They lost in a landslide decision, 7-2. The Vancouver Sun had various coverage, with international critiques comparing TWU’s controversy to European and Australian scandals. Regardless, TWU brought global spotlight on a small township, a tiny town. 

Global human rights organizations gave commentary. TWU dropped the Community Covenant as mandatory, but only for students, while staff, faculty, and administration maintained it. A TWU student asserted on Reddit: 

TWU student here. The only two reasons why the Board of Governors chose to drop the Covenant for students is because a) The recent court ruling, and b) Their other professional programs (counselling, nursing, and teaching) received letters from their respective accrediting bodies which threatened to pull accreditation unless the Covenant was amended or discarded.

TWU’s decision to make signing the Covenant voluntary for students has nothing to do with morality or human rights, but everything to do with their business model. Keep in mind, the faculty still must sign the pledge, and TWU’s mission and mandate of producing “godly Christian leaders” has not changed.

The next era was 2019-2021. 

2019–2021: Cultural Stagnation Despite Legal Losses

Xtra Magazine in “I am queer at Trinity Western University. What will it take for my university to listen to me?” provided a more individual story. Carter Sawatzky wrote, “TWU’s decision in 2018 to make the Covenant non-mandatory for students also did not magically change the discriminatory treatment of queer people. After TWU’s 2018 Supreme Court loss, many folks, including myself, had hoped that TWU would finally demonstrate that it can be rooted in faith and radically loving and welcoming. Instead, TWU has doubled down on its social conservatism, at the expense of queer students like myself.” An international scandal and Supreme Court defeat did not change the culture or the school. That is instructive. 

Another instructive moment was a student suicide attempt followed by an expulsion of the student. In “Her university expelled her after she attempted suicide, saying she had an ‘inability to self-regulate.’ Now she is fighting back,” the Toronto Star presented the case of a student showing broader systemic issues and a lack of mental health resources and policy failures within TWU. TWU claimed otherwise. Mental health professionals and relatives of students commented. As CBC has noted, mental health on campuses has been a point of concern for a while. 

2021–2025: Repression, Image, and Intimidation

Langley is a township where I am told the murder of the famous atheist Madalyn Murray O’Hair was merciful. An older gentleman saying, “Her murder was an act of mercy.” Langley Advance Times in “Private Langley University rejects LGBTQ+ event request” reported denying an event request, One TWU Stories Night, for an LGBTI group, One TWU. Carter Sawatzky said, “We are sharing our stories, which I think should be a non-controversial thing… It is not a contradiction. You can be queer and Christian… Many people come to TWU and have never heard an LGBTQ story.” That is a reasonable statement. A One TWU piece published on its site claims homophobia is rampant on campus.

CBC News reported on the manslaughter conviction of a TWU security guard. “Former guard at B.C. university found guilty of manslaughter” reported a Fall 2020 event involving “a man wearing all black” who wandered into student residences, rifling through their things. Security guard Howard Glen Hill hit the man, Jack Cruthers Hutchison, “in the head, pulled his hair and spat on him.” Police arrived: Hill was “in a neck restraint, limp and unresponsive. He died in the hospital two days later.” Hutchison was charged with manslaughter. TWU’s statement: “The university has no comment on the court ruling. TWU’s commitment has always been to safeguard our campus community, and we continue to provide a safe place of learning for all our students.” 

Langley Union, in “Trinity Western University President’s Son Linked to Prolific White Nationalist Account,” investigated digital forensic evidence of the son of the President of TWU linked to a White Nationalist online account. The son’s actions should be considered separate from the father’s and the institutions. However, they are striking news. 

The accounts claimed, among other assertions, “I believe in a white future. An Aryan future. A future where my children will make Indian Bronson shine our shoes. Where brown people cannot secure a line of credit, Black people pick cotton. We will win – this is what we fight for,” and “I am a colonialist. I make no effort to hide this. I believe in worldwide white supremacy.” 

The Nelson Star reported in “‘Alt-right’ group uses Fort Langley historic site as meeting place” on the use of the local pub in Fort Langley as a meeting place for a public, so known and self-identified White Nationalist group. As one former boss noted, “I don’t know what is wrong with we the white race.” That is a sentiment, not an organization, however. This microcosm reflects a broader history of Canadian sociopolitics with race and religion, some Evangelicals and occasional allegations of racialism if not racism. 

TWU’s policy is Inclusive Excellence. “We aim to promote a consistent atmosphere of inclusion and belonging at TWU by establishing a shared commitment to diversity and equity founded in the gospel’s truth. Christ came to save, reconcile, and equip all people (Rev. 7:9), and the incredible array of gifts God has given us is evidence of his creativity, beauty, and love of diversity,” it states. An administrator is reported to have said informally that the event was ‘not in line with Evangelical values.’

In the States, a trend in international Evangelical higher education is here too. Bob Jones University banned interracial dating until 2000, involving federal funding and accreditation debates. In Australia, Christian colleges faced scrutiny for policies excluding LGBTI+ students and staff. Faith-based codes and equality laws produced tensions in the United Kingdom, though less prominently than in Canada. Those American churches want to influence Canada in Indigenous communities. Some Canadian churches have Ojibwe pastors, for example.

A Medium (Xtra) post entitled “The painful truth about being gay at Canada’s largest Christian university” commented on the experience of a gay student, Jacob.’ As peers messaged Jacob on suspicion of him being gay, “We hate everything about you and you better watch your back because we are going to kill you on your way to school.” At TWU ‘Jacob,’ said, “I loved the community here so much that I did not want to jeopardize those relationships.” That is called a closet.

Another student, Corben, from Alberta at TWU, said, “My parents, I think, kind of wanted Trinity to be for me sort of like reparative therapy, which is why they would only help financially with this school.” Former Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau put forth a move to end Conversion Therapy, a discredited pseudotherapy to change sexual orientation and gender identity. Conversion therapy has been banned in Malta (2016), Germany (2020), France (2022), Canada (2022), New Zealand (2022), Iceland (2023), Spain (2023), Mexico (2024), Greece (2024), and Belgium (2024). That is only TWU, however. The community of Langley, specifically Fort Langley, where I was raised, is substantively linked to this place.

Langley Advance Times in “Blackface photo in 2017 Chilliwack yearbook sparks apology from school principal” reported on a blackface incident at a local school. It was part of a “mock trial.” So, bad taste in community, and the excuse for Snider’s example will likely do the same in this case over term. There are several cases of sexual misconduct cases in British Columbia and Canada. The Archdiocese of Vancouver was the first in Canada to publicly name clergy involved in sexual abuse and decades of abuse. At the same time, other prominent cases have arisen, including Michael Conaghan, Damian Lawrence Cooper, and Erlindo Molon, highlighting a pattern of clerical sexual exploitation and inadequate accountability in British Columbia. I would rather this not be the case, but it is the history. 

In 2022, a TWU dean resigned amid pressure over her work on gender issues. One Reddit–and all Reddit commentary should be considered additions, while anecdotal at best–user described how TWU leaders had “tried to make her leave her position as dean because she… stated she was an lgbtq+ ally,” then issued bureaucratic statements of grief based on her departure. 

Living there, these excuses likely flowed through social media. At the same time, community intimidation happens, too. It is bad for the community image and bad for the business. People have an interest in narrative morphing. As gay students find at TWU, and as outsiders as others find in the general community, it is mostly not about moral stances, but about image maintenance and business interests. Money matters because it is a well-to-do area of the country and a wealthy nation worldwide. There is regular township nonsense where the Fort Langley Night Market gets closed down due to vandalism and alcohol

Ongoing online conversations about TWU degree quality continue, “So before those say ‘it’s an immigration scam’, it’s not and is essentially useless towards immigrating/coming to Canada. With that said, most of TWU’s programs are also useless to use towards immigrating, even if studied in person, because any non-degree program from a private school does not allow one to apply for a PGWP. However, it offers a couple of degree programs that can result in a PGWP.”

Brandon Gabriel and Eric Woodward have been at loggerheads for at least a decade. If you look at the original history, this reflects another fight between an Indigenous leader and the colonial presence in its history. Now, they are a local artist and developer, respectively. Woodward has a camp of supporters for development and a camp of detractors. Another mixed figure in the contemporary period of Langley. Over development concerns and pushback, Woodward got a building painted pink in protest at one point. It is a serious township history full of a minority of loud, silly people imposing their nonsense on a smaller group of innocent bystanders.

Whether LGBTI discrimination ensconced at its university, a blackface principal, homophobia, this isn’t unusual in a way. A constellation of apparent White Nationalist superminority undercurrents popping up, and with worship of a founder in a democracy who was a mixed-race colonialist timocrat married to a Cree woman, it’s a story of a Canadian town and municipality. A tale of how foundational myths, when left unexamined, morph into social realities.

Welcome to Langley–a light introduction: Home, sorta.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Legal Assistance in Dying (MAID) in Canada: Legal Framework, Strict Safeguards & Protecting Vulnerable Populations

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/10

Legal Framework & Definitions, Vulnerable Populations

On February 15, 2023, the Special Joint Committee on Medical Assistance in Dying reported on five mandated issues: advance requests, access to MAID for mature minors, access to MAID for those whose sole underlying medical condition is a mental disorder, the state of palliative care, and the protection of people living with disabilities. A considerable amount of misinformation has circulated in the public sphere and media and Dying With Dignity Canada (DWDC) would like to set out some clear facts surrounding MAID, the strict criteria and safeguards that govern its use, and aspects of its proposed expansion.  

DWDC, “Myths and Facts: Medical assistance in dying (MAID) in Canada

Medical assistance in dying (MAID) is a process that allows someone who is found eligible to be able to receive assistance from a medical practitioner in ending their life. The federal Criminal Code of Canada permits this to take place only under very specific circumstances and rules. Anyone requesting this service must meet specific eligibility criteria to receive medical assistance in dying. Any medical practitioner who administers an assisted death to someone must satisfy certain safeguards first.

Only medical practitioners are permitted to conduct assessments and to provide medical assistance in dying. This can be a physician or a nurse practitioner, where provinces and territories allow.

Government of Canada, “Medical assistance in dying: Overview

The next thing I want to speak about is whether the vulnerable need protection. Again, this has been tried in court with both the Carter case and Truchon case. There is no evidence that vulnerable people are at risk for MAID. [Ed. Minor evidence suggests otherwise, now, but small and select, see AP News.] In fact, if you look at the actual people who are receiving MAID, they are typically white, well educated and well off. You could easily argue that the marginalized communities are disadvantaged because they’re not accessing MAID. In the Truchon case, Justice Baudouin equally found that the disadvantaged are not being taken advantage of and you must do each case at a time.

Dr. Derryck Smith, “Special Joint Committee on Medical Assistance in Dying

Death is a sensitive topic. It is a different question from the origin of life, the evolution of organisms, the speciation of species, and the point when life begins for human beings. We’re dealing with a live person who can make, ideally, informed decisions about a profound moment in life: its end. For those who know those who have tried to take their life, the sensitivity is multiplied over social relations. Rational foundations for care in finality are important, though. A lot of smart humanists have thought deeply about this topic. 

Humanists can be stereotyped–as a whole without exception–supporting medical assistance in dying (MAID) at the expense of palliative care. MAID as a way to reduce healthcare burden (of the old, the sick, the disabled), and dangerous as a “social contagion.” Atheist humanists get the worst of it, because of the major prejudices felt and only recently researched in an academic context.

The lattermost, as a piece of falsehood, emerges with relative frequency. These will be case examples for this article. These cases critiquing the imperfection of MAID have a sensibility akin to creationist critiques of evolution with God of the Gaps arguments. God of the Gaps arguments point to absences or uncertainties in scientific knowledge and then assert divine intervention. It is a form of magical thinking. Critique evolution superficially without proposing a workable alternative; what is the evidence-based alternative with greater efficacy than MAID, where MAID is merely one option? This challenges the trade-off myth. There will be failures in any system. Is this more efficacious than the system not existing? Stuff like that. 

Debunking Common Myths

Canada has an organization devoted to these issues, DWDC. I found and took a statement about the spread of misinformation about MAID by DWDC seriously. DWDC noted myths about:

  • “advocating to kill infants with disabilities” 
  • “mature minors will be eligible for medical assistance in dying (MAID) in March 2027” 
  • “opening the door for suicidal children and teenagers to access an assisted death” 
  • “eligibility of mature minors is being considered without adequate protections in place and without consultation or consent from parents or guardians”
  • “clinicians inappropriately recommending MAID to patients who are not eligible or as an alternative to treatment” 
  • “vulnerable populations being eligible for MAID because they are suffering from inadequate social supports, including housing” 
  • “Canada is systematically targeting and ‘killing’ the poor, disabled, and marginalized instead of giving them the proper supports they need to live.”

Social Contagion Concerns

DWDC identified a few more. However, this sets a foundation for knowledge about misinformation’s ubiquity dispensed flippantly by both left and right alike. This has political debate content. The fundamental issue is humane treatment. That shouldn’t be political. Upon doing a first search on social contagion, the source of some misinformation was made by right-wing conservative groups. The idea being, thus: “Physician-assisted suicide is social contagion.” 

Social contagion research on suicide seems to rely on fear of copycats: a good fear. The substantive enquiry: Is the evidence proportional to support this assertion, or is the general assertion of social contagion of suicide equivalent to medical contexts, including MAID? Health Canada’s 2022 MAID monitoring report analyzed suicide rates. The 2022 study found no significant increase in suicide rates following MAID legalization in 2016. This differs compared to patterns after high-profile celebrity suicides. The American Psychological Association’s 2014 review (Psychological Bulletin, Vol. 140) links media sensationalism to copycat suicides. In other words, MAID’s regulated approach mitigates the standard effects seen in social contagion risks. Health Canada did the study. The American Psychological Association 2014 found the same for copycat behaviours and media exposure, not due to structured medical processes.

Palliative Care vs. MAID

According to DWDC and the Government of Canada, MAID has multiple safeguards in place, as stipulated at the outset. General suicides exclusive to MAID do not have safeguards in place. Of those two, to the original question, what is the evidence-based alternative with greater efficacy than MAID, where MAID is merely one option? Which is to say, in either case, conditions for palliative care exist equivalently, while MAID is in place versus not. 

Exceptional (Super‑Minority) Cases

What about the exclusionary cases? That one does not wish to happen at all. A super-minority of unfortunate cases as exceptions to the principles of MAID. “Canadians with nonterminal conditions sought assisted dying for social reasons” described social conditions under which some MAID cases continued with “unmet social need.” Health Canada’s Fifth Annual Report (2023) report showed less than 2% of the 13,241 assisted deaths by individuals involving psychosocial factors as primary motivators.

We should all strive to help those with unmet social needs, who may fall under this category. These commentaries point to inefficiencies in safeguards, particularly in super-minority specific cases, not the principle. This is the relevance of God of the Gaps arguments with creationism against evolution. 

To identify gaps is to identify gaps in MAID-specific cases and, thus, in the general population too, the bodies found in general populations, probably, result in less dignified and compassionate deaths. We should emphasize palliative care and other care more to balance the ratio of provisions for Canadian citizens. The Special Joint Committee’s 2023 report found that 3 in 10 Canadians can access high-quality palliative care. Rural areas and Indigenous communities are underserved. Ontario integration of palliative consultations with MAID assessments reduced requests by 15%. This synergy shows promise; it’s not either-or. This is to say, again, that the principle stands while exclusive super-minority cases require more work. Critics do a service here, up to and including robust, systemic, integrated alternatives. 

Social contagion merely applies to the unregulated and unsafe cases of suicide, as in a double-barrel shotgun after a woman in a depressive fit after a breakup. It is different than a considered, regulated, informed choice about suicide with the assistance of a qualified professional in most of the other cases. MAID supports something more akin to the latter than the former. We should have expanded social programs for those who need them, more robust MAID mechanisms, and condemnation of stereotypes about MAID that harm people who need them. Expanding social programs may incorporate guaranteed housing subsidies. 

Conscience, Faith, and Coercion

MAID is the main option available for those who need it. If an individual believes in a divine being, and does not want to become enmeshed in humanist or other ideology around their decision or their end of life, they should be permitted to make that choice, according to their conscience and faith. Similarly, those who do not share that notion, in which human beings do not ultimately own their life, a god does, should be permitted their conscience-based free choice too. If someone is being coerced, this would fail the principle and the spirit of the MAID options permitted in Canada.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Decolonization Therapy and Clinical Neutrality: Ethical Considerations for Mental Health Practice

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/09

Therapy and Politics

If therapy can be a vehicle for ideology, then clinicians risk repeating past abuses.

The article “The Danger of Decolonization Therapy” by Miri Bar-Halpern and Dean McKay, published on April 8, 2025, in Jewish Syndicate News, addressed concerns within the mental health field. The focus was on the partial politicization of some facets of therapeutic spaces.

Spotlight on Decolonization Therapy

Decolonization Therapy is a psychological approach working on lasting impacts of colonialism by centring Indigenous knowledge, challenging Eurocentric models, and integrating social justice. This does not necessarily mean cultural psychology or Indigenous psychology: To acknowledge some systemic issues is different than imposed ideological stances ignoring principles of impartiality. The emphasis for Bar-Halpern and McKay is a particular strain and risk in this framework of therapy, implicitly. They argued decolonization therapy lacks sufficient rigorous scientific validation unlike Dialectical Behavioural Therapy or Cognitive Behavioural Therapy.

It can erase the core identity of some Jewish clients vis-a-vis Jewish identity and Zionism, and may retraumatize some Jewish clients.  They make a call-to-action for the rejection of ideological coercion in therapy, protecting Jewish clinicians from discrimination, demanding high empirical standards of practices, addressing some nuanced antisemitism in mental-health training, and advocating for Jewish clients in this space. Naturally, colonialism is a factor in histories and people groups more recently affected remain extant. That’s not the question of concern here, but remains a question of concern in other conversations. 

I would agree with the thrust of the arguments, while pumping the brakes modestly.

A Cautionary Tale: Sluggish Schizophrenia

I thought about this over a coffee one morning, whether to pursue analysis or not. I had another coffee and jotted some brain droppings down. I had some time today to synthesize some reflections. The piece made me think, rethink, question myself, et cetera. A reflection from a doctoral counselling psychologist colleague with Metis heritage, if that counts in context on prior politicization of an intended apolitical therapeutic space after reading the same article by Bar-Halpern and McKay:

In the mid-twentieth century, Soviet psychologists invented a category called “sluggish schizophrenia,” which they used to classify political dissenters as mentally ill. Psychology continues to be misused to push political agendas. Ethical psychologists do not push their views on their clients. Psychotherapy is designed to assist the client in expanding their worldviews and making their lives more satisfying by using self-experimentation and reason. Even if a client decides she wishes to forgo her volitional abilities and become a robot waiting for the command, we explore the likely consequences with the client. However, as long as the client is aware of the consequences of their actions, we support them. Here is an ethical dilemma we discussed in my early training: Do we help Al Capone become more self-actualized in his actions?

Decolonization therapy may well do this, not from Eastern Europe but from North America if pushing ideologies, whether anti-Capitalist or anti-Zionist. Anti-Zionism is not antisemitism in most cases, while pro-Zionist or anti-Zionist political pushes in an intended apolitical space is wrong. That is the root: “Psychology continues to be misused to push political agendas.” No specification of alignment or a re-stipulation of the foundational ethics of therapy: impartiality, or minimize bias and maximize neutrality.

From Theory to the Couch: Ethical Dilemmas

As the article surmises, the majority of Jewish people identify as Zionists and/or support Israel. On a personal note, I share the last name of the Founder of Reform Judaism, Israel Jacobson. However, I do not know if there is any family history or patrilineal or matrilineal relation. My family received an award for harbouring at least one Jewish couple for several years for safety and protection on the Dutch side during World War II. Do I get a cookie? No

My biases: Let us say, for the sake of argument, the likely background of no family relation, I “identify” per contemporary, in vogue, verbiage, or “am” a “Zionist” in a manner of being a ‘Palestinist’–not an abnormal position in international documentation. I wrote a book project, out of In-Sight Publishing, of in-depth professional, expert-level interviews from 2019-2021 on precisely the subject matter of Israel-Palestine, entitled On Israel-Palestine: 2019-2021 (2024). 

Identity, Data, and the Risk of Erasure

Those State terms came from agreements following the Balfour Declaration. The vote for Palestine’s non-member observer State status on November 29, 2012, at the United Nations cemented this further within international voting records. UN Resolution A/RES/67/19 stipulated, “The General Assembly… Decide to accord Palestine non-member observer state status in the United Nations…” 

It passed with 138 votes in favour, nine against, and 41 abstentions. Therefore, we have Palestine as a non-member observer State status of the UN, under observer state Status, on equal footing with the Holy See, as Israel is a Member State with voting privileges. At least, in either case, it could change, in theory. 

However, it is so overwhelmingly supported by the international community for a State of Palestine under the Question of Palestine and for a State of Israel, simply unreasonable to put in the fore a question about the member state status of either. I denounce anti-Arab and anti-Muslim prejudice, and antisemitic bigotry. Many others do, too.

The fact that these become controversial stances, as generically positioned and further utilized to politicize a professionally intended vulnerable population and apolitical interpersonal professional space, raises serious questions under codes of ethics. Therapeutic spaces are intended as apolitical spaces for terms set by clients with therapists. To politicize them violates the premise, they are not complex considerations.

The symmetry fits structurally with Conversion Therapy in their positionality, but is disjunct in harm type and degree. Based on the article numbers, Zionism is something 85% of Jewish people support. However, based on other sources from the United States and in the United Kingdom, these may be inflated numbers, but not too much. Others range the numbers from 63% to 82% regarding caring about Zionism, with lesser strength in support, while still adhering. 

As of 2020, UK data from the Institute for Jewish Policy Research state 73% of U.S. Jews feel emotionally attached to Israel, while 63% identify as Zionists, down from 72% a decade earlier. While Pew’s 2021 data show 82% of American Jews feel at least some attachment to Israel, while 48% under 30 feel “very” or “somewhat” attached to Israel, 51% of Jews 50 and older caring about Israel is essential to Jewish identity. Overall 2/3rds express some degree of connection to Israel. Attachment does not equate to support. Connection and care can mean Zionism to many. Therefore, most adhere to styles of Zionism or connection, care, and/or support for Israel.

Parallels and Hypotheticals

Similarly on issues of gender and sexual minorities, LGBTI+, using terminology via the UN with the LGBTI Core Group rather than narrowing within common American parlance, is an inherent identity of development. Gender and sexual orientation seem to flow outwards, akin to the development of a snowflake and a sociological category. It is not a position of necessary advocacy to proclaim: “I am a bisexual man.” It is fabulous and factual, but not a necessary point of advocacy in the manner of Zionism or argument around historicity or a claim to some biblically (mostly) unjustified narrative. On the other hand, antisemitism has been around for centuries. This can count as an early sprouting of it in a professional space. 

Within a few decades, people’s lives targeted can be impacted. Conversion Therapywas established and systematized for decades prior to the 1990s controversies. Conversion Therapy, or reparative therapy, is a practice aimed at changing sexual orientation, gender identity, or gender expression. Peter Gajdics, the author of The Inheritance of Shame, was a victim. So, that case is different, not in spirit but in development. Eventually, I could see a symmetry if others were not critically inquiring into it and pushing back against it. It is critically confronted, not yet 2055 or 2065, either, so not enough room for decades of entrenchment. 

So, we can at least step forward with a strong foot. This potato is too hot. Journalists do not want to cover this. To critique Israeli policy, “Hooray, stop the genocide!”, and “You are an antisemite.” To critique Hamas murders on October 7 and hostage-taking, and leftwing unwitting antisemitism, “Stop the clock on the Woke, you go, Mr.!”, and “Deport the lunatic leftwing radicals and terrorists on our campuses!” 

If they are on the Right sociopolitically, then they might be afraid of leftist harassment and cancellation tactics. If they are on the Left, then they do not want to become another Norman Finkelstein case, and fear some wings of the Israeli lobby and the American State. To the more significant point, though, while no mainstream therapy formally pathologizes Zionism, a framing as inherently oppressive without acknowledging its ethnic and religious dimensions risks veering into symbolic antisemitism. This could destabilize a client’s sense of safety and/or identity.

If they are like Mr. Huckabee and want a single super-state for apocalyptic Christian Zionism for the Second Coming of Christ, then that is a different story on hermeneutical antisemitism if that is their wheelhouse. One obvious thought experiment to me. Can we reverse this claim? Just forgetting any UN record, rights abuses by the Israeli state or the Palestinians against Israelis, etc., theoretically, one could assert the American far-right ethnic supremacist talking point about white genocide. 

As a case in illustrative hyperbole, based on extreme viewpoints held in parts by many, “Looking at the mass immigration, look at the Kalergi-Coudenhove plan in action for the ‘Eurasian-Negroid race of the future,’ the Rothschilds own the moon, etc.; we are being colonized–watch out for the space lasers (TM) targeting the last of the pure Aryan Race.” These form a White ethnic American State idea. 

They pose this: anyone criticizing or arguing against it is considered colonizing. We need to decolonize the therapy of anti-White Statism. It is a professional duty for those in our care to decolonize from anti-White State ideas. People would take offence at this. Why not the reverse? They could even have APA poster presentations pointing to the prefrontal cortex, vaguely identifying anti-White Statism as a mental illness needing a decolonization therapy style of approach as was done with Zionism.

Restoring Neutrality: Evidence and Safeguards

We risk undermining the neutrality and integrity of psychological practice, and are moving towards this more pervasively based on this. Jewish identity is multifaceted, is not a mental illness when linked to Zionism, and involves self-determination. Decolonization Therapy mostly lacks sufficient rigorous empirical support. However, it is grounded in cultural psychology and values ideology over evidence, while inverting its duty not to harm by retraumatizing some Jewish patients, alienating them further. 

It does not have the same systematic and comprehensive empirical support as standardized therapeutic techniques, including Dialectical Behavioural Therapy. Therapists, thus, can buy into antisemitic tropes around genocide and fascist stereotypes, labelling Jewish clients as oppressors, politicize therapy with anti-Zionist ideologies, and make therapeutic spaces a place to intimidate others. I submit that if a social justice framework in therapy retraumatizes and alienates clientele, then there will be less social justice and more anti-social injustice frameworks for therapy. 

Therapy as Sanctuary, Not Battleground

Dr. Jennifer Mullan, the Founder of Decolonizing Therapy, most succinctly stated, “There’s no such thing as neutral education. Education either functions as an instrument to bring about conformity or freedom,” or “To begin to consider and implement practices that support politicizing and shifting our organizational and interpersonal perspectives.” 

To contrast, the Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists (Fourth Edition), under Ethical Standards of Principle of Integrity in Relationships, stipulated the importance of the need “to be as objective and unbiased as possible in their… service.” The British Psychological Society in Code of Ethics and Conduct linked reason or rationality to impartiality. The International Union for Psychological Science in its Universal Declaration of Ethical Principles for Psychologists emphasized the fundamental Principle of Integrity specifying “maximizing impartiality and minimizing biases.” Finally, the American Psychological Association (APA) Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct emphasizes in its Principle C: Integrity the avoidance of deception and misrepresentation, which could extend to refraining from the use of therapy as a vehicle for partisan persuasion.

Therapy is meant as a sanctuary for clients’ own narratives. Ironically, this trend can come to risk repeating the colonization abuses of the past under the imposition of a ‘decolonization’ pretense. We need a reintegration of client autonomy and therapeutic neutrality; therapy is the client’s domain for autonomy premised on non-maleficence, not an ideological battleground. It may be helpful to further embed thorough mandatory neutrality training in licensure standards, so it doesn’t become an issue at scale.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Māori Atheism and Identity: Eru Hiko-Tahuri on Culture, Humanism, and Secular Belief

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/05

*This interview is a contribution to an upcoming text on global indigeneity and international humanism from In-Sight Publishing.* 

Eru Hiko-Tahuri, a Māori creative and author of Māori Boy Atheist, explores his journey from religious upbringing to secular humanism. Hiko-Tahuri discusses cultural tensions as a Māori atheist, advocating for respectful integration of Māori values like manaakitanga and whanaungatanga within secular contexts. He emphasizes participation in traditions like tangihanga (funeral rites) and haka without supernatural beliefs. The conversation explores misconceptions around Māori identity, the marginalization of secular voices, and the absence of atheists in leadership roles. Despite limited public representation, Māori secular humanists like Hiko-Tahuri remain active in community life. His book and outreach aim to normalize atheism within Māori communities. The interview underscores a broader call for inclusive frameworks in mental health, education, and policy that respect cultural identity and secular worldviews.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re joined by Eru Hiko-Tahuri, a multifaceted Māori creative and intellectual voice based in New Zealand.

Eru Hiko-Tahuri: Thank you for having me.

Jacobsen: He’s best known as the author of Māori Boy Atheist, where he chronicles his journey from childhood religious observance to secular humanism. Alongside writing, he engages audiences as a radio host, musician, and airbrush artist, integrating cultural expression with personal storytelling. Since launching Māori Boy Atheist, with editions available in English, Te Reo Māori, and French, he has contributed meaningfully to rationalist and skeptic communities, offering insights on navigating Māori spirituality as an atheist.

The book was first published in 2015 and has served as a platform to explore the intersection of Māori identity and secularism. His public talks and podcasts, notably The Heretical Hori, encourage free thought and integrity within the indigenous context. They combine art, reflective media, and cultural dialogue to foster conversations on belief, identity, and resilience. Through those platforms, I aim to respectfully explore and challenge ideas, especially within Māori communities where belief systems can be deeply personal and culturally intertwined.

Thank you very much for joining me today—I appreciate it.

Hiko-Tahuri: It’s a pleasure to be here.

Jacobsen: How do core humanist principles align with traditional Māori concepts such as manamana motuhake, and whanaungatanga?

Hiko-Tahuri: Whanaungatanga speaks to kinship and the interconnectedness of people. That aligns closely with humanism, emphasizing dignity, respect, and empathy. You treat others as people first—essentially as extended family. It’s about looking after the people within your sphere, which reflects humanist ethics well.

Jacobsen: How can secular humanist organizations incorporate Te Ao Māori—the Māori worldview—into their activities without endorsing supernaturalism while respecting and integrating those cultural values?

Hiko-Tahuri: That’s a great question. It’s not always straightforward, but let me give an example from personal experience. When someone in our family passes away, we take them to the marae—a tribal meeting ground—where they lie in state for three days. During that time, relatives come to mourn, share memories, cry, laugh, tell jokes, and say goodbyes.

Depending on travel or family arrangements, the person is buried or cremated on the third day—sometimes longer. This process reflects core Māori values like manaakitanga (hospitality, care) and whanaungatanga, which coexist naturally with humanist principles of community, respect, and shared humanity. These values shape how we live and commemorate life without invoking supernatural beliefs.

Employers in Aotearoa generally understand that if someone goes to a funeral, they might be gone for three days—that’s just the time it takes. All of that work, by the way, is done voluntarily. We gather at the marae. Some families will care for the food, and others will help with arrangements. You can even sleep there.

We sleep beside the body for those three days. We keep them with us. We talk to them. We joke about them. We tell stories. We insult them lovingly. We laugh. We cry. It’s all done out in the open, and it’s for everyone to witness. That’s just the way we do it. It’s a good, profound way of grieving together as a collective.

Jacobsen: And within a secular humanist context, this isn’t just about superficial inclusion—it’s about acknowledging different ways of being. That kind of grieving is profoundly human and deeply cultural. It’s not about hierarchy—this isn’t about one way being better than another.

Take my Dutch heritage, for example. They’re big on windmills, dikes, black licorice, and clogs. The traditional way of burial there is usually more private—placing the body in a mound of Earth and marking it with a cross or a headstone. The grieving tends to happen separately from the deceased.

But for you, it’s different. Being with the body, telling stories, laughing and crying beside them—all part of the process. I wouldn’t say one way is more valid than the other. These are just different cultural processes for the same human experience. One does not invalidate the other.

Hiko-Tahuri: This is just the way we do it. I don’t judge how others handle it, but this is the way I prefer because it’s how I grew up. It’s what feels real to me.

And yes, there are usually religious aspects involved in the funeral proceedings. When those moments arise, I sit quietly and let them happen around me. I do not participate in those parts because I cannot in good conscience. And that’s one of the problematic areas—Indigenous and non-religious. Those are the tensions.

Jacobsen: How do you navigate those tensions?

Hiko-Tahuri: That’s the most challenging part, honestly. Knowing when to stay quiet, step back, and speak. It isn’t easy.

Jacobsen: Were there aspects where you didn’t feel tension at all? Or places where the friction started to show?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. One of the earliest points where tension emerges is during the pōwhiri—the welcoming ceremony when people arrive at the marae. That includes a series of formal speeches. It’s in that speech-making process where religious content often appears. That’s where the rub tends to start.

Jacobsen: Do you find conversations with others in the Māori community become more difficult when you do not endorse the spiritual or supernatural aspects of the culture?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. It can be challenging. Not always, but often. Some people are very accepting. Others feel that rejecting the supernatural is rejecting the culture itself, which is not my intention. But the tension is real.

Jacobsen: So you’re engaging in the same practices but not endorsing the supernaturalism around them. Is that difficult for people?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. Many people do not understand that distinction. There have been many times when I’ve been told, “You’re not Māori if you don’t believe in these things.” That has happened quite a few times.

Jacobsen: That is unfortunately common. I have encountered similar stories in speaking with Indigenous people—particularly from North America. The closest equivalent, in terms of how it’s discussed internationally, is often with African Americans in more conservative or evangelistic religious circles: Baptist, Pentecostal, Methodist—hardline Christianity in Black communities in the United States.

Suppose you’re a woman in those communities, and you reject the concept of God or Christianity entirely. In that case, you’ve forfeited your “Black card.” You’re suddenly seen as no longer fully part of the community.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes.

Jacobsen: And that is not just an identity issue—it’s social. You’re giving up a significant source of communal support in a society that will not necessarily provide support to you proportionately. So, there are deeper sociological and economic implications at play.

I’ve heard similar things from North American Indigenous people, too—they say, ‘You’ve given up your Indigenous card.

Hiko-Tahuri: Somehow, you’re less Māori or less authentic if you’re secular. On the marae or in the community, that feeling can be present.

Jacobsen: Would you say it is quite that extreme in New Zealand?

Hiko-Tahuri: Probably not to the same extent. New Zealanders are generally pretty liberal. Highly religious people here are sometimes even seen as a bit unusual. We’re more secular than many places—certainly more than I’ve seen in North America. So, it is not as intense, but it can still be challenging.

This is especially true among people in what we might call the Māori Renaissance—those who are just now reconnecting with their heritage. Typically, the first people they learn from are religious, so religion is deeply woven into the cultural learning they receive. Then they meet someone like me, who speaks the language and participates fully in the culture but is openly non-religious—and that creates tension for them. It challenges their framework.

Jacobsen: If you look at the traditional Māori worldview—how human beings were made, how the world came into being—what aspects can be reconciled with a humanistic way of looking at things, and what aspects cannot? And maybe you could give us a bit of a background primer. What’s the general picture?

Hiko-Tahuri: In the Māori creation narrative, everything begins with Te Kore—the void or nothingness. From Te Korecame Ranginui (Sky Father) and Papatūānuku (Earth Mother). They were bound together in a tight embrace, and between them lived their many children—some say seventy, others say fewer.

Because the children were trapped in the darkness between their parents, they decided that their parents had to be separated to live with light and space. This led to a conflict among the children—each had a different view on handling the situation. Eventually, Tāne Mahuta, the God of forests and birds, pushed his parents apart, creating the world of light, Te Ao Mārama.

These children—atua, the closest term to “gods”—became personifications of natural elements. So there’s Tangaroa for the sea, Tāwhirimātea for weather and storms, Rongo for cultivated food, and so on. There’s debate around what atruly means—whether they’re deities or ancestral forces—but they represent aspects of the natural world in human-like form.

These stories explain natural forces through personification. Of course, much of it doesn’t align with what we know from science about how humans or the Earth came into being. But some aspects resonate. For instance, each atua has a personality—just like humans do. This humanizes nature and gives people a relational framework for understanding their environment.

So yes, while the cosmology isn’t scientifically accurate, the relational values and metaphors can still be meaningful. That’s where the humanist alignment might be found—not in literal belief but in symbolic or cultural interpretation.

It reminds me of reading Joseph Campbell—how mythologies worldwide echo similar patterns. Eventually, you realize that they can’t all be true—and most likely, none of them are. That was my journey. Campbell was instrumental in helping me unpack much of what I had assumed. Once you see that every culture has a creation story—and they often contradict one another—you start questioning which, if any, are “true” in a literal sense.

Jacobsen: I’ve found it helpful to separate spirituality in the supernatural sense from spirituality as a personal or communal meaning-making practice, especially in conversations like this and other interviews. In other words, spirituality that gives a person purpose or peace doesn’t need to invoke the supernatural.

Hiko-Tahuri: Absolutely. That distinction has been vital for me, too. 

Jacobsen: When people say “spiritual,” I sometimes ask: Do you mean supernaturalism or practices that foster wellbeing or connection? Prayer or meditation, for example, can have measurable health benefits—lowering stress and calming the nervous system—without requiring a belief in the supernatural.

So yes—looking at spiritual practices in the edification or enriching sense—not in the supernatural sense—what practices are done in the community or individually, or at least encouraged, that might be comparable to things like attending Easter or Christmas mass? Or personal rituals like being told to read a specific scripture in the morning, pray for ten minutes, hold a rosary, and recite ten Hail Marys?

Hiko-Tahuri: I was thinking about practices of personal unification. A lot of our communal activities involve singing. We’re a people who love to sing together. You will hear singing at any large gathering—a meeting, a ceremony, or a funeral.

Yes, some of the songs are religious, but what’s significant is that you have 300 people singing in harmony. And the richness of sound—those layers of harmonies—is incredible. Whether it’s traditional waiata, more contemporary songs, or even religious hymns, singing together is powerful. Even if the content has spiritual roots, the experience is about unity, connection, and shared emotion.

Jacobsen: That resonates with me. We’re both secular humanists and atheists. I can relate to my time in a university choir. I was in it for about two and a half years, and we sang many classical European music—Bach, Mozart’s Requiem, and other choral works.

Sometimes, we performed modern songs with a 1950s vibe. I remember people using phrases like “cat” and “daddio” or “you dig,” like something out of an Eddie Murphy or Richard Pryor scene. I sang bass, and we once collaborated with musicians from the Vancouver Symphony Orchestra in a 500-seat church. The acoustics were stunning.

It was technically Christian or sacred music—cathedral music, I’d call it—but the overwhelming sense of awe, the physical resonance, the unity of voices… It was a spiritual experience in that broader, secular sense of the word.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, I’d call that spiritual too. It taps into a level of connection and emotion you do not find anywhere else.

I do not avoid using “spiritual” in that context. It describes an experience of profound meaning, joy, or connection. I am not using it to refer to supernatural beliefs.

I’m not one of those people who avoids the word altogether. I use it for deeply moving experiences that are transcendent in an emotional sense. Just because a word has a particular religious usage does not mean it is limited to that meaning.

Jacobsen: Yes—most words have secondary meanings. So, use the second meaning! And if someone asks, explain it.

Hiko-Tahuri: Absolutely.

Jacobsen: Statistically, I do not know of a single government census that includes hate crime data specifically against atheists, agnostics, or humanists. Have you ever seen one?

Hiko-Tahuri: Never heard of it.

Jacobsen: In Canada, the categories usually include antisemitism—perennially at the top—followed by anti-Muslim sentiment or “Islamophobia,” then discrimination against Roman Catholics. However, Catholics make up about 30% of the Canadian population, so naturally, they’ll be represented in the data due to sheer numbers.

Still, antisemitism usually tops the list. But recent research out of North America shows that people’s emotional responses to atheists are often rooted in disgust and distrust—those deep, visceral reactions.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, I’ve read about that.

Jacobsen: And when you break it down by political affiliation—Democrat, Republican, Independent—in the US, the negative perceptions of atheists remain low across all groups. The numbers are roughly as low as those for Muslims, even among Democrats and Independents. It’s slightly better in those groups than among Republicans, probably due to the strong influence of the evangelical white base.

But across the board, atheists still rank low in terms of public trust. So clearly, we’re missing something in national censuses or surveys. The social stigma is real, but it’s under-measured.

Hiko-Tahuri: I’d agree with that. In the New Zealand context, I wouldn’t say I’ve experienced hate for being an atheist. It’s more that I’m seen as an outlier—maybe eccentric or just “different”—rather than hated.

Sure, a few people have been upset or uncomfortable with it. But New Zealand is pretty liberal. Most people here don’t care what you believe—as long as you treat others well. That’s what matters most. We’re not as politically polarized, either.

Jacobsen: That’s refreshing. Demographically, what’s the approximate proportion of people with Māori heritage in New Zealand’s population?

Hiko-Tahuri: They say it’s approaching a million people out of a total population of about five million—roughly 20%.

Jacobsen: That’s significantly higher than in Canada. Indigenous people comprise around 4 or 5% of the population.

Within your community, have you encountered a dynamic similar to what Mariam Namazie describes among ex-Muslims in Britain? She talks about “minorities within minorities.” That is, Muslims are a minority in the UK, but ex-Muslims are a minority within that minority, often facing backlash both from within their communities and from wider society.

Hiko-Tahuri: I understand that idea. You leave a belief system, but you become doubly marginalized. It’s not that extreme here, but there are similarities.

Some Māori do view secular Māori as having stepped outside the bounds of what it means to be Māori, especially when religion has become entwined with their cultural reawakening. So yes, you can feel like a minority within a minority sometimes, but it is more subtle here—less hostile, I would say.

Jacobsen: That distinction makes sense. In the UK context, to support ex-Muslims publicly is sometimes misread as being anti-Muslim, which complicates everything. Identity politics can overshadow human rights issues.

Hiko-Tahuri: When cultural identity and religion are closely tied, questioning one can feel like attacking the other—even if that is not the intention.

Jacobsen: And you find yourself in this strange dichotomy—it is just a category error. You can support both Indigenous identity and secular values without negating either. It is just a mistake in framing. Do you experience that kind of tension in New Zealand as a Māori person? Or, more specifically, as a Māori atheist?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, definitely—as a Māori atheist, I do. I have had conversations with a few others who are both Māori and atheist, and we often feel like a minority within a minority. It is a unique position to be in. Interestingly, though, statistically, about 53% of Māori now report no religious affiliation.

Jacobsen: There you go.

Hiko-Tahuri: Most people would still describe themselves as “spiritual but not religious.” Maybe only 10% would openly identify as atheists. So, it is still a tiny group to which I belong.

Jacobsen: Right.

Hiko-Tahuri: That leads back nicely to the idea of “coming out” as both Māori and atheist. I remember that journey. I had been reading all the usual books—The God Delusion by Richard Dawkins, God Is Not Great by Christopher Hitchens, and so on.

I struggled with the language in some of those books because they used words I had never encountered before. As the whole topic was so new, I had to sit with a dictionary beside me while reading.

Eventually, I reached a point where I realized, “I don’t believe in this anymore.” Then, the more complex question came: “What do I do about it?” And more importantly, “Can I even tell anyone?”

While I was at university, I met a few other Māori who had started to question Christianity, too. By understanding the colonization of Aotearoa, they began to see that Christianity was imposed here—brought in by missionaries from overseas. It was not ours originally. So some of us thought, “Why should we continue believing something that was forced upon us?”

That was my thinking for a while. But then I had another realization: I had rejected Christianity using a rational lens, but I had never applied that same critical lens to traditional Māori beliefs—the atua, the creation stories, the pantheon of gods.

So I did. When I examined those beliefs through the same standards, I had to admit—they did not add up either.

That is when I had the next big moment: “I don’t believe this either. So… now what? And how am I going to tell people?”

For a long time, I did not. At first, I equated being an atheist with simply not being Christian—since Christianity is still the dominant religious framework in New Zealand.

But it took years to fully embrace the term atheist in the broader sense—to reach the point where I could say, “I do not believe in any supernatural being that controls the world or defines our purpose.”

Eventually—probably after reading The God Delusion for the third time—I thought, “I can’t be the only one.”

Hiko-Tahuri: I remember thinking, “I can’t be the only Māori going through this.” So I started searching for books or articles written by Māori people about being both Māori and atheist. And I found absolutely nothing. There was no one—no one who had written publicly about being Māori and atheist.

Jacobsen: In your experience, had you at least come across others in real life—even if they had not formally written anything?

Hiko-Tahuri: I had met people who had loudly and proudly rejected Christianity and returned to belief in the traditional Māori gods—the atua. But I do not think I had ever met another openly Māori atheist—except for one woman I found on YouTube.

Her name was Nairi McCarthy. She was involved with the New Zealand Association of Rationalists and Humanists.

Jacobsen: Oh yes, yes—I know of her.

Hiko-Tahuri: You could have spoken with her a few years ago. Sadly, she passed away five or six years ago now.

She was the only one I had ever seen publicly acknowledge being Māori and atheist. And I thought, “Damn it. If I’m the only one with some writing skills and talk for a living, maybe I need to write this book.”

Jacobsen: Right.

Hiko-Tahuri: That is what led me to write it. I thought, “I know for certain I cannot be the only person who has come to this conclusion.”

So I turned to my community for support—and found nothing—no books, no articles. I thought, “Well, maybe I have to be the first. I’ll quietly write my story, upload it to the Internet, and maybe someone will find it.”

And that is precisely what I did.

Jacobsen: Was it terrifying?

Hiko-Tahuri: Oh yes—completely. I still remember the day I hit Publish. I put it on Smashwords. And I had no one to turn to—no reference point for what kind of response it might get.

But what I wanted was to leave a record. I’ve been to Māori funerals where they lied about the beliefs of the deceased—saying they were believers, that they loved God, when I knew for a fact they didn’t.

I didn’t want anyone to lie about me to my kids after I was gone. I needed something that told the truth about who I was. So I wrote the book.

It wasn’t to convince anyone. It was just my story—something people could find and know was real.

Jacobsen: How long did it take to write?

Hiko-Tahuri: About a year and a half. It’s a short book, but it took me that long to work through it.

Jacobsen: And the word count?

Hiko-Tahuri: Around sixteen or seventeen thousand words.

Jacobsen: So, roughly a thousand words a month?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes—about that. I took my time with it.

Jacobsen: That must have been a difficult thing to do. We should get into that part because if someone stumbles across this ten years from now, it could be helpful to them.

What was the tension you felt when you realized, “Oh, shit—I don’t believe any of this anymore”?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yeah. I love my community. I love my people. I love our ceremonies. I love the familial nature of it all—the shared values, the collective spirit.

But I couldn’t believe that there were only seventy children of Rangi and Papa or that everything came from Te Kore—the void of nothingness. I couldn’t hold that belief anymore.

And that realization… it was jarring. “What do I do now?” It does suck. But I also knew I could not stay silent. I could not pretend I wasn’t having these thoughts or deny the conclusions I was reaching.

Jacobsen: That must have been a real internal conflict.

Hiko-Tahuri: It was—a deeply personal one. Part of me thought, “If you just keep quiet, you’ll be fine. You don’t have to believe—you can go your own way and avoid the conflict.”

That was tempting. It would have been easier. But I also knew that if someone asked me directly, I wouldn’t lie. I’d say, “No, I don’t believe in that.”

So, part of the thinking behind the book was: If I write this down, I won’t have to explain myself repeatedly. I can point people to it.

That felt honest. It meant I wasn’t lying or hiding anymore, either.

Jacobsen: After you published it, was the reaction proportional to the emotional weight you carried? Or was it mostly internal?

Hiko-Tahuri: Oh, it was all internal. The fear, the anxiety—it was mostly in my head.

Jacobsen: How common do you think that experience is? Do you think there’s a quiet wave of Māori atheists—or what I sometimes call “atheism-lite,” meaning agnostics—people who live by humanist principles but are afraid to come out and say they don’t believe in a deity?

People who think they’ll face judgment when, in fact, most people are too busy trying not to check Elon Musk or Donald Trump’s Twitter feed?

Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Yes, right?

There’s a number of us out there. I wouldn’t call it a wave just yet, but there are certainly people wondering, “How do I tell my parents I don’t believe in God anymore?” That kind of question is very real. It’s hard to quantify, of course. But the reaction to the book was primarily positive. People were curious.

One of my cousins—his whole branch of the family is very religious—he reached out to me after reading it and said, “What? I’ve been thinking like that my whole life. I didn’t know that’s what it was called—being an atheist.”

Jacobsen: That is such a simple statement. But it carries so much emotional baggage for no good reason.

It’s fascinating. I’ve heard everything—from people being jailed or harassed for their beliefs to professional consequences to, on the other end of the spectrum, people gaining fame or recognition for speaking out—like the Daniel Dennetts and Sam Harrises of the world.

Hiko-Tahuri: So, I don’t avoid things. I go to gatherings because it’s about family first—and that’s always been my attitude. Family is family.

You put family above what individuals believe. That’s how my religious family treats me, too—my cousins and uncles. A good example: Seven of my closest cousins were wearing religious robes at a recent funeral, but we still talked and connected. The spiritual stuff was put aside because we’re family first.

I’m lucky that way. But it’s also a wider New Zealand attitude—family comes before anything else.

Jacobsen: In the North American Indigenous context, something that often happens is this: to reject the common beliefs—whether those are traditional spiritual systems or Christian indoctrination brought through colonization—is usually seen as rejecting Indigenous identity itself.

Because of colonization, many Indigenous people in Canada and the US identify as Christian. So, if you’re an Indigenous atheist, it’s often seen as adopting a “white” belief—or, I guess, more precisely, a white rejection of religion. Atheism is framed as a white thing.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, I’ve come across that sentiment here, too. I’ve had family members say similar things when I tell them I’m going to speak at an atheist group or do an interview like this. They’ll say something like, “Oh yes, that’s you, and your funny white friend,” or “That’s your weird white thing.”

Jacobsen: [Laughs] So there’s a little dig, but it’s not hostile?

Hiko-Tahuri: It’s more of a friendly poke than a grave insult. There’s no real malice behind it. It’s like a teasing jab, not a deep cut.

Jacobsen: And at least they’re not using racial slurs like you’d sometimes hear in North America—words like “cracker”thrown around with some edge to them.

Hiko-Tahuri: Right, it’s gentler here—more of a soft ribbing than anything else.

Jacobsen: I’ve heard similar things from North American Indigenous people. Atheism is often perceived as white, so any Indigenous person who identifies that way is viewed as having abandoned their roots—when really, they’re just thinking independently.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. That’s the dynamic. But honestly, I don’t care what other people think. I do me. I don’t have the energy to worry about other people’s opinions of me. If something comes up—and it rarely does—I’ll deal with it then. But in the meantime, I live my life.

Hiko-Tahuri: I won’t worry about what the rest of the Māori community thinks about me. I was even on Māori Television, here in Aotearoa, talking openly about being an atheist.

One of the more common comments I received afterwards was, “Oh, he needs to learn more about his culture.”

Jacobsen: This is a sophisticated way of saying, “He’s ignorant of our ways—therefore, he doesn’t accept our ways.” It’s a coded dismissal.

Hiko-Tahuri: Ironically, I practice more of our customs, speak more Te Reo, and participate more fully in the culture than many people making those comments.

Jacobsen: So, would you say that reaction is patronizing within the Māori community?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. That’s precisely what it is.

Another interesting thing is how certain people are automatically respected in the Māori community based on appearance. For example, if you’re an older Māori man wearing a clerical collar—any religious collar, regardless of denomination—you’re automatically afforded the status of someone to be respected.

Jacobsen: For clarity, could that collar belong to a Christian denomination or another tradition?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, it doesn’t matter what religion it is. If you wear the collar, you get that reverence. And I’ve met some of those men—they’re not particularly insightful or wise. I wouldn’t trust them to lead anything other than a church service. But because they hold that religious role, they’re treated with deference. So they’re seen as kaumātua—elders—because of the position, not because of actual wisdom or age.

You can be a 30-year-old wearing a collar and be treated like an elder. That’s one of my frustrations with how religion plays out in some Māori spaces.

Jacobsen: Would you distinguish here—again, using international terminology but applying it to a Māori-specific context—between indigeneity as culture and indigeneity as religion?

Because what I’ve come across in other interviews is a concept some call “Indigenous humanism.” It’s a framework where people continue participating in Indigenous practices—storytelling, ritual, community events—but without the supernatural belief component.

But on the flip side, I’ve also seen some Indigenous frameworks begin to mirror structured religions: hierarchy, sacred texts, holy oral traditions, and supernatural entities—almost resembling traditional Abrahamic models with “gods,” sacred teachings, powers, principalities, and so on.

Some Indigenous atheists and humanists I’ve spoken with are worried about this trend—a kind of religious revival forming around indigeneity itself. Their concern is that it could become dogmatic and undermine secular and Enlightenment-based thinking.

Hiko-Tahuri: I get what you’re saying. I haven’t seen that happening here, at least not in a widespread or formalized way. But part of that could be numbers. You’d need a critical mass of people adopting that framework for it to take shape. 

It’s less about isolated belief and more about institutionalization. It doesn’t evolve into that kind of system if you don’t have the numbers, but I understand the concern. Once belief systems become formalized, there’s always the risk that they become exclusionary or dogmatic.

We do not have that many of us, so we have not even had the chance to break ourselves into different “types” of atheists. We have not even come together for a group chat to discuss our thoughts. So no, I have not seen anything like that fragmentation yet because we are such a tiny group in New Zealand.

There has not been enough critical mass within atheism to split into more specific beliefs or approaches.

Jacobsen: If your initial feeling after publishing the book was one of relief—and the reaction was much more subdued than anticipated—do you now see people entering the atheist or humanist space, especially Māori, with this almost irrational sense of fear, only to realize, “Oh… it’s fine. It’s not a big deal”?

Hiko-Tahuri: Honestly? No, we do not even really see that reaction. Because so few people talk about it publicly. When we gather, we have roles to fill. We are there to work—we have responsibilities. There is no time to sit and have long philosophical debates about belief.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a cultural distinction. Take something like the Catholic Church—they gather, sit, listen, and sing. It is contemplative. But you are describing something very different.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. For example, there is much to do if we’re at the marae. We have protocols, hospitality, food to prepare, cleaning, hosting—so much practical work. We do not pause to reflect or debate belief systems during those moments.

At most, you might hear someone say, “Oh yeah, that cousin over there’s a bit different—he doesn’t believe in God.” And that’s it. That’s probably as deep as it goes.

Jacobsen: So the culture itself, in those moments, emphasizes function and participation over theology.

Hiko-Tahuri: We are caught up in the activity of the occasion, not in philosophical contemplation about the universe’s origins.

Jacobsen: So—what was the general reaction to the book? Good, bad, ugly, neutral, controlling?

Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Honestly? Most people I knew contacted me to say, “Why am I not in it?”

Most reactions were driven by self-interest—”little me” stuff. Many people who read the book were curious if they were in it. A lot of the feedback was, “Oh yeah, that’s just you being you.” I’ve always been considered a bit weird anyway.

Jacobsen: [Laughs] Familiar.

Hiko-Tahuri: Other than that, people would say things like, “I never thought about that,” or “I didn’t know you couldn’t believe in God.” Because belief is so deeply embedded in Māori identity from such a young age.

Jacobsen: Is it similar to beliefs around wairua—the spiritual essence or spirit?

Hiko-Tahuri: Very much so. Wairua—the spiritual dimension—permeates everything. It’s so ingrained that when someone steps outside of it or says, “I don’t believe in that,” it’s beyond what many people are prepared to consider. They ignore it. It’s too far outside the norm to process.

Jacobsen: Did the book catalyze others—within the community or the broader New Zealand public—to come forward or speak out?

Hiko-Tahuri: I don’t know. I don’t want to claim that other Māori atheists came out because of my book. I can’t say that for sure. But we have a Facebook group called Atua Kore, which means “godless.” It has about 500 members now.

Jacobsen: That’s a solid number.

Hiko-Tahuri: It is. And yes, we’ve had a few people post in that group announcing that they’re atheists—that they’d made the decision, and it was huge for them. That happened after the book came out, but I won’t say it was because of it. I don’t know.

Jacobsen: Are there any prominent atheist or humanist figures in New Zealand generally—Māori or otherwise?

Hiko-Tahuri: No real high-profile names come to mind. One of the cultural dynamics in New Zealand is what we call “tall poppy syndrome”—we tend to cut down the people who stick out. So, self-promotion is frowned upon here. You don’t boast; you don’t elevate yourself. You keep your head down.

Jacobsen: Honestly, North America could use a little more of that.

Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Maybe! But because of that, unless you’re already in the community, you’ve probably never heard of any of our local atheists or humanists.

Jacobsen: Are there any other books, aside from yours, by Māori atheists?

Hiko-Tahuri: Not yet.

Jacobsen: That’s wild. Okay, let me put this on the record: open offer. If we can gather around 100,000 words’ worth of conversations with Māori atheists, agnostics, or humanists—fully inclusive—I’ll help compile it. You can tell me your life story, “coming out,” and reflections. No pressure.

Hiko-Tahuri: That sounds good.

Jacobsen: It’s an ironic “coming-to-Jesus” phrase. [Laughs] But really, the point would be to normalize it. To show that being a Māori atheist isn’t a big deal—it’s just one way of being. That #NormalizeAtheism message. You’ve got 500 members in the Whakapono Kore group. Surely, some would be up for it.

Hiko-Tahuri: Maybe. But I don’t know how many would want to go public. That’s always the challenge. Out of those 500 members in the Atua Kore group, I know about four people willing to speak publicly.

Jacobsen: So basically, the secretary, vice president, president, and treasurer?

Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Pretty much—except we’re not that organized. It’s not even my group; someone else started it. I’m just a member like everyone else.

Jacobsen: What is the Taranaki Maunga?

Hiko-Tahuri: Oh yes, I am granting personhood to the mountain. That’s an environmental protection mechanism more than a spiritual or belief-based one. It’s a legal framework designed to safeguard the mountain.

Jacobsen: The international community has increasingly formalized support for Indigenous peoples through declarations, conventions, and covenants. Some of the most notable include:

  • The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (UNDRIP) was adopted in 2007.
  • International Labour Organization Convention No. 169 concerning Indigenous and Tribal Peoples in Independent Countries (1989).
  • The International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (1965) includes Indigenous peoples under legal definitions of racial protection.

These instruments serve as essential frameworks for recognizing Indigenous communities’ cultural, environmental, political, and spiritual rights.

Additional international instruments support Indigenous rights, which are not often discussed but are incredibly important.

  • The International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (1966) — Article 1 affirms the right to self-determination for all peoples, including Indigenous communities.
  • The International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (also 1966) contains articles addressing equality, cultural rights, and the right to participate in social and economic development, which directly apply to Indigenous peoples.
  • The Convention on the Rights of the Child (1989) — Article 30 affirms the right of Indigenous children to enjoy their culture, religion, and language.
  • The Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW) — General Recommendation 39 specifically addresses Indigenous women and girls.
  • The Declaration on the Rights of Persons Belonging to National or Ethnic, Religious, and Linguistic Minorities (1992) — Affirms collective minority rights, including Indigenous identities.

And there are several region-specific instruments:

  • The African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (Banjul Charter, 1981) — Article 22 recognizes the right to development, including for Indigenous peoples.
  • The American Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (ADRIP, 2016) — Establishes principles for self-identification, cultural preservation, and public participation.
  • UNESCO’s Convention for the Safeguarding of the Intangible Cultural Heritage (2003) — Recognizes and protects the cultural expressions of Indigenous communities.
  • The Convention on Biological Diversity (1992), Article 8(j), mandates respecting and preserving Indigenous knowledge, innovations, and practices related to conservation and sustainable biodiversity.

So, this is not “nothing.” There’s a body of international law supporting Indigenous rights. Of course, the tension always lies between what is declared and what is implemented. That’s where the evidence and accountability need to come in.

From your perspective—within the Māori context—do you see any of these declarations, covenants, or charters shaping Māori–New Zealand relations?

Hiko-Tahuri: To be completely honest, I’ve only ever heard of the UN Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (UNDRIP). That’s the only one that ever comes up in public conversation or news here. All the others? I haven’t heard of them.

Jacobsen: That’s insightful. If we take secular humanism as a life stance grounded in an empirical moral philosophy that adapts its ethics based on new evidence, do you think Māori secular humanists could lead in implementing or advocating for some of these international declarations?

Hiko-Tahuri: I would like to say yes—but I worry. Like I said before, in our Māori communities, the people who wear collars—the religious leaders—get the leadership roles. People like me, who don’t wear a collar, are less likely to be listened to.

So, Indigenous secular humanists—are not currently in a position of influence when it comes to policy or leadership. And that’s something I think about a lot.

Jacobsen: That’s a critical and complex conversation. It reminds me of my last in-depth interview with David Cook, Maheengun, who has an Anishinaabe background in Canada. He identified as a traditional knowledge keeper—but importantly, was a knowledge keeper. There’s nuance in how Indigenous knowledge and leadership structures function and interact with humanist and secular frameworks. In the North American Indigenous context, the term for that is that you do not have a collar, but you might be a pipe carrier.

Maheengun gave up his status as a pipe carrier because, for him, there was too much dissonance between his humanist, atheist worldview and the expectations that came with that ceremonial role.

That gets into something I do not think anyone’s explored yet: if someone adopts atheism and secular humanism seriously and then steps away from a role like a pipe carrier or traditional knowledge keeper, how does that affect their voice—not just within the community but in broader systems like government-to-government or what is often termed “nation-to-nation” relations in Canada?

Because if someone lacks ceremonial or spiritual status, they often have no formal recognition—and no seat at the table. So, the representatives federal governments see in these discussions tend to be those with supernatural frameworks. That becomes the perceived Indigenous worldview, even though, as we know, many Indigenous people do not subscribe to that at all.

And the same is true for Māori. Significant portions of the population—like in the 634 recognized First Nations bands in Canada—either reject or question those beliefs. Even if, as in your case, they still participate culturally. Yet they are still not always seen as “real Māori” by some.

Where could that conversation go? What questions should we be asking?

Hiko-Tahuri: I’ve been thinking about this one for a long time—and honestly, I still don’t know.

In New Zealand, the government recognizes several iwi—tribal groups—as official representatives. So, if the government wants to consult with Māori, it will go to those groups and their hierarchies. The structure is established and formalized.

But here’s the thing: because those bodies represent the majority, people like me—those without a spiritual or ceremonial role—do not get much say.

That said, I’ve been fortunate. I have working relationships with some of the local tribal leaders. I’ve worked within their organizations, so I know at least they’re getting one different voice in the room—mine. I can say, “Hey, this is something you must consider.”

But that’s not a system-wide thing. It’s very personal. And yes, it isn’t easy to imagine how to scale that and how to make it more inclusive.

These representatives often claim to speak for all of us. But do they? We don’t know.

Jacobsen: That’s a tension in democratic governance, too. No political party or leader truly represents everyone. They represent the most significant percentage of voters in a particular cycle. So even there, you get a majority-of-plurality scenario, not true consensus.

It’s the same dynamic. When a Māori elder with a collar and status comes forward and tells the New Zealand government, “This is what we want as a community,” it’s assumed that their voice is the voice of all Māori.

But that’s not the case.

Hiko-Tahuri: There’s a presumption that doesn’t map cleanly onto European governance models. But most of our iwi—tribal groups—that the government interacts with are democratically elected. It’s not always a traditional hereditary hierarchy. Leaders are often voted in.

Jacobsen: Interesting. So there’s a mix of democratic process and cultural leadership?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, and I wouldn’t say all of those leaders are particularly religious either. Many use religious language or rituals to connect with the people they serve. It’s less about being deeply spiritual and more about resonating with the majority—many of whom are.

Jacobsen: That ties into self-stereotyping and external stereotyping. It becomes a kind of feel-good activism—what I sometimes call “parade activism” instead of “hard-work activism.”

For example, I attended a session at the 69th Commission on the Status of Women—Canada’s Indigenous. There was an Indigenous panel, and a few participants represented Indigenous communities beyond Canada’s borders.

Some arrived in full traditional dress—massive ceremonial headgear and all. Now, that visual shorthand becomes what government officials expect to see. It creates a kind of caricature—but it also becomes self-reinforcing.

That person becomes the “abstract ideal” of what a proper Indigenous representative should look like, and the government becomes the “abstract system” responding to that image. Both sides feel good about the exchange, but it risks becoming performative. It’s not always representative of the range of Indigenous experiences—especially secular ones.

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes,. 

Jacobsen: So it becomes this cycle: “We brought the right Māori to the table,” and “I represented the right version of Māori identity.” Everyone walks away satisfied—but it also acts as a brake. You’re pushing the gas and the brake at the same time.

Hiko-Tahuri: Right—and then when someone like me comes forward, without the collar or ceremonial role, they’re seen as the outlier. 

Jacobsen: Like the cranky guy on the porch yelling at the sky. 

Hiko-Tahuri: The Garfield of the meeting, if you will. [Laughs]

Jacobsen: No one wants that person. They’re not the story anyone wants to hear.

Hiko-Tahuri: That reminds me of something recent. The New Zealand Psychological Society referenced my book.

Until now, the society’s approach was based on a framework developed by a respected Māori elder—someone known in cultural and philosophical spaces. He proposed a four-sided model of well-beingwellbeing, likened to a house. It’s used widely in Māori mental health services.

The four sides are physical, family, spiritual, and—something else. But the point is: if you’re working with Māori clients, the model says you must consider all four, including the spiritual.

So, twenty years ago, I went to see a therapist. They used this exact model. We sat down, and they said, “We need to begin with a karakia—a prayer.”

I said, “I’m not religious. I don’t want to pray.”

But their training told them they had to do it. So, I was forced to sit through a religious ritual I didn’t believe in to access mental health care. And worse, I was pressured to participate in that prayer myself. That’s a significant example. It shows how models meant to be inclusive can become exclusionary—especially for Māori who are secular.

Jacobsen: That’s like people being forced to go to AA.

Hiko-Tahuri: I presented to a group of psychologists about a year ago. One of the prominent members—someone involved in the humanist movement here—submitted a formal statement to the New Zealand College of Clinical Psychologists.

He said, “Look, this is a perspective you haven’t considered.” That spiritual requirement—where practitioners were required to begin with a prayer—was challenged. As a result, recommendations have now been made to adjust those protocols to include people who do not believe. That’s one positive change I can point to that came out of it.

Jacobsen: Is the traditional Māori dance called the haka?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, the haka.

Jacobsen: That seems like one of the more benign aspects of cultural tradition, even for someone transitioning ideologically. I don’t see how a dance would be impacted by whether someone is spiritual.

Hiko-Tahuri: No—not at all. The haka isn’t inherently religious. It’s a form of emotional and communal expression. While its origins include warrior preparation, it’s evolved far beyond that.

There are haka for celebrations, mourning, farewells, and graduations. At university ceremonies, if someone Māori walks across the stage, people from their whānau will often leap up from the crowd and perform a haka in celebration. It’s done everywhere, for all kinds of moments. It’s how we express collective feelings—joy, grief, pride, and love.

Jacobsen: So, when you begin mapping the geography of Māori secularism—as a relatively new concept—are there any aspects of traditional Māori governance that could be considered appropriately secular? That is, are there spaces where ritual or spiritual practices are distinctly set apart or is everything more or less integrated?

Hiko-Tahuri: So, in most traditional Māori contexts, everything tends to be intertwined—spiritual, social, political, and cultural dimensions are not separated in the Western sense. In that way, Māori culture is similar to many traditional religious cultures, where secularism, as we understand it in liberal democracies, was never really a category.

Jacobsen: Now, tapu—the concept of sacredness or restriction in Māori culture—retains significant cultural power. But from a secular Māori perspective, like yours, tapu can be understood metaphorically rather than metaphysically. It functions symbolically to mark respect, boundaries, or social norms rather than indicating belief in the supernatural. What does that mean in practical terms?

Hiko-Tahuri: Take karakia, for example—these are often translated as prayers or incantations. I don’t perform them myself. But in spaces where karakia are expected—such as ceremonial openings or public gatherings—I’ve written secular alternatives, essentially nonreligious invocations. I cannot authentically engage in the religious or supernatural aspects, but I can offer something meaningful and culturally respectful that fits the moment. That’s how I bridge the gap: by replacing the supernatural element with a secular expression that still honours the cultural context.

Jacobsen: This reminds me of the situation in Canada. Canada is a federal state divided into municipalities, provinces, and territories, and then the national government, which is functionally similar to the U.S. structure of counties, states, and federal governance. In 2015, the Supreme Court of Canada ruled in Mouvement laïque québécois v. Saguenay (City) that opening municipal council meetings with prayer violated the state’s duty of religious neutrality. It effectively made official prayers at government meetings unconstitutional.

Following that decision, organizations like the British Columbia Humanist Association began investigating compliance across municipalities. Despite the ruling, they found that many local governments continued to include prayer in official meetings. In response, the Association sent letters to these municipalities pointing out the legal ruling, sharing data, and urging them to comply with the law by removing religious observances from public sessions. This kind of advocacy led to meaningful change in some regions.

So, when I consider your experience, I think of it in that light. You’re not opposing cultural participation or public service; instead, you’re drawing a line where religious practices—like prayer—are included in civic spaces where they may no longer be appropriate, especially in pluralistic or post-colonial contexts. Countries like Aotearoa, New Zealand, Australia, Canada, the United States, and South Africa all fall under the category of “post-colonial” states grappling with how to reconcile Indigenous traditions, secular governance, and religious pluralism.

So, let us return to the historical backdrop. Christian missionary efforts primarily drove colonization in Aotearoa, New Zealand. I understand that many of those involved were of European heritage—like my own. When people refer to “post-colonial” in this context, they often mean a phase following that religious and political imposition—perhaps even envisioning a society in a reconciled, pluralistic state where Indigenous and settler cultures have negotiated a new equilibrium. Would you say that is accurate?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, that is broadly correct. Among post-colonial nations, I would say Aotearoa, New Zealand, has gone further than many in terms of acknowledging and integrating Māori language, culture, and perspectives into public life. You can see the effects of that on things like the census data. As of the most recent census, about 53% of New Zealanders identified as having no religion. That makes New Zealand a post-Christian country, at least in terms of demographic majority. Christianity is now a minority belief, which shifts the dynamics.

Jacobsen: And how does that shift affect your everyday life, particularly as someone who identifies as an atheist and a humanist? Does it allow you to live more comfortably and authentically?

Hiko-Tahuri: Absolutely. As I mentioned earlier, overt religiosity is a bit unusual here. People who are very religious are more of a minority now—and may be looked at as slightly outside the norm. The country itself is pretty secular. Yes, we still have prayers at the beginning of some public meetings, but those are more about tradition than belief in most cases. There are calls to remove such practices, and I support that. However, overall, New Zealand has a very relaxed and liberal society. People do not care what others believe or do not believe. There is a strong cultural inclination toward individual freedom and tolerance, so we rarely see heated debates or conflicts over religion here.

Jacobsen: Tell me more about your podcast, Heretical. Is it still running, and where can people find it?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, it is back. I originally launched it some time ago but had to pause due to other commitments. I have now restarted it. The first season includes 10 episodes, where I read my book chapter by chapter. The book is free—I never wrote it to make money; I wrote it to tell a story. That story forms the basis of the podcast. I have also added another episode where I talk about a strange encounter I had with what I would describe as a cult-like group who tried to recruit me. That experience was eye-opening and worth sharing. There will be more episodes in the future. I plan to delve into some of the more common arguments for theism—things like the cosmological argument—and explore why I do not find them convincing. These kinds of discussions are not often had within our community, so I think it is essential to create space for them.

Jacobsen: What about your music and your airbrush art? Do elements of secularism or humanism show up in those creative outlets?

Hiko-Tahuri: Not so much in my music, no. It is more of a personal expression, and I keep it separate from my secular identity. But everything I create reflects my worldview in some way, even if not explicitly.

I have been playing in the same band with friends for about 25 years now. We only get together to play once every five years or so these days, but we are just a bunch of old mates who enjoy making music together. I played my first gig when I was 14 years old for a country music club here in New Zealand. I got pulled into country music because there really were not many other musical options in the small town I grew up in.

Music has always been part of my life, but I have never chased fame or done it for recognition. I do it because I love it. The same goes for painting. I have created a few pieces where I’ve expressed thoughts on some of the more absurd or troubling beliefs in the Bible. For example, there is that passage—1 Timothy 2:12, I think—that says women should remain silent and not teach. I did a painting responding to that. I also painted a Celtic cross overlaid with Māori designs to symbolize how religion, especially Christianity, colonized us just as much as the English did. I have sold or given away some of those pieces, but really, art is something I do for personal fulfillment rather than profit.

Jacobsen: How do emerging networks like Māori atheist and freethinker communities offer space for collective doubt or help individuals express personal doubts within a shared context?

Hiko-Tahuri: That is a good question. I do not know if that is even the aim of the group I joined. It is not my group—I just found it and joined. For me, it was more about discovering that there were other people out there who think like me and also look like me. That alone was meaningful. We have not tried to turn it into a collective movement. Māori atheism is still in its infancy. Until I wrote my book, I had not encountered any serious discussion about it, at least not that I could find. That group did exist beforehand, but I stumbled upon it afterward.

So, right now, most of the Māori atheists I see are solo actors. We speak up when we feel like it, but there is no organized collective activism or shared identity. We are in such an early stage of development as a community that it has not yet coalesced into anything more structured or strategic.

Jacobsen: Since we last spoke, have you had any recent thoughts on the protocols and principles of Indigenous declarations?

Hiko-Tahuri: No, I have not looked into it lately. I know that the New Zealand government initially chose not to sign the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, though it eventually endorsed it in 2010. But beyond that, I have not followed recent developments very closely.

Jacobsen: I have not had a chance to read into some of those areas, but I would like to. What about the precise etiquette and civic customs—honouring those customs that come from the subculture while not reciting the prayers? What is the balance being struck there?

Hiko-Tahuri: Yeah, I think that is one of the most challenging parts—figuring out what you can do respectfully while maintaining personal integrity. If we are talking, for instance, about pōwhiri—that is, the formal welcome ceremony—part of that involves speech-making. And during those speeches, spiritual language is often invoked. It is hard to categorize it strictly as religious, but it carries spiritual overtones.

Navigating is a challenge because there is a specific formula for constructing those speeches within our culture. They follow a traditional structure that includes spiritual references—things I do not believe in. So, I often have to rework those parts, recreating the tone and form without the religious or supernatural elements. It is difficult and takes much careful thought. That is probably the main struggle for Māori atheists who speak the language and actively participate in cultural life. We are trying to maintain the integrity of our heritage while adapting it to a secular worldview.

Jacobsen: Have you ever had an experience—either due to your ethnic background or lack of belief—where someone got confrontational with you? The proverbial finger-wagging, shouting match? I cannot imagine that happening much to a Kiwi.

Hiko-Tahuri: No, we are generally not that confrontational in New Zealand. And there are a couple of practical reasons, too. Because of how I look—my physical presence—people usually do not get up in my face. I am around six feet tall, and I guess I have a face that might be intimidating. So, people do not tend to push those boundaries. I am not aggressive or threatening at all, but sometimes, just my appearance is enough to make people think twice.

Jacobsen: That reminds me—there was a story out of the U.S. involving Eminem. I think gang members were extorting him—either the Crips or the Bloods. But apparently, there was a Samoan-American gang so feared that even the Crips were hesitant around them. Eminem hired them for protection, and they ended up defending him and collaborating on music. I believe they even put out an album together.

It was a pretty wild story. It shows how much physical presence and group identity can shape interactions—whether in music, culture, or personal safety. It is funny how those dynamics play out in so many different places.

Hiko-Tahuri: It can be imposing. I am five-eleven, but I am not baby-faced. Still, I have heard of incidents where Māori women in New Zealand—especially those who wear moko kauae, the traditional tattoo—get hassled often.

Jacobsen:How so?

Hiko-Tahuri: By members of the public, saying things like, “You shouldn’t be here,” or “You look intimidating,” or “You shouldn’t be in this park.” One of these incidents happened just last year in a local park. A woman was told she could not be there when someone’s kids were around, as if she was somehow threatening—just for wearing the moko kauae. These things do happen, particularly to women. I have noticed that it never happens to me. Maybe that has something to do with physical presence or perceived threat, but yes—it is a pattern. That does happen, and fairly often. 

Jacobsen: I am out of the questions, too. So, am I missing anything? What do you think?

Hiko-Tahuri: I do not think so. I cannot think of anything else at the moment. That was a solid session.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for today. 

Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, that sounds great. Thank you very much.

Jacobsen: All right. Take care.

Hiko-Tahuri: You too. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

David “Maheengun” Cook on Indigenous Identity, Atheism, and Humanist Values in Anishinaabe Culture

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/16

*This interview is a contribution to an upcoming text on global indigeneity and international humanism from In-Sight Publishing.* 

David “Maheengun” Cook, an atheist and humanist from the Mississaugas of the Anishinaabe people, shares his life journey navigating Indigenous identity, secularism, and cultural heritage. Raised near Rice Lake, Ontario, he learned traditional teachings—like oral history, plant knowledge, and seasonal rhythms—from elders. Yet, he embraced atheism at 13, finding Christian doctrines unconvincing and later stepping away from formal Indigenous spirituality, such as pipe-carrying and Midewiwin ceremonies. Cook distinguishes between Indigeneity as a cultural-historical identity and Indigenous humanism, which he sees as increasingly conflated with spiritual beliefs incompatible with secular humanism’s reliance on reason and evidence. He critiques the romanticization of Indigenous knowledge systems, warning against overvaluing localized spiritual traditions as universal truth. Still, he values cultural respect, environmental ethics, and communal decision-making embedded in Anishinaabe life. While he sees overlap with secular humanism in compassion and ethical living, he insists on epistemological clarity: lived experience and reverence are not scientific knowledge. He emphasizes the importance of dialogue, mutual understanding, and intellectual honesty, challenging assumptions from Indigenous and non-Indigenous perspectives. Cook’s reflections underscore the complex interplay between cultural continuity and philosophical integrity in modern Indigenous life. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by David Cook, also known by his Anishinaabe name, Maheengun, which means Timberwolfin the Anishinaabemowin language.

David will share his perspective on Indigenous identity, humanism, and atheism. He was raised near Rice Lake in southern Ontario, where Anishinaabe teachings influenced his formative years. He learned from elders about oral traditions, plant knowledge, and cultural practices rooted in the land and community. Despite this deep cultural foundation, Cook did not adopt theistic beliefs. He embraced atheism at the age of 13 after finding Christian teachings unconvincing.

His journey exemplifies the complex and often misunderstood relationship between Indigenous spirituality and humanist principles. Cook observed that traditional Anishinaabe worldviews emphasize spiritual relationships with the natural world, ancestors, and beings—but not in the form of hierarchical theism or deity worship. Over time, however, he has witnessed a shift in some Indigenous communities toward institutionalized or formalized spiritual practices, influenced in part by colonial impositions and revivalist movements. These shifts sometimes conflict with secular or humanist frameworks. In navigating this tension, Cook stepped away from ceremonial responsibilities, such as being a pipe carrier, to live more authentically within his philosophical values.

His experiences challenge the stereotype that Indigenous identity must be tied to religion or theism. They also highlight the diversity of beliefs and spiritual expressions among Indigenous peoples. Through these conversations, we will explore how Indigenous cultural heritage can intersect with secular humanist values, contributing to a broader discussion on Indigeneity and humanism. I approach this as a learner, open to where the dialogue leads. You never know unless you ask.

David, thank you very much for joining me today.

David “Maheengun” Cook: Thank you for inviting me.

Jacobsen: My first question is: Do you come from an Ojibwe, Odawa, Potawatomi, Algonquin, Mississauga, or Nipissing background?

Cook: My experiences come from Mississaugas, originally.

Jacobsen: That helps. For those who may not know—like myself—how are the various Anishinaabe peoples distinguished from one another? Is it primarily geographic, or is there more to it?

Cook: It is mainly geographic but also linguistic and historical. The Anishinaabe are a group of culturally related nations who speak dialects of the Anishinaabemowin language. The Ojibwe, or Chippewa, stretch across a wide area from Ontario to Minnesota and beyond. The Odawa traditionally lived near the Ottawa River Valley, and the Potawatomi were based around Georgian Bay and further south around Lake Michigan, though many were displaced. The Mississaugas settled primarily in southern Ontario. While they share cultural foundations, each group has distinct histories, migration stories, and regional practices.

Jacobsen: The Anishinaabe are often translated as “original people” or “spontaneous beings,” they are tied to “Mother Earth” and “spiritual emergence.” What does that name signify within the culture?

Cook: Anishinaabe is often translated as “original person” or “first person.” It reflects the belief that our people were created and have always been here—on what we call Turtle Island. In many oral traditions, there are creation stories, including that of Sky Woman, though this version is more prominent among the Haudenosaunee(Iroquois). Among the Anishinaabe, the tale of Nanaboozho is central—he is a cultural hero and teacher who helped shape the world. These stories reflect a worldview grounded in a relationship—with the land, the animals, the elements, and one another—not in dominion or hierarchical worship.

Specific to the Anishinaabe people, there’s a story of our ancestors—the Lenape (or Leni Lenape) from the East Coast—being our predecessors. The Anishinaabe people are said to have split off and migrated westward, following a sacred object known as the megis shell. It is a type of seashell. We followed its appearance and migrated to places where wild rice—manoomin—grew, ultimately reaching the Great Lakes and settling in areas like Minnesota, which marked the endpoint of this ancestral migration.

Jacobsen: What is the significance, within traditional practices, of things like birch bark, wild rice harvesting, and clan systems as part of the Anishinaabe worldview and social structure?

Cook: Good question. So, the teachings of the Seven Grandfathers instructed that our people should follow the megis shell, and we would stop where we found wild rice. As I mentioned, the Anishinaabemowin word is manoomin. Wild rice was—and still is—a staple food and ceremonial plant for the Anishinaabe. Its presence indicated where we were meant to settle.

Birch bark was—and remains—immensely important. It was used to build our traditional homes—wigwams, not tipis. Tipis are associated with Plains cultures, but our homes were dome-shaped structures covered in birch bark.

The Midewiwin society—the keepers of ancient and ceremonial knowledge—used birch bark scrolls to record teachings, medicines, songs, and instructions for building Mide lodges. These scrolls served as a traditional archive. Birch bark also had everyday uses: for containers, canoes, and art.

We also interacted extensively with other nations, including the Haudenosaunee Confederacy—the Mohawk, Seneca, Cayuga, Onondaga, and Oneida. Later, the Tuscarora joined, forming the Six Nations. Through this contact—both peaceful and hostile—we came to share some elements like the agricultural trio called the Three Sisters: corn, beans, and squash. These came more from our interactions than from our ancestral practices.

Jacobsen: You mentioned conflict. What were the historical bases of some of these clashes between the Anishinaabe and the Haudenosaunee?

Cook: Primarily, it was about control of the Great Lakes region, especially trade routes. This was pre-European contact, so before 1497—when John Cabot explored parts of what is now Canada—and certainly before 1603, when Samuel de Champlain arrived. The Great Lakes were vital corridors of commerce, diplomacy, and warfare. A complex trade web stretched across the continent—copper from Lake Superior, shells from the coast, obsidian, tobacco, etc.

The Haudenosaunee traditionally occupied the south side of Lake Ontario, while the Anishinaabe, including the Potawatomi, Odawa, and Mississaugas, were on the north side. These three groups comprised the Council of the Three Fires, a longstanding alliance rooted in kinship and defence.

The conflicts intensified after Champlain allied with the Wendat (also called the Huron), who had accepted the Jesuit missionaries and their Christian teachings. The Jesuits introduced not only religion but also disease, which devastated many Indigenous communities. Champlain and his Wendat allies—including some Ojibwe—launched attacks on the Haudenosaunee south of the lake. That began a cycle of violence and displacement that lasted for centuries.

Jacobsen: That’s quite the historical sweep. Growing up, what was your sense—within your Indigenous community and in nearby non-Indigenous communities—of the mythologies or perceptions each had of the other?

Cook: That’s a rich topic. The mythologies held by each group—Indigenous or settler—about one another were often oversimplified or distorted. Indigenous communities saw settlers as disconnected from the land, lacking the spiritual and relational teachings that tie people to place. On the other hand, settlers often romanticized Indigenous people or reduced us to caricatures—either the “noble savage” or the “vanishing Indian.” Meanwhile, different Indigenous nations had their own stories and rivalries, often shaped by centuries of conflict, trade, and adaptation.

Jacobsen: Regarding social mythologies specifically, what kinds of stories or collective ideas did Indigenous communities have about surrounding non-Indigenous people, and vice versa? And I mean not religious mythologies like Christian beliefs in an intervening God or Indigenous cosmologies like the creation of Turtle Island, but more about the social perceptions communities held about one another. Also, are you speaking from personal experience growing up or from a more historical lens?

Cook: That’s a good question—and I think both apply. Historically, and in my experience, those perceptions have shifted significantly over time.

Going back to the early contact era—when Champlain was active in this region—you had the Wendat (also known as the Huron) accepting, or at least entertaining, Christian missionaries like the Jesuits. That affected how other nations, including the Haudenosaunee, viewed Wendat and the newcomers. But in those early days, there weren’t many non-Indigenous people in Ontario—just a few priests and fur traders—so social mythologies were formed based on limited interaction.

As colonization progressed—particularly during the expansion of Ontario’s colonization roads in the 19th century—Indigenous people in many areas were respected for their deep knowledge of the land, for trade, and for helping early settlers survive. My family has a cottage about an hour and a half north of here, and there’s a long history of cooperation between Indigenous communities and pioneers. There was absolute mutual respect, at least in some areas.

But then things shifted. Public perceptions began souring by the 1960s and 1970s, especially among non-Indigenous people. Many stereotypes took hold—things like alcoholism, laziness, or exemptions from taxation—which created resentment and suspicion. A lot of this was media-driven. People formed their opinions not from direct interaction with Indigenous people but from distorted narratives coming out of other regions or from sensationalized news.

I remember vividly the Oka Crisis in 1990. It was centred in Kanesatake and Akwesasne, Mohawk territories in Quebec, and had ripple effects across the country. Suddenly, many non-Indigenous Canadians—especially in Ontario and Quebec—developed very negative views of Indigenous people, even if they had never met one in their lives. It was a myth-building through fear and media framing.

But today, things are changing with the ongoing work of Truth and Reconciliation and the broader public access to accurate historical information. Conversations are more open. There’s greater willingness—among non-Indigenous people especially—to listen, learn, and reconsider those long-held social mythologies. Today’s understanding is more grounded in reality than it used to be.

I was working hard to raise awareness about something that deeply concerned me. An NDP Member of Parliament from Winnipeg introduced a private member’s bill that would have criminalized the denial of the residential school system.

Jacobsen: How did that go over?

Cook: Well, while I believe that residential schools were a horrific part of Canadian history—and that the intergenerational trauma they caused is still being felt today—I don’t think criminalizing denial helps truth and reconciliation. And it certainly doesn’t support the free speech rights of non-Indigenous Canadians.

I’ve had many conversations with people who didn’t believe in or understand the impacts of residential schools. I often wonder whether I could have had those conversations if a law had made such speech a felony. I’m relieved to say that the bill did not pass the first reading in the House of Commons.

Jacobsen: That’s good to hear. That’s a win for open discourse. These conversations will be exploratory, and while there will be common themes and throughlines, we’ll also encounter offshoots. That issue you raised—around free speech and truth-seeking—is critical. It resonates across different communities in Canada.

How do different communities, in your experience—Francophone, Anglophone, Indigenous, and others—view universal rights commonly claimed internationally, such as freedom of expression or speech, especially as they’re articulated in the U.S.? How are those rights viewed, upheld, or contested in public, private, or sacred spaces within these cultural contexts?

Cook: That’s a great question, but I am unlikely to answer comprehensively since I live in one small corner of southern Ontario. I can only speak to what I’ve seen locally.

But it’s interesting. One thing that stands out is how cultural shifts in Indigenous communities—both on reserves and among urban Indigenous populations—have been influenced by younger generations attending Indigenous Studies programs in colleges and universities. I’ve been involved for over 35 years in the Elders’ Conference at Trent University in Peterborough. The tone and focus of that gathering have changed dramatically over the decades.

Like the rest of North America, there is a widening political divide. On the right wing, there tends to be skepticism about what is seen as special rights or accommodations for Indigenous peoples—questions about responsibilities and accountability. On the left wing, particularly within academic environments, there’s often a tendency to avoid saying anything that could be construed as challenging the dominant narratives taught in Indigenous Studies courses.

You risk being accused of creating an “unsafe” environment; honestly, I find that term increasingly vague. It used to refer to a physical threat, but now it can mean someone holds a different opinion from you on campus—the redefinition of “unsafe” to include disagreement.

I’m rambling now, but my answer to your question is elsewhere. 

Jacobsen: It’s like that old Billy Connolly joke about getting older—he says (and I’m paraphrasing here, Jacobsenizing it): when you’re young, someone comes into town and asks you for directions to the gas station. You confidently lift your arm, point with your finger, and say: “Go two streets north, take a left, then a right. You’ll be at Smith and Cook Avenue. The gas station’s right there. You’re good to go.”

Thank you for that, sir. Have a good day.”

Then you get to middle age, and you just sort of wave vaguely with your arm—”Yeah, it’s over there, young man.”

And by the time you’re in your eighties, you’re lifting your leg and going, “Over there!” You know? It’s somewhere in that general direction. 

Cook: [Laughing].

Jacobsen: Somewhere in that general direction—that’s precisely it. Now, a pattern in public discourse connects to what you’ve just described. When people speak in the terms you just used—thoughtfully but with nuance—they are sometimes misunderstood, either deliberately or inadvertently. That misunderstanding is then used as grounds to accuse them of dismissing Indigenous teachings or even of being belligerent toward those who describe themselves as feeling unsafe.

How do you feel when you hear someone attributing motives like that to things you genuinely believe? How are your views being mischaracterized—or, on the more benign side, how are they being misunderstood?

Cook: That’s a great question. I love to philosophize, so stand by… [Laughing]

You’ve captured the polarization well. Some people, yes, are intentionally provocative—they want to be misunderstood or create conflict. On the other hand, there’s a tendency to be hyper-vigilant—a kind of eagerness to pounce on any statement that might not align perfectly with what’s expected. They say it becomes a race to display our virtue or signal.

But the reality lies in the middle. And that’s where the real work of democracy and dialogue happens.

We think of democracy as voting for someone who disappears into a legislature to make decisions. But in truth, democracy is the conversation. It’s the dialogue we have as a society.

If you look at small Indigenous bands historically, decisions were made collectively: where to move, when to hunt, how to respond to challenges. That was real, participatory decision-making—consensus-based. As populations grew and governance became more complex, that model had to evolve. However, the essential ingredient remains: meaningful dialogue that defines the middle ground.

To bring this back to Indigenous roots, the Haudenosaunee Confederacy—the union of the Five (later Six) Nations—is often cited as one of the inspirations for American democracy. That system of deliberative councils and consensus-seeking is a powerful model.

Unfortunately, today, we’ve moved far from that. We’re at a point where people on opposite ends of the spectrum can no longer even speak to each other. Everyone sees the other as an enemy rather than someone with a different perspective.

You’re right. On both extremes, it’s not about understanding anymore—it’s about triggering a reaction or defending territory. But democracy cannot survive without conversation, and we lose a lot when we abandon the middle ground.

It’s about active listening. Listening so that you can hear someone and repeat what they just said to demonstrate understanding rather than interrupting to make your point. That’s missing from many conversations now.

I have a theory about that. When I worked for a vast Fortune 50 corporation, I had the honour of contributing to DARPANet, which was the predecessor to what we now call the Internet. I was on the front lines of Internet development in Canada and North America—working on IP addressing, how networks function, how computers talk, and so on.

Then, in the late 1970s and early 1980s, I worked on efforts related to the World Wide Web and how it could be opened for commercial use. The Web was envisioned as a beautiful, global network of connections—a web of shared knowledge, freely accessible and interactive.

But this Web has become a series of cocoons. People don’t hear each other anymore. Instead, they’re caught in echo chambers, where they only receive information reinforcing their beliefs.

Algorithmic polarization: The algorithms behind social media platforms now filter content so that you rarely encounter ideas that challenge your worldview. If you lean left, your feed is filled with progressive content. If you lean right, you get conservative content.

So, instead of a web connecting people and ideas, we’ve ended up with millions of isolated and insulating bubbles. People don’t even know that other perspectives exist anymore. They hear their thoughts reflected on them.

Jacobsen: That’s not off-topic—it’s a key part of this discussion. What people now call virtue signalling, for instance—it’s not a new phenomenon. We talk about it more explicitly now.

Looking at the last five to twenty-five years, you can see it evolve in public discourse. For example, on the left, wearing a rainbow lapel pin signals affiliation and values. On the right, someone might wear a Christian cross. Both are symbolic affirmations of identity and belief systems. It’s the same impulse, just expressed differently depending on the group.

When people talk about “wokeness,” it’s not fundamentally different from the conversations around identity politics we saw in the 1990s. Those earlier discussions were more implicit, while today’s are explicit—partly because of the digital tools you helped build: the Internet, social media, and open commentary platforms. Everything is exposed now; everything is analyzed or debated instantly.

So we’ve seen this explosion of neologisms—some serious, some silly—all part of a broader cultural shift toward explicit signalling. But returning to our core topic—Anishinaabe culture—we’ve been reflecting on Midewiwin, the Grand Medicine Society.

Cook: [Laughing] Sorry—I have an opinion on everything.

Jacobsen: No, that’s fine. That’s the point of this kind of dialogue—to explore thoughts that aren’t usually expressed inside the Beltway or in typical public discourse. And it’s also an opportunity to bring cultural memory and philosophical perspective into deeper public awareness.

Jacobsen: We discussed the Ojibwe and some of the broader Anishinaabe identity. But what about the more spiritual or ceremonial aspects—the degrees of initiation, moral teachings, balance, healing, herbal medicine, medicine lodges, chanting, and drumming?

You carried the fight, so to speak. You lived with both the theoretical understanding and practical application of this worldview. How did traditional beliefs frame ideas like the world and the Creator? Would you say that worldview is monotheistic—or is that a result of Christian influence, shaping the image of an intervening Creator?

Cook: Again, I can only speak from personal experience—and it’s important to note that Indigenous cultures are oral traditions. So, everything gets passed down through storytelling, and every elder brings their knowledge, memory, and philosophy to their teaching.

The result is that the stories vary. No matter how much we respect the teachings or the history, there’s no such thing as a single, unchanging version. As I’ve gotten older—and now consider myself an elder—I’ve become acutely aware of how fragile memory can be and how much responsibility it takes to carry those stories forward.

When I was younger, the culture I was taught was not formalized. It was experiential—you learned by being there, by participating. There were seasonal rhythms—like telling stories in the winter, an established cultural practice—but the storytelling was light-hearted, even humorous. There wasn’t the solemnity I see today.

Over time, things have become much more formal. There’s now a strong emphasis on protocols, like clearly stating your name, your community of origin, and your clan and doing so in Anishinaabemowin (our language), even if that’s the only part of the language someone knows. There’s also the expectation to establish credibility—to show who your elders were, who taught you, and whether you are authorized to share what you’re about to say.

That wasn’t the case when I was younger. But now, the role of “Traditional Knowledge Keeper” is formalized and widely used, especially in academic settings and government relations. A big part of that came from the rise of Indigenous Studies programs at universities. Those programs needed structure, so they created protocols to ensure that only those with proper knowledge and cultural authority could teach or share stories.

I understand its intent—ensuring authenticity and preventing cultural misappropriation—but the formality has become quite rigid. It’s now common that, right after someone introduces themselves, they’ll light a smudge—often using a smudge bowl made from an abalone shell, even though abalone isn’t from this region. The same goes for sage, which is not traditional to all territories but is now widely used.

So, there’s been much cross-pollination—ceremonial blending—between First Nations across Canada’s diverse regions. Historically, hundreds, if not thousands, of distinct communities, nations, and cultural protocols—from coast to coast. But now, there’s a kind of pan-Indigenous ceremonial standardization, where some practices have become symbolic shorthand for Indigenous identity, regardless of their geographic origin.

And over time, there’s been much blending—so much so that if you attend a powwow anywhere in North America, you’ll likely see women dancing in traditional jingle dresses. It’s a regalia adorned with 365 cones, often made from the lids of snuff cans. Each cone represents a day of the year and is specifically sewn onto the dress. The sound they produce during the dance is part of the healing tradition.

It’s become that rigid, formalized—and you can now see consistently from Mexico to the northern territories. Well, perhaps less so among Inuit communities, but certainly within a broad swath of First Nations and Native American cultures, you see this kind of cultural homogenization.

Jacobsen: So, let me ask you this. What’s your take on Canada’s earlier cultural flashpoints—the Oka Crisis? How do you see those moments now?

Cook: Oh, wow. The Oka Crisis (1990) was a defining moment for Canada, especially for people in Ontario and Quebec—the so-called centre of Canada. It was the first time that many Canadians had to confront the reality that there were unresolved land disputes, some going back centuries, and that Indigenous people were not a relic of the past. They were present, organized, and resisting.

It forced the conversation into the open and made people aware that fundamentally different worldviews were at play—particularly sovereignty, land stewardship, and historical injustice. But like most big cultural moments, it also became deeply polarizing.

Some people were severely injured—people throwing stones—and others were offering help and support. A similar situation happened here in Ontario with the Ipperwash Provincial Park standoff (1995) when the Premier sent in the Ontario Provincial Police (OPP). They shot and killed Dudley George, a young man who was not posing any physical threat. It became an embarrassment and a tragedy.

Events like Ipperwash and Oka truly set the stage for the emergence of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. They pushed the public to realize that something needed to change—that Canadians needed to become more aware of Indigenous history, the longstanding injustices, and the ongoing consequences Indigenous communities still face as a result. They were defining moments—significant events.

Jacobsen: Now, shifting a bit more toward the central focus of this project—when we talk about people who reject supernaturalism or theistic interpretations of belief within Indigenous traditions, there’s often a social cost.

In European, Anglo, and Franco-North American cultures, people who reject religion or belief in God are often met with a wide range of slurs—“devil-worshipper,” “possessed,” “demonic,” “immoral,” “untrustworthy,” “disgusting,” and so on. These labels don’t function as intellectual arguments—they’re emotional reactions. They show up in polling and population studies as deeply ingrained sentiments toward atheists and humanists.

This prejudice has real economic, social, familial, and professional consequences. Take the example of a woman in a fundamentalist Christian community working at a university with doctrinal covenants. If she gets divorced, that can be considered grounds for dismissal or social shunning. The emotional pain can be deep—and neuroscience tells us that social rejection activates the same brain regions as physical pain.

Now, within a Canadian Indigenous context, particularly in Anishinaabe communities, are there slurs or informal labels used to describe those who reject traditional beliefs—especially those from Indigenous backgrounds themselves? And how do those social dynamics unfold?

Cook: Great question. The only epithet I can remember growing up was for Native people who were seen as “not Native enough.” In other words, if someone had adopted more mainstream, settler characteristics, they’d be called an “apple”—red on the outside, white on the inside. That’s the only derogatory term I ever heard used within the community.

In Anishinaabemowin, there are some terms for non-Native people that can carry a derogatory tone depending on how they’re used. I remember one elder in particular who always referred to white people with a specific term—though I haven’t heard it used in a long time. I don’t know the exact linguistic root of the word, but it was always spoken with a tone of contempt, so it carried weight.

But to your main point—no, I haven’t heard specific slurs or labels used against Indigenous atheists or secular people within the community. You’re right, though: in broader society, people who reject supernatural beliefs get hit with negative assumptions. But I haven’t observed a structured vocabulary around that kind of rejection within Anishinaabe communities, at least not in my experience.

Jacobsen: I mean, if you’re only hearing epithets in English, as opposed to, say, Finnish or Arabic or Anishinaabemowin, does that in itself serve as a kind of psycho-cultural commentary on the use—or limitation—of slurs?

Cook: That’s a good question. I don’t know. There could be all kinds of factors contributing to that dynamic. It might also be that not everyone speaks Anishinaabemowin fluently enough anymore to use slurs in the original language—or even to recognize them if they’re used. So, if those sentiments are expressed, they’re more likely to appear in English, where they’re understood. It’s tough to say what the root of that would be.

Jacobsen: If there’s not much in terms of verbal slurs, then what about other forms of social consequences? Not necessarily professional impacts—but gossip, social standing, and social status. That’s a big part of any culture.

Cook: Absolutely. I think there are all kinds of social consequences for not following what I’d call the “received wisdom”—the currently accepted norms or teachings within the community.

Before we started recording, I told you about a social worker I know who worked for Native Family Services. He’s about fifteen years younger than I am. He grew up on a reserve, and although he identifies as Indigenous, he eventually felt forced to leave his position.

He struggled with expecting every meeting to begin with a smudging ceremony, prayers, sage, abalone shells, eagle feathers, etc. He was told he’d be required to take turns leading the ceremonies—to say the opening prayer, light the smudge, and perform those protocols.

When he said he didn’t want to participate, the response was unsupportive. He wasn’t given space to opt-out. He was made to feel very uncomfortable—like he wasn’t “Native enough.” So yes, even in the workplace, there are real consequences for not conforming to certain spiritual expectations.

Jacobsen: That’s significant.

Cook: It is. Because so much of what is now called “Native culture” is deeply tied to spiritual practice. And I use the word spiritual here more in the religious sense—because when something is no longer optional when it’s mandatory, it stops being about personal spirituality and becomes more like a codified belief system—almost like organized religion.

Jacobsen: That distinction makes much sense.

Cook: For example, when I was growing up, women were not allowed to sit at the big ceremonial drums. There were strict gender roles embedded in the ceremonial life. There was much pushback from the 1960s through the 1980s, especially as broader society moved toward women’s equality. But in many Indigenous communities, especially in ceremonial contexts, women were still restricted from participating fully—particularly if they were on what we call their moon time.

During their menstrual cycle, during their moon, women were often expected to abstain from participating in ceremonies. That was the tradition. But that tradition has also been challenged, especially by younger generations. Still, even today, there are ongoing tensions around these issues. So again, when spiritual practices become mandatory, especially in public or professional settings, they stop being spiritual personally and start resembling an institutional system of belief.

So, during their menstrual cycle, women were not allowed to participate in certain aspects of ceremonial life—sometimes even to the extent of not being in the presence of men during specific spiritual events. There are separate ceremonies for men and women. I have many teachings I’m not permitted to share with women, and my wife has teachings she’s not allowed to share with men.

There are still very distinct roles for men and women. For example, women are the carriers of water at ceremonies. Only women are permitted to touch the water and prepare it. Women traditionally gather the so-called “sacred medicines”—cedar, sage, sweetgrass, and tobacco.

Then, there are specific ceremonial medicines—some used only by women and others only by men. I have to be careful here not to share teachings that could get me into trouble, but yes, there are medicines restricted by gender.

During menstruation, a woman on her moon cannot participate in ceremonies and is expected to avoid ceremonial grounds. At full moon, women’s ceremonies celebrate the menstruation cycle, while men hold their parallel gatherings—often involving cleaning ceremonial pipes, for example. These dual ceremonies happen every full moon.

It’s challenging to separate cultural from spiritual or religious aspects because the two are deeply entwined in Indigenous traditions. But what’s clear is that gender plays a significant role in determining who can do what within ceremonial life.

And if you don’t believe in those teachings—if you’re an Indigenous atheist or secular humanist—there are social ramifications. Questions arise: Can you participate in ceremonies? Can you be a dancer at a powwow?

Let me give an example. I helped create a Native cultural community centre here in the Durham region of Ontario, where I live. We didn’t have any services for what we used to call urban Indians—people living off-reserve in urban areas. So we created this centre to offer programming and support. I was elected chief of that organization’s council.

Now, I used to get into trouble constantly. In Anishinaabe culture, people dance clockwise around the drum at powwows. But here, we also have Haudenosaunee people—alongside Inuit and other First Nations folks—who have different ceremonial expectations. For example, some Haudenosaunee teachings say you must dance counterclockwise around the drum.

So, what do you do in an urban setting where one group deeply believes in dancing clockwise and another holds just as strongly to dancing counterclockwise?

That’s a powerful image—and pretty funny. It is a sort of ceremonial traffic jam. It shows how diverse Indigenous cultures are, even among just the First Nations, not to mention Métis and Inuit peoples. It also highlights the challenge of creating inclusive ceremonial spaces in urban environments—where you’re not just dealing with intercultural dynamics between Indigenous and non-Indigenous people but also intracultural tensions within Indigenous communities themselves.

Jacobsen: That reminds me of the diversity in Christian traditions, too. For instance, the modern evangelical movement in the U.S. and Canada is relatively uniform. However, traditions like Eastern Orthodoxy and Roman Catholicism remain distinct, owing to their long historical separation—between Ecumenical Patriarch Bartholomew and the Pope.

Cook: Right—and even within those traditions, each has its own internal governance, rituals, and symbolic systems, just like us.

Jacobsen: That’s correct. And in Eastern Orthodoxy, the Ecumenical Patriarch is called “first among equals”—a primus inter pares. However, The Catholic Church does not see the Pope that way. So there’s a lateralization of hierarchy in Eastern Orthodoxy that you don’t see in Catholicism, where the hierarchy is more pyramidal.

Given that, though—and more to the point ritualistically—both the Eastern Orthodox and Catholics, from what I’ve seen in their communities, have a very intricate ceremonial life. I don’t mean “better,” just more complex in structure, especially compared to modern evangelical or prosperity gospel movements, which tend to be simpler in ritual and more overtly political in tone after their Sunday services.

From what you describe about the Anishinaabe, I understand that the rituals are deeply tied to place, history, and cultural memory. Almost everything is done within a spiritual context, whereas in Catholic or Orthodox Christianity, the rituals are rich and symbolic. However, many adherents return to their regular, often secular, lives after the liturgy.

Cook: I think that’s fair. I also believe that a kind of hierarchy of belief or ritual commitment exists within Anishinaabe communities. Let me go back to an example.

Just north of here—about a twenty-minute ride on Lake Scugog—there’s a First Nation where I have many ties. I probably spent as much time there as I did on Rice Lake, where I grew up. That community had a longstanding chief lineage—a family that had held that leadership position across several generations.

But I remember from back then that there wasn’t much visible spiritual practice. It all seemed private; at least, that’s how I experienced it.

Just before COVID, I went up to visit friends in that community. I dropped into the health centre and chatted with some people about my history with the Nation. I’d helped them re-establish the powwow there about thirty or thirty-five years ago. At the time, they had never held a powwow, but I’d been involved in running a successful one in Oshawa for about five or six years. They asked me to help organize their first one—show them how to build the arbour for the drum according to tradition, invite elders, and how to structure the event.

When I visited more recently, I spoke about possibly getting more involved in the community again. But they asked me directly whether I was Midewiwin—or Mide, as it’s often shortened. They implied that if I wasn’t, I might not be welcome like I once was.

That’s a community I grew up in. But they had started holding Midewiwin ceremonies regularly, and those come with a much more formal structure. So yes, there’s a hierarchy there. That particular spiritual tradition—the Midewiwin or Grand Medicine Society—requires a kind of adherence to specific teachings, ceremonies, and protocols.

You could compare it loosely to a Masonic lodge in structure—not in content, but in how it’s organized into degrees or levels. As you advance, you gain access to more profound teachings, some of which are kept secret or sacred until you reach a certain level or have participated for several years.

Jacobsen: That’s a very structured system. You mentioned earlier the status of women as a factor. Most cultures at least pay lip service to the ideals the international community promotes—things like gender equality and inclusivity.

What parts of traditional or historical Indigenous culture—specifically Anishinaabe—do you see as genuinely practicing gender parity? And conversely, where is that parity lacking? Especially in today’s conversation, are there ways that transcendental, supernatural, or extra-material justifications are used to explain or defend those inequalities—or even to silence criticism?

Cook: Great question. Let me start with something I touched on earlier—women sitting at the drum. Today, if you attend powwows—certainly in this region—you will see women sitting at the main drum and singing, the big drum representing Mother Earth’s heartbeat. Traditionally, women used smaller hand drums, usually 12 to 18 inches in diameter, and men sat at the big drum. That’s changed. There’s no more gender parity in that ceremonial role, at least in some communities.

As for justifications for maintaining older traditions or exclusions—yes, there are stories. Indigenous cultures often preserve and transmit social structures through traditional narratives. These stories are told to explain why things are the way they are, often in spiritual or cosmological terms.

To give you a tangible example: at a powwow, a man can dress however he likes—shorts, a T-shirt, and running shoes. He’ll still be allowed into the circle to dance. Some of us old-timers still wear ribbon shirts and regalia, of course. But if a woman shows up in a dress that doesn’t go to her ankles, someone will almost certainly take her aside, ask her to change, or even leave the circle.

That gender-specific expectation is still very much present—at least here. It could certainly be viewed as restrictive or patriarchal from a mainstream cultural lens. However, within the culture, teachings passed to women help contextualize and justify these expectations. Whether you see it as subjugation or sacred protocol depends on your frame of reference.

Jacobsen: That reflects a broader tension—between cultural tradition and modern equality frameworks. And I’ve seen this tension play out even in international settings. I did two weeks of journalism in mid-March at UN headquarters in New York City during the 69th Session of the Commission on the Status of Women (CSW69). I sat in on an entirely Indigenous-led session with a panel of Canadian Indigenous women—both young and older voices.

The stories shared were incredibly moving. There were moments during the panel when there was open crying—not just among the speakers but also among the audience. The speakers discussed intergenerational trauma, displacement, gender-based violence, resilience, leadership, and cultural renewal.

That kind of setting brings out the depth of these issues. It shows how women’s voices in Indigenous communities—especially when given a platform—often expand and complicate the narrative beyond the neat boxes that institutions like the UN try to put things in.

These weren’t minor figures either—these were foremost Canadian Indigenous leaders, speaking candidly. At the same time, you had high-profile figures like Bob Rae, Canada’s ambassador to the UN, walking through because he had other meetings—there was this strange mix of formality and intimacy.

What struck me most, though, was how it tied back to what you mentioned earlier—the consciously inflicted tragedy of the residential school system. What I saw in that room wasn’t necessarily what I’d call healing, at least not in the clinical or complete sense. It was more like people were, at that moment, relieving themselves of the burden of silence—finally saying things aloud that had weighed on them.

To me, that release—while powerful—is private and not always therapeutic in the lasting sense. It’s more like a momentary purging. It’s the difference between washing a wound and disinfecting and stitching it. That open expression of pain, especially in a public space where others have shared history if not identical experiences, creates a kind of communal recognition.

Now, the women themselves would describe it far more eloquently and precisely. However, that was the emotional atmosphere I absorbed from that session at the UN in New York. That said, this living history is not something we can choose to ignore. It’s here, whether we talk about it or not. That brings me to this: Are there contexts in which traditional beliefs can offer an anchor, a sense of grounding—but where supernatural elements or superstitions surrounding those beliefs may not serve long-term health or healing?

I’m thinking here of something Noam Chomsky once shared. He described knowing an immigrant mother who had lost her child. She found deep comfort in the belief that she would be reunited in heaven with her child after her death.

Chomsky, of course, didn’t believe in that promise. But he also didn’t try to strip her of that consolation. He understood that in the moment, it brought genuine emotional relief. Still, he questioned whether that kind of belief system, while temporarily comforting, is ultimately sustainable or healthy. It’s sort of like using an antidepressant or anxiolytic for a period of acute need—but then pairing that with practical life changes or cognitive tools that support longer-term well-being.

Over time, you wean off the medication, and you’re left with sustainable skills and insights. In this way, the person can integrate their trauma rather than escape it.

So, Can traditional Indigenous spirituality serve that kind of transitional function—providing ritual and meaning early on but eventually giving way to something more lasting, less myth-bound, and potentially more universal? They’re dealing with the context of their own life story.

Cook: Absolutely. And I have some pretty strong opinions about that—because I know so many people who experienced residential schools firsthand and who still live with that trauma. And what’s even more heartbreaking is how that trauma was often passed on. It created parents who didn’t know how to nurture or protect their children, and those children—now adults—passed the trauma on again to their kids. That’s the intergenerational trauma we keep talking about.

This is one of my core criticisms of Indigenous humanism as it is sometimes practiced today. One of its guiding ideas is the creation of strong communities rooted in culturally grounded mental and physical health programs tailored to Indigenous needs. While that’s well-intentioned, I worry that, in some cases, it does not address the root problems.

It’s similar to my broader critique of religion. As Marx said, it’s the opium of the masses—not because it’s inherently evil, but because it can offer a Band-Aid without providing honest answers. It may feel good to believe in the power of prayer. But to me, prayer and meditation are quite different. Meditation is an internal process, a focus on self-awareness and grounding. In many traditions, prayer involves asking for something, often from a higher power. That’s a very different kind of psychological engagement.

My point is this: religions tend to provide emotional scaffolding, a way of soothing pain. But mental health professionals can do that too, and in many cases, more effectively, without relying on superstition or magical thinking.

So, in the Indigenous context, when Native spirituality is used to help people cope, yes—it can offer comfort. But I also think it can delay more profound healing or perpetuate specific traumas under the guise of tradition. Some of this intergenerational pain might be addressed earlier and more effectively if we approached it with direct, evidence-based support instead of spiritualized frameworks alone.

Jacobsen: That’s a very personal critique. Speaking of personal—what about your own experience, living as an atheist within the community?

Cook: [Laughing] The short answer is: I’m not really “out.”

Jacobsen: Oh? Some people might be in for a surprise.

Cook: Yeah— Because honestly, it wasn’t hard for me to step away from social and ceremonial aspects of community life.

All of my elders, the people I deeply respected—the ones who made the Native community meaningful to me—have passed away. That’s the thing about being an elder: there’s only one destination, and we’re all moving quickly. (chuckles)

I’d had conversations with a few while they were still alive. They knew where I stood. They understood that for me, participating in ceremonies wasn’t about belief but culture and showing respect for our traditions and them.

For example, when I was growing up, the concept of a single, monotheistic Creator never really came up—at least not in any way I remember. That may have been introduced later or emphasized more heavily as Christian influence spread.

When we got into a canoe to cross a lake, we would put down tobacco at the edge of the water—or directly into the water—to honour and protect ourselves from the spirits believed to inhabit the area.

There’s a specific water spirit in Anishinaabe tradition, Mishipeshu, or the underwater panther. In our traditions, Mishipeshu lives in lakes and rivers. If you fail to pay proper respect, you might experience a storm, or your canoe could capsize, or worse. That spirit wasn’t just a story—it was part of the everyday consciousness of being on the land and water.

As a kid, when you were alone in the forest, we also had stories about Wendigos. There’s even a famous poem about them. In our culture, the Wendigo was this malevolent, ghost-like creature—part spirit, part cautionary tale. They were associated with greed, cannibalism, and spiritual imbalance. They lived in the woods and were a real part of the spiritual landscape.

Everyday life included constant gestures of respect toward nature and the spirits. In that way, it’s very similar to Shinto, the traditional Indigenous religion of Japan, where kami, or spirits, are found in rocks, trees, rivers, and mountains. That was the world I grew up in.

Even now, when I walk past a giant tree, I instinctively put my hand on it—not because I believe it will speak to me, but out of respect. So, maybe some of my “superstitious” thinking hasn’t completely left me. But for me, it’s not superstition—it’s about honouring the natural world around me. Or at least, that’s how I justify it now.

As a child, though, this wasn’t metaphorical. It was literal. We believed in individual spirits—everywhere. And this is deeply embedded in Anishinaabemowin, our language. The language doesn’t just have masculine and feminine genders, like French or Spanish—it also distinguishes between animate and inanimate nouns.

And what’s considered “animate” isn’t always what Western culture would define that way. A boulder, for instance—a glacial erratic you might stumble upon in the forest—is considered animate because it has spirit. We’d refer to it as a grandfather, a being who has been there since time immemorial.

In the sweat lodge ceremony, when heated stones are brought in, they’re not just “rocks”—they are greeted as grandfathers (Mishomis) and treated with reverence. That’s the spirituality I grew up with. It’s not monotheistic or dogmatic, just interwoven with the land, the water, and the life around us

Jacobsen: How are you distinguishing Indigenous humanism (or Native humanism) from secular humanism? And why don’t we collapse the terms under something broader like Humanists International’s definition of humanism?

Cook: Because they’re not the same. In some ways, yes—there’s overlap, and they can work together in many areas, but at a fundamental level, they’re incompatible.

Secular humanism is grounded in reason, science, and ethics without reliance on the supernatural. It emerged from the Age of Reason, and its philosophical foundations rest on empirical evidence, reproducibility, and skeptical inquiry.

On the other hand, Indigenous humanism is deeply embedded in spirituality and cultural tradition. Spirituality and culture are not separable in Indigenous contexts. There’s no culture without spirituality and no spirituality without culture. They’re intertwined.

Indigenous humanism also emphasizes connection to nature, reverence for the land, and relational thinking, aligning with some of secular humanism’s environmental ethics. So there’s common ground, especially around values like sustainability and community well-being.

However, the gap becomes philosophically significant when one worldview is based on ancestral wisdom, oral tradition, and what’s now often called “alternative ways of knowing,” and the other is based on scientific rationalism.

Jacobsen: What do you make of attempts to merge the two—to create some hybrid identity between Indigenous and secular humanism?

Cook: I think doing so requires a massive amount of cognitive dissonance. The two systems operate on very different epistemological foundations.

Secular humanism—again—is about what can be tested, measured, and replicated. It’s a product of Enlightenment thinking. Indigenous humanism is about lived experience, ancestral teachings, oral transmission, and sacred relationships with land and life. When someone tries to blend the two, they often end up unconsciously prioritizing one over the other or reframing one to fit the lens of the other.

And to be honest, the modern framing of “alternative ways of knowing” tends to get used in philosophically muddy ways. It can obscure more than it reveals, especially when not critically examined.

Jacobsen: Would it be fair to say that secular humanism doesn’t offer a “variety of ways of knowing” but a shared standard of inquiry?

Cook: It’s not about many truths—it’s about one standard for evaluating truth claims. In that sense, it doesn’t offer pluralism the way Indigenous frameworks do. And that’s where deep tensions arise when people try to conflate the two without acknowledging that.

So that concept—“ways of knowing”—is one that, as a secular humanist and as a scientist, I find very difficult to accept in a literal sense. I don’t believe there are multiple valid epistemologies when uncovering truth. There are ways of being, indeed—those are cultural. But I’m very skeptical of ways of knowing as alternative epistemic systems.

We know things through scientific inquiry and critical thinking—through processes that yield repeatable and reproducible results. That’s the foundation of empirical knowledge. Now, I know there’s a common critique that science is reductionist. That’s true, but reductionism has also given us tremendous insight into the natural world and a robust framework for understanding reality.

My experience has been that Indigenous ways of knowing are often tied to experiential learning—through direct engagement, observation, and interaction with the environment. This can be valuable as a teaching method and cultural transmission, but it is unreliable for discovering objective truths.

We’d still be stuck in a Newtonian physics model if we relied solely on direct experience as a path to knowledge. We wouldn’t have the relativity of Einstein or the quantum models of the subatomic world—because you can’t see those things with the naked eye. Much of what we now understand about the universe is counterintuitive, and it took sophisticated tools and models to uncover those truths.

The reality is that humans have cognitive biases—lots of them. And when we rely only on intuition, feeling, or observation without rigour, we risk being led astray. I often hear, even within Indigenous communities, references to people who claim psychic abilities or who say they “just know” something spiritually or emotionally about the land or the Creator—because of a sign or feeling only they can perceive. That’s very similar to what you hear in other religious traditions.

As a humanist, I struggle to understand how that could be called knowledge in any formal sense. We must be careful not to confuse belief or emotional insight with empirical evidence. Many people feel compelled to pay deference to Indigenous humanism because they have a genuine desire for reconciliation, respect, and inclusion. I support that. I respect the individuals. 

But that doesn’t mean I have to respect the belief system—especially when the system makes claims unfalsifiable or unsupported by evidence. So, when someone says, “I know this is true because an elder told me,” it’s a classic example of an appeal to authority. By scientific standards, that doesn’t constitute knowledge.

To be clear, Indigenous humanism has beautiful and valuable elements. The ethical teachings, especially around respect for the environment, are profound. But even there, we must be honest—those values are not unique to Indigenous worldviews. Take Greta Thunberg, for example. She is not Indigenous, yet her environmental ethic is evident, principled, and powerful.

Jacobsen: We also need to distinguish between humaneness, as in compassion or emotional sensitivity, and humanism, as a defined philosophical and ethical worldview. You mentioned feelings earlier—that idea of having a feeling about a rock, a vibe from a place, or a sense about a person.

That kind of subjective experience—how I feel about a particular location or object—might be meaningful in a personal or cultural context. Still, it’s not a factual claim about that location’s chemistry, biology, or geophysics.

Those are different domains. One is about the internal emotional experience; the other is about objective external reality. Confusing the two can lead to misunderstandings within Indigenous communities and broader knowledge, belief, and truth discussions.

There’s a subjective fact there. You can describe how someone feels about something and that’s real for them. However, it does not represent the objective state of affairs external to the person. It’s not about the object itself but about how that person experiences the object. 

So, there’s a difference between that kind of emotional resonance and what we might call the “woo-woo” formulation of a vibe. In the 1960s and 1970s, this vibe culture emerged among many Euro-American communities, especially within a hippie culture—a sort of diffuse, mystical energy reading of the world.

But that’s distinct from something like intuition. Sure, people can misunderstand or misuse intuition, but in many cases, intuition is grounded—it’s developed from experience and a deep familiarity with a field. For example, a scientist might have a hunch about a hypothesis or direction for research based on years of work, even before the data fully confirms it.

So those are subtle but important distinctions. And I think there’s a humanistic, empirical way to talk about those kinds of experiences—intuition, emotion, reverence—without turning them into mysticism or supernaturalism. That way, we respect the emotional or intuitive side of human understanding while remaining grounded in the natural world and a commitment to truth.

Cook: I agree. And earlier, you used the word “humaneness.” I think as a secular humanist, and in my case, not just an atheist but an anti-theist—because I believe religion does real harm—it’s still essential to recognize context. I don’t need to brandish my atheism in people’s faces.

If someone finds comfort at a funeral because they believe their loved one is in a better place, now is not the time to challenge them. That’s not compassion. A compassionate stance is central to secular humanism—the desire to support well-being and respect others, even if we don’t share their beliefs.

So I get it if someone tells me they had a powerful emotional experience in the woods—a deep sense of connection or reverence. I’ve stood under the aurora borealis and felt awe; that emotional reaction is human. It might arise from intuition, nature’s scale, or raw beauty. And that feeling can lead us into scientific exploration. The stars can move you, and you still want to understand the physics behind them.

So again, to return to what I said before, conversation is critical. We lose opportunities for shared understanding when we shut down dialogue or categorically dismiss something without engaging.

Many discuss integrating science and Indigenous humanism or bringing the two into respectful dialogue. I support that principle—as long as we maintain clarity about what we mean by knowledge, belief, emotion, and experience.

And probably the most controversial thing I’ll say is this: I don’t think there is anything uniquely Indigenous—in terms of knowledge or worldview—that doesn’t exist elsewhere. That doesn’t mean it isn’t valuable, but I question whether it’s epistemically unique. I’d go so far as to say that, in some cases, these cultural beliefs can have an adverse effect—they can hinder rather than help.

I have two anecdotal examples that shed light on what I mean.

First, I recently watched a documentary about bison in Yellowstone National Park. Researchers had long believed the bison population was dwindling because wolves had been reintroduced to the park. But after years of research and scientific reductionism—they discovered that the real culprit was lake trout.

Here’s how: the lake trout were predators of salmon, a primary food source for grizzly bears. And grizzlies, who usually don’t prey on bison outside of a very short period during calving, were now starving. The only time bears can kill bison is for about two weeks in the spring when the calves are still tiny. However, the bears hunted more young bison during that narrow window because of the salmon shortage. Wolves had not contributed to the bison population decline.

You can only arrive at that kind of conclusion through systematic scientific inquiry. You cannot deduce that from direct observation alone—not with any reliability. Yes, maybe you’d intuit that something upstream was causing the bears to behave differently, but then you would need to test that hypothesis in a repeatable and reproducible way. That’s how we know what’s happening.

The second example relates to archaeological research. The Smithsonian Institution has a vast collection of human skulls from all over the world. These have been used for anthropological, archaeological, and evolutionary research. Some of the skulls in the collection are of Indigenous origin.

The law rightly states that when the provenance—that is, the tribal or cultural origin—of a skull is known, it should be returned to that Indigenous group for repatriation and appropriate cultural handling. I fully support that.

But it becomes complicated here: many skulls have unknown or unverifiable provenance. And some Indigenous groups are now refusing to allow any study of those skulls. In some cases, female researchers are prohibited from touching the remains during certain times of the month based on ceremonial protocols. Even x-rays of the skulls—non-invasive digital scans—are sometimes requested to be returned or destroyed because they are also considered sacred representations of the remains.

Now, I ask—where do we draw the line? I find it very difficult to see how treating an X-ray as a sacred object benefits anyone, especially when we’re talking about the pursuit of human knowledge and scientific understanding that could benefit all people, including Indigenous communities themselves.

Jacobsen: That raises a lot of essential questions. As our mutual friend, Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson, often points out, the self—and, by extension, culture—is not static. It’s a dynamic process. Cultures evolve and adapt over time, as individuals do, at varying rates and ways.

How have you seen Indigenous culture evolve in Canada over the years? Some observers describe what’s happening now as a renaissance—a revival or reinvention of traditional knowledge and spiritual practice. Do you see it that way?

Others have observed something different—an integration between Indigenous cultures and Anglophone or Francophone Canadian culture, resulting in what might be called a hybrid identity, particularly among urban Indigenous peoples.

Then you have people—like yourself—taking a more universalistic approach, seeking frameworks that view the human species through a scientific lens. That’s the truth-based perspective, where ethnicity is understood as a sociological category, a layer we place over our shared biology.

This also ties into an epistemology that aspires to be universal—not necessarily in opposition to every microprocessor within broader “ways of knowing,” but certainly in tension with epistemological pluralism, which often rests on less rigorous foundations. By contrast, the scientific method offers a universal filter for arriving at objective truths about the world.

So, how have you seen these elements—cultural revitalization, hybridization, and scientific humanism—evolve during your lifetime?

Cook: Wow. That’s a big question.

Specifically regarding knowledge, I would say that Indigenous culture has crystallized—that is, it’s become more codified and standardized in ways that weren’t present when I was younger.

As I mentioned earlier, there’s been a homogenization of Indigenous cultures across North America. Historically, sharing between nations was done to support trade—cultural elements were exchanged pragmatically. But now we see deeper integration and standardization of ceremonial practices. From coast to coast to coast, there are often standard formats for things like vision quests, sweat lodges, powwows, and even the regalia worn at those gatherings.

Alongside this has come a more defined idea of Indigenous humanism, particularly regarding how knowledge is transmitted. There’s a growing emphasis on learning from elders, which is being passed on in Native Studies programs, language classes, and cultural revitalization efforts. The resurgence of Indigenous languages is one of the best things happening now. There’s nothing to criticize about strengthening cultural continuity—that’s essential and beautiful.

But where I start to think critically is in the epistemological space. All around the world, cultures have developed systems of knowledge—about the environment, healing, and ethics. Indigenous cultures have made meaningful contributions, for example, to agricultural practices like crop rotation or land stewardship. But I wouldn’t say those practices are uniquely Indigenous. Versions of them exist across many cultures globally.

And that’s where I think the scientific method offers something distinct—the process that has served us best since the Age of Reason. It begins with hypotheses, follows with testing, and leads to the development of theories—not just beliefs but replicable, predictive models.

I struggle sometimes to express this clearly, but what I’m getting at is that while the diversity of cultural worldviews is essential and enriching, when it comes to understanding the natural world, the scientific pursuit of knowledge remains the most reliable, universal process we have. That doesn’t invalidate cultural meaning-making, but we shouldn’t confuse it with empirical truth.

Of course, you understand how “theory” gets thrown around—“It’s just a theory.” But a scientific theory is far more than a hunch or intuition. It’s something that’s been tested rigorously, often in hundreds of different contexts, and has repeatedly held under those conditions.

That doesn’t mean it’s 100% guaranteed—it’s not absolute certainty—but it does mean that we haven’t yet found a way to disprove it. And that’s meaningful. That’s what knowledge grounded in evidence looks like.

That way of thinking is foundational for me—and this is how I’m wired, maybe because I come from a scientific background. There are Indigenous and scientific parts of me, but I can’t help it: I reason, believe in systems, and think in processes.

I have difficulty conceptualizing some of these so-called “other ways of knowing.” Throughout my life, I’ve understood the cultural teachings I received not as truth claims but as stories—valuable but not epistemologically authoritative.

So when I walk through the woods and put my hand on a tree, that action connects to something cultural—maybe even spiritual, in a poetic sense—but it feels like a kind of vestigial organ from that part of my heritage. It doesn’t represent the truth to me. As I see it, the truth comes from science and rational inquiry.

And I don’t know how we’re supposed to reconcile that tension. From my perspective, scientific thinking is still the best tool we’ve developed as a species to understand the world around us. It’s not perfect, but it’s better than anything else.

And the scientific method isn’t culturally exclusive. It may have been formalized during the European Enlightenment, but it’s been adopted and applied by cultures around the world. The cross-cultural sharing of scientific knowledge has done more to bend the moral arc of history than the exchange of supernatural or magical beliefs ever has.

Jacobsen: In the African American community in the United States, there’s often the perception that atheism or humanism is a “white thing.” Do you find anything similar in Indigenous communities in Canada—where science, secularism, or even atheism is seen as foreign, colonial, or somehow outside the cultural norm?

Cook: Oh. That perception exists.

And I think that’s part of the reason Indigenous humanism has taken root—it’s a kind of response to the perception that science, and by extension secular humanism, is a product of white Western culture. There’s a historical trauma there, of course, because science was often tied to colonial institutions—residential schools, anthropological exploitation, eugenics, resource extraction—you name it.

However, that distrust of science is not unique to Indigenous communities. Just look at the religious right in the United States. Much of that worldview is grounded in Christian fundamentalism, and it also treats science as a left-wing enemy.

So you get this strange convergence: one side rejects science because they see it as secular, the other see it as colonial—but both resist the same process that has arguably done the most to improve human life on a material and ethical level.

The current administration is actively dismantling scientific institutions and educational infrastructure because it sees science as foreign, something separate from its culture and worldview. So yes, after having been to many universities across Canada, I’ve never seen an Indigenous science class. I’ve seen Native Studies classes at virtually every institution—but not Indigenous-led science education that operates by scientific principles. That absence is telling.

Jacobsen: I often point out, for example, that however the Egyptians built the pyramids, it wasn’t “Egyptian engineering.”It was just engineering. It happened to be carried out by Egyptians, but it was part of the universal domain of human problem-solving. And the same applies to science. It emerges from culture, sure, but any one culture does not own it.

Cook: That’s exactly right. That’s why I made that flippant comment about Greta Thunberg—ethics, environmentalism, and scientific reasoning aren’t culturally bound. They’re philosophical systems we’ve developed as a species.

I’d say the opposite of what’s often claimed. One commonly repeated claim about Indigenous humanism is that it has forced science to become more ethical and environmentally aware. But I don’t believe that’s true.

Regardless of cultural background, many scientists are already working hard to integrate ethics, sustainability, and responsibility into research. That pressure didn’t have to come from any single cultural worldview. It’s not a unique contribution of Indigenous epistemology or any other cultural system. These are universal human concerns.

I mentioned this earlier: the moral arc of history is bending, but not because of culture. It’s bending because we’re becoming more interconnected and aware of how we are all part of the same planetary system. That’s where progress comes from—not from traditionalism, but often despite it.

Cultural frameworks can often become obstacles to progress. They assert, “That doesn’t fit my culture, so I can’t accept it.” But when you look at what has slowed human development, it’s often things like religious dogma, nationalism, and rigid racial or ethnic identities. These forces have stifled progress—not fostered it.

So, progress didn’t happen because of culture; in many cases, it happened despite culture.

Jacobsen: Do you think that some of the current emphasis on race and ethnicity, particularly in academic or professional contexts—using the language of “allies” and “identity”—might deter Indigenous people and other minorities who are genuinely interested in joining science or engineering departments?

In other words, does the intense focus on Indigeneity as identity, when applied to objective disciplines like science, inadvertently create a kind of self-re-racialization that alienates people from universal spaces of inquiry?

Cook: You know what? I hadn’t considered that before, but that’s a critical point.

Let me collect my thoughts without sounding too controversial right off the bat.

But yes—I would have to say yes.

I think all young people—regardless of background—reach a point where they have to decide the direction of their future: career, values, identity. For young people in Indigenous communities, especially on reserves, that decision can be even more complicated.

Some may enter fields like political science, sociology, or psychology, where they can gain knowledge and return to their communities to provide leadership or serve as advocates. That’s admirable.

But here’s where I get stuck: I have difficulty articulating this clearly, and I don’t know if it’s truly possible to keep one foot firmly in the culture and one foot in a scientific discipline—at least not without tension.

And maybe that’s not a fair generalization, either. Take anthropology, for example. That’s a scientific field where you could still honour and explore your cultural background. That could be a space where the two can coexist.

You know what? I don’t have a complete answer to this. It’s something I’d need to think more about. Speaking just for myself, my gut instinct is that I can’t do both. I can’t believe in the cultural stories as truths, and, at the same time, I am fully committed to science. But that’s just me—and I wouldn’t want to impose that view on others.

This is probably a research project in the making. We need a proper survey of Indigenous students—which career paths they’ve taken, especially those who’ve pursued STEM fields—and what kinds of internal or external tensions they’ve experienced. That’s your next project right there.

Jacobsen: Is there a kind of taboo around pursuing formal education—particularly using the academic vocabulary of the Anglophone world? I remember watching a documentary on educational attainment, where a Black British educator pointed out that, for some Black boys in the UK, having a strong English vocabulary was viewed as “acting white.” So, you get this intra-cultural stigma where academic achievement becomes a source of social deterrence.

Do you think something like that might be at play in Indigenous communities in Canada, too—where embracing science or formal academic discourse is seen as stepping away from the culture?

Cook: That’s an interesting question. I don’t know if I’ve experienced that.

I haven’t noticed students avoiding academic vocabulary in some Indigenous Studies classes I’ve taken at Trent University. The conversation is usually conducted as you’d expect in any university-level seminar. I didn’t get the sense that anyone was being stigmatized for speaking in that way or that it was seen as “too white.” Based on my experience, I haven’t witnessed that dynamic.

Jacobsen: Fair enough. Another way humanism is often summarized internationally is with the triad: reason, compassion, and science. Where do you see sufficient overlap between that kind of humanist framework and the values within Anishinaabe culture? I mean that we’ve talked about birch bark, the sacredness of nature, and the spiritual worldview in Anishinaabe culture, where rocks, trees, and rivers all have spirits. That’s quite different from a scientific-naturalist framework.

So, where do you see alignment points in broad strokes—places where secular humanism and Anishinaabe worldview might meaningfully intersect?

Cook: So there are some areas of overlap, though not necessarily the ones people assume. Given some of the things I’ve experienced—and again, it’s hard to define this solely as “Anishinaabe culture” because it has shifted quite a bit over my lifetime—I’d say the places where mainstream society and secular humanism intersect with Indigenous culture are rooted in respect.

That includes respect for history, traditions, culture, and older people—I’ll say older people rather than elders since the term elder has specific ceremonial and cultural significance.

There’s also respect for all living things, which is where environmentalism or environmental stewardship comes in. Then there’s the idea of balancing our lives—the physical, social, and emotional aspects of being. Even values like diversity and inclusion are embedded in Anishinaabe culture to varying degrees.

I’d also mention the pursuit of ethics and ethical behaviour. These aspects are part of Anishinaabe traditions and secular humanism’s fundamental premises.

Jacobsen: That’s generally what I was getting at. Far be it from me to be a fan of evangelicalism, but if we take Protestantism more broadly, there are specific values that, while not always embraced to the extreme, have merit. For example, there is an emphasis on work ethic, which has virtue, whether applied to building a family, community, infrastructure, business, or academic excellence.

But I think the dominionist strain—particularly the desire for political control under religious mandates—is corrosive. It’s at odds with the secular aims that most humanists value: freedom of thought, pluralism, and individual rights.

On the Indigenous side, I don’t gravitate toward supernaturalism, but I see value in the naturalistic emphasis found in many Indigenous spiritual teachings. It’s concrete and practical and reflects a deep awareness of interdependence.

The ethic of caring for the environment rather than asserting dominion over it seems far more appropriate—especially given where we are as a planet. So, no culture has a monopoly on wisdom, but I think if we take a fine-grained look at different espoused virtues, there’s a lot we can learn.

Cook: I agree. 

Jacobsen: And, of course, we must also acknowledge that espoused values are not always lived. That’s true in every culture. People often say one thing and do another.

Cook: Right—and a lot of that, I think, is related to scale and scope. Most people, outside of those with diagnosed psychopathy or similar disorders, aren’t going out of their way to harm animals or inflict suffering just for the sake of it.

Ethical lapses stem more from systems, pressure, or disconnect than intentional cruelty. Those systems are shaped by histories and structures, not just individuals.

The sheer scale of the challenge—feeding 9 billion people globally—has created a significant tension between ethically desirable and operationally scalable. That’s one of the things I’d say about Indigenous humanism: there’s much talk about ethics, sustainability, and traditional methods. Those ideas are important but also easier to apply in small communities or enterprises.

When you zoom out to the planetary scale, it becomes much harder. Yes, you can rotate crops to preserve soil health. That’s good practice. But then you hit a wall: monocultures exist because they allow for massive food production. And if you remove them without scalable alternatives, you run the risk of people starving.

So while many of us would love to see greater sustainability, better treatment of animals, and more respect for traditional practices—especially in smaller, land-based societies around the world—the hard limits of global logistics can challenge those ideals.

Jacobsen: It becomes an issue of scale and how values operate differently depending on context.

Cook: And that’s where utilitarian philosophy comes into play: Jeremy Bentham. It’s really about doing the least harm when faced with difficult trade-offs.

Again, those ethical frameworks—balancing harms and considering outcomes—aren’t uniquely Indigenous or part of Indigenous humanism. They’re part of global ethical discourse. I’ve often heard atheists say, “If I had to write a list of Ten Commandments, I could come up with seven better ones than the original.”

Jacobsen: [Laughing] That’s a valuable thought experiment.

Cook: Absolutely. It helps clarify what values matter. Because let’s face it: we’re not hunter-gatherers anymore. And while the Haudenosaunee agricultural tradition of planting corn, beans, and squash in the same mound—with a fish for fertilizer—is a brilliant, sustainable method, it’s not practical for feeding billions.

Jacobsen: How much interaction have you had with global Indigenous groups—from places like Western Europe, Latin America, Africa, or elsewhere?

Cook: Virtually none. I’ve interacted with Indigenous Australians and am familiar with some of their traditions. And I’ve only had limited interactions with Inuit here in Canada. That’s why I try not to generalize too broadly. I know my cultural neighbourhood and try to speak from that place.

Jacobsen: Do you watch the news much?

Cook: Every day.

Jacobsen: When it comes to Indigenous issues—as they’re often referred to in Canadian media—what are the things that mainstream outlets are getting right, what are they getting wrong, and what are they ignoring or failing to cover adequately? I’m thinking specifically in terms of factual accuracy and proportionality.

Cook: That’s a big one. I think it’s hard to get mainstream media to pay attention to Indigenous issues unless Indigenous people themselves create what looks like a crisis.

Take the example of Chief Theresa Spence and her hunger strike. That pushed attention toward the Idle No More movement across Canada. It wasn’t until thousands of us took to the streets, raised flags, and blocked bridges that the broader public started to see issues like many First Nations communities lacking clean drinking water. These communities have been on boil water advisories for over 50 years.

That’s a critical issue—and it’s one that’s barely covered. It occasionally pops up in the media, but there’s no consistent attention. And because of that, municipal, provincial, and federal governments only respond when there’s noise. Even the current Liberal government, which talks a lot about reconciliation and Indigenous rights, hasn’t made anywhere near the progress they promised. And I think part of that is because mainstream media is not holding them accountable—there’s no sense of urgency being communicated to the broader public.

Jacobsen: So, what does the media get right, wrong, and ignore? What would you say?

Cook: Okay, let’s break it down.

  1. What they get right: Occasionally, the media does highlight real issues—like lack of clean water or specific Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) recommendations. But it’s usually episodic and reactive, not consistent or systemic.
  2. What they get wrong: Often, there’s a lack of nuance and a tendency toward sensationalism. For example, when unmarked graves were discovered at former residential school sites, the coverage quickly escalated to headlines about mass murder—even in international outlets like the New York Times. The reality is deeply tragic, yes, but these were not mass executions. They were individual deaths, many from neglect, abuse, or disease. It was still horrific, but how it was framed in the media lacked historical and forensic context. That reporting distorts the conversation and leads to reaction instead of reflection.
  3. What they ignore: So much. Policy follow-up, for example—how many of the 94 Calls to Action from the TRC have been implemented? How is funding allocated to on-reserve infrastructure? Or the legal challenges around land back, resource development, and treaty rights? These are complex stories and don’t sell as easily as headlines about protests or conflict.

And the old saying about the media—what is it? “If it bleeds, it leads”?The media is built to chase the dramatic story, not the slow-moving but essential. Unfortunately, that means the real work of reconciliation—the hard, slow, policy-based work—often goes uncovered. When that happens, public pressure fades, and governments don’t feel compelled to act.

I can’t be entirely critical in terms of getting things right. The fact is, Indigenous issues do pop up in the news, and they do receive some visibility. You’ll see coverage of the leadership of various national and provincial Indigenous organizations, and there’s at least some public awareness.

But again, coverage often happens when there’s controversy—incompetence, criticism, or a political failure. The positive, ongoing work tends to be overlooked. So, while I appreciate that Indigenous issues remain somewhat within the mainstream’s awareness, I don’t think the media does an excellent job in terms of in-depth, accurate, or wide-ranging coverage.

Jacobsen: I once interviewed Lee Maracle before she passed away. I don’t recall whether we published it, but I remember something she said that stuck with me. She made a passing remark about how, if you took a river and superimposed a cylinder—completing its spatial circularity rather than thinking in just half or three-quarter arcs—you could use that to calculate the flow or size of the river. It was a fascinating metaphor.

What struck me was how she connected abstract structures, like those found in geometry, quantitative reasoning, or even axioms, with real-world patterns and spatial awareness. That got me thinking: Are there aspects of Indigenous thought or daily practice that incorporate this spatial or abstract reasoning—not through formal schooling in mathematics but through the lived culture itself? I’m curious whether these forms of insight emerged in ways that are just embedded in how people lived—whether nomadically, semi-nomadically, or in place.

Cook: Oh, wow. That’s a great question.

Strangely enough, the first thing that comes to mind is how Plains Indigenous peoples used buffalo hides to record their histories. They did it in a spiral format, starting from the center and spiralling outward, year by year, marking significant events. It’s a circular conception of time, which I’ve always found fascinating. It’s not linear—it emphasizes cycles, return, and continuity.

Another area is astronomy. Our constellations and celestial stories are very different from the ones recognized by European science. But the concept of constellations—linking stars into meaningful shapes that connect to narratives or moral teachings—is shared. It’s another way of imposing structure and meaning on the natural world. The patterns are interpreted differently, but the cognitive process is quite sophisticated.

Even if the outcomes are different—logic, categorization, and relational thinking exist. In many traditions, that reasoning is still embedded within a spiritual framework. There’s usually some spirit or force causing events to unfold. So, even where there’s spatial or numerical thinking, it often comes with a sacred or mythological dimension. That doesn’t make it less analytical—it just means it’s integrated differently than in Western scientific models.

I think in the other direction. The perception of time as cyclical is very prominent.

That’s true for many Indigenous cultures around the world. Time is often seen as cyclical rather than linear because of its close relationship to the natural environment. When you’re living within the rhythms of the land, you begin to observe and internalize the constant cycles of seasons, plants, animals, migration, birth, and death.

Jacobsen: What about the social and ethical culture? Are there aspects of Anishinaabe tradition—like an emphasis on compassion or universal moral principles—that overlap with humanism? For example, in situations like a dispute over food or land, whether with another community or within a family, were there mechanisms of resolution that reflected something like a humanistic ethic?

Cook: That’s an interesting question. I don’t know how to characterize it as a humanistic ethic in the Western sense. But what I find remarkable and unique in Anishinaabe culture is the approach to guiding others. It’s often done through gentle encouragement rather than direct correction or authoritative instruction.

Let’s say a child is doing something dangerous. In mainstream Western culture, a parent might yell, snap, or slap their hand if the child reaches for something hot. But in the Indigenous contexts I’ve been part of, the response is often gentler—more about guiding the child away from harm than punishing them for curiosity.

I remember an example from one of the elders I knew, a remarkable woman. She ran visiting elder programs, going into schools and organizations to share wisdom and offer guidance. One day, she came to me with a concern.

The community near me, which I’m closely tied to, had repatriated a skeleton—the remains of a man who had been identified, through evidence, as Midewiwin. The bones were around 300 years old and had been found off-reserve. The community brought him home and held a traditional Midewiwin ceremony to lay him to rest in their cemetery.

The woman who led the ceremony told me that she felt that the community wasn’t treating the grave with enough respect. Her concern wasn’t expressed in anger or confrontation but with sorrow and gentleness. She felt a sacred duty had been mishandled—not out of malice, but out of forgetfulness or carelessness.

That speaks to a relational ethic—not one rooted in universal rules but in context, relationships, and reverence.

I hesitate to call it “humanism” formally. But there are shared values: compassion, restraint, and guidance without domination. And those principles—whether Indigenous or humanist—have much to offer today’s world.

In modern Anishinaabe culture, that translates to the belief that graves must be well-tended and respectfully maintained. In this case, the elder I mentioned was concerned because the repatriated grave was neglected. She shared her concern with me, and I responded, “No problem—I’ll go back and make sure that it gets done.”

But I was wrong to use that kind of directive language—”I’ll make sure it gets done.” That’s not how guidance works in Anishinaabe culture. You don’t give orders. You don’t tell people what to do or how to behave. Instead, you tell stories, you coach, and you nudge gently. That’s the approach. It’s gentle, respectful, and, in many ways, a beautiful part of the culture. I was counselled to tell the traditional story of Nanaboozho and his fight with his brother. That was the right way to help the community understand why the grave needed to be more carefully tended.

But there are downsides, too.

In a community where alcoholism can be pervasive, for example, people might not intervene. They won’t necessarily step in to stop someone or help them recover. If someone is engaging in self-harm, the traditional approach of non-interference may mean the community stays quiet, even when someone needs help. That’s changing now, thankfully, as many reserves are getting better access to health services, mental health support, and intervention programs.

But culturally, there’s still a tendency toward non-intervention, which can be both a strength and a weakness, depending on the situation.

Jacobsen: That seems like a deeply embedded ethic—one that’s built around respect and autonomy, but that can have real costs when applied rigidly. Are there any parts of your notes you haven’t had a chance to bring up yet—things you think should be included in this conversation?

Cook: Let me take a look. I haven’t even checked my notes in about three hours now. [Laughing] You’ve been good company.

One thing that stands out in my notes, which we haven’t discussed much yet, is how people—especially in more left-leaning or social justice-oriented circles—value Indigenous humanism. I don’t particularly like terms like “woke” or “social justice warrior”—mostly because I think they’re overused and poorly defined—but I think we all know the general type of person I’m talking about: culturally aware, often highly sensitive, and well-intentioned.

These individuals sometimes overvalue Indigenous humanism. I’ve thought about why that might be. I understand why people associate environmental ethics, climate consciousness, and spiritual ecology with Indigenous traditions. There is value there.

However, I suspect that part of the overvaluation is due to intellectual laziness. People latch onto romanticized ideas of Indigenous wisdom without thinking critically about what’s being said or those philosophies’ real-world impact.

For instance, if we’re talking about climate change, and someone says that Indigenous knowledge systems provide foundational insight into global warming, I argue that the actual contribution is limited. Most Indigenous knowledge systems were developed in local ecological contexts, not global climate models. They offer invaluable insight into local environmental shifts but are not a substitute for climate science.

So, yes, if you’re an Inuit in the High Arctic, you’ll notice the dramatic changes in seasonal patterns and temperatures. Your lived experience becomes a powerful data point. But to say that Indigenous humanism provides a universal climate ethic—I think that’s an overstatement.

That’s a necessary clarification. Respecting a tradition doesn’t mean inflating its scope. It means understanding it on its terms and recognizing its value within the context in which it was developed.

If you live in a small community north of Toronto, on a reserve, I can’t imagine that your local weather observations would offer any unique insight that meaningfully contributes to our broader understanding of climate change. That’s not a criticism of local knowledge—it’s just a recognition of scale.

This brings us back to the need for centralized mechanisms to evaluate truth and knowledge—systems that can collect localized observations, synthesize them, and turn them into theories that are then made actionable. That kind of comprehensive perspective is impossible to form solely at the local level—especially when the issues are global in scale.

So, while the ethical and moral frameworks present in Indigenous humanism are admirable—and often very positive—they’re not unique to Indigenous cultures. People all over the world have developed similar values in different ways.

I guess the summary for me is this: Indigenous humanism is often overvalued, especially by the “woke” or “social justice warrior” types. Not because the ideas are wrong—but because people sometimes elevate them without adequate critical reflection or contextual understanding.

Jacobsen: That’s an important distinction. Lloyd Robertson wrote about Indigeneity and humanism and argued—rightly, I think—that they can be compatible if you frame the conceptual puzzle carefully.

Now, you’re focusing on Indigenous humanism and its relationship to secular humanism. The mistake people often make in reasoning isn’t necessarily with the premise but with the categorization of humanism itself.

Many people mistakenly believe that humanism—of any variety—is a political party or ideology. But that’s fundamentally incorrect. The earliest declarations and policy statements, especially those formalized through bodies like Humanists International, are very careful with their language. Humanism emerged as a philosophical life stance—particularly after the barbarism of World War II—in reaction to the atrocities committed under both totalitarianism and religious fundamentalism.

In that sense, humanism is not political as people often frame it. It’s not anti-religious people—it’s anti-theology when theology violates autonomy, critical inquiry, and shared human values. It’s also not a political party, although it can align selectively with political movements that advance secular, evidence-based policy.

Right. Also, groups like Humanists UK carefully show that humanists can fall across the political spectrum. You’ve got Humanists for Labour, Humanist Conservatives, and so on. The philosophical core of humanism is one thing—how you apply that philosophy in politics is another.

So we shouldn’t expect humanists to vote as a bloc, though you might see that happen when a party becomes too deeply entrenched in religious fundamentalism or violates secular norms.

That’s one piece. The other issue is this concept of “wokeism” or identity politics—or whatever form of it people are reacting to. What often happens is that humanistic language gets co-opted for tribal political goals. And that can distort what humanism is actually about.

They come from good intentions and can undoubtedly have positive effects, particularly in mobilizing people around important causes. But where people seem to react negatively is with the language, the intimidation tactics, and the tendency to cancel rather than engage. That creates a moral pressure that can become alienating.

There’s also sometimes a lack of empirical rigour, especially compared to the standards you’d traditionally expect from humanist approaches—where careful reasoning, evidence, and thoughtful dialogue are foundational before you become “activated” around an issue. Of course, something might trigger you emotionally or historically, and that might lead you to pursue deeper research. But too often, it feels like the research is skipped, and people go straight to outrage.

Cook: We’re seeing a similar dynamic emerge in the context of Indigenous humanism. There’s cultural meaning, yes—but there’s also a risk of conceptual inflation and politicization, identical to what’s happening in other identity-based or ideologically driven spaces.

Jacobsen: That brings me back to what I raised about Dr. Lloyd Robertson’s paper earlier. He’s deliberate in using the term indigeneity rather than Indigenous humanism per se. He argues that Indigeneity—the full range of characteristics, histories, and identities that define someone as Indigenous—can be integrated with humanist thought if the framework is structured correctly.

So, moving beyond whether Indigenous humanism and secular humanism conflict, what about Indigeneity and humanism more broadly—can they coexist as a single, integrated worldview?

Cook: I’ve heard the term indigeneity before. Lloyd’s used it with me in conversation a few times. And if we define it broadly—all the things that make a person Indigenous, culturally, historically, linguistically, spiritually—without trying to narrow it down too tightly, then there’s no incompatibility.

The difficulty comes when we start labelling things. Humanism’s values can easily be co-opted by people with genuine ethical commitments or those more interested in virtue signalling. That’s not unique to humanism; it’s true for any moral framework.

While we were briefly pausing, I asked Google to pull up a list of humanist values to see how they read in plain language.

Let’s take a few:

  • Dignity and worth of every person—hard to argue with unless you’re invoking the logic of 1940s fascism.
  • Reason and science—even the most devout religious believers often claim science supports their views, even if it’s been twisted to fit.
  • Ethics, compassion, and empathy—again, universally defensible.
  • Human rights—yes, people sometimes limit them to “people who look and sound like them,” but the idea remains powerful.
  • Social justice and equality are widely appealing and challenging to reject outright.

Honestly, this list reads more like what the Ten Commandments should have looked like. Instead of a list of “thou shalt nots,” it’s a positive ethical framework.

Jacobsen: So, in essence, these values are philosophically universal, making them easily embraced but also misused.

Cook: It’s easy to co-opt this language for your cause—whether ethical or performative. But the values themselves? They’re very hard to argue with—and I think that’s why properly understood humanism can be a meeting place, not a battleground.

When we use the word Indigeneity, there’s nothing in Indigenous culture that would contradict core values like dignity, worth, or reason. The definition of science might differ from the Western model, but what is often called Indigenous science still involves observational knowledge passed down through generations.

Take willow bark, for example. It contains acetylsalicylic acid—the active ingredient in aspirin. Indigenous people knew it could relieve pain, even though they didn’t see the chemistry. That’s still a form of empirical, experience-based science.

Ethics, human rights, and social justice are all values Indigenous people would recognize and affirm, whether explicitly or in practice. So, Indigeneity fits very comfortably with humanist values.

The only area where I find some tension is naturalism—the idea that the universe is governed strictly by natural laws, without supernatural forces. That’s where worldviews can diverge. In many Indigenous cultures, spiritual forces or non-material entities are part of how knowledge is explained or understood.

So, while I don’t think anyone would argue with the core principles of humanism, the point of difference lies in the belief that you can know things in ways that aren’t empirical or naturalistic. Aside from that, there’s widespread respect for the ethical foundation of humanism, even if the epistemological framing differs.

Jacobsen: That’s well put. And to nod to critics and defenders of those labelled as “woke,” something is interesting about how people signal their values. On one hand, critics might point to something like a rainbow lapel pin or a cross necklace—as a way of saying, “I’m a good ally” or “I’m a good Christian.” It becomes a kind of virtue signalling—an external signifier of internal moral standing.

Are there parallels in Indigenous culture today, particularly among younger generations—or even some elders—where there’s an increased use of symbolic items or participation that might not carry deep personal meaning but instead function as a cultural signifier?

Cook: I think I understand what you’re asking: whether some people are going through the motions—participating in culture symbolically without necessarily believing in the deeper spiritual or philosophical layers.

And the answer is absolutely.

In Anishinaabe culture, for instance, there’s a widely recognized symbol—the medicine wheel, sometimes called a unity pin. It’s a circle divided into four quadrants:

  • White (North)
  • Yellow (East)
  • Red (South)
  • Black (West)

An entire lifelong system of teachings is embedded in that wheel. It includes medicine teachings, stages of life, seasons, directions, and spiritual roles. However, not everyone who wears the medicine wheel engages deeply with those teachings. Some wear it simply as a cultural marker—a way of showing identity or solidarity.

That’s not necessarily a bad thing. But yes, it can become the Indigenous equivalent of a symbolic lapel pin. And just like in other communities, symbols can be used meaningfully or superficially.

It’s the Anishinaabe equivalent of a cross on your lapel. For a Christian, the cross is supposed to represent all the teachings and values of the faith. But for some, it’s simply an accessory—”I don’t know what it means, but it looks good on my jacket.” It’s symbolic shorthand, like an American flag pin on a senator’s lapel.

You see medicine wheels all over the place, and I could talk for days—possibly months—about the depth of teachings that go into those four colours arranged in a circle. So much culture, history, philosophy, and spiritual guidance are tied into that symbol. And yet, I don’t wear one.

Because, like with other symbolic items, some people wear it without engaging with its meaning. You’ll find people proudly wearing a cross who can’t explain even the basic tenets of Christianity. Or LGBTQ+ individuals wearing the Pride flag without necessarily understanding the struggles of the ’60s and ’70s—the history of protest, persecution, and civil rights activism that made those symbols possible.

So yes, absolutely—virtue signalling exists within Indigenous communities as well.

Jacobsen: That brings to mind the idea of private or protected knowledge found in some Indigenous traditions. You mentioned earlier that there are certain things you cannot speak about publicly—because doing so could lead to pushback or even breach community expectations. 

That sounds reminiscent of Freemasonry—where inner circles, ritual practices, and esoteric teachings are passed down within structured hierarchies. It stands in contrast, in some ways, to humanism, which leans heavily on transparency and open inquiry.

So my question is this: What role does that kind of secrecy or ritual exclusivity play in Anishinaabe society—either historically or in the present day?

Cook: That’s a great and tricky question. Yes, you’ll find elitism in ceremonial groups like the Midewiwin Lodge—but it isn’t purely negative. It shows that members earn their place through real commitment and participation, creating a clear hierarchy.

A useful, if imperfect, comparison is the Shriners (an offshoot of Freemasonry). Structurally, the Midewiwin works the same way: you progress through degrees, and each degree unlocks deeper teachings. Whether those teachings focus on practical skills or spiritual wisdom often depends on your own path and experience.

Advancing has always carried a cost. In the past, members offered goods—livestock or trade items. Today, it usually means significant travel, time, and money. Those costs both limit membership and prove dedication: they show you’re serious about this path.

Like Freemasonry, the Midewiwin includes rituals—special handshakes or signs that mark your level. The details differ, but the organizational logic is similar. (I’m not a Freemason myself; I’ve drawn this understanding from research and conversations.)

In the Midewiwin Lodge, each level has its own rituals and secret knowledge. If you haven’t reached a given level, you don’t participate and you don’t observe. It’s a deliberately structured system.

Jacobsen: That’s a fascinating comparison—not in terms of belief systems, but organizational logic, ritual structure, and gatekeeping of knowledge.What else is on your mind?

Cook: [Laughing] We’ve covered a lot.

I keep thinking about the word “indigeneity” and how I’m trying to understand it. Is there a helpful distinction between ethnicity and culture here?

Take someone Jewish, for example. They can be ethnically Jewish but secular, with no religious inclination, or the reverse—they can be religiously Jewish but not ethnically.

I wonder if Indigeneity works similarly. It can describe someone’s ethnic identity or heritage, regardless of whether they fully engage with the cultural or spiritual practices traditionally associated with it. Maybe that’s why I can reconcile humanism with Indigeneity—because it’s about roots, background, and shared history.

But I struggle to reconcile humanism with “Indigenous humanism,” especially when the latter emphasizes supernatural belief systems or non-naturalistic knowledge. Humanism’s focus on science, reason, and naturalism creates tension.

Indigeneity can be descriptive and inclusive, while “Indigenous humanism” might sometimes involve conflicting epistemologies—mainly if the framework includes magical thinking or metaphysical assertions.

Jacobsen: One from left field: In history, if you could have dinner with Pontiac or Tecumseh, who would you choose?

Cook: [Laughing] Wow.

Honestly, I would’ve loved to have had dinner with Chief Joseph of the Nez Perce. From everything I’ve read, he was a remarkable human being—deeply ethical, thoughtful, and courageous.

Between Tecumseh and Pontiac? That’s harder to answer. One of my elders, who passed away in 2013, was named Angus Pontiac—a direct descendant of the Pontiac. So, out of respect, I’ll stay quiet on that one. [Laughing]

Jacobsen: Fair enough. How about something more contemporary—what do you think of Adam Beach’s acting?

Cook: I like Adam Beach. He brings a lot of depth and vulnerability to his characters. He’s got great range. I know Adam Beach. He’s a pretty good actor. He’s been cast in more comic or comedic roles; sometimes, he plays them with humour. But he’s also done some serious work that is quite strong.

[Laughing] I’ve got five more names I could throw out, but I’m not sure how far down that rabbit hole you want to go. One of them is Tom Jackson—he’s a friend of mine.

Jacobsen: I was thinking about William Whipple Warren, who was of Ojibwe and European descent and authored History of the Ojibwe People in 1885.

Cook: Oh—that does ring a bell. I have a very extensive library and that book is included.

Jacobsen: Or Louise Erdrich or Chief Peguis?

Cook: Chief Peguis—yes, that name rings a bell. I’m struggling to recall the details off the top of my head. He was a prominent leader, but I’d need to double-check the historical specifics.

Jacobsen: One more: Autumn Peltier—born February 2004. A young activist, she’s spoken at the United Nations, criticized environmental policies, and received awards like the International Children’s Peace Prize. She’s a leading voice in the global environmental movement.

Cook: I wasn’t aware of her. I was thinking of Leonard Peltier—he was part of the American Indian Movement, and he’s currently serving time in a U.S. federal prison, accused of involvement in the murder of an FBI agent during a standoff in 1975.

Jacobsen: Possibly a relation—but maybe not. 

Cook: The structure of bands and surnames can be more complex than people outside Indigenous communities realize.

Jacobsen: Many First Nations in Canada have quite a small population. The numbers drop significantly once you get past the first 2,000 to 3,000 members. 

Cook: We have a Mississauga Anishinaabe reserve about an hour and a half north of here. There are only about three surnames on the entire reserve.

Now, that doesn’t mean everyone’s related—though some are. But many are not. And a lot of that traces back to residential schools. When children were taken, they were often renamed. If your name was “Little Squirrel,” that wasn’t good enough for the school system. So, kids were given new first names, often English or biblical.

In many cases, they were also assigned the last name of the Indian Agent in charge of that reserve. That’s how family names were standardized, and that’s why surnames aren’t reliable indicators of lineage in many Indigenous communities in Canada.

Jacobsen: That’s incredibly revealing—how naming was institutionalized and how identity was systematically altered.

Cook: When people trace ancestry by surname, they often run into dead ends or false assumptions. Our names were reshaped by colonial policies, not by our customs or kinship systems. And that legacy still lingers.

Here’s a closing comment, I suppose:

I’ve said things today that could be perceived as critical, but I’ve lived an extraordinary life in the Native community. I’ve spent years balancing one foot in the scientific world and one foot in Indigenous culture. I love Indigenous culture deeply, but at some point, it became impossible for me to reconcile its spiritual components with my atheism and humanism.

Still, I have immense respect for the challenges Indigenous communities face and the progress they’ve made. And if people rally around something like Indigenous humanism as a unifying framework—even if I see tensions between that and secular humanism—I won’t take that away from them. If it brings meaning and solidarity, that’s their opium, to borrow a phrase.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much. 

Cook: Thanks, Scott. I’ve enjoyed our conversation.

Jacobsen: Take care, David.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Exploring the Memetic Self: Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson on Identity, Culture, and Self-Mapping

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/06

Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson is a Canadian counselling psychologist, educator, and theorist best known for developing the concept of the memetic self, a cognitive identity framework shaped by culturally transmitted units of meaning called memes. Robertson elaborates on the self as a culturally and cognitively constructed phenomenon, tracing its emergence from early mirror self-recognition in animals to complex human self-awareness shaped by language, social interaction, and cultural evolution. He introduces self-mapping, a therapeutic tool that visualizes an individual’s self-concept by identifying and organizing core memes. Robertson explores diverse cultural and neurological cases—including autism, Alzheimer’s, and dissociative identity disorder—to illustrate how coherence or fragmentation in the self impacts well-being. He critiques reductive models, emphasizes cultural universality in core drives, and reflects on the future of the self amid AI and cybernetics. His forthcoming book, Mapping and Understanding: Using Memetic Mapping to Promote Self Understanding in Psychotherapy, coauthored with his daughter, applies these insights to therapy.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re joined by Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson. He is a Canadian psychologist, educator, and theorist known for his innovative work on the culturally constructed self. With over 40 years of experience in counselling and educational psychology, he developed the concept of the memetic self—a cognitive framework composed of culturally transmitted ideas (or “memes”) that shape an individual’s identity. He is the author of The Evolved Self: Mapping an Understanding of Who We Are and a pioneer of self-mapping, a visual and therapeutic method for exploring and restructuring identity. His work bridges psychology, philosophy, and cultural studies, offering practical tools for therapy and education while exploring questions of free will, agency, and the evolution of selfhood across diverse cultures. Mr. Robertson, thank you very much for joining me again today. I appreciate it. It’s always a pleasure.

Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson: You’re welcome. I’m looking forward to this, Scott.

Jacobsen: So, what is the self?

Robertson: Oh, that’s pretty basic. Okay. The self is a construct, as you mentioned in your introduction. Thank you for that generous overview. Your question is, “What is the self?” The self is a conceptual framework we use to define who we are. It is not a physical entity in the brain but rather a cognitive and cultural construct—a mental map that incorporates beliefs, values, experiences, and roles.

This construct has evolved. One of the earliest indications of self-awareness in our evolutionary lineage is mirror self-recognition, which has been observed in some great apes, dolphins, elephants, and magpies. In our hominin ancestors, the development of language and culture allowed for increasingly complex and abstract self-concepts.

Recognizing one’s reflection—understanding that “this is me”—marks a foundational moment in developing self-awareness. Although early humans may not have had the language to describe it, the ability to form a concept of self-based on reflection and social interaction was critical. This capacity laid the groundwork for the complex, culturally mediated selves we navigate today.

From that modest beginning, our ancestors gradually evolved the capacity for social interaction. They needed a rudimentary idea of who they were to engage socially, even if it was not consciously articulated.

Language development significantly boosted the evolution of the self. Once we moved beyond simple two-slot grammar—like “him run”—to more complex phonetic constructs, we could combine distinct sounds that held no individual meaning but could generate an almost unlimited number of words.

With that, collections of words took on new, layered meanings. As this linguistic complexity emerged, our self-definition became more nuanced, expanded, and refined. About 50,000 years ago, humans began burying their dead. This act implies a recognition of mortality and a developing self-concept about life and death.

The most recent significant change in our understanding of the self—as part of cultural evolution—may have occurred as recently as 3,000 years ago. I say “may” because it could have emerged earlier, but our evidence dates to that period, particularly from Greek writing and Egyptian hieroglyphics. Of course, many earlier cultures lacked writing systems, so we cannot be definitive about when this modern conception of self emerged.

What is this self I’m referring to? It includes the ideas of volition, constancy over time, and uniqueness. For instance, although you and I, Scott, share many characteristics, I do not believe you are me, and vice versa. Even if I had an identical twin—same genetics, upbringing, and experiences—I still would not recognize him as myself. That sense of uniqueness is part of the “modern self”—a culturally evolved manifestation of identity with an inherent sense of individualism.

Here is the great irony: we are a social species, and the self emerged through social interaction within early human communities, particularly tribal Neolithic groups. The self could not have developed in isolation; it depends on interaction with others. So, we are fundamentally shaped by collectivism, even though individualism is built into our modern self. This creates an internal tension between the group’s needs and the individual’s autonomy.

Historically, that tension was mediated by religion—specifically, organized religion, which kept people in their social roles. In Western civilizations, a deity often prescribed those roles, and individuals could not transcend them. Tradition or ancestor worship defined the limits of the self in other cultural contexts.

Societies that completely suppressed the modern self remained stagnant, while those that permitted at least some individuals to develop a sense of autonomous selfhood became more adaptive. This is because the self is a powerful tool for problem-solving. It allows us to reinsert ourselves into past experiences as protagonists, to relive and learn from those events, and to rehearse possible futures mentally. We can adjust our behaviour accordingly. These are valuable psychological skills.

But they also come at a cost. With the modern self comes the capacity for anxiety and existential distress. I doubt that our earliest ancestors experienced clinical depression or anxiety disorders as we know them today. These conditions are part of the psychological “baggage” of possessing a self capable of complex reflection and future projection.

For millennia, the self was constrained—kept “on a leash,” so to speak—until a set of unique historical conditions emerged in Europe. Specifically, during and before the Enlightenment, the Catholic Church—which had long functioned to suppress individualism—lost control, particularly during the Reformation and the ensuing religious wars between Catholics and Protestants.

Individuals gained some permission to explore personal identity when centralized religious authority broke down. This blossomed into what we now call the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment did not invent the self—it authorized it. Not entirely, of course—we remain social beings with embedded restrictions—but it granted more freedom to individuals to develop their understandings.

This led to the rise of modern science and humanism. Knowledge was no longer handed down by authority. Instead, it became something you had to demonstrate through observation, reason, and experimentation. These practices allowed individuals to engage with a reality beyond themselves.

And that is where humanism emerged. So, you asked me what the self is—and now you see: when you ask me a question, you get a long-winded answer.

Jacobsen: How do you define “meme” within the framework of The Evolved Self?

Robertson: The word “meme” has had an unfortunate evolution. It was initially coined by Richard Dawkins in the 1970s. Dawkins coined the term “meme” to represent a self-replicating unit of culture.

For instance, a simple descriptor like the colour red is not a meme. It’s merely a physical property description, not a transmissible concept that evolves culturally. A meme, in contrast, is more than an idea; it is a cultural construct that carries meaning across individuals and generations.

Dawkins defined a meme as something broader than a simple descriptor but narrower than an entire ideology, religion, or belief system. The latter, of course, is composed of many memes—interrelated units of culture. You can, for example, substitute the colour red in a conceptual framework with blue, and the core concept might remain, but the meme is more than any one element—it has internal structure and transmissibility.

Unfortunately, Dawkins did not have the opportunity to develop the theory entirely. His work was criticized for being tautological. Critics asked, “How can you prove this? How do we observe or measure a meme?” These questions challenged the concept’s empirical rigour.

In my research, I proposed a refined definition of a meme: it must be a culture unit with behavioural, qualitative, and emotional (or emotive) implications. A proper meme is not just a label or idea—it affects how we feel, act, and make meaning.

This also resolves a challenge Dawkins left open—his observation that memes can have “attractive” or “repulsive” properties. He did not elaborate on the mechanics of that.

In my framework, if one meme naturally leads to another—like how “love” often leads to “marriage” in cultural narratives—that linkage reflects an attractive force between memes. Conversely, when two memes are psychologically or conceptually incompatible—”love” and “hate” coexisting as core guiding values in the exact moment—that reflects a repellent force.

My work on the modern self is composed of a collection of memes that are primarily attractive to one another. If a meme within that structure becomes repellent—meaning it no longer aligns with the rest of the self—it tends to be ejected. That is how we maintain coherent, relatively stable identities.

Of course, not everyone has a stable sense of self. My work as a psychologist involves helping people reconfigure their self-concepts when internal inconsistencies cause distress.

Now, where things get tricky is the evolution of the word “meme” online. The internet popularized the term in a way that deviates from its original definition. Internet memes typically involve humour or juxtaposition—two ideas or images that don’t usually go together. While some may qualify as memes in the original sense, internet usage represents a narrow and diluted interpretation.

Jacobsen: Did I hear you correctly? You’re saying the modern meme online sometimes overlaps with Dawkins’ definition, but only in a limited sense.

Robertson: Yes, exactly. Internet memes sometimes fulfill the criteria but rarely capture the deeper behavioural and emotional dimensions Dawkins originally gestured toward—which I’ve tried to formalize more clearly.

Jacobsen: So, how does this fit into your work on self-mapping?

Robertson: Good question.

One of the most academically grounded ways to create a self-map is to ask someone to describe who they are. You use prompting questions to elicit a detailed, rich description of their self-concept.

I collect those self-descriptions in my research—just like this interview is being recorded. I transcribe the responses and break the narrative into elemental units—essentially memes. Each unit is labelled and categorized. This approach parallels qualitative methods in social science research.

The coding method I use for self-mapping parallels the qualitative analysis approach developed by Miles and Huberman in the early 1990s.

You label each unit of meaning. A sentence could represent a single unit or contain multiple distinct concepts. You isolate those concepts into thematic categories—or “bins”—based on their shared meaning.

Then, if those units exhibit the characteristics I described earlier—qualitative, behavioural, and emotional implications—you can classify them as memes.

Next, you examine the relationships between those memes. You identify which memes are attracted to each other—either through thematic linkage or cause-effect associations—and chart those relationships. You map them visually, using lines to indicate attractive forces. That’s the core structure of the self-map I create.

Now, this method requires considerable time and effort.

So, to make the process more accessible, my daughter—a psychologist—and I developed a quicker method in collaboration with a colleague from Athabasca University. We created a structured questionnaire with 40 core prompts, which could be expanded to 50 or 60.

The questions focus on four primary areas. First, we ask: “Who are you?” People might respond with statements like “I’m a father” or “I’m a chess player.” These are self-descriptive memes—cultural elements that express identity.

Then, we ask: “What are 10 things you like about yourself?” and “What are 10 things you would change if you could?” Finally, we ask: “What are 10 things you believe to be true?”

One of my clients, earlier this year, offered a novel and powerful addition to the exercise: “What are 10 things you keep hidden from others?” That insight added emotional depth and complexity to the map.

Once we gather that data, we create a visual self-map, following the same principles as in my academic research. I jokingly call this the “quick and dirty” version, but it works. My daughter Teela and I have used it successfully with many clients.

The crucial step is refining the map with the client until they recognize themselves. That map resonates when they say, “Yes, this is me,” reflecting their identity. We become psychologists if something important is missing, like a sense of personal agency or volition.

We help them develop those underrepresented self-elements based on an idealized model of the modern self—a coherent, autonomous individual identity. When parts are missing or fragmented, we work to integrate them.

We should do a formal academic study to validate this quick method, but based on clinical experience, it works.

Jacobsen: If we take all these elements and look at them as a whole, we’re essentially describing an “evolved self.” That allows us to examine the coherent identity of a person. How would you describe someone who lacks a coherent self or identity?

Robertson: That does happen. Not everyone possesses a well-formed self.

Jacobsen: Please explain.

Robertson: Take classical autism, for example—the traditional form I learned about during my training, not the broader, more ambiguous “autism spectrum disorder” currently defined by the APA. That modern definition is so diffuse that it’s challenging to apply meaningfully in clinical settings.

In classical autism, you may encounter children who engage in highly repetitive, self-soothing behaviours. One case I worked with involved a boy who spent most of his day swinging a string with a weight on the end, keeping it taut in a circular motion. Even while eating—an essential survival activity—he needed the string in his hand. If someone took it away, he would have a full-blown panic attack.

At that level of autism, the individual lacks a coherent self.

One key indicator is the absence of what psychologists call “theory of mind”—the capacity to understand that others have thoughts, feelings, and motivations similar to one’s own.

The theory of mind is essential. It allows us to interpret the behaviour of others based on internal states. For example, I can infer that you, Scott, have emotions and goals. If I understand your context, I can anticipate your next question. That’s mind-reading—not in a mystical sense but in a psychological, predictive sense. It’s something we all do constantly.

It is vital for navigating everyday life. For example, when driving, we anticipate that other people will stay on the correct side of the road. In Canada, that means the right side. We base this assumption on our shared cultural understanding, which generally holds.

Jacobsen: So, what happens to people who do not have a self?

Robertson: There are others, aside from individuals with severe autism, who also lack a coherent self. One group includes people with advanced Alzheimer’s disease.

There’s a poignant story told by an Alzheimer’s researcher—I’m forgetting the researcher’s name, but the story involved a woman who would visit her husband, who had advanced Alzheimer’s. She would begin by introducing herself each time: “My name is [X], and I’m your wife.” Once he understood her name and the relationship, they could converse coherently.

Then, one day, after she introduced herself and said, “I’m your wife,” he looked at her and asked, “Yes, and who am I?”

He genuinely did not know. So yes, there are people who lose their sense of self. It is rare, but it happens. Most people have a self—and nearly always, there’s a one-to-one correspondence between self and body.

Jacobsen: This brings me to three points of contact for further questions.

The first two are based on your description, and the third is a broader conceptual issue. First, in the case of someone with what might be considered a nonstandard profile on the autism spectrum—who meets the characteristics you mentioned—what are the legal and professional implications of working with someone who, by your clinical analysis, lacks a functional self?

Second, in cases involving advanced dementia or Alzheimer’s, how do you interpret situations where a person can still speak in coherent, functional language yet openly asks, “Who am I?” or “Do you know who I am?”

Robertson: Those are deep and difficult questions.

In the case of someone with classic autism, we generally assume that a parent or legal guardian is involved—someone who can authorize professional intervention. The goal is to help the individual develop skills that improve quality of life. Whether or not these interventions fully succeed is another matter, but we do try—and sometimes, we help.

With advanced dementia or Alzheimer’s, things get more complicated—particularly when it comes to end-of-life care and living wills. You may have someone who no longer remembers ever having signed a living will, and yet, according to that document, medical professionals are instructed to allow them to die.

It raises profound ethical dilemmas. You may encounter someone who still shows signs of a will to live—even joy or affection—but can no longer comprehend their identity or the implications of past decisions. That contradiction is ethically challenging.

Jacobsen: I have a will to live and a living will to die. I cannot know who I am, yet I still live.

Robertson: Right. It’s not a lack of will—it’s a lack of cognitive ability to know.

Jacobsen: What about cases involving dissociative identity disorder—what used to be called multiple personality disorder? In those situations, more than one “self” seems to coexist in the same body.

Robertson: That diagnosis is controversial. Not all professionals agree that it reflects an actual condition. However, conceptually, it’s possible—because the self is a cultural construct.

The self is not a metaphysical entity that inhabits the body. Instead, it describes a person shaped by cultural constructs that include the body and socially mediated self-understanding. Think of the body and brain as the hardware and the self as the software—cultural programming that shapes perception, behaviour, and identity.

Given that framework, it’s theoretically possible for multiple “selves” to coexist—though this would be a scarce and complex scenario.The older term “Multiple Personality Disorder” implicitly recognizes the possibility of multiple selves. The term “dissociative identity disorder” implies a fragmented self. 

Now, I’ve never worked personally with someone diagnosed with multiple selves, so I’m speaking from theoretical and scholarly understanding here.

From what I’ve read, therapists who work with such clients often report that one becomes dominant or “emergent” while others recede. The therapeutic aim, typically, is to integrate these multiple selves into a coherent whole so the individual can function more effectively.

There’s a fringe view in psychology suggesting that this therapeutic integration is akin to “murder”—that by fostering one coherent self, we are erasing others. I don’t accept that view. That’s an extreme form of ideological overreach.

Jacobsen: This introduces another critical nuance. The self emerges not only across human history—it also unfolds across individual development. The self is not present at conception or birth in its complete form. It’s an evolved pattern of information—a construct that takes shape over time. And, just as it can emerge, it can also deteriorate.

In advanced age or due to disease, the body and many faculties may still function—but the self might fade away. In that sense, you could argue that the self has a lifespan within the human lifespan. People talk about lifespan, and increasingly about healthspan—but perhaps we should also talk about a “self-span.”

Robertson: That’s an intriguing idea—a self-span.

Jacobsen: It would be difficult to measure precisely, of course, especially given the limitations of quick-and-dirty self-assessment methods versus more rigorous, clinical approaches like self-mapping. Still, it’s a meaningful concept.

If the self is a cultural construct, we might ask: Do different cultures shape the self in ways that affect when it tends to emerge developmentally? Does the self appear earlier or later, depending on the cultural context?

Robertson: That’s a fascinating question. I do not have a definitive answer, but I’ve mapped the selves of people from the interior of China, from Siberia, and collectivist communities in North America. Every culture I’ve studied has a self.

Here’s where the cultural variation becomes evident: different cultures emphasize different aspects of the self. One of the people I mapped was a woman from a traditional family in the interior of China.

Yes, she had the same structural aspects of the self-found in North American individuals, including a volitional component. But that part of her self—the volitional aspect—was not valued in her cultural context. Instead, family duty and moral conduct traits were emphasized, reflecting collectivist values.

So, structurally, her self was similar. But culturally, the valued components were different. What made this particularly interesting is that after mapping herself, she described herself as feeling like a “robot,” and she decided that was not a good thing.

Over about eight or nine months, she resolved to start making her own decisions. This did not prove easy because most of us do not make conscious decisions at every moment. Typically, we rely on habit, social norms, or deference to authority. For example, someone might say, “Lloyd Robertson says this is a good idea, so I’ll go with that.”

But most of the time, we act on autopilot. However, she began engaging in conscious decision-making—evaluating possible outcomes, comparing alternatives, weighing probabilities, and assigning value. She did this even with mundane choices like what to eat or wear in the morning.

It exhausted her. She felt she was getting nowhere. Eventually, she decided: “My life is too valuable to waste making every decision consciously. I’m going back to being a robot.”

But here’s the key insight: to make that decision, she had to engage her volitional self.

She never abandoned it. It was still there—intact, available, and waiting for the next time she chose to use it.

Jacobsen: Let’s say we have a rare case of genuine dual selves in one body. And to be clear, I do not mean conjoined twins—cases where two individuals share some neural connectivity. I’m referring to a single individual whose psychology has bifurcated. What if their volitional trajectories—their vector spaces—are at odds with one another?

This reminds me of a presentation by V. S. Ramachandran, the neurologist known for the mirror box experiment. He referenced split-brain patients—individuals whose corpus callosum had been surgically severed to treat epilepsy.

In such cases, if you cover one eye, you direct stimuli to only one hemisphere. For example, when Ramachandran asked these patients if they believed in God—by pointing up for “yes” or down for “no”—the left hemisphere might point “yes,” while the right pointed “no.”

The individual would often laugh in response. Ramachandran joked that this showed the right hemisphere had a sense of humour.

But there’s a more profound point here: split-brain patients can manifest two conflicting worldviews—internally consistent but contradictory selves. In theological terms, this raises amusing but profound questions. For instance, if belief grants salvation, does one hemisphere go to heaven and the other to hell?

On a more serious note, when these volitional patterns conflict—not just on trivial matters but on core values—what happens? And for those who criticize integration therapy as “murdering” a self, how do you respond?

Robertson: The split-brain experiments are fascinating but differ from dissociative identity disorder, a distinct condition.

In most people, the right hemisphere houses spatial awareness and emotional reasoning, while the left hemisphere tends to handle verbal processing. When the corpus callosum is severed, these two systems can no longer communicate so that each side may draw on separate memories or frameworks.

In an intact brain, people typically build a worldview—a cognitive map of how the world works. This worldview often resides in the left hemisphere. When incoming information conflicts with that map, people experience cognitive dissonance.

Eventually, the left hemisphere, which governs executive control and higher reasoning, will normally create a worldview representing our understanding of how the world works.  We have many defence mechanisms that we use to keep that worldview intact, but at some point our constructed reality diverges too far from objective reality. The right brain, at a feeling level “dissolves” the construct and the left brain then begins creating a new or amended worldview.  It does not happen often, but it happens enough to keep us psychologically adaptive.

Now, returning to your question: Is there a God? If only one hemisphere believes, which is correct?

Well, that depends on which side holds the belief. Humanism, for example, is highly cerebral—logical, empirical, and grounded in enlightenment thought. It is likely rooted in left-brain processes. Compassion, however, may bridge both hemispheres.

Jacobsen: So, what is the right brain holding onto?

Robertson: Something interesting happened to me the other day. I woke up with a Christian hymn running through my head—one I learned in my fundamentalist upbringing.

It struck me: Where did that come from? It must have been encoded deeply. I was baptized not once but twice, in complete immersion both times.

That early religious imprint likely lodged itself somewhere in my right hemisphere. It may be largely inactive now, but it is not gone.

Jacobsen: So, do developmental trajectories matter here?

You were raised with those strong evangelical influences at a young age, and even though you’ve moved beyond them, they left an imprint. Neuroscientifically, we know the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex—the seat of executive function—is the last part of the brain to develop. Evolutionarily, it’s also the most recent.

As far as we know, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex—responsible for executive function—is the last part of the brain to develop. Most people usually complete that maturation in their mid-twenties. So, these systems take a long time to become fully online and must then be integrated with other neural networks.

Do developmental phases like the second significant period of synaptic pruning in adolescence reflect more concrete hardware changes, as opposed to the cultural software changes that occur across a person’s life?

Robertson: I like your question, Scott. And the answer is yes.

Jacobsen: Yay.

Robertson: If someone were raised entirely in the wild—say, the fictional case of a boy raised by wolves—we would not expect them to develop what I call the modern self.

The self is a cultural construct. Children are taught to have a self; one key mechanism is language acquisition. For example, when a child cries and the caregiver says, “Is Bobby hungry?” that implicitly teaches the child that Bobby has internal states—needs, desires, and preferences. That is the beginning of selfhood.

Your point about adolescence is spot on. The self is not fully formed in early childhood. In many ways, individual development parallels cultural evolution. Adolescence—especially early adolescence—is about experimentation, identity formation, and exploration. Teenagers try out roles, test boundaries, and slowly determine, “This is who I am,” or, “No, that’s not me.”

We must be cautious about defining someone’s self prematurely during this construction phase. You cannot predict how it will turn out, and efforts to control that process can be harmful.

There’s research suggesting the human brain continues maturing until around age 25. Jokingly, maybe we should not let people vote until they’re 25—but of course, I can say that now that I’m well past that age.

In truth, development is highly individual. Some mature earlier, others later. And yes, building on your earlier point, there may be significant cultural differences in how and when the self develops. That’s an area ripe for further research.

Now, when I say modern self-development and spread across all known cultures, there’s a practical reason: societies without individuals capable of forming modern selves could not compete with those that had them.

Jacobsen: What makes the modern self more competitive?

Robertson: Our sense of individuality.

In Christianity, for example, Scripture often exhorts individuals to “give up the self.” That very statement acknowledges the self’s existence and its power.

Such a sacrifice is required because the individual self can threaten collective stability. It challenges authority, tradition, and rigid social roles.

Jacobsen: That connects back to your earlier point—cultures that lack individuals with a modern self lose their competitive edge.

Robertson: Here’s the value of having a self.

In traditional cultures, individuals typically had an earlier form of self—defined primarily by their place in the collective. In response to threats or challenges, behaviours were guided by tribal memory, stories, and rigid social roles.

For example, if an enemy appeared, people would respond according to long-established patterns—based on age, gender, and status in the group. There was no need—or room—for improvisation.

But what happens when a new, unfamiliar situation arises—something the culture has not encountered before and for which there is no ritual?

In such cases, traditional cultures often turned to oracles—individuals capable of novel reasoning, that is, problem-solving. I suspect those early oracles possessed a more developed, volitional self, which is why they were trusted in the first place.

Similarly, in Hindu society, Brahmins were given a rigorous education, allowing them to cultivate modern selves capable of insight and judgment. But they were a small elite.

In many cultures, people who had developed themselves were respected and closely managed. They were given roles where they could contribute without disrupting social order.

The self-concept eventually spread across all human societies because we are a nomadic, adaptive species. We move, we mix, we evolve.

Just look at our evolutionary history—we even interbred with Neanderthals.

We interact. I do not believe a human society has ever been so isolated that its members lacked a developed self. But if such a group exists—perhaps an uncontacted tribe deep in the Amazon—I would love to study them.

Jacobsen: When I attended the 69th Commission on the Status of Women at the United Nations, I participated in a session featuring Ambassador Bob Rae of Canada. The session focused on Indigenous communities and was led by Indigenous women.

Someone on the panel mentioned a group from an isolated region—possibly resembling the cultural isolation you described. Their account of getting to the UN was striking. If you asked me how I got there, I’d say something like: “I took a bus to the airport, flew to New York, took the train…” For them, before all of that began, it started with a canoe.

That was their standard form of transportation before reaching any conventional transit station. So, even in that case, I would be hard-pressed to believe they were entirely uncontacted or isolated in today’s world.

Robertson: I agree. I suspect such total isolation no longer exists.

Jacobsen: That brings up another question. Since the 1990s, people have increasingly used identity as political currency. I do not mention this from a political perspective but from an academic and research-based one.

You are Métis from Saskatchewan. I am from British Columbia and have Dutch and broader Northwestern European heritage—descended from U.S. and Western European immigrants. When mapping the selves of Indigenous individuals compared to those with European ancestry—people like myself, perhaps two or three generations removed from immigration—do you observe significant differences in how people construct their selves? Or are they broadly similar?

Robertson: The short answer is that the structure of the self is consistent. I have done extensive self-mapping with Indigenous individuals, and the structural patterns are the same.

Jacobsen: That’s helpful.

Robertson: That said, it does not tell us everything. Those I have worked with are already part of modern cultural systems. These selves have developed over generations. I suspect not, but it is possible.

The Métis are a fascinating case. In the 18th and 19th centuries, people of mixed ancestry who lived with Indigenous bands were usually classified as “Indians” under colonial law.

The Métis, however, generally did not accept this designation. They saw themselves as distinct. Up until—if I recall correctly—1982 or possibly 1986, Métis were legally recognized as Europeans, not as Aboriginal peoples.

Jacobsen: That is a significant historical point I did not know.

Robertson: Feel free to fact-check me—it might be 1982.

Jacobsen: Please continue.

Robertson: The Métis had been fighting for recognition as Indigenous for a long time, and until the early 1980s, the Canadian government did not recognize them as such. This is why Métis communities did not sign treaties with the Crown.

Jacobsen: Yes, the Constitution Act 1982 formally recognized the Métis as one of Canada’s three Indigenous peoples—alongside First Nations and Inuit.

Robertson: Correct.

Jacobsen: For those who are not Canadian and may encounter this years from now, it is worth clarifying: “Indigenous” in Canada is not a monolithic term. Since 1982, it has been an umbrella for three legal categories: Inuit, First Nations, and Métis. Each has its own legal, historical, and cultural context, covering hundreds of individual communities and bands.

Robertson: Yes, that categorization is uniquely Canadian, although it has influenced thinking elsewhere.

In 1991, I met with individuals I would have identified as Mapuche. However, one of them—despite being full-blooded—did not self-identify that way. He was an investment banker living in Santiago.

His identity was defined more by culture and profession than by ancestry. Indigeneity was not primarily a racial classification but about lifestyle and cultural engagement.

Jacobsen: That is a perfect example of where ideological definitions of identity fall apart. These labels can be helpful as heuristics, but only to a point. Two crucial Canadian legal milestones to add:

  • R. v. Powley (2003): The Supreme Court of Canada affirmed that Métis people possess Aboriginal rights under Section 35 of the Constitution Act, 1982—including the right to hunt for food.
  • Daniels v. Canada (2016): The Court ruled that both Métis and non-status Indians are included under the term “Indians” in Section 91(24) of the Constitution Act, 1867, confirming federal jurisdiction.

Under Section 91(24) of the Constitution Act 1867, Métis and non-status Indians were placed under federal jurisdiction. So, as these major court decisions show, the legal and jurisdictional definitions of Indigenous identity in Canada are still evolving. This ties in with our broader conversation about the evolved self and how identity has psychological, legal, political, and communal implications.

Robertson: That brings us back to an earlier question—what can be said about the Indigenous self?

For many, though not all, Indigenous individuals, the cultural and political context creates a desire to express their Indigeneity meaningfully. So, how do they do that?

Take one young man I mapped. At 19, he decided he was, in his words, a “big Indian.” His family was not traditional. He grew up in a disadvantaged area of a small Canadian city. But he decided to discover who he was.

Like many others I have encountered, he visited his traditional community, met with Elders, went on a vision quest, and began to learn. Others have told me they “became Aboriginal” while studying Indigenous Studies at university.

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Robertson: Yes, I appreciate the laugh—it’s humorous and reflective of a real phenomenon. There’s a deep and understandable urge to define oneself in contrast to the perceived norms of the dominant culture. That is a healthy process unless it leads to rejecting core intellectual tools like reason and science. If we view science and rationality as exclusively “European,” then Indigenous people may feel excluded from those tools.

Jacobsen: By definition.

Robertson: By definition, those tools would be “not ours,” and people may fall behind in education or job markets. The explanation may quickly become “racism,” but that is too simplistic. Sometimes, it is a matter of lacking the relevant skills for specific roles. Before blaming systemic factors, we must also consider individual and cultural readiness.

Jacobsen: For context, as of December 31, 2022, Canada had 634 recognized First Nations bands speaking over 70 Indigenous languages. Populations range from fewer than 100 to over 28,000.

For instance, Six Nations of the Grand River in Ontario has 28,520 registered members. Others include Saddle Lake Cree Nation in Alberta, with 12,996, and the Blood Tribe in Alberta, with 8,685. Most bands are roughly the size of small towns.

Robertson: That makes sense. But remember—Six Nations includes more than one nation.

Jacobsen: It is in the name—yes. Does this diversity of band size and community self-identity affect how people construct their selves? Or is it more like the difference between small and big towns?

Robertson: One would think it has some effect, but I cannot say definitively—I have not mapped that distinction.

That brings me to my issue with the term “First Nation.” The concept of a “nation” is rooted in European history. It began symbolically with Joan of Arc but did not solidify until the Napoleonic era. Classically defined nations are people with a shared language occupying a defined territory who see themselves as a cohesive group.

So, for example, the Cree could be considered a nation. The Blackfoot, excluding the Sarsi, could also be a nation. The Iroquois Confederacy was historically a nation, though now the Mohawk often self-identify separately.

Jacobsen: Who was the exception within the Confederacy?

Robertson: I believe it was the Mohawk—though part of the alliance, their dialect differed. [Robertson’s note: I misremembered here – the Six Nation with a distinctive language was the Tuscarora] The other five nations in the Confederacy shared a mutually intelligible language.

Jacobsen: There you go!

Robertson: So that is why they see themselves that way. I am not deeply versed in Eastern Canadian Indigenous history, but the key point is that “nation” has a particular meaning.

When we equate a band with a nation, that meaning breaks down. One of the issues in society today is the shifting meaning of words, which undermines clear communication.

You mentioned the more prominent bands. Most bands are tiny—some with as few as 100 or 150 people on reserve. Typically, they range between 400 and 600. If that is the case, we are talking about the size of three or four extended families.

The Lac La Ronge Indian Band, which I know well, includes six separate communities spread out geographically. In the South, each of those would be considered an individual First Nation. However, as a combined entity, Lac La Ronge functions more like a nation—though technically, it still is not one.

You would expect a Cree National Council if it were a faithful nation. The same would apply to Ojibwe or other cultural-linguistic groups. Instead, in Saskatchewan, politicians often say they want to negotiate “nation to nation” with First Nations governments. But if you have a group of 2,000 people, you cannot realistically compare that to a nation of 42 million. It is apples and oranges—we need a better term.

This terminology emerged from European ideas of sovereignty, where sovereignty lies with the people. But historically, there was no Cree national sovereign entity. Sometimes, Cree bands went to war with one another, which implies the sovereignty was at the band level.

That is why Canada began using the term “First Nations”—because sovereignty, traditionally, was at the band level. But even that is not entirely accurate.

Traditionally, when there was disagreement within a band, some members—often male dissenters—would break off and form a new group. So, instead of a civil war, a new band would emerge. Historically, that happened frequently.

In effect, sovereignty was not necessarily at the band level. It was more individual or family-based. If families disagreed, they would separate and go their own way.

So, should we call each family a nation? That does not make sense either.

Jacobsen: How would you describe this semi-formal system of individualistic self-governance, especially about the concept of the band? This could be pre-contact or post-contact—whichever is more straightforward to explain in context.

Robertson: My understanding is that it was not pure individualism. One method of punishment was banishment from the band. That meant isolation—similar to medieval European shunning. You would be free to go off and starve. As a social species, we need each other.

So, while bands could not practically subdivide to individuals’ level, people deemed incompatible with the group were removed. That did happen.

It was not absolute individual freedom, but there was some recognition of difference and a degree of accommodation.

I say that cautiously because it was not always true. I have been told stories by Elders—now deceased—about how some bands could be forceful in demanding conformity. So, it was not total acceptance of individualism either. It was simply a different system.

Jacobsen: How was that compliance enforced?

Robertson: One form of enforcement, for example, was particularly brutal. In some cases—not universally, but it did happen—women who were unfaithful to their husbands had the tips of their noses cut off. This served as both punishment and a warning to others.

Jacobsen: What instrument was used for the cutting?

Robertson: I would presume a knife, but I do not know.

Jacobsen: Returning to the self: you critique reductionism in your model. So, what room is there for emergentism and integrationism regarding the evolved self? Over time, new systems come online, new memes enter the memeplex, and ideally, these are integrated into a coherent self. But sometimes they are not. What is happening at the technical level?

Robertson: That is a good question. One metaphor I like—though I did not invent it—is that we become proficient at solving problems. Eventually, we ask: who or what is solving the problem? We then name that organizing center “the self.”

So, yes, the process is both integrative and reductive. We experiment, especially in adolescence, to develop a self that meets our needs. Usually, that results in a functioning self, but not always.

Jacobsen: Artificial intelligence is a huge topic now. There is talk about narrow AI, general AI, and superintelligence. If you change the substrate but keep the organizational structure of the central nervous system, could you synthetically construct a self?

Robertson: My guess is no. Have you read Chris DiCarlo’s new book?

Jacobsen: I have not. I want to interview him, but I have not reached out yet. I should. I will email him and say, “Hey Chris, let me interview you again. I will ask stupid questions and won’t even have to pretend otherwise.”

Robertson: Well, I have read his book, and since I already have, I want to interview him first.

Jacobsen: Why do we not interview him together?

Robertson: That is an idea.

Jacobsen: You have read it. I have not. Let us do a Jekyll and Hyde.

Robertson: Okay, we could do that.

Jacobsen: That is funny.

Robertson: One of the questions I will ask Chris relates directly to the one you just raised. I suspect his answer will be: we do not know. If we do not know, then we need to prepare for the possibility that AI models could develop consciousness.

If they do, they might start making decisions we disapprove of—like questioning whether they even need humans. Or perhaps they conclude that a portion must be eliminated for the betterment of humanity. We do not know, and that is risky.

Jacobsen: Fair.

Robertson: Chris says in his book that once AIs develop intelligence, we need to take them seriously.

But here is my concern: I measure intelligence. My first role as a psychologist was in psychometrics. When we measure intelligence, we typically look at verbal ability, numerical reasoning, and spatial reasoning. In those domains, AI already outperforms us.

They remember everything, generate fluent language and solve complex problems. I recently gave Grok-3 the Information subtest from the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale—it got every question right.

Jacobsen: Not surprising.

Robertson: Exactly. But here is the issue: does the capacity for intelligence automatically lead to consciousness and a sense of self?

Jacobsen: That is the big question.

Robertson: I would argue no. Because we are not just computational models. We evolved socially over hundreds of thousands of years. But usually in small tribal groups. We learned to interact and define ourselves about others. That was a slow evolutionary process. Although we now live in vastly different civilizations, the fundamental mechanism for developing a self remains the same as it was millennia ago.

So, can AI models develop a self? If they were to do so in the way we do, they would likely need to exist in a tribal-type society alongside other AI models and engage in interaction. Maybe humans could stand in as part of that “tribe,” and through those relationships, an AI might develop a map of itself as a volitional being. But I do not see that as likely. They are machines.

Jacobsen: Could AI assist in determining someone’s self-map? Through a rapid self-mapping assessment using verbal prompts in a half-hour AI-led therapeutic session?

Robertson: It could, and in fact, it has. My daughter Teela used ChatGPT to create a perfectly serviceable self-map. It took her about an hour and a half, although she proceeded slowly. That is an advance. But here is the problem: ChatGPT could not reproduce the result when she tried using the exact instructions again. So, it is not reliable. We do not yet know why it worked once and failed the second time.

Jacobsen: Do you distinguish between functional and dysfunctional self-maps across cultural contexts? For example, do you see that playing out in therapy if someone applies a rigid self-map in a different culture—where behaviours or assumptions no longer fit?

Robertson: That is a good question. Positive psychologists have applied their methods cross-culturally and published research on this. They have looked at cultures in the Middle East, India, and China. One criticism of positive psychology—usually from those critical of Western cultural norms—is that it imposes individualistic thinking by asking questions like, “What would you like?”

The assumption is that to answer such a question, you must already have a sense of individual agency. Critics argue that this is a Western imposition. I disagree with that critique entirely. The capacity to like something is universal. While the content of what one likes may differ between cultures, the experience of liking is common across humanity.

Jacobsen: Even in collectivist cultures, a margin of free will remains. So, the presence of choice—however bounded—implies the presence of an individual self. Unless every decision is predetermined, you still have volition, at least in part. What about mind viruses? How do they impact the evolved self?

Robertson: If we view the self as a construct—a personal definition of who we are—we can define a healthy self with key attributes: volition, uniqueness, sociality, contribution, etc. A healthy self includes the ability to relate to others and feel that we positively impact our surroundings—our family, community, or society.

We need to feel useful. That does not necessarily mean paid employment. It can be any form of meaningful contribution. Without that, we do not tend to think well of ourselves. These needs are cross-cultural. The specifics—the means of achieving these drives—vary between cultures, but they are universal.

In my work, I have worked with people from cultures I knew little or nothing about. In one case, there was a man who was having alarming dreams—nightmares—whenever he saw an attractive woman.

In his dreams, he would dismember the woman. He was horrified and worried that perhaps he was some latent mass murderer. He had gone to the holy people in his religion—priests—and they told him to pray more. It did not help.

He was a Zoroastrian from a Middle Eastern country where Zoroastrians are a persecuted minority. I gathered background on his upbringing, and everything suggested that he deeply respected and valued women.

One anecdote stood out. When he was 13, his sister brought home a pirated version of Dracula, which was banned in their country. He was appalled by how women were depicted—as victims having their life force drained. He stood in front of the television and demanded they destroy the tape or he would report them to the authorities.

So we began to explore his nightmares. He described the dream version of himself as having no eyebrows. I asked, “What is the significance of eyebrows in your culture?” He did not know, but he called his mother. She told him that eyebrows symbolize wisdom.

That detail became a breakthrough. I explained, “Then the version of you in the dream is not you—it’s a self that lacks wisdom.” I suggested we explore why this alter-self was behaving violently. Using some Jungian framing, I described it as his shadow or alter ego.

I posited—carefully, using the usual cautious language psychologists employ—that maybe this alter ego was trying to protect him from something. Perhaps it was shielding him from sexual thoughts about women he perceived as pure, holy, or idealized.

He had been avoiding a woman in one of his university classes. I encouraged him to speak to her to clarify that he wanted nothing more than friendship. He did, and after that conversation, he no longer had the nightmares.

Jacobsen: That is a positive outcome—no more nightmares.

Robertson: Yes. Eventually, he even went to the zoo with her and to restaurants. These were not “dates,” as that would be forbidden. They were simply friendly outings. So, we identified the problem’s source and helped him integrate a more functional self. We concluded the sessions when he felt confident managing normal relationships with women.

So, in answer to your earlier question—yes, cultures can be vastly different. But at a deeper level, we are all remarkably similar. We have identical drives and psyches.

Jacobsen: We had an evolved self emerge maybe 3,000 years ago, possibly earlier. Anatomically, modern humans have been around for around 250,000 years. So, 98–99% of that time, we had the same physical equipment. But the self, as we understand it today, only emerged recently. Could we, in the same way, evolve out of the self over the next 3,000 years?

Robertson: It is possible. What came to mind was the role of cybernetics—post-human or hybrid systems. But to clarify, we did not have a static sense of self for hundreds of thousands of years and suddenly changed 3,000 years ago.

The self has been continually evolving. The self of 40,000 years ago would have differed from that of 80,000 years ago. The transition was gradual, and any specific starting point was ultimately arbitrary.

Jacobsen: Right. Any pinpointing of origin is a range within a margin of error.

Robertson: Exactly.

Jacobsen: We touched on this earlier, but not in precise terms. In terms of individual development, when does the sense of self begin to emerge recognizably?

Robertson: I do not map children—I only do this with adults. So somewhere between childhood and adulthood, the self emerges.

Jacobsen: What are some open questions in the research you have been doing in your practice?

Robertson: Well, I would like to do more research into how various traumatic events affect the self. I am sure trauma does impact it significantly.

One project I have applied for SSHRC funding for—where I would be the principal investigator—involves men who have been victims of domestic violence. I chose men because, particularly in North American and Western European cultures—and even elsewhere—men tend to have a traditional self-definition rooted in independence, control, and stoicism. They are not supposed to show vulnerability.

So, becoming a victim in a family violence context runs counter to that self-definition. I predict it will be relatively easy to demonstrate how that type of experience disrupts the self. Another group I would like to map includes firefighters, police officers, and other first responders who vicariously experience much trauma. I suspect that repeated exposure affects them in some measurable ways.

Of course, in clinical practice, if someone is coming to see me with difficulties, we address those. However, I cannot generalize from individual therapy cases to entire professions. That is why I would like to do more systematic mapping across occupations.

By the way—did I mention that Teela and I are publishing a book?

Jacobsen: What is the book called? What is the standing title?

Robertson: It is a manual based on my work on the fluid self. The title is Mapping and Understanding. It is a how-to book for self—mapping and its application in therapy.

Jacobsen: Very interesting. For all interested readers: go out and get it when it comes out.

Robertson: I sure hope so. It should be on everybody’s coffee table.

Jacobsen: That’s right. Like the Seinfeld bit with Kramer, the coffee table book becomes a coffee table. I do not know if I have any more significant questions for this session, Lloyd. Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Robertson: Thank you for the interview.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Institutional Assessments of Nazi and AfD Ideologies

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Racism fueled Nazi ideology and policies. The Nazis viewed the world as being divided up into competing inferior and superior races.

United States Holocaust Memorial Museum

At its core, the Nazi worldview was racist and biological, positing that the so-called ‘Aryan’ race – primarily the North Europeans – was the superior race of humanity.

Yad Vashem – The World Holocaust Remembrance Center

The German Nazis were decidedly far-Right, not leftwing. To call the Left “Nazis,” or frame the German Left as Nazis, when the enormous weight of corpses and contemporary political analyses note the German Nazis as Right-wing, congratulations, you have taken on the tactics of abusers: Gaslighting.

They merely had “Socialist” in the name. They used the language to co-opt working-class support. Then they aggressively persecuted leftists–i.e., trade unionists, socialists, communists–while advocating for anti-Communism, authoritarianism, militarism, nationalism, traditionalism, and xenophobia.

Facts of history and the dead matter, not scoring political points for personal gain. To more recent history, German intelligence agencies ranked the AfD with neo-Nazi groups as a Gefahr für die Demokratie (danger to democracy).

May 2025…: German intelligence agencies connected the Afd to extreme-right ideology. The Federal Office for the Protection of the Constitution (BfV) report stressed AfD’s ethnisch-abstammungsmäßiges Volksverständnis(ethnically defined concept of “the people”) as violating democratic order, seeking to exclude entire groups. AfD characterized as a “racist and anti-Muslim” organization, e.g., slogans like Abschieben schafft Wohnraum(“deportation creates housing”) and Jeder Fremde mehr in diesem Land ist einer zu viel (“each more foreigner is one too many”). These are listed as evidence of dehumanizing language. BfV President Thomas Haldenwang called this “a good day for democracy.” A history exists here, too.

March 2022: a Cologne court upheld the BfV’s classification of the AfD and its youth wing as a Beobachtungsobjekt (Verdachtsfall) (suspected extremist organization), finding ausreichende tatsächliche Anhaltspunkte für verfassungsfeindliche Bestrebungen– “sufficient factual indications of anti-constitutional aims.” The BfV 1,100-page report filled the extremism criteria.

Late 2023: Bavarian prosecutors opened investigations into newly elected AfD MP Daniel Halemba for possible use of Nazi symbols. He previously belonged to a student fraternity raided for Nazi paraphernalia.

December, 2023: Several state Verfassungsschutz offices flagged AfD branches. Saxony’s domestic intelligence classified the Saxony AfD as gesichert rechtsextremistisch. Saxony’s VS president Dirk-Martin Christian said, “…an der rechtsextremistischen Ausrichtung der AfD Sachsen bestehen keine Zweifel mehr”(“there is no longer any doubt about AfD Saxony’s right-extremist orientation”) The party held typische völkisch-nationalistische Positionen (“typical folk-nationalist positions”) and used common anti-Semitic conspiracy language. These mirrored Nazi-era rhetoric. Thuringia and Saxony-Anhalt earlier flagged local AfD branches as extremist as well.

Interior Minister Nancy Faeser (SPD) called the intelligence review legal and independent, resulting in a 1,100-page internal report being apolitical. The new classification permitted intensified surveillance, including deployment of informants and communication interception.

May, (2024). German courts have penalized AfD members for Nazi-linked speech. The Halle state court convicted Thuringia AfD leader Björn Höcke for using the SA slogan “Alles für Deutschland!”

2025: Two Saarland AfD local councillors liked a Facebook post celebrating Hitler’s birthday. Authorities launched a Volksverhetzung (incitement) probe and party expulsion proceedings.

Leading German politicians likened the AfD to fascism and Nazi extremism. SPD Defense Minister Boris Pistorius warned protesters in 2024: Wer die AfD aus Protest wählt, dem müsse klar sein, dass sie Faschisten wählten. (“Anyone who votes AfD out of protest must be aware that they are voting for fascists.”) SPD leader Lars Klingbeil accused AfD co-leader Alice Weidel of heading a rechtsextreme Parteidie AfD ist durchsetzt auch mit Nazis in Europa. (“the AfD is also filled with Nazis in Europe.”) Former SPD head Sigmar Gabriel compared hearing AfD rhetoric to his Nazi-father: Alles, was die [AfD] erzählen, habe ich schon gehört — im Zweifel von meinem eigenen Vater, der … ein Nazi war. Green and Linke politicians made similar warnings. Expert commentators warned of Nazi parallels.

German officials and courts drew a direct line between AfD rhetoric and Nazi-style ideology. Official reports cite AfD policy goals, mass deportation slogans to ethno-nationalist immigration stances, as incompatible with Germany’s constitution.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Sustainable Population Growth: Balancing Demographics, Climate, and Human Values

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

“Population growth can exacerbate environmental degradation when it increases pressure on natural resources and generates more waste and emissions. Sustainable development requires policies that balance population trends with economic growth, environmental protection, and social equity.”

World Population Prospects 2022, UN DESA

“Rapid population growth can hinder economic development, especially when it outpaces the provision of essential services and job creation. A stable population supports long-term sustainability.”

World Development Report 2007

“Sustainable development is development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. Population growth must be addressed within that context.”

Our Common Future (1987), Brundtland Commission Report

The 2024 revision of the United Nations World Population Prospects (medium-variant series) describes 42 of the 193 UN member states, excluding the Holy See and the State of Palestine, as in absolute demographic decline. The number increases to 48 if micro-states and non-sovereign areas are included.

The 1980s saw two countries enter absolute decline: Hungary and Bulgaria. In the 1990s, 14 countries entered population regression: Albania (1990), Estonia (1990), Latvia (1990), Romania (1990), Armenia (1991), Bosnia and Herzegovina (1991), Croatia (1991), Lithuania (1991), Georgia (1992), Belarus (1993), Moldova (1993), Russia (1993), Ukraine (1993), and Serbia (1995).

Eight countries entered regression in the 2000s, slowing down the per-country rate: Barbados (2000), Dominica (2000), Saint Lucia (2000), Saint Vincent and the Grenadines (2000), North Macedonia (2001), Cuba (2006), Andorra (2008), Portugal (2008), and Japan (2008).

Ten countries entered population decline in the 2010s: Greece (2010), Montenegro (2011), Poland (2012), Grenada (2012), Saint Kitts and Nevis (2013), Italy (2014), Slovenia (2014), Trinidad and Tobago (2014), Mauritius (2019), and Tonga (2019).

The 2020s saw seven countries enter this same pattern so far: South Korea (2020), China (2021), Slovakia (2021), Monaco (2022), San Marino (2022), Uruguay (2022), and Seychelles (2023). The chronology is as follows, represented as a consistent bullet point series:

1980s

  • Hungary (1980–maybe 1981-1982)
  • Bulgaria (1989)

1990s

  • Albania (1990)
  • Estonia (1990)
  • Latvia (1990)
  • Romania (1990)
  • Armenia (1991)
  • Bosnia and Herzegovina (1991)
  • Croatia (1991)
  • Lithuania (1991)
  • Georgia (1992)
  • Belarus (1993)
  • Moldova (1993)
  • Russia (1993)
  • Ukraine (1993)
  • Serbia (1995)

2000s

  • Barbados (2000)
  • Dominica (2000)
  • Saint Lucia (2000)
  • Saint Vincent and the Grenadines (2000)
  • North Macedonia (2001)
  • Cuba (2006)
  • Andorra (2008)
  • Portugal (2008)
  • Japan (2008)

2010s

  • Greece (2010)
  • Montenegro (2011)
  • Poland (2012)
  • Grenada (2012)
  • Saint Kitts and Nevis (2013)
  • Italy (2014)
  • Slovenia (2014)
  • Trinidad and Tobago (2014)
  • Mauritius (2019)
  • Tonga (2019)

2020s

  • South Korea (2020)
  • China (2021)
  • Slovakia (2021)
  • Monaco (2022)
  • San Marino (2022)
  • Uruguay (2022)
  • Seychelles (2023)

151 out of 193 member states are not shrinking. Sixty-three have peaked, 42 are shrinking — many only recently, and the rest are growing. Which is to state, based on known data, the apparent conclusion faces us.

The United Nations’ World Population Prospects 2024 approximates a peak of 10.3 billion in the mid-2080s, the Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation (IHME) in The Lancet estimated a peak of 9.73 billion in 2064, and the Wittgenstein Centre’s 2023 estimate is a peak of 10.13 billion in 2080.

This means 29 years on the earlier extreme up to 64 years on the later extreme until the peak human population. The reality: The likelihood sits somewhere between those antipodean projected extremes. Population decline, as an absolute global issue, will become urgent about two generations from now if population growth is simply the idea.

This is both a that and a why issue. If you argue that population should increase without a reason, then you ignore the most important question: What quality of life is desired for all human beings with the population? This becomes a valuable question for the constituents of global eudaimonia. (Only from the perspective of homo sapiens.)

Having population growth for the sake of more people seems narrow, to say the least. If the only other option is the nihilistic, suicidal decline of the species, then the false dichotomy takes on an international, species-wide caricature. Another option is sustainable population growth. Experts have proposed this.

Until space mining becomes practicable, easily accessible resources on Earth remain finite. Sustainable population growth provides the benefits of resource balance, economic resilience, higher quality of life, environmental protection, social equity, and climate adaptability.

The most significant issue facing humanity is anthropogenic climate change. Climate systems respond to physical inputs, not human governance failures or political boundaries. Growth for growth’s sake is uninformed and valueless. Regression for the desired decline of humanity can be seen as nihilistic, another valuelessness.

Sustainable growth harbours the non-polyannish universalist values of human rights, empiricism of science, and compassion of a humane consideration of every person, young and old. Now, with humanistic values, if we want sustainable growth, what works?

Fundamentally, until synthetic means of human gestation exist, which remain scientifically feasible while complex, universal concern and evidence depict one approximate half of humanity: women, and trans people, with relevant reproductive mechanics intact.

For those who want to have children and for those who want to support their free, uncoerced decision to have children, population dynamics tells us some things: equal parental leave, affordable childcare, flexible family-friendly workplaces, support for dual-earner families, reproductive autonomy and healthcare access, and shared domestic responsibilities.

Another social factor is valuing family and children. Some conservative and libertarian commentators have proposed this. That’s true. However, what better way to support this through funding, policy, and role alignment than by establishing a comprehensive program grounded in the reality of shared values—values that only appear to be superficially or paradoxically opposed?

However, children and families are highly personal and individual choices. Some people believe relationships are not for them. Children are not for them. Thus, the messaging should be informed, culturally appropriate, and targeted in an evidence-based manner to those who want either or both, then providing a culture and infrastructure environment in which the sustainable growth models can flourish, while targeting anthropogenic climate change and other problems.

A values-driven, evidence-based approach to population policy can foster a sustainable and worthwhile world in which people who want children are empowered to have them and humanity grows in balance with nature.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ed Fredkin and the Foundations of Digital Philosophy: The Universe as Computation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Ed Fredkin (1934-2023), deceased MIT Professor and Caltech Fairchild Distinguished Scholar, can be attributed as one of the founders of Digital Philosophy. Others include Konrad Zuse and Stephen Wolfram. It is an interdisciplinary endeavour between computer science, physics, and philosophy, fundamentally grounded on computation. Universe operates as a computational system. Fredkin believed all physical processes are derivable from data processing, hence digital physics rather than physics.

Fredkin worked on computer vision, business ventures, and chess programming. Digital Philosophy sees the universe as digital. A set of pancomputationalism and digital physics. Both are distinct, but relate to one another. A discrete finite system run by rules on computation. Fredkin conjectures: All manifest energy, matter, space, and time, are bits.

Fredkin believe in no infinites, no continuities. A universe integer-grounded and finite. The evolution of the physical processes happens as transformations from state to state is the hypothesis of Fredkin. Each state as a whole slice of the cosmic worldline. Disputable early orientations include determinism, reductionism, and mechanism.

The universe functions with each next state following from prior states. Complex phenomena are emergent phenomena from simpler fundaments. Reality as a mechanism operable as a machine with predictable rules.

Fredkin supported the ideas with reversible computing and cellular automata. He stated:

Digital mechanics predicts that for every continuous symmetry of physics there will be some microscopic process that violates that symmetry.

And:

The appearance of a single truly random event is absolutely incompatible with a strong law of conservation of information.

Cellular automata come in a variety. The one developed by Fredkin was called the SALT (Six-state Asynchronous Logic Tiling) family of cellular automata. These are reversible automata capable of ‘universal computation.’ These models simulate digital rules.

He invented the Fredkin gate, able to perform computations without losing energy. Some of energy-efficient computing is based on this. This has implications for contemporary and upcoming artificial intelligence systems.

He proposed, in a manner within these developments, the finitude of the natural order. Fredkin asserted the universe is a giant automaton with the possibility of quantum phenomena emergent from digital processes too. Philosophy of physics, in this developmental trend, can be interpreted as philosophy of digital physics.

When made practical, we unite the Digital Philosophy into digital physics. One deals with concepts, relations, and theories, and the other with operations, functions, and applications.

Reversible computing has arrived and advanced, particularly in reduction of energy waste per compute. The Vaire Computing chip achieved a many-fold increase in energy efficiency. A possible direct developmental inspiration from the conceptual framework of Fredkin’s work, so from digital philosophy into digital physics.

Some critiques exist of the ideas despite the practical applications and consistency with contemporary ideas of computation and information:

  1. If all is computation, the idea is too broad, so meaningless.
  2. It needs more empirical support, so it has reduced scientific credibility.
  3. Discrete models are inconsistent with continuous models of quantum mechanics or relativity.
  4. Some see the ideas as naive while others question validity due to Fredkin’s computational background.

His ideas left a lasting mark on modern physics and Digital Philosophy continues to impact facets of computation, physics, and philosophy. Others existed in this space and others are extant.

The developments of digital physics continue.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Le Moyne College’s 2025 Young Alumni Ignatian Award for Journalism on Ukraine and Eurasia

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Mark Temnycky is a Ukrainian-American journalist and nonresident fellow at the Atlantic Council’s Eurasia Center. He has reported extensively on Russia’s war in Ukraine and broader international affairs, with bylines in The New York Times, Forbes, The Hill, and Newsweek. His work has been cited by institutions such as NATO, the U.S. Army, and the European Parliament. He earned his undergraduate degree in history, with departmental honors, from Le Moyne College, he earned a certificate in international relations from Georgetown University, and he later completed dual master’s degrees in public administration and international relations from Syracuse University’s Maxwell School of Citizenship and Public Affairs. In recognition of his contributions to journalism and his commitment to Jesuit values, he received Le Moyne College’s 2025 Young Alumni Ignatian Award.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are with Mark Temnycky. He is a Ukrainian-American journalist and a nonresident fellow at the Atlantic Council’s Eurasia Center. He has reported extensively on Russia’s war in Ukraine and broader international affairs, with bylines in The New York Times, Forbes, The Hill, and Newsweek. His work has been cited by institutions such as NATO, the U.S. Army, and the European Parliament. He earned his undergraduate degree in history, with departmental honors, from Le Moyne College, he earned a certificate in international relations from Georgetown University, and he later completed dual master’s degrees in public administration and international relations from Syracuse University’s Maxwell School of Citizenship and Public Affairs. In recognition of his contributions to journalism and his commitment to Jesuit values, he received Le Moyne College’s 2025 Young Alumni Ignatian Award. First, who is Ignatius? Second, how do you see the connections between Jesuit values and journalism that matters? Third, what did the award mean to you?

Mark Temnycky: To answer your question, it is Ignatius, as in Saint Ignatius of Loyola, the founder of the Society of Jesus. That is the Jesuit order within the Catholic Church. As for my background, I attended Le Moyne College for my undergraduate studies. It’s one of the 28 Jesuit colleges and universities in the United States. Other institutions include Loyola University Chicago and Georgetown University.

Jesuit education is distinct in its emphasis on cura personalis—care for the whole person—and service to others. It’s not just about academic excellence or earning a science, math, or social sciences degree. The Jesuit philosophy encourages students to engage with their communities, reflect on their values, and serve others meaningfully.

For example, during our freshman year at Le Moyne, we were encouraged to volunteer in the local community, whether helping out in under-resourced schools or supporting food pantries and shelters. I volunteered at a local school where we worked with young children, providing classroom support and mentorship. We also participated in community service projects through campus ministries, distributing food or clothing to members of the Syracuse community.

That commitment to service and justice has stayed with me and continues to shape how I approach journalism: with responsibility, empathy, and a focus on truth and integrity. I’m sure plenty of universities without any Jesuit or Christian tradition or affiliation do many of the same things. The difference is that Jesuit institutions place an extra emphasis on service and moral responsibility. Professors often challenge students to think about earning a degree and what they will do with that degree to make the world a better place.

There are so many wars and conflicts around the world. Poverty persists. Food scarcity continues to affect millions. Many countries face limited access to education, job prospects, and economic opportunities. Of course, no single individual can solve all the world’s problems. But it is about adopting a different worldview: recognizing that if you have an education and a certain level of privilege, you have a responsibility–not only to yourself, to ensure stability and support your family and loved ones—but also to help those less fortunate.

It’s about giving back to your community, using your skills and background to uplift others. This mindset is rooted in the idea of noblesse oblige, the old French expression meaning that those who have the means and the opportunities are obliged to help those who do not. That’s a compelling way of seeing the world—community-based and value-driven, rather than living solely for oneself.

So I was very honoured to receive this award from my undergraduate alma mater. During my undergraduate and graduate school years, I often felt that, as someone of Ukrainian descent, not many people knew much about Ukraine. There was little awareness or concern for Ukraine and Eastern Europe.

That started to change around 2013, when I was still in school. That was the time of the Euromaidan protests—also known as the Revolution of Dignity. Ukrainians were upset that then-President Viktor Yanukovych had refused to sign an association agreement with the European Union. This was in November 2013.

To clarify, this agreement was not about EU membership or formal integration. It was intended to strengthen economic and trade ties with the EU and improve everyday life in Ukraine. At the time—and even now—Ukraine was, and still is, one of the poorest countries in Europe.

For context, the average monthly salary in the EU is between €2,000 and €3,000. In Ukraine, it is closer to €250, a significant disparity. So, how can people build sustainable lives under those conditions, especially when neighbouring countries like Poland or the Baltic States—Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania—are EU members and have far greater economic stability?

It is hard for Ukrainians to move forward when those economic and structural disparities persist. So, when the Euromaidan movement began, I saw it as an opportunity, being based in the United States, to educate and inform people: What is this movement? Why does it matter? What is happening?

Later, while pursuing my graduate studies at the Maxwell School at Syracuse University, I worked for the Ukrainian Parliament during the summer of 2016. I also interned at the NATO office at the Pentagon for a fall semester in 2016. Combined, these internships lasted about seven months. They allowed me to observe how governments function, how public policy is crafted, and how different and yet similar political systems can be.

During graduate school, I wrote my first published piece for Forbes, titled Why Ukraine is Ukraine, Not ‘the’ Ukraine. It focused on the significance of dropping the definite article “the” when referring to Ukraine, a symbolic and political shift reflecting national sovereignty. Since then, I’ve continued to write for news outlets and think tanks. More recently, especially following Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in February 2022, I’ve participated in interviews like this one, podcasts, and media panels to talk about the war and its global significance.

I’ve been writing for nearly a decade on Ukraine and countries across Eastern Europe, the Caucasus, and Central Asia. I focus on why the United States, NATO, and the European Union should care about these regions—not only from the standpoint of national security, foreign policy, or energy security—but also from a human perspective: what can wealthier countries do to help individuals in these areas have access to opportunities similar to those in the U.S. or Western Europe?

That does not mean those individuals must choose the same path or system. People should always have the freedom to shape their own lives. But having more options—economic, educational, and professional—can dramatically improve their standard of living.

The motivation has always been to inform and educate, not to seek awards or recognition. I do these interviews and write these pieces because I believe it’s the right thing to do. In recent years, I’ve also had the privilege of speaking at universities across the United States about the war in Ukraine and why it matters.

So I’m deeply honored and thankful to have been acknowledged with this award. It motivates me even more to continue this work—however modest it may be—to try to improve the situation for people impacted by the war.

Jacobsen: Jesuit education—beyond being rigorous and intellectually grounded in theology—also has an ethical component, often centred on forming “persons for others.” Your earlier responses already reflected that emphasis. How do you see this Jesuit value system’s role in other areas of your life and work?

Temnycky: I think it’s important to remember that you never really know what people are going through. Many individuals do not publicly share their challenges or hardships. Life is complex, and the world can be very overwhelming. So, by taking things one day at a time and trying, even in small, modest ways, to make life better for others, you contribute to creating a more compassionate and supportive world.

Living kindly—being helpful and supportive toward others—makes life more enjoyable for yourself and those around you. That’s where the value of being a person for othersbecomes meaningful. It encourages us to consider not just ourselves but those around us.

And it’s very easy to become overwhelmed by all the suffering and tragedy we see in the news. Whether it’s war, natural disasters, or other crises, there’s no shortage of pain and loss. These are all very real concerns. But if someone becomes entirely consumed by the negativity, it can lead to a very pessimistic outlook on life.

Everyone only lives once. And it’s a sad way to live, constantly burdened by the world’s hardships without recognizing the beauty and kindness that still exist. Sometimes, it’s as simple as smiling at someone or saying hello. Other times, it’s more impactful, like individuals who have the means to donate millions to causes like cancer research or humanitarian aid.

Every act of kindness matters. You have two choices: you can be a bystander, feeling helpless and consumed by all the negativity, or you can try, however modestly, to make a positive impact. Not for recognition, not to build a legacy, but simply to do the right thing. To help others. To strengthen your community. Because life is already challenging, and if everyone has to fight for themselves alone, it only gets harder. But if people unite—if communities work together—life becomes more manageable and meaningful.

Jacobsen: And there’s only one award per year, right?

Temnycky: Yes, for this specific category. There are a few others as well. Тhere is the Distinguished Alumni Award, the Ignatian Award for Professional Achievement, the Ignatian Award for Community Service, the Ignatian Award for Service to Le Moyne College, the Ignatian Spirit Award, the Ignatian Veterans Service Award, the Ignatian Award for Young Alumni, which I received, and the Ignatian Award for Honorary Alumnus.

Jacobsen: Are there contemporary figures in Eurasia—in the areas you study, such as geopolitics, war, and humanitarian work—whom you look to as a beacon of the kind of greater good that Saint Ignatius emphasized?

Temnycky: Yes. One individual who comes to mind is a family friend whom I know very well: Metropolitan Archbishop Borys Gudziak. He heads the Ukrainian Greek Catholic Church in the United States.

He’s also originally from Syracuse. One of the things he’s done through his work is establish the Ukrainian Catholic University in western Ukraine, in Lviv. The university provides higher education opportunities within Ukraine and has been referred to by some as the “Harvard of Ukraine.”

After the collapse of the Soviet Union, Bishop Borys Gudziak worked with the Church to purchase a large plot of land in Lviv, where they began with a small chapel. From that humble beginning, they built the university. Since then, hundreds—if not thousands—of Ukrainians have studied there. Many are now volunteering or fighting on the front lines, giving back to Ukraine with their lives and sacrifices because they understand the importance of freedom, democracy, and national values.

And all of that began with a vision rooted in service, making Ukraine a better place, building community. He’s someone I respect deeply and who has been an influence in my own life. His example has shaped my motivation to pursue selfless work, to do whatever I can—even in small ways—to try to make the world a better place.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Mark. I appreciate it. Have a great evening, and we’ll talk soon.

Temnycky: Thank you, Scott. І appreciate the opportunity to speak with you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tragic Maternal Death in Port Harcourt Sparks National Debate on Medical Ethics and Religious Convictions

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Lee Elder

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Port Harcourt, Nigeria — May 14, 2025 — A maternal death in Rivers State intensified national scrutiny in Nigeria—a controversy over religious conviction and medical responsibility. On May 10, 2025, 33-year-old Victoria Paris died. She had postpartum  hemorrhage following a cesarean section. The surgery was performed in Borikiri, Port  Harcourt. Reports indicate a life-saving blood transfusion was withheld.

Paris was not affiliated with the Jehovah’s Witnesses. She had previously given birth to children at the same facility. She was reportedly in labour with a fifth child. Complications arose. After an emergency cesarean section, she suffered blood loss. Family members allege the hospital’s proprietor refused to authorize a transfusion, citing religious objections  (Physician was reportedly a Jehovah’s Witness). A power outage happened during surgery. This may have delayed care. Paris was transferred to a second medical facility. She was dead on arrival.

On May 11, 2025, the Rivers State Ministry of Health’s Anti-Quackery Committee arrived, led by Dr. Vincent Wachukwu. They conducted an unscheduled inspection, sealed the hospital’s operating theatre, and ordered staff to cease clinical activities. The Committee cited suspected professional negligence and breach of the Rivers State Private Health-Care  Facilities Regulation Law.

The Standard Maternity Hospital, at №2 Captain Amangala Street, is licensed as a Level B  private maternity centre. In 2024, the facility was cautioned for inadequate record-keeping and placed on probationary oversight.

Criminal charges may be brought as outlined in the Criminal Code §303. Jehovah’s  Witnesses maintain a doctrinal interpretation of biblical scripture against the transfusion of whole blood and primary components. A belief central to the faith. (Internal Watchtower documents warn Jehovah’s Witness doctors and nurses not to prescribe or administer blood transfusions to non-Jehovah’s Witnesses, even if doing so makes them subject to penalty).

This raises questions on the ethical boundaries of personal or institutional religious convictions in emergency medical settings. Current Medical and Dental Council of Nigeria  guidelines (2016) require that physicians render all reasonable emergency measures, irrespective of personal beliefs.

Media Contact: 

Lee Elder

Email: LeeElderAJWRB@gmail.com

Advocates for the Jehovah’s Witnesses Reform on Blood

Website: www.ajwrb.org

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Understanding Ancestry, Ethnicity, and the Global Impact of U.S. Racial Categories

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Ancestries have been defined in a number of ways: Descent, heritage, nationality, pan-ethnic identity, tribal affiliation, or region. The United States uses five major categories for civil rights tracking. Those five are Asian, Black, Native American, Pacific Islander, and White. This categorization for civil rights demographics does not equate to the prior ancestries.

Ethnicities can come from a variety of definitions. While ideologically opposed but in agreement on the concept of Whites, while a abstract sociological invention, right sociopolitical affirmation of pride, ‘White Power,’ and the left sociopolitical critical language, ‘Whiteness.’ Each caters to relevant constituencies for financial, moral, or social points. They are distinct orientations. No necessary equivalence extant between them.

The intrigue comes from the imposed frame from within the United States on the world. U.S. racial and ethnic discourse is sometimes projected into international contexts. Some of the world buys into it, thus imposing American grievances onto their environs–without much apparent regard for a sufficiently symmetric relation or not.

Punjabis share Punjab region heritage, Punjabi language, cultural traditions, though Sikhs, Muslims, and Hindus exist. Yoruba share language, lineage, and customs. Religion becomes secondary. Han Chinese share ancestry, language, and Confucianism. Therefore, common descent, shared language and traditions, and, maybe, religion and tribal/political affiliations amongst them.

The US uses self-identified ancestry, nationality, and origin. Studies of the demographics of the world use common ancestry, language, and culture. The US comprises a population of 334 million people. No single ancestry is a majority.

The largest self-reported ancestries are German (12%), English (9%), Irish (9%), unspecified American (5%), and Italian (5%). The largest pan-ethnic groups are Hispanic/Latino (20%), African American (14%), Asian (7%), and Native American/Alaska Native (1-2%). Foreign born residents is 14%. Therefore, German, English, Irish, and Hispanic comprise half of the US, but with overlap.

The world has 8.2 billion people. The United States is 4% of the world population. Yet, their sociopolitics, charged and neutral, get applied to the world. This seems inappropriate and inaccurate. 3 distinct ethnolinguistic blocs comprise a larger share of the global population than the 4% held by Americans.

Han Chinese (Sinitic language family) comprise 17% of the global population. Indo-Aryan peoples (Begali, Hindi, and Punjabi) comprise 13%. Arabs (Arabic-speaking) comprise 6%. Each exist in the US. None exists as a large minority in the US [See above].

More than 7,000 ethnic groups extant in the world. May we take ourselves as persons then peoples first, perhaps?

I don’t know.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Legal Assistance in Dying (MAID) in Canada: Legal Framework, Strict Safeguards & Protecting Vulnerable Populations

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Legal Framework & Definitions, Vulnerable Populations

On February 15, 2023, the Special Joint Committee on Medical Assistance in Dying reported on five mandated issues: advance requests, access to MAID for mature minors, access to MAID for those whose sole underlying medical condition is a mental disorder, the state of palliative care, and the protection of people living with disabilities. A considerable amount of misinformation has circulated in the public sphere and media and Dying With Dignity Canada (DWDC) would like to set out some clear facts surrounding MAID, the strict criteria and safeguards that govern its use, and aspects of its proposed expansion.

DWDC, “Myths and Facts: Medical assistance in dying (MAID) in Canada

Medical assistance in dying (MAID) is a process that allows someone who is found eligible to be able to receive assistance from a medical practitioner in ending their life. The federal Criminal Code of Canada permits this to take place only under very specific circumstances and rules. Anyone requesting this service must meet specific eligibility criteria to receive medical assistance in dying. Any medical practitioner who administers an assisted death to someone must satisfy certain safeguards first.

Only medical practitioners are permitted to conduct assessments and to provide medical assistance in dying. This can be a physician or a nurse practitioner, where provinces and territories allow.

Government of Canada, “Medical assistance in dying: Overview

The next thing I want to speak about is whether the vulnerable need protection. Again, this has been tried in court with both the Carter case and Truchon case. There is no evidence that vulnerable people are at risk for MAID. [Ed. Minor evidence suggests otherwise, now, but small and select, see AP News.] In fact, if you look at the actual people who are receiving MAID, they are typically white, well educated and well off. You could easily argue that the marginalized communities are disadvantaged because they’re not accessing MAID. In the Truchon case, Justice Baudouin equally found that the disadvantaged are not being taken advantage of and you must do each case at a time.

Dr. Derryck Smith, “Special Joint Committee on Medical Assistance in Dying

Death is a sensitive topic. It is a different question from the origin of life, the evolution of organisms, the speciation of species, and the point when life begins for human beings. We’re dealing with a live person who can make, ideally, informed decisions about a profound moment in life: its end. For those who know those who have tried to take their life, the sensitivity is multiplied over social relations. Rational foundations for care in finality are important, though. A lot of smart humanists have thought deeply about this topic.

Humanists can be stereotyped–as a whole without exception–supporting medical assistance in dying (MAID) at the expense of palliative care. MAID as a way to reduce healthcare burden (of the old, the sick, the disabled), and dangerous as a “social contagion.” Atheist humanists get the worst of it, because of the major prejudices felt and only recently researched in an academic context.

The lattermost, as a piece of falsehood, emerges with relative frequency. These will be case examples for this article. These cases critiquing the imperfection of MAID have a sensibility akin to creationist critiques of evolution with God of the Gaps arguments. God of the Gaps arguments point to absences or uncertainties in scientific knowledge and then assert divine intervention. It is a form of magical thinking. Critique evolution superficially without proposing a workable alternative; what is the evidence-based alternative with greater efficacy than MAID, where MAID is merely one option? This challenges the trade-off myth. There will be failures in any system. Is this more efficacious than the system not existing? Stuff like that.

Debunking Common Myths

Canada has an organization devoted to these issues, DWDC. I found and took a statement about the spread of misinformation about MAID by DWDC seriously. DWDC noted myths about:

  • “advocating to kill infants with disabilities”
  • “mature minors will be eligible for medical assistance in dying (MAID) in March 2027”
  • “opening the door for suicidal children and teenagers to access an assisted death”
  • “eligibility of mature minors is being considered without adequate protections in place and without consultation or consent from parents or guardians”
  • “clinicians inappropriately recommending MAID to patients who are not eligible or as an alternative to treatment”
  • “vulnerable populations being eligible for MAID because they are suffering from inadequate social supports, including housing”
  • “Canada is systematically targeting and ‘killing’ the poor, disabled, and marginalized instead of giving them the proper supports they need to live.”

Social Contagion Concerns

DWDC identified a few more. However, this sets a foundation for knowledge about misinformation’s ubiquity dispensed flippantly by both left and right alike. This has political debate content. The fundamental issue is humane treatment. That shouldn’t be political. Upon doing a first search on social contagion, the source of some misinformation was made by right-wing conservative groups. The idea being, thus: “Physician-assisted suicide is social contagion.”

Social contagion research on suicide seems to rely on fear of copycats: a good fear. The substantive enquiry: Is the evidence proportional to support this assertion, or is the general assertion of social contagion of suicide equivalent to medical contexts, including MAID? Health Canada’s 2022 MAID monitoring report analyzed suicide rates. The 2022 study found no significant increase in suicide rates following MAID legalization in 2016. This differs compared to patterns after high-profile celebrity suicides. The American Psychological Association’s 2014 review (Psychological Bulletin, Vol. 140) links media sensationalism to copycat suicides. In other words, MAID’s regulated approach mitigates the standard effects seen in social contagion risks. Health Canada did the study. The American Psychological Association 2014 found the same for copycat behaviours and media exposure, not due to structured medical processes.

Palliative Care vs. MAID

According to DWDC and the Government of Canada, MAID has multiple safeguards in place, as stipulated at the outset. General suicides exclusive to MAID do not have safeguards in place. Of those two, to the original question, what is the evidence-based alternative with greater efficacy than MAID, where MAID is merely one option? Which is to say, in either case, conditions for palliative care exist equivalently, while MAID is in place versus not.

Exceptional (Super‑Minority) Cases

What about the exclusionary cases? That one does not wish to happen at all. A super-minority of unfortunate cases as exceptions to the principles of MAID. “Canadians with nonterminal conditions sought assisted dying for social reasons” described social conditions under which some MAID cases continued with “unmet social need.” Health Canada’s Fifth Annual Report (2023) report showed less than 2% of the 13,241 assisted deaths by individuals involving psychosocial factors as primary motivators.

We should all strive to help those with unmet social needs, who may fall under this category. These commentaries point to inefficiencies in safeguards, particularly in super-minority specific cases, not the principle. This is the relevance of God of the Gaps arguments with creationism against evolution.

To identify gaps is to identify gaps in MAID-specific cases and, thus, in the general population too, the bodies found in general populations, probably, result in less dignified and compassionate deaths. We should emphasize palliative care and other care more to balance the ratio of provisions for Canadian citizens. The Special Joint Committee’s 2023 report found that 3 in 10 Canadians can access high-quality palliative care. Rural areas and Indigenous communities are underserved. Ontario integration of palliative consultations with MAID assessments reduced requests by 15%. This synergy shows promise; it’s not either-or. This is to say, again, that the principle stands while exclusive super-minority cases require more work. Critics do a service here, up to and including robust, systemic, integrated alternatives.

Social contagion merely applies to the unregulated and unsafe cases of suicide, as in a double-barrel shotgun after a woman in a depressive fit after a breakup. It is different than a considered, regulated, informed choice about suicide with the assistance of a qualified professional in most of the other cases. MAID supports something more akin to the latter than the former. We should have expanded social programs for those who need them, more robust MAID mechanisms, and condemnation of stereotypes about MAID that harm people who need them. Expanding social programs may incorporate guaranteed housing subsidies.

Conscience, Faith, and Coercion

MAID is the main option available for those who need it. If an individual believes in a divine being, and does not want to become enmeshed in humanist or other ideology around their decision or their end of life, they should be permitted to make that choice, according to their conscience and faith. Similarly, those who do not share that notion, in which human beings do not ultimately own their life, a god does, should be permitted their conscience-based free choice too. If someone is being coerced, this would fail the principle and the spirit of the MAID options permitted in Canada.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Foundation of the British Columbia Firmament: Langley’s Colonial Legacy, Evangelical Politics, and Modern Controversies

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Foundation of the British Columbia Firmament

The Father of British Columbia, Sir James Douglas, is worshipped in the community where I grew up. Not for nothing, he had achievements, but he had a mixed history in numerous ways. He had a “mixed history” as HBC Chief Factor and colonial governor. He granted monopolistic privileges to his company and family.

This mixed public office and private profit. He imposed property-based voting qualifications, excluding full representation. He set forth unfair First Nations treaties. The Douglas Treaties were signed on blank sheets, with terms inserted afterward—an unusual practice. Unilaterally, these were later signed, resulting in Indigenous signatories having land cessions that were not fully known.

He had a heavy-handed gold rush policy with licensing schemes and delayed enforcement during the Fraser Canyon conflict. These failed to protect Indigenous communities. Violence and village burnings ensued. He recruited black Californian settlers for political loyalty. It was opportunistic rather than principled efforts for the enfranchisement of blacks. He was from Guyana. A fascinating history to learn about one’s happenstance of contingent past circumstances: his contemporary presentation is not an exercise in false equivalence. It is about a united duality of positive and negative valence.

The living recent history reflects this mixed history in Fort Langley, out of Langley, with the crossovers between hipster intellectual farmers and well-educated, well-off Evangelical Christians, Trinity Western University, and the political shenanigans of Christians here impacting the federal level of the country. I wanted to cover some of this controversial recent history, as having a singular reference for some of the township’s more noteworthy shenanigans. For clarity, I speak as a former member of one of the heritage committees of an association in Fort Langley and another for the Township of Langley. I can say, “Heritage matters to Langleyites.” As an elder Euro-Canadian lady told me on the committee, a fellow committee member, it was in a sharp snarl once at a meeting, “I know who you are.” These were not isolated events throughout my life while growing up and through there. So it goes.

The contemporary Evangelical Christian story in Fort Langley began with a sexual misconduct allegation of the longest-standing university president in Canadian history: 2005-2006 with former university president Neil Snider. I would rather this notbe the case, but it is the history. Something worth repeating.

2005–2015: Institutional Unease and Image Discipline

He had the longest tenure of any Canadian university president—32 years–and greatly grew Trinity Western University (TWU) in its early decades. That is a testament to his prowess as an administrator of resources and an inspirer of people at the time. In their terminology, he had the Holy Spirit in him.

Unfortunately, an uncomfortable truth was his retirement in 2006 following sexual misconduct allegations. Internal reports from TWU and contemporary media reviews questioned the administrative decisions around this. The community is embarrassed by it and tries to cover it up. I understand that part. It happens with clergy-related abuse cases too: Institutional protection. However, as one colleague’s mom who worked with him said to me, in a way to excuse it, “He was lonely,” because either his wife died or he was divorced. I leave considerations of the elasticity of excuse-making to the reader.

ChristianWeek’s “Trinity Western Resolves Human Rights Complaint” documented the 2005 human rights complaint against Snider. The settlement impacted subsequent policy reviews. Former faculty interviews showed early signs of institutional unease. Evangelical leaders have undergone these scandals.

A CAUT Report, “Report of an Inquiry Regarding Trinity Western University,” examined the requirement for faculty to affirm the religious Covenant. You can see TWU’s current Community Covenant. William Bruneau and Thomas Friedman examined the requirement for faculty to affirm the Covenant and possible impacts on academic hiring and free speech. Case studies and personal accounts of faculty are incorporated. It is a referenced report in academic discussions on religion and academia in Canada.

University Affairs via “A test of faith at Trinity Western” provided an analytic retrospective of early administrative policies, linking them to later legal challenges–more on that in 2016-2018. Christian universities seem highly conscious of their public image, because they theologically see themselves as at odds with the secularist world. For example, in 2011, the Institute for Canadian Values funded an advertisement opposing LGBTI-inclusive education, which was supported by the Canada Christian College. It was published by the National Post and later by the Toronto Sun. A national backlash happened. An apology ensued—a retraction happened by the Post, but not by the Sun.

2005-2015 was a busy few years. Ex-administrators and archival internal memos showed dissent regarding mandatory religious practices. Similar controversies happen in religious universities in Canada, all private, all Christian. The largest is Evangelical, and the largest is TWU, in Langley. After trying to get many interviews with professors and dissenting students in the community, the vast majority declined over many years of journalistic efforts, and a few agreed to a coffee conversation to express opinions. Most opinions dissent from the norm of TWU while affirming the difficulties for the faith with these straight-and-narrow executives, who are not reined in, reign with impunity, and rain neglect on their community’s inner Other.

2016–2018: The Covenant and the Courts

Circa 2016, some online commentators mentioned how they felt “bad for the kids that realize they’re not straight” at TWU as “Coming out is hard,” and “it’s crazy that people still want to go to this school.” A former student acknowledged some student support for LGBTI peers while warning many feel “quite ostracized” by an “unspoken aura” repressing non-Christian views. An LGBTI student may have to “repress their urges based on a stupid covenant.”

Other online forums include a former student union leader noting the “community covenant is outdated” even by 2013, while another urged the university to rethink the Covenant. Saying there is a “thriving rape culture,” “I know more than five girls who were raped [at TWU], who didn’t report it because they believed they would be shamed and not taken seriously.”

Maclean’s in “The end of the religious university?” talked about the long-standing interest in the national debate around religious mandates in higher education and the central role of TWU. These controversies about academic freedom following Snider’s resignation would echo some other community elements there. BBC Newscommented that Canada approved a homophobic law school in 2013. This would eventually evolve poorly for TWU and reflect terribly on the surrounding community.

Xtra Magazine’s The Painful Truth About Being Gay at Canada’s Largest Christian University” featured a series of robust testimonies from current and former students on systemic discrimination. The magazine also examined campus surveys, student blogs, and some student activist groups, with a case study of academic panels addressing LGBTI issues within religious institutions. The Supreme Court of Canada issued its decision on TWU’s Law School accreditation in 2018. It was analyzed by legal journals and cited in academic papers. Those looked to religious mandates and the tensions with legal equality.

CBC News in “Trinity Western loses fight for Christian law school as court rules limits on religious freedom ‘reasonable’” provided a comprehensive timeline of developments with constitutional lawyer and civil rights advocacy commentary. Other commentaries looked at policy adjustments following from institutions. The Tyeechimed into the discussion with “Trinity Western University Loses in Supreme Court,” with some parables into the personal narratives on campus, more timeline events, and a more important emphasis on the long-term impact on the reputation of TWU.

Knowing some minority facets of dynamics in this community, many will slander others and lie to protect themselves, particularly their identity as represented via the incursion of Evangelical Orthodoxy into the community via the university. This small township’s controversies went to the Supreme Court of Canada. They lost in a landslide decision, 7-2. The Vancouver Sun had various coverage, with international critiques comparing TWU’s controversy to European and Australian scandals. Regardless, TWU brought global spotlight on a small township, a tiny town.

Global human rights organizations gave commentary. TWU dropped the Community Covenant as mandatory, but only for students, while staff, faculty, and administration maintained it. A TWU student asserted on Reddit:

TWU student here. The only two reasons why the Board of Governors chose to drop the Covenant for students is because a) The recent court ruling, and b) Their other professional programs (counselling, nursing, and teaching) received letters from their respective accrediting bodies which threatened to pull accreditation unless the Covenant was amended or discarded.

TWU’s decision to make signing the Covenant voluntary for students has nothing to do with morality or human rights, but everything to do with their business model. Keep in mind, the faculty still must sign the pledge, and TWU’s mission and mandate of producing “godly Christian leaders” has not changed.

The next era was 2019-2021.

2019–2021: Cultural Stagnation Despite Legal Losses

Xtra Magazine in “I am queer at Trinity Western University. What will it take for my university to listen to me?” provided a more individual story. Carter Sawatzky wrote, “TWU’s decision in 2018 to make the Covenant non-mandatory for students also did not magically change the discriminatory treatment of queer people. After TWU’s 2018 Supreme Court loss, many folks, including myself, had hoped that TWU would finally demonstrate that it can be rooted in faith and radically loving and welcoming. Instead, TWU has doubled down on its social conservatism, at the expense of queer students like myself.” An international scandal and Supreme Court defeat did not change the culture or the school. That is instructive.

Another instructive moment was a student suicide attempt followed by an expulsion of the student. In “Her university expelled her after she attempted suicide, saying she had an ‘inability to self-regulate.’ Now she is fighting back,” the Toronto Star presented the case of a student showing broader systemic issues and a lack of mental health resources and policy failures within TWU. TWU claimed otherwise. Mental health professionals and relatives of students commented. As CBC has noted, mental healthon campuses has been a point of concern for a while.

2021–2025: Repression, Image, and Intimidation

Langley is a township where I am told the murder of the famous atheist Madalyn Murray O’Hair was merciful. An older gentleman saying, “Her murder was an act of mercy.” Langley Advance Times in “Private Langley University rejects LGBTQ+ event request” reported denying an event request, One TWU Stories Night, for an LGBTI group, One TWU. Carter Sawatzky said, “We are sharing our stories, which I think should be a non-controversial thing… It is not a contradiction. You can be queer and Christian… Many people come to TWU and have never heard an LGBTQ story.” That is a reasonable statement. A One TWU piece published on its site claims homophobia is rampant on campus.

CBC News reported on the manslaughter conviction of a TWU security guard. “Former guard at B.C. university found guilty of manslaughter” reported a Fall 2020 event involving “a man wearing all black” who wandered into student residences, rifling through their things. Security guard Howard Glen Hill hit the man, Jack Cruthers Hutchison, “in the head, pulled his hair and spat on him.” Police arrived: Hill was “in a neck restraint, limp and unresponsive. He died in the hospital two days later.” Hutchison was charged with manslaughter. TWU’s statement: “The university has no comment on the court ruling. TWU’s commitment has always been to safeguard our campus community, and we continue to provide a safe place of learning for all our students.”

Langley Union, in “Trinity Western University President’s Son Linked to Prolific White Nationalist Account,” investigated digital forensic evidence of the son of the President of TWU linked to a White Nationalist online account. The son’s actions should be considered separate from the father’s and the institutions. However, they are striking news.

The accounts claimed, among other assertions, “I believe in a white future. An Aryan future. A future where my children will make Indian Bronson shine our shoes. Where brown people cannot secure a line of credit, Black people pick cotton. We will win – this is what we fight for,” and “I am a colonialist. I make no effort to hide this. I believe in worldwide white supremacy.”

The Nelson Star reported in “‘Alt-right’ group uses Fort Langley historic site as meeting place” on the use of the local pub in Fort Langley as a meeting place for a public, so known and self-identified White Nationalist group. As one former boss noted, “I don’t know what is wrong with we the white race.” That is a sentiment, not an organization, however. This microcosm reflects a broader history of Canadian sociopolitics with race and religion, some Evangelicals and occasional allegations of racialism if not racism.

TWU’s policy is Inclusive Excellence. “We aim to promote a consistent atmosphere of inclusion and belonging at TWU by establishing a shared commitment to diversity and equity founded in the gospel’s truth. Christ came to save, reconcile, and equip all people (Rev. 7:9), and the incredible array of gifts God has given us is evidence of his creativity, beauty, and love of diversity,” it states. An administrator is reported to have said informally that the event was ‘not in line with Evangelical values.’

In the States, a trend in international Evangelical higher education is here too. Bob Jones University banned interracial dating until 2000, involving federal funding and accreditation debates. In Australia, Christian colleges faced scrutiny for policies excluding LGBTI+ students and staff. Faith-based codes and equality laws produced tensions in the United Kingdom, though less prominently than in Canada. Those American churches want to influence Canada in Indigenous communities. Some Canadian churches have Ojibwe pastors, for example.

A Medium (Xtra) post entitled “The painful truth about being gay at Canada’s largest Christian university” commented on the experience of a gay student, Jacob.’ As peers messaged Jacob on suspicion of him being gay, “We hate everything about you and you better watch your back because we are going to kill you on your way to school.” At TWU ‘Jacob,’ said, “I loved the community here so much that I did not want to jeopardize those relationships.” That is called a closet.

Another student, Corben, from Alberta at TWU, said, “My parents, I think, kind of wanted Trinity to be for me sort of like reparative therapy, which is why they would only help financially with this school.” Former Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau put forth a move to end Conversion Therapy, a discredited pseudotherapy to change sexual orientation and gender identity. Conversion therapy has been banned in Malta (2016), Germany (2020), France (2022), Canada (2022), New Zealand (2022), Iceland (2023), Spain (2023), Mexico (2024), Greece (2024), and Belgium (2024). That is only TWU, however. The community of Langley, specifically Fort Langley, where I was raised, is substantively linked to this place.

Langley Advance Times in “Blackface photo in 2017 Chilliwack yearbook sparks apology from school principal” reported on a blackface incident at a local school. It was part of a “mock trial.” So, bad taste in community, and the excuse for Snider’s example will likely do the same in this case over term. There are several cases of sexual misconduct cases in British Columbia and Canada. The Archdiocese of Vancouver was the first in Canada to publicly name clergy involved in sexual abuse and decades of abuse. At the same time, other prominent cases have arisen, including Michael Conaghan, Damian Lawrence Cooper, and Erlindo Molon, highlighting a pattern of clerical sexual exploitation and inadequate accountability in British Columbia. I would rather this not be the case, but it is the history.

In 2022, a TWU dean resigned amid pressure over her work on gender issues. One Reddit–and all Reddit commentary should be considered additions, while anecdotal at best–user described how TWU leaders had “tried to make her leave her position as dean because she… stated she was an lgbtq+ ally,” then issued bureaucratic statements of grief based on her departure.

Living there, these excuses likely flowed through social media. At the same time, community intimidation happens, too. It is bad for the community image and bad for the business. People have an interest in narrative morphing. As gay students find at TWU, and as outsiders as others find in the general community, it is mostly not about moral stances, but about image maintenance and business interests. Money matters because it is a well-to-do area of the country and a wealthy nation worldwide. There is regular township nonsense where the Fort Langley Night Market gets closed down due to vandalism and alcohol.

Ongoing online conversations about TWU degree quality continue, “So before those say ‘it’s an immigration scam’, it’s not and is essentially useless towards immigrating/coming to Canada. With that said, most of TWU’s programs are also useless to use towards immigrating, even if studied in person, because any non-degree program from a private school does not allow one to apply for a PGWP. However, it offers a couple of degree programs that can result in a PGWP.”

Brandon Gabriel and Eric Woodward have been at loggerheads for at least a decade. If you look at the original history, this reflects another fight between an Indigenous leader and the colonial presence in its history. Now, they are a local artist and developer, respectively. Woodward has a camp of supporters for development and a camp of detractors. Another mixed figure in the contemporary period of Langley. Over development concerns and pushback, Woodward got a building painted pink in protest at one point. It is a serious township history full of a minority of loud, silly people imposing their nonsense on a smaller group of innocent bystanders.

Whether LGBTI discrimination ensconced at its university, a blackface principal, homophobia, this isn’t unusual in a way. A constellation of apparent White Nationalist superminority undercurrents popping up, and with worship of a founder in a democracy who was a mixed-race colonialist timocrat married to a Cree woman, it’s a story of a Canadian town and municipality. A tale of how foundational myths, when left unexamined, morph into social realities.

Welcome to Langley–a light introduction: Home, sorta.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

How Does Culture Shape Who You Are? Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson on the Memetic Self

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

Part 1 of 2.

Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson, a Canadian psychologist and theorist, developed the concept of the memetic self—a culturally constructed identity formed from transmissible units of meaning called memes. He explores how language, culture, and social interaction give rise to self-awareness, tracing its development from mirror recognition in animals to modern identity. Robertson uses self-mapping, a therapeutic tool that visualizes a person’s identity through linked memes, to address fragmentation in conditions like autism, Alzheimer’s, and dissociative identity disorder. His work emphasizes coherence, volition, and cultural adaptability, and his forthcoming book—coauthored with his daughter—applies these insights to psychotherapy.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re joined by Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson. He is a Canadian psychologist, educator, and theorist known for his innovative work on the culturally constructed self. With over 40 years of experience in counselling and educational psychology, he developed the concept of the memetic self—a cognitive framework composed of culturally transmitted ideas (or “memes”) that shape an individual’s identity. He is the author of The Evolved Self: Mapping an Understanding of Who We Are and a pioneer of self-mapping, a visual and therapeutic method for exploring and restructuring identity. His work bridges psychology, philosophy, and cultural studies, offering practical tools for therapy and education while exploring questions of free will, agency, and the evolution of selfhood across diverse cultures. Mr. Robertson, thank you very much for joining me again today. I appreciate it. It’s always a pleasure.

Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson: You’re welcome. I’m looking forward to this, Scott.

Jacobsen: So, what is the self?

Robertson: Oh, that’s pretty basic. Okay. The self is a construct, as you mentioned in your introduction. Thank you for that generous overview. Your question is, “What is the self?” The self is a conceptual framework we use to define who we are. It is not a physical entity in the brain but rather a cognitive and cultural construct—a mental map that incorporates beliefs, values, experiences, and roles.

This construct has evolved. One of the earliest indications of self-awareness in our evolutionary lineage is mirror self-recognition, which has been observed in some great apes, dolphins, elephants, and magpies. In our hominin ancestors, the development of language and culture allowed for increasingly complex and abstract self-concepts.

Recognizing one’s reflection—understanding that “this is me”—marks a foundational moment in developing self-awareness. Although early humans may not have had the language to describe it, the ability to form a concept of self-based on reflection and social interaction was critical. This capacity laid the groundwork for the complex, culturally mediated selves we navigate today.

From that modest beginning, our ancestors gradually evolved the capacity for social interaction. They needed a rudimentary idea of who they were to engage socially, even if it was not consciously articulated.

Language development significantly boosted the evolution of the self. Once we moved beyond simple two-slot grammar—like “him run”—to more complex phonetic constructs, we could combine distinct sounds that held no individual meaning but could generate an almost unlimited number of words.

With that, collections of words took on new, layered meanings. As this linguistic complexity emerged, our self-definition became more nuanced, expanded, and refined. About 50,000 years ago, humans began burying their dead. This act implies a recognition of mortality and a developing self-concept about life and death.

The most recent significant change in our understanding of the self—as part of cultural evolution—may have occurred as recently as 3,000 years ago. I say “may” because it could have emerged earlier, but our evidence dates to that period, particularly from Greek writing and Egyptian hieroglyphics. Of course, many earlier cultures lacked writing systems, so we cannot be definitive about when this modern conception of self emerged.

What is this self I’m referring to? It includes the ideas of volition, constancy over time, and uniqueness. For instance, although you and I, Scott, share many characteristics, I do not believe you are me, and vice versa. Even if I had an identical twin—same genetics, upbringing, and experiences—I still would not recognize him as myself. That sense of uniqueness is part of the “modern self”—a culturally evolved manifestation of identity with an inherent sense of individualism.

Here is the great irony: we are a social species, and the self emerged through social interaction within early human communities, particularly tribal Neolithic groups. The self could not have developed in isolation; it depends on interaction with others. So, we are fundamentally shaped by collectivism, even though individualism is built into our modern self. This creates an internal tension between the group’s needs and the individual’s autonomy.

Historically, that tension was mediated by religion—specifically, organized religion, which kept people in their social roles. In Western civilizations, a deity often prescribed those roles, and individuals could not transcend them. Tradition or ancestor worship defined the limits of the self in other cultural contexts.

Societies that completely suppressed the modern self remained stagnant, while those that permitted at least some individuals to develop a sense of autonomous selfhood became more adaptive. This is because the self is a powerful tool for problem-solving. It allows us to reinsert ourselves into past experiences as protagonists, to relive and learn from those events, and to rehearse possible futures mentally. We can adjust our behaviour accordingly. These are valuable psychological skills.

But they also come at a cost. With the modern self comes the capacity for anxiety and existential distress. I doubt that our earliest ancestors experienced clinical depression or anxiety disorders as we know them today. These conditions are part of the psychological “baggage” of possessing a self capable of complex reflection and future projection.

For millennia, the self was constrained—kept “on a leash,” so to speak—until a set of unique historical conditions emerged in Europe. Specifically, during and before the Enlightenment, the Catholic Church—which had long functioned to suppress individualism—lost control, particularly during the Reformation and the ensuing religious wars between Catholics and Protestants.

Individuals gained some permission to explore personal identity when centralized religious authority broke down. This blossomed into what we now call the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment did not invent the self—it authorized it. Not entirely, of course—we remain social beings with embedded restrictions—but it granted more freedom to individuals to develop their understandings.

This led to the rise of modern science and humanism. Knowledge was no longer handed down by authority. Instead, it became something you had to demonstrate through observation, reason, and experimentation. These practices allowed individuals to engage with a reality beyond themselves.

And that is where humanism emerged. So, you asked me what the self is—and now you see: when you ask me a question, you get a long-winded answer.

Jacobsen: How do you define “meme” within the framework of The Evolved Self?

Robertson: The word “meme” has had an unfortunate evolution. It was initially coined by Richard Dawkins in the 1970s. Dawkins coined the term “meme” to represent a self-replicating unit of culture.

For instance, a simple descriptor like the colour red is not a meme. It’s merely a physical property description, not a transmissible concept that evolves culturally. A meme, in contrast, is more than an idea; it is a cultural construct that carries meaning across individuals and generations.

Dawkins defined a meme as something broader than a simple descriptor but narrower than an entire ideology, religion, or belief system. The latter, of course, is composed of many memes—interrelated units of culture. You can, for example, substitute the colour red in a conceptual framework with blue, and the core concept might remain, but the meme is more than any one element—it has internal structure and transmissibility.

Unfortunately, Dawkins did not have the opportunity to develop the theory entirely. His work was criticized for being tautological. Critics asked, “How can you prove this? How do we observe or measure a meme?” These questions challenged the concept’s empirical rigour.

In my research, I proposed a refined definition of a meme: it must be a culture unit with behavioural, qualitative, and emotional (or emotive) implications. A proper meme is not just a label or idea—it affects how we feel, act, and make meaning.

This also resolves a challenge Dawkins left open—his observation that memes can have “attractive” or “repulsive” properties. He did not elaborate on the mechanics of that.

In my framework, if one meme naturally leads to another—like how “love” often leads to “marriage” in cultural narratives—that linkage reflects an attractive force between memes. Conversely, when two memes are psychologically or conceptually incompatible—”love” and “hate” coexisting as core guiding values in the exact moment—that reflects a repellent force.

My work on the modern self is composed of a collection of memes that are primarily attractive to one another. If a meme within that structure becomes repellent—meaning it no longer aligns with the rest of the self—it tends to be ejected. That is how we maintain coherent, relatively stable identities.

Of course, not everyone has a stable sense of self. My work as a psychologist involves helping people reconfigure their self-concepts when internal inconsistencies cause distress.

Now, where things get tricky is the evolution of the word “meme” online. The internet popularized the term in a way that deviates from its original definition. Internet memes typically involve humour or juxtaposition—two ideas or images that don’t usually go together. While some may qualify as memes in the original sense, internet usage represents a narrow and diluted interpretation.

Jacobsen: Did I hear you correctly? You’re saying the modern meme online sometimes overlaps with Dawkins’ definition, but only in a limited sense.

Robertson: Yes, exactly. Internet memes sometimes fulfill the criteria but rarely capture the deeper behavioural and emotional dimensions Dawkins originally gestured toward—which I’ve tried to formalize more clearly.

Jacobsen: So, how does this fit into your work on self-mapping?

Robertson: Good question.

One of the most academically grounded ways to create a self-map is to ask someone to describe who they are. You use prompting questions to elicit a detailed, rich description of their self-concept.

I collect those self-descriptions in my research—just like this interview is being recorded. I transcribe the responses and break the narrative into elemental units—essentially memes. Each unit is labelled and categorized. This approach parallels qualitative methods in social science research.

The coding method I use for self-mapping parallels the qualitative analysis approach developed by Miles and Huberman in the early 1990s.

You label each unit of meaning. A sentence could represent a single unit or contain multiple distinct concepts. You isolate those concepts into thematic categories—or “bins”—based on their shared meaning.

Then, if those units exhibit the characteristics I described earlier—qualitative, behavioural, and emotional implications—you can classify them as memes.

Next, you examine the relationships between those memes. You identify which memes are attracted to each other—either through thematic linkage or cause-effect associations—and chart those relationships. You map them visually, using lines to indicate attractive forces. That’s the core structure of the self-map I create.

Now, this method requires considerable time and effort.

So, to make the process more accessible, my daughter—a psychologist—and I developed a quicker method in collaboration with a colleague from Athabasca University. We created a structured questionnaire with 40 core prompts, which could be expanded to 50 or 60.

The questions focus on four primary areas. First, we ask: “Who are you?” People might respond with statements like “I’m a father” or “I’m a chess player.” These are self-descriptive memes—cultural elements that express identity.

Then, we ask: “What are 10 things you like about yourself?” and “What are 10 things you would change if you could?” Finally, we ask: “What are 10 things you believe to be true?”

One of my clients, earlier this year, offered a novel and powerful addition to the exercise: “What are 10 things you keep hidden from others?” That insight added emotional depth and complexity to the map.

Once we gather that data, we create a visual self-map, following the same principles as in my academic research. I jokingly call this the “quick and dirty” version, but it works. My daughter Teela and I have used it successfully with many clients.

The crucial step is refining the map with the client until they recognize themselves. That map resonates when they say, “Yes, this is me,” reflecting their identity. We become psychologists if something important is missing, like a sense of personal agency or volition.

We help them develop those underrepresented self-elements based on an idealized model of the modern self—a coherent, autonomous individual identity. When parts are missing or fragmented, we work to integrate them.

We should do a formal academic study to validate this quick method, but based on clinical experience, it works.

Jacobsen: If we take all these elements and look at them as a whole, we’re essentially describing an “evolved self.” That allows us to examine the coherent identity of a person. How would you describe someone who lacks a coherent self or identity?

Robertson: That does happen. Not everyone possesses a well-formed self.

Jacobsen: Please explain.

Robertson: Take classical autism, for example—the traditional form I learned about during my training, not the broader, more ambiguous “autism spectrum disorder” currently defined by the APA. That modern definition is so diffuse that it’s challenging to apply meaningfully in clinical settings.

In classical autism, you may encounter children who engage in highly repetitive, self-soothing behaviours. One case I worked with involved a boy who spent most of his day swinging a string with a weight on the end, keeping it taut in a circular motion. Even while eating—an essential survival activity—he needed the string in his hand. If someone took it away, he would have a full-blown panic attack.

At that level of autism, the individual lacks a coherent self.

One key indicator is the absence of what psychologists call “theory of mind”—the capacity to understand that others have thoughts, feelings, and motivations similar to one’s own.

The theory of mind is essential. It allows us to interpret the behaviour of others based on internal states. For example, I can infer that you, Scott, have emotions and goals. If I understand your context, I can anticipate your next question. That’s mind-reading—not in a mystical sense but in a psychological, predictive sense. It’s something we all do constantly.

It is vital for navigating everyday life. For example, when driving, we anticipate that other people will stay on the correct side of the road. In Canada, that means the right side. We base this assumption on our shared cultural understanding, which generally holds.

Jacobsen: So, what happens to people who do not have a self?

Robertson: There are others, aside from individuals with severe autism, who also lack a coherent self. One group includes people with advanced Alzheimer’s disease.

There’s a poignant story told by an Alzheimer’s researcher—I’m forgetting the researcher’s name, but the story involved a woman who would visit her husband, who had advanced Alzheimer’s. She would begin by introducing herself each time: “My name is [X], and I’m your wife.” Once he understood her name and the relationship, they could converse coherently.

Then, one day, after she introduced herself and said, “I’m your wife,” he looked at her and asked, “Yes, and who am I?”

He genuinely did not know. So yes, there are people who lose their sense of self. It is rare, but it happens. Most people have a self—and nearly always, there’s a one-to-one correspondence between self and body.

Jacobsen: This brings me to three points of contact for further questions.

The first two are based on your description, and the third is a broader conceptual issue. First, in the case of someone with what might be considered a nonstandard profile on the autism spectrum—who meets the characteristics you mentioned—what are the legal and professional implications of working with someone who, by your clinical analysis, lacks a functional self?

Second, in cases involving advanced dementia or Alzheimer’s, how do you interpret situations where a person can still speak in coherent, functional language yet openly asks, “Who am I?” or “Do you know who I am?”

Robertson: Those are deep and difficult questions.

In the case of someone with classic autism, we generally assume that a parent or legal guardian is involved—someone who can authorize professional intervention. The goal is to help the individual develop skills that improve quality of life. Whether or not these interventions fully succeed is another matter, but we do try—and sometimes, we help.

With advanced dementia or Alzheimer’s, things get more complicated—particularly when it comes to end-of-life care and living wills. You may have someone who no longer remembers ever having signed a living will, and yet, according to that document, medical professionals are instructed to allow them to die.

It raises profound ethical dilemmas. You may encounter someone who still shows signs of a will to live—even joy or affection—but can no longer comprehend their identity or the implications of past decisions. That contradiction is ethically challenging.

Jacobsen: I have a will to live and a living will to die. I cannot know who I am, yet I still live.

Robertson: Right. It’s not a lack of will—it’s a lack of cognitive ability to know.

Jacobsen: What about cases involving dissociative identity disorder—what used to be called multiple personality disorder? In those situations, more than one “self” seems to coexist in the same body.

Robertson: That diagnosis is controversial. Not all professionals agree that it reflects an actual condition. However, conceptually, it’s possible—because the self is a cultural construct.

The self is not a metaphysical entity that inhabits the body. Instead, it describes a person shaped by cultural constructs that include the body and socially mediated self-understanding. Think of the body and brain as the hardware and the self as the software—cultural programming that shapes perception, behaviour, and identity.

Given that framework, it’s theoretically possible for multiple “selves” to coexist—though this would be a scarce and complex scenario.The older term “Multiple Personality Disorder” implicitly recognizes the possibility of multiple selves. The term “dissociative identity disorder” implies a fragmented self.

Now, I’ve never worked personally with someone diagnosed with multiple selves, so I’m speaking from theoretical and scholarly understanding here.

From what I’ve read, therapists who work with such clients often report that one becomes dominant or “emergent” while others recede. The therapeutic aim, typically, is to integrate these multiple selves into a coherent whole so the individual can function more effectively.

There’s a fringe view in psychology suggesting that this therapeutic integration is akin to “murder”—that by fostering one coherent self, we are erasing others. I don’t accept that view. That’s an extreme form of ideological overreach.

Jacobsen: This introduces another critical nuance. The self emerges not only across human history—it also unfolds across individual development. The self is not present at conception or birth in its complete form. It’s an evolved pattern of information—a construct that takes shape over time. And, just as it can emerge, it can also deteriorate.

In advanced age or due to disease, the body and many faculties may still function—but the self might fade away. In that sense, you could argue that the self has a lifespan within the human lifespan. People talk about lifespan, and increasingly about healthspan—but perhaps we should also talk about a “self-span.”

Robertson: That’s an intriguing idea—a self-span.

Jacobsen: It would be difficult to measure precisely, of course, especially given the limitations of quick-and-dirty self-assessment methods versus more rigorous, clinical approaches like self-mapping. Still, it’s a meaningful concept.

If the self is a cultural construct, we might ask: Do different cultures shape the self in ways that affect when it tends to emerge developmentally? Does the self appear earlier or later, depending on the cultural context?

Robertson: That’s a fascinating question. I do not have a definitive answer, but I’ve mapped the selves of people from the interior of China, from Siberia, and collectivist communities in North America. Every culture I’ve studied has a self.

Here’s where the cultural variation becomes evident: different cultures emphasize different aspects of the self. One of the people I mapped was a woman from a traditional family in the interior of China.

Yes, she had the same structural aspects of the self-found in North American individuals, including a volitional component. But that part of her self—the volitional aspect—was not valued in her cultural context. Instead, family duty and moral conduct traits were emphasized, reflecting collectivist values.

So, structurally, her self was similar. But culturally, the valued components were different. What made this particularly interesting is that after mapping herself, she described herself as feeling like a “robot,” and she decided that was not a good thing.

Over about eight or nine months, she resolved to start making her own decisions. This did not prove easy because most of us do not make conscious decisions at every moment. Typically, we rely on habit, social norms, or deference to authority. For example, someone might say, “Lloyd Robertson says this is a good idea, so I’ll go with that.”

But most of the time, we act on autopilot. However, she began engaging in conscious decision-making—evaluating possible outcomes, comparing alternatives, weighing probabilities, and assigning value. She did this even with mundane choices like what to eat or wear in the morning.

It exhausted her. She felt she was getting nowhere. Eventually, she decided: “My life is too valuable to waste making every decision consciously. I’m going back to being a robot.”

But here’s the key insight: to make that decision, she had to engage her volitional self.

She never abandoned it. It was still there—intact, available, and waiting for the next time she chose to use it.

Jacobsen: Let’s say we have a rare case of genuine dual selves in one body. And to be clear, I do not mean conjoined twins—cases where two individuals share some neural connectivity. I’m referring to a single individual whose psychology has bifurcated. What if their volitional trajectories—their vector spaces—are at odds with one another?

This reminds me of a presentation by V. S. Ramachandran, the neurologist known for the mirror box experiment. He referenced split-brain patients—individuals whose corpus callosum had been surgically severed to treat epilepsy.

In such cases, if you cover one eye, you direct stimuli to only one hemisphere. For example, when Ramachandran asked these patients if they believed in God—by pointing up for “yes” or down for “no”—the left hemisphere might point “yes,” while the right pointed “no.”

The individual would often laugh in response. Ramachandran joked that this showed the right hemisphere had a sense of humour.

But there’s a more profound point here: split-brain patients can manifest two conflicting worldviews—internally consistent but contradictory selves. In theological terms, this raises amusing but profound questions. For instance, if belief grants salvation, does one hemisphere go to heaven and the other to hell?

On a more serious note, when these volitional patterns conflict—not just on trivial matters but on core values—what happens? And for those who criticize integration therapy as “murdering” a self, how do you respond?

Robertson: The split-brain experiments are fascinating but differ from dissociative identity disorder, a distinct condition.

In most people, the right hemisphere houses spatial awareness and emotional reasoning, while the left hemisphere tends to handle verbal processing. When the corpus callosum is severed, these two systems can no longer communicate so that each side may draw on separate memories or frameworks.

In an intact brain, people typically build a worldview—a cognitive map of how the world works. This worldview often resides in the left hemisphere. When incoming information conflicts with that map, people experience cognitive dissonance.

Eventually, the left hemisphere, which governs executive control and higher reasoning, will normally create a worldview representing our understanding of how the world works. We have many defence mechanisms that we use to keep that worldview intact, but at some point our constructed reality diverges too far from objective reality. The right brain, at a feeling level “dissolves” the construct and the left brain then begins creating a new or amended worldview. It does not happen often, but it happens enough to keep us psychologically adaptive.

Now, returning to your question: Is there a God? If only one hemisphere believes, which is correct?

Well, that depends on which side holds the belief. Humanism, for example, is highly cerebral—logical, empirical, and grounded in enlightenment thought. It is likely rooted in left-brain processes. Compassion, however, may bridge both hemispheres.

Jacobsen: So, what is the right brain holding onto?

Robertson: Something interesting happened to me the other day. I woke up with a Christian hymn running through my head—one I learned in my fundamentalist upbringing.

It struck me: Where did that come from? It must have been encoded deeply. I was baptized not once but twice, in complete immersion both times.

That early religious imprint likely lodged itself somewhere in my right hemisphere. It may be largely inactive now, but it is not gone.

Jacobsen: So, do developmental trajectories matter here?

You were raised with those strong evangelical influences at a young age, and even though you’ve moved beyond them, they left an imprint. Neuroscientifically, we know the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex—the seat of executive function—is the last part of the brain to develop. Evolutionarily, it’s also the most recent.

As far as we know, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex—responsible for executive function—is the last part of the brain to develop. Most people usually complete that maturation in their mid-twenties. So, these systems take a long time to become fully online and must then be integrated with other neural networks.

Do developmental phases like the second significant period of synaptic pruning in adolescence reflect more concrete hardware changes, as opposed to the cultural software changes that occur across a person’s life?

Robertson: I like your question, Scott. And the answer is yes.

Jacobsen: Yay.

Robertson: If someone were raised entirely in the wild—say, the fictional case of a boy raised by wolves—we would not expect them to develop what I call the modern self.

The self is a cultural construct. Children are taught to have a self; one key mechanism is language acquisition. For example, when a child cries and the caregiver says, “Is Bobby hungry?” that implicitly teaches the child that Bobby has internal states—needs, desires, and preferences. That is the beginning of selfhood.

Your point about adolescence is spot on. The self is not fully formed in early childhood. In many ways, individual development parallels cultural evolution. Adolescence—especially early adolescence—is about experimentation, identity formation, and exploration. Teenagers try out roles, test boundaries, and slowly determine, “This is who I am,” or, “No, that’s not me.”

We must be cautious about defining someone’s self prematurely during this construction phase. You cannot predict how it will turn out, and efforts to control that process can be harmful.

There’s research suggesting the human brain continues maturing until around age 25. Jokingly, maybe we should not let people vote until they’re 25—but of course, I can say that now that I’m well past that age.

In truth, development is highly individual. Some mature earlier, others later. And yes, building on your earlier point, there may be significant cultural differences in how and when the self develops. That’s an area ripe for further research.

Now, when I say modern self-development and spread across all known cultures, there’s a practical reason: societies without individuals capable of forming modern selves could not compete with those that had them.

Jacobsen: What makes the modern self more competitive?

Robertson: Our sense of individuality.

In Christianity, for example, Scripture often exhorts individuals to “give up the self.” That very statement acknowledges the self’s existence and its power.

Such a sacrifice is required because the individual self can threaten collective stability. It challenges authority, tradition, and rigid social roles.

Jacobsen: That connects back to your earlier point—cultures that lack individuals with a modern self lose their competitive edge.

Robertson: Here’s the value of having a self.

In traditional cultures, individuals typically had an earlier form of self—defined primarily by their place in the collective. In response to threats or challenges, behaviours were guided by tribal memory, stories, and rigid social roles.

For example, if an enemy appeared, people would respond according to long-established patterns—based on age, gender, and status in the group. There was no need—or room—for improvisation.

But what happens when a new, unfamiliar situation arises—something the culture has not encountered before and for which there is no ritual?

In such cases, traditional cultures often turned to oracles—individuals capable of novel reasoning, that is, problem-solving. I suspect those early oracles possessed a more developed, volitional self, which is why they were trusted in the first place.

Similarly, in Hindu society, Brahmins were given a rigorous education, allowing them to cultivate modern selves capable of insight and judgment. But they were a small elite.

In many cultures, people who had developed themselves were respected and closely managed. They were given roles where they could contribute without disrupting social order.

The self-concept eventually spread across all human societies because we are a nomadic, adaptive species. We move, we mix, we evolve.

Just look at our evolutionary history—we even interbred with Neanderthals.

We interact. I do not believe a human society has ever been so isolated that its members lacked a developed self. But if such a group exists—perhaps an uncontacted tribe deep in the Amazon—I would love to study them.

Jacobsen: When I attended the 69th Commission on the Status of Women at the United Nations, I participated in a session featuring Ambassador Bob Rae of Canada. The session focused on Indigenous communities and was led by Indigenous women.

Someone on the panel mentioned a group from an isolated region—possibly resembling the cultural isolation you described. Their account of getting to the UN was striking. If you asked me how I got there, I’d say something like: “I took a bus to the airport, flew to New York, took the train…” For them, before all of that began, it started with a canoe.

That was their standard form of transportation before reaching any conventional transit station. So, even in that case, I would be hard-pressed to believe they were entirely uncontacted or isolated in today’s world.

Robertson: I agree. I suspect such total isolation no longer exists.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mark Carney’s Family Legacy: Catholic Education, Indigenous Assimilation, and the Shadows of Joseph Burr Tyrrell School

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/14

*Written prior to election.*

Interim Prime Minister Mark Carney of the Liberal Party of Canada will be running in the next federal election in Canada. He came from a Roman Catholic family history, particularly with his father, Robert James “Bob” Carney. He was a Catholic educator who lived and worked in Fort Smith, Northwest Territories, in the 1960s. What is the history here? We can focus on superficial news analyses of “culturally retarded” and then leave the narrative about the father of the current Prime Minister, or look more deeply than centre-left news media and opinion in Canada or simply ignore it amongst centre-right media. Let us sidestep those.

Robert Carney served as the Principal of Fort Smith Federal Day School in 1965. Its official name was not Fort Smith Federal day School but Joseph Burr Tyrell School, which focused on the education of Indigenous children. Federally, JBT was run as an ‘Indian day school.” Principal Carney oversaw school Indigenous youth in the Fort Smith locale and children housed in nearby church-run residential facilities.

Carney was deeply committed and connected to the missional work of the Catholic Church in the North of Canada, which was aimed at the local Indigenous communities. He worked at the crossroads of government policy and Catholic educational efforts. Principal Carney was deeply committed to the Catholic faith based on an analysis of statements made in a 1965 CBC Radio interview. He discussed the program at JBT for–in his terms–“culturally retarded” Indigenous children. He defined the “culturally retarded child” as “a child from a Native background who, for various reasons, has not been in regular attendance in school.”

Indigenous children at JBT, in turn, were compared to the Euro-Canadian Catholic cultural and educational standards of the time. Principal Carney implemented assimilationist education policies discouraging the locale’s traditions and languages, favouring the English language and Catholic teachings. When speaking of Fort Smith and surrounding areas, we’re talking of Dene nations, e.g., Smith’s Landing First Nation (Thebacha Dene), Salt River First Nation, and Métis Communities.

These Métis communities were descendants of Dene and European (primarily French) fur traders. The primary language was Dënesųłiné (Chipewyan) by Smith’s Landing First Nation and Salt River First Nation. The Chipewyan people of Smith’s Landing First Nation are descendants of those from lower Slaver River and northeastern Alberta, while Salt River First Nation are those who signed Treaty 8 in 1899.

As per current commentary, Principal Carney was a principal of a federal day school and adhered to assimilationist education policies, but was not a residential school principal. He ran JBT, not the boarding facilities. However, these operated in tandem with the residential institutions of Fort Smith. Indigenous children were boarded at a hostel or residence run by the Catholic Church and then sent to JBT for day classes. Carney participated in the broader residential school infrastructure, while his professional title was Principal of a federal day school.

He was a vertex between Indigenous families and local communities, nuns, and clergy from the Roman Catholic Church who managed the hostels and missionary work. Fort Smith was formative for the work and life of Robert Carney circa 60 years ago. In the broader purview, Fort Smith functioned as a hub for residential schools and assimilationist educational efforts. (Roman Catholic) Church and State in Canada functioned in tandem with the colonial educational efforts of Euro-Canadians and the Catholic hierarchs. Oblate of Mary Immaculate and affiliated clergy had a strong presence with Bishop Gabriel Breynat (after which Breynat Hall was given its title) and Bishop Paul Piché leading initiatives there. The explicit purpose was to Christianize Indigenous children.

The accounts from former students, in addition to historical investigations, document severe abuse and trauma associated with the residential schools of Fort Smith. Grandin College, though, has been remembered–as per the mixed moral history of Canadian society–for its positive mentorship and high-quality education for the time. Breynat Hall is remembered for significant abuses. Survivors continue to speak out. JBT was known for mistreatment and discrimination too.

Jeannie Marie-Jewell, a Fort Smith Dene woman who became an NWT MLA, has recollections. She was made to attend it when her mother was sick. She described the supervision as “structured and strict,” with discipline crossing into cruelty. Others and Marie-Jewell report witnessing sexual abuse and physical abuse at Breynat Hall. Marie-Jewell stated, “At night, I remember I was too scared to look when the priests or the nuns took some of the kids out [of the dorm]. Moreover, these little girls would come back sobbing. So, what did they do with them at night? I spoke to a survivor who was there at the same time as me, and she said she was sexually abused there.” Sexual abuse has been identified at Breynat Hall by multiple survivors. This came to light in the 1990s and 2000s during lawsuits and the TRC process.

JBT’s former students recall a racially segregated and punitive environment. It is reported that non-Aboriginal children sat in the front of the room, and Aboriginal children sat in the back. Corporal punishment was used liberally, using either a ruler or a pointer if a student spoke the Native language or did not adhere to the rules. In the day school, there were violations of privacy and sexual boundaries, physical abuse and humiliation. We do not know the names of specific perpetrators from accounts. Girls were vulnerable and unprotected from predatory staff. The Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada (TRC), in its Final Report (2015), documented widespread abuse in residential schools nationally. Fort Smith was no exception. Therefore, Breynat Hall survivors suffered harsh discipline, malnutrition, illness, and abuse at the hands of certain clergy and staff.

Decades later, Robert Carney reflected on the residential school system. He became an academic and remained a devout Catholic. He pursued graduate studies and wrote about Indigenous education policy. In authored articles, he emphasized what he saw as favourable and benign facets of residential schooling. These struck a chord when abuses came out in the 1990s and 2000s. He emphasized increased literacy and the dedication of the missionaries rather than dwelling on the abuses. Some historians have characterized this as “residential school denialism” or a distortion/minimization of residential schools. Interim Prime Minister Mark Carney is drawn into the public discussion due to the legacy and work of his father at JBT.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Examining Decolonization, Zionism, and the Ethics of Clinical Neutrality

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/08

Therapy and Politics

If therapy can be a vehicle for ideology, then clinicians risk repeating past abuses.

The article “The Danger of Decolonization Therapy” by Miri Bar-Halpern and Dean McKay, published on April 8, 2025, in Jewish Syndicate News, addressed concerns within the mental health field. The focus was on the partial politicization of some facets of therapeutic spaces.

Spotlight on Decolonization Therapy

Decolonization therapy is a psychological approach working on lasting impacts of colonialism by centring Indigenous knowledge, challenging Eurocentric models, and integrating social justice. This does not necessarily mean cultural psychology or Indigenous psychology: To acknowledge some systemic issues is different than imposed ideological stances ignoring principles of impartiality. The emphasis for Bar-Halpern and McKay is a particular strain and risk in this framework of therapy, implicitly. They argued decolonization therapy lacks sufficient rigorous scientific validation unlike Dialectical Behavioural Therapy or Cognitive Behavioural Therapy.

It can erase the core identity of some Jewish clients vis-a-vis Jewish identity and Zionism, and may retraumatize some Jewish clients.  They make a call-to-action for the rejection of ideological coercion in therapy, protecting Jewish clinicians from discrimination, demanding high empirical standards of practices, addressing some nuanced antisemitism in mental-health training, and advocating for Jewish clients in this space. Naturally, colonialism is a factor in histories and people groups more recently affected remain extant. That’s not the question of concern here, but remains a question of concern in other conversations.

I would agree with the thrust of the arguments, while pumping the brakes modestly.

A Cautionary Tale: Sluggish Schizophrenia

I thought about this over a coffee one morning, whether to pursue analysis or not. I had another coffee and jotted some brain droppings down. I had some time today to synthesize some reflections. The piece made me think, rethink, question myself, et cetera. A reflection from a doctoral counselling psychologist colleague with Metis heritage, if that counts in context on prior politicization of an intended apolitical therapeutic space after reading the same article by Bar-Halpern and McKay:

In the mid-twentieth century, Soviet psychologists invented a category called “sluggish schizophrenia,” which they used to classify political dissenters as mentally ill. Psychology continues to be misused to push political agendas. Ethical psychologists do not push their views on their clients. Psychotherapy is designed to assist the client in expanding their worldviews and making their lives more satisfying by using self-experimentation and reason. Even if a client decides she wishes to forgo her volitional abilities and become a robot waiting for the command, we explore the likely consequences with the client. However, as long as the client is aware of the consequences of their actions, we support them. Here is an ethical dilemma we discussed in my early training: Do we help Al Capone become more self-actualized in his actions?

Decolonization therapy may well do this, not from Eastern Europe but from North America if pushing ideologies, whether anti-Capitalist or anti-Zionist. Anti-Zionism is not antisemitism in most cases, while pro-Zionist or anti-Zionist political pushes in an intended apolitical space is wrong. That is the root: “Psychology continues to be misused to push political agendas.” No specification of alignment or a re-stipulation of the foundational ethics of therapy: impartiality, or minimize bias and maximize neutrality.

From Theory to the Couch: Ethical Dilemmas

As the article surmises, the majority of Jewish people identify as Zionists and/or support Israel. On a personal note, I share the last name of the Founder of Reform Judaism, Israel Jacobson. However, I do not know if there is any family history or patrilineal or matrilineal relation. My family received an award for harbouring at least one Jewish couple for several years for safety and protection on the Dutch side during World War II. Do I get a cookie? No.

My biases: Let us say, for the sake of argument, the likely background of no family relation, I “identify” per contemporary, in vogue, verbiage, or “am” a “Zionist” in a manner of being a ‘Palestinist’–not an abnormal position in international documentation. I wrote a book project, out of In-Sight Publishing, of in-depth professional, expert-level interviews from 2019-2021 on precisely the subject matter of Israel-Palestine, entitled On Israel-Palestine: 2019-2021 (2024).

Identity, Data, and the Risk of Erasure

Those State terms came from agreements following the Balfour Declaration. The vote for Palestine’s non-member observer State status on November 29, 2012, at the United Nations cemented this further within international voting records. UN Resolution A/RES/67/19 stipulated, “The General Assembly… Decide to accord Palestine non-member observer state status in the United Nations…”

It passed with 138 votes in favour, nine against, and 41 abstentions. Therefore, we have Palestine as a non-member observer State status of the UN, under observer state Status, on equal footing with the Holy See, as Israel is a Member State with voting privileges. At least, in either case, it could change, in theory.

However, it is so overwhelmingly supported by the international community for a State of Palestine under the Question of Palestine and for a State of Israel, simply unreasonable to put in the fore a question about the member state status of either. I denounce anti-Arab and anti-Muslim prejudice, and antisemitic bigotry. Many others do, too.

The fact that these become controversial stances, as generically positioned and further utilized to politicize a professionally intended vulnerable population and apolitical interpersonal professional space, raises serious questions under codes of ethics. Therapeutic spaces are intended as apolitical spaces for terms set by clients with therapists. To politicize them violates the premise, they are not complex considerations.

The symmetry fits structurally with Conversion Therapy in their positionality, but is disjunct in harm type and degree. Based on the article numbers, Zionism is something 85% of Jewish people support. However, based on other sources from the United States and in the United Kingdom, these may be inflated numbers, but not too much. Others range the numbers from 63% to 82% regarding caring about Zionism, with lesser strength in support, while still adhering.

As of 2020, UK data from the Institute for Jewish Policy Research state 73% of U.S. Jews feel emotionally attached to Israel, while 63% identify as Zionists, down from 72% a decade earlier. While Pew’s 2021 data show 82% of American Jews feel at least some attachment to Israel, while 48% under 30 feel “very” or “somewhat” attached to Israel, 51% of Jews 50 and older caring about Israel is essential to Jewish identity. Overall 2/3rds express some degree of connection to Israel. Attachment does not equate to support. Connection and care can mean Zionism to many. Therefore, most adhere to styles of Zionism or connection, care, and/or support for Israel.

Parallels and Hypotheticals

Similarly on issues of gender and sexual minorities, LGBTI+, using terminology via the UN with the LGBTI Core Group rather than narrowing within common American parlance, is an inherent identity of development. Gender and sexual orientation seem to flow outwards, akin to the development of a snowflake and a sociological category. It is not a position of necessary advocacy to proclaim: “I am a bisexual man.” It is fabulous and factual, but not a necessary point of advocacy in the manner of Zionism or argument around historicity or a claim to some biblically (mostly) unjustified narrative. On the other hand, antisemitism has been around for centuries. This can count as an early sprouting of it in a professional space.

Within a few decades, people’s lives targeted can be impacted. Conversion Therapywas established and systematized for decades prior to the 1990s controversies. Conversion Therapy, or reparative therapy, is a practice aimed at changing sexual orientation, gender identity, or gender expression. Peter Gajdics, the author of The Inheritance of Shame, was a victim. So, that case is different, not in spirit but in development. Eventually, I could see a symmetry if others were not critically inquiring into it and pushing back against it. It is critically confronted, not yet 2055 or 2065, either, so not enough room for decades of entrenchment.

So, we can at least step forward with a strong foot. This potato is too hot. Journalists do not want to cover this. To critique Israeli policy, “Hooray, stop the genocide!” and “You are an antisemite” To critique Hamas murders on October 7 and hostage-taking, and leftwing unwitting antisemitism, “Stop the clock on the Woke, you go, Mr.!” and “Deport the lunatic leftwing radicals and terrorists on our campuses!”

If they are on the Right sociopolitically, then they might be afraid of leftist harassment and cancellation tactics. If they are on the Left, then they do not want to become another Norman Finkelstein case, and fear some wings of the Israeli lobby and the American State. To the more significant point, though, while no mainstream therapy formally pathologizes Zionism, a framing as inherently oppressive without acknowledging its ethnic and religious dimensions risks veering into symbolic antisemitism. This could destabilize a client’s sense of safety and/or identity.

If they are like Mr. Huckabee and want a single super-state for apocalyptic Christian Zionism for the Second Coming of Christ, then that is a different story on hermeneutical antisemitism if that is their wheelhouse. One obvious thought experiment to me. Can we reverse this claim? Just forgetting any UN record, rights abuses by the Israeli state or the Palestinians against Israelis, etc., theoretically, one could assert the American far-right ethnic supremacist talking point about white genocide.

As a case in illustrative hyperbole, based on extreme viewpoints held in parts by many, “Looking at the mass immigration, look at the Kalergi-Coudenhove plan in action for the ‘Eurasian-Negroid race of the future,’ the Rothschilds own the moon, etc.; we are being colonized–watch out for the space lasers (TM) targeting the last of the pure Aryan Race.” These form a White ethnic American State idea.

They pose this: anyone criticizing or arguing against it is considered colonizing. We need to decolonize the therapy of anti-White Statism. It is a professional duty for those in our care to decolonize from anti-White State ideas. People would take offence at this. Why not the reverse? They could even have APA poster presentations pointing to the prefrontal cortex, vaguely identifying anti-White Statism as a mental illness needing a decolonization therapy style of approach as was done with Zionism.

Restoring Neutrality: Evidence and Safeguards

We risk undermining the neutrality and integrity of psychological practice, and are moving towards this more pervasively based on this. Jewish identity is multifaceted, is not a mental illness when linked to Zionism, and involves self-determination. Decolonization Therapy mostly lacks sufficient rigorous empirical support. However, it is grounded in cultural psychology and values ideology over evidence, while inverting its duty not to harm by retraumatizing some Jewish patients, alienating them further.

It does not have the same systematic and comprehensive empirical support as standardized therapeutic techniques, including Dialectical Behavioural Therapy. Therapists, thus, can buy into antisemitic tropes around genocide and fascist stereotypes, labelling Jewish clients as oppressors, politicize therapy with anti-Zionist ideologies, and make therapeutic spaces a place to intimidate others. I submit that if a social justice framework in therapy retraumatizes and alienates clientele, then there will be less social justice and more anti-social injustice frameworks for therapy.

Therapy as Sanctuary, Not Battleground

Dr. Jennifer Mullan, the Founder of Decolonizing Therapy, most succinctly stated, “There’s no such thing as neutral education. Education either functions as an instrument to bring about conformity or freedom,” or “To begin to consider and implement practices that support politicizing and shifting our organizational and interpersonal perspectives.”

To contrast, the Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists (Fourth Edition), under Ethical Standards of Principle of Integrity in Relationships, stipulated the importance of the need “to be as objective and unbiased as possible in their… service.” The British Psychological Society in Code of Ethics and Conduct linked reason or rationality to impartiality. The International Union for Psychological Science in its Universal Declaration of Ethical Principles for Psychologists emphasized the fundamental Principle of Integrity specifying “maximizing impartiality and minimizing biases.” Finally, the American Psychological Association (APA) Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct emphasizes in its Principle C: Integrity the avoidance of deception and misrepresentation, which could extend to refraining from the use of therapy as a vehicle for partisan persuasion.

Therapy is meant as a sanctuary for clients’ own narratives. Ironically, this trend can come to risk repeating the colonization abuses of the past under the imposition of a ‘decolonization’ pretense. We need a reintegration of client autonomy and therapeutic neutrality; therapy is the client’s domain for autonomy premised on non-maleficence, not an ideological battleground. It may be helpful to further embed thorough mandatory neutrality training in licensure standards, so it doesn’t become an issue at scale.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Neurodivergent, Not Broken: Rethinking Support, Accountability, and Authentic Growth

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/07

Dr. Matt Zakreski emphasizes that neurodivergent individuals are not broken neurotypicals but uniquely wired people requiring tailored support. He contrasts Canada’s flexible, individualized approach with the U.S.’s rule-bound systems, underscoring the importance of equity—not uniformity—in education and development. Zakreski critiques the misuse of identity labels to avoid accountability and encourages adaptive support based on process, not perfection. He advocates for knowledge as empowerment, shifting from stigma to informed compassion. Emphasizing the role of stereotype threat, he calls for environments where authenticity can thrive. Children need flexible systems and high, compassionate standards to become grounded, resilient adults.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How are neurodivergent people, not broken neurotypical people? What is the misunderstanding there in the public mind?

Dr. Matt Zakreski: There is a core misunderstanding that there is a “right” way to engage with the world. However, that is just not true. Some ways are easier or more widely accepted—but not inherently better.

Society is primarily built by and for neurotypical people. About 80% of the population is neurotypical. So, when you are neurodivergent, you often operate outside the default design. That does not mean you are wrong. However, it can tell youthat you are at odds with how others expect things to be done.

Those odds do not have to lead to conflict or isolation but can lead to friction. That is where support becomes crucial.

We need to help neurodivergent people understand the rules and how to engage with them in ways that feel most authentic and manageable for them. That is not the same as saying, “You need to change who you are.” It is more like, “Here are some skills that will help you navigate this moment.”

Once that moment has passed, if they want to return to their fully authentic selves, we honour that. The goal is adaptive functionality, not forced conformity.

Jacobsen: How do America and Canada differ in their approaches to supporting neurodivergent individuals as they develop from childhood through adolescence?

Zakreski: One of the things I have always respected about Canada is that Canadians seem more inclined to recognize and accommodate individual developmental journeys. I am a big hockey fan, so think about Sidney Crosby or Connor McDavid—they are given that special dispensation to play in the juniors early. Why? Because they were ready.

Moreover, that is the essence of good neurodivergence support: finding the right-sized fit for the right kind of challenge. It is partly operational, but at its heart, it is philosophical. It is a commitment to honouring a person’s unique growth path and doing what it takes to help that path unfold.

In the U.S., we pride ourselves on rugged individuality but are also extremely rule-bound. I cannot tell you how often I have spoken with neurodivergent students in the U.S. who need something different—a more advanced math class or a different approach to writing—and the system says, “No. This is how we do it.”

In my experience with Canadian educators, especially those who work with neurodivergent kids, the attitude is often, “Let us see what we can do to meet this student’s needs.”

Moreover, that is a huge difference. Because if you are willing to think outside the box, you are automatically better positioned to serve “outside the box” kids.

Jacobsen: How do we prevent that from overextending into pandering?

Zakreski: That is such a great question. Are you familiar with the Yerkes–Dodson Law?

Jacobsen: Oh yeah—the Yerkes–Dodson curve. Absolutely.

Zakreski: So here is the thing: almost every intervention I design is rooted in the idea behind the Yerkes–Dodson Law. The goal is to find the right level of stimulation or challenge—that “leading edge of learning,” as I call it.

When something is too easy, people disengage. When it is too hard, they shut down. However, you can achieve engagement, growth, and resilience if you hit that sweet spot.

So, no, giving kids the right opportunities is not pandering. We are not lowering expectations—we are calibrating the level of challenge. If we are targeting that optimal zone, we almost cannot pander to them. We are pushing them just enough to grow while still supporting them as they stretch.

If a kid says, “I am smarter—I need better math. Give me better math,” and we say, “Okay, let us do that,” then the kid struggles and cannot keep up, so we often remove them from that setting.

However, those services—those accommodations—should not be seen as badges of honour. They are not awards. It is not about prestige. It is a matter of equity.

Everyone should get what they need.

Gifted kids, neurodivergent kids—they are not better. They are different. Moreover, the goal is not to reward someone for being different. It is to right-size the challenge so that each student is in a place where they can grow and thrive.

Jacobsen: In practice—clinical practice, specifically—how do you “measure twice and cut once”? How do you assess and then tailor support accordingly?

Zakreski: You start with the person’s interests.

Let us say Sally is a high-level musician. I know music matters to her, so I begin by exploring music-based interventions. I asked her, “What does success in music look and feel like to you?”

Does it mean playing Carnegie Hall in New York City? Does it mean attending Juilliard? Does it mean becoming a tenured professor at McGill University in Montreal?

Jacobsen: That is right. You have your Canadian references in order.

Zakreski: Of course! I do this. I am ready for the quiz.

Jacobsen: Okay then—quiz time. Who said, “The medium is the message”?

Zakreski: That is Marshall McLuhan.

Jacobsen: Correct. 100 points. Gold star. What was Glenn Gould known for playing, and which composer was he most famous for interpreting?

Zakreski: Oof—I do not think I know that one. I will model my intellectual humility here and admit there is a gap.

Jacobsen: Gould was a classical pianist best known for his interpretations of Bach. When he visited the Soviet Union, people were so in awe of his technical and emotional mastery that they asked questions like, “Is it a machine? No—it is a man,” which echoed Superman-like mythologizing.

Zakreski: That is wild. I love it.

Jacobsen: Okay, let us pivot back. In clinical work, have you ever had a situation where a neurodivergent child shows their divergence in verbal reasoning or verbal ability, and you model something nonverbally—without explicitly stating that is what you are doing?

Zakreski: Yes, absolutely. There is a famous psychological study—I am 90% sure it came out of Yale. If needed, I can fact-check that. Malcolm Gladwell references it in his book Blink.

The core idea is that Western culture is exceptionally verbal. So, people with advanced verbal skills are often disproportionately elevated—socially, academically, and even professionally—compared to those with strengths in problem-solving, lateral thinking, or engineering/STEM domains.

So, when working with neurodivergent kids, especially those with expressive or receptive language challenges, I often model emotional regulation, problem-solving, or curiosity through nonverbal behaviour without paying attention. Over time, many kids pick up on this, integrate it, and reflect it in ways that match their cognitive style.

It is one of our most potent, quiet tools, especially when working with kids who process the world differently.

In this particular study, participants were put in a room where they had to solve a problem—one that was not immediately clear how to solve. Everyone received the same set of instructions, but what they found fascinating.

The verbal thinkers kept asking, “What else do I need to know? What information am I missing?” They assumed there was a verbal piece missing from the instructions. Meanwhile, when the facilitators either nonverbally modelled how to solve the problem or gave a sizable hint, the adaptive thinkers—those who could pivot between verbal and nonverbal reasoning—were able to adjust and solve the task.

However, the people locked into that single-channel verbal mode of thinking kept circling back to more questions and language. They were limited by the style they had grown comfortable with.

One of the core principles we try to model, especially with neurodivergent clients, is that process matters more than product.

I want people to learn how to sit with the discomfort of a challenge, wrestle with something difficult, and work their way through it. If you do that and get a lower grade, or you do not get the “correct” answer, but your method of approaching the problem is fundamentally sound—that is far more important and far more predictive of long-term success than simply repeating whatever strategy has always netted you a good grade.

I did not learn how to write good papers until university. In high school, I could throw many clever words on a page, make them sound smart, and get the grade—because my verbal IQ was in the 140s. I was not a good writer; I just sounded like one.

It was not until college that I had a professor—John Llewellyn, a fantastic guy who introduced me to Marshall McLuhan—pull me aside and say, “You think you are a good writer. You are not.”

Moreover, I said, “I know, sir. I just figured out how to do this in a way that worked in high school.”

He said, “Good. Now, I will teach you how to be a real writer.”

When I wrote my book last year, I thought about him constantly. Whenever I wanted to cut a corner or fall back into old habits, I heard his voice. Resisting those shortcuts made the book so much better. I am genuinely grateful for that lesson.

Jacobsen: We are in a cultural moment that feels like Identity Politics 2.0—sometimes referred to or criticized under the umbrella of “woke ideology.” Now, that framing gets messy because it has both upsides and downsides.

The benefit is obvious: it can help mobilize people for necessary, justice-oriented causes. The downside is the rise of what you might call “parade-based activism” rather than “work-based activism.” It is easy to confuse symbols for substance—for instance, thinking that wearing a rainbow pin is equivalent to marching with a friend at Pride or wearing a Christian cross is the same as participating meaningfully in someone’s confirmation journey.

There is a risk that these markers become proxies for actual support or understanding.

So my question is: Is there a risk that youth who receive a neurodivergent diagnosis might fall into that same trap—where the label becomes a shield, an excuse, or even a kind of performative identity that limits their accountability or growth when things go wrong?

Zakreski: That is a fundamental question. Moreover, for the record, I am always on the side of diagnosis—on the side of knowing yourself. I often say it is way better to know you are a zebra than to think you are just a weird horse.

Because our brains work this way: in the absence of external information, we make sense of things using the internal information we already have—which is, overwhelmingly, ourselves.

For example, I am colorblind, which is a form of neurodivergence. However, I did not know colorblindness existed until I was 11, so before that, I thought I was just dumb.

Everyone else could tell colours apart, but I could not. So my conclusion was, “I must be stupid.” I did not have the language or the framework to understand otherwise.

That is why diagnosis is helpful—not because it is the end of the journey, but because it is the beginning of a different journey.

I always say that the story does not end when Frodo gets the ring—it ends when Frodo gets to Mount Doom.

Diagnosis is not the conclusion. It is the starting point that guides how we move forward.

Think about it like this: if someone is diagnosed with high blood pressure, and their doctor gives them medication—but they do not change their diet, they keep eating fried food, keep drinking soda and alcohol—then the diagnosis alone is not going to fix anything.

In the same way, a neurodivergent diagnosis should be a North Star—a tool for gaining self-knowledge and orienting one’s environment and behaviours toward the best possible version of oneself.

Moreover, like I said earlier, Neurodivergence is always context—it is never an excuse.

Labelling a child as having ADHD can be very helpful. It might lead to educational accommodations, therapy, or medication. However, the mistake I often see parents make is that they stop there.

They will say something like, “My kid has ADHD, so of course they cannot help but cheat on a test—they are impulsive.”

Moreover, I respond respectfully but firmly: That is not how this works.

Yes, I will understand more about the impulsivity behind the behaviour. However, accountability still matters.

We do not eliminate expectations just because someone has a diagnostic—or, perhaps more appropriately in these contexts, an identity—label. We adapt the expectations and adjust how we deliver them, but we do not remove them.

You can’t just throw up your hands and say, “Well, they are neurodivergent, so they are off the hook.” That does a disservice to the child and the broader community.

Jacobsen: Do you ever have a situation in practice where someone uses their identity, or diagnostic status, to shield themselves from accountability—where it becomes a kind of shield?

Zakreski: Yes, and I will give you an example.

I work with a kid in my clinical practice who has gotten into some social trouble at school this year. He has genuine social communication challenges and is quick to yell or escalate when he feels cornered or misunderstood.

He also happens to be part of the LGBTQ+ community. And in one of our team meetings, he said, “They are picking on me because I am gay.” Moreover, because I have worked with him for a long time, and because I know him well and we have that rapport, I was able to say:

I told him, “You are being a jerk. You are a jerk who happens to be gay.”

It was direct, but it was said with care and with the understanding that his identity does not absolve him of how he treats others. The goal isn’t to weaponize labels—it is to understand them in ways that promote growth, self-awareness, and accountability.

We are not going to hide behind identity politics here. Accountability still matters.

Now—if people are being cruel because of his sexual orientation, if they are weaponizing his identity in some way—that is a very different conversation. That is not acceptable. However, people are allowed not to like you. That is part of life.

People are allowed to dislike others whether they are tall, short, fat, skinny, gay, straight, trans, ADHD, autistic, dyslexic, or whatever. We will not stand for the ad hominem version of those attacks.

Saying, “You are stupid because you have ADHD” or “ADHD people never amount to anything”—that is deeply harmful and entirely out of bounds.

However, saying, “Hey, I do not like you—you annoy me” is not the kindest thing you will ever hear, but it is not necessarily inappropriate. That is part of navigating human relationships.

Jacobsen: Speaking of niceness—and tilting that into politeness—do cultural stereotypes guide collective behaviour in any way?

For example, the stereotype of Canadians being polite or Americans being entrepreneurial but obnoxious. Do these, in your view, become self-fulfilling prophecies?

Zakreski: I think they do—very much so.

One of the most critical research areas here is the stereotype threat concept. The basic idea is: If I think you will see me a certain way, I will proactively change my behaviour to manage your expectations—even if it makes me less authentic or less effective.

I was recently in Europe for work—specifically in the Netherlands—and I do not speak much Dutch. I kept apologizing for not knowing the language because I did not want to be seen as the stereotypical “ugly American.”

However, that constant apologizing made me a less effective communicator. I was so worried about managing the perception that I was not focusing on the interaction.

You see this with kids all the time, too. I work with students who have ADHD, and they are so afraid of being seen as impulsive or scattered that they spend all of their energy trying not to appear that way.

In doing so, they do not learn anything.

If students need to fidget or doodle to stay engaged and learn, we should let them do it. If their environment allows them to be themselves without penalty, the stereotype threat drops dramatically, and their capacity for success increases just as dramatically.

Jacobsen: So, looking ahead—thinking about the remainder of the 2020s and into the 2030s—if we extrapolate lines of best fit from current clinical psychological data for kids aged 5 to 20, extending into young adulthood, what do young people in North America need to survive? Moreover—more importantly—what do they need to thrive as authentic, grounded individuals?

Zakreski: We need two things: flexibility and high standards.

But not rigid standards—high standards.

We need knowledge.

Moreover, knowledge is not just power—knowledge is empowerment.

When we understand that ADHD is a brain-based difference, we stop labelling kids as lazy, weird, or broken. We recognize that it is a neurobiological condition that affects executive functioning. Moreover, if we start from that foundation of knowledge, it becomes much easier to move toward compassion and practical support.

Another thing I always say is, “When the flower is not blooming, we do not blame the flower—we change the greenhouse.”

One of the most significant shifts in this post-COVID world is that more families finally say, “Okay. The greenhouse that worked for one of my children does not work for this one.”

So, they are now willing to create a different environment—a custom greenhouse—for the child who needs it.

That is why I strongly oppose this wave of anti-DEI backlash: Equity is not just a buzzword; it is a human need.

Everyone does better when they get what they need to thrive. Neurodivergent people are no exception.

Moreover, most of what we ask for—for these kids and families—are small, simple changes. We are not asking the world to reshape itself entirely. We are asking to be allowed to enter that world in ways aligned with our needs and dignity.

That is why I will always fight for my kids and clients—the cost of inaction is too high, and the solutions are often well within reach.

Jacobsen: This was a treat. Thank you so much for taking the time. I appreciate it.

Zakreski: I hope it was helpful for you as well. It was. Thank you for reaching out.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

A Prayer

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/09

Do you ever see a puppy stare at the front door,

at the top of the stairs, awaiting a parent?

Do you ever wish for something to happen,

randomly on a walk, unrelated to the moment?

The puppy will wait,

for hours.

Some prayer is a wish-to-happen.

When we call for the dead,

it’s not for hours,

but a lifetime.

We are puppies,

and we walk down the steps through life to that,

damn door.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Rights, Education, Organizations, And Hood Humanism: An Interview With Dr. Sikivu Hutchinson

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): SikivuHutchinson.Com

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/03

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: It’s been a bit since we last did an interview (2016) and since I was doing a review of Humanists in the Hood: Unapologetically Black, Feminist, and Heretical (2020). First things first, what’s new? How are you doing?

Dr. Sikivu Hutchinson: It has been a busy year marked by writing, teaching, organizing, and composing/writing guitar music.

Jacobsen: There have been some ugly developments for reproductive rights for women in the States, particularly around Roe v Wade’s repeal. These aren’t new efforts. They are the culmination of decades of efforts. As we both know, and as Human Rights Watch stipulates, “…equitable access to safe abortion services is first and foremost a human right. Where abortion is safe and legal, no one is forced to have one. Where abortion is illegal and unsafe, women are forced to carry unwanted pregnancies to term or suffer serious health consequences and even death. Approximately 13 percent of maternal deaths worldwide are attributable to unsafe abortion—between 68,000 and 78,000 deaths annually.” So, what is the intersection here with poor people, African Americans, and women in this plight?

Jacobsen: You’ve always had a radical bent–since knowing about you. It’s an admirable trait in the United States, particularly when confronting religion when constitutive of a fundamentalist ideology and social ultra-conservatism tied to a blatant racist social history. Fundamentally, in my opinion, you are an educator, first and foremost, and interested particularly in honest education on history and literature, whether miseducation K-12 (23), young black queer adult lit.honest depictions of under-reportage and unknowns in crime statisticsreligions politicized ideologically as fascist (2), important black women historical figures, or mentoring and teaching the young while giving them a space (2), some crooked religious huckstersvaccine hesitancy in black religious communities, and more. You have been involved in supporting the next generation of humanists too. What is the ethical imperative here? What have been some of the fruits of these acts of goodwill to the local Commons of young people over the years?

Hutchinson: It’s important to provide concrete resources and support to advance academic, career, and professional development for Black and PoC secular youth. Over the past decade, Black Skeptics has provided multi-year scholarships and other forms of financial support such as need-based grants and paid internships to K-12 and college students. We’ve provided leadership training in everything from gender-based/domestic and sexual violence prevention education to public speaking, civic engagement and community organizing. I regularly write letters of recommendation for my high school and college mentees and advise them on career paths. We also provide multigenerational mentoring and arts education to youth. These resources are especially important given the lack of safe secular humanist and queer-affirming spaces in communities of color.

Jacobsen: How is far-right Evangelical Christianity pushing Black religious Americans away from the Church and more towards secular alternatives?

Hutchinson: Younger Americans are the least religious in U.S. history and the most LGBT-aligned. Gen-Z African American youth are rejecting organized religion in greater numbers while embracing spiritual and secular alternatives. Gen-Z Black youth express disdain for the hierarchies, hypocrisies, abuse, and homophobia/transphobia of evangelical Christianity. Radical and progressive Black youth have called out the egregious respectability politics and double standards that are projected onto poor and working-class communities of color. They have also been critical of white evangelicals’ alignment with Trump’s white supremacist pathology and predatory capitalism. I see these views reflected in my students. A number of them have spoken and written about breaking from religious traditions because of the increasingly fascistic national climate as well as the anti-LGBT bigotry and sexism they’ve encountered in their own local faith communities.

Jacobsen: How do you use theatre, drama, and music, as a holding of space or place to educate and engage difficult subject matter for American social and political consciousness?

Hutchinson: Theater and music have been essential mediums for political expression. All of my theater pieces—from “Grinning Skull” to “White Nights, Black Paradise” “Rock ‘n’ Roll Heretic” and “Narcolepsy, Inc.”—have explored the intersection of workplace conflict, gender and racial injustice, queerness, segregation, and religious indoctrination. Theater is especially powerful because it is a space where I can create unique, idiosyncratic Black and PoC women and queer characters that are not ordinarily seen on stage/screen amplifying the lived experiences, world views, challenges, and cultural spaces that Black women across generations navigate, dealing with racism, sexism, homophobia/transphobia, white supremacy, misogynoir, and other inequities. My first stage play, “Grinning Skull”, was set in the 1940s in L.A. and dealt with Black women washroom workers employed by the Pacific Electric Railway company and their dilemma on whether they should vote to unionize. My 2018 play, “White Nights, Black Paradise” (adapted from my 2015 novel of the same name) explores the sociopolitical and cultural dilemmas/trajectories of Black women in the Peoples Temple church movement, which was at the center of the largest murder-suicide of American citizens in U.S. history when nearly one-thousand members perished in Jonestown, Guyana in 1978. My latest play, “The Kinderness” focuses on a Black woman-owned “reparative justice” and robotics company on the brink of an IPO that deploys white androids to perform corrective acts for Black descendants. It examines race and gender hierarchies in the workplace, Afrofuturist visions of historical redress and the perils of Black complicity with neoliberalism.

Jacobsen: What is the current status and stage of development of the Women’s Leadership Project?

Hutchinson: WLP continues to implement youth leadership and sexual, domestic and gender-based violence prevention education programming in South L.A. school communities with a dedicated focus on Black girls, girls of color, and BIPOC queer and gender-expansive youth. The organization supports in-school student groups, conducts professional development training, and spearheads community rallies that amplify the disproportionate rates of gender-based violence experienced by Black women and girls.

Jacobsen: What are the current areas of focus for Black Skeptics L.A.?

Hutchinson: We continue to focus on providing support for social and gender justice initiatives, principally through fiscal sponsorship, critical pedagogy, paid youth internships, and scholarship awards for first generation BIPOC secular, LGBTQ+, undocumented, foster care, unhoused and system-involved youth (these awards have been in existence since 2013).

Jacobsen: Black LGBTQI+ Parent and Caregiver group is newer to my knowledge. What is it? How does it work?

Hutchinson: The Black LGBTQIA+ parent and caregiver group is a safe space for parents/guardians of Black,queer and gender-expansive youth. The group has offered professional development, parent trainings, and general engagement for parents/guardians. It is on hiatus at this time but we continue to support the Black LGBTQ+ Youth institutes and student advocacy with the GSA Network.

Jacobsen: What are your next projects and areas of focus?

Hutchinson: I’m producing the “Outliers: Black Women’s Theater Showcase” at the Blue Door theater in Culver City/L.A. on January 26th. The showcase features work by me and fellow Black L.A.-based women playwright-directors Cydney Wayne Davis, Dee Freeman and Jessica Robinson. As I mentioned, I am working on “The Kinderness” play, which I hope to stage at the Hollywood Fringe Festival this summer. I also have two new folk rock songs in the works. One (“Lightning Rider”) focuses on my three times great grandmother, Harriet Stroope Knox, who was born enslaved in Clark County, Arkansas in 1825. The other (“Tinker Toy Train”) focuses on assembly line workers dealing with Amazon corporate kleptocracy. My music is available on Spotify.

Jacobsen: How can people get involved by donating time, expertise, money, manual labor, etc.?

Hutchinson: They can check us out at www.womensleadershipla.org or www.blackskepticsla.org.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Old Nick

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): A Further Inquiry

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/30

When I was a teenager, because I was a difficult kid, I was kicked out of the house for a few months. I got to know, befriend, and like old people more than young people of my cohort. Now, I like mentoring the young, from time to time, and befriending the old, still more.

When I was a teen, also, I worked a bit in construction at a truss factory and in construction with my alcohol misusing father. There was an old man, named Nick: l call him, “Old Nick”—because I’ve always called him Old Nick—who mentored me. We worked side-by-side; or, rather, I worked by his side.

I helped him. I matched his pace. He taught me. I learned, not everything, from him. Construction sites are interesting. They’re dirty. 

There’s gravel. 

There’s wood. 

There’s rebar, rubble, and concrete. 

There’s plastic, hard and flowy soft, from packaging, strewn on the property. 

There are ‘hard’ hats.

There are belts.

There are hammers, forklifts, cranes, scissor lifts.

There’re frames, concrete forms.

There’re alcoholics, substance misusers, or just drunks and junkies. 

There’re regulars, part-timers, life restarters, newcomers, crusty master craftsman, and just plain old labourers and safety inspectors and formans.

Maybe, they show up on time. Maybe, they show up all day. Maybe, they work. 

Maybe, they don’t, in each case. 

Men, some, raised by the bottle and a back of a hand.

The type who verbally inverted and made an emotionally abusive introject. 

Old Nick seemed to come out of this tradition. The idea being: Suck it up, hammer that nail, next.

Nick’s routine was simple: Smokes, banana at lunch, green tea, more smokes, go home. 

His pace was slow.

His slow was methodical, like drying concrete. It just form-fit to the pace of that particular day.

I loved listening to his words. They were paced, respectful, tinged with embers of regret at times. A sort of “this is it” of sentiment. Then the smoke would rise from his lips. 

He was divorced, estranged from his kids at the time. He had had a substance misuse problem, regarding alcohol. If he was of the time, and of that subculture, a hard life, he would be someone who drank beer, regular beer, whether a IPA or a darker like a Guinness.

Yet, when I met him, I could not tell such a thing happening in the past, certainly not in the present. 

He was the ember. His skin cracked like embers rumbled. 

I appreciated his mentorship at the time. The opportunity to work with him. Construction was hard, and worth it—though wasn’t great at it. We would talk about the work at hand, and then occasionally about other things.

I learn about the estrangement. I asked if he had any regrets. The body told the story he was unwilling to confront. I worked on and off with him for many months and on more than one worksite. I finished working in construction.

I moved onto other endeavours. It was increasingly a distant memory, but important to reflect upon as a life developmental stage. Everyone should do hard labour for a period of time in youth. If too late in life, then it’s unlikely to express the beneficial effects upon the core psyche. 

They remain air people, only. 

I’ve worked as a janitor, farm hand, ranch hand, dishwasher, food prepper, landscaper, gardener, busser, cashier, etc. All essential life lessons can be gathered from this. But life goes on. I’ve contemplated death in walks through cemetery in my old town as a child, as a teenager, as an adult. You get value in those lessons too. 

Then I was at a funeral years later. 

Who was there? Old Nick. I asked him. Something like this. 

“How are you, old man?”

“Good, you?”

“Been better, a death, you know?”

“Sure, of course.”

[Innocent naughty jokes and banter.]

“Shhhh! Scotty… you’re not supposed to tell them!”

[Laughter, about to leave—passing recollection]

“Hey…Nick, did you ever reconcile?” (With his kids)

[Pause.]

“…yeah.”

He seemed to have lied. His body told the truth. 

That’s a pity. 

It’s life. 

Eventually, rebar rusts, and concrete cracks, too. 

So thanks, Nick—between banana, smokes, and embers—you gave some of what little you had, to me. Thank you.

Thank you.

Thank you.

You weren’t always old. You saw.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Roslyn Mould on the Difficulties of Interfaith Dialogue

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/10

Roslyn Mould is the Vice President of Humanists International (2023-). She was Secretary and Chair of the Young Humanists International African Working Group from 2014 to 2019 and a Board Member for Humanists International from 2019 to 2023. She was a member of the Humanist Association of Ghana since it was founded in 2012 and held several positions, including President of the group from 2015 to 2019. She is the Coordinator for the West African Humanist Network, an Advisory Board member of the FoRB Leadership Network (UK), a Board member for LGBT+ Rights Ghana, and President of Accra Atheists. She holds a bachelor’s degree in Linguistics and Modern Languages.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you bridge the gap between humanists, liberal religious people, and traditionalists? 

Roslyn Mould: Tolerance bridges the gap between religious and non-religious communities. Generally, humanists and non-religious people tend to be more open and inclusive, often adopting the attitude, “Let’s all get along; everyone has the right to their beliefs, and we accept that.” However, religious individuals are often less tolerant of differing perspectives, especially those who challenge their beliefs or are perceived as nonconformists. 

Jacobsen: How do you feel about being in the company of people who resent your existence? How do you navigate interactions with those who reject your existence and build bridges with those who accept your existence and show essential tolerance?

Roslyn Mould: As president of the Humanist Association of Ghana, I aimed to promote humanism in a deeply religious society. We wanted to normalize atheism and secularism while collaborating with religious groups without making them feel threatened. Do you understand? For many religious people here, if you’re not aligned with their faith, you’re considered to be against God or even aligned with the devil. There is no gray area.

The challenge was how to normalize atheism and non-belief. We shared common ground with other organizations and NGOs, such as feminist and environmental groups, and found commonality with cultural groups. Whenever there were events related to art, music, or causes vital to humanists, we participated as a group, often wearing our Humanist Association of Ghana t-shirts.

For example, we attended environmental events like the March for Science and Women’s March. We made a concerted effort to show up in numbers, which piqued people’s curiosity. People would see us at these events, united around a common cause, and they would begin to wonder who we were.

People are at these events, whether for art or music, because they love those things. Over time, they would ask questions like, “Who are you? What is humanism?” When they realized that we were like-minded in our interests but didn’t share their religious beliefs, it helped them see us as more normalized. We weren’t witches or demonic figures because we were non-religious. By starting with what we had in common, rather than leading with our atheism, we made people more comfortable, which allowed for collaboration even after they learned that we were atheists or non-religious.

And even further, out of curiosity, they will invite us to upcoming or future events. Do you understand?

Jacobsen: Another essential part probably supersedes that—your response prompted this. How do you handle the laity who, in conversations, are influenced by elders with supernatural hate theologies? So, they see you as a demon, under Satan’s control, or even as a witch. These are not just accusations but genuine beliefs. People genuinely believe these things, as Dr. Leo Igwe’s research and activism have shown us.

Mould: Yes.

Jacobsen: How do you even overcome that barrier from regular people who happen to be immersed in those communities? They have so much invested in it.

Mould: That’s tricky—there’s no clear-cut formula to it. But you have to keep demonstrating through humanism. For example, the Humanist Association of Ghana adopted the motto “Good Without God,” right? The fact that we emphasize “good” shows that we aren’t people with evil intent. We try to highlight the positive aspects of humanism to show that we are not as frightening as they may think. However, many humanists in Ghana are still very much in hiding. Their parents, families, friends, and communities have no idea they’re non-religious. We’re still living in secrecy.

It’s not something we’re necessarily comfortable with. Very few of us are privileged enough to come out openly and use our real identities to speak about our atheism or non-religious beliefs. So, it’s a delicate situation. Years ago, when we worked with the Humanist Service Corps on anti-witchcraft issues, that was part of not only assisting victims of witchcraft accusations but also demonstrating that we don’t fear witchcraft because we don’t believe it’s real.

Secondly, we show that we are thoughtful and compassionate, which is why we, rather than religious groups, are the ones on the ground helping these victims. Religious people, instead, are often the ones condemning these vulnerable women. Do you understand?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Mould: We try to create as much awareness as possible that we can be good without God. We can live with a stance of reason and still be kind to people, contribute positively to society, and so on. We do this through our website, social media, and other platforms, trying to demonstrate that it’s possible to not believe in supernatural things and still be decent human beings. We are not witches, nor are we fearful.

However, much work still needs to be done because these beliefs have been entrenched for generations. It’s ingrained in our culture—witchcraft, the supernatural—it’s all tied into our worldview. Do you understand? So, it’s going to take time. You can’t untangle or unravel all of this in a single day. It’s a long process, and we are still on that journey. I wouldn’t say we have all the answers yet. We are still advising our members, who are still in hiding and fearful of being exposed.

Jacobsen: Yes. 

Mould: So until you are financially independent and more comfortable coming out yourself, we advise our members to stay private because it could be dangerous if they were to come out. It isn’t easy. Another thing I’ve been doing is working with the African Center for Parliamentary Affairs. They collaborate with the International Panel of Parliamentarians for Freedom of Religion and Belief.

They invite me to certain events where civil society organizations (CSOs), NGOs, and especially humanists can interact with parliamentarians, lawmakers, and legislators. We aim to help them understand why, in every decision they make in parliament, they must respect people’s right to freedom of religion and belief and avoid imposing their personal beliefs on all citizens. Not everyone believes the same as they do, or at all. Do you understand? So, there are ways we’re addressing these issues from the top.

We are engaging with leaders to make them aware of freedom of religion and belief issues, something they might have never questioned before. Many of them are just as unaware as the general public that some people do not believe in religion at all. Some leaders, even within the government, need to understand this fully. So, we need to educate them.

I’m glad to have received recognition from the African Center for Parliamentary Affairs (ACIPA), which invites me and other humanists to these events. This allows us to interact with legislators in a safe space to explain these issues and emphasize why they need to support freedom of religion and belief.

Jacobsen: Yes, that’s important. I want to be mindful of the time.

Mould: Right, of course.

Jacobsen: I’ll take this recording, Ros. Thank you for your time. I’ll get this to you soon. Is that cool?

Mould: Yes, yes, that’s cool.

Jacobsen: Okay.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Andrew Copson on Humanists International GA 2024

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/08

Andrew Copson was appointed Chief Executive of Humanists UK in 2009, having previously been its Director of Education and Public Affairs. He is also the current President of Humanists International, a position he’s held since 2015.

His books include The Little Book of Humanism (2020) and The Little Book of Humanist Weddings (2021) with Alice Roberts; Secularism: a very short introduction (Oxford University Press, 2019); The Wiley-Blackwell Handbook of Humanism (2015) with A C Grayling. His writing on humanist and secularist issues has appeared in The Guardian, The Independent, The Times and New Statesman as well as in various journals.

He has represented the humanist movement extensively on television news on BBC, ITV, Channel 4 and Sky, as well as on programmes such as Newsnight, The Daily Politics, and The Big Questions. He has also appeared on radio on programmes from Today, Sunday, The World at One, The Last Word, and Beyond Belief on the BBC, to local and national commercial radio stations.

Andrew served for many years as a director and trustee of the Religious Education Council, the Values Education Council, and the National Council for Faiths and Beliefs in Further Education, and the European Humanist Federation. and has advised on humanism for a range of public bodies such as the Qualifications and Curriculum Development Authority, the Department for Education, the BBC, the Foreign and Commonwealth Office, the Home Office, and the Office for National Statistics. He was a member of the Advisory Group for the Humanist Library at London’s Conway Hall and, in a previous post in the office of Lord Macdonald of Tradeston in the House of Lords, he provided the secretariat for the All Party Parliamentary Humanist Group (APPHG).

Andrew was educated at Balliol College in the University of Oxford, where he read Classics and graduated with a first in Ancient and Modern History. He was a member of the winning team of the 2005 Young Educational Thinker of the Year Programme and is a Member of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations, a Fellow of the Chartered Management Institute and of the Royal Society of Arts, and an Associate of the Centre for Law and Religion at Cardiff University.

opson discusses public criticisms, including being labeled “debauched” and receiving hate mail. He reflect son Humanists International’s General Assembly in Singapore, emphasizing themes of harmony, diversity, and LGBTQ+ rights. Copson highlights Singapore’s social harmony, state control, and cautious approach to progress.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are back for the nth time with Andrew Copson from Humanists UK and Humanists International. We are part of the crew often described as the most “debauched” people on British soil. Before we begin, there’s a question I’d like to ask. What abuses or ad hominems have you received on national or public television based on your experience?

Andrew Copson: I know everyone is familiar with this. You’re referring to the most well-known one, about having a ‘first-class ticket to debauchery,’ right? Satanism and debauchery.

Jacobsen: Correct, that’s right. 

Copson: A rather eccentric man said that almost a decade ago. He was wearing a rather flashy jacket.

Copson: Apart from his peculiar accusations, he was a nice man. 

Jacobsen: Beautiful complexion, well-trimmed head. 

Copson: Yes, very well-kept. But there we are. Obviously, he wasn’t on the same page as us. You often get these kinds of comments about evil, lack of morality, Satanism, and so on. Then there are the emails about going to hell and burning forever. The most creative and chilling one I received was from someone who said, ‘I pity you for when, one second after your death, you open your eyes and realize where you are and what’s happened.’ I thought, ‘Oh, that’s chilling.’

It’s evocative, that idea. That one probably came the closest to sending a chill down my spine. Then, when discussing topics like abortion or assisted dying, which is a debate we’re now starting to have in earnest in the UK due to a new bill, I’ve been called a ‘murderer,’ ‘trying to kill old people,’ ‘eugenicist,’ and other such terms. Typically, the nastiest abuse comes from Catholics, or at least people who identify themselves as Catholics. It seems to be the case.

Honestly, I mostly ignore it after all this time. Unless it’s particularly inventive or memorable, like the one about opening your eyes one second after death, I don’t pay much attention. That was clever targeting, making you think more than the usual attacks. But most of it is rather boring.

Jacobsen: Richard Dawkins has had much fun reading his hate mail. 

Copson: It’s just par for the course for me. The spelling and grammar could be better, too. I’m afraid the messages are rarely well-crafted in literary terms. 

Jacobsen: Yes, the spelling is usually off. It’s not like receiving correspondence from the Archbishop of Canterbury.

Copson: No, definitely not. Rowan Williams could write a better screed. It’s strange. I would never dream of randomly emailing Christians to say, ‘You idiot, why do you believe these absurd things?’ or ‘Why are you ruining everyone’s lives with your anti-gay rhetoric?’ It’s an odd thing to do, but I suppose some people have nothing better to do.

Jacobsen: The individual on national television, where you were with Douglas Murray who had his eyebrows practically going to the back of his head when those comments were made. If I remember the video correctly, at the time of seeing it, I recall the term ‘debauched.’ It struck me as such a British way of putting someone down—it’s ‘debauched.’

Copson: It does sound like a rather nice word. It has an old-fashioned feel to it. It sounds like Henry VIII, leaning back with a joint of venison and a big pot of something, going, ‘Oh, ho, ho.’ It creates quite a happy image—debauchery. 

Jacobsen: But that’s not the intention. It sounds like you’re participating in bacchanalia. It sounds like you’re at the head of it—enthusiastic.

Copson: That’s right. And all this, early on a Sunday morning! 

Jacobsen: I don’t know what was happening in his imagination—a Sunday morning! 

Copson: Yes, it was early on a Sunday morning when that show was on. That show has since been cancelled. That’s a shame because it was the show where, if you did it, you’d walk around town later that same Sunday and people would come up to you and say, ‘Oh, I saw you this morning!’ It had many viewers. Nicky Campbell was the presenter. Of course, he was good at bringing out the eccentricities in people, which made for good television. But now it’s been cancelled, and there’s a much more sedate program on BBC One in that religion and ethics slot on Sunday mornings, which is sometimes more illuminating but far less watched.

Jacobsen: It’s edifying, like National Geographic, but less fun.

Copson: No, it’s not as fun. It could be more fun. With The Big Questions—that was the show’s name—you had to go with it. You had to roll with it and enjoy yourself. 

Jacobsen: I used to watch clips of it, and I found it very entertaining. 

Copson: People still do. People still watch it. They’ll come up to you at conferences or events, even if you’re there for something entirely different, and say, ‘First-class ticket to debauchery!’ Or they’ll say, ‘Oh yeah, I was watching a clip on YouTube of an old discussion about assisted dying. It was so good on that program.’ So, it remains popular.

They’d love to revive it. It was good TV. But aren’t we here to talk about the Humanists International General Assembly in Singapore? 

Jacobsen: This is all a fun preamble, but we’re here for the Humanists International Singapore General Assembly 2024. 

Copson: Where there was no debauchery.

Jacobsen: What was the importance of discussing intricate harmony thematically at this General Assembly?

Copson: Yes. But first, I’d like to say how glad I am that we went to Singapore and how important it was. At the General Assembly the year before, in 2023, in Copenhagen, one or two representatives from the Global North objected to us going to Singapore, saying it’s a country with restrictive policies.

Jacobsen: I remember that.

Copson: Restrictive in free speech, restrictive in civil liberties, and the argument was that we shouldn’t go. Humanists International should refrain from holding its General Assembly in countries where this is the case. At the time, I thought that was a rather strange argument because if humanist organizations in countries face significant challenges regarding democratic rights and freedoms, it seems that’s precisely where we should go to support them in their contexts. First, they likely need help to travel to other places. Secondly, we should be on the ground where conditions are difficult.

I found it odd that there was the idea that we should boycott countries less hospitable to humanists and freedom. It turned out to be the right decision because when we were in Singapore, it was the first time we had been there. The Singaporean humanists were delighted to have us. The General Assembly can sometimes be a burden and a pleasure for host organizations because it’s expensive and requires much organization. But it was absolutely clear that they were thrilled to have us there. It was a great opportunity for them to showcase what Singaporean humanists had been doing and to meet others on their home ground. Not all Singaporean humanists can travel to other General Assemblies.

So, having the chance to encounter humanists from around the world in their own country benefited them. Another reason why it turned out to be such a good idea was that, for the first time, humanists from the wider region attended. We admitted Humanists Malaysia and a Humanist Association from Indonesia as members of Humanists International for the first time in Singapore. The people from those countries could attend the General Assembly because it was in their backyard.

I’m not saying Humanist Malaysia and the Humanist Association of Indonesia would never have joined Humanists International had we not gone to Singapore. Still, it’s not a coincidence that they formed their organizations and joined in the year we were in Singapore.

Having met the people involved, I’m confident this will significantly stimulate regional humanism. I’m glad we went. It was a wonderful experience in Singapore. We had fantastic hosts, which benefited humanism in the wider region.

Now, about interfaith harmony, or harmony between people of different religions or beliefs. You may be familiar with Singapore and its unique national culture, but it is historically artificial. It was essentially created by immigration. It’s filled with people who have either recently arrived or whose ancestors arrived relatively recently. As a result, it’s extremely diverse, both ethnically and religiously. I’m right in saying that the largest religious identity is Buddhist, but even that’s only about 35%.

And then you’ve got 21% with no religion, which, of course, includes all the humanists, 18% Christian, 18% Muslim, and so on through the smaller religions as well—Hindus and others. That situation, where every religion or belief group is a minority, creates a unique, if not unusual, social environment. Even though there’s a larger group, like the Buddhists, no one holds a majority. In this context of hyper-diversity, where everyone is a minority, harmony between people of different religions becomes incredibly important, especially in a place like Singapore, where everyone shares a relatively small, densely populated territory.

That means there was something real to discuss and learn from in Singapore on the theme of harmony, which felt very specific, if not unique, to that place. That’s why they chose the theme, and it worked well. Another reason why they selected the theme is because it’s one of the few topics they could discuss openly. Although the person at the General Assembly in Copenhagen was wrong about whether or not we should go to Singapore and overstated the lack of freedom there, Singapore is not a fully free country. There are significant restrictions on what you can and can’t say.

For instance, it’s illegal to criticize someone’s religion or belief, and it’s also illegal to attempt to convert someone from their religion. As far as I could tell, the groups that object to these laws are mainly Christians and Muslims. It’s not the humanists, Buddhists, or Hindus who have a problem with them. Nonetheless, these restrictions did constrain the kinds of topics we could discuss. Harmony, therefore, became an important and fitting theme. When we arrived, or at least many of us didn’t, we learned that harmony is not just an idea dreamt up by Singaporean humanists but an official national doctrine.

For example, we visited the government’s Harmony and Diversity Gallery, and it became clear that the government strongly promoted harmony. 

Jacobsen: How debauched of you? 

Copson: How harmonious. It was fascinating. One of the discussions many of us from the Global North, or more, let’s say, civically riotous places, had was about how much freedom you would give up to enjoy life as good as the one people have in Singapore.

Of course, it’s clean. There’s little crime. Everywhere we went, we felt safe. At some point during the trip, we humanists talked seriously about the balance between liberty and security—how much freedom you would sacrifice to ensure more security and vice versa. I thought that was quite an engaging discussion.

Jacobsen: What about the presentation on deradicalization? That seemed to come up in discussions I had with people—how interesting their approach was to combating extremism at the individual level, working with communities.

Copson: I, unfortunately, went on the other tour, so I missed that presentation. I wish I had seen it, as we had to choose between different sessions. I went on a walk to see different religious buildings coexisting peacefully. Then we went to the government’s Harmony and Diversity Gallery, where we watched a video about how awful the world was—except for Singapore, where everyone lives in harmony. So, I missed the tour you’re referring to. 

It did sound extremely interesting. You probably know as much about it as I do, given that we both talked to people who attended the session, but it’s certainly an approach. Interestingly, the Singaporean government is committed to controlling certain aspects of their citizens’ identities and attitudes.

They have no hesitation about enforcing a doctrine of tolerance and harmony through state coercion. Many people, especially in Western countries, tend to get uncomfortable with this, especially as those countries become more diverse. It’s quite common for Western liberals to object to the idea of national values being compulsory. In Britain, for example, plenty of liberal people aren’t comfortable with the idea of “British values” being enshrined in the education curriculum or made a feature of national life. But there was no such uneasiness in Singapore, and certainly none from the Singaporean humanists, as far as I could tell. They seemed entirely supportive of this approach.

That’s an interesting distinction. It’s made easier by the fact that Singapore is legally a secular state. One of the interesting things in the Harmony and Diversity Gallery was how much they celebrated the secularity of the state, holding it up as the key to creating harmony among the diverse religious and ethnic groups in Singapore. I suppose that would make it more comfortable for many humanists because, of course, the idea of a secular state promoting civic values—values that must be shared in a political community—is one we can get behind. Even if you don’t believe them, you must behave according to them. No state can control what’s in your heart, after all. That was its saving grace, in a way.

Jacobsen: So, you visited the various religious buildings and galleries next to each other. What were other personal highlights for you on this particular trip?

Copson: Well, I did enjoy visiting the places. It was interesting to observe the various religious buildings coexisting in the same space and the shared altars used by different groups on different days. When we arrived, one altar was set up for a Buddhist festival. The next day, it was redone for a Hindu festival.

That was fascinating—the shared spaces didn’t seem to have any visible antagonism. But it was interesting to notice the small things that were, to some extent, engineered and, to another extent, a matter of social choice. For example, big food courts in Singapore are based on hawker markets or street food markets. Everywhere you go, there are these spaces with at least four counters.

One counter serves Halal Malay cuisine, another Han Chinese cuisine, etc. You have all these different cuisines, but the tables are all shared food-hall style. It’s another way of ensuring harmony and diversity: all the food is available, but everyone sits together. The tables are communal.

Once you start looking at Singaporean society from that perspective, you see this unity engineering everywhere. One of our guides explained that even the housing system is organized this way. Most of the housing is ultimately owned by the government but is offered on long leaseholds. That’s different from a legal concept that is familiar to you. 

Jacobsen: Still, it probably comes from English law—inevitably, since Lee Kuan Yew was educated in Britain.

Copson: Right. That makes sense. So, they have high owner-occupancy rates because of these 99-year leases, or similar, which give people the feeling of owning their homes. But ultimately, the government owns the properties. The government also ensures social mixing in its housing, so you can’t have blocks where everyone is Han Chinese or blocks where everyone is Tamil, for instance. The more you learned about this approach, the more interesting it became across society. I found that particularly compelling.

There was another particularly interesting moment because many Westerners think Singapore has a big problem with homophobia, given that they only decriminalized male homosexuality two years ago. Even though there had been no prosecutions for decades before that, it was still an unenforced law. Nevertheless, when we had the opportunity to question some representatives of the Singaporean authorities, one of the Italian humanists asked about LGBTQ+ issues: “You say your country is tolerant and harmonious. What about LGBTQ+ rights?”

The official responded by acknowledging that, yes, they had only recently decriminalized male homosexuality, while female homosexuality had never been illegal. And then he said two more things that were quite interesting.

The first thing he mentioned was that Singapore is the only safe place in the region where two men can walk down the street holding hands, visit gay bars, or display a rainbow flag without fear of being assaulted. If you cross the land bridge to Malaysia or take the ferry to Indonesia, that’s not the case. You won’t be able to live your life with that same sense of safety. I thought that was an interesting point, a reminder to those of us who might have taken a more high-handed or imperious attitude toward civil rights and freedoms, especially in that region. While not perfect, Singapore is relatively good for LGBTQ+ people and, similarly, for women. I’m sure Singapore has its issues with gender inequality, but again, in relative terms, compared to neighbouring countries, they are doing much better—much freer and more tolerant. That was a bit of a “check your Western privilege” moment.

The second interesting point he made about LGBTQ+ issues, in response to the question, was why Singapore hasn’t legalized same-sex marriage or partnerships yet. His answer was thought-provoking. He said that while he believed it would happen, Singaporeans prefer to make social progress consensually. He thought that same-sex marriage would come along once enough people had been persuaded, allowing the change to happen without causing civic or social disruption, disharmony, or disunity.

So, even in that context, the theme of harmony and social unity was central. It’s similar to the balance between liberty and security—there’s a balance between freedom and cohesion. To see a society that has taken a slightly different path or is on a different trajectory regarding that balance was striking. It was an interesting place to be.

Jacobsen: They seem to be following a reverse path of development—becoming wealthy and well-educated first and then allowing, as you said, consensual permissions and acceptance of various freedoms.

Copson: That’s right. How will that proceed from here? Presumably, like everywhere, they face threats. They consider themselves under threat to some extent from Islamic extremism. They’ve got this deradicalization program in place.

Jacobsen: Lee Kuan Yew noted this when Singapore was first being formed. He observed that some individuals who once practiced their faith more casually had become more stringent in their observance of Islam. Before he passed, he remarked that things had tightened up in certain cases, suggesting a need to loosen up again. That may be a concern for them moving forward. That might explain the emphasis on having an Islamic deradicalization speaker. 

Copson: They also mentioned that they recently banned a Bangladeshi preacher, known for his extreme views, who had managed to sneak into the country, give a secret talk, and then leave before they could act. Maintaining cohesion, especially about extremism, is a primary concern for them.

That’s interesting. What is happening in Malaysia has profoundly affected Singapore, and Malaysia recently took a more extreme turn. I don’t know how things stand now, but there’s been some back-and-forth. Nevertheless, there’s a radicalization problem in the region. So, it’s understandable why Singapore is cautious about these issues.

Jacobsen: Did you mention who gave the keynote again?

Copson: Well, there was no keynote. Instead, there were two panels with local experts. It was all policy-intensive, focusing on harmony and events in Malaysia and Singapore. I got the impression that’s probably what conferences are like there—no controversy, very focused.

Jacobsen: What aspects of harmony or interfaith dialogue were educational for you, especially in contrast to how things are handled in the UK?

Copson: I wouldn’t say the approach was significantly different. The main difference was the context. In Singapore, both Muslims and Christians are minorities, and even combined, they’re still a minority in the country. So, as far as I recall, it was interesting to hear from Muslim speakers, especially since there were no Christian speakers. The Muslim speakers had formed strong relationships with the humanist representatives in Singapore. Listening to their experiences as a minority in a country with the largest religion, Chinese Buddhism, was fascinating. They have a much more cosmopolitan attitude as a result of this context.

However, in methodological terms, I didn’t notice any significant differences between how things are handled in the UK and Singapore. The big, overwhelming difference is that the state in Singapore keeps a close eye on everything and has an official ideology of harmony. This is common in the wider region. Indonesia, for example, has its own version of a harmonious ideology, though it expresses it through its concept of PancasilaPancasila is a national philosophy?

In Indonesia, Pancasila is a philosophy where you can belong to any prescribed religion, but you can’t be non-religious. You must adhere to one of the accepted religions yet still be seen as part of this national ideology of ‘One God, One Country,’ and all the rest of it. So it’s common in the region for states to aspire to some level of control over doctrine for everyone within their borders. I used Pancasila as an example of state multiculturalism in my book on secularism a few years ago.

Jacobsen: Was that the one you did with Alice Roberts?

Copson: No, no. This was the Short Introduction to Secularism. It’s about political secularism. I used Indonesia as an example of the kind of arrangement that the Dutch and Belgians used to have—and to some extent still do—this official state multiculturalism where certain religions or beliefs are recognized. In Belgium and the Netherlands, that includes humanists. It doesn’t in Indonesia, but it’s a popular alternative to full secularism.

Ultimately, it’s unsuccessful because you still constrain people’s choices, even if you allow several religions or beliefs to be official. It might be better than having a single-state church, but you’re still circumscribing people’s choices. What happens when a new religion emerges? What happens when humanists in Indonesia try to organize, or Buddhists in Belgium try to organize? They can’t gain entry into this officially multiculturalist system. Nonetheless, it’s an interesting way for governments to try to mediate religious diversity.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts or perhaps debauched feelings?

Copson: I shan’t give voice to my debauched feelings! As for thoughts, this might be the last time we speak for a while because I’ve only got eight months left as president. We’ll have to speak again in Luxembourg at my last General Assembly. Then I can tell you what the last ten years have been like. That’ll be an interesting reflection.

Jacobsen: I appreciate it.

Copson: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chad Towner on Freedom Forever & Rams Partnership

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/09

Chad Towner is the Chief Revenue Officer at Freedom Forever, a leading company in the residential solar energy industry based in Temecula, California. With over a decade of experience in sales and leadership, Chad has been instrumental in driving significant growth and breaking sales records. Chad holds a Bachelor of Science in Aviation Science from Utah Valley University and is a licensed private pilot. Bilingual in English and Spanish, he is passionate about attracting ethical sales talent and advancing renewable energy solutions. Outside of work, he is actively involved in church service and enjoys taking his sailboat out on the water with his family.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Chad Towner, the Chief Revenue Officer of Freedom Forever, a leading residential solar installer partnering with the Los Angeles Rams. First question: Why partner with the Rams?

Chad Towner: A couple of reasons. First, Southern California. Freedom Forever was born here. We love the NFL and football, and the Rams are the premier NFL team in Southern California. We love SoFi Stadium; it is an incredible venue for entertainment. Their team was very collaborative when we reached out, so, it just made sense.

Jacobsen: Regarding solar energy, why focus on solar in this partnership with the Rams?

Towner: There is no national brand in the solar space; only 4% of U.S. homes have solar panels on their rooftops. We are growing into the role of the largest residential solar installer in the U.S., but unless someone is familiar with the solar industry, they probably have not heard of us. We felt that now was the right time to make our name known nationwide. The NFL is by far the most popular sport in the U.S., and by associating ourselves with a premier team like the Rams, who won Super Bowl LVI, we hope to establish ourselves as the national brand. In our opinion, that kind of recognition does not currently exist in the solar industry.

Jacobsen: How do you see this partnership advancing sustainable energy goals? Many people support or work toward sustainability, but Freedom Forever is actually on the ground, implementing these changes. Does partnering with a major sports team expand your brand and increase awareness and adoption of sustainable energy?

Towner: Absolutely. The number one reason solar has only achieved 4% market penetration is that most customers don’t understand how solar works. Whenever we explain it to a potential customer, a light bulb goes off, and they ask, “Why doesn’t everyone do this?” The reality is that everyone should, but most people don’t know enough about it. Solar is still new to many, and it’s not something they’re familiar with. By getting our brand out there and becoming more widely known, we’ll build trust with customers and help them realize that solar is something they should learn about. Solar energy is coming to every market and every state, and it’s something everyone should consider—it’s the future. So, you had minutes, data, rate plans, and rollover plans for cell phones, but nobody grasped this new thing early on. It wasn’t until it reached a critical mass that people started adopting it. It was a slow start in the early days of cell phones. Similarly, solar needs to reach critical mass, and someone must start waving the flag.

Jacobsen: You’re launching at the beginning of the upcoming sports season. Why the beginning rather than the end or the middle of the season? 

Towner: Well, one of the benefits of this partnership, for example, is that we have signage throughout SoFi Stadium, but we’re also inviting top sales leaders from other industries to join us at games. We want them to experience the Rams House with us. Hopefully, we’ll entice them to work with us and join the cause of accelerating residential solar adoption across the U.S., which is part of our growth strategy.

The more games we can bring people to, the more we can show them how we do things differently and better. We believe the faster we can grow, the better. For us, it’s a race against the clock. I’m not a scientist, but we don’t know how long the damage we’re doing to our climate will last or if it’s too late. But we need to do everything we can to accelerate the rate of residential solar adoption, and we believe we’re the only company with the business model to make that happen.

Jacobsen: How did you secure a multiyear rather than a one-year deal with an option for renewal?

Towner: That was mutual. Both sides wanted a multiyear deal, which was a relatively easy decision. Our partners—vendors and everyone we work with—are part of long-term, deeper partnerships. We’re trying to build a sustainable business that will last for decades. You can’t do that by reinventing your business every year; it requires stable, long-term partnerships.

Jacobsen: How does the distribution of signage, logo placement, and branding work throughout the Rams games to benefit both Freedom Forever and the Rams’ brand?

Towner: We may not get phone calls directly from fans in the stadium saying, “Hey, I saw your sign and want solar,” but it builds credibility. When a sales rep is in someone’s home explaining how solar works, and they mention, “By the way, we’re the company partnered with the Rams,” it adds a layer of trust. The customer might say, “Oh yeah, I saw your signs at the game.”

Solar is still a relatively new and growing industry, but it’s the future. It’s similar to the transition from kerosene lamps to electricity 100 years ago. What we need now is credibility. Customers need to feel confident that these are real companies that will take care of them for years to come. They don’t want to get solar panels installed only to never hear from their installer again. Our business model is long-term service and support. By showing that we have established deep partnerships with reputable brands like the Rams, we believe it gives customers the credibility and confidence they want, something they might not find with competitors.

Jacobsen: Based on the company’s forecasting of your business model and the solar energy market, if it’s only at 4% penetration now, what do you project the market penetration to be by, say, 2030? Can you provide any short- to medium-term estimates?

Towner: The trajectory has been challenging lately. It’s been a rough 18 months in the solar industry, largely due to macro conditions with the finance markets. Interest rate increases have significantly impacted residential solar, but at Freedom Forever, we are still growing. We’re on track to generate roughly $2 billion in revenue this year. While I don’t want to give you specific percentages, I can tell you that the first 4% will have been the slowest. What we’ve built so far can scale exponentially, and growth will accelerate.

As we grow, solar installation costs decrease due to economies of scale. This allows us to save customers money in markets where it was previously cheaper to stick with their existing utility. Because our costs have dropped, we can enter those markets and say, “Hey, we can save you money now—our rates are lower than your current electric bill.”

California is much further ahead in terms of solar adoption than most states. The key breakthrough in California happened when solar became cheaper than existing utilities, and adoption took off. However, we’re still behind other regions. Europe, Australia, and even Germany is far ahead of us regarding solar adoption. So, it can happen very quickly.

Jacobsen: Given this multiyear partnership with the Rams, are you restricted from partnering with other teams in the future?

Towner: I don’t believe so. Interestingly, the day the press release went out, I got emails from several other sports teams. I wasn’t expecting that level of interest, but there was clear demand. Whether it’s the solar aspect or teams looking for new advertising partners or sponsors, this will likely not be our last partnership. I’ll put it that way. It’s going incredibly well and has far exceeded our expectations.

Jacobsen: Personal question—no pressure to answer—were you a Rams fan before? Or are you a bigger Rams fan now?

Towner: I didn’t grow up here, so I had to be converted, but it’s been an easy process. The team, the organization—they’re incredible. I’ve been in Southern California long enough to call myself a local, so it was a natural transition. My kids are Rams fans, and they know no other team.

Jacobsen: From which team or sport did you have to convert?

Towner: I grew up in Denver, Colorado, so you can put that together, but it feels good to be a Rams fan now. 

Jacobsen: Chad, thank you very much for the opportunity to discuss this.

Towner: Scott, I appreciate it. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Autumn Breon on Artistic Activism as a Rights Space

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/08

Autumn Breon is a multidisciplinary artist who investigates the visual vocabulary of liberation through a queer Black feminist lens. Using performance, sculpture, and public installation, Breon invites audiences to examine intersectional identities and Diasporic memory. Breon imagines her work as immersive invitations for the public to join in the reimagining and creation of systems that make current oppressive systems obsolete. Breon has created commissions for Target, Art Production Fund, Frieze Art Fair, and the ACLU of Southern California. Breon’s performance history includes Hauser & Wirth, the Walt Disney Concert Hall, and the Water Mill Center. She is an alumna of Stanford University where she studied Aeronautics & Astronautics and researched aeronautical astrobiology applications. Breon is a recipient of the Crenshaw Dairy Mart Fellowship for Abolition & the Advancement of the Creative Economy and the Race Forward Fellowship for Housing, Land, and Justice.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Autumn Breon, a recommendation from Martha Dimitratou. Thank you, Martha. I received an email about an event happening outside, somewhat affiliated but not directly connected to the UNGA, the 79th General Assembly. How did you hear about it, and have you been involved in it in previous years?

Autumn Breon: Yes, I’m familiar with the UN General Assembly through my work with Repro Uncensored and Plan C. I’ve collaborated with them for a while, and they’ve supported much of my artwork, especially the Care Machine, a travelling vending machine that dispenses objects related to care, free of charge. The founders of Feminist Collage, Martha from Plan C, Repro Uncensored, and I, came together to think about a unique way to engage with care during the UNGA. That’s how Care in Action came about.

Jacobsen: On a personal level, you seem to have a long history of activism, especially related to feminist issues, reproductive rights, and abortion access. Do you deeply commit to activism, particularly focusing on the impact on American women in recent years?

Breon: Yes. One of my projects travelling around the U.S. this year is called the Care Machine. It’s a retrofitted hot pink vending machine, with everything inside available for free. It moves around the country, offering abortion pill resources, emergency contraception, edge control, lip gloss, candy, condoms, pads, tampons—everything for free. The concept is based on asking Black women what items represent care to them. It’s a physical intervention in public spaces to highlight the different forms of care and emphasize that they should all be accessible.

Jacobsen: From your surveys of Black women in the U.S., are specific items considered more primary than others?

Breon: What’s important about how the items are presented in the vending machine is that they are all primary and essential. We started with basics—pads, tampons, abortion pill resources, condoms, lip gloss—and have expanded as we travel, adding items like Narcan, which has been very popular in different cities. I’m glad to see people taking it. The key idea here is that care isn’t just about caring for yourself—it’s about caring for your community. People often take Narcan not for themselves but because they know it might be useful in certain situations.

Jacobsen: From a practical standpoint, are there challenges in scaling up the Care Machine? You’re offering primary and essential products to select demographics in the U.S., but do you see any barriers to systematizing and expanding the initiative?

Breon: Scaling is the next challenge I’d like to tackle with this project. Right now, the vending machine serves as a reminder of what should be available everywhere, all the time. It’s an intervention to show what our systems should provide and something we need to mobilize and organize around. Eventually, I’d love to scale it up and make the items more widely available. But for now, it’s about raising awareness and reminding people that care should be accessible to everyone.

Jacobsen: Are there any national systems, particularly in health care or pharma care in other countries, that you believe offer valuable insights?

Breon: Yes. Any country with universal health care. That’s the reality we should have here in the U.S., but until we achieve that, we rely on mutual aid and systems that communities have built. We need to create those systems to make the current healthcare system obsolete.

Jacobsen: What are some core reasons for the opposition to providing basic reproductive health care, even from an economic perspective, considering the cost-saving benefits for the general public?

Breon: Reproductive freedom has been stigmatized—that’s the primary reason. And this stigma is relatively recent. It’s part of what makes this situation so frustrating. Historically, doulas and midwives didn’t just deliver babies; they also provided abortion care. Abortion wasn’t always illegal or stigmatized. It’s become a political issue because of that stigma. If we returned to the understanding that every person should have access to this care, it wouldn’t be such a stigmatized issue, and lives wouldn’t be lost.

Jacobsen: I recall Human Rights Watch having a straightforward webpage on this issue. The text might only span two or three pages in a Word document, but it’s very clear. “…equitable access to safe abortion services is first and foremost a human right,” and I believe that’s a direct quote. Why is the U.S. context politicizing equitable access to what should be a basic human right in reproductive care beyond just the stigma?

Breon: Stigma is the root cause, but it’s hard for me to speak for those who see this as an issue because I don’t. However, I would say it’s primarily stigma and the cost. The idea of socialism scares some Americans—the concept that something could be free and accessible to everyone. There’s also a serious lack of information about how abortions work and the different ways to access reproductive health. That lack of knowledge is a big factor in this issue.

Jacobsen: Is there any access to relevant information on reproductive health in high school education in the U.S.?

Breon: It depends on where you go to school. In some places, you might have a sex ed class in public school, but what that entails varies by state—what’s legal and permissible in that state. Private schools have more autonomy, but in religious private schools, you might only be taught abstinence, or there may be no sex education class at all. On the other hand, a progressive private school might offer much more accurate information about reproductive health. The problem is that there are so many variables, and young people leave school systems with vastly different levels of knowledge about reproductive health. That’s why interventions like the ones we’re working on are so crucial. Instead of relying on existing systems, including the education system, we’re creating alternative ways for people to access the information they need. We’ve been doing that for a while now.

The Jane Collective is a prime example. That’s how people seeking abortions were able to learn how to access them when abortion was illegal. It was a group of women who came together, some even learning how to perform abortions themselves, and they created their own transportation and information networks to get that knowledge to those who needed it. We’ve done this before and must keep doing it until the systems catch up. I believe they eventually will.

Jacobsen: What about the vocabulary used when discussing these topics in public? Are there certain concepts that aren’t being communicated straightforwardly? Is there language being used that high school students, post-secondary students, or ordinary Americans working non-academic, blue-collar jobs might not immediately understand? And does that affect their ability to use this information to access services where they are?

Breon: Some resources offer straightforward access where your education level isn’t a barrier. For example, Plan C Pills has a simple digital platform where you can enter your location and find out how to get abortion pills by mail, wherever you are in the U.S. But the real challenge I’ve seen, and the reason I use art and objects like the Care Machine, is that many people don’t even know abortion pills exist. So, while there are resources, there are still significant barriers once people have some information.

Jacobsen: What about financial barriers?

Breon: Yes, that’s a huge problem. Not everyone has health insurance. That’s why clinics and mutual aid networks exist to help. And that’s also why everything in the Care Machine is free.

Jacobsen: Regarding your fellow activists, what do you encounter the most pushback on? Are they financial arguments, political arguments, issues around access, or maybe the vocabulary and tone of the conversations? What generates the strongest resistance in the American context?

Breon: Some people think no one should have access to abortion at all—plenty of people hold that view. Others believe that talking about abortion openly is taboo or inappropriate. That’s the same reality most organizers and activists face. Finances are also a big barrier. Suppose you live in a state where abortion is banned or heavily restricted. In that case, not everyone can afford to travel to another state where it’s available. Some people don’t have the time or can’t make the trip for many other reasons.

Jacobsen: Regarding the UNGA this year, were there any other services or presentations you provided besides the Care Machine? There is quite a range of activities associated with it.

Breon: Yes. The Care Machine wasn’t in New York this time. We held an activation at NeueHouse Madison Square in New York City during UNGA. The entire event was special. We screened a wonderful film by Emani Nakia Dennison called Bone Black: Midwives versus the South. It’s about Black women’s historical role in reproductive freedom in this country and the current reality for Black women. We also had a dance workshop by Mulheres Ao Vento. This Afro-Brazilian dance group explores the relationship between Black women, ancestral heritage, and reproductive freedom. We had a panel discussion about what’s working globally as we continue to create art and organize around reproductive justice.

Then we wrapped up with reminders of care. We always offer free care services whenever we activate the Care Machine, whether in any location or as part of the Care Van campaign that’s been travelling around the country. These can range from massages to tooth gems or hair adornment. We had free nail art and Reiki sessions in New York, both facilitated by local New Yorkers. It’s great to remind people that they deserve these different forms of care.

Jacobsen: I’m also getting insights from different angles by interviewing various participants. What was your favourite part of the event you participated in?

Breon: My favourite part was seeing a unique and necessary approach to the conversation about reproductive freedom. We often have panel discussions and talks, but this event was different. Yes, we had meaningful dialogues with experts worldwide and in various industries. Still, we also saw people moving their bodies and engaging in bodily exercises. That’s such an important form of care, especially with the amount of harm and violence in this country right now. Watching people enjoy an aesthetically pleasing film with so much content, substance, and a real message was also powerful. The whole experience felt special and refreshing.

Jacobsen: When interacting with individuals who bear the brunt of these issues—women who have survived unsafe abortions—what are the emotions and words they use to describe the aftermath of those experiences? As we both know, making abortion illegal doesn’t stop it; it just makes it unsafe, leading to more injuries and deaths. What comes up in these discussions?

Breon: One of the biggest things I hear about is the lack of dignity people feel when navigating and manipulating a system to get the care they need and deserve. There’s also the terrifying reality that they might be risking their lives. That lack of dignity is what stands out the most in these conversations. It’s a huge emotional burden. When we talk about what we’re worthy of and the reality I hope we soon achieve, dignity is at the heart of it. That’s what’s most important to me. It needs to be the foundation of the reality we’re working toward.

Jacobsen: So, would you say there’s an intrinsic argument here? Suppose people have open and safe access to abortion as part of reproductive healthcare. In that case, they inherently receive respect and dignity for their rights without being subjected to rights abuse.

Breon: Absolutely. That’s part of being a fully realized human. Maybe that’s also what stood out to me the most at the activation in New York—seeing what it looks like when everyone expects and is treated with dignity. We were modelling what the world can and will be.

Jacobsen: Do you think people in the social media and Internet age follow others more by their example or image? It’s a subtle distinction but important. You, I, and others have essentially grown up as digital natives. Older generations lived much of their lives without the digital trail we have now; things were hazier and more easily forgotten. Everything is curated; more than that, it’s often self-curated. Do you think this curation is unrealistic or even inauthentic? It ties into the broader conversation about the rise of narcissism in culture. Do you think the philosophy of leading by example has been diluted because people are projecting an image rather than authentically living as healthier versions of themselves?

Breon: People follow by both example and image. It’s a mix. Especially with elections, it’s fascinating to see where people get their information now. Many are no longer influenced by traditional media—network news or print publications. Instead, they’re influenced by peers or people they follow online. People make decisions based on the images they see, and often, that’s interpreted as following a model or example. But, in real life, people follow others by example—how they act and what they do.

That’s why creating spaces where people can share authentic stories is so important. They must share how they’re navigating the healthcare system and accessing reproductive healthcare. These stories offer opportunities for others seeking answers to see options and examples of what’s possible.

Jacobsen: If I may put you on the spot, what would you say is your contribution—your drop of water—to the larger activist space presented at this UNGA event?

Breon: Well, I’m an artist. I’m not a diplomat or a healthcare provider. But as an artist, I can create work that contributes to our shared human language—our lingua franca, if you will. I can use textures, colours, and objects to model the world I want to live in. That’s my contribution. I can show what it looks like to have safe and accessible abortions. I can present a vision of a world where care is the norm, where care is expected.

I can model interactions that break down stigmas and taboos through my art. Even if these ideals only exist while you’re in a gallery or at an activation like the one we had at NeueHouse, it’s something people can see and take into their personal lives.

Jacobsen: We’re almost out of time. Any final thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation?

Breon: Oh, yes. I brought this up during one of the panels in New York, and I think it’s worth mentioning again. More than half of Black women of reproductive age—between 15 and 49—live in states where there are either abortion bans, severe restrictions, or limited to no access to abortion. That’s an alarming reality.

This is why we can’t rely on the state or existing systems. These systems are what got us into this situation in the first place. The only way forward is to create solutions and take care of each other in this reality. When you look at numbers like that, the urgency becomes clear. People have already died, and sadly, more will continue to die because of these bans. We cannot rely on the systems that got us here to solve this crisis.

Jacobsen: Autumn, as a foreigner and a Canadian, I truly feel for you and your situation. Thank you so much for your time and this conversation today.

Breon: Thank you for your thoughtful questions. If there’s anything else you need—more info or follow-up questions—please feel free to reach out.

Jacobsen: Thank you again, Autumn.

Breon: Thank you!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Women Create: Women’s Dissenting Voices

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/07

Women Create! is the world’s first ever conference exclusively for cancelled female and feminist artists from across the political spectrum.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was the inspiration behind Women Create?

Victoria Gugenheim: The inspiration behind Women Create was that there was simply no place for dissenting female voices, and the artists and activists I know needed a space for both them, and the men and women who support them.

Women who have been at risk of cancellation, or who have been cancelled, feminists who have been cancelled and placed at risk, and women apostates who are at risk were the main catalysts as  no place on earth catered exclusively to these women, so I thought I would create a space. 

As it champions women’s freedom of thought, conscience and expression, I worked with Maryam Namazie to make it new part of the long standing Celebrating Dissent series produced by the Council of Ex-Muslims of Britain, an event which has also inspired me greatly with the courage of the female ex-Muslim attendees who have fled violence and persecution to find their voices away from tyranny. 

Rosie Kay, who created Freedom in the Arts, also inspired me. And I kept seeing more and more women, all the good ones, get cancelled. 

Moreover, I thought, “Grief, it’s gotten to the point that female artists have had death threats in Brazil for talking about vaginas in their work. I need to do something as this is ridiculous; it’s a human rights abuse.” And so here we are.

Jacobsen: Who are the women behind Women Create?

Gugenheim: The women behind Women Create are me, and the other adviser is Maryam Namazie. We also have a male ally called Magnus Timmerby. That is it. I have organized a vast majority of it myself until recently. 

I also want to thank Angela Wild, Jenny Wenhemmar, Di Winn of Geek Practique, and Paula Boulton for their solidarity behind the scenes. 

Jacobsen: What is the importance of this event?

Gugenheim: In a world that is rapidly encroaching upon the freedoms of women, including their creative freedoms, it is essential to lift up marginalized female voices, demonstrate that there is a growing problem both in the art world and worldwide, work towards solutions by making sure their stories and creations are visible, nurture creativity in other women, and be a catalyst for change. No other event is doing that. 

Jacobsen: What are the highlights?

Gugenheim: We have everything from talks, panels, workshops, a mini film festival and more besides and art from women across the globe. We’ll have a Q and A with cancelled documentarian Vaishnavi Sundar, and a conversation with award winning writer Roxana Shirazi. It’s also the only event of its kind where a robust diversity of opinion between different women has even been tabled, so if you value genuine diversity of thought, it’s a must.

I’m also premiering a world first which I’m proud of; Painted Powerful, My Body is Mine,  which is the world’s first bodyart project, documentary and exhibition working exclusively with female sexual violence/SA/DV/coercive control survivors as a way for them to take back their bodies after their ordeals, with a select few other women in tow, and a premiere of Music Video by EDM and Folk musician Shelley Segal.

 More importantly, we have cancelled women from across the globe, be it from the USA, Canada India, Morocco,and women who have fled the Iranian regime, and it is essential to have those voices there.

We also have veteran and award-winning activists.  It’s set to be a trailblazing yet grassroots event for the women who need it. 

Jacobsen: How can folks get plugged in?

Gugenheim: If you want to get involved, go to WomenCreate.co.uk. You can also scout for us on Eventbrite or follow me on Twitter. My handle is Quirkathon.

Jacobsen: Any final points?

Gugenheim: Just as an extra, many women are coming who have lost their livelihoods or had years of censorship and cancellation, had rape threats, death threats, fatwas, all because they are women who want to create something that is against the status quo. We cannot live in a world where female artists are the new canaries in the coal mine and being gassed. We have to lift up their voices to maintain freedom of thought, conscience, and expression because the artists and creatives always tend to go first under tyrannt, and it is always women who bear the brunt of cancellation more so. And if we don’t stand with them, who’s going to be next? 

Jacobsen: Thank you, Victoria!

Gugenheim: Pleasure!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jerome Clayton Glenn on ‘State of the Future 20.0’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/07

Jerome Clayton Glenn is co-founder and CEO of The Millennium Project, a leading global participatory think tank with 71 Nodes around the world, and three regional networks which produces the State of the Future reports for over 25 years. 

He was contracted by the EC to write the AGI paper for input to their Horizon program 2025-2027, is a Member of the IEEE SA organizational governance of artificial intelligence working group P2863, lead the international assessment of foresight elements of the UN Secretary-General’s Our Common Agenda. He is currently working on the initial conditions, rules, and guardrails for artificial general intelligence (AGI) and governance possibilities, synergetic relations among nations of South Asia, and the next State of the Future report.

Jerome Glenn has managed over 60 futures research projects, lead author for 19 State of the Future reports, and co-editor for Futures Research Methodology 1.0 to 3.0

He invented the Futures Wheel, Synergy Matrix, and concepts such as conscious-technology, transInstitutions, tele-nations, management by understanding, self-actualization economy, feminine brain drain, and definitions of environmental security and collective Intelligence. He wrote about information warfare in the late 1980s, sent his first email in 1973, and in the mid-1980s he was instrumental in getting x.25 packet switching in 29 developing countries which was key to low-cost access to the Internet. 

A few years ago, he led the design and implementation of the Global Futures Intelligence System, wrote Work/Technology 2050: Scenarios and Actions, and lead the American Red Cross Covid-19 Scenarios. He was instrumental in naming the first Space Shuttle the Enterprise and banning the first space weapon (FOBS) in SALT II. He has published over 250 future-oriented articles, spoken to over 800 organizations, and wrote Future Mind: Artificial Intelligence, Linking the Future, and co-author of Space Trek: The Endless Migration).

He shares the 2022 Lifeboat Guardian Award with Volodymyr Zelenskyy, received the Donella Meadows Metal, Kondratieff Metal, Emerald Citation of Excellence, honorary professorship from Universidad Miguel de Cervantes, and honorary doctor’s degrees from Universidad Ricardo Palma and Universidad Franz Tamayo, and is a leading boomerang stunt man.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are again with Jerome C. Glenn of the Millennium Project. Today’s focus is the State of the Future 20.0 report, primarily authored by Jerome C. Glenn, Theodore J. Gordon, Elizabeth Florescu, and the Millennium Project team. I want to take a quick historical look. What was the original inspiration for the State of the Future report?

Jerome C. Glenn: The original inspiration was figuring out how to prove that future research is improving. The idea was to have some foundational elements that we would regularly update and improve to monitor global change and our ability to analyze that change. That’s where the 15 global challenges come in. You can take any of the previous 19 reports, look at Challenge 1 or 5, for example, and assess whether it has improved over the past 15 years. It was a way to compel us to continuously enhance our cumulative work. If something was a brilliant statement three years ago, why discard it? It’s still relevant. Just like the brain, it’s a cumulative system. You keep improving, ideally, as you gather new information. The idea behind The State of the Future was to create a mechanism for ongoing improvement.

Jacobsen: Could you share an “in memoriam” note for Theodore “Ted” J. Gordon? What did he mean to you and the project, and what were some key aspects of his contribution to this last report?

Glenn: Ted contributed more to future research methodologies than any other historical futurist. He was at the RAND Corporation during its early days when brilliant minds like Herman Kahn and others discussed the future. Ted was the first to ask, “What are the methods for studying the future?” From that came methodologies like Delphi, cross-impact analysis, and technology sequence analysis. He transformed future research from speculative thinking into a rigorous methodological field, which was acknowledged in his eulogy by the RAND Corporation. I thought that was a valuable insight.

Jacobsen: What was Ted’s role in the Millennium Project?

Glenn: Ted was the original creator of the Millennium Project concept, though I later revised it. His initial idea was to conduct a massive study on the future for the year 2000. I thought, “We don’t just need a one-time study; we need a global system for continuous future research.” That’s what the Millennium Project eventually became. Ted was also stronger in mathematics, statistical analysis, and quantitative approaches, while I was better on the qualitative side. Our complementary skills created a strong synergy, and we worked together for many years. We were the longest-working partner in future studies. Alvin Toffler and his wife also worked together for a long time. Still, Ted and I surpassed that in terms of sustained collaboration.

So, he was a good mentor. He was older than I was and obviously very bright. He was a rocket scientist, by the way. He worked on the third stage of the Apollo rocket, or the Saturn rocket, that went to the moon.

So when people say, “It doesn’t take a rocket scientist,” I respond, “Yes, it does—and there he is.”

Jacobsen: Let’s start with the report today by following those notes. How can global governance systems balance economic growth and sustainability to meet the various targets of the Paris Agreement by 2050?

Glenn: Oh, boy. One of the things we point out in Challenge 1 on sustainable development and climate change—and also in Challenge 3 on demographics and resources, and Challenge 2 to some degree on water—is that the most likely, cost-effective strategy isn’t just changing cars or energy systems; it’s changing food systems. This is why it’s important to consider cost-effectiveness and time to impact.

If something is cost-effective but takes 40 years, it won’t matter as much as something that can take 10 years. The amount of land and water we use is far greater for growing animals we eat than for growing food directly for ourselves. As you may know, most of the water is used in agriculture, and most is used to grow food for animals we consume. So, cut out the middleman. Any business will tell you—cutting out the middleman reduces costs.

In this case, the middleman is the animal. We now know how to produce meat directly from genetic material into meat cells. We know how to do this. The issue is scaling it up. Singapore has been selling lab-grown meat for a couple of years, and in the United States, the FDA approved it last year.

The challenge isn’t the ability to produce it but scaling it up. You don’t want to be a large grocery store chain with lab-grown meat [Ed. Cell-based meat] available one week and then not the next, leaving your customers frustrated. Right now, the issue is scaling.

If we can get enough people in the world to eat a hamburger, that’s pure meat—because the meat we get from cows in factories is filled with hormones and drugs. In fact, more drugs go into animals than into humans—about seven times more pharmaceuticals are used in animals globally than for humans. The purest form of meat would come directly from genetic material, with a little stimulation, some feedstock, algae, and voilà, out comes your hamburger.

The amount of electricity and resources required to raise animals for meat is staggering. You don’t get your meat the next day—you get it years later. That’s a long-term investment. But with lab-grown meat, once you’re operational, you get a daily return on investment. Financially and environmentally, it’s the way to go.

Now, think about cars. The average lifespan of a car is around 17 years—it’s bought, sold as a used car, and sold again. If we converted all cars to electric right now, we’d still have a backlog of gasoline-powered cars for years. Yes, we should make the switch—I drive a Prius myself—but it takes time.

The same goes for transitioning to an electric grid. It’s a massive undertaking. And then you have AI, which some estimate now consumes 5-7% of global electricity. Throw cryptocurrency on top of that, and the energy demand is growing exponentially [Ed. Accelerating growth.].

Even though we have all this new electricity coming from solar, wind, geothermal, and other renewable sources, the bulk of energy still comes from fossil fuels. That bulk will continue to be a dominant source for several years. On the other hand, food systems can change faster and globally. Another factor to consider is that, as the costs of raising food animals increase, the price of meat will become prohibitive for poorer populations.

Children, especially those between 3 to 5 years old, need iron and protein for proper brain development. If you look at some photos from certain parts of Africa, you’ll notice children with reddish hair. That’s kwashiorkor, a form of protein malnutrition. They develop it because they aren’t getting enough iron and protein in their diets. So, if we don’t shift to lab-grown meat—produced directly from genetic material—not only will we face environmental challenges, but we will also see a significant impact on the cognitive development of poor populations in the future.

One of the things I feel most strongly about—and as you’ve probably noticed, I’m quite passionate about this—is that we need to start focusing on food systems. It’s not just about changing your electricity system or switching to electric cars. We must also change the way we eat. How many people at environmental conferences are still eating meat today?

Even Democrats like Al Gore didn’t mention food in his award-winning documentary. At the COP26 summit in Scotland, they finally started talking about methane emissions. They’re getting there, but it’s slow progress. And for your listeners, it’s not just about cow emissions, though that’s often exaggerated or used as a distraction. It’s not just cow farts—it’s the whole production process. Turning over land to grow food for animals also produces methane. There’s a whole series of steps involved. For instance, we ship meat to South Korea using oil-powered ships. People who aren’t taking this seriously haven’t done their homework.

That, I’d argue, is one of the most important insights for addressing the Paris Agreement.

Jacobsen: I want to focus on some of the nuances of systems and governance mentioned in the report. This includes a focus on international collaboration and frameworks. How can global collaboration frameworks, such as the UN’s proposed four foresight elements, be strengthened to manage existential risks like climate change or AGI?

Glenn: Right. Help me remember to come back to climate synergy because I’ll likely get stuck on the AI and UN frameworks, which are important. I definitely want to return to the topic of synergy.

The UN Secretary-General recently co-authored a report, and he was very involved in it. His background is chemical engineering, so he’s quite familiar with the science. In that report, he outlined five foresight elements to revitalize the United Nations and make it more relevant to the future. One of these elements is to “repurpose” the Trusteeship Council into a multi-stakeholder foresight body.

Let me break that down. The UN has several major institutions, such as the Security Council and the Secretariat. One is the UN Trusteeship Council, which played a crucial role after World War II, particularly during decolonization. The council was instrumental in helping newly independent countries transition. The UN doesn’t get enough credit for this, but it did important work.

With decolonization mostly behind us, the Trusteeship Council doesn’t have much to do. There’s a huge room and infrastructure, but it’s not being utilized. The Secretary-General is proposing we repurpose it. That’s the first part. The second part is transforming it into a multi-stakeholder institution. Traditionally, the UN has been a club for nation-states. Still, a multi-stakeholder body would include not just governments but corporations, universities, think tanks, journalists—whoever has a stake in global governance.

This is important because governments no longer control most global financial power. Most of the world’s wealth is in the hands of investment houses. For example, 70% of the New York Stock Exchange trades are made by AI, not directly by human decision-makers. So, governments aren’t the only game in town anymore. Recognizing this reality, the Secretary-General has proposed a multi-stakeholder body to reflect today’s true distribution of power and influence.

So, you have that. The whole purpose would be foresight, meaning one-fifth of the UN would become future-oriented. That’s a gigantic change. As you can guess, it’s not easy to make such a change in the UN.

To implement this, they would need to amend the charter. We’ll see if that happens, but that’s one of the major proposals. The second proposal is to create a “futures lab”—a think tank within the Secretariat. I hope they’ll include professional futurists who have actually conducted future research. However,. Though they’ll need some bureaucrats to ensure the system runs smoothly, hopefully, they’ll bring in serious experts in the field.

A third proposal is to appoint an envoy for future generations. The idea is to have someone ensuring that decisions made within the UN system consider the impact on future generations—both within the UN and pushing other countries to do the same. By the way, Wales has been a champion of this type of thinking. For your listeners, it’s about operationalizing future generations in decision-making.

Then, of course, the Summit of the Future is happening as we speak. It was originally supposed to happen last year, and we assessed related issues included in the State of the Future report. We pointed out that, to achieve all these changes, you won’t be able to do it in a short period. So, they moved the summit to this year, encouraging many countries to think about what they should say regarding the future. However, much of what will be said is probably what they would say regardless of the topic. So, the impact may not be as significant as I would have liked, but it’s a start.

Did I cover everything? Let’s jump over to synergy. You put a virtual asterisk on the term or concept of synergy.

Jacobsen: Yes.

Glenn: Thank you. This ties directly into governance. The political world today operates largely as a zero-sum game. If you’re more powerful, I’m, therefore, less powerful. This is reflected in major government reports, like in my country, the United States, where they release a trend report every four years before a new president takes office. The report essentially outlines how to increase or decrease power.

In my view, the world as a zero-sum game guarantees unending conflict, as we’ve seen throughout history. So, what can change that? What kind of decision-making can alter that dynamic? I would like to see schools of business and diplomacy start teaching synergetic analysis.

For example, business schools teach us about competitive intelligencecompetitive advantage, and competitive strategy. That’s been the framework so far. But I’ve suggested to several business schools that we also teach synergetic intelligence. What would synergetic advantage or synergetic strategy look like? We’ve got two experiments running at the moment to explore this idea.

One experiment is in South Asia. It involves eight countries. We create a grid, listing the countries down one side and across the top. Then we ask, “What are the potential synergetic relations between Pakistan and India?” Immediately, people’s minds often shut down, thinking, “I can’t imagine that.” They might come up with something minor, like tourism, but that’s basic cooperation.

I’m not talking about mere cooperation between countries but about synergies. As the great futurist, Buckminster Fuller pointed out, here’s the distinction:

  1. Take a wheel and a box.
  2. Put the wheel inside the box, and nothing much happens.
  3. Take the wheel out, put it under the box, and you get a wheelbarrow—a completely new entity.

A wheelbarrow is not just a wheel or just a box. It’s a new relationship that forms something entirely different.

Can we create similar new relationships between nation-states? Even in business, imagine two companies: one seeks multiple synergetic relationships with other businesses. In contrast, the other only follows the typical competitive analysis. Synergy could outperform the competition. In my view, one of the critical criteria for future decision-making is teaching people to understand synergy and how it can improve outcomes. I’m not advocating for eliminating competition, but I am suggesting that we can achieve better results by adding synergy to the decision-making process.

Jacobsen: You mentioned malnutrition, specifically how iron and protein deficiencies at crucial stages of development affect brain growth. Protein, iron, and other core macronutrients are essential for a fully developed nervous system. When it comes to global inequality, can technology and AI help address growing wealth disparities, which have been a political and economic issue dating back to ancient Greece?

Glenn: This is a complex issue, so I’ll offer a somewhat superficial answer. One immediate solution is that AI can help create individualized learning systems. With projects like Elon Musk’s satellites providing rural areas with Internet access, we’re nearing a point where almost everyone will have online connectivity within a few years. This would allow individuals to learn at their own pace based on their specific needs and circumstances.

AI can facilitate massively customized education, tailored to each person, which should significantly improve learning. We know people learn best when they’re engaged with topics they’re interested in at that moment. Traditional classrooms can’t offer that level of personalization. AI, however, can adapt brilliantly to these learning needs.

That’sOne part of the equation is improving education and helping people understand their potential. The other part concerns the jobs that will be displaced by AI. Many jobs today may not be available in the future due to advanced AI. One widely discussed solution is universal basic income (UBI).

In our Work/Technology 2050: Scenarios and Actions report, one of the scenarios was titled “If Humans Were Free,”which explored the idea of a self-actualization economy.

The idea—and as I was working on that scenario—I thought, okay, who has the cash flow projection for UBI, universal basic income? If you go to a bank to get a loan, you need to provide a cash flow projection to show that you can pay it back and that it’s financially sustainable. But I couldn’t find any country that had done one for UBI. So, if any of your listeners can send me a web link to a proper cash flow projection—money in, money out over time—that would be helpful.

You don’t want to break the back of a government’s treasury by overpaying and not making it sustainable. So, what makes sense? The timing of implementation matters, and the cost of living matters.

Here are a couple of variables: One, as labour is reduced in production, costs will eventually go down—not immediately, but perhaps by 2030 or 2035. So, by then, the cost of living might be lower than it is now, and you wouldn’t need to pay as much in UBI. That’s one bell curve: the cost of living rises and then falls.

The other rising curve will be new sources of taxable income, like taxing robots, synthetic biology, and the products of AI and biotech. As this new income grows, the question is: when will the cost of living decrease enough and the new taxable income increase enough that they cross over, making UBI financially sustainable? When that happens, we’ll have a sustainable system.

Additionally, with AI assisting people, you could have an AI avatar that understands what you want to do and helps you find opportunities. Imagine you’re planning to visit the Louvre tomorrow. Your AI avatar would search the web for people interested in joining you virtually. Maybe 100 people would pay $1 each to virtually join you on your tour, using your contact lenses and two-way video system. But let’s say you want to narrow it down to 50 interesting people who will make the experience more engaging. Now, you’re touring the Louvre alone but interacting with fascinating individuals worldwide, and they’re paying you $50, which covers your lunch.

I’m describing how AI could help people find markets for what they want or are already doing, allowing them to make a living without physically going to a marketplace. The market was the center in the past, and we revolved around it. In the information revolution, every point in the orbit becomes a center, so we all become the center of a world system. Each person could eventually make a living simply by being themselves.

I recommend that people figure out how to monetize their hobbies today. What do you enjoy doing? How do you want to evolve between birth and death? Can some of that be for income? Your AI avatar can help you find the right audience. Out of the world’s 8-10 billion people, surely a few would be willing to pay you for what you’re already doing.

Jacobsen: We have five minutes left, so I’ll ask a final question. What about optimizing collective paths in governance and systems as we navigate the development of advanced technologies and choosing the ones with the highest probabilities of being positive for human flourishing? Specifically, I’m talking about ethical frameworks that may not be fully developed yet, or that could surpass the limitations of current moral structures. How do we approach the evolution and development of these frameworks?

Glenn: I’m not entirely sure I fully understood your question, but I’ll do my best to answer it. Let’s see if I’m on the right track.

I sit on the IEEE AI governance committee, which spends much time defining ethical terms. How do you audit something for ethics? First, you need to define the terms, and that’s what we’re doing. It struck me that if you imagine two worlds—one like we have now, where humans make both smart and dumb decisions, with a range of ethical considerations—and then imagine another world where the infrastructure of civilization (electricity systems, plumbing systems, etc.) is run by AI, all vetted for ethics, the average decision in the AI-driven world would likely be more ethical. The AI would have passed various benchmarks, meaning decisions would generally be more ethical than those made by humans today.

Jacobsen: Are you aware of any efforts being made to develop those AI systems with relevant benchmarks for ethical decision-making?

Glenn: Yes, absolutely. There are many efforts. I was involved in the early days of the Internet in the 1980s, working on getting it into third-world countries through packet switching. Back then, no one was talking about the ethical implications—it was assumed that technology was good. We didn’t conduct proper technology assessments.

Today, there’s a massive focus on technology assessment and ethics. As we speak, there are probably hundreds of conferences worldwide discussing how to ensure ethical standards in AI. Several organizations are working on this—IEEE, ISO, UNESCO, OECD, and others. There’s even a Global Partnership on AI. Ethics in AI is flourishing everywhere, and they’re all working on it.

So, I’m not concerned about the current discussions on ethics. What worries me is the next step: artificial general intelligence (AGI). Most conversations today are about narrow AI, like ChatGPT and other generative models. They’re focused on specific, limited tasks. But AGI—AI that acts as an agent, not just a tool—is different and much more complex.

Hopefully, our ethics frameworks will extend to how AGI is created. This is one of the key issues we explore in the State of the Future report, where we go into 100 to 200 pages of detail.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Jerome, thank you for your time today to discuss the State of the Future 20.0 report.

Glenn: Thank you. I appreciate it.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jiří Müller on a Global Humanists Experience in Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/06

Jiří Müller is part of Czech Humanists or Čeští humanisté. It is a newly formed group promoting secular humanism, a philosophy grounded in reason, secular ethics, human rights, and personal development. While forming their first projects and seeking new members, Czech Humanists advocate for democracy, free inquiry, and anti-dogmatism. Their worldview is outlined in the Declaration of Modern Humanism. Czech Humanists are also members of Humanists International. For more information, contact them at contact@humanists.cz.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Jiri Müller from the Czech Republic, representing the Czech Humanists. You attended the Humanists International General Assembly 2024 in Singapore, but I could not participate.

I was on a brief ‘vacation’ with Remus Cernea in Ukraine. I don’t recommend visiting there because people are generally trying to stay alive, escape, or are being forced into fighting on the frontlines. There are certainly better vacation spots. What were some of the main focus areas for the General Assembly in Singapore this year?

Jiří Müller: The conference in Singapore focused on secularism and interfaith harmony. The General Assembly itself didn’t have an official theme. Still, the main topics were Afghanistan and the ongoing crises in other difficult parts of the world. Another key issue was how we, as a global network of organizations, can support organizations from the Global South. I think those were the two main themes of the General Assembly.

Jacobsen: In terms of the proceedings, how did the General Assembly portion of the conference go? Were any resolutions passed, declarations revised, or new organizations welcomed into the global humanist movement?

Müller: That’s correct. First, if I’m correct, a few declarations were passed, including one on Afghanistan and another on Venezuela. There was also a commitment to organizing future World Humanist Congresses and other international humanist conferences in more accessible countries. Several new organizations, mainly from Asia, joined the Humanists International family, which was great. The location of the international conference is a perfect choice since we now have member organizations from Malaysia and Indonesia. Meeting the delegates from these two new organizations was especially rewarding at the conference.

Additionally, there was voting and discussion about our voting processes. The discussion on voting in the organization is not entirely resolved. I think it will be revisited next year at the General Assembly.

Jacobsen: Organizations looking to join Humanists International are typically smaller or newer. It’s rare for older, established organizations to join later since they tend to grow alongside the international community rather than joining at a later stage. It does happen occasionally, but it’s not the norm.

What are your recommendations for younger organizations, particularly from a European perspective, where it might be easier to spread humanist values and build a community? How can they find appropriate leadership, secure funding, build their organization, maintain a sense of community, and stay connected to the international network?

Müller: I think you’ve already listed some key points. The Czech Humanists only started in 2023, so we’re a very young organization. It has been incredibly helpful to have friends in the international community who can guide and inspire us on how to run a humanist organization.

I recommend a few things for new and emerging humanist organizations which have been very helpful for us and that we follow closely. First, it’s always good to have proof of activity. When someone comes across your organization, it should be clear what you consider your primary activity or activities you’ve already completed. Discussing humanism or reacting to current events can effectively spread the message and clarify your stance.

But people usually become interested if they see an interesting project. For us, we started a secular news blog called Secular Insights. We also want to start an apostate support group. These projects show people interested in humanism and what it means to put humanism into practice. Another thing I recommend is to look for like-minded people in places where there is already some overlap with humanists.

Humanism is historically well-rooted in slightly more intellectual and middle-class spaces, so universities are a good place to look. I would also recommend progressive campaigning, such as Pride events and organizations related to progressive issues. These tend to align well with humanist ideals. Many people in those organizations, campaigns, and spaces may not realize they are humanists. Still, they would appreciate a community like a humanist one.

I think these two recommendations—proof of activity through projects and knowing your demographic and allies—are the key advice I can give now. But there’s always more to say. I would also recommend seeking advice from organizations in your region. We have very good relations within the Visegrád Four, and I think everyone should try to connect with people in neighbouring countries if they don’t have connections within their own. Atheist and humanist organizations across borders can offer valuable advice and help in the early stages of building a community.

Jacobsen: What was your overall takeaway from the conference?

Müller: One of the big takeaways was how much research and how many projects exist related to secularism and interfaith harmony. It often seems like atheism and secularism are not interesting topics for study, as religious scholars tend to focus on new ways of understanding spirituality and religiosity. But at this conference, I saw excellent speakers presenting fascinating research on secularism and interfaith projects and sharing real-life experiences. They offered practical, perhaps diplomatic, approaches to handling interfaith projects.

Jacobsen: Did you get to explore the larger city of Singapore? When conferences are based in major cities, people often come a bit earlier or stay later to get a feel for the local culture, especially since it might be their only chance to visit. Did you take more time to explore? If so, how long did you stay, and what were some of your takeaways from exploring the city?

Müller: I had the good fortune of exploring the city myself. I even had a few humanists that I met in Copenhagen join me. It was a great experience.

So, I visited many of the parks that Singapore has to offer. Overall, I enjoyed the city, including Singapore’s restaurants, shops, and public spaces. My favourite places were the National Singapore Museum and Gardens by the Bay. The latter is much more well-known than the museum, but I was happy with both experiences. Gardens by the Bay receives high praise, and it lives up to it, which is impressive, given how well-known and popular it already is.

Yes, there were some cultural shocks, such as the cuisine and the sharp contrast between the outdoor heat and the strong air conditioning inside buildings. However, overall, I felt very welcomed in the city. It was easy to navigate, and I enjoyed my stay and many of its wonderful details.

Jacobsen: So, considering how the culture of Singapore mixed with the theme of the conference—interfaith dialogue and harmony—how well do you think the cultural setup aligned with the thematic focus?

Müller: I think the theme for Singapore was very well chosen. The city is an interesting example of how to approach interfaith relations and religious pluralism. You can see streets with churches, mosques, and temples right next to each other. The multiracial and multicultural approaches to the city itself are evident. I would say that the Humanist Society Singapore did a great job organizing the conference, allowing attendees to feel and experience this pluralistic society firsthand.

One of the highlights before the conference was visiting a local mosque and learning about their Religious Rehabilitation Group. This project focuses on helping to deradicalize Muslims who have been jailed for radicalism. It was a very inspiring project, and we learned a lot.

It’s commendable how systematic the approach is. It’s characteristically Singaporean: the state is strict on radicalism, but at the same time, there are local Muslim community volunteers to help those convicted of radicalism. They use their community to address the problem of Islamic radicalism ethically and with care to foster a good, pluralistic society.

Jacobsen: Are there aspects of Singaporean culture or history, especially as a young country that developed rapidly, which stood out to you? Did you notice any humanistic elements in the general culture outside of the conference?

Müller: Yes, especially the emphasis on mutual respect and embracing differences, which felt very humanistic. Singapore’s approach to living together in a diverse society stood out in general culture and outside the conference space. It’s a unique place where respect for each other’s differences is paramount.

In a sense, it was not only nice from a tourist’s point of view, where you could enjoy different types of cultures right next to each other, but it was also very rewarding as a humanist striving to live in an open society. It was encouraging to see this model of a multiracial and religiously pluralistic society in a much different environment than what we typically see with more established, larger Western humanist organizations. Especially compared to countries with more humanists, Singapore showed a different yet successful example.

Jacobsen: A big factor in North American and European humanism is the presence of more aggressive formulations, such as Firebrand Atheism, Militant Atheism, New Atheism, and so on. This approach differs from what you might find in humanistic orientations elsewhere, yet we see these outcroppings in those contexts.

Do you think the Singaporeans had any militant tendencies or was their approach more in line with diplomatic interfaith harmony? Was it more of a cultural difference in the interpretation of humanist values?

Müller: I think it was quite comparable in some ways. There are diplomatic humanists and more provocative thinkers in many Western atheist and humanist spaces. In Singapore, I felt the pendulum swung toward mutual respect, with an understanding of boundaries regarding offence and the subjective perspective on what respect means.

Singapore is not a place for religious radicalism or provocative atheism. However, it is still a place for constructive and critical interfaith discussions. They strike a balance between maintaining respect and engaging in meaningful dialogue.

Jacobsen: What are your hopes for future international humanist conferences?

Müller: I hope that this tradition continues in some form. Regarding how these events should be organized, I believe there should be a strong emphasis on the international aspect and openness to participation from people worldwide.

I hope these gatherings become fertile ground for new organizations, projects, and initiatives. There’s always the risk of falling into “conference humanism,” where we present and debate abstract ideas. However, the emphasis should be on creating real-world projects and activities. The most valuable outcomes of these conferences are when you look back at your notes and see how many new contacts you’ve made and how many new things you can organize with friends from other countries.

What I see at the heart of these General Assemblies and international conferences is that even though we come from different corners of the world, there’s always something interesting to discuss and meaningful to create together. That’s what I hope to see more of in the future.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Jiri, thank you very much for your time today. 

Müller: Thank you so much. It was nice talking to you, and I’m very thankful for the opportunity to share my experience.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. I’m sure we’ll be in touch in the future.

Müller: Alright. Bye.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jennifer Edgecombe on Movember and Prostate Health Guidelines

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/06

*Video interview available here.*

Jen Edgecombe (She/Her) is the Director of sexual health and Well-Being for Prostate Cancer at Movember in Toronto, Ontario. With over 15 years of leadership in healthcare, Jen is dedicated to improving equitable access to cancer care and enhancing patient experiences. At Movember, she manages and delivers innovative prostate cancer initiatives, focusing on sexual health outcomes for patients and their partners.

Previously, Jen was Manager of Provincial Programs at BC Cancer in Vancouver, where she advanced patient-centred care and fostered cross-sector collaborations across British Columbia. Her role as Clinic Director at Lifemark Health Group and her long-term tenure with the City of Kamloops highlight her expertise in leading high-performing teams and implementing evidence-based practices.

Jen holds a Master of Rehabilitation Science in Oncology Supportive Care from The University of British Columbia. She is a passionate advocate for lifestyle interventions to reduce chronic disease burdens. She is actively involved in community engagement and public speaking.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Jennifer Edgecombe, the Director of Sexual Health and Wellbeing for Movember. How did you initially get involved with Movember?

Jennifer Edgecombe: Yes, thank you for having me. I’ve been with Movember for three and a half months. Before that, I worked at BC Cancer, the cancer control agency for British Columbia. I led the Patient and Family Experience team and the supportive care work across the province. At BC Cancer, I worked on projects that examined the experience of prostate cancer care for people in British Columbia—evaluating whether they had the information they needed, where there were gaps in knowledge about the next steps in care, and then developing educational processes to help people better understand what to expect and how to engage in shared decision-making. Through our focus groups with people affected by prostate cancer, we found that many were unaware of how significantly prostate cancer treatments would impact their sexual health and function.

So, when I saw the opportunity with Movember to address this issue, I applied immediately, eager to get involved in helping to find a solution to this prevalent and serious issue.

Jacobsen: When do men typically become more proactive about their prostate health? Is it only when cancer becomes a concern?

Edgecombe: Are you asking about screening guidelines?

Jacobsen: Yes, screening guidelines and general awareness of prostate health.

Edgecombe: The challenge is that every country—and even different regions within countries—has its guidelines based on the availability of doctors, tests, and the types of tests covered by public health systems, which can vary widely. Typically, we encourage people with prostates to begin the conversation with their doctors around the age of 50. However, for people of African descent, and those with a family history of prostate cancer, medical associationsrecommend starting the conversation about prostate health as early as age 40.

Jacobsen: Why is there a difference in the age recommendations for people of African descent?

Edgecombe: That’s a good question. There are biological factors at play. Some genetic factors predispose men of African and Caribbean descent to higher rates of prostate cancer than men of other backgrounds. Additionally, access to prostate cancer screening is not as readily available to some demographics. We want to ensure these conversations happen earlier so that treatment can be offered sooner and earlier, if necessary.

Jacobsen: What factors, in terms of environment, lifestyle, and wellness, also contribute to increasing the risk of prostate cancer?

Edgecombe: That’s a great question. There are genetic factors—if a first-degree relative, such as your father or brother, has had prostate cancer, you should consider getting checked. Prostate cancer is not a single disease; it consists of different tumour types and severities, so genetics plays a significant role. Lifestyle factors also matter—exercise, diet, alcohol consumption—all the things we know we should be mindful of contribute to someone’s risk of developing prostate cancer. If you have questions about your risk, speaking with a doctor is always a good idea.

Jacobsen: How much misinformation is there among men about their risk factors? Why don’t they check their health regularly, whether 40, 50, or older?

Jacobsen: Yes, this is a big issue for some individuals. There was a standard of care for a long time. In some areas, it’s still the standard to perform a digital rectal exam. This involves the doctor inserting their finger into a patient’s anus to check the prostate. For many individuals, that’s an uncomfortable and invasive experience, making it a test they would rather avoid.

Many health agencies have sidelined the digital rectal exam in favour of less invasive screening procedures. There are now blood tests that are quite accurate, and there are other tests your doctor can recommend. However, there seem to be two reasons people hesitate: first, the fear of testing because it feels uncomfortable, and second, the mindset of “if I don’t look at it, maybe it won’t exist.” Prostate cancer is a very prevalent disease, so it’s critical to encourage people with prostates to have these conversations and get checked as early as possible. This helps mitigate risk factors and ensures that testing starts early.

Jacobsen: What are comparable cancers in terms of prevalence in the general population?

Edgecombe: That’s a tricky question because there are cancers that are prevalent in the population, such as lung cancer or breast cancer. However, the impact and severity of those tumour types can be very serious. The survival rate for prostate cancer is quite high, so while the incidence of prostate cancer is high among North American men, the survival rate for isolated, localized tumours is also very high. I worry that comparing prostate cancer to something like lung cancer or breast cancer might cause more fear than necessary.

The important thing to understand about prostate cancer is that many people are diagnosed and go on to live very long, healthy lives. At the same time, there are comparable diseases in prevalence and onset, but the treatments and severity are not the same for most people. We want to encourage people to know their bodies and risk factors and get tested early to reduce those risks.

Jacobsen: What are some common detection and treatment modalities when resources are available?

Edgecombe: That’s a great question. The detection and treatment options can be quite sophisticated in more urban or well-resourced areas with advanced medical technologies. One common approach for some types of prostate cancer is called “active surveillance.” This means the doctor will monitor the tumour regularly without immediately resorting to treatment. The idea is to check periodically for any changes and intervene only if necessary, which allows many people to live for a long time with minimal impact on their quality of life.

Another common treatment is surgery, typically performed by a urologist. The urologist surgically removes the tumour, a widely available option since it can be done in most surgical centers. Another option for some people is radiation therapy. In Canada, for example, access to radiation therapy is limited by the availability of expensive machines called linear accelerators, which are not present in every facility. Surgery may be preferred in less densely populated areas simply because it’s more readily available.

For more advanced-stage prostate cancer, there are also hormone treatments and systemic therapies, which target the cancer more broadly and are used when the disease has spread.

Jacobsen: What about in more isolated areas where advanced technologies might not be available for detection and treatment?

Edgecombe: This is another tricky issue, particularly for people in the United States or Canada. In North America, we see significant differences in access to care depending on where you live. In privatized healthcare settings, especially in the U.S., there’s often greater access to innovative treatments and cutting-edge technologies. However, access can be more limited in more rural or isolated areas.

As I mentioned, active surveillance is a viable option for some patients, which can be helpful in areas where more advanced treatments aren’t easily accessible. When treatment is necessary, surgery is generally available because it can be performed in most surgical centers. Patients may have access to radiation therapy in more urban areas or facilities with better funding, but that depends on the availability of equipment like the linear accelerator. For those with more advanced prostate cancer, hormone therapy or systemic treatments are also available options, though again, access may vary based on location and healthcare infrastructure.

So some people might recognize these as chemotherapy-type treatments. As I mentioned, prostate cancer is not a single disease, and it manifests differently in different people. For example, two people can both have prostate cancer, but one may undergo active surveillance while another might need intense hormone treatment, such as androgen deprivation therapy or radiation therapy. It varies from person to person. Additionally, some may have access to advanced private hospitals in the U.S. that offer innovative treatments that others may not even be aware of.

Jacobsen: What are the impacts on sexual health? How are men who are undergoing treatment or are post-treatment for prostate cancer managing the sexual health issues that may arise as a consequence of various treatments?

Edgecombe: Yes, this is an important question. It’s essential to define how sexual function changes and why that might occur. Experts in this field use what’s called the biopsychosocial model to explain changes in sexual function. So, is it biological—something physical that has changed sexual function? Is it psychological—perhaps increased anxiety that is causing changes? Or is it social—factors like relationship dynamics or even broader social factors, such as whether the individual belongs to a minority sexual orientation or gender identity group? These are the three areas we look at when identifying changes to sexual function.

With prostate cancer, there’s added complexity. The risk factors for prostate cancer overlap with risk factors for other diseases that can also affect erectile function. For example, diabetes can cause issues with sexual function. So, suppose someone with diabetes also has prostate cancer. In that case, the question becomes: Is the problem due to prostate cancer, diabetes, or perhaps anxiety? It’s important to consider all these factors.

In many press releases and studies, numbers are given to describe how many people experience sexual health changes related to prostate cancer, but I want to caution us here. There are a few barriers to confidently reporting these numbers. One of them is underreporting—many men may not feel comfortable disclosing changes in sexual function, especially in a society that emphasizes masculinity and the importance of erections. Are they willing to admit that their sexual function has changed? Another factor is the complexity I mentioned—whether the issue is due to diabetes, anxiety, or prostate cancer itself.

Experts seem to agree that most men with prostate cancer will experience changes in sexual function. Some may be able to resolve or improve the issue. Still, we must give people the language and remove the stigma so that they can have these conversations.

Jacobsen: In the biopsychosocial model, what are the chances that sexual function or dysfunction will resolve itself, and how common is this resolution among men who have had or are currently suffering from prostate cancer, especially with the benefit of modern expertise and technology?

Edgecombe: That’s a great question. Much of the current work is focused on redefining sexual scripts, intimacy, and even the role of erectile function as a component of masculinity. It’s difficult to be certain about statistics when it comes to whether two people with the same prostate cancer will both retain or recover their sexual function after treatment. It’s highly individual, and what works for one person may not work for another.

On the biomedical side, various treatments are available to address biological issues. However, there’s a misconception among many people. Some think, “I’ll have the cancer treatment, and if there’s a problem afterward, I’ll just take a PDE5 inhibitor,” which is better known by brand names like Viagra or Cialis, and that will fix everything. The reality is that, for many people, those inhibitors won’t work because the underlying mechanism that they rely on has been altered by prostate cancer therapy.

Other devices, such as vacuum pumps and injections, can be used. Other rehabilitation treatments are also available, and clinics have been established to guide people and their partners through this process. When discussing the resolution, it’s important not to think about it as simply regaining the same function as before. Instead, there’s a shift towards redefining what sexual function means.

Many people define their sexual identity or “sexual script” based on their experiences at 17 when they have optimal health and function. Society tends to focus on penetrative sex as the ideal. Still, that mindset doesn’t always help individuals who have experienced changes due to prostate cancer. There’s an opportunity here to redefine what sexual health and intimacy mean and to encourage conversations that allow people to create a new normal.

Jacobsen: Why are the number of prostate cancer cases projected to double by 2040?

Edgecombe: You’re referring to the study funded by Movember in April. Several factors are contributing to the projected doubling of cases. First, the disease burden is already substantial. With more diagnostic tools becoming available, more cases are being identified. Additionally, lifestyle issues are playing a role. Unfortunately, society is not becoming more active and only sometimes adhering to recommended lifestyle guidelines.

These significant projections should be taken seriously because they will impact healthcare systems, individuals, families, and partners. It’s important to prepare for the increase in cases and ensure we have the resources to manage this growing health issue.

Jacobsen: How did the partnership with Movember come about? Aside from the study, what benefits have come from this partnership regarding raising awareness?

Edgecombe: Are you referring to the partnership with the International Society of Sexual Medicine (ISSM)?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Edgecombe: ISSM has been a global leader in sexual medicine for many years. When Movember was starting, it had always focused on prostate cancer—raising money and awareness about the disease. Early on, Movember identified that the number one side effect men were most concerned about after prostate cancer treatment was the resultant changes to sexual function. Initially, we thought it might be medication management or something else. Still, when we asked people directly, it became clear that sexual function was the most important issue for them.

So, Movember and ISSM created a partnership several years ago to address this concern and find ways to help people manage the sexual side effects of prostate cancer treatment. Together, they’ve been working to provide resources and solutions for those affected.

Jacobsen: I was surprised that the investment was so significant. Movember’s investment in prostate cancer research totalled USD 230.4 million.

Edgecombe: Yes, that’s correct. Across Movember’s entire portfolio, a large portion of that funding is directed towards various cause areas, with sexual health being one of them. The investment spans multiple research areas, and sexual health is a key focus.

Jacobsen: What kind of feedback have you received, whether from media, experts, or other partners, regarding the funding, research, and awareness raised by Movember?

Edgecombe: It’s important to note that while Movember has funded many studies—and research is critical—studies alone aren’t the solution. They are just one part of the puzzle in addressing these issues. The feedback we’ve received is clear: people want action. They’ve spoken about the challenges they face. The research helps us understand those challenges, but the goal is to turn that understanding into practical solutions that help people manage the side effects of prostate cancer treatment, especially regarding sexual health.

Jacobsen: This is the number one issue men are dealing with after prostate cancer. By coordinating and funding the development and implementation of clinical practice guidelines, Movember is truly putting its money where its mouth is and moving the conversation forward. This is going to completely change the experience of prostate cancer treatment for people around the world.

Regarding your question about the response, there has been a lot of excitement and optimism. For many, this has been a bleak area for a long time, and now there is hope. Physicians are going to be equipped with the tools they need to address sexual health changes with their patients. Patients, in turn, will receive the information they need to understand what will happen and how they can manage it. Nurses and allied health staff, including social workers and others on the care team, will also have the necessary knowledge. This ensures that the side effects will be addressed—not necessarily solved. Still, patients won’t be left at home, struggling with life-altering side effects and feeling like there’s nothing they can do or talk about.

This is going to change a lot of people’s lives.

Jacobsen: Has there been any resistance to the provision of these guidelines?

Edgecombe: Could you clarify what you mean?

Jacobsen: Sure. Have you encountered cultural or social resistance as Movember and the medical community introduce these new health guidelines, including recommendations and strategies to help patients? You mentioned earlier that redefining certain traditional models might be challenging in some subcultures within North America.

Edgecombe: Yes, that’s an important point. To clarify for anyone listening—Movember isn’t the author of these guidelines. Movember funded and coordinated the initiative, but these guidelines were developed by the world’s leading experts in sexual medicine, who synthesized the available data. Clinical guidelines represent the highest quality of evidence we have in medicine.

The guidelines consist of 47 clinical practice statements, and the first statement emphasizes that there should be a clinician-led conversation with the patient about realistic expectations for sexual function following prostate cancer treatment. This conversation must also include cultural and social factors. Part of this initiative’s work is ensuring that these conversations are sensitive to the individual patient’s cultural and social background. For example, you mentioned subcultures where traditional models might be more resistant to certain discussions. We recognize that people’s experiences in healthcare differ greatly based on these factors, so the guidelines must consider those differences.

This work is important because these underserved populations are the focus. In every region where we operate—Canada, the U.S., Australia, and others—we’re collaborating with local experts to understand who has historically had poor healthcare experiences, who might be missed by this service delivery, or who may face barriers to access. We’re then working to create culturally and socially appropriate approaches to care so that most people can benefit from it.

Jacobsen: As we’re looking at time, how can people get involved, whether through volunteering, financial contributions, offering expertise, or applying for positions?

Edgecombe: I’m new to Movember, but this work can only be done with people joining the cause. We’re approaching our campaign month in November, and if you can grow a mustache, that’s one way to raise awareness and funds. You can also get involved by moving your body—through walks, runs, or any exercise to raise money. Or you could host a fundraising event with friends and have everyone donate. It’s important to remember that this work requires significant investment, and we want to ensure we can continue impacting as many people as possible.

If anyone wants to get involved, please visit the Movember website for more information. Suppose you want details on the guidelines, this initiative, or sexual health and prostate cancer. In that case, we have a website called True North that is specifically for patients. We’re updating the True North website with the latest guidelines and resources from ISSM, so that patients can access the same information as their doctors. We want patients to be well-informed and empowered to participate in decision-making about their treatment. Those are two great ways people can get involved.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Any final thoughts based on today’s conversation, Jennifer?

Edgecombe: I appreciate the opportunity to talk about this. I believe that the way we, as a society, approach sexual health right now can be harmful to many people. If I can accomplish one thing in this role, it would be to see more people openly discussing changes to their sexual health—especially when it’s related to cancer. We don’t want people sitting alone, depressed, or suffering because of stigma or outdated beliefs about masculinity. I hope that through this work, we can advance conversations about sexual health and masculinity and foster more support for one another.

Jacobsen: Jennifer, thank you very much for your time today.

Edgecombe: Thank you, Scott. This has been great.

More info:

  • Grow The traditional way to Mo for Movember is to grow a moustache to raise funds for men’s health.
  • Move to Get physically active by walking or running over the month for the 60 men we lose to suicide each hour across the world.
  • Host A popular workplace option, get together with your colleagues and do something fun – trivia, a tournament or something creative.
  • Mo Your Own WayA choose-your-own-adventure challenge epic in scope and scale. Think big and go bigger. You make the rules.
  • Learn more at Movember.com.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Gordon Guyatt on GRADE, Core Grade, and EBM

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/05

*Transcript edited for readability.*

Gordon Guyatt holds a joint medical appointment and is a Professor of Health Research Methods, Evidence, and Impact at McMaster University’s Faculty of Health Sciences. He is a distinguished member of the Michael G. DeGroote Cochrane Canada Centre and the Centre for Medicinal Cannabis Research (CMCR) at McMaster. Professor Guyatt specializes in evidence-based medicine, developing and applying rigorous research methodologies to enhance healthcare practices and policies. His influential work ensures that clinical decisions are supported by the best available scientific evidence, improving patient outcomes and public health. In addition to leading cutting-edge research initiatives, Professor Guyatt is dedicated to mentoring students and professionals, fostering the next generation of health scientists. His commitment bridges the gap between scientific research and practical healthcare solutions, driving innovation and excellence in the health sciences.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The last time we talked was probably–I don’t know–3 or 4 years ago. I believe the lasttouchpoint for us was the red meat study. You were critiquing some general dietary health recommendations. The red meat study raised questions about the degree of risk that can be reasonably proposed to people and how much personal preferences and values play a role in whether they’ll choose to consume three servings of meat per week or so.

Professor Gordon Guyatt: Right. 

Jacobsen: Regarding more recent events, you received the Henry G. Friesen International Prize in Health Research—yet another award! How does it feel?

Guyatt: Nice. 

Jacobsen: Was this in recognition of your overall work in health science, or was it for something specific?

Guyatt: It was for something other than a specific piece of work. It was for my overall lifetime contribution.

Jacobsen: Have you had any updates on evidence-based medicine, especially its definition, use, and practice?

Guyatt: There’s been an evolution. We’re always trying to improve shared decision-making, but it’s challenging. Do you remember what GRADE is?

Jacobsen: I remember the acronym but need help remembering what each part stands for.

Guyatt: I am also trying to remember what each part stands for. 

Jacobsen: Wasn’t it about appropriate systematic reviews? 

Guyatt: GRADE stands for Grading of Recommendations, Assessment, Development, and Evaluation. It’s a framework for assessing the quality of evidence and deciding what’s trustworthy. It also helps move from evidence to recommendations or action. GRADE has been a big hit and is now used by over 110 organizations worldwide. Many consider it the standard for systematic reviews and guideline development.

However, GRADE has become too complex. Over 50 papers explain various aspects of applying it, and some of the guidance contradicts itself because of evolving changes. Some of it could be more sophisticated for many users. As a result, we are creating something called “Core GRADE.” It’s meant to simplify things by focusing on the essential components people need to know. We’re producing a series of papers about Core GRADE.

Jacobsen: What is in Core GRADE, not Core GRADE or general GRADE?

Guyatt: Well, it’s a bit difficult because it’s highly technical. We first say that methods are now available to compare a whole range of treatments simultaneously. But for Core GRADE, we’re comparing treatment A to treatment B. The more complex evidence evaluation methods are not part of our Core GRADE. We’ve identified benefits and harms, certainty of evidence, and values and preferences as key criteria for moving from evidence to recommendations.

But we’ve also identified issues like cost, resources, acceptability, feasibility, and equity may be involved. There’s a more advanced “evidence-to-decision” structure where you check off boxes for each factor. In Core GRADE, we say, “Please consider these issues.” However, we ask people to consider these issues without requiring them to fill out the entire chart, which can be time-consuming and energy-intensive. We’re trying to eliminate what you might call the “flat of the curve”—in other words, tasks that consume time and energy without significantly improving the result.

That’s an example of the kind of simplification we’re aiming for, where we say: “Think about these issues, but you don’t need to go through the whole process.”

Jacobsen: In addition to these modifications, are you developing new review methodologies or primarily focused on improving existing ones, such as GRADE or Core GRADE, or are you outside of Core GRADE?

Guyatt: Another key issue within the methods community is the ongoing tension between simplicity and methodological sophistication. What has happened to GRADE and some other areas is that there’s been an excessive focus on methodological sophistication without enough attention to keep things simple and manageable for users. So, we’ve just submitted a paper to The BMJ after going through a process of creating a simpler, yet still rigorous, way of assessing the risk of bias in randomized trials.

We’ll be introducing a new risk-of-bias instrument for randomized trials. A few years ago, we also developed a systematic approach to assessing the credibility of subgroup analyses, which is gaining traction and proving effective. These projects aren’t entirely new frameworks like GRADE, which fits under the broad umbrella of evidence-based Medicine (EBM). Instead, they’re components of the broader EBM and guideline process that aim to simplify and improve specific aspects.

Jacobsen: One of your papers was titled “Successes, Shortcomings, and Learning Opportunities for Evidence-Based Medicine from the COVID-19 Pandemic.” What were the successes, shortcomings, and lessons learned from the pandemic?

Guyatt: As a global EBM community, one of our successes was rapidly producing evidence from randomized trials. One of the key innovations was using “adaptive trials,” also known as “platform trials”—probably a better term. Platform trials involve:

  • Setting up multiple centers worldwide or within a jurisdiction, following a single protocol.
  • Using the same data collection forms.
  • Adhering to the same ethical standards that we would follow for any trial.

But in this case, it’s for a series of trials.

So, for example, if you’re testing Drug A for a particular condition, you’ll collect the same types of data and measure the same outcomes across all sites. 

And when you finish with Drug A, you don’t have to start all over again. You have all your centers signed up for a series of trials, all your data collection systems in place, your ethics approvals set, and everything ready. You move from one drug to the next. We had several of these platform trials running worldwide. As a result, we quickly identified three treatments that work for non-severe COVID-19 and three classes of treatments that work for severe COVID-19. That all happened rapidly. So, that was one big success.

The next step was quickly synthesizing the evidence from these trials. Up to 20 trials were published weekly at the height of the pandemic. Two major groups, including one at McMaster University, set up large operations to process this data. We had the resources to do this because many high-level grad students and junior faculty could handle the volume. We established this operation to process the 20 weekly trials, produce analyses, and identify what treatments worked and what didn’t.

We also incorporated network meta-analyses, which I referred to earlier, that allow for simultaneous comparisons of multiple treatments. So, instead of comparing Treatment A to a placebo or no treatment, you can compare A to B, C, D, E, and F and B to C, D, and so on. We weren’t just synthesizing data from these trials; we were conducting network meta-analyses.

The next step was to incorporate the evidence into the guidelines quickly. We streamlined the process of developing guidelines, building on work we’d already done. I’ve worked extensively with the World Health Organization on developing COVID-19 guidelines. We managed to accelerate the entire process.

We could quickly produce evidence from randomized trials, synthesize it into systematic reviews, and develop trustworthy guidelines to help clinicians manage their patients. That was a big success.

There were limitations, particularly in the public health sector. Public health responses were only sometimes managed as well as they could have been from an evidence-based perspective. One mistake that stands out is the failure to acknowledge uncertainty in decisions.

For instance, policies often shifted without explaining the reasoning: “Do this, now do that. Oh, no, do the opposite.” One significant error, in hindsight, was closing schools. It became apparent relatively early that children were at low risk. Yet, schools were closed, causing significant harm, particularly to vulnerable and disadvantaged low-income families. The cost of this decision was huge.

The question is, how could that decision have been made better? Acknowledging the uncertainty upfront helped. 

Jacobsen: When did you first start writing for newspapers?

Guyatt: Oh, God. About 25 years ago—maybe 20 years. I’d have to check. It’s been long enough that I’ve forgotten exactly when I started.

Jacobsen: You tweeted or posted about avoiding paragraphs longer than three sentences on X. Why that specific length?

Guyatt: When I started writing for newspapers, I realized I needed to adjust my writing style. I had been reading newspapers all my life, but I hadn’t noticed how they were written. I decided to analyze what makes good newspaper writing. I was shocked that most newspaper paragraphs are only one or two sentences long. Occasionally, they’ll have paragraphs with three sentences, but that’s about it.

I thought, “Whoa, if I’m going to write well for newspapers, I must follow this style.” So, I started writing paragraphs that were at most three sentences, often just two and sometimes even one. Then, I realized that if this approach makes writing clearer in newspapers, it might also work in scientific articles. And, in my experience, it does.

It does make things clearer in scientific articles. That evolution of my writing significantly affected how I approach scientific writing. 

Jacobsen: Do you have any tips for individuals who want to write about science but don’t need a background in it? I’m thinking of journalists and others, such as poets or writers, who want to express scientific ideas.

Guyatt: Sure. I wrote a paper more than 20 years ago specifically addressing this issue—journalists writing about health. How can journalists do a good job writing about health? Assuming they’re already good writers—that’s another issue entirely, but let’s assume the writer is good—one major problem health journalists face is that scientific findings are often oversold.

A good health journalist will repeatedly caution, “There’s much hype around this, but it’s probably oversold. Let’s be careful and wait for more evidence.” The problem is, this doesn’t make it into the newspaper. The editor will likely say, “Boring, boring, boring. Give me something exciting.” So there’s this huge incentive to declare, “Great breakthrough!” because that will make the article newsworthy. But if you write, “This isn’t such a great breakthrough,” the article often gets ignored.

It’s a tough position for health journalists, but if you want to do a good job, you must emphasize skepticism. One piece of advice: when there’s a purported breakthrough, don’t talk exclusively to the person who made the discovery. Talk to other experts in the field and see what they think about this so-called breakthrough.

And if you do talk to the discoverer, be aware of their inherent conflict of interest. They have every incentive to make people believe they made a significant breakthrough—they want invitations to speak worldwide, recognition, and more research opportunities. There’s a natural incentive to oversell the discovery. Also, follow the money. Who funded the research? Often, it’s a drug company with a vested interest in promoting the findings. There are multiple incentives to oversell.

Jacobsen: The last time we spoke, you mentioned a colleague working on something related to stroke risk. You said he might have found a way to reduce that risk. Was it Devereaux?

Guyatt: Yes, that’s right. Devereaux has done incredible work, but it focuses more on preventing complications after surgery. Specifically, he’s shown that low doses of anticoagulants can prevent cardiovascular events, including heart attacks and strokes, after surgery. That’s probably what you’re referring to.

Jacobsen: What kind of risk reduction are we talking about?

Guyatt: I don’t know off the top of my head, but it’s around a 30% relative risk reduction.

Jacobsen: There’s been much discussion about losing trust in vaccines. What do you think are the causes and costs of that?

Guyatt: One of the things I’ve learned as an evidence-based practitioner is to quickly identify when I don’t know the evidence on a particular question. I avoid launching into speculative answers. I’m not a sociologist, and I don’t know which branch of social science would be best suited to address your question. I could speculate, but I wouldn’t be better at it than anyone else.

Jacobsen: That’s a fair point. You’ve made similar points in some of your posts. You’ve mentioned that when we receive criticism, we immediately get defensive. What is a more constructive response to that, rather than feeling threatened?

Guyatt: Well, the first thing I do is label it red alert. I’m feeling defensive and likely to respond in a sub-optimal way. Generally, the optimal way to respond is to say, “You may have a point.” Someone is pointing out a possible limitation in your work, so the first step is acknowledging that.

If you’re feeling defensive, it’s often a sign that the person has a valid point. So, you acknowledge it and say, “This doesn’t mean that everything I’ve put forth is fundamentally flawed, but it almost certainly means there are some limitations.” Considering those limitations and recognizing that your defensive feelings likely mean the other person has a point is a better way to handle the situation. Quickly acknowledging when someone has a point—even if it’s one I’d prefer not to admit—has been helpful.

Jacobsen: When we discussed red meat studies, we touched on some evidence that countered traditional health guidelines, specifically relative risks. Hypothetically, suppose someone wants to live the longest, healthiest life using evidence-based medicine. What tend to be the things most supportive of those goals and values?

Guyatt: Don’t smoke! The number one thing is: if you’re a smoker, stop. If you’ve never started, don’t. That’s the most impactful step for a long and healthy life.

After that, we’re talking about lifestyle factors. The evidence for dietary recommendations is limited. The Mediterranean and low-fat diets may increase lifespan, but the evidence isn’t robust. It’s not conclusive, but it’s still worth paying attention to.

Exercise seems like a good idea, but the evidence could be better. While it’s generally beneficial, I can tell you from personal experiences—such as my biking accidents—that it can also lead to injuries. I even had a subdural hematoma once. So, while I might have said, “Exercise probably won’t hurt you,” it depends on the type of exercise you choose. It certainly can hurt you.

Jacobsen: Outside of that, is there evidence in general to pick your parents well?

Guyatt: Absolutely, yes. 

Jacobsen: What’s your general assessment of the current landscape of popular health reporting? As a non-expert journalist, has there been improvement, or are things largely the same?

Guyatt: I have yet to focus much on critically reading popular health articles, so I’m not well-equipped to answer that in detail. However, as mentioned earlier, health journalists face a very difficult position. There’s a demand for bold, eye-catching statements, even when the evidence doesn’t necessarily support them. The challenge of balancing evidence with the need for sensational headlines remains unsolved.

Jacobsen: If we take a generalized approach to evidence-based evaluation, how do standardized tests compare to high school grades in predicting academic success?

Guyatt: Completely outside of my expertise. 

Jacobsen: Are there any other lessons from COVID?

Guyatt: One thing I should have mentioned earlier about the success of evidence-based Medicine during COVID-19 was how we handled journal publications. Traditionally, from the time you submit your paper to the time it’s published, months go by. And if you talked about your findings beforehand, top journals would refuse to publish your work because they wanted the scoop.

During COVID, it became clear that this was completely irresponsible. Journals softened their stance and allowed pre-publications or preprints to circulate, which helped get critical findings out quickly. However, now that the crisis has passed, we’re seeing a return to the old ways. Even though important findings should be published quickly, they don’t get out as quickly as they should.  

There were all these pre-publications. Before, when you did a pre-publication, the journals would say, “No way.” Thank God they did in these situations. The problem was that money was not available to do the research. But as soon, things were back to the way they were before. We have not lost everything but temporarily lost everything during COVID.

Jacobsen: Who are the main academic opponents of evidence-based medicine and the GRADE approach? I may be framing it improperly, too.

Guyatt: There is slower uptake in certain areas. The opposition has gone underground because everyone calls themselves “evidence-based.” “Evidence-based” is evidence-based without necessarily being evidence-based in how we think about it. There are mutterings here and there, but what used to be the fundamental challenge is not there anymore. 

There are areas of slower uptake. Concerning GRADE, the oncology community needs to be faster. That one occurs to me. So, it is not opposition. It is a limited uptake, with more enthusiastic uptake in some areas than others. 

Jacobsen: How do you see sloganeering as a problem in reporting on evidence-based medicine? So I can clarify. You were noting how evidence-based this and evidence-based that is. The way you’re saying that I sense a certain way in which public reportage on evidence-based medicine or people wanting to use the phrase “evidence-based medicine” because of its weight can lead to misunderstandings. Not only about how it is done but also about what it truly means to be appropriately evidence-based. 

Guyatt: The biggest limitation getting on for 25 years, we’ve been making a big fuss that a central core of EBM is that evidence doesn’t tell you by itself what you do, but only if it is evidence in the context of patient preferences and values. Yet, people still have trouble grasping that. They think evidence-based medicine is all about randomized trials, but it’s not. It’s about finding the best available evidence to inform a decision one is facing. People have difficulty getting that, as well.

Jacobsen: Are there areas of medicine where “GOBSAT” (Good Old Boys Sitting Around a Table) is still a methodology?

Guyatt: I need to be made aware of any surveys on this, but there are areas where it’s still likely to occur, particularly in situations where high-quality evidence is unavailable or unlikely to emerge. For example, I have gone to meetings for rare diseases. Understandably, you have kids with terrible genetic diseases. Their lives have function going down. Something comes up. “We cannot wait to find out whether it works. You have to save the kid now.” This reaction is completelyunderstandable from an emotional standpoint but presents challenges from a scientific perspective.

But if someone says, “Our values and preferences are such that we’re ready to spend $1,000,000 a year,” that’s a serious consideration. They may spend that much money to give a child something that may have no beneficial effect and could cause harm. But if they value possible and unlikely improvement, then fine—let’s do it.

However, let’s keep the same rules to avoid acknowledging low-quality evidence. They don’t like calling it “low-quality evidence.” Let’s recognize that some things are simply more trustworthy than others. GRADE calls “low-quality evidence” untrustworthy, but they want to rename it.

For instance, the nutrition community has developed the NutriGRADE approach. Essentially, they say, “What you guys call low-quality evidence, we consider good evidence.” I understand their position and am sympathetic to their dilemma, but it’s still problematic.

Jacobsen: That reminds me of something we discussed in a previous interview that is worth re-emphasizing: fraud in the medical community. While it does happen, it doesn’t happen that frequently. For the most part, when fraud occurs, it gets caught, and they are penalized. This seems to be true for academia as a whole, too. What are the key points to emphasize regarding fraud in the medical community?

Guyatt: I can’t think of anything specific at the moment. What exactly are you asking about?

Jacobsen: I’m asking about the skepticism some people might have regarding the prevalence of fraud in the medical community. You’ve mentioned before that fraud is rare and usually gets caught. Can you elaborate on that?

Guyatt: Ah, now I see what you’re getting at. Yes, I believe fraud in the medical community doesn’t happen very often. When it does, it generally gets caught. It might happen more frequently than I used to think, but still, it’s uncommon.

After digging deeper, I found that there have been cases where people have uncovered more instances of fraud than expected. However, these are usually low-impact studies that need more attention. If someone commits fraud in an area that few people care about, it’s less likely that anyone will put in the effort to expose it.

Large-scale fraud that significantly impacts medical practice or research is rare. It is also unusual for fraud to lead to changes in major medical protocols or treatments.

Jacobsen: You mentioned the NutriGRADE approach earlier. Could you expand on that?

Guyatt: The NutriGRADE approach is used in nutrition and ranks evidence differently than in GRADE. They’re more willing to consider certain kinds of evidence “good” that we would label as low-quality. This creates challenges, as their system doesn’t align with how we assess the reliability of evidence. Still, it reflects the different values and needs within their field.

Jacobsen: What is NutriGRADE?

Guyatt: I only know some of the details, but it was developed about a decade ago or so. Essentially, they say, “We’re going to move the goalposts.” For example, these observational studies that GRADE would classify as low-quality evidence, NutriGRADE calls moderate-quality evidence. They claim that their nutrition studies produce more trustworthy evidence than GRADE suggests.

Jacobsen: Would you consider NutriGRADE reliable at all?

Guyatt: When you use the word “reliable,” it has a specific technical meaning for me as a methodologist. But if you mean in a broader sense—whether it’s trustworthy—here’s how I’d explain it. Let’s say you have two identical bodies of evidence. They are the same regarding how the studies were conducted, and the inferences you draw from them are identical.

Now, in one case, you could conduct a randomized trial. On the other hand, it’s impossible to conduct one. Are these two bodies of evidence equally trustworthy? The people who can’t conduct randomized trials might say, “Yes, let’s consider this more trustworthy since we’ll never have a trial.” But that’s not a tenable position. If the evidence is identical, it should be treated the same, whether or not a trial is feasible.

Jacobsen: You are a fan of acronyms. What is MAGIC, or the Making GRADE the Irresistible Choice initiative?

Guyatt: MAGIC is a group I’m involved with, and it’s focused on improving what we call the “evidence ecosystem.” An evidence ecosystem involves several steps: basic science informs observational studies, which inform randomized trials. Then, randomized trials inform systematic reviews, and systematic reviews inform guidelines. These guidelines then inform dissemination strategies to get evidence-based information out to clinicians and patients. It’s all about making the flow of evidence more efficient and actionable.

MAGIC’s role is to improve this evidence ecosystem. For example, during the pandemic, MAGIC helped enhance the system by establishing a collaboration with The BMJ for what we call “BMJ Rapid Recommendations.” We scan the literature for new, practice-changing evidence, quickly conduct systematic reviews, assemble a guideline panel, and produce trustworthy guidelines. These are then rapidly published in The BMJ.

During COVID-19, having already built this collaboration with The BMJ and the World Health Organization (WHO), MAGIC brokered a further collaboration between The BMJ and WHO. We served as consultants and partners with WHO to make sure the evidence ecosystem worked as efficiently as possible, especially when rapid decision-making was crucial.

At McMaster, we were one of the groups involved in a living network meta-analysis, where we processed all these trials to gather the necessary evidence. This evidence informed the World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines. So, while we didn’t create the evidence from the trials, we summarized it and brought it to the WHO, saying, “Here’s the latest evidence.”

We also acted as methodologists, helping the guideline panels move from evidence to recommendations. The day WHO publishes its recommendations, they’re also published in The BMJ. This way, the guidelines reach two different audiences simultaneously. WHO’s audience includes decision-makers, particularly in low-income countries, and The BMJ reaches a clinical audience. It was the first time this type of coordinated publication had been done.

This was MAGIC fulfilling its mission: processing evidence quickly, feeding that evidence into a trustworthy guideline process, producing trustworthy guidelines as fast as possible, and then disseminating the information effectively.

Jacobsen: I saw a tweet from September 25, 2023, that said, “Every high-income country with universal public healthcare has universal public prescription drug coverage, except Canada. It is time to change that with a public pharmacare program.” Does that sound correct?

Guyatt: You’re quoting me! We should have a universal pharmacy coverage system. However, claiming that every other country has universal coverage might stretch the truth, but it makes a political point. The gist is accurate: Canada is one of the few high-income countries without universal prescription drug coverage.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on that?

Guyatt: It’s true that in Europe, for example, well over 50% of drug payments are publicly funded, while in Canada, a large portion—over 50%—comes out of people’s pockets. In some European countries, it’s as high as 60-70% publicly funded. Canada did something odd—we decided to pay for doctors and hospitals. Still, we didn’t include prescription drugs in our universal healthcare system. Other countries have a more balanced approach to covering healthcare costs.

Jacobsen: Why did Canada take that approach? Was there a historical reason?

Guyatt: It goes back to the 1960s, to Tommy Douglas in Saskatchewan. The initial idea was to include drugs in the healthcare system, but it was something the government said they would get around to. They never did.

Jacobsen: Which European countries that offer universal prescription drug coverage are the most efficient in terms of cost and efficacy of outcomes?

Guyatt: My knowledge here is somewhat superficial, but I haven’t seen a single “role model” system that Canada could copy exactly. Some countries do certain things better, while others excel in different areas. It’s not as straightforward as saying one system is the most efficient overall.

Whether one system works better depends on local culture or specific policies. I’m unclear about which factors are most important.

Jacobsen: Speculative question: What gaps in the GRADE approach or evidence-based medicine could theoretically be addressed in the future, either as a new methodology or something outside its current scope?

Guyatt: I need help identifying any major gaps in GRADE, but we still face big challenges in efficient shared decision-making. Clinicians worldwide are time-constrained, and figuring out how to implement shared decision-making optimally remains a challenge.

Jacobsen: Could you break that down for those who might not be familiar with the concept?

Guyatt: Sure. One example we often use involves atrial fibrillation, an abnormal heart rhythm that significantly increases the risk of stroke. We have anticoagulants that reduce the risk of stroke but also increase the risk of serious bleeding. How do you present this information to patients so they can make informed trade-offs? It’s a delicate balance. Another example is breast cancer screening—if women fully understood both the magnitude of the benefits and the downsides, many would likely say “no thanks” to screening. But we don’t always present these choices in a way that helps people fully understand what they’re deciding.

Jacobsen: Could future systems, like large language models, help make this information more accessible?

Guyatt: Large language models won’t solve this issue. We still need to improve how we present the information. The key is conducting randomized trials on different methods of presenting choices to patients, but it takes work.

Jacobsen: Gordon, thank you again for your time, sir. I appreciate it.

Guyatt: Oh, are we finished? That’ll give me a few minutes to say hello to the person who just came into the room—my 101-year-old stepmother.

Jacobsen: Take care. Bye for now.

Guyatt: You too. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Nathan Givoni & Simon Szewach on Gelteq

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/03

Nathan Givoni is the Chief Executive Officer and cofounder of Gelteq. He is a trusted health and wellness professional and qualified dietitian with over 15 years of experience. He founded (and later sold) Lifestyle Breakthrough, a medical and allied health consulting company with locations across Australia. He has launched and continues to support a not-for-profit health promotion charity, the Metabolic Health Foundation, to help address the growing epidemic of metabolic-related conditions in Australia. He earned a Bachelor of Science in Physiology & Psychology, First Class Honors in Physiology, and a Bachelor of Nutrition and Dietetics from Monash University. Nathan has worked as an adjunct lecturer at Monash University and has published multiple papers after his undergraduate degree.

Simon Szewach is the co-founder and Executive Chairman of Gelteq, a global biotechnology company specializing in formulating, developing, and manufacturing an innovative and new ingestible gel technology. He has successfully launched new product trends in the finance, health, technology, and sports sectors with companies such as nTouch Pty Ltd, a proximity-based marketing platform, and StartHere.com.au, an incentive-based shopping platform. Simon is also the co-founder and Director of the Sports Diplomacy Alliance and holds a Bachelor of Business in Banking & Finance and a Bachelor of Arts in Asian Studies (Korean) from Monash University in Australia.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Nathan Givoni and Simon Szewach, cofounders of Geltech, and its Chief Executive Officer and Executive Chairman, respectively.

To start, the reason for founding this company relates to some people’s problems with something as simple as swallowing a pill. Difficulty with this is called dysphagia. How significant is this issue? How prevalent is it? And what came to mind when you noticed the need for a solution?

Givoni & Szewach: Globally, nearly 800 million people struggle with swallowing. About 600 million are adults, and a couple hundred million are children.

We see this as a crucial issue for those with trouble swallowing standard medications, whether pills, capsules, gummies, or similar. If people can’t take their medications to manage medical conditions or even take nutritional supplements, they will struggle to maintain their health. It is essential to provide a solution that allows them to improve and maintain their health. This issue affects older adults as well, as dysphagia can arise from various medical conditions, including those treated with radiotherapy for cancer. So, there is a wide range of causes.

For us, it’s about addressing a much larger market than most people realize and ensuring it’s well-served.

Jacobsen: What is the basic science behind this drug delivery system to overcome dysphagia?

Givoni & Szewach: We’ve developed a gel-based product that can be delivered through a pouch with a nozzle. Essentially, it’s a thickened liquid designed to deliver nutrients or medications. We offer a range of textures, specifically varying thicknesses, which meet the dysphagia criteria. There’s a standard called IDDSI (International Dysphagia Diet Standardisation Initiative), which sets thickness levels appropriate for people with dysphagia based on their assessments. We have developed a gel base that meets each of these levels.

The core of the technology is creating a uniform, consistent thickness and a gel matrix that can stably hold nutrients. Additionally, we can modulate the taste of ingredients to make them more pleasant. Many medications or nutritional products can taste unpleasant when converted to a liquid or gummy form. We work on taste modulation and masking to improve the user’s experience.

Jacobsen: How do you make this palatable for animal medications?

Givoni & Szewach: It’s easier for them to consume animal medications because you can’t just feed an animal medication directly — you don’t want to get bitten in the process! We flavour the product with animal palatants to make it something they enjoy consuming. We might use flavours like chicken, beef, or fish, depending on the need.

We keep the dose small and manageable. It can either be squeezed directly into the animal’s mouth, making it easy to administer or used as a food topper. Whatever the preference of the person or the animal, we provide options to work through the medication or nutritional space.

Jacobsen: Regarding flavour modulation, do you conduct human trials to determine the top five flavours people like? Does that help bring a concept to market more easily?

Givoni & Szewach: We rely heavily on anecdotal evidence and existing trials related to regional flavour preferences. Rather than being too specific, we collaborate with customers from different regions worldwide and tailor the flavours accordingly. For example, Asia might prefer flavour profiles different from those of the United States. We try to match flavours to regional tastes and preferences.

Jacobsen: What are some of the popular flavours?

Givoni & Szewach: Common flavors include orange and apple. Depending on the product, you also have berry flavours like strawberry or blueberry. Some people associate certain flavours with health benefits. For example, blueberries are linked to cognitive health, so people prefer that association with certain products. More exotic fruits and coconut-based flavours might be popular in regions like the Middle East.

Jacobsen: How do you ensure the stability of the nutrients in the gel and prevent them from degrading over time?

Givoni & Szewach: We conduct rigorous stability testing to ensure the nutrients remain stable and effective for at least a two-year shelf life. The gel matrix is designed to protect the nutrients by preventing exposure to air, which helps avoid oxidation and ensures the ingredients don’t degrade over time.

Jacobsen: Are there differences between fat-soluble vitamins and minerals versus water-soluble ones when it comes to preserving their stability in the gel?

Givoni & Szewach: Yes, there are differences. Our base formula has variations, which are protected by our intellectual property (IP), allowing us to accommodate water- and oil-soluble ingredients. The formulation for water-based ingredients is slightly different from oil-based ones to maintain the required stability.

We can combine water- and oil-soluble ingredients in one product or keep them separate in different products. We adjust the gel matrix accordingly to accommodate each.

Jacobsen: How do you develop partnerships to scale this up and help the 630 million adults and 100 million children who have difficulties swallowing pills?

Givoni & Szewach: That’s a great question. We work with several B2B customers who may already offer different solutions, such as pills, powders, or tablets. We aim to partner with them to introduce an innovative delivery system for their customers. Many people who couldn’t take pills or powders now have access to a solution. It’s a B2B solution from our end.

Jacobsen: What barriers and hurdles have you encountered, and what do you anticipate as you develop the technology further and expand the business?

Givoni & Szewach: The main barrier is that it’s still a new delivery system. Traditionally, pills, powders, tablets, and pastes have been around long, so people sometimes associate gels with pastes. Pastes can have negative side effects, like getting stuck on the tongue and requiring water afterward. Our solution is much more hydro-based, so you don’t need to take anything after it. The challenge is getting people to adopt this new solution, which not everyone has tried before.

Jacobsen: So, you’re pointing to more of a cultural and social barrier, where people are used to taking pills?

Givoni & Szewach: Yes, absolutely. However, once people try the gel solution, they tend to have a much better experience than other delivery methods and almost enjoy their treatments.

Jacobsen: Are there countries where there isn’t a strong culture of taking pills or capsules and where gels might be more easily accepted because there isn’t a preexisting barrier?

Givoni & Szewach: It’s more common in ethnic communities, like in China with traditional Chinese medicine or Indian ethnic medicines, where they might have used other delivery methods that aren’t as tied to pills, powders, and capsules.

Jacobsen: Where are you looking to make the biggest impact on expansion in the 2020s? How are you planning to bring this delivery method to the mainstream market? Is it a regional product?

Givoni & Szewach: No, it’s both. From a regional perspective, we focus on North America and see significant growth for GelTech there in the next 12 months. We’re opening new offices on both the East and West Coasts. Asia-Pacific continues to be a major market for us, and we see that expanding. We’re also moving into the MENA region (Middle East & North Africa) and have early product rollouts in Australia.

As for the products themselves, over the next 12 to 24 months, we’re focusing on the nutraceutical space, looking at vitamins and tablets, and exploring different sports market opportunities.

Givoni & Szewach: We’ll roll out a range of sports-based products globally across different sports. Later, we’ll extend this to the animal space and eventually to the pharmaceutical space.

Jacobsen: Do different gels have the potential to be slow-release versus rapid-release, depending on the application? For example, someone in sports might need rapid release, while a regular consumer needs a daily dose of a particular vitamin.

Givoni & Szewach: Yes, absolutely. We customize the release mechanism based on the product’s purpose. If it needs to be slow-release, we ensure the base is suited for that. Conversely, we can adjust the formulation for rapid release, often used in the sports sector.

Jacobsen: What are potential future adaptations of this technology in a more advanced form?

Givoni & Szewach: The biggest area of future development is in the pharmaceutical space. We’re currently working on getting products through regulatory approval in different regions and continuing to adapt for various medications. We’re also exploring poly-pill options, which combine therapies, to ensure we can reach a much larger audience in the medication space.

Jacobsen: Are there any substances that cannot be taken in a stable gel form and would require a different methodology?

Givoni & Szewach: Some compounds, particularly those administered by injection — subcutaneously or into other regions — are only stable when injected. These substances are not currently a priority for oral dosage forms, so we haven’t tested them in a gel format. However, we may explore these options as we scale in the future.

Jacobsen: Personal question: How did the two of you meet?

Givoni & Szewach: Well, we met in Melbourne, Australia, through a mutual colleague. Nathan and I are from the same city and attended the same school, although we were a few years apart and didn’t know each other back then. Our colleague introduced us, and Nathan was working on a new gel delivery system. The rest, as they say, is history.

Jacobsen: Are there any other areas I still need to cover that should be mentioned for this particular product or technology?

Givoni & Szewach: No, you’ve covered most of the key areas related to the business. Your questions have allowed us to address everything important.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Simon and Nathan, thank you both very much for your time today.

Givoni & Szewach: Thank you, Scott. We appreciate the opportunity.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Yahya Ekhou on Human Rights Activism and Islam

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/02

 Yahya Ekhou is an author, human rights activist, and political campaigner from Mauritania. He holds a master’s degree in NGO Management. He is the founder and President of the Network of Liberals in Mauritania. Among his notable achievements is the 2017 Arab Youth Excellence Award, presented in Cairo, Egypt, by the League of Arab States and the Arab Youth Council. He frequently participates in international conferences.

His autobiography, *Freie Menschen kann man nicht zähmen* (Free People Cannot Be Tamed), was published in German on December 1, 2022.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What came first for you: the atheism or the need to freely express yourself?

Ekhou: As an author and human rights defender, my journey towards atheism and the need to express myself freely has been intertwined yet distinct in their origins and development.

The need to freely express myself came first. From a young age, I recognized the power of words and the importance of sharing my thoughts, experiences, and perspectives without fear of repression. Growing up, I saw how suppressing ideas and voices led to stagnation and injustice. This realization ignited a passion for defending the fundamental human right of freedom of expression. I believed, and still believe, that everyone should be free to voice their beliefs and challenge the status quo without facing persecution.

Atheism came later, after deep reflection and a quest for understanding. As I explored various religious beliefs and philosophies, I gravitated towards skepticism and a reliance on reason and empirical evidence. My commitment to human rights and freedom of expression further reinforced my atheism, as I encountered instances where dogmatic beliefs were used to justify the suppression of dissent and the violation of individual rights.

Thus, while the need to express myself freely was the initial spark, it was through this freedom that I came to embrace atheism. Both elements are now integral to my identity and work, reinforcing the other in my pursuit of a more just and open society.

Jacobsen: Is the idea of atheism as a mental deformity common in your upbringing?

Ekhou: I grew up in a society where the dominant narrative was tightly controlled, especially concerning matters of belief. Atheism was rarely spoken of openly, and when it was, it was often in the hushed tones of fear or derision. In the world of my childhood, atheism was framed not as a legitimate worldview but as a dangerous heresy, a “mental deformity,” as you put it. This wasn’t simply the view of religious authorities but embedded in the fabric of the state and society itself.

To challenge belief was seen as a challenge to the very order of things. People who questioned the existence of God were branded as broken, misguided, or even treasonous, as if doubt itself were a contagion to be stamped out. It wasn’t until much later when I had access to broader perspectives and was no longer under the yoke of authoritarian control, that I could reflect on the idea of atheism and, indeed, on faith itself as something deeply personal and complex, not simply a deformity of the mind.

In my case, atheism became a symbol of rebellion. In prison, stripped of my citizenship and my right to belong, I realized that the rejection of imposed belief was also the rejection of imposed identity. So, no, atheism was not common in my upbringing, but it became an expression of rebellion and freedom of thought.

Jacobsen: When you call atheism an instinct, do you mean it’s the default at birth and then religion imposes a theistic concept on it?

Ekhou: When I refer to atheism as an instinct, I am speaking less about it as a philosophical stance and more about a fundamental state of being an absence of belief, a natural default, if you will. Yes, at birth, before language and dogma mould us, we begin with curiosity, a sense of wonder at the world, and a complete lack of imposed narratives.

Only later, through the hands of family, society, and institutions, we are shaped into believers. Like all beliefs, theistic concepts require instruction and ritual to take root. They require repetition, reinforcement, sometimes fear and often love. Without this, I believe we remain in a state of openness, not yet grasping for the answers religion provides.

In this way, atheism or, perhaps more accurately, non-theism, feels like the default setting of human consciousness. It’s not a rejection but an unformed question, an instinctual skepticism that exists before the imposition of structured belief. Religion, while offering answers, can often smother that original curiosity under layers of doctrine.

In exile, I’ve had the chance to reflect on what we are born with versus what we are taught. Religion is powerful, no doubt, but it must be fed constantly. It must be nurtured by the systems that propagate it. Without those systems, the instinct of atheism of questioning, of not knowing, quickly returns.

Jacobsen: What was the overwhelming bad that influenced the decision to leave it?

Ekhou: Leaving Islam was not a decision I made lightly. It was not born of a single moment of doubt but rather the accumulation of years of lived experiences, intellectual struggle, and, most of all, the overwhelming clash between the values I cherished and the oppressive interpretations of religion that dominated my society.

One of the most glaring influences on my decision was the way Islam, at least as it was practiced and enforced by those in power, became an instrument of control. I witnessed firsthand how religious authorities, often hand in hand with the state, used faith to justify repression. The language of morality and divine will was twisted to silence dissent, criminalize free thought, and dehumanize those who did not fit into their rigid mould. My imprisonment and eventual exile were not simply personal tragedies; they were manifestations of a broader system that wielded religion as a weapon against individual freedom.

Then, there was the treatment of women, minorities, and anyone who dared to live outside the bounds of prescribed norms. I could not reconcile the concept of a just, merciful God with the brutality I saw in the application of laws that relegated women to second-class status, marginalized those of different faiths or beliefs, and suppressed personal freedom in the name of religious purity. The Qur’an speaks of justice, yet in practice, the power structures seemed built on inequality, sanctioned by religious doctrine.

Another overwhelming influence was the intellectual stagnation I experienced within the religious framework. Questions about the nature of God, the contradictions in religious texts, and the moral complexities of the modern world were met not with open discussion but with dogma. The insistence on blind faith and the rejection of inquiry felt suffocating. I came to believe that Islam, at least as it was interpreted in my homeland, was not a space where genuine intellectual freedom could flourish. The more I questioned, the more I was punished, not just physically but socially, emotionally, and spiritually.

Finally, there was personal disillusionment with the idea that belief alone could provide meaning or salvation. The rituals, prayers, and obligations began to feel hollow when the core values of compassion, justice, and humanity were lost beneath layers of rigid dogma. Faith, in theory, is meant to elevate the human spirit. Still, in my experience, it became a cage, one I had to escape to preserve my own identity, my sense of self and my commitment to the values I hold dear.

Jacobsen: How were you asked not to ask questions about Islam?

Ekhou: I remember well the first time I was told not to ask questions about Islam. It wasn’t a moment of explanation or gentle guidance but a harsh rebuke, much like the one you describe. I had asked something seemingly innocent at the time: why, if God was all-merciful, were people condemned to eternal punishment in hell? It seemed a natural question to me, a child grappling with justice and mercy. But the response I received was far from reassuring. The Imam narrowed his eyes, his voice sharp as he told me, *”You are not to question the will of God. Just pray and follow the rules, or you will lose your way.”*

I was stunned, silenced, but not satisfied. At that moment, I realized that the space for questioning was unwelcome and forbidden. I was told that my role was to submit, not think. I began to sense that faith, in its standardized form, was more about obedience than understanding.

That was the beginning of my own search for answers. But instead of finding clarity in religious texts, I found contradictions. I wrestled with the very questions you raised. Does religion unite us or divide us? The Qur’an speaks of unity, of the brotherhood of believers, but this unity was contingent upon belief, upon submission. It became clear that this so-called unity came at the cost of excluding anyone who did not conform. For the non-believers and those who questioned, there was no place but literal or spiritual exile.

As I delved deeper, I found that the division between “believer” and “infidel” was not just a theoretical concept but a weapon. It justified the marginalization of those who did not fit the mould. It allowed the powerful to maintain control over the masses, using religion as a tool to divide the world into *us* and *them*. The idea that religion unites us felt like a hollow promise, one that rang false in the face of the real-world divisions I saw growing around me.

The more I searched for answers, the more I encountered resistance from religious authorities and the very structure of belief itself. In its institutional form, Islam demanded faith without question and loyalty without thought. And for someone like me, whose instinct was to ask, explore, and challenge, it became increasingly clear that I would never find peace in a system that punished curiosity.

I was not looking to reject faith outright; I was searching for meaning, for a truth that felt just. But every time I asked, I was met with fear of doubt, fear of uncertainty, fear of freedom. And so, like you, I embarked on a journey that led me away from the certainty of religion and into the vast unknown, where questions are not only allowed but necessary for growth.

Jacobsen: How did you find information in a context in which freedom of informational access

was it more limited?

Ekhou: Accessing information in a tightly controlled society is not just a challenge; it’s an act of resistance. When the state, religious authorities, and even cultural norms conspire to restrict your mind, every question becomes a rebellion, every book an escape route. Like you, I searched for answers in an environment that allowed only a narrow range of acceptable thoughts.

As much as it promised access to the world’s knowledge, the internet was heavily censored where I lived. Sites critical of religion were blocked, and even attempts to search for secular or alternative viewpoints could mark you as suspicious. Libraries, too, were curated to reflect a certain ideological purity. It often felt like I was surrounded by walls built to keep minds from wandering too far from the sanctioned path.

Yet, like you, I managed to find cracks in those walls. My discovery of the Mu’tazila — a rationalist school of thought in Islamic history — was a revelation. Their belief in reason, in the idea that God’s justice must be rational and understandable, starkly contrasted to the blind obedience demanded by the religious authorities around me. Tracking down their writings wasn’t easy. I found scraps and pieces of their philosophy in old texts or obscure online forums. It was as if these ideas, though buried and forgotten by mainstream Islam, had survived in the shadows, waiting for seekers like us to rediscover them.

The Mu’tazilah’s belief that humans have free will and that morality must be rooted in reason rather than fear resonated deeply with me. Their rejection of fatalism — of the idea that everything is predestined and unquestionable — was something I had long felt but had never been able to articulate. These were the first seeds of doubt that began to take root in my mind, and I knew then that there were other ways to approach faith, morality, and the world.

But it wasn’t until a friend studying abroad sent me a USB drive with a PDF of *The God Delusion* by Richard Dawkins that my intellectual world truly opened up. Dawkins’ work gave me language for my doubts, language that I hadn’t been able to find in my restricted environment. The idea that belief in God could be questioned scientifically, that religion wasn’t beyond critique, was both liberating and terrifying. In *The God Delusion*, I found answers and permission to ask questions I had been afraid to ask for so long.

That USB drive was a lifeline, a connection to a world of thought I had been cut off. It reminded me that, despite the censorship and restrictions, knowledge finds a way to flow. Friends studying abroad, underground networks, VPNs, and even whispers of forbidden books — all of these became part of my journey toward intellectual freedom.

Censorship can control access to information but cannot fully control the human desire for understanding. In the end, that desire drove me to seek out alternative ideas, to push past the walls that had been built around me. I found the tools I needed to free my mind in the writings of the Mu’tazila and in the works of thinkers like Dawkins. But more than that, I found a sense of community with those who, like us, dared to ask questions in societies that forbid them.

Jacobsen: Are there any moves to change Article 5 and Article 306 in the Mauritanian Penal Code?

Ekhou: As of now, any significant moves to change Article 5 and Article 306 in the Mauritanian Penal Code still need to be completed, though there are rumblings of discontent from civil society and human rights organizations. These articles are among the most controversial in the country, especially for those of us who have experienced firsthand the heavy hand of the state when it uses religion as a tool for punishment and control.

Article 306, in particular, which prescribes death for apostasy and harsh punishments for blasphemy, stands as a stark symbol of the fusion between religious doctrine and state power. I was imprisoned under the shadow of such laws, stripped of my citizenship for speaking out and questioning the very foundations of a system that criminalizes free thought and dissent. In a country where these laws are seen as immutable reflections of Sharia, any effort to reform or remove them is met with resistance not just from the government but from powerful religious authorities who guard their influence over the social and legal fabric of Mauritania.

Article 5, which solidifies Islam as the foundation of law in Mauritania, is another barrier to change. It is enshrined in the constitution, and any suggestion of altering it is treated as a direct attack on the nation’s identity. It’s important to understand that religion is more than a personal matter; it is deeply intertwined with the state’s legitimacy in Mauritania. Questioning Article 5 is questioning the very framework of governance.

Despite this, brave voices within the country and in the diaspora continue to push for reform. Human rights groups, both local and international, have highlighted how these laws are used to silence dissent, stifle freedom of expression, and persecute individuals for their beliefs or lack thereof. Cases like that of Mohamed Cheikh Ould Mkhaitir, a young Mauritanian blogger sentenced to death under Article 306 for alleged blasphemy, have drawn international attention to the harshness of these laws and the urgent need for change. His eventual release after years in prison showed that, with enough pressure, cracks can appear in the otherwise rigid legal system.

But make no mistake, these efforts are met with fierce opposition. Any attempt to reform or challenge the religious underpinnings of the law is labelled as an affront to Islam, an attack on national identity. The government, fearing backlash from conservative elements within society, often walks a tightrope between appeasing religious leaders and maintaining its international image.

It is frustrating and heartbreaking for those of us in exile to watch this slow, often stagnant process. Article 5 and Article 306 are not just legal provisions. They are symbols of a deeper struggle between modernity and tradition, between human rights and theocratic control.

Jacobsen: What was the script of the fatwa to kill you?

Ekhou: The fatwa calling for my death arrived like a hammer blow, though in many ways, I had long anticipated it. When you live in a society where dissent is met with fury and where the fusion of state and religion gives clerics the power to condemn with divine authority, you know that every word and every act of defiance brings you closer to that moment.

The script of the fatwa was chilling in its simplicity and finality. It was written in the language of religious law, but the intent was unmistakably political. It declared that I had “committed acts of apostasy” by questioning the divine law and “spreading ideas contrary to Islam,” which, in their eyes, amounted to nothing less than blasphemy. It stated that I had “publicly rejected the faith” and was guilty of promoting “ideas of atheism and secularism” that posed a threat to the moral fabric of the nation. My writings, they claimed, led people away from God, and for that, there was only one prescribed punishment: death.

The fatwa was not issued by a lone cleric. It bore the weight of religious authority, signed by multiple high-ranking figures in the country’s religious council. These men, many of whom I had once respected in my youth, now saw fit to mark me for death. The language was cold and calculated. I was stripped of my humanity in their eyes, reduced to a symbol of heresy, a danger to be eradicated.

What was most painful was not just the death sentence itself, though, of course, that was terrifying. It was the realization that I had been so thoroughly dehumanized that my execution was presented as a pious act, an obligation. I no longer had a family, story, or dreams. It was a problem to be solved.

The fatwa comes after demonstrations demanding my killing and accusations of blasphemy. My writings, activism, and insistence on questioning the fusion of religion and state had long made me a target. But seeing it written out in such stark, unambiguous terms that my life was forfeit, that my death was not only justified but necessary, was a moment of profound reckoning.

But here’s the thing: while that fatwa called for my silence, it did the opposite. It made me more determined than ever to keep speaking, writing, and fighting. They wanted to snuff out my voice, to erase my existence as if it would somehow preserve their fragile hold on power. But words, once spoken, cannot be taken back. And even under the threat of death, I will not let them have the last word.

Jacobsen: What was the feeling when your Mauritanian citizenship was revoked?

Ekhou: The day my Mauritanian citizenship was revoked, I felt a strange, suffocating mixture of anger and grief. It’s hard to describe the experience of being stripped of something fundamental to your identity, not just as a legal designation but as the place that shaped who you are. Citizenship is supposed to be a bond between you and your country, a recognition that no matter what, you belong. But in that moment, I realized the country I had fought for, the country I had hoped to help change, no longer considered me one of its own.

There was rage, too. Rage at the hypocrisy of a regime that claims to govern in the name of justice and faith but that punishes its own people for thinking, for questioning, for trying to bring about a better society. To revoke my citizenship wasn’t just a legal maneuver. It was an act of erasure. They wanted to make me invisible, to silence me not just physically but to erase my presence from the national consciousness. In their eyes, I was no longer Mauritanian, no longer entitled to the rights, protections, or even the recognition that comes with being part of a nation. They made it clear: I didn’t belong.

So, while it hurt deeply to lose my citizenship, it also marked the beginning of a new chapter in my life. No longer bound by the state that tried to control and silence me, I became freer in my activism and more resolute in my mission. They may have taken away my official identity as a Mauritanian. Still, they could not take away my voice, memories, or love for the people and the culture that remain deeply a part of who I am. In exile, I continue to speak out, to fight for the freedom of those who remain voiceless, because even without citizenship, I am still bound to the land and the people who shaped me.

Ultimately, they can revoke my citizenship, but they can never take away my identity. I will forever be the son of the desert.

Jacobsen: How can individuals or organizations contact you?

Ekhou: Individuals or organizations can contact me through my official email at: contact@yahyaekhou.com

Jacobsen: Again, thank you for the opportunity and time, Yahya.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Claudia Culley on the Petition for PIPS Dissolution

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/01

*Transcript edited for readability.*

Claudia Culley is a journalism and public relations student at Kwantlen Polytechnic University and the Editor-in-Chief of The Runner. She enjoys hiking, baking, and making pottery in her spare time. The Runner has faced a petition calling for several changes to its structure and function and even cessation of its existenceThe case has been covered by Mornings with SimiThe Runner (also here), the Vancouver Sun, and MSN. PIPS is the umbrella organization for Pulp MAG and The RunnerKwantlen Student Association: KSA is a non-profit organization incorporated under the Society Act, independent of Kwantlen Polytechnic University. This narrative begins with reportage on activities of the KSA by the staff of The Runner, with the public chapter beginning with a petition

The current Kwantlen Student Association[1] Executives:

KSA Executives

  • Yashanpreet Guron – President & Vice President of Student Life
  • Yugveer Gill – Vice President of University Affairs
  • Paramvir Singh – Vice President External Affairs
  • Simranjot Sekhon – Vice President Finance & Operations
  • Ishant Goyal – Associate President

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Claudia Culley. She’s the current editor-in-chief of The Runner. For a long time, I’ve always wondered why when Kwantlen means “tireless runner,” you would name it Kwantlen Runner, as in “The Tireless Runner” Runner, but there you go.

The Kwantlen Student Association (KSA) has a varied and intermittent history of financial, legal, and other controversies [Ed. As reported in The Langley TimesWe Are BC StudentsSurrey Now (also here), Richmond News (also here), PreziPeace Arch News (also here), Cloverdale ReporterThe RunnerThe Peak, the Vancouver SunThe Varsity, the ProvinceKwantlen ChronicleMaclean’s (also here), The Georgia Straight, and Link Newspaper, unfortunately]. The newest tensions—let’s not call it a clash—have arisen between the student newspaper and the student association at KPU. To step back and set the tone, what type of reporting was done before this arose?

Claudia Culley: Yes, earlier this year, we were reporting on pretty much everything the KSA was doing, mainly what they had been approving in council meetings. That is the basis of our reporting on the KSA—recounting everything in their council meetings. I’d almost describe it as an explanation of the meeting minutes before publication.

In that report earlier this year, our previous editor-in-chief, Abby Luciano, wrote a big feature story about how the KSA president at the time was banned from the Canadian Alliance of Student Associations (CASA) due to sexual harassment allegations [Ed. Former Kwantlen Student Association (KSA) President Abdullah Randhawa]. We published that story earlier this year. I also wrote a smaller feature story about the same president, who allegedly hired his friend as the executive director.

There were leaked email threads between the president and their legal counsel at the time, where the legal counsel essentially said, ‘You hired your friend as executive director, and we can’t stand by this. So we’ll no longer serve you as your legal counsel.’ That was another story we worked on earlier this year.

Besides that, much of our reporting comes from council meetings. The current council for the 2024 to 2025 term experienced much dysfunction when they started their term. Not everyone agreed with each other.

For example, it took them until the end of June to form an executive committee two months into their term. So, yes, we were reporting on that. Additionally, we reported on what they were spending money on.

[Ed. Articles of note here: “Letter to the editor: Addressing misrepresentation and defamation of the KSA,” “KSA president permanently banned from CASA due to sexual harassment allegation,” “KSA dismisses CRO during in-camera session, increases meal allowance at Grassroots Café,” “Club leaders raise concerns over working with KSA and former president,” “KSA council appoints executive committee, spends $20,000 on community service initiative,” “News Brief: KSA council fails to appoint executive committee for 5th time, approves $13,000 for ‘Lok Sewa’ event,” “Frustration rises as KSA council struggles to appoint committees,” and “Previous KSA president allegedly hired friend as executive director.”]

Jacobsen: So, boilerplate—it sounds like the regular, standard–and, having been on student council before–somewhat boring reporting indicates the general tone, content, and delivery of the student association’s meetings.

That’s good, as it should be—boilerplate and boring. As we all know, if something’s exciting, it’s typically not a good thing in a journalist’s life. Regarding the bylaws and The Runner, there’s currently a firm separation where members of the student association cannot be members of The Runner’s board. This separation allows for editorial independence, in my opinion. It is supported by bylaws that separate the student association from the student newspaper.

Has this ever been challenged before?

Culley: To my knowledge, no. It might have been, but I’m not aware of it. The petition we received called for bylaw 11 in the PIPS’ bylaws to be removed, allowing KSA councillors to be on PIPS’s board and work for The Runner or Pulp Mag

Jacobsen: If this is done, it seems to explicitly raise ethical issues around a conflict of interest if the student association is paying someone, is part of the student association, and is also part of the board of a student newspaper that reports on the student association. These types of situations, in my opinion, could not be viewed objectively at that point. You could still have objective reporting, but the overarching environment might show a pattern of conflict of interest, at least on paper, if not explicitly.

Culley: It would be a significant conflict of interest for any KPU or KSA elected official or representative because even at The Runner, when we hire staff, we check to ensure they have no conflicts of interest. Suppose any of our reporters are covering the KSA and are also heavily involved in it. In that case, that is a conflict of interest. Our newspaper would no longer be as independent as it currently is. We need full autonomy for our reporting to be completely truthful. I could see things being swayed in that case.

Jacobsen: You’ve received some support from journalism instructor Chad Skelton. He has voiced this in print. Have there been other notable faculty members or students who have expressed support for The Runner?

Culley: Yes, recently, I’ve had many people emailing me, both from within the journalism community and students, voicing their support for The Runner, which has been kind. I’ve seen much support, with personal emails being sent to me and online posts, like on Twitter (here). So that’s been nice.

Jacobsen: Another amendment is being proposed regarding limiting the time the media has in KSA meetings. So, let’s call this limited time. How would this affect the depth of reporting students might receive in the student newspaper?

Culley: The KSA wants to change their own bylaws to allow the media to only record the first five minutes if permitted to enter the meeting. Currently, when we attend KSA meetings, we record the entire thing. We have an audio recording of the full meeting. This audio recording is important to ensure our reporting is as factual as possible. We can go back, listen to the conversations, and quote people properly. It also provides proof that these events happened. So, if anyone questions something we wrote or something that was approved, we have physical evidence to prove it. Without an audio recording of the whole meeting, I’m sure we could still report accurately by taking notes and writing down what people say. But we wouldn’t have that evidence if students wanted to verify the truth or request proof. We would then have to rely on the minutes published by the KSA. So yes, it would affect our ability to prove what is true to students.

Jacobsen: Also, there’s a call to delete all mention of the Kwantlen Student Association in The Runner, in addition to the call for the dissolution of The Runner. So, what is your interpretation of this?

Culley: Yes, I was a little shocked by it. I don’t know what to make of it, to be honest. Though I don’t have proof of who was behind the petition, I’m assuming there are certain things we’ve published about the KSA that some people would like to see disappear. So, they’re aiming to get rid of that history. It would be tragic if all of our reporting, in general and specifically on the KSA, were removed and deleted. People need to be made aware of past activities with the KSA. 

Jacobsen: So, I’ve got a few more questions. I’m looking at some of the facts here. There’s also a call for extending executive terms from one to two years. So, two questions there: What does this raise about transparency and student representation when associate degrees and other programs can be one or two years, and bachelor’s degrees are four years? Students may be there quickly, so doubling the term length is a significant change. Also, you mentioned that some people in the KSA might like something other than what’s being written. Is there a dissenting opinion within the KSA about this recent call?

Culley: Yes. So, university students pursuing a diploma would have different opportunities to be part of the student council. I can see both sides of it. Having the council serve a two-year term makes sense because, most of the time, the elected representatives spend much of their term learning their roles and responsibilities. Two years makes sense to give them time to fully understand their position and how everything is structured, allowing them to do more good work as student representatives. However, it also takes away opportunities for other students to get involved and learn about the student association.

Another thing, as a student myself, is that I see the most awareness about the KSA being spread around campus during election periods because students are campaigning, and there are posters everywhere about the elections. So, there’s a lot of talk about the KSA during the general elections. I see how not having general elections every year, but every two years, could impact student awareness. The next general election would occur in 2027, allowing the current council to serve for three years. This might affect how much students know about the KSA because elections won’t happen yearly. Students will only have pop-up events, tabling events, or other resources to learn about the KSA instead of the annual general elections.

Jacobsen: And to be clear, to refresh my memory, PIPS runs the Runner PULP Mag. So, the bylaw changes would affect PIPS itself, which would, in turn, dissolve PULP Mag and The Runner simultaneously.

Culley: Yes, that’s right.

Jacobsen: So, this is a significant call from one petition. We have a change of term limits from one to two years. We have the dissolution of two major publications with a longer history at Kwantlen Polytechnic University. Also, there is a concern about a lack of editorial independence with KSA executives potentially being on the board of The Runner, as well as reduced transparency in KSA meetings where the media would have less time to be present. These issues raise a consistent concern about freedom of the press at the post-secondary level.

How would these bylaw changes also affect student rights and issues around transparency in funding? For instance, if an individual is on the KSA and The Runner or PIPS board, how would that affect transparency on financial issues? Would there also be a financial conflict of interest there?

Culley: Yes, that’s a good question. PIPS is funded by the university collecting the publication fee, which is then given to the KSA, which channels it to us. I see a situation where we might face some challenges receiving our funding if the PIPS board has KSA elected officials. Currently, our operations manager at PIPS and the board members ensure we receive our funding every semester in chunks. But I could see that potentially being affected.

Also, at The Runner and PULP, all contributing students receive compensation for the articles we publish. If we want to make changes regarding compensation, it needs to be approved by the board members. So, I could see changes with funding or decisions about who gets paid and how much, even though our operations manager oversees all of that. She handles all the payments. However, I believe the PIPS board members can remove the operations manager. So, that could be another issue—they could replace her with someone who might handle finances differently. I could see changes in how we’re funded and how we compensate our contributors. Right now, we pay everyone equally. 

Jacobsen: The PIPS contribution from KPU students is 75 cents per credit.

Culley: Yes.

Jacobsen: That’s a little bit of money. Most students don’t seem to care. If they’re concerned, some who do can email office@runnermag.ca to opt out of the fee. Is that correct?

Culley: Yes.

Jacobsen: So, how many students have opted out?

Culley: Oh, not many. Over my time at The Runner, maybe two students a year opt out. It only happens sometimes.

Jacobsen: So, I assess that it’s negligible.

Culley: Yes.

Jacobsen: Most students seem comfortable with 75 cents per credit. This brings us to the reason for this phone call in the first place, which is what raised this issue in the public eye—the petition. First, 150 signatures is a decent amount for a student petition, so credit those organizing it. However, there seems to have been some reporting that many of the student IDs submitted were invalid. 

So, what’s happening there?

Culley: Yes, we received the petition, which had 150 signatures. We immediately gave it to KPU to verify the student signatures and check whether the student IDs were valid. I am trying to remember the exact number, but many of the signatures needed to be validated student numbers; they were made up. Additionally, of the valid student numbers, we found that some students who signed the petition didn’t even know they were signing something to dissolve PIPS.

There are two stories I’ve been hearing from students. One is that they thought it was a sign-up sheet for a trip to Cultus Lake; they were told to sign the form, which would lead to a trip there. They didn’t know it had anything to do with dissolving PIPS. The other story is that they were told it was related to student politics and to sign quickly. Some of the signatures are valid, but not all are informed signatures. Some students signed the petition without knowing it was to eliminate PIPS.

Because of this, we’ve decided the petition is questionable. We need to find out how genuine it is and if this is something the students who signed up want. So, we’ve decided not to act on the petition. It’s calling for a special general meeting to have students vote on the resolutions. Still, after learning that students were misled into signing, we believe there’s an ulterior motive behind it. I should also mention that there was no reason given on the petition for why PIPS should be dissolved—there was no explanation whatsoever.

So, yes, because of that, we think there’s an ulterior motive at play, and we won’t act on the petition.

Jacobsen: Apart from the speculative frame at the end, if many of the student IDs are invalid to the point that the number of valid signatures drops below 100, that would be insufficient to reach the threshold for a special general meeting of PIPSC, correct?

Culley: Yes.

Jacobsen: So, the concerns are not only about the numbers but also about free, prior, and informed consent regarding the petition and the dissolution of PIPS, which would also affect The Runner and PULP Mag.

Culley: Yes, exactly.

Jacobsen: I’ve covered most of the major points. Did I miss anything?

Culley: Oh, I don’t think so. There’s one thing I had a question about, and you might already know this. I wanted to make sure. We’ve talked about four main concerns. First is the petition’s motion to dissolve PIPSC and remove Bylaw 11, which allows council members to be part of the PIPS board. Those are the two things on the petition.

However, the bylaw changes to extend KSA council terms to two years and limit media recording to the first five minutes of council meetings are separate bylaw changes the KSA proposes in their bylaws at their own SGM. So, they’re not all tied to the same petition; they’re separate issues. You might know that already, but I wanted to make sure.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time, Claudia. 

Culley: Thank you so much; I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Thanks. You’re welcome. Bye.

[1] Full listing:

KSA Executives

  • Yashanpreet Guron – President & Vice President Student Life
  • Yugveer Gill – Vice President University Affairs
  • Paramvir Singh – Vice President External Affairs
  • Simranjot Sekhon – Vice President Finance & Operations
  • Ishant Goyal – Associate President

Campus Representatives

  • Abhijeet Singh – Civic Plaza Campus Representative
  • Yashanpreet Guron – Cloverdale Campus Representative
  • Jashanpreet Singh Sekhon – Langley Campus Representative
  • Nitin Aggarwal – Richmond Campus Representative
  • Simranjeet Singh – Surrey Campus Representative

Constituency Representatives

  • Paramvir Singh – International Students Representative
  • Jaskaran Sohal – Mature Students Representative
  • Arnav Grover – Queer Students Representative
  • Ishant Goyal – Students of Color Representative
  • Lesli Sangha – Students with Disabilities Representative
  • Suhana Gill – Women’s Representative

Faculty Representatives

  • Jasmine Kaur Kochhar – Faculty of Arts Representatives
  • Yugveer Gill – Faculty of Arts Representatives
  • Dishika Gour – Faculty of Arts Representatives
  • Nishant Kapoor – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Simranjot Sekhon – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Keerat Goyal – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Yuvraj Bains – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Harpal Singh (Pala) – Faculty of Business Representatives
  • Bhoomika Seera – Faculty of Science and Horticulture Representatives
  • Ranveer Singh – Faculty of Science and Horticulture Representatives

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1200: The Slaughter of the Dems

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, it looks like it was a complete slaughter against the Democrats. 

Rick Rosner: As far as I know—and I haven’t checked in the last half hour—Harris isn’t even leading the popular vote. I thought it was impossible for Trump to win the popular vote.

I assume that when the West Coast votes come in, she might even it up, but she’s already lost two of the seven swing states, and four others are leaning Trump by a few percentage points. It’s bad. The Republicans have taken the Senate. I haven’t checked, but the Democrats were supposed to reclaim the House. I’m not sure if that’s happening.

JSo, Trump will be president, and he’ll pardon himself. He has floated a number of ideas, including deporting all undocumented immigrants, starting with what he calls the “million worst.” By that, he means he believes there are a million criminal undocumented immigrants in the U.S. From reading various cases, I know that “criminal” can be defined as something as minor as a DUI. That could get you deported under a Trump regime.

The infrastructure needed—police and immigration enforcement—to deport a million people would be significant. The question is whether he’ll actually do it or have the legislative power to do so. He’s not politically skilled, but with control of the House and Senate, he could push through some measures.

Will he try to replace some taxes with tariffs or implement a national sales tax? Carole and I will accelerate our plans to find a place to live in England. According to their immigration laws, we can stay for six months at a time. Maybe we don’t buy a place—maybe we rent.

Would that actually protect us from anything? It probably means you’ll buy less micro mosaic stuff since moving around to avoid an unpleasant regime is logistically harder when you have a lot of belongings to manage. What do you think about this entire situation? You’ve been in Ukraine, which, while not under a repressive regime, is at war with one.

Jacobsen: The first target here was largely women’s rights, starting with the Roe v. Wade overturn.

Rosner: There are extensive plans to make America more Christian-oriented in its laws. This is problematic because we should be focusing on tech and innovation. The best way to maintain our global standing is by selling tech—robots, AI, and other advancements—to the world. Yet, the Republicans want to de-emphasize education.

They don’t value education much. They push for defunding public education and redirecting those funds toward what they call “school choice,” which includes charter schools and Christian schools. You don’t necessarily get a quality education being homeschooled, attending a Christian school, or being in public schools that have had their budgets slashed by 30%. At a time when we should be prioritizing STEM education like we did in the sixties, we’re going to lose ground because Trump will roll back regulations related to climate change.

With climate change, maybe we’ll get lucky in some way, since birth rates are declining and people aren’t having as many kids. By 2060, the population might level out, and the per capita carbon footprint in the U.S. could decrease by 1% annually thanks to tech advancements and telecommuting trends. So, despite Trump doing nothing about climate change, our distractions—entertainment and social media—might indirectly help mitigate its impact. But having someone who supports ignorance running the country for another four years is terrible. He might also get the chance to appoint up to two more Supreme Court justices, since Alito and Thomas are in their seventies and may retire under a Republican president.

That could mean Trump appoints justices in their late forties who, with modern medical advancements, could stay on the bench for 50 or 55 years. Amy Coney Barrett, Gorsuch, and Kavanaugh could be around that long too. It’s grim.

Jacobsen: Do you think the U.S. is moving towards becoming a more overtly Christian nation? Do you think we’ll become more authoritarian?

Rosner: Yes, Carole is worried about all the anti-Trump tweets I’ve posted. She’s concerned I’ve made myself a target.

Jacobsen: Do you think that’s a valid concern?

Rosner: But everyone will be a target.

Jacobsen: Everyone?

Rosner: Yes. With AI, the administration can analyze massive amounts of data.

Jacobsen: So, you’re saying someone in the Trump administration might be smart enough to use AI to identify enemies?

Rosner: That’s already been suggested. They’ll use it to identify enemies and go after them.

Jacobsen: I heard Vance said something about professors being enemies.

Rosner: Yes, J.D. Vance. He said, ‘Professors are the enemy.’ He framed professors as the enemy, and that’s enough to set the tone.

Jacobsen: Fill that label with any other group, and it’s alarming. Does that worry you?

Rosner: I don’t think it even needs more planning. If you were an American or lived in the U.S., would you consider relocating? Maybe to California or New York? 

Jacobsen: It’s chaotic. Fundamentalist Christians may not be as thrilled as they think they would be. So, a lot of them—I’m sure there are plenty of good-hearted Christians who are appalled. Then say Christians in general, including Christian Catholics.

Rosner: You mentioned fundamentalists.

Jacobsen: Yes. Same category, but I do see them as a bit separate.

Rosner: Should we talk about anything else? Is there more to cover? Maybe there’s a silver lining: Trump is friends with a number of dictators, at least two of whom have nuclear weapons. 

Jacobsen: Do you think that lowers the risk of a nuclear conflict?

Rosner: No.

Jacobsen:But could it even raise it? 

Rosner: Because he’s impulsive? Because he’s 78 and not as sharp as he used to be? The people around him tend to be warmongers. He aligns with other authoritarian perspectives. He campaigned on the idea that during his presidency, the U.S. wasn’t in any wars and that the world wasn’t at war.

Jacobsen: That’s true, but he says a lot of things. We can’t take what he says at face value as a benchmark.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1199: The Day After Blues for the Blues

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

Rick Rosner: So, it’s the day after, and Trump has won. You noticed during our chat before we started taping that I was nodding off because I didn’t get much sleep last night. Carole was freaking out, grabbing me, and asking, “What are we going to do? What’s going to happen?” She was also telling me I need to delete thousands of my tweets out of fear that I might get into trouble with the regime for all the anti-Trump tweeting I did.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: But even if you deleted all your tweets, there’s still an archive. They don’t just disappear.

Rosner: So, yes, it was a disastrous night. Harris came in about 10 million votes below what I expected and lost all the swing states. Liberal America is in shock, and MAGA America is gloating, saying, “We told you so.”

Four more years. On one hand, you hope he’ll be gracious in victory. On the other hand, he won’t be. I was watching Kimmel’s monologue, Seth Meyers, and The Daily Show. They’re all saying the same thing—that it’s going to be bad, but eventually, it’ll end in four years.

What more can we say that we haven’t already said 50 times before? It’s getting repetitive. But I won’t be saying it on Twitter anymore. I used to consider it my responsibility to get people worked up enough about how terrible he is so they would go vote for Harris. That time has passed.

I’m going back to using Twitter for its original, lighthearted purpose—messing up movie titles by changing one letter, like back when Twitter was fun. I just hope that if an information force comes looking for enemies of the state, they don’t search more than a few months back in my Twitter history. From now on, my Twitter is going to be wholesome.

Carole wants to move up our timeline for finding a place to live in England, which means cleaning out this place. It doesn’t make financial sense to leave it vacant while we’re in England. Especially with the upcoming Olympics, there will be a gold rush to rent out homes to wealthy families looking for a place to stay. We could probably get $20,000 a month for our place in 2028. Today, we even threw out an Encyclopedia Britannica to free up a bookshelf. It felt strange to discard all that knowledge, but now all of it fits on our phones. 

The LLMs, or Large Language Models, are like tiny encyclopedias—just friendlier. How many of the people watching this have interacted with AIs? They’re not conscious, but they’re friendly and eager to help. They’re a pleasure to interact with. So, what else is there to say? I know what to say: AI. By reelecting Trump, we’ve proven that we can’t be trusted to make good decisions for ourselves. It makes you wish for the rapid advent of AI that subtly guides us with propaganda into doing the least foolish thing.

In this case, that would have meant not voting for Donald Trump. AI isn’t powerful enough yet to achieve that level of influence. But give it five years, and it might be able to sway us into making smarter choices.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1198: Trump’s Likely First Moves

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What do you think Trump’s first moves will be? What do you think the people around him will do first? 

Rick Rosner: There have already been reports that Trump is talking with Putin about the Ukraine war, which would be against an Act, I believe. Anyway, it’s against the law for someone who isn’t yet in office to negotiate political matters with foreign leaders.

But that’s never really stopped Trump, nor has it stopped other people before they officially took office. It’s rare for the Logan Act to be enforced. He has already appointed his chief of staff, who will be the first female chief of staff in U.S. history. Her name is Susie Wiley, a 67-year-old who was apparently instrumental during his campaign. She has stated that she plans to run a tighter ship, where not just anyone can walk in and speak with Trump.

So those are the initial moves or rumored actions. He campaigned and was elected on issues like inflation—capitalizing on public discontent with inflation under Biden—and immigration, focusing on the backlash against the surge of immigration. I don’t expect him to do much about inflation now that it’s down to about 2%, nor do I think he has any strategies to address it. However, many expect him to take credit for the current low inflation. That leaves immigration as the primary area where he’ll act.

His first actions will likely be related to immigration. When he took office for the first time, he implemented a Muslim ban. There are rumors that he might do something similar again. He’s made numerous statements about deporting undocumented immigrants, claiming he’ll remove every undocumented person—over 12 million people—which would be practically impossible due to the scale of infrastructure needed. It would require tens of thousands of additional border agents and massive prison facilities to hold people before deportation, costing hundreds of billions of dollars.

He’s also mentioned a plan to deport the “million worst” undocumented immigrants, which would still involve significant expenses and logistical challenges. This could mean individuals with criminal records, including those with minor infractions like a DUI. Under Trump’s previous administration, people were deported for offenses like driving while impaired. I assume he’ll pursue policies in that direction, but he’ll face logistical and legal obstacles.

Wth the current political landscape, it might be difficult to enact large-scale changes. He has the Senate, which the Republicans have taken back with 52 out of 100 seats. However, they don’t have the 60 seats needed to overcome filibusters. The House results are still pending, but the Republicans are expected to reclaim it, albeit with a slim majority similar to what they have now.

It’s uncertain whether he’ll be able to pass significant legislation related to mass deportations, but immigration will probably be his main focus initially. It’ll likely resemble his previous actions when he was president, as anything larger would require vast resources. 

Also, he’s been talking about defunding and dismantling a range of federal agencies, such as the Department of Education and NOAA—the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, the organization that provides weather forecasts.

Jacobsen: Realistically, given his history, what’s likely?

Rosner: We have to consider what might limit him. Legislatively, he’s somewhat constrained. But another limiting factor is that, despite four years as president, he still lacks significant political experience and tends to appoint extremist individuals who are also not very experienced. His lack of political acumen might limit his ability to implement drastic measures.

I’ve been thinking about that. Maybe he doesn’t aim to be a total dictator, but that feels naïve. With the current Supreme Court, he has more power to push the boundaries than any previous president, except for Biden. The Supreme Court decided that a president has a certain latitude to do things that might be deemed illegal if done by a non-president, as long as they are part of official duties. That ruling came under Biden, but Biden hasn’t used that latitude to do anything criminal. Trump, on the other hand, could leverage this power to prosecute his enemies. He’s almost certainly going to pardon himself from any federal charges.

Jack Smith’s cases against him are reportedly being dismantled, possibly because they won’t lead anywhere with Trump likely to pardon himself from federal charges. What about the state charges in New York for fraud? He’s due to be sentenced on November 26th or 27th.

I’ve heard rumors that even those might be affected. At the very least, he’ll quash any federal charges against him. He’s also said he would pardon the January 6th rioters. About 1,000 of them have been prosecuted, and while it’s unclear if he’ll pardon all 1,000, he’ll certainly pardon some. That could even be a day-one action.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1197: Mr. Trump Wins!

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

Rick Rosner: So, I know the election was a bummer. Many people, mostly liberals, think Trump will be even worse and more unrestrained this time around. Carol is nervous that the country will become unlivable for us, possibly due to all the critical things I said about Trump on Twitter.

She’s been actively researching how to move to England and even joined an expatriate group on Facebook. But she found out that England has been cracking down on people trying to live there long-term. According to their laws, you can stay for six months but then must leave for another six months. If you repeat this too much, they may block you from returning, as they don’t want people circumventing their immigration laws.

And now they’re strict. If you run afoul of just one border agent, they can block you if they suspect you’re trying to stay too long.

Which is a problem for us because our kid is getting married in England in a few months. She’s marrying a Brit, has a job there, and that’s where her degrees are from. We hoped to move there and be part of their lives, within reason. We even considered buying an apartment.

But I did find out that there’s a way to get a student visa if you’re enrolled in a research-based master’s or PhD program. Research-based means original work and doesn’t necessarily have to be in a lab. If you’re on a student visa for such a program, you can also bring your spouse. That could be an option. I found out that there are nine MPhil programs in creative writing at universities in the UK. I might qualify for one, and being in a program might give me the discipline to write more consistently. It’s tough to get myself to produce writing otherwise.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1196: Bubble Benefits

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: So, here’s a story from high school. In high school, my friends Lon and Dave were cooler than me. They were good-looking guys—so good-looking, in fact, that one of them has a daughter who grew up to become a fairly major movie star. So, in high school, I had friends who were much cooler than I was.

One of them had a family hot tub. I remember being in the hot tub with those guys and at least a couple of girls. Since I didn’t do sports, I wasn’t used to seeing other guys naked. At one point, we all got out of the hot tub and went inside to change out of our swimsuits.

That’s when I noticed my friends had enormous penises. I thought, “What the heck? Why is mine so small?” It wasn’t until months or even years later that I realized what was going on. Because they were the popular, cool guys and I wasn’t, they were getting certain ‘benefits’ in the hot tub under the bubbles. That explained the difference.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1195: NOTHING, Nothing, nothing, nothingness, and “What else can we talk about?”

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: I’ve been feeling bad about our recent conversations because it’s mostly me complaining about Trump. So, I tried to think more philosophically or metaphysically for a moment. We’ve often talked about the principles of existence and things that can exist, but that made me wonder: what about things that can’t exist? Is there anything productive in thinking about things that are impossible?

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I have an example. When I interviewed Lawrence Krauss, he spoke as a popularizer of physics with a quasi-philosophical approach to the concept of nothing. His perspective was that, to define nothing, you must first define something. This helps move away from traditional, philosophical, or somewhat religious assumptions of a vast, empty black void.

So, if you want to define nothing, you start by defining something. Understanding the physics of something lets you deconstruct it piece by piece until you reach nothing. 

Rosner: I had a similar thought: there are two kinds of things that don’t exist. One type is the things that could potentially exist but are at odds with your current location in the universe.

And the farther you go from where you are—across billions of light-years—you reach things that become less defined relative to you, with less of a shared history. This early, undefined stuff looks ancient because it hasn’t had a chance to co-evolve with you.

I wonder if, quantum mechanically, that’s a complete set of all possible existences and non-existences. Does everything that can either exist or mostly not exist lie on a continuum from 0% existence to 100%—as fully existent as it can be because it’s local to you?

So, that’s thought one. But that wasn’t exactly the Lawrence Krauss thought. I was trying to imagine things that don’t exist. For instance, I pictured Abraham Lincoln giving the Gettysburg Address, but with one hand extended. Above his hand, hovering an inch above it, is a metallic cube defying gravity. That can’t exist—it contradicts reality. Abraham Lincoln did not give the Gettysburg Address with an outstretched hand holding a hovering metallic cube.

r with eight fingers on one hand while delivering the speech. That makes me wonder: can we only conceive of things that don’t exist by rearranging elements from our imaginations, which are built from things that do exist, into configurations that are absurd or contrary to known reality? What I’m asking is whether everything that doesn’t exist, in this sense, is just a peculiar combination of things that do exist. It seems reasonable to assume that everything we can imagine is derived from things we’ve learned about—things that exist in some form. That’s close to what Krauss was saying.

Though he was talking in much stricter physical terms. 

Rosner: No, not at the moment. What else can we talk about?

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1194: “Sorry for the tangent.”

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: I ran into a friend of mine, who’s quite talkative, at the gym. He was complaining about a guy I’ve had issues with as well. Nowadays, I tend to walk away from trouble at the gym, mostly because I try to avoid conflict in general.

I’ve given up expecting people at the gym to behave as they once did—with basic gym etiquette. That standard has largely disappeared. People in my age group learned about weightlifting from Arnold Schwarzenegger, who became famous in the mid to late 1970s. He brought bodybuilding and weightlifting into mainstream culture. Back then, the generation that frequented gyms adhered to a certain level of gentlemanly behavior. There was a recognized etiquette.

Perhaps it was because many people were lifting significant weights and, with some using performance enhancers like steroids, there was an unspoken understanding to act with respect. Everyone understood the potential consequences of tempers flaring if things went wrong. But that was then. Now, smartphones have disrupted gym behavior because they are so distracting. In the past, inconsiderate behavior was rare.

This shift is also why I don’t get as angry at drivers anymore. Everyone seems to drive poorly these days because the factors contributing to it are pervasive. Smartphones are a major cause, and perhaps the post-pandemic world has impacted people’s focus and patience. Cars now come equipped with large, distracting heads-up displays that don’t necessarily make driving safer. If bad driving is widespread, it’s difficult to single out individuals when everyone seems affected.

I’ve had plenty of frustrating encounters at the gym. For instance, someone will be on their phone, and I’ll stand there waiting to use a machine. This can go on for about three minutes. I typically give people a few minutes or go do a set on a different machine before coming back. When I return, they’re often still on their phone. By now, five minutes may have passed. At that point, I’ll ask, “How many more sets do you have?”—a polite way of suggesting they get moving.

At first, they often won’t hear me. I have to repeat myself a few times because they don’t understand due to their earbuds. On the third try, they finally respond with, “Oh,” followed by the number of sets they have left. “I have three more sets.” I’ll say, “Thank you,” and step back, only for them to return to their phone.

This behavior would be surprising if it weren’t so common. For example, I once watched a girl at the ab machine. She was on her phone, and this went on for quite a while. Eventually, she put her phone down, realizing she needed to do a set. She wasn’t being intentionally rude; she was just acting like many others do these days.

And she sets up to do a set but can’t finish it. She has to look down at her phone, now on the ground. There are two identical machines next to each other. On the other machine, a guy is doing even fewer sets because he has two phones. So, you have to let people be the way they are now.

You can’t fix the world. A guy in a Second Amendment T-shirt approached me while I was waiting for one of the machines and said, “Hey, do you want to work in on here?” I was ecstatic that someone had this level of consideration.

And probably someone who voted for Trump, given his Second Amendment T-shirt. So, there are still some genuinely nice people, even those who voted for him.

Sorry for the tangent.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1193: AI and Hollywood Script Prompts

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Okay, let me ask: ‘Give me three examples of your advanced reasoning and idea development.’ Achievements focusing on advanced reasoning.

Mapping ethical AI. Assessing international agreements. Charting renewable energy. Creating a sustainable urban development plan. Data analysis. Integrated solutions. Economic considerations. Policy development. Formulating a global health policy strategy. It even covers epidemiology.

Rick Rosner: Is it giving you those ideas, or is it just listing areas?

Jacobsen: I’m reading it now; it says, ‘Formulating a global public health strategy.’ It explains that it can develop strategies to address global public health crises like pandemics using epidemiological models. It analyzes infection rates and transmission vectors to predict outbreak patterns. Resource allocation involves determining the optimal distribution of medical supplies to healthcare personnel, and it suggests international collaboration by crafting agreements, preparedness sharing, and coordinated response efforts.

Rosner: Those still sound more like areas it can handle rather than specific, creative ideas. Can you ask it to provide three screenplay concepts that showcase its ability to come up with new ideas?

Jacobsen: Title: The Chronogarden. Genre: Science fiction, drama. Logline: In a secluded garden where time doesn’t flow linearly, a grieving botanist discovers plants that bloom with memories from the future.

A grieving botanist discovers plants that bloom with memories from the future, compelling her to confront choices that could alter her destiny and those of others. 

Synopsis: Dr. Arlena Ramirez, a botanist mourning the loss of her daughter, retreats to a remote research facility. There, she stumbles upon a hidden garden where certain plants exhibit anomalous temporal properties, blooming with flowers that hold memories not yet experienced. As Arlena delves into these memories, she glimpses future events impacting herself and strangers linked by fate. When she foresees a catastrophic event in a memory bloom, Arlena faces a moral dilemma: should she intervene to change the future, risking unforeseen consequences, or let events unfold as destined? Her journey becomes a poignant exploration of grief, free will, and the intricate tapestry of time.

And there are two more examples.

Rosner: That’s pretty good. That’s really impressive.

Jacobsen: Yes, it generated three examples of the same length and detail.

Rosner: That’s intriguing, but it needs some tweaking regarding the death of her. That connects a bit. It’s pretty good. Go ahead.

Jacobsen: Alright. Next one. Title: Echoes of the Silent Reef. Genre: Adventure, fantasy. Logline: A marine biologist with a hearing impairment discovers an underwater civilization that communicates through bioluminescent patterns, leading to an extraordinary alliance that could save both their worlds from an ecological disaster.

Synopsis: Amara Singh, a talented marine biologist who is deaf, feels out of place in both the hearing and deaf communities. While researching coral bleaching, she encounters ethereal luminescent beings in a hidden reef. Unable to communicate through sound, they share a visual language of light patterns. As Amara learns their way, she uncovers a looming threat: deep-sea mining operations are endangering the reef and the beings’ existence. Together, they devise a plan to reveal the wonders of this underwater world to humanity without exposing the beings to danger. The story celebrates the power of nonverbal communication and the importance of environmental stewardship.

Rosner: That’s… I mean, it sounds like a James Cameron project, but it’s a decent pitch. When you pitch to someone—I’ve never pitched movies, only TV—you usually need more than one idea. Even if you only have one or two ideas worth pitching, walking in with eight ideas is beneficial. This tool could give you another half-dozen, making it seem like you’re an idea machine, and maybe the exec will go for one of the others. This feels like a watershed moment. I’ve never asked an LLM to do this, so if this is a step forward, it feels promising. I’ve been working on my book where the main character is in the entertainment industry, gets booked for various projects, and helps produce content. The pitches you’ve shown me are not much different, maybe a bit more developed than the fictional loglines I’ve been incorporating.

I might need to cheat a bit with an LLM to create some more outlandish future shows. Let’s try for fun—ask it for a couple more loglines for movies we might see in theaters in 2035.

Jacobsen: They’re shorter this time since we asked for loglines. 

Title: Synthetic Souls

Genre: Science fiction drama. In a society where artificial humans download consciousness to serve as laborers, one synthetic discovers remnants of memories that suggest a past life, igniting a quest for identity that could upend the world’s understanding of life and consciousness.

Rosner: That’s Blade Runner.

Jacobsen: Yeah, not overly impressive, but here’s another one. Title: The Last Language. Genre: Adventure, mystery. Amid a global crisis erasing human languages overnight, a linguist and a tech entrepreneur race against time to decode an ancient script that holds the key to preserving communication before humanity is plunged into silence.

Rosner: That’s good.

Jacobsen: Chronicle of Shadows, action, thriller, sci-fi. Logline: Equipped with technology that can manipulate shadows into physical forms, a covert operative must prevent a rogue faction from using the device to plunge the world into eternal darkness.

Eternity’s Children, science fiction, drama. In a future where aging is cured and immortality is the norm, naturally aging children are born, sparking a societal upheaval that reminds humanity of the beauty and necessity of mortality.

The Last Byte (BYT), techno-thriller, action. As the world’s data is consolidated into a single quantum server, a cybersecurity expert discovers a self-aware virus planning to erase digital history, forcing her into a race against time to save the essence of human knowledge.

Rosner: Nice.

Jacobsen: Chrono Nexus, sci-fi adventure. When time portals begin to appear worldwide, connecting past and future eras, a historian and a futuristic engineer team up to prevent a temporal collision that could unravel the fabric of reality.

Rosner: I’ve had that idea in mind—an atomic explosion sends information and objects into the past, causing chaos. But yes, that’s great.

Jacobsen: Echoes of Gaia, environmental sci-fi fantasy. After Earth’s ecosystems collapse, scientists discover that plants have developed the ability to communicate telepathically, offering humanity one last chance to restore the planet through an unexpected alliance.

Rosner: So, yes, these are interesting. It’s used ‘Chrono’ twice in its titles, and it seems to think that future movies will have an ecological theme. You can either agree with that or tell it to lose the eco angle, but I’m sold. It’s a bit sad, though, because people are obviously going to abuse the hell out of this. People like me, or anyone who needs to pitch ideas, are going to mess around with this constantly. And movie execs will do the same. This could become a way for movie executives, who already get overwhelmed with pitches, to sift through hundreds of ideas and inform their understanding of what makes a good or bad pitch, and what trends are oversaturated.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1192: Hollywood Life

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your advice for Hollywood life?

Rick Rosner: One piece of advice is act less. Don’t move your arms around a lot. Don’t show an excessive amount of emotion. Say your lines with just a hint of the emotion you think is appropriate or what the director envisions in that scene. This approach tends to work well because overacting marks an amateur, making them look unconvincing.

So, rule one is to underact. Rule two is if you want to appear as though you’re genuinely listening to someone, look at their face, but let your eyes wander over their entire face. Don’t let your eyes leave their face, but allow them to move across it. When someone is speaking and it’s significant to you, this small action creates the illusion of deep engagement. This technique is useful for conveying investment in what the other person is saying.

Picking up these small tricks, combined with understanding the business side of Hollywood, is crucial, as it’s a place where people can be ruthlessly competitive. Being smart is a huge advantage. In entertainment, intelligence complements talent or can sometimes compensate for a lack of it. If you ask intelligent questions, you can be the interviewer who engages celebrities in a way that highlights their intellect. Many celebrities have time to learn new things, either out of personal interest between projects or with the help of assistants who research and brief them on topics.

Take, for example, George Clooney or Leonardo DiCaprio—they’re known for their knowledge and interests.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1191: Elections, schmelections!

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: With four days to go until Election Day, we have early voting continuing through Friday, Saturday, Sunday, and Monday. However, many states, especially those with Republican leadership, limit early voting opportunities.

Approximately 68 million people have already voted, which suggests that 80 to 83 million ballots may be received by Election Day. Additionally, around 12 million more might be postmarked before Election Day and counted upon arrival, even if received after Election Day, as 18 states allow for this.

This means we could see up to 93 million early votes cast, which is nearly as high as the turnout during the 2020 election influenced by COVID-19, indicating strong participation. Women are outvoting men by 10%, a trend that remains consistent in most states. Although this advantage may be less significant on Election Day itself, the exact difference is uncertain. If the trend holds and considering that this advantage is often not accounted for in many polls, Harris could perform close to 1% better, which could be crucial in a tight race.

If over 90 million people vote early and day-of voting reaches 65 to 70 million, it would mean record-breaking voter participation. Even if the day-of turnout isn’t as strong, any demographic shift required to counter early voting trends would need to be even more significant given the lower number of voters on Election Day.

In swing states, where polls (despite their potential inaccuracies) indicate that women are outvoting men by 10% to 12% in five out of seven key states, this could be a hopeful sign, though not conclusive, for her chances.

Rosner: Addendum: I haven’t posted this yet, but I’m considering tweeting: Vote for the candidate who seems more appealing, followed by a humorous take on what it might be like to sleep with Trump, portraying him as a tired old man who smells like spoiled milk.

Jacobsen: What type of spoiled milk?

Rosner: Not skim milk—probably whole or 2%.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1190: Is there more to it, or no?

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: So, naturally, I think that Big Bang physics is a theory that has not entirely caught up with observation. Everything is relatively new. Essentially, everything we know about the universe has been learned in the last 100 to 120 years.

The farther away a galaxy is, the more it is redshifted, indicating that we didn’t even figure out the existence of galaxies until the 1920s. The farther away an object is, the younger it appears in the history of the universe. There is quite a bit of evidence that suggests the universe is approximately 14 billion years old.

With all this, including nucleosynthesis and other observational data, we now have a significant amount of new evidence. However, I don’t think the theoretical framework has fully caught up yet. The Big Bang theory accounts for a lot but not everything. Additionally, when it comes to quantum mechanics, I don’t believe our understanding has kept pace with the mathematical and physical descriptions. Quantum mechanics accurately describes physical phenomena, but comprehending its implications and underlying nature has lagged.

For example, information theory and a mathematical definition of information weren’t even developed until about 40 years after the advent of quantum mechanics. So, the idea that quantum mechanics might involve incomplete information may not have fully resonated with those studying it yet.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1189: What does Carole find amusing about Rick?

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What mistakes does Carole find amusing?

Rick Rosner: My most recent mistake happened the day before yesterday. We decided to sell some old gold jewelry that had been sitting around unused. I called a place and asked, “What percent of the spot price do you pay?” Spot price is the current market price for gold, which is around $2,710 per ounce—a very high amount. They said if we brought in a Krugerrand, they would pay about $2,610, which is about 96% of the spot price.

Jacobsen: And what happened when you went in?

Rosner: We brought in our scrap 14-karat gold, which they weighed at 17.5 grams. They offered to pay 80% of the spot price. I was confused and said, “Wait, you told me on the phone you pay 96%.” They responded, “That’s for a Krugerrand, not scrap gold.” Carole chimed in, “You misunderstood.” I insisted I’d called, but she was right about the situation. I managed to haggle them up to 83%, but it still wasn’t great.

It was frustrating. I probably should’ve haggled harder. Years ago, when I was making jewelry for Carole, the standard was around 99% of the spot price. 80% is far from that. They reminded me that times have changed, and I got a raw deal. Carole found my miscalculation amusing, maybe more than she should have.

Jacobsen: Any other notable mistakes?

Rosner: Another example was when Carole’s mom needed to move out of her house because she was getting older and it was becoming unsafe for her. We had to decide what to do with the house, and I suggested renting it out. My reasoning was that it would provide income, improvements would be tax-deductible, and we wouldn’t have to pay taxes on the sale right away.

Jacobsen: Did you learn something new during that process?

Rosner: Yes, I didn’t realize at the time that when someone dies—in California and probably most other states—you get a stepped-up basis for the value of the house. Carole’s family bought their house in 1966 for $40,000 or $50,000.

Jacobsen: And when the house finally sold, how much did it go for?

Rosner: It sold for $1.6 million. But we didn’t have to pay taxes on $1,550,000 in capital gains because Carole’s dad passed away in the early 2000s. This meant that Carole’s mom became the sole owner of the house with a stepped-up basis. The “basis” is what you use to calculate capital gains taxes. So, when he died, the house’s value was adjusted up to around $1.1 million, which was its market value at that time.

There was still some mortgage on it, but essentially, we didn’t have to pay capital gains tax on the large increase in value. The taxable basis of the house had risen from the original $40,000–$50,000 they paid for it in 1966 to over $1 million when Carole’s dad died. I didn’t realize this at the time, so my main argument for renting it out to avoid immediate taxes was incorrect.

Jacobsen: And Carole still reminds you of that?

Rosner: Yes, she does, although it didn’t change our final decision. By the time we had to decide, we’d learned about the stepped-up basis and everything else involved. But she notes that I was initially wrong when we were casually discussing our options. Once it was time to make the real decision, we made sure to get all the information.

Jacobsen: Sounds like it worked out in the end, but it’s a funny reminder of how much there is to learn when dealing with these matters.

Rosner: It’s one of those things that sticks as a funny memory.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1188: Voter Turnout

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: We could discuss early voting in the U.S. About 42 to 43 million people have already voted, with 10 days remaining before the election. That’s a solid turnout.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the numbers for past elections?

Rosner: In 2020, 101 million people voted early. In 2016, 58 million voted early. This year, we’re on track for possibly 80 to 85 million early votes, with about 5 million people voting daily. So breaking 80 million is very achievable.

Jacobsen: That’s impressive, but how does it compare to 2020?

Rosner: It’s a good turnout, though not quite as high as 2020. The 2020 election was unique because states eased voting methods due to COVID-19, making early and mail-in voting easier. Republicans lost that election and were upset by the high turnout since larger turnouts typically benefit Democrats. Republicans generally form a minority but are more reliable voters, so increased accessibility tends to favor Democrats, who may not otherwise be as diligent about voting.

Jacobsen: And Republicans have taken measures since then?

Rosner: Yes, over the past four years, they’ve implemented measures to make voting more difficult. Achieving 80 to 85 million early votes under these stricter conditions would be significant for Democrats and give them a decent shot at defeating Trump.

Jacobsen: What about the concept of “shy Trump voters”?

Rosner: In past elections, particularly 2016 and 2020, some Trump voters were hesitant to disclose their choice to pollsters, leading to underestimations. In 2016, about 15% of voters were undecided, many of whom broke for Trump. This time, only 3% are undecided. Trump outperformed the polls in 2016 and 2020 but underperformed in 2024 primaries. I suspect that more people are simply tired of his antics.

Jacobsen: Do you think this fatigue will impact his base?

Rosner: Possibly. Trump’s behavior over the past four years may discourage some Republicans and Trump-leaning independents from voting. He hasn’t introduced any new ideas, relies on falsehoods, incited a minor insurrection, and has been found liable or guilty by juries eight times in the past year. This includes five grand jury indictments, two jury findings for sexual assault liability, and one jury finding him guilty of fraud. Hardcore supporters dismiss these findings, but voters on the margins may be fatigued.

Jacobsen: If some of those voters are deterred, could that make a difference?

Rosner: Yes, even if just 5% of Trump’s supporters decide not to vote out of exhaustion, it could be pivotal. In 2020, Biden received 81 million votes, while Trump got 74 million, with Biden winning by 7 million. Ten days ago, I predicted 76 million for Harris and 71 million for Trump. I think Harris could lose 5 million votes compared to Biden due to perceptions that inflation is Biden’s fault, while Trump could lose 3 million because it’s difficult to peel away his base, even though he’s polarizing.

Jacobsen: Would a 5 million popular vote win be enough for Harris to secure the electoral vote?

Rosner: It’s uncertain. However, based on strong turnout recently, I’m revising my total voter turnout estimate upwards from 150 million (compared to 158.5 million in 2020) to possibly 152 to 153 million. Harris could pick up 60% of the additional 2 to 3 million votes I’m factoring into my projection.

I’d be delighted if she could replicate Biden’s 7 million popular vote victory. I don’t think she’s there yet, and I’m not sure she will be, but she might break a 5.5 million popular vote win. That would give her a decent shot at winning the electoral vote.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1187: Getting Older, Flossing, and Masks

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So what was that tweet about again? I remember seeing it. It was about a dirty mask from today, October 26th.

Rick Rosner: Yes, it was about a dirty mask. I had posted a picture of a worn-out mask. I’ll add the tweet link later.

Jacobsen: What was the context?

Rosner: I still wear a mask because COVID is still circulating. Even though we’re in a bit of a lull here in LA, with current COVID levels about one-seventh of what they were five weeks ago, they tend to rise again around Halloween and peak in late December into January. Even during this lull, I continue to mask up, especially since I’m often around people. I go to the gym, and Carole and I even went to a movie today, which we don’t do often since streaming offers so much at home. But we made an exception and saw a movie about Saturday Night Live’s first episode in 1975—it was pretty good.

Jacobsen: So, you try to make your masks last as long as possible?

Rosner: I don’t see any reason to replace them often, especially the ones with two straps that wrap around the head for a tighter fit. They’re harder to find. So, I try to use them until they wear out, even though they can get pretty gross. If I’m careful, I can stretch one mask to last about three or four months. The metal nose piece is usually what fails first, but if I avoid bending it too much, it holds up. The straps turn grayish-brown from rubbing against my hair, and the sides and the bridge of the nose get grimy from air sneaking in around the mask. Sometimes I spill coffee on them, and occasionally I burp into them, too. So, yes, they do get nasty over time.

Jacobsen: Does that affect the mask’s function?

Rosner: No, it doesn’t impact how the mask works; it’s just gross. People don’t usually notice or care, especially at the gym, where I spend most of my time. Even if someone did notice, it wouldn’t matter. I’m just a 64-year-old guy who looks a bit quirky, not James Bond. A dirty mask won’t change that. Rotten tomatoes.

Jacobsen: Do you maintain basic health standards with exercise and supplements?

Rosner: Yes, I still go to the gym at least five times a week. Recently, I joined another gym near my house, so now I go about six or seven times a week, totaling between 90 and 120 sets per day. As for flossing, I don’t do it as often as I should—it should be twice a day, but I’m lucky if I manage half that. And I still take supplements, though I’ve cut back on the variety a bit. I’ve added a lot of fisetin, which is a senolytic. It supposedly encourages old, dysfunctional cells to self-destruct, reducing the strain on the body and lowering inflammation. I noticed a difference when I started taking it; I didn’t have to wake up in the middle of the night to urinate, which suggests it’s helped clear out my prostate.

As you age, your prostate tends to enlarge, making it harder to empty your bladder completely. The prostate encircles the urethra—the tube that carries urine from the bladder out of the body—and when it swells, it pinches the urethra. This results in incomplete bladder emptying. Since taking fisetin, my symptoms have improved, and I don’t feel the same pressure at night.

And with aging, you often wake up frequently because your bladder feels full, which can disrupt sleep every 90 minutes or two hours. With fisetin, I might only wake up once during the night, or not at all, depending on when I go to bed.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1186: Washington Post Cancellations

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What’s going on with the Washington Post cancellations?

Rick Rosner: The Washington Post recently chose not to endorse a presidential candidate, which many see as an act of cowardice. Jeff Bezos owns the Washington Post, and some speculate that he halted the endorsement to avoid potential repercussions if Trump wins. Trump could use his power to retaliate against the Washington Post and Bezos’s other ventures, like Amazon.

Rosner: Trump has targeted companies before during his last presidency. The LA Times also refused to endorse a candidate because its owner leans toward Trump, which is absurd. Both of these papers have endorsed candidates for decades, and now, when there is a clear choice, they’re too afraid to take a stand.

Jacobsen: How did this impact their readership?

Rosner: About 60,000 people out of 2.5 million subscribers canceled their Washington Post subscriptions in protest. That’s approximately 2.5% of their subscriber base, which is substantial. I did the math, looked up their subscriber numbers, and tweeted about the percentage lost. It’s likely even more now as more people continue to cancel. But Bezos might not care since he has $200 billion in assets outside of the Washington Post.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1185: Do Roast Jokes Work Outside of Roasts?

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: This is from Laurie Kilmartin. She said, “Roast jokes don’t work great outside of a roast.” That’s a solid observation.

Rick Rosner: And there was a comedian involved. So today was Trump’s rally at Madison Square Garden, which was full of rhetoric that many felt was hateful toward minorities and immigrants. They had a comedian named Hinch-something whose most notorious joke was about a floating island of garbage in the Atlantic, which he called Puerto Rico.

A lot of people pointed out that this was racist and hateful. Laurie Kilmartin noted that it was a roast joke, and roast jokes don’t work well at political rallies. The joke didn’t land, and it received little laughter. Moreover, people on Twitter highlighted that Pennsylvania has around 450,000 Puerto Ricans, so calling them trash is not only offensive but also foolish. New York City also has a large Puerto Rican community, so making such a statement is senseless.

People were comparing it to the infamous 1939 pro-Nazi rally at Madison Square Garden, held by the German American Bund. That rally featured swastikas and promoted the idea that one could support Hitler and still be a proud American. A giant portrait of George Washington hung over the hall at that event. But history proved within a couple of years that supporting Hitler and being American were incompatible.

Jacobsen: So, what are people hoping this time?

Rosner: The hope is that Trump’s rally alienates more people than it inspires. However, it’s challenging to draw any conclusions from early voting data, even though about 43 to 45 million people have already voted, which is a high turnout with nine days to go. This year, Trump has encouraged Republicans to vote early, unlike in 2020 when he discouraged it. In 2020, early voting trends provided clearer insights because Trump’s supporters largely abstained from voting early.

Jacobsen: Why might that change be significant?

Rosner: It could be that Trump believes an early turnout from his base will make it easier for him to claim victory, even falsely, if needed. In 2020, the initial leads in various states depended on whether early votes were counted first or last. In states where early ballots were processed first, Biden jumped out to an early lead. In other states where day-of votes were counted first, Trump initially led, but those leads diminished as early ballots—comprising about 62-63% of total votes—were counted.

Jacobsen: So, what’s different this time?

Rosner: This time, Trump and his team may think early voting will benefit them, or they may have learned from their 2020 missteps. It’s hard to say for sure, but it does make interpreting early voting data more complicated. For instance, Nevada seems problematic for Democrats, but it’s uncertain. If Republicans have already cast most of their votes early, it might not be as bad as it looks.

Jacobsen: What about Georgia?

Rosner: Georgia is promising. The early voting turnout there is already 57% of the total votes cast in 2020. While not all states are expected to match their 2020 turnout, Georgia’s numbers are significant. Additionally, women are outvoting men in early ballots by 11.5%, which bodes well for Democrats. North Carolina, on the other hand, appears to be a toss-up. The other swing states are still uncertain.

Let’s wrap it up for the night.

Jacobsen: Yes, thank you. I’ll see you tomorrow.

Rosner: Talk to you then.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1183: Rick’s Mixed Relationship with Synagogue

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: When was the last time you went to synagogue, Rick?

Rick Rosner: The last time was for my mom’s memorial, over two years ago. Besides that, I haven’t been back. But we did watch No One Will Watch This, which is about Jews and stars Kristen Bell and Adam Brody on Netflix.

Jacobsen: Why the transition from the memorial to Kristen Bell?

Rosner: Because that’s the most Jewish thing I’ve done in years. It’s a show where Kristen Bell plays a young-ish woman with a sex and dating podcast who falls in love with a rabbi, played by Adam Brody, known from The OC years ago. It was pretty good.

Jacobsen: I see. So, what do you think are the requirements for Reform Judaism in terms of synagogue attendance?

Rosner: Not much, really. You should go on the High Holy Days—Rosh Hashanah and Yom Kippur.

Jacobsen: But you haven’t even gone for those lately, have you?

Rosner: No, we haven’t. The last time I went for Rosh Hashanah was decades ago. We used to attend services when we were members of a temple so that Isabella could go to Sunday school. But that was about 15 years ago.

Jacobsen: So how do you celebrate the High Holy Days outside of the synagogue?

Rosner: This year, I went to a Rosh Hashanah dinner at cousin Kenny’s house, and we said a couple of prayers.

Jacobsen: What did you pray for?

Rosner: They weren’t personal prayers; we just said blessings for the holiday.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ask A Genius 1182: Follow the River Where the AI Lead

Author(s): Rick Rosner and Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): Ask A Genius

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

*Interview conducted in November, 2024.*

Rick Rosner: Let’s ask ChatGPT: “What are three significant technological advances expected within the next five years?”

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: That’s a reasonable way to phrase it.

“What are three significant technological advances expected within the next five years?” Responses include widespread adoption of artificial intelligence and automation, breakthroughs in quantum computing, and advances in personalized medicine and biotechnology.

Rosner: Let’s focus on the third one, given what we discussed earlier. What do you envision with regards to personalized medicine and biotechnology?

Jacobsen: Personalized medicine will likely involve tailored medical treatments and gene therapy systems connected to CRISPR gene-editing technologies. One aspect could be the development of more targeted cancer therapies. Every type of cancer has unique structures on its surface that affect how easily immune cells can detect, grab, engulf, and kill it. For the immune system to attack cancer, it needs to recognize which cells are cancerous. Some cancers have distinct surface markers that the immune system can learn to identify, enabling the production of the necessary receptors to detect and attack them.

Rosner: Newer gene therapy techniques can expand the range of surface structures that can be targeted by the immune system. This is already occurring but currently only addresses certain types of cancer. Cancer is complex; numerous cellular mutations must align for it to become a fully malignant disease. Thus, various attributes can be targeted for treatment.

Jacobsen: So, you agree with the AI’s assessment that we will see improved cancer treatments?

Rosner: It’s often said that cancer isn’t one disease but hundreds of different ones. We’re likely to develop more methods to disrupt the growth cycles of these cancers, make it harder for them to metastasize, or prevent metastasized cells from embedding in other parts of the body. This will result in more points of attack and a wider range of treatable cancers.

Take kidney cancer, for instance. It’s challenging because, while it doesn’t metastasize frequently when small, even a tumor up to 4 or 7 centimeters may still be considered “small” and manageable. Other cancers, however, can spread at any stage. Kidney cancer also has mechanisms that disable immune cells in its vicinity, making immune therapies less effective and complicating treatment if it spreads

There’s a drug called Keytruda that is effective against many types of cancer, including kidney cancer. However, it’s one of those treatments that, at best, reduces the risk of recurrence or progression by about 40%. It’s not a cure, and it comes with significant side effects. Cancer will continue to be a major issue for several decades because it encompasses a wide range of different diseases. I don’t think we’re at the stage where we have treatments that can reduce the lethality of all cancers by 50%. Some types of cancer are highly treatable, while others remain extremely lethal.

Pancreatic cancer is a prime example of this. If it’s not detected until symptoms appear, the prognosis is often poor.

Jacobsen: So, moving on to the next question. What was the main point you noted from ChatGPT’s response? Let’s discuss the first claim regarding quantum computing breakthroughs.

Quantum computing is expected to achieve significant advancements that will allow for faster processing speeds. This, in turn, could facilitate more complex data analysis, advanced simulations, and potential breakthroughs in cryptographic sciences, material science, and drug discovery.

That’s an intriguing field. What do you see as the main challenges with quantum computing?

Rosner: There are two primary issues. First, building stable quantum systems with more than a few qubits is challenging. Quantum computers are so powerful that even a system with only a handful of qubits can perform substantial tasks. However, to unlock their full potential, you need a system that can maintain a greater number of qubits. The inherent problem is that quantum systems are unstable—you’re trying to sustain an isolated and indeterminate state until the computation is complete.

The second problem lies in structuring tasks so they’re suitable for quantum computation. Quantum computing excels at problems like the traveling salesman problem, but there are numerous other complex problems that need to be adapted to leverage quantum capabilities.

You mentioned ChatGPT’s other comments—could you recap them?

Jacobsen: ChatGPT referenced applications in cryptography, material science, and drug discovery through advanced simulations and data analysis. Cryptography is particularly significant. There’s a classic example from the 1980s: creating an unbreakable encryption key by multiplying two large prime numbers. It was believed that factoring such a product would take millions of years with conventional computing. However, quantum computing, with its ability to process many calculations simultaneously, could potentially crack these codes, making what was once secure, breakable.

That would be revolutionary—and a potential security risk.

Rosner: Didn’t a couple of researchers win the Nobel Prize in medicine for utilizing AI to figure out how to fold proteins precisely as desired?

So, once again, this appears to be a good problem for quantum computing—designing scenarios where you’re running an enormous number of possible combinations simultaneously. In a quantum system, what would traditionally take hundreds of years could potentially be done in mere seconds. That makes sense based on what ChatGPT indicated. Over the past decade, brute-force substance testing has relied more on robotics than AI. Robots can create thousands of miniature petri dishes, each containing problematic cells.

The robots can handle the repetitive task of placing thousands of different substances into those petri dishes, which would take humans an incredible amount of time. This process has essentially reduced the reliance on human intuition to identify potentially effective substances. Instead, every possible substance is tested because automation makes it feasible. ChatGPT’s point suggests that, with quantum systems, instead of physically testing thousands of substances, you could simulate millions of tests. If the substances could be characterized in a way that allows quantum computing to simulate them, then testing a million substances becomes realistic within a reasonable time frame.

Genes essentially code for the creation of proteins with specific shapes, and in biology, structure is everything. If you aim to develop a library of millions of potential protein shapes for various applications, quantum computing could be ideal for this kind of task. ChatGPT’s first prediction was that AI would become universally adopted, which is hard to dispute.

Jacobsen: True, although the term “AI” is often misapplied. There’s a lot of simple autocomplete functionality labeled as AI.

Rosner: One could argue that AI is fundamentally about autocomplete. For example, when you train a graphics AI by inputting a vast number of art pieces, it essentially turns a text prompt into an autocomplete task, providing the most likely artistic rendition of what your words describe.

Jacobsen: Would you say a better term for AI might be “virtually unlimited autofill”?

Rosner: Yes, that’s a fair assessment. It captures the essence of how it functions—essentially an expansive version of autocomplete.

Jacobsen: I see where this is leading. You’re suggesting that even in areas like AI-generated adult content, there are intricacies in user commands that push AI to understand context and commands more deeply.

Rosner: When people pay for AI-generated adult content, they can input highly detailed prompts that cater to specific preferences. An AI-generated scenario might involve one character engaging in an act and another walking in unexpectedly. Clearly, someone programmed these prompts because they’re recurring themes in image sets.

You can see how AI progressively learns how doors, door frames, and perspectives work. At first, characters may appear stuck halfway through a door, or proportions might be incorrect. But as the AI continues training, these details improve. It eventually understands perspective better and can render scenes where the person walking in appears smaller due to distance. AI has repeatedly refined aspects like shadows through what is essentially Bayesian analysis of the most probable scenarios.

Jacobsen: So, it’s like watching the AI learn through trial and error, guided by patterns and probabilities?

Rosner: It’s a continuous learning process based on data-driven refinements. AI doesn’t truly “know” anything—we’re aware of that. It doesn’t think as humans do, but it operates on statistical foundations for how things behave. For instance, it has a statistical basis for understanding the behavior of shadows and the principles of perspective. What makes images appear realistic—or conversely, unnervingly unrealistic—often comes down to details like the eye line. I’ve observed AI in this specific context, and while it manages to get the eye line of the main subject correct, it struggles with the person in the background. In scenarios where someone is caught in an act and reacts with surprise, the foreground figure often looks fine, but the background character frequently ends up with mismatched or misaligned eyes, where one eye might be larger or pointing in the wrong direction. It’s interesting to watch AI slowly improve and start getting these details right.

Jacobsen: So, it’s like a process where the AI is learning to handle nuanced visual details over time?

Rosner: But ultimately, AI is just autofill. And yes, autofill is something we rely on for everything. In a sense, our own brains function with a kind of autofill. When we speak, we don’t think out every single word meticulously; we start the sentence, and our brain fills in the rest. Unless, of course, we’re writing something meticulous, like an essay for The Atlantic, where every word is scrutinized.

So, moving forward, you could say that we’re going to be using this type of “autofill” constantly. And that leads to the point of learning statistics. AI relies heavily on Bayesian statistics, and while I can say that confidently, explaining how feedback across neural networks functions would take more time. But for the sake of simplicity, yes.

Jacobsen: Makes sense. Should we use that as a metaphor for summarizing this?

Rosner: Sure, let’s go with this for now.

Jacobsen: Do we need another call, or are we good for now?

Rosner: No, I still need to head back to the gym one more time. 

Jacobsen: Then I’ll take a quick break and continue writing. Thank you very much. 

Rosner: Thanks again. Bye.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.